2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.
4 F From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010EX1UGX
Title: FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION
This contents does not include all the necessary items about repair and service. This manual is
made for the use of persons who have special techniques and certifications. If non-specialized or
uncertified technicians perform repairs or service only using this manual or without proper
equipment or tools, this may cause severe injury to you or other persons nearby and also cause
damage to your customer's vehicle.
In order to prevent dangerous operation and damage to your customer's vehicle, be sure to follow
the instructions shown below.
This contents must be read thoroughly. It is especially important to have a good

understanding of all the contents written in the PRECAUTION of "INTRODUCTION"
section.
The service method written in this manual is very effective to perform repair and service.
When performing the operations following the procedures using this manual, be sure to
use tools specified and recommended. If using non-specified or tools other than
recommended tools and service methods, be sure to confirm the safety of the technicians
and that there is no possibility of causing personal injury or damage to the customer's
vehicle before starting the operation.
If part replacement is necessary, the part must be replaced with the same part number
or equivalent part. Do not replace it with an inferior quality part.
It is important to note that this manual contains various "Cautions" and "Notices" that
must be carefully observed in order to reduce the risk of personal injury during service or
repair, or reduce the possibility that improper service or repair may damage the vehicle
or render it unsafe. It is also important to understand that these "Cautions" and
"Notices" are not exaggerations and are possible hazardous consequences that might
result from failure to follow these instructions.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 F From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010EW2RZX
Title: FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)
FOREWORD
This is Volume 1 of the 2013 SCION FR-S manual. There are three volumes to this manual. The
sections included in each volume are indicated by black type in the Section Index. Use the Section
Index of each volume to find the volume with the section you need.
Applicable models ZN6 series
Please note that the publications below have also been prepared as relevant service manuals for the
components and system in these vehicles.
MANUAL NAME PUB. NO.
2013 SCION FR-S Electrical Wiring Diagram EM20S0U
2013 SCION FR-S New Car Features NM20S0U
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication.
However, specifications and procedures are subject to change without notice. For the most current
information available, refer to the Toyota Technical Information System (TIS) online at dealership
locations or on the Internet at http://techinfo.toyota.com.
If you find any failures in this manual, you are kindly requested to inform us by using the report
form on the next page.
Repair Manual Quality Report
Att.) Service Manager, Your Distributor

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UYV0BHX
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL: GENERAL INFORMATION (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL INFORMATION
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(a) This manual is written in accordance with SAE J2008.
(b) Repair operations can be separated mainly into the following 3 processes:
(1) Diagnosis
(2) Removing/Installing, Replacing, Disassembling/Reassembling, Checking and Adjusting
(3) Final Inspection
(c) The following procedure is omitted from this manual. However, this procedure must be performed.
(1) Use a jack or lift to perform operations.
(2) Clean all removed parts.
(3) Perform a visual check before and after performing any work.
2. INDEX
(a) An alphabetical INDEX section is provided at the end of the manual as a reference to help find the
item to be repaired.
3. PREPARATION
(a) Use of Special Service Tools (SST) and Special Service Materials (SSM) may be required, depending
on the repair procedure. Be sure to use SST and SSM when they are required and follow the work
procedure properly. A list of SST and SSM is in the "Preparation" section of this manual.
4. REPAIR PROCEDURES
(a) A component illustration is placed under the title where necessary.
(b) Non-reusable parts, grease application areas, precoated parts and torque specifications are noted
in the component illustrations.
The following illustration is an example.

(c) Torque specifications, grease application areas and non-reusable parts are emphasized in the
procedures.
HINT:
There are cases where such information can only be explained by using an illustration. In these cases,
torque, oil and other information are described in the illustration.
(d) Only items with key points are described in the text. What to do and other details are explained
using illustrations next to the text. Both the text and illustrations are accompanied by standard
values and notices.
Illustration What to do and where to do it
Task heading What work will be performed
How to perform the task

Explanation
Information such as specifications and warnings, which are written in boldface
text
text
(e) Illustrations of similar vehicle models are sometimes used. In these cases, minor details may be
different from the actual vehicle.
(f) Procedures are presented in a step-by-step format.
5. SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Specifications are presented in boldface text throughout the manual. The specifications are also
found in the "Service Specifications" section for reference.
6. TERM DEFINITIONS
CAUTION Possibility of injury to you or other people.
NOTICE Possibility of damage to components being repaired.
HINT Provides additional information to help you perform repairs.
7. INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS

(a) The units used in this manual comply with the International System of Units (SI UNIT) standard.
Other units from the metric system and the English systems are also provided.
Example:
Torque: 30 N·m (310 kgf·cm, 22ft·lbf)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZB09AX
Title: INTRODUCTION: TERMS: ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL (2013 FR-S)
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL

ABBREVIATION MEANING
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System
A/C Air Conditioner
AC Alternating Current
ACC Accessory
ACIS Acoustic Control Induction System
ACM Active Control Engine Mount
ACSD Automatic Cold Start Device
ACT Actuator
A.D.D Automatic Disconnecting Differential
ADM P.T. Astra Daihatsu Motor
A/F Air-Fuel Ratio
AFS Adaptive Front-Lighting System
AHC Active Height Control Suspension
AID Air Injection Control Driver
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
ALT Alternator
AMP Amplifier
ANT Antenna
ASG Automated Sequential Gearbox
ASL Automatic Sound Levelizer
ASSB Assembly Services Sdn. Bhd.
A/T, ATM Automatic Transmission (Transaxle)
A-TRAC, A-TRC Active Traction Control
ATDC After Top Dead Center
ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid
AUTO Automatic
AUX Auxiliary
AVG Average
AVS Adaptive Variable Suspension
AWD All Wheel Drive
B+, +B Battery Voltage

BA Brake Assist
BACS Boost Altitude Compensation System
BATT Battery
BDC Bottom Dead Center
B/L Bi-Level
B/S Bore-Stroke Ratio
BTDC Before Top Dead Center
BVSV Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve
Calif. California
CAN Controller Area Network
CB Circuit Breaker
CCM Carbon Ceramic Material
CCo Catalytic Converter for Oxidation
CCV Canister Closed Valve
CD Compact Disc
CF Cornering Force
CG Center of Gravity
CH Channel
CKD Complete Knock Down
CNG Compressed Natural Gas
COMB. Combination
CPS Combustion Pressure Sensor
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRAWL Crawl Control
CRS Child Restraint System
CTR Center
C/V Check Valve
CV Control Valve
CVT Continuously Variable Transmission (Transaxle)
CW Curb Weight
DC Direct Current
DEF Defogger
DFL Deflector
DIFF. Differential
DIFF. LOCK Differential Lock
D/INJ Direct Injection
DLC Data Link Connector

DLI Distributorless Ignition
DOHC Double Overhead Camshaft
DP Dash Pot
DS Dead Soak
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
DVD Digital Versatile Disc
EBD Electric Brake Force Distribution
EC Electrochromic
ECAM Engine Control And Measurement System
ECD Electronically Controlled Diesel
ECDY Eddy Current Dynamometer
ECT Electronic Controlled Automatic Transmission
ECU Electronic Control Unit
ED Electro-Deposited
EDU Electronic Driving Unit
EDIC Electric Diesel Injection Control
EFI Electronic Fuel Injection
E/G Engine
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EMPS Electric Motor Power Steering
EPS Electric Power Steering
ENG Engine
ES Easy & Smooth
ESA Electronic Spark Advance
EVAP Evaporative Emission Control
E-VRV Electric Vacuum Regulating Valve
EX Exhaust
FE Fuel Economy
FF Front-Engine-Front-Wheel-Drive
F/G Fuel Gauge
FIPG Formed In Place Gasket
Fusible Link
FL
Front Left
F/P Fuel Pump
Front
FR
Front Right
F/W Flywheel
FW/D Flywheel Damper
FWD Front Wheel Drive
GAS Gasoline
GND Ground
GPS Global Positioning System
GSA Gear Shift Actuator
GTMC Gac Toyota Motor Co., Ltd.
GTS Global TechStream
H/B Hatchback
H-FUSE High Current Fuse
HID High Intensity Discharge (Headlight)
HPU Hydraulic Power Unit
HSG Housing
HT Hard Top
HV Hybrid Vehicle
HWS Heated Windshield System
IC Integrated Circuit
IDI Indirect Diesel Injection
IFS Independent Front Suspension
IG Ignition
IIA Integrated Ignition Assembly
IMC INDUS Motor Company Ltd.
IN Intake (Manifold, Valve)
INT Intermittent
I/P Instrument Panel
IRS Independent Rear Suspension
ISC Idle Speed Control
ISCV Idle Speed Control Valve
KD Kick-Down
KDSS Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEV Low Emission Vehicle
LH Left-Hand
LHD Left-Hand Drive
LIN Local Interconnect Network
L/H/W Length, Height, Width
LLC Long-Life Coolant
LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
LSD Limited Slip Differential
LSP & BV Load Sensing Proportioning and Bypass Valve
LSPV Load Sensing Proportioning Valve
MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure
MAX. Maximum
MIC Microphone
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MIN. Minimum
MG1 Motor Generator No. 1
MG2 Motor Generator No. 2
MMT Multi-mode Manual Transmission
MP Multipurpose
MPI Multipoint Electronic Injection
MPX Multiplex Communication System
M/T Manual Transmission (Transaxle)
MT Mount
MTG Mounting
N Neutral
NA Natural Aspiration
NO. Number
O2S Oxygen Sensor
OC Oxidation Catalyst
OCV Oil Control Valve
O/D Overdrive
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturing
OPT Option
ORVR On-board Refilling Vapor Recovery
O/S Oversize
P & BV Proportioning and Bypass Valve
PBD Power Back Door
Power Control System

PCS
Pre-crash Safety System/Pre-collision System
PCV Positive Crankcase Ventilation
PKB Parking Brake
PPS Progressive Power Steering
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PS Power Steering
PSD Power Slide Door
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
PTO Power Take-Off
PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
P/W Power Window
R&P Rack and Pinion
RAM Random Access Memory
RBS Recirculating Ball Type Steering
REAS Relative Absorber System
R/F Reinforcement
RFS Rigid Front Suspension
RH Right-Hand
RHD Right-Hand Drive
RL Rear Left
ROM Read Only Memory
Rear
RR
Rear Right
RRS Rigid Rear Suspension
RSE Rear Seat Entertainment
RWD Rear Wheel Drive
SC Supercharger
Swirl Control Valve (for gasoline engine)

SCV
Suction Control Valve (for diesel engine)
SFTM Sichuan Faw Toyota Motor Co., Ltd.
SIA Subaru of Indiana Automotive, Inc.
SICS Starting Injection Control System
SLLC Super Long Life Coolant
SOC State Of Charge
SOHC Single Overhead Camshaft
SPEC Specification
SPI Single Point Injection

SPV Spill Control Valve
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
SSM Special Service Materials
SST Special Service Tools
STD Standard
STJ Cold-Start Fuel Injection
SULEV Super Ultra Low Emission Vehicle
T/A Transaxle
TACH Tachometer
TASA Toyota Argentina S.A.
TCAP Toyota Caetano Portugal, S.A.
TCM Transmission Control Module
Timing Control Valve (for diesel engine)

TCV
Tumble Control Valve (for gasoline engine)
TDB Toyota do Brasil Ltda.
TDC Top Dead Center
TDV Toyota de Venezuela, C.A.
TEMP. Temperature
TFT TOYOTA Free-Tronic
TFTM Tianjin Faw Toyota Motor Co., Ltd.
THS ll TOYOTA Hybrid System ll
TIS Total Information System for Vehicle Development
T/M Transmission
TMC Toyota Motor Corporation
TMCA Toyota Motor Corporation Australia Ltd.
TMMBC Toyota Motor Manufacturing de Baja California, S. de R.L. de C.V.
TMMC Toyota Motor Manufacturing Canada Inc.
TMMF Toyota Motor Manufacturing France S.A.S.
TMMI Toyota Motor Manufacturing, Indiana, Inc.
TMMIN P.T. Toyota Motor Manufacturing Indonesia
TMMK TOYOTA Motor Manufacturing Kentucky, Inc.
TMMR Toyota Motor Manufacturing Russia
TMMT Toyota Motor Manufacturing Turkey Inc.
TMMTX Toyota Motor Manufacturing, Texas, Inc.
TMUK Toyota Motor Manufacturing (UK) Ltd.
TMP Toyota Motor Philippines Corp.
TMT Toyota Motor Thailand Co. Ltd.

TMV Toyota Motor Vietnam Co., Ltd.
TPCA Toyota Peugeot Citroen Automobiles Czech, s.r.o.
TRAC/TRC Traction Control System
TSAM Toyota South Africa Motors (Pty) Ltd.
TVIP TOYOTA Vehicle Intrusion Protection
TWC Three-Way Catalyst
U/D Underdrive
U/S Undersize
VCV Vacuum Control Valve
VDIM Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VENT Ventilator
VGRS Variable Gear Ratio Steering
VIM Vehicle Interface Module
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VLC Valve Lift Control
VPS Variable Power Steering
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
VSV Vacuum Switching Valve
VTV Vacuum Transmitting Valve
VVT-i Variable Valve Timing-intelligent
W/, w/ With
WGN Wagon
W/H Wire Harness
W/O, w/o Without
X-REAS X-Relative Absorber System
1ST, 1st First
2ND, 2nd Second
2WD Two Wheel Drive Vehicle (4 x 2)
3RD, 3rd Third
4TH, 4th Fourth
4WD Four Wheel Drive Vehicle (4 x 4)
4WS Four Wheel Steering System
5TH, 5th Fifth
6TH, 6th Sixth
7TH, 7th Seventh
8TH, 8th Eighth

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000286702CX
Title: INTRODUCTION: TERMS: GLOSSARY OF SAE AND SCION TERMS (2013 FR-S)
GLOSSARY OF SAE AND SCION TERMS

This glossary lists all SAE-J1930 terms and abbreviations used in this manual in compliance with SAE
recommendations, as well as their SCION equivalents.
SAE SAE TERM SCION TERM

ABBREVIATION ( )-ABBREVIATION
A/C Air Conditioning Air Conditioner
ACL Air Cleaner Air Cleaner, A/CL
AIR Secondary Air Injection Air Injection (AI)
AP Accelerator Pedal -
B+ Battery Positive Voltage +B, Battery Voltage
BARO Barometric Pressure -
CAC Charge Air Cooler Intercooler
CARB Carburetor Carburetor
CFI Continuous Fuel Injection -
CKP Crankshaft Position Crank Angle
CL Closed Loop Closed Loop
CMP Camshaft Position Cam Angle
CPP Clutch Pedal Position -
CTOX Continuous Trap Oxidizer -
CTP Closed Throttle Position LL ON, Idle ON
DFI Direct Fuel Injection Direct Injection (DI./INJ)
DI Distributor Ignition -
DLC3 Data Link Connector 3 OBD II Diagnostic Connector
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code Diagnostic Trouble Code
DTM Diagnostic Test Mode -
ECL Engine Coolant Level -
ECM Engine Control Module Engine Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
Coolant Temperature, Water Temperature

ECT Engine Coolant Temperature
(THW)
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Electrically Erasable Programmable Read

EEPROM
Only Memory Only Memory (EEPROM)
Cold Mixture Heater (CMH), Heat Control

EFE Early Fuel Evaporation
Valve (HCV)
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)

EI Electronic Ignition Distributorless Ignition (DLI)
EM Engine Modification Engine Modification (EM)
Erasable Programmable Read Only

EPROM Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM)
Memory
EVAP Evaporative Emission Evaporative Emission Control (EVAP)
FC Fan Control -
Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable

FEEPROM -
Read Only Memory
Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only

FEPROM -
Memory
FF Flexible Fuel -
FP Fuel Pump Fuel Pump
GEN Generator Alternator
GND Ground Ground (GND)
HO2S Heated Oxygen Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO 2 S)
IAC Idle Air Control Idle Speed Control (ISC)
IAT Intake Air Temperature Intake or Inlet Air Temperature
ICM Ignition Control Module -
IFI Indirect Fuel Injection Indirect Injection (IDL)
IFS Inertia Fuel-Shutoff -
ISC Idle Speed Control -
KS Knock Sensor Knock Sensor
MAF Mass Airflow Air Flow Meter
MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure Manifold Pressure Intake Vacuum
Electric Bleed Air Control Valve (EBCV)

MC Mixture Control Mixture Control Valve (MCV)
Electric Air Control Valve (EACV)
MDP Manifold Differential Pressure -
MFI Multiport Fuel Injection Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI)
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light
MST Manifold Surface Temperature -
MVZ Manifold Vacuum Zone -
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory -
O2S Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor, O 2 Sensor (O 2 S)
OBD On-Board Diagnostic On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
OC Oxidation Catalytic Converter Oxidation Catalytic Convert (OC), CCo
OL Open Loop Open Loop
PAIR Pulsed Secondary Air Injection Air Suction (AS)
PCM Powertrain Control Module -

PNP Park/Neutral Position -
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory -
PSP Power Steering Pressure -
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

PTOX Periodic Trap Oxidizer
Diesel Particulate Trap (DPT)
RAM Random Access Memory Random Access Memory (RAM)
RM Relay Module -
ROM Read Only Memory Read Only Memory (ROM)
RPM Engine Speed Engine Speed
SC Supercharger Supercharger
SCB Supercharger Bypass E-ABV
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI), Sequential

SFI Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection
Injection
SPL Smoke Puff Limiter -
SRI Service Reminder Indicator -
SRT System Readiness Test -
ST Scan Tool -
TB Throttle Body Throttle Body
Single Point Injection

TBI Throttle Body Fuel Injection
Central Fuel Injection (Ci)
TC Turbocharger Turbocharger
TCC Torque Converter Clutch Torque Converter
TCM Transmission Control Module Transmission ECU, ECT ECU
TP Throttle Position Throttle Position
TR Transmission Range -
Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve (BVSV)

TVV Thermal Vacuum Valve Thermostatic Vacuum Switching Valve
(TVSV)
Three-Way Catalytic (TWC)

TWC Three-Way Catalytic Converter Manifold Converter
CC RO
Three-Way + Oxidation Catalytic

TWC+OC CC R + CCo
Converter
VAF Volume Airflow Air Flow Meter
VR Voltage Regulator Voltage Regulator
VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
WOT Wide Open Throttle Full Throttle
WU-OC Warm Up Oxidation Catalytic Converter -
WU-TWC Warm Up Three-Way Catalytic Converter -

3GR Third Gear -
4GR Fourth Gear -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UYW0DPX
Title: INTRODUCTION: IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION: VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL

NUMBERS (2013 FR-S)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

1. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(a) The vehicle identification number is stamped on the vehicle body and on the certification label as
shown in the illustration.
Text in Illustration
*A Manual transmission - -
*1 Vehicle Identification Number *2 Certification Label
2. ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBER
(a) The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder

block of the engine as shown in the illustration.
*1 FA20 Engine Serial Number
(b) The transmission serial number is printed on the transmission number label.
*A TL70 *B TX6A
*1 Transmission Number Label - -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZ30BTX
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT

INSPECTION PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. BASIC INSPECTION
(a) WHEN MEASURING RESISTANCE OF ELECTRONIC PARTS
(1) Unless otherwise stated, all resistance measurements are standard values measured at an
ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F). Resistance measurements may be inaccurate if measured
at high temperatures, i.e. immediately after the vehicle has been running. Measurements should
be made after the engine has cooled down.
(b) HANDLING CONNECTORS
*a INCORRECT
*b CORRECT
(1) When disconnecting a connector, first squeeze the

mating connector housing halves tightly together to
release the lock, and then press the lock claw and
separate the connector.
(2) When disconnecting a connector, do not pull on the

harnesses. Grasp the connector directly and separate
it.
(3) Before connecting a connector, check that there are

no deformations, damage, looseness or missing
terminals.
(4) When connecting a connector, press firmly until it

locks with a "click" sound.
(5) If checking a connector with a TOYOTA electrical

tester, check the connector from the backside
(harness side) using a mini test lead.
NOTICE:
As a waterproof connector cannot be checked from the
backside, check it by connecting a sub-harness.
Do not damage the terminals by moving the inserted
tester needle.
(c) CHECKING CONNECTORS

*a Core Wire
*b Looseness of Crimping
*c Terminal Deformation
*d Pull Lightly
(1) Checking when a connector is connected: Squeeze the connectors together to confirm that they
are fully connected and locked.
(2) Checking when a connector is disconnected: Check by pulling the wire harness lightly from the
backside of the connector. Look for unlatched terminals, missing terminals, loose crimps or
broken conductor wires. Visually check for corrosion, metallic or foreign matter and water, and
bent, rusted, overheated, contaminated or deformed terminals.
(3) Checking the contact pressure of the terminal:

Prepare a spare male terminal. Insert it into a female
terminal, and check for ample tension when inserting
and after full engagement.
NOTICE:
When testing a gold-plated female terminal, always use
a gold-plated male terminal.
(d) CONNECTOR TERMINAL REPAIR METHOD
*a CORRECT
*b INCORRECT
(1) If there is any foreign matter on the terminal, clean

the contact point with compressed air or a cloth.
Never rub the contact point using sandpaper as the
plating may come off.
(2) If there is abnormal contact pressure, replace the

female terminal. If the male terminal is gold-plated
(gold color), use a gold-plated female terminal; if it is
silver-plated (silver color), use a silver-plated female
terminal.
(3) Damaged, deformed or corroded terminals should be
replaced. If the terminal does not lock into the
housing, the housing may have to be replaced.
(e) WIRE HARNESS HANDLING
*a INCORRECT
(1) If removing a wire harness, check the wiring and

clamps before proceeding so that it can be restored in
the same way.
(2) Never twist, pull or slacken the wire harness more

than necessary.
(3) The wire harness should never come into contact with
any high temperature part, rotating, moving, vibrating
or sharp-edged parts. Avoid contact with panel edges,
screw tips and other sharp items.
(4) When installing parts, never pinch the wire harness.
(5) Never cut or break the cover of the wire harness. If it

is cut or broken, repair it with insulating tape or
replace the wire harness.
2. CHECK FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
(a) For an open circuit in the wire harness in Fig. 1, measure

the resistance and voltage as follows:
(b) Check the resistance.
(1) Disconnect connectors A and C and measure the resistance between the terminals of the
connectors.
Standard Resistance (Fig. 2):
TESTER CONNECTION SPECIFIED CONDITION
Connector A terminal 1 - Connector C terminal 1 10 kΩ or higher
Connector A terminal 2 - Connector C terminal 2 Below 1 Ω
HINT:
Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harness vertically and horizontally.
If the results match the values specified above, an open circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector A and terminal 1 of connector C.
(2) Disconnect connector B and measure the resistance

between the terminals of the connectors.
TESTER CONNECTION SPECIFIED

CONDITION
Connector A terminal 1 - Connector B1

Below 1 Ω
terminal 1
Connector B2 terminal 1 - Connector C

10 kΩ or higher
terminal 1
If the results match the values specified above, an

open circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector B2 and terminal 1 of connector C.
(c) Check the voltage.
(1) In a circuit in which voltage is applied to the ECU

connector terminal, an open circuit can be checked by
conducting a voltage check.
With each connector still connected, measure the

voltage between body ground and the following
terminals (in this order): 1) terminal 1 of connector
A, 2) terminal 1 of connector B, and 3) terminal 1 of
connector C.
Standard Voltage (Fig. 4):
Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground 5V
Connector B terminal 1 - Body ground 5V
Connector C terminal 1 - Body ground Below 1 V
If the results match the values specified above, an

open circuit exists in the wire harness between
terminal 1 of connector B and terminal 1 of
connector C.
3. CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
(a) If a wire in the harness is shorted to ground (Fig. 5),

locate the shorted section by measuring the resistance as
follows:
(b) Check the resistance to body ground.
(1) Disconnect connectors A and C and measure the resistance.
Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground Below 1 Ω
Connector A terminal 2 - Body ground 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:
Measure the resistance while lightly shaking the wire harness vertically and horizontally.
If the results match the values specified above, a short circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector A and terminal 1 of connector C.
(2) Disconnect connector B and measure the resistance.

CONDITION
Connector A terminal 1 - Body ground 10 kΩ or higher
Connector B2 terminal 1 - Body

Below 1 Ω
ground
If the results match the values specified above, a

short circuit exists between terminal 1 of
connector B2 and terminal 1 of connector C.
4. CHECK AND REPLACE ECU
NOTICE:
The connector should not be disconnected from the ECU. Perform the inspection from the backside
of the connector on the wire harness side.
When no measuring condition is specified, perform the inspection with the engine stopped and the
ignition switch ON.
Check that the connectors are fully seated. Check for loose, corroded or broken wires.
(a) First, check the ECU ground circuit. If it is faulty, repair it. If it is normal, the ECU could be faulty.
Temporarily replace the ECU with a normally functioning one and check if the symptoms occur. If
the trouble symptoms disappear, replace the original ECU.
(1) Measure the resistance between the ECU ground

terminal and body ground.
*a Ground
Standard resistance:
Below 1 Ω
(2) Disconnect the ECU connector. Check the ground

terminals on the ECU side and wire harness side for
bent terminals, corrosion or foreign matter. Lastly,
check the contact pressure of the female terminals.
Component without harness connected

*a
(ECU)
*b Ground
Front view of wire harness connector

*c
(to ECU)
*d Ground
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZ20BWX
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: GENERAL INFORMATION

(2013 FR-S)
GENERAL INFORMATION
A large number of ECU controlled systems are used in this vehicle. In general, ECU controlled
systems are considered to be very intricate, requiring a high level of technical knowledge to
troubleshoot. However, most problem checking procedures only involve inspecting the ECU
controlled system circuits one by one. An adequate understanding of the system and a basic
knowledge of electricity is enough to perform effective troubleshooting, accurate diagnosis and
necessary repairs.
(For using the Techstream*)
HINT:
*: The Techstream is the name for the diagnostic tester in North America.
Before using the Techstream, read the operator's manual thoroughly.

If the Techstream cannot communicate with the ECU controlled systems when connected
to the DLC3 with the ignition switch ON and the Techstream turned on, there is a
problem on the vehicle side or the Techstream side.
i. If communication is possible when the Techstream is connected to another

vehicle, inspect the diagnosis data link line (bus (+) line), CANH and CANL
lines, and the power circuits for the vehicle ECUs.
ii. If communication is still not possible when the Techstream is connected to
another vehicle, the problem is probably in the Techstream itself. Perform the
Self Test procedure outlined in the Techstream operator's manual.
1. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
The troubleshooting procedures consist of diagnosis procedures for when a DTC is stored and
diagnosis procedures for when no DTC is stored. The basic idea is explained in the following
table.
PROCEDURE DETAILS TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD

TYPE
The malfunctioning part is identified based on the

DTC detection conditions using a process of
The diagnosis procedure is
DTC Based elimination.
based on the DTC that is
Diagnosis The possible trouble areas are eliminated one-by-
stored.
one by use of the Techstream and inspection of
related parts.
Symptom The malfunctioning part is identified based on the

Based The diagnosis procedure is problem symptoms using a process of elimination.
Diagnosis based on problem The possible trouble areas are eliminated one-by-
(No DTCs symptoms. one by use of the Techstream and inspection of
stored) related parts.
Vehicle systems are complex and use many ECUs that are difficult to inspect independently.
Therefore, a process of elimination is used, where components that can be inspected
individually are inspected, and if no problems are found in these components, the related ECU is
identified as the problem and replaced.
It is extremely important to ask the customer about the environment and the conditions
present when the problem occurred (Customer Problem Analysis). This makes it possible to
simulate the conditions and confirm the symptom. If the symptom cannot be confirmed or the
DTC does not recur, the malfunctioning part may not be identified using the troubleshooting
procedure, and the ECU for the related system may be replaced even though it is not defective.
If this happens, the original problem will not be solved.
In order to prevent endless expansion of troubleshooting procedures, the troubleshooting
procedures are written with the assumption that multiple malfunctions do not occur
simultaneously for a single problem symptom.
To identify the malfunctioning part, troubleshooting procedures narrow down the target by
separating components, ECUs and wire harnesses during the inspection. If the wire harness is
identified as the cause of the problem, it is necessary to inspect not only the connections to
components and ECUs but also all of the wire harness connectors between the component and
the ECU.
2. DESCRIPTION
(a) The data of each system and Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can be read from the Data Link
Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. When the system seems to be malfunctioning, use the
Techstream to check for malfunctions and perform repairs.
3. CHECK DLC3
(a) The vehicle ECUs use ISO 15765-4 communication

protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies
with SAE J1962 and matches the ISO 15765-4 format.
TERMINAL NO. TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

(SYMBOL) DESCRIPTION CONDITION
4 (CG) - Body
Chassis ground Always Below 1 Ω
ground
5 (SG) - Body
Signal ground Always Below 1 Ω
ground
16 (BAT) -
Battery positive Always 11 to 14 V
Body ground
6 (CANH) - 14 Ignition
CAN bus line 57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) switch off*
6 (CANH) - 4 HIGH-level CAN Ignition 200 Ω or

(CG) bus line switch off* higher
14 (CANL) - 4 LOW-level CAN Ignition 200 Ω or

(CG) bus line switch off* higher
6 (CANH) - 16 HIGH-level CAN Ignition

6 kΩ or higher
(BAT) bus line switch off*
14 (CANL) - 16 LOW-level CAN Ignition

6 kΩ or higher
(BAT) bus line switch off*
NOTICE:
*: Before measuring the resistance, leave the vehicle as
is for at least 1 minute and do not operate the ignition
switch, any other switches or the doors.
If the result is not as specified, the DLC3 may have a
malfunction. Repair or replace the harness or connector.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 D From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZ1088X
Title: INTRODUCTION: HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT ECU CONTROLLED SYSTEMS: HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

1. OPERATION FLOW
HINT:
Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure below. The following is an outline of basic
troubleshooting procedure. Confirm the troubleshooting procedure for the circuit you are working on
before beginning troubleshooting.
1. VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP
NEXT
2. CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS
(a) Ask the customer about the conditions and environment when the problem occurred.
NEXT
3. INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding to the next step.
NEXT
4. SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DTC (AND FREEZE FRAME DATA) CHECK
(a) Visually check the wire harnesses, connectors and fuses for open and short circuits.
(b) Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature.

(c) Confirm the problem symptoms and conditions, and check for DTCs.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output A
DTC is not output B
B GO TO STEP 6
5. DTC CHART
(a) Find the output DTC in the DTC chart. Look at the Trouble Area column for a list of
potentially malfunctioning circuits and/or parts.
NEXT GO TO STEP 7
6. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS CHART
(a) Find the problem symptoms in the problem symptoms table. Look at the Suspected Area
column for a list of potentially malfunctioning circuits and/or parts.
NEXT
7. CIRCUIT INSPECTION OR PARTS INSPECTION
(a) Identify the malfunctioning circuit or part.
NEXT
8. ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE
(a) Adjust, repair or replace the malfunctioning circuit or parts.

NEXT
9. CONFIRMATION TEST
(a) After the adjustment, repairs or replacement of components, confirm that the malfunction no
longer exists. If the malfunction does not recur, perform a confirmation test under the same
conditions and in the same environment as when the malfunction first occurred.
NEXT END
HINT:
When troubleshooting, confirm that the problem symptoms have been accurately identified.
Preconceptions should be discarded in order to make an accurate judgment. To clearly understand
what the problem symptoms are, it is extremely important to ask the customer about the problem
and the conditions at the time the malfunction occurred.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may also
help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points for problem analysis:
What Vehicle model, system name
When Date, time, occurrence frequency
Where Road conditions
Under what conditions? Driving conditions, weather conditions
How did it happen? Problem symptoms
3. SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
HINT:
The diagnostic system in this vehicle has various functions.
The first function is the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) check. A DTC is a code stored in the ECU
memory whenever a malfunction in the signal circuits to the ECU occurs. In a DTC check, a previous
malfunction's DTC can be checked by a technician during troubleshooting.
Another function is the Input Signal Check, which checks if the signals from various switches are
sent to the ECU correctly.
By using these functions, the problem areas can be narrowed down and troubleshooting can
be more effective. Diagnostic functions are incorporated in the following systems of this
vehicle.
SYSTEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION AND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
DTC DTC SENSOR CHECK/TEST MODE DATA ACTIVE

CHECK CHECK (INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) LIST TEST
(NORMAL (CHECK
MODE) MODE)
SFI System (FA20) ○ ○ - ○ ○
Ignition System (FA20) - - - - -
Fuel System (FA20) - - - - -
Emission Control System

- - - - -
(FA20)
Intake System (FA20) - - - - -
Cooling Fan System

- - - - -
(FA20)
Starting System (FA20) - - - - -
Key Inter Lock System

- - - - -
(FA20)
Cruise Control System ○ - - ○ ○
Automatic Transmission
○ ○ - ○ ○
System (TX6A)
Tire Pressure Warning

○ - ○ ○ ○
System
Vehicle Stability Control

○ - ○ ○ ○
System
Power Steering System ○ - - ○ -
Audio and Visual System - - - - -
Charging System (FA20) ○ ○ - ○ ○
Electric Power Control

○ - - ○ -
System
LIN Communication
○ - - - -
System
CAN Communication
○ - - - -
System
Power Door Lock Control

- - - ○ ○
System
Wireless Door Lock

○ - - ○ ○
Control System
Key Reminder Warning

- - - ○ -
System
Engine Immobiliser
○ - - ○ ○
System
Lighting System (INT) - - - ○ ○
Meter / Gauge System ○ - - ○ ○
Clock System - - - - -
Airbag System ○ ○ - ○ -
Occupant Classification
○ - - ○ -
System
Seat Heater System - - - - -
Seat Belt Warning System - - - ○ ○
Air Conditioning System - - - ○ ○
Power Window Control

○ - - ○ ○
System
Window Defogger System - - - ○ ○
Luggage Compartment
- - - ○ ○
Door Opener System
Power Mirror Control

- - - - -
System
Wiper and Washer System - - - - -
Lighting System (EXT) ○ - - ○ ○
Horn System - - - - -
In the DTC check, it is very important to determine whether the problem indicated by the DTC
either: 1) still occurs, or 2) occurred in the past but has returned to normal. In addition, the DTC
should be compared to the problem symptom to see if they are related. For this reason, DTCs
should be checked before and after confirmation of symptoms (i.e., whether or not problem
symptoms exist) to determine current system conditions, as shown in the flowchart below.
Never skip the DTC check. Failing to check for DTCs, depending on the case, may result in
unnecessary troubleshooting for systems operating normally or lead to repairs not related to the
problem. Follow the procedure listed in the flowchart in the correct order.
The following flowchart shows how to proceed with troubleshooting using the DTC check. Directions
from the flowchart will indicate how to proceed either to DTC troubleshooting or to the
troubleshooting of each problem symptom.
1. DTC CHECK
NEXT
2. MAKE A NOTE OF DTC DISPLAYED AND THEN CLEAR DTCs
NEXT
3. SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
No symptoms exist A
Symptoms exist B
B GO TO STEP 5
4. SIMULATION TEST USING SYMPTOM SIMULATION METHODS
NEXT
5. DTC CHECK
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
TROUBLESHOOT FOR PROBLEM INDICATED BY

B DTC
6. SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Symptoms exist A
No symptoms exist B
If a DTC was displayed in the initial DTC check, the problem may have occurred in a wire harness or
connector in that circuit in the past. Check the wire harness and connectors.
B END
TROUBLESHOOT FOR EACH PROBLEM

A SYMPTOM
If problem symptoms are present, but no DTCs were stored again after they were cleared, then the
problem causing the symptom may be occurring for something that does not store DTCs (the DTC that
was displayed in the initial DTC check may have been from a past problem or a secondary problem).
4. SYMPTOM SIMULATION
HINT:
The most difficult case in troubleshooting is when no problem symptoms occur. In such a case, a
thorough problem analysis must be carried out. A simulation of the same or similar conditions and
environment in which the problem occurred in the customer's vehicle should be carried out. No matter
how much skill or experience a technician has, troubleshooting without confirming the problem
symptoms will lead to important repairs being overlooked and mistakes or delays.
For example:
With a problem that only occurs when the engine is cold or as a result of vibration caused by the
road during driving, the problem can never be determined if the symptoms are being checked on a
stationary vehicle or a vehicle with a warmed-up engine. Vibration, heat or water penetration
(moisture) is difficult to reproduce. The following symptom simulation tests are effective substitutes
for the conditions and can be applied to a stationary vehicle. Important points in the symptom
simulation test:
In the symptom simulation test, the problem symptoms as well as the problem area or parts must
be confirmed. First, narrow down the possible problem circuits according to the symptoms. Then,
connect the tester and carry out the symptom simulation test, judging whether the circuit being
tested is defective or normal. Also, confirm the problem symptoms at the same time. Refer to
Problem Symptoms Table for each system to narrow down the possible causes.
To reproduce DTCs, it is necessary to satisfy the respective DTC detection conditions.
(a) VIBRATION METHOD: When a malfunction seems to

occur as a result of vibration.
*a Vibrate Slightly
*b Shake Slightly
(1) PARTS OR SENSORS
Apply slight vibration with a finger to the part or

sensor suspected to be the cause of the problem, and
check whether the malfunction occurs.
NOTICE:
Applying strong vibration to relays may open the relays.
(2) CONNECTORS
Slightly shake the connector vertically and
horizontally.
(3) WIRE HARNESS
Slightly shake the wire harness vertically and

horizontally.
HINT:
The connector joint and fulcrum of the vibration are the major
areas that should be checked thoroughly.
(b) HEAT METHOD: When a malfunction seems to occur when the area in question is heated.
(1) Heat the component that is the possible cause of the malfunction with a hair dryer or similar
device. Check if the malfunction occurs.
NOTICE:
Do not heat components to more than 60°C (140°F). Exceeding this temperature may damage the
components.
Do not apply heat directly to parts in an ECU.
(c) WATER SPRINKLING METHOD: When a malfunction

seems to occur on a rainy day or in high-humidity.
(1) Sprinkle water onto the vehicle and check if the

malfunction occurs.
NOTICE:
Never sprinkle water directly into the engine
compartment. Indirectly change the temperature and
humidity by spraying water onto the front of the radiator.
Never apply water directly onto the electronic
components.
HINT:
If the vehicle has or had a water leak problem, the leak may
have damaged the ECU or connections. Look for evidence of
corrosion or short circuits. Proceed with caution during water
tests.
(d) HIGH ELECTRICAL LOAD METHOD: When a malfunction
seems to occur when the electrical load is high.
(1) Turn on the heater blower, headlights, rear window

defogger and all other electrical loads. Check if the
malfunction recurs.
5. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
Look for output Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) (from the DTC checks) in the appropriate section's
Diagnostic Trouble Code chart. Use the chart to determine the trouble area and the proper inspection
procedure. A description of each of the chart's columns is shown in the table below.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
DTC No. Indicates the diagnostic trouble code.
Detection
Indicates the system or details of the problem.
Item
Trouble
Indicates the suspected areas of the problem.
Area
Indicates the page where the inspection procedure for each circuit is to be found, or gives
See page
instruction for checking and repairs.
6. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
When no DTC is output but the problem still occurs, use the Problem Symptoms Table. The suspected
areas (circuits or parts) for each problem symptom are shown in the table. The suspected areas are listed
in order of probability. A description of each of the table columns is shown in the following table.
HINT:
In some cases, the problem is not detected by the diagnostic system even though a problem symptom
occurs. It is possible that the problem occurs outside the detection range of the diagnostic system, or
that the problem occurs in a completely different system.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Symptom -
Suspected Area Indicates the circuit or part which needs to be checked.
See page Indicates the page where the inspection procedure is located.
7. INSPECTION
A description of the main points for inspection of suspected areas is shown in the following table.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
The major role and operation of the circuit or system and its component parts are
Description
explained.
DTC No., DTC

Indicates the diagnostic trouble codes, DTC detection conditions and suspected
Detection Condition
areas for a problem.
and Trouble Area
This is a wiring diagram for the circuit or system.

This diagram can be used together with the Electrical Wiring Diagram to
thoroughly understand the circuit.
Wire colors are indicated by alphabetical codes. B = Black, L = Blue, R = Red, BR
Wiring Diagram
= Brown, LG = Light Green, V = Violet, G = Green, O = Orange, W = White, GR =
Gray, P = Pink, Y = Yellow, SB = Sky Blue
The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the
color of the stripe.
This shows the procedure not only to determine whether the circuit is normal or
Inspection
abnormal, but also to determine whether the problem is located in the sensors,
Procedure
actuators, wire harness or ECU.
The illustration shows whether the connector being checked is connected or

disconnected.
Illustration of the
The connections for an electrical tester are indicated by (+) or (-) after the
ECU connector
terminal name.
during the check
For inspections between a connector and body ground, information about the
ground is not shown in the illustration.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 A From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004PFL00QX
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS (2013 FR-S)
CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERS
1. CUSTOMIZE WIRELESS DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
2. CUSTOMIZE KEY REMINDER WARNING SYSTEM
3. CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SYSTEM (INT)
4. CUSTOMIZE METER / GAUGE SYSTEM
5. CUSTOMIZE SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM
6. CUSTOMIZE WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
7. CUSTOMIZE LIGHTING SYSTEM (EXT)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000315Z04XX
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
INITIALIZATION
1. PROCEDURES NECESSARY WHEN ECU OR OTHER PARTS ARE REPLACED
REPLACEMENT PART NECESSARY EFFECT/INOPERATIVE FUNCTION WHEN SEE

PROCEDURE NECESSARY PROCEDURES ARE NOT PAGE
PERFORMED
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) MIL comes on
registration
ECM
ECU communication ID
registration (Engine Engine start
immobiliser system)
TCM
Automatic
transmission
assembly
Valve body
assembly
Transmission
wire Large shift shock
Reset memory
Shift solenoid The deterioration of fuel efficiency
valve S1, S2,
S3, S4, SL1,
SL2, SLT,
SLU, and/or
SR
Engine
assembly
Brake actuator
assembly
(Skid control
ECU)
Steering
sensor
Steering
column VSC sensor neutral VSC system does not operate normally
assembly memorization (warning indicator light comes on).
Rack and
pinion power
steering gear
assembly
Adjust front
wheel
alignment
Rotation angle sensor
Power steering ECU initialization and torque P/S warning light comes on
assembly sensor zero point EPS control
calibration
Rotation angle sensor

Steering column initialization and torque Steering effort is different between turning
assembly sensor zero point steering wheel to left and right
calibration
Door control
When DTC detection conditions of
receiver Transmitter
"transmitter ID not received" DTC
Tire pressure ID
are met, TPWS indicator blinks for
warning valve registration
1 minute, and then illuminates.
and Initialization
Tire pressure warning function
transmitter
Key
Main body
ECU (network Code registration
gateway ECU) (Engine immobiliser Engine start
Combination system)
meter
assembly
Door control
transmitter Code registration
assembly (Wireless door lock Wireless door lock control system
Door control system)
receiver
Power window
regulator
motor
assembly
Door window
regulator sub-
assembly
Auto up/down function
Door glass
Initialize power window Jam protection function
Front door
control system Operation function after ignition
frame sub-
switch is turned off
assembly rear
lower
Front door
sush
Front door
opening trim
weatherstrip
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 L From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UYX0E9X
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. BASIC REPAIR HINT
(a) HINTS ON OPERATIONS
Always wear a clean uniform.

1 Attire
A hat and safety shoes must be worn.
Prepare a grille cover, fender cover, seat cover and floor mat before starting
2 Vehicle protection
work.
When working with 2 or more persons, be sure to check the safety of

one another.
When working with the engine running, make sure to provide
ventilation for exhaust fumes in the workshop.
If working on high temperature, high pressure, rotating, moving or
3 Safety procedures
vibrating parts, wear appropriate safety equipment and take extra
care not to injure yourself or others.
When jacking up the vehicle, be sure to support the specified locations
with safety stands.
When lifting up the vehicle, use appropriate safety equipment.
Preparation of
tools and Before starting work, prepare a tool stand, SST, measuring equipment, oil, and
4
measuring any replacement parts required.
equipment
Diagnose with a thorough understanding of proper procedures and of

the reported problem.
Before removing any parts, check the general condition of the
Removal and
assembly and for deformation and damage.
installation,
If the procedure is complicated, take notes. For example, note the
5 disassembly and
total number of electrical connections, bolts or hoses removed. Add
assembly
matchmarks to ensure reassembly of components in the original
operations
positions. Temporarily mark hoses and their fittings if needed.
Clean and wash the removed parts if necessary and assemble them
after a thorough check.
Place the removed parts in a separate box to avoid mixing them up

with new parts or contaminating the new parts.
6 Removed parts For non-reusable parts such as gaskets, O-rings and self-locking nuts,
replace them with new ones as instructed in this manual.
Retain the removed parts for customer inspection, if requested.
Make sure that removed and installed parts (oil filler cap, level
Checks to dipstick, floor mat, etc.) are properly installed/tightened.
7* perform after Make sure that none of the cloths or tools that were used have been
work is finished left in the engine compartment or within the vehicle.
Check that there are no oil leaks.
CAUTION:
*: Be sure to perform these checks properly, Not performing these checks properly after finishing
work can lead to serious accident or injury.
(b) JACKING UP AND SUPPORTING THE VEHICLE
(1) Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting the vehicle. Be sure to lift and support the
vehicle at the proper locations.
(c) PRECOATED PARTS
*a Seal Lock Adhesive
(1) Precoated parts are bolts and nuts that are coated
with seal lock adhesive at the factory.
(2) If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or moved

in any way, it must be recoated with the specified
adhesive.
(3) When reusing a precoated part, clean off the old

adhesive and dry the part with compressed air. Then
apply new seal lock adhesive appropriately to that
part.
(4) Some seal lock agents harden slowly. You may have
to wait for the seal lock adhesive to harden.
(d) GASKETS
(1) When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leaks.
(e) BOLTS, NUTS AND SCREWS
(1) Carefully follow all the specifications for tightening torque. Always use a torque wrench.
(2) Make sure that no foreign matter (burrs, paint, etc.) gets trapped under the heads of the bolts
and nuts when tightening them.
(f) FUSES
*a INCORRECT
*b CORRECT
(1) When inspecting a fuse, check that the wire of the fuse is not broken.
(2) If the wire of a fuse is broken, confirm that there are no shorts in its circuit.
(3) When a fuse is replaced, a fuse with the same amperage rating must be used.
ILLUSTRATION SYMBOL PART NAME ABBREVIATION
FUSE FUSE
MEDIUM CURRENT FUSE M-FUSE
HIGH CURRENT FUSE H-FUSE

FUSIBLE LINK FL
CIRCUIT BREAKER CB
(g) CLIPS
(1) The removal and installation methods of typical clips used for vehicle body parts are shown in
the table below.
HINT:
If clips are damaged during a procedure, always replace the damaged clips with new ones.
SHAPE (EXAMPLE) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the clips with a clip remover or pliers.
Remove the clips with a clip remover or screwdriver.

Remove the clips with a wide scraper to prevent panel damage.
Remove the clips by pushing the center pin through and prying out the
shell.
Remove the clips by unscrewing the center pin and prying out the shell.
Remove the clips by prying out the pin and then prying out the shell.
(h) CLAWS
(1) The removal and installation methods of typical claws used for vehicle body parts are shown in
the table below.
HINT:
If claws are damaged during a procedure, always replace the cap or cover that has damaged claws
with a new one.
SHAPE (EXAMPLE) ILLUSTRATION PROCEDURE
Using a screwdriver, disengage the

claws and remove the cap or cover.


(i) HINGES, GUIDES, CLAMPS, PINS, ETC.
(1) The removal and installation methods of typical hinges, guides, clamps and pins used for vehicle
body parts are shown in the table below.
HINT:
If clamps are damaged during a procedure, always replace the cap or cover that has damaged clamps
with a new one.
SHAPE (EXAMPLE) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(j) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF VACUUM HOSES
(1) To disconnect a vacuum hose, pull and twist it from

the end of the hose. Do not pull it from the middle of
the hose as this may damage the hose.
*a INCORRECT
*b CORRECT
(2) When disconnecting vacuum hoses, use tags to
identify where they should be reconnected.
(3) After completing any hose related repairs, double-check that the vacuum hoses are properly
connected. The label under the hood shows the proper layout.
(4) When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hose onto a connector that is too large. If a hose
has been stretched, air may leak. Use a step-down adapter if necessary.
(k) TORQUE WHEN USING TORQUE WRENCH WITH EXTENSION TOOL
(1) Use the formula below to calculate special torque

values for situations where SST or an extension tool is
combined with a torque wrench.
Formula
T' = (L2/(L1 + L2))*T
Reading of torque wrench {N*m (kgf*cm,

T'
ft.*lbf)}
TTorque {N*m (kgf*cm, ft.*lbf)}
L1
Length of SST or extension tool {cm (in.)}
L2
Length of torque wrench {cm (in.)}
NOTICE:
If an extension tool or SST is combined with a torque
wrench and used to tighten to a torque specification in
this manual, the actual torque will be excessive and
parts will be damaged.
2. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH SRS AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

CAUTION:
Before performing pre-disposal deployment of any SRS component, review and closely follow all
applicable environmental and hazardous material regulations. Pre-disposal deployment may be
considered hazardous material treatment.
Failure to carry out the service operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to
unexpectedly deploy during servicing and lead to serious injury. Furthermore, if a mistake is made
when servicing the SRS, it is possible that the SRS may fail to operate properly. Before servicing
(including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be sure to read the following
section carefully.
(a) GENERAL NOTICE
(1) The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly
when the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door closed in order to
prevent the door molding from being damaged. When the negative (-) battery terminal needs to
be disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
(2) As malfunctions of the SRS are difficult to confirm, the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) become
the most important source of information when troubleshooting. When troubleshooting the SRS,
always check for DTCs before disconnecting the battery.
(3) Work must be started at least 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and after the
cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal.
The SRS is equipped with a back-up power source. If work is started within 90 seconds after
turning the ignition switch off and disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal, the SRS may deploy.
When the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal, the clock and audio
system memory will be cleared. Before starting work, make a note of the settings of each
memory system. When work is finished, reset the clock and audio system as before.
CAUTION:
Never use a back-up power source (battery or other) to avoid clearing the system memory. The
back-up power source may inadvertently power the SRS and cause it to deploy.
(4) If the vehicle has been involved in a minor collision where the SRS does not deploy, the steering
pad, front passenger airbag assembly, knee airbag assembly, front seat side airbag assembly,
curtain shield airbag assembly and front seat outer belt assembly should be inspected before
further use of the vehicle.
(5) Never use SRS parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, use new ones.
(6) Before repairs, remove the airbag sensor assemblies if impacts are likely to be applied to the
sensor during repairs.
(7) Never disassemble and attempt to repair any airbag sensor assemblies or airbag assemblies.
1. Steering pad
2. Front passenger airbag assembly
3. Front seat side airbag assembly
4. Curtain shield airbag assembly
5. Front seat outer belt assembly
(8) Replace the airbag sensor assemblies and the airbag assemblies if: 1) damage has occurred
from being dropped, or 2) cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector are
present.
(9) Do not directly expose the airbag sensor assemblies or airbag assemblies to hot air or flames.
(10) Use a voltmeter/ohmmeter with high impedance (minimum = 10 kΩ) for troubleshooting
electrical circuits.
(11) Information labels are attached to the SRS components. Follow the instructions on the labels.
(12) After work on the SRS is completed, check the SRS warning light.
(b) SPIRAL CABLE
(1) The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steering column with the spiral cable at the
neutral position. Otherwise, cable damage and other problems may occur. Refer to the
information about correct installation of the steering wheel .
(c) STEERING PAD
(1) Always place a removed or new steering pad with the surface facing upward. Placing the
steering pad with the pad surface facing downward could cause a serious accident if the airbag
deploys. Also, do not place anything on top of the steering pad.
(2) Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to deploy, which
could cause serious injury.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the steering pad.
(4) Store the steering pad in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93°C (199°F), the
humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.
(5) Before using an electric welder anywhere on the vehicle, disconnect the airbag ECU assembly
connectors. These connectors contain shorting springs. This feature reduces the possibility of the
airbag deploying due to current entering the squib wiring.
(6) When disposing of the vehicle or the steering pad by itself, the airbag should be deployed using
SST before disposal . Deploy the airbag in a safe place away from electrical noise.
(d) FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(1) Always place a removed or new front passenger airbag assembly with the pad surface facing
upward. Placing the airbag assembly with the airbag deployment direction facing downward
could cause a serious accident if the airbag deploys.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the front passenger airbag assembly.
(4) Store the airbag assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 93°C (199°F),
the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.
(6) When disposing of the vehicle or the airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should be
deployed using SST before disposal . Deploy the airbag in a safe place away from
electrical noise.
(e) FRONT SEAT SIDE AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(1) Always place a removed or new front seat side airbag assembly with the airbag deployment
direction facing upward.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the front seat side airbag assembly.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should be deployed
using SST before disposal . Deploy the airbag in a safe place away from electrical noise.
(f) CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAG ASSEMBLY
(1) Always place a removed or new curtain shield airbag assembly in a clear plastic bag, and keep it
in a safe place.
CAUTION:
The plastic bag should be disposed of after use.
NOTICE:
Never disassemble the curtain shield airbag assembly.
(3) Grease or detergents of any kind should not be applied to the curtain shield airbag assembly.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the airbag assembly unit by itself, the airbag should be deployed
using SST before disposal . Deploy the airbag in a safe place away from electrical noise.
(g) FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY (SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER)
(1) Never measure the resistance of the front seat outer belt assembly. This may cause the
pretensioner of the front seat outer belt assembly to activate, which could cause serious injury.
(2) Never disassemble the front seat outer belt assembly.
(3) Never install the front seat outer belt assembly on another vehicle.
(4) Store the seat outer belt assembly in an area where the ambient temperature is below 80°C
(176°F), the humidity is not high and there is no electrical noise.
(6) When disposing of a vehicle or the front seat outer belt assembly unit by itself, the front seat
outer belt assembly should be activated before disposal . Activate the front seat outer belt
assembly in a safe place away from electrical noise.
(7) As the front seat outer belt assembly is hot after being activated, allow some time for it to cool
down sufficiently before disposal. Never apply water to cool down the front seat outer belt
assembly.
(8) Grease, detergents, oil or water should not be applied to the front seat outer belt assembly.
(h) AIRBAG ECU ASSEMBLY
(1) Never reuse a airbag ECU assembly that has been involved in a collision where the SRS has
deployed.
(2) The connectors to the airbag ECU assembly should be connected or disconnected with the airbag
ECU assembly installed to the vehicle. If the connectors are connected or disconnected while the
airbag ECU assembly is not installed, the SRS may activate.
(3) Work must be started at least 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off and the cable is
disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal, even if only loosening the bolts of the
airbag ECU assembly.
(i) WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
(1) All the connectors in the system are a standard yellow color. If an SRS wire harness has an
open circuit or a connector is broken, replace it.
3. ELECTRONIC CONTROL
*1 Cable
*2 Negative (-) Battery Terminal
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly when
the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door closed in order to prevent the
door molding from being damaged. When the negative (-) battery terminal needs to be
disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
Certain systems need to be initialized after disconnecting and reconnecting the cable from the
negative (-) battery terminal.
After the ignition switch is turned off, the navigation receiver assembly (for Navigation Receiver
Type) or radio and display receiver assembly (for Radio and Display Type with Intuitive Parking
Assist System) records various types of memory and settings. As a result, after turning the ignition
switch off, make sure to wait at least 60 seconds before disconnecting the cable from the negative
(-) battery terminal.
(a) DISCONNECTING AND RECONNECTING NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
(1) Before performing work on electronic components, disconnect the cable from the negative (-)
battery terminal to prevent damage to the electrical system or components.
(2) When disconnecting the cable, turn the ignition switch and headlight switch off and loosen the
cable nut completely. Perform these operations without twisting or prying the cable. Then
disconnect the cable.
(3) Clock settings, radio settings, audio system memory, DTCs and other data will be cleared when
the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal. Write down any necessary data
before disconnecting the cable.
(b) HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC PARTS
*a INCORRECT
(1) Do not open the cover or case of the ECU unless

absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched,
the IC may be rendered inoperative by static
electricity.
(2) Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting electronic

connectors. Pull on the connector itself.
(3) Do not drop electronic components, such as sensors or

relays. If they are dropped on a hard surface, they
should be replaced.
(4) When cleaning the engine components with steam,

protect the electronic components, air filter and
emission-related components from water.
(5) Never use an impact wrench to remove or install

temperature switches or temperature sensors.
(6) When measuring the resistance between terminals of

a wire connector, insert the tester probe carefully to
prevent the terminals from bending.
4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FUEL CONTROL PARTS

(a) PLACE FOR REMOVING AND INSTALLING FUEL SYSTEM PARTS
(1) Work in a location with good air ventilation that does not have welders, grinders, drills, electric
motors, stoves, or any other ignition sources nearby.
(2) Never work in a pit or near a pit as fuel vapors will collect there.
(b) REMOVING AND INSTALLING FUEL SYSTEM PARTS
(1) Prepare a fire extinguisher before starting work.
(2) To prevent static electricity, install a ground wire between the fuel changer and vehicle, and do
not spray the surrounding area with water. Be careful when performing work in this area, as the
floor surface will become slippery. Do not clean up gasoline spills with water, as this may cause
the gasoline to spread, and possibly create a fire hazard.
(3) Avoid using electric motors, work lights and other electric equipment that can cause sparks or
high temperatures.
(4) Avoid using iron hammers as they may create sparks.
(5) Dispose of fuel-contaminated cloth separately using a fire resistant container.
5. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE INTAKE PARTS
(a) If any metal particles enter intake system parts, this may
damage the engine.
(b) When removing and installing intake system parts, cover the openings of the removed parts and
engine openings. Use adhesive tape or other suitable materials.
(c) When installing intake system parts, check that no metal particles have entered the engine or
installed parts.
6. REMOVING AND INSTALLING HOSES

(a) Before removing and installing hoses
Using hoses that are damaged or deformed may cause seeping, leaking, or coming off
hoses, etc. Leaked oil may disperse into the exhaust pipe and ignite or cause fumes, so
take sufficient care during inspection and maintenance.
Neglecting to remove hoses when working on areas that require removal of hoses may
damage the interior of the hoses. Be sure to remove such hoses when working.
(b) When removing, installing, and inspecting hoses
(1) Comply with the following when removing hoses.
When using standard hose removers, do not

use hose removers with pointed tips (hose
pluckers) as pointed tips may damage the
hose or the surface of the pipe.
When using pliers, etc. to make hose
removal process easier, be sure to protect
the hose with a cloth, then pull it out by
hand in a straight line while rotating it
slightly.
*1 Hose Remover
(2) When continuing to use the same hose, perform the

following inspection, and replace with a new hose if a
fault is found.
Replace hoses that have ridden up on the

stay or spool.
Bend hoses and check carefully to see
whether they exhibit damage to their outer
or inner surfaces, cracks, fractures, hardened
or softened rubber, swelling, peeling
interiors, or deformation due to foreign
matter adhering to or penetrating the hose.
Replace with a new hose if any of these
problems are found.
*a Hose riding up on stay
*b Hose riding up on spool

(3) Comply with the following when installing hoses.
Take sufficient care with regard to where the

hose is installed.
Do not use lubricant.
Push in firmly up to the specified position
(the seat or spool).
Check whether the hose clamp position,
orientation, and hose layout are correct
(Check that the positioning and orientation
are correct, that the hose is not too long or
too short, that the hose is not different to
before the procedure was done, and that
sufficient space has been left between the
hose and other parts in the area).
After attaching the hoses, check that they
are not leaking or losing fluid (Check that the
hoses are firmly fixed in place with the
clamps).
Push the hose against the spool (Do not push the hose
*a
firmly enough to cause wrinkles on its tip).
Apply clamping force evenly around the exterior of the

*b
hose.
(4) For hose clips and hose clamps, perform the following inspection and replace with new ones if a
fault is found.
Check for the presence of deformation, rust, damage, and foreign matter.
For clips, check that the springs are performing properly, and that the clip has
sufficient clamping force.
For clamps, check that the clamp can be screw-tightened, that the clamp is not
elliptical in shape, and that the screws are undamaged.
(5) For pipes, perform the following inspection, and replace with a new pipe if a fault is found.
Check that there is no damage, rust, peeling (including peeling plating), foreign matter,
bending, breakage, or fracturing.
(6) Replace the following parts with new ones when removing or changing the attachment position
of the hose.
Transmission oil cooler hose and fuel hose
7. HANDLING OF HOSE CLAMPS

*1 Clamp Track
*2 Spring Type Clamp

(a) Before removing a hose, check the clamp position so that
it can be reinstalled in the same position.
(b) Replace any deformed or dented clamps with new ones.
(c) When reusing a hose, attach the clamp on the clamp

track portion of the hose.
(d) For a spring type clamp, it may be necessary to spread

the tabs slightly after installation by pushing them in the
direction of the arrows as shown in the illustration.
8. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
(a) Install the antenna as far away from the ECU and sensors
of the vehicle electronic systems as possible.
(b) Install the antenna and feeder at least 20 cm (7.87 in.)

away from the ECU and sensors of the vehicle electronic
systems. For details about ECU and sensor locations, refer
to the section on the applicable components.
(c) Keep the antenna and feeder separate from other wiring
as much as possible. This will prevent signals sent from
the communication equipment from affecting vehicle
equipment and vice versa.
(d) Check that the antenna and feeder are correctly

adjusted.
(e) Do not install a high-powered mobile communication

system.
9. HEADLIGHT INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE

(a) When the headlight dimmer switch assembly is set to head, do not touch the discharge headlight
high-voltage socket area.
NOTICE:
When performing inspection or maintenance, the discharge headlight precautions must be
followed.
(b) When the headlights are illuminated, do not cover the

headlights for 3 minutes or more.
*a Illumination for 3 minutes or more prohibited if covered
NOTICE:
As the headlight's outer lens is made of resin, the
resulting heat created when covering the headlight for
an extended period of time may deform the headlight.
10. SET FRONT HOOD STAY

(a) When performing inspections or general maintenance, use the front hood stay in its normal
attachment position.
NOTICE:
When performing inspections or general maintenance, do not remove the front hood stay.
(b) When it is necessary to open the engine hood further to remove the engine, etc., set the front
hood stay in attachment position B, as shown in the illustration.
11. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH TRACTION CONTROL (TR(A)C) AND VEHICLE
STABILITY CONTROL (VSC) SYSTEMS
When testing with a 2-wheel drum tester such as a speedometer tester, a combination speedometer and
brake tester, or a chassis dynamometer, or when jacking up the front wheels and turning the wheels,
perform the following procedure to enter inspection mode and disable the TR(A)C and VSC systems
.
HINT:
The vehicle may slip unexpectedly out of the dynamometer because of TR(A)C and VSC operation.
Pressing the VSC OFF switch does not disable TR(A)C and VSC operation completely.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the VSC OFF indicator light will come on.
Secure the vehicle with chains for safety.
12. PRECAUTIONS FOR TOWING REAR WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLES

(a) Use one of the following methods to tow the vehicle.
(b) If the vehicle has trouble with the chassis or drivetrain, use method 1 (flatbed truck).
NOTICE:
Do not use any towing method other than those shown above.
(c) If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency the vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable
or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s).
This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for distances of less than 30 km, and at
speeds below 30km/h (19 mph).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drivetrain,
axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
NOTICE:
If the towing speed or distance exceeds the above limits, or the vehicle is towed in a backward
direction with the wheels on the ground, the drivetrain or vehicle may be damaged.
(1) Emergency towing procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal slowly.
NOTICE:
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers
which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains.
Do not turn off the ignition switch. Turning off the ignition switch may result in engagement of the
steering lock, resulting in a hazardous situation or accident.
(d) The towing methods shown below are dangerous and can damage the vehicle, so do not use them.
(1) Do not tow the vehicle with only 2 wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
If the vehicle is towed with only the front wheels on the ground, the steering may move,
causing the vehicle to become unstable.
NOTICE:
If the vehicle is towed with only the rear wheels on the ground, the drivetrain may overheat and
be damaged.
(2) Do not use a sling-type towing method either from the front or rear.
NOTICE:
If a sling-type tow truck is used, damage may occur to the vehicle body.
13. FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH CATALYTIC CONVERTER
CAUTION:
If a large amount of unburned gasoline or gasoline vapors flow into the converter, it may cause
converter overheating and create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following
precautions:
(a) Use only unleaded gasoline.
(b) Avoid performing unnecessary spark tests.
(1) Perform a spark test only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible.
(2) While testing, never race the engine unless instructed.
(c) Avoid a prolonged engine compression measurement. Engine compression measurements must be
performed as rapidly as possible.
(d) Do not run the engine when the fuel tank is nearly empty. This may cause the engine to misfire
and create an extra load on the converter.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UYY0AOX
Title: INTRODUCTION: REPAIR INSTRUCTION: VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS (2013 FR-S)
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS

1. NOTICE ABOUT VEHICLE CONDITION WHEN RAISING VEHICLE
(a) The vehicle must be unloaded before jacking up or raising the vehicle. Never jack up or raise a
heavily loaded vehicle.
(b) When removing any heavy components like the engine or transaxle, the vehicle center of gravity
will shift. To stabilize the vehicle, place a balance weight in a location that will prevent the vehicle
from rolling or shifting, or place a transmission jack under the appropriate jack position at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
2. NOTICE FOR USING 4 POST LIFT

(a) Follow the safety procedures outlined in the lift's instruction manual.
(b) Do not damage the tires or wheels while driving onto the lift.
(c) Use wheel chocks to secure the vehicle.
3. NOTICE FOR USING JACK AND SAFETY STANDS

(a) Work on a level surface. Use wheel chocks at all times.
(b) Use safety stands with rubber attachments as shown in

the illustration.
*1 Rubber Attachment
(c) Set the jack and safety stands exactly under the specified locations on the vehicle.
(d) Do not work on or leave the vehicle supported only by a jack. Be sure to support the vehicle with
safety stands.
(e) When jacking up the vehicle, first release the parking brake and move the shift lever to N.
(f) When jacking up the entire vehicle:
(1) When jacking up the front wheels first, make sure wheel chocks are behind the rear wheels.
(2) When jacking up the rear wheels first, make sure wheel chocks are in front of the front wheels.
(g) When jacking up only the front or rear wheels of the vehicle:
(1) Before jacking up the front wheels, place wheel chocks on both sides of the rear wheels.
(2) Before jacking up the rear wheels, place wheel chocks on both sides of the front wheels.
(h) When lowering a vehicle that only has its front or rear wheels jacked up.
(1) Before lowering the front wheels, make sure wheel chocks are in front of the rear wheels.
(2) Before lowering the rear wheels, make sure wheel chocks are behind the front wheels.
4. NOTICE FOR USING A SWING ARM TYPE LIFT

(b) Use swing arms equipped with rubber attachments as shown in the illustration.
(c) Position the vehicle so that its center of gravity is centered on the lift (length of "L" in the
illustration should be as short as possible).
(d) Ensure that the rubber cushions or swing arms do not contact the body cladding or lower
mouldings.
(e) Be sure to lock the swing arms before raising the vehicle (if equipped with arm locks).
(f) Use the lift to raise the vehicle until the tires are off the ground, then stop the lift and shake the
front and rear of the vehicle to make sure that it is stable.
5. NOTICE FOR USING PLATE TYPE LIFT
(b) Use plate lift attachments (rubber lifting blocks) on top of the plates.
(c) Be sure to set the vehicle to the specified position described in the following chart and shown in the
following illustration.
Right and left set

Center the vehicle on the lift.
position
Match the attachments to positions A in the illustration.

Front and rear set
Do not use a plate lift with attachments that are unable to reach
position
positions A in the illustration.
(d) Ensure that the plate lift or rubber lifting blocks do not contact the body cladding or lower
mouldings.
(e) Use the lift to raise the vehicle until the tires are off the ground, then stop the lift and shake the
front and rear of the vehicle to make sure that it is stable.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 N From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000019FS055X
Title: MAINTENANCE: BODY: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. BODY INSPECTION
(a) Check the body exterior for dents, scratches and rust.
(b) Check the underbody for rust and damage.
If necessary, replace the damaged part or repair the damaged area.
2. REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING FILTER
(a) Remove the air conditioning filter .
(b) Visually inspect the surface of the air conditioning filter.
(c) If the air conditioning filter is contaminated with foreign matter, replace it.
3. ROAD TEST
(a) Check the engine and chassis for abnormal noises.
(b) Check that the vehicle does not wander or pull to one side.
(c) Check that the brakes work properly and do not drag.
(d) Set the parking brake shoes and drums.
4. TIGHTEN BOLTS AND NUTS ON CHASSIS AND BODY

(a) If necessary, tighten the bolts and nuts on the chassis parts listed below.
Front axle and suspension

Drivetrain
Rear axle and suspension
Brake system
Engine mounts
Other chassis parts
(b) If necessary, tighten the bolts and nuts on the body parts listed below.
Seat belt system

Seats
Doors and hood
Body mounts
Fuel tank
Exhaust system
Other body parts
5. FINAL INSPECTION
(a) Check the operation of the body parts.
(1) Hood
Auxiliary catch operates properly.

Hood locks securely when closed.
(2) Front doors

Door locks operate properly.
Doors close properly.
(3) Luggage compartment door
Luggage compartment door opens and closes properly.
(4) Seats
Seats adjust easily and lock securely in any position.

Front seatbacks lock securely in any position.
Fold-down rear seatbacks lock securely.
(5) Be sure to deliver a clean car. Make sure to check the following:
Steering wheel
Shift lever knob
All switches and knobs
Door handles
Seats
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001AQU061X
Title: MAINTENANCE: BRAKE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. INSPECT BRAKE LINE PIPES AND HOSES
HINT:
Work in a well-lighted area. Turn the front wheels fully to the

right or left before beginning the inspection.
(a) Using a mirror, check the entire circumference and length

of the brake lines and hoses for:
Damage
Wear
Deformation
Cracks
Bends
Corrosion
Leaks
Twists
(b) Check all the clamps for tightness and connections for
leakage.
(c) Check that the hoses and lines are not near sharp edges,
moving parts or the exhaust system.
(d) Check that the lines are installed properly and pass
through the center of the grommets.
2. INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Check the brake pedal for Automatic Transmission, for Manual Transmission).
3. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE
(a) Check the parking brake shoe clearance and parking brake lever travel .
(b) Check the parking brake cables to ensure that they are not deformed or binding.
4. INSPECT BRAKE LININGS AND DRUMS

(a) Check the parking brake linings and drums.
5. INSPECT FRONT BRAKE
(a) Check the front brake pads and discs .
6. INSPECT REAR BRAKE
(a) Check the rear brake pads and discs .
7. INSPECT OR CHANGE BRAKE FLUID

(a) Inspect or change the brake fluid .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001AQV066X
Title: MAINTENANCE: CHASSIS: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. INSPECT STEERING LINKAGE AND GEAR HOUSING
(a) Check the steering wheel free play .
(b) Check the steering linkage for looseness or damage.
(1) Check that the tie rod ends do not have excessive play.
(2) Check that the dust seals and boots are not damaged.
(3) Check that the boot clamps are not loose.
(4) Check that the steering gear box is not damaged.
(5) Check that the connectors are properly connected to the steering gear box.
2. INSPECT SUSPENSION BALL JOINT AND DUST COVER

(a) Inspect the ball joints for excessive looseness.
(1) Jack up the front of the vehicle and place wooden blocks with a height of 180 to 200 mm (7.09
to 7.87 in.) under the front tires.
(2) Jack up the lower suspension arm until there is about half a load on the front suspension.
(3) Check that the front wheels are pointing straight ahead. Use wheel chocks on all 4 wheels.
(4) Using a lever, pry up the end of the lower arm. Check the amount of play.
Maximum ball joint vertical play:

0 mm (0 in.)
If there is any play, replace the ball joint.

(b) Check the dust cover for damage.
3. INSPECT CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL AND SYSTEM OPERATION
(a) Check the clutch fluid level .
4. INSPECT DRIVE SHAFT BOOTS

(a) Check the drive shaft boots for loose clamps, cracks, grease leaks, kinks or damage.
5. INSPECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

(a) Visually check the automatic transmission for fluid leakage. If fluid is leaking, find the cause and
repair it.
(b) Inspect the automatic transmission fluid .
6. REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
(a) Replace the automatic transmission fluid .
7. INSPECT MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL

(a) Visually check the manual transmission for oil leakage. If fluid is leaking, find the cause and repair
it.
(b) Inspect the manual transmission oil .
8. INSPECT REAR DIFFERENTIAL OIL

(a) Visually check the rear differential for oil leakage. If fluid is leaking, find the cause and repair it.
(b) Inspect the rear differential oil .
9. PERFORM TIRE ROTATION
10. INSPECT FRONT AND REAR SUSPENSION

(a) Check the front and rear suspension.
SUSPENSION TYPE SEE PROCEDURE
Front Suspension
Rear Suspension
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001AQT066X
Title: MAINTENANCE: ENGINE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
HINT:
Perform these procedures after the engine has cooled down.
1. INSPECT DRIVE BELT
(a) Inspect the drive belt .
2. INSPECT ENGINE OIL
(a) Inspect the engine oil .
3. REPLACE ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
(a) Replace the engine oil and oil filter .
4. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT
(a) Inspect the engine coolant .
5. REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT
(a) Replace the engine coolant .
6. REPLACE SPARK PLUGS
(a) Replace the spark plugs .
7. REPLACE FUEL FILTER
(a) Replace the fuel filter .
8. INSPECT BATTERY
(a) Check the battery .
9. INSPECT AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT

(a) Remove the air cleaner filter element.
(b) Check that the air cleaner filter element is not excessively dirty. If the air cleaner filter element is
excessively dirty, replace the air cleaner filter element.
(c) Clean the air cleaner filter element with compressed air.
(d) Reinstall the air cleaner filter element.
10. INSPECT EXHAUST PIPES AND MOUNTINGS

(a) Visually check the pipes, hangers and connections for severe corrosion, leaks or damage.
11. INSPECT FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the fuel tank cap gasket .
12. INSPECT FUEL LINES, CONNECTIONS, FUEL TANK VAPOR VENT SYSTEM HOSES AND
FUEL TANK BANDS
(a) Visually check the fuel lines and hoses for cracks, leakage, loose connections, or deformation.
(b) Check for tank band looseness or deformation.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZE09JX
Title: MAINTENANCE: INSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
These are maintenance and inspection items that are considered to be the owner's responsibility.
The owner can do them or they can have them done at a service center.
These items include those that should be checked on a daily basis, those that in most cases
do not require special tools, and those that are considered to be reasonable for the owner to
do.
General maintenance items and procedures are as follows:
1. GENERAL NOTES
Maintenance requirements vary depending on the country.

Check the maintenance schedule in the owner's manual supplement.
Determine the appropriate time to service the vehicle using either miles driven or time
(months) elapsed, whichever reaches the specification first.
Maintain similar intervals between periodic maintenance unless noted.
Failing to check each vehicle part could lead to poor engine performance and increase exhaust
emissions.
2. LIGHTS
(a) Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights illuminate or
blink properly. Also, check if they have enough brightness.
(b) Check that the headlights are aimed properly.
3. WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS

(a) Check that all the warning lights and buzzers are working.
4. HORNS
(a) Check if the horns are working correctly.
5. WINDSHIELD GLASS
(a) Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
6. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

(a) Check that the washers are aimed properly. Also, check that the washer fluid hits the center of the
operating range of each wiper on the windshield.
(b) Check if the wipers streak. Replace them if necessary.
7. WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
(a) When the air conditioning is on the defroster setting, check that air comes out of the defroster
outlets.
8. REAR VIEW MIRROR

(a) Check that the rear view mirror is securely mounted.
9. SUN VISORS
(a) Check that the sun visors move freely and are securely mounted.
10. STEERING WHEEL

(a) Check that the steering wheel has the proper amount of free play. Also check for steering difficulty
and unusual noises .
11. SEATS
(a) Check that the seat adjusters, seatback recliner and other seat controls operate smoothly.
(b) Check that all the latches lock securely in all positions.
(c) Check that the locks hold securely in all positions.
(d) Check that the headrests move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in all
latched positions.
(e) When the rear seatbacks are folded down, check that the latches lock securely.
12. SEAT BELTS

(a) Check that the seat belt components, such as the buckles, retractors and anchors, operate properly
and smoothly.
(b) Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
13. ACCELERATOR PEDAL

(a) Check that the pedal operates smoothly. Check that the pedal does not have uneven resistance or
stick in certain positions.
14. BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Check that the brake pedal operates smoothly.
(b) Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and free play for Automatic
Transmission, for Manual Transmission).
(c) Start the engine and check the brake booster function.
(d) Start the engine and check the brake system indicator.
15. BRAKES
(a) In a safe place, check that the vehicle does not pull or lead to the side when applying the brakes.
16. PARKING BRAKE
(a) Check that the parking brake lever has the proper amount of travel .
(b) On a slight grade, check that the parking brake alone can hold the vehicle in place.
17. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION "PARK" MECHANISM

(a) Check the shift lever for proper and smooth operation.
(b) When the shift lever is in P and all brakes are released in an area that has a slight grade, check
that the vehicle is stable.
18. FLOOR MATS

(a) Check that the correct floor mats are used, and that they are properly installed.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZD08YX
Title: MAINTENANCE: OUTSIDE VEHICLE: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
These are maintenance and inspection items that are considered to be the owner's responsibility.
The owner can do them or they can have them done at a service center.
These items include those that should be checked on a daily basis, those that in most cases
do not require special tools, and those that are considered to be reasonable for the owner to
do.
General maintenance items and procedures are as follows:
1. GENERAL NOTES

Following the maintenance schedule is mandatory.
Failing to check each vehicle part could lead to poor engine performance and increase exhaust
emissions.
2. TIRES
(a) Check the tire inflation pressure with a gauge. Make adjustments if necessary.
(b) Check the surfaces of the tires for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
3. WHEEL NUTS
(a) Check for nuts that are loose or missing. Tighten them if necessary.
4. TIRE ROTATION
(a) Check the maintenance schedule in the owner's manual supplement.
5. WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

(a) Check the blades for wear or cracks whenever they are unable to wipe the windshield clean.
Replace them if necessary.
6. FLUID LEAKS
(a) Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel, oil, water and other fluids.
NOTICE:
If you smell fuel or notice any leaks, locate the cause and correct it.
7. DOORS AND ENGINE HOOD

(a) Check that all of the doors and the hood operate smoothly, and that all the latches lock securely.
(b) When the primary latch is released, check that the engine hood secondary latch prevents the hood
from opening.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZF091X
Title: MAINTENANCE: UNDER HOOD: GENERAL MAINTENANCE (2013 FR-S)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. GENERAL NOTES

Following the maintenance schedule is mandatory.
Maintain similar intervals between periodic maintenance unless noted.
Failing to check each maintenance item could lead to poor engine performance and increase
exhaust emissions.
2. WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

(a) Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
3. ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

(a) Check that the coolant level is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the see-through reservoir.
4. RADIATOR AND HOSES

(a) Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked by leaves, dirt and bugs.
(b) Check the radiator and hoses for:
Damage
Cracks
Kinks
Corrosion
Rot
Clogging
Leaks
5. BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

(a) Check that the electrolyte level of all the battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on
the case.
HINT:
If the electrolyte level is difficult to see, lightly shake the vehicle.
6. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

(a) Check that the brake fluid level is near the upper level line on the see-through reservoirs.
7. ENGINE DRIVE BELT

(a) Check the drive belt for fraying, cracks, wear or oil.
8. ENGINE OIL LEVEL

(a) Check that the engine oil level is between the full level and low level marks on the dipstick with the
engine turned off.
9. EXHAUST SYSTEM
(a) Visually inspect for severe corrosion, cracks, holes or loose supports.
HINT:
If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, inspect and repair
the exhaust system.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 B From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KES00HX
Title: PREPARATION: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Vernier caliper -
Alignment tester -
Toe-in gauge -
Camber-caster-kingpin gauge -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020C700RX
Title: PREPARATION: AUDIO / VIDEO: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020FO00IX
Title: PREPARATION: AUDIO / VIDEO: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110 Toyota Electrical Tester Set -
09080-2C100 Test Lead Set -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H7Q010X
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Axle
Torque wrench -
Dial indicator with magnetic base -
Non-residue solvent -
Differential
Torque wrench -
Micrometer -
Non-residue solvent -
Prussian blue -
MP grease -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H7R00ZX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Differential
ITEM CAPACITY OIL GRADE
Rear
differential
1.10 to 1.20 liters (1.17 to 1.27 US qts, Toyota genuine differential gear oil LT 75W-
oil
0.97 to 1.05 Imp. qts) 85 GL-5 or equivalent
(except
LSD)
Rear
differential 1.10 to 1.20 liters (1.17 to 1.27 US qts, Toyota genuine differential gear oil LX 75W-
oil 0.97 to 1.05 Imp. qts) 85 GL-5 or equivalent
(for LSD)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002ZWC00VX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110 Set, Hexagon Socket Wrench -
(09013-6C130) Socket Hexagon -

10mm
09051-1C110 Plastic Hammer -
09051-1C300 Chisel -
09072-1C200 Vernier Calipers -

150mm
09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H7P00ZX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1281, Three Bond 1281 or equivalent -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KC800HX
Title: PREPARATION: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09213-70011 Crankshaft Pulley Holding Tool -
09308-00010 Oil Seal Puller -
09330-00021 Companion Flange Holding Tool -
09504-22011 Differential Side Bearing -

Replacer
09506-30012 Differential Drive Pinion Rear -

Bearing Cone Replacer
09520-01010 Drive Shaft Remover Attachment -
09520-24010 Differential Side Gear Shaft -

Puller
(09520-32040) Shocker Set -
09554-22010 Differential Oil Seal Replacer -

09556-22010 Drive Pinion Front Bearing -
Remover
09570-18010 Rear Differential Mount Cushion -

Remover and Replacer
(09571-01010) Remover -
(09571-01020) Base No.1 -
(09571-01030) Base No.2 -
(09571-01040) Replacer -
(09571-01050) Sleeve -
(09571-01060) Ring -
(09571-01070) Nut -
(09571-01080) Bearing -
(09571-01090) Shaft -
09570-18020 Rear Differential Mount Cushion -

(09571-01100) Remover -
(09571-01110) Base No.1 -
(09571-01120) Base No.2 -
(09571-01130) Replacer -
(09571-01140) Sleeve -
(09571-01150) Plate -
(09571-01160) Nut -
(09571-01170) Bearing -
(09571-01180) Bolt -
(09571-01190) Shaft -
09636-20010 Upper Ball Joint Dust Cover -

Replacer
09710-18030 Rear Suspension Bush Tool Set -
09710-30012 Rear Suspension Bush Tool -

Set
(09710-04081) Base -
09716-18010 Rear Suspension Bush -

09922-10010 Variable Open Wrench -
09930-00010 Drive Shaft Nut Chisel -
09950-00020 Bearing Remover -
09950-30012 Puller A Set -
(09951-03010) Upper Plate -

(09953-03010) Center Bolt -
(09954-03010) Arm -
(09955-03030) Lower Plate 130 -
(09956-03030) Adaptor 20 -
09950-40011 Puller B Set -
(09951-04020) Hanger 200 -
(09952-04010) Slide Arm -
(09953-04030) Center Bolt 200 -
(09954-04010) Arm 25 -
(09955-04061) Claw No. 6 -

(09957-04010) Attachment -
(09958-04011) Holder -
09950-60010 Replacer Set -
(09951-00350) Replacer 35 -
(09951-00380) Replacer 38 -
(09951-00430) Replacer 43 -
(09951-00480) Replacer 48 -
(09951-00580) Replacer 58 -
(09951-00590) Replacer 59 -
(09952-06010) Adapter -
09950-60020 Replacer Set No. 2 -
(09951-00720) Replacer 72 -
(09951-00890) Replacer 89 -
09950-70010 Handle Set -
(09951-00410) Replacer 41 -
(09951-00620) Replacer 62 -
(09951-07100) Handle 100 -
(09951-07200) Handle 200 -
(09952-06010) Adapter -
09960-20010 Ball Joint Puller Set -

(09961-02010) Assy -
Ball Joint Puller
(09961-02060) Spacer B -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YI07PX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vinyl tape -
Ruler -
Micrometer -
Torque wrench -
Wooden Plate -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YJ04TX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
ITEM CAPACITY CLASSIFICATION
Brake fluid - SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT3

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YH07OX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (FRONT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09017-1C100 Union Nut Wrench -
10 mm
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YI07QX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vinyl tape -
Ruler -
Micrometer -
Wooden block -
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YJ04UX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YH07PX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE (REAR): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
10 mm
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043ET003X
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043ES003X
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013
FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
10mm

12mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YI07OX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YJ04SX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000039YH07NX
Title: PREPARATION: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
10mm

12mm
99999-90022 Hand-held vacuum pump -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZTT00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vernier calipers -
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZTU00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Brake fluid - SAE J1703 or FMVSS NO. 116 DOT3

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZTW00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09012-2C510 Deep Socket Wrench -
19mm

10mm
09051-1C400 Pin Punch -

3

150mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZTS00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CLUTCH: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09301-00110 Clutch Guide Tool -
09333-00013 Clutch Diaphragm Spring Aligner -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001VAO00CX
Title: PREPARATION: CRUISE CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000312203NX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
Protective goggle
Metal saw
Cutter or other similar tool
Plastic-faced hammer
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002ZNQ076X
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
MP grease -
Toyota genuine adhesive 1324, Three bond 1324 or equivalent -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000312003OX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120 Set, "TORX" Socket Wrench -
(09013-1C120) "TORX" Socket Wrench T-type -

T30
09050-00032 Air Drill -
09050-20010 Air Riveter -
09061-1C100 Clip Remover -

6mm
09061-1C300 Set, Moulding Remover -
(09061-1C310) Remover A, Moulding -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000367203QX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
08850-00065 Butyl Tape Set
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043Y4003X
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR / HATCH: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09812-18010 Front Door Glass Adjusting Tool -
09812-18020 Front Door Fix Window Glass -

Adjusting Tool
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001Z4E00CX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Protective tape -
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
MP grease -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001Z4D00CX
Title: PREPARATION: DOOR LOCK: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

T30
09011-3C400 Socket Wrench -

6mm

10mm
(09061-1C310) Remover A, Moulding -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JAQ00HX
Title: PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCI00HX
Title: PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09905-00012 Snap Ring No. 1 Expander -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JAP00GX
Title: PREPARATION: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09325-20010 Transmission Oil Plug -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000208P00JX
Title: PREPARATION: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Protective tape
Heat light
Piano wire
Wooden block or similar object For tying both piano wire ends
Cutter or other similar tool
Torque wrench
Double-sided tape
Adhesive 3M DP-105 or equivalent
Infrared light
Non-residue solvent
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000208O00JX
Title: PREPARATION: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
6mm
(09061-1C320) Remover B, Moulding -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205L00FX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Vernier calipers -
Pin (φ1mm) -
Vise -
Ohmmeter -
Ammeter -
Aluminium plate -
Soldering iron -
Solder -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205K00FX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09011-3C400 Socket Wrench -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205J00FX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09387-00041 Bearing Puller Assembly -
09632-36010 Steering Vane Pump Bearing -

Replacer
09820-36010 Starter Amateur Bearing -

Remover & Replacer
(09951-00250) Replacer 25 -
(09951-00520) Replacer 52 -
09950-70010 Handle Set -
(09951-07100) Handle 100 -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZAU00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Thermometer -
Torque wrench -
Vernier caliper -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZAT00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09080-1C110 Toyota Electrical Tester Set
09080-2C100 Test Lead Set
09230-40010 Radiator Cap Tester
09231-40010 Radiator Cap Tester

Adapter Set A
-
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZAS00KX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 COOLING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09960-10010 Variable Pin Wrench Set -
(09962-01000) Variable Pin Wrench Arm Assembly -
(09963-00700) Pin 7 -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KD402GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Battery -
Pressure Gauge -
Sound scope -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004B3Y006X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
19mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004B6C007X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Three Bond 1141G or equivalent -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020IF00EX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Voltmeter -
Ohmmeter -
Battery -
Thermometer -
Torque wrench -
Spark plug cleaner -
Megohmmeter -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020IE00EX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09011-3C220 Wrench,Spark Plug -
14mm

19mm
09022-1C500 Tilt Extension Bar -

35mm
09022-3C200 Joint,Universal -
54mm
09025-00010 Torque Wrench (30 kgf-cm) -
Torque Wrench -
99999-70027 Torque wrench -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043I2006X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09224-00010 O2 Sensor Wrench -
09240-00020 Wire Gauge Set -
09250-53010 Engine Mount Spacer -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001UYQ00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Abrasive compound -
Angle gauge -
Caliper gauge -
Carbide cutter (30°) -
CO/HC meter -
Compression gauge -
Connecting rod aligner -
Cylinder gauge -
Dial indicator -
Dye penetrant -
Engine tune-up tester -
Engine Stand -
Feeler gauge -
Marker -
Micrometer -
Piston ring compressor -
Piston ring expander -
Plastigage -
Precision straightedge -
Reamer (5.5 mm) -
Steel square -
Torque wrench -
Valve seat cutter -
V-block -
Vernier caliper -
Wooden block -
Wire (1.0 mm) -
Hexagonal wrench (2.5 mm) -
Prussian blue -
Plastic-faced hammer -
400-grit sandpaper -
HINT:
Torx is registered trademark of Textron Inc.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001UYO00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C110 Set, Hexagon Socket Wrench
(09013-6C100) Socket Hexagon

5mm
09011-3C220 Wrench,Spark Plug

14mm
09012-2C510 Deep Socket Wrench

19mm
09012-2C520 Deep Socket Wrench

24mm
09013-1C551 "TORX" Socket Wrench E-type

E14
09013-1C560 "TORX" Socket Wrench E-type

E16
09017-1C140 Union Nut Wrench

19mm
09061-1C110 Clip Remover

10mm
09072-1C200 Vernier Calipers
150mm
09090-04020 Engine Sling Device
09091-1C100 Oil Pan Seal Cutter

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001UYP00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Toyota Genuine Adhesive 1324, Three Bond 1324 or equivalent -
Three Bond 1105 or equivalent -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000206N00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09201-10000 Valve Guide Bushing Remover & -
Replacer Set
(09201-01050) Valve Guide Bushing Remover & -

Replacer 5
09201-41020 Valve Stem Oil Seal Replacer -
09202-70020 Valve Spring Compressor -
(09202-00010) Attachment -
(09202-01010) Arm -
(09202-01020) Set Bolt -
09223-15030 Oil Seal & Bearing Replacer -
09223-22010 Crankshaft Front Oil Seal -

Replacer
09228-22020 Oil Filter Wrench -
09950-70010 Handle Set -
(09951-07100) Handle 100 -
(09951-07150) Handle 150 -
(09963-00700) Pin 7 -
(09963-01000) Pin 10 -
SU003-03936 Fuel Hose Puller -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000201K00IX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Stop watch -
Sound scope -
Measuring flask -
Ohmmeter -
Volt meter -
Torque wrench -
Needle nose pliers -
Engine lifter -
Vernier calipers -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000201J00IX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

6mm
09013-1C160 "TORX" Plus Socket Wrench -

17mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001U0T03YX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Butyl Tape Set -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000201I00GX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 FUEL: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09260-39020 Injector Seal Toolset -
(09261-03010) Injector Seal Holder -
(09261-03020) Injector Seal Guide -
09268-31014 Injection Measuring Tool Set -
(09268-41141) Adapter -
(09268-41410) Clamp -
(09268-41700) Hose Band -
(09268-41800) Tie Band -
(95336-08070) Hose -
09268-45100 EFI Fuel Pressure Gauge Set -

(09268-41250) T Joint -
(09268-41260) Gauge Assy -
(09268-41270) Straight Joint -
(95336-08070) Hose -
(96135-51300) Clip -
09808-18010 Fuel Pump Retainer Tool -
09842-30090 EFI Inspection Wire I -
SU003-03936 Fuel Hose Puller -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KD602OX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Vernier calipers -
Wooden block -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004ICT008X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09250-53010 Engine Mount Spacer -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020DH00LX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Oil pressure gauge -
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020DI00NX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Standard Oil Grade
OIL GRADE OIL VISCOSITY

(SAE)
API grade SL "energy-conserving", SM "energy-conserving", SN "resource-conserving" 0W-20

or ILSAC multigrade engine oil 5W-30
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil 5W-20
Standard Capacity
ITEM CAPACITY
Drain and refill with oil filter change 5.4 liters (5.7 US qts, 4.8 Imp. qts)
Drain and refill without oil filter change 5.2 liters (5.5 US qts, 4.6 Imp. qts)
Dry fill 6.3 liters (6.7 US qts, 5.5 Imp. qts)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000005B3V000X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
19mm

24mm
09080-2C110 AC/DC400A Probe -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020DG00LX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing Black, Three Bond 1217G or equivalent -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020DF00JX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 LUBRICATION: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09228-22020 Oil Filter Wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205I00CX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Battery -
Torque wrench -
Service Wire Harness -
Vernier calipers -
Vise -
Sandpaper (No. 400) -
Ohmmeter -
Ammeter -
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
High-temperature grease -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205H00CX
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
14mm
09041-2C220 "TORX" Driver -

T25H

T25

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000005B0X000X
Title: PREPARATION: FA20 STARTING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09249-37010 Wrench -
VVT Set Bolt
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020E500QX
Title: PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Wooden block
metal saw Shock absorber disposal

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003GGB021X
Title: PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

6mm
09013-6C510 Long Socket Hexagon -

6mm
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KEP00IX
Title: PREPARATION: FRONT SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09710-18040 Front Suspension Bush Tool Set -
(09711-01010) Remover and Replacer -
(09711-01020) Guide Pin -
(09711-01030) Base -
09716-18020 Front Suspension Bush -

09716-18030 Front Suspension Bush -

09726-18010 Stud Bolt Socket Wrench -
09727-30021 Coil Spring Compressor -
(09727-00010) Bolt Set -
(09727-00021) Arm Set -

(09727-00031) Compressor -
09729-97202 Socket,Lock Nut17 -
(09961-02010) Assy -
Ball Joint Puller
(09961-02060) Spacer B -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020FZ00IX
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Vinyl tape
Torque wrench
Clip remover
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020G000IX
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Compressor oil - ND-OIL 8 or equivalent

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020FY00IX
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09010-3C120 Set, "TORX" Socket Wrench
09013-6C090 Hexagon Socket Wrench

4
(09013-1C100) "TORX" Socket Wrench T-type

T20
09013-7C400 Wrench Set

10mm
95146-00180 Halogen Leak Detector

DENSO Part No.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000440W003X
Title: PREPARATION: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09985-20010 Set,Air Conditioner
Service Tool
(09985-02010) Gauge,Refrigerant Charging
(09985-02050) Hose,Refrigerant Charging
(09985-02090) Coupler,Quick
(09985-02110) Coupler,Quick
(09985-02130) Valve,Refrigerant Drum Service
(09985-02150) Joint,T
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020EE027X
Title: PREPARATION: HORN: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Battery
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002PN003TX
Title: PREPARATION: HORN: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020FJ00IX
Title: PREPARATION: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Double-sided tape
Protective tape
Clip remover
Adhesive Tape
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCS00AX
Title: PREPARATION: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
6mm

10mm
09061-1C300 Set, Moulding Remover
(09061-1C310) Remover A, Moulding
(09061-1C320) Remover B, Moulding
(09061-1C330) Remover C, Moulding
(09061-1C340) Remover D, Moulding

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCO009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (EXT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
White paper
Tire pressure gauge
Protective tape
Battery
Dry cell battery

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCN009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (EXT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09042-1C200 Plier 150mm -

6mm
Oscilloscope -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCK009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (INT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Protective tape -
Battery -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCJ009X
Title: PREPARATION: LIGHTING (INT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
(09061-1C320) Remover B, Moulding -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020LK00GX
Title: PREPARATION: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Protective tape -
Adhesive tape -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000021LE00HX
Title: PREPARATION: METER / GAUGE / DISPLAY: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
6mm

10mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020LM043X
Title: PREPARATION: MIRROR (EXT): EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Protective tape -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020LL043X
Title: PREPARATION: MIRROR (EXT): RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09061-1C300 Set, Moulding Remover
(09061-1C340) Remover D, Moulding

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003K6A01KX
Title: PREPARATION: NETWORKING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003J9D00AX
Title: PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Ruler -
Drum gauge -
Torque wrench -
Ohmmeter -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004ZQY001X
Title: PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003J9C00AX
Title: PREPARATION: PARKING BRAKE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09718-00011 Shoe Hold Down Spring Driver -
09921-00011 Spring Tension Tool -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCD00AX
Title: PREPARATION: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCC00AX
Title: PREPARATION: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Z9203SX
Title: PREPARATION: POWER DISTRIBUTION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000314A051X
Title: PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Wooden block -
Jack -
metal saw Shock absorber disposal

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCW013X
Title: PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

5mm

14mm
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCV00XX
Title: PREPARATION: REAR SUSPENSION: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09727-30021 Coil Spring Compressor -
(09727-00010) Bolt Set -
(09727-00021) Arm Set -
(09727-00031) Compressor -
09729-18010 Lock Nut Socket Wrench -

(09961-02010) Assy -
Ball Joint Puller
(09961-02060) Spacer B -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020G2052X
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Hog ring -
Hog ring pliers -
Tape To avoid surface damage
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020G1015X
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

T40
09013-1C540 "TORX" Socket Wrench E-type -

E10
HINT:
"TORX" is a registered trademark of Textron lnc.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ZXQ01GX
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Battery
Plastic bag
Hog ring pliers
Hog ring
Protective tape
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ZXP01GX
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ZXO00RX
Title: PREPARATION: SEAT BELT: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09082-18010 Airbag Deployment Wire -

Sub-Harness No.11
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBG01ZX
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000005B87000X
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
(09061-1C340) Remover D, Moulding -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043ZP003X
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING COLUMN: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09950-50013 Puller C Set -
(09951-05010) Hanger 150 -
(09952-05010) Slide Arm -
(09953-05020) Center Bolt 150 -
(09954-05031) Claw No.3 -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCB00AX
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KC900AX
Title: PREPARATION: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09521-24010 Drive Shaft Boot Clamping Tool -
09612-00012 Rack & Pinion Steering Rack -

Housing Stand
09616-00011 Steering Worm Bearing Adjusting -

Socket
09631-10021 Rack Stopper Wrench -
(09961-02010) Assy -
Ball Joint Puller
(09961-02060) Spacer B -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003NB601RX
Title: PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Battery -
Protective tape -
Tire
Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.) or more Airbag disposal
Inner diameter: 360 mm (1.18 ft.) or more
Tire with disc wheel

Width: 185 mm (7.28 in.) or more Airbag disposal
Inner diameter: 360 mm (1.18 ft.) or more
Wire harness
Airbag disposal
Stripped wire section: 1.25 mm 2 (0.0019 in. 2 ) or more
Cardboard Box Airbag disposal
Plastic bag Airbag disposal

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003NB501RX
Title: PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003NB401OX
Title: PREPARATION: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST

Sub-Harness No.11

Sub-Harness No.12

Sub-Harness No.13
09843-18061 SRS Check Wire -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003K5Q020X
Title: PREPARATION: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Protective tape -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043F8004X
Title: PREPARATION: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09843-18040 Diagnosis Check Wire No. 2 -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ERZ02DX
Title: PREPARATION: TIRE / WHEEL: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Tire pressure gauge -
Wheel balancer -
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBC01BX
Title: PREPARATION: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Tire pressure gauge -
Torque wrench -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBB01BX
Title: PREPARATION: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXN00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Cylinder gauge -
Dial indicator -
Feeler gauge -
Magnetic base -
Micrometer -
Torque wrench -
Press -
V-block -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXO00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
API GL-3
Manual transmission gear oil 2.2 liters (2.3 US qts, 1.9 Imp. qts)
SAE 75W-90
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXL00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

10mm

T40

T45

19mm

27mm

19mm
09051-1C200 Bar,Brass -
09051-1C410 Pin Punch -
5
09053-1C100 Magnet,Hand -

150mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXM00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXK00CX
Title: PREPARATION: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09309-35010 Transmission Rear Bearing -

Replacer
09309-36010 Transmission Rear Bearing -

Replacer
09309-37010 Transmission Bearing Replacer -
09316-60011 Transmission & Transfer Bearing -

Replacer
(09316-00011) Replacer Pipe -
(09316-00021) Replacer A -
09330-50010 Propeller Shaft Center Bearing -

Replacer
09350-20015 TOYOTA Automatic Transmission -
Tool Set
(09350-06120) No. 2 Measure Terminal -
09527-20011 Rear Axle Shaft Bearing Remover -
09612-70100 Power Steering Oil Seal Remover -

Set
(09612-07210) Collet Setting Pipe No.1 -
09631-12090 Seal Ring Tool -
09632-36010 Steering Vane Pump Bearing -

Replacer
09950-00020 Bearing Remover -
09950-30012 Puller A Set -
(09951-03010) Upper Plate -

(09953-03010) Center Bolt -
(09956-03010) Adaptor 16 -
(09951-00230) Replacer 23 -
(09951-00420) Replacer 42 -
(09951-00560) Replacer 56 -
(09951-00750) Replacer 75 -
09950-70010 Handle Set -
(09951-07100) Handle 100 -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PM600CX
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Protective tape
Vernier caliper
Straightedge
Feeler gauge
Caliper gauge
Dial indicator or dial indicator with magnetic base
V block
Micrometer
Cylinder gauge
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
(REFERENCE)
7.5 liters (7.9 US qts, 6.6 Imp.

Dry fill
Automatic transmission qts) Toyota Genuine ATF
fluid Drain and 2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp. WS
refill qts)
Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013

FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

5mm
09013-2C120 Wrench Torx For Tamper Resistant -

T55H
09051-1C400 Pin Punch -

3

Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SSM (2013 FR-S)
SSM

Title: PREPARATION: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SST (2013 FR-S)
SST
09309-37010 Transmission Bearing Replacer -
09320-89010 Transfer Clutch Spring -

Compressor

Tool Set
(09350-06120) No. 2 Measure Terminal -
(09350-07020) Oil Pump Puller -
(09350-07050) No. 3 Piston Spring Compressor -
(09350-07060) No. 1 Snap Ring Expander -

(09350-07070) No. 2 Snap Ring Expander -
(09350-07080) Brake Reaction Sleeve Puller -
(09350-07090) Brake No.1 Piston Puller -
(09350-07110) Oil Seal Replacer -

Tool Set
(09351-32010) One-way Clutch Test Tool -
(09351-32020) Stator Stopper -

Tool Set
(09351-04010) Pipe -
(09351-04020) Spring Compressor No. 1 -

09380-60010 Automatic Transmission -
Brake Spring Compressor Set
(09381-06030) Hanger C -
(09381-06050) Arm B -
(09381-06080) Ring C -
(09381-06090) Attachment -
(09381-06100) Crow -
(09381-06110) Nut -
09387-00070 First & Reverse Brake Wrench -
09387-00110 Clutch Compression Wrench -
09843-18040 Diagnosis Check Wire No. 2 -

(09951-01030) Replacer 103 -
(09963-01000) Pin 10 -
09992-00095 Automatic Transmission Oil -

Pressure Gauge Set
(09992-00231) Adaptor C -
(09992-00271) Gauge Assy -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001XDT00IX
Title: PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench
Heat light
Protective Tape
Knife
Suction cup
Piano wire
Wooden block or similar object
Plastic sheet
Scraper
Brush or sponge
Sealer gun
Battery
Title: PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
MP grease -
Primer (Sunstar #435-40) -
Adhesive (Sunstar #560) -
Primer (Sunstar #435-70) -
Primer (Sunstar GP402) -
Primer Enclosed with penguin seal #580 super -
Primer (Yokohama M-300 or equivalent) -
Adhesive (Toyota Genuine Windshield Glass Adhesive or equivalent) -
Primer (3M N-200) -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001XDR00KX
Title: PREPARATION: WINDOW / GLASS: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

T25

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020LI02HX
Title: PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: EQUIPMENT (2013 FR-S)
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench -
Wire brush -
Protective tape -
Battery -
Windshield washer fluid -
Thin-bladed screwdriver -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002ZNQ07LX
Title: PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: LUBRICANT (2013 FR-S)
LUBRICANT
Multemp SA grease -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020LH02HX
Title: PREPARATION: WIPER / WASHER: RECOMMENDED TOOLS (2013 FR-S)
RECOMMENDED TOOLS

T30

6mm

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000312N05WX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Vehicle Height (Unloaded Vehicle)
FRONT B - A REAR C REAR D REAR E
146 mm (5.75 in.) 225 mm (8.86 in.) 375 mm (14.76 in.) 372 mm (14.65 in.)
Measurement points:
A: Ground clearance of front lower suspension arm set front bolt center
B: Ground clearance of front wheel center
C: Ground clearance of lower control arm set bolt center
D: Front wheel arch height of front wheel center
E: Rear wheel arch height of rear wheel center
Camber (Unloaded Vehicle)
- CAMBER INCLINATION RIGHT-LEFT DIFFERENCE
Front 0 +/- 45' (0 +/- 0.75°) 30' (0.50°) or less
Rear -1°12' +/- 45' (-1.20° +/- 0.75°) 45' (0.75°) or less
Caster (Unloaded Vehicle)
- CASTER INCLINATION (REFERENCE) RIGHT-LEFT DIFFERENCE
Front 5°54' (5.90°) 30' (0.50°) or less
Wheel Turning Angle (Unloaded Vehicle)
- INSIDE WHEEL (REFERENCE) OUTSIDE WHEEL (REFERENCE)
Front 36°54' (43.90°) 31°12' (31.20°)
Toe-in (Unloaded Vehicle)
- SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 0°00' +/- 0°11' (0.00° +/- 0.19°)

Front
B - A: 0 +/- 3.0 mm (0 +/- 0.1181 in.)
C + D: 0°10' +/- 0°15' (0.16° +/- 0.24°)

Rear
B - A: 2.0 +/- 3.0 mm(0.0787 +/- 0.1181 in.)
Wheel Turning Angle (Unloaded Vehicle)

- INSIDE WHEEL OUTSIDE WHEEL REFERENCE
Front 41°48' +/- 2°(41.8° +/- 2°) 36°20' (36.33°)
Distance between the centers of the 2 installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH and RH
- STANDARD DISTANCE
Rear 443.8 to 447.8 mm (17.47 to 17.63 in.)
Distance between the centers of the 2 installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly
- STANDARD DISTANCE
Rear 448.9 to 450.9 mm (17.67 to 17.75 in.)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003NRN020X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
PART TIGHTENED N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
Front shock absorber assembly x steering knuckle 155 1581 114
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Tie rod end lock nut 85 867 63
Toe adjust cam nut 100 1020 74

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZZA022X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: AUDIO / VIDEO: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Stereo component amplifier assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front No. 3 speaker assembly x Upper instrument panel assembly 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Amplifier antenna assembly x Body 4.5 46 40 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002G6J012X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Axle
Front axle hub bearing looseness Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Front axle hub runout Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Rear axle hub bearing looseness Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Rear axle hub runout Maximum: 0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
Differential
Rear differential carrier oil seal drive in depth 1.55 to 2.45 mm (0.0610 to 0.0964 in.)
Rear differential side gear shaft oil seal drive

-0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.)
in depth
Differential ring gear runout Maximum: 0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
Rear differential case sub-assembly runout Maximum: 0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
Differential ring gear backlash 0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
Differential side gear backlash 0 mm (0 in.)
Rear drive pinion companion flange runout Maximum: 0.09 mm (0.00354 in.)
New bearing: 1.49 to 2.59 N*m (15.2 to 26.4 kgf*cm,

13.2 to 22.9 in.*lbf)
Differential drive pinion preload (at starting)
Reused bearing: 1.11 to 1.91 N*m (11.3 to 19.5 kgf*cm,
9.8 to 16.9 in.*lbf)
New differential case bearing x New rear drive pinion

tapered roller bearing:
2.57 to 4.26 N*m (26.2 to 43.4 kgf*cm, 22.7 to 37.7
in.*lbf)
New differential case bearing x Reused rear drive pinion
2.19 to 3.58 N*m (22.3 to 36.5 kgf*cm, 19.4 to 31.7
in.*lbf)
Total preload (Drive pinion preload plus)
Reused differential case bearing x New rear drive pinion
1.98 to 3.37 N*m (20.2 to 34.4 kgf*cm, 17.5 to 29.8
in.*lbf)
Reused differential case bearing x Reused rear drive
pinion tapered roller bearing:
1.60 to 2.69 N*m (16.3 to 27.4 kgf*cm, 14.2 to 23.8
in.*lbf)
2.57 to 2.59 (0.1012 to 0.1020)

2.59 to 2.61 (0.1020 to 0.1028)
2.61 to 2.63 (0.1028 to 0.1035)
2.63 to 2.65 (0.1035 to 0.1043)
2.65 to 2.67 (0.1043 to 0.1051)
2.67 to 2.69 (0.1051 to 0.1059)
2.69 to 2.71 (0.1059 to 0.1067)
2.71 to 2.73 (0.1067 to 0.1075)
2.73 to 2.75 (0.1075 to 0.1083)
2.75 to 2.77 (0.1083 to 0.1091)
2.77 to 2.79 (0.1091 to 0.1098)
2.79 to 2.81 (0.1098 to 0.1106)
2.81 to 2.83 (0.1106 to 0.1114)
2.83 to 2.85 (0.1114 to 0.1122)
2.85 to 2.87 (0.1122 to 0.1130)
2.87 to 2.89 (0.1130 to 0.1138)
2.89 to 2.91 (0.1138 to 0.1146)
2.91 to 2.93 (0.1146 to 0.1154)
2.93 to 2.95 (0.1154 to 0.1161)
2.95 to 2.97 (0.1161 to 0.1169)
2.97 to 2.99 (0.1169 to 0.1177)
2.99 to 3.01 (0.1177 to 0.1185)
Rear differential side gear shaft plate washer 3.01 to 3.03 (0.1185 to 0.1193)
thickness mm (in.) 3.03 to 3.05 (0.1193 to 0.1201)
3.05 to 3.07 (0.1201 to 0.1209)
3.07 to 3.09 (0.1209 to 0.1217)
3.09 to 3.11 (0.1217 to 0.1224)
3.11 to 3.13 (0.1224 to 0.1232)
3.13 to 3.15 (0.1232 to 0.1240)
3.15 to 3.17 (0.1240 to 0.1248)
3.17 to 3.19 (0.1248 to 0.1256)
3.19 to 3.21 (0.1256 to 0.1264)
3.21 to 3.23 (0.1264 to 0.1271)
3.23 to 3.25 (0.1271 to 0.1280)
3.25 to 3.27 (0.1280 to 0.1287)
3.27 to 3.29 (0.1287 to 0.1295)
3.29 to 3.31 (0.1295 to 0.1303)
3.31 to 3.33 (0.1303 to 0.1311)
3.33 to 3.35 (0.1311 to 0.1319)
3.35 to 3.37 (0.1319 to 0.1327)
3.37 to 3.39 (0.1327 to 0.1335)
3.39 to 3.41 (0.1335 to 0.1343)
3.41 to 3.43 (0.1343 to 0.1350)
3.43 to 3.45 (0.1350 to 0.1358)
3.45 to 3.47 (0.1358 to 0.1366)
3.47 to 3.49 (0.1366 to 0.1374)
1.69 to 1.71 (0.0665 to 0.0673)

1.72 to 1.74 (0.0677 to 0.0685)
1.75 to 1.77 (0.0688 to 0.0697)
1.78 to 1.80 (0.0701 to 0.0709)
1.81 to 1.83 (0.0713 to 0.0720)
1.84 to 1.86 (0.0724 to 0.0732)
1.87 to 1.89 (0.0736 to 0.0744)
1.90 to 1.92 (0.0748 to 0.0756)
1.93 to 1.95 (0.0760 to 0.0768)
1.96 to 1.98 (0.0772 to 0.0780)
Rear differential drive pinion plate washer 1.99 to 2.01 (0.0783 to 0.0791)
thickness mm (in.) 2.02 to 2.04 (0.0795 to 0.0803)
2.05 to 2.07 (0.0807 to 0.0815)
2.08 to 2.10 (0.0819 to 0.0827)
2.11 to 2.13 (0.0831 to 0.0839)
2.14 to 2.16 (0.0843 to 0.0850)
2.17 to 2.19 (0.0854 to 0.0862)
2.20 to 2.22 (0.0866 to 0.0874)
2.23 to 2.25 (0.0878 to 0.0886)
2.26 to 2.28 (0.0890 to 0.0898)
2.29 to 2.31 (0.0902 to 0.0909)
2.32 to 2.34 (0.0913 to 0.0921)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002G6K012X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Axle
Front disc brake caliper assembly x Steering knuckle 80 816 59
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Steering knuckle x Front axle hub sub-assembly 65 663 48
Front speed sensor x Steering knuckle 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Steering knuckle x Front shock absorber with coil spring 155 1581 114
Front disc brake dust cover x Steering knuckle 18 184 13
Steering knuckle x Front lower suspension arm assembly 51 520 38
Steering knuckle x Tie rod sub-assembly 27 275 20
Rear axle hub and bearing assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 65 663 48
Rear speed sensor x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear axle shaft nut x Rear drive shaft assembly 190 1938 140
Toe control link sub-assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 60 612 44
Rear upper control arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 80 816 59
Rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 110 1122 81
Rear stabilizer Link assembly x Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly 38 388 28
Differential
Rear differential filler plug x Rear differential carrier assembly 49 500 36
Rear differential drain plug x Rear differential carrier assembly 49 500 36
Bearing cap x Rear differential carrier 85 870 63
Differential ring gear x Rear differential case sub-assembly 97 984 71
338 or 3445 or 249 or

Rear drive pinion nut x Differential drive pinion
less less less
Rear differential breather plug oil deflector x Rear differential carrier

8.0 82 71 in.*lbf
cover
Rear differential carrier cover x Rear differential carrier 47 475 35
Rear differential breather plug x Rear differential carrier cover 21 210 15
Rear differential carrier assembly x Rear suspension member sub-

103 1050 76
assembly (Rear)
Rear differential carrier assembly x Rear suspension member sub-
95 970 70
assembly (Front)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003EFG01VX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (FRONT): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Standard 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
Pad lining thickness
Minimum 11.0 mm (0.433 in.)

Disc thickness
Disc runout Maximum 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003EFH01VX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (FRONT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Carrier x Steering knuckle 80 816 59
Disc brake cylinder assembly x Carrier 26 270 19
No. 1 front flexible hose x Disc brake cylinder assembly 18 184 13
No. 1 front flexible hose x brake tube 18 184 13
No. 1 front flexible hose x front shock absorber assembly 33 337 24

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ED3024X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (REAR): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
for for Solid Disc Brake


Disc thickness
for Ventilated Disc Brake


Disc thickness
Minimum 16.5 mm (0.6496 in.)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ED4028X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE (REAR): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Rear disc brake bleeder plug x Rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH 8.0 82 71 in.*lbf
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Caliper support bracket x Rear axle carrier 66 673 49
Rear disc brake cylinder assembly x Caliper support bracket 26 265 19
Rear brake flexible hose x Rear disc brake cylinder assembly 18 184 13
Brake line union nut 15 155 11
Rear brake flexible hose x Rear axle carrier 33 337 24

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043EU003X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Switch not pushed in 10 kΩ or higher
VSC OFF switch 5-8
Switch pushed in Below 1 Ω

VSC SPORT switch 1-8
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043EV003X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

(2013 FR-S)
Front fender liner x Body 7.5 76 66 in.*lbf
Brake actuator bracket assembly x Body 33 337 24
Brake actuator assembly x Brake actuator bracket assembly 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Brake actuator assembly x Brake line 15 155 11
Front speed sensor set bolt 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear speed sensor set bolt 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Battery negative terminal set bolt 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Z3V01IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
for Manual
145mm (5.709in.)
Transmission
Brake pedal height from floor mat
for Automatic
150mm (5.906in.)
Transmission
Brake pedal free play 2mm (0.079in.) or less
for Manual
More than 55 mm (2.165 in.)
Brake pedal reserve distance from asphalt sheet Transmission
at 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) for Automatic
Transmission
With the engine More than 93 kPa (698 mmHg, 27

Vacuum of the vacuum pump assembly
idling in.Hg) of vacuum
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Z3W01NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Disc brake cylinder bleeder plug 8.0 82 71 in.*lbf
Brake master cylinder sub-assembly x Brake tube 19 194 14
Brake pedal support x Brake booster assembly 18 184 13
Brake pedal support x Body 18 184 13
Brake pedal support x Brake pedal 30 306 22
Brake master cylinder sub-assembly x Brake booster assembly 14 143 10
Hub nut 120 1224 86
Brake master cylinder push rod clevis lock nut 19 194 14
Vacuum pump assembly set bolt 16 163 12

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXR00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: CLUTCH: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Clutch Pedal
Pedal play 4.0 (0.158 in.)
Pedal stroke
105 to 115 mm (4.134 to 4.528 in.)
(Reference)
Clutch Unit
Clutch disc rivet depth Minimum 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)
Clutch disc runout Maximum 0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)
Maximum depth 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)

Clutch cover diaphragm spring wear
Maximum width 6.0 mm (0.236 in.)
Flywheel runout Maximum 0.1 mm (0.00394 in.)
Clutch cover diaphragm spring tip non-alignment Maximum 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
Clutch Pedal Switch
Clutch start switch assembly
Standard resistance ON (Pushed in) Below 1 Ω

1-2 OFF (Released) 10 kΩ or higher
Clutch switch assembly
Standard resistance ON (Pushed in) Below 1 Ω

1-2 OFF (Released) 10 kΩ or higher
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXS00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: CLUTCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
69
Clutch release cylinder bleeder plug x Clutch release cylinder assembly 7.8 80
in.*lbf
71
Clutch switch assembly x Clutch pedal support sub-assembly 8.0 82
in.*lbf
Clutch pedal support sub-assembly x Body 18 184 13
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Steering column assembly 35 357 26
Clutch master cylinder to flexible hose tube x Master cylinder to release cylinder
15 153 11
hose
Clutch master cylinder to flexible hose tube x Clutch master cylinder assembly 15 153 11
Clutch master cylinder assembly x Body 18 184 13
Clutch release cylinder assembly x Clutch housing 37 377 27
Master cylinder to release cylinder hose x Clutch release cylinder assembly 18 184 13
Clutch cover assembly x Flywheel sub-assembly 16 163 12
Release fork support x Manual transmission assembly. 16 163 12
71
Clutch start switch assembly x Clutch pedal support sub-assembly 8.0 82
in.*lbf
71
Clutch switch assembly x Clutch pedal support sub-assembly 8.0 82
in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000049O9015X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: CRUISE CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH
Cruise control Main switch Assembly (ON-OFF button) released 1 MΩ or higher
Cruise control Main switch Assembly (ON-OFF button) pushed Below 2.5 Ω
Resistance 1-3 +/RES switch ON 235 to 245 Ω
-/SET switch ON 617 to 643 Ω
CANCEL switch ON 1509 to 1571 Ω

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000203C00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR / HATCH: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Part Tightened N*m kgf*cm ft.*lbf
HOOD
Hood hinge x Hood panel 25 255 18
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY
Hood lock x Body 33 337 24
66
Hood lock control lever sub-assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
FRONT DOOR
Door hinge x Body 30 306 22
Door hinge x Door panel 25 255 18
Door striker x Body 18 184 13
Door check x Body 33 337 24
66
Door check x Door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Front door sash x Door panel (Under) 14 143 10
66
Front door sash x Door panel (Upper) 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Front door rear lower frame sub-assembly x Door panel 14 143 10
66
Front door glass sub-assembly x Front door window regulator sub-assembly 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Front door window regulator sub-assembly (nut) x Door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Front door window regulator sub-assembly (bolt) x Door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Front door outside handle frame sub-assembly x Front door lock cylinder 66
7.5 77
assembly in.*lbf
66
Front door outside handle frame sub-assembly x Door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Front door sush stopper x Door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Door glass inner stabilizer x Door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
LUGGAGE DOOR
Luggage door hinge x Luggage compartment door panel 18 184 13
49
Luggage compartment door lock assembly x Luggage compartment door panel 5.5 56
in.*lbf
FUEL LID LOCK CONTROL CABLE ASSEMBLY
66
Fuel lid lock open lever sub-assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
40
Handle cover x Fuel lid lock open lever sub-assembly 4.5 46
in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001Z4F00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DOOR LOCK: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT DOOR LOCK
PART TIGHTENED N*M KGF*CM FT*LBF
Front Door lock assembly x Door panel 5.5 56 49 in.*lbf
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCK
66
Luggage compartment door lock assembly x Luggage compartment door panel 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Luggage compartment door lock cylinder assembly x Luggage compartment 40

4.5 46
door panel in.*lbf
DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
Door control receiver x Body 13 133 10

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JAN00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Propeller Shaft
Propeller shaft with center bearing shaft assembly runout Maximum runout: 0.6 mm (0.0236 in.)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JAO00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Rear Drive Shaft
Rear axle shaft set nuts 290 2957 214
Rear wheel set nuts 103 1050 76
Propeller Shaft
Center support bearing assembly x Body 52 530 38
Propeller shaft assembly x Rear Differential companion flange 74 755 55

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000208R00JX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: EXTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT BUMPER
Front bumper cover x Fender liner 7.5 76 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Body 7.5 76 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Front lower bumper cover 7.5 76 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper reinforcement sub-assembly x Body 32 326 24
Front bumper stay bracket x Body 7.5 76 66 in.*lbf
Front lower bumper cover x Front bumper stay bracket 7.5 76 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Front bumper hole cover RH 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Front bumper cover x Front bumper hole cover LH 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
REAR BUMPER
Rear bumper reinforcement x Body (nut) 45 459 33
Rear bumper reinforcement x Body (bolt) 45 459 33
Rear bumper cover x Body 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side retainer LH x Body 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side retainer RH x Body 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side bracket RH x Body 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Rear bumper side bracket LH x Body 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
REAR SPOILER (for Sport Package)
Rear spoiler x Luggage compartment door 10 102 7
Rear spoiler x No.1 rear spoiler bracket RH 10 102 7
Rear spoiler x No.1 rear spoiler bracket LH 10 102 7
No.1 rear spoiler bracket RH x Luggage compartment door 10 102 7
No.1 rear spoiler bracket LH x Luggage compartment door 10 102 7
REAR SPOILER
Rear spoiler x Luggage compartment door 4.5 46 40 in.*lbf
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR GARNISH
Luggage compartment door outside garnish x Luggage compartment door 4.5 46 40 in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205S00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Standard amperage: 10 A or less
Charging circuit without load
Standard voltage: 11.3 to 15.6 V
Charging circuit with load Standard amperage: 30 A or higher
Standard length: 22.5 mm (0.885 in.)

Brush length
Minimum exposed length: 5.0 mm (0.196 in.)
Slip ring resistance: 2.0 to 2.4 kΩ at 20°C (68°F)

Generator rotor assembly Standard slip ring diameter: 22.7 mm (0.893 in.)
Minimum slip ring diameter: 22.1 mm (0.870 in.)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205T00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Terminal x Generator rear end cover 8.9 91 79 in.*lbf
Bolt A
20 18 in.*lbf
2.0
Generator regulator x Generator rear end cover
Bolt B
40 35 in.*lbf
3.9
Stator coil x Generator rear end cover 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Bearing retainer x Generator drive end frame 3.9 40 35 in.*lbf
Generator pulley x Generator rotor assembly 108 1101 80
Generator rear end cover x Generator drive end frame 4.4 45 39 in.*lbf
Generator assembly x V-ribbed belt tensioner assembly 25 255 18
Generator wire x Terminal 16 163 12

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZB800KX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Pumping speed:
1 pump per second
Standard valve (for brand-new cap):
Radiator Cap
93 to 123 kPa (0.95 to 1.25 kgf*cm 2 , 14 to 18 psi)
Minimum standard valve (after suing cap):
83 kPa (0.85 kgf*cm 2 , 12 psi)
Valve opening temperature:

86 to 90°C (187 to 194°F)
Thermostat (for Engine Coolant)
Valve lift:
8.0 mm (0.315 in.) or more at 95°C (203°F)

48 to 52°C (118 to 126°F)
Thermostat (for Automatic Transmission)
Valve lift:
6.0 mm (0.236 in.) or more at 63°C (145°F)
Standard current:
Cooling fan motor 7.4 to 11.4 A at 20°C (68°F)
(when the battery is connected to the fan motor connector)
Standard current:
No. 2 cooling fan motor 7.4 to 11.4 A at 20°C (68°F)
(when the battery is connected to the fan motor connector)
Standard resistance (3 - 5): 10 kΩ or higher

(Battery voltage is not applied between terminals 1 and 2)
Fan No. 1 relay
Standard resistance (3 - 5): Below 1 Ω
(Battery voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2)

Fan No. 2 relay
(Battery voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2)
( Battery voltage is applied between terminals 1 and 2)

Fan No. 3 relay
((Battery voltage is not applied between terminals 1 and 2)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZB900KX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 COOLING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Water pump assembly x Chain cover 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Water pump pulley x Water pump assembly 14 143 10
Water outlet x Cylinder block assembly (for Engine Coolant) 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Water outlet x Water pipe (for Automatic Transmission) 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Radiator assembly x Cooler condenser assembly 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
Radiator support x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Radiator support sub-assembly x Body 18 184 13
Cooling fan motor x Fan shroud 3.9 40 35 in.*lbf
No. 2 cooling fan motor x Fan shroud 3.9 40 35 in.*lbf
Fan x Cooling fan motor 6.3 64 56 in.*lbf
No. 2 fan x No. 2 cooling fan motor 6.3 64 56 in.*lbf
Water filler sub-assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Air cleaner duct x Body 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
Air cleaner duct x Air cleaner case 3.0 31 27 in.*lbf
Radiator reserve tank assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004B6K003X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
FUEL CUT-OFF RPM
ITEM SPECIFIED CONDITION
Fuel cut off rpm 2500 rpm or more
Fuel injection restart rpm 1400 rpm
CANISTER
TESTER CONNECTION CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
25 to 30 Ω at 20°C (68°F)
Standard resistance 1-5
27 to 35 Ω at 60°C (140°F)
Standard voltage 7-8 3.5 V at 25°C (77°F)
PURGE VALVE
1-2 20°C (68°F) 21 to 27 Ω

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KD802UX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
CANISTER
Canister base bracket x Charcoal canister assembly 18 184 13
Charcoal canister assembly x Body (Bolt) 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Charcoal canister assembly x Body (Nut) 18 184 13
Bracket A x Canister pump module 18 184 13
Bracket B x Canister pump module 18 184 13
Canister pump module x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
PURGE VALVE
Purge valve x Intake manifold 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
PCV VALVE
PCV valve sub-assembly x Cylinder head cover sub-assembly 23 235 17

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020HH00NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Spark plug
Resistance
Spark plug (terminal part) - Body Always 6.85 to 7.65 Ω
ground
Camshaft timing oil control valve assembly
Resistance 20°C (68°F) 6.85 to 7.65 Ω
Throttle with motor body assembly
Resistance
20°C (68°F) 0.3 to 100 Ω
2 (M+) - 1 (M-)
Accelerator pedal assembly
Voltage Released 0.5 to 0.8 V

Accel sensor out No. 1 Depressed 2.4 to 3.5 V
Voltage Released 0.5 to 0.8 V

Accsel sensor out No. 2 Depressed 2.4 to 3.5 V
Mass air flow meter
-20°C (-4°F) 13.6 to 18.4 kΩ

Resistance
20°C (68°F) 2.21 to 2.69 kΩ
1 (THA) - 2 (E2)
60°C (140°F) 0.49 to 0.67 kΩ
Crankshaft position sensor
1-2 Always 1836 to 2244 Ω
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Approx. 20°C (68°F) 2.35 to 2.65 kΩ

Resistance 0.305 to 0.331
Approx. 80°C (176°F)
kΩ
Engine oil temperature sensor
Approx. 20°C (68°F) 2.25 to 2.65 kΩ

Resistance 0.305 to 0.331
Approx. 80°C (176°F)
kΩ
Knock sensor
Resistance 20°C (68°F) 532 to 588 kΩ
Air fuel ratio sensor
Resistance
20°C (68°F) 1.98 to 2.64 Ω
1-2
Resistance
Always 10 kΩ or higher
1-4
Heated oxygen sensor
Resistance
20°C (68°F) 5.0 to 6.4 Ω
1-2
Resistance
1-4
EFI MAIN 1 RELAY
Battery voltage not applied to 1 and 2

Resistance 10 kΩor higher
terminals
3-5
Battery voltage applied to 1 and 2 terminals Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN 2 RELAY

terminals
3-5
EFI MAIN 3 RELAY

terminals
3-5
IG2 RELAY

terminals
3-5
INJ RELAY

terminals
3-5
ETCS RELAY

terminals
3-5
C/OPEN RELAY

terminals
3-5
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020HI00NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Engine mount assembly x Front suspension cross member 45 459 33
57
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly x Injector driver 6.4 65
in.*lbf
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly x Injector cover 19 194 14
Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly x Camshaft timing oil control valve 57
6.4 65
(OCV) in.*lbf
71
Throttle with motor body assembly x Intake manifold 8.0 82
in.*lbf
66
ECM x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Accelerator pedal assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
9.0
MASS air flow meter x Air cleaner case sub-assembly 1.0 10
in.*lbf
57
VVT sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65
in.*lbf
57
Crankshaft position sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65
in.*lbf
Spark plug x Cylinder head sub-assembly 17 173 13
75
Ignition coil x Cylinder head cover sub-assembly 8.5 87
in.*lbf
66
Clutch flexible hose bracket x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Engine wire x Injector cover 11 112 8
Engine coolant temperature sensor x Cylinder head sub-assembly 18 184 13
Engine oil temperature sensor x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 18 184 13
Knock sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly 24 245 18
35
Manifold absolute pressure sensor x Intake manifold 4.0 41
in.*lbf
Air fuel ratio sensor x Exhaust manifold

21 214 16
(without SST)
Air fuel ratio sensor x Exhaust manifold

18 184 13
(with SST)
Heated oxygen sensor x Exhaust manifold

21 214 16
(without SST)
Heated oxygen sensor x Exhaust manifold
18 184 13
(with SST)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001UZ700FX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Ignition timing -5 to 10° BTDC at idle (Transmission in neutral)
Automatic transmission (in neutral) 600 to 800 rpm

Idle speed
Manual transmission 550 to 750 rpm
Compression pressure 1750 kPa (17.8 kgf/cm, 254 psi)
Minimum pressure 1150 kPa (11.7 kgf/cm 2 , 167 psi)

Compression
Difference between each
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 29 psi) or less
cylinder
0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to

Intake
0.0063 in.)
Valve clearance Standard (Cold)
0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to
Exhaust
0.0106 in.)
Circle runout Maximum 0.020 mm (0.00079 in.)
40.82 to 40.92 mm (1.6083 to

Intake
1.6110 in.)
Cam lobe height 40.72 to 40.82 mm (1.6031 to

Exhaust
1.6071 in.)
For fuel pump 40.6 mm (1.5984 in.)
Intake 34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)

Camshaft Cam base circle
Exhaust 34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)
25.946 to 25.963 mm (1.02149

Journal diameter
to 1.02216 in.)
0.0068 to 0.1160 mm (0.00027

Thrust clearance
to 0.00457 in.)
0.037 to 0.072 mm (0.00146 to

Oil clearance
0.00283 in.)
Warpage Maximum 0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)

Cylinder head
sub-assembly Cylinder head height
Overall length 103.3 mm (4.067 in.)
0.8 to 1.2 mm (0.0315 to 0.0472

Margin thickness
in.)
Intake valve 5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.2148 to
Valve stem diameter
0.2154 in.)
0.8 to 1.6 mm (0.032 to 0.063

Valve seat width
in.)
Overall length 95.1 mm (3.744 in.)
1.0 to 1.4 mm (0.039 to 0.055

Margin thickness
in.)
Exhaust valve 5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to
Valve stem diameter
0.21496 in.)
1.1 to 1.7 mm (0.043 to 0.067

Valve seat width
in.)
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to

Inside diameter
0.21701 in.)
Intake valve 0.030 to 0.057 mm (0.00118 to

Oil clearance
guide bush 0.00224 in.)
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466

Protrusion height
in.)
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to

Inside diameter
0.21701 in.)
Exhaust valve 0.040 to 0.067 mm (0.00157 to

Oil clearance
guide bush 0.00264 in.)
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466

Protrusion height
in.)
5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.21476 to

Intake
0.21535 in.)
Valve stem end diameter
5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to
Exhaust
Valve adjusting 0.21496 in.)
shim 5.500 to 5.560 mm (0.21654 to
Valve adjusting shim inside diameter
0.21890 in.)
0.030 to 0.115 mm (0.00118 to

Oil clearance
0.00453 in.)
Free length 41.06 mm (1.617 in.)
Valve spring Deviation Maximum Less than 1.8 mm (0.0710 in.)
Angle Maximum 2.5°
Warpage Maximum 0.025 mm (0.00098 in.)

Cylinder block height
Minimum 204.9 mm (8.067 in.)
86.005 to 86.015 mm (3.38602

Cylinder block Thrust
to 3.38641 in.)
85.995 to 86.005 mm (3.38562

Cylinder bore diameter lateral
to 3.38602 in.)
Maximum (When
86.505 mm (3.40570 in.)
boring)
Taper 0.030 mm (0.00118 in.)

Cylinder bore
Out-of-runout 0.010 mm (0.00039 in.)
Distance from
39.4 mm (1.551 in.)
piston head
85.985 to 85.995 mm (3.38523
A grade
to 3.38562 in.)
85.975 to 85.985 mm (3.38484

Piston diameter B grade
to 3.38523 in.)
Piston
0.25 mm (0.0098 86.225 to 86.245 mm (3.39468
in.) over size to 3.39547 in.)
0.50 mm (0.0197 86.475 to 86.495 mm (3.40452

in.) over size to 3.40531 in.)
0.010 to 0.030 mm (0.00039 to

Oil clearance
0.00118 in.)
0.004 to 0.008 mm (0.00016 to

Piston pin oil clearance
0.00031 in.)
Piston pin
0.006 to 0.026 mm (0.00024 to
Connecting rod bushing oil clearance
0.00102 in.)
0.25 to 0.30 mm (0.00984 to

No. 1
0.01181 in.)
0.60 to 0.70 mm (0.02362 to

Piston ring end gap No. 2
0.02756 in.)
0.10 to 0.35 mm (0.00394 to

Piston ring Oil ring
0.01378 in.)
0.030 to 0.080 mm (0.00118 to

No. 1
0.00315 in.)
Groove clearance
0.030 to 0.070 mm (0.00118 to
No. 2
0.00276 in.)
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100

Bend Maximum
mm (3.937 in.) in length
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100

Twist Maximum
mm (3.937 in.) in length
0.070 to 0.330 mm (0.00276 to

Thrust clearance
0.01299 i
0.025 to 0.055 mm (0.00098 to

Oil clearance
0.00217 in.)
1.492 to 1.508 mm (0.05874 to

Standard
0.05937 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 1.511 to 1.515 mm (0.05949 to

Bearing size (Thickness at in.) Undersize 0.05965 in.)
Connecting rod
center) 0.05 mm (0.0020 1.521 to 1.525 mm (0.05988 to
in.) Undersize 0.06004 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098 1.621 to 1.625 mm (0.06382 to

49.976 to 50.000 mm (1.96756

Standard
to 1.96850 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 49.946 to 49.970 mm (1.96637

in.) Undersize to 1.96732 in.)
Crank pin diameter
0.05 mm (0.0020 49.926 to 49.950 mm (1.96559
0.25 mm (0.0098 49.726 to 49.750 mm (1.95771

Circle runout Maximum 0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
Crank pin taper Maximum 0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Crank pin out-of-runout Maximum 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.)
Crankshaft journal taper Maximum 0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Crankshaft journal out-of-

Maximum 0.005 mm (0.00020 in.)
runout
Crank pin diameter Minimum 47.726 mm (1.87897 in.)
Crankshaft journal diameter Minimum 67.735 mm (2.66673 in.)
1.492 to 1.508 mm (0.05874 to

Standard
0.05937 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 1.511 to 1.515 mm (0.05949 to

Connecting rod bearing in.) Undersize 0.05965 in.)
thickness (at center) 0.05 mm (0.0020 1.521 to 1.525 mm (0.05988 to
0.25 mm (0.0098 1.621 to 1.625 mm (0.06382 to

2.495 to 2.513 mm (0.09823 to

Standard
0.09894 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 2.519 to 2.522 mm (0.09917 to

No. 1 to No. 4 crank bearing in.) Undersize 0.09929 in.)
thickness (at center) 0.05 mm (0.0020 2.529 to 2.532 mm (0.09957 to
0.25 mm (0.0098 2.629 to 2.632 mm (0.10350 to

2.493 to 2.511 mm (0.09815 to

Standard
Crankshaft 0.09886 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 2.517 to 2.520 mm (0.09909 to

No. 5 crank bearing thickness in.) Undersize 0.09921 in.)
(at center) 0.05 mm (0.0020 2.527 to 2.530 mm (0.09949 to
0.25 mm (0.0098 2.627 to 2.630 mm (0.10342 to

49.976 to 50.000 mm (1.96756

Standard
to 1.96850 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 49.946 to 49.970 mm (1.96637

Crank pin outer diameter
0.05 mm (0.0020 49.926 to 49.950 mm (1.96559
0.25 mm (0.0098 49.726 to 49.750 mm (1.95771
67.985 to 68.009 mm (2.67657

Standard
to 2.67751 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 67.955 to 67.979 mm (2.67539

Crankshaft journal diameter
0.05 mm (0.0020 67.935 to 67.959 mm (2.67460
0.25 mm (0.0098 67.735 to 67.759 mm (2.66673

0.130 to 0.308 mm (0.00512 to

Thrust clearance
0.01213 in.)
0.013 to 0.031 mm (0.00051 to

Oil clearance
0.00122 in.)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001UZ800FX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Belt generator cover x Compressor with magnet clutch 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Generator cover x Generator assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
for Bolt 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf

Air cleaner cap with air cleaner hose x Body
for Clamp 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
No. 1 chain vibration damper x Cylinder head sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
No. 1 chain tensioner assembly x Cylinder head sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
No. 2 chain tensioner assembly x Cylinder head sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Camshaft cap x Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH 18 184 13
Camshaft cap x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH 18 184 13
Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH x Exhaust camshaft LH 18 184 13
Camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH x Intake camshaft LH 18 184 13
Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly RH x Exhaust camshaft RH 18 184 13
Camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH x Intake camshaft RH 18 184 13
1st 20 204 15
2nd 100 1020 74
3rd loosen 360°
4th 20 204 15
Cylinder head sub-assembly LH x Cylinder block LH
5th 42 428 31
6th Turn 100°
turn 100° (2 central bolts)

7st turn 50° (except 2 central
bolts)
1st 20 204 15
2nd 100 1020 74
3rd loosen 360°
4th 20 204 15
Cylinder head sub-assembly RH x Cylinder block RH
5th 42 428 31
6th Turn 100°
turn 100° (2 central bolts)

7th turn 50° (except 2 central
bolts)
1st 20 204 15
Crankshaft pulley x Crankshaft
2nd Turn 90°
Flywheel sub-assembly x Crankshaft 85 867 63
Drive plate and ring gear sub-assembly x Crankshaft 95 969 70
No. 1 Engine Hanger x Engine assembly 43 439 32
Front engine mounting bracket x Engine assembly 45 459 33
Transmission assembly x Engine assembly 50 510 37
Fuel hose x Fuel pipe 1.3 13 12 in.*lbf
Front engine mounting bracket x Front suspension crossmember sub-

45 459 33
assembly
Manual transmission assembly x Engine assembly 50 510 37
Automatic transmission assembly x Engine assembly 50 510 37
Rear engine under cover LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Grounded cable x Engine assembly 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Suction hose sub-assembly x Compressor assembly 10 102 7
Suction hose sub-assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Vacuum tube connector hose x Engine assembly 18 184 13
Generator wire x Generator assembly 16 163 12
Wire harness clamp bracket x Body 11 112 8
Wire harness clamp bracket x Engine assembly 11 112 8
Wire harness clamp bracket x No. 2 engine hanger 10 102 7
Water filler sub-assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Stay x Body 35 357 26
Air cleaner assembly with hose x Body 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
Air cleaner assembly with hose x Throttle body with motor assembly 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Oil spacer x Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Hole plug x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH 25 255 18
for Union
Camshaft oil feed pipe sub-assembly x Camshaft housing sub- 31 316 23
bolt
assembly RH
for Bolt 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Oil spacer x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Stud bolt x Oil pan sub-assembly 10 102 7
Baffle plate x Oil pan sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Oil strainer sub-assembly x Oil pan sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly x Oil pan sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
drain plug x No. 2 oil pan sub 39 400 29
No. 2 engine hanger x Engine assembly 21 214 16
1st 18 184 13
Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH x Cylinder head sub-
2nd loosen 180°
assembly LH
3rd 18 184 13
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly LH x Camshaft housing sub-assembly LH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
1st 18 184 13
Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH x Cylinder head sub-
2nd loosen 180°
assembly RH
3rd 18 184 13
Cylinder head cover sub-assembly RH x Camshaft housing sub-assembly

6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
RH
Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH x Injector driver bracket 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Spark plug x Cylinder head sub-assembly 17 174 13
Bolt A and
10 102 7
B
Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
Bolt C and
25 255 18
D
Water outlet x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Engine water pump assembly x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Water pump pulley x Engine water pump assembly 14 143 10
No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 36 367 27
PCV valve sub-assembly x Cylinder block sub-assembly 23 235 17
Water inlet pipe x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Rear cylinder head plate x Camshaft housing sub-assembly RH 16 163 12
PCV hose connector x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Engine oil pressure switch assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-
18 184 13
assembly
Camshaft timing oil control valve x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
VVT sensor x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Crank position sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Knock control sensor x Cylinder block sub-assembly 24 245 18
E.F.I. water temperature sensor x Water inlet pipe 18 184 13
Oil filter union x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 45 459 33
Oil filter sub-assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 14 143 10
Ignition coil x Cylinder block sub-assembly 8.5 87 75 in.*lbf
No. 1 water by-pass x Engine assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Intake manifold x Cylinder head cover sub-assembly 25 255 18
Fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly x Fuel pump assembly 31 316 23
Fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly x Intake manifold 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Injector cover x Intake manifold 19 194 14
Generator assembly x Engine assembly 25 255 18
Stud bolt x Cylinder head 18 184 13

Chain cover mount bolt x Cylinder head LH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
No. 1 cylinder block tight plug x Cylinder block 37 377 27
Crankshaft sensor holder assembly x cylinder block LH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Cylinder block plate x cylinder block LH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Oil separator cover x cylinder block RH 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
1st 10 102 7
Connecting rod x Connecting rod cap 2nd 25 255 18
3rd turn 92.5°
1st 35 357 26
2nd loosen 180°
3rd 35 357 26
Cylinder block sub-assembly
4st loosen 180°
5st 17 173 13
6st turn 60°
Cylinder block sub-assembly 25 255 18

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000201W00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 FUEL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
350 to 500 kPa (4.0 to 5.0 kgf/cm 2 , 51

Fuel pressure
to 73 psi)
Fuel pressure : at fuel pressure remains for 5 minutes after

147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 , 21 psi) or more
engine has stopped
Fuel pressure (for high pressure) : at engine warm up and 3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 51.0 kgf/cm 2 ,
idle 435 to 725 psi)
Fuel injector (for port injection)
Resistance at 20°C (68°F) 12 Ω
84 to 103 cc(5.1 to 6.3 cu.in.) per 15

Injection volume
seconds
Difference between each injector 19 cc(1.2 cu.in.) or less
Fuel drop 1 drop or less per 22 minutes
Fuel Injector (for direct injection)
Resistance at 20°C (68°F) 1.9 Ω
Fuel pressure sensor
Terminal 2 (VOUT) and 1 (GND)

voltage : Apply 5 V between terminals 3 (VCC) and 1 Approximately 0.5 V
(GND)
Fuel pump
Resistance at 20°C (68°F) 0.2 to 3.0 Ω
Fuel pump (for high pressure)
Resistance at 20°C (68°F) 1.19 to 1.39 Ω
Fuel sender gauge assembly (Main)
Float Level F 6.5 to 8.5 Ω

Resistance
Float Level E 168 to 172 Ω
Fuel sender gauge assembly (Sub)
Float Level F 5.5 to 9.5 Ω

Resistance
Float Level E 236 to 244 Ω
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000201X00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 FUEL: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Fuel delivery pipe x Intake manifold 19 194 14
Injector cover x Intake manifold 19 194 14
Wire harness clamp bracket x Intake manifold protector 11 112 8
Fuel delivery pipe LH x Cylinder head 19 194 14
Fuel delivery pipe RH x Cylinder head 19 194 14
Fuel delivery pipe LH x Fuel delivery pipe (Union nut) 25 255 18
Fuel delivery pipe RH x Fuel delivery pipe (Union nut) 25 255 18
Fuel delivery pipe x Water pipe 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Fuel delivery pipe LH x No. 2 fuel delivery pipe (Union nut) 25 255 18
No. 2 fuel delivery pipe (Union nut) x Fuel pump (High-pressure) 25 255 18
Fuel pressure sensor x No. 1 fuel delivery pipe 36 367 27
Injector driver x Engine assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Fuel pump gauge retainer x Fuel tank 85 867 63
Pump drive case assembly x Cylinder head 19 194 14
Fuel pump (for high pressure) x Pump drive case assembly 21 214 16
Fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly x Fuel pump (for high pressure) (Union bolt) 31 316 23
Fuel pump ECU x Body 5.0 51 44 in.*lbf
Fuel tank to filler pipe hose x Fuel tank assembly (Hose clamp) 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Fuel tank assembly x Body 33 337 24
No. 1 fuel tank protector x Body 9.0 92 80 in.*lbf
No. 2 fuel tank protector x Body 9.0 92 80 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KDA034X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Fuel delivery pipe x Intake manifold 19 194 14
Purge valve x Intake manifold 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Manifold absolute pressure sensor x Intake manifold 4.0 41 35 in.*lbf
Intake manifold x Cylinder head 25 255 18
Throttle with motor body assembly x Intake manifold 8.0 82 71 in.*lbf
CHAMBER
Air cleaner duct with chamber x Intake manifold 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
Chamber duct x Air cleaner case sub-assembly (Hose clamp) 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
Chamber duct x Chamber (Hose clamp) 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Exhaust manifold x Cylinder head 30 306 22
Exhaust manifold x Front exhaust pipe sub-assembly 35 357 26
EXHAUST PIPE
Tail pipe baffle x Tail exhaust pipe assembly 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Tail exhaust pipe assembly x Center exhaust pipe assembly 48 490 35
Center exhaust pipe assembly x Front exhaust pipe assembly 18 184 13
Front exhaust pipe assembly x Front exhaust pipe sub-assembly 43 439 32
Front exhaust pipe assembly x Exhaust pipe bracket 50 510 37
Front exhaust pipe sub-assembly x Exhaust manifold 35 357 26
No. 1 engine under cover x Body (Bolt A) 30 306 22
No. 1 engine under cover x Body (Bolt B) 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
No. 2 engine under cover x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000208G00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 LUBRICATION: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Idle: 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 , 7.3 psi) or more
Oil pressure
6000 rpm: 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 , 73 psi) or more
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000208H00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 LUBRICATION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Oil pan drain plug x No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly 39 400 29
Oil filter union x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 45 459 33
Oil filter sub-assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 14 143 10
Engine oil pressure switch assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 18 184 13
Cam timing oil control valve x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Camshaft position sensor x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Engine oil pressure switch assembly x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 18 184 13
Bolt A and B 10 102 7

Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly
Bolt C and D 25 255 18
Idler pulley bracket x Engine assembly 36 367 27
Oil level dipstick guide x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Wire harness bracket x Timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly 6.4 65 57 in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205Q00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Starter assembly Standard current Below 90 A at 11.5 V
for Manual Transmission 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

Standard runout
for Automatic Transmission 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)

Maximum runout
Standard depth for Manual Transmission 0.50 mm (0.020 in.)

Segment - Mold for Automatic Transmission 0.7 mm (0.0276 in.)
Starter armature
Minimum depth
assembly for Automatic Transmission 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)
Segment - Mold
Segment - Segment
Below 1 Ω
Standard for Automatic Transmission
resistance Commutator - Armature coil core
10 kΩ or higher
for Automatic Transmission
Standard diameter for Automatic Transmission 29 mm (1.1417 in.)
Minimum diameter for Automatic Transmission 28 mm (1.1024 in.)

Standard length

Minimum length
Standard brush 15.9 to 19.5 N (1.6 to 2.0

for Manual Transmission
spring force kgf, 3.6 to 4.4 lbf)
Brush length Minimum brush

for Manual Transmission 2.5 N (0.3 kgf, 0.6 lbf)
spring force
A-B
Standard A-C
10 kΩ or higher
resistance B-D
for Automatic C-D
Transmission A-D
Below 1 Ω
B-C
Standard for Manual Transmission Below 1 Ω

resistance
Terminal 50 - for Automatic Transmission Below 1 Ω
Terminal C
Standard for Manual Transmission Below 1 Ω

Starter magnetic resistance
switch assembly Terminal 50 - for Automatic Transmission Below 2 Ω
Switch body
Standard
resistance
for Manual Transmission 1 MΩ or higher
Terminal 30 -
Terminal C
Standard
resistance
LOCK 10 kΩ or higher
All combinations
of all terminals
Standard
resistance ACC Below 1 Ω
2 (AM1) - 3 (ACC)
Standard
Ignition switch resistance
assembly 2 (AM1) - 3 (ACC) ON Below 1 Ω
- 4 (IG1)
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM2)
Standard
resistance
1 (ST1) - 2 (AM1)
START Below 1 Ω
-- 4 (IG1)
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM2)
- 8 (ST2)
1-2
(Battery voltage not applied to
terminals 1 and 2) 93.8 to 136.4 kΩ
(Measured temperature : 20 °C
(68 °F))
Starter relay Specified condition 3 - 5

(Battery voltage is applied Below 1 Ω
between terminals 1 and 2)
3-5
(Battery voltage is not applied 10 kΩ or higher
1-2
(Battery voltage not applied to
terminals 1 and 2) 93.8 to 136.4 kΩ
(Measured temperature : 20 °C
(68 °F))
Inhibitor relay Specified condition 3 - 5

(Battery voltage is applied Below 1 Ω
3-5
(Battery voltage is not applied 10 kΩ or higher
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000205R00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FA20 STARTING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Lower side bolt 50 510 37
Upper side bolt

50 510 37
(without SST)
Starter x Engine Upper side bolt

40 408 30
(with SST)
Terminal 30 10 102 7
Terminal C 10 102 7
Starter magnetic switch assembly x Starter drive housing 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
for Manual transmission 1.5 15 13 in.*lbf

Starter cover x Starter brush holder assembly
for Automatic transmission 1.4 14 12 in.*lbf
Starter yoke assembly x Starter drive housing 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
Key lock unit 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KDE00KX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: FRONT SUSPENSION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
front suspension upper to cowl brace sub-assembly x Body 16 163 12
Front suspension support sub-assembly x Front shock absorber assembly

55 561 41
(without SST)
Front suspension support sub-assembly x Front shock absorber assembly

49 495 36
(with SST)
Front shock absorber with coil spring x Body 23 235 17
Front shock absorber with coil spring x Steering knuckle 155 1581 114
Front stabilizer link assembly x Front shock absorber assembly 46 469 34
Front flexible hose x Front shock absorber assembly 33 337 24
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Front lower suspension arm bolt x Body 110 1122 81
Front lower arm suspension arm assembly x Steering knuckle 51 520 38
Lower arm support plate x Body 110 1122 81
Front lower suspension arm assembly x Body 85 867 63
No. 1 engine under cover bolt 30 306 22
No. 2 engine under cover bolt 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf.
Front No. 2 stabilizer bracket bolt 75 765 55
Front No. 2 stabilizer bracket nut 25 255 18
Rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly x Body 60 612 44
Front stabilizer link assembly x Front stabilizer bar 46 469 34
Front cross member sub-assembly x Body 95 969 70

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020EM00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Refrigerant charge volume Standard: 390 +/-50 g(13.8 +/-1.8 oz)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020EN00JX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: HEATING / AIR CONDITIONING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
Instrument panel reinforcement assembly x Body 25 255 18
Lower instrument panel reinforcement sub-assembly x Instrument panel 66

7.5 77
reinforcement assembly in.*lbf
66
Air conditioning tube assembly x Cooler expansion valve 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Air conditioning unit assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
31
Cooler expansion valve x Air conditioner tube assembly 3.5 36
in.*lbf
31
Air conditioner tube assembly x No. 1 cooler evaporator sub-assembly 3.5 36
in.*lbf
COOLER EXPANSION VALVE
Suction hose sub-assembly x Cooler expansion valve 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
COMPRESSOR
Compressor with magnet clutch x Engine 36 367 27
Suction hose sub-assembly x Compressor with magnet clutch 10 102 7
No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose x Compressor with magnet clutch 10 102 7
CONDENSER
Cooler condenser assembly x Radiator assembly 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
No. 1 cooler refrigerant discharge hose x Cooler condenser assembly 10 102 7
Air conditioner tube and accessory assembly x Cooler condenser assembly 10 102 7
No. 1 cooler condenser bracket x Cooler condenser assembly 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf
No. 2 cooler condenser bracket x Cooler condenser assembly 6.0 61 53 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020ED00IX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: HORN: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Part Tightened N*m kgf*cm ft.*lbf
Low pitched horn assembly x Body 18 184 13
High pitched horn assembly x Hone bracket sub-assembly 18 184 13
Horn bracket sub-assembly x Front bumper reinforcement sub-assembly 13 133 10

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000200K00NX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: INTERIOR PANELS / TRIM: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY PAD
Instrument panel reinforcement x Passenger airbag 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
FRONT CONSOLE BOX
Console box assembly x Body 6.5 66 58 in.*lbf
ROOF HEADLINING
Center pillar garnish LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Center pillar garnish RH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front seat outer belt assembly LH x Body 30 306 22
Front seat outer belt assembly RH x Body 30 306 22
Rear window side garnish LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear window side garnish RH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear quarter trim front garnish LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear quarter trim front garnish RH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCQ00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: LIGHTING (EXT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY (for Halogen Headlight)
Headlight assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support RH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY (for HID Headlight)
Headlight assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support RH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front bumper side support LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
FOG LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Fog light assembly x Front bumper cover 2.0 20 18 in.*lbf
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RESISTOR
Daytime running light resistor x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Front turn signal light assembly x Front bumper cover 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Rear combination light assembly x Body 4.5 46 40 in.*lbf
REAR LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Rear light assembly x Rear bumper cover 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
HEIGHT CONTROL SENSOR
Rear height control sensor sub-assembly LH x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ECU
Headlight leveling ECU assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCP009X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: LIGHTING (INT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Front door courtesy switch assembly x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020LN03QX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: MIRROR (EXT): TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Outer rear view mirror sub-assembly x Door panel 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020CK00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: PARKING BRAKE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Parking brake switch assembly resistance ON (When switch shaft is not pressed) Below 1 Ω
(Switch connector - Switch body) OFF (When switch shaft is pressed) 10 kΩ or higher
Parking brake lever travel at 200 N (20 kgf, 45.0 lbf) 7 to 8 notches
Standard 190 mm (7.48 in.)

Brake disc inside diameter
Maximum 191 mm (7.52 in.)

Parking brake shoe lining thickness
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020CL00MX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: PARKING BRAKE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Parking brake switch assembly set screw 1.5 15 13 in.*lbf
Parking brake lever sub-assembly set bolt 18 184 13
No. 1 fuel tank Protector set bolt 9.0 92 80 in.*lbf
No. 2 fuel tank Protector set bolt 9.0 92 80 in.*lbf
No. 2/No. 3 parking brake cable assembly x Body 18 184 13
Center exhaust pipe assembly x Tail exhaust pipe assembly 48 490 35
Center exhaust pipe assembly x Front exhaust pipe assembly 18 184 13
Lower casing bracket set bolt 18 184 13
Clamp H/B x Casing lower bracket 18 184 13
Rear disc brake caliper assembly set bolt 66 673 49

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCF00FX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Power steering ECU set bolts 10 102 7

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002KJF014X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: POWER DISTRIBUTION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
53
Battery x Battery current sensor assembly 6.0 61
in.*lbf
66
Engine wire x Battery current sensor assembly 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Nut 7.5 77
Instrument panel junction block assembly x Instrument panel in.*lbf
reinforcement assembly 66
Bolt 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020E700SX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: REAR SUSPENSION: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Rear support to rear shock absorber nut

25 255 18
without SST
Rear support to rear shock absorber nut

23 235 17
with SST
Rear shock absorber with coil spring x Body 30 306 22
Rear No. 1 upper control arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 161 1642 119
Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly x Rear shock absorber with coil spring 80 816 59
Rear stabilizer link sub-assembly x Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly 38 388 28
Rear height control sensor sub-assembly x Rear No. 2 suspension arm 66

7.5 77
assembly in.*lbf
Hub nut 120 1224 89
Upper control arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 80 816 59
Upper control arm assembly x Rear suspension member assembly 90 918 66
Rear NO. 1 suspension arm assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 110 1122 81
Rear NO. 1 suspension arm assembly x Rear suspension member assembly 110 1122 81
NO. 1 parking brake cable support bracket x Rear NO. 1 suspension arm
18 184 13
assembly
Wheel nut 120 1224 89
Toe control link sub-assembly x Rear axle carrier sub-assembly 60 612 44
Toe control link sub-assembly x Rear suspension member assembly 100 1020 74
Rear stabilizer bracket x Body 30 306 22
Rear stabilizer link sub-assembly x Rear stabilizer bar 38 388 28
80
NO. 1 fuel tank protector x Body 9.0 92
in.*lbf
80
NO. 2 fuel tank protector x Body 9.0 92
in.*lbf
Rear suspension member assembly x Body (Bolt A) 145 1479 107
Rear suspension member assembly x Body (Bolt B) 70 714 52
No. 3 parking brake cable assembly x Rear suspension member assembly 18 184 13
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Z9308ZX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT SEAT ASSEMBLY
Front seat assembly x Body 53 540 39
Separate type front seatback assembly x Separate type front seat cushion
42 428 31
assembly
Front seat inner belt assembly x Front seat assembly 42 428 31
Separate type front seatback cover bracket x Separate type front seatback 49
5.5 56
frame assembly in.*lbf
49
Front seat airbag assembly x Separate type front seatback frame assembly 5.5 56
in.*lbf
REAR SEAT ASSEMBLY
Bench type seatback assembly x Rear seat hinge sub-assembly 33 337 24
Separate type rear seat cushion assembly x Body 13 133 10
Rear rear window side garnish x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear seatback lock striker x Body 33 337 24
Rear seatback lock assembly x Rear seatback frame assembly 25 250 18

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003UWV00QX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: SEAT BELT: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY
Front seat inner belt assembly x Front seat assembly 42 428 31
FRONT SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
Rear window side garnish x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Rear quarter trim front garnish x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Center pillar garnish x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front seat outer belt assembly (shoulder anchor) x Body 30 306 22
Front seat outer belt assembly (floor anchor) x Body 30 306 22
Front seat outer belt assembly (Upper bolt) x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf
Front seat outer belt assembly (Lower bolt) x Body 30 306 22
REAR SEAT INNER BELT ASSEMBLY
Rear seat inner belt assembly x Body 30 306 22
REAR SEAT OUTER BELT ASSEMBLY
Rear seat outer belt assembly (floor anchor) x Body 30 306 22
Rear seat outer belt assembly x Body 30 306 22
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT TETHER ANCHOR
Bench type rear seatback assembly x Body 33 337 24
Child restraint seat tether anchor bracket x Body 25 255 18

CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR BRACKET
Bench type rear seatback assembly x Body 33 337 24
Rear seat hinge sub-assembly x Body 33 337 24
Child restraint seat anchor bracket sub-assembly x Body 25 255 18

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000118V0C8X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH

Bolt Type
HEXAGON HEAD BOLT STUD BOLT WELD BOLT CLASS
NORMAL RECESS BOLT DEEP RECESS BOLT
4T
No Mark No Mark No Mark
5T
6T
w/ Washer w/ Washer
7T
8T
9T
10T
11T
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000118X0C8X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: HOW TO DETERMINE NUT STRENGTH (2013 FR-S)
HOW TO DETERMINE NUT STRENGTH

Nut Type
PRESENT STANDARD HEXAGON NUT OLD STANDARD HEXAGON NUT CLASS
COLD FORGING NUT CUTTING PROCESSED NUT
- - 4N
No Mark
5N (4T)
No Mark (w/ Washer) No Mark (w/ Washer) No Mark
- - 6N
- 7N (5T)
- - 8N
10N (7T)
No Mark
- - 11N
- - 12N
HINT:
*: Nut with 1 or more marks on one side surface of the nut.

Use a nut with the same nut strength classification number (or more) as the bolt strength
classification number when tightening parts with a bolt and nut.
Example:
Bolt = 4T
Nut = 4N or more
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000118W0C8X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STANDARD BOLT: SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS (2013 FR-S)
SPECIFIED TORQUE FOR STANDARD BOLTS

CLASS DIAMETER PITCH SPECIFIED TORQUE
(MM) (MM)
HEXAGON HEAD BOLT HEXAGON FLANGE BOLT
N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF N*M KGF*CM FT.*LBF
6 1 5 55 48 in.*lbf 6 60 52 in.*lbf
8 1.25 12.5 130 9 14 145 10
10 1.25 26 260 19 29 290 21

4T
12 1.25 47 480 35 53 540 39
14 1.5 74 760 55 84 850 61
16 1.5 115 1,150 83 - - -
6 1 6.5 65 56 in.*lbf 7.5 75 65 in.*lbf
8 1.25 15.5 160 12 17.5 175 13
10 1.25 32 330 24 36 360 26

5T
12 1.25 59 600 43 65 670 48
14 1.5 91 930 67 100 1,050 76
16 1.5 140 1,400 101 - - -
6 1 8 80 69 in.*lbf 9 90 78 in.*lbf
8 1.25 19 195 14 21 210 15
10 1.25 39 400 29 44 440 32

6T
12 1.25 71 730 53 80 810 59
14 1.5 110 1,100 80 125 1,250 90
16 1.5 170 1,750 127 - - -
6 1 10.5 110 8 12 120 9
8 1.25 25 260 19 28 290 21
10 1.25 52 530 38 58 590 43

7T
12 1.25 95 970 70 105 1,050 76
14 1.5 145 1,500 108 165 1,700 123
16 1.5 230 2,300 166 - - -
8 1.25 29 300 22 33 330 24
8T 10 1.25 61 620 45 68 690 50
12 1.25 110 1,100 80 120 1,250 90
8 1.25 34 340 25 37 380 27
9T 10 1.25 70 710 51 78 790 57

12 1.25 125 1,300 94 140 1,450 105
8 1.25 38 390 28 42 430 31
10T 10 1.25 78 800 58 88 890 64
12 1.25 140 1,450 105 155 1,600 116
8 1.25 42 430 31 47 480 35
11T 10 1.25 87 890 64 97 990 72
12 1.25 155 1,600 116 175 1,800 130

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBJ01SX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING COLUMN: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Maximum steering free play 30 mm (1.18 in.)
1.6 to 2.1 N*m (16.3 to 21.4

Steering column assembly preload
kgf*cm, 14.2 to 18.6 in.*lbf)
Steering intermediate shaft assembly turn torque (rack and 6.6 N*m (66 kgf*cm, 58 in.*lbf) or
pinion power steering gear assembly side) less
Steering intermediate shaft assembly turn torque (steering 6.0 N*m (61 kgf*cm, 53 in.*lbf) or
column assembly side) less
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBK01XX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING COLUMN: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
No. 1 engine under cover set bolt 30 306 22
66
No. 2 engine under cover set bolt 7.5 77
in.*lbf.
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Steering column assembly 35 357 26
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Rack and pinion steering gear

35 357 26
assembly
Steering column assembly set nuts 40 408 30
Steering column assembly set bolt 40 408 30
Steering wheel assembly set nut 39 398 29

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCH00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Rack and pinion power steering gear assembly total 0.9 to 1.6 N*m (9.2 to 16.3 kgf*cm, 8.0 to
preload (turning) 14.2 in.*lbf)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KCG00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
No. 1 engine under cover set bolt 30 306 22
66
No. 2 engine under cover set bolt 7.5 77
in.*lbf.
Front stabilizer link assembly x Front stabilizer bar 46 469 34
Front stabilizer bar set bolts 60 612 44
Tie rod end sub-assembly x Steering knuckle 27 275 20
Steering intermediate shaft assembly x Rack and pinion power steering gear
35 357 26
assembly
Rack and pinion power steering gear assembly set bolts 120 1220 89
Tie rod end sub-assembly x Steering rack end sub-assembly 85 869 63
Steering rack end sub-assembly 103 1050 76
Lock nut x Steering rack housing 60 612 44

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KFQ00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
66
Curtain shield airbag assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Separate type front seatback assembly x Separate type front seat cushion
42 428 31
assembly
Separate type front seatback cover bracket x Separate type front seatback 49
5.5 55
frame assembly in.*lbf
49
Front seat airbag assembly x Separate type front seatback frame assembly 5.5 55
in.*lbf
Airbag sensor assembly x Body 25 255 18
Front airbag sensor x Body 13 133 10
66
Door side airbag sensor x Front door 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
No. 2 side airbag sensor assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
Rear airbag sensor assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
No. 2 airbag sensor assembly x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003K5R00AX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: THEFT DETERRENT / KEYLESS ENTRY: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
Transponder key ECU x Body 7.5 77 66 in.*lbf

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBI02HX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TIRE / WHEEL: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure:
TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
KPA (KGF/CM 2 , PSI)
P205/55R16 91V 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)
215/45R17 87W 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)
T135/80D16 101M 420 (4.2, 60) 420 (4.2, 60)
Steel wheel 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.) (Vertical and lateral)

Maximum wheel runout
Aluminum wheel 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) (Vertical and lateral)
Maximum wheel imbalance after adjustment 10.0 g (0.0220 lb)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003JBH009X
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER SET NUT 4.0 41 35 IN.*LBF
HUB NUT 120 1224 89
Door control receiver set bolt 13 133 10

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXP00CX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
Pushed: Below 1 Ω
Neutral position switch assembly 1-2
Released: 10 kΩ or higher
Pushed: Below 1 Ω
Back-up light switch assembly 1-2
Released: 10 kΩ or higher
Manual transmission extension housing oil seal

- 0.1 to 1.1 mm (0.00394 to 0.0433 in.)
installation depth
0.040 to 0.082 mm (0.00157 to

Standard
Reverse idler gear radial clearance 0.00323 in.)
Maximum
0.082 mm (0.00323 in.)
No. 4 gear shift fork slotted spring pin drive in 0 mm (0 in.) (from the end surface of
-
depth the No. 4 gear shift fork)
No. 1 gear shift head slotted spring pin drive in 0 mm (0 in.) (from the end surface of
-
depth the No. 1 gear shift head)
-
-
Transmission front bearing retainer oil seal

- 11.1 to 11.9 mm (0.437 to 0.469 in.)
installation depth
Extension housing rear oil seal installation depth - 1.0 to 2.0 mm (0.0394 to 0.0787 in.)
0.10 to 0.40 mm (0.00394 to 0.0157

Standard
Counter shaft 6th gear thrust clearance in.)
Maximum
0.40 mm (0.0157 in.)
0.015 to 0.068 mm (0.000590 to

Standard
Counter shaft 6th gear radial clearance 0.00268 in.)
Maximum
0.068 mm (0.00268 in.)
0.029 to 0.072 mm (0.00114 to

Standard
Input shaft radial clearance 0.00283 in.)
Maximum
0.072 mm (0.00283 in.)
Standard 0.15 to 0.40 (0.00590 to 0.0157 in.)

1st gear thrust clearance
Maximum 0.40 (0.0157 in.)
0.015 to 0.066 (0.000590 to 0.00260

Standard
1st gear radial clearance in.)
Maximum
0.066 (0.00260 in.)
Standard 0.10 to 0.45 (0.000394 to 0.0177 in.)

2nd gear thrust clearance
Maximum 0.45 (0.0177 in.)
0.015 to 0.066 (0.000590 to 0.00260

Standard
2nd gear radial clearance in.)
Maximum
0.066 (0.00260 in.)
Standard 0.10 to 0.45 (0.000394 to 0.0177 in.)

Reverse gear thrust clearance
Maximum 0.45 (0.0177 in.)
0.015 to 0.066 (0.000590 to 0.00260

Standard
Reverse gear radial clearance in.)
Maximum
0.066 (0.00260 in.)
Standard 0.10 to 0.35 (0.00393 to 0.0138 in.)

Counter shaft 3rd gear thrust clearance
Maximum 0.35 (0.0138 in.)
0.015 to 0.068 (0.000590 to 0.00268

Standard
Counter shaft 3rd gear radial clearance in.)
Maximum
0.068 (0.00268 in.)
Standard 0.10 to 0.35 (0.00393 to 0.0138 in.)

Counter shaft 4th gear thrust clearance
Maximum 0.35 (0.0138 in.)
0.065 to 0.115 (0.002559 to 0.00453

Standard
Counter shaft 4th gear radial clearance in.)
Maximum
0.115 (0.00453 in.)
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard
No. 1 gear shift head clearance in.)
Maximum
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard
Maximum
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard
Maximum
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
Standard
width 14.8 to 15.0 mm (0.583 to 0.591 in.)
Shift shaft
width
Standard
width 14.8 to 15.0 mm (0.583 to 0.591 in.)
No. 1 shift inter lock block
width
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard
No. 4 gear shift fork in.)
Maximum
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630

Standard
5th shift head in.)
Maximum
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
No. 2 synchronizer ring and counter shaft 6th gear Standard 0.88 to 1.52 mm (0.0346 to 0.0598 in.)
clearance Minimum 0.88 mm (0.0346 in.)
34.015 to 34.040 mm (1.33917 to

Standard
Counter shaft 6th gear inside diameter 1.34016 in.)
Maximum
34.040 mm (1.34016 in.)
Standard 7.9 to 8.0 mm (0.311 to 0.315 in.)

No. 4 gear shift fork claw
0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

No. 4 gear shift fork claw and glove of the No. 4 Standard
in.)
transmission hub sleeve clearance Maximum
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
22.040 to 22.061mm (0.86771 to

Standard
Reverse idler gear inside diameter 0.86854 in.)
Maximum
22.061mm (0.86854 in.)
21.979 to 22.000 mm (0.86531 to

Standard
Reverse idler gear shaft outer diameter 0.86614 in.)
Minimum
21.979 mm (0.86531 in.)
Front input shaft bearing shaft snap ring thickness Standard 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
Mark A 2.80 mm (0.11023 in.)
B 2.85 mm (0.11220 in.)
C 2.90 mm (0.11417 in.)

No. 4 transmission clutch hub shaft snap ring
D 2.95 mm (0.11614 in.)
E 3.00 mm (0.11811 in.)
F 3.05 mm (0.12007 in.)

No. 2 synchronizer ring and 3rd gear clearance
Standard 0 mm (0 in.)
Front input shaft bearing shaft snap ring thickness
Maximum 0.1 mm (0.00394 in.)
Mark 0 1.95 mm (0.07677 in.)
2 2.00 mm (0.07874 in.)
3 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)

Front input shaft bearing shaft snap ring
4 2.10 mm (0.08267 in.)
5 2.15 mm (0.08464 in.)
6 2.20 mm (0.08661 in.)
Standard 31.984 to 32.000 mm (1.25921 to

A 1.25984 in.)
42.984 to 43.000 mm (1.69228 to

B
1.69291 in.)
40.984 to 41.000 mm (1.61354 to

Output shaft outer diameter C
1.61417 in.)
Minimum
31.984 mm (1.25921 in.)
A
B 42.9849 mm (1.69228 in.)
C 40.984 mm (1.61354 in.)
Output shaft runout Standard 0.03 mm (0.00118 in.) or less
47.015 to 47.040 mm (1.85098 to

Standard
Reverse gear inside diameter 1.85197 in.)
Maximum
47.040 mm (1.85197 in.)
46.315 to 46.340 mm (1.82343 to
Standard
1st gear inside diameter 1.82441 in.)
Maximum
46.340 mm (1.82441 in.)
49.015 to 49.040 mm (1.92972 to

Standard
2nd gear inside diameter 1.93071 in.)
Maximum
49.040 mm (1.93071 in.)
40.284 to 40.300 mm (1.58598 to

Standard
1st gear bearing inner race outer diameter 1.58661 in.)
Minimum
40.284 mm (1.58598 in.)

0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

in.)
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)

0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

in.)
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
Standard
0.48 to 1.12 mm (0.0189 to 0.0441 in.)
inner
No. 1 synchronizer ring set and 1st gear clearance
Middle 0.38 to 1.22 mm (0.0150 to 0.0480 in.)
Outer 0.8 to 1.8 mm (0.0315 to 0.0709 in.)
Standard
0.48 to 1.12 mm (0.0189 to 0.0441 in.)
inner
No. 1 synchronizer ring set and 2nd gear clearance
Middle 0.38 to 1.22 mm (0.0150 to 0.0480 in.)
Outer 0.8 to 1.8 mm (0.0315 to 0.0709 in.)

Standard 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
thickness
Mark A 1.80 mm (0.07086 in.)
B 1.85 mm (0.07283 in.)
C 1.90 mm (0.07480 in.)

D 1.95 mm (0.07677 in.)
E 2.00 mm (0.07874 in.)
F 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)
6th gear shaft snap ring thickness Standard 0 to 0.11 mm (0 to 0.00433 in.)
Mark A 2.67 mm (0.10511 in.)
B 2.73 mm (0.10748 in.)
C 2.79 mm (0.10984 in.)
D 2.85 mm (0.11220 in.)
E 2.91 mm (0.11456 in.)
6th gear shaft snap ring F 2.97 mm (0.11692 in.)

G 3.03 mm (0.11929 in.)
H 3.09 mm (0.12165 in.)
J 3.15 mm (0.12401 in.)
K 3.21 mm (0.01053 in.)
L 3.27 mm (0.12874 in.)

0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138

in.)
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)

No. 2 synchronizer ring and 3rd gear clearance
Maximum 1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)
Standard
0.4 to 1.2 mm (0.0157 to 0.0472 in.)
inner
No. 3 synchronizer ring set and counter shaft 3rd
gear clearance Middle 0.3 to 1.3 mm (0.0118 to 0.0512 in.)
Outer 0.8 to 1.8 mm (0.0315 to 0.0709 in.)
Standard 39.284 to 39.300 mm (1.54661 to

A 1.54721 in.)
37.984 to 38.000 mm (1.49543 to

B
1.49606 in.)
24.987 to 25.000 mm (0.98374 to

Counter shaft outer diameter C
0.98425 in.)
Minimum
39.284 mm (1.54661 in.)
A
B 37.984 mm (1.49543 in.)
C 24.987 mm (0.98374 in.)
Counter shaft runout Standard 0.03 mm (0.00118 in.) or less
43.015 to 43.040 mm (1.69350 to

Standard
Counter shaft 3rd gear inside diameter 1.69448 in.)
Maximum
43.040 mm (1.69448 in.)
46.315 to 46.340 mm (1.82425 to

Standard
Counter shaft 4th gear inside diameter 1.82441 in.)
Maximum
46.340 mm (1.82441 in.)
46.225 to 46.250 mm (1.81988 to

Standard
4th gear bearing inner race outer diameter 1.82087 in.)
Minimum
46.225 mm (1.81988 in.)
4th inner race thrust washer thickness Standard 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
Mark A 3.75 mm (0.14763 in.)
B 3.80 mm (0.14960 in.)
C 3.85 mm (0.15157 in.)
D 3.90 mm (0.15354 in.)

4th inner race thrust washer
E 3.95 mm (0.15551 in.)
F 4.00 mm (0.15748 in.)
G 4.05 mm (0.15944 in.)
H 4.10 mm (0.16141 in.)
Counter drive gear shaft snap ring thickness Standard 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
Mark A 1.80 mm (0.07086 in.)
B 1.85 mm (0.07283 in.)
C 1.90 mm (0.07480 in.)

Counter drive gear shaft snap ring
D 1.95 mm (0.07677 in.)
E 2.00 mm (0.07874 in.)
F 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)
Front counter gear bearing shaft snap ring thickness Standard 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
Mark 1 2.05 mm (0.08070 in.)
2 2.10 mm (0.08267 in.)
3 2.15 mm (0.08464 in.)

Front counter gear bearing shaft snap ring
4 2.20 mm (0.08661 in.)
5 2.25 mm (0.08858 in.)
6 2.30 mm (0.09055 in.)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YXQ00EX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013

FR-S)
Manual transmission assembly filler plug x Manual transmission assembly 37 377 27
Manual transmission assembly drain plug x Manual transmission assembly 37 377 27
Neutral position switch assembly x Manual transmission assembly 32 329 24
Back-up light switch assembly x Manual transmission assembly 32 329 24
Manual transmission assembly x Rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator 40 408 30
Manual transmission assembly x Engine for bolt 50 510 37
Manual transmission assembly x Engine for nut 50 510 37
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Body for bolt 65 663 48
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Body for nut 40 408 30
Exhaust pipe bracket x Manual transmission assembly 23 235 17
Floor shift control shift lever retainer sub-assembly x Body 18 184 13
Clutch release cylinder assembly x Manual transmission assembly 37 377 27
Wire harness clamp bracket x Manual transmission assembly 10 102 7
Ground cable x Manual transmission assembly 13 133 10
66
Shift lever cap x floor shift control shift lever retainer 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Shift lever boot x Body 18 184 13
No. 3 gear shift fork shaft x No. 3 gear shift fork 20 199 14
Front bearing retainer x Clutch housing 17 173 13
Transmission case x Clutch housing 29 296 21
Transmission case x Reverse idler gear shaft 28 286 21
Clutch housing x Reverse idler gear shaft 28 286 21
Rear bearing retainer x Transmission case 30 306 22
Head straight screw plug x Transmission case 19 194 14
Front shift inner lever x Shift shaft 33 340 25
No. 1 extension housing oil receiver pipe x Transmission extension housing 75

8.5 87
sub-assembly in.*lbf
Transmission extension housing sub-assembly x Transmission case 29 296 21
Bolt x Transmission extension housing sub-assembly 31 316 23

Holder x Transmission extension housing sub-assembly 39 400 29
Head straight screw plug x Transmission extension housing sub-assembly 25 250 18
62
Wire harness clamp bracket x Clutch housing 7.0 71
in.*lbf
Release fork support x Clutch housing 16 163 12

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PMD00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SERVICE DATA (2013 FR-S)
SERVICE DATA
350 to 430 kPa (3.6 to 4.4 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to

Line pressure (Fluid temperature): 50 to 80°C D position 62 psi)
(122 to 176°F)
Engine idling 760 to 950 kPa (7.7 to 9.7 kgf/cm 2 , 110
R position
to 138 psi)
1200 to 1380 kPa (12.5 to 14.0 kgf/cm 2 ,

Line pressure (Fluid temperature): 50 to 80°C D position
174 to 200 psi)
(122 to 176°F)
At stall speed (Throttle valve fully open) 1410 to 1630 kPa (14.4 to 16.6 kgf/cm 2 ,
R position
204 to 236 psi)
Engine stall speed D position 2350 +/- 250 rpm
N→D
Less than 1.2 seconds
position
Time lag
N→R
Less than 1.5 seconds
position
Engine idle speed (A/C OFF) N position 600 to 800 r/min
Drive plate runout Maximum 0.30 mm (0.0118 in.)
Shift schedule
D, 6 position
1→2 47 km/h (29 mph)
2→3 96 km/h (59 mph)
Throttle valve fully open 3→4 142 km/h (88 mph)
4→5 201 km/h (125 mph)
5→6 282 km/h (175 mph)
1→2 12 km/h (7 mph)
2→3 20 km/h (12 mph)
Throttle valve opening 6 % 3→4 30 km/h (19 mph)
4→5 48 km/h (30 mph)
5→6 59 km/h (37 mph)
Manual downshift speed
→5 264 km/h (164 mph)
→4 186 km/h (116 mph)
5, 4, 3, 2, 1 gear range →3 129 km/h (80 mph)
→2 80 km/h (50 mph)

→1 38 km/h (23 mph)
NOTICE:
All shift point values indicated in the above tables are actual values. Therefore, if checking a shift
point with a chassis dynamometer, keep in mind that there is a range of error in the chassis
dynamometer indication.
If checking a shift point against the speed indicated on the speedometer, remember to consider the
speedometer correction rate and range of error in the tester indication.
Transmission Revolution Sensor
ITEM TESTER CONNECTION SPECIFIED CONDITION

CONDITION
1-2
Transmission revolution sensor NT 560 to 680 Ω
20°C (68°F)
1-2
Transmission revolution sensor SP2 560 to 680 Ω
20°C (68°F)
Transmission Wire
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL) 10°C (50°F) 5 to 8 kΩ
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL) 25°C (77°F) 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL) 110°C (230°F) 0.22 to 0.28 kΩ
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL) Always 79 Ω to 156 kΩ
1 (E2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
9 (OIL) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
Shift Solenoid Valve
ITEM TESTER CONNECTION SPECIFIED CONDITION

CONDITION
1-2
Shift solenoid valve SL1 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
20°C (68°F)
Solenoid Connector (S1) - Solenoid Body (S1)

Shift solenoid valve S1 11 to 15 Ω
20°C (68°F)

20°C (68°F)

20°C (68°F)

20°C (68°F)
1-2
Shift solenoid valve SL2 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
20°C (68°F)
Solenoid Connector (SR) - Solenoid Body (SR)

Shift solenoid valve SR 11 to 15 Ω
20°C (68°F)
1-2
Shift solenoid valve SLT 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
20°C (68°F)
1-2
Shift solenoid valve SLU 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
20°C (68°F)
Park/Neutral Position Switch
2 (RB) - 6 (PL) Shift lever in P Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Shift lever not in P 10 kΩ or higher
Shift lever in R Below 1 Ω

2 (RB) - 1 (RL)
Shift lever not in R 10 kΩ or higher
2 (RB) - 9 (NL) Shift lever in N Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Shift lever not in N 10 kΩ or higher
Shift lever in D, M, "+" or "-" Below 1 Ω

2 (RB) - 7 (DL)
Shift lever not in D, M, "+" or "-" 10 kΩ or higher
Shift Lever Assembly
1-3 Shift lever not in P
2-3 Shift lever in P
Shift lever in M
8-9
Shift lever held in "+" (Up shift) Below 1 Ω
10 - 11 Shift lever in M
Shift lever in M
12 - 13
Shift lever held in "-" (Down shift)
Shift lever in M
8-9
Shift lever not in "+" 10 kΩ or higher
10 - 11 Shift lever not in M
Shift lever in M
12 - 13
Shift lever not in "-"
Shift Lock Solenoid
4-5 20°C (68°F) 27.6 to 30.5 Ω
Shift Paddle Switch

Pull continuously "+" (Up shift) Below 1 Ω
1-3
Release "+" 10 kΩ or higher
Pull continuously "-" (Down shift) Below 1 Ω

1-4
Release "-" 10 kΩ or higher
Pattern Select Switch
Pattern select (SNOW) switch on Below 1 Ω

6-8
Pattern select (SNOW) switch off 10 kΩ or higher
Pattern select (SPORT) switch on Below 1 Ω

4-8
Pattern select (SPORT) switch off 10 kΩ or higher
Automatic Transmission Unit:
1st and reverse return spring free length Standard: 23.74 mm (0.934 in.)
Rear planetary gear pinion thrust clearance Standard: 0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.00788 to 0.0236 in.)
Rear planetary gear bushing inside diameter Standard: 18.025 mm (0.710 in.)
1st and reverse brake pack clearance 0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.0197 to 0.0315 in.)
Mark 0: 0 mm (0 in.)
Mark 2: 0.2 mm (0.00787 in.)
Mark 4: 0.4 mm (0.01575 in.)
Mark 6: 0.6 mm (0.02362 in.)
Flange thickness (1st and reverse brake)
Mark 8: 0.8 mm (0.03150 in.)
Mark 10: 1.0 mm (0.03937 in.)
Mark 12: 1.2 mm (0.04724 in.)
Mark 14: 1.4 mm (0.05512 in.)
Intermediate shaft runout Standard: 0.03 mm (0.00118 in.)
Standard A: 22.962 to 22.975 mm (0.9041 to 0.9045 in.)

Intermediate shaft diameter
Standard B: 27.759 to 27.775 mm (1.0929 to 1.0935 in.)
Center planetary gear pinion thrust clearance Standard: 0.12 to 0.68 mm (0.00473 to 0.0267 in.)
No. 2 brake pinion return spring free length Standard: 22.66 mm (0.892 in.)
No. 2 brake piston piston stroke 0.6 to 0.9 mm (0.0237 to 0.0354 in.)
Mark 0: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)

Mark 1: 2.1 mm (0.0826 in.)
Mark 2: 2.2 mm (0.0866 in.)
Mark 3: 2.3 mm (0.0905 in.)
Flange thickness (No. 2 brake piston)
Mark 4: 2.4 mm (0.0944 in.)
Mark 5: 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
Mark 6: 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
Mark 7: 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
Brake piston return spring free length Standard: 17.05 mm (0.671 in.)
Front planetary gear pinion thrust clearance Standard: 0.20 to 0.60 mm (0.00788 to 0.0236 in.)
Front planetary gear bushing inside diameter Standard: 48.78 mm (1.92 in.)
No. 1 brake piston piston stroke 0.42 to 0.72 mm (0.0166 to 0.0283 in.)
No. 3 brake piston return spring free length Standard: 15.72 mm (0.619 in.)
Mark 0: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)

Mark 1: 2.2 mm (0.0866 in.)
Flange thickness ( No. 1 brake piston)
Mark 2: 2.4 mm (0.0944 in.)
Mark 3: 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
Oil Pump:
Oil pump body bushing inside diameter Standard: 38.138 mm (1.5015 in.)
Stator shaft bushing inside diameter Standard: 21.527 mm (0.8475 in.)
Body clearance Standard: 0.10 to 0.17 mm (0.00394 to 0.00669 in.)
Tip clearance Standard: 0.070 to 0.150 mm (0.00276 to 0.00590 in.)
Side clearance Standard: 0.02 to 0.04 mm (0.000787 to 0.00157 in.)
Mark 0: 9.946 to 9.952 mm (0.39157 to 0.39181 in.)

Mark 1: 9.953 to 9.959 mm (0.39185 to 0.39209 in.)
Mark 2: 9.960 to 9.966 mm (0.39213 to 0.39236 in.)
Drive and driven gear thickness Mark 3: 9.967 to 9.973 mm (0.39240 to 0.39264 in.)
Mark 4: 9.974 to 9.980 mm (0.39268 to 0.39291 in.)
Mark 5: 9.981 to 9.987 mm (0.39295 to 0.39319 in.)
Mark 6: 9.988 to 9.994 mm (0.39323 to 0.39346 in.)
Clutch Drum And Input Shaft:
Direct clutch return spring free length Standard: 20.02 mm (0.788 in.)
Reverse clutch return spring free length Standard: 21.03 mm (0.828 in.)
Direct clutch pack clearance 0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.0197 to 0.0314 in.)
Mark 0: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)

Mark 1: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 2: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 3: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Flange thickness (Direct clutch) Mark 4: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Mark 5: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
Mark 6: 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
Mark 7: 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
Mark 8: 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
Reverse clutch pack clearance 0.4 to 0.7 mm (0.0158 to 0.0275 in.)
Mark 0: 2.4 mm (0.0945 in.)

Mark 1: 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
Mark 2: 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
Mark 3: 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
Mark 4: 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
Mark 5: 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
Flange thickness (Reverse clutch)
Mark 6: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
Mark 7: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 8: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 9: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Mark A: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Mark B: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
Forward clutch return spring free length Standard: 26.29 mm (1.04 in.)
Forward clutch pack clearance 0.56 to 0.86 mm (0.0221 to 0.0338 in.)
Mark 0: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)

Mark 1: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 2: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 3: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Mark 4: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Flange thickness (Forward clutch)
Mark 5: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
Mark 6: 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
Mark 7: 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
Mark 8: 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
Mark 9: 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
Coast clutch pack clearance 0.4 to 0.7 mm (0.0158 to 0.0275 in.)
Mark 0: 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)

Mark 1: 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
Mark 2: 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
Mark 3: 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
Mark 4: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
Flange thickness (Coast clutch)
Mark 5: 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
Mark 6: 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
Mark 7: 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
Mark 8: 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
Mark 9: 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
Forward clutch hub inside diameter Standard: 23.037 to 23.062 mm (0.9070 to 0.9079 in.)
Reverse clutch hub inside diameter Standard: 33.312 to 33.337 mm (1.3115 to 1.3125 in.)
Accumulator:
SPRING FREE LENGTH/OUTER DIAMETER MM (IN.) COLOR
B 1 (Outer) 46.36 (1.8252)/17.10 (0.6732) Natural
C2 65.07 (2.5618)/16.2 (0.6378) Pink
B3 64.5 (2.539)/19.5 (0.768) Orange
C 3 (Inner) 44.0 (1.732)/14.0 (0.551) Yellow
C 3 (Outer) 76.65 (3.0178)/20.10 (0.7913) White
Output Shaft Bearing:
Clearance 0.02 to 0.12 mm (0.000787 to 0.00472 in.)
No. 1: 3.80 mm (0.150 in.)

No. 2: 3.85 mm (0.152 in.)
No. 3: 3.90 mm (0.154 in.)
No. 4: 3.95 mm (0.156 in.)
No. 5: 4.00 mm (0.157 in.)
No. 6: 4.05 mm (0.159 in.)
Flange thickness
No. 7: 4.10 mm (0.161 in.)
No. 8: 4.15 mm (0.163 in.)
No. 9: 4.20 mm (0.165 in.)
No. 10: 4.25 mm (0.167 in.)
No. 11: 4.30 mm (0.169 in.)
No. 12: 4.35 mm (0.171 in.)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PME00GX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

(2013 FR-S)
Overflow plug x Automatic transmission assembly 20 204 15
Refill plug x Automatic transmission assembly 39 400 29
48
Transmission revolution sensor x Automatic transmission assembly 5.4 55
in.*lbf
ATF temperature sensor x Transmission valve body assembly 10 102 7
57
Valve body wire harness clamp x Transmission valve body assembly 6.4 65
in.*lbf
Valve body oil strainer assembly x Transmission valve body assembly 10 102 7
Automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly x Automatic transmission 62

7.0 71
assembly in.*lbf
Shift solenoid valve (S2) x Transmission valve body assembly 10 102 7
Shift solenoid valve (SR) x Transmission valve body assembly 10 102 7
57
Lock plate x Transmission valve body assembly 6.4 65
in.*lbf
Transmission valve body assembly x Automatic transmission assembly 11 112 8
Detent spring x Transmission valve body assembly 10 102 7
61
Lock nut x Park/neutral position switch assembly 6.9 70
in.*lbf
Park/neutral position switch assembly x Automatic transmission assembly 13 130 9
Transmission control shaft lever RH x Park/neutral position switch assembly 16 163 12
Transmission oil cooler bracket x Transmission oil cooler 23 235 17
Transmission oil cooler x Body 23 235 17
Floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly x Shift lever assembly 18 184 13
Floor shift assembly x Body 18 184 13
Shift Paddle Switch (Transmission Shift Switch Assembly) x Steering wheel 15

1.7 18
assembly in.*lbf
Oil cooler tube x Automatic transmission assembly 21 214 16
Automatic transmission assembly x Engine 50 510 37
Rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator x Automatic transmission assembly 40 408 30
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator 40 408 30
Rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator x Body 65 663 48
Exhaust pipe bracket x Automatic transmission assembly 23 235 17
Torque converter assembly x Drive plate 25 255 18
Vacuum tube connector hose x Engine 18 184 13
No. 2 engine hanger x Engine 21 214 16
Wire harness clamp bracket x No. 2 engine hanger 10 102 7
Ground cable x Automatic transmission assembly 13 133 10
Oil pump assembly x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly 21 214 16
65
Parking lock pawl bracket x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly 7.3 74
in.*lbf
Extension housing sub-assembly x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly 34 345 25
Automatic transmission housing x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly

34 347 25
(for Bolts A and B)
Automatic transmission housing x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly

57 581 42
(for Bolt C)
Automatic transmission case plug (TORX) x Automatic transmission case sub-

39 400 29
assembly
Automatic transmission case plug (Hexagon) x Automatic transmission case 65

7.4 75
sub-assembly in.*lbf
48
Automatic transaxle breather tube x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly 5.4 55
in.*lbf
Oil cooler tube union x Automatic transmission case sub-assembly 39 393 28
66
TCM bracket x TCM 7.5 77
in.*lbf
66
TCM x Body 7.5 77
in.*lbf
Stator shaft assembly x Front oil pump body sub-assembly 11 112 8

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002E8X03DX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: WINDOW / GLASS: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
Power window regulator motor assembly x Front door window regulator sub- 53
6.0 61
assembly in.*lbf
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000313803JX
Title: SPECIFICATIONS: WIPER / WASHER: TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (2013 FR-S)
FRONT WIPER MOTOR
Windshield wiper arm and blade assembly LH x Front wiper motor and link
22 224 16
assembly
Windshield wiper arm and blade assembly RH x Front wiper motor and link
22 224 16
assembly
53
Front wiper motor and link assembly x Body 6.0 61
in.*lbf
66
Windshield wiper link assembly x Windshield wiper motor assembly 7.5 77
in.*lbf
75
Windshield wiper motor assembly x Front wiper crank sub-assembly 8.5 87
in.*lbf
WASHER MOTOR
66
Front fender liner LH x Front bumper cover 7.5 77
in.*lbf
HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR
##
Headlight washer actuator sub-assembly LH x Front bumper side support LH ## ##
in.*lbf
##
Headlight washer actuator sub-assembly RH x Front bumper side support RH ## ##
in.*lbf
##
Clamp x Washer jar ## ##
in.*lbf
35
Headlight cleaner control relay x Washer jar 4.0 41
in.*lbf
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 K From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZR01CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZQ01TX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 3 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 3 clamps and install the No. 3 antenna cord sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the amplifier antenna assembly.
(b) Place the amplifier antenna cord in the amplifier

antenna cutout.
(c) Install the amplifier antenna assembly with the nut.
Torque: 4.5 N·m (46 kgf·cm, 40in·lbf)

*1 Nut
*2 Amplifier Antenna Cord
3. INSTALL RADIO ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZS01UX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AMPLIFIER ANTENNA: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE ROOF HEADLINING ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE RADIO ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE AMPLIFIER ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the connector.
(b) Remove the nut.
(c) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the amplifier

antenna assembly.
4. REMOVE NO. 3 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Disengage the 3 clamps and remove the No. 3
antenna cord sub-assembly.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 R From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000012A606KX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 U From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000012AB0ADX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: AUDIO AND VISUAL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZ301FX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 G From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020Q204DX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(a) With the speaker installed, check that there is no looseness or other abnormalities.
(b) Check that there is no foreign matter in the speaker, no tears on the speaker cone or other
abnormalities.
(c) Measure the resistance of the speaker.
Standard Resistance:
TESTER CONDITION SPECIFIED

CONNECTION CONDITION
1-2 Always 3.4 to 4.6 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the speaker.

*a
(Front No. 1 Speaker Assembly)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZ201QX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the RH and LH sides.

The procedure described below is for the LH side.
1. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the front No. 1 speaker assembly with the 3 screws.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the speaker cone.
(b) Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. INSTALL DOOR ARMREST COVER

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZ401QX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: FRONT DOOR SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE DOOR ARMREST COVER
2. REMOVE FRONT DOOR TRIM BOARD SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 3 screws and front No. 1 speaker assembly.
NOTICE:
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003AW400VX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VEM01UX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION

(a) Check that there is no foreign matter in the front No. 2 speaker assembly, no tears on the front
No. 4 speaker assembly cone or other abnormalities.
(b) Measure the resistance of the front No. 2 speaker

assembly.
1 (+) - 2 (+) Always 3.4 to 4.6 Ω
3 (-) - 4 (-) Always 3.4 to 4.6 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 2

speaker assembly.

*a
(Front No. 2 speaker assembly)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VEL02GX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH and LH sides.

The procedure listed below is for the RH side.

(a) Engage the 3 claws to install the front No. 2 speaker assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the cone part of the speaker.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VEO02CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 6 Speakers): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 claws and remove the front No. 2

speaker assembly from the No. 2 instrument speaker
panel sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003AW400WX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VEM01VX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION

(a) Check that there is no foreign matter in the front No. 3 speaker assembly, no tears on the front
No. 3 speaker assembly cone or other abnormalities.
(b) Measure the resistance of the front No. 3 speaker

assembly.
1-2 Always 3.7 to 4.7 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the front No. 3

speaker assembly.

*a
(Front No. 3 speaker assembly)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VEL02HX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:


(a) Connect the connector.
(b) Install the front No. 3 speaker assembly with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
2. INSTALL NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VEO02DX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (for 8 Speakers): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the front No. 3 speaker

assembly.
NOTICE:
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001Q0002AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZZ03CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL MICROPHONE COVER

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the microphone cover.
2. INSTALL MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the microphone assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001Q0103CX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: MICROPHONE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE MICROPHONE ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the microphone

assembly.
3. REMOVE MICROPHONE COVER
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the microphone

cover.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004O0U001X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ZDZ019X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NOISE FILTER
(a) Measure the resistance of the noise filter according to

the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION

CONNECTION
1-2 Always 10 kΩ or higher
1-4 Always Below 1 Ω

*a
(Noise Filter)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000042IC00MX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NOISE FILTER

(a) Engage the guide and install the radio setting condenser.
(b) Engage the 2 clamps.
(c) Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
3. INSTALL NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL LH

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000042IE00LX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: NOISE FILTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL LH
2. REMOVE NO. 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE NOISE FILTER

(b) Disengage the 2 clamps.
(c) Disengage the guide and remove the noise filter.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004MZ8007X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004O9Y003X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(a) With the rear speaker assembly installed, check that there is no looseness or other
abnormalities.
(b) Check that there is no foreign matter in the rear speaker assembly, no tears on the rear
speaker assembly cone or other abnormalities.
(c) Measure the resistance of the rear speaker assembly.
1-2 Always 5.1 to 6.9 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the rear

speaker assembly.

*a
(Rear speaker assembly)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004MZ700AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the rear speaker assembly with the 2 screws.
NOTICE:
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER
3. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER
4. INSTALL REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
5. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE
6. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004MZ900AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: QUARTER TRIM SPEAKER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. DISCONNECT FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP
HINT:
Disconnect the front door opening trim weatherstrip to the extent that allows the removal of the
luggage compartment trim cover.
2. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE
3. REMOVE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY
4. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER
5. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER
6. REMOVE REAR SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 2 screws and the rear speaker assembly.
NOTICE:
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZU02AX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000024DA09GX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Align the locating tape of the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly as shown in the illustration, and
then engage the 8 clamps.
*1 No. 2 Antenna Cord Sub-assembly *2 Marking Line
*a End of Roof Headlining Assembly - -
Adhesive Tape Locating Tape
(b) Fix the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly on the roof headlining assembly with adhesive tape as
HINT:
Fix the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly in the order shown in the illustration.
When applying the 2nd tape, remove the looseness of the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly by
pulling it in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
3. INSTALL ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 9 clamps and install the antenna cord sub-assembly.
(b) Install the floor mat.

4. INSTALL AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001OGD05KX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA CORD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Peel back the floor carpet LH side.
(b) Disengage the 9 clamps and remove the antenna cord

sub-assembly.
4. REMOVE NO. 2 ANTENNA CORD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 2 adhesive tapes.
(b) Disengage the 8 clamps and remove the No. 2 antenna cord sub-assembly from the roof
headlining.
Adhesive Tape - -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004MZB002X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004MZA008X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the roof antenna pole sub-assembly in the

direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration to
install it.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004MZC008X
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: RADIO ANTENNA POLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE ROOF ANTENNA POLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the roof antenna pole sub-assembly in the

direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration to
remove it.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZF01DX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZE01OX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the No. 1 amplifier bracket with the 4 screws.
(b) Install the stereo component amplifier assembly with bracket with the 3 nuts.
(c) Connect the 2 connectors to the stereo component amplifier assembly with bracket.
(d) Engage the clamp and connect the wire harness to the stereo component amplifier cover.
(e) Install the clip and connect the rear seat back cover.
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

(a) Install the luggage compartment floor mat.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PZG01OX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

(a) Remove the luggage compartment floor mat.
2. REMOVE STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clip and separate the rear seat back
cover.
(b) Disconnect the clamp and the wire harness from the
stereo component amplifier cover.
(c) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the stereo

component amplifier.
(d) Remove the 3 nuts and the stereo component
amplifier.
(e) Remove the 4 screws and No. 1 amplifier bracket.
*a LH Side
*b RH Side
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001TAC01LX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001TAB01YX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 1 STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the No. 1 stereo jack adapter assembly.
2. INSTALL FRONT CONSOLE BOX COVER

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001TAD01YX
Title: AUDIO / VIDEO: STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE FRONT CONSOLE BOX COVER
2. REMOVE NO. 1 STEREO JACK ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the No. 1 stereo

jack adapter assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIT023X
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIS021X
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
Use the same procedure for RH and LH sides.

The procedure listed below is for LH side.
1. INSTALL NO. 1 FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE

(a) Temporarily install the NO. 1 front flexible hose with a new clip.
NOTICE:
Securely install the clip.
(b) Hold the NO. 1 front flexible hose with a wrench using a union nut wrench.
NOTICE:
Do not bend or damage the brake tube.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt and dust to enter the brake tube from the
connecting point.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where a union nut wrench is
combined with a torque wrench .
(c) Connect the No. 1 front flexible hose to the front shock absorber assembly with the bolt.
(d) Install the No. 1 flexible hose to the disc brake cylinder assembly with 2 new gaskets and the
new union bolt.
2. ADD BRAKE FLUID
3. BLEED BRAKE LINE
4. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEAK
5. INSPECT FLUID LEVEL
6. INSTALL FRONT WHEEL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIU01XX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE FRONT WHEEL
2. DRAIN BRAKE FLUID
NOTICE:
Immediately wash off any brake fluid that comes into contact with any painted surfaces.
3. REMOVE NO. 1 FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the bolt and separate the No. 1 front flexible
hose from the front shock absorber assembly.
(b) Remove the union bolt, 2 gaskets and No. 1 front

flexible hose.
(c) Hold the No. 1 flexible hose with a wrench and

disconnect the brake tube using a union nut wrench.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt and dust
to enter the brake tube from the connecting position.
(d) Remove the clip.
(e) Remove the No. 1 front flexible hose.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIF02EX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIH02BX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE CYLINDER BOOT
(a) Remove the 2 cylinder boots.
NOTICE:
To prevent damage to the front disc brake piston,
remove the boot by hand, and not using a
screwdriver or the like.
*1 Cylinder Boot
*2 Front Disc Brake Piston
2. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PISTON
(a) Place a wooden block between the front disc brake

piston and disc cylinder.
*1 Wooden Block
*a 30 mm (1.811 in.)
(b) Slowly apply compressed air to remove the 2 front disc brake pistons from the cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not place your fingers in front of the front disc brake piston when applying compressed
air.
NOTICE:
Do not spatter the brake fluid.
HINT:
If the front disc brake piston has been damaged, replace it with a new one.
(c) Remove the wooden block.

3. REMOVE PISTON SEAL
(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective

tape, remove the 2 piston seals from the disc brake
cylinder.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inner surface or piston seal
groove of the cylinder.
4. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Remove the front disc brake bleeder plug cap from the front disc brake bleeder plug.
5. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG

(a) Remove the front disc brake bleeder plug.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010KR014X
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. CHECK BRAKE CYLINDER AND PISTON

(a) Check the cylinder bore and piston for rust and scoring. If necessary, replace the disc brake
cylinder and piston.
2. CHECK PAD LINING THICKNESS
(a) Using a ruler, measure the pad lining thickness.
Standard thickness:
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
Minimum thickness:
11.0 mm (0.4331 in.)
If the pad lining thickness is lower/under the

minimum, replace the pad.
3. CHECK DISC THICKNESS
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the disc thickness.
Standard Thickness:
24.0 mm (0.945 in.)
Minimum Thickness:
22.0 mm (0.866 in.)
4. CHECK DISC RUNOUT
(a) Check the bearing play in the axial direction and

check the axle hub runout .
(b) Tighten the disc with the 5 nuts.
(c) Using a dial indicator, measure the disc runout 10 mm (0.394 in.) away from the outer edge of
the front disc.
*1 Dial Indicator
Maximum disc runout:

0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not bring the magnetic base near the axle hub and speed sensor.
Set the magnetic base on the shock absorber.
If the runout exceeds the maximum value, change the installation positions of the disc and axle
to make the minimum runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum even when the installation
positions are changed, replace the front disc.
(d) Remove the 5 hub nuts and front disc.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIE02MX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL FRONT DISC

(a) When reusing the disc
(1) Align the matchmarks placed when removing, and install the front disc to the axle hub.
(b) When replacing the front disc
(1) Install a new front disc to the axle hub and measure the disc runout .
(c) Temporarily tighten the hub nut and fix the front disc to the axle hub.
2. INSTALL CARRIER
(a) Install the carrier with the 2 new bolts.
3. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the inner face of the 2 new front disc
brake cylinder slide bushes as shown in the illustration.
Lithium Soap Base Glycol Grease
4. INSTALL BUSH
(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the contact surface of the No. 2 front
disc brake cylinder slide pin with a new bush.
(b) Install the bush to the No. 2 front disc brake cylinder slide pin.
5. INSTALL NO. 2 FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the No. 2
front disc brake cylinder slide pin, as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the No. 2 front disc brake cylinder slide pin to the carrier.
6. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the front
disc brake cylinder slide pin, as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the front disc brake cylinder slide pin to the carrier.
7. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (LOWER)

(a) Apply MP grease to the front disc brake pad support plate (lower) as shown in the illustration.
MP grease
8. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (UPPER)
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the front disc brake pad support plate (lower).
9. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply disc brake grease to both sides of the shim.
Disc Brake Grease
(b) Install the covers (shim) to each front disc brake pad.
(c) Install the disc brake pads, covers (shim) and shims to the carrier.
*1 Cover (Shim) *2 Shim
*3 Disc Brake Pad - -
10. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the front disc brake cylinder assembly LH to

the carrier with the 2 bolts.

11. CONNECT NO. 1 FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Install the No. 1 front flexible hose to the disc brake cylinder assembly with 2 new gaskets and
the new union bolt.
12. ADD BRAKE FLUID
13. BLEED BRAKE LINE
14. INSPECT FLUID LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIJ02DX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG

(a) Temporarily install the front disc brake bleeder plug to the front disc brake cylinder assembly
LH.
2. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Install the front disc brake bleeder plug cap on the front disc brake bleeder plug.
3. INSTALL PISTON SEAL

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of 2 new
piston seals.
(b) Securely install the 2 piston seals into the grooves of the disc brake cylinder.
NOTICE:
Securely install the piston seal into the groove of the disc brake cylinder.
4. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE PISTON

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of a new
cylinder boot as shown in the illustration.
*1 Cylinder Boot
*2 Front Disc Brake Piston
(b) Securely install the cylinder boot into the grooves of the front disc brake piston.
(c) Apply a light of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the 2 front disc
brake pistons and install them to the front disc brake cylinder LH.
NOTICE:
Do not install the piston forcibly in the disc brake cylinder.
5. INSTALL CYLINDER BOOT

(a) Securely install the cylinder boot into the groove of the front disc brake cylinder LH.
*1 Cylinder Boot *2 Front Disc Brake Cylinder Assembly LH
*3 Front Disc Brake Piston - -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIG02JX
Title: BRAKE (FRONT): FRONT BRAKE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

The procedure listed below is for the LH side.
NOTICE:
3. DISCONNECT NO. 1 FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the union bolt, 2 gaskets and disconnect the

No. 1 front flexible hose from the disc brake cylinder
assembly LH.
4. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and front disc brake cylinder sub-
assembly.
5. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD

(a) Remove the disc brake pads from the carrier.
(b) Remove the covers (shims) and shims from each pad.
*1 Cover (shim) *2 Shim
*3 Disc Brake Pad - -
6. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (UPPER)
(a) Remove the front disc brake pad support plate

(upper) from the carrier.
7. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE (LOWER)
(a) Remove the front disc brake pad support plate (lower)
from the carrier.
8. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE

PIN
(a) Remove the front disc brake cylinder slide pin from
the carrier.
9. REMOVE NO. 2 FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN
(a) Remove the No. 2 front disc brake cylinder slide pin
from the carrier.
10. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH
(a) Remove the 2 front disc brake cylinder slide bushes

from the carrier.
11. REMOVE BUSH

tape, remove the bush from the pin (B).
*1 Protective Tape
12. REMOVE CARRIER
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and carrier.
13. REMOVE FRONT DISC
(a) Place matchmarks on the front disc and front axle

hub.
HINT:
It is not necessary when replacing the disc.
*a Matchmark
(b) Remove the front disc.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIW01CX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIV017X
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR LEFT FLEXIBLE HOSE

(a) Connect the rear left flexible hose with a new clip.
NOTICE:
Securely install the clip.
(b) Hold the rear left flexible hose with a wrench and connect the brake tube to the rear left flexible
hose using a union nut wrench.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt and dust to enter the brake tube from the
connecting position.
Use the formula to calculate special torque wrench is combined with a torque wrench .
(c) Connect the rear left flexible hose to the rear carrier LH with the bolt.
(d) Connect the rear left flexible hose to the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH with a new 2
gaskets and the new union bolt.
2. ADD BRAKE FLUID
3. BLEED BRAKE LINE
6. INSTALL REAR WHEEL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIX015X
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE FLEXIBLE HOSE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR WHEEL
3. REMOVE REAR LEFT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the union bolt and 2 gaskets, and disconnect

the rear left flexible hose from the rear disc brake
cylinder LH.
*A Solid Disc Brake
*B Ventilated Disc Brake
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the rear left flexible
hose from the rear carrier LH.
(c) Hold the rear left flexible hose with a wrench and
disconnect the brake tube using a union nut wrench.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt and dust
to enter the brake tube from the connecting position.
(d) Remove the clip.
(e) Remove the rear left flexible hose.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIL015X
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIN00YX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE PISTON
(a) Place a wooden block between the rear disc brake

piston and disc brake cylinder.
*1 Wooden Block
*a 30 mm (1.1811 in.)
(b) Slowly apply compressed air to remove the disc brake piston.
CAUTION:
Do not place your fingers in front of the piston when using compressed air.
NOTICE:
Do not spatter brake fluid.
2. REMOVE CYLINDER BOOT

tape, remove the cylinder boot from the disc brake
cylinder.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inner surface or groove of the
cylinder.
*1 Protective Tape
3. REMOVE PISTON SEAL

tape, remove the piston seal.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inner surface or piston seal
groove of the cylinder.
4. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Remove the rear disc brake bleeder plug cap from the rear disc brake bleeder plug.
5. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG

(a) Remove the rear disc brake bleeder plug from the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ED100LX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. CHECK BRAKE CYLINDER AND PISTON

(a) Check the cylinder bore and piston for rust and scoring.
2. INSPECT PAD LINING THICKNESS
(a) Using a ruler, measure the pad lining thickness.
SPECIFICATION MINIMUM STANDARD

THICKNESS THICKNESS
Solid Type 1.5 mm (0.059 in.) 9.0 mm (0.354 in.)
Ventilated Type 1.5 mm (0.059 in.) 11.0 mm (0.433 in.)
3. INSPECT DISC THICKNESS
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the disc thickness.
SPECIFICATION MINIMUM STANDARD

THICKNESS THICKNESS
8.5 mm (0.3346 10.0 mm (0.3937

Solid Type
in.) in.)
16.5 mm (0.6496 18.0 mm (0.7087

Ventilated Type
in.) in.)
4. INSPECT DISC RUNOUT
(a) Check the bearing play in the axial direction and

check for the axle hub runout .
(b) Tighten the disc with the 5 nuts.
(c) Using a dial indicator, measure the disc runout 10 mm (0.394 in.) away from the outer edge of
the rear disc.
*1 Dial Indicator
Maximum disc runout:

0.05 mm (0.0020 in.)
NOTICE:
If the runout exceeds the maximum value, change the installation positions of the disc and axle
to make the minimum runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum even when the installation
positions are changed, replace the front disc.
(d) Remove the 5 hub nuts and rear disc.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIK01IX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the inner face of a new rear disc brake
cylinder slide bush.
HINT:
Apply at least 0.3 g (0.01 oz.) of lithium soap base glycol grease to each rear disc brake cylinder
slide bush.
(b) Install the 2 rear disc brake cylinder slide bushes to the caliper support bracket.
2. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE REAR CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the contact face between a new bush
and rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin.
*1 rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin
*2 Bush
(b) Install the new bush to the rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin.
(c) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to entire circumference of the rear disc
brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin and fitting part.
(d) Install the rear disc brake rear cylinder rear disc brake cylinder slide pin to the caliper support
bracket.
3. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to entire circumference of the rear disc
brake cylinder slide pin and fitting part.
(b) Install the rear disc brake cylinder slide pin to the caliper support bracket.
4. INSTALL REAR DISC

(a) Align the matchmarks placed when removing, install the rear disc to the axle hub.
HINT:
When using a new rear disc, install it so that rear disc runout is minimum.
5. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE
6. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING HOLE PLUG

(a) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug to the rear disc.
7. INSTALL CALIPER SUPPORT BRACKET

(a) Install the caliper support bracket with the 2 new bolts.

(b) Apply a light of lithium soap base glycol grease to contact section of the rear disc brake pad
support plate with the rear disc brake pad.
8. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE

(a) Apply a light of lithium soap base glycol grease to contact section of the rear disc brake pad
support plate with the rear disc brake pad.
(b) Install the rear disc brake pad support plate to the caliper support bracket.
9. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE ANTI SQUEAL SHIM KIT

(a) Apply disc brake grease to the rear disc brake anti squeal shim kit.
*A Solid Disc Brake
*1 Rear Disc Brake Pad Kit
*2 Rear Disc Brake Anti Squeal Shim Kit
Disc Brake Grease
(b) Put the rear disc anti squeal shim kit to each rear disc brake pad.
10. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE PAD KIT

(a) Install the rear disc brake pad kit to the caliper support bracket.
11. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Apply the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH to the caliper support bracket.
12. CONNECT REAR FLEXIBLE HOSE LH

(a) Connect the rear left flexible hose with 2 new gaskets and the new union bolt.
13. ADD BRAKE FLUID
14. BLEED BRAKE LINE

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIP00YX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG

(a) Temporarily install the rear disc brake bleeder plug to the rear disc brake cylinder LH.
2. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE BLEEDER PLUG CAP

(a) Install the rear disc brake bleeder plug cap to the rear disc brake bleeder plug.
3. INSTALL PISTON SEAL

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of a new
piston seal and install it into the groove of the disc brake cylinder.
4. INSTALL CYLINDER BOOT

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to a new cylinder boot, and put it on the
disc brake piston as shown in the illustration.
*1 Piston
*2 Cylinder Boot
Lithium soap base glycol grease
5. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE PISTON
(a) Fit the seal section of the cylinder boot into the
groove of the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH.
*1 Cylinder Boot
*2 Rear disc Brake Piston
*3 Rear disc Brake Cylinder Assembly LH
NOTICE:
Securely fit the seal section of the cylinder boot.
(b) Push in the piston by hand and fit the seal section of the boot into the groove of the rear disc
brake piston.
NOTICE:
Securely fit the seal section of the cylinder boot.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CIM01AX
Title: BRAKE (REAR): REAR BRAKE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

NOTICE:
3. DISCONNECT REAR FLEXIBLE HOSE LH
(a) Remove the union bolt and 2 gaskets and disconnect

the rear left flexible hose from the rear disc brake
cylinder assembly LH.
*A Solid Disc Brake
4. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rear disc brake cylinder LH.
5. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE PAD KIT
(a) Remove the rear disc brake pad kit from the caliper
support bracket.
*A Solid Disc Brake
6. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE ANTI SQUEAL SHIM KIT
(a) Remove the rear disc brake anti squeal shim kit from
each rear disc brake pad.
*A Solid Disc Brake
*1 Rear Disc Brake Pad
*2 Rear Disc Brake Anti Squeal Shim Kit

7. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE PAD SUPPORT PLATE
(a) Remove the 2 rear disc brake pad support plates.
8. REMOVE CALIPER SUPPORT BRACKET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and caliper support bracket.
9. REMOVE REAR DISC
(a) Place matchmarks on the rear disc and rear axle hub.
*a Matchmark
HINT:
It is not necessary when replacing the rear disc.
(b) Release the parking brake and remove the rear disc.
HINT:
If it is difficult to remove the rear disc, insert a

screwdriver through the hole of rear disc and turn the
adjusting screw to contract it.
*a Contract
*b Expand
10. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING HOLE PLUG

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug from the rear from the rear disc.
11. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE PIN
(a) Remove the rear disc brake cylinder slide pin from the
caliper support bracket.
12. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE REAR CYLINDER SLIDE PIN
(a) Remove the rear disc brake rear cylinder slide pin
from the caliper support bracket.
(b) Remove the bush from the rear disc brake rear
cylinder slide pin.
13. REMOVE REAR DISC BRAKE CYLINDER SLIDE BUSH
(a) Remove the 2 rear disc brake cylinder slide bushes

from the caliper support bracket.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000034UW00EX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-
S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058JE000X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013
FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 nuts and remove the brake actuator

assembly from the brake actuator bracket assembly.
2. REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR DAMPER
(a) Remove the 3 brake actuator actuator damper from

the brake actuator bracket assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000034UV01BX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY WITH BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET

(a) Install the brake actuator assembly with brake actuator bracket using the 4 bolts.
(b) Connect the brake actuator connector to the brake actuator.
(c) Turn the locking lever downwards, and engage the

wire harness connector locking claw to lock the
connector.
*a Turn
NOTICE:
Make sure that the actuator connector can be
connected smoothly. Do not allow water, oil or dirt to
enter.
Make sure that the connector is locked securely.
(d) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, tighten 2 brake

tubes.
NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate the special torque
values for situations where the union nut wrench is
(e) Using a union nut wrench 10 mm, tighten the 4 brake

tubes.
NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate the special torque
values for situations where the union nut wrench is
(f) Connect the front speed sensor LH harness clamp to the brake actuator bracket assembly.
(g) Connect the cooler pipe to the clamp.
(h) Connect the 2 harness clamp to the brake actuator bracket.
2. ADD BRAKE FLUID
3. BLEED BRAKE SYSTEM
4. INSPECT FLUID LEAK
5. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
6. INSTALL FRONT FENDER LINER LH
7. INSTALL FRONT WHEEL LH

8. VSC SENSOR NEUTRAL MEMORIZATION
9. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058JF000X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-
S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR DAMPER
(a) Install the 3 new brake actuator dampers (A and B)

to the brake actuator bracket assembly.
2. INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET

ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the brake actuator bracket assembly to the
brake actuator assembly with the 3 new nuts and 3
new washers.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the hole plugs of a new brake
actuator assembly before connecting the brake lines
because the brake actuator assembly is filled with
brake fluid.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000034UX01BX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: BRAKE ACTUATOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Before removing the brake actuator assembly, refer to the "Brake line precaution".
1. REMOVE FRONT WHEEL LH
NOTICE:
Wash off the brake fluid immediately if it comes into contact with a painted surface.
3. REMOVE FRONT FENDER LINER LH
4. REMOVE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY WITH BRAKE ACTUATOR BRACKET
(a) Disconnect the harness clamp from the brake actuator

bracket.
(b) Disconnect the harness clamp from the brake actuator

bracket.
(c) Disconnect the cooler pipe from the clamp.

(d) Disconnect the front speed sensor LH harness clamp
from the brake actuator bracket.
(e) Press the wire harness connector locking claw to

disengage the locking lever, and turn the locking lever
upwards to unlock the connector.
*a Turn
(f) Disconnect the connector from the brake actuator assembly.
(g) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the 2

brake lines from the brake actuator assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to allow the brake fluid to enter the
removed connector.
(h) Using a union nut wrench 10 mm, disconnect the 4

brake lines from the brake actuator assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to allow the brake fluid to enter the
removed connector.
(i) Remove the brake actuator bracket installation bolt.
(j) Remove the 3 bolts from the brake actuator with

bracket.
(k) Remove the brake actuator with bracket from the vehicle body.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the brake tubes.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VKW00YX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR: COMPONENTS
(2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WET03BX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR: INSTALLATION
(2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
The procedures listed below are for the LH side.

Use the same procedures for the RH and LH sides.
1. INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Install the front speed sensor LH with the bolt.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter between the steering knuckle
and the front disc brake dust cover.
(b) Connect the 6 front speed sensor clamps.
NOTICE:
Securely connect the connector.
2. INSTALL FRONT FENDER LINER LH

4. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WEU02RX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: FRONT SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013
FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE FRONT FENDER LINER LH
3. REMOVE FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Disconnect the front speed sensor connector.
(b) Disconnect the 6 clamps.

(c) Remove the bolt and front speed sensor LH from the
steering knuckle.
NOTICE:
Clean the speed sensor installation hole and the
contact surfaces every time the front speed sensor is
removed.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SS0011X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR SPEED SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SRY02NX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR SPEED SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Install the rear speed sensor LH with the 3 bolts.
NOTICE:
Prevent foreign matter from attaching to the rear speed sensor LH tip, installation surface
and sensor body.
(b) Connect the 2 clamps.
NOTICE:
Do not twist the wire harness for the rear speed sensor LH when installing it.
(c) Pull the rear speed sensor LH grommet out from vehicle interior.
NOTICE:
Do not pull the rear speed sensor LH wire harness.
Do not fix the pass-through grommet at an angle.
(d) Connect the rear speed sensor LH connector.
(e) Remove the luggage compartment floor mat.
2. INSTALL REAR WHEEL LH


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SS1028X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: REAR SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-
S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR WHEEL LH
2. REMOVE REAR SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Remove the luggage compartment floor mat.
(b) Disconnect the rear speed sensor LH connector.
(c) Disconnect the rear speed sensor LH grommet and 2 harness clamps from the rear wheel
house.
Text in illustration
Grommet - -
(d) Remove the 2 bolts from the bracket.
(e) Remove the bolt and the rear speed sensor LH.
NOTICE:
Clean the speed sensor installation hole and the
contact surfaces every time the rear speed sensor is
removed.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UWC064X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR: COMPONENTS
(2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UWA09MX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR: INSTALLATION
(2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL STEERING SENSOR
(a) Align the 2 pins and 2 guides, and engage the 6 claws
to install the steering sensor to the spiral cable sub-
assembly.
*1 Guide
*2 Pin
NOTICE:
Do not rotate the spiral cable until the steering
sensor has been attached to it.
2. ALIGN FRONT WHEELS TO FACEING STRAIGHT AHEAD
3. INSTALL SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable sub-assembly with the battery connected and the ignition switch
on (IG).
Do not rotate the spiral cable sub-assembly without the steering wheel with the battery
connected and the ignition switch on (IG).
Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned straight when inspecting the steering
sensor.
(a) Check that the ignition switch is off.
(b) Check that the cable is disconnected from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
Wait at least for 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal to disable the SRS system.
(c) Check that the front wheels are facing straight ahead.
(d) Set the turn signal switch to the neutral position.
NOTICE:
If it is not in the neutral position, the turn signal switch pin may snap.
(e) Engage the 3 claws to install the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly.
(f) Connect the each connector.
4. INSTALL UPPER STEERING COLUMN COVER
5. INSTALL LOWER STEERING COLUMN COVER

6. INSPECT AND ADJUST SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSTALL NO.1 INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
8. INSTALL UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL METER ORNAMENT
9. INSTALL METER HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
10. INSTALL CENTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
12. INSTALL STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
13. INSPECT SRS WARNING LIGHT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UWD09LX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013
FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
2. ALIGN FRONT WHEELS FACING STRAIGHT AHEAD
4. REMOVE CENTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE METER HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL METER ORNAMENT
7. REMOVE NO.1 INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDER COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
8. INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE LOWER STEERING COLUMN COVER
10. REMOVE UPPER STEERING COLUMN COVER
11. REMOVE SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
12. REMOVE STEERING SENSOR
NOTICE:
Remove the steering sensor from the spiral cable sub-assembly only when replacing it or the
steering sensor.
Do not rotate the center section of the steering sensor, as it may deviate from the steering
sensor neutral point.
When replacing the spiral cable sub-assembly:
(a) Disengage the 6 claws, 2 pins and 2 guides to remove

the steering sensor from the spiral cable sub-
assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the guide and claw.
*1 Guide
*2 Pin
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 J From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XIQ0E2X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: ABS
Warning Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S)
ABS Warning Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) is connected to the combination meter assembly via CAN
communication.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NOTICE:
When replacing the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly), perform VSC sensor neutral
memorization .
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(a) Check if a CAN communication system DTC is output .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output. A
DTC is output. B
B INSPECT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK ABS WARNING LIGHT
(a) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(c) Check that the ABS warning light comes on.

OK:
The ABS warning light comes on.
HINT:
If troubleshooting has been carried out according to Problem Symptoms Table, refer back to the table
and proceed to the next step before replacing parts .
NG INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
3. INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the ignition switch off.
(b) Reconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(c) Perform an Active Test of the combination meter assembly (meter CPU) using the Techstream
.
(d) Check the combination meter assembly.

OK:
The ABS warning light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:
NG REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XIH0E3X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: ABS
Warning Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
ABS Warning Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
If any of the following is detected, the ABS warning light remains on:
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector is disconnected from the skid control
ECU (brake actuator assembly).
There is a malfunction in the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) internal circuit.
There is an open in the harness between the combination meter assembly and the skid control
The ABS control system is defective.
HINT:
In some cases, the Techstream cannot be used when the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) is
abnormal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
Inspect the fuses for circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection
procedure.
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

DTC is output. B
2. CHECK IF BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR IS SECURELY CONNECTED
(a) Check if the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector is securely connected.
OK:
The connector is securely connected.
CONNECT CONNECTOR TO ECU CORRECTLY

NG
OK
3. CHECK BATTERY
(a) Check the battery voltage.

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
CHECK OR REPLACE CHARGING SYSTEM

NG COMPONENT OR BATTERY
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE TERMINAL)
(a) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator

assembly) connector.
(b) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage:
A5-25 (+BS) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
A5-25 (+BS) - A5-38 (GND1) Always 11 to 14 V
A5-28 (IG1) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
A5-28 (IG1) - A5-38 (GND1) Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly))
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR

NG CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)
OK
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (GND1 TERMINAL)
(b) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
A5-38 (GND1) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

*a

NG CONNECTOR (GND1 CIRCUIT)
OK
(a) Reconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(b) Perform an Active Test of the combination meter assembly (meter CPU) using the
Techstream .
(c) Check the combination meter assembly.

OK:
The ABS warning light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YHH0E5X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: Brake
Warning Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S)
Brake Warning Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
2. CHECK BRAKE WARNING LIGHT
(c) Check that the brake warning light comes on.

OK:
The brake warning light comes on.
HINT:
(b) Reconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(c) Perform an Active Test of the combination meter assembly (meter CPU) using the Techstream
.
(d) Check the combination meter assembly.

OK:
The brake warning light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YHG0E5X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: Brake
Warning Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
Brake Warning Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
If any of the following is detected, the brake warning light remains on:
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector is disconnected from the skid control
The brake fluid level is insufficient.
The parking brake is applied.
EBD operation is not possible.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
procedure.
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

DTC is output. B
OK:

NG
OK
3. CHECK BATTERY

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V

OK
(a) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator

Standard Voltage:

*a

OK

*a

OK
6. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PARKING BRAKE SWITCH)
(b) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(d) Select the Data List using the Techstream .

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
ON: Parking brake applied

Parking Brake SW Parking brake switch / ON or OFF -
OFF: Parking brake released
(e) Using the Techstream, check the switch operation signal received when the parking brake is
operated.
OK:
When the parking brake is operated, the display changes as shown above.
INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
7. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH
(b) Remove the reservoir filler cap and the strainer.
(c) Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch connector.
(d) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
HINT:
A float is located inside the reservoir. Its position changes according to the brake fluid level.
1-2 Switch OFF (Float up) 1.9 to 2.1 kΩ
1-2 Switch ON (Float down) Below 1 Ω

*a
(Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch (Brake Master Cylinder Sub-assembly))
HINT:
If there is no problem after finishing the above check, adjust the brake fluid level to the MAX level.
REPLACE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY - BRAKE

8.
FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH)
(a) Disconnect the combination meter assembly connector.

D7-17 (LBL) - A59-1 Always Below 1 Ω
D7-17 (LBL) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A59-2 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Reconnect the combination meter assembly connector and the brake fluid level warning
switch connector.
Techstream .

OK:
The brake warning light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:
10. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(b) Disconnect the parking brake switch assembly connector.
(c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
Parking brake switch ON

1 - Body ground Below 1 Ω
(Switch pin free)
Parking brake switch OFF

1 - Body ground 10 kΩ or higher
(Switch pin pushed in)

*a
(Parking Brake Switch Assembly)
REPLACE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK

11.
ASSEMBLY - PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
3B-24 - D31-1 Always Below 1 Ω

3B-24 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
12. INSPECT INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the instrument panel junction block assembly .
(b) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) from the instrument panel junction block
assembly .

*a - -
(Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly)
MB-14 (PKB) - 3B-24 Always Below 1 Ω
MB-14 (PKB) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:
REPLACE INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION

NG BLOCK ASSEMBLY
REPLACE MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
OK GATEWAY ECU)
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 C From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001JD60BOX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: C146C:
Open in ABS Motor Relay Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC C146C Open in ABS Motor Relay Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ABS motor relay supplies power to the pump motor. While the ABS is activated, the skid control ECU
turns the ABS motor relay on to operate the pump motor.
If the voltage supplied to the ABS motor relay (+BM) is too low due to low voltage from the battery or
alternator, the DTC may be stored.
DTC DTC DETECTION CONDITION TROUBLE AREA

NO.
Any of the following is detected:
1. When the ABS motor relay is actuated, voltage is ABS NO. 1 fuse (Fusible
not supplied to the pump motor. link block assembly)
C146C 2. When the ABS motor relay is not actuated, ABS motor relay circuit
voltage in the pump motor is high. ABS motor relay (Brake
3. The skid control ECU judges that pump motor actuator assembly)
operation is abnormal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
procedure.
HINT:
When C1241 is output together with C146C, inspect and repair the trouble areas indicated by C1241
first .
PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ABS MOTOR RELAY)
(a) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(b) Start the engine.
(c) Select the Active Test using the Techstream .

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER DISPLAY TEST PART CONTROL RANGE DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
Motor Relay ABS motor relay Relay ON/OFF Operating sound of motor can be heard
(d) Check the operating sound of the pump motor when operating it using the Techstream.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Operating sound is heard. A
Operating sound is not heard. B
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (+BM

B TERMINAL)
2. RECONFIRM DTC
HINT:
This DTC is stored when a problem is identified in the brake actuator assembly.
The ABS motor relay is in the brake actuator assembly.
Therefore, motor relay inspection and motor relay unit inspection cannot be performed. Be sure to
check if the DTC is output again before replacing the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly).
(a) Clear the DTCs .
(b) Turn the ignition switch off.
(c) Start the engine.
(d) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 30 seconds or more.
(e) Check if the same DTC is output .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC C146C is not output. A
DTC C146C is output. B
HINT:
If a speed signal of 40 km/h (25 mph) or more is received by the skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly) with the ignition switch ON, the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) performs self
diagnosis of the motor circuit.
If the normal system code is output (No DTCs are output), slightly jiggle the connectors, wire
harness, and fuses of the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly).
If any DTCs are output while jiggling a connector or wire harness of the skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly), inspect and repair the connector or wire harness.
If no DTCs were output when reconfirming DTCs, checking for intermittent problems is necessary
because it is suspected that the original DTCs were stored due to the poor connection of a
connector terminal.
B REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
A CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (+BM TERMINAL)
(a) Make sure that there is no looseness at the locking

part and the connecting part of the connector.
(b) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(c) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage:
A5-1 (+BM) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V

*a

NG CONNECTOR (+BM CIRCUIT)
OK
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.
TESTER CONNECTION CONDITION SPECIFIED

CONDITION
A5-13 (GND2) - Body

Always Below 1 Ω
ground

*a


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001NJY01TX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: C146E:
Open in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC C146E Open in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ABS solenoid relay is built into the skid control ECU in the brake actuator assembly.
The ABS solenoid relay supplies power to the ABS and TR(A)C solenoids.
The skid control ECU detects a solenoid relay malfunction by performing a self check and relay operation
check.

NO.
Either of the following is detected: ABS NO. 2 fuse (Fusible link

1. A solenoid relay drive circuit in the skid block assembly)
C146E control ECU is malfunctioning. ABS solenoid relay circuit
2. The solenoid relay cannot be switched ABS solenoid relay (Brake
between on and off. actuator assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
procedure.
HINT:
When C1241 is output together with C146E, inspect and repair the trouble areas indicated by C1241
first .
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (+BS TERMINAL)

Standard Voltage:

*a

NG CONNECTOR (+BS CIRCUIT)
OK

table below.
CONDITION
A5-38 (GND1) - Body

Always Below 1 Ω
ground

*a

OK
3. RECONFIRM DTC
HINT:
This DTC is stored when a problem is identified in the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly).
The solenoid circuits are located in the brake actuator assembly.
Therefore, solenoid circuit inspection and solenoid unit inspection cannot be performed. Be sure to
check if the DTC is output again before replacing the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly).
(b) Clear the DTCs .
(c) Turn the ignition switch off.
(d) Start the engine.
(e) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for 30 seconds or more.
(f) Check if the same DTC is output .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC C146E is not output. A
DTC C146E is output. B
HINT:
If a speed signal of 15 km/h (9 mph) or more is received by the skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly) with the ignition switch ON, the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) performs self
diagnosis of the solenoid circuit.
harnesses, and fuses of the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly).
connector terminal.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XII080X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: C1201:
Engine Control System Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1201 Engine Control System Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
If a malfunction in the SFI system is detected, the operation of VSC and TR(A)C is prohibited by the fail-
safe function. When the signals from the engine are received normally, fail-safe control is canceled.
DTC DTC DETECTION CONDITION TROUBLE

NO. AREA
Engine control system malfunction signal continues for 5 seconds while the vehicle
C1201 SFI system
is being driven.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SFI SYSTEM
(a) Check if an SFI system DTC is output .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
HINT:
B INSPECT SFI SYSTEM
A REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XI80DAX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: C1225-
C1228,C1468,C1469,C146A,C146B: SA1 Solenoid Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1225 SA1 Solenoid Circuit
DTC C1228 STR Solenoid Circuit
DTC C1468 SFR Solenoid Circuit
DTC C1469 SFL Solenoid Circuit
DTC C146A SRR Solenoid Circuit
DTC C146B SRL Solenoid Circuit
DESCRIPTION
These solenoids turn on when signals are received from the skid control ECU and they control the pressure
acting on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force.

NO.
C1225
C1226
C1227
Solenoid circuit
C1228 Solenoid valve signal does not match the check
Solenoid valve (Brake actuator
C1468 result.
assembly)
C1469
C146A
C146B
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC C146E .
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE
1. RECONFIRM DTC
HINT:
These codes are detected when a problem is determined in the brake actuator assembly.
The solenoid circuits are in the brake actuator assembly.
Therefore, solenoid circuit inspection and solenoid unit inspection cannot be performed. Be sure to
check if any DTC is output before replacing the brake actuator assembly.
(d) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTCs C1225, C1226, C1227, C1228, C1468, C1469, C146A and C146B are not output. A
DTCs C1225, C1226, C1227, C1228, C1468, C1469, C146A and/or C146B are output. B
HINT:
The skid control ECU performs self diagnosis of the solenoid circuit after the ignition switch turned
to ON.
harness, and fuses of the brake actuator assembly.
connector terminal.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XIM0L6X
Steering Angle Sensor (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1231 Steering Angle Sensor
DESCRIPTION
The steering sensor signal is sent to the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) via the CAN
communication system. When there is a malfunction in the CAN communication system, it will be detected
by the steering sensor zero point malfunction diagnostic function.

CODE
Steering
sensor
Steering
When the +BS terminal voltage is between 9.6 and 16.5 V, the
C1231 sensor circuit
steering sensor malfunction signal is received.
Steering
sensor power
supply
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
When replacing the steering sensor, perform VSC sensor neutral memorization .
procedure.
HINT:
When DTC U0073 and/or U0126 is output together with DTC C1231, inspect and repair the trouble
areas indicated by DTC U0073 and/or U0126 first .
When the speed sensor or the yaw rate sensor has trouble, DTCs for the steering sensor may be
output even when the steering sensor is normal. When DTCs for the speed sensor or yaw rate
sensor assembly are output together with this steering sensor DTC, inspect and repair the speed
sensor and yaw rate sensor assembly first, and then inspect and repair the steering sensor.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON again and check that no CAN communication system DTC is
output.
(d) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 35 km/h (22 mph), turn the steering wheel to the right and
left, and check that no speed sensor and yaw rate sensor DTCs are output .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No CAN communication system, speed sensor or yaw rate sensor DTC is output. A
CAN communication system DTC is output. B
Speed sensor or yaw rate sensor DTC is output. C
HINT:
If there is a malfunction in the speed sensor or yaw rate sensor, an abnormal value may be output
although the steering sensor is normal.
If speed sensor and yaw rate sensor assembly DTCs are output together with this steering sensor
DTC, inspect and repair the speed and yaw rate sensors first, and then inspect and repair the
steering sensor.
GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (HOW

B TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING)
C REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTC

A
(b) Disconnect the steering sensor connector.
(c) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
D56-4 (IG) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a
(to Steering Sensor)

OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (GROUND TERMINAL)
(b) Disconnect the steering sensor connector.
(c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.

CONDITION
D56-1 (ESS) - Body
Always Below 1 Ω
ground

*a
(to Steering Sensor)

NG CONNECTOR (GROUND CIRCUIT)
OK REPLACE STEERING SENSOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000025HJ01NX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM:
C1234,C1419,C1472,C1474: Yaw Rate Sensor (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1234 Yaw Rate Sensor
DTC C1419 Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit
DTC C1472 Acceleration Sensor
DTC C1474 Forward and Rearward G Sensor
DESCRIPTION
NO.
C1234 Internal failure of the skid control ECU (Yaw rate sensor).
Internal failure of the skid control ECU (Acceleration

C1419
sensor). Skid control ECU (Brake actuator
C1472 Internal failure of the skid control ECU (Lateral G sensor). assembly)
Internal failure of the skid control ECU (Forward and

C1474
backward G sensor).
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
(b) Check that the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) has been installed properly .
OK:
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) should be tightened to the specified torque.
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) should not be tilted.
INSTALL BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY

NG CORRECTLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002N5F02QX
C1237,C1275-C1278: Speed Sensor Rotor Faulty (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1237 Speed Sensor Rotor Faulty
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode

DTC C1275
DTC)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode

DTC C1276
DTC)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode

DTC C1277
DTC)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode

DTC C1278
DTC)
DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) measures the speed of each wheel by receiving signals
from the speed sensor.
These signals are used for recognizing that all four wheels are operating properly.
Therefore, all wheel signals must be equal.
DTCs C1275 to C1278 are cleared when the speed sensor sends a vehicle speed signal or when Test Mode
ends. DTCs C1275 to C1278 are output only in Test Mode.

NO.
Any of the following is detected:
1. Discrepancy among four wheel speed Tire and wheel size

sensor output. Tire deformation
2. Abnormal pulse signals from 3 or Speed sensor rotor
C1237 more sensors. Speed sensor
3. Continuous ABS control is performed Speed sensor circuit
for 60 seconds or more. Skid control ECU (Brake actuator
4. VSC control is performed for 5 assembly)
seconds or more.
C1275 Front speed sensor rotor RH/LH (Front axle

Detected only during Test Mode.
C1276 hub sub-assembly RH/LH)
C1277 Rear speed sensor rotor RH/LH (Rear axle hub

C1278 sub-assembly RH/LH)
HINT:
DTC C1275 is for the front speed sensor RH.

DTC C1276 is for the front speed sensor LH.
DTC C1277 is for the rear speed sensor RH.
DTC C1278 is for the rear speed sensor LH.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTCs C1330, C1331, C1332, C1333, C1464, C1465, C1466 and C1467 for front, and
for rear).
NOTICE:
memorization .
HINT:
When C1330, C1331, C1332, C1333, C1464, C1465, C1466 and/or C1467 is output together with
C1237, inspect and repair the trouble areas indicated by C1330, C1331, C1332, C1333, C1464, C1465,
C1466 and/or C1467 first for front, and/or for rear).
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK TIRES
(a) Check the size and condition of all four wheels .
HINT:
The DTC is output when tire deformation or a difference in tire size is detected.
OK:
The diameter of all four tires and the tire pressure are the same.
REPLACE TIRES SO THAT ALL FOUR TIRES

NG ARE THE SAME SIZE
OK
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SPEED SENSOR)

(c) Select the Data List using the Techstream .

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY CONDITION
FR When driving at constant

Front wheel speed sensor RH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Wheel speed: No large
km/h (0 mph), Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 mph) 0 km/h (0 mph)
Speed fluctuations
FL When driving at constant

Front wheel speed sensor LH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
RR When driving at constant

Rear wheel speed sensor RH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
RL When driving at constant

Rear wheel speed sensor LH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
(d) Check the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
Factors that affect the indicated vehicle speed include tire size, tire pressure, and tire wear. The speed
indicated on the speedometer has an allowable margin of error. This can be tested using a
speedometer tester (calibrated chassis dynamometer). For details about testing and the margin of
error, see the reference chart .
OK:
The speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on the Techstream is similar to the speed
indicated on the speedometer.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (for front) B
NG (for rear) C
B CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
C CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
A
3. PERFORM TEST MODE INSPECTION (SIGNAL CHECK)
(b) Perform the sensor check using the Test Mode procedure .
OK:
All Test Mode DTCs are not output.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (for front) B
NG (for rear) C
B CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
C CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
4. RECONFIRM DTC
(d) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 45 km/h (28 mph) or more for at least 120 seconds.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC C1237 is not output. A
DTC C1237 is output (for front). B
DTC C1237 is output (for rear). C
B REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR
C REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR

5. CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
(b) Check the speed sensor installation.

OK:
There is no clearance between the sensor and the front axle hub sub-assembly.
The installation bolt is tightened properly.
Torque
7.5 N*m (77 kgf*cm, 66 in.*lbf)
NG INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR CORRECTLY
OK
6. CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR TIP
(a) Remove the front speed sensor .
(b) Check the speed sensor tip.

OK:
No scratches or foreign matter on the sensor tip.
NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal after cleaning or replacement .
CLEAN OR REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - FRONT

7.
SPEED SENSOR)
(a) Install the front speed sensor .
(b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the locking part and the connecting part of the
connectors.
(c) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector and the front speed
sensor connector.
for RH
for LH
A5-16 (FR+) - A42-2 (FR+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-16 (FR+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-4 (FR-) - A42-1 (FR-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-4 (FR-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-19 (FL+) - A12-2 (FL+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-19 (FL+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-32 (FL-) - A12-1 (FL-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-32 (FL-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
8. RECONFIRM DTC
(a) Reconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector and the front speed
sensor connector.
(e) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 45 km/h (28 mph) or more for at least 120 seconds.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC C1237 is output. A
DTC C1237 is not output. B
B CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
9. REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR
(b) Replace the front speed sensor .
NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal after replacement .
NEXT
10. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
END
B
11. REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR
(b) Replace the front speed sensor rotor .
HINT:
If the front speed sensor rotor needs to be replaced, replace the front axle hub sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
NEXT
12. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

END
B
A REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
13. CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION

OK:
There is no clearance between the sensor and the rear axle hub sub-assembly.
Torque
7.5 N*m (77 kgf*cm, 66 in.*lbf)
NG INSTALL REAR SPEED SENSOR CORRECTLY
OK
14. CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR TIP
(a) Remove the rear speed sensor .

OK:
NOTICE:
CLEAN OR REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR
NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - REAR SPEED

15.
SENSOR)
(a) Install the rear speed sensor .
connector.
(c) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector and the rear speed
sensor connector.
for RH
for LH
A5-17 (RR+) - G9-2 (RR+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-17 (RR+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-29 (RR-) - G9-1 (RR-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-29 (RR-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-31 (RL+) - H12-2 (RL+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-31 (RL+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-18 (RL-) - H12-1 (RL-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-18 (RL-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
16. RECONFIRM DTC
(a) Reconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector and the rear speed
sensor connector.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
17. REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR
(b) Replace the rear speed sensor .
NOTICE:
NEXT
18. RECONFIRM DTC


Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
END
B
19. REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR ROTOR
(b) Replace the rear speed sensor rotor .
HINT:
If the rear speed sensor rotor needs to be replaced, replace the rear axle hub and bearing assembly.
NOTICE:
NEXT
20. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
END
B

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XW60DXX
Low or High Power Supply Voltage (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1241 Low or High Power Supply Voltage
DESCRIPTION
If a malfunction is detected in the power supply circuit, the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
stores this DTC and the fail-safe function prohibits ABS operation.
This DTC is stored when the +BS terminal voltage meets one of the DTC detection conditions due to a
malfunction in the power supply or charging circuit such as the battery or alternator circuit, etc.
The DTC is canceled when the +BS terminal voltage returns to normal.

NO.
ABS NO. 2
fuse
ECU IG1
fuse
Any of the following is detected: Battery
Charging
1. The vehicle speed is 6 km/h (4 mph) or more and the +BS
system
terminal voltage (soft low voltage) is 9.6 V or less for 1 second
Power
or more.
source
2. The vehicle speed is 6 km/h (4 mph) or more and the +BS
circuit
terminal voltage (hard low voltage) is 6.9 V or less for 1
C1241 Ground
second or more.
circuit
3. The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or more, the +BS
Internal
terminal voltage is 9.6 V or more, the skid control ECU (brake
power
actuator assembly) turns on more than one valve at the same
supply
time within a short period of time and the valve relay supply
circuit of
voltage drop exceeds the threshold.*
the skid
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly)
*: The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) monitors the resistance of the power source line at the
+BS terminal. A malfunction is detected when an abnormality occurs in the +BS terminal wire harness or
its connection and the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) determines that the wiring resistance at
the +BS terminal exceeds the standard resistance.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK BATTERY

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V

OK

Standard Voltage:

*a
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (for +BS circuit) B
NG (for IG1 circuit) C

B CONNECTOR (+BS CIRCUIT)

C CONNECTOR (IG1 CIRCUIT)
A

*a

OK
4. RECONFIRM DTC
(e) Perform a road test.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC C1241 is output. B
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XIG0H7X
Master Cylinder Pressure Sensor Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1246 Master Cylinder Pressure Sensor Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The master cylinder pressure sensor is connected to the skid control ECU in the brake actuator assembly.

NO.
Any of the following is detected: STOP fuse

1. The voltage of the sensor signal is out of Stop light switch circuit
range (below 0.129 V, above 3.29 V). Master cylinder pressure
C1246 2. An abnormality is detected in the skid sensor circuit
control ECU internal sensor test. Master cylinder pressure
3. The sensor signal offset value is out of sensor (Brake actuator
range. assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTCs C1249 .
NOTICE:
memorization .
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK STOP LIGHT OPERATION
(a) Check that the stop lights come on when the brake pedal is depressed, and go off when the
brake pedal is released.
OK:
CONDITION ILLUMINATION CONDITION
Brake pedal depressed. ON
Brake pedal released. OFF
INSPECT LIGHTING SYSTEM (STOP LIGHT

NG CIRCUIT)
OK
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE SENSOR)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY
Master Brake pedal

Master cylinder pressure sensor Reading increases when
Cylinder released: 0.20 to
reading / Min.: 0.00 V, Max.: 5.00 V brake pedal is depressed
Sensor 0.40 V
(d) Check that the brake fluid pressure value of the master cylinder pressure sensor observed on
the Techstream changes when the brake pedal is depressed.
OK:
When the pedal is depressed, the voltage displayed on the Techstream increases.
NG REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
OK
3. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STOP LIGHT SWITCH)
(a) Select the Data List using the Techstream .

ABS/VSC/TRAC
ON: Brake pedal depressed

Stop Light SW Stop light switch / ON or OFF -
OFF: Brake pedal released
(b) Check that the stop light switch display observed on the Techstream change according to
brake pedal operation.
OK:
The Techstream displays on or off according to brake pedal operation.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER

NG SOURCE TERMINAL)
OK
4. RECONFIRM DTC
(d) Drive the vehicle and depress the brake pedal several times to test the stop light circuit.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

(b) Disconnect the noise filter connector.
Standard Voltage:
A13-3 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Noise Filter)

OK

(a) Remove the noise filter .
(b) Inspect the noise filter .
NG REPLACE NOISE FILTER
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NOISE FILTER - STOP LIGHT SWITCH

7.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Make sure that there is no looseness at the locking part and the connecting part of the
connector.
(b) Disconnect the stop light switch assembly connector.
A13-2 - A22-1 Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
8. INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the stop light switch assembly .
(b) Inspect the stop light switch assembly .
NG REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
9. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STP TERMINAL)
connector.
(c) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(d) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage:
Stop light switch ON (Brake pedal depressed) 11 to 14 V*

A5-30 (STP) - Body ground
Stop light switch OFF (Brake pedal released) Below 1.5 V
HINT:
*: The standard voltage value varies depending on the +BS terminal voltage value. The standard
voltage is 85% of the +BS terminal voltage.

*a

NG CONNECTOR (STP CIRCUIT)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XIE0K1X
Open in Stop Light Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1249 Open in Stop Light Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) receives stop light switch signals and uses them to
determine whether or not the brakes are applied.
DTCs may be stored if one of the following occurs:
Stop light switch stuck on/off malfunction.

Accelerator pedal and brake pedal depressed simultaneously.*
HINT:
*: The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) may store this DTC upon judging that a stuck on
malfunction has occurred when the accelerator pedal and brake pedal are depressed simultaneously.
However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

NO.
STOP fuse
Stop light
switch
Any of the following is detected: assembly
Noise
The vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 mph) or more, the accelerator filter
pedal is depressed, the master cylinder pressure is 0.5 MPa Stop light
C1249 (5.09 kgf/cm 2 , 72 psi) or less, and the stop light switch is on switch
for 60 seconds or more. circuit
When the stop light switch is OFF, the master cylinder pressure Skid
is increased. control
ECU
(Brake
actuator
assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
(a) Interview the customer to check if the pedals were depressed simultaneously while driving or
braking.
OK:
The pedals were not depressed simultaneously.
HINT:
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) may store this DTC upon judging that a stuck on
malfunction has occurred when the accelerator pedal and brake pedal are depressed simultaneously.
If the pedals were depressed simultaneously, clear the DTC because it is not a malfunction.
END
NG
OK
2. CHECK STOP LIGHT OPERATION
(a) Check that the stop lights come on when the brake pedal is depressed, and go off when the
brake pedal is released.
OK:
CONDITION ILLUMINATION CONDITION
Brake pedal depressed. ON
Brake pedal released. OFF

NG SOURCE TERMINAL)
OK
3. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STOP LIGHT SWITCH)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
ON: Brake pedal depressed

OFF: Brake pedal released
(d) Check that the stop light switch display observed on the Techstream changes according to
brake pedal operation.
OK:
The Techstream displays on or off according to brake pedal operation.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STP

NG TERMINAL)
OK
4. RECONFIRM DTC
(e) Drive the vehicle and depress the brake pedal several times to test the stop light circuit.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:

Standard Voltage:

*a
(to Noise Filter)

OK
(a) Remove the noise filter .
(b) Inspect the noise filter .
OK

7.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Make sure that there is no looseness at the locking part and the connecting part of the
connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Remove the stop light switch assembly .
(b) Inspect the stop light switch assembly .
OK
(a) Reconnect the stop light switch assembly connector.
connector.
Standard Voltage:

HINT:

*a

OK
10. RECONFIRM DTC
(e) Drive the vehicle and depress the brake pedal several times to test the stop light circuit.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
INSPECT LIGHTING SYSTEM (STOP LIGHT

A CIRCUIT)

connector.
Standard Voltage:

HINT:

*a
HINT:


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XI90O4X
C1271,C1272,C1330,C1331,C1464,C1465: Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode
DTC) (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1271 Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
DTC C1272 Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)
DTC C1330 Open in Front Speed Sensor RH
DTC C1331 Open in Front Speed Sensor LH
DTC C1464 Front Speed Sensor RH
DTC C1465 Front Speed Sensor LH
DESCRIPTION
Each speed sensor detects wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly). These signals are used by the brake control system.
Speed sensor rotors have row of alternating N and S magnetic poles, and their magnetic fields change
when the rotors turn.
Each speed sensor detects that magnetic field change and sends a pulse signal to the skid control ECU
(brake actuator assembly).
DTCs C1271 and C1272 are cleared when the speed sensor sends a vehicle speed signal or when Test
Mode ends. DTCs C1271 and C1272 are output only in Test Mode.
NO.
Front speed sensor RH/LH

C1330 An open or short in the speed sensor Speed sensor circuit
C1331 signal circuit. Sensor installation
Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)

Speed sensor circuit
C1464 An abnormal signal is received from a Front speed sensor rotor RH/LH (Front axle
C1465 wheel speed sensor. hub sub-assembly RH/LH)
Sensor installation

C1271 Sensor installation
C1272 Front speed sensor rotor RH/LH (Front axle
hub sub-assembly RH/LH)
HINT:
DTCs C1271, C1330 and C1464 are for the front speed sensor RH.
DTCs C1272, C1331 and C1465 are for the front speed sensor LH.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FRONT SPEED SENSOR)

ABS/VSC/TRAC

DISPLAY CONDITION
FR When driving at constant

Front wheel speed sensor RH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
FL When driving at constant

Front wheel speed sensor LH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
HINT:
OK:
CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR

NG INSTALLATION
OK
OK:
CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR

NG INSTALLATION
OK
3. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTCs C1330, C1331, C1464 and C1465 are not output. A
DTCs C1330, C1331, C1464 and/or C1465 are output. B
B REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR

4. CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION

OK:
There is no clearance between the sensor and the front axle hub sub-assembly.
Torque
7.5 N*m (77 kgf*cm, 66 in.*lbf)
NG INSTALL FRONT SPEED SENSOR CORRECTLY
OK
5. CHECK FRONT SPEED SENSOR TIP
(a) Remove the front speed sensor .

OK:
NOTICE:
CLEAN OR REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - FRONT

6.
SPEED SENSOR)
(a) Install the front speed sensor .
connectors.
(c) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector and the front speed
sensor connector.
for RH
for LH
A5-16 (FR+) - A42-2 (FR+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-16 (FR+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-4 (FR-) - A42-1 (FR-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-4 (FR-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-19 (FL+) - A12-2 (FL+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-19 (FL+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-32 (FL-) - A12-1 (FL-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-32 (FL-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY (FRONT SPEED SENSOR POWER SOURCE

7.
TERMINAL)
(b) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:
for RH
for LH

CONDITION
A42-2 (FR+) - Body Ignition switch

8 to 14 V
ground ON

CONDITION
A12-2 (FL+) - Body Ignition switch

8 to 14 V
ground ON
*A for RH
*B for LH

*a
(to Front Speed Sensor)
OK
8. RECONFIRM DTC
(a) Reconnect the front speed sensor connector.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTCs C1330, C1331, C1464 and/or C1465 are output. A
DTCs C1330, C1331, C1464 and C1465 are not output. B
9. REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR
(b) Replace the front speed sensor .
NOTICE:
NEXT
10. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
END
B
A
11. REPLACE FRONT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR
(b) Replace the front speed sensor rotor .
HINT:
If the front speed sensor rotor needs to be replaced, replace the front axle hub sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
NEXT
12. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
END
B

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XIA0HBX
C1273,C1274,C1332,C1333,C1466,C1467: Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
(2013 FR-S)
DTC C1273 Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
DTC C1274 Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)
DTC C1332 Open in Rear Speed Sensor RH
DTC C1333 Open in Rear Speed Sensor LH
DTC C1466 Rear Speed Sensor RH
DTC C1467 Rear Speed Sensor LH
DESCRIPTION
Each speed sensor detects the wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU
(brake actuator assembly). These signals are used by the brake control system.
Speed sensor rotors have row of alternating N and S magnetic poles, and their magnetic fields change
when the rotors turn.
Each speed sensor detects that magnetic field change and sends a pulse signal to the skid control ECU
DTCs C1273 and C1274 are cleared when the speed sensor sends a vehicle speed signal or when Test
Mode ends. DTCs C1273 and C1274 are output only in Test Mode.
NO.
Rear speed sensor RH/LH

C1332 An open or short in the speed sensor Speed sensor circuit
C1333 signal circuit. Sensor installation

C1466 An abnormal signal is received from a Rear speed sensor rotor RH/LH (Rear axle
C1467 wheel speed sensor. hub sub-assembly RH/LH)
Sensor installation

C1273 Sensor installation
C1274 Rear speed sensor rotor RH/LH (Rear axle
hub sub-assembly RH/LH)
HINT:
DTCs C1273, C1332 and C1466 are for the rear speed sensor RH.
DTCs C1274, C1333 and C1467 are for the rear speed sensor LH.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (REAR SPEED SENSOR)

ABS/VSC/TRAC

DISPLAY CONDITION
RR When driving at constant

Rear wheel speed sensor RH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
RL When driving at constant

Rear wheel speed sensor LH reading / Min.: 0 Vehicle stopped:
Speed fluctuations
HINT:
OK:
NG CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
OK
OK:
NG CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
OK
3. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTCs C1332, C1333, C1466 and C1467 are not output. A
DTCs C1332, C1333, C1466 and/or C1467 are output. B
B REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR

4. CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION

OK:
There is no clearance between the sensor and the rear axle hub sub-assembly.
Torque
7.5 N*m (77 kgf*cm, 66 in.*lbf)
NG INSTALL REAR SPEED SENSOR CORRECTLY
OK
5. CHECK REAR SPEED SENSOR TIP
(a) Remove the rear speed sensor .

OK:
NOTICE:
CLEAN OR REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - REAR SPEED
6.
SENSOR)
(a) Install the rear speed sensor .
connector.
(c) Disconnect the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector and the rear speed
sensor connector.
for RH
for LH
A5-17 (RR+) - G9-2 (RR+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-17 (RR+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-29 (RR-) - G9-1 (RR-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-29 (RR-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-31 (RL+) - H12-2 (RL+) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-31 (RL+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A5-18 (RL-) - H12-1 (RL-) Always Below 1 Ω
A5-18 (RL-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
INSPECT BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY (REAR SPEED SENSOR POWER SOURCE

7.
TERMINAL)
table below.
Standard Voltage:
for RH
for LH

CONDITION
G9-2 (RR+) - Body Ignition switch

8 to 14 V
ground ON

CONDITION
H12-2 (RL+) - Body Ignition switch

8 to 14 V
ground ON
*A for RH
*B for LH

*a
(to Rear Speed Sensor)
OK
8. RECONFIRM DTC
(a) Reconnect the rear speed sensor connector.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

9. REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR
(b) Replace the rear speed sensor .
NOTICE:
NEXT
10. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
END
B
A
11. REPLACE REAR SPEED SENSOR ROTOR
(b) Replace the rear speed sensor rotor .
HINT:
If the rear speed sensor rotor needs to be replaced, replace the rear axle hub and bearing assembly.
NOTICE:
NEXT
12. RECONFIRM DTC

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
END
B

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000027RM01HX
Error in Matching of ECUs (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1288 Error in Matching of ECUs
DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU stores this DTC when the previously learned values in the VSC system and the
engine information sent from the ECM are inconsistent, or when the learning has not completed after the
skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) is replaced with a new one.
DTC NO. DTC DETECTION CONDITION TROUBLE AREA
C1288 ECM does not match. ECM
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
2. RECONFIRM DTC


Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XII07ZX
ECT System Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1294 ECT System Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
If a malfunction in the automatic transmission system is detected, the operation of VSC and TR(A)C is
prohibited by the fail-safe function. When the signals from the automatic transmission are received
normally, fail-safe control is canceled.

NO.
Automatic transmission system malfunction signal continues for 0.5 Automatic transmission
C1201
seconds. system
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
(a) Check if the automatic transmission system DTC is output .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
HINT:
B INSPECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
A REPLACE TCM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001JHK02TX
Skid Control ECU Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1300 Skid Control ECU Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU stores this DTC if malfunctions are found in the circuit inside the ECU by self
diagnosis.
C1300 Internal failure of the skid control ECU. Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE
1. REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) .
HINT:
This DTC is output when the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) detects a malfunction in the
internal circuit.
END
NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003U2400AX
CALIBRATION (2013 FR-S)
CALIBRATION
1. DESCRIPTION
(a) Refer to the table below and then perform the necessary operation according to the part to be
replaced in order to perform calibration.
PARTS TO BE REPLACED NECESSARY OPERATION
Steering sensor
Steering column assembly 1. Perform VSC sensor neutral memorization
Rack and pinion power steering gear assembly
Wheel alignment adjustment

(a) Perform VSC Sensor Neutral Memorization.
NOTICE:
While obtaining the zero point, keep the vehicle stationary and do not vibrate, tilt, move, or shake
it. (Do not start the engine.)
Be sure to perform this procedure on a level surface (with an inclination of less than 1 degree).
HINT:
When VSC sensor neutral memorization is performed, the yaw rate and acceleration sensor and the
steering sensor zero point calibration are performed at the same time.
(1) Turn the ignition switch off.
(2) Check that the steering wheel is centered.
(3) Check that the shift lever is in neutral.
(4) Apply the parking brake by pulling up the parking brake lever.
(5) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(6) Turn the ignition switch on.
(7) Turn the Techstream on.
(8) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Utility / VSC Sensor Neutral
Memorization.
(9) According to the display on the Techstream, perform VSC sensor neutral memorization.
(10) Turn the ignition switch off and disconnect the Techstream.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHS0C2X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: CHECK
FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (2013 FR-S)
CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

1. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
HINT:
A momentary interruption (open circuit) in the connectors and/or wire harness can be detected using
the Data List function of the Techstream.
(d) Turn the Techstream on.
(e) Follow the directions on the Techstream to display the Data List and select areas where momentary
interruption should be monitored.
HINT:
A momentary interruption (open circuit) cannot be detected for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to ON (initial check).
If Error remains displayed for one of the items on the Techstream, check for continuity between the
ECU and the item for which Error is displayed.
If a momentary interruption occurs and Error is displayed on the Techstream, Error will remain
displayed on the Techstream for 1 second after the circuit returns to normal.
ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC

CONDITION NOTE
Error: Voltage
IG Voltage Value IG voltage value decrease detection / Error
low -
Decreased or Normal
Normal: Normal
Error: Voltage
IG Voltage Value IG voltage value increase detection / Error
high -
Increased or Normal
Normal: Normal
(f) While observing the screen, gently jiggle the connector or wire harness.
OK:
Normal is displayed.
HINT:
If the display changes, this indicates that there has been a momentary interruption (open circuit) in
the connector and/or wire harness. In this case, repair or replace the connectors and/or wire
harnesses as one of them is faulty.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHW0BIX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA
LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)
DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
Using the Techstream to read the Data List allows the values or states of switches, sensors, actuators
and other items to read without removing any parts. This non-intrusive inspection can be very useful
because intermittent conditions or signals may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed.
Reading the Data List information early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time.
NOTICE:
In the table below, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not
depend solely on these reference values when deciding whether a part is faulty or not.
(a) Warm up the engine.
(c) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(e) Turn the Techstream on.
(f) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Data List.
(g) According to the display on the tester, read the Data List.
ABS/VSC/TRAC

DISPLAY CONDITION
ON: Warning
ABS Warning light on
ABS warning light / ON or OFF -
Light OFF: Warning
light off
ON: Warning
Brake Warning light on
Brake warning light / ON or OFF -
Light OFF: Warning
light off
ON: Brake pedal

depressed
OFF: Brake
pedal released
ON: Parking
Parking Brake brake applied
Parking brake switch / ON or OFF -
SW OFF: Parking
brake released
Gear position information / "P,N", R, Actual gear

Gear Position* -
1st-6th or Fail position
Shift Lever Shift lever position information / Actual shift lever
-
Position* "P,N", R, D/M or Fail position
Shift ON: During gear

Shift information / ON or OFF -
Information* change
Other: Normal
Inspection mode
Inspection mode / Other or Inspect -
Mode Inspect:
Inspection mode
Number of times ignition switch

Number of IG turned to ON after entering
- -
ON(Inspection) inspection mode / Min.: 0, Max.:
255
Master cylinder pressure sensor Brake pedal

Master Cylinder Reading increases when brake
reading / Min.: 0.00 V, Max.: 5.00 released: 0.20
Sensor pedal is depressed
V to 0.40 V
During
Deceleration Acceleration sensor reading / Min.: -
- deceleration/acceleration:
Sensor 18.30 m/s 2 , Max.: 18.21 m/s 2
Changes continuously
Acceleration sensor 2 reading / During

Deceleration 2
Min.: -18.30 m/s , Max.: 18.21 - deceleration/acceleration:
Sensor2
m/s 2 Changes continuously
Vehicle stopped:
0 °/s
Yaw Rate Yaw rate sensor / Min.: -128 °/s, Turning right: -
-
Sensor Max.: 127 °/s 128 to 0 °/s
Turning left: 0
to 127 °/s
Turning left:
Steering Angle Steering angle sensor / Min.: - Increases
-
Sensor 3276.8°, Max.: 3276.7° Turning right:
Decreases
Lateral G / Min.: -25.10 m/s 2 , During turning: Changes in

Lateral G -
Max.: 24.90 m/s 2 proportion with acceleration
During
Forward and Forward and backward G / Min.: - acceleration/deceleration:
-
Rearward G 25.10 m/s 2 , Max.: 24.90 m/s 2 Changes in proportion with
acceleration
Yaw rate value / Min.: -128 °/s, During turning: Changes in

Yaw Rate Value -
Max.: 127 °/s proportion with yaw
During steering operation:

Steering Angle Steering angle value / Min.: -
- Changes in proportion with
Value 3276.8°, Max.: 3276.7°
steering wheel rotation
ON: Indicator
Slip Indicator light on
Slip indicator light / ON or OFF -
Light OFF: Indicator
light off
Front wheel speed sensor RH
FR Wheel Vehicle stopped: When driving at constant
reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph),
Speed 0 km/h (0 mph) speed: No large fluctuations
Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 mph)
Front wheel speed sensor LH

Vehicle stopped: When driving at constant
FL Wheel Speed reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph),
0 km/h (0 mph) speed: No large fluctuations
Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 mph)
Rear wheel speed sensor RH

RR Wheel Vehicle stopped: When driving at constant
reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph),
Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 mph)
Rear wheel speed sensor LH reading

RL Wheel Vehicle stopped: When driving at constant
/ Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), Max.:
326.4 km/h (202 mph)
Maximum wheel speed sensor

Vehicle stopped: When driving at constant
Vehicle Speed reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph),
0 km/h (0 mph) speed: No large fluctuations
Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 mph)
During
FR Wheel Front wheel RH acceleration / Min.:
Acceleration -200.84 m/s 2 , Max.: 199.27 m/s 2
During
FL Wheel Front wheel LH acceleration / Min.:
Acceleration -200.84 m/s 2 , Max.: 199.27 m/s 2
During
RR Wheel Rear wheel RH acceleration / Min.: -
Acceleration 200.84 m/s 2 , Max.: 199.27 m/s 2
During
RL Wheel Rear wheel LH acceleration / Min.: -
Acceleration 200.84 m/s 2 , Max.: 199.27 m/s 2
FR Wheel ABS Front wheel RH ABS control status / ON: During

-
Ctrl Status ON or OFF control
FL Wheel ABS Front wheel LH ABS control status / ON: During

-
RR Wheel ABS Rear wheel RH ABS control status / ON: During

-
RL Wheel ABS Rear wheel LH ABS control status / ON: During

-
FR Wheel EBD Front wheel RH EBD control status / ON: During

-
FL Wheel EBD Front wheel LH EBD control status / ON: During

-
RR Wheel EBD Rear wheel RH EBD control status / ON: During

-
RL Wheel EBD Rear wheel LH EBD control status / ON: During

-
TRC(TRAC) Ctrl ON: During

TR(A)C control status / ON or OFF -
Status control
TRC(TRAC)
TR(A)C engine control status / ON ON: During
Engine Ctrl -
or OFF control
Status
TRC(TRAC)
TR(A)C brake control status / ON or ON: During
Brake Ctrl -
OFF control
Status
FR Wheel VSC Front wheel RH VSC control status / ON: During

-
FL Wheel VSC Front wheel LH VSC control status / ON: During

-
RR Wheel VSC Rear wheel RH VSC control status / ON: During

-
RL Wheel VSC Rear wheel LH VSC control status / ON: During

-
Engine Engine speed / Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: Engine stopped: When engine speed is
Revolutions 65535 rpm 0 rpm constant: No large fluctuations
Real Engine Real engine torque / Min.: -1024.0

- -
Torque Nm, Max.: 1023.0 Nm
When the During accelerator pedal

Accelerator Percentage of accelerator pedal
accelerator operation: Changes in
Opening Angle opening angle / Min.: 0.0%, Max.:
pedal is proportion with the pedal
% 100.0%
released: 0.0% movement
ON: Solenoid
relay on
Solenoid Relay ABS solenoid relay / ON or OFF -
OFF: Solenoid
relay off
ON: Motor relay

ECB Motor on
ABS motor relay / ON or OFF -
Relay OFF: Motor relay
off
TRC(TRAC)/VSC
Master cut solenoid (SRM2) / ON or
Solenoid ON: Operating -
OFF
(SRM2)
TRC(TRAC)/VSC
Master cut solenoid (SRM1) / ON or
OFF
(SRM1)
TRC(TRAC)/VSC
Master cut solenoid (SRC2) / ON or
OFF
(SRC2)
TRC(TRAC)/VSC
Master cut solenoid (SRC1) / ON or
OFF
(SRC1)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SFRH) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SFRH)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SFRR) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SFRR)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SFLH) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SFLH)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SFLR) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SFLR)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SRRH) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SRRH)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SRRR) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SRRR)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SRLH) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SRLH)
ABS Solenoid
ABS solenoid (SRLR) / ON or OFF ON: Operating -
(SRLR)
IG1 Voltage IG1 voltage value / Min.: 0.00 V, Changes in proportion to

-
Value Max.: 20.00 V battery voltage
MT Voltage Motor voltage value / Min.: 0.00 V, Changes in proportion to

-
Value Max.: 20.00 V battery voltage
Normal: Normal
mode
TRC(TRAC) OFF:
TRC(TRAC)/VSC TR(A)C/VSC OFF mode / Normal,
TR(A)C OFF -
Off Mode TRC(TRAC) OFF or VSC OFF
mode
VSC OFF: VSC
OFF mode
Normal: Normal
VSC SPORT mode / Normal or mode
Sports Mode -
Sports Sports: VSC
SPORT mode
Number of DTC recorded / Min.: 0,

Number of DTC - -
Max.: 255
IG Voltage Error: Voltage

IG voltage value decrease detection
Value low -
/ Error or Normal
Decreased Normal: Normal
Error: Voltage
IG Voltage IG voltage value increase detection
high -
Value Increased / Error or Normal
Normal: Normal
*: for Automatic Transmission
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
Using the Techstream to perform Active Tests allows relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be
operated without removing any parts to operate without removing any parts. This non-intrusive
functional inspection can be very useful because intermittent operation may be discovered before parts
or wiring is disturbed. Performing Active Tests early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic
time. Data List information can be displayed while performing Active Tests.

(f) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Active Test.
(g) According to the display on the tester, perform the Active Test.
ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER TEST PART CONTROL RANGE DIAGNOSTIC

DISPLAY NOTE
Observe
ABS Warning combination
ABS warning light Warning light ON/OFF
Light meter
assembly
Observe
VSC OFF combination
VSC OFF indicator light Indicator light ON/OFF
Indicator Light meter
assembly
Observe
TRC(TRAC) OFF TR(A)C OFF indicator combination
Indicator light ON/OFF
Indicator Light light meter
assembly
Observe
Brake Warning combination
Brake warning light Warning light ON/OFF
Light meter
assembly
Observe
Slip Indicator combination
Slip indicator light Indicator light ON/OFF
Light meter
assembly
Observe
Sports Mode VSC SPORT indicator combination
Indicator light ON/OFF
Indicator Light light meter
assembly
Operating
sound of
Motor Relay ABS motor relay Relay ON/OFF
motor can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS Solenoid solenoid
ABS solenoid (SRLR) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SRLR) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SRLH) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SRLH) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SRRR) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SRRR) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SRRH) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SRRH) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SFLR) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SFLR) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SFLH) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SFLH) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SFRR) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SFRR) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SFRH) Solenoid ON/OFF
(SFRH) (clicking
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
VSC/TRC(TRAC)
Master cut solenoid solenoid
Solenoid Solenoid ON/OFF
(SRM2) (clicking
(SRMR)
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
VSC/TRC(TRAC)
(SRM1) (clicking
(SRMF)
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
VSC/TRC(TRAC)
(SRC2) (clicking
(SRCR)
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
VSC/TRC(TRAC)
(SRC1) (clicking
(SRCF)
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
ABS solenoid (SRLR,
each
SRLH, SRRR, SRRH, Solenoid
SFLR, SFLH, SFRR, SRLR/SRLH/SRRR/SRRH/SFLR/SFLH/SFRR/SFRH
(clicking
SFRH)
sound) can
be heard
Operating
sound of
Master cut solenoid
each
VSC/TRC(TRAC) (SRMR, SRMF, SRCR, Solenoid
solenoid
Solenoid SRCF, SPFL, SPFR, SRMR/SRMF/SRCR/SRCF/SPFL/SPFR/SMR/SMF
(clicking
SMR, SMF)
sound) can
be heard
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHP0DZX
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
When troubleshooting a vehicle with a diagnosis system, the only difference from the usual
troubleshooting procedure is connecting the Techstream to the vehicle and reading various data output
from the skid control ECU.
The skid control ECU records DTCs when it detects a malfunction in itself or in its circuits.
To check for DTCs, connect the Techstream to the DLC3 on the vehicle. The Techstream can be used to
clear the DTCs, activate various actuators, and check the Freeze Frame Data and Data List.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge the battery before proceeding to the next step.
(b) Check the DLC3 .
2. DIAGNOSIS
(a) If the skid control ECU detects a malfunction, the ABS warning, brake warning, and/or slip indicator
lights will come on in order to warn the driver.
(b) The DTCs are simultaneously stored in memory.
The DTCs can be read by connecting the Techstream .
(c) This system has a Test Mode (signal check) function.
The DTCs can be read by connecting the Techstream .
3. WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR LIGHT INITIAL CHECK

(a) Release the parking brake.
NOTICE:
Before releasing the parking brake, move the shift lever to P (for automatic transmission) or set
chocks to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
HINT:
When the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level is low, the brake warning light comes on.
(b) When the ignition switch is turned to ON, check that the ABS warning, brake warning, TR(A)C OFF
indicator, VSC OFF indicator, VSC SPORT indicator and slip indicator lights all come on.
HINT:
If the warning light and indicator light check result is not normal, proceed to troubleshooting for the
ABS warning, brake warning, TR(A)C OFF indicator, VSC OFF indicator, VSC SPORT indicator and
slip indicator light circuits.
If any of the indicators remains on or does not come on, proceed to troubleshooting for the light
circuits listed below.
TROUBLE AREA SEE PROCEDURE
ABS warning light circuit (Remains on)
ABS warning light circuit (Does not come on)
Brake warning light circuit (Remains on)
Brake warning light circuit (Does not come on)
TR(A)C OFF indicator light circuit (Remains on)
TR(A)C OFF indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
VSC OFF indicator light circuit (Remains on)
VSC OFF indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
VSC SPORT indicator light circuit (Remains on)
VSC SPORT indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
Slip indicator light circuit (Remains on)
Slip indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
(1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON, check that the brake warning, TR(A)C OFF indicator,
VSC OFF indicator and VSC SPORT indicator lights turn off after 3 seconds.
(2) When the engine is started, check that the ABS warning and slip indicator lights turn off after 3
seconds.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 S From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001NJG01RX
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART

NOTICE:
Turn the ignition switch off before removing any parts.
HINT:
If no malfunction is found when inspecting parts, inspect the skid control ECU and ground points for
poor connections.
If a trouble code is displayed during the DTC check, inspect the trouble areas listed for that code.
For details, refer to the "See page" reference for the DTC.
When 2 or more DTCs are detected, perform diagnosis for each DTC, one by one until the problem
is identified.
If DTCs were checked using the warning light or indicator light, refer to the tables in DTC
Check/Clear to cross-reference them to the 5-digit DTCs shown in the following tables.
Inspect the fuses and relays before inspecting the trouble areas shown in the following table.
VSC System
DTC CODE DETECTION ITEM SEE PAGE
C1201 Engine Control System Malfunction
C1225 SA1 Solenoid Circuit
C1228 STR Solenoid Circuit
C1231 Steering Angle Sensor
C1234 Yaw Rate Sensor
C1237 Speed Sensor Rotor Faulty
C1241 Low or High Power Supply Voltage
C1246*2 Master Cylinder Pressure Sensor Malfunction
C1249 Open in Stop Light Switch Circuit
C1288 Error in Matching of ECUs
C1294 ECT System Malfunction
C1300 Skid Control ECU Malfunction
C1330 Open in Front Speed Sensor RH
C1331 Open in Front Speed Sensor LH
C1332 Open in Rear Speed Sensor RH
C1333 Open in Rear Speed Sensor LH

C1419 Acceleration Sensor Internal Circuit
C1464*1 Front Speed Sensor RH
C1465*1 Front Speed Sensor LH
C1466*1 Rear Speed Sensor RH
C1467*1 Rear Speed Sensor LH
C1468 SFR Solenoid Circuit
C1469 SFL Solenoid Circuit
C146A SRR Solenoid Circuit
C146B SRL Solenoid Circuit
C146C*1 Open in ABS Motor Relay Circuit
C146E Open in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit
C1472 Acceleration Sensor
C1474 Forward and Rearward G Sensor
U0073 Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off
U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A"
U0101 Lost Communication with TCM
U0126 Lost Communication with Steering Angle Sensor Module
*1, *2:
Even after the trouble areas are repaired, the ABS warning light will not go off unless the following
operations are performed:
*1:
a. Drive the vehicle at 20 km/h (12 mph) for 30 seconds or more and check that the
ABS warning light goes off.
b. Clear the DTC.
*2:
a. Keep the vehicle stationary for 5 seconds or more and depress the brake pedal
lightly 2 or 3 times.
b. Drive the vehicle at a vehicle speed of 50 km/h (31 mph) and keep depressing the
brake pedal strongly for approximately 3 seconds.
c. Repeat the above operation 3 times or more and check that the ABS warning light
goes off.
d. Clear the DTC.
ABS Test Mode DTC
C1271 Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
C1272 Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)
C1273 Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
C1274 Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)
C1275 Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
C1276 Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)
C1277 Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC)
C1278 Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor LH (Test Mode DTC)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHV0EHX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC
CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK/CLEAR
(a) Check for DTCs.
(3) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(5) Read the DTCs following the prompts on the Techstream. Enter the following menus: Chassis /
ABS/VSC/TRAC / Trouble Codes.
(6) Check the details of the DTCs .
(b) Clear the DTCs.
(5) Operate the Techstream to clear the codes. Enter the following menus: Chassis /
ABS/VSC/TRAC / Trouble Codes.
2. END OF DTC CHECK/CLEAR

(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) Check that the ABS warning and slip indicator lights go off within approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to ON.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHX0A7X
FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
1. FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a problem with sensor signals or actuator systems, the skid control ECU prohibits
power supply to the brake actuator assembly and informs the ECM of VSC system
malfunction.
The brake actuator turns off the solenoids and the ECM stops its VSC control
according to signals from the skid control ECU. The vehicle will operate in a manner
similar to a vehicle that is not equipped with ABS, TR(A)C and VSC systems.
ABS control will be prohibited, but EBD control will continue to the extent that EBD
control is possible. If EBD control is impossible, the brake warning light will come on
to warn the driver .
If a VSC system component malfunctions before VSC control begins, VSC control will be
prohibited. If a system component malfunctions during VSC control, the system will
gradually stop performing control so as not to trigger a sudden change in vehicle operation.
If it is impossible for control to continue, the indicator light comes on to inform the
driver of system control termination .
ABS, EBD and BA System
ITEM OPERATION
Malfunction in the ABS system. ABS, BA, TR(A)C and VSC control prohibited.
Malfunction in the BA system. ABS, BA, TR(A)C and VSC control prohibited.
Malfunction in the EBD system. ABS, EBD, BA, TR(A)C and VSC control prohibited.
TR(A)C and VSC System
ITEM OPERATION
Before control: Disables control.

Malfunction in the engine control system (TR(A)C and
During control: Uses only the brakes to
VSC systems).
perform control.
Malfunction in the automatic transmission control system

Disables control.
(TR(A)C and VSC systems).
Malfunction in the brake control system (VSC system). Disables control.
Before control: Disables control.

Malfunction in the brake control system (TR(A)C system). During control: Disables control (by
gradually ending control).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHY0FHX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: FREEZE
FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
FREEZE FRAME DATA

1. FREEZE FRAME DATA
(a) Whenever an ABS DTC is detected, the skid control ECU stores the current vehicle (ECU or sensor)
state as Freeze Frame Data.
(b) The skid control ECU stores the number of times (maximum: 31) the ignition switch has been
turned from off to ON since the last time the ABS was activated.
HINT:
However, if the vehicle is stopped or driven at a low speed (7 km/h (4.3 mph) or less), or if a DTC
is detected, the skid control ECU will stop counting the number.
Freeze Frame Data at the time the ABS operates:
The skid control ECU stores and updates data whenever the ABS system operates.
When the ECU stores data at the time a DTC is detected, the data stored during ABS
operation is cleared.
Freeze Frame Data at the time a DTC is detected:
When the skid control ECU stores data at the time a DTC is detected, no updates will be
performed until the data is cleared.
2. CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA

(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/ TRAC / Trouble Codes.
(f) Select a DTC to display its Freeze Frame Data.
ABS/VSC/TRAC

DISPLAY
Elapsed Time Elapsed time after freeze

after Freeze trigger / Min.: 0 msec, Max.: - -
Trigger 510 msec
Number of times ignition

Number of IG switch turned to ON after
- -
ON Freeze Frame Data stored / 0
to 31
ON: Brake pedal

depressed
OFF: Brake pedal
released
ON: Parking brake
Parking Brake Parking brake switch / ON or applied
-
SW OFF OFF: Parking brake
released
Gear position information /

Gear Position* Actual gear position -
"P,N", R, 1st-6th or Fail
Shift Lever Shift lever position information Actual shift lever

-
Position* / "P,N", R, D/M or Fail position
ABS: ABS activated

VSC: VSC activated
Operated Operated system status / ABS,
Actual operated system TRC(TRAC): TR(A)C activated
System VSC, TRC(TRAC), BA or Fail
BA: BA activated
Fail: Fail safe mode activated
Master cylinder pressure

Master Cylinder Brake pedal released: Reading increases when
sensor reading / Min.: 0.00 V,
Sensor 0.20 to 0.40 V brake pedal is depressed
Max.: 5.00 V
When brake pedal is When brake pedal is being

Master cylinder pressure
M/C Sensor released or pedal held operated: Changes in
sensor change / Min.: -30
Grade at constant position: 0 proportion with pedal
MPa/s, Max.: 225 MPa/s
MPa/s movement speed
Vehicle stopped: 0 °/s

Turning right: -128 to 0
Yaw Rate Yaw rate sensor / Min.: -128
°/s -
Sensor °/s, Max.: 127 °/s
Turning left: 0 to 127
°/s
Lateral G / Min.: -25.10 m/s 2 During turning: Changes in

Lateral G -
, Max.: 24.90 m/s 2 proportion with acceleration
Forward and backward G / During

Forward and acceleration/deceleration:
Min.: - 25.10 m/s 2 , Max.: -
Rearward G Changes in proportion with
2
24.90 m/s acceleration
Front wheel speed sensor RH

FR Wheel reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 Vehicle stopped: 0 When driving at constant
Speed mph), Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 km/h (0 mph) speed: No large fluctuations
mph)
Front wheel speed sensor LH

reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 Vehicle stopped: 0 When driving at constant
FL Wheel Speed
mph), Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 km/h (0 mph) speed: No large fluctuations
mph)
Rear wheel speed sensor RH

RR Wheel reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 Vehicle stopped: 0 When driving at constant
mph)
Rear wheel speed sensor LH

RL Wheel reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 Vehicle stopped: 0 When driving at constant
mph)
Maximum wheel speed sensor
reading / Min.: 0 km/h (0 Vehicle stopped: 0 When driving at constant
Vehicle Speed
mph), Max.: 326.4 km/h (202 km/h (0 mph) speed: No large fluctuations
mph)
Vehicle speed grade / Min.: - During driving: Changes in

Vehicle Speed Vehicle stopped: 0 m/s
25.10 m/s 2 , Max.: 24.90 m/s 2 proportion with vehicle
Grade
2 acceleration/deceleration
Real Engine Real engine torque / Min.: -

- -
Torque 1024.0 Nm, Max.: 1023.0 Nm
During accelerator pedal

Accelerator The difference of a present
When the accelerator operation: Changes in
Opening Angle accelerator / Min.: 0.0%,
pedal is released: 0.0% proportion with the pedal
% Max.: 100.0%
movement
Other: Normal mode

Inspection Inspection mode / Other or
Inspect: Inspection -
Mode Inspect
mode
Turning left: Increases

Steering Angle Steering angle sensor / Min.: -
Turning right: -
Sensor 3276.8°, Max.: 3276.7°
Decreases
Normal: Normal mode

TR(A)C/VSC OFF mode / TRC(TRAC) OFF:
TRC(TRAC)/VSC
Normal, TRC(TRAC) OFF or TR(A)C OFF mode -
Off Mode
VSC OFF VSC OFF: VSC OFF
mode
Normal: Normal mode

VSC SPORT mode / Normal or
Sports Mode Sports: VSC SPORT -
Sports
mode
3. CLEAR FREEZE FRAME DATA
NOTICE:
Clearing the DTC will also clear the Freeze Frame Data.
(d) Clear the DTCs and Freeze Frame Data .

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHK0F2X
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW
TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
*: Use the Techstream.
NEXT
(a) Interview the customer and confirm the trouble .
NEXT
3. CHECK DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
(a) Check and record DTCs and Freeze Frame Data.
(b) Clear the DTCs and Freeze Frame Data for DTC Check/Clear, and for Freeze
Frame Data).
(c) Reconfirm the DTCs.
(1) Reconfirm the DTCs based on the recorded DTCs and Freeze Frame Data for DTC
Check/Clear, and for Freeze Frame Data).
HINT:
When DTCs indicating CAN communication system malfunctions are output, repair the CAN
communication system first .
If the Techstream cannot communicate with the skid control ECU, inspect the CAN communication
system .
If there is no response from the skid control ECU, inspect the power source circuit of the skid
control ECU .
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. A
DTC is not output. (Problem symptom does not occur.) B
DTC is not output. (Problem symptom occurs.) C
B Go to step 5
C Go to step 6
4. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(a) Proceed to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart .
NEXT Go to step 7
(a) Proceed to How to Proceed with Troubleshooting .
NEXT
(a) Proceed to Problem Symptoms Table .
NEXT
7. CIRCUIT INSPECTION*
NEXT
8. IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM
NEXT
9. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
NEXT
10. CONFIRMATION TEST*
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001JB305LX
PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XFT0CCX
PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTIONS
(a) When there is a malfunction with terminal contact points or part installation problems, removal and
installation of the suspected parts may return the system to normal either completely or
temporarily.
(b) In order to determine the malfunctioning area, be sure to check the conditions at the time the
malfunction occurred, such as DTC output and the Freeze Frame Data, and record it before
disconnecting any connector or removing and installing parts.
(c) Since the system may be influenced by malfunctions in systems other than the VSC system, be sure
to check for DTCs in other systems.
2. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
(a) Do not remove or install VSC parts such as the steering sensor except when required, as they need
to be adjusted correctly after removal and installation.
(b) Be sure to perform preparation before work and confirmation after work is completed by following
the directions in the repair manual when working on the VSC system.
(c) Be sure to remove and install the ECU, brake actuator assembly, sensors, etc. with the ignition
switch off unless it is otherwise specified in the inspection procedure.
(d) If the ECU, brake actuator assembly or a sensor has been removed and installed, it is necessary to
check the system for problems after the parts have been reassembled. Check for DTCs using the
Techstream, also check that system functions and signals received by the ECU are normal using
Test Mode.
3. DTC PRECAUTION
(a) Warnings for some DTCs cannot be cleared only by repairing the malfunctioning parts. If the
warning is displayed after repair work, the DTC should be cleared after turning the ignition switch
off.
NOTICE:
If a DTC for a malfunctioning part reappears after it was cleared, then it has been stored again.
4. CHASSIS DYNAMOMETER PRECAUTION
When testing with a 2-wheel drum tester such as a speedometer tester, a combination tester for the
speedometer and brakes, a chassis dynamometer, or when jacking up the front wheels and turning the
wheels, perform the following procedure to enter Inspection Mode and stop the TR(A)C and VSC systems.
Enter Inspection Mode to disable TR(A)C and VSC operation when using a chassis dynamometer.
HINT:
If Inspection Mode is not used, the vehicle may unexpectedly move off the dynamometer because
of TR(A)C and VSC operation.
The VSC OFF switch must not be used to disable TR(A)C and VSC operation when the vehicle is to
be operated on a dynamometer. Pressing the VSC OFF switch does not disable TR(A)C and VSC
operation completely.
NOTICE:
Secure the vehicle with lock chains for safety.
(a) Activating Inspection Mode (When Using the Techstream)
(1) Ensure that the ignition switch is off and the engine is stopped.
(2) Make sure that the shift lever is in P.
(4) Start the engine.
(6) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Utility / Inspection Mode.
(7) Check that the VSC OFF indicator light will come on.
HINT:
If the VSC OFF indicator light does not come on, repeat the steps.
Turning the ignition switch off ends Inspection Mode.
(b) Activating Inspection Mode (When not Using the Techstream)
HINT:
Perform steps "C" to "H" within 30 seconds.
(1) Ensure that the ignition switch is off and the engine is stopped (Step "A").
(2) for Manual Transmission:
Check that the shift lever is in neutral (Step "B").
for Automatic Transmission:
Make sure that the shift lever is in P (Step "B").
(3) Start the engine (Step "C").
(4) Apply the parking brake by pulling up the parking brake lever (Step "D").
(5) Depress and release the brake pedal twice (Step "E").
(6) While holding the brake pedal down, release and apply the parking brake twice (Step "F").
(7) With the parking brake applied, depress and release the brake pedal twice (Step "G").
(8) Check if the slip indicator light will come on (Step "H").
HINT:
If the slip indicator light does not come on in step "H", repeat steps "A" to "H".
5. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS

(a) The CAN communication system is used for communication between the skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly), the steering sensor and other ECUs. If any CAN communication DTCs are
detected, DTCs corresponding to the malfunction will be output.
(b) If any CAN communication DTCs are output, repair the malfunction and troubleshoot the VSC
system while communication is normal.
(c) In order to enable CAN communication, a specific type of wiring is used for the CAN communication
lines. The wiring used for each communication line is a twisted pair of wires that have an equal
length. A bypass wire should not be used because the data being transmitted will be corrupted.
Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 T From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHN0D7X
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

If there are no DTCs output and the problem still occurs, check the suspected areas for each problem
symptom in the order given in the following table and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page.
NOTICE:
When replacing the brake actuator assembly, sensors, etc., turn the ignition switch off.
HINT:
Use the table below to help determine the cause of problem symptoms. If multiple suspected areas
are listed, the potential causes of the symptoms are listed in order of probability in the "Suspected
Area" column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in the order they
are listed. Replace parts as necessary.
Inspect the fuses and relays related to this system before inspecting the suspected areas below.
Vehicle Stability Control System
SYMPTOM SUSPECTED AREA SEE

PAGE
Check for DTCs again and make sure that DTCs are not output.
Power source circuit
Front speed sensor circuit
Rear speed sensor circuit

ABS, BA and/or EBD
does not operate. Check the brake actuator assembly using the Techstream. (Check brake
actuator assembly operation using the Active Test function.) If abnormal,
check the hydraulic circuit for leaks.
If the symptoms still occur even after the above suspected areas have
been inspected and proved to be normal, replace the skid control ECU
Front speed sensor circuit
ABS, BA and/or EBD Stop light switch circuit

does not operate
Check the brake actuator assembly using the Techstream. (Check brake
efficiently.
actuator assembly operation using the Active Test function.) If abnormal,
check the hydraulic circuit for leaks.
Check CAN communication system.

ABS sensor DTC check
cannot be done. If the symptoms still occur even after the above suspected areas has
ABS warning light ABS warning light circuit

abnormal (Remains
on). Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
ABS warning light ABS warning light circuit

abnormal (Does not
come on). Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
Brake warning light Brake warning light circuit

abnormal (Remains
Brake warning light Brake warning light circuit

abnormal (Does not
Check the engine control system.
Check the automatic transmission control system.
Power source circuit
Check the hydraulic circuit for leaks. -

VSC and/or TR(A)C Front speed sensor circuit
does not operate.
Steering sensor circuit
Replace the ECM.
Check CAN communication system.

VSC sensor DTC check
cannot be done. If the symptoms still occur even after the above suspected areas has
TR(A)C OFF indicator TR(A)C OFF indicator light circuit

light abnormal
(Remains on). Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
TR(A)C OFF indicator TR(A)C OFF indicator light circuit

light abnormal (Does
not come on). Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
VSC OFF indicator VSC OFF indicator light circuit

light abnormal
VSC OFF indicator VSC OFF indicator light circuit

VSC SPORT indicator VSC SPORT indicator light circuit

light abnormal
VSC SPORT indicator VSC SPORT indicator light circuit

Slip indicator light Slip indicator light circuit

abnormal (Remains
Slip indicator light Slip indicator light circuit

abnormal (Does not
Sensor check cannot Check CAN communication system.

be done. Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YHJ0AIX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: Slip
Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S)
Slip Indicator Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
Slip Indicator Light Slip indicator light Indicator light ON/OFF Observe combination meter assembly
(d) Check that the slip indicator light on the combination meter assembly turns on or off in
accordance with the Techstream operation.
OK:
The slip indicator light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:
Techstream .

OK:
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YHI0AIX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: Slip
Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
Slip Indicator Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
The slip indicator light blinks during VSC and/or TR(A)C operation.
If a malfunction is detected, the slip indicator light comes on to warn the driver .
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
OK:

NG
OK
3. CHECK BATTERY

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V

OK
(a) Perform an Active Test of the combination meter assembly (meter CPU) using the
Techstream .
(b) Check the combination meter assembly.

OK:
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHO09FX
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(a) Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(1) Helps prevent the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied firmly or when braking on a
slippery surface.
(b) Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD)
(1) EBD control utilizes ABS, realizing proper brake force distribution between the front and rear
wheels in accordance with the driving conditions. In addition, during braking while cornering, it
also controls the brake forces of the right and left wheels, helping maintain vehicle behavior.
(c) Brake Assist (BA)
(1) The primary purpose of brake assist is to provide supplementary brake force to assist a driver
who cannot generate a large brake force during emergency braking, thus helping ensure the
vehicle's braking performance.
(d) Traction Control (TR(A)C)
(1) Helps restrain the slippage of the drive wheels if the driver depresses the accelerator pedal
excessively when starting off or accelerating on a slippery surface.
(e) Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
(1) Helps restrain sideways slippage of the vehicle during a strong understeer tendency or strong
oversteer tendency while cornering.
2. FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Judges the vehicle driving condition based on the signals from each sensor
Skid
and switch, and sends the brake control signals to the brake actuator
Control ECU
assembly.
Master
Cylinder
Detects the master cylinder pressure.
Pressure
Sensor
Pump Motor Drives the pumps inside the brake actuator assembly.
Brake
Actuator The hydraulic circuit has 2 master cylinder cut solenoid valves, 2
Assembly reservoir cut solenoid valves, 4 pressure holding solenoid valves
Solenoid and 4 pressure reduction solenoid valves.
Valves Change the fluid path based on the signals from the skid control
ECU during the operation of the brake control system functions, in
order to control the fluid pressure applied to the wheel cylinders.
Yaw Rate
The yaw rate sensor detects the vehicle's yaw rate.
and
The acceleration sensor detects the vehicle's longitudinal and
Acceleration
lateral acceleration.
Sensor
ABS Motor
Supplies power to the pump motor.
Relay
Skid Control
ECU ABS
Solenoid Supplies power to the solenoid valves.
Relay
Speed Sensor Detect the wheel speed of each of the 4 wheels.
Pattern VSC OFF Enables the driver to select normal mode, TR(A)C OFF mode or VSC OFF
Select Switch mode.
Switch VSC SPORT
Assembly Enables the driver to select normal mode or VSC SPORT mode.
Switch
Stop Light Switch

Detects the brake pedal depressing signal.
Assembly
Main Body ECU (Network

Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the skid control ECU.
Gateway ECU)
Parking Brake Switch

Detects the parking brake pedal status.
Assembly
Sends the accelerator pedal position signal, engine speed signal

etc., to the skid control ECU.
ECM
Based on the signals from the skid control ECU, controls the engine
output.
TCM* Sends the gear position signal to the skid control ECU.
Steering Sensor Detects the steering direction and angle of the steering wheel.
ABS
Illuminates to alert the driver when the skid control ECU detects a
Warning
malfunction in the ABS.
Light
Brake malfunction in the EBD or brake system.
Warning Illuminates to alert the driver when the brake fluid level is low.
Light Illuminates to inform the driver when the parking brake is
operated.
TR(A)C OFF
Combination Indicator Illuminates to inform the driver when TR(A)C OFF mode is selected.
Meter Light
Assembly VSC OFF
Illuminates to inform the driver when VSC OFF mode or VSC SPORT mode is
Indicator
selected.
Light
VSC SPORT
Indicator Illuminates to inform the driver when VSC SPORT mode is selected.
Light
Blinks to inform the driver when the TR(A)C or VSC is performing

Slip
control.
Indicator
Light
malfunction in the TR(A)C and/or VSC.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XHQ079X
SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TRANSMITTING ECU RECEIVING ECU SIGNAL COMMUNICATION
(TRANSMITTER) METHOD
CAN communication
Steering sensor Skid control ECU Steering sensor signal
line
Wheel speed signal CAN communication

Skid control ECU ECM
VSC data signal line
Accelerator pedal
position signal CAN communication
ECM Skid control ECU
Engine speed signal line
Diagnosis signal
CAN communication
TCM* Skid control ECU Gear position signal
line
Power steering ECU CAN communication

Skid control ECU VSC data signal
assembly line
CAN communication
Main body ECU Skid control ECU Parking brake switch signal
line
ABS warning light

signal
Brake warning light
signal
TR(A)C OFF indicator
light signal
Combination meter CAN communication
Skid control ECU VSC OFF indicator
assembly line
light signal
VSC SPORT indicator
light signal
Slip indicator light
signal
Wheel speed signal

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001NJI017X
TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. TERMINALS OF ECU

*a - -
(Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly))
TERMINAL NO. (SYMBOL) TERMINAL DESCRIPTION
1 (+BM) ABS motor relay power supply
2 (SPD) Speed signal output for speedometer
3 - (Not used)
4 (FR-) Front wheel speed RH (-) signal input
5 - (Not used)
6 - (Not used)
7 - (Not used)
8 - (Not used)
9 - (Not used)
10 - (Not used)
11 - (Not used)
12 (CSW1) VSC OFF switch input
13 (GND2) Pump motor ground
14 (CANL) CAN communication line L
15 - (Not used)
16 (FR+) Front wheel speed RH (+) signal input
17 (RR+) Rear wheel speed RH (+) signal input
18 (RL-) Rear wheel speed LH (-) signal input
19 (FL+) Front wheel speed LH (+) signal input

20 - (Not used)
21 - (Not used)
22 - (Not used)
23 - (Not used)
24 - (Not used)
25 (+BS) ABS solenoid relay power supply
26 (CANH) CAN communication line H
27 (CSW2) VSC SPORT switch input
28 (IG1) IG1 power source input
29 (RR-) Rear wheel speed RH (-) signal input
30 (STP) Stop light switch input
31 (RL+) Rear wheel speed LH (+) signal input
32 (FL-) Front wheel speed LH (-) signal input
33 - (Not used)
34 - (Not used)
35 - (Not used)
36 - (Not used)
37 - (Not used)
38 (GND1) Skid control ECU ground
2. TERMINAL INSPECTION
(a) Disconnect the connector and measure the voltage and resistance on the wire harness side.

*a - -
HINT:
The voltage cannot be measured with the connector connected to the skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly) because the connector is watertight.
Standard
TERMINAL NO. WIRING TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED
(SYMBOL) COLOR DESCRIPTION CONDITION
A5-1 (+BM) - W - Body ABS motor relay

Always 11 to 14 V
Body ground ground power supply
A5-12 (CSW1) - O - Body VSC OFF switch VSC OFF switch held ON → OFF (Not Below 1 Ω → 10
Body ground ground input pressed) kΩ or higher
A5-13 (GND2) - B - Body Pump motor

Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground ground ground
A5-25 (+BS) - G - Body ABS solenoid relay

Always 11 to 14 V
Body ground ground power supply
A5-27 (CSW2) - P - Body VSC SPORT switch VSC SPORT switch held ON → OFF Below 1 Ω → 10
Body ground ground input (Not pressed) kΩ or higher
G-R -
A5-28 (IG1) - IG1 power source
Body Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
Body ground input
ground
A5-30 (STP) - R - Body Stop light switch Stop light switch ON → OFF (Brake 11 to 14 V* →
Body ground ground input pedal depressed → released) Below 1.5 V
A5-38 (GND1) - B - Body Skid control ECU

Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground ground ground
HINT:
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001JBD04SX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: TEST
MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
TEST MODE PROCEDURE

1. WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR LIGHT INITIAL CHECK
(a) Release the parking brake.
NOTICE:
Before releasing the parking brake, move the shift lever to P (for automatic transmission) or set
chocks to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
HINT:
When the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level is low, the brake warning light comes on.
(b) When the ignition switch is turned to ON, check that the ABS warning, brake warning, TR(A)C OFF
indicator, VSC OFF indicator, VSC SPORT indicator and slip indicator lights all come on.
HINT:
If the skid control ECU stores a DTC, the ABS warning and slip indicator lights will come on.
If any of the indicators remains on or does not come on, proceed to troubleshooting for the light
circuits listed below.
TROUBLE AREA SEE PROCEDURE
ABS warning light circuit (Remains on)
ABS warning light circuit (Does not come on)
Brake warning light circuit (Remains on)
Brake warning light circuit (Does not come on)
TR(A)C OFF indicator light circuit (Remains on)
TR(A)C OFF indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
VSC OFF indicator light circuit (Remains on)
VSC OFF indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
VSC SPORT indicator light circuit (Remains on)
VSC SPORT indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
Slip indicator light circuit (Remains on)
Slip indicator light circuit (Does not come on)
(1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON, check that the brake warning, TR(A)C OFF indicator,
VSC OFF indicator and VSC SPORT indicator lights turn off after 3 seconds.
(2) When the engine is started, check that the ABS warning and slip indicator lights turn off after 3
seconds.
2. SENSOR CHECK USING TEST MODE (SIGNAL CHECK)

HINT:
DTCs are stored if any malfunctions are detected during the check of each sensor.
(a) Procedure to enter Test Mode
(2) Check that the steering wheel is centered.
(3) Check that the shift lever is in neutral.
(7) Switch the skid control ECU to Test Mode using the Techstream. Enter the following menus:
Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Utility / Signal Check.
(8) Check that the ABS warning and slip indicator lights come on.
(b) Speed Sensor Check
(1) Drive the vehicle straight-ahead.
Accelerate the vehicle to a speed of 45 km/h (28 mph) or more for several seconds.
HINT:
The sensor check may not complete if wheelspin occurs.

The speed sensor check may not complete if the speed sensor check is started while turning the
steering wheel or spinning the wheels.
NOTICE:
After the ABS warning light goes off, if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph), a sensor
check code will be stored again.
Decelerate or stop the vehicle before the speed reaches 80 km/h (50 mph).
(2) Check that the ABS warning light goes off.
HINT:
The ABS warning light goes off when the sensor check has completed.
The ABS warning light comes on immediately after a malfunction has been detected during the
speed sensor check.
(3) Stop the vehicle.
HINT:
When the sensor check has completed, the ABS warning light goes off.
NOTICE:
If the sensor check has not completed, the ABS warning light will come on and the ABS system
will not operate.
(c) End of Sensor Check
(1) If the sensor checks have completed, the ABS warning light goes off.
NOTICE:
If the sensor checks have not completed, the ABS warning light come on and the ABS system
will not operate.
(d) Reading Sensor Check DTCs
(1) Read the DTC(s) by following the Techstream screen.

NOTICE:
If only DTCs other than Test Mode sensor check DTCs are displayed, repair the malfunctions and
clear the DTCs.
If Test Mode sensor check DTCs and other DTCs are displayed or if only Test Mode sensor check
DTCs are displayed, repair the malfunctions, clear the DTCs, and perform Test Mode inspection
again.
HINT:
See "Sensor Check DTCs".
(2) Turn the ignition switch off and disconnect the Techstream.
(e) Sensor Check DTCs
ABS Sensor
DTC DETECTION ITEM TROUBLE AREA

NO.
Front speed sensor RH

Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor installation
C1271
Sensor RH Front speed sensor rotor RH (Front axle hub
and bearing assembly RH)
Front speed sensor LH

Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor installation
C1272
Sensor LH Front speed sensor rotor LH (Front axle hub
and bearing assembly LH)
Rear speed sensor RH

Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor Sensor installation
C1273
RH Rear speed sensor rotor RH (Rear axle hub
and bearing assembly RH)
Rear speed sensor LH

Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor Sensor installation
C1274
LH Rear speed sensor rotor LH (Rear axle hub
and bearing assembly LH)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front speed sensor rotor RH (Front axle hub and
C1275
Front Speed Sensor RH bearing assembly RH)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Front speed sensor rotor LH (Front axle hub and
C1276
Front Speed Sensor LH bearing assembly LH)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear speed sensor rotor RH (Rear axle hub and
C1277
Rear Speed Sensor RH bearing assembly RH)
Abnormal Change in Output Signal of Rear speed sensor rotor LH (Rear axle hub and
C1278
Rear Speed Sensor LH bearing assembly LH)
HINT:
The codes in this table are output only in Test Mode (signal check).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FQP0DAX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: TRAC
OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S)
TRAC OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (TR(A)C OFF INDICATOR LIGHT)
(c) Select the Active Test on the Techstream .

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TRC(TRAC) OFF Indicator TR(A)C OFF indicator Indicator light Observe combination meter
Light light ON/OFF assembly
(d) Check that the TR(A)C OFF indicator light on the combination meter assembly turns on or off
in accordance with the Techstream operation.
OK:
The TR(A)C OFF indicator light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:
Techstream .

OK:
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FQO0DCX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: TRAC
OFF Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
TRAC OFF Indicator Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
Pressing the VSC OFF switch turns off TR(A)C, and pressing and holding this switch turns off TR(A)C and
VSC. If TR(A)C is turned off, the TR(A)C OFF indicator light will come on.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
OK:

NG
OK
3. CHECK BATTERY

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V

OK
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VSC OFF SWITCH)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC

DISPLAY NOTE
Normal: Normal mode

TRC(TRAC) OFF:
TRC(TRAC)/VSC TR(A)C/VSC OFF mode / Normal, TRC(TRAC) TR(A)C OFF mode
-
Off Mode OFF, Unknown or VSC OFF Unknown: Unspecified
VSC OFF: VSC OFF
mode
(d) Using the Techstream, check that the switch condition displayed on the Techstream changes
according to VSC OFF switch operation.
OK:
The Techstream display changes according to VSC OFF switch operation.
NG INSPECT VSC OFF SWITCH
OK
Techstream .

OK:
HINT:

6. INSPECT VSC OFF SWITCH
(a) Remove the VSC OFF switch .
(b) Inspect the VSC OFF switch .
REPLACE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - VSC OFF

7.
SWITCH)
A5-12 (CSW1) - D35-5 Always Below 1 Ω
A5-12 (CSW1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
D35-8 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
HINT:

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YUO0I8X
U0073,U0100,U0101,U0126: Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off (2013 FR-S)
DTC U0073 Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off
DTC U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A"
DTC U0101 Lost Communication with TCM
DTC U0126 Lost Communication with Steering Angle Sensor Module
DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) receives signals from the ECM, steering sensor and TCM
via the CAN communication system.

NO.
The +BS terminal voltage is between 9.6 and 16.5 V and bus off is CAN communication
U0073
judged for 0.1 seconds or more. system
CAN
communication
system
The +BS terminal voltage is between 9.6 and 16.5 V, the vehicle
Skid control
U0100 speed is 6 km/h (4 mph) or more, and signals cannot be sent to the
ECU (Brake
ECM for 0.5 seconds or more.
actuator
assembly)
ECM
CAN
communication
system
Skid control
U0123 speed is 6 km/h (4 mph) or more, and signals cannot be sent to the
ECU (Brake
TCM for 0.5 seconds or more.
actuator
assembly)
TCM
CAN
communication
system
Skid control
U0126 speed is 6 km/h (4 mph) or more, and signals from the steering
ECU (Brake
sensor cannot be received for 0.1 seconds or more.
actuator
assembly)
steering sensor
PROCEDURE
1. RECONFIRM DTC
(d) Drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) or more and turn the steering wheel to the
right and left.
(e) Check that no CAN communication system DTC is output .
(f) If VSC system DTCs are output, record them .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
CAN communication system DTC is output. C
HINT:
The CAN communication system must be normal when performing troubleshooting for sensor DTCs (for
VSC system).
REPAIR CIRCUITS INDICATED BY OUTPUT

B DTCS
C INSPECT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Hide Tree Find Print Standard Expert
< Back |
Language Selection: Last Modified: 3-

EN FR ES 6.4 L From: 201203
27-2012
Scion 2013 FR-S Repair Manual (RM20S0U) Model: Doc ID:
Model Year: 2013
Audio / Visual / Telematics FR-S RM000000XFT0CCX
Brake
BRAKE (FRONT) Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS:
BRAKE (REAR) VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION
BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS (2013 FR-S)
BRAKE ACTUATOR
FRONT SPEED SENSOR
REAR SPEED SENSOR PRECAUTION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
1. TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTIONS
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (a) When there is a malfunction with terminal contact
PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM points or part installation problems, removal and
SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM installation of the suspected parts may return the
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
system to normal either completely or temporarily.
HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (b) In order to determine the malfunctioning area, be
CALIBRATION (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM sure to check the conditions at the time the
TEST MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM malfunction occurred, such as DTC output and the
PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data, and record it before
TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
disconnecting any connector or removing and
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
installing parts.
DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (c) Since the system may be influenced by malfunctions
FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM in systems other than the VSC system, be sure to
DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM check for DTCs in other systems.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
C1201: Engine Control System Malfunction (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM 2. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
C1225-C1228,C1468,C1469,C146A,C146B: SA1 Solenoid Circuit (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
C1231: Steering Angle Sensor (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (a) Do not remove or install VSC parts such as the
C1234,C1419,C1472,C1474: Yaw Rate Sensor (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM steering sensor except when required, as they need
C1237,C1275-C1278: Speed Sensor Rotor Faulty (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM to be adjusted correctly after removal and
C1241: Low or High Power Supply Voltage (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM installation.
C1246: Master Cylinder Pressure Sensor Malfunction (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
(b) Be sure to perform preparation before work and
C1249: Open in Stop Light Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
C1271,C1272,C1330,C1331,C1464,C1465: Low Output Signal of Front Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC) (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTE confirmation after work is completed by following the
C1273,C1274,C1332,C1333,C1466,C1467: Low Output Signal of Rear Speed Sensor RH (Test Mode DTC) (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTE directions in the repair manual when working on the
C1288: Error in Matching of ECUs (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM VSC system.
C1294: ECT System Malfunction (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
(c) Be sure to remove and install the ECU, brake
C1300: Skid Control ECU Malfunction (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
actuator assembly, sensors, etc. with the ignition
C146C: Open in ABS Motor Relay Circuit (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
C146E: Open in ABS Solenoid Relay Circuit (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM switch off unless it is otherwise specified in the
U0073,U0100,U0101,U0126: Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM inspection procedure.
ABS Warning Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
(d) If the ECU, brake actuator assembly or a sensor has
ABS Warning Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
been removed and installed, it is necessary to check
Brake Warning Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
the system for problems after the parts have been
Brake Warning Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
TRAC OFF Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM reassembled. Check for DTCs using the Techstream,
TRAC OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM also check that system functions and signals
VSC OFF Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM received by the ECU are normal using Test Mode.
VSC OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
VSC SPORT Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM 3. DTC PRECAUTION
VSC SPORT Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Warnings for some DTCs cannot be cleared only by
Slip Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
repairing the malfunctioning parts. If the warning is
Slip Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S):BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
VSC OFF SWITCH displayed after repair work, the DTC should be
BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER) cleared after turning the ignition switch off.
PARKING BRAKE
Drivetrain NOTICE:
Engine / Hybrid / EV System If a DTC for a malfunctioning part reappears after
it was cleared, then it has been stored again.
General
INTRODUCTION 4. CHASSIS DYNAMOMETER PRECAUTION
Power Source / Network
Steering When testing with a 2-wheel drum tester such as a
Suspension speedometer tester, a combination tester for the
Vehicle Exterior speedometer and brakes, a chassis dynamometer, or when
Vehicle Interior
jacking up the front wheels and turning the wheels,
perform the following procedure to enter Inspection Mode
and stop the TR(A)C and VSC systems.
Enter Inspection Mode to disable TR(A)C and VSC

operation when using a chassis dynamometer.
HINT:
If Inspection Mode is not used, the vehicle may

unexpectedly move off the dynamometer because of
TR(A)C and VSC operation.
The VSC OFF switch must not be used to disable
TR(A)C and VSC operation when the vehicle is to be
operated on a dynamometer. Pressing the VSC OFF
switch does not disable TR(A)C and VSC operation
completely.
NOTICE:
Secure the vehicle with lock chains for safety.
(a) Activating Inspection Mode (When Using the

Techstream)
(1) Ensure that the ignition switch is off and the
engine is stopped.
(2) Make sure that the shift lever is in P.

(6) Enter the following menus: Chassis /
ABS/VSC/TRAC / Utility / Inspection Mode.
(7) Check that the VSC OFF indicator light will come
on.
HINT:
If the VSC OFF indicator light does not come on,

repeat the steps.
(b) Activating Inspection Mode (When not Using the

Techstream)
HINT:
Perform steps "C" to "H" within 30 seconds.
(1) Ensure that the ignition switch is off and the

engine is stopped (Step "A").
(2) for Manual Transmission:
Check that the shift lever is in neutral (Step
"B").
for Automatic Transmission:
Make sure that the shift lever is in P (Step "B").

(3) Start the engine (Step "C").
(4) Apply the parking brake by pulling up the
parking brake lever (Step "D").
(5) Depress and release the brake pedal twice (Step

"E").
(6) While holding the brake pedal down, release and
apply the parking brake twice (Step "F").
(7) With the parking brake applied, depress and
release the brake pedal twice (Step "G").
(8) Check if the slip indicator light will come on
(Step "H").
HINT:
If the slip indicator light does not come on in step

"H", repeat steps "A" to "H".
5. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS
(a) The CAN communication system is used for
communication between the skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly), the steering sensor and other
ECUs. If any CAN communication DTCs are detected,
DTCs corresponding to the malfunction will be
output.
(b) If any CAN communication DTCs are output, repair
the malfunction and troubleshoot the VSC system
while communication is normal.
(c) In order to enable CAN communication, a specific
type of wiring is used for the CAN communication
lines. The wiring used for each communication line is
a twisted pair of wires that have an equal length. A
bypass wire should not be used because the data
being transmitted will be corrupted.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FQP0DCX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM: VSC
OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S)
VSC OFF Indicator Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (VSC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
VSC OFF Indicator VSC OFF indicator Indicator light Observe combination meter
(d) Check that the VSC OFF indicator light on the combination meter assembly turns on or off in
accordance with the Techstream operation.
OK:
The VSC OFF indicator light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:
Techstream .

OK:
The VSC OFF indicator light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FQO0DEX
OFF Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
VSC OFF Indicator Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
Pressing the VSC OFF switch turns off TR(A)C and pressing and holding this switch turns off TR(A)C and
VSC. If VSC is turned off, the VSC OFF indicator light will come on.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
OK:

NG
OK
3. CHECK BATTERY

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V

OK
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VSC OFF SWITCH)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC

DISPLAY NOTE
Normal: Normal mode

TRC(TRAC) OFF:
TRC(TRAC)/VSC TR(A)C/VSC OFF mode / Normal, TRC(TRAC) TR(A)C OFF mode
-
Off Mode OFF, Unknown or VSC OFF Unknown: Unspecified
VSC OFF: VSC OFF
mode
according to VSC OFF switch operation.
OK:
The Techstream display changes according to VSC OFF switch operation.
NG INSPECT VSC OFF SWITCH
OK
5. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VSC SPORT SWITCH)
(a) Select the Data List using the Techstream .

ABS/VSC/TRAC
Normal: Normal mode

Sports Mode VSC SPORT mode / Normal or Sports -
Sports: VSC SPORT mode
(b) Using the Techstream, check that the switch condition displayed on the Techstream changes
according to VSC SPORT switch operation.
OK:
The Techstream display changes according to VSC SPORT switch operation.
NG INSPECT VSC SPORT SWITCH
OK
Techstream .

OK:
The VSC OFF indicator and VSC SPORT indicator lights turn on or off in accordance with the Active
Test operation.
HINT:
7. INSPECT VSC OFF SWITCH
(a) Remove the VSC OFF switch .
(b) Inspect the VSC OFF switch .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - VSC OFF

8.
SWITCH)

HINT:

NG CONNECTOR
9. INSPECT VSC SPORT SWITCH
(a) Remove the VSC SPORT switch .
(b) Inspect the VSC SPORT switch .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - VSC SPORT

10.
SWITCH)
A5-27(CSW2) - D35-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A5-27(CSW2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FQP0DBX
SPORT Indicator Light does not Come ON (2013 FR-S)
VSC SPORT Indicator Light does not Come ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (VSC SPORT INDICATOR LIGHT)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
Sports Mode Indicator VSC SPORT indicator Indicator light Observe combination meter
(d) Check that the VSC SPORT indicator light on the combination meter assembly turns on or off
in accordance with the Techstream operation.
OK:
The VSC SPORT indicator light turns on or off in accordance with the Active Test operation.
HINT:
Techstream .

OK:
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FQO0DDX
SPORT Indicator Light Remains ON (2013 FR-S)
VSC SPORT Indicator Light Remains ON
DESCRIPTION
communication.
When the VSC SPORT switch is operated, the system switches between normal mode and sport mode.
If the VSC SPORT switch is pressed in normal mode, the system enters sport mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
memorization .
PROCEDURE

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
OK:

NG
OK
3. CHECK BATTERY

Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V

OK
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VSC SPORT SWITCH)

ABS/VSC/TRAC
Normal: Normal mode

Sports Mode VSC SPORT mode / Normal or Sports -
Sports: VSC SPORT mode
according to VSC SPORT switch operation.
OK:
The Techstream display changes according to VSC SPORT switch operation.
NG INSPECT VSC SPORT SWITCH
OK
Techstream .

OK:
HINT:
6. INSPECT VSC SPORT SWITCH
(a) Remove the VSC SPORT switch .

(b) Inspect the VSC SPORT switch .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY - VSC SPORT

7.
SWITCH)
HINT:

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001WZ102QX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VSC OFF SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000034VE00ZX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VSC OFF SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Make sure that there is no looseness in the locking part and the connecting part of the VSC OFF
switch.
(1) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in

the table below.

*a
(Pattern Select Switch Assembly)
TESTER CHECK SPECIFIED

CONNECTION CONDITION CONDITION
Switch not pushed

10 kΩ or higher
5-8 in
(b) Make sure that there is no looseness in the locking part and the connecting part of the VSC SPORT
switch.
(1) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TESTER CONNECTION CHECK CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION

1-8
(c) Check the illumination status
(1) Check the illumination when the battery voltage is applied between the connector terminals.
Standard:
CHECK CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
Battery positive → 2
The illumination comes on
Battery negative → 3
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001WYZ02WX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VSC OFF SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 2 screws and the pattern select switch assembly to the shifting hole cover sub-assembly.
(b) Connect the pattern select switch assembly connector clamp. (for Automatic Transmission)
(c) Connect the pattern select switch assembly connector.
2. INSTALL SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
3. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
4. INSTALL SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
5. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001WZ202WX
Title: BRAKE CONTROL / DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEMS: VSC OFF SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
2. REMOVE SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
3. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
4. REMOVE SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
5. REMOVE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the pattern select switch assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the pattern select switch assembly connector clamp. (for Automatic Transmission)
(c) Remove the 2 screws and the pattern select switch

assembly from the shifting hole cover sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJC00SX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004A0W005X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Slide the 2 clamps and remove the vacuum tube connector hose.
(b) Using a vacuum pump, check that there is ventilation

from the booster to the engine, and no ventilation from
the engine to the booster.
*a Brake Booster Assembly Side
*b Engine Assembly Side
If the result is not as specified, replace the vacuum tube

connector hose.
(c) Connect the engine side of the vacuum hose with the
engine stamp facing outside of the vehicle.
*1 Paint Mark
*a Engine Assembly Side
*b Brake Booster Assembly Side
(d) Connect the vacuum hose to the booster assembly with the paint mark facing front side of the
vehicle.
HINT:
If the paint mark has been disappeared, check the ventilation and connect the hose so that there is
ventilation from the booster to the engine, and no ventilation from the engine to the booster.
(e) Slide the 2 clamps and install the vacuum hose connector hose.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJB01YX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY

(a) Temporarily install the lock nut and push rod clevis to the brake booster assembly.
(b) Set the push rod length as shown in the illustration.
*1 Lock Nut
*2 Push Rod Clevis
*a Push Rod Length
Push rod length:

155.2 mm (6.11 in.)
(c) Tighten the lock nut.
(d) Install the 4 nuts to the brake booster assembly.
2. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 BRAKE TUBE

(a) Connect 2 clips and install the front No. 2 brake tube.
(b) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, connect the front No. 2 brake tube from the brake actuator.
NOTICE:
Do not bend or damage the brake lines.
Do not allow brake lines to twist and interfere with other parts or vehicle body during tightening.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter the brake lines.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where the union nut wrench is
3. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 BRAKE TUBE

(a) Connect 2 clips and install the front No. 1 brake tube.
(b) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, connect the front No. 1 brake tube from the brake actuator.
NOTICE:
Do not allow brake lines to twist and interfere with other parts or vehicle body during tightening.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter the brake lines.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where the union nut wrench is
4. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE
5. INSTALL PUSH ROD PIN
6. INSTALL BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. CHECK AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL
8. INSTALL TCM (for Automatic Transmission)
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the LH side as for the RH side .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJD01QX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE BOOSTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
3. REMOVE TCM (for Automatic Transmission)
4. REMOVE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
5. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Slide the clip and disconnect the vacuum tube connector hose from the brake booster assembly.
6. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 BRAKE TUBE
(a) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the front

No. 1 brake tube from the brake actuator.
(b) Disconnect 2 clips and remove the front No. 1 brake

tube.
7. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 BRAKE TUBE

(a) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the front
No. 2 brake tube from the brake actuator.
(b) Disconnect 2 clips and remove the front No. 2 brake

tube.
8. REMOVE BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY

(a) Loosen the push rod clevis lock nut.
(b) Remove the 4 nuts.
(c) Remove the push rod clevis pin.
(d) Remove the brake booster assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003WYV00DX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: BLEEDING (2013 FR-S)
BLEEDING
NOTICE:
Move the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake before bleeding the brakes (for automatic
transmission).
Apply the parking brake before bleeding the brakes (for manual transmission).
Add brake fluid to keep the level between the MIN and MAX lines of the reservoir while bleeding the
brakes.
If brake fluid leaks onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
Do not operate the brake actuator assembly while air is in the brake system or in the brake master
cylinder sub-assembly. Doing so may cause air to enter the brake actuator assembly.
If bleeding the brake actuator assembly is difficult due to air in the brake actuator assembly,
replace it with a new one.
HINT:
If any work is done on the brake system or if air in the brake lines is suspected, bleed the air from the
system.
1. FILL RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID
2. BLEED BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY
HINT:
If the master cylinder has been disassembled or if the reservoir becomes empty, bleed the air from the
master cylinder.
(a) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, separate the 2 brake

tubes from the master cylinder.
(b) Slowly depress the brake pedal and hold it there (Step
A).
(c) Block the outer holes with your fingers, and release the
brake pedal (Step B).
(d) Repeat Steps A and B 3 or 4 times.
(e) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, install the 2 brake

tubes into the master cylinder.
NOTICE:
Do not allow brake lines to twist and interfere with other
parts or vehicle body during tightening.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to
enter the brake lines.
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for
situations where a union nut wrench is combined with a
torque wrench .
3. BLEED BRAKE LINE
4. INSPECT FOR BRAKE FLUID LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SRG03NX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR
(a) Check the fluid level.
*a MAX Line
*b MIN Line
If brake fluid level is lower than the MIN line, check for
leaks and inspect the disc brake pads. If necessary, refill
the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX line after repair
or replacement.
Brake Fluid:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
NOTICE:
If using a dropper to adjust the fluid amount, make sure
that the dropper has not been used with mineral oils,
water or deteriorated brake fluid. Sealed areas may
deteriorate and lead to fluid leaks, or the fluid may
deteriorate and lead to decreased efficiency.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XY202KX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE FLUID: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
NOTICE:
Move the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake before replacing the brake fluid (for automatic
transmission).
Move the shift lever to P and apply the parking brake before replacing the brake fluid (for manual
transmission).
Add brake fluid to keep the level between the MIN and MAX lines of the reservoir while replacing
the brake fluid.
If brake fluid leaks onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
HINT:
If any work is performed on the brake system or if air in the brake lines is suspected, bleed the brake
system.
1. FILL RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID

(a) Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir filler cap.
(b) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid.
Brake Fluid:
NOTICE:
Make sure that there is sufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
2. BLEED BRAKE LINE
NOTICE:
Bleed the brake line of the wheel farthest from the master
cylinder first.
Add brake fluid to keep the level between the MIN and
MAX lines of the reservoir while bleeding the brake lines.
(a) Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder plug.
(b) Depress the brake pedal several times, and then loosen
the bleeder plug with the pedal depressed.*1
(c) When fluid stops coming out, tighten the bleeder plug and
release the brake pedal.*2
(d) Repeat steps *1 and *2 until all the air in the brake fluid
is completely bled out and a new brake fluid comes out.
(e) Tighten the bleeder plug completely.
(f) Repeat the above steps to replace the brake fluid of the
brake lines for each wheel.
3. INSPECT FOR BRAKE FLUID LEAK
4. INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SRD092X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Since the brake lines are classified as critical safety related parts, be sure to disassemble and
inspect the components if a brake fluid leak is found. If any abnormality is found, replace the
component with a new one.
When removing brake components, cover the brake line connections to prevent foreign matter,
such as dust or dirt, from entering the lines.
Do not damage or deform the brake lines when removing or installing them.
Do not deform the bracket and the body when connecting a brake line and flexible hose.
When installing a brake tube grommet to the body, make sure that the brake line passes through
the center of the grommet.
When installing a brake line or flexible hose, make sure that it is free from twists or bends.
If the cap of a flexible hose does not match the groove on the bracket, twist the hose slightly to
insert it.
Flexible hoses must be free from shock absorber oil, grease, etc.
When installing a brake line to a plastic clamp, make sure that the brake line is not loose or
pinched.
Do not reuse any clips or plastic clamps removed from a flexible hose or brake line.
After installing a brake line or flexible hose, make sure that it does not interfere with any other
components.
Do not allow brake fluid to adhere to any painted surface such as the vehicle body. If brake fluid
leaks onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
When disconnecting and connecting a flexible hose and brake line:
*1 Union Nut Wrench

*2 Clip
*a Disconnecting
*b Connecting
a. Hold the flexible hose with a wrench and disconnect the brake line with a union nut
wrench without deforming the line.
b. Remove the clip.
c. Install a new clip.
d. Hold the flexible hose with a wrench and connect the brake line with a union nut wrench
without deforming the line.
When connecting a brake line and way:
a. Support the way to prevent deformation of the brake tube and connect the brake tube to
the way with a union nut wrench.
b. Support the way to prevent deformation of the brake tube and install the bolt to fix the
way to the body.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003D8B02EX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE LINE: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HK8013X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HK602QX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SEAL
(a) Install a new seal to the brake master cylinder sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the brake master cylinder sub-assembly to the brake booster assembly with the 2 nuts.
(b) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, install the 2 brake tubes to the brake master cylinder sub-
assembly.
NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate the special torque values for situations where a union nut wrench is
(c) Connect the brake fluid level switch connector.
3. BLEED BRAKE SYSTEM
4. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HK902FX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Make sure to release the vacuum from the brake booster assembly before removing the brake
master cylinder sub-assembly from the brake booster assembly.
NOTICE:
If brake fluid leaks onto any painted surface, wash it off immediately.
3. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
4. REMOVE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Release the vacuum from the booster by depressing the brake pedal several times.
(b) Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
(c) Using a union nut wrench 12 mm, disconnect the 2 brake

tubes from the brake master cylinder sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 nuts and the brake master cylinder sub-
assembly from the brake booster assembly.
NOTICE:
Because of the way the master cylinder sub-assembly is
designed, the piston can easily fall out, and so do not hold
the master cylinder sub-assembly by the piston or pull
the piston out. If the piston has been removed from the
master cylinder sub-assembly by accident, there is a
danger that the performance of the master cylinder sub-
assembly will be degraded, and so it cannot be reused
and must be replaced with a new master cylinder sub-
assembly.
The master cylinder requires careful handling. Do not
allow the master cylinder to receive any impact, such as
from being dropped. Do not reuse a master cylinder that
has been dropped.
Do not strike or pinch the master cylinder piston, and do
not cause any damage to the master cylinder piston by
any other means.
When installing the master cylinder to the brake booster
or removing the master cylinder from the brake booster,
make sure that the master cylinder is kept horizontal or
with its tip facing downward (the piston faces upward) to
prevent the master cylinder piston from falling out.
Do not allow any foreign objects to contaminate the
master cylinder piston. If a foreign object gets on the
piston, remove it by using a piece of cloth, and then apply
an even layer of lithium soap base glycol grease around
the circumference (sliding part) of the piston.
Do not use any other type of grease or fluid.
Be careful not to damage the brake tubes.
5. REMOVE SEAL
(a) Remove the seal.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJ3019X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. CHECK AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT
(a) Check the pedal height.
*1 Push Rod Clevis Lock Nut
*2 Floor mat
*a Pedal Height
Standard Pedal Height from floor mat:

150mm (5.906in.)
(b) Adjust the pedal height.
(1) Remove the instrument side panel LH.
(2) Remove the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
(3) Disconnect the connector from the stop light switch assembly.
(4) Remove the stop light switch assembly.
(5) Loosen the push rod clevis lock nut.
(6) Adjust the pedal height by turning the push rod.

150mm (5.906in.)
(7) Tighten the push rod clevis lock nut.
(8) Install the stop light switch .
(9) Connect the connector to the stop light switch assembly.
(10) Check that the stop light does not illuminate when the brake pedal is not stepped.
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY
(a) Stop the engine. Depress the pedal several times until
there is no vacuum in the booster. Then release the pedal.
(b) Depress the pedal until resistance is felt.
(c) Check the pedal free play by measuring the distance between the position in the previous step and
the pedal released position.
Standard pedal free play:

0.5 to 2.0mm (0.020 to 0.079in.)
*a Pedal Free Play
HINT:
If the pedal free play distance 1mm (0.039in.) or less, adjust the stop light switch assembly.
3. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE

(a) Release the brake pedal. Start the engine, and when the pressure in the brake booster reaches
66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.6 in.Hg), proceed with the next step.
(b) Depress the pedal and check the pedal reserve distance.
*1 Floor mat
*a Pedal Reserve Distance
Standard Pedal Reserve Distance from the floor mat at

490 N (50 kgf, 110.2 lbf):
If the distance is not as specified, troubleshoot the brake

system.
HINT:
Check the brake pedal reserve distance at the same location

as that used when checking the brake pedal height.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003D8800HX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002W9103JX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL PAD
(a) Remove the brake pedal pad from the brake pedal
support assembly.
2. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Remove the bolt and nut from the brake pedal support
assembly.
HINT:
Hold the bolt in place and loosen the nut.
3. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN SPRING

(a) Remove the brake pedal return spring.
4. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL SHAFT COLLAR

(a) Remove the brake pedal shaft collar.
5. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL BUSH

(a) Remove the 2 brake pedal bushes.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002W8Y04VX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-
S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the brake pedal support assembly with the 4 nuts.
(b) Install the brake pedal support assembly with the 2 bolts.
2. INSTALL PUSH ROD PIN

(a) Apply lithium soap base glycol grease to the new push rod pin.
*1 Push Rod Pin
(b) Connect the brake master cylinder push rod clevis to the brake pedal with the new push rod pin,
and install a new clip as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
After installation, check that the pedal operates smoothly.
3. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER

(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the stop light switch mounting adjuster.
4. INSPECT AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL
5. INSPECT AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT

6. INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY
7. INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE
8. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
9. INSTALL TCM
HINT:
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002W9203WX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL BUSH
(a) Install the 2 brake pedal bushes to the brake pedal.
*1 Brake Pedal Bush
*2 Brake Pedal
2. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Apply a light layer of lithium soap base glycol grease to the entire circumference of the brake pedal
return spring and brake pedal shaft collar.
Lithium soap base glycol grease
(b) Install the brake pedal return spring and brake pedal shaft collar to the brake pedal.
(c) Install the brake pedal to the brake pedal bracket support
assembly.
*1 Brake Pedal
*2 Brake Pedal Support Assembly
(d) Install the bolt and nut to the brake pedal support
assembly.
HINT:
Hold the bolt in place and tighten the nut.
3. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL PAD

(a) Install the brake pedal pad to the brake pedal.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002W9004UX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Automatic Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
3. REMOVE TCM
4. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps and remove the stop light switch
mounting adjuster from the brake pedal support
assembly.
6. REMOVE PUSH ROD PIN
(a) Remove the clip and the push rod pin from the push rod
clevis.
7. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 2 bolts from the brake pedal support
assembly.
(b) Remove the 4 nuts and the brake pedal support

assembly.
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. CHECK AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT
(a) Check the pedal height.
*1 Push Rod Clevis Lock Nut
*2 Floor mat
*a Pedal Height

145mm
(5.709in.)
(b) Adjust the pedal height.
(1) Remove the instrument side panel LH.
(2) Remove the No. 1 instrument panel under cover sub-assembly.
(3) Disconnect the connector from the stop light switch assembly.
(4) Remove the stop light switch assembly.
(5) Loosen the push rod clevis lock nut.
(6) Adjust the pedal height by turning the push rod.

145mm
(5.709in.)
(7) Tighten the push rod clevis lock nut.
(8) Install the stop light switch assembly .
(9) Connect the connector to the stop light switch assembly.
(10) Check that the stop light does not illuminate when the brake pedal is not stepped.
2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY

(a) Stop the engine. Depress the pedal several times until
there is no vacuum in the booster. Then release the pedal.
(b) Depress the pedal until resistance is felt.
(c) Check the pedal free play by measuring the distance between the position in the previous step and
the pedal released position.
Standard pedal free play:
0.5 to 2.0mm
(0.020 to 0.079in.)
*a Pedal Free Play
HINT:
Check the brake pedal free play at the same location as that used when checking the brake pedal
height.
3. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE

(a) Release the brake pedal. Start the engine, and when the pressure in the brake booster reaches
66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.6 in.Hg), proceed with the next step.
(b) Depress the pedal and check the pedal reserve distance.
*1 Floor mat
*a Pedal Reserve Distance
Standard Pedal Reserve Distance from the floor mat at

490 N (50 kgf, 110.2 lbf):
If the distance is not as specified, troubleshoot the brake

system.
HINT:
Check the brake pedal reserve distance at the same location

as that used when checking the brake pedal height.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJ500QX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002W9103KX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL PAD
(a) Remove the brake pedal pad from the brake pedal
support assembly.
2. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Remove the bolt.
(b) Remove the clutch master cylinder bracket and the brake
pedal from the brake pedal support assembly.
*1 Clutch Master Cylinder Bracket
*2 Brake Pedal
*3 Brake Pedal Support Assembly

3. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN SPRING
(a) Remove the brake pedal return spring from the clutch master cylinder bracket.
4. REMOVE BRAKE PEDAL BUSH
(a) Remove the 2 brake pedal bushes from the brake pedal.
*1 Brake Pedal Bush
*2 Brake Pedal
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJ401BX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER

(a) Engage the 2 clamps and install the stop light switch mounting adjuster.
2. INSPECT AND ADJUST BRAKE PEDAL
3. INSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002W9203XX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL BUSH
(a) Install the 2 brake pedal bushes to the brake pedal.
*1 Brake Pedal Bush
*2 Brake Pedal
2. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL

(a) Apply lithium soap base glycol grease to the brake pedal return spring and the clutch master
cylinder bracket.
*1 Brake Pedal Return Spring

(b) Install the clutch master cylinder bracket and the brake
pedal to the brake pedal support sub-assembly.
*2 Brake Pedal
*3 Brake Pedal Support Sub-assembly
(c) Install the bolt.
3. INSTALL BRAKE PEDAL PAD

(a) Install the brake pedal pad to the brake pedal.
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE PEDAL (for Manual Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE STOP LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTING ADJUSTER
(a) Disengage the 2 clamps and remove the stop light switch
mounting adjuster from the brake pedal support sub-
assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJ901XX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Take extra care to replace each part properly. Improper installation or repair could affect the
performance of the brake system and cause a driving hazard.
It is very important to keep the brake system parts and the work area clean when repairing the
brake system.
If the vehicle is equipped with a mobile communication system, refer to the Precautions in the
Introduction section.
Care must be taken when using magnets as they could affect the performance of the speed sensors.
Since the brake line is one of the critical safety-related parts, be sure to disassemble the
components if a brake fluid leak is found. If any abnormality is found, replace the component with a
new one.
When removing brake components, cover the brake tube connections to prevent foreign matter
such as dust or dirt from entering the tubes.
Do not damage or deform the brake tubes when removing or installing them.
Do not deform the bracket and the body when connecting a brake line and flexible hose.
When installing a brake tube grommet to the body, make sure that the brake tube passes through
the center of the grommet.
When installing a brake tube or flexible hose, make sure that it is not twisted or bent.
If the fitting of the flexible hose does not match the groove on the bracket, twist the hose slightly
to insert it.
Flexible hoses must be free from absorber oil, grease, etc.
When installing a brake tube to a plastic clamp, make sure that the brake tube is not loose or being
pinched.
Do not reuse a clip or plastic clamp removed from a flexible hose.
After installing a brake tube and flexible hose, make sure that they do not interfere with any other
components.
Do not allow brake fluid to adhere to any painted surface such as the vehicle body. If brake fluid
leaks onto any painted surface, immediately wash it off.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HJA01YX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the table below to help determine the cause of problem symptoms. If multiple suspected areas are
listed, the potential causes of the symptoms are listed in order of probability in the "Suspected Area"
column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in the order they are listed.
Replace parts as necessary.
Brake System

PAGE
Fluid leaks in brake system -
Air in brake system
Front brake piston seals (worn or damaged)

Low pedal or spongy pedal
Rear brake piston seals (worn or damaged)
Brake master cylinder (faulty)
Booster push rod (adjustment necessary)
Brake pedal free play (minimum)
Parking brake lever travel (adjustment necessary)
Parking brake cable (sticking)
Parking brake shoe clearance (adjustment necessary)
Front brake pad (cracked or distorted)
Rear brake pad (cracked or distorted)

Brake drag
Parking brake lining (cracked or distorted)
Front brake piston (stuck or seized)
Rear brake piston (stuck or seized)
Parking brake shoe return tension spring
Vacuum leaks in booster system
Brake master cylinder (faulty)
Front brake piston (stuck or seized)
Rear brake piston (stuck or seized)
Front brake pad (oily, cracked or distorted)
Brake pull Rear brake pad (oily, cracked or distorted)
Parking brake lining (oily, cracked or distorted)

Front brake disc (scored)
Rear brake disc (scored)
Fluid leaks in brake system -
Air in brake system
Front brake pad (worn, cracked, distorted, oily or glazed)
Rear brake pad (worn, cracked, distorted, oily or glazed)

Hard pedal but braking
inefficient Parking brake lining (worn, cracked, distorted, oily or
glazed)
Vacuum leaks in booster system
Front brake pad (cracked, distorted, dirty or glazed)
Rear brake pad (cracked, distorted, dirty or glazed)
Front disc brake pad clip (worn)
Rear disc brake pad clip (worn)
Front brake installation bolt (loose)
Noise from brakes Rear brake installation bolt (loose)
Front brake anti-squeal shim (damaged)
Rear brake anti-squeal shim (damaged)
Parking brake shoe hold-down spring (damaged)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002I8900HX
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000159A017X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY

(a) Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, and install it.
(b) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the

illustration.
*a Edge of groove
*b 2.0 to 4.0 mm (0.078 to 0.158 in.) in diameter
*c 1.0mm or less
NOTICE:
Clean and degrease the contact surface.
Install the vacuum pump assembly within 5 minutes of
applying seal packing.
HINT:
When replace the vacuum pump assembly on the vehicle,

apply seal packing to the vacuum pump assembly.
(c) Install the vacuum pump assembly while aligning the

grooves of the vacuum pump assembly with the claws of
the intake camshaft RH.
*a Groove of the vacuum pump assembly
*b Claw of the intake camshaft
NOTICE:
Make sure that the O-ring is not pinched.
(d) Install the 3 bolts.
2. INSTALL VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Install the vacuum tube connector hose.
3. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000159D016X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY OPERATION
(a) Move the clamp and disconnect the vacuum tube

connector hose from the vacuum pump assembly.
(b) Connect the hose of a vacuum gauge to the vacuum

pump assembly.
*1 Vacuum Gauge
(c) Start the engine and warm it up for more than 2 minutes.
(d) With the engine idling, check the vacuum of the vacuum pump assembly.
Standard pressure:
More than 93 kPa (698 mmHg, 27 in.Hg) of vacuum
If the is not as specified, disassemble the vacuum pump assembly and inspect or replace it .
HINT:
After disassembling and checking the vacuum pump assembly, check the vacuum pump assembly
function.
(e) Remove the vacuum gauge from the vacuum pump assembly.
(f) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose to the vacuum pump and move the clamp back into
position.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000159C017X
Title: BRAKE SYSTEM (OTHER): VACUUM PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE
(a) Change the locations of the front hood stay from A to B,

and support the hood sub-assembly with the location B.
(b) Disconnect the vacuum tube connector hose from the

vacuum pump assembly.
2. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER TO COWL BRACE SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
3. REMOVE VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 3 bolts and vacuum pump assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring.
(c) Remove the seal packing from the vacuum pump assembly and the engine.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000006NP00LX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000006NR00OX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

2. SEPARATE REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the rear disc brake
caliper assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Hang the rear disc brake cylinder assembly LH with wire
or equivalent.
3. REMOVE REAR DISC
(a) Put matchmarks on the rear disc and the rear axle hub.
*a Matchmark
(b) Release the parking brake and remove the rear disc.
HINT:
If the disc cannot be removed easily, use a screwdriver to turn the shoe adjuster as shown in the
illustration in order to contract the parking brake shoes.
*a Expand *b Contract
4. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Using SST, remove the parking brake shoe return tension
spring.
SST: 09921-00011
5. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
(a) Using SST, remove the parking brake shoe return tension
spring.
SST: 09921-00011
6. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT COMPRESSION SPRING
(a) Using SST, remove the parking brake shoe strut

compression spring.
SST: 09921-00011
7. FIX PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Using SST, remove the brake shoe hold down

compression spring.
SST: 09718-00011
HINT:
Hold the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin with your
finger.
8. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Front Side)
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for front side).
9. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT LH

(a) Pull the parking brake shoe towards the front of the vehicle by hand as shown in the illustration.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe strut LH.

*1 Parking brake shoe strut LH
10. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN

COMPRESSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
(a) Using SST, remove the brake shoe hold down
compression spring (for rear side).
SST: 09718-00011
HINT:
Use the service hole to hold the parking brake shoe hold down
spring pin with your finger.
11. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Rear Side)
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for rear side).
12. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING SCREW SET
(a) Expand the parking brake shoe outward by hand and pull
downward to separate them from the parking brake plate.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set.
13. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE KIT
(a) Remove the parking brake shoe kit.
14. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe return tension spring.
15. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE LEVER LH
(a) Using needle-nose pliers, remove the parking brake shoe

lever LH from the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly as
16. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE TYPE C WASHER
(a) Widen and remove the parking brake shoe type C washer
from the parking brake shoe as shown in the illustration.
17. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE WAVE WASHER

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe wave washer.
18. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SHOE PIN

(a) Remove the parking brake shoe pin.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V6G04TX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRAKE DISC INSIDE DIAMETER
(a) Using a brake drum gauge or an equivalent tool, measure

the inside diameter of the disc.
Standard inside diameter:

190 mm (7.48 in.)
Maximum inside diameter:
191 mm (7.52 in.)
If the inside diameter is more than the maximum, replace

the rear disc.
2. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SHOE LINING THICKNESS
(a) Using a ruler, measure the thickness of the parking brake

shoe lining.
Standard thickness:
3.5 mm (0.1378 in.)
Minimum thickness:
1.5 mm (0.0591 in.)
If the lining thickness is less than the minimum, or if

there is severe or uneven wear, replace the parking brake
shoe assembly.
NOTICE:
Always replace both right and left parking brake shoes
together.
3. INSPECT BRAKE DISC AND PARKING BRAKE SHOE LINING FOR PROPER CONTACT
(a) Apply chalk to the inside surface of the disc, then slide the brake shoe against the disc to check the
fit of the brake shoe lining to the disc.
Chalk
If the contact between the disc and the brake shoe lining is incorrect, repair it using a brake shoe
grinder or replace the parking brake shoe assembly.
NOTICE:
Always replace both right and left parking brake shoes together.
Wipe off the chalk after inspection.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000006NT00RX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. APPLY DISC BRAKE GREASE

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the backing plate which make contact with
the shoe as shown in the illustration.
Disc Brake Grease
2. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE PIN

(a) Install the parking brake shoe pin.
3. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE LEVER LH

(a) Apply a light coat of disc brake grease to the areas of the parking brake shoe lever LH which make
contact with the parking brake shoe pin.
(b) Install the parking brake shoe lever LH to the parking brake shoe.
4. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE WAVE WASHER

(a) Install the wave washer.
5. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE TYPE C WASHER

(a) Install a new parking brake shoe type C washer.
(b) Using a pair of pliers, squeeze together the ends of the
parking brake shoe type C washer.
6. INSTALL NO. 3 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY

(a) Using needle-nose pliers, connect the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake
shoe lever LH.
7. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring to

the parking brake shoe.
8. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE KIT
(a) Install the parking brake shoe to the parking brake shoe
return tension spring.
9. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTING SCREW SET
(a) Apply disc brake grease to the parking brake shoe

adjusting screw set as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set to the parking brake shoes.
NOTICE:
Take care to install the correct parking brake shoe adjusting screw set because the direction of
the parking brake shoe adjusting screw set is different between the left and right sides.
Disc Brake Grease
For front side (LH Side)

For rear side (RH Side)
(c) Expand the parking brake shoes outward by hand and fit
them to the parking brake plate.
10. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Rear Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for rear side) to the parking brake plate.
11. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Rear
Side)
(a) Using SST, install the parking brake shoe hold down
compression spring (for rear side) as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09718-00011
12. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT LH

(a) Pull the parking brake shoe towards the front of the vehicle by hand as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the parking brake shoe strut LH.
(c) Install the parking brake shoe.
*1 Parking brake shoe strut LH
13. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN SPRING PIN (for Front Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe hold down spring pin (for Front side) to the parking brake plate.
14. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE HOLD DOWN COMPRESSION SPRING (for Front
Side)
(a) Using SST, install the parking brake shoe hold down
compression spring (for Front Side) as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09718-00011
15. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE STRUT COMPRESSION SPRING

(a) Install the parking brake shoe strut compression spring to the shoe strut.
16. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Rear Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring (for rear side).
17. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SHOE RETURN TENSION SPRING (for Front Side)
(a) Install the parking brake shoe return tension spring (for front side).
18. CHECK PARKING BRAKE INSTALLATION

(a) Make sure that all the parts are installed properly. If necessary, remove and reinstall the parts.
*a LH Side *b RH Side
Front of the Vehicle - -
(a) Align the matchmarks of the rear disc and rear axle hub,
and install the rear disc.
*a Matchmark
HINT:
When replacing the disc with a new one, select the installation
position where the rear disc has minimal runout.
20. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE SHOW CLEARANCE AND PARKING BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
(a) Temporarily install the hub nuts to the hub bolts.
(b) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.

(c) Turn the shoe adjuster and expand the shoes until the disc locks.
(d) Turn and contract the shoe adjuster until the disc can rotate smoothly.
Standard:
Returns 10 notches.
(e) Check that the parking brake does not drag.
(f) Remove the hub nuts from the hub bolts.
21. INSTALL REAR DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear disc brake caliper assembly LH with the new 2 bolts.
22. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL
23. ADJUST PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KG2009X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake plate with the clamp.
(b) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the body with the 4 bolts.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the No. 2 parking brake cable assembly as for the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly.
3. INSTALL PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL CENTER EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the center exhaust pipe assembly with the cushion rubber.
(b) Install the new gasket and the center exhaust pipe assembly with the 2 new nuts and the 2 bolts.
HINT:
Do not reuse the gaskets.

Do not reuse the nuts.
(c) Install the new gasket and the front exhaust pipe assembly with the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and the
2 compression springs to the center exhaust pipe assembly.
HINT:
5. INSTALL NO. 3 FUEL TANK PROTECTOR
6. INSTALL LOWER CASING BRACKET

(a) Install the lower casing bracket of the body with the 2 bolts.
7. INSTALL CLAMP H/B

(a) Install the clamp H/B of the casing lower bracket with the 2 nuts.
8. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY

10. INSTALL CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY

Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE CABLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE NO. 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE CLAMP H/B
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the clamp H/B.
5. REMOVE LOWER CASING BRACKET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the lower casing bracket.
6. REMOVE NO. 3 FUEL TANK PROTECTOR
7. REMOVE CENTER EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and the 2

compression spring and disconnect the center exhaust
pipe assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts and disconnect the tail
exhaust pipe assembly.
(c) Remove the cushion rubber and the center exhaust pipe
assembly.
(d) Remove the gasket.
8. REMOVE PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and separate the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly from the vehicle.
Bolt Vehicle front side
(b) Remove the clamp and remove the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly.

HINT:
Use the same No. 3 parking brake cable assembly as for the No. 2 parking brake cable assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OG007X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OF008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the parking brake switch assembly with the screw.
2. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE LEVER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the parking brake lever assembly with the 3 bolts.
(b) Connect the parking brake switch assembly connector.

(a) Temporarily install the NO. 1 parking brake cable assembly to the parking brake lever with the
adjusting nut.
(b) Install the NO. 2 parking brake cable assembly and NO. 3 to the NO. 1 parking brake cable
assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OH008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE LEVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Release the parking brake lever assembly.
(b) Remove the adjusting nut.
(c) Disconnect the NO. 2 parking brake cable assembly and

NO. 3 parking brake cable assembly from the NO. 1
parking brake cable assembly.
(d) Remove the NO. 1 parking brake cable assembly from the parking brake lever assembly.
3. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE LEVER ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the parking brake switch assembly connector.
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and parking brake lever assembly.

4. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the screw and parking brake switch assembly

from the parking brake lever assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OU007X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OT007X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the resistance.
(1) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals.
ON
OFF
TESTER CONNECTION SWITCH CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
1 - Ground Released (ON) Below 1 Ω
1 - Ground Pushed in (OFF) 10 kΩ or higher
If the result is not as specified, replace the parking brake switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OS008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the parking brake switch assembly with the screw.
(b) Connect the parking brake switch assembly connector.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026OV008X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the parking brake switch assembly connector.
(b) Remove the screw and parking brake switch assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UVR057X
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT

(a) Fully pull the parking brake lever to engage the parking brake.
(b) Pull the lever again to disengage the parking brake.
(c) Slowly pull the parking brake lever using the specified force, and count the number of clicks.
Parking brake lever travel:

7 to 8 notches at 200 N (20 kgf, 45.0 lbf)
If the parking brake lever travel is not as specified, adjust the parking brake shoe clearance and
parking brake lever travel.
(a) Remove the front console box .
(b) Completely release the parking brake lever.
(c) Loosen the adjusting nut to completely release the

parking brake cable.
*1 Adjusting nut
(d) Remove the rear wheels.
(e) Temporarily install the hub nuts to the hub bolts.
(f) Remove the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(g) Turn the shoe adjuster and expand the shoes until the disc locks.
(h) Turn and contract the shoe adjuster until the disc can rotate smoothly.
Standard:
Returns 10 notches.
(i) Check that there is no brake drag against the shoe.
(j) Install the parking brake shoe adjusting hole plug.
(k) Turn the adjusting nut until the parking brake lever travel is corrected to be within the specified
range.

(l) Using a wrench or an equivalent tool, tighten the adjusting nut.
(m) Operate the parking brake lever 3 to 4 times, and check the parking brake lever travel.

(n) Check that the parking brake does not drag.

(o) Remove the hub nuts from the hub bolts.
(p) Install the rear wheels.
(q) Install the front console box .
3. INSPECT BRAKE WARNING LIGHT

(a) When operating the parking brake lever, check that the brake warning light illuminates.
Standard:
The brake warning light always illuminates at the first click.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003KNR00AX
Title: PARKING BRAKE: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
SYMPTOM SUSPECTED AREA SEE PAGE
Parking brake lever travel (Out of adjustment)
Parking brake wire (Sticking) (No. 1 cable)
Parking brake wire (Sticking) (No. 2 cable)
Brake drag Parking brake wire (Sticking) (No. 3 cable)
Parking brake shoe clearance (Out of adjustment)
Parking brake shoe lining (Cracked or distorted)
Tension or return spring (Damaged)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000X11026X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: AXLE SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Axle System
Tires (Worn or improperly inflated)
Front wheel alignment (Incorrect)
Rear wheel alignment (Incorrect)

Wander/pulls
Steering linkage (Loose or worn)
Front hub bearings (Loose or worn)
Front stabilizer bar (Bend or breach)
Wheels (Out of balance)
Front Shock absorber (Worn)
Front wheel shimmy Wheel alignment (Incorrect)
Lower ball joint (Worn)
Hub bearings (Loose or worn)
Wheel alignment (Incorrect)
Lower ball joint (Worn)

Front wheel shimmy
Front Shock absorber (Worn)

Rear wheel shimmy
Shock absorber (Worn)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001V2R00VX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000TLO02FX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION
(a) Put matchmarks on rear suspension member and new

rear No. 2 differential mount cushion.
*a Arrow
*b Matchmark
CAUTION:
Install the rear No. 2 differential mount cushion with the
arrow marks facing upward and downward.
(b) Using SST and install the rear No. 2 differential mount cushion.
SST: 09570-18010
09571-01030
09571-01040
09571-01050
09571-01060
09571-01070
09571-01080
09571-01090
*1 Rear Suspension Member
*2 Rear No. 2 Differential Mount Cushion
*3 SST(09571-01090)
*4 SST(09571-01070)
*5 SST(09571-01050)
*6 SST(09571-01080)
*7 SST(09571-01040)
*8 SST(09571-01030)
*9 SST(09571-01060)
*a Hold
*b Turn
*c Start
*d End
Front side
HINT:
Install the rear No. 2 differential mount cushion while aligning with the matchmark on the rear
suspension member and checking misalignment.
Push in the rear No. 2 differential mount cushion until SST (09571-01040) comes into contact with
the rear suspension member.
Make sure that the differential mount cushion is aligned within 5° from the center.
*a 5°
(a) Put matchmarks on rear suspension member and new

rear No. 1 differential mount cushion.
*a Triangle Mark
*b Matchmark
NOTICE:
Install the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion with the
triangle mark facing upward.
(b) Using SST and install the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion.
SST: 09570-18020
09571-01120
09571-01130
09571-01140
09571-01150
09571-01160
09571-01170
09571-01180
09571-01190
SST: 09922-10010
*3 SST(09571-01150)
*4 SST(09571-01130)
*5 SST(09571-01190)
*6 SST(09571-01120)
*7 SST(09571-01170)
*8 SST(09571-01140)
*9 SST(09571-01160)
*10 SST(09571-01180)
*11 SST(09922-10010)
*a Hold
*b Turn
*c Start
*d End
Front side
NOTICE:
Install the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion while checking that SST and the rear No. 1
differential mount cushion are not at an angle.
If the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion is pushed in at an angle, the installation becomes
difficult. Be sure to set SST on the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion with no clearance.
HINT:
Install the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion while aligning with the matchmark on the rear
suspension member and checking misalignment.
Push in the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion until SST (09571-01130) comes into contact with
the rear suspension member.
Make sure that the differential mount cushion is aligned within 3° from the center.
*a 3°
3. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR
5. INSTALL EXHAUST TAIL PIPE ASSEMBLY
6. INSTALL DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000TLR02FX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE EXHAUST TAIL PIPE ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR
4. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT CUSHION

(a) Using SST, remove the rear No. 1 differential mount cushion.
SST: 09570-18020
09571-01100
09571-01110
09571-01140
09571-01150
09571-01160
09571-01170
09571-01180
09571-01190
SST: 09922-10010

*3 SST(09571-01180)
*4 SST(09571-01160)
*5 SST(09571-01140)
*6 SST(09571-01170)
*7 SST(09571-01190)
*8 SST(09571-01110)
*9 SST(09571-01100)
*10 SST(09571-01150)
*11 SST(09922-10010)
*a Hold
*b Turn
*c Start
*d End
Front side
NOTICE:
Make sure that SST does not come into contact with the cylindrical part of the rear suspension
member and is not set at an angle.
Make sure that SST does not run on the weld bead around the cylindrical part.

(a) Using SST, remove the rear No. 2 differential mount cushion.
SST: 09570-18010
09571-01010
09571-01020
09571-01050
09571-01060
09571-01070
09571-01080
09571-01090
*3 SST(09571-01090)
*4 SST(09571-01070)
*5 SST(09571-01050)
*6 SST(09571-01080)
*7 SST(09571-01020)
*8 SST(09571-01010)
*9 SST(09571-01060)
*a Hold
*b Turn
*c Start
*d End
Front side
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000009HK00DX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL OIL: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. INSPECT DIFFERENTIAL OIL LEVEL
(a) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, remove the rear

differential filler plug and gasket.
(b) Check that the oil level is between 0 to 5 mm (0 to 0.197

in.) from the bottom lip of the rear differential filler plug
opening.
*a 0 to 5 mm (0 to 0.197 in.)
NOTICE:
An excessively large or small amount of differential oil
may cause damage.
After replacing oil, drive the vehicle and check the oil
level.
If necessary, fill the rear differential carrier assembly with

differential synthetic gear oil.
(c) Inspect for oil leaks if the oil level is low.
(d) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, install the rear differential filler plug and a new gasket.
2. ADD DIFFERENTIAL OIL

(a) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, remove the rear differential filler plug and gasket.
(b) Add differential oil.
Capacity Oil Grade
Toyota genuine differential

gear oil LT 75W-85 GL-5
1.10 to 1.20 liters (1.17 or equivalent (except for
to 1.27 US qts, 0.97 to LSD)
1.05 Imp. qts) Toyota genuine differential
gear oil LX 75W-85 GL-5
or equivalent (for LSD)
(c) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, install the rear differential filler plug together with a new gasket.
NOTICE:
When adding differential oil, make sure that the vehicle is level.
An excessively large or small amount of differential oil may cause damage.
After adding differential oil, drive the vehicle and recheck the oil level.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000013SC00YX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. Before disassembly, clean the outside of the rear differential carrier assembly and
remove any sand or mud to prevent it from entering the inside of the rear differential
carrier assembly during disassembly and installation.
2. When removing a connected part made of light alloy such as a rear differential
carrier cover, tap it off with a plastic-faced hammer. Do not attempt to pry it off with a
screwdriver.
3. Always arrange disassembled parts in order to protect them from dust.
4. Before installation, thoroughly clean and dry each part, and then apply Toyota
genuine differential gear oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 to those parts. Do not use alkaline
cleaner for aluminum or rubber parts and ring gear set bolts. Also, do not clean rubber
parts such as O-rings or oil seals with non-residue solvent (except LSD).
5. Before installation, thoroughly clean and dry each part, and then apply Toyota
genuine differential gear oil LX 75W-85 GL-5 to those parts. Do not use alkaline
cleaner for aluminum or rubber parts and ring gear set bolts. Also, do not clean rubber
parts such as O-rings or oil seals with non-residue solvent (for LSD).
6. Coat sliding surfaces and rotating parts with Toyota genuine differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 (except LSD).
7. Coat sliding surfaces and rotating parts with Toyota genuine differential gear oil LX
75W-85 GL-5 (for LSD).
8. When holding a part in a vise, be sure to place an aluminum sheet between the part
and vise. Do not put the part directly in the vise.
9. Do not damage the contact surfaces of the rear differential carrier. Such damage may
cause oil leakage.
10. Do not fill the differential with oil immediately after parts have been installed using
seal packing. Allow at least 1 hour for the seal packing to dry before filling the
differential.
11. Damage to surfaces in contact with an oil seal, O-ring or gasket may cause oil
leakage.
12. When press-fitting an oil seal, do not damage the oil seal lip or outside periphery.
13. When replacing a bearing, replace the inner and outer races as a set.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001RFE016X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: DIFFERENTIAL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Differential System
Oil (Level low or wrong grade)
Ring gear or drive pinion (Worn or chipped)
Backlash adjustment (Incorrect)

Noise in rear differential
Preload adjustment (Incorrect)
Tooth contact between ring gear and drive pinion (Incorrect)
Bearing (Worn)
Oil (Level too high or wrong grade)
Oil leak from rear differential Side gear shaft oil seal (Worn or damaged)
Carrier oil seal (Worn or damaged)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V7F01AX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V7G01UX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
HINT:

2. SEPARATE FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the front disc brake caliper assembly from the steering knuckle.
NOTICE:
Hang the caliper using a piece of string or equivalent.
4. REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT

(a) Using SST, remove the front axle hub bolt from the front axle hub sub-assembly.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
09961-02060
*1 Nut *2 Body
*3 Claw *4 SST (spacer B)
*a Place a wrench here - -

Molybdenum grease Turn
CAUTION:
Before working, apply molybdenum grease to the bolt threads and bolt tip of SST.
NOTICE:
Install SST so that claw and body are parallel.
Make sure to tie the string of SST to the vehicle to prevent SST from dropping.
Do not damage the front disc brake dust cover.
Do not damage the front axle hub.
Do not damage the steering knuckle.
5. INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB BOLT
(a) Set a new axle hub bolt onto the front axle hub, and
tighten the nut (M12 x P1.25mm (0.0492 in.)) through
the washer plate to install the axle hub bolt.
*1 Nut
*2 Washer
*a Turn
*b Hold
NOTICE:
Install the nuts to prevent damage to the front axle hub
bolts.
7. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the front disc brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle with the 2 new bolts.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4D01SX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: FRONT AXLE HUB: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4C02GX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: FRONT AXLE HUB: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the front axle hub sub-assembly to steering knuckle with the 4 new bolts.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter between the steering knuckle.
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter between the front axle hub sub-
assembly.
2. INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS
3. INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB RUNOUT

(a) Install the bolt and speed sensor front to steering knuckle.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter such as dirt or dust to enter between the steering knuckle and
the front disc brake dust cover.


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000X12021X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: FRONT AXLE HUB: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
HINT:

(a) Using a dial indicator, check for looseness near the center
of the front axle hub.
Maximum looseness:
0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
NOTICE:
If the looseness is more than the maximum, replace the
front axle hub and bearing assembly.
(a) Using a dial indicator, check for runout on the surface of

the axle hub outside the hub bolt.
Maximum runout:
0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
NOTICE:
front axle hub and bearing assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4E025X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: FRONT AXLE HUB: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

4. DISCONNECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Remove the bolt, disconnect the front speed sensor LH

from the steering knuckle.
NOTICE:
Clean the speed sensor installation hole and the contact
surfaces every time the front speed sensor LH is
removed.
5. REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 4 bolts, front axle hub sub-assembly LH from

the steering knuckle.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4L02KX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE CARRIER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000005905000X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE CARRIER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM BUSH

(a) Using SST and press, remove the rear No. 1 suspension arm bush.
SST: 09710-18030
SST: 09716-18010
Aspect Weight - -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4K03IX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE CARRIER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Using a jack and wooden block, jack up the rear axle carrier sub-assembly LH to replicate standard
vehicle height conditions.
2. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Temporarily tighten the rear upper control arm assembly

LH to the rear axle carrier sub-assembly with the new bolt
and new nut.
3. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Temporarily tighten the rear NO. 1 suspension arm

assembly LH to the rear axle carrier sub-assembly with
the new bolt and new nut.
4. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Temporarily tighten the rear NO. 2 suspension arm

assembly LH to the rear axle carrier sub-assembly with
the bolt and new nut.
5. INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the nut and the toe control link sub-assembly LH to the rear axle carrier sub-assembly.
(b) Install the new cotter pin.
6. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the clip and the NO. 3 parking brake cable
assembly to the parking brake plate sub-assembly.
8. REASSEMBLY PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY
9. STABILIZE SUSPENSION
10. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Fully tighten the bolt.
HINT:
Hold the bolt and tighten the nut.
11. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

HINT:
Hold the nut and tighten the bolt.
HINT:
Hold the bolt and tighten the nut.
13. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY
14. INSTALL REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY LH
15. INSPECT AND ADJUST REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT

Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE CARRIER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM BUSH

(a) Using SST and a press, install the new rear No. 1 suspension arm bush.
SST: 09710-18030
SST: 09716-18010
Aspect Weight - -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4M033X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE CARRIER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY LH
2. DISASSEMBLY PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY
3. SEPARATE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. SEPARATE NO. 3 PARKING BRAKE CABLE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clip and separate the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly from parking brake plate sub-assembly.
5. SEPARATE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear upper control
arm assembly LH from rear axle carrier.
6. SEPARATE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear No. 1
suspension arm assembly LH from rear axle carrier.
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear No. 2
suspension arm assembly LH from rear axle carrier.
8. DISCONNECT TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the cotter pin.
(b) Remove the nut.
(c) Install the SST (spacer B) as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
As SST may become damaged, make sure the space between the toe control link sub-assembly
LH and spacers is not less than 1 mm (0.0394 in.).
(d) Using SST, disconnect the toe control link sub-assembly LH from the rear axle carrier as shown in
the illustration.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
09961-02060
*1 Nut *2 Body
*a 1 mm (0.0394 in.) *b Place a wrench here
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Do not damage the toe-control link ball joint dust cover.
Do not damage the toe-control link sub-assembly.
Do not damage the parking brake plate sub-assembly.
Do not damage the rear axle carrier.
9. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE PLATE SUB-ASSEMBLY
10. REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Hold the drive shaft and remove the rear axle carrier sub-assembly LH.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V7I01TX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE HUB BOLT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V7H02FX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE HUB BOLT: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
HINT:

2. SEPARATE REAR CALIPER ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE REAR DISC
4. REMOVE REAR AXLE HUB BOLT LH

(a) Using SST, remove the rear axle hub bolt LH from rear axle hub and bearing assembly LH.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
09961-02060
*1 Nut *2 Body
*a Place a wrench here - -

CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Install SST so that claw and body are parallel
Do not damage the rear axle hub and bearing.
5. INSTALL REAR AXLE HUB BOLT LH
(a) Set a new axle hub bolt onto the rear axle hub and
bearing, and tighten the nut (M12 x P1.25mm (0.0492
in.)) through the washer plate to install the axle hub bolt.
*1 Nut
*2 Washer
*a Turn
*b Hold
NOTICE:
Install the nuts to prevent damage to the rear axle hub
bolt LHs LH.
7. INSTALL REAR CALIPER ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4L02IX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE HUB: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4K03FX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE HUB: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear axle hub and bearing assembly to the rear axle assembly with the 4 bolts.
4. STAKE REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT LH

(a) Clean the threaded parts on the rear drive shaft assembly and a new rear axle shaft nut using a
non-residue solvent.
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform this step even when using a new rear drive shaft assembly.
Keep the threaded parts free of oil and foreign matter.
(b) Install the new rear axle shaft nut.
HINT:
Stake the rear axle shaft nut LH after inspecting for looseness and runout in the following steps.
5. INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS
6. INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB RUNOUT
7. STAKE REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT LH
(a) Using a chisel and hammer, stake the rear axle shaft nut
LH.
8. INSTALL REAR SPEED SENSOR LH

(a) Install the bolt and the rear speed sensor LH.


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000X1301ZX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE HUB: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
HINT:

3. REMOVE REAR DISC
(a) Using a dial indicator, check for looseness near the center
of the rear axle hub.
Maximum looseness:
0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
NOTICE:
Make sure that the dial indicator is set perpendicular to
the measurement surface.
Keep the magnet of the dial indicator away from the rear
axle hub and bearing assembly.

rear axle hub and bearing assembly.
(a) Using a dial indicator, check for runout on the surface of

the rear axle hub and bearing assembly outside the rear
axle hub bolt.
Maximum runout:
0.05 mm (0.00196 in.)
NOTICE:
Make sure that the dial indicator is set perpendicular to
the measurement surface.
Keep the magnet of the dial indicator away from the rear
If the runout is more than the maximum, replace the rear



Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4M031X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR AXLE HUB: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. SEPARATE REAR SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Remove the bolt and separate rear speed sensor LH.
NOTICE:
Prevent foreign matter from attaching to the sensor tip.
3. REMOVE REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT LH

(a) Using SST and a hammer, release the staked part of the
rear axle shaft nut.
SST: 09930-00010
NOTICE:
Do not grind the SST.
Release the staked part of the nut completely, otherwise
the threads of the drive shaft may be damaged.
(b) Remove the rear axle shaft nut.
5. REMOVE REAR DISC
6. REMOVE REAR AXLE HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Using a plastic-faced hammer, disconnect the rear drive shaft assembly from the rear axle hub and
bearing assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the boot.
Use wire or equivalent to prevent the rear drive shaft assembly from hanging down.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and the rear axle hub and bearing
assembly LH from the rear axle assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001V2P01DX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O5901CX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL BREATHER PLUG
(a) Remove the rear differential breather plug from the rear
differential carrier cover.
2. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER COVER
(a) Remove the 8 bolts.
(b) Using a brass bar and a hammer, remove the rear

differential carrier cover from the rear differential carrier
assembly.
NOTICE:
Place the brass bar onto the corners of the rear
Do not damage the sealing surface of the rear differential
carrier.
3. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL BREATHER PLUG OIL DEFLECTOR
(a) Remove the bolt and the rear differential breather plug oil
deflector from the rear differential carrier cover.
4. SECURE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Secure the rear differential carrier sub-assembly to the

overhaul stand with the 6 bolts.
5. INSPECT RUNOUT OF DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR
(a) Set a dial indicator perpendicular to the end of the

differential ring gear face.
(b) Rotate the differential ring gear and measure the runout.
Maximum runout:
0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
If the runout is more than the specified maximum value, remove the differential ring gear and check
the runout of the rear differential case sub-assembly.
6. INSPECT DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR BACKLASH
(a) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange

sub-assembly, rotate the differential ring gear and
measure the backlash.
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
HINT:
Record the measured backlash to use as a reference for

selecting a rear differential side gear shaft plate washer.
Inspect the tooth contact and use the result as a
reference for selecting a rear differential side gear shaft
plate washer.
7. INSPECT TOOTH CONTACT BETWEEN RING GEAR AND DRIVE PINION
(a) Coat 3 or 4 teeth at 3 different positions on the

differential ring gear with Prussian blue.
(b) Rotate the differential ring gear in both directions.
(c) Inspect the tooth contact pattern.
*a Proper Contact *b Heel Contact
Select an adjusting washer that brings the

*c Face Contact *d
drive pinion closer to the ring gear
*e Toe Contact *f Flank Contact
Select an adjusting washer that shifts the drive

*g - -
pinion away from the ring gear
8. INSPECT DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR BACKLASH
(a) Place a dial indicator on the tip of a side gear tooth at a

right angle. Hold the pinion gear in the rear differential
case sub-assembly and check that the backlash.
Standard Backlash:
0 mm (0 in.)
If the result is not as specified, replace the rear
differential case sub-assembly with a new one.
9. INSPECT RUNOUT OF REAR DRIVE PINION COMPANION FLANGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the vertical and lateral

runout of the rear drive pinion companion flange sub-
assembly.
*a Vertical Runout
*b Lateral Runout
*c 30 mm (1.181 in.)
Maximum Runout:
Vertical runout 0.09 mm (0.00354 in.)
Lateral runout 0.09 mm (0.00354 in.)
NOTICE:
Measure the runout of the rear drive pinion companion
flange horizontally at a position 30 mm (1.18 in.) away
from the center of the differential drive pinion shaft.
If the runout is more than the maximum value, replace

the rear drive pinion companion flange.
10. INSPECT DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION PRELOAD
(a) Using a torque wrench, measure the starting torque of

the differential drive pinion.
Differential drive pinion preload (at starting):

1.11 to 1.91 N*m (11.3 to 19.5 kgf*cm, 9.8 to 16.9
in.*lbf)
HINT:
The backlash between the differential drive pinion and

differential ring gear should allow enough movement of
the differential drive pinion to allow this measurement to
be performed.
Make sure not to include the preload of the differential
ring gear (rear differential case sub-assembly) in the
measurement of the differential drive pinion preload.
11. INSPECT TOTAL PRELOAD
(a) Using a torque wrench, measure the preload with the

teeth of the differential drive pinion and differential ring
gear in contact.
Total preload (at starting):

1.60 to 2.69 N*m (16.3 to 27.4 kgf*cm, 14.2 to 23.8
in.*lbf)
12. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR SHAFT OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST, remove the 2 rear differential side gear shaft
oil seals.
SST: 09308-00010
*1 Rear Differential Side Gear Shaft Oil Seal
13. REMOVE REAR DRIVE PINION NUT
(a) Using SST and a hammer, unstake the staked part of the
rear drive pinion nut.
SST: 09930-00010
NOTICE:
Be sure to use SST with the tapered surface facing the
differential drive pinion.
Do not grind the tip of SST with a grinder, etc.
Completely loosen the staked part of the rear drive pinion
nut when removing it.
Do not damage the threads of the differential drive pinion.
(b) Using SST to hold the rear drive pinion companion flange,
remove the rear drive pinion nut.
SST: 09330-00021
*a Turn
*b Hold
14. REMOVE REAR DRIVE PINION COMPANION FLANGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, remove the rear drive pinion companion

flange sub-assembly.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09950-30012
09951-03010
09953-03010
09954-03010
09955-03030
09956-03030
NOTICE:
Apply grease to the threads of SST center bolt before
use.
15. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL DUST DEFLECTOR
HINT:
Perform this procedure only when the rear differential dust deflector is damaged.
(a) Using SST and a press, remove the rear differential dust
deflector.
SST: 09950-00020
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00380
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
Do not drop the rear drive pinion companion flange.
16. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL

17. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION OIL SLINGER
(a) Remove the rear differential drive pinion oil slinger.
18. REMOVE REAR DRIVE PINION FRONT TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
(a) Using SST, remove the rear drive pinion front tapered
roller bearing (inner race) from the differential drive
pinion.
SST: 09556-22010
*a Turn
*b Hold
NOTICE:
Apply grease to the threads and tip of SST center bolt
before use.
19. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION BEARING SPACER
(a) Remove the rear differential drive pinion bearing spacer.
20. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Put matchmarks on either bearing cap and the rear

differential carrier sub-assembly.
*a Matchmark
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and 2 bearing caps from the rear differential carrier sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not exchange bearing caps, as each cap is only suitable for its original location and the
installation direction relative to the rear differential carrier sub-assembly for which it was
manufactured.
(c) Using SST and a hammer, remove the 2 rear differential

side gear shaft plate washers.
SST: 09504-22011
NOTICE:
Put identification marks on the rear differential side
gear shaft plate washers to show the location for
installation (differential ring gear back side or
differential ring gear teeth side), or keep them separate
so that they can be distinguished.
HINT:
Measure the thickness of each rear differential side gear shaft

plate washer and note it.
(d) Remove the rear differential case sub-assembly and the

rear differential case bearing outer races differential ring
gear back side and differential ring gear teeth side from
the rear differential carrier.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the rear differential case bearing or the
differential ring gear.
Put identification marks on the rear differential case
bearing outer races to show the location for installation
(back side or teeth side), or keep them separate so that
they can be distinguished.
21. REMOVE REAR DRIVE PINION REAR TAPERED ROLLER BEARING

(a) Remove the differential drive pinion from the rear differential carrier sub-assembly.
(b) Using SST and a press, remove the rear drive pinion rear
tapered roller bearing (inner race) from the differential
drive pinion.
SST: 09950-00020
NOTICE:
Do not drop the differential drive pinion.
HINT:
If either the differential drive pinion or differential ring gear is

damaged, replace both as a set.
(c) Remove the rear differential drive pinion plate washer from the differential drive pinion.
HINT:
Measure the thickness of the rear differential drive pinion plate washer and note it.
(d) Using a brass bar and a hammer, remove the rear drive
pinion rear tapered roller bearing (outer race) from the
rear differential carrier sub-assembly.
*1 Outer Race
NOTICE:
Place the brass bar onto the rear drive pinion rear
tapered roller bearing outer race. Do not damage the
rear differential carrier.
(a) Using a brass bar and a hammer, remove the rear drive
pinion front tapered roller bearing (outer race) from the
*1 Outer Race
NOTICE:
Place the brass bar onto the rear drive pinion front
tapered roller bearing outer race. Do not damage the
23. REMOVE DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR
(a) Hold the rear differential case sub-assembly in a vise

between aluminum plates.
*a Matchmark
NOTICE:
Do not overtighten the vise.
(b) Put matchmarks on the differential ring gear and the rear differential case sub-assembly.
(c) Using a chisel and hammer, unstake the 5 rear differential ring gear set bolt lock plates.
(d) Remove the 10 rear differential ring gear set bolts and
the 5 rear differential ring gear set bolt lock plates.
(e) Using a plastic-faced hammer, tap on the differential ring

gear to separate it from the rear differential case sub-
assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the differential ring gear.
24. INSPECT RUNOUT OF REAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
HINT:
Perform this procedure only when the runout of the differential ring gear exceeds the specified
maximum value.
(a) Install the rear differential case bearing outer races

differential ring gear back side and differential ring gear
teeth side to the rear differential case bearing inner races
LH and RH respectively.
NOTICE:
Be sure to install the rear differential case bearing outer
races in the correct position.
Do not damage the rear differential case bearing or
(b) Install the rear differential case sub-assembly to the rear differential carrier sub-assembly.
(c) Install the differential ring gear back side and differential ring gear teeth side rear differential side
gear shaft plate washers so that there is no looseness in the rear differential case bearings.
*a Differential Ring Gear Back Side *b Differential Ring Gear Teeth Side
(d) Align the matchmarks on the bearing cap and the rear
differential carrier sub-assembly and install the 2 bearing
caps.
*a Matchmark
NOTICE:
Make sure that the right and left bearing caps are not
interchanged.
(e) Tighten both bearing caps with the 4 bolts.
(f) Using a dial indicator, measure the rear differential case

sub-assembly runout.
Maximum runout:
0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
If the runout is more than the maximum value, replace

the rear differential case sub-assembly with a new one.
(g) Remove the 4 bolts and 2 bearing caps.
NOTICE:
Do not exchange bearing caps, as each cap is only suitable for its original location and the
installation direction relative to the carrier for which it was manufactured.
(h) Remove the rear differential case sub-assembly and the rear differential case bearing outer races
differential ring gear back side and differential ring gear teeth side from the rear differential carrier
sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the rear differential case bearing or differential ring gear.
25. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE BEARING
HINT:
Perform this procedure only when replacing the rear differential case bearing or rear differential case
sub-assembly.
(a) Hold the rear differential case sub-assembly in a vise

*a Turn
*b Hold
NOTICE:
(b) Using SST, remove the rear differential case bearing inner races LH and RH from the rear
differential case sub-assembly.
SST: 09950-40011
09951-04020
09952-04010
09953-04030
09954-04010
09955-04061
09957-04010
09958-04011
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00350
09951-00480
09952-06010
NOTICE:
Do not deform the bearing cage if the bearing is to be reused.
Hook the claws of SST to the rear differential case bearing inner race.
Apply grease to the threads and tip of SST center bolt before use.
26. INSPECT DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR BACKLASH
(a) Secure the rear differential case sub-assembly in a vise

NOTICE:
(b) Place a dial indicator on the tip of a side gear tooth at a right angle. Hold the pinion gear in the
rear differential case sub-assembly and check that the backlash.
Standard Backlash:
0 mm (0 in.)
If the result is not as specified, replace the rear differential case sub-assembly with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O5701QX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Support the rear differential carrier assembly using a jack.
(b) Install a new snap ring to the rear drive shaft assembly.
(c) Coat the spline of the inboard joint shaft assembly with toyota genuine differential gear oil LT 75W-
85 GL-5 (except LSD).
(d) Coat the spline of the inboard joint shaft assembly with toyota genuine differential gear oil LX 75W-
85 GL-5 (for LSD).
(e) Install the shaft snap ring with the opening facing downward.
(f) Align the shaft splines and install the drive shaft assembly with a brass bar and hammer.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the drive shaft dust cover, boot or oil seal.
Keep the drive shaft assembly level while handling it.
Do not tap the axle side of the drive shaft with the hammer.
Set the hole snap ring with the opening facing down word.
HINT:
Whether the inboard joint shaft is in contact with the pinion shaft or not can be confirmed from the
sound or feeling when tapping it in.
(g) Install the rear upper differential mount stopper and rear lower differential mount stopper to the
rear differential carrier assembly.
(h) Install the rear differential carrier assembly along with

the rear differential mount stopper with the 5 bolts.
A - Torque: 62 N·m (632 kgf·cm, 46ft·lbf)

B - Torque: 95 N·m (969 kgf·cm, 70ft·lbf)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O5A01DX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-
S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR

(a) Clean the contact surfaces of the rear differential case sub-assembly and differential ring gear.
(b) Clean the rear differential ring gear set bolt hole.
(c) Heat the differential ring gear to approximately 100°C

(212°F) in boiling water.
*a Boiling Water
(d) Carefully take the differential ring gear out of the boiling water.
CAUTION:
Use thick gloves to protect your hands as the differential ring gear is hot.
(e) Secure the rear differential case sub-assembly between aluminum plates in a vise.
NOTICE:
(f) After the moisture on the differential ring gear has completely evaporated, quickly install the
differential ring gear to the rear differential case sub-assembly.
(g) Align the matchmarks on the differential ring gear and

rear differential case sub-assembly.
*a Matchmark
(h) Temporarily install 5 new rear differential ring gear set bolt lock plates with the 10 rear
differential ring gear set bolts.
(i) After the differential ring gear cools down, tighten the 10 ring gear set bolts uniformly.
(j) Using a chisel and hammer, stake the 5 rear

differential ring gear set bolt lock plates.
(1) Stake one claw so that it is flush against the flat

surface of the bolt.
(2) Stake the other claw against the surface of the

bolt head to act as a stopper if the bolt starts to
loosen.
2. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE BEARING

(a) Using SST and a press, install the rear differential case bearing inner races LH and RH to the
rear differential case sub-assembly.
SST: 09710-30012
09710-04081
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00430
09951-00580
09951-00590
09952-06010
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
Do not apply hypoid gear oil to a new bearing.
Do not deform the bearing cage. Set SST to the center of the rear differential case sub-
assembly.
If the bearing is replaced, replace it and its outer race as a set.
3. INSPECT RUNOUT OF DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR

differential ring gear back side and differential ring
gear teeth side to the rear differential case bearing
inner races LH and RH respectively.
NOTICE:
Be sure to install the rear differential case bearing
outer races in the correct position.
(b) Install the rear differential case sub-assembly to the rear differential carrier.
(c) Install the differential ring gear back side and differential ring gear teeth side rear differential
side gear shaft plate washers so that there is no looseness in the rear differential case bearings.
HINT:
If the rear differential case bearing is new, select a thinner rear differential side gear shaft plate
washer and install it.
If the rear differential case bearing is reused, install a rear differential side gear shaft plate
washer with the same thickness as the removed one.
(d) Align the matchmarks on the bearing cap and the rear
differential carrier and install the 2 bearing caps.
*a Matchmark
NOTICE:
Make sure that the right and left bearing caps are
not interchanged.
(e) Tighten both bearing caps with the 4 bolts.
(f) Using a dial indicator, measure the runout of the

Maximum runout:
0.07 mm (0.00275 in.)
(g) Remove the 4 bolts and 2 bearing caps.
*a Matchmark
NOTICE:
Do not exchange bearing caps, as each cap is only
suitable for its original location and the installation
direction relative to the carrier for which it was
manufactured.
(h) Remove the 2 rear differential side gear shaft plate washers.
(i) Remove the rear differential case sub-assembly and

the rear differential case bearing outer races
gear teeth side from the rear differential carrier.
NOTICE:
4. INSTALL REAR DRIVE PINION REAR TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
(a) Install the rear differential drive pinion plate washer

to the differential drive pinion.
*1 Rear Differential Drive Pinion Plate Washer
HINT:
Temporarily install the rear drive pinion rear tapered

roller bearing (inner race) to prevent the rear
differential drive pinion plate washer from being
dropped.
The rear differential drive pinion plate washer can be
installed in either direction.
(b) Using SST and a press, install the rear drive pinion
rear tapered roller bearing (inner race) to the
differential drive pinion.
SST: 09506-30012
(c) Using SST and a press, install the rear drive pinion
rear tapered roller bearing (outer race) to the
differential carrier assembly rear.
SST: 09950-60020
09951-00890
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07200
Rear Drive Pinion Rear Tapered Roller Bearing (Outer

*1
Race)
5. INSTALL REAR DRIVE PINION FRONT TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
(a) Using SST and a press, install the rear drive pinion
front tapered roller bearing (outer race) to the
SST: 09950-60020
09951-00720
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
Rear Drive Pinion Front Tapered Roller Bearing (Outer

*1
Race)
6. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL DUST DEFLECTOR
HINT:
Perform this procedure only when replacing the rear differential dust deflector.
(a) Using SST and a press, install a new rear differential

dust deflector to the rear drive pinion companion
flange.
SST: 09636-20010
NOTICE:
Slowly press in the rear differential dust deflector.
If any burrs remain after pressing in the rear
differential dust deflector, remove them.
7. ADJUST DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION PRELOAD
(a) Install the differential drive pinion and the rear drive
pinion front tapered roller bearing (inner race) to the
NOTICE:
Do not drop the differential drive pinion.
Install the rear differential drive pinion bearing spacer
and the differential carrier assembly rear oil seal after
adjusting the tooth contact pattern.
(b) Install the rear differential drive pinion oil slinger to

the differential carrier assembly rear.
(c) Using SST, install the rear drive pinion companion

flange to the differential carrier assembly rear.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09950-30012
09951-03010
09953-03010
09954-03010
09955-03030
09956-03030
NOTICE:
Hold the differential drive pinion until SST is installed.
Install the rear drive pinion companion flange so that
there is a slight looseness in the differential drive
pinion because the rear differential drive pinion
bearing spacer is not yet installed.
Apply grease to the threads and tip of SST center bolt
before use.
(d) Coat the threads of a new rear drive pinion nut with hypoid gear oil LSD.
(e) Using SST and a torque wrench, hold the rear drive
pinion companion flange and tighten the rear drive
pinion nut.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09330-00021
Torque: 338 N·m (3445 kgf·cm, 249ft·lbf)or less
NOTICE:
Tighten the rear drive pinion nut to approximately 100
N*m (1020 kgf*cm, 74 ft.*lbf), and then tighten it
further while checking the differential drive pinion
preload.
Apply hypoid gear oil LSD to the rear drive pinion nut
and the threads of the differential drive pinion.
As there is no rear differential drive pinion bearing
spacer, tighten the rear drive pinion nut a little at a
time. Do not overtighten it.
(f) Turn the bearing clockwise and counterclockwise several times to stabilize it.
(g) Using a torque wrench, measure the starting torque

of the differential drive pinion.
HINT:

differential ring gear should allow enough movement
of the differential drive pinion to allow this
measurement to be performed.
Differential Drive Pinion Preload (at Starting):
New rear drive pinion 1.39 to 2.49 N*m (14.2 to 25.4

tapered roller bearing kgf*cm, 12.3 to 22.0 in.*lbf)
Reused rear drive pinion 1.01 to 1.81 N*m (10.3 to 18.5

NOTICE:
Record the differential drive pinion preload for the
total preload measurement.
Do not apply hypoid gear oil to a new rear drive pinion
tapered roller bearing.
If the preload is not within the specified range, adjust

the differential drive pinion preload or perform repairs
as necessary.
8. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY

gear teeth side to the rear differential case bearing
inner races LH and RH respectively.
NOTICE:
Be sure to install the rear differential case bearing
outer races in the correct position.
(b) Install the rear differential case sub-assembly to the differential carrier assembly rear.
(c) Install the differential ring gear back side and differential ring gear teeth side rear differential
side gear shaft plate washers so that the rear differential case bearing is not loose.
HINT:
If the final gear set (differential drive pinion and differential ring gear) and rear differential case
bearing are new, select a thinner rear differential side gear shaft plate washer and install it.
If the final gear set (differential drive pinion and differential ring gear) and rear differential case
bearing are reused, install a rear differential side gear shaft plate washer with the same
thickness as the removed one.
9. INSPECT AND ADJUST DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR BACKLASH
(a) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange,

rotate the differential ring gear and measure the
backlash.
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
HINT:
Record the measured backlash to use as a reference

for selecting a rear differential side gear shaft plate
washer.
Inspect the tooth contact and use the result as a
reference for selecting a rear differential side gear
shaft plate washer.
(b) Select a new rear differential side gear shaft plate

washer so that the differential ring gear backlash will
be within the specified range, and install it to the
differential ring gear back side.
Standard Plate Washer:
PART MARK THICKNESS PART MARK THICKNESS

NO. NO.
3.04 mm
90201- 2.58 mm 90564-
01 47 (0.1200
52001 (0.1016 in.) 46029
in.)
3.06 mm
90564- 2.60 mm 90201-
32 17 (0.1205
46014 (0.1024 in.) 52017
in.)
3.08 mm
90564- 2.62 mm 90564-
33 48 (0.1213
46015 (0.1031 in.) 46030
in.)
3.10 mm
90201- 2.64 mm 90564-
03 49 (0.1221
52003 (0.1039 in.) 46031
in.)
3.12 mm
90564- 2.66 mm 90201-
34 19 (0.1228
46016 (0.1047 in.) 52019
in.)
3.14 mm
90564- 2.68 mm 90564-
35 50 (0.1236
46017 (0.1055 in.) 46032
in.)
3.16 mm
90201- 2.70 mm 90564-
05 51 (0.1244
52005 (0.1063 in.) 46033
in.)
3.18 mm
90564- 2.72 mm 90201-
36 21 (0.1252
46018 (0.1070 in.) 52021
in.)
3.20 mm
90564- 2.74 mm 90564-
37 52 (0.1260
46019 (0.1078 in.) 46034
in.)
3.22 mm
90201- 2.76 mm 90564-
07 53 (0.1268
52007 (0.1087 in.) 46035
in.)
3.24 mm
90564- 2.78 mm 90201-
38 23 (0.1276
46020 (0.1094 in.) 52023
in.)
3.26 mm
90564- 2.80 mm 90564-
39 54 (0.1283
46021 (0.1102 in.) 46036
in.)
3.28 mm
90201- 2.82 mm 90564-
09 55 (0.1291
52009 (0.1110 in.) 46037
in.)
3.30 mm
90564- 2.84 mm 90201-
40 25 (0.1299
46022 (0.1118 in.) 52025
in.)
3.32 mm
90564- 2.86 mm 90564-
41 56 (0.1307
46023 (0.1126 in.) 46038
in.)
3.34 mm
90201- 2.88 mm 90564-
11 57 (0.1315
52011 (0.1134 in.) 46039
in.)
3.36 mm
90564- 2.90 mm 90201-
42 27 (0.1323
46024 (0.1142 in.) 52027
in.)
3.38 mm
90564- 2.92 mm 90564-
43 58 (0.1331
46025 (0.1150 in.) 46040
in.)
3.40 mm
90201- 2.94 mm 90564-
13 59 (0.1339
52013 (0.1157 in.) 46041
in.)
3.42 mm
90564- 2.96 mm 90201-
44 29 (0.1346
46026 (0.1165 in.) 52029
in.)
3.44 mm
90564- 2.98 mm 90564-
45 60 (0.1354
46027 (0.1173 in.) 46042
in.)
3.46 mm
90201- 3.00 mm 90564-
15 61 (0.1362
52015 (0.1181 in.) 46043
in.)
3.48 mm
90564- 3.02 mm 90201-
46 31 (0.1370
46028 (0.1189 in.) 52031
in.)
(c) Make the rear differential case bearing and the rear
differential side gear shaft plate washer snug by
tapping on the rear differential carrier with a plastic-
faced hammer.
(d) Set a dial indicator perpendicular to the end of the

(e) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange, rotate the differential ring gear and
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
(f) If the backlash is not within the specified range, select

a new rear differential side gear shaft plate washer so
that the differential ring gear backlash will be within
the specified range, and install it to the differential
ring gear back side.
(g) Select a thicker rear differential side gear shaft plate

washer so that the clearance (A) becomes zero or
close to zero.
*1 Rear Differential Side Gear Shaft Plate Washer
*2 Rear Differential Case Bearing LH
(h) Make the rear differential case bearing and the rear
differential side gear shaft plate washer snug by
tapping on the rear differential carrier with a plastic-
faced hammer.
(i) Set a dial indicator perpendicular to the end of the

(j) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange, rotate the differential ring gear and
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
If the backlash is not within the specified range, adjust the thickness of the right and left rear
differential side gear shaft plate washers by an equal amount so that the backlash is within the
specified range.
10. ADJUST REAR DIFFERENTIAL CASE BEARING PRELOAD
(a) After adjusting the backlash of the differential ring

gear, remove the differential ring gear teeth side rear
differential side gear shaft plate washer.
(b) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the removed rear differential side gear shaft plate
washer.
(c) Select a new rear differential side gear shaft plate washer which is 0.06 to 0.09 mm (0.00236
to 0.00354 in.) thicker than the removed one.
HINT:
Select a rear differential side gear shaft plate washer which can be pressed in 2/3 of the way with
a finger.
(d) Using SST and a plastic-faced hammer, drive in the

rear differential side gear shaft plate washer.
SST: 09504-22011
(e) Align the matchmarks on the bearing cap and rear

differential carrier and install the 2 bearing caps.
*a Matchmark
NOTICE:
Make sure that the right and left bearing caps are
not interchanged.
(f) Tighten both bearing caps with the 4 bolts.

(g) Set a dial indicator perpendicular to the end of the
(h) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange, rotate the differential ring gear and
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
If the measured value is out of the specified range, adjust it by increasing or decreasing the
thickness of both the right and left rear differential side gear shaft plate washers equally.
HINT:
Record the measured backlash to use as a reference for selecting a rear differential side gear
shaft plate washer.
Inspect the tooth contact and use the result as a reference for selecting a rear differential side
gear shaft plate washer.

teeth of the differential drive pinion and the
differential ring gear in contact.
Total Preload (at Starting):
New 2.47 to 4.16 N*m (25.2

differential to 42.4 kgf*cm, 21.9 to
New rear drive case bearing 36.8 in.*lbf)
pinion tapered
roller bearing Reused 1.88 to 3.27 N*m (19.2
case bearing 28.9 in.*lbf)
New 2.09 to 3.48 N*m (21.3

Reused rear drive case bearing 30.8 in.*lbf)
pinion tapered
If the measured preload is less than the specified
value, replace the rear differential side gear shaft plate
washer of the differential ring gear tooth surface side
with a new thicker one.
If the preload is more than the specified value, replace

the rear differential side gear shaft plate washer of the
differential ring gear tooth surface side with a new
thinner one.
(b) Set a dial indicator to the end of the differential ring

gear face.
(c) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange, rotate the differential ring gear and
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
If the backlash is not within the specified range, change the thickness of the right and left rear
differential side gear shaft plate washers by equal amounts to adjust it.
HINT:
Record the measured backlash to use as a reference for selecting a rear differential side gear
shaft plate washer.
Inspect the tooth contact and use the result as a reference for selecting a rear differential side
gear shaft plate washer.
12. INSPECT TOOTH CONTACT BETWEEN RING GEAR AND DRIVE PINION
(a) Coat 3 or 4 teeth at 3 different positions on the

differential ring gear with Prussian blue.
(b) Rotate the differential ring gear in both directions.
(c) Inspect the tooth contact pattern.
*a Proper Contact *b Heel Contact
Select an adjusting washer that brings the

*c Face Contact *d
drive pinion closer to the ring gear
*e Toe Contact *f Flank Contact
Select an adjusting washer that shifts the

*g - -
drive pinion away from the ring gear
(d) If the teeth are not contacting properly, use the

following table to select a proper rear differential drive
pinion plate washer for correction.
*1 Rear Differential Drive Pinion Plate Washer
NOTICE:
If the contact pattern is face contact or flank contact,
tooth contact may be adjustable while keeping the
backlash within the specified range.
If the thickness of the rear differential drive pinion
plate washer has been changed, adjust the backlash
and measure the total preload.
Standard Plate Washer:
PART MARK THICKNESS PART MARK THICKNESS

NO. NO.
2.03 mm
90201- 1.70 mm 90201-
- - (0.0799
35497 (0.0669 in.) 35508
in.)
2.06 mm
90201- 1.73 mm 90201-
- - (0.0811
35498 (0.0681 in.) 35509
in.)
2.09 mm
90201- 1.76 mm 90201-
- - (0.0823
35499 (0.0693 in.) 35510
in.)
2.12 mm
90201- 1.79 mm 90201-
- - (0.0795
35500 (0.0705 in.) 35511
in.)
2.15 mm
90201- 1.82 mm 90201-
- - (0.0846
35501 (0.0717 in.) 35512
in.)
2.18 mm
90201- 1.85 mm 90201-
- - (0.0858
35502 (0.0728 in.) 35513
in.)
2.21 mm
90201- 1.88 mm 90201-
- - (0.0870
35503 (0.0740 in.) 35514
in.)
2.24 mm
90201- 1.91 mm 90201-
- 01 (0.0882
35504 (0.0752 in.) 35515
in.)
2.27 mm
90201- 1.94 mm 90201-
- 02 (0.0894
35505 (0.0764 in.) 35516
in.)
2.30 mm
90201- 1.97 mm 90201-
- 03 (0.0906
35506 (0.0776 in.) 35517
in.)
2.33 mm
90201- 2.00 mm 90201-
- 04 (0.0917
35507 (0.0787 in.) 35518
in.)
(a) Using SST to hold the rear drive pinion companion

flange, remove the differential carrier assembly rear.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09330-00021
17. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION BEARING SPACER
(a) Install a new rear differential drive pinion bearing

spacer to the differential drive pinion.
NOTICE:
Be sure to install the spacer so that the side with
the larger inner diameter faces the rear differential
carrier as shown in the illustration.
(a) Install the rear drive pinion front tapered roller

bearing (inner race) to the differential drive pinion.
19. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION OIL SLINGER
(a) Install the rear differential drive pinion oil slinger to

the differential drive pinion.
20. INSTALL REAR DRIVE PINION COMPANION FLANGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, install the rear drive pinion companion

flange.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09950-30012
09951-03010
09953-03010
09954-03010
09955-03030
09956-03030
NOTICE:
Apply grease to the threads of SST center bolt
before use.
22. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST, install the rear drive pinion companion

flange.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09950-30012
09951-03010
09953-03010
09954-03010
09955-03030
09956-03030
NOTICE:
Apply grease to the threads of SST center bolt
before use.
(b) Coat the threads of the rear drive pinion nut with hypoid gear oil LSD.
(c) Using SST and a torque wrench, hold the rear drive
pinion companion flange and tighten the rear drive
pinion nut.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09330-00021
Torque: 338 N·m (3445 kgf·cm, 249ft·lbf)or less
NOTICE:
Tighten the rear drive pinion nut to approximately 100
N*m (1020 kgf*cm, 74 ft.*lbf), and then tighten it
further while checking the differential drive pinion
preload.
Apply hypoid gear oil LSD to the rear drive pinion nut
and the threads of the differential drive pinion.
(a) Using a torque wrench, measure the starting torque

of the differential drive pinion.
HINT:

differential ring gear should allow enough movement
of the differential drive pinion to allow this
measurement to be performed.
Differential Drive Pinion Preload (at Starting):
New rear drive pinion 1.49 to 2.59 N*m (15.2 to 26.4

Reused rear drive pinion 1.11 to 1.91 N*m (11.3 to 19.5

If the preload is less than the specified

minimum value, check the preload while
retightening the rear drive pinion nut by 5 to
10° to adjust it so that it is within the
specified range.
Torque:
338 N*m (3445 kgf*cm, 249 ft.*lbf) or
less
If the preload is less than the specified
minimum value even when the tightening
torque of the rear drive pinion nut is more
than the specified maximum value, loosen the
rear drive pinion nut and check that the
threads of the rear drive pinion nut and
differential drive pinion are not stripped.
If the threads are not stripped, replace the
rear differential drive pinion bearing spacer.
Apply hypoid gear oil LSD to the threads of
the differential drive pinion and repeat the
procedure.

teeth of the drive pinion and ring gear in contact.
Total Preload (at Starting):
New 2.57 to 4.26 N*m (26.2

New rear drive case bearing 37.7 in.*lbf)
pinion tapered
New 2.19 to 3.58 N*m (22.3

Reused rear drive case bearing 31.7 in.*lbf)
pinion tapered
If the total preload is not within the specified range,

adjust the total preload or perform repairs as
necessary.
26. INSPECT DIFFERENTIAL RING GEAR BACKLASH

(a) Set a dial indicator perpendicular to the end of the differential ring gear face.
(b) While holding the rear drive pinion companion flange,

rotate the differential ring gear and measure the
backlash.
Standard Backlash:
0.13 to 0.18 mm (0.00512 to 0.00708 in.)
27. INSPECT RUNOUT OF REAR DRIVE PINION COMPANION FLANGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the vertical and lateral

runout of the rear drive pinion companion flange.
*a Vertical Runout
*b Lateral Runout
*c 30 mm (1.181 in.)
Maximum Runout:
Vertical runout 0.09 mm (0.00354 in.)
Lateral runout 0.09 mm (0.00354 in.)
NOTICE:
Measure the runout of the rear drive pinion
companion flange horizontally at a position 30 mm
(1.181 in.) away from the center of the differential
drive pinion shaft.
If the runout is more than the maximum, replace the

rear drive pinion companion flange and differential
ring gear.
28. STAKE REAR DRIVE PINION NUT
(a) Using SST and a hammer, stake the rear drive pinion
nut.
SST: 09930-00010
29. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR SHAFT OIL SEAL
30. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRAIN PLUG

(a) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, install the rear differential drain plug and a new gasket.

31. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the rear differential carrier sub-assembly

from the overhaul stand.
32. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL BREATHER PLUG OIL DEFLECTOR

(a) Clean the seal packing attached to the rear differential carrier and the rear differential carrier
cover using a scraper and wire brush. Then remove the oil with non-residue solvent or
equivalent.
NOTICE:
Do not scratch the sealing surface.
(b) Install the rear differential breather plug oil deflector

to the rear differential carrier cover with the bolt.
33. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER COVER
(a) Apply seal packing to the rear differential carrier cover

as shown in the illustration.
*a Seal packing
*b 2 to 3 mm (0.0787 to 0.118 in.)
Seal packing:
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1281, Three Bond 1281
or equivalent
NOTICE:
Apply the seal packing in a continuous line,
approximately 2 to 3 mm (0.0787 to 0.118 in.) in
diameter.
Overlap the seal packing at least 10 mm (0.394 in.) at
the beginning and end of application.
Install the rear differential carrier cover within 3
minutes of application.
(b) Install the rear differential carrier cover with the 8

bolts.
NOTICE:
Do not fill the differential with oil or drive the
vehicle immediately after installing the differential
carrier cover. Leave the vehicle for at least 1 hour.
Also, avoid sudden acceleration and deceleration for
at least 12 hours after application.
34. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL BREATHER PLUG
(a) Install the rear differential breather plug to the rear


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O5801NX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. DRAIN DIFFERENTIAL OIL
(a) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, remove the rear

differential filler plug and gasket.
(b) Using a hexagon wrench 10 mm, remove the rear

differential drain plug and gasket to drain the differential
oil.
(a) Support the rear differential carrier assembly with a

transmission jack.
(b) Remove the 5 bolts, rear upper differential mount stopper
and rear lower differential mount stopper.
(c) Lower the transmission jack slowly.
(d) Using a SST, disconnect the rear drive shaft assembly

from the rear differential carrier assembly as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09520-01010
SST: 09520-24010
09520-32040
(e) Lower the transmission jack and pull off the rear drive shaft assembly from the rear differential
carrier assembly, and then remove the rear differential carrier assembly.
HINT:
Tie the disconnected rear drive shaft with a rope.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003F7X00NX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000009HY02YX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
3. SECURE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST, remove the rear differential carrier oil seal
from the rear differential carrier.
SST: 09308-00010
*1 Rear Differential Carrier Oil Seal
HINT:
When replace the rear differential carrier oil seal, replace the
rear differential drive pinion bearing spacer and adjust the
drive pinion preload.
9. REPLACE REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION BEARING SPACER
(a) Replace the new rear differential drive pinion bearing

spacer.
11. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE PINION OIL SLINGER
14. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST and a hammer, install the new rear differential
carrier oil seal.
SST: 09554-22010
Standard depth:
1.55 to 2.45 mm (0.0610 to 0.0964 in.)
*1 Rear Differential Carrier Oil Seal
NOTICE:
Tap the oil seal uniformly so that the oil seal is straight.
Do not excessively tap the oil seal.
(b) Apply MP grease to the rear differential carrier oil seal lip.
18. STAKE REAR DRIVE PINION NUT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001RHY00TX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR SHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001RHX01BX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: REAR DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR SHAFT OIL SEAL: REPLACEMENT
(2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
HINT:

1. DRAIN DIFFERENTIAL OIL
2. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY LH
5. SECURE REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE REAR DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR SHAFT OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST, remove the rear differential side gear shaft oil
seal.
SST: 09308-00010
7. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR SHAFT OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST and a hammer, install a new 2 rear differential

side gear shaft oil seals.
SST: 09213-70011
SST: 09950-60010
SST: 09950-70010
09951-00410
09951-00620
09951-07100
09952-06010
Oil seal depth:

-0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.)
NOTICE:
To ensure a proper seal, evenly tap in the rear differential
side gear shaft oil seal.
When installing the oil seal, tap it in until its surface is
flush with the rear differential carrier.
8. INSTALL REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY
11. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4G01SX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: STEERING KNUCKLE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4F02HX
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: STEERING KNUCKLE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL STEERING KNUCKLE LH

(a) Install the steering knuckle LH with the 2 bolts and 2 new nuts.
2. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the nut and the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
(b) Install new cotter pin.
3. INSTALL TIE ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the nut and the tie rod sub-assembly LH to the steering knuckle LH.
(b) Install new cotter pin.
NOTICE:
If the holes for the clip are not aligned, tighten the nut up to an additional 60°
4. INSTALL FRONT DISC BRAKE DUST COVER LH

(a) Install the 3 bolts and the front disc brake dust cover LH to the steering knuckle LH.

6. INSTALL FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSPECT AND ADJUST FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4H024X
Title: AXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL: STEERING KNUCKLE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE FRONT AXLE HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
2. REMOVE FRONT DISC BRAKE DUST COVER LH
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and the front disc brake dust cover
LH.
3. DISCONNECT TIE ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the cotter pin and nut.
(b) Install the SST (spacer B) to tie rod assembly.
NOTICE:
As SST may become damaged, make sure the space between the tie rod and spacers is not less
than 1 mm (0.0394 in.).
(c) Using SST, disconnect the tie rod assembly.

SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
09961-02060
*1 Nut *2 Body
CAUTION:
Apply the molybdenum grease to the end and threads of SST bolt.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the dust cover on the tie rod end sub-assembly.
Do not damage the tie-rod end.
Do not damage the ball joint dust cover.
4. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(b) Install the SST (spacer B) to the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
NOTICE:
As SST may become damaged, make sure the space between the front lower suspension arm
assembly LH and spacers is not less than 1 mm (0.0394 in.).
(c) Using SST, disconnect the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
09961-02060
*1 Nut *2 Body
CAUTION:
Apply the molybdenum grease to the end and threads of SST bolt.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the dust cover on the front suspension lower arm assembly.
Do not damage the front lower arm sub-assembly.
5. REMOVE STEERING KNUCKLE LH
(a) Remove the steering knuckle LH with the 2 bolts and 2

nuts.
NOTICE:
When removing the nuts, keep the bolts from rotating.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003WYV00FX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH FLUID: BLEEDING (2013 FR-S)
BLEEDING
NOTICE:
Immediately wash off any clutch fluid that comes into contact with any painted surfaces.
HINT:
If any work is done on the clutch system or if air in the clutch lines is suspected, bleed the air from
the system.
1. FILL CLUTCH FLUID
(a) Fill the clutch fluid.
Fluid:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT3
NOTICE:
Add clutch fluid to keep the level between the MIN and
MAX lines of the master cylinder reservoir sub-assembly
while bleeding the clutch.
2. BLEED CLUTCH LINE
NOTICE:
In case of clutch fluid replacement, make sure that the old fluid is replaced in the clutch line
between the master cylinder reservoir sub-assembly and the bleeder before bleeding.
(a) Connect a vinyl tube to the clutch release cylinder bleeder

plug.
(b) Depress the clutch pedal 5 times, and then loosen the clutch release cylinder bleeder plug while the
pedal is depressed (Step C).
(c) When fluid no longer comes out, tighten the clutch release cylinder bleeder plug, and then release
the clutch pedal (Step D).
(d) Repeat Steps C and D until all the air in the fluid is completely bled out.
(e) Tighten the clutch release cylinder bleeder plug.

(f) Depress the clutch pedal 10 times or more and confirm its operation.
3. INSPECT FOR CLUTCH FLUID LEAK
4. INSPECT CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002WKJ014X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH FLUID: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
(a) Check the clutch fluid level.
If clutch fluid level is lower than the MIN line, check for
leaks and inspect the clutch lines. If necessary, refill the
master cylinder reservoir sub-assembly with clutch fluid
to the MAX line after repair or replacement.
Fluid:
NOTICE:
When adjusting fluid amount using a dropper or the
like, do not use one which was used with liquid
petroleum, water, or deteriorated clutch fluid. This may
deteriorate seals or fluid, resulting a fluid leak and poor
clutch function.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000033BB00WX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH FLUID: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
NOTICE:
HINT:
the system.
2. REPLACE CLUTCH FLUID
(a) Connect a vinyl tube to the clutch release cylinder bleeder

plug.
(b) Depress the clutch pedal several times, and then loosen the clutch release cylinder bleeder plug
with the pedal depressed (Step A).
(c) At the point where the fluid stops coming out, tighten the clutch release cylinder bleeder plug, and
then release the clutch pedal (Step B).
(d) Repeat Steps A and B until the new clutch fluid is comes out.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the master cylinder reservoir sub-assembly does not run out of clutch fluid.
(e) Tighten the clutch release cylinder bleeder plug.
(f) Repeat the above procedure to bleed the air out of the clutch line for each wheel.
3. INSPECT FOR CLUTCH FLUID

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B2Z01VX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000023TJ01OX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap.
(b) Fix the clutch master cylinder assembly in a vise between aluminum plates.
NOTICE:
(c) Using a pin punch and a hammer, tap out the straight pin and remove the master cylinder body.
2. REMOVE CLUTCH RESERVOIR GROMMET

(a) Remove the clutch reservoir grommet from the clutch master cylinder assembly.
3. REMOVE MASTER CYLINDER PISTON SUB-

ASSEMBLY
(a) Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring while
pushing the clutch master cylinder push rod.
(b) Remove the master cylinder piston sub-assembly and

spring from the master cylinder body.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the inside of the master cylinder body.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B2Y02UX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER TO FLEXIBLE HOSE TUBE

(a) Install the master cylinder to release cylinder hose to the clutch flexible hose bracket with the clip.
(b) Using a union nut wrench (10 mm), connect the clutch master cylinder to flexible hose tube to the
master cylinder to release cylinder hose.
NOTICE:
(c) Using a union nut wrench (10 mm), connect the clutch master cylinder to flexible hose tube to the
clutch master cylinder assembly.
NOTICE:
2. INSTALL CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the sheet to the clutch master cylinder assembly.
(b) Install the clutch master cylinder assembly with the 2 nuts.
(c) Install the master cylinder to release cylinder hose with a union bolt and 2 new gaskets.
3. INSTALL CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER PUSH ROD CLEVIS

(a) Apply MP grease to the new clevis pin.
(b) Install the clutch master cylinder push rod clevis to the clutch pedal lever sub-assembly with the
clevis pin and a clip.
HINT:
Install the clevis pin from the left side of the vehicle.
4. FILL UP FILL CLUTCH FLUID
8. INSPECT AND ADJUST CLUTCH PEDAL


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000023TK01PX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL MASTER CYLINDER PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply lithium soap base glycol grease to the portions shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the master cylinder piston sub-assembly and spring into the master cylinder body.
(c) Fix the clutch master cylinder assembly in a vise between aluminum plates.
NOTICE:
(d) Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring while pushing
the clutch master cylinder push rod.
2. INSTALL CLUTCH RESERVOIR GROMMET

(a) Install the clutch reservoir grommet onto the master cylinder body.
3. INSTALL MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the master cylinder reservoir sub-assembly to the master cylinder body.
(b) Using a pin punch and a hammer, tap in the straight pin.
(c) Install the master cylinder reservoir cap.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B3002TX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DRAIN CLUTCH FLUID
4. REMOVE CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER PUSH ROD CLEVIS
(a) Remove the clip and the clevis pin, and separate the
clutch master cylinder push rod clevis from the clutch
pedal lever sub-assembly.
6. REMOVE CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the union bolt, 2 gaskets and the master

cylinder to the release cylinder hose from the clutch
release cylinder assembly.
HINT:
Use a container to collect the fluid.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the clutch master cylinder

assembly and sheet.
7. REMOVE CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER TO FLEXIBLE
HOSE TUBE
(a) Using a union nut wrench (10 mm), disconnect the clutch
master cylinder to flexible hose tube from the master
cylinder to release cylinder hose.
HINT:
(b) Remove the clip and the clutch flexible hose bracket.
(c) Using a union nut wrench (10 mm), remove the clutch
master cylinder to flexible hose tube from the clutch
master cylinder assembly.
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B3C012X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B3B016X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY

table below.
*a 9.0 to 10.0 mm (0.354 to 0.394 in.)
*b ON
*c OFF
TESTER SWITCH SPECIFIED

ON (Pushed in) Below 1Ω

1-2
OFF (Released) 10 kΩ or higher
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the clutch

start switch assembly.
2. INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY

table below.
*a 5.0 to 6.5 mm (0.197 to 0.256 in.)
*b ON
*c OFF

ON (Pushed in) Below 1Ω

1-2
OFF (Released) 10 kΩ or higher
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the clutch

switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B3A013X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the clutch start switch assembly to the clutch pedal support sub-assembly with the nut.
(b) Connect the clutch start switch connector.
(c) With the clutch pedal fully depressed, check that the
clearance shown in the illustration is as specified.
*a Clearance
Standard clearance:
3.0 to 3.5 mm (0.118 to 0.138n.)
HINT:
Do not turn the clutch start switch assembly.
2. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. INSTALL CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the clutch switch assembly to the clutch pedal support sub-assembly with the nut.
(b) Connect the clutch switch connector.
(c) Without depressing the clutch pedal, check that there is

no clearance between the switch shaft and the clutch
pedal stopper.
*a No Clearance
HINT:
Do not turn the clutch switch assembly.

6. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL
7. INSPECT CLUTCH START SYSTEM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BFZ010X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

(a) Check that the engine does not start when the clutch pedal is released.
(b) Check that the engine starts when the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
If necessary, replace or adjust the clutch start switch assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B3D013X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the clutch switch connector.
(b) Remove the nut and the clutch switch assembly from the
clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
HINT:
Do not turn the clutch switch assembly.
4. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the clutch start switch connector.
(b) Remove the nut and the clutch start switch assembly
from the clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
HINT:
Do not turn the clutch start switch assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000ERC032X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
(a) If the full stroke of the clutch pedal sub-assembly is not

within the specified value, loosen the lock nuts of the
clutch switch assembly and adjust the full stroke of the
clutch pedal sub-assembly with the clutch switch
assembly.
*1 Lock Nut
*a Pedal stroke
Pedal stroke:
110 to 115 mm (4.331 to 4.528 in.)
NOTICE:
When adjusting the full stroke of clutch pedal sub-
assembly, do not turn the clutch switch assembly.
HINT:
If the clutch switch assembly cannot adjust the full stroke of

clutch pedal sub-assembly to the specified value, adjust it by
turning the clutch master cylinder push rod.
(b) Loosen the push rod lock nuts of the clutch master
cylinder assembly.
(c) Rotate the clutch master cylinder push rod to adjust.
*a In the Longer Direction

*b In the Shorter Direction
(d) Make sure that the clutch pedal sub-assembly contacts the clutch pedal stopper when the clutch
pedal sub-assembly is at the maximum stroke position.
(e) Make sure that the clutch pedal sub-assembly contacts the clutch switch side when the pedal is
released.
(f) Turn the clutch master cylinder push rod to shorten until a
clearance is gained on the clutch switch side.
(g) Turn the clutch master cylinder push rod to lengthen until the clutch pedal sub-assembly contacts
the clutch switch assembly.
(h) Turn further in the direction that will shorten the clutch
master cylinder push rod by 270°.
*a In the Longer Direction
*b In the Shorter Direction
(i) Check that the clevis pin moves smoothly by moving it to the left and right directions.
(j) Tighten the clutch master cylinder push rod lock nut of the
clutch master cylinder assembly.

(k) Depress and release the clutch pedal sub-assembly two or three times to ensure that the clutch
pedal sub-assembly and the release lever operate smoothly. If the clutch pedal sub-assembly and
the release lever do not operate smoothly, bleed the air from the clutch line.
(l) Measure the clutch pedal sub-assembly full stroke length again to ensure that it is within
specifications. If it is not within specifications, repeat the adjustment procedures again from the
beginning.
Pedal stroke:
105 to 115 mm (4.134 to 4.528 in.)
2. INSPECT CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Move the clutch pedal sub-assembly in the lateral

direction with a force of approximately 10 N (1.0 kgf, 2.2
lbf) to check that the clutch pedal sub-assembly
deflection is within the service limit.
Maximum play:
4.0 (0.158 in.)
If the play exceeds the maximum, replace the clutch pedal

sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002VLN00OX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001EXM00ZX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL PAD

(a) Install the clutch pedal pad to the clutch pedal sub-assembly.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 CLUTCH PEDAL CUSHION

(a) Install the No. 1 clutch pedal cushion to the clutch pedal sub-assembly.
3. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL STOPPER

(a) Install the clutch pedal stopper to the clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
4. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply MP grease to the 2 clutch pedal bushes.
MP grease
(b) Install the clutch pedal sub-assembly and 2 clutch pedal bushes to the clutch pedal support sub-
assembly.
(c) Using a pin punch (3 mm (0.118 in.)) and a hammer, align the clutch pedal lever sub-assembly
hole and the clutch pedal sub-assembly hole, and insert the straight pin from above.
5. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL SPRING

(a) Install the 2 bushes to the clutch pedal sub-assembly and clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
(b) Apply MP grease to the assist rod A, assist rod B and clutch pedal spring.
MP grease
(c) Install the assist rod A, assist rod B, clutch pedal spring and assist bush to the clutch pedal sub-
assembly and the clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
(d) Apply MP grease to the 2 clevis pins.
MP grease
(e) Install the 2 clevis pins and 2 E-rings.
HINT:
6. INSTALL CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the clutch switch assembly to the clutch pedal support sub-assembly with the nut.
7. INSTALL CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
8. INSTALL CLUTCH PEDAL SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Insert the hook on the clutch pedal support sub-assembly

into the vehicle panel.
*1 Hook
(b) Install the clutch pedal support sub-assembly to the vehicle with the 4 nuts and 3 bolts.
(c) Install the clutch master cylinder assembly with the 2 nuts.
(d) Apply MP grease to the new clevis pin.

(e) Install the clutch master cylinder push rod clevis to the clutch pedal lever sub-assembly with the
clevis pin and a clip.
HINT:
(f) Apply MP grease to the push rod pin.
(g) Install the brake master cylinder push rod clevis with the push rod pin and a clip.
HINT:
Install the push rod pin from the left side of the vehicle.
(h) Connect the connector and engage the wire harness clamp.
(i) Connect the 3 connectors.
9. INSTALL STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the steering intermediate shaft assembly to the

steering column assembly.
*a Matchmark
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the steering intermediate shaft
assembly and the steering column assembly.
(b) Install the bolt.

(a) Without depressing the clutch pedal sub-assembly, check

that there is no clearance between the clutch switch shaft
and the clutch pedal stopper.
*a No Clearance
12. INSTALL POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001EXO00ZX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH PEDAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
2. SEPARATE STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Put matchmarks on the steering intermediate shaft

*a Matchmark
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the steering column
assembly.
3. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the 3 connectors.
(b) Disconnect the connector and wire harness clamp.

(c) Remove the clip and the clevis pin, and separate the
clutch master cylinder push rod clevis from the clutch
pedal lever sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the clip and push rod pin, and separate the
brake master cylinder push rod clevis from the brake
pedal.
(e) Remove the 2 nuts and separate the clutch master

cylinder assembly.
(f) Remove the 3 bolts, 4 nuts and the clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
Bolt
Nut
4. REMOVE CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the nut and the clutch switch assembly from the
clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
6. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL SPRING

(a) Remove the 2 E-rings and the 2 clevis pins.
(b) Remove the assist rod A, assist rod B, clutch pedal spring
and assist bush.
(c) Remove the 2 bushes from the clutch pedal sub-assembly

and clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
7. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a pin punch (3 mm (0.118 in.)) and a hammer, tap

out the straight pin and remove the clutch pedal lever
sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the clutch pedal sub-assembly and 2 clutch pedal

bushes from the clutch pedal support sub-assembly.
8. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL STOPPER
(a) Remove the clutch pedal stopper from the clutch pedal
support sub-assembly.
9. REMOVE NO. 1 CLUTCH PEDAL CUSHION

(a) Remove the No. 1 clutch pedal cushion from the clutch pedal sub-assembly.
10. REMOVE CLUTCH PEDAL PAD

(a) Remove the clutch pedal pad from the clutch pedal sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001EXS008X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001F1D008X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the clutch release cylinder assembly with the 2 bolts.
2. CONNECT MASTER CYLINDER TO RELEASE CYLINDER HOSE

(a) Install the master cylinder to release cylinder hose with a union bolt and 2 new gaskets.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001F1E008X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DRAIN CLUTCH FLUID
NOTICE:
HINT:
the system.
2. DISCONNECT MASTER CYLINDER TO RELEASE CYLINDER HOSE
(a) Remove the union bolt, 2 gaskets and disconnect the

master cylinder to release cylinder hose from the clutch
release cylinder assembly.
HINT:
3. REMOVE CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the clutch release cylinder

assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004UA6005X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Clutch System
Engine mounting (Loose) -
Clutch disc assembly (Excessive runout)
Clutch disc assembly (Oily)
Clutch grabs/chatters Clutch disc assembly (Worn out)
Clutch disc torsion spring (Damaged)
Clutch disc assembly (Glazed)
Diaphragm spring (Tip out of alignment)
Clutch line (Air in line)
Clutch pedal spongy Master cylinder cup (Damaged)
Release cylinder cup (Damaged)
Clutch release bearing assembly (Worn, dirty or damaged)

Clutch noisy
Clutch disc torsion spring (Damaged)
Clutch pedal (Free play out of adjustment)
Clutch disc assembly (Worn out)

Clutch slips
Diaphragm spring (Damaged)
Pressure plate (Distorted)
Flywheel sub-assembly (Distorted)
Clutch pedal (Free play out of adjustment)
Clutch line (Air in line)
Master cylinder cup (Damaged)
Release cylinder cup (Damaged)
Clutch disc assembly (Out of line)

Clutch does not disengage
Clutch disc assembly (Excessive runout)
Clutch disc assembly (Lining broken)
Clutch disc assembly (Dirty or burned)
Clutch disc assembly (Lack of spline grease)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001EY5008X
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000OPT00EX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH UNIT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the rivet head depth.
Minimum rivet depth:

0.3 mm (0.0118 in.)
If necessary, replace the clutch disc assembly.
(b) Install the clutch disc assembly to the manual

transmission assembly.
NOTICE:
Insert the clutch disc assembly in the correct direction.
(c) Using a dial indicator with a roller instrument, measure the clutch disc assembly runout.
Maximum runout:
0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)
If necessary, replace the clutch disc assembly.
2. INSPECT CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the depth and width of

the diaphragm spring wear.
Maximum:
A (Depth)
0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
B (Width)
6.0 mm (0.236 in.)
If necessary, replace the clutch cover assembly.

3. INSPECT FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the flywheel sub-

assembly runout.
Maximum runout:
0.1 mm (0.00394 in.)
If necessary, replace the flywheel sub-assembly.
4. INSPECT CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the clutch release bearing assembly moves

smoothly without abnormal resistance by turning the
sliding parts of the clutch release bearing assembly
(contact surfaces with the clutch cover) while applying
force in the axial direction.
(b) Inspect the clutch release bearing assembly for damage and wear.
If necessary, replace the clutch release bearing assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PA600EX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY
(a) Insert SST into the clutch disc assembly, and then insert
them both into the flywheel sub-assembly.
*1 Clutch Disc Assembly
*2 Flywheel Sub-assembly
SST: 09301-00110
NOTICE:
Insert the clutch disc assembly in the correct direction.
2. INSTALL CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY
(a) Align the matchmark on the clutch cover assembly with

that on the flywheel sub-assembly.
*a Matchmark
(b) Following the procedures shown in the illustration, tighten the 6 bolts in order, starting with the
bolt located near the knock pin at the top.
SST: 09301-00110
HINT:
Following the order in the illustration, tighten the bolts evenly one at a time.
Move SST up, down, right and left lightly after checking that the disc is in the center, and tighten
the bolts.
3. INSPECT AND ADJUST CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a dial indicator with a roller instrument, measure

the diaphragm spring tip alignment.
Maximum non-alignment:
0.5 mm (0.0197 in.)
(b) If the alignment is not as specified, using SST, adjust the

diaphragm spring tip alignment.
SST: 09333-00013
4. INSTALL RELEASE FORK SUPPORT

(a) Install the release fork support to the manual transmission assembly.
5. INSTALL CLUTCH RELEASE FORK BOOT

(a) Install the clutch release fork boot to the manual transmission assembly.
6. INSTALL RELEASE BEARING HUB CLIP

(a) Install the 3 release bearing hub clips to the clutch release bearing assembly.
(b) Install the release bearing hub clip to the clutch release fork sub-assembly.
7. INSTALL CLUTCH RELEASE FORK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply release hub grease to the contact surfaces of the clutch release fork sub-assembly and clutch
release bearing assembly, clutch release fork sub-assembly and clutch release cylinder push rod,
and clutch release fork sub-assembly and release fork support.
Release Hub Grease
Grease:
Toyota Genuine Release Hub Grease or equivalent
(b) Engage the 2 release bearing hub clips and install the clutch release fork sub-assembly to the
clutch release bearing assembly.
8. INSTALL CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply clutch spline grease to the input shaft spline.
Clutch Spline Grease
Grease:
Toyota Genuine Clutch Spline Grease or equivalent
NOTICE:
Do not apply grease to portion A shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the clutch release bearing assembly with the clutch release fork sub-assembly to the manual
NOTICE:
After the installation, move the fork forward and backward to check that the release bearing
slides smoothly.
9. INSTALL MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PA700EX
Title: CLUTCH: CLUTCH UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE CLUTCH RELEASE FORK SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clutch release fork sub-assembly with the

clutch release bearing assembly from the manual
3. REMOVE CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 2 release bearing hub clips and remove

the clutch release bearing assembly from the clutch
release fork sub-assembly.
4. REMOVE RELEASE BEARING HUB CLIP

(a) Remove the 3 release bearing hub clips from the clutch release bearing assembly.
5. REMOVE CLUTCH RELEASE FORK BOOT
(a) Remove the clutch release fork boot from the manual
6. REMOVE RELEASE FORK SUPPORT
(a) Remove the release fork support from the manual

7. REMOVE CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY
(a) Put the matchmarks on the clutch cover assembly and the
flywheel sub-assembly.
*a Matchmark
(b) Loosen the 6 bolts one turn at a time until spring tension is released.
(c) Remove the 6 bolts and pull off the clutch cover assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not drop the clutch disc assembly.
8. REMOVE CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the clutch disc assembly.
NOTICE:
Keep the lining part of the clutch disk and the surfaces of the pressure plate and flywheel free of
oil and foreign matter.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003FRR00HX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: DRIVE SHAFT SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013
FR-S)

HINT:
Drive Shaft System
Rear wheel shimmy Rear drive shaft (worm)

Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001PKS00PX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(a) Set the dial indicator so that the dial indicator measurement probe is centered on the propeller
shaft with center bearing shaft assembly.
(b) Lightly turn the propeller shaft with center bearing shaft
assembly by hand, and measure the deflection.
Maximum runout:
0.6 mm (0.0236 in.)
NOTICE:
The dial indicator must be placed so that it is
perpendicular to the propeller shaft with center bearing
shaft assembly at the center of the shaft.
If the shaft runout is more than the maximum, replace the

propeller shaft with center bearing shaft assembly.
2. INSPECT SPIDER BEARING
(a) Check that the spider bearing rotates smoothly.
(b) Check that there is no play in the spider bearing.
*1 Front spider bearing
*2 Rear spider bearing

3. INSPECT CENTER SUPPORT BEARING ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the center support bearing assembly by hand. Check

that the center support bearing assembly turns smoothly.
(b) Check that the center support bracket of the center support bearing assembly is not cracked or
deformed.
(c) Check that the seals are not cracked or damaged.
HINT:
If the center support bearing assembly is damaged or worn, or does not turn smoothly, replace it.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O3V01KX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Completely remove any oil or the like and clean the contact surfaces of the propeller shaft
assembly and the rear drive pinion companion flange.
(b) Remove SST from the extension housing. (for Manual Transmission)
SST: 09325-20010
(c) Remove SST from the extension housing. (for Automatic Transmission)
SST: 09325-40010
(d) Insert the front propeller shaft assembly into the extension housing.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the oil seal.
(e) Install the 2 center support bearing washers and the center support bearing.
(f) Install the 2 bolts and the center support bearing bracket.
(g) Align the matchmarks on the differential companion

flange and the flexible coupling and connect the propeller
shaft.
*a Matchmark
(h) Install the rear propeller shaft assembly with the 4 new bolts, 4 washers and 4 new nuts.
NOTICE:
Hold the nut and tighten the bolt.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O3X01KX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Place matchmarks on the differential companion flange

and flexible coupling.
*a Matchmark
(b) Remove the 4 nuts, 4 bolts and 4 washers.
(c) Remove the 2 bolts.
(d) Disconnect the center support bearing.
(e) Remove the front propeller shaft with the center bearing assembly.
(f) Insert SST in the transmission to prevent oil leaks. (for

Manual Transmission)
NOTICE:
SST: 09325-20010
(g) Insert SST in the transmission to prevent oil leaks. (for
Automatic Transmission)
NOTICE:
SST: 09325-40010
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000U0301MX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: PROPELLER SHAFT SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Propeller Shaft Assembly
Center support bearing (Worn)
Noise and Vibration Propeller with center bearing shaft assembly (Runout)
Spider bearing (Worn or stuck)

Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000021T700VX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR NO. 2 DRIVE SHAFT INBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
(a) Using a flat tip screwdriver or needle-nose pliers, loosen

the boot band on the large end of rear No.2 drive shaft
inboard joint boot clamp.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the rear drive shaft outboard joint boot.
2. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT INBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
Remove the rear drive shaft inboard joint boot clamp on the small end of rear No.2 drive shaft inboard
joint boot clamp in the same manner.
3. REMOVE REAR NO. 2 DRIVE SHAFT OUTBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
Remove the rear No. 2 drive shaft outboard joint boot clamp on the small end of rear drive shaft
inboard joint boot No.2 clamp in the same manner.
4. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT OUTBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
Remove the rear drive shaft outboard joint boot clamp on the small end of rear drive shaft inboard
joint boot No.2 clamp in the same manner.
5. REMOVE CIRCLIP B
(a) Using screwdriver, remove the round circlip Bat the neck
of the EDJ outer race.
6. REMOVE EDJ OUTER RACE
(a) Take out the EDJ outer race from the shaft assembly.
(b) Wipe off the grease and take out the balls.
*1 EDJ outer race
*2 Grease
*3 Balls (8 pieces)
NOTICE:
The grease is a special grease (grease for constant
velocity joints). Do not mix it with other greases.
HINT:
Disassemble exercising care not to lose the balls (8 pieces).
(c) To remove the EDJ cage from the EDJ inner race, turn the EDJ cage by a half pitch to the track
groove of the EDJ inner race and shift the EDJ cage.
7. REMOVE EDJ INNER RACE

(a) Using pliers, remove the snap ring fixing the EDJ inner race to the shaft.
(b) Remove the EDJ inner race.
8. REMOVE EDJ BOOT

(a) Disconnect the EDJ cage from the shaft and remove the EDJ boot.
NOTICE:
Wrap the shaft splines with vinyl tape to protect the boot from scratches.
9. REMOVE EBJ BOOT

(a) Remove the EDJ boot or EBJ boot in the same procedure as for the EDJ boot.
HINT:
Further disassembly of the drive shaft is impossible because the DOJ and EBJ cannot be disassembled.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000499Z004X
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT DRIVE SHAFT

(a) Check that there is no excessive play in the outboard
joint.
(b) Check that the inboard joint slides smoothly in the thrust
direction.
(c) Check that there is no excessive play in the radial

directions of the inboard joint.
(d) Check the boots for damage.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O46027X
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Align the rear axle carrier splines and rear drive shaft assembly splines, and install the rear drive
shaft assembly.
2. INSTALL REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT LH
3. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
Use the same procedure described for the LH side.
4. INSTALL REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT RH
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000021T800VX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL EBJ BOOT

(a) Wrap the shaft splines with vinyl tape.
NOTICE:
Wrap the shaft splines with vinyl tape to protect the boot from scratches.
(b) Install the EDJ boot in the specified position, and fill of the specified grease.
Standard grease capacity:

50 to 60g (1.76 to 2.12 oz.)
2. INSTALL EDJ BOOT

(a) Place the EDJ boot at the center of the shaft.
(b) Insert the EDJ cage onto the shaft.
*1 EDJ cage
*a Cutout portion
HINT:
Insert the EDJ cage with the cutout portion facing the shaft
end, since the EDJ cage has an orientation.
3. INSTALL EDJ INNER RACE

(a) Install the EDJ inner race on the shaft and fix the rear
drive the shaft snap ring in place using pliers.
HINT:
Confirm that the rear drive the shaft snap ring is completely
fitted into the shaft groove.
4. INSTALL EDJ CAGE
(a) Install the EDJ cage to EDJ inner race fixed upon the
shaft.
*1 EDJ cage
*2 EDJ inner race
HINT:
Fit the cage with the protruding section aligned with the track
on the EDJ inner race, and turn by a half pitch.
(b) Fill of the specified grease into the inner side of the EDJ outer race.

80 to 90 g (2.82 to 3.17 oz)
(c) Apply a thin coat of the specified grease to the cage pocket and 8 ball bearings.
(d) Insert the 8 ball bearings into the cage pocket.
(e) Align the outer race track and ball positions, and place
the shaft, EDJ inner race, cage and ball bearings in the
original positions, and then fix the outer race in place.
*1 Outer race
*2 Grease
*3 Balls (8 pieces)
(f) Install the circlip B in the groove on the EDJ outer race.
HINT:
Assure that the balls, cage and EDJ inner race are
completely fitted in the outer race of EDJ.
Use care not to place the matched position of rear drive
shaft snap ring in the ball groove of outer race.
Pull the shaft lightly and assure that the circlip is
completely fitted in the groove.
(g) NKG814 apply an even coat of the specified grease to the entire inner surface of the boot. Also
apply grease to the shaft.

20 to 30 g (0.71 to 1.06 oz)
(h) Install the EDJ boot taking care not to twist it.
HINT:
The inside of the large end of EDJ boot and the boot groove shall be cleaned so as to be free from
grease and other substances.
When installing the EDJ boot, position the outer race of EDJ at center of the stroke.
5. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 DRIVE SHAFT OUTBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP

(a) Apply NKG814 grease to the interior surface of the new rear No. 2 drive shaft outboard joint boot
clamp.
(b) Mount the rear No. 2 drive shaft outboard joint boot
clamp to the EDJ boot, and temporarily bend the lever.
CAUTION:
Make sure that protective gloves are worn during work
in order to prevent injury to hands, etc.
NOTICE:
When temporarily bending the lever, make sure that the
band and lever are not twisted.
In order to prevent breakage of the rear No. 2 drive shaft
outboard joint boot clamp, do not repeatedly bend the
lever.
(c) While pushing the joint towards the work surface, press
down using one hand, and fold the lever while turning the
drive shaft forward.
*a Weight
*b Ground
NOTICE:
Do not damage the deflector.
Do not raise the joint off the work surface.
(d) Using a plastic hammer, tap the buckle to affix.
NOTICE:
Do not hit the buckle with the plastic hammer excessively
hard
Install the clamp so that the lever does not rise.
Make sure that the gap between the two buckles is
parallel.
6. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT OUTBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
(a) Install a new rear drive shaft outboard joint boot clamp
to the EDJ boot and temporarily bend the lever.
CAUTION:
Make sure that protective gloves are worn during work
in order to prevent injury to hands, etc.
NOTICE:
When temporarily bending the lever, make sure that the
band and lever are not twisted.
In order to prevent breakage of the rear drive shaft
outboard joint boot clamp, do not repeatedly bend the
lever.
(b) Use water pump pliers to tighten the rear drive shaft
outboard joint boot clamp, and temporarily fasten.
*a The end is near the center of the lever.

(c) Use a plastic hammer to tap the buckle to affix.
NOTICE:
Do not hit the buckle with the plastic hammer excessively
hard.
Affix the lever so that it does not rise.
Make sure that the gap between the two buckles is
parallel.
7. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 DRIVE SHAFT INBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
Work on the rear No. 2 drive shaft inboard joint boot clamp in the same way as the rear No. 2 drive
shaft outboard joint boot clamp.
8. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT INBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
Work on the rear drive shaft inboard joint boot clamp in the same way as the rear drive shaft outboard
joint boot clamp.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O4801WX
Title: DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT: REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT LH
(a) Using a plastic hammer, separate the rear drive shaft

assembly LH from the rear axle carrier. If it is difficult to
separate, tap the end of the rear drive shaft assembly LH
using a brass bar and a hammer.
(b) Remove the rear drive shaft assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the joint boot or speed sensor.
Do not push out the rear axle carrier excessively.
4. REMOVE REAR AXLE SHAFT NUT RH
HINT:
5. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000032KE02UX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-
S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017MP03IX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

table below.

1-2 Pushed Below 1 Ω
1-2 Released 10 kΩ or higher

*a
(Back-Up Light Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the back-up light

switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YVJ04BX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-
S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install the back-up light switch assembly with a new gasket to
the manual transmission assembly.
NOTICE:
(b) In the order indicated in the illustration, engage the 3

clamps in place, and connect the back-up light switch
assembly wire and neutral position switch assembly wire.
HINT:
Install the wire harness so that there is slack on the

connector side.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YVL04BX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the 3 clamps.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the back-up

light switch assembly and gasket from the manual
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H8K00EX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: COUNTER GEAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002RI2006X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: COUNTER GEAR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. INSPECT THRUST CLEARANCE
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the thrust clearance of the

counter shaft 3rd gear and counter shaft 4th gear.
*a Counter shaft 4th gear thrust clearance
*b Counter shaft 3rd gear thrust clearance
Standard Clearance
GEAR STANDARD MAXIMUM

CLEARANCE MM (IN.) CLEARANCE MM (IN.)
Counter shaft 0.10 to 0.35 (0.00393

0.35 (0.0138)
3rd gear to 0.0138)
Counter shaft 0.10 to 0.35 (0.00393

0.35 (0.0138)
4th gear to 0.0138)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, adjust it with the 4th

inner race thrust washer.
2. INSPECT RADIAL CLEARANCE
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the radial clearance of the

counter shaft 3rd gear and counter shaft 4th gear.
*a Counter shaft 4th gear radial clearance
*b Counter shaft 3rd gear radial clearance
Standard Clearance
GEAR STANDARD CLEARANCE MAXIMUM

MM (IN.) CLEARANCE MM
(IN.)
Counter shaft 0.015 to 0.068

0.068 (0.00268)
3rd gear (0.000590 to 0.00268)
Counter shaft 0.065 to 0.115

0.115 (0.00453)
4th gear (0.002559 to 0.00453)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the

corresponding gear and needle roller bearing or 4th gear
bearing inner race all together with a new ones.
3. REMOVE FRONT COUNTER GEAR BEARING
(a) Using a snap ring expander, remove the shaft snap ring.
(b) Using SST and a press, remove the front counter gear
bearing.
SST: 09950-00020
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00230
SST: 09950-70010
4. REMOVE COUNTER DRIVE GEAR
(b) Using SST and a press, remove the counter drive gear.
SST: 09950-00020
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00230
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
5. REMOVE COUNTER SHAFT 4TH GEAR
(a) Using a snap ring expander, remove the shaft snap ring,
and then remove the 4th washer retaining ring and 4th
inner race thrust washer.
(b) Using a screwdriver, pry the 4th gear bearing inner race
and turn it counterclockwise along the gear, and remove
the 4th gear bearing inner race.
(c) Remove the counter shaft 4th gear and No. 1

synchronizer ring.
6. REMOVE COUNTER SHAFT 3RD GEAR

(a) Using SST and a press, remove the No. 2 transmission
clutch hub, counter shaft 3rd gear, No. 3 synchronizer
ring set and needle roller bearing.
SST: 09950-00020
7. REMOVE NO. 2 TRANSMISSION HUB SLEEVE
(a) Remove the No. 2 transmission hub sleeve, and then

remove the 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting keys, 3 No. 1
synchromesh shifting key springs and 3 balls from the
transmission clutch hub.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth to prevent the No. 1 synchromesh shifting
keys, No. 1 synchromesh shifting key springs and balls
from popping out.
Do not deform the No. 1 synchromesh shifting key spring.
HINT:
During this operation, keep the No. 2 transmission clutch hub

and No. 1 synchromesh shifting key intact.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000590U000X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: COUNTER GEAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 2 TRANSMISSION HUB SLEEVE
(a) Check that the spline gear edges of the No. 2

transmission hub sleeve are not worn down.
HINT:
If it shows any sign of wear, replace the No. 2 transmission

hub sleeve with a new one.
(b) Install the No. 2 transmission hub sleeve to the No. 2 transmission clutch hub, and then check that
it slides smoothly.
HINT:
If it does not slide smoothly, replace the No. 2 transmission hub sleeve and No. 2 transmission clutch
hub with a new one.
2. INSPECT NO. 2 TRANSMISSION HUB SLEEVE CLEARANCE
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the claw width of the

No. 2 gear shift fork.
Standard width:
7.9 to 8.0 mm (0.311 to 0.315 in.)
Minimum width:
7.9 mm (0.311 in.)
HINT:
If the width is less than the minimum, replace the No. 2 gear
shift fork with a new one.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the groove of the No. 2 transmission hub sleeve, and then
calculate the clearance with the No. 2 gear shift fork.
Standard clearance:
0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace both the No. 2 gear shift fork and No. 2 transmission
hub sleeve with a new ones.
3. INSPECT NO. 1 SYNCHRONIZER RING
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper cone of

the counter shaft 4th gear, and then hold the No. 1
synchronizer ring in position with your hand to measure
the clearance between the No. 1 synchronizer ring and
counter shaft 4th gear by using a feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.8 to 1.6 mm (0.0314 to 0.0629 in.)
Maximum clearance:
1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)
NOTICE:
Check the entire circumference of the gear.
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the No. 1

synchronizer ring with a new one.
(b) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper cone of

synchronizer ring in position with your hand to check that
it does not slide in the circumferential direction.
HINT:
If the ring slides, replace the No. 1 synchronizer ring with a

new one.
4. INSPECT NO. 3 SYNCHRONIZER RING SET

(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper cone of the counter shaft 3rd gear and No. 3
synchronizer ring set, and then hold the No. 3 synchronizer ring set in position with your hand to
measure the clearance between the No. 3 synchronizer ring set and the counter shaft 3rd gear by
using a feeler gauge.
*a Inner *b Middle
*c Outer - -
Standard Clearance:
LOCATION STANDARD CLEARANCE MM (IN.)
Inner 0.4 to 1.2 (0.0157 to 0.0472)
Middle 0.3 to 1.3 (0.0118 to 0.0512)
Outer 0.8 to 1.8 (0.0315 to 0.0709)
NOTICE:
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the No. 3 synchronizer ring set with a new one.

the counter shaft 3rd gear, and then hold the No. 3
synchronizer ring set in position with your hand to check
that it does not slide in the circumferential direction.
HINT:
If the No. 3 synchronizer ring set slides, replace the No. 3

synchronizer ring set with a new one.
5. INSPECT COUNTER SHAFT
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of each

location.
Standard Outer Diameter:
PART STANDARD OUTER MINIMUM OUTER

DIAMETER MM (IN.) DIAMETER MM (IN.)
39.284 to 39.300 (1.54661

A 39.284 (1.54661)
to 1.54721)
37.984 to 38.000 (1.49543

B 37.984 (1.49543)
to 1.49606)
24.987 to 25.000 (0.98374

C 24.987 (0.98374)
to 0.98425)
HINT:
If the diameter is less than the minimum, replace the counter

shaft with a new one.
(b) Using V-block and a dial gauge, measure the runout of

each location as shown in the illustration.
Standard runout:
0.03 mm (0.00118 in.) or less
HINT:
If the runout exceeds the standard, replace the counter shaft

with a new one.
6. INSPECT COUNTER SHAFT 3RD GEAR
(a) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the inside diameter of

the counter shaft 3rd gear.

43.015 to 43.040 mm (1.69350 to 1.69448 in.)
43.040 mm (1.69448 in.)
HINT:
If the inside diameter exceeds the maximum, replace the

counter shaft 3rd gear with a new one.
7. INSPECT COUNTER SHAFT 4TH GEAR

the counter shaft 4th gear.

46.315 to 46.340 mm (1.82425 to 1.82441 in.)
46.340 mm (1.82441 in.)
HINT:

counter shaft 4th gear with a new one.
8. REMOVE 4TH GEAR BEARING INNER RACE
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the outside diameter of the

4th gear bearing inner race.
Standard outside diameter:

46.225 to 46.250 mm (1.81988 to 1.82087 in.)
Minimum outside diameter:
46.225 mm (1.81988 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not measure the oil groove.
HINT:
If the outside diameter is less than the minimum, replace the
4th gear bearing inner race with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002RI3006X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: COUNTER GEAR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL COUNTER SHAFT 3RD GEAR
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the mounting point

of the counter shaft, needle roller bearing and inside
surface and taper cone of the counter shaft 3rd gear.
(b) Install the needle roller bearing and counter shaft 3rd gear.
2. INSTALL NO. 2 TRANSMISSION HUB SLEEVE

(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the moving parts of the No. 2 transmission clutch hub.
*1 No. 2 Transmission Clutch Hub
*2 No. 2 Transmission Hub Sleeve
*3 Ball
*4 No. 1 Synchromesh Shifting Key
*5 No. 1 Synchromesh Shifting Key Spring
Front Side
(b) As shown in the illustration, install the No. 2 transmission hub sleeve to the No. 2 transmission
clutch hub. Install the 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting keys and 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting key
springs all together, and then install the balls.
HINT:
Install the shifting key ball while holding down the synchromesh shifting key spring. Install the ball
while holding down the No. 1 synchromesh shifting key spring.
After the installation, let the No. 1 synchromesh shifting key spring settle down.
3. INSTALL NO. 2 TRANSMISSION CLUTCH HUB
(a) Install the No. 3 synchronizer ring set to the counter

shaft 3rd gear.
HINT:
Align the middle ring claw with the groove in the counter
shaft 3rd gear.
Align the inner ring claw with the groove in the outer ring.
(b) Using SST and a press, install the No. 2 transmission clutch hub.
SST: 09316-60011
09316-00011
NOTICE:
Make sure that the No. 3 synchronizer ring set is positioned properly.
HINT:
Align the No. 2 transmission clutch hub and the No. 3 synchronizer ring set so that they can fit
together.
Make sure to press fit the No. 2 transmission clutch hub until it touches the counter shaft.
After the press fit, make sure that the No. 3 synchronizer ring set moves toward the thrust
direction.
4. INSTALL COUNTER SHAFT 4TH GEAR
(a) Install the No. 1 synchronizer ring to the No. 2

HINT:
Align the No. 2 transmission clutch hub and the No. 1
synchronizer ring so that they can fit together.
(b) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the 4th gear bearing inner race and inside surface and taper
cone of the counter shaft 4th gear.
(c) Install the counter shaft 4th gear and 4th gear bearing inner race.
HINT:
To install it, rotate the 4th gear bearing inner race along the gear in a clockwise direction.
5. INSTALL 4TH INNER RACE THRUST WASHER

(a) Select a 4th inner race thrust washer that is suitable to retain the specific thrust clearance between
the 4th gear bearing inner race and 4th inner race thrust washer.
*1 4th Inner Race Thrust Washer
Front Side
Standard clearance:
0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
HINT:
Select the thickest 4th inner race thrust washer possible for installation.
4th Inner Race Thrust Washer Thickness
PART NO. THICKNESS MM (IN.) MARK
SU003-03500 3.75 (0.14763) A
SU003-03501 3.80 (0.14960) B
SU003-03502 3.85 (0.15157) C
SU003-03503 3.90 (0.15354) D
SU003-03504 3.95 (0.15551) E
SU003-03505 4.00 (0.15748) F
SU003-03506 4.05 (0.15944) G
SU003-03507 4.10 (0.16141) H
(b) Using a snap ring expander, as shown in the illustration, install a new 4th inner race thrust washer,
new 4th washer retaining ring and new shaft snap ring to the counter shaft.
6. INSTALL COUNTER DRIVE GEAR
(a) Using SST and a press, install the counter drive gear.
SST: 09309-36010
7. INSTALL SHAFT SNAP RING (for Counter Drive Gear)
(a) Select a shaft snap ring that is suitable to retain the

specific thrust clearance between the counter drive gear
and shaft snap ring.
Standard clearance:
0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
HINT:
Select the thickest shaft snap ring possible for installation.

Shaft Snap Ring Thickness
PART NO. THICKNESS: MM (IN.) MARK
SU003-03581 1.80 (0.07086) A
SU003-03582 1.85 (0.07283) B
SU003-03583 1.90 (0.07480) C
SU003-03584 1.95 (0.07677) D
SU003-03585 2.00 (0.07874) E
SU003-03586 2.05 (0.08070) F
(b) Using a snap ring expander, install a new shaft snap ring to the counter shaft.
8. INSTALL FRONT COUNTER GEAR BEARING

(a) Using SST and a press, as shown in the illustration, install a new front counter gear bearing while
holding it with your hand.
*1 Front Counter Gear Bearing
Front Side
SST: 09330-50010
NOTICE:
Attach SST to the inner race of the front counter gear bearing, and then install the front counter
gear bearing.
9. INSTALL SHAFT SNAP RING (for Front Counter Gear Bearing)

specific thrust clearance between the counter gear front
bearing and shaft snap ring.
Standard clearance:
0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
HINT:
PART NO. THICKNESS: MM (IN.) MARK
SU003-03560 2.05 (0.08070) 1
SU003-03558 2.10 (0.08267) 2
SU003-03561 2.15 (0.08464) 3
SU003-03559 2.20 (0.08661) 4
SU003-03562 2.25 (0.08858) 5
SU003-03563 2.30 (0.09055) 6
(b) Using a snap ring expander, install a new shaft snap ring to the counter shaft.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H8K00CX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: INPUT SHAFT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H8L00BX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: INPUT SHAFT: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. INSPECT NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING
(a) Install the input shaft to the output shaft, and then check
the needle roller bearing.
Standard:
Abnormal fitting, interfering, abnormal noise, or looseness
should not be found.
HINT:
If any abnormality is found, replace the needle roller bearing

with a new one.
(a) Install the input shaft to the output shaft, and then using
a dial indicator, measure the radial clearance.
Standard clearance:
0.029 to 0.072 mm (0.00114 to 0.00283 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.072 mm (0.00283 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the needle

roller bearing and output shaft with a new ones.
3. INSPECT FRONT INPUT SHAFT BEARING
(a) Check the front input shaft bearing.
Standard:
HINT:
If any abnormality is found, replace the front input shaft

bearing with a new one.
4. REMOVE NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING

(a) Remove the needle roller bearing from the input shaft.
5. REMOVE NO. 2 SYNCHRONIZER RING
(a) Remove the No. 2 synchronizer ring from the input shaft.
6. REMOVE FRONT INPUT SHAFT BEARING
(a) Using 2 screwdrivers and a hammer, remove the shaft

snap ring from the input shaft.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth to prevent the shaft snap ring from popping
out.
(b) Using SST and a press, remove the front input shaft
bearing from the input shaft.
SST: 09950-00020
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000590S000X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: INPUT SHAFT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper corn of

the 3rd gear, and hold the No. 2 synchronizer ring in
position with your hand to measure the clearance
between the No. 2 synchronizer ring and 3rd gear by
using a feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.8 to 1.6 mm (0.0315 to 0.0630 in.)
Minimum clearance:
0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)
NOTICE:
HINT:
If the clearance is less than the minimum, replace the No. 2


the 3rd gear, and then hold the No. 2 synchronizer ring in
position with your hand to check that it does not slide in
the circumferential direction.
HINT:
If the No. 2 synchronizer ring slides, replace the No. 2

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H8M00BX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: INPUT SHAFT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL FRONT INPUT SHAFT BEARING

(a) Using SST and a press, as shown in the illustration, install a new front input shaft bearing to the
input shaft.
*1 Front Input Shaft Bearing
Front Side
SST: 09527-20011
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00560
NOTICE:
Retain the front input shaft bearing inner race, and press fit.
(b) Select a shaft snap ring that is suitable to retain the

specific thrust clearance between the front input shaft
bearing and shaft snap ring.
Standard clearance:
0 mm (0 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.1 mm (0.00394 in.)
SU003-03575 1.95 (0.07677) 0
SU003-03576 2.00 (0.07874) 1
SU003-03577 2.05 (0.08070) 2
SU003-03578 2.10 (0.08267) 3

SU003-03579 2.15 (0.08464) 4
SU003-03580 2.20 (0.08661) 5
(c) Using a brass bar and a hammer, install a new shaft snap ring to the input shaft.
2. INSTALL NO. 2 SYNCHRONIZER RING
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the No. 2

synchronizer ring, and then install the No. 2 synchronizer
ring to the input shaft.
3. INSTALL NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the needle roller

bearing, and then install the needle roller bearing to the
input shaft.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H8K00BX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSAXLE UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-
S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002RHU007X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSAXLE UNIT: DISASSEMBLY (2013
FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MANUAL TRANSMISSION FILLER PLUG
(a) Remove the manual transmission filler plug and gasket.
2. REMOVE MANUAL TRANSMISSION DRAIN PLUG
(a) Remove the manual transmission drain plug and gasket.
3. REMOVE RELEASE FORK SUPPORT
(a) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the release

fork support from the clutch housing.
4. REMOVE BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disengage the 3 clamps.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the back-up

light switch assembly and gasket.
5. REMOVE NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the clamp.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the neutral

position switch assembly and gasket.
6. REMOVE WIRE HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET

(a) Remove the bolt and wire harness clamp bracket.
7. REMOVE LOCK BALL PIN
(a) Using a 10 mm hexagon socket wrench, remove the head

straight screw plug, compression spring and lock ball pin.
8. REMOVE HOLDER
(a) Using a 27 mm deep socket wrench, remove the holder,

compression spring and lock ball pin.
9. REMOVE TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Remove the 8 bolts and clamp.
*1 Clamp
(c) Using a plastic hammer, remove the transmission

extension housing sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Be sure to remove the transmission extension housing
sub-assembly while the transmission is in neutral.
Do not damage the transmission extension housing sub-
assembly.
10. REMOVE EXTENSION HOUSING REAR OIL SEAL
(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective

tape, remove the extension housing rear oil seal.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
assembly.
HINT:
Remove the transmission extension housing sub-assembly

while protecting it with a piece of cloth.
11. REMOVE EXTENSION HOUSING DUST DEFLECTOR
(a) Using a plastic hammer, remove the extension housing

dust deflector.
12. REMOVE TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL

tape, remove the transmission extension housing oil seal.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
assembly.
HINT:
Remove the transmission extension housing sub-assembly

while protecting it with a piece of cloth.
13. REMOVE NO. 2 EXTENSION HOUSING OIL RECEIVER PIPE
(a) Remove the No. 2 extension housing oil receiver pipe.
14. REMOVE NO. 1 EXTENSION HOUSING OIL RECEIVER PIPE
(a) Remove the bolt, No. 1 extension housing oil receiver

pipe and stopper plate.
(b) Remove the straight pin.

15. REMOVE SHIFT SHAFT
(a) Slide and remove the shift shaft and No. 1 shift inter lock
block.
16. REMOVE NO. 1 SHIFT INTER LOCK BLOCK
(a) Remove the No. 1 shift inter lock block from the shift
shaft.
17. REMOVE FRONT SHIFT INNER LEVER
(a) Remove the bolt and front shift inner lever from the shift
shaft.
18. REMOVE HEAD STRAIGHT SCREW PLUG

(a) Using a T40 "TORX" socket wrench, remove 3 head
straight screw plugs.
(b) Using a magnet hand, remove the 2 compression springs

and 2 balls.
19. REMOVE SHIFT ARM
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the E-ring.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth to prevent the E-ring from flying off.
(b) Remove the shift arm.
20. REMOVE NO. 3 GEAR SHIFT FORK SHAFT
(a) Remove the No. 3 gear shift fork shaft and 5th shift head
together.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to drop the ball from the 5th shift head.
The ball on the transmission case may fall inside the
transmission case. If that happens, take it out when the
transmission case is removed.
(b) Remove the ball from the 5th shift head.
(c) Using a magnetic hand, remove the ball.
21. REMOVE 5TH SHIFT HEAD
(a) Using 2 screwdrivers and a plastic hammer, remove the

shaft snap ring.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth to prevent the shaft snap ring from flying
off.
(b) Remove the washer.
(c) Remove the 5th shift head, compression spring and ball.
NOTICE:
Be careful of the ball and compression spring that fall
out when sliding the 5th shift head.
22. INSPECT COUNTER SHAFT 6TH GEAR THRUST CLEARANCE
(a) Using SST and a dial indicator, measure the thrust

clearance.
SST: 09350-20015
09350-06120
Standard clearance:
0.10 to 0.40 mm (0.00394 to 0.0157 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.40 mm (0.0157 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the counter

shaft 6th gear, No. 4 transmission clutch hub, 6th gear thrust
washer, needle roller bearing and counter shaft with a new
ones.
23. INSPECT COUNTER SHAFT 6TH GEAR RADIAL CLEARANCE
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the radial clearance.
Standard clearance:
0.015 to 0.068 mm (0.000590 to 0.00268 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.068 mm (0.00268 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the counter

shaft 6th gear, needle roller bearing and counter shaft with a
new ones.
24. REMOVE NO. 4 TRANSMISSION CLUTCH HUB

shaft snap ring.
NOTICE:
off.
(b) Using SST and 3 bolts, remove the No. 4 transmission

clutch hub, No.4 transmission hub sleeve, No. 4 gear shift
fork and No. 2 gear shift fork shaft all together.
*a Hold
*b Turn
SST: 09950-30012
09951-03010
09953-03010
09956-03010
25. REMOVE NO. 4 GEAR SHIFT FORK
(a) Using a 5 mm pin punch and hammer, remove the slotted

spring pin.
(b) Remove the No. 4 gear shift fork from the No. 2 gear shift fork shaft.
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the hole snap ring.

(b) Remove the No. 4 transmission hub sleeve, and then
synchromesh shifting key springs and 3 balls from the No.
4 transmission clutch hub.
NOTICE:
from popping out.
HINT:
During this operation, keep intact the No. 4 transmission

clutch hub and No. 1 synchromesh shifting key.
27. REMOVE NO. 2 SYNCHRONIZER RING
(a) Remove the No. 2 synchronizer ring.
28. REMOVE COUNTER SHAFT 6TH GEAR
(a) Remove the counter shaft 6th gear.
29. REMOVE NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING
(a) Remove the needle roller bearing.

30. REMOVE 6TH GEAR THRUST WASHER
(a) Remove the 6th gear thrust washer.
(b) Remove the straight pin.
31. REMOVE NO. 2 GEAR SHIFT HEAD
(a) Using a 5 mm pin punch and hammer, remove the slotted

spring pin.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth to prevent the slotted spring pin from flying
off.
Take care in order that the slotted spring pin does not fall
inside through the gear shift fork shaft hole.
(b) Remove the No. 2 gear shift head from the No. 2 gear shift fork shaft.

(a) Using a 5 mm pin punch and a hammer, remove the
slotted spring pin.
NOTICE:
off.
(a) Using a 5 mm pin punch and a hammer, remove the

slotted spring pin.
NOTICE:
off.
34. REMOVE REAR BEARING RETAINER
(a) Using a T45 "TORX" socket wrench, remove the 4 bolts

and rear bearing retainer.
(b) Remove the shift arm pivot.

35. REMOVE TRANSMISSION CASE
(b) Remove the bolt that retains the reverse idler gear shaft,
and the gasket (transmission case side)
(c) Remove the 9 bolts and clamp.
*1 Clamp
(d) Using a plastic hammer, remove the transmission case.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the transmission case.
36. REMOVE OIL RECEIVER PIPE

(a) Remove the oil receiver pipe.
37. REMOVE FRONT BEARING RETAINER
(a) Remove 7 bolts and front bearing retainer.
38. REMOVE TRANSMISSION FRONT BEARING RETAINER OIL SEAL

tape, remove the transmission front bearing retainer oil
seal.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not damage the front bearing retainer.
HINT:
Remove the front bearing retainer while protecting it with a

piece of cloth.
39. REMOVE COUNTER SHAFT
(a) Using a snap ring expander, remove the 2 shaft snap

rings.
HINT:
Remove the 2 shaft snap rings from the input shaft and
counter shaft.
(b) Remove the bolt and gasket to free the reverse idler gear
and reverse idler gear shaft. (Clutch housing side)
(c) Using a hammer handle edge, tap to remove the input

shaft, output shaft, counter shaft, reverse idler gear,
reverse idler gear shaft, No. 1 gear shift fork shaft, No. 2
gear shift fork shaft and No. 3 gear shift fork shaft all
together from the clutch housing side.

shaft snap ring.
NOTICE:
off.
(b) Remove the bolt and No. 2 gear shift fork shaft.

shaft snap ring.
NOTICE:
off.
(b) Remove the No. 1 gear shift fork shaft and No.1 gear
shift fork together.
(c) Using 2 screwdrivers and a plastic hammer, remove the

shaft snap ring.
NOTICE:
off.
(d) Remove the bolt and No. 1 gear shift fork shaft.
(a) Remove the bolt and No. 3 gear shift fork shaft.
43. REMOVE INPUT SHAFT
(a) Remove the input shaft from the output shaft.
44. INSPECT REVERSE IDLER GEAR RADIAL CLEARANCE
(a) Use a vice to secure the reverse idler gear, and then use
a dial indicator to measure the radial clearance.
Standard clearance:
0.040 to 0.082 mm (0.00157 to 0.00323 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.082 mm (0.00323 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the reverse

idler gear and reverse idler gear shaft with a new ones.
45. REMOVE REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT
(a) Remove the reverse idler gear shaft from the reverse
idler gear.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000590P000X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSAXLE UNIT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-
S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 1 GEAR SHIFT HEAD
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the clearance of the No.

1 gear shift head groove.
Standard clearance:
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630 in.)
Maximum clearance:
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the No. 1 gear

shift head with a new one.

Standard clearance:
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.59843 to 0.60630 in.)
Maximum clearance:
15.4 mm (0.60630 in.)
HINT:


Standard clearance:
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.598 to 0.606 in.)
Maximum clearance:
15.4 mm (0.606 in.)
HINT:

4. INSPECT SHIFT SHAFT

shift shaft.
Standard width:
14.8 to 15.0 mm (0.583 to 0.591 in.)
Minimum width:
14.8 mm (0.583 in.)
HINT:
If the width is less than the minimum, replace the gear shift
with a new one.
5. INSPECT NO. 1 SHIFT INTER LOCK BLOCK

No. 1 shift inter lock block.
Standard width:
14.8 to 15.0 mm (0.583 to 0.591 in.)
Minimum width:
14.8 mm (0.583 in.)
HINT:
If the width is less than the minimum, replace the No. 1 shift
inter lock block.
6. INSPECT NO. 4 GEAR SHIFT FORK

4 gear shift fork groove.
Standard clearance:
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.598 to 0.606 in.)
Maximum clearance:
15.4 mm (0.606 in.)
HINT:

7. INSPECT 5TH SHIFT HEAD
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the clearance of the 5th

shift head groove.
Standard clearance:
15.2 to 15.4 mm (0.598 to 0.606 in.)
Maximum clearance:
15.4 mm (0.606 in.)
HINT:
If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the 5th shift

head with a new one.
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper cone of

synchronizer ring in position with your hand to measure
the clearance between the No. 2 synchronizer ring and
counter shaft 6th gear by using a feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.88 to 1.52 mm (0.0346 to 0.0598 in.)
Minimum clearance:
0.88 mm (0.0346 in.)
NOTICE:
HINT:
If the clearance is less than the minimum, replace the No. 2

synchronizer ring and counter shaft 6th gear with a new one.

synchronizer ring in position with your hand to check that
it does not slide in the circumferential direction.
HINT:
If the No. 2 synchronizer ring slides, replace the No. 2

synchronizer ring and counter shaft 6th gear with a new one.
9. INSPECT COUNTER SHAFT 6TH GEAR

the counter shaft 6th gear.

34.015 to 34.040 mm (1.33917 to 1.34016 in.)
34.040 mm (1.34016 in.)
HINT:
counter shaft 6th gear with a new one.

HINT:

it slides smoothly.
HINT:
hub with a new one.

Standard width:
7.9 to 8.0 mm (0.311 to 0.315 in.)
Minimum width:
7.9 mm (0.311 in.)
HINT:
If the width is less than the minimum, replace the gear No. 4
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the groove of the No. 4 transmission hub sleeve and then
Standard clearance:
0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
HINT:
12. INSPECT REVERSE IDLER GEAR
(a) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the inner diameter of

the reverse idler gear.

22.040 to 22.061mm (0.86771 to 0.86854 in.)
22.061mm (0.86854 in.)
HINT:

reverse idler gear with a new one.
13. INSPECT REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of the

reverse idler gear shaft.
Standard outer diameter:

21.979 to 22.000 mm (0.86531 to 0.86614 in.)
Minimum outer diameter:
21.979 mm (0.86531 in.)
HINT:
If the outer diameter is less than the minimum, replace the

reverse idler gear shaft with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002RHV007X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSAXLE UNIT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-
S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 3 GEAR SHIFT FORK SHAFT
(a) Install the No. 3 gear shift fork shaft to the No. 3 gear
shift fork with a new bolt.
(b) Using a brass bar and a hammer, install a new shaft snap
ring.
(c) Install the No. 1 gear shift fork shaft together with the
No. 1 gear shift fork to the No. 3 gear shift fork shaft and
(d) Using a brass bar and a hammer, install a new shaft snap
ring.
ring.
4. INSTALL TRANSMISSION FRONT BEARING RETAINER OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST and a hammer, install a new transmission front

bearing retainer oil seal.
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00420
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
Installation depth:
11.1 to 11.9 mm (0.437 to 0.469 in.) (from the end
surface of the front bearing retainer)
NOTICE:
Do not damage the lip of the transmission front bearing
retainer oil seal.
Do not damage the front bearing retainer.
(b) Apply MP grease to the lip of the transmission front bearing retainer oil seal.
5. INSTALL REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the reverse idle

gear shaft, and then install it to the reverse idler gear.
6. INSTALL INPUT SHAFT

bearing of the input shaft, and then install the input shaft
to the output shaft.
7. INSTALL COUNTER SHAFT

(a) Install the input shaft, output shaft, counter shaft, reverse idler gear, reverse idler gear shaft, No.
1 gear shift fork shaft, No. 2 gear shift fork shaft and No. 3 gear shift fork shaft all together to the
clutch housing.
(b) Using a new gasket and a new bolt, temporarily install
the reverse idler gear shaft (clutch housing side).
(c) Using a snap ring expander, install 2 new shaft snap

rings.
HINT:
Install the shaft snap rings to the input shaft and counter
shaft.
8. INSTALL FRONT BEARING RETAINER

(a) Apply seal packing 1281 continuously to the front bearing retainer as shown in the illustration.
Seal Packing 1281
NOTICE:
Install it within 10 minutes of the seal packing application.
(b) Apply adhesive 1344 to the 2nd and 3rd pitches from the
tip of new bolt.
*1 Adhesive 1344
(c) Install the front bearing retainer with the 7 bolts.
NOTICE:
Install the front bearing retainer ensuring that the
transmission front bearing retainer oil seal lip is not
damaged.
9. INSTALL OIL RECEIVER PIPE
(a) Install the oil receiver pipe.
NOTICE:
Confirm that the protrusions of the oil receiver pipe are
properly fitted in the grooves.
*a Protrusion
10. INSTALL TRANSMISSION CASE

(a) Apply seal packing 1281 continuously to the transmission case as shown in the illustration.
Seal Packing 1281
NOTICE:
Install within 10 minutes of the seal packing application.
(b) Check the location of the knock pin, and then using a plastic hammer, install the transmission case.
Do not hit hard.
(c) Apply adhesive 1324 to the 2nd and 3rd pitches.
*1 Adhesive 1324
(d) Install the transmission case and clamp with the 9 bolts.
*1 clamp
(e) Install a new reverse idler gear shaft fixing bolt and new
gasket (transmission case side).

(f) Securely tighten the reverse idler gear shaft fixing bolt
(clutch housing side).
(g) Using a snap ring expander, install a new shaft snap ring.
11. INSTALL REAR BEARING RETAINER
(a) Install the shift arm pivot to the rear bearing retainer.
(b) Apply adhesive 1324 to the 2nd and 3rd pitches from the
tip of new bolt.
*1 Adhesive 1324
(c) Using a T45 "TORX" socket wrench, install the rear

bearing retainer with the 4 bolts.
12. INSTALL 6TH GEAR THRUST WASHER
(a) Install the straight pin to the counter shaft.
(b) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the 6th gear thrust washer.
*1 6th Gear Thrust Washer
Front Side
(c) As shown in the illustration, install the 6th gear thrust washer to the counter shaft.
13. INSTALL NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING

bearing, and then install the needle roller bearing to the
counter shaft.
14. INSTALL COUNTER SHAFT 6TH GEAR
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the counter shaft

6th gear, and then install the counter shaft 6th gear to
the counter shaft.
15. INSTALL NO. 2 SYNCHRONIZER RING
(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the No. 2

synchronizer ring, and then install the No. 2 synchronizer
ring to the counter shaft.

*3 Ball
Front Side
clutch hub, and install the 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting keys and 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting key
springs all together, and then install the 3 balls.
HINT:
Install the ball while holding down the No. 1 synchromesh shifting key spring.
After the installation, settle the No. 1 synchromesh shifting key spring.
(c) Install a new hole snap ring.
(a) Using SST and a press, install the No. 4 transmission

clutch hub, No. 4 transmission hub sleeve, and No. 4 gear
shift fork all together.
SST: 09632-36010
HINT:

synchronizer ring so that they can fit together.
Engage the No. 4 gear shift fork with the groove of the
No. 4 transmission hub sleeve.
18. INSTALL SHAFT SNAP RING

specific thrust clearance between the No. 4 transmission
clutch hub and shaft snap ring.
Standard clearance:
0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
HINT:
SU003-03552 2.80 (0.11023) A
SU003-03553 2.85 (0.11220) B
SU003-03554 2.90 (0.11417) C
SU003-03555 2.95 (0.11614) D
SU003-03556 3.00 (0.11811) E
SU003-03557 3.05 (0.12007) F
ring to the counter shaft.
19. INSTALL NO. 2 GEAR SHIFT HEAD

(a) Install the No. 2 gear shift head to the No. 2 gear shift
fork shaft.
(b) Using a 5 mm pin punch and a hammer, install a new slotted spring pin to the No. 2 gear shift fork
shaft.
NOTICE:
Do not tap the pin too deep.
Standard depth:
0 mm (0 in.) (from the end surface of the No. 2 gear shift head)
20. INSTALL 5TH SHIFT HEAD
(a) Install the compression spring to the 5th shift head, and
then, while holding down the ball with the 5 mm pin
punch, install the 5th shift head to the No. 3 gear shift
fork shaft.
(b) Install the washer.
(c) Using a brass bar and a hammer, install a new shaft snap
ring to the No. 3 gear shift fork shaft.
(a) As shown in the illustration, insert the No. 3 gear shift

fork shaft. Using a T40 "TORX" socket wrench, install the
ball and compression spring, and then tighten with a new
head straight screw plug.
22. INSTALL SHIFT ARM
(a) Install the shift arm to the shift arm pivot.
(b) Using a brass bar and a hammer, install a new E- ring to

the shift arm pivot.
(a) Using a screwdriver, install the 2 balls to the No. 3 gear

shift fork shaft.
HINT:
Support the ball with the screwdriver so that the ball does not
fall off.
(b) While the identification hole is facing towards the outside,

insert the No. 2 gear shift fork shaft. And then, using a
T40 "TORX" socket wrench, install the ball and
compression spring, and then tighten 2 new head straight
screw plugs.
*a Identification Hole
(c) Using a 5 mm pin punch and a hammer, install a new

slotted spring pin to the No. 2 gear shift fork shaft.
NOTICE:
Standard depth:
0 mm (0 in.) (from the end surface of the No. 4 gear shift
fork)

fork shaft.
HINT:
While rotating, install the No. 3 gear shift head so that the
shift arm is engaged with the groove of the No. 3 gear shift
head.
shaft.
NOTICE:
Standard depth:
fork shaft.
shaft.
NOTICE:
Standard depth:
26. INSTALL FRONT SHIFT INNER LEVER
(a) Apply adhesive 1324 to the 2nd and 3rd pitches from the
tip of new bolt.
*1 Adhesive 1324
(b) Install the front shift inner lever to the shift shaft with a
new bolt.
27. INSTALL NO. 1 SHIFT INTER LOCK BLOCK
(a) Install the No. 1 shift inter lock block to the shift shaft.
28. INSTALL SHIFT SHAFT
(a) Install the shift shaft and No. 1 shift inter lock block by
sliding them.
29. INSTALL NO. 1 EXTENSION HOUSING OIL RECEIVER PIPE
(a) Install the straight pin.

(b) Install the No. 1 extension housing oil receiver pipe and
stopper plate with a new bolt.
*1 No. 1 Extension Housing Oil Receiver Pipe End
NOTICE:
Confirm that the end of No. 1 extension housing oil
receiver pipe is properly fitted in the groove.
30. INSTALL NO. 2 EXTENSION HOUSING OIL RECEIVER PIPE
(a) Install the No. 2 extension housing oil receiver pipe.
31. INSTALL TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL
(a) Apply MP grease to the lip of the new transmission

extension housing oil seal.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, install a new transmission extension housing oil seal.
SST: 09325-20010
Installation depth:
0.1 to 1.1 mm (0.00394 to 0.0433 in.) (from the end surface of the transmission extension housing
sub-assembly)
NOTICE:
Do not damage the lip of the transmission extension housing oil seal.
32. INSTALL EXTENSION HOUSING DUST DEFLECTOR
(a) Using SST and a hammer, install a new extension

housing dust deflector.
SST: 09950-60020
09951-00750
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
HINT:
Make sure to tap it until it touches the transmission extension

housing sub-assembly.
33. INSTALL EXTENSION HOUSING REAR OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST and a hammer, install a new extension

housing rear oil seal.
SST: 09612-70100
09612-07210
Installation depth:
1.0 to 2.0 mm (0.0394 to 0.0787 in.) (from the end
surface of the transmission extension housing sub-
assembly)
NOTICE:
Do not damage the lip of the extension housing rear oil
seal.
(b) Apply MP grease to the lip of the extension housing rear oil seal.
34. INSTALL TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply seal packing 1281 continuously to the transmission extension housing sub-assembly as
Seal Packing 1281
NOTICE:
Install it within 10 minutes of the seal packing application.
(b) Install the transmission extension housing sub-assembly

and clamp with 8 new bolts.
*1 clamp
NOTICE:
Be sure to install the transmission extension housing sub-
assembly while the transmission is in neutral.
Make sure to align the knock pin with the hole securely.
(c) Install a new bolt.
35. INSTALL HOLDER
(a) Using a 27 mm deep socket wrench, install a new holder,

compression spring and lock ball pin.
36. INSTALL LOCK BALL PIN
(a) Using a 10 mm hexagon socket wrench, install a new

head straight screw plug, compression spring and lock ball
pin.
37. INSTALL WIRE HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET

(a) Install the wire harness clamp bracket with a new bolt.
38. INSTALL NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install the neutral

position switch assembly and a new gasket.
NOTICE:
situations where the union nut wrench is combined with
a torque wrench .
(b) Engage the clamp and connect the neutral position switch
assembly wire.
39. INSTALL BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install the back-up

light switch assembly and a new gasket.
NOTICE:
situations where the union nut wrench is combined with
a torque wrench .
HINT:

connector side.
40. INSTALL RELEASE FORK SUPPORT
(a) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the release

fork support to the clutch housing.
41. INSTALL MANUAL TRANSMISSION DRAIN PLUG
(a) Install the manual transmission drain plug with a new

gasket to the transmission case.
42. INSTALL MANUAL TRANSMISSION FILLER PLUG
(a) Install the manual transmission filler plug with a new

gasket to the transmission case.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001P1600KX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS

(2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001P1500UX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION

(2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CONTROL SHAFT

(a) Install a new control shaft collar onto the shift shaft.
(b) Install the shift lever damper and control shaft to the
shift shaft.
(c) Using a pin punch (5 mm (0.197 in.)) and a hammer,

align the control shaft hole and the shift shaft hole with
the cutout of the control shaft collar, and insert the shaft
pin from above.
(d) Slide the control shaft collar until it comes into contact
with the stopper of the control shaft, then stake it to the
cutout.
NOTICE:
Be careful to install the floor shift control shaft in the
proper direction.
*1 Control Shaft Collar
*2 Shaft Pin
*3 Control Shaft
*4 Shift Lever Damper
*5 Shift Shaft
2. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHAFT

(a) Apply a light coat of with MP grease to the floor shift control shaft.
MP grease
(b) Install the 2 collars to the floor shift control shaft.
(c) Install the plate washer and clip.
3. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER BUSHING

(a) Install the 4 shift lever retainer bushings.
4. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER

(a) Apply a light coat of with MP grease to the new 2 shift lever pins.
MP grease
(b) Install the floor shift control shift lever retainer with the 2
shift lever pins.
(c) Secure the shift lever pins to the extension housing sub-assembly.
5. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply a light coat of with MP grease to the floor shift control shift lever retainer sub-assembly.
MP grease
(b) Install the floor shift control shift lever retainer sub-assembly to the floor shift control shift lever
retainer.
6. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 ENGINE MOUNTING INSULATOR

(a) Install the rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator to the manual transmission assembly with the 4
bolts.
(a) Confirm that 2 knock pins are on the manual transmission assembly contact surface of the engine
cylinder block before manual transmission assembly installation.
(b) Install the manual transmission assembly to the engine with the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
*1 Knock Pin
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive force to the transmission assembly as this will break the input shaft.
Insert dowel pins into the dowel holes securely so that the end face of the transmission assembly
fits close against the engine assembly before tightening the bolts.

(a) Tilt up the manual transmission assembly.
(b) Install the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator to the rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator with
the 2 washers and 2 nuts.
(c) Install the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator to the body with the 4 bolts.
9. REMOVE EXHAUST PIPE BRACKET

(a) Install the exhaust pipe bracket with the 2 bolts.
10. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply a light coat of with MP grease to the floor shift control shaft.
MP grease
(b) Install the new O-ring and 2 bushings to the shift lever assembly.
(c) Install the plate washer to the floor shift lever assembly.
(d) Install the shift lever assembly with the clip.
(e) Install the shift and select lever boot.
11. INSTALL SHIFT AND SELECT LEVER BOOT

(a) Install the shift and select lever boot to the floor shift control shaft.
12. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the floor shift control shift lever retainer sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
13. INSTALL EXHAUST MANIFOLD

(a) Install the bolt to the manual transmission assembly.
15. INSTALL CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the clutch release cylinder assembly with the 2 bolts.
16. CONNECT WIRE HARNESS

(a) Install the wire harness clamp bracket with the bolt.
(b) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(c) Connect the ground cable with the bolt.
(d) Connect the 2 connectors.
(e) Connect the 2 connectors.
HINT:
Press down the lever until the claw of the connector A makes
a connection sound.
17. INSTALL STARTER ASSEMBLY
18. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER BAR
19. INSTALL PROPELLER SHAFT WITH CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY
20. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER CAP

(a) Install the shift lever cap with the 4 bolts.
21. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER BOOT

(a) Install the No. 1 shift and select lever boot and shift and select lever retainer with the 4 bolts.
(b) Connect the wire harness clamp.
(c) Install the shift and select lever cover with the 2 clips.
24. ADD MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL
26. INSPECT FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL LEAK
27. INSTALL NO. 2 ENGINE UNDER COVER

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001P1700TX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL

(2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL
3. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER BOOT
(a) Remove the 2 clips and the shift and select lever cover.
(b) Disconnect the wire harness clamp.
(c) Remove the 4 bolts, the shift and select lever retainer and the select lever boot.
4. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER CAP
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and the shift lever cap.

5. REMOVE NO. 1 ENGINE UNDER COVER
7. DRAIN MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL
8. REMOVE PROPELLER SHAFT WITH CENTER BEARING ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER BAR
10. REMOVE STARTER ASSEMBLY
11. SEPARATE WIRE HARNESS
HINT:
Fix the disconnected harness components with tape to keep them out of the way.
(a) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the

connector.
(b) Disconnect the connector (B).
(c) Disconnect the 2 connectors.
(d) Remove the bolt and disconnect the ground cable.

(e) Disengage the wire harness clamp.
(f) Remove the bolt and the wire harness clamp bracket.
12. SEPARATE CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the clutch release

cylinder assembly.
13. SEPARATE MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt from the manual transmission assembly.
14. REMOVE EXHAUST MANIFOLD
15. SUSPEND ENGINE ASSEMBLY

(a) Support the engine assembly with an engine lifter so that it is stable, as shown in the illustration.
Attachment Placement Positions
NOTICE:
Set the engine assembly with transmission so that it is horizontal.
Never attach the attachment and plate lift attachment to the oil pan section of the engine assembly.
16. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn over the shift and select lever boot.
(b) Using a screwdriver, remove the clip and the floor shift lever assembly.
(c) Remove the plate washer from the floor shift lever assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 bushings and O-ring from the floor shift lever assembly.
17. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER BOOT

(a) Remove the shift lever boot from the floor shift lever assembly.
18. SEPARATE FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the floor shift control
shift lever retainer sub-assembly.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the exhaust pipe bracket.
20. SUPPORT MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Support the manual transmission assembly with a

transmission jack.
NOTICE:
Check that the manual transmission assembly is centered
on the transmission jack plate.
When removing the manual transmission assembly,
support the engine assembly so that it does not tilt.
21. REMOVE REAR NO. 2 ENGINE MOUNTING INSULATOR

(a) Remove the 4 bolts, 2 washers, 2 nuts and rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator.
Bolt
Nut

(a) Remove the 3 bolts, 2 nuts and manual transmission assembly.
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive force to the transmission assembly as this will break the input shaft.
To prevent damage to the knock pins, do not pry between the manual transmission assembly and
the engine assembly.
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and rear No. 1 engine mounting

insulator.
24. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the floor shift control shift lever retainer sub-
assembly.
25. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT LEVER RETAINER
(a) Pull up the locks of the shift lever pins, and remove the 2
shift lever pins.
(b) Remove the floor shift control shift lever retainer.
26. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER RETAINER BUSHING
(a) Remove the 4 shift lever retainer bushings.
27. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHAFT

(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the clip, plate washer and
floor shift control shaft.
(b) Remove the 2 collars from the control shaft.
28. REMOVE CONTROL SHAFT

(a) Using a hammer and a screwdriver, cut off the control
shaft collar and remove it from the shift shaft.
(b) Using a pin punch (5 mm (0.197 in.)) and a hammer,

remove the shaft pin and control shaft from the shift
shaft.
(c) Remove the shift lever damper from the floor shift control
shaft.
*1 Control Shaft Collar
*2 Shaft Pin
*3 Control Shaft
*4 Shift Lever Damper
*5 Shift Shaft
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001P1400HX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL
SEAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001P1300JX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL
SEAL: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
2. REMOVE MANUAL TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST, remove the manual transmission extension

housing oil seal.
SST: 09308-00010
3. INSTALL MANUAL TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL

(a) Coat the lip of a new manual transmission extension housing oil seal with MP grease.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the manual transmission

extension housing oil seal.
SST: 09325-20010
Installation depth:
0.1 to 1.1 mm (0.00394 to 0.0433 in.)
NOTICE:
Keep the lip free of foreign matter.
Do not tap the oil seal at an angle.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001B3K03FX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL: ON-VEHICLE

INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

(a) Stop the vehicle in a level place.
(b) Remove the manual transmission filler plug and the

gasket.
(c) Check that the oil surface is within 5 mm (0.197 in.) of

the bottom of the manual transmission filler plug opening.
*a 0 to 5 mm (0 to 0.197 in.)
NOTICE:
Excessively large or small amounts of oil may cause
problems.
After replacing the oil, drive the vehicle and check the oil
level again.
(d) Check for oil leakage when the oil level is low.
(e) Install the manual transmission filler plug and a new gasket.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Z2L03AX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL: REPLACEMENT (2013
FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
1. DRAIN MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL

(a) Remove the manual transmission filler plug and the
gasket.
(b) Remove the manual transmission drain plug and gasket,

and then drain the manual transaxle oil.
(c) Install a new gasket and the manual transmission drain

plug.
2. ADD MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL
(a) Add manual transmission oil until the oil level is within 5
mm (0.197 in.) from the bottom of the manual
transmission filler plug opening.
*a 0 to 5 mm (0 to 0.197 in.)
Standard capacity (Reference):

2.2 liters (2.3 US qts, 1.9 Imp. qts)
Gear oil type:
Toyota Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil "LV GL-3
and SAE 75W-90"
(b) Check for oil leakage when the oil level is low.
(c) Install the transmission filler plug and a new gasket.
3. INSPECT FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL
4. INSPECT FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001P1800PX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: MANUAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM

SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Manual Transmission System

PAGE
Oil level (Low)
Oil (Wrong)
Synchronizer ring (Input shaft) (Worn or

damaged)
Synchronizer ring (Output shaft) (Worn or

damaged)
Abnormal noise
Gear (Output shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Gear (Counter shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Bearing (Input shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Bearing (Output shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Bearing (Counter shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Oil level (High)
Oil leak Gasket (Damaged)
Oil seal (Worn or damaged)
Oil (Wrong)
Clutch (Dragging)
Shift fork (Input shaft) (Worn)
Shift fork (Output shaft) (Worn)
Shift fork (Counter shaft) (Worn)
Synchronizer ring (Input shaft) (Worn or

damaged)
Synchronizer ring (Output shaft) (Worn or

damaged)
Hard shifting or impossible to shift Synchronizer ring (Counter shaft) (Worn or
damaged)
Shift key spring (Output shaft) (Worn or

damaged)
Shift key spring (Counter shaft) (Worn or

damaged)
Hub sleeve (Output shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Hub sleeve (Counter shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Shift detent ball spring (Damaged)
Shift fork (Output shaft) (Worn)
Shift fork (Counter shaft) (Worn)
Hub sleeve (Output shaft) (Worn or damaged)

Jumps out of gear or shift lever moves
Hub sleeve (Counter shaft) (Worn or damaged)
excessively
Bearing (Output shaft) (Worn or damaged)
Bearing (Counter shaft) (Worn or damaged)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000032KE02VX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017MP03JX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013
FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

table below.

1-2 Pushed Below 1 Ω
1-2 Released 10 kΩ or higher

*a
(Neutral Position Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the neutral

position switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YVJ04CX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install the neutral position switch assembly with a new gasket to
the manual transmission assembly.
NOTICE:

HINT:

connector side.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001YVL04CX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-
S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the 3 clamps.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the neutral

position switch assembly and gasket from the manual
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002H8K00DX
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OUTPUT SHAFT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002RHY006X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OUTPUT SHAFT: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. INSPECT THRUST CLEARANCE
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the thrust clearance of the

1st gear, 2nd gear and reverse gear.
*a Reverse gear thrust clearance
*b 2nd gear thrust clearance
*c 1st gear thrust clearance
Standard Clearance:
GEAR STANDARD CLEARANCE MAXIMUM CLEARANCE

MM (IN.) MM (IN.)
0.15 to 0.40 (0.00590 to

1st gear 0.40 (0.0157)
0.0157)
0.10 to 0.45 (0.000394

2nd gear 0.45 (0.0177)
to 0.0177)
Reverse 0.10 to 0.45 (0.000394

0.45 (0.0177)
gear to 0.0177)
HINT:

corresponding gear, transmission clutch hub, needle roller
bearing and output shaft with a new ones.
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the radial clearance of the

1st gear, 2nd gear and reverse gear.
*a Reverse gear radial clearance
*b 2nd gear radial clearance
*c 1st gear radial clearance
Standard Clearance:
GEAR STANDARD CLEARANCE MM MAXIMUM CLEARANCE
(IN.) MM (IN.)
0.015 to 0.066 (0.000590

1st gear 0.066 (0.00260)
to 0.00260)
0.015 to 0.066 (0.000590

2nd gear 0.066 (0.00260)
to 0.00260)
Reverse 0.015 to 0.066 (0.000590

0.066 (0.00260)
gear to 0.00260)
HINT:

corresponding gear, needle roller bearing and output shaft
with a new ones.
3. REMOVE REVERSE GEAR
(b) Using SST and a press, remove the No. 3 transmission

clutch hub, No. 3 transmission hub sleeve, reverse gear,
No. 3 synchronizer ring and reverse gear bearing from the
output shaft.
SST: 09950-00020
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00230
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100

NOTICE:
from popping out.
HINT:
During this operation, keep intact the No. 3 transmission

clutch hub and No. 1 synchromesh shifting key.
5. REMOVE 6TH GEAR
(a) Using 2 screwdrivers and a hammer, remove the shaft

snap ring.
(b) Using SST and a press, remove the 6th gear.
SST: 09950-00020
6. REMOVE 1ST GEAR
(a) Using SST and a press, remove the rear output shaft
bearing, 1st gear and 1st gear bearing inner race.
SST: 09950-00020
(b) Remove the 1st gear needle roller bearing, 1st shift
restrict ball and No. 1 synchronizer ring set.
7. REMOVE 2ND GEAR
(a) Using SST and a press, remove the 2nd gear, No. 1
transmission clutch hub and 2nd gear needle roller
bearing from the output shaft.
SST: 09950-00020
8. REMOVE NO. 1 SYNCHRONIZER RING SET

(a) Remove the No. 1 synchronizer ring set.

NOTICE:
from popping out.
HINT:
During this operation, keep the No. 1 transmission clutch hub

and No. 1 synchromesh shifting key intact.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000590T000X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OUTPUT SHAFT: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING
(a) Check the rear output shaft bearing.
Standard:
HINT:
If any abnormality is found, replace the rear output shaft

bearing with a new one.
2. INSPECT OUTPUT SHAFT
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of each

point.
Standard Outer Diameter:
PART STANDARD OUTER MINIMUM OUTER

DIAMETER MM (IN.) DIAMETER MM (IN.)
31.984 to 32.000 (1.25921

A 31.984 (1.25921)
to 1.25984)
42.984 to 43.000 (1.69228

B 42.984 (1.69228)
to 1.69291)
40.984 to 41.000 (1.61354

C 40.984 (1.61354)
to 1.61417)
HINT:
If the outer diameter is less than minimum, replace the output

(b) Using V-blocks and a dial indicator, measure the runout

of each location as shown in the illustration.
Standard runout:
0.03 mm (0.00118 in.) or less
HINT:
If the runout is outside the specification, replace the output
3. INSPECT REVERSE GEAR
(a) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the inner diameter of

the reverse gear.

47.015 to 47.040 mm (1.85098 to 1.85197 in.)
47.040 mm (1.85197 in.)
HINT:
If the inner diameter exceeds the maximum, replace the

reverse gear with a new one.
4. INSPECT 1ST GEAR

the 1st gear.

46.315 to 46.340 mm (1.82343 to 1.82441 in.)
46.340 mm (1.82441 in.)
HINT:
If the inside diameter exceeds the maximum, replace the 1st

gear with a new one.
5. INSPECT 2ND GEAR

the 2nd gear.

49.015 to 49.040 mm (1.92972 to 1.93071 in.)
49.040 mm (1.93071 in.)
HINT:
If the inside diameter exceeds the maximum, replace the 2nd

gear with a new one.
6. INSPECT 1ST GEAR BEARING INNER RACE
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the outside diameter of the

1st gear bearing inner race.
Standard outer diameter:

40.284 to 40.300 mm (1.58598 to 1.58661 in.)
Minimum outer diameter:
40.284 mm (1.58598 in.)
HINT:
If the outside diameter is less than minimum, replace the 1st

gear bearing inner race with a new one.

Standard width:
7.9 to 8.0 mm (0.311 to 0.315 in.)
Minimum width:
7.9 mm (0.311 in.)
HINT:
Standard clearance:
0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
HINT:

Standard width:
7.9 to 8.0 mm (0.311 to 0.315 in.)
Minimum width:
7.9 mm (0.311 in.)
HINT:
Standard clearance:
0.15 to 0.35 mm (0.00590 to 0.0138 in.)
Maximum clearance:
0.35 mm (0.0138 in.)
HINT:

HINT:

it slides smoothly.
HINT:
hub with a new one.

HINT:

it slides smoothly.
HINT:
hub with a new one.
11. INSPECT NO. 1 SYNCHRONIZER RING SET (for 1st Gear)

(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper cone of the 1st gear and No. 1 synchronizer ring
set, and then hold the No. 1 synchronizer ring set in position with your hand to measure the
clearance between the No. 1 synchronizer ring set and the 1st gear by using a feeler gauge.
*a Inner *b Middle
*c Outer - -
Standard Clearance:
LOCATION STANDARD CLEARANCE MM ( IN.)
Inner 0.48 to 1.12 (0.0189 to 0.0441)
Middle 0.38 to 1.22 (0.0150 to 0.0480)
Outer 0.8 to 1.8 (0.0315 to 0.0709)
NOTICE:
HINT:

the 1st gear, and then hold the No. 1 synchronizer ring
set in position with your hand to check that it does not
slide in the circumferential direction.
HINT:

12. INSPECT NO. 1 SYNCHRONIZER RING SET (for 2nd Gear)

(a) Apply manual transmission gear oil to the taper cone of the 2nd gear and No. 1 synchronizer ring
set, and then hold the No. 1 synchronizer ring set in position with your hand to measure the
clearance between the No. 1 synchronizer ring set and the 2nd gear by using a feeler gauge.
*a Inner *b Middle
*c Outer - -
Standard Clearance:
LOCATION STANDARD CLEARANCE MM ( IN.)
Inner 0.48 to 1.12 (0.0189 to 0.0441)
Middle 0.38 to 1.22 (0.0150 to 0.0480)
Outer 0.8 to 1.8 (0.0315 to 0.0709)
NOTICE:
HINT:

the 2nd gear, and then hold the No. 1 synchronizer ring in
position with your hand to check that it does not slide in
the circumferential direction.
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002RHZ006X
Title: TL70 MANUAL TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OUTPUT SHAFT: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL REVERSE GEAR

of the output shaft, reverse gear bearing and inside
surface and taper cone of the reverse gear.
(b) Install the reverse gear bearing and reverse gear to the output shaft.

*3 Ball
Front Side
clutch hub. And install the 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting keys and 3 synchromesh shifting key
HINT:
(a) Install the No. 3 synchronizer ring to the reverse gear.
(b) Using SST and a press, install the No. 3 transmission clutch hub.
SST: 09309-37010
HINT:
Align the No. 3 transmission clutch hub and the No. 3 synchronizer ring so that they can fit
together.
After the No. 3 transmission clutch hub is installed, check that the No. 3 synchronizer ring moves in
the thrust direction.
Make sure to press fit the No. 3 transmission clutch hub until it touches the output shaft.
4. INSTALL SHAFT SNAP RING (for No. 3 transmission clutch hub)

specific thrust clearance between the No. 3 transmission
clutch hub and shaft snap ring.
Standard clearance:
0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.00394 in.)
HINT:
SU003-03581 1.80 (0.07086) A
SU003-03582 1.85 (0.07283) B

SU003-03583 1.90 (0.07480) C
SU003-03584 1.95 (0.07677) D
SU003-03585 2.00 (0.07874) E
SU003-03586 2.05 (0.08070) F
(b) Using a snap ring expander, install a new shaft snap ring to the output shaft.
5. INSTALL 2ND GEAR

of the output shaft, 2nd gear needle roller bearing and
inside surface and taper cone of the reverse gear.
(b) Install the 2nd gear needle roller bearing and 2nd gear to the output shaft.

*3 Ball
Front Side
clutch hub. And install the 3 No. 1 synchromesh shifting keys and 3 synchromesh shifting key
HINT:
(a) Align and install the No. 1 synchronizer ring set (for 2nd
gear) in the position, as shown in the illustration.
HINT:
Align the middle ring claw with the groove in the 2nd
gear.
(b) Using SST and a press, install the No. 1 transmission

clutch hub.
SST: 09309-35010
SST: 09631-12090
HINT:

synchronizer ring set (for 2nd gear) so that they can fit
together.
After the No. 1 transmission clutch hub is installed, check
that the No. 1 synchronizer ring set (for 2nd gear) moves
in the thrust direction.
Make sure to press fit the No. 1 transmission clutch hub

until it touches the output shaft.
(c) Align and install the No. 1 synchronizer ring set (for 1st
gear) in the position, as shown in the illustration.
HINT:
Align the outer ring claw with the groove in No. 1

8. INSTALL 1ST GEAR
(a) After the output shaft is installed, apply manual

transmission gear oil to the mounting point of the output
shaft, needle roller bearing inner race, and inside surface
and taper cone of the 1st gear.
(b) Install the 1st shift restrict ball, 1st gear, 1st gear needle roller bearing and 1st gear bearing inner
race to the output shaft.
*1 1st Shift Restrict Ball
HINT:
Align the middle ring claw with the groove in the 1st gear.
9. INSTALL REAR OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING

(a) Using SST and a press, as shown in the illustration, install the rear output shaft bearing.
*1 Rear Output Shaft Bearing
Front Side
SST: 09309-35010
SST: 09316-60011
09316-00021
HINT:
Make sure to press fit the rear output shaft bearing until it touches the 1st gear bearing inner race.
10. INSTALL 6TH GEAR
(a) Using SST and a press, install the 6th gear.
SST: 09309-35010
HINT:
Make sure to press fit the 6th gear until it touches the rear
output shaft bearing.
11. INSTALL SHAFT SNAP RING (for 6th gear)

specific thrust clearance between the 6th gear and shaft
snap ring.
Standard clearance:
0 to 0.11 mm (0 to 0.00433 in.)
HINT:
SU003-03564 2.67 (0.10511) A

SU003-03565 2.73 (0.10748) B
SU003-03566 2.79 (0.10984) C
SU003-03567 2.85 (0.11220) D
SU003-03568 2.91 (0.11456) E
SU003-03569 2.97 (0.11692) F
SU003-03570 3.03 (0.11929) G
SU003-03571 3.09 (0.12165) H
SU003-03572 3.15 (0.12401) J
SU003-03573 3.21 (0.01053) K
SU003-03574 3.27 (0.12874) L
(b) Using a brass bar and hammer, install a new shaft snap ring to the output shaft.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NR9022X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY:

COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION

INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Engage the splines of the input shaft and turbine runner.
(b) Engage the splines of the stator shaft and stator while
turning the torque converter assembly.
HINT:
If the stator shaft splines are difficult to engage with the

stator splines, move the torque converter back approximately
10 mm (0.394 in.) and engage the splines while rotating the
torque converter assembly.
(c) Turn the torque converter assembly to engage the key of

the oil pump drive gear into the slot on the torque
converter assembly.
(d) Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure

dimension A between the transmission contact surface of
the engine and the torque converter contact surface of
the drive plate.
(e) Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure

dimension B shown in the illustration and check that
dimension B is more than dimension A, which was
measured in the first step.
Standard::
B = A + 1 mm (0.0394 in.) or more
NOTICE:
Make sure to deduct the thickness of the straightedge.
If the transmission is installed to the engine with the
torque converter not sufficiently inserted, the torque
converter may be damaged.
2. INSTALL OIL COOLER TUBE

(a) Install the oil cooler tube with the bolt to the automatic transmission assembly.
(b) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses to the transmission oil cooler with the 4 hose clamps.
3. INSTALL WIRE HARNESS

(a) Install the wire harness to the automatic transmission
assembly with engage the 6 wire harness clamps.
(b) Connect the park/neutral position switch connector,

transmission wire connector and the transmission
revolution sensor connector.
HINT:
Push up the lever until the claw of the transmission wire

connector makes a connection sound.

(a) Install the rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator to the automatic transmission assembly with the 4
bolts.

5. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Confirm that 2 knock pins are on the automatic

transmission assembly contact surface of the engine
cylinder block before automatic transmission assembly
installation.
(b) Keeping the engine assembly and the automatic transmission assembly in a horizontal position,
align the knock pins with each hole on the automatic transmission assembly and install the 2 bolts
and 2nuts.
*1 Knock Pin
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
Make sure not to pinch or damage any wire harness.
Make sure the knock pin is fully engaged with the knock pin hole.
Do not forcibly pry the automatic transmission assembly.
After installing the automatic transmission assembly, confirm that the torque converter assembly
can be rotated by hand.

(a) Install the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator to the rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator with 2
washers and 2 nuts.
(b) Install the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator to the body with the 4 bolts.
7. INSTALL EXHAUST PIPE BRACKET

(a) Install the exhaust pipe bracket with the 2 bolts.
8. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply MP grease to the pin.
(b) Install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly to the transmission control shaft lever RH with
the pin and a clip.
(c) While pushing the shift lock release button, move the shift lever to N.
(d) Using tape, hold a 0.3 mm feeler gauge on the floor shift
control select lever.
(e) Using tape, attach the floor shift control select lever to
the console box assembly.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the feeler gauge is not on the area
(f) Turn the transmission control shaft lever RH of the

park/neutral position switch assembly counterclockwise
until it stops, and turn it clockwise 2 notches to set it to
the N position.
(g) Temporarily install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly with the nut.
(h) Tighten the nut while lightly pushing the lever rearward.
NOTICE:
Do not push the lever too hard.
9. INSTALL TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (NT)
10. CONNECT OIL COOLER TUBE

(a) Fasten the oil cooler pipe with the oil cooler tube using 2 bolts.
11. INSTALL TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE

(a) Install the 2 transmission oil cooler hoses to the transmission oil cooler with the 4 hose clamps.
13. CONNECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 2 bolts to the automatic transmission assembly.
14. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND TORQUE CONVERTER SETTING BOLT

(a) Install the 6 drive plate and torque converter setting bolt.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the drive plate and torque converter setting bolts do not fall into the clutch housing.
Make sure not to damage the drive plate and torque converter setting bolts.
15. INSTALL FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER

(a) Install the flywheel housing side cover.
16. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE

(a) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose with the 2 bolts.
17. CONNECT WIRE HARNESS

(a) Install the No. 2 engine hanger with the 2 bolts.
(b) Install the wire harness clamp bracket with the bolt.
(c) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(d) Connect the 3 connectors.
HINT:
Push down the lever until the claw of the connector (A) makes
a connection sound.
(e) Engage the 4 wire harness clamps.
(f) Install the ground cable to the automatic transmission assembly with the bolt
(g) Connect the 2 connectors.
HINT:
Push down the lever until the claw of the connector (A) makes
a connection sound.
23. CONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
24. ADD ENGINE COOLANT
25. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
26. CHECK FOR ENGINE COOLANT LEAKS
27. INSPECT SHIFT LEVER POSITION
28. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKS
29. RESET CHECK RESET MEMORY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRA03ZX

REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. DRAIN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
8. DISCONNECT WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR
HINT:
Fix disconnected harness components with tape to keep them out of the way.
(a) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the

connector.
(b) Disconnect the connector (B).
(c) Remove the bolt and disconnect the ground cable.

(d) Disengage the 4 wire harness clamps.
(e) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the

connector.
(f) Disconnect the connector (B) and (C).
(g) Disengage the wire harness clamp.
(h) Remove the bolt and the wire harness clamp bracket.
(i) Remove the 2 bolts and the No. 2 engine hanger.
9. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the disconnect the union to

check valve hose.
10. REMOVE FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER
(a) Remove the flywheel housing side cover from the

automatic transmission assembly.
11. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE AND TORQUE CONVERTER SETTING BOLT
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Remove the 6 drive plate and torque converter setting
bolt.
12. DISCONNECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts from the automatic transmission

assembly.
14. SUSPEND ENGINE ASSEMBLY

(a) Support the engine assembly with an engine lifter so that it is stable shown in the illustration.
Attachment Placement Positions
NOTICE:
Set the engine assembly with transmission so that it is horizontal.
Never attach the attachment and plate lift attachment to the oil pan section of the engine assembly.
15. REMOVE TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE

(a) Loosen the 4 hose clamps and remove the 2 transmission
oil cooler hoses.
NOTICE:
Use a container to catch any coolant which flows out of
the transmission oil cooler hoses.
16. SEPARATE OIL COOLER TUBE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the oil cooler tube.
17. REMOVE TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (NT)
18. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) While pushing the shift lock release button, move the shift lever to N.
(b) Remove the clip, pin and the floor shift gear shifting rod
sub-assembly from the transmission control shaft lever
RH.
(c) Remove the nut and disconnect the floor shift gear
shifting rod sub-assembly.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the exhaust pipe bracket from
the automatic transmission assembly.
20. SUPPORT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Support the automatic transmission assembly with a high

transmission jack.
NOTICE:
To prevent damage to and deformation of the oil pan,
never place a jack under the oil pan area of the

(a) Remove the 4 bolts, 2 washers and 2 nuts and the rear No. 2 engine mounting insulator from the
rear No. 1 engine mounting insulator.
Bolt
Nut
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and the rear No. 1 engine mounting
insulator from the automatic transmission assembly.
23. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and 2 nuts and the automatic transmission assembly from the engine
assembly.
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
To prevent damage to the knock pins, do not pry between the automatic transmission assembly and
the engine assembly.
Do not allow the torque converter to fall off.
24. DISCONNECT WIRE HARNESS
(a) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector,

transmission wire connector and the transmission
revolution sensor connector.
HINT:
Disengage the claw, press down the lever, and disconnect the
transmission wire connector.
(b) Disengage the 6 wire harness clamps and the wire harness from the automatic transmission
assembly.
25. REMOVE OIL COOLER TUBE

(a) Loosen the 4 hose clamps and remove the 2 oil cooler
hoses.
NOTICE:
the oil cooler hoses.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the oil cooler tube from the
26. REMOVE TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the torque converter assembly from the

NOTICE:
Remove the torque converter assembly from the input
shaft horizontally.
27. INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000013BU08VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID:

ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTICE:
This transmission requires Toyota Genuine ATF WS.
After servicing the transmission, you must follow the ATF adjustment procedure.
Maintain the vehicle in a horizontal position while adjusting the fluid level.
1. BEFORE FILLING TRANSMISSION
When you have replaced the entire automatic transmission, automatic transmission oil pan,
drain plug, transmission valve body and/or torque converter, proceed to the "TRANSMISSION
FILL" procedures.
When you have replaced the automatic transmission extension housing oil seal and/or repaired
a fluid leak, proceed to the "FLUID TEMPERATURE CHECK" procedures.
2. FILL TRANSMISSION PAN WITH FLUID

(a) Lift the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Set the vehicle on a lift so that the vehicle is kept level when it is lifted up (make sure that the
tilt angle from the front to rear of the vehicle is within +/- 1°).
(b) Remove the No. 2 engine under cover .
(c) Remove the refill plug with O-ring, overflow plug and
gasket.
*1 Refill Plug
*2 Overflow Plug
*a Refill Hole
(d) Fill the transmission through the refill hole until fluid
begins to trickle out of the overflow tube.
*1 Overflow Tube
*a Specified Fluid Level
(e) Wait until the fluid flow slows and only drops come out.
(f) Temporarily install the overflow plug and gasket.
HINT:
Reuse the old gasket. The overflow plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(g) Fill the transmission with the amount of fluid listed in the table below.
Reference Capacity:
PERFORMED REPAIR FILL AMOUNT
Automatic transmission oil pan and drain plug removal/installation 2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp. qts)
Transmission valve body removal/installation 3.0 liters (3.2 US qts, 2.6 Imp. qts)
Torque converter removal/installation 4.5 liters (4.8 US qts, 4.0 Imp. qts)
HINT:
If you cannot fill the listed amount of fluid, perform the following:
(1) Temporarily install the refill plug with O-ring.
HINT:
Reuse the old O-ring. The refill plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(2) Start the engine and idle it.
NOTICE:
Check that electrical systems such as the air conditioning system, audio system and lighting
system are off.
(3) Slowly move the shift lever from P to M. Then return the shift lever to P.
HINT:
Slowly move the shift lever to circulate the fluid through each part of the transmission.
(4) Wait for 30 seconds with the engine idling.
(5) Stop the engine.
(6) Remove the refill plug with O-ring.
(7) Fill the transmission with the remaining fluid until the amount in the table has been filled.
(h) Temporarily install the refill plug with O-ring.
HINT:
(i) Lower the vehicle.
3. FLUID TEMPERATURE CHECK
NOTICE:
The ATF temperature can be confirmed by using the Techstream.
(a) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List / A/T Oil Temperature 1.
(e) Check the ATF temperature.
NOTICE:
If the ATF temperature is higher than 43°C (109°F), turn the ignition switch OFF and wait until
the fluid temperature drops to below 43°C (109°F).
4. FLUID LEVEL CHECK
CAUTION:
It is necessary to change to temperature detection mode in order to idle the vehicle appropriately.
The ATF temperature must be between 43 and 47°C (109 and 117°F) to accurately check the fluid
level.
(a) When using the Techstream:
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Active Test / Connect the TC and TE1.
Standard condition:
Indicator lights in the combination meter blink.
(b) When not using the Techstream:
Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the

DLC3.
*a Front view of DLC3
SST: 09843-18040
Standard condition:
Indicator lights in the combination meter blink.
(c) Start the engine and idle it.
NOTICE:
Check that electrical systems such as the air conditioning system, audio system and lighting
system are off.
(d) Slowly move the shift lever from P to M. Then return the shift lever to P.
HINT:
(e) Move the shift lever to D, and then quickly move it back
and forth between N and D (once within 1.5 seconds) for
at least 6 seconds. This will activate the fluid temperature
detection mode.
Standard condition:
When switching to the oil temperature detecting mode,
regardless of the shift position, the indicator lights [▲]
and [▼] turn on for 2 seconds, and then go off.
(f) When using the Techstream:

Return the shift lever to P and terminate the Active Test on the Techstream.
(g) When not using the Techstream:
Return the shift lever to P and disconnect SST from the DLC3.
(h) While watching the state of the indicator lights [▲] and [▼], idle the engine to rise the oil
temperature.
NOTICE:
If only the indicator light [▲] turns on or the indicator lights [▲] and [▼] turn on
simultaneously, stop the operation. And then, wait until the fluid temperature is lowered and
only the indicator light [▼] turns on in the oil temperature detecting mode.
(i) Allow the engine to idle until the fluid temperature reaches 43 to 47°C (109 to 117°F).
Indicator [D] Indication of ATF Temperature:
BELOW PROPER PROPER TEMPERATURE HIGHER THAN PROPER

TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
Below 43°C (109°F) 43 to 47°C (109 to 117°F) Higher than 47°C (117°F)
Indicator lights [▲] and [▼] turn

Indicator lights [▼] turns on Indicator lights [▲] turns on
on
(j) Remove the overflow plug and gasket with the engine
idling.
*1 Overflow Tube
(k) Wait until the overflow slows to a trickle.
NOTICE:
If the fluid does not overflow, perform the following:
(1) Remove the refill plug with O-ring.
(2) Refill the transmission through the refill hole until fluid begins to trickle out of the overflow tube.
(3) Wait until the overflow slows to a trickle.
(l) Install the overflow plug and a new gasket.
(m) Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the refill plug.
(n) Install the refill plug with O-ring.
(o) Install the No. 2 engine under cover .
(p) Lower the vehicle.
5. COMPLETE
(a) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(b) When using the Techstream:
Disconnect the Techstream from the DLC3.
(c) Inspect for automatic transmission fluid leak.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004LXE008X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID:

REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
1. REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

(a) Lift the vehicle. [*1]
NOTICE:
Set the vehicle on a lift so that the vehicle is kept level when it is lifted up (make sure that the
tilt angle from the front to rear of the vehicle is within +/- 1°).
(b) Remove the No. 2 engine under cover .
(c) Remove the drain plug and gasket, and drain the ATF. [*2]
(d) Temporarily install the drain plug and gasket. [*3]
HINT:
Reuse the old gasket. The drain plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(e) Remove the refill plug with O-ring, overflow plug and
gasket. [*4]
*1 Refill Plug
*2 Overflow Plug
*a Refill Hole
(f) Add fluid to the refill hole until it flows out of the overflow
tube. [*5]
*1 Overflow Tube

NOTICE:
Use Toyota Genuine ATF WS.
(g) Wait until the fluid flow slows and only drops come out. [*6]
(h) Temporarily install the overflow plug and gasket. [*7]
HINT:
Reuse the old gasket. The overflow plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
(i) Add fluid to the refill hole using the amount of fluid specified for removal and installation of the oil
pan. [*8]
HINT:
Specified amount of fluid is 2.0 liters (2.1 US qts, 1.8 Imp. qts).
(j) Temporarily install the refill plug with O-ring. [*9]
HINT:
(k) Lower the vehicle. [*10]
(l) Start the engine. [*11]
NOTICE:
Make sure that the A/C switch is off.
(m) Slowly move the shift lever from P to M. Then return the shift lever to P. [*12]
HINT:
(n) Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds to warm it up. [*13]
(o) Turn the ignition switch off. [*14]
(p) Repeat steps [*1] to [*14].
(q) Repeat steps [*1] to [*2].
(r) Install the drain plug and a new gasket.
(s) Repeat steps [*4] to [*10].
(t) Adjust the fluid level .
(u) Install the No. 2 engine under cover .
(v) Lower the vehicle.
(w) Operation complete.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PKP016X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: B1016:

Shift Lock Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC B1016 Shift Lock Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When an IGN signal, P switch signal, and STP signal are input into the main body ECU (network gateway
ECU), a signal is output to the shift lock control unit assembly.

NO. 1. DIAGNOSIS CONDITION
2. MALFUNCTION STATUS
3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. Ignition switch is turned to ON

Shift lock control unit assembly
2. Shift lock circuit open, short to B+, or
Wire harness or connector
B1016 short to ground
Main body ECU (Network
3. For 3 seconds or more
Gateway ECU)
4. 1-trip detection logic
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY

(a) Perform inspection of the shift lock control unit assembly .
REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU - SHIFT LOCK CONTROL
2.
UNIT ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.
D5-20(SLS+) - D28-4(SLS+) Always Below 1 Ω
D5-20(SLS+) or D28-4(SLS+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(d) Connect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(e) Connect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY -

3.
BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.
D28-5(SLS-) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

(c) Connect the D28 shift lock control unit assembly connector.

CONNECTOR (SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT
NG ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)

OK GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W780NLX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: CHECK

MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

HINT:
Check mode has a higher sensitivity to malfunctions and can detect malfunction that normal mode
cannot detect. Check mode can also detect all the malfunctions that normal mode can detect. In check
mode, DTCs are detected with 1-trip detection logic.
1. DTC CHECK (CHECK MODE)
HINT:
Techstream only: Compared to the normal mode, the check mode is more sensitive for detecting
malfunctions. Furthermore, the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also
be detected in the check mode.
(a) Procedure for Check Mode using the Techstream.
(1) Check the initial conditions.
Battery positive voltage 11 V or more

Throttle valve fully closed
Transmission in the P or N position
A/C switch is off
(4) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the Techstream main switch on.
(5) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / Check Mode.
NOTICE:
All DTCs and freeze frame data recorded will be erased if: 1) Techstream is used to change the
ECM from normal mode to check mode or vice-versa; or 2) during check mode, the ignition
switch is turned from the on to on (ACC) or turned OFF.
(6) Start the engine (the MIL goes off after the engine starts).
(7) Perform "MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN" for the ECT test , or simulate the conditions of the
malfunction described by the customer.
NOTICE:
Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs, etc.
(8) After simulating malfunction conditions, use the Techstream diagnosis selector to check the
DTCs and freeze frame data, etc.
(9) When you use Techstream: Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.
(10) After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit.
(11) to confirm the details of the DTCs.
2. DTC CLEAR
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the Techstream main switch on.
(c) When you use Techstream: Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes / Clear.
HINT:
When operating Techstream to erase the codes, the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. (See
the Techstream instruction book for operating instructions.)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7E0PNX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DATA

LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
and other items to be read without removing any parts. This non-intrusive inspection can be very
useful because intermittent conditions or signals may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed.
NOTICE:
(d) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(f) Enter the following menus: "Powertrain / ECT / Data List" or "Body Electrical / Main Body / Data
List".
(g) According to the display on the Techstream, read the "Data List".
"Powertrain / ECT / Data List"

DISPLAY
Vehicle speed /
Vehicle
Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), Max.: Actual vehicle speed -
Speed
255 km/h (158 mph)
Engine speed /
Engine
Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383.75 550 to 800 rpm: Idling -
Speed
rpm
If value -40°C (-
40°F): sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature / 75 to 100°C (167 to
Coolant open
Min.: -40°C (-40°F), Max.: 212°F): After warming
Temp If value 215°C
140°C (284°F) up
(419°F): sensor circuit
shorted
Engine run time /

Engine Run
Min.: 0 second, Time after engine start -
Time
Max.: 65535 seconds
Battery Battery voltage /

11 to 14 V: Idling -
Voltage Min.: 0, Max.: 65.535 V
Brake pedal is
ON:
Stop Light Stop light switch status/
Depressed -
Switch ON or OFF
OFF:
Released
A/C signal status / A/C switch is:

A/C signal -
ON or OFF ON : OFF
#Codes
# of Codes /
(Include - Number of detected DTCs
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
History)
MIL ON run distance /

MIL ON Run Distance after DTC
Min.: 0 km (0 mile), -
Distance detected
Max.: 65535 km (40723 mile)
Running Running time from MIL ON /

Equivalent to running
Time from Min.: 0 minute, -
time after MIL ON
MIL ON Max.: 65535 minutes
Time after DTC cleared /

Time after Equivalent to time after
Min.: 0 minute, -
DTC Cleared DTCs cleared
Max.: 65535 minutes
Distance Distance after DTC cleared /

Equivalent to time after
from DTC Min.: 0 km (0 mile) -
DTCs cleared
Cleared Max.: 65535 km (40723 mile)
Warmup Warm-up cycle after DTC

Number of warm-up cycles after
Cycle cleared / -
DTCs cleared
Cleared DTC Min.: 0, Max.: 255
TC and TE1 terminals of DLC3

TC and TE1 / - Active Test support data
ON or OFF
Engine Engine speed /

Speed from Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383.75 550 to 800 rpm: Idling -
EFI rpm
If value -40°C (-
40°F): sensor circuit
Coolant Engine coolant temperature / 80 to 105°C (176 to
open
Temp from Min.: -40°C (-40°F), Max.: 221°F): After warming
If value 140°C
EFI 215°C (419°F) up
(284°F): sensor circuit
shorted
0%:
Accelerator
pedal
Throttle
Throttle sensor position / released Recognition value for throttle
Position
Min.: 0%, Max.: 100% 64 to 96%: opening angle on TCM
from EFI
Accelerator
pedal fully
depressed
10 to 22%:
Accelerator
pedal
Accel Absolute Accelerator Pedal
released
Position Position / -
54 to 86%:
from EFI Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
Accelerator
pedal fully
depressed
Received
MIL request status/ MIL request is:
MIL from -
ON : OFF ON : OFF
ECT
Shift lever position is
On D: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
Shift Received Shift Position Signal 4th, 5th or
Position Sig from ECT 6th -
from ECT 1st,2nd,3rd,4th,5th,6th,7th,8th On M: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
6th
Lock-up is
ON (after
warming up
engine):
Input turbine
speed (NT)
is equal to
Input shaft speed/
engine speed Data is displayed in increments
SPD(NT) Min.: 0 rpm
OFF (idling of 50 rpm
Max.: 12,750 rpm
with shift
lever on N):
Input turbine
speed (NT)
is nearly
equal to
engine speed
Vehicle stopped: 0
Output shaft speed/
km/h (0 mph) (output
SPD(SP2) Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph) -
shaft speed is equal to
Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
vehicle speed)
Shift lever is: When shift lever position

Shift SW displayed on the Techstream
PNP switch status/ On P: ON
Status (P differs from actual position,
ON or OFF Not on P:
Range) adjustment of PNP switch or shift
OFF
cable may be incorrect

PNP switch status/ On R: ON
Status (R differs from actual position,
ON or OFF Not on R:
OFF

PNP switch status/ On N: ON
Status (N differs from actual position,
ON or OFF Not on N:
OFF
Continuously
shift to "+"
Sport Shift Sport shift up switch status/ (upshift): ON
-
Up SW ON or OFF Release "+"
(up-shift):
OFF
Continuously
shift to "-"
(down-shift):
Sport Shift Sport shift down switch status/
ON -
Down SW ON or OFF
Release "-"
(down-shift):
OFF
Shift lever position is:
M, "+" and
Sports Mode Sport mode select switch
"-": ON
Selection status/ -
Not on M,
SW ON or OFF
"+" and "-":
OFF
Ignition switch is:

Pushed: OFF
↓
Pattern switch (ECT
Pattern switch (ECT SNOW)
Snow Switch SNOW) is:
status/ -
Status Pushed: ON
ON or OFF
↓
Pattern switch (ECT
SNOW) is:
Pushed: OFF
Shift lever is:

When shift lever position
Shift SW On D or M: displayed on the Techstream
PNP switch status/
Status (D ON differs from actual position,
ON or OFF
Range) Not on D or adjustment of PNP switch or shift
M: OFF cable may be incorrect
After stall
test: 50 to
100°C (122
ATF temperature sensor No. 1 If value is -40°C (-40°F) or
A/T Oil to 212°F)
value/ 215°C (419°F), ATF temperature
Temperature Equal to
Min.: -40°C (-40°F) sensor No. 1 circuit is opened or
1 ambient
Max.: 215°C (419°F) short circuited
temperature
while engine
is cold
Lock-up is
Operating:
Lock Up Status/ ON
Lock Up -
ON or OFF Not
operating:
OFF
Shift solenoid SL is
Operating:
SL Solenoid Shift solenoid SL status/ ON
-
Status ON or OFF Not
operating:
OFF
Shift lever position is
On D: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
TCM gear shift command/
Shift Status 6th -
1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
On M: 1st,
2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th or
6th
MT Down Shift indicator lamp down shift

Shift indicator lamp is:
Shift status/ -
ON : OFF
Indication ON or OFF
Shift indicator lamp up shift

MT Up Shift Shift indicator lamp is:
status/ -
Indication ON : OFF
ON or OFF
Ignition switch is:

ON : OFF
↓
Pattern select switch (SNOW)
Snow or 2nd Pattern select switch is:
status/ -
Mode Pushed : ON
ON or OFF
↓
Pattern select switch is:
Released : OFF
"Powertrain / ECT / Data List"
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE
Brake pedal is
Stop light switch ON:

Stop Light
status/ Depressed -
Switch
ON or OFF OFF:
Released
Shift lever is:

PNP switch When shift lever position displayed on the
Shift P On P: ON
status/ Techstream differs from actual position, adjustment
Signal Not on P:
ON or OFF of PNP switch or shift cable may be incorrect
OFF
IG Power Supply
IG Power
Voltage /
Supply 11 to 14 V: Idling -
Min.: 0, Max.:
Voltage
21.4 V
Shift Lock Control

Unit Assembly is
Shift Lock
Control Unit Operating:
Shift Lock
Assembly ON -
Solenoid
status/ Not
ON or OFF operating:
OFF
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
Using Techstream to perform Active Test allows relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be operated
without removing any parts. This non-intrusive functional inspection can be very useful because
intermittent operation may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed. Performing Active Test
early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be displayed
while performing Active Test.
(d) Turn the ignition switch on position.
(f) Enter the following menus: "Powertrain / ECT / Active Test" or "Body Electrical / Main Body / Active
Test".
(g) According to the display on the Techstream, perform the "Active Test".
"Powertrain / ECT / Active Test"
TESTER TEST PART CONTROL RANGE DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Solenoid Operate the shift solenoid SLU ON or OFF
Shift lever P or N
(SLU)
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Solenoid Operate the shift solenoid S1 ON or OFF
Shift lever P or N
(S1)
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Shift lever P or N
(S2)
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Shift lever P or N
(S3)
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Shift lever P or N
(S4)
position
Possible to check shift solenoid

valve SLU operation
[Vehicle Condition]
Control shift solenoid SLU to set
Activate the
automatic transmission to lock-up ON or OFF Throttle valve opening
Lock Up
condition angle: Less than 35%
Vehicle speed: 50 km/h
(30 mph) or more
Press
"→"
button:
Possible to check operation of
Control the Shift up
Operate shift solenoid valve and set shift solenoid valves
Shift Press
each shift position by yourself [Vehicle Condition]
Position "←"
50 km/h (30 mph) or less
button:
Shift
down
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Solenoid Operate the shift solenoid SR ON or OFF
Shift lever P or N
(SR)
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Solenoid Operate the shift solenoid SL1 ON or OFF
Shift lever P or N
(SL1)
position
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate the
Engine stopped
Solenoid Operate the shift solenoid SL2 ON or OFF
Shift lever P or N
(SL2)
position
Connects and disconnects TC and

The MIL will not blink when
Connect the TE1.
ON or OFF "Connect the TC and TE1 / ON" is
TC and TE1 (transitions into the fluid
selected.
temperature detection mode)
"Body Electrical / Main Body / Active Test"
Shift Lock Operate the shift lock ON or OFF -
* : "Activate the Solenoid (SLT)" in the Active Test is performed to check the line pressure changes
by connecting the SST to the automatic transmission, which is used in the HYDRAULIC TEST
as well.
HINT:
The pressure values in Active Test and HYDRAULIC TEST are different from each other.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7I0MMX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM:

DEFINITION OF TERMS (2013 FR-S)
DEFINITION OF TERMS
TERM DEFINITION
Description of what the TCM monitors and how it detects malfunctions (monitoring
Monitor description
purpose and its details).
Related DTCs Diagnostic code
Preconditions that allow the TCM to detect malfunctions.

Typical enabling
With all preconditions satisfied, the TCM sets the DTC when the monitored value(s)
condition
exceeds the malfunction threshold(s).
The priority order that is applied to monitoring, if multiple sensors and components
Sequence of are used to detect the malfunction.
operation While another sensor is being monitored, the next sensor or component will not be
monitored until the previous monitoring has concluded.
Required
The sensors and components that are used by the TCM to detect malfunctions.
sensor/components
The number of times that the TCM checks for malfunctions per driving cycle.
"Once per driving cycle" means that the TCM detects malfunction only one time
Frequency of
during a single driving cycle.
operation
"Continuous" means that the TCM detects malfunction every time when enabling
condition is met.
The minimum time that the TCM must sense a continuous deviation in the
Duration monitored value(s) before setting a DTC. This timing begins after the "typical
enabling conditions" are met.
Malfunction
Beyond this value, the TCM will conclude that there is a malfunction and set a DTC.
thresholds
MIL illumination timing after a defect is detected.

"Immediately" means that the TCM illuminates MIL the instant the TCM determines
MIL operation that there is a malfunction.
"2 driving cycle" means that the TCM illuminates MIL if the same malfunction is
detected again in the 2nd driving cycle.
Normal operation range of sensors and solenoids under normal driving conditions.
Component
Use these ranges as a reference.
operating range
They cannot be used to judge if a sensor or solenoid is defective or not.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W760ROX

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
When troubleshooting OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics) vehicles, an OBD II scan tool (complying with
SAE J1987) must be connected to the DLC3 (Data Link Connector 3) of the vehicle. Various data in
the vehicle TCM (Transmission Control Module) can be then read.
OBD II regulations require that the vehicle on-board computer illuminate the MIL (Malfunction
Indicator Lamp) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in:
a. The emission control system components.

b. The powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions).
c. The computer itself.
In addition, the applicable DTCs prescribed by SAE J2012 are recorded in the TCM memory. If the
malfunction does not recur in 3 consecutive trips, the MIL turns off automatically but the DTCs
remain recorded in the TCM memory.
To check for DTCs, connect the Techstream to the DLC3. The Techstream displays DTCs, freeze
frame data, and a variety of the engine data. The DTCs and freeze frame data can be cleared with
the Techstream. In order to enhance OBD function on vehicles and develop the off-board diagnosis
system, Controller Area Network (CAN) communication is used in this system. CAN is a network
which uses a pair of data transmission lines spanning multiple computers and sensors. It allows for
high speed communications between the systems and simplification of the wire harness
connections.
2. NORMAL MODE AND CHECK MODE
The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. In normal mode, 2 trip
detection logic is used to ensure accurate detection of malfunctions. Check mode is also available as an
option for technicians. In check mode, 1 trip detection logic is used for duplicating malfunction symptoms
and increasing the system's ability to detect malfunctions, including intermittent problems (the Techstream
only).
3. 2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the TCM memory (1st
trip). If the same malfunction is detected during the subsequent driving cycle, the MIL is illuminated
(2nd trip).

The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as freeze frame data the moment a DTC
is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can be helpful in determining whether the
vehicle was running or stopped, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel
ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
5. DLC3 (Data Link Connector 3)
(a) Check the DLC3 .
6. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
If voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery before proceeding to the next step.
7. MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

(a) The MIL illuminates when the ignition switch is first turned on (the engine is not running).
(b) The MIL should turn off when the engine is started. If the MIL remains illuminated, the diagnosis
system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
HINT:
If the MIL does not illuminate when the ignition switch is first turned on, check the MIL circuit .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W710L1X

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
DTC DETECTION ITEM MIL MEMORY SEE

CODE PAGE
DTC
B1016 Shift Lock Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P0601 Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum Error Comes on
stored
DTC
P062F Internal Control Module EEPROM Error Comes on
stored
DTC
P0707 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0708 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit High Comes on
stored
DTC
P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0717 Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal Comes on
stored
DTC
P0722 Output Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal Comes on
stored
DTC
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio Comes on
stored
DTC
P0751 Shift Solenoid "A" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0752 Shift Solenoid "A" Stuck ON (S1 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0757 Shift Solenoid "B" Stuck ON (S2 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0756 Shift Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0761 Shift Solenoid "C" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S3) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0762 Shift Solenoid "C" Stuck ON (S3 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0766 Shift Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S4) Comes on
stored
Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve DTC

P0776 Comes on
SL2) stored
DTC
P0781 1-2 Shift (1-2 Shift Valve) Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

P0882 TCM Power Input Signal Low
come on stored
DTC
P0894 Transmission Component Slipping Comes on
stored
DTC
P0961 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Performance (SL1 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0962 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Circuit Low (SL1 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0963 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Circuit High (SL1 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0965 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (SL2 Solenoid) Comes on
stored
Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid DTC
P0966 Comes on
Valve DS2) stored
Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid DTC
P0967 Comes on
Valve DS2) stored
DTC
P0973 Shift Solenoid "A" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0974 Shift Solenoid "A" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0976 Shift Solenoid "B" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0977 Shift Solenoid "B" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0979 Shift Solenoid "C" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S3) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0980 Shift Solenoid "C" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S3) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0982 Shift Solenoid "D" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0983 Shift Solenoid "D" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0985 Shift Solenoid "E" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve SR) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0986 Shift Solenoid "E" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve SR) Comes on
stored
DTC
P160A Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error Comes on
stored
Does not DTC
P1817 Manual Mode Switch Circuit Malfunction
come on stored
Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve DTC

P2714 Comes on
SLT) stored
DTC
P2719 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Circuit Performance (SLT Solenoid) Comes on
stored
DTC
P2720 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Control Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P2721 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Control Circuit High Comes on
stored
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Performance DTC

P2757 Comes on
(Shift Solenoid Valve SLU) stored
Torque Converter Pressure Control Solenoid Circuit Stuck ON / DTC

P2758 Comes on
Performance (SLU / DSU Solenoid) stored
Torque Converter Pressure Control Solenoid Circuit Performance DTC

P2762 Comes on
(SLU / DSU Solenoid) stored
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit DTC

P2763 Comes on
High (Shift Solenoid Valve DSU) stored
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit DTC

P2764 Comes on
Low (Shift Solenoid Valve DSU) stored
DTC
U0073 Control Module Communication Bus OFF Comes on
stored
DTC
U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A" Comes on
stored
DTC
U0122 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamics Control Module Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

U0140 Lost Communication with Body Control Module
come on stored
Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module Does not DTC
U0155
(Combination Meter) come on stored
DTC
U0401 Invalid Data Received from ECM/PCM "A" Comes on
stored
DTC
U0416 Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

U0422 Invalid Data Received from Body Control Module
come on stored
Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control DTC

U0423 Comes on
Module stored
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W770REX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: DTC

CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

NOTICE:
When the diagnosis system is changed from normal mode to check mode or vice versa, all DTCs
and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode are cleared. Before changing modes, always
check and make a note of DTCs and freeze frame data.
HINT:
DTCs which are stored in the ECM can be displayed on the Techstream. The Techstream can display
the current, pending and permanent DTCs.
If a malfunction is detected during the current driving cycle, current and permanent DTCs are
stored.
Some DTCs are not stored if the ECM does not detect the same malfunction again during a second
consecutive driving cycle. However, such malfunctions, detected on only one occasion, are stored as
pending DTCs.
Current and pending DTCs can be cleared by using the Techstream. However, permanent DTCs
cannot be cleared using either of these two methods.
After clearing current DTCs using the Techstream, permanent DTCs can be cleared when the system
is determined to be normal for the relevant DTCs and then the universal trip is performed.
2 Trip Detection Examples
Store
Malfunction detected
condition
System determined to be normal

Pending
or
DTC Clear
DTCs cleared using Techstream
condition
or
Cable disconnected from negative battery terminal
Store
Malfunction detected (2nd trip)
condition
Current
No malfunctions in 40 driving cycles
DTC Clear
or
condition
Store
condition
One trip is confirmed with no abnormality after no malfunction is detected in 3

Permanent
consecutive driving cycles
DTC Clear
or
condition
After DTCs cleared using Techstream, malfunction not detected when universal
trip driving performed
ON Malfunction detected (2nd trip)
One trip is confirmed with no abnormality after no malfunction is detected in 3

MIL consecutive driving cycles
OFF
or
1. CHECK DTC
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(c) Turn the Techstream on.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.
(e) Check the DTC(s) and freeze frame data, and then write them down.
(f) Check the details of the DTC(s) .
2. CLEAR DTC (Pending and Current DTC)

(e) Clear the DTCs.
3. CLEAR PERMANENT DTC
HINT:
Even if the following procedure is not performed, permanent DTCs are cleared if no malfunction are
detected during 3 consecutive driving cycles.
(e) Check if permanent DTCs are stored.
HINT:
If permanent DTCs are not output, it is not necessary to continue this procedure.
(f) Clear DTCs.
(g) Perform the universal trip.
1. Idle the engine for 30 seconds or more.

2. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes or more.
HINT:
It is possible to complete the drive pattern even if the vehicle decelerates to less
than 40 km/h (25 mph) during the driving cycle provided that the vehicle is driven
at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes.
When accelerating through the gears, make sure the vehicle is driven so all gears
are used in order and no gears are skipped.
3. Allow 10 minutes or more to elapse from the time the engine is started.
(h) Turn the ignition switch off.
(i) Wait 15 seconds.
(j) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(k) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.
(l) Check that the permanent DTCs have been cleared.
HINT:
If the permanent DTCs have not been cleared, perform the universal trip again.
The permanent DTCs are cleared when the universal trip is completed.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O8L0MHX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: FAIL-

SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
1. FAIL-SAFE CHART
This function minimizes the loss of the ECT functions when any malfunction occurs in each sensor or
solenoid.
MALFUNCTION PART FUNCTION
During an input speed sensor malfunction, shift control is effected through the
DTC P0717:
output speed sensor signal SP2.
Input Speed Sensor
During an input speed sensor malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and 6th, AI-SHIFT
NT
*1 and flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
During an output speed sensor malfunction, shift control is effected through the
DTC P0722:
input speed sensor signal NT.
Output Speed
During an output speed sensor malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and 6th, AI-SHIFT
Sensor SP2
*1 and flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
DTC P0711, P0712,

P0713: During an ATF temperature sensor malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and 6th and
ATF Temperature flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
Sensor
The current to the failed solenoid valve is cut off and control is effected by
operating the other solenoid valves.
S1, S2, S3, S4 and
Shift control is effected depending on the failed solenoid as described in the table
SR
on the next page.
DTC P0776, P0961,

P0962, P0963,
P0965, P0966, During a solenoid valve SL1 or SL2 malfunction, up-shift to the 5th and 6th and
P0967: flex lock-up clutch control are prohibited.
SL1 and SL2
DTC P2757, P2758,

P2762, P2763, During a solenoid valve SLU malfunction, the current to the solenoid valve is
P2764: stopped. This stops lock-up control and flex lock-up control, fuel economy
Shift Solenoid Valve decreases.
SLU
DTC P2714, P2719,

During a solenoid valve SLT malfunction, the current to the solenoid valve is
P2720, P2721:
stopped. This stops line pressure optimal control, the shift shock increases.
However, shifting is effected through normal clutch pressure control.
SLT
*: AI (Artificial Intelligence) -SHIFT control
In addition to the switching of the shift pattern through the pattern select switch, the AI-SHIFT control
enables the ECM to estimate the road conditions and the driver's intention in order to automatically select
the optimal shift pattern. As a result, a comfortable ride has been realized.
(a) Fail-safe operation for electronically malfunctioning shift solenoid valve (S1, S2, S3, S4 and SR):
HINT:
Fail-safe operation in the event of an electric system malfunction.
Fail safe function:
If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits has an open or short failure, the ECM turns the other shift
solenoid "ON" and "OFF" in order to shift into the gear positions shown in the table below.
In case of a short circuit, the ECM stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid.
Even if staring the engine again in the fail-safe mode, the gear position remains in the same position.
Operating Condition of Shift Solenoid Valves
SHIFT LEVER POSITION OR SHIFT RANGE GEAR POSITION SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
S1 S2 S3 S4 SR SL1 SL2 SLU
P Park Off On On On On Off On Off
R* Reverse Off On On On On On On Off
N Neutral Off On On On On On On Off
1st Off On On Off On Off On Off
2nd On On On On On Off Off On
3rd On Off On Off On Off Off On

D, M6
4th* On Off Off Off On Off On On
5th* On Off Off On Off On Off On
6th* On On Off On Off On Off On
M5 3rd On Off On Off On Off Off On
5th* On Off Off On Off On Off On

M4
3rd On Off On Off On Off Off On
M3 2nd On On On On On Off Off Off
3rd* On Off On Off On Off Off Off
1st Off On On Off On Off On On

M2
2nd* On On On On On Off Off Off
M1 1st* Off On On Off On Off Off Off

HINT:
*: Engine braking occurs
(b) Fail-safe operation for mechanically malfunction:
HINT:
Fail-safe operation in the event of a mechanical system malfunction.
Fail safe function:
The ECM controls the gear position as shown in the table below when malfunctions occur.
Fail-safe chart for mechanical malfunction:
DTC CONDITION GEAR *1
- Normal 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Shift solenoid valve S1: 1st

P0751 2nd ↑ 3rd 3rd 3rd
Stuck OFF malfunction *2
Shift solenoid S3:

P0762 1st 2nd ↑ 3rd 3rd 3rd
Stuck ON malfunction
Shift solenoid valve S4, Shift solenoid valve SL2 or Valve body
P0766 (Brake control valve): 1st 2nd ↑ 3rd 3rd 3rd
Malfunction
Valve body (1-2 shift valve): 1st

P0781 2nd ↑ 3rd 3rd 3rd
Malfunction *2
Valve body (Sequence valve):

P0729 1st 2nd ↑ 4th 5th 5th
Malfunction
HINT:
*1: Actual gear shift (gear position) under fail-safe operation

*2: Under engine braking, downshifting to 1st or 2nd gear is prohibited.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W6Z0TVX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: HOW TO

PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
The TCM of this system is connected to the CAN and multiplex communication system. Therefore,
before starting troubleshooting, make sure to check that there is no trouble in the CAN and
multiplex communication systems.
*: Use Techstream.
NEXT
NEXT
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding.
NEXT
4. CONNECT TECHSTREAM TO DLC3*
NEXT
5. CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
(a) Refer to the DTC CHECK/CLEAR .
NEXT
6. VISUAL INSPECTION
NEXT
7. SETTING CHECK MODE DIAGNOSIS*
(a) Refer to the CHECK MODE PROCEDURE .
NEXT
8. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
(a) Refer to the ROAD TEST .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Symptom does not occur A
Symptom occurs B
B GO TO STEP 10
(a) Refer to the ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE .
NEXT
10. DTC CHECK*
(a) Refer to the DTC CHECK / CLEAR .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
B GO TO STEP 18
11. BASIC INSPECTION
(a) Refer to the PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH .
(b) Refer to the SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY .
NG GO TO STEP 21
OK
12. MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST
(a) Refer to the MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST .
NG GO TO STEP 17
OK
13. HYDRAULIC TEST
(a) Refer to the HYDRAULIC TEST .
NG GO TO STEP 17
OK
14. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST
(a) Refer to the MANUAL SHIFTING TEST .
NG GO TO STEP 16
OK
15. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE CHAPTER 1
(a) Refer to the PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .
NG GO TO STEP 19
OK
16. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE CHAPTER 2
(a) Refer to the PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .
NEXT
17. PART INSPECTION
NEXT GO TO STEP 21
18. DTC CHART
(a) Refer to the DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART .
NEXT
19. CIRCUIT INSPECTION
NEXT
NEXT
21. REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7B0MWX

HYDRAULIC TEST (2013 FR-S)
HYDRAULIC TEST
1. PERFORM HYDRAULIC TEST
(a) Measure the line pressure.
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) temperature: 60 to
90°C (140 to 194°F)
The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the
conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is performing the test.
Be careful to prevent SST hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.
This Check must be conducted after checking and adjusting engine.
Perform under condition that A/C is OFF.
When conducting stall test, do not continue more than 5 seconds.
(1) Warm up the ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid).
(2) Lift the vehicle up.
(3) Remove the test plug on the transmission case center right side and connect SST.
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271
(4) Lower the vehicle.
(5) Fully apply the parking brake and check the 4 wheels.
(6) Start the engine and check idling speed.
(7) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D position.
(8) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.
(9) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
engine speed reaches stall speed.
(10) In the same manner, do the test in R position.
Specified line pressure:
CONDITION D POSITION KPA (KGF / CM 2 , PSI) R POSITION KPA (KGF / CM 2 , PSI)
350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
(3.6 to 4.4 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to 62 psi) (7.7 to 9.7 kgf/cm 2 , 110 to 138 psi)
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
2
(12.5 to 14.0 kgf/cm , 174 to 200 psi) (14.4 to 16.6 kgf/cm 2 , 204 to 236 psi)
Evaluation:
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE
Shift solenoid valve SLT defective

If the measured values at all position are higher
Regulator valve defective
Shift solenoid valve SLT defective

If the measured values at all position are lower Regulator valve defective
Oil pump defective
D position circuit fluid leak

If pressure is low in the D position only
Clutch No.1 (C 1 ) defective
R position circuit fluid leak

If pressure is low in the R position only Clutch No.3 (C 3 ) defective
Brake No.4 (B 4 ) defective
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7F0KYX

INITIALIZATION (2013 FR-S)
INITIALIZATION
1. RESET MEMORY
NOTICE:
Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transmission assembly,
valve body, engine assembly or TCM.
The RESET MEMORY can be performed only with the Techstream.
HINT:
The TCM memorizes the condition that the ECT controls the automatic transmission assembly and
engine assembly according to those characteristics. Therefore, when the automatic transmission
assembly, valve body, transmission wire, engine assembly, or TCM has been replaced, it is necessary to
reset the memory so that the TCM can memorize the new information.
Reset procedure is as follows.
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
(d) Turn the Techstream main switch on.
(e) Enter the following menu: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / Reset Memory. Then, press "Next".
(f) Perform the reset memory procedure from the main menu.
CAUTION:
After performing the RESET MEMORY, be sure to perform the ROAD TEST described earlier.
HINT:
The TCM is learned by performing the ROAD TEST.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7C0Q5X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MANUAL

SHIFTING TEST (2013 FR-S)
MANUAL SHIFTING TEST

1. PERFORM MANUAL SHIFTING TEST
HINT:
With this test, it can be determined whether the trouble occurs in the electrical circuit or is a
mechanical problem in the transmission.
If any abnormalities are found in the following test, the problem is in the transmission itself.
(a) Disconnect the connector of the transmission wire.
(b) Drive with the transmission wire disconnected.
Shifting the shift lever to the D position to check whether the shifting condition changes the table
below.
SHIFT POSITION SHIFTING CONDITION
D No Shift (Not Change)
HINT:
When driving with the transmission wire disconnected, the gear position will be as follows:
When the shift lever is in the D position, the gear is held in the 4th position.
When the shift lever is in the R or the P position, the gear is also in the R or the P position
respectively.
(c) Connect the connector of the transmission wire.
(d) Clear the DTC .

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7A0NMX

MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS (2013 FR-S)
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS

1. PERFORM MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS
(a) Measure the stall speed.
The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transmission and engine by
measuring the stall speeds in the D position.
NOTICE:
Driving test should be done on a paved road (a nonskid road).
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) temperature 60 to
90°C (140 to 194°F).
Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds.
To ensure safety, do this test in a wide, clear level area which provides good traction.
The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One technician should observe the conditions of
wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.
Be sure to perform a road teat after inspecting and adjusting the engine.
(1) Check the 4 wheels.
(3) Fully apply the parking brake.
(4) Keep your left foot pressed firmly on the brake pedal.
(6) Shift into the D position. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
(7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time.
Stall speed:
2350 +- 250 rpm
Evaluation:
Engine power output may be insufficient

Stator one-way clutch not operating properly
(a) Stall engine speed is low
HINT:
in D position
If the value is less than the specified value by 600 rpm or more, the
torque converter could be faulty.
Line pressure is too low

Clutch No. 1 (C 1 ) slipping
(b) Stall engine speed is high
One-way clutch No. 3 (F 3 ) not operating properly
in D position
One-way clutch No .4 (F 4 ) not operating properly
Improper fluid level
(b) Measure the time lag.
(1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling, there will be a certain time lapse or lag
before the shock can be felt. This is used for checking the condition of the clutch, and brake.
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform a road teat after inspecting and adjusting the engine.
Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.
90°C (140 to 194°F).
Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.
Perform the test three times, and measure the time lags. Calculate the average value of the three
time lags.
(3) Fully apply the parking brake.
(4) Start and warm up the engine and check idle speed.
Idle speed:
approx. 700 rpm (In N position and A/C OFF)
(5) Shift the lever from N to D position. Using a stop watch, measure the time from when the lever
is shifted until the shock is felt.
Time lag:
N → D less than 1.2 seconds
(6) In the same way, measure the time lag for N → R.
Time lag:
N → R less than 1.5 seconds
Evaluation (If N → D or N → R time lag is longer than the specified):

Clutch No.1 (C 1 ) worn
N → D time lag is longer

Clutch No. 3 (C 3 ) worn
N → R time lag is longer
Brake No. 4 (B 4 ) worn
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7K0MRX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: MONITOR

DRIVE PATTERN (2013 FR-S)
MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN

1. MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN FOR ECT TEST
(a) Perform this drive pattern as one method to simulate the detection conditions of the ECT
malfunctions. (The DTCs may not be detected due the actual driving conditions. And some codes
may not be detected through this drive pattern.)
HINT:
Preparation for driving
Warm up the engine sufficiently. (Engine coolant temperature is 60°C (140°F) or higher)
Notice in driving
Drive the vehicle through all gears.
Stop → 1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th → 5th → 6th → 6th (lock-up ON).
Perform engine brake test in the M position.
While driving in the 6(M) position and 6th gear lock-up, shift into the "-" position and down-
shift from 6th to 5th, 5th to 4th, 4th to 3rd, 3rd to 2nd, 2nd to 1st.
Check that the engine brake performs properly whenever down-shift takes place.
Repeat the above driving pattern three times or more.
NOTICE:
The monitor status can be checked using Techstream. When using Techstream, monitor status can
be found in the "Powertrain / ECT / Data List".
In the event that the drive pattern must be interrupted (possibly due to traffic conditions or other
factors), the drive pattern can be resumed and, in most cases, the monitor can be completed.
Perform this drive pattern on a level road as much as possible and strictly observe the posted speed
limits and traffic laws while driving.
HINT:
*1: Drive at such a speed in the uppermost gear, to engage lock-up. The vehicle can be driven at a
speed lower than that in the above diagram under the lock-up condition.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003Q3G03PX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: P062F:

Internal Control Module EEPROM Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC P062F Internal Control Module EEPROM Error
DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is turned from off to ON, the TCM calculates the integrated values within the
TCM, and if these do not match the values stored within the TCM, the DTC is stored.
1. DIAGNOSIS CONDITION
3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

2. TCM internal error
P062F TCM
3. -
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The TCM monitors its internal operation. If the internal operation is malfunctioning, the TCM illuminates
the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P062F: Non Volatile Memory (EEPROM)
Required sensors/Components TCM
Frequency of operation Once per driving cycle
Duration 1 time
MIL operation Immediately
Sequence of operation None
TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present None
Ignition switch changed from OFF to ON Yes
TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

Calculated sum value of EEPROM Not (Sum value stored in EEPROM)
NOTICE:
Perform the universal trip to clear permanent DTCs .

There is a possibility that the DTC P062F is issued from the ECUs of the TCM. Use Techstream to
conduct a health check to confirm which ECU the DTC is issued from and then inspect the related
system.
PROCEDURE
1. REPLACE TCM
(a) Replace the TCM .
NEXT PERFORM THE RESET MEMORY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XP108MX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: P160A:

Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC P160A Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error
DESCRIPTION
This compares values calculated by the TCM with the data recorded after calculations when the ignition
switch is turned to ON, and if these do not match, then the DTC is stored, and the power is cut to all
solenoids (fixed to 4th).

NO. AREA
3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

2. TCM internal malfunction.
When the information recorded inside the TCM differs from that in the
P160A TCM
same trip while the ignition switch is ON.
3. -
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P160A: Random Access Memory (RAM)
Frequency of operation Once per driving cycle
Duration 1 time

Ignition switch OFF to ON

The value that is written to a RAM is different from the value that is read. Yes
NOTICE:

There is a possibility that the DTC P062F is issued from the ECUs of the TCM. Use Techstream to
conduct a health check to confirm which ECU the DTC is issued from and then inspect the related
system.
PROCEDURE
1. REPLACE TCM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8E08YX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: P0601:

Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0601 Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum Error
DESCRIPTION
This compares values calculated by the TCM with the data stored within the TCM when the ignition switch
is turned to ON, and if these do not match 2 times in series, then prohibits learning. If this continues
further, power is cut to all solenoids (fixed to 4th).
3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

2. TCM internal malfunction
P0601 TCM
3. -
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0601: Flash ROM
Frequency of operation Turning ignition switch ON or off, or clearing DTC requested
Duration 2 times

One of the following conditions is met: Condition (A) or (B)
Condition (A)
Ignition switch changed from OFF to ON Yes

Condition (B)
Clear DTC request from diagnostic tool was received Yes

Calculated sum data of Flash ROM Not (Check sum data of Flash ROM)
NOTICE:

There is a possibility that the DTC P062F is issued from the ECUs of the ECM and TCM. Use
Techstream to conduct a health check to confirm which ECU the DTC is issued from and then
inspect the related system.
PROCEDURE
1. REPLACE TCM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W840V6X

P0707,P0708: Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0707 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Low
DTC P0708 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
A signal from the park/neutral position switch assembly input into the TCM detects the shift position. The
engine can only be started when the shift lever is in P or N.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. The output speed sensor SP2 is normal, not learning Open or short in
control prohibited status, and the vehicle speed is 30 park/neutral
km/h or more position switch
P0707 Not learning control prohibited status circuit
2. All contacts for shift position P, R, N, and D are off Park/neutral
3. Continues for 30 sec. position switch
4. 2-trip detection logic TCM
Open or short in
1. Not learning control prohibited status park/neutral
2. 2 or more shift positions are detected at the same position switch
P0708 time circuit
3. Continues for 10 sec. Park/neutral
4. 1-trip detection logic position switch
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs indicate a problem with the park/neutral position switch and the wire harness in the
park/neutral position switch circuit.
The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
For security, the park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position so that engine can be started
only when the shift lever is in the P or N position.
The park/neutral position switch sends a signal to the TCM according to the shift position (P, R, N, D, or
M). The TCM determines that there is a problem with the switch or related parts if it receives more than 1
position signal simultaneously. The TCM will turn on the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0707: Range switch (Open/GND Short)
Related DTCs
P0708: Range switch (Battery Short)
Required sensors/Components Park/neutral position switch
Frequency of operation Continuous
P0707: 2 sec. x 15 times

Duration
P0707: 2 driving cycles

MIL operation
P0708: Immediately

Battery voltage 10.2 V or more
Above condition satisfied for 2 sec. or more
Fail-safe mode (Solenoids power supply is shut down.) Not active
Vehicle speed sensor (P0722) No failure

The number of range switch signal input 0
Vehicle speed 18.6 mph or more
The number of range switch signal input 2 or more
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List.
ITEM MEASUREMENT NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

ITEM/ CONDITION
RANGE
(DISPLAY)
Shift lever
Shift SW PNP switch position is; When shift lever position displayed on the Techstream differs
Status (R status/ R: ON from actual position, adjustment of PNP switch or shift cable
Range) ON or OFF Except R: may be incorrect
OFF
Shift lever
Shift SW PNP switch position is;
Status (P status/ P: ON ↑
Range) ON or OFF Except P:
OFF
Shift lever
Shift SW PNP switch position is;
Status (N status/ N: ON ↑
Range) ON or OFF Except N:
OFF
Shift lever
position is;
Shift SW PNP switch
D and M:
Status (D status/ ↑
ON
Range) ON or OFF
Except D
and M: OFF
Shift lever
position is;
Sports Sport mode
M, "+" and
Mode select switch
"-": ON -
Selection status/
Except M,
SW ON or OFF
"+" and "-
": OFF
NOTICE:
Inspect the fuses circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the A19 TCM connector.
(b) Measure resistance according to the value(s) in the table below when the shift lever is
moved to each position.
TESTER CONNECTION SHIFT POSITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
P Below 1 Ω
A19-3(P) - L2-2(RB)
Except P 10 kΩ or higher
R Below 1 Ω
A19-10(R) - L2-2(RB)
Except R 10 kΩ or higher
N Below 1 Ω
A19-21(N) - L2-2(RB)
Except N 10 kΩ or higher
D Below 1 Ω
A19-9(D) - L2-2(RB)
Except D 10 kΩ or higher
(c) Connect the A19 TCM connector.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

NG (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH - TCM)
OK
2. CHECK PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
(a) Disconnect the L2 park/neutral position switch connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch on.
Standard voltage:
L2-2(RB) - Body ground Ignition Switch ON 11 to 14 V
(d) Connect the L2 park/neutral position switch connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH - TCM)

(b) Disconnect the L2 park/neutral position switch connector.
A19-3(P) - L2-6(PL) Always Below 1 Ω
A19-10(R) - L2-1(RL) Always Below 1 Ω
A19-21(N) - L2-9(NL) Always Below 1 Ω
A19-9(D) - L2-7(DL) Always Below 1 Ω
A19-3(P) - Body ground() Always 10 kΩ or higher
A19-10(R) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A19-21(N) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A19-9(D) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
Standard voltage:
A19-3(P) - Body ground Ignition Switch ON Below 1 V
A19-10(R) - Body ground Ignition Switch ON Below 1 V
A19-21(N) - Body ground Ignition Switch ON Below 1 V
A19-9(D) - Body ground Ignition Switch ON Below 1 V
(e) Connect the TCM connector.
(f) Connect the L2 park/neutral position switch connector.

NG CONNECTOR
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION

OK SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7Z0K0X

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Performance (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Performance
DESCRIPTION
The oil temperature sensor within the valve body detects the oil temperature within the transmission
hydraulic control circuit, and inputs into the TCM a signal corresponding to the oil temperature.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. Detects that the park/neutral position switch assembly is

normal, the shift position sensor is in D, the ATF temperature
with ignition switch ON is less than 20°C (68°F) , the present
ATF temperature is less than 20°C (68°F) , and the vehicle
speed is 40 km/h or more
2. If any of the following conditions are met: Transmission
wire (ATF
a. While diagnostic conditions are satisfied, the
temperature
P0711 variation in oil temperature sensor input voltage is
sensor)
0.05V or less after the ignition switch is turned to
Harness and
on
connector
b. While diagnostic conditions are satisfied, the
variation in oil temperature sensor input voltage is
0.05V or less
3. Continues for 600 sec.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates that there is a problem with output from the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
temperature sensor and that the sensor itself is defective. The ATF temperature sensor converts the ATF
temperature to an electrical resistance value. Based on the resistance, the TCM determines the ATF
temperature and detects an opens or shorts in the ATF temperature circuit or a fault of the ATF
temperature sensor.
After running the vehicle for a certain period, the ATF temperature should increase. If the ATF
temperature is below 20°C (68°F) after running the vehicle for a certain period, the TCM interprets this as
a fault, and turns on the MIL.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0711: ATF Temperature Sensor (Stuck)
Required sensors/Components ATF temperature sensor
Duration 10 min.
MIL operation 2 driving cycles

ALL:
Engine speed 400 rpm or more
CAN BUS OFF (U0073) No failure
ECM NO ID (U0100) No failure
0.049 V or more and 4.932 V or

ATF temperature sensor output voltage
less
Range switch (P0707,P0708) No failure
D
Range position (If range position changes to P, R
or N, timer is held.)
Transmission oil temperature 20°C (68°F) or less
Vehicle speed
(If the vehicle speed condition is once satisfied, it is effective while 24.9 mph or more
satisfying the malfunction criteria.)

Absolute change of output voltage 0.049 V or less
WIRING DIAGRAM
1. DATA LIST
NOTICE:

In the table below, the value listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values.
HINT:
ITEM MEASUREMENT ITEM/ NORMAL CONDITION

RANGE (DISPLAY)
ATF Temp. Sensor After Stall Test;

A/T Oil Temperature Value/ Approx. 80°C (176°F)
1 min.: -40°C (-40°F) Equal to ambient temperature when cold
max.: 215°C (419°F) soak
HINT:
When DTC P0712 is output and Techstream output is -40°C (-40°F), there is a short circuit.
When DTC P0713 is output and Techstream output is 171°C (340°F), there is an open circuit.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYED MALFUNCTION
171°C (340°F) Open circuit
-40°C (-40°F) or more Short circuit
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0711)
(b) Turn the ignition switch on position and push the Techstream main switch ON.
(c) When you use Techstream:
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Trouble Codes.
(d) Read the DTCs using the Techstream.

Result:
DISPLAY (DTC OUTPUT) PROCEED TO
Only "P0711" is output A
"P0711" and other DTCs B
HINT:
If any other codes besides "P0711" are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
OK:
Automatic transmission fluid level is correct.
ADD FLUID
NG
OK REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W850LRX

P0712,P0713: Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit Low Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit Low Input
DTC P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The oil temperature sensor within the valve body detects the oil temperature within the transmission
hydraulic control circuit, and inputs into the TCM a signal corresponding to the oil temperature.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. Not learning control prohibited status Transmission wire

2. The oil temperature sensor input voltage is 0.05 V (ATF temperature
or less sensor)
P0712
3. Detects a malfunction that continues for 10 seconds Harness and
6 times consecutively connector
1. Park/neutral position switch assembly is normal,

and shift lever is in D or R for 1 min. or more Transmission wire
Not learning control prohibited status (ATF temperature
2. The oil temperature sensor input voltage is 4.94 V sensor)
P0713
or more Harness and
3. Detects a malfunction that continues for 1 second connector
12 times consecutively TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs indicate an open or short in the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) temperature sensor circuit.
The automatic transmission fluid (ATF) temperature sensor converts ATF temperature to an electrical
resistance value. Based on the resistance, the TCM determines the ATF temperature, and the TCM detects
an open or short in the ATF temperature circuit. If the resistance value of the ATF temperature is less than
0.049 V or more than 4.932 V , the TCM interprets this as a fault in the ATF sensor or wiring. The TCM will
turn on the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0712: ATF Temperature Sensor (GND Short)
Related DTCs
P0713: ATF Temperature Sensor (Battery Short/Open)
Required sensors/Components ATF temperature sensor

Duration

P0712: ATF temperature sensor (GND Short)
P0713: ATF temperature sensor (Battery Short/Open)

The following conditions are satisfied.
After ignition switch ON, above condition satisfied for 1 min. or more
Range position D or R

P0712: Range check (Low resistance)
Output voltage 0.049 V or less
P0713: Range check (High resistance)
Output voltage 4.932 V or more
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:

RANGE (DISPLAY)
ATF Temp. Sensor After Stall Test;

A/T Oil Temperature Value/ Approx. 80°C (176°F)
1 min.: -40°C (-40°F) Equal to ambient temperature when cold
max.: 215°C (419°F) soak
HINT:
When DTC P0712 is output and Techstream output is -40°C (-40°F) or more, there is a short circuit.
When DTC P0713 is output and Techstream output is 171°C (340°F), there is an open circuit.
171°C (340°F) Open circuit
-40°C (-40°F) or more Short circuit
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
A18-22(OIL) - A18-23(EOIL) Always 79 Ω to 156 kΩ

NG (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM)
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM)
(b) Disconnect the L4 transmission wire connector.
Standard voltage:
L4-8(EOIL) - Body ground Ignition switch on Below 1 V
L4-15(OIL) - Body ground Ignition switch on Below 1 V
A18-22(OIL) - L4-15(OIL) Always Below 1 Ω
A18-23(EOIL) - L4-8(EOIL) Always Below 1 Ω
L4-8(EOIL) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
L4-15(OIL) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(e) Connect the A18 TCM connector.
(f) Connect the L4 transmission wire connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7Y08RX

Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0717 Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal
DESCRIPTION
The input speed sensor NT inputs signal into the TCM as a signal of the input axis revolutions.
The TCM carries out shift timing control based upon signals from the input speed sensor NT and the output
speed sensor SP2.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. The shift solenoid valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT),
output speed sensor SP2 and shift position sensor are normal.
While the vehicle is driven with shift lever in D, when the input
Input
speed sensor NT revolutions calculated from the shift solenoid
speed
valve SP2 are 550 rpm or more. (2.5 seconds or more have
sensor
elapsed after moving the shift lever to D. However, if there is a
NT
P0717 malfunction with the oil temperature sensor, or the oil
TCM
temperature is 20°C (68°F) or less, then 10 seconds or more
Harness
after moving the shift lever to D)
and
2. While the shift solenoid valve SP2 outputs 12 pulses, the input
connector
speed sensor NT does not detect even 1 pulse.
3. Detected 500 times consecutively.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates that pulse is not output from the input speed sensor NT or is output only little. The
input speed sensor NT terminal of the TCM detects the revolving signal from input speed sensor NT (input
RPM). The TCM outputs a gearshift signal comparing the input speed sensor NT with the output speed
sensor SP2.
While the vehicle is operating in the shift position of D, the output shaft revolution is 550rpm or more * ,
the TCM detects the trouble, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
*: The engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0717: Turbine Shaft Speed Sensor
Required sensors/Components Speed sensor (NT)

Duration 500 count

Fail-safe mode (Solenoids power

Not active
supply is shut down.)
Range position D
Turbine shaft speed calculated from

550 rpm or more
vehicle speed.
Transmission is not in the shift control. Yes
Transmission is not in the gear shift

Yes
control.
Transmission is not in the diagnostic

Yes
service control.
Linear solenoid 1 (P0961,P0962,P0963) No failure
Line pressure linear solenoid

No failure
(P2720,P2721,P2719)
Shift solenoid 1 (P0973,P0974) No failure
SR solenoid (P0985,P0986) No failure
Engine torque signal No failure
10 sec. or more
(at ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F) or less, or ATF temperature
sensor is failure )
Elapsed time after selecting D range.
2.5 sec. or more
(at ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F) or more, and ATF
temperature sensor is no failure )
Turbine shaft speed sensor pulse while detecting vehicle speed sensor signal 12 pulse. 0 pulse
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
ITEM MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION
ITEM/
RANGE
(DISPLAY)
HINT:
Input shaft
speed/ Lock-up is
SPD
Min.: 0 rpm ON (after warming up engine): Input turbine speed (NT) is equal to
(NT)
Max.: 12,750 engine speed
rpm OFF (idling with shift lever on N): Input turbine speed (NT) is nearly
equal to engine speed
HINT:
SPD (NT) is always 0 while driving:
Open or short in the sensor or circuit.

SPD (NT) is always more than 0 and less than 300 rpm while driving the vehicle at 50 km/h (31
mph) or more:
Sensor trouble, improper installation, or intermittent connection trouble of the circuit.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
(a) Check the input speed sensor NT installation.

OK:
The installation bolt is tightened properly and there is no
clearance between the sensor and transmission case.
SECURELY INSTALL SPEED SENSOR OR

NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR
OK
2. INSPECT INPUT SPEED SENSOR NT

(a) Disconnect the L5 speed sensor connector.
(b) Perform inspection of the input speed sensor NT.
(c) Connect the L5 speed sensor connector.
NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR (NT)
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPEED SENSOR - TCM)
(b) Disconnect the L5 speed sensor connector.
L5-1(NT+) - A19-17(NT+) Always Below 1 Ω
L5-2(NT-) - A19-28(NT-) Always Below 1 Ω
L5-1(NT+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
L5-2(NT-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(d) Connect the A19 TCM connector.
(e) Connect the L5 speed sensor connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
PERFORM THE RESET MEMORY

NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W880OGX

Output Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0722 Output Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal
DESCRIPTION
The output speed sensor SP2 inputs signal into the TCM as a signal of the output axis revolutions.
The TCM carries out shift timing control based upon signals from the output speed sensor SP2 and the
input speed sensor NT.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Open or
1. The shift solenoid valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT),
short in
input speed sensor NT and shift position sensor are normal
output
With the shift lever is in D, driving in 1st gear 6 km/h or more,
speed
in 2nd gear 9 km/h or more, in 3rd gear 13 km/h or more, in 4th
sensor
gear 18 km/h or more, in 5th gear 25 km/h or more, and in 6th
SP2
gear, 30 km/h or more. (2.5 seconds or more have elapsed
circuit
after moving the shift lever to D. However, if there is a
P0722 Output
malfunction with the oil temperature sensor, or the oil
speed
temperature is 20°C (68°F) or less, then 10 seconds or more
sensor
after moving the shift lever to D)
SP2
2. While the input speed sensor NT outputs 12 pulses, the output
TCM
speed sensor SP2 does not detect even 1 pulse.
Harness
3. Detected 500 times consecutively.
and
connector
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates that pulse is not output from the input speed sensor NT or is output only little. The
input speed sensor NT terminal of the TCM detects the revolving signal from input speed sensor NT. The
TCM outputs a gearshift signal comparing the input speed sensor NT with the output speed sensor SP2.
While the vehicle is operating in the shift position of D, the output shaft revolution is 300 rpm or more * ,
the TCM detects the trouble, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
*: The engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0722: Vehicle Speed Sensor
Required sensors/Components Speed sensor (SP2)
Duration 500 count

Fail-safe mode (Solenoids power supply is

Not active
shut down.)
Turbine shaft speed sensor (P0717) No failure
Transmission output speed calculated from

300 rpm or more
turbine shaft speed.
Range position D
Transmission is not in the shift control. No
Transmission is not in the gear shift

No
control.
Transmission is not in the diagnostic

No
service control.
Line pressure linear solenoid

No failure
(P2719,P2720,P2721)
10 sec. or more
(at ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F) or less, or ATF
temperature sensor is failure )
Elapsed time after selecting D range.
2.5 sec. or more
(at ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F) or more, and ATF
temperature sensor is no failure )
Vehicle speed sensor pulse while detecting turbine shaft speed sensor signal 12 pulse. 0 pulse
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
(b) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
RANGE (DISPLAY)
Output shaft speed/ HINT:

SPD Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph)
(SP2) Max.: 255 km/h (158 Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph) (output shaft speed is equal to
mph) vehicle speed)
HINT:
SPD (SP2) is always 0 while driving:
Open or short in the sensor or circuit.

SPD (SP2) is always more than 0 and less than 300 rpm while driving the vehicle at 50 km/h (31
mph) or more:
Sensor trouble, improper installation, or intermittent connection trouble of the circuit.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
(a) Check the output speed sensor SP2 installation.

OK:
The installation bolt is tightened properly and there is no
clearance between the sensor and transmission case.
SECURELY INSTALL SPEED SENSOR OR

NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR
OK
2. INSPECT OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SP2
(a) Disconnect the speed sensor connector.
(b) Perform inspection of the output speed sensor SP2 .
(c) Connect the speed sensor connector.
REPLACE OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SP2

NG
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SP2 - TCM)
(b) Disconnect the L3 output speed sensor SP2 connector.
L3-1(SP2+) - A19-18(SP2+) Always Below 1 Ω
L3-2(SP2-) - A19-7(SP2-) Always Below 1 Ω
A19-18(SP2+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A19-7(SP2-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(e) Connect the L3 output speed sensor SP2 connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. REPLACE TCM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8I05FX

Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The TCM uses signals from the output speed sensor SP2 and input speed sensor NT to detect the actual
gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th gear). Then the TCM compares the actual gear with the shift
schedule in the TCM memory to detect mechanical problems of the shift solenoid valves, valve body or
automatic transmission (clutch, brake or gear, etc.).

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. While driving with the shift lever in D, the ATF temperature

20°C (68°F) or more, and coolant temperature 40°C (104°F)
or more. (However, abnormalities with the shift solenoid
valve S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor
NT, output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch,
CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant temperature sensor, Transmission
air flow sensor, electronically control throttle, and accelerator valve body
pedal sensor are not detected) assy
P0729
2. If any of the following conditions are met: Shift
solenoid
a. When the TCM commands shifting to 5th, the
valve SLT
actual gear position is also switched to 5th.
b. When the TCM commands 6th gear, the actual
position is switched to 4th.
3. -
HINT:
Gear positions in the event of a solenoid valve mechanical problem:
TCM command gearshift 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Actual gear position under malfunction ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 4th
Gear position during fail-safe operation:
If any malfunction is detected, the TCM changes into the fail-safe mode to shift into the gear
positions as shown in the table below.
Gear position under normal conditions 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Actual gear position under fail-safe mode ↑ ↑ ↑ 4th 5th 5th
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The TCM commands gear shifts by turning the shift solenoid valves "ON/OFF" and switching oil pressure to
the valves in the valve body.
The DTC indicates that the sequence valve is locked in the direction the spring stretches and that shifting
to the 6th gear is impossible.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0729: 6th Error
Required sensors/Components Sequence valve
Duration 1 count

The following items are common to all conditions below.
Turbine shaft speed sensor(P0717) No failure
Vehicle speed sensor(P0722) No failure
Line pressure linear solenoid (P2720, P2721,P2719) No failure
ATF temperature sensor (P0711,P0712,P0713) No failure
CAN BUS OFF(U0073) No failure
ECM NO ID(U0100) No failure
Engine coolant temperature sensor No failure

Throttle position sensor No failure
Accelerator pedal position sensor No failure
Range position D
Elapsed time after selecting D range 4 sec. or more
Engine coolant temperature 40°C(104°F) or more
ATF temperature 20°C(68°F) or more

Compare target gear instructed from TCM and gear ratio calculated from
turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed.
Both of the following condition are met: Condition (A) and (B)
Condition (A)
Shift position D position
Target gear position. 5th
Gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed. 5th
Condition (B)
Both of the following condition are met: Condition (C) and (D)
Condition (C)
Shift position M position
Condition (D)
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
(c) Read the DTCs using the Techstream .

Result:
Only "P0729 and P2714" are output A
"P0729 and P0714" and other DTCs B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. CHECK THE GEAR POSITION
(a) Drive the vehicle with shift lever in the M.
(b) Check the shift position.
TCM gearshift 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Actual gear position under malfunction ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 4th
HINT:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
OK:
Gear position changes.
REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
3. HYDRAULIC TEST
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
(a) Warm up the ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid).
(b) Lift the vehicle up.
(c) Remove the test plug on the transmission case center right side and connect SST.
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271
(d) Lower the vehicle.
(e) Fully apply the parking brake and check the 4 wheels.
(f) Start the engine and check idling speed.

(g) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal and shift into D position.
(h) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.
(i) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. Quickly read the highest line pressure when
(j) In the same manner, do the test in R position.

350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
2
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
OK
4. CLEAR THE DTC AND RUNNING TEST
(a) Clear the DTC, and check DTC again after conducting the "MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN FOR
ECT TEST" .
OK:
No DTC code

NG ASSEMBLY
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8J0ADX

P0751,P0752: Shift Solenoid "A" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0751 Shift Solenoid "A" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)
DTC P0752 Shift Solenoid "A" Stuck ON (S1 Solenoid)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The TCM carries out detection of the gear position based upon signals from the input speed sensor NT and
the output speed sensor SP2. Subsequently, if the gear position as detected by the TCM is different to the
commanded gear position, then a related solenoid valve, valve body, or automatic transmission
mechanical problem is detected.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

NT, output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch, Shift
CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant temperature sensor, solenoid
air flow sensor, electronically control throttle, and accelerator valve S1
pedal sensor are not detected) Harness or
P0751
2. The following conditions are met: connector
Transmission
wire
actual gear position is also switched to 5th.
TCM
b. When the TCM commands shifting to 6th gear, the
engine overruns (in neutral)
3. -

pedal sensor are not detected) Harness or
P0752 2. The following conditions are met: connector
a. - During driving with the shaft lever in D, when Transmission
the TCM commands shifting to 1st gear, the actual wire
gear position is shifted to 2nd. TCM
b. - When the TCM commands shifting to 5th gear,
the actual gear position is also shifted to 5th
3. -
HINT:
*1: Actual gear position under S1 stuck ON malfunction 2nd 2nd ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
*2: Actual gear position under S1 stuck OFF malfunction 1st 2nd ↑ ↑ ↑ N*
N*: Neutral
*1: Actual gear position under fail safe mode when S1 stuck ON
2nd 2nd ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
malfunction
*2: Actual gear position under fail safe mode when S1 stuck OFF 1st 2nd
↑ 3rd 3rd 3rd
malfunction *3 *3
*3: Under engine braking downshifting to 1st or 2nd gear is prohibited.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates "stuck ON malfunction" or "stuck OFF malfunction" of the shift solenoid valve S1.
The TCM commands gear shifts by turning the shift solenoid valves "ON/OFF". When the gear position
commanded by the TCM and the actual gear position are not the same, the TCM illuminates the MIL and
stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0751: Shift Solenoid 1 (OFF Stuck)
Related DTCs
P0752: Shift Solenoid 1 (ON Stuck)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve S1
Duration 1 count

Line pressure linear solenoid (P2720,P2721,P2719) No failure
Range position D
Engine coolant temperature 40°C (104°F) or more
ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) or more

P0751: Shift solenoid 1 (OFF Stuck)
Compare target gear instructed from TCM and gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed. Neutral
Condition (C)
Condition (D)
P0752: Shift solenoid 1 (ON Stuck)
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Target gear position. 1st
Gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed. 2nd
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Condition (D)

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. CHECK THE SHIFT POSITION

HINT:
The shift solenoid valve S1 is turned on/off normally when the shift lever is in the D position:
Shift solenoid valve S1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK OTHER DTCS OUTPUT

Result:
"P0751 and P2714" or "P0752 and P0767" are output A
"P0751 and P2714" or "P0752 and P0767" and other DTCs B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. HYDRAULIC TEST
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271

350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
2
OK
3. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve S1 .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve S1 .
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1

OK
4. INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Perform inspection of the transmission valve body assembly .

OK:
There are no foreign objects on each valve.

NG ASSEMBLY
REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

OK ASSEMBLY
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W800A5X

P0756,P0757: Shift Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S2) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0756 Shift Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)
DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid "B" Stuck ON (S2 Solenoid)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

pedal sensor are not detected) Transmission
P0756
2. The following conditions are met: wire
Harness and
a. When the TCM commands shifting to 1st, the
connector
actual gear position is shifted to 3rd.
TCM
b. When the TCM commands shifting to 6th, the
actual gear position is shifted to 5th.
3. -

pedal sensor are not detected) Transmission
P0757
2. The following conditions are met: wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
3. -
HINT:
*1: Actual gear position under S2 stuck ON malfunction ↑ ↑ 2nd ↑ 6th ↑
*2: Actual gear position under S2 stuck OFF malfunction 3rd 3rd 3rd ↑ 5th 5th
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
commanded by the TCM and the actual gear position are not the same, the TCM illuminates the MIL and
stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
Duration 1 count


ECM Communication Counter (U0401) No failure
Range position D

vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed. 3rd
Condition (B)
Condition (C)

Condition (D)
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Condition (D)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:

HINT:
Shift solenoid valve S2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
PROCEDURE
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON and push the Techstream main switch ON.

Result:
Only "P0756 and P2714" or "P0757" is output A
"P0756 and P2714" or "P0757" and other DTCs B

B GO TO DTC CHART
2. HYDRAULIC TEST
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
90°C (140 to 194°F)

SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271

350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
OK
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve S2.
OK

OK:
REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE

NG BODY ASSEMBLY
REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC

OK TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8105FX

P0761,P0762,P0781: Shift Solenoid "C" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S3) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0761 Shift Solenoid "C" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S3)
DTC P0762 Shift Solenoid "C" Stuck ON (S3 Solenoid)
DTC P0781 1-2 Shift (1-2 Shift Valve)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor
NT, output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch,
CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant temperature sensor,
air flow sensor, electronically control throttle, and accelerator
pedal sensor are not detected)
2. If any of the following conditions are met: Shift
a. The following conditions are all met: solenoid
valve S3
i. When the TCM commands shifting to
remains
1st, the actual gear position is also
open
P0761 switched to 3rd.
Transmission
ii. When the TCM commands shifting to
wire
6th, the actual gear position is also
Harness and
switched to 6th.
connector
b. The following conditions are all met: TCM
i. When the TCM commands shifting to
2nd, the actual gear position is shifted
to 6th.
ii. When the TCM commands shifting to
3rd, the actual gear position is shifted
to 4th.
3. -

valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor Shift
NT, output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch, solenoid
CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant temperature sensor, valve S3
air flow sensor, electronically control throttle, and accelerator remains
pedal sensor are not detected) open
P0762
2. The following conditions are met: Transmission
wire
Harness and
actual gear position is also switched to 3rd.
connector
TCM
actual gear position is shifted to N.
3. -

valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor Shift
NT, output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch, solenoid
CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant temperature sensor, valve S3
air flow sensor, electronically control throttle, and accelerator remains
pedal sensor are not detected) open
P0781
wire
Harness and
actual gear position is also switched to 3rd.
connector
TCM
actual gear position is shifted to N.
3. -
HINT:
*1: Actual gear position under S3 stuck ON malfunction ↑ ↑ ↑ 3rd N* N*
*2: Actual gear position under S3 stuck OFF malfunction 3rd 6th 4th 4th 5th 6th
N*: Neutral
*1: Actual gear position under fail safe mode when S3 stuck ON
↑ ↑ ↑ 3rd 3rd 3rd
malfunction
*2: Actual gear position under fail safe mode when S3 stuck OFF
3rd 6th 4th 4th 5th 6th
malfunction
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
commanded by the TCM and the actual gear position are not same, the TCM illuminates the MIL and stores
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0762: Shift solenoid 3 (ON Stuck)
P0781: 1-2 Shift Valve (Shrinking of Spring)
Duration 1 count


Range position D

vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Target gear position. 2nd
Condition (D)
Target gear position. 3rd
Both of the following condition are met: Condition (E) and (F)
Condition (E)
Target gear position. 2nd
Condition (F)
Target gear position. 3rd
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Condition (D)
P0781: 1-2 Shift Valve (Shrinking of Spring)
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Condition (D)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:

HINT:
Shift solenoid valve S3 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PROCEDURE

Result:
Only "P0761" or "P0762, P0781 and P2714" are output A
"P0761" or "P0762, P0781 and P2714" and other DTCs B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. HYDRAULIC TEST
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271


350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
2
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
OK
OK

OK:

NG BODY ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8209XX

P0766,P0767,P0776: Shift Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S4) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0766 Shift Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
DTC P0767 Shift Solenoid "D" Stuck ON (S4 Solenoid)
DTC P0776 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
DESCRIPTION

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

20°C (68 °F) or more, and coolant temperature 40°C (104°F)
or more. (However, abnormalities with the shift solenoid Shift
valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor solenoid
NT, output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch, valve S4
CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant temperature sensor, Shift
air flow sensor, electronically control throttle, and accelerator solenoid
P0766 valve SL2
a. When the TCM commands shifting to 5th, the wire
actual gear position is switched to 4th. Harness and
b. When the TCM commands shifting to 6th, the connector
actual gear position is shifted to 4th. TCM
3. -

P0767 valve SL2
a. When the TCM commands shifting to 1st, the wire
actual gear position is switched to 2nd. Harness and
actual gear position is also shifted to 5th. TCM
3. -

P0776 valve SL2
a. When the TCM commands shifting to 5th, the wire
actual gear position is switched to 4th. Harness and
actual gear position is shifted to 4th. TCM
3. -
HINT:
*: Actual gear position under malfunction 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 4th 4th
Gear positions in the event of a shift solenoid valve S4 ON stuck with M position:
*: Actual gear position under malfunction 2nd 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
*: Actual gear position under fail-safe mode 1st 2nd 3rd 3rd 3rd 3rd
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates "stuck OFF malfunction" of the shift solenoid valve S4, "stuck ON malfunction" of the
shift solenoid valve SL2, or brake control valve malfunction. The TCM commands gear shifts by turning the
shift solenoid valves "ON/OFF". When the gear position commanded by the TCM and the actual gear
position are not same, the TCM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0767: Shift Solenoid 4 (ON Stuck)
P0776: Linear Solenoid 2 (ON Stuck)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve S4, Shift solenoid valve SL2
Duration 1 count

Range position D


vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Condition (D)
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
P0776: Linear Solenoid 2 (ON Stuck)
vehicle speed.
Condition (A)
Condition (B)
Condition (C)
Condition (D)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
The shift solenoid valve S4 and SL2 are turned on/off normally when the shift lever is in the D
position:
Shift solenoid valve S4 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
Shift solenoid valve SL2 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
PROCEDURE

Result:
Only "P0766, P0776 and P2714" or "P0752 and P0767" is output A
"P0766, P0776 and P2714" or "P0752 and P0767" and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. HYDRAULIC TEST
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271

350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
2
OK

OK
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2
OK
(a) Check the transmission valve body assembly .

OK:

NG BODY ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T8P0ZSX

TCM Power Input Signal Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0882 TCM Power Input Signal Low
DESCRIPTION
TCM detects a reduction in power supply voltage, and depending on status, implements the following fail-
safe.
Learning control prohibition (when detection conditions 1 or 2 are met)

Slip control, lock-up control, manual mode, shift paddle operation prohibition, torque up
prohibition, and prohibition on shifting to 5th or 6th. If this continues further, power is cut to all
solenoids (fixed to 4th).

CODE 1. DIAGNOSIS CONDITION
3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. The engine speed and input speed sensor NT are 400 rpm or
IG circuit
more, and the CAN communication and input speed NT are
Harness
normal
P0882 and
2. Ignition voltage is 9.0 V or less
connector
3. Continues for 20 sec.
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
Inspect the fuses circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK TCM (POWER SOURCE, GROUND)
Standard Voltage:
A18-34(IG1) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
A18-35(IG2) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
A18-3(E02) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
A18-33(E01) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

CONNECTOR (TCM - BATTERY, BODY
NG GROUND)
OK
2. REPLACE TCM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W830HBX

P0894,P2714: Transmission Component Slipping (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0894 Transmission Component Slipping
DTC P2714 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)
DESCRIPTION
The shift solenoid valve SLT is controlled by the duty ratio as determined in advance by the transmission
control computer, based upon signals from the accelerator position sensor, input speed sensor NT and
output speed sensor SP2. In this way, the line pressure is adjusted to match the throttle valve opening
angle and engine output. The TCM uses the revolution signals from the input speed sensor NT and output
speed sensor SP2 to detect clutch and other slipping.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

Shift
10°C or more, and coolant temperature 40°C or more.
solenoid
(However, abnormalities with the shift solenoid valve (S1, S2,
valve SLT
S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor NT, output
Valve body
speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch, CAN bus, ECM
assembly
communication, coolant temperature sensor, air flow sensor,
P0894 Torque
electronically control throttle, and accelerator pedal sensor are
converter
not detected)
clutch
2. The C1 clutch total heating power is the predetermined value
assembly
or more.
Automatic
3. -
transmission

10°C or more, and coolant temperature 40°C or more. Shift
(However, abnormalities with the shift solenoid valve (S1, S2, solenoid
S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2, SLT), input speed sensor NT, output valve S1,
speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position switch, CAN bus, ECM S2, S3, S4,
communication, coolant temperature sensor, air flow sensor, SLT
electronically control throttle, and accelerator pedal sensor are Valve body
not detected)
P2714 assembly
2. The following conditions are met: Torque
a. The C1 clutch total heating power is the converter
predetermined value or more. clutch
b. The C2 clutch total heating power is the assembly
predetermined value or more. Automatic
transmission
3. -
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The TCM calculates the amount of heat absorbed by the friction material based on the difference in
revolution (clutch slippage) between the turbine and output shaft. The TCM illuminates the MIL and
outputs this DTC when the amount of heat absorption exceeds the specified value.
NOTICE:
If you continue driving under these conditions, the clutch will burn out and the vehicle will no
longer be drivable.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0894: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (AT Slip)
Related DTCs
P2714: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (ON Stuck)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve SLT
Duration 1 count


Range position D

[P0894: AT slip]
When either condition below is met: ON malfunction (A) or (B)
AT slip (A)
Summation of C1 clutch heat generations Specified value
AT slip (B)
Actual gear for SLT fail judgement Not determined
[P2714: ON malfunction]
One of the following conditions is met: ON malfunction (A), (B), (C), (D), (E), (F), (G) (H) or (I)
ON malfunction (A)
ON malfunction (B)
6th Error Detected
ON malfunction (C)
Shift Solenoid 1 (OFF Stuck) Detected
ON malfunction (D)
ON malfunction (E)
Shift Solenoid 3 (ON Stuck) Detected

ON malfunction (F)
ON malfunction (G)
1-2 Shift Valve (Shrinking of Spring) Detected
ON malfunction (H)
Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (AT Slip) Detected
ON malfunction (I)
Linear Solenoid 2 (ON Stuck) Detected
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0894 AND P2714)

Result:
Only "P0894 and P2714" or "P0894" is output A
"P0894 and P2714" or "P0894" and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. HYDRAULIC TEST
*1 SST *2 Test Plug
NOTICE:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
SST: 09992-00095
09992-00231
09992-00271

350 to 430 kPa 760 to 950 kPa

Idling
1200 to 1380 kPa 1410 to 1630 kPa

Stall test
2
NG INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
OK
3. CHECK THE GEAR POSITION
HINT:
90°C (140 to 194°F)
OK:
Gear position changes.
TCM GEAR SHIFT COMMAND 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH 5TH 6TH PROCEED
TO
Shift solenoid Stuck ON 2nd 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

A
S1 Stuck OFF 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th N*2
Shift solenoid Stuck ON 1st 2nd 2nd 4th 6th 6th

B
S2 Stuck OFF 3rd 3rd 3rd 4th 5th 5th
Actual gear position under
malfunction Shift solenoid Stuck ON 1st 2nd 3rd 3rd N*1 N*1
C
S3 Stuck OFF 3rd 6th 4th 4th 5th 6th
Stuck
Shift solenoid 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th D
ON*2
S4
Stuck OFF 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 4th 4th E
Normal 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th D
HINT:
*1: Neutral
*2: When shift solenoid S4 is stuck ON, gear shifting is normal.
B INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2
C INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S3
D INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
E INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4
Go to step 9
OK
Go to step 9
OK
Go to step 9
OK
Go to step 9
OK
8. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve SLT .
OK
(a) Check the transmission valve body assembly .

OK:

NG BODY ASSEMBLY
OK
10. INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the torque converter clutch assembly .

OK:
The torque converter clutch operates normally.
REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH

NG ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8F0E7X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: P0961-

P0963: Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Performance (SL1 Solenoid) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0961 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Performance (SL1 Solenoid)
DTC P0962 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Circuit Low (SL1 Solenoid)
DTC P0963 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Circuit High (SL1 Solenoid)
DESCRIPTION
Based upon a signal from the TCM, the combination of shift solenoid valve (S1, S2, S3, S4, SR, SL1, SL2)
changes the gear position from 1st to 6th. As a fail-safe function if the solenoid valve system is open or
shorted, the TCM cuts power to all solenoids, leaving just the mechanical hydraulic circuit, requiring
manual shifting.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
1. Not learning control prohibited status solenoid
Not open or short in the shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit valve SL1
2. The difference between the shift solenoid valve SL1 Transmission
P0961
operational feedback current is 12 A or more in total. wire
3. Detects "2.Malfunction Status" 2 times consecutively. Harness and
4. 1-trip detection logic connector
TCM
1. Not learning control prohibited status Shift

1 second or more has elapsed after turning shift solenoid solenoid
valve SL1 off. valve SL1
2. The shift solenoid valve SL1 operational feedback voltage is Transmission
P0962
0.018 V or less. wire
3. Detects malfunction that continues for 100 ms or more 5 Harness and
times consecutively. connector

valve SL1 on. valve SL1
P0963
0.257 V or more. wire
Reference (Using an oscilloscope):
Check the waveform between the terminals SL1+ and SL1- of the TCM connector
Standard:
Refer to the illustration.
Terminal SL1+ - SL1-
Tool setting 5 V/DIV., 1 ms./DIV.
Vehicle condition 5th or 6th gear
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates an open or short in the shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit. The TCM commands gearshift by
turning the shift solenoid valves "ON/OFF". When there is an open or short circuit in any shift solenoid
valve circuit, the TCM detects the problem and illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0961: Linear Solenoid 1 (Feedback Stuck)
Related DTCs P0962: Linear Solenoid 1 (GND Short/Open)
P0963: Linear Solenoid 1 (Battery Short)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve SL1
P0961: 2 count
Duration P0962: 0.1 sec. x 5 times
P0963: 0.1 sec. x 5 times

Linear solenoid 1 (P0962,P0963) No failure
Check the feedback terminal voltage 0.257 V or less
Above condition (Battery voltage) satisfied for 0.5 sec. or more
P0962: Linear Solenoid 1 (GND Short/Open)
Linear solenoid 1 (P0961) No failure

The accumulation of difference between target current and feedback current 12 A or

(Sum_ie). more
Sum_ie is cleared when at least one of the following conditions is satisfied.
1. Enable conditions are not satisfied.

2. Difference between target current and feedback current (ie) is between -50 mA and 50
mA.
3. Plus and minus of ie is turned over.
Check the feedback terminal voltage. 0.018 V or less
Elapsed time after recovering from Battery Short. 1 sec. or more
Check the feedback terminal voltage. 0.257 V or more

Elapsed time after recovering from GND short/open. 1 sec. or more
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
The shift solenoid valve SL1 is turned on/off normally when the shift lever is in the D position:
Shift solenoid valve SL1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (SL1)
(a) Disconnect the L4 transmission wire connector.
L4-13(SL1+) - L4-6(SL1-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
L4-13(SL1+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
L4-6(SL1-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

(c) Connect the L4 transmission wire connector.
NG INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1
OK
A18-16(SL1+) - A18-12(SL1-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
A18-16(SL1+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A18-12(SL1-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1 .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve SL1 .
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8G0D9X

P0967: Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (SL2 Solenoid) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0965 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (SL2 Solenoid)
Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve
DTC P0966
DS2)
Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve
DTC P0967
DS2)
DESCRIPTION
changes the gear position from 1st to 6th. As a fail-safe function if the c.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
2. The difference between the shift solenoid valve SL2 valve SL2
operational specified current and operational feedback current Transmission
P0965
is 12 A or more in total. wire
TCM

valve SL2 off valve SL2
P0966

valve SL2 on valve SL2
P0967
Reference (Using an oscilloscope):
Check the waveform between the terminals SL2+ and SL2- of the TCM connector
Standard:
Refer to the illustration.
Terminal SL2+ - SL2-
Vehicle condition Engine idle speed
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates an open or short in the shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit. The TCM commands gear shifts
by turning the shift solenoid valves "ON/OFF". When there is an open or short circuit in any shift solenoid
valve circuit, the TCM detects the problem and illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0966: Linear Solenoid 2 (GND Short/Open)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve SL2
P0965: 2 count

Linear solenoid 2 (P0965,P0966) No failure
Above condition (Battery voltage) satisfied for 0.5 sec. or more


(Sum_ie). more
Sum_ie is renewed every 25msec.


mA.
Voltage of the feedback terminal 0.018 V or less
Voltage of the feedback terminal 0.257 V or more

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
The shift solenoid valve SL2 is turned on/off normally when the shift lever is in the D position:
Shift solenoid valve SL2 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (SL2)
L4-14(SL2+) - L4-7(SL2-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
L4-14(SL2+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
L4-7(SL2-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID SL2
OK
(a) Disconnect the TCM connector.
A18-5(SL2+) - A18-11(SL2-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
A18-5(SL2+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A18-11(SL2-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(c) Connect the TCM connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
NEXT THE RESET MEMORY
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID SL2
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2 .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve SL2 .

NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID SL2

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W860B0X

P0973,P0974: Shift Solenoid "A" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0973 Shift Solenoid "A" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)
DTC P0974 Shift Solenoid "A" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)
DESCRIPTION
manual shifting.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
solenoid
1. Not learning control prohibited status
valve S1
2. During shift solenoid valve S1 on signal is output, the TCM S1
Transmission
P0973 output monitor value is "off".
wire
3. Continues for 500ms or more.
Harness and
connector
TCM
Shift
solenoid
valve S1
2. During shift solenoid valve S1 off signal is output, the TCM S1
Transmission
P0974 output monitor value is "on".
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs indicate an open or short in the shift solenoid valve S1 circuit. When there is an open or short
circuit in any shift solenoid valve circuit, the TCM detects the problem and illuminates the MIL and stores
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0973: Shift Solenoid 1 (GND Short)
Related DTCs
P0974: Shift Solenoid 1 (Open/Battery Short)
Duration 0.5 sec.


Status of output monitor when TCM outputs ON signal OFF
Status of output monitor when TCM outputs OFF signal ON
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
Shift solenoid valve S1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (S1)
Standard voltage:
A18-7(S1) - Body ground Ignition switch ON Below 1 V
A18-7(S1) - Body ground 20°C(68°F) 11 to 15 Ω

OK
2. REPLACE TCM

Standard voltage:
L4-1(S1) - Body ground Ignition switch ON Below 1 V
L4-1(S1) - A18-7(S1) Always Below 1 Ω
L4-1(S1) and A18-7(S1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W870ASX

P0976,P0977: Shift Solenoid "B" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S2) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0976 Shift Solenoid "B" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)
DTC P0977 Shift Solenoid "B" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)
DESCRIPTION
manual shifting.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
solenoid
valve S2
2. During shift solenoid valve S2 on signal is output, the TCM's
Transmission
P0976 S2 output monitor value is "off".
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
Shift
solenoid
valve S2
2. During shift solenoid valve S2 off signal is output, the TCM's
Transmission
P0977 S2 output monitor value is "on".
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0976: Shift Solenoid2 (GND Short)
Related DTCs
P0977: Shift Solenoid2 (Open/Battery Short)
Duration 0.5 sec.


P0976: Shift Solenoid2 (GND Short)
P0977: Shift Solenoid2 (Open/Battery Short)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
Shift solenoid valve S2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage:

OK
2. REPLACE TCM

Standard voltage:

NG CONNECTOR
OK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8B05BX

P0979,P0980: Shift Solenoid "C" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S3) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0979 Shift Solenoid "C" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S3)
DTC P0980 Shift Solenoid "C" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S3)
DESCRIPTION
manual shifting.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift solenoid valve

S3
2. During shift solenoid valve S3 on signal is output, the
Transmission wire
P0979 TCM's S3 output monitor value is "off".
Harness and
connector
TCM
Open in shift
solenoid valve S3
2. During shift solenoid valve S3 off signal is output, the
circuit
P0980 TCM's S3 output monitor value is "on".
Shift solenoid valve
S3
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P0980: Shift Solenoid 3 (OPEN/Battery Short)
Duration 0.5 sec.


P0980: Shift Solenoid 3 (OPEN/Battery Short)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
Shift solenoid valve S3 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage:

OK
2. REPLACE TCM

Standard voltage:
L4-2(S3) or A18-6(S3) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8C06ZX

P0982,P0983: Shift Solenoid "D" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0982 Shift Solenoid "D" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
DTC P0983 Shift Solenoid "D" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)
DESCRIPTION
manual shifting.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
solenoid
valve S4
2. During shift solenoid valve S4 on signal is output, the TCM's
Transmission
P0982 S4 output monitor value is "off".
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
Shift
solenoid
valve S4
2. During shift solenoid valve S4 off signal is output, the TCM's
Transmission
P0983 S4 output monitor value is "on".
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
Duration 0.5 sec.


WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
Shift solenoid valve S4 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage:

OK
2. REPLACE TCM

Standard voltage:

NG CONNECTOR
OK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000TA0125X

Manual Mode Switch Circuit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1817 Manual Mode Switch Circuit Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
A signal from the manual mode switch assembly input into the TCM detects the M position.

CODE 1. DIAGNOSIS CONDITION
3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. Shift position sensor is normal, and not in learning Manual mode

control prohibited status. switch
P1817 2. The shift lever is in P, N, or R, and the M switch is on. Harness and
3. Continues for 2 sec. connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH
A19-8(M) - Body ground M Below 1 Ω
A19-8(M) - Body ground Except M 10 kΩ or higher
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MANUAL

NG MODE SWITCH - SHIFT POSITION
INDICATOR)
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MANUAL MODE SWITCH - SHIFT POSITION

3.
INDICATOR)
(a) Disconnect the D36 shift position indicator connector.
(b) Disconnect the D28 manual mode switch connector.
D36-6(MM) - D28-10(MM+) Always Below 1 Ω
D36-6(MM) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
D28-10(MM+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(d) Connect the D36 shift position indicator connector.

(e) Connect the D28 manual mode switch connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. INSPECT MANUAL MODE SWITCH
(a) Disconnect the D28 manual mode switch connector.
M Below 1 Ω
D28-10(MM+) - D28-11(MM-)
Except M 10 kΩ or higher
(c) Disconnect the D28 manual mode switch connector.
NG REPLACE MANUAL MODE SWITCH
OK
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TCM - SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR)
(b) Disconnect the D36 shift position indicator connector.
D36-5(M) - A19-8(M) Always Below 1 Ω
D36-5(M) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A19-8(M) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

(e) Connect the D36 shift position indicator connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8A0GAX

P2719,P2720,P2721: Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Circuit Performance (SLT Solenoid) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P2719 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Circuit Performance (SLT Solenoid)
DTC P2720 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Control Circuit Low
DTC P2721 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Control Circuit High
DESCRIPTION

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
2. The difference between the shift solenoid valve SLT valve SLT
operational specified current and operational feedback current Transmission
P2719
is 12 A or more in total. wire
TCM

2. 1 second or more has elapsed after turning shift solenoid solenoid
valve SLT off. valve SLT
The shift solenoid valve SLT operational feedback voltage is Transmission
P2720

2. 1 second or more has elapsed after turning shift solenoid solenoid
valve SLT on. valve SLT
The shift solenoid valve SLT operational feedback voltage is Transmission
P2721
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
When an open or short in the shift solenoid valve SLT circuit is detected, the TCM interprets this as a fault.
The TCM will turn on the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2719: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (Feedback Stuck)
Related DTCs P2720: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (GND Short/Open)
P2721: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (Battery Short)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve SLT
P2719: 2 count

Line pressure linear solenoid(P2720,P2721) No failure
Above condition (Battery voltage) is satisfied for 0.5 sec. or more
P2720: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (GND Short/Open)
Line pressure linear solenoid(P2719) No failure

Line pressure linear solenoid(P2719) No failure


(Sum_ie). more


mA.
P2720: Line Pressure Linear Solenoid (GND Short/Open)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
A18-4(SLT+) - A18-9(SLT-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
(c) Disconnect the A18 TCM connector.

OK
2. REPLACE TCM
A18-4(SLT+) - L4-11(SLT+) Always Below 1 Ω
A18-9(SLT-) - L4-4(SLT-) Always Below 1 Ω
Standard voltage:
A18-4(SLT+) - Body ground Ignition switch ON Below 1 V
A18-9(SLT-) - Body ground Ignition switch ON Below 1 V

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve SLT .

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W8D0DAX

P2757,P2758: Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve
SLU) (2013 FR-S)
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Performance (Shift

DTC P2757
Solenoid Valve SLU)
Torque Converter Pressure Control Solenoid Circuit Stuck ON /

DTC P2758
Performance (SLU / DSU Solenoid)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. The following conditions are met:
a. Not learning control prohibited status

b. 4 seconds or more have elapsed after moving the
shift lever to D.
c. Coolant temperature is 40°C (104°F) or more.
d. ATF temperature is 20°C (68 °F) or more.
e. 4th or higher gears
f. Abnormalities with the shift solenoid valve (S1,
S2, S3, S4, SR, SLT, SLU), input speed sensor NT, Transmission
output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position wire
switch, CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant Shift
temperature, electronically control throttle and solenoid
accelerator pedal sensor are not detected.
P2757 valve SLU
2. The following conditions are met: Torque
converter
a. The shift solenoid SLU hydraulic command value is
clutch
more than the specified value for 3 seconds or
TCM
more.
b. The engine speed is 70 rpm or more faster than
the turbine revolutions.
c. 4th or higher gear
d. The throttle valve opening angle is the specified
angle or more.
e. Vehicle speed is 22 km/h or more.
3. All conditions in (b) have passed for 2 seconds or more.

a. Not learning control prohibited status

b. 4 seconds or more have elapsed after moving the
shift lever to D.
c. Coolant temperature is 40°C (104°F) or more.
d. ATF temperature is 20°C (68 °F) or more.
e. 4th or higher gears
f. Abnormalities with the shift solenoid valve (S1,
S2, S3, S4, SR, SLT, SLU), input speed sensor NT,
output speed sensor SP2, park/neutral position Transmission
switch, CAN bus, ECM communication, coolant wire
temperature, electronically control throttle and Shift
accelerator pedal sensor are not detected. solenoid
P2758 valve SLU
Torque
a. The shift solenoid SLU hydraulic command value is converter
less than the specified value for 3 seconds or clutch
more. TCM
b. The difference between the engine speed and the
turbine speed is 35 rpm or less.
c. 4th or higher gear
d. The throttle valve opening angle is the specified
angle or more.
e. Vehicle speed is 22 km/h or more.
3. All conditions in "2. Malfunction status" have passed for 2

seconds or more.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Torque converter lock-up is controlled by the TCM based on the input speed sensor NT, output speed
sensor SP2, engine rpm, engine load, engine temperature, vehicle speed, transmission temperature, and
gear selection. The TCM determines the lock-up status of the torque converter by comparing the engine
rpm (NE) to the input turbine rpm (NT). The TCM calculates the actual transmission gear by comparing
input turbine rpm (NT) to output shaft rpm (SP2). When conditions are appropriate, the TCM requests
"lock-up" by applying control voltage to the shift solenoid SLU. When the SLU is turned on, it applies
pressure to the lock-up relay valve and locks the torque converter clutch.
If the TCM detects no lock-up after lock-up has been requested or if it detects lock-up when it is not
requested, the TCM interprets this as a fault in the shift solenoid valve SLU or lock-up system
performance.
The TCM will turn on the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2757: Lock up Control Solenoid (OFF Stuck)
Related DTCs
P2758: Lock up Control Solenoid (ON Stuck)
Required
Shift solenoid valve SLU
sensors/Components
Frequency of
Continuous
operation
P2757: 2 sec.
Duration P2758: 1.8 sec., 2count (After 1 count, detect failure again after vehicle speed is
less than 10km/h (6mph).)

Lock up control solenoid (P2762,P2763,P2764) No failure
Range position D

Target gear position 4th, 5th or 6th

P2757: Lock up Control Solenoid (OFF Stuck)
Lock up control solenoid instruction value 513 kPa or more
Above condition is satisfied for 3 sec. or more
Engine speed - Turbine shaft speed 70 rpm or more
Gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed. 4th, 5th or 6th
Throttle position See MAP A
MAP A
Turbine shaft speed (rpm) 1200 1500 3500 5100 5200
Throttle (%) 12.9 13.4 26 39.6 100
P2758: Lock up Control Solenoid (ON Stuck)
Lock up control solenoid instruction value 4 kPa or less
Above condition is satisfied for 3 sec. or more
Engine speed - Turbine shaft speed 35 rpm or less
Gear ratio calculated from turbine shaft speed and vehicle speed. 4th, 5th or 6th
Throttle position See MAP B
MAP B
Turbine shaft speed (rpm) 1200 1500 2000 5800 5900
Throttle (%) 8.1 8.2 10 40 100
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
1. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
Using the Techstream to perform Active Test allows relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be
operated without removing any parts. This non-intrusive functional inspection can be very useful
because intermittent operation may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed. Performing
Active Test early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be
displayed while performing Active Test.
(g) According to the display on the Techstream, perform the "Active Test".
ITEM TEST DETAILS DIAGNOSTIC NOTE
[Test Details]
Control the shift solenoid SLU to set the automatic
transmission to the lock-up condition.
Activate the Possible to check the
[Vehicle Condition]
Lock Up SLU operation.
Throttle valve opening angle: Less than 35 %
Vehicle Speed: 50 km/h (30 mph) or more
HINT:
This test can be conducted when the vehicle speed is 50 km/h (30 mph) or more.
This test can be conducted with the 5th or 6th gear.
(h) Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly.
HINT:
When changing the accelerator pedal opening angle while driving, if the engine speed does not
change, lock-up is on.
Slowly release, but not fully, the accelerator pedal in order to decelerate. (Fully releasing the pedal
will close the throttle valve and lock-up may be turned off automatically.)
PROCEDURE

Result:
Only "P2757" or "P2758" is output A
"P2757" or "P2758" and other DTCs B
B GO TO DTC CHART
A
2. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLU .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve SLU .
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU
OK

OK:

NG BODY ASSEMBLY
OK
(a) Check the torque converter assembly .

OK:
The torque converter clutch operates normally.
NG REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W890E5X

P2764: Torque Converter Pressure Control Solenoid Circuit Performance (SLU / DSU Solenoid) (2013 FR-
S)
Torque Converter Pressure Control Solenoid Circuit Performance (SLU /

DTC P2762
DSU Solenoid)
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit High

DTC P2763
(Shift Solenoid Valve DSU)
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit Low

DTC P2764
(Shift Solenoid Valve DSU)
DESCRIPTION
The shift solenoid valve SLU is controlled by the duty ratio as determined in advance by the TCM. In this
way, it carries out lock-up and flex lock-up control.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
Shift
1. Not learning control prohibited status.
solenoid
Not open or short in the shift solenoid valve SLU/DSU circuit.
valve SLU
2. The difference between the shift solenoid valve SLU
Transmission
P2762 operational specified current and operational feedback current
wire
is 12 A or more in total.
Harness and
3. Detects "2.Malfunction Status" 5 times consecutively.
connector
TCM

Not malfunction with the shift solenoid valve SLU/DSU circuit Shift
performance. solenoid
2. 1 second or more has elapsed after turning shift solenoid valve SLU
valve SLU off. Transmission
P2763
The shift solenoid valve SLU operational feedback voltage is wire
0.018 V or less. Harness and
3. Detects malfunction that continues for 100 ms or more 5 connector
times consecutively. TCM
Not malfunction with the shift solenoid valve SLU/DSU circuit Shift
performance. solenoid
2. 1 second or more has elapsed after turning shift solenoid valve SLU
valve SLU on. Transmission
P2764
The shift solenoid valve SLU operational feedback voltage is wire
0.257 V or more. Harness and
3. Detects malfunction that continues for 100 ms or more 5 connector
times consecutively. TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
When an open or short in a shift solenoid valve SLU circuit is detected, the TCM determines there is a
malfunction. The TCM will turn on the MIL and store this DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2762: Lock up Control Solenoid (Feedback Stuck)
Related DTCs P2763: Lock up Control Solenoid (Battery Short)
P2764: Lock up Control Solenoid (GND Short/Open)
Required sensors/Components Shift solenoid valve SLU
P2762: 2 count

Lock up control solenoid (P2764,P2763) No failure
Above condition (Battery voltage) is satisfied for 0.5 sec. or more
P2763: Lock up Control Solenoid (Battery Short)

Lock up control solenoid (P2762) No failure
Lock up control solenoid (P2762) No failure


(Sum_ie). more


mA.
P2763: Lock up Control Solenoid (Battery Short)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (SLU)
L4-12(SLU+) - L4-5(SLU-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
L4-12(SLU+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
L4-5(SLU-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
NG INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU
OK

A18-13(SLU+) - A18-1(SLU-) 20°C(68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
A18-13(SLU+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A18-1(SLU-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLU .
(b) Perform inspection of the shift solenoid valve SLU .
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W720GZX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PARTS

LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YTG04NX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Pattern

Select Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Pattern Select Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
A signal from the pattern select switch assembly input into the TCM enables switching of the mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
(*) Pattern Select Switch (ECT SNOW Switch)
When the ECT SNOW switch is pushed, the switch contact is made and the ECT SNOW mode is selected.
To cancel the ECT SNOW mode, push the ECT SNOW switch once again.
The ECT SNOW mode is automatically cancelled out when the ignition switch is turned "off".
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM

(c) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.

OK
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC

NOTE
Ignition switch is:

ON: off
↓
Pattern switch (ECT SPORT)
Sport Switch is:
status/ -
Status Pushed: ON
ON or OFF
↓
is:
Pushed: OFF
INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK

OK

NOTE
Ignition switch is:

ON: off
↓
Snow Switch is:
status/ -
Status Pushed: ON
ON or OFF
↓
is:
Pushed: OFF
INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH
NG ASSEMBLY
OK GO TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(a) Perform inspection of the pattern select switch .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY - TCM -

4.
BODY GROUND)
(b) Disconnect the pattern select switch assembly connector.
A19-13(SPORT) - D35-4(SPORT) Always Below 1 Ω
A19-3(SPORT) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(d) Connect the TCM connector.
(e) Connect the pattern select switch assembly connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
5. REPLACE TCM
(a) Perform inspection of the pattern select switch .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PATTERN SELECT SWITCH - TCM - BODY

7.
GROUND)
(b) Disconnect the pattern select switch assembly connector.
A19-24(SNOW) - D35-6 Always Below 1 Ω
A19-24(SNOW) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(e) Connect the pattern select switch assembly connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
8. REPLACE TCM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O7H0C0X

PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transmission
assembly, engine assembly, valve body assembly or TCM .
HINT:
RESET MEMORY can not be completed by only disconnecting the battery cable.
1. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE PRECAUTIONS

(a) The automatic transmission is composed of highly precision-finished parts which need careful
inspection before reassembly. Even a small nick could cause fluid leakage or affect the performance.
The instructions here are organized so that you work on only one component group at a time. This
will help avoid confusion caused by similar-looking parts of different sub-assemblies being on your
workbench at the same time. The component groups are inspected and repaired from the converter
housing side. Complete the inspection, repair and reassembly before proceeding to the next
component group as much as possible. If a defect is found in a certain component group during
reassembly, inspect and repair this group immediately. If a component group cannot be assembled
because some parts are being ordered, be sure to keep all parts of the group in a separate
container while proceeding with disassembly, inspection, repair and reassembly of other component
groups. Recommended: Toyota Genuine ATF WS
(b) All disassembled parts should be washed clean and any fluid passages and holes should be blown
through with compressed air.
(c) Dry all parts with compressed air. Never use a shop rag or a piece of cloth to dry them.
(d) When using compressed air, always aim away from yourself to prevent accidentally spraying ATF or
kerosene in your face.
(e) Only recommended automatic transmission fluid or kerosene should be used for cleaning.
(f) After cleaning, the parts should be arranged in the correct order for efficient inspection, repair, and
reassembly.
(g) When disassembling a valve body, be sure to match each valve together with the corresponding
spring.
(h) New discs for the brakes and clutches that are to be used for replacement must be soaked in ATF
for at least 15 minutes before reassembly.
(i) All oil seal rings, clutch discs, clutch plates, rotating parts, and sliding surfaces should be coated
with ATF prior to reassembly.
(j) All gaskets and rubber O-rings should be replaced with new ones.
(k) Do not apply adhesive cements to gaskets and similar parts.
(l) Make sure that the ends of a snap ring are not aligned with one of the cutouts and are installed in
the groove correctly.
(m) When replacing a worn bushing, the sub-assembly containing the bushing must also be replaced.
(n) Check thrust bearings and races for wear or damage. Replace them as necessary.
(o) When working with FIPG material, you must observe the following:
Using a razor blade and a gasket scraper, remove all the old packing (FIPG) material from
the gasket surface.
Thoroughly clean all components to remove any loose material.
Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
Parts must be reassembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the packing
(FIPG) material must be removed and reapplied.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W730S7X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM

SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
If a normal code is displayed during the diagnostic trouble code check although the trouble still occurs,
check the electrical circuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages
and proceed to the page given for troubleshooting.
The Matrix Chart is divided into 2 chapters.
Chapter 1:
Refer to the table below when the trouble cause is considered to be electrical.
If the instruction "Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart" is given in the flow chart
of each circuit, proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check.
If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits, check
and replace the TCM.
1. Chapter 1: Electronic Circuit Matrix Chart

PAGE
1. Shift solenoid valve S1 circuit *1

No up-shift (1st -> 2nd)
2. TCM

No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
2. TCM
2. Engine coolant temperature sensor

No up-shift (3rd -> 4th)
circuit *1
3. TCM
2. Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1
3. Shift solenoid valve SL) circuit *1

No up-shift (4th -> 5th) 4. Shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit *1

circuit *1
5. TCM
1. Park/neutral position switch circuit

*1

No up-shift (5th -> 6th) circuit *1
4. TCM
1. Park/neutral position switch circuit

*1
No down-shift (6th -> 5th)
3. TCM
2. Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1
No down-shift (5th -> 4th) 3. Shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit *1
4. Shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit *1
5. TCM

No down-shift (4th -> 3rd)
2. TCM

No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd)
2. TCM

No down-shift (2nd -> 1st)
2. TCM
1. Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit *1

circuit *1
No lock-up or No lock-up off
3. Stop light switch circuit *1
4. Input speed sensor NT circuit *1
5. TCM
1. Shift solenoid valve SLT circuit *1
3. Output speed sensor SP2 circuit *1
4. Throttle position sensor circuit *1

Shift point too high or too low
5. Pattern select SPORT switch circuit
6. ATF temperature sensor circuit *1
7. TCM
8. Park/Neutral position switch

Up-shift to 6th while engine is cold circuit *1
2. TCM
1. Transmission control switch circuit

No gear change by shifting into "+" or "-" while the
2. Shift paddle switch circuit
shifting lever
3. TCM

Harsh engagement (N -> D)
3. TCM
2. Output speed sensor SP2 circuit *1

Harsh engagement (Lock-up)
3. Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit *1
4. TCM
1. Throttle position sensor circuit *1
Harsh engagement (Any driving position) 4. Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit *1
7. TCM
Poor acceleration 2. Pattern select (SNOW) switch circuit
3. TCM
ECT SNOW does not operate 2. Pattern select (SNOW) switch circuit
3. TCM
ECT SPORT does not operate 2. Pattern select (SPORT) switch circuit
3. TCM
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd -> 3rd -> 4th -> 5th) Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1
Shift solenoid valve SR circuit *1

Slip or shudder (5th -> 6th and 6th -> 5th)
Shift solenoid valve SLT circuit *1
HINT:
*1: When the circuit is detective, a DTC may be output.
2. Chapter 2: On-Vehicle Repair and Off-Vehicle Repair

PAGE
1. Transmission control rod
2. Manual valve
Vehicle does not move in any forward position and reverse
3. Parking lock pawl
positions
4. Rear planetary gear unit
5. Torque converter clutch
1. Valve body assembly

Vehicle does not move in R position
2. Brake No. 4 (B4)
2. Brake No. 3 (B3)
No up-shift (1st -> 2nd) 3. One-way clutch No. 1

(F1)
4. One-way clutch No. 2

(F2)

No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)
2. Clutch No. 3 (C3)

No up-shift (3rd -> 4th)

No up-shift (4th -> 5th)
2. Brake No. 1 (B1)

No up-shift (5th -> 6th)
2. Brake No. 2 (B2)
No down-shift (6th -> 5th) Valve body assembly
No down-shift (5th -> 4th) Valve body assembly
No down-shift (4th -> 3rd) Valve body assembly
No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd) Valve body assembly
No down-shift (2nd -> 1st) Valve body assembly

No lock-up or No lock-up off
2. C1 accumulator

Harsh engagement (N -> D)
(F3)

(F4)

Harsh engagement (Lock-up)

2. C3 accumulator

Harsh engagement (N -> R)
4. Brake No. 4 (B4)

(F1)
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd -> 3rd -> 4th -> 5th -> 6th) Valve body assembly
2. B3 accumulator
3. Brake No. 3 (B3)

Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd)
(F1)

(F2)
Harsh engagement (2nd -> 3rd) 2. C3 accumulator
Harsh engagement (3rd -> 4th) 2. C2 accumulator
Harsh engagement (4th -> 5th) 2. B1 accumulator
3. Brake No. 1 (B1)
Harsh engagement (5th -> 6th) 2. B2 accumulator
3. Brake No. 2 (B2)
Harsh engagement (6th -> 5th) 2. C3 accumulator
2. Oil strainer

Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse: After warm-up)
(F1)
Slip or shudder (Particular position: Just after engine starts) Torque converter clutch
1. Brake No. 4 (B4)

Slip or shudder (R position)
(F1)

Slip or shudder (1st) (F3)

(F4)
2. Brake No. 3 (B3)

(F1)
Slip or shudder (2nd)
(F2)

(F4)
Slip or shudder (3rd) 3. One-way clutch No. 1

(F1)

(F4)

Slip or shudder (4th)
(F4)
Slip or shudder (5th) 2. Clutch No. 3 (C3)
3. Brake No. 1 (B1)

Slip or shudder (6th)
2. Brake No. 2 (B2)
No engine braking (1st +- 4th: S position) Clutch No. 4 (C4)

No engine braking (1st: 1 position)
2. Brake No. 4 (B4)

No engine braking (2nd: 2 position)
2. Brake No. 2 (B2)

No engine braking (3rd: 3 position)
2. Brake No. 1 (B1)
No engine braking (4th: 4 position) Valve body assembly

No kick-down Valve body assembly
Shift point too high or too low Valve body assembly

Poor acceleration (All positions)
1. Brake No. 2 (B2)
Poor acceleration (6th) 2. Clutch No. 2 (C2)
3. Front planetary gear unit

Engine stalls when starting off or stopping
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W790M5X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: ROAD

TEST (2013 FR-S)
ROAD TEST
(a) Based on the result of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms. If the
problem is that the transaxle does not shift up, shift down, or the shift point is too high or too low,
conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem
symptoms.
2. ROAD TEST
(a) Perform a road test.
CAUTION:
Check for safety before performing any tests.
NOTICE:
Be sure to inspect and adjust the engine before performing these tests.
Perform the road test with the engine coolant temperature between 60 and 90°C (140 and 194°F)
and the ATF temperature between 40 and 110°C (104 and 230°F).
Perform these tests with the air conditioning and cruise control off.
Transmission With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in D, move the shift lever to M and return it
Control to D. Check that the meter display changes from D to the appropriate M position and then
Switch Test back again.
M Position With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in M, move the shift lever to "+" and "-".
Test Check that the meter display changes between M position properly.
D Position While driving the vehicle normally, check that the transmission shifts up and down
Shift Test through each gear properly.
While driving on a level surface at a constant speed in the lock-up range (50 km/h (30
Lock-up
mph) or more) with the shift lever in D, lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check
Function
that the engine speed does not change abruptly.
P Position Stop the vehicle on an incline (approximately 5° or more). Then move the shift lever to P
Test and release the parking brake. Check that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.
Abnormal
Check for abnormal noise and vibration while driving the vehicle forward and backward,
Noise and
and during shift operations.
Vibration
Fluid
After performing all other road test inspections, check for fluid leakage.
Leakage
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001SM002VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Shift

Paddle Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Shift Paddle Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the shift lever is in M, it is possible to change into any gear using the steering assembly
transmission shift switch.
Additionally, when the vehicle is being driving with the shift lever in D, operating the steering assembly
transmission shift switch changes to selection of gears with the shift lever in D, enabling shifting to any
gear.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE


OK
TESTER DISPLAY CONDITION STANDARD
Continuously shift to "+" (upshift): ON

Sport Shift Up SW -
Release "+" (up-shift): OFF
Continuously shift to "-" (down-shift): ON

Sport Shift Down SW -
Release "-" (down-shift): OFF

NG (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH - TCM)
OK CHECK INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH - TCM)
Pull continuously
"+" Below 1 Ω
A19-1(SFTD) - Body ground (Up shift)
Release "+" or "-" 10 kΩ or higher
Pull continuously
"-" Below 1 Ω
A19-2(SFTU) - Body ground (Down shift)
(c) Connect the TCM connector.
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL

NG CABLE - BODY GROUND)
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the spiral cable connector.
A-7 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
(c) Connect the spiral cable connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE - TCM)
(b) Disconnect the spiral cable connector.
A19-1(SFTD) - A-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A19-2(SFTU) - A-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A19-1(SFTD) or A-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A19-2(SFTU) or A-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(e) Connect the spiral cable connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH - SPIRAL

6.
CABLE)
(a) Disconnect the spiral cable connector.
Pull continuously
"+" Below 1 Ω
C-4 - C-1 (Up shift)
Pull continuously
"-" Below 1 Ω
C-3 - C-1 (Down shift)
(c) Connect the spiral cable connector.
INSPECT TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSPECT TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the transmission shift switch assembly .
REPLACE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK REPLACE SWITCH NO.1 WIRE

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W750LZX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(a) The ECT (Electronic controlled automatic transmission) is an automatic transmission that
electronically controls shift timing using the TCM. The TCM detects electrical signals that indicate
engine and driving conditions, and controls the shift point, based on driver habits and road
conditions. As a result, fuel efficiency and power transmission performance are improved.
Shift shock has been reduced by controlling the engine and transmission simultaneously.
In addition, the ECT has features such as follows:
Diagnostic function.
Fail-safe function when a malfunction occurs.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W7D0GUX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: SYSTEM

DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
The configuration of the electronic control system in the A960E automatic transmission is as shown in the
following chart.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W740IDX

TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. TCM
HINT:
Each TCM terminal's standard voltage is shown in the table below.
In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Look under "Symbols (Terminal No.)" for
the terminals to inspected. The standard voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specific
Condition".
Use the illustration above as a reference for the TCM terminals.
TERMINALS NO. WIRING TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

(SYMBOLS) COLOR DESCRIPTION CONDITION
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in D

11 to 14 V
A19-9(D) - A18- D shift position and M
BR - B-Y
33(E01) switch signal Ignition switch ON and shift lever except
Below 1 V
in D and M
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in R 11 to 14 V

A19-10(R) - R shift position
V - B-Y Ignition switch ON and shift lever except
A18-33(E01) switch signal Below 1 V
in R
A19-1(SFTD) - Down shift switch Ignition switch ON and shift lever in "-"
BE - B-Y Below 1 V
A18-33(E01) signal (Down shift)
A19-2(SFTU) - Up shift switch Ignition switch ON and shift lever in "+"

SB - B-Y Below 1 V
A18-33(E02) signal (Up shift)
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in M 11 to 14 V

A19-8(M) - A18- M shift position
O-B - B-Y Ignition switch ON and shift lever except
33(E01) switch signal Below 1 V
in M
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in P 11 to 14 V
A19-3(P) - A18- Park position
BR - B-Y Ignition switch ON and shift lever except
33(E01) switch signal Below 1 V
in P
Ignition switch ON and shift lever in N 11 to 14 V

A19-21(N) - Neutral position
B-G - B-Y Ignition switch ON and shift lever except
A18-33(E01) switch signal Below 1 V
in N
Pulse
A18-13(SLU+) - SLU solenoid 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th gear (each gear generation
LG - LG-Y
A18-1(SLU-) signal lock-up, M position) (See
waveform 2)
A18-15(SR) - SR solenoid 1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear 11 to 14 V

R-B - B-Y
A18-33(E01) signal 5th or 6th gear Below 1 V
A18-14(S4) - S4 solenoid 2nd, 5th or 6th gear 11 to 14 V

L-W - B-Y
A18-33(E01) signal 1st, 3rd or 4th gear Below 1 V
A18-6(S3) - S3 solenoid 1st, 2nd or 3rd gear 11 to 14 V

L-Y - B-Y
A18-33(E01) signal 4th, 5th or 6th gear Below 1 V
A18-17(S2) - S2 solenoid 1st, 2nd or 6th gear 11 to 14 V

L-O - B-Y
A18-33(E01) signal 3rd, 4th or 5th gear Below 1 V
A18-7(S1) - S1 solenoid 1st gear Below 1 V

Y - B-Y
A18-33(E01) signal Except 1st gear 11 to 14 V
Pulse
A18-5(SL2+) - BR-A - SL2 solenoid generation
Engine idle speed
A18-11(SL2-) BR-B signal (See
waveform 3)
Pulse
A18-16(SL1+) - SL1 solenoid generation
BR - BR-Y 5th or 6th gear
A18-12(SL1-) signal (See
waveform 4)
Pulse
A19-18(SP2+) - Output speed generation
B-W Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)
A19-7(SP2-) sensor SP2 signal (See
waveform 6)
Pulse
A19-17(NT+) - Input speed generation
G-L Engine idle speed (P or N position)
A19-28(NT-) sensor NT signal (See
waveform 5)
Pulse
A18-4(SLT+) - L-R - R- SLT solenoid generation
Engine idle speed
A18-9(SLT-) W signal (See
waveform 1)
A18-22(OIL) - ATF temperature

R - G-B ATF temperature: 115°C (239°F) or more Below 1 V
A18-23(EOIL) sensor signal
B-Y -
A18-33(E01) -
Body Ground Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground
ground
B-Y -
A18-3(E02) -
Body ground
ground
Pulse
CAN
A18-29(CANH) - B-W - B- generation
communication Ignition switch ON
A18-33(E01) Y (See
line
waveform 7)
Pulse
CAN
A18-28(CANL) - generation
L - B-Y communication Ignition switch ON
A18-33(E01) (See
line
waveform 8)
A18-34(IG1) -
P - B-Y Starter signal Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
A18-33(E01)
A18-35(IG2) -
P - B-Y Starter signal Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
A18-33(E01)
A18-26(BM) -
Y-R - B-Y Battery Always 11 to 14 V
A18-33(E01)
Ignition switch ON and pattern select

11 to 14 V
A19-13(SPORT) SPORT switch switch pressed continuously (SPORT)
L - B-Y
- Body ground signal Ignition switch ON and pattern select
Below 1 V
switch released (SPORT)
Ignition switch ON and pattern select

11 to 14 V
A19-24(SNOW) W-R - B- SNOW switch switch pressed continuously (SNOW)
- Body ground Y signal Ignition switch ON and pattern select
Below 1 V
switch released (SNOW)
(a) Waveform 1
Reference:
Terminal A18-4(SLT) - A18-9(SLT-)
(b) Waveform 2
Reference:
Terminal A18-13(SLU+) - A18-1(SLU-)
Vehicle 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th gear (each gear lock-
condition up, M position)
(c) Waveform 3
Reference:
Terminal A18-5(SL2+) - A18-11(SL2-)
(d) Waveform 4
Reference:
Terminal A18-16(SL1+) - A18-12(SL1-)
Vehicle condition 5th or 6th gear
(e) Waveform 5
Reference:
Terminal A19-17(NT+) - A19-28(NT-)
Vehicle condition Engine idle speed (P or N position)
(f) Waveform 6
Reference:
Terminal A19-18(SP2+) - A19-7(SP2-)
Vehicle condition Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)
(g) Waveform 7
Reference:
Terminal A18-29(CANH) - A18-33(E01)
Tool setting 1V/DIV., 10 ms./DIV.

Vehicle condition Ignition switch ON
(h) Waveform 8
Reference:
Terminal A18-28(CANL) - A18-33(E01)
Tool setting 1V/DIV., 10 ms./DIV.
Vehicle condition Ignition switch ON
2. Main Body ECU RH (Cowl Side Junction Block RH)

*1 Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly *2 Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)
HINT:
Each ECU terminal's standard voltage is shown in the table below.
In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Look under "Symbols (Terminal No.)" for
the terminals to inspected. The standard voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specific
Condition".
Use the illustration above as a reference for the ECU terminals.

TERMINALS NO. WIRING TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED
Ignition switch ON, Shift lever P

11 to 14 V
D5-20(SLS+) - Shift lock control unit position, and Stop light switch ON
R
Body ground assembly signal Ignition switch ON, Shift lever P
Below 1 V
position, and Stop light switch OFF
3C-8 - Body Stop light switch Stop light switch ON 11 to 14 V

R
ground signal Stop light switch OFF Below 1 V
3D-23 - Body Park position switch Shift lever except P position 11 to 14 V

WL
ground signal Shift lever P position Below 1 V
HINT:
*1: Voltage is input intermittently as this is an intermittent circuit. (Voltage varies between a peak of
7.5 to 14 V and a low of 0 to1.5 V.)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WP10COX

Transmission Control Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Transmission Control Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the shift lever is in M, it is possible to change into any gear using the floor shift lever assembly
sequential gate.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
(a) Disconnect the D28 transmission control switch connector.
(b) Perform inspection of the transmission control switch .
NG REPLACE TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH - TCM)
Press continuously
"+" Below 1 Ω
A19-1(SFTU) - Body ground (Up shift)
M 10 kΩ or higher
Press continuously
"-" Below 1 Ω
A19-2(SFTD) - Body ground (Down shift)
M 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. REPLACE TCM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000057Y4000X

U0073,U0401,U0416,U0422,U0423: Control Module Communication Bus OFF (2013 FR-S)
DTC U0073 Control Module Communication Bus OFF
DTC U0401 Invalid Data Received from ECM/PCM "A"
DTC U0416 Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
DTC U0422 Invalid Data Received from Body Control Module
DTC U0423 Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
Problems on the CAN bus (communication line) can be detected from the DLC3 connector (Except
when the DLC3 branch line is open).
By using the Techstream, it is possible to check CAN communication DTC.
The DLC3 is connected to the CAN communication line, but the CAN communication is unable to
detect problems on the DLC3 branch line.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER
1. Ignition voltage is 9 V or more, and this condition continues for

1 second or more.
CAN communication
U0073 2. Data reception and transmission are not possible
system
3. 500 ms
1. CAN bus is normal.

2. Reception of malfunction signal from the ECM. CAN communication
U0401
3. 50 times system

2. Reception of malfunction signal from the skid control ECU
CAN communication
U0416 (brake actuator assembly).
system
3. 40 times

2. Reception of malfunction signal from the main body ECU
CAN communication
U0422 (network gateway ECU).
system
3. 40 times

2. Reception of malfunction signal from the combination meter
CAN communication
U0423 assembly.
system
3. 40 times
MONITOR STRATEGY
U0073: CAN Bus Off
Related DTCs U0401: TCM Communication Counter
U0416: VSC Communication Counter
U0073: TCM
Required Sensors/Components U0401: TCM
U0406: Skid Control ECU
Frequency of Operation Continuous
Duration 1 count
MIL Operation Immediately
Sequence of Operation None

U0073: CAN Bus Off
U0401: TCM Communication Counter


U0073: CAN Bus Off
The CAN controller performs confirmation of bus by 50 msec. period and becomes 1 count or
bus off consecutively. more
U0401: TCM Communication Counter
Communication counter is not count up

50 count
(Check communication counter value by 10ms period)
Communication counter is not count up

40 count
(Check communication counter value by 10ms period)
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT
NEXT GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001RRQ05JX

U0100,U0122,U0140,U0155: Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A" (2013 FR-S)
DTC U0122 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
DTC U0140 Lost Communication with Body Control Module
Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module

DTC U0155
(Combination Meter)
DESCRIPTION
The TCM receives and transmits signals from each ECU using CAN communication.
HINT:
Problems on the CAN bus (communication line) can be detected from the DLC3 connector (Except
when the DLC3 branch line is open).
By using the Techstream, it is possible to check CAN communication DTC.
The DLC3 is connected to the CAN communication line, but the CAN communication is unable to
detect problems on the DLC3 branch line.

3. MALFUNCTION TIME
4. OTHER

2. Signal from the ECM is interrupted. CAN communication
U0100
3. 500 ms, 800 ms, 2000 ms (differs depending on ID) system

2. Signal from the skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
CAN communication
U0122 is interrupted.
system
3. 800 ms

2. Signal from the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) is
CAN communication
U0140 interrupted.
system
3. 800 ms, 20000 ms (differs depending on ID)

2. Signal from combination meter assembly is interrupted. CAN communication
U0155
3. 2000 ms system
MONITOR STRATEGY
U0100: Lost Communication with TCM
Related DTCs
U0122: Lost Communication with VSC
U0100: TCM
Required Sensors/Components
U0122: Skid Control ECU
Duration 1 count


Frame ID Lost communication with TCM
U0122: Lost Communication with VSC
Frame ID Lost communication with VSC
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT


Result:
U0100, U0122, U0140 or U0155 A
U0100, U0122, U0140 or U0155 and P160A B
B GO TO P160A
2. CHECK DTC OUTPUT
NEXT GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O9X031X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT:

COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O9Z03PX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT:

DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE REFILL PLUG

(a) Remove the refill plug.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the refill plug.
2. REMOVE TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH
(a) Remove the nut, spring washer and the transmission

control shaft lever RH from the park/neutral position
switch assembly.
3. REMOVE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.
(b) Remove the nut and the lock washer.
(c) Remove the bolt and the park/neutral position switch assembly from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
Make sure that the manual valve lever shaft has not been rotated prior to installing the park/neutral
position switch assembly as the detent spring may become detached from the manual valve lever shaft.
4. REMOVE OIL COOLER TUBE UNION

(a) Remove the 2 oil cooler tube union from the automatic
transmission case sub-assembly.
5. REMOVE TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 transmission revolution

sensors from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the 2 transmission revolution sensors.
6. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION BREATHER TUBE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the automatic transmission

breather tube from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
7. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CASE PLUG

(a) Remove the 5 automatic transmission case plugs from the
automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the 5 O-rings from the 5 automatic transmission case plugs.
(c) Using "TORX" socket wrench T55, remove the automatic

transmission case plug from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the O-ring from the automatic transmission case plug.
8. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION HOUSING
(a) Remove the 10 bolts and the automatic transmission

housing from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
9. REMOVE EXTENSION HOUSING DUST DEFLECTOR

(a) Using a brass bar and a hammer, tap out the extension
housing dust deflector from the extension housing sub-
assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the extension housing sub-
assembly.
10. REMOVE EXTENSION HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Using a screwdriver, remove the extension housing sub-

assembly from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not pry the surface where the extension housing
sub-assembly contacts the automatic transmission case
sub-assembly.
HINT:
Tape the screwdriver tip before use.
11. REMOVE TRANSMISSION CASE ADAPTER RADIAL BALL BEARING
(a) Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring from the
extension housing sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the transmission case adapter radial ball bearing from the extension housing sub-
assembly.
12. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL
(a) Using a screwdriver, pry out the automatic transmission

extension housing oil seal from the extension housing
sub-assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the extension housing sub-
assembly.
HINT:
13. REMOVE OUTPUT SHAFT THRUST BEARING
(a) Using a snap ring expander, remove the snap ring from
the output shaft of the rear planetary gear assembly.
(b) Remove the rear output shaft thrust bearing race, output shaft thrust bearing and the output shaft
thrust bearing race.
14. SECURE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the automatic transmission case sub-assembly to

an overhaul attachment.
15. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not turn the transmission over as this will contaminate the valve body with foreign matter
located at the bottom of the oil pan.
(a) Using a socket hexagon wrench 5 mm, remove the overflow plug and gasket.
(b) Remove the drain plug and gasket.
(c) Remove the 20 bolts, automatic transmission oil pan sub-

assembly and the automatic transmission oil pan gasket.
(d) Remove the 3 transmission oil cleaner magnets from the

automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly.
*1 Transmission Oil Cleaner Magnet
(e) Examine the particles in the automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly.
(1) Collect any steel chips with the removed transmission oil cleaner magnets. Carefully inspect the
foreign matter and particles in the automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly and on the
transmission oil cleaner magnets to anticipate the type of wear you will find in the automatic
Steel (magnetic): bearing, gear and clutch plate wear
Brass (non-magnetic): bush wear
16. REMOVE VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

(a) Turn over the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and the valve body oil strainer
assembly from the transmission valve body assembly.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the valve body oil strainer
assembly.
*1 O-ring
17. REMOVE TRANSMISSION WIRE
(a) Remove the bolt and the temperature sensor clamp, and
separate the ATF temperature sensor.
(b) Remove the bolt and the valve body wire harness clamp.
(c) Disengage the wire harness clamp.
(d) Disconnect the 9 solenoid valve connectors.

(e) Remove the bolt and pull out the transmission wire.
(f) Remove the O-ring from the transmission wire.
*1 O-ring
18. REMOVE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt, detent spring cover and the detent
spring from the transmission valve body assembly.
(b) Remove the 19 bolts and the transmission valve body

assembly from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
(c) Disconnect the manual valve connecting rod sub-

assembly from the manual valve lever sub-assembly.
*1 Manual Valve Connecting Rod Sub-assembly
*2 Manual Valve Lever Sub-assembly
19. REMOVE TRANSMISSION CASE GASKET
(a) Remove the 3 transmission case gaskets from the

20. REMOVE BRAKE DRUM GASKET
(a) Remove the 3 brake drum gaskets from the automatic

21. REMOVE CHECK BALL BODY
(a) Remove the check ball body and the compression spring
from the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
*1 Check Ball Body
*2 Compression Spring
22. REMOVE C-2 ACCUMULATOR PISTON

(a) While blowing compressed air into the oil hole, remove
the C-2 accumulator piston and the spring from the
NOTICE:
Take care as the C-3 and B-3 accumulator pistons may
jump out.
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the C-2 accumulator piston.
(c) Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring and the spring
sub-assembly from the C-2 accumulator piston.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the C-2 accumulator piston.
HINT:
23. REMOVE B-3 ACCUMULATOR PISTON

(a) While blowing compressed air into the oil hole, remove the B-3 accumulator piston and the spring
NOTICE:
Take care as the C-3 accumulator piston may jump out.
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the B-3 accumulator piston.
sub-assembly from the B-3 accumulator piston.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the B-3 accumulator piston.
HINT:
24. REMOVE C-3 ACCUMULATOR PISTON
(a) While blowing compressed air into the oil hole, remove
the C-3 accumulator piston and the 2 springs from the
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the C-3 accumulator piston.
sub-assembly from the C-3 accumulator piston.
NOTICE:
HINT:
25. REMOVE B-1 ACCUMULATOR VALVE
(a) Remove the B-1 accumulator valve and the spring from
the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
26. REMOVE PARKING LOCK PAWL BRACKET
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and the parking lock pawl bracket
27. REMOVE PARKING LOCK ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the parking lock rod sub-assembly from the
manual valve lever sub-assembly.
28. REMOVE PARKING LOCK PAWL SHAFT
(a) Pull out the parking lock pawl shaft from the front side,
and remove the parking lock pawl and the torsion spring.
*1 Parking Lock Pawl
*2 E-ring
*3 Parking Lock Pawl Shaft
*4 Torsion Spring
(b) Remove the E-ring from the parking lock pawl shaft.
29. REMOVE MANUAL VALVE LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a screwdriver and a hammer, cut off the spacer

and remove it from the manual valve lever shaft.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the manual valve lever shaft.
HINT:
(b) Using a pin punch 3 mm and a hammer, drive out the

spring pin.
HINT:
Slowly drive out the spring pin so that it does not fall into the
(c) Pull the manual valve lever shaft out through the case and remove the manual valve lever sub-
assembly.
30. REMOVE MANUAL VALVE LEVER SHAFT OIL SEAL
(a) Using a screwdriver, pry out the 2 manual valve lever

shaft oil seals from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
31. REMOVE OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(b) Using a screwdriver, pull out the oil pump assembly from
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the oil pump assembly or
HINT:
(c) Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing race from the oil pump
assembly.
*1 No. 1 Thrust Bearing Race
*2 Oil Pump Assembly
*3 O-ring
(d) Remove the O-ring from the oil pump assembly.
32. REMOVE CLUTCH DRUM AND INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clutch drum and input shaft assembly from
(b) Remove the clutch drum thrust washer, thrust needle

roller bearing, input shaft front thrust bearing race and
the input shaft front thrust needle roller bearing from the
clutch drum and input shaft assembly.
*1 Thrust Needle Roller Bearing
*2 Input Shaft Front Thrust Bearing Race
*3 Input Shaft Front Thrust Needle Roller Bearing
*4 Clutch Drum Thrust Washer

33. REMOVE NO. 2 ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the No. 2 one-way clutch assembly and the input
shaft clutch drum thrust washer from the clutch drum and
input shaft assembly.
*1 No. 2 One-way Clutch Assembly
*2 Input Shaft Clutch Drum Thrust Washer
34. SUPPORT CLUTCH DRUM AND INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Place the oil pump assembly onto the torque converter
assembly, and then place the clutch drum and input shaft
assembly onto the oil pump assembly.
*1 Torque Converter Assembly
35. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring from the

reverse clutch piston sub-assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the reverse clutch piston sub-
assembly.
HINT:
(b) Remove the reverse clutch hub sub-assembly from the

reverse clutch drum sub-assembly.
36. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH REACTION SLEEVE
(a) Remove the reverse clutch reaction sleeve from the

reverse clutch hub sub-assembly.
37. REMOVE NO. 3 CLUTCH DISC (REAR CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Remove the clutch cushion plate, reverse clutch flange, 4

No. 3 clutch discs and the 3 No. 3 clutch plates from the
*1 No. 3 Clutch Disc
*2 No. 3 Clutch Plate
*3 Reverse Clutch Flange
*4 Clutch Cushion Plate
38. REMOVE FORWARD CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the forward clutch hub sub-assembly and the

No. 3 clutch hub thrust washer from the reverse clutch
drum sub-assembly.
*1 Forward Clutch Hub Sub-assembly
*2 No. 3 Clutch Hub Thrust Washer
(b) Remove the 2 thrust needle roller bearings and the No. 2
thrust bearing race from the forward clutch hub sub-
assembly.

39. REMOVE COAST CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the coast clutch hub sub-assembly from the

(a) Remove the No. 4 one-way clutch assembly and the No.
2 clutch hub thrust washer from the coast clutch hub sub-
assembly.
*1 Coast Clutch Hub Sub-assembly
41. REMOVE NO. 1 CLUTCH DISC (FORWARD CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the input shaft.
HINT:

(b) Remove the forward clutch flange, 4 No. 1 clutch discs, 4
No. 1 clutch plates and the clutch cushion plate from the
input shaft.
*4 Forward Clutch Flange
42. REMOVE NO. 4 CLUTCH DISC (COAST CLUTCH DISC)
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the forward clutch piston sub-
assembly.
HINT:
(b) Remove the coast clutch flange, 4 No. 4 clutch discs and
the 4 No. 4 clutch plates from the forward clutch piston
sub-assembly.
*3 Coast Clutch Flange
43. REMOVE INPUT SHAFT
(a) Remove the thrust needle roller bearing and the input
shaft rear thrust bearing race from the input shaft.
*2 Input Shaft Rear Thrust Bearing Race
(b) Remove the input shaft from the reverse clutch drum
sub-assembly.
44. REMOVE CLUTCH DRUM OIL SEAL RING
(a) Remove the 4 clutch drum oil seal rings from the input
shaft.
45. REMOVE NO. 1 CLUTCH BALANCER
(a) Place SST on the No. 1 clutch balancer, and compress the
forward clutch return spring sub-assembly with a press.
SST: 09387-00110
(b) Using SST, remove the snap ring.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
(c) Remove the No. 1 clutch balancer and the forward clutch
return spring sub-assembly from the input shaft.
*1 No. 1 Clutch Balancer
*2 Forward Clutch Return Spring Sub-assembly
(d) Remove the D-ring from the No. 1 clutch balancer.
*1 D-ring
46. REMOVE FORWARD CLUTCH PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Hold the forward clutch piston sub-assembly and apply

compressed air (392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi) to the
input shaft to remove the forward clutch piston sub-
assembly.
(b) Remove the coast clutch piston from the forward clutch
piston sub-assembly.
*1 Coast Clutch Piston
*2 Forward Clutch Piston Sub-assembly

(c) Remove the O-ring from the input shaft.
*1 O-ring
47. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH FLANGE
(a) Remove the reverse clutch flange from the reverse clutch
drum sub-assembly.
48. REMOVE NO. 2 CLUTCH DISC (DIRECT CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the 2 snap rings from the

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
HINT:
(b) Remove the direct clutch flange, 5 No. 2 clutch discs and
the 5 No. 2 clutch plates from the reverse clutch drum
sub-assembly.
*3 Direct Clutch Flange
49. REMOVE NO. 3 CLUTCH BALANCER
reverse clutch return spring sub-assembly with a press.
SST: 09387-00070
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
(c) Remove the No. 3 clutch balancer.
50. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the reverse clutch return spring sub-assembly

and O-ring from the reverse clutch piston sub-assembly.
*1 Reverse Clutch Return Spring Sub-assembly
*2 O-ring
*3 Reverse Clutch Piston Sub-assembly

51. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the reverse clutch piston sub-assembly from the

*2 Reverse Clutch Drum Sub-assembly
(b) Remove the O-ring from the reverse clutch piston sub-
assembly.
*1 O-ring
(c) Remove the O-ring from the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
*1 O-ring
52. REMOVE DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
direct clutch return spring sub-assembly with a press.
SST: 09320-89010
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
(c) Remove the No. 2 clutch balancer and the direct clutch
return spring sub-assembly.
*2 O-ring
*3 Direct Clutch Return Spring Sub-assembly
(d) Remove the O-ring from the No. 2 clutch balancer.
(e) Using 2 screwdrivers, remove the direct clutch piston

sub-assembly from the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the direct clutch piston sub-
assembly.
HINT:

(f) Remove the 2 O-rings from the direct clutch piston sub-
assembly.
*1 O-ring
53. REMOVE NO. 3 BRAKE DISC (2ND BRAKE DISC SET)

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
(b) Remove the No. 3 brake flange, 3 No. 3 brake discs and
the 3 No. 3 brake plates from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*1 No. 3 Brake Plate
*2 No. 3 Brake Disc
*3 No. 3 Brake Flange
54. REMOVE 2ND BRAKE CYLINDER
(a) Using SST, remove the snap ring from the automatic
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07060
(b) Remove the 2nd brake cylinder from the automatic
55. REMOVE 2ND BRAKE PISTON
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring and the No. 3
brake piston return spring sub-assembly from the 2nd
brake cylinder.
*1 Snap Ring
*2 No. 3 Brake Piston Return Spring Sub-assembly
*3 2nd Brake Cylinder
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the 2nd brake cylinder.
HINT:
(b) Hold the 2nd brake piston and apply compressed air (392
kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi) to the 2nd brake cylinder to
remove the 2nd brake piston.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings from the 2nd brake piston.
*1 O-ring
56. REMOVE ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the one-way clutch assembly and the No. 1

planetary carrier thrust washer from the automatic
*1 One-way Clutch Assembly
*2 No. 1 Planetary Carrier Thrust Washer
57. REMOVE FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the front planetary gear assembly and the one-
way clutch inner race sub-assembly from the automatic
*1 One-way Clutch Inner Race Sub-assembly
*2 Front Planetary Gear Assembly
(b) Remove the front planetary flange rear thrust bearing

race, front planetary flange thrust needle roller bearing
and the No. 2 planetary carrier thrust washer from the
*1 Front Planetary Flange Rear Thrust Bearing Race
*2 Front Planetary Flange Thrust Needle Roller Bearing
58. REMOVE FRONT PLANETARY RING GEAR
(a) Remove the front planetary ring gear from the automatic
59. REMOVE CENTER PLANETARY RING GEAR
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the front planetary ring gear.
HINT:
(b) Remove the center planetary ring gear from the front planetary ring gear.
(c) Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the center planetary ring
gear.
HINT:
(d) Remove the front planetary ring gear flange sub-assembly from the center planetary ring gear.
60. REMOVE NO. 1 BRAKE DISC
(a) Remove the No. 1 brake flange, 3 No. 1 brake discs and
the 3 No. 1 brake plates from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*2 No. 1 Brake Disc

61. REMOVE BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
(b) Remove the brake piston return spring sub-assembly and

the No. 1 brake cylinder from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*1 Brake Piston Return Spring Sub-assembly
*2 No. 1 Brake Cylinder
62. REMOVE NO. 1 BRAKE PISTON
(a) Hold the No. 1 brake piston and apply compressed air
(392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi) to the No. 1 brake
cylinder to remove the No. 1 brake piston.
HINT:
If the piston does not pop out with compressed air, lift the
piston out with needle-nose pliers.
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the No. 1 brake piston.

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
(b) Remove the 2 No. 2 brake flanges, 4 No. 2 brake discs, 3

No. 2 brake plates and the No. 2 brake piston return
spring sub-assembly from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*2 No. 2 Brake Disc
(a) Hold the No. 2 brake piston and apply compressed air
(392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi) to the transmission case
to remove the No. 2 brake piston and the No. 2 brake
cylinder.
HINT:
(b) Remove the No. 2 brake piston from the No. 2 brake cylinder.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings from the No. 2 brake piston.
65. REMOVE CENTER PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the center planetary gear assembly, planetary

sun gear, thrust needle roller bearing and the No. 4 thrust
bearing race from the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.

*3 Center Planetary Gear Assembly
*4 Planetary Sun Gear
66. REMOVE INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
(a) Using SST, remove the snap ring from the automatic
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07060
(b) Remove the intermediate shaft together with the No. 3

one-way clutch assembly from the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
(a) Remove the No. 3 one-way clutch assembly and the one-
way clutch inner race from the intermediate shaft.
*2 One-way Clutch Inner Race
68. REMOVE REAR PLANETARY RING GEAR FLANGE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the rear planetary ring gear flange sub-
assembly, No. 7 thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller
bearing and the No. 8 thrust bearing race from the
intermediate shaft.
*1 Rear Planetary Ring Gear Flange Sub-assembly
69. REMOVE BRAKE PLATE STOPPER SPRING
(a) Remove the brake plate stopper spring from the

(a) Remove the 2 No. 4 brake flanges, 5 No. 4 brake discs

and the 4 No. 4 brake plates from the automatic
*2 No. 4 Brake Disc
71. REMOVE REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the rear planetary gear assembly from the

(b) Remove the thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller
bearing and the No. 9 thrust bearing race from the rear
planetary gear assembly.
*1 Thrust Bearing Race
(c) Remove the thrust needle roller bearing from the

72. REMOVE 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Place SST on the 1st and reverse brake return spring
sub-assembly and compress the 1st and reverse brake
*1 Snap Ring
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07050
(b) Using SST, remove the snap ring and the 1st and reverse brake return spring sub-assembly.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
73. REMOVE BRAKE APPLY TUBE
(a) Remove the brake apply tube from the automatic

74. REMOVE 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE PISTON
(a) Hold the 1st and reverse brake piston and apply
compressed air (392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi) to the
transmission case to remove the 1st and reverse brake
piston.
HINT:
(b) Remove the O-ring from the 1st and reverse brake piston.
75. REMOVE BRAKE REACTION SLEEVE
(a) Using SST, remove the brake reaction sleeve from the
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07080
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the brake reaction sleeve.
(a) Using SST, remove the No. 4 brake piston from the
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07090
(b) Remove the 2 O-rings from the No. 4 brake piston.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O9W03YX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT: INSPECTION

(2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the free length of the

spring together with the spring seat.
Standard free length:

23.74 mm (0.935 in.)
If the free length is shorter than the standard free length,

replace the 1st and reverse brake return spring sub-
assembly.
2. INSPECT REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the rear planetary gear

pinion thrust clearance.
Standard clearance:
0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.00788 to 0.0236 in.)
If the clearance is more than the standard clearance,

replace the rear planetary gear assembly.
(b) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the

rear planetary gear bushing.

18.025 mm (0.710 in.)
If the inside diameter is more than the standard inside

diameter, replace the rear planetary gear assembly.
3. INSPECT PACK CLEARANCE OF NO. 4 BRAKE

(a) Make sure that the 1st and reverse brake piston moves
smoothly when applying and releasing compressed air
(392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi).
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the level difference

(dimension A) between the upper surface of the brake
apply tube and the contact surface of the No. 4 brake
flange at both ends across the 1st and reverse brake
piston diameter, and calculate the average.
NOTICE:
The 1st and reverse brake piston must be securely
installed to the end face of the transmission case.
HINT:
Dimension A = 23.32 to 24.18 mm (0.919 to 0.951 in.)
(c) Using a vernier caliper, and while applying compression

of 4.9 N (0.5 kgf, 1.1 lbf) or less, measure the thickness
(dimension B) of the 2 No. 4 brake flanges, 4 No. 4 brake
plates and the 5 No. 4 brake discs altogether at both ends
across a diameter, and calculate the average.
HINT:
Dimension B = 23.64 to 26.00 mm (0.931 to 1.023 in.)
Pack clearance = Dimension A - Dimension B - 0.18 mm

(0.00709 in.) + 1.8 mm (0.0709 in.)
Pack clearance:
0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.0197 to 0.0314 in.)
(d) If the pack clearance is outside the standard range, select and install a No. 4 brake flange that
brings the pack clearance to be within the standard range.
HINT:
There are 8 types of No. 4 brake flanges that can be used to adjust the pack clearance. Select the one
with the most appropriate thickness.
Thickness H:
PART NO. MARK THICKNESS H
SU003-03786 0 0 mm (0 in.)
SU003-03787 2 0.2 mm (0.00787 in.)
SU003-03788 4 0.4 mm (0.0157 in.)
SU003-03789 6 0.6 mm (0.0236 in.)
SU003-03790 8 0.8 mm (0.0315 in.)
SU003-03791 10 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
SU003-03792 12 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.)
SU003-03793 14 1.4 mm (0.0551 in.)
4. INSPECT NO. 4 BRAKE DISC
(a) Check whether the sliding surfaces of the discs, plates

and the flanges are worn or burnt.
If necessary, replace them.
NOTICE:
If the linings of the discs are peeled off or discolored, or if
any part of the printed numbers is damaged, replace all
the discs.
Before assembling new discs, soak them in ATF for at
least 15 minutes.
5. INSPECT INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
(a) Using a dial indicator, check the intermediate shaft

runout.
Standard runout:
0.03 mm (0.00118 in.)
If the runout is more than the standard, replace the

intermediate shaft with a new one.
(b) Using a micrometer, check the outer diameter of the

intermediate shaft at each point shown in the illustration.
Standard diameter:
A
22.962 to 22.975 mm (0.9041 to 0.9045 in.)
B
27.759 to 27.775 mm (1.0929 to 1.0935 in.)
If the outer diameter is less than the standard, replace the

intermediate shaft with a new one.
6. INSPECT NO. 3 ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Hold the rear planetary ring gear flange sub-assembly and turn the No. 3 one-way clutch
assembly.
Lock
Free
(b) Check that the No. 3 one-way clutch assembly turns freely when turned counterclockwise and locks
when turned clockwise.
If there is a problem with the No. 3 one-way clutch assembly, replace it.
7. INSPECT CENTER PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the center planetary gear

Standard clearance:
0.12 to 0.68 mm (0.00473 to 0.0267 in.)

replace the center planetary gear assembly.

and the flanges are worn or burnt.
NOTICE:
the discs.
least 15 minutes.
9. INSPECT NO. 2 BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY


22.66 mm (0.892 in.)

replace the No. 2 brake piston return spring sub-
assembly.
10. INSPECT PISTON STROKE OF NO. 2 BRAKE PISTON
(a) Make sure that the No. 2 brake piston moves smoothly
when applying and releasing compressed air (392 kPa, 4.0
kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi).
(b) Using SST and a dial indicator, measure the moving
distance (distance A) of the No. 2 brake disc at both ends
across a diameter while blowing air (392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm
2 , 57 psi) into the oil hole as shown in the illustration,
and calculate the average.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-06120
Piston stroke:
0.6 to 0.9 mm (0.0237 to 0.0354 in.)
(c) If the piston stroke is outside the standard range, select and install a No. 2 brake flange that brings
the piston stroke within the standard range.
HINT:
There are 8 types of No. 2 brake flanges that can be used to adjust the piston stroke. Select one with
the most appropriate thickness.
Flange Thickness:
PART NO. MARK THICKNESS
SU003-03771 0 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
SU003-03772 1 2.1 mm (0.0827 in.)
SU003-03773 2 2.2 mm (0.0866 in.)
SU003-03774 3 2.3 mm (0.0906 in.)
SU003-03775 4 2.4 mm (0.0945 in.)
SU003-03776 5 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
SU003-03777 6 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
SU003-03778 7 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
11. INSPECT BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY


17.05 mm (0.671 in.)

replace the brake piston return spring sub-assembly.
12. INSPECT FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the front planetary gear

Standard clearance:
0.20 to 0.60 mm (0.00788 to 0.0236 in.)

replace the front planetary gear assembly.
(b) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the inside diameter of

the front planetary gear bushing.

48.78 mm (1.92 in.)

diameter, replace the front planetary gear assembly.
13. INSPECT ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the one-way clutch assembly to the one-way clutch inner race sub-assembly.
Lock
Free
(b) Hold the one-way clutch inner race sub-assembly and turn the one-way clutch assembly.
(c) Check that the one-way clutch assembly turns freely when turned counterclockwise and locks when
turned clockwise.
If there is a problem with the one-way clutch assembly, replace it.
(d) Remove the one-way clutch assembly from the one-way clutch inner race sub-assembly.
(a) Make sure that the No. 1 brake piston moves smoothly
when applying and releasing compressed air (392 kPa, 4.0
kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi).
(b) Using a vernier caliper, and while applying compression

of 4.9 N (0.5 kgf, 1.1 lbf) or less, measure the level
difference (dimension A) between the upper surface of the
No. 1 brake piston and the contact surface of the No. 1
brake flange at both ends across the No. 1 brake piston
diameter.
(c) Using a vernier caliper, measure the thickness (dimension B) of the No. 1 brake flange, 3 No. 1
brake plates and the 3 No. 1 brake discs altogether at both ends across a diameter, and calculate
the average.
HINT:
Dimension A = 15.27 to 15.92 mm (0.602 to 0.626 in.)
Dimension B = 14.50 to 15.54 mm (0.571 to 0.611 in.)
Piston stroke = Dimension A - Dimension B
Piston stroke:
0.42 to 0.72 mm (0.0166 to 0.0283 in.)
(d) If the piston stroke is outside the standard range, parts may have been assembled incorrectly, so
check and reassemble them again.
(e) If the piston stroke is still outside the standard range, select another No. 1 brake flange that brings
the piston stroke within the standard range.
HINT:
There are 4 types of No. 1 brake flanges that can be used to adjust the piston stroke. Select one with
the most appropriate thickness.
Flange Thickness:
SU003-03765 0 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.)
SU003-03766 1 2.2 mm (0.0866 in.)
SU003-03767 2 2.4 mm (0.0945 in.)
SU003-03768 3 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)

and the flange are worn or burnt.
NOTICE:
any part of the groove is damaged, replace all the discs.
least 15 minutes.
16. INSPECT NO. 3 BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY


15.72 mm (0.619 in.)

replace the No. 3 brake piston return spring sub-
assembly.
17. INSPECT NO. 3 BRAKE DISC (2ND BRAKE DISC SET)

NOTICE:
the discs.
least 15 minutes.

(a) Hold the reverse clutch hub sub-assembly and turn the No. 2 one-way clutch assembly.
Lock
Free
(b) Check that the No. 2 one-way clutch assembly turns freely when turned clockwise and locks when
turned counterclockwise.
19. INSPECT INDIVIDUAL PISTON OPERATION
(a) Check the operating sound while applying compressed air

into the oil holes indicated in the illustration.
*a No. 1 Clutch
*b No. 2 Clutch
*c No. 3 Clutch
*d No. 4 Clutch
*e No. 1 Brake
*f No. 2 Brake
*g No. 3 Brake
*h No. 4 Brake (In)
*i No. 4 Brake (Out)
HINT:
When inspecting the direct clutch, check the operating sound

with the C3 accumulator piston hole closed.
If there is no sound, disassemble the parts and check the

installation condition of the parts.

(a) Hold the coast clutch hub sub-assembly and turn the No. 4 one-way clutch assembly.
Lock
Free
(b) Check that the No. 4 one-way clutch assembly turns freely when turned clockwise and locks when
turned counterclockwise.
21. INSPECT DIRECT CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY


20.02 mm (0.788 in.)

replace the direct clutch return spring sub-assembly.
22. INSPECT REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY


21.03 mm (0.828 in.)

replace the reverse clutch return spring sub-assembly.
23. INSPECT NO. 2 CLUTCH DISC (DIRECT CLUTCH DISC)

NOTICE:
If the linings of the discs are peeled off or discolored, or
even a part of the printed numbers is damaged, replace
all the discs.
least 15 minutes.
24. INSPECT PACK CLEARANCE OF NO. 2 CLUTCH
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the moving distance

(distance A) of the direct clutch flange at both ends across
a diameter while blowing air (392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57
psi) into the oil hole as shown in the illustration, and
calculate the average.
HINT:
Flange moving distance A = 0.24 to 1.12 mm (0.00944 to

0.0440 in.)
Pack clearance = Flange moving distance A - 0.03 mm

(0.00118 in.)
Pack clearance:
0.5 to 0.8 mm (0.0197 to 0.0314 in.)
NOTICE:
When measuring the moving distance, install a standard
flange {thickness: 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)} to the position
indicated by the shaded area in the illustration.
(b) If the pack clearance is outside the standard range, select and install a direct clutch flange that
brings the pack clearance within the standard range.
HINT:
There are 9 types of direct clutch flanges that can be used to adjust the pack clearance. Select the one
Flange Thickness:
SU003-03756 0 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
SU003-03757 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
SU003-03758 2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
SU003-03759 3 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
SU003-03760 4 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
SU003-03761 5 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
SU003-03762 6 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
SU003-03763 7 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
SU003-03764 8 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)

(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the reverse clutch piston stroke (distance A) and the moving
distance (distance B) of the reverse clutch flange at both ends across a diameter while blowing air
(392 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi) into the oil hole as shown in the illustration, and calculate the
average.
HINT:
Piston stroke A = 1.62 to 2.68 mm (0.0638 to 0.105 in.)
Flange moving distance B = 1.22 to 1.67 mm (0.0481 to 0.0657 in.)
Pack clearance = Piston stroke A - Flange moving distance B - 0.02 mm (0.000787 in.)
Pack clearance:
0.4 to 0.7 mm (0.0158 to 0.0275 in.)
NOTICE:
When measuring the moving distance, install a standard flange {thickness: 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)}
to the position indicated by the shaded area in the illustration.
(b) If the pack clearance is outside the standard range, select and install a reverse clutch flange that
HINT:
There are 12 types of reverse clutch flanges that can be used to adjust the pack clearance. Select the
one with the most appropriate thickness.
Flange Thickness:
SU003-03725 0 2.4 mm (0.0945 in.)
SU003-03726 1 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.)
SU003-03727 2 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
SU003-03728 3 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
SU003-03729 4 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
SU003-03730 5 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
SU003-03731 6 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
SU003-03732 7 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)

SU003-03733 8 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
SU003-03734 9 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
SU003-03735 A 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
SU003-03736 B 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
26. INSPECT FORWARD CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY


26.29 mm (1.04 in.)

replace the forward clutch return spring sub-assembly.
27. INSPECT NO. 4 CLUTCH DISC (COAST CLUTCH DISC)

NOTICE:
all the discs.
least 15 minutes.

(distance A) of the forward clutch flange at both ends
across a diameter while blowing air (196 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm
2 , 28 psi) into the oil hole as shown in the illustration,
and calculate the average.
HINT:

0.00669 in.)

(0.000394 in.)
Pack clearance:
0.56 to 0.86 mm (0.0221 to 0.0338 in.)
NOTICE:
(b) If the pack clearance is outside the standard range, select and install a forward clutch flange that
HINT:
There are 10 types of forward clutch flanges that can be used to adjust the pack clearance. Select the
one with the most appropriate thickness.
Flange Thickness:
SU003-03712 0 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
SU003-03713 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
SU003-03714 2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
SU003-03715 3 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
SU003-03716 4 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
SU003-03717 5 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
SU003-03718 6 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
SU003-03719 7 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
SU003-03720 8 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
SU003-03721 9 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
29. INSPECT NO. 1 CLUTCH DISC (FORWARD CLUTCH DISC)

NOTICE:
all the discs.
least 15 minutes.

(distance A) of the coast clutch flange at both ends across
a diameter while blowing air (196 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 28
psi) into the oil hole as shown in the illustration, and
calculate the average.
HINT:

0.0397 in.)

(0.000394 in.)
Pack clearance:
0.4 to 0.7 mm (0.0158 to 0.0275 in.)
NOTICE:
(b) If the pack clearance is outside the standard range, select and install a coast clutch flange that
HINT:
There are 10 types of coast clutch flanges that can be used to adjust the pack clearance. Select the one
Flange Thickness:
SU003-03746 0 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
SU003-03747 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
SU003-03748 2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
SU003-03749 3 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
SU003-03750 4 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
SU003-03751 5 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)

SU003-03752 6 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
SU003-03753 7 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
SU003-03754 8 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
SU003-03755 9 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
31. INSPECT FORWARD CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the

forward clutch hub bushing.

23.037 to 23.062 mm (0.9070 to 0.9079 in.)

diameter, replace the forward clutch hub sub-assembly.
32. INSPECT NO. 3 CLUTCH DISC (REAR CLUTCH DISC)

NOTICE:
all the discs.
least 15 minutes.
33. INSPECT REVERSE CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY

reverse clutch hub bushing.

33.312 to 33.337 mm (1.3115 to 1.3124 in.)

diameter, replace the reverse clutch hub sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000OA003RX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT: REASSEMBLY

(2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. BEARING POSITION
MARK FRONT RACE DIAMETER THRUST BEARING DIAMETER REAR RACE DIAMETER
INSIDE / OUTSIDE INSIDE / OUTSIDE INSIDE / OUTSIDE
74.2 mm (2.921 in.) / 87.7 71.9 mm (2.831 in.) / 85.6

A -
mm (3.453 in.) mm (3.370 in.)
37.0 mm (1.457 in.) / 51.2 33.5 mm (1.319 in.) / 48.0

B -
mm (2.016 in.) mm (1.890 in.)
20.0 mm (0.787 in.) / 35.6 20.0 mm (0.787 in.) / 41.0

C -
mm (1.402 in.) mm (1.614 in.)
31.0 mm (1.220 in.) / 48.0 33.3 mm (1.311 in.) / 51.2
D -
mm (1.890 in.) mm (2.016 in.)
42.5 mm (1.673 in.) / 61.2

E - -
mm (2.409 in.)
34.9 mm (1.374 in.) / 50.8 38.6 mm (1.520 in.) / 53.1

F -
mm (1.999 in.) mm (2.091 in.)
58.5 mm (2.303 in.) / 73.5 55.2 mm (2.173 in.) / 71.2

G -
mm (2.894 in.) mm (2.803 in.)
29.6 mm (1.165 in.) / 44.9 27.8 mm (1.095 in.) / 43.8 27.8 mm (1.095 in.) / 43.7
H
mm (1.768 in.) mm (1.726 in.) mm (1.721 in.)
19.0 mm (0.748 in.) / 35.0 20.8 mm (0.819 in.) / 38.5

I -
mm (1.378 in.) mm (1.516 in.)
43.3 mm (1.705 in.) / 56.7 40.6 mm (1.598 in.) / 58.0

J -
mm (2.232 in.) mm (2.284 in.)
37.0 mm (1.457 in.) / 51.2 36.1 mm (1.421 in.) / 52.5 36.1 mm (1.421 in.) / 51.0
K
mm (2.016 in.) mm (2.067 in.) mm (2.007 in.)
2. INSTALL NO. 4 BRAKE PISTON
(a) Coat 2 new O-ring with ATF, and install them to the
brake reaction sleeve.
*1 Brake Reaction Sleeve
*2 No. 4 Brake Piston
*3 O-ring
(b) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the No. 4 brake piston.
(c) Install the No. 4 brake piston to the brake reaction sleeve.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the O-rings.
3. INSTALL BRAKE REACTION SLEEVE
(a) With the No. 4 brake piston underneath (the rear side),
install the brake reaction sleeve and the No. 4 brake
piston to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
*1 Brake Reaction Sleeve
*2 No. 4 Brake Piston
NOTICE:
4. INSTALL 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE PISTON
(a) Coat a new O-rings with ATF, and install it to the 1st and
reverse brake piston.
*1 1st and Reverse Brake Piston
(b) With the spring seat of the 1st and reverse brake piston facing upwards (the front side), place the
1st and reverse brake piston in the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the O-ring.
5. INSTALL 1ST AND REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Place the 1st and reverse brake return spring sub-assembly onto the 1st and reverse brake piston.
(b) Place SST on the 1st and reverse brake return spring
sub-assembly, and compress the 1st and reverse brake
*1 Snap Ring
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07050
(c) Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
6. INSTALL BRAKE APPLY TUBE
(a) Install the brake apply tube with its protruding part fitting
into the groove of the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Engage the 1st and reverse brake piston claw with the
protrusion of the brake apply tube.
7. INSTALL REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the thrust needle roller bearing to the automatic

Bearing Diameter
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE
Thrust needle roller 40.6 mm (1.598 58.0 mm (2.284

bearing in.) in.)
(b) Install the thrust needle roller bearing to the rear

planetary gear assembly.
*1 Thrust Bearing Race
Bearing and Race Diameter
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE

bearing in.) in.)
19.0 mm (0.748 35.0 mm (1.378

Thrust bearing race
in.) in.)
No. 9 thrust bearing 43.3 mm (1.705 56.7 mm (2.232

race in.) in.)
(c) Coat the No. 9 thrust bearing race and the thrust bearing race with petroleum jelly, and install
them onto the rear planetary gear assembly.
(d) Install the rear planetary gear assembly to the automatic

8. INSPECT PACK CLEARANCE OF NO. 4 BRAKE
9. INSTALL NO. 4 BRAKE DISC
(a) Install the 2 No. 4 brake flanges, 5 No. 4 brake discs and
the 4 No. 4 brake plates to the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*2 No. 4 Brake Disc
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *1
NOTICE:
Make sure that the discs, plates and the flanges are
installed in the correct order.
10. INSTALL BRAKE PLATE STOPPER SPRING
(a) Install the brake plate stopper spring to the automatic

11. INSTALL REAR PLANETARY RING GEAR FLANGE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 8 thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller
bearing, No. 7 thrust bearing race and the rear planetary
ring gear flange sub-assembly to the intermediate shaft.
*1 Rear Planetary Ring Gear Flange Sub-assembly
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE

race in.) in.)

bearing in.) in.)

race in.) in.)
12. INSTALL NO. 3 ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 3 one-way clutch assembly and the one-
way clutch inner race to the intermediate shaft.
*2 One-way Clutch Inner Race
13. INSTALL INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
(a) Install the intermediate shaft together with the No. 3

one-way clutch assembly to the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
(b) Using SST, install the snap ring to the automatic
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07060
14. INSTALL CENTER PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the center planetary gear assembly and the

planetary sun gear to the automatic transmission case
sub-assembly.
*3 Center Planetary Gear Assembly
*4 Planetary Sun Gear
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE

bearing in.) in.)

race in.) in.)
(b) Coat the No. 4 thrust bearing race with petroleum jelly, and install it onto the center planetary gear
assembly.
(c) Install the thrust needle roller bearing to the center planetary gear assembly.
(a) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the No.
2 brake piston.
*1 O-ring
(b) Press the No. 2 brake piston into the No. 2 brake cylinder.
NOTICE:
(c) Install the No. 2 brake piston to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
HINT:
Install the No. 2 brake cylinder so that the projection protrudes from the upside of the automatic
(d) Check that the oil pressure apply hole of the No. 2 brake
cylinder aligns with the oil pressure apply hole of the
(a) Install the No. 2 brake piston return spring sub-assembly

to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly as
*a Identification shape
NOTICE:
Make sure that the identification shape of the No. 2
brake piston return spring sub-assembly faces the
upper right side as shown in the illustration.
(b) Install the 2 No. 2 brake flanges, 4 No. 2 brake discs and
case sub-assembly.
*2 No. 2 Brake Disc
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *1
NOTICE:
Make sure that the discs, plates and the flanges are
(c) Using SST and a screwdriver, compress the No. 2 brake
piston return spring sub-assembly and install the snap
ring to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07020
SST: 09380-60010
09381-06030
09381-06050
09381-06080
09381-06090
09381-06100
09381-06110
NOTICE:
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
(a) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the No.
1 brake piston.
*1 O-ring
(b) Press the No. 1 brake piston into the No. 1 brake cylinder.
NOTICE:
19. INSTALL BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the brake piston return spring sub-assembly and

the No. 1 brake cylinder to the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*1 Brake Piston Return Spring Sub-assembly
*2 No. 1 Brake Cylinder
HINT:
Install the No. 1 brake cylinder so that the projection

protrudes from the upside of the automatic transmission case
sub-assembly.
(b) Check that the oil pressure apply hole of the No. 1 brake
(c) Using SST and a screwdriver, compress the brake piston

return spring sub-assembly and install the snap ring to
*1 Protective Tape
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07020
SST: 09351-40010
09351-04010
09351-04020
NOTICE:
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
20. INSTALL CENTER PLANETARY RING GEAR
(a) Install the front planetary ring gear flange sub-assembly

to the center planetary ring gear.
*1 Protective Tape
(b) Using a screwdriver, install the snap ring.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the center planetary ring gear.
HINT:
(c) Install the center planetary ring gear to the front planetary ring gear.
(d) Using a screwdriver, install the snap ring.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the front planetary ring gear.
Install the snap ring to the front planetary ring gear so
that both ends of the snap ring come to the center of a
protrusion on the front planetary ring gear.
HINT:
21. INSTALL FRONT PLANETARY RING GEAR
(a) Install the front planetary ring gear to the automatic

22. INSTALL FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 2 planetary carrier thrust washer and the
front planetary flange thrust needle roller bearing.
*1 Front Planetary Flange Rear Thrust Bearing Race
*2 Front Planetary Flange Thrust Needle Roller Bearing
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE
Front planetary flange thrust 38.6 mm 53.1 mm

needle roller bearing (1.520 in.) (2.091 in.)
Front planetary flange rear 34.9 mm 50.8 mm

thrust bearing race (1.374 in.) (1.999 in.)
(b) Coat the front planetary flange rear thrust bearing race with petroleum jelly, and install it onto the
front planetary ring gear.
(c) Install the front planetary gear assembly and the one-
way clutch inner race sub-assembly to the automatic
*1 One-way Clutch Inner Race Sub-assembly
*2 Front Planetary Gear Assembly
(a) Install the No. 1 brake flange, 3 No. 1 brake discs and
case sub-assembly.
*2 No. 1 Brake Disc
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *3
NOTICE:
Make sure that the discs, plates and the flange are
25. INSTALL ONE-WAY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 1 planetary carrier thrust washer and the
one-way clutch assembly to the automatic transmission
case sub-assembly.
*1 One-way Clutch Assembly
26. INSTALL 2ND BRAKE PISTON
(a) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the 2nd
brake piston.
*1 O-ring
(b) Press the 2nd brake piston into the 2nd brake cylinder.
NOTICE:
(c) Using a screwdriver, install the No. 3 brake piston return

spring sub-assembly to the 2nd brake cylinder with the
snap ring.
*1 Snap Ring
*3 2nd Brake Cylinder
NOTICE:
Be sure that the end gap of the snap ring is not aligned
with the spring retainer claw.
Be careful not to damage the 2nd brake cylinder.
HINT:
27. INSTALL 2ND BRAKE CYLINDER

(a) Install the 2nd brake cylinder to the automatic
(b) Check that the oil pressure apply hole of the 2nd brake
(c) Using SST, install the snap ring to the automatic

SST: 09350-30020
09350-07060
28. INSTALL NO. 3 BRAKE DISC (2ND BRAKE DISC SET)
(a) Install the No. 3 brake flange, 3 No. 3 brake discs and
case sub-assembly.
*2 No. 3 Brake Disc
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *3
NOTICE:
(b) Using a screwdriver, install the snap ring to the

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
case sub-assembly.
HINT:
29. INSTALL DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the
direct clutch piston sub-assembly.
*1 O-ring
(b) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the No. 2
clutch balancer.
*1 O-ring
(c) Install the No. 2 clutch balancer and the direct clutch
return spring sub-assembly to the direct clutch piston
sub-assembly.
*1 Direct Clutch Piston Sub-assembly
*2 Direct Clutch Return Spring Sub-assembly

(d) Press the direct clutch piston sub-assembly into the reverse clutch drum sub-assembly by hands.
NOTICE:
(e) Place SST on the No. 2 clutch balancer, and compress the
direct clutch return spring sub-assembly with a press.
SST: 09320-89010
NOTICE:
Stop pressing when the spring sheet is lowered to the
place 1 to 2 mm (0.0394 to 0.0787 in.) from the snap
ring groove to prevent the spring sheet from being
deformed.
(f) Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
NOTICE:
Be sure that the end gap of the snap ring is not aligned with the spring retainer claw.
Do not expand the snap ring excessively.
(g) Set the end gap of the snap ring in the No. 2 clutch
balancer as shown in the illustration.
*1 Stopper
30. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the reverse
clutch drum sub-assembly.
*1 O-ring
(b) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the reverse
clutch piston sub-assembly.
*1 O-ring
(c) Press the reverse clutch drum sub-assembly into the

reverse clutch piston sub-assembly with both hands.
*2 Reverse Clutch Drum Sub-assembly
NOTICE:
31. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the reverse
*1 Reverse Clutch Return Spring Sub-assembly
*2 O-ring
(b) Install the reverse clutch return spring sub-assembly to the reverse clutch piston sub-assembly.
32. INSTALL NO. 3 CLUTCH BALANCER

(a) Install the No. 3 clutch balancer to the reverse clutch
(b) Place SST on the No. 3 clutch balancer, and compress the reverse clutch return spring sub-
assembly with a press.
SST: 09387-00070
NOTICE:
Stop pressing when the spring sheet is lowered to the place 1 to 2 mm (0.0394 to 0.0787 in.)
from the snap ring groove to prevent the spring sheet from being deformed.
(c) Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
NOTICE:
(d) Set the end gap of the snap ring in the No. 3 clutch
*1 Snap Ring
*a Correct
*b Incorrect
33. INSTALL NO. 2 CLUTCH DISC (DIRECT CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Install the direct clutch flange, 5 No. 2 clutch discs and
the 5 No. 2 clutch plates to the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.

*3 Direct Clutch Flange
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *3
NOTICE:
(b) Using a screwdriver, install the 2 snap rings to the

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
HINT:
35. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH FLANGE
(a) Install the reverse clutch flange to the reverse clutch

drum sub-assembly.
36. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH REACTION SLEEVE
(a) Install the clutch cushion plate, reverse clutch flange, 4

No. 3 clutch discs, 3 No. 3 clutch plates and the reverse
clutch reaction sleeve to the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
*5 Reverse Clutch Reaction Sleeve
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *3 - *4 - *5
NOTICE:
Make sure that the discs, plates, flange, sleeve and the
cushion plate are installed in the correct order.
(b) Using a screwdriver, install the snap ring to the reverse

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
assembly.
HINT:
38. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH REACTION SLEEVE

reverse clutch piston sub-assembly.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
assembly.
HINT:

(b) Remove the reverse clutch reaction sleeve, clutch cushion
plate, reverse clutch flange, 4 No. 3 clutch discs and the 3
No. 3 clutch plates from the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
39. INSTALL FORWARD CLUTCH PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the coast clutch piston to the forward clutch piston
sub-assembly.
*1 Coast Clutch Piston
*2 Forward Clutch Piston Sub-assembly
(b) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the input
shaft.
*1 O-ring
(c) Install the forward clutch piston sub-assembly to the input shaft.
40. INSTALL NO. 1 CLUTCH BALANCER
(a) Coat a new D-ring with ATF, and install it to the No. 1
clutch balancer.
*2 D-ring
(b) Install the No. 1 clutch balancer and the forward clutch
return spring sub-assembly to the input shaft.
*2 Forward Clutch Return Spring Sub-assembly
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the D-ring.
(c) Place SST on the No. 1 clutch balancer, and compress the
forward clutch return spring sub-assembly with a press.
SST: 09387-00110
NOTICE:
Stop pressing when the spring sheet is lowered to the
place 1 to 2 mm (0.0394 to 0.0787 in.) from the snap
ring groove to prevent the spring sheet from being
deformed.
(d) Using SST, Install the snap ring.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07070
NOTICE:
(e) Set the end gap of the snap ring in the No. 1 clutch
*1 Snap Ring
*a Correct
*b Incorrect
41. INSTALL NO. 4 CLUTCH DISC (COAST CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Install the coast clutch flange, 4 No. 4 clutch discs and
the 4 No. 4 clutch plates to the forward clutch piston sub-
assembly.
*3 Coast Clutch Flange
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *3
NOTICE:
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the forward clutch piston sub-
assembly.
HINT:
43. INSTALL NO. 1 CLUTCH DISC (FORWARD CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Install the forward clutch flange, 4 No. 1 clutch discs, 4

No. 1 clutch plates and the clutch cushion plate to the
input shaft.
*4 Forward Clutch Flange
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *2 - *3 - *4
NOTICE:
Make sure that the discs, plates, flange and the cushion
plate are installed in the correct order.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the input shaft.
HINT:
45. INSTALL CLUTCH DRUM OIL SEAL RING
(a) Coat 4 new clutch drum oil seal rings with ATF.
(b) Squeeze the ends of the 4 clutch drum oil seal rings together, and install them to the input shaft
groove.
NOTICE:
Do not expand the ring ends excessively.
HINT:
After installing the clutch drum oil seal rings, check that they rotate smoothly.
46. INSTALL INPUT SHAFT
(a) Install the input shaft to the reverse clutch drum sub-
assembly.
(b) Install the input shaft rear thrust bearing race and the
thrust needle roller bearing to the input shaft.
*2 Input Shaft Rear Thrust Bearing Race
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE
20.0 mm 41.0 mm
Thrust needle roller bearing
(0.787 in.) (1.614 in.)
Input shaft rear thrust 20.0 mm 35.6 mm

bearing race (0.787 in.) (1.402 in.)
(a) Install the No. 2 clutch hub thrust washer and the No. 4
one-way clutch assembly to the coast clutch hub sub-
assembly.
*1 Coast Clutch Hub Sub-assembly
48. INSTALL COAST CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the coast clutch hub sub-assembly to the reverse
clutch drum sub-assembly.
49. INSTALL FORWARD CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 2 thrust needle roller bearings and the No. 2
thrust bearing race to the forward clutch hub sub-
assembly.
*1 Thrust Needle Roller Bearing A
*2 Thrust Needle Roller Bearing B
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE

bearing A in.) in.)

bearing B in.) in.)
31.0 mm (1.220 48.0 mm (1.890

No. 2 thrust bearing race
in.) in.)
(b) Install the No. 3 clutch hub thrust washer and the
forward clutch hub sub-assembly to the reverse clutch
drum sub-assembly.
*1 Forward Clutch Hub Sub-Assembly
50. INSTALL NO. 3 CLUTCH DISC (REAR CLUTCH DISC)
(a) Install the clutch cushion plate, reverse clutch flange, 4

No. 3 clutch discs and the 3 No. 3 clutch plates to the
Installation order:
*1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *2 - *1 - *3 - *4
NOTICE:
Make sure that the discs, plates, flange and the cushion
plate are installed in the correct order.
51. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH REACTION SLEEVE
(a) Install the reverse clutch reaction sleeve to the reverse

clutch hub sub-assembly.
52. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH HUB SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the reverse clutch hub sub-assembly to the

(b) Using a screwdriver, install the snap ring to the reverse

*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
assembly.
HINT:
(a) Install the input shaft clutch drum thrust washer and the
No. 2 one-way clutch assembly to the clutch drum and
input shaft assembly.
*2 Input Shaft Clutch Drum Thrust Washer
54. INSTALL CLUTCH DRUM AND INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the input shaft front thrust needle roller bearing
and the thrust needle roller bearing to the clutch drum
and input shaft assembly.
*2 Input Shaft Front Thrust Bearing Race
*3 Input Shaft Front Thrust Needle Roller Bearing
*4 Clutch Drum Thrust Washer
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE
71.9 mm 85.6 mm
Thrust needle roller bearing
(2.831 in.) (3.370 in.)
Input shaft front thrust bearing 37.0 mm 51.2 mm

race (1.457 in.) (2.016 in.)
Input shaft front thrust needle 33.5 mm 48.0 mm

roller bearing (1.319 in.) (1.890 in.)
(b) Coat the input shaft front thrust bearing race and the clutch drum thrust washer with petroleum
jelly, and install them onto the clutch drum and input shaft assembly.
(c) Install the clutch drum and input shaft assembly to the
55. INSTALL OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 1 thrust bearing race to the oil pump
assembly.
*3 O-ring
Race Diameter
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE

race in.) in.)
(b) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the oil pump assembly.
(c) Place the oil pump assembly through the input shaft, and align the bolt holes of the oil pump
assembly with the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the O-ring.
(d) Hold the input shaft, and lightly press the oil pump assembly to slide the clutch drum oil seal rings
into the clutch drum and input shaft assembly.
(e) Install the 9 bolts.

56. INSPECT INDIVIDUAL PISTON OPERATION
57. INSTALL MANUAL VALVE LEVER SHAFT OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST and a hammer, drive in 2 new manual valve

lever shaft oil seals to the automatic transmission case
sub-assembly.
SST: 09350-30020
09350-07110
(b) Coat the manual valve lever shaft oil seal lips with MP grease.
58. INSTALL MANUAL VALVE LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a new spacer to the manual valve lever sub-

assembly.
*1 Spacer
(b) Install the manual valve lever shaft to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly through the
manual valve lever sub-assembly.
(c) Using a hammer, drive in a new spring pin.

(d) Align the manual valve lever indentation with the spacer
hole, and stake them together with a punch.
(e) Make sure that the shaft rotates smoothly.
59. INSTALL PARKING LOCK PAWL SHAFT

(a) Install a new E-ring to the parking lock pawl shaft.
(b) Install the parking lock pawl, parking lock pawl shaft and
the torsion spring to the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly.
*2 E-ring
*3 Parking Lock Pawl Shaft
*4 Torsion Spring
60. INSTALL PARKING LOCK ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the parking lock rod sub-assembly to the manual

valve lever sub-assembly.
61. INSTALL PARKING LOCK PAWL BRACKET
(a) Install the parking lock pawl bracket to the automatic

transmission case sub-assembly with the 3 bolts.
(b) Shift the manual valve lever sub-assembly to the P

position, and confirm that the rear planetary gear is
correctly locked by the parking lock pawl.
*1 Rear Planetary Gear
62. INSTALL B-1 ACCUMULATOR VALVE
(a) Install the spring and the B-1 accumulator valve to the
hole.
B-1 Accumulator Spring
FREE LENGTH OUTER DIAMETER COLOR
46.36 mm (1.825 in.) 17.1 mm (0.673 in.) Natural
63. INSTALL C-3 ACCUMULATOR PISTON
(a) Using a screwdriver, install the spring sub-assembly to

the C-3 accumulator piston with the snap ring.
C-3 Accumulator Spring Sub-assembly
FREE LENGTH COIL OUTER DIAMETER COLOR
23.0 mm (0.906 in.) 14.0 mm (0.551 in.) Pink
NOTICE:
HINT:

(b) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the C-3
accumulator piston.
*1 O-ring
*2 Inner Spring
*3 Outer Spring
(c) Install the 2 springs and the C-3 accumulator piston to the hole.
C-3 Accumulator Spring
SPRING FREE LENGTH OUTER DIAMETER COLOR
Inner 44.0 mm (1.732 in.) 14.0 mm (0.551 in.) Yellow
Outer 76.65 mm (3.018 in.) 20.1 mm (0.791 in.) White
64. INSTALL B-3 ACCUMULATOR PISTON

the B-3 accumulator piston with the snap ring.
B-3 Accumulator Spring Sub-assembly
30.0 mm (1.181 in.) 16.2 mm (0.638 in.) White
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the B-3 accumulator piston.
HINT:
(b) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the B-3
accumulator piston.
*1 O-ring
*2 Spring
(c) Install the spring and the B-3 accumulator piston to the hole.
B-3 Accumulator Spring

64.50 mm (2.539 in.) 19.5 mm (0.768 in.) Orange
65. INSTALL C-2 ACCUMULATOR PISTON

the C-2 accumulator piston with the snap ring.
C-2 Accumulator Spring Sub-assembly
18.50 mm (0.728 in.) 14.0 mm (0.551 in.) Green
NOTICE:
HINT:
(b) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the C-2
accumulator piston.
*1 O-ring
*2 Spring
(c) Install the spring and the C-2 accumulator piston to the hole.
C-2 Accumulator Spring
65.07 mm (2.562 in.) 16.2 mm (0.638 in.) Pink
66. INSTALL CHECK BALL BODY
(a) Install the check ball body and the compression spring to
*1 Check Ball Body
67. INSTALL BRAKE DRUM GASKET
(a) Install 3 new brake drum gaskets to the automatic

68. INSTALL TRANSMISSION CASE GASKET
(a) Install 3 new transmission case gaskets to the automatic

69. INSTALL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Connect the manual valve connecting rod sub-assembly

to the manual valve lever sub-assembly.
(b) Install the transmission valve body assembly to the

automatic transmission case sub-assembly with the 19
bolts.
HINT:
Each bolt length is indicated below.
Bolt length:
Bolt A
25 mm (0.984 in.)
Bolt B
36 mm (1.42 in.)
Bolt C
45 mm (1.77 in.)
Bolt D
50 mm (1.97 in.)
(c) Install the detent spring and the detent spring cover to
the transmission valve body assembly with the bolt.
70. INSTALL TRANSMISSION WIRE
(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the

transmission wire.
*1 O-ring
(b) Install the transmission wire with the bolt.

(c) Connect the 9 solenoid valve connectors.
(d) Coat the ATF temperature sensor O-ring with ATF.
(e) Install the ATF temperature sensor and the temperature

sensor clamp with the bolt.
(f) Install the valve body wire harness clamp with the 2 bolt.
(g) Engage the wire harness clamp.
71. INSTALL VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY
(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the valve
body oil strainer assembly.
*1 O-ring
(b) Install the valve body oil strainer assembly to the
transmission valve body assembly with the 4 bolts.
72. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 3 transmission oil cleaner magnets to the

(b) Install a new automatic transmission oil pan gasket and

the automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly with the
20 bolts.
(c) Install the drain plug and a new gasket.
(d) Using a socket hexagon wrench 5 mm, install the overflow plug and a new gasket.
73. INSTALL OUTPUT SHAFT THRUST BEARING

(a) Install the output shaft thrust bearing race, output shaft thrust bearing and the rear output shaft
thrust bearing race to the output shaft of the rear planetary gear assembly.
ITEM INSIDE OUTSIDE
Output shaft thrust bearing race 37.0 mm (1.457 in.) 51.2 mm (2.016 in.)
Output shaft thrust bearing 36.1 mm (1.421 in.) 52.5 mm (2.067 in.)
Rear output shaft thrust bearing race 36.1 mm (1.421 in.) 51.0 mm (2.007 in.)
(b) Using a snap ring expander, install the snap ring.
(c) Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the snap ring and the rear output shaft
thrust bearing race.
Standard clearance:
0.02 to 0.12 mm (0.000787 to 0.00472 in.)
If the clearance is outside the standard range, select another rear output shaft thrust bearing race
that brings the clearance within the standard range.
HINT:
There are 12 different thicknesses for the rear output shaft thrust bearing race.
Race Thickness
SU003-03819 3.80 mm (0.150 in.)
SU003-03820 3.85 mm (0.152 in.)
SU003-03821 3.90 mm (0.154 in.)

SU003-03822 3.95 mm (0.156 in.)
SU003-03823 4.00 mm (0.157 in.)
SU003-03824 4.05 mm (0.159 in.)
SU003-03825 4.10 mm (0.161 in.)
SU003-03826 4.15 mm (0.163 in.)
SU003-03827 4.20 mm (0.165 in.)
SU003-03828 4.25 mm (0.167 in.)
SU003-03829 4.30 mm (0.169 in.)
SU003-0383 4.35 mm (0.171 in.)
74. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST and a hammer, drive in the automatic

transmission extension housing oil seal to the extension
housing sub-assembly.
SST: 09309-37010
Drive in depth:
5.4 to 5.8 mm (0.213 to 0.228 in.)
(b) Coat the lip of a new automatic transmission extension housing oil seal with MP grease.
75. INSTALL EXTENSION HOUSING DUST DEFLECTOR
(a) Using SST and a press, install a new extension housing

dust deflector to the extension housing sub-assembly.
SST: 09950-60020
09951-01030
76. INSTALL TRANSMISSION CASE ADAPTER RADIAL BALL BEARING
(a) Install the transmission case adapter radial ball bearing

to the extension housing sub-assembly.
(b) Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring to the extension housing sub-assembly.
77. INSTALL EXTENSION HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Clean and degrease the threads of the 6 bolts and the contact surfaces of the case and the housing
with non-residue solvent.
(b) Apply seal packing to the extension housing sub-

Seal Packing
*a
(Seal Diameter: 1.2 mm (0.0472 in.))
Seal packing:
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1281, Three Bond 1281 or
equivalent
NOTICE:
Assemble the extension housing sub-assembly within 10
minutes after the seal packing application.
(c) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads on the end of the 6

bolts.
*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
Toyota Genuine Adhesive 1344, Three Bond 1344 or
equivalent
(d) Install the extension housing sub-assembly to the

bolts.
HINT:
Each bolt length is indicated below.
Bolt length:
for Bolt A
35 mm (1.378 in.)
for Bolt B
45 mm (1.772 in.)
78. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION HOUSING

(a) Clean and degrease the bolts and the bolt holes with non-residue solvent.
(b) Install the automatic transmission housing to the

bolts.

(c) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads on the end of the 4
bolts.
*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(d) Install the automatic transmission housing to the

bolts.
Bolt A (M10 bolt) - Torque: 34 N·m (345 kgf·cm,

25ft·lbf)
Bolt B (M12 bolt) - Torque: 57 N·m (579 kgf·cm,
42ft·lbf)
79. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CASE PLUG
(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the

automatic transmission case plug.
(b) Using "TORX" socket wrench T55, install the automatic transmission case plug to the automatic

(c) Coat 5 new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the 5
automatic transmission case plug.
(d) Install the 5 automatic transmission case plugs to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly.
80. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION BREATHER TUBE
(a) Install the automatic transmission breather tube to the

bolts.
81. INSTALL TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR
(a) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the 2
transmission revolution sensors.
(b) Install the 2 transmission revolution sensors to the automatic transmission case sub-assembly with
the 2 bolts.
82. INSTALL OIL COOLER TUBE UNION

(a) Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install the 2 oil cooler tube unions.
(b) Install the 2 oil cooler tube unions to the automatic

83. INSTALL PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Clean the bolt and the bolt hole.
(b) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads on the end of the bolt.
*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(c) Temporarily install the park/neutral position switch
assembly to the automatic transmission case sub-
assembly with the bolt.
(d) Install a new lock washer and the nut.
(e) Turn the transmission control shaft lever RH

counterclockwise until it stops, and turn it clockwise 2
notches to set it to the N position.
(f) Align the neutral basic line with the groove as shown in
the illustration, and tighten the bolt.
*a Neutral Basic Line
*b Groove
(g) Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.
84. INSTALL TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH

(a) Install the transmission control shaft lever RH to the
park/ neutral position switch assembly with the spring
washer and nut.
85. INSTALL REFILL PLUG

(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the refill plug.
(b) Install the refill plug.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRX01LX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EXTENSION HOUSING REAR OIL SEAL:
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRY01VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: EXTENSION HOUSING REAR OIL SEAL:
REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
2. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL
(a) Using SST, remove the automatic transmission extension

housing oil seal.
SST: 09308-00010
3. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING OIL SEAL

(a) Coat the lip of a new automatic transmission extension housing oil seal with MP grease.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the automatic

transmission extension housing oil seal.
SST: 09325-40010
Standard depth:
5.4 to 5.8 mm (0.213 to 0.228 in.)
NOTICE:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOE01SX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OIL COOLER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOC026X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OIL COOLER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the transmission oil cooler to the transmission oil cooler bracket with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the 2 new oil cooler hoses to the transmission oil cooler with the 2 hose clamps.
(c) Install the transmission oil cooler with the 3 bolts.
2. CONNECT WATER BY-PASS HOSE

(a) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses to the transmission oil cooler with the 2 hose clamps.
3. CONNECT TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE

(a) Connect the 2 oil cooler hoses with the 2 hose clamps.
(b) Install the clip as shown in the illustration.
*a Paint Mark
5. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
6. INSPECT FOR ENGINE COOLANT LEAK
7. INSPECT FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VVP010X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: ON-
VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

(a) Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) Depress the brake pedal and check that the engine starts when the shift lever is in N or P, but does
not start when the shift lever is in other positions.
(c) Check that the back-up light illuminates and the reverse warning buzzer sounds only when the
shift lever is in R.
If a malfunction failure is found, check the park/neutral position switch assembly for continuity.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOF026X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: OIL COOLER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. DRAIN ENGINE COOLANT
4. DISCONNECT TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE
(a) Loosen the 2 hose clamps and disconnect the 2 oil cooler
hoses from the transmission oil cooler.
NOTICE:
the oil cooler hoses.
5. DISCONNECT WATER BY-PASS HOSE
(a) Loosen the 2 hose clamps and disconnect the 2 water by-
pass hoses.
NOTICE:
the water by-pass hoses.
6. REMOVE TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and the transmission oil cooler.

(b) Loosen the 2 hose clamps and remove the 2 oil cooler
hoses from the transmission oil cooler.
(c) Remove the clip from the oil cooler hoses.
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and the transmission oil cooler from
the transmission oil cooler bracket.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOB01OX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH:

ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. DISCONNECT TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH

(b) Remove the nut and spring washer, and disconnect the
transmission control shaft lever RH.
2. ADJUST PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt of the park/neutral position switch

assembly.
(b) Clean the bolt and the bolt hole.
(c) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads on the end of the bolt.
*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(d) Align the neutral basic line with the groove as shown in
the illustration.
*b Groove
(e) Hold the park/neutral position switch assembly in position and install the bolt.
3. CONNECT TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH

(a) Connect the transmission control shaft lever RH with the spring washer and nut.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOE01RX

COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOD01OX

INSPECTION

table below.

*a
(Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly)

2 (RB) - 6 (PL) Shift lever in P Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Shift lever not in P 10 kΩ or higher
Shift lever in R Below 1 Ω

2 (RB) - 1 (RL)
Shift lever not in R 10 kΩ or higher
2 (RB) - 9 (NL) Shift lever in N Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Shift lever not in N 10 kΩ or higher
Shift lever in D, M, "+"

Below 1 Ω
or "-"
2 (RB) - 7 (DL)
Shift lever not in D, M,
10 kΩ or higher
"+" or "-"
If the result is not as specified, replace the park/neutral

position switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOC025X

INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Clean the bolt and the bolt hole.
(b) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads on the end of the bolt.
*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(c) Temporarily install the park/neutral position switch assembly with the bolt.
HINT:
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque when adjusting the park/neutral position switch assembly.
(d) Install a new lock washer and the nut to the park/neutral position switch assembly.
(e) Temporarily install the transmission control shaft lever RH.
(f) Turn the transmission control shaft lever RH

counterclockwise until it stops, and turn it clockwise 2
notches to set it to the N position.
(g) Remove the transmission control shaft lever RH.
(h) Align the neutral basic line with the groove as shown in
the illustration, and tighten the bolt.
*b Groove
(i) Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.
(j) Connect the park/neutral position switch connector.
2. INSTALL TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH

(a) Install the transmission control shaft lever RH with the spring washer and nut.
3. CONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly to the transmission control shaft lever RH with
the spacer, pin and clip.
HINT:
Install the pin from the right side of the vehicle.
4. INSTALL FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VVP010X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: ON-
VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)

(a) Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) Depress the brake pedal and check that the engine starts when the shift lever is in N or P, but does
not start when the shift lever is in other positions.
(c) Check that the back-up light illuminates and the reverse warning buzzer sounds only when the
shift lever is in R.
If a malfunction failure is found, check the park/neutral position switch assembly for continuity.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NOF025X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH: REMOVAL
(2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY
3. DISCONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clip and pin the floor shift gear shifting rod
sub-assembly from the transmission control shaft lever
RH.
4. REMOVE TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH
(a) Remove the nut, spring washer and the transmission

control shaft lever RH.
5. REMOVE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector.
(b) Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.

(c) Remove the nut and the lock washer from the
park/neutral position switch assembly.
(d) Remove the bolt and the park/neutral position switch

assembly.
HINT:
Make sure that the manual valve lever shaft has not been
rotated prior to installing the park/neutral position switch
assembly as the detent spring may become detached from the
manual valve lever shaft.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001T8Q01VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PATTERN SELECT SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NS8026X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PATTERN SELECT SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013
FR-S)
INSPECTION

table below.

*a
(Pattern Select Switch Assembly)
TESTER SWITCH CONDITION SPECIFIED

Pattern select (SNOW)

Below 1 Ω
switch on
6-8
Pattern select (SNOW)
10 kΩ or higher
switch off
Pattern select (SPORT)

Below 1 Ω
switch on
4-8
Pattern select (SPORT)
10 kΩ or higher
switch off
If the result is not as specified, replace the pattern select

switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001T8P02DX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PATTERN SELECT SWITCH: INSTALLATION

(2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the pattern select switch assembly with the 2 screws.
2. INSTALL UPPER CONSOLE PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001T8R02EX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: PATTERN SELECT SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-
S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE UPPER CONSOLE PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 screws and the pattern select switch

assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O9O02LX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
2. ADJUST SHIFT LEVER POSITION

(b) Using tape, hold a 0.3 mm feeler gauge on the floor shift
(c) Using tape, attach the floor shift control select lever to
NOTICE:
(d) Remove the nut and disconnect the floor shift gear
(e) Turn the transmission control shaft lever RH of the
the N position.
(f) Temporarily install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-
assembly with the nut.
(g) Tighten the nut while lightly pushing the lever rearward.
NOTICE:
5. INSPECT FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK

Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000191W01CX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER HOUSING
(a) Using a screw driver, disengage the claw and disconnect

the connector.
(b) Using a thin-bladed screwdriver, lift up the terminal

retainer of the transmission control switch connector to
release the lock.
(c) Using a thin-bladed screwdriver, pull out terminals 2, 3,

10 and 11 of the transmission control switch connector.
(d) Remove the shift lever lock nut and shift lever lock pin.
(e) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the floor shift shift
lever housing from the base plate.
2. REMOVE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the pin then remove the shift lock release arm
and shift lock control unit assembly.
(b) Remove the shift lock release arm from the shift lock
control unit assembly.
3. REMOVE DETENT ROD
(a) Remove the detent lock clamp.
(b) Remove the detent lock spring and detent lock rod.
(c) Remove the cushion detent lock from the detent lock rod.
(d) Remove the bush detent lock.
4. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER PLATE GROMMET
(a) Remove the shift lever plate grommet from the base
plate.
5. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHAFT LEVER
(a) Using a pin punch (3 mm (0.118 in.)) and a hammer,

drive out the spring pin.
(b) Remove the floor shift control shaft lever from the base
plate.
6. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SELECT LEVER
(a) Remove the floor shift support bracket and the floor shift
control shaft lever from the base plate.
7. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT SUPPORT BRACKET
(a) Remove the floor shift support bracket from the floor
shift control shaft lever.
(b) Remove the pin and the spring from the floor shift
support bracket.
8. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER SEAT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 spacer plates and shift lever seat sub-
assembly from the base plate.
9. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT CONNECTING ROD SWIVEL
(a) Remove the clip, 2 washers, grommet, pin and floor shift
connecting rod swivel from the select lever.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRZ01KX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY)

table below.

*a
(Transmission Control Switch (Shift Lever Assembly))

Shift lever in M
Shift lever held in
8-9
"+"
(Up shift) Below 1 Ω
10 - 11 Shift lever in M
Shift lever in M
Shift lever held in
12 - 13
"-"
(Down shift)
Shift lever in M
8-9 Shift lever not in
"+" 10 kΩ or higher
10 - 11 Shift lever not in M
Shift lever in M
12 - 13 Shift lever not in "-
"
If the result is not as specified, replace the transmission

control switch.
2. INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY (SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY)

table below.

*a
(Shift Lock Control Unit Assembly)
4-5 20°C (68°F) 27.6 to 30.5 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the shift lock

control unit assembly.
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install and tighten the 4 bolts in the sequence shown in

the illustration.
(c) Connect the 2 connectors.
3. CONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Using tape, hold a 0.3 mm feeler gauge on the floor shift
(c) Using tape, attach the floor shift control select lever to
NOTICE:
(d) Turn the transmission control shaft lever RH of the
the N position.
(e) Temporarily install the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly with the nut.
(f) Tighten the nut while lightly pushing the lever rearward.
NOTICE:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000OA902RX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013
FR-S)

(a) When moving the shift lever from P to R with the ignition switch to ON and the brake pedal
depressed, make sure that it moves smoothly and correctly into position.
(b) Check that the shift lever does not stop when moving the shift lever from R to P, and check that
the shift lever does not stick when moving the shift lever from D to M.
(c) Start the engine and make sure that the vehicle moves forward after moving the shift lever from N
to D and moves rearward after moving the shift lever to R.
If the operation cannot be performed as specified, inspect the park/neutral position switch assembly
and check the shift lock control unit assembly installation condition.
2. INSPECT SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

(a) Move the shift lever to P.
(c) Check that the shift lever cannot be moved from P.
(d) Turn the ignition switch to ON, depress the brake pedal and check that the shift lever can be
moved to other positions.
If the operation cannot be performed as specified, inspect the shift lock control unit assembly.
3. INSPECT SHIFT LOCK RELEASE BUTTON OPERATION

(a) When operating the shift lever with the shift lock release button pressed, check that the lever can
be moved to any position.
If the operation cannot be performed as specified, check the shift lock control unit assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000191X01CX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONNECTING ROD SWIVEL
(a) Install the 2 washers, grommet, pin and floor shift

connecting rod swivel to the select lever with the clip.
2. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER SEAT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the shift lever seat sub-assembly and the 4 spacer
plates to the base plate.
3. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT SUPPORT BRACKET
(a) Apply MP grease to the spring and pin.
(b) Install the spring and pin to the floor shift support bracket.
(c) Apply MP grease to the floor shift control shaft lever and
floor shift support bracket.
(d) Install the floor shift support bracket to the floor shift
control shaft lever.
4. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SELECT LEVER
(a) Install the floor shift support bracket and floor shift
control shaft lever to the base plate.
5. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT CONTROL SHAFT LEVER
(a) Install the floor shift control shaft lever to the base plate.
(b) Using a pin punch (3 mm (0.118 in.)) and a hammer,
install a new spring pin.
6. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER PLATE GROMMET
(a) Install the shift lever plate grommet to the base plate.
7. INSTALL DETENT ROD

(a) Install the bush detent lock.
(b) Install the cushion detent lock to the detent lock rod.
(c) Apply MP grease to the detent lock spring and detent lock
rod.
(d) Install the detent lock rod and detent lock spring.
(e) Install the detent lock clamp.
8. INSTALL SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSEMBLY

(b) Install the shift lock release arm to the shift lock control
unit assembly.
(c) Install the shift lock control unit assembly to the base
plate.
9. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER HOUSING

(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the floor shift shift lever
housing to the base plate.
(b) Install the shift lever lock nut and shift lever lock pin.
(c) Install the terminals 2, 3, 10 and 11 of the transmission

control switch connector.
(d) Lock the harness connector terminals.

(e) Engage the claw and install the connector.
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT LEVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. DISCONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Remove the nut and disconnect the floor shift gear
5. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER ASSEMBLY
(b) Disengage the wire harness clamp.

(c) Remove the 4 bolts and the shift lever assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001MAJ02VX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001MA803DX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-
S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)

table below.

*a
(Shift Paddle Switch (transmission shift switch assembly))

Pull continuously
"+" Below 1 Ω
1-3 (Up shift)
Release "+" 10 Ω or higher
Pull continuously
"-" Below 1 Ω
1-4 (Down shift)
Release "-" 10 Ω or higher
If the resistance value are not as specified, replace the

shift paddle switch (transmission shift switch assembly).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001MA7045X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)

(a) Install the shift paddle switch (transmission shift switch assembly) with 4 screws.
(b) Engage the clamp.
3. INSTALL STEERING PAD

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001MA9043X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE STEERING PAD
3. REMOVE SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Detach the clamp.
(b) Remove the 4 screws and remove the shift paddle switch
(transmission shift switch assembly).
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SPEED SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NR503MX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SPEED SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (NT)

table below.

*a
(Transmission Revolution Sensor (NT))
1-2 20°C (68°F) 560 to 680 Ω

revolution sensor (NT).
2. INSPECT TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (SP2)

table below.

*a
(Transmission Revolution Sensor (SP2))
1-2 20°C (68°F) 560 to 680 Ω

revolution sensor (SP2).
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SPEED SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (SP2)

(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the transmission revolution sensor (SP2).
(b) Install the transmission revolution sensor (SP2) with the bolt.
(c) Connect the transmission revolution sensor connector.
2. INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (NT)

(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the transmission revolution sensor (NT).
(b) Install the transmission revolution sensor (NT) with the bolt.
(c) Connect the transmission revolution sensor connector.

Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: SPEED SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (NT)
(a) Disconnect the transmission revolution sensor connector.

*1 O-ring
(b) Remove the bolt and the transmission revolution sensor (NT).
(c) Remove the O-ring from the transmission revolution sensor (NT).
5. REMOVE FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE TRANSMISSION REVOLUTION SENSOR (SP2)
(a) Disconnect the transmission revolution sensor connector.
*1 O-ring
(b) Remove the bolt and the transmission revolution sensor (SP2).
(c) Remove the O-ring from the transmission revolution sensor (SP2).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002ZA300BX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TCM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002ZA2009X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TCM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TCM
(a) Install the TCM bracket to the TCM with the 2 nuts.
(b) Install the 2 bolts and the TCM.
(c) Connect the 2 connectors.
HINT:
When the automatic transmission assembly, transmission valve body assembly, and TCM are replaced,
the TCM learning value must be cleared.
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TCM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE TCM
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the TCM.
(c) Remove the 2 nuts and the TCM bracket.

Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TORQUE CONVERTER AND DRIVE PLATE:
INSPECTION

(a) Inspect the one-way clutch.
(1) Install SST into the inner race of the one-way clutch.
SST: 09350-32014
09351-32010
(2) Set SST so that it fits in the notch of the torque converter hub and the outer race of the one-
way clutch.
SST: 09350-32014
09351-32020
(3) With the torque converter assembly standing on its side, check that the clutch locks when SST
is turned counterclockwise and rotates freely and smoothly when SST is turned clockwise.
Lock
Free
If the results are not as specified, clean the torque converter assembly and recheck the one-
way clutch.
If the results still are not as specified even after cleaning the torque converter assembly, replace
the torque converter assembly.
(b) Determine the condition of the torque converter

assembly.
Sample showing maximum allowable amount of powder in

*a
ATF
(1) Check that the following conditions are met:
During the stall test or when the shift lever is

in N, metallic sounds are not emitted from
the torque converter assembly.
The one-way clutch turns in one direction
and locks in the other direction.
The amount of powder in the ATF is not more
than the sample shown in the illustration.
If the results are not as specified,

replace the torque converter
assembly.
HINT:
The sample illustration shows approximately 0.025 liters

(0.026 US qts, 0.022 Imp. qts) of ATF taken from a removed
(c) Replace the ATF in the torque converter assembly.
(1) If the ATF is discolored and/or has a foul odor, stir the ATF in the torque converter assembly
thoroughly and drain the ATF with the torque converter assembly facing upward.
(d) Clean and check the transmission oil cooler.
(1) If the torque converter assembly is inspected or the

ATF is replaced, clean the transmission oil cooler.
HINT:
Apply compressed air at 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi)

into the inlet hose.
If a large amount of powder is found in the ATF, add new
ATF using a bucket pump and clean the transmission oil
cooler and oil pipe line again.
(2) If the ATF is cloudy, inspect the transmission oil cooler.
(e) Prevent deformation of the torque converter assembly

and damage to the oil pump gear.
*a Correct
*b Incorrect
*c Bottom is damaged
(1) When any marks due to interference are found on the

end of a bolt for the torque converter assembly and on
the bottom of the bolt hole, replace the bolt and
(2) Make sure all of the bolts are the same length.
(3) Make sure no spring washers are missing.
2. INSPECT DRIVE PLATE

(a) Check the drive plate for damage.
(b) Set up a dial indicator and measure the runout of the 6 portions around the torque converter
contact surfaces.
Measuring Point
Maximum runout:
0.30 mm (0.0118 in.)
If the runout is more than the maximum, or the drive plate is damaged, replace the drive plate
.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRG014X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TRANSMISSION WIRE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-
S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRF014X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TRANSMISSION WIRE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-
S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR (TRANSMISSION WIRE)

table below.

*a
(ATF Temperature Sensor (Transmission Wire))
1 (E2) - 9 (OIL) Always 79 Ω to 156 kΩ
1 (E2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
9 (OIL) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:
If the resistance is out of the specified range at any of the

ATF temperatures shown in the table below, the driveability of
the vehicle may decrease.
ATF TEMPERATURE SPECIFIED CONDITION
10°C (50°F) 5 to 8 kΩ
25°C (77°F) 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ
110°C (230°F) 0.22 to 0.28 kΩ
If the result is not as specified, replace the ATF

temperature sensor (transmission wire).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRE01GX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TRANSMISSION WIRE: INSTALLATION (2013

FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION WIRE

(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the transmission wire.
(b) Install the transmission wire with the bolt.
(c) Connect the transmission wire connector.
HINT:
Push up the lever until the claw of the transmission wire

connector makes a connection sound.
2. CONNECT TRANSMISSION WIRE

(a) Connect the 9 solenoid valve connectors.
(b) Coat the ATF temperature sensor O-ring with ATF.
(c) Install the ATF temperature sensor and the temperature sensor clamp with the bolt.
(d) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(e) Install the valve body wire harness clamp with the bolt.

(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the valve body oil strainer assembly.
(b) Install the valve body oil strainer assembly with the 4 bolts.
4. INSTALL TRANSMISSION OIL CLEANER MAGNET
(a) Install the 3 transmission oil cleaner magnets to the

automatic transmission oil pan sub-assembly as shown in
the illustration.

(a) Install a new automatic transmission oil pan gasket and the automatic transmission oil pan sub-
assembly with the 20 bolts.
NOTICE:
Remove the gasket and be careful not to spill oil on the contacting surfaces of the transmission
case and oil pan.
6. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRH01GX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: TRANSMISSION WIRE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 20 bolts, automatic transmission oil pan sub-

assembly and the automatic transmission oil pan gasket.
NOTICE:
Some fluid will remain in the automatic transmission oil
pan sub-assembly. Remove all the bolts and carefully
remove the automatic transmission oil pan sub-
assembly.
3. REMOVE TRANSMISSION OIL CLEANER MAGNET
(a) Remove the 3 transmission oil cleaner magnets from the

(b) Examine the particles in the automatic transmission oil

pan sub-assembly.
(1) Collect any steel chips with the removed transmission

oil cleaner magnets. Carefully inspect the foreign
matter and particles in the automatic transmission oil
pan sub-assembly and on the transmission oil cleaner
magnets to anticipate the type of wear you will find in
the automatic transmission assembly.
Steel (magnetic): bearing, gear and clutch plate wear
Brass (non-magnetic): bush wear

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and the valve body oil strainer
assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful as some fluid will come out of the valve body
oil strainer assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the valve body oil strainer
assembly.
*1 O-ring
5. DISCONNECT TRANSMISSION WIRE
(a) Remove the bolt and the temperature sensor clamp.
(b) Separate the ATF temperature sensor.
(c) Remove the bolt and the valve body wire harness clamp.
(d) Disengage the wire harness clamp.

(e) Disconnect the 9 solenoid valve connectors.
6. REMOVE TRANSMISSION WIRE
(a) Disconnect the transmission wire connector.
HINT:
Disengage the claw, press down the lever, and disconnect the
transmission wire connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and pull out the transmission wire.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the transmission wire.
*1 O-ring
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRN028X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013
FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O9L05YX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013
FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2
(a) Remove the bolt, lock plate and 2 straight pins.
(b) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2.
2. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU
(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLU.
3. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
(a) Remove the bolt, lock plate and 2 straight pins.
(b) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT.
4. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1

(a) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1.
5. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR
(a) Remove the bolt and the shift solenoid valve SR.
6. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4
(a) Remove the bolt, valve body wire harness clamp and the
shift solenoid valve S4.

(a) Remove the bolt and the shift solenoid valve S2.
(a) Remove the bolt and the shift solenoid valve S3.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000ODH04LX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013
FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1 AND SL2

table below.

*a
(Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 and SL2)
1-2 20°C (68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
(b) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 1 and the negative (-) lead to terminal
2 of the shift solenoid valve connector, then check the movement of the valve.
OK:
The solenoid makes an operating sound.
If the result is not as specified, replace the shift solenoid valve.

table below.

*a
(Shift Solenoid Valve S1)

CONDITION
Shift solenoid valve S1 connector
20°C
terminal - Shift solenoid valve S1 11 to 15 Ω
(68°F)
body
(b) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of the shift solenoid valve S1 connector, and the
negative (-) lead to the shift solenoid valve S1 body.
OK:
If the result is not as specified, replace the shift solenoid valve S1.

table below.

*a

CONDITION

20°C
(68°F)
body
OK:

table below.

*a

CONDITION

20°C
(68°F)
body
OK:

table below.

*a

CONDITION

20°C
(68°F)
body
OK:
6. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR

table below.

*a
(Shift Solenoid Valve SR)

CONDITION
Shift solenoid valve SR connector

20°C
terminal - Shift solenoid valve SR 11 to 15 Ω
(68°F)
body
(b) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of the shift solenoid valve SR connector, and the
negative (-) lead to the shift solenoid valve SR body.
OK:
If the result is not as specified, replace the shift solenoid valve SR.

table below.

*a
(Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)
1-2 20°C (68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
1 of the shift solenoid valve SLT connector, then check the movement of the valve.
OK:
If the result is not as specified, replace the shift solenoid valve SLT.

table below.

*a
(Shift Solenoid Valve SLU)
1-2 20°C (68°F) 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
1 of the shift solenoid valve SLU connector, then check the movement of the valve.
OK:
If the result is not as specified, replace the shift solenoid valve SLU.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRM020X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013
FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the check ball body and the compression spring.
*1 Check Ball Body and Compression Spring
*2 Accumulator Piston
(b) Check the accumulator pistons, check ball body and the compression spring shown in the
illustration.
(c) Connect the manual valve connecting rod sub-assembly to the manual valve lever sub-assembly.
(d) Install the transmission valve body assembly with the 19

bolts.

Bolt Length
BOLT BOLT LENGTH
A 25 mm (0.984 in.)
B 36 mm (1.42 in.)
C 45 mm (1.77 in.)
D 50 mm (1.97 in.)
(e) Install the detent spring and the detent spring cover with the bolt.
2. CONNECT TRANSMISSION WIRE
4. INSTALL TRANSMISSION OIL CLEANER MAGNET

8. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
9. INSPECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
11. INSPECT EXHAUST GAS LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000O9M05YX
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013
FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S3
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve S3 with the bolt.
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve S2 with the bolt.
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve S1.

(a) Install the valve body wire harness clamp, shift solenoid
valve S4 with the bolt.
5. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve SR with the bolt.

6. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve SL1.
7. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve SLT.
(b) Install the 2 straight pins and lock plate with the bolt.
8. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU

(a) Install the shift solenoid valve SLU.
9. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2
(a) Install the shift solenoid valve SL2.
(b) Install the 2 straight pins and lock plate with the bolt.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000NRO020X
Title: TX6A AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION / TRANSAXLE: VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. DRAIN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

(a) Remove the drain plug and gasket, and drain the ATF.
(b) Install the drain plug and a new gasket.
5. REMOVE TRANSMISSION OIL CLEANER MAGNET
7. DISCONNECT TRANSMISSION WIRE
8. REMOVE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt, detent spring cover and the detent
spring.
(b) Remove the 19 bolts and the transmission valve body

assembly.
(c) Disconnect the manual valve connecting rod sub-
assembly from the manual valve lever sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the check ball body and the compression spring.
*1 Check Ball Body
NOTICE:
Do not drop the check ball body and compression
spring.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000419K00HX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLANT: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
NOTICE:
Do not remove the radiator cap, cylinder block drain cock plugs and radiator drain cock plug
while the engine and radiator are still hot. Pressurized, hot engine coolant and steam may be
released and cause serious burns.
HINT:
Collect the coolant in a container and dispose of it according to the local regulations.
(a) Remove the service hole cover from the front bumper
under cover.
(b) Connect a hose with an inside diameter of 8 mm (0.315 in.) to the drain plug.
(c) Loosen the radiator drain cock plug.
(d) Open the air bleed plug on the heater hose side.
(e) Remove the radiator cap and drain the coolant.
HINT:
Before replenishing the coolant, turn the A/C switch off.
(a) Tighten the radiator drain cock plug.
(b) Pour in coolant of the specified density until it reaches the base of the entrance to the water inlet.
HINT:
The coolant contains anti-freeze and anti-rust agents for use with engines with aluminum cylinder
blocks. Using other than the specified coolant may cause rust, so be sure to use Toyota SLLC 50
Blue.
Crimp the inlet and outlet radiator hoses several times by hand, and add water if the water level in
the entrance water inlet drops.
The coolant quantity includes the quantity in the reserve tank.
(c) Open the air bleed plug on the heater hose side.
(d) If the water level in the entrance to the water inlet drops, pour coolant in until it reaches the base
of the entrance to the water inlet.
(e) Close the air bleed plug when the coolant begins to come out of the air bleed valve on the heater
hose side.
(f) Pour in coolant of the specified concentration until it reaches the "FULL" level of the radiator reserve
tank.
(g) Close the radiator cap. [*1]
(h) Start the engine, race it 5 to 6 times at under 3000 rpm or less, and then stop the engine. [*2]
HINT:
Finish this operation within 40 seconds.
(i) 1 minute after stopping the engine, remove the radiator cap and pour coolant in if the water level in
the entrance to the water inlet has dropped. [*3]
(j) Repeat operations [*1], [*2], and [*3] until the water level in the entrance to the water inlet does
not drop.
HINT:
Perform before the engine warms up, as the air that comes out of the inlet radiator hose will travel to
the radiator side when the engine warms up and the thermostat opens.
(k) Close the radiator cap and the radiator reserve tank cap.
(l) Start the engine, set the heater on full warm, and then run it with the blower speed set to "LO".
(m) Run the engine at 2000 rpm or less until the radiator fan starts and stops. [*4]
HINT:
To prevent overheating, pay attention to the water temperature.
(n) Stop the engine and wait until the coolant temperature drops to 30 °C (86 °F) or less. [*5]
(o) Remove the radiator cap and, if the volume of coolant has dropped, pour coolant in until it reaches
the base of the entrance to the water inlet and until it reaches the "FULL" level in the radiator
reserve tank. [*6]
(p) Close the radiator cap. [*7]
(q) Set the heater to full warm, and, with the blower speed set to "LO", race the engine at 3000 rpm
or less. [*8]
(r) At this point, if the engine coolant can be heard flowing in the heater core, repeat operations [*4],
[*5], [*6], [*7], and [*8].
(s) When the water level no longer drops, adjust the water
level so that the water level in the radiator reserve tank
reaches the "FULL" line.
3. INSPECT FOR COOLANT LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002BMP01CX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN MOTOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002BMO01NX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN MOTOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR

(a) Install the No. 2 cooling fan motor with the 3 screws.
2. INSTALL COOLING FAN MOTOR

(a) Install the cooling fan motor with the 3 screws.
(b) Connect the wire harness to the 2 cooling fan motors.
3. INSTALL NO. 2 FAN

(a) Install the No. 2 fan with the nut.
4. INSTALL FAN
(a) Install the fan with the nut.
5. INSTALL FAN SHROUD
HINT:
Insert a cardboard or a blanket between the radiator assembly and the fan shroud to protect the
radiator assembly.
(a) Engage the fitting sections in the bottom of the fan shroud with the fitting sections of the radiator
assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the outlet radiator hose, inlet radiator hose, No.1 radiator hose, water filler sub-
assembly, or air conditioner tube and accessory assembly.
(b) Attach the 2 claws and install the fan shroud to the radiator assembly.
(c) Connect the 2 cooling fan motor connectors and 2 clamps to the radiator assembly.
6. INSTALL RADIATOR SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
7. INSTALL RADIATOR COVER PLATE
8. REMOVE AIR CLEANER DUCT
9. CONNECT HOOD LOCK ASSEMBLY
10. INSTALL WATER FILLER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the water filler sub-assembly with the 4 bolts.

11. INSTALL RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ASSEMBLY
12. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER COVER
13. INSTALL AIR CLEANER CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000202U02NX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN MOTOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT COOLING FAN MOTOR
(a) Check that the motor operates smoothly when the

battery is connected to the cooling fan motor connector.

*a
(Cooling fan motor)
If the motor does not operate smoothly, replace the

cooling fan motor.
(b) Measure the current while the motor is operating.
Standard Current:
ITEM CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
Cooling fan motor 20°C (68°F) 7.4 to 11.4 A at 12 V
If the result is not as specified, replace the cooling fan motor.
2. INSPECT NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR
(a) Check that the motor operates smoothly when the

battery is connected to the No. 2 cooling fan motor
connector.

*a
(No. 2 cooling fan motor)
If the motor does not operate smoothly, replace the No. 2

cooling fan motor.
(b) Measure the current while the motor is operating.
Standard Current:
ITEM CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
No. 2 cooling fan motor 20°C (68°F) 7.4 to 11.4 A at 12 V

If the result is not as specified, replace the No. 2 cooling fan motor.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002BMQ01NX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN MOTOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR CLEANER CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER COVER
4. REMOVE RADIATOR COVER PLATE
5. REMOVE RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE WATER FILLER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and separate the water filler sub-
assembly.
7. DISCONNECT HOOD LOCK ASSEMBLY
8. REMOVE RADIATOR SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE FAN SHROUD
(a) Disconnect the 2 wire harness clamps and the 2 cooling

fan motor connectors.
*1 Cooling fan motor connector
*2 No. 2 cooling fan motor connector
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the connectors.
(b) Mark the sponge on the upper surface of the fan shroud, and use scissors, etc. to cut the sponge.
HINT:
Cut the radiator packing at the position between the corner of the radiator packing and the edge of the
fun shroud.
*1 Cutting Line
(c) Detach the 2 claws and separate the fan shroud from the radiator assembly.
*1 Cardboard or Blanket
*2 Fan shroud
HINT:
Insert a cardboard or a blanket between the radiator assembly and the fan shroud to protect the
radiator assembly.
(d) Remove the fan shroud from the radiator assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not apply any excessive force to the outlet radiator
hose, inlet radiator hose, No.1 radiator hose, pipe or
water filler sub-assembly when removing the fan
shroud.
10. REMOVE FAN
(a) Remove the nut and fan.
11. REMOVE NO. 2 FAN
(a) Remove the nut and No. 2 fan.
12. REMOVE COOLING FAN MOTOR
(a) Disengage the connector clamp, and disconnect the

connector from cooling fan motor.
(b) Remove the 3 screws and cooling fan motor.
13. REMOVE NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR
(a) Remove the 3 screws and the No. 2 cooling fan motor.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002YZE03HX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN SYSTEM: Cooling Fan Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cooling Fan Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM turns on or off the fan relays using signals calculated from the engine coolant temperature, air
conditioning (ON/OFF), air conditioner refrigerant pressure, engine speed and vehicle speed signals.
The ECM switches the circuit of the cooling fan motors between series and parallel by turning on or off the
fan relays in order to control the speed of the cooling fan motors in two steps.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to System Diagram .
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE ELECTRIC COOLING

1.
FAN)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Electric Cooling
Fan.
(e) Check the operation of the cooling fans while operating them using the Techstream.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON Cooling fans operate
OFF Cooling fans stop
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA

NG SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
OK
2. INSPECT ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK (FAN NO. 1 RELAY VOLTAGE)
(a) Remove the FAN No. 1 relay from the engine room
relay block.
Standard Voltage:
5 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
*1 Engine Room Relay Block
*2 FAN No. 1 Relay Terminals
(c) Reinstall the FAN No. 1 relay.

NG CONNECTOR (BATTERY - FAN NO. 1 RELAY)
OK
3. INSPECT ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK (FAN NO. 3 RELAY VOLTAGE)

(a) Remove the FAN No. 3 relay from the engine room
relay block.
Standard Voltage:
5 (FAN NO. 3 relay terminal) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V

NG CONNECTOR (BATTERY - FAN NO. 3 RELAY)
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FAN NO. 1, NO. 2 OR NO. 3 RELAY)

(a) Remove the FAN No. 1, FAN No. 2 and FAN No. 3
relays from the engine room relay block.
Standard Voltage:
2 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
(d) Reinstall the FAN No. 1, FAN No. 2 and FAN No. 3 relay.

CONNECTOR (FAN NO. 1, NO. 2 OR NO. 3
NG RELAY)
OK
5. INSPECT FAN NO. 1 RELAY
(a) Inspect the FAN No. 1 relay .
REPLACE FAN NO. 1 RELAY

NG
OK

NG
OK

NG
OK
8. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FAN NO. 2 RELAY - BODY GROUND)
(a) Remove the FAN No. 2 relay from the engine room relay block.
Standard Resistance (Check for Open):
5 (FAN NO. 2 relay terminal) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω


CONNECTOR (FAN NO. 2 RELAY - BODY
NG GROUND)
OK
9. INSPECT COOLING FAN MOTOR
(a) Inspect the cooling fan motor .
NG REPLACE COOLING FAN MOTOR
OK
10. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COOLING FAN MOTOR - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the A45 cooling fan motor connector.
A45-1 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
(c) Reconnect the A45 cooling fan motor connector.

CONNECTOR (COOLING FAN MOTOR - BODY
NG GROUND)
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COOLING FAN MOTOR - ENGINE ROOM

11.
RELAY BLOCK)
(a) Disconnect the A45 cooling fan motor connector.
(b) Remove the FAN No. 1 and FAN No. 2 relays from the engine room relay block.
A45-2 - 3 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) Always Below 1 Ω
Standard Resistance (Check for Short):

CONDITION
A45-2 or 3 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) or 4 (FAN NO. 2 relay terminal) -

Body ground
(d) Reconnect the A45 cooling fan motor connector.
(e) Reinstall the FAN No. 1 and FAN No. 2 relays.

CONNECTOR (COOLING FAN MOTOR -
NG ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK)
OK
12. INSPECT NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR
(a) Inspect the No. 2 cooling fan motor .
NG REPLACE NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR - ENGINE ROOM
13.
RELAY BLOCK)
(a) Disconnect the A46 No. 2 cooling fan motor connector.
A46-1 or 3 (FAN NO. 2 relay terminal) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A46-2 or 3 (FAN NO. 3 relay terminal) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
(d) Reconnect the A46 No. 2 cooling fan motor connector.

CONNECTOR (NO. 2 COOLING FAN MOTOR -
NG ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK)
OK
14. INSPECT ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK (FAN NO. 1 RELAY - FAN NO. 2 RELAY)
(a) Remove the FAN No. 1 and FAN No. 2 relays from the
engine room relay block.
1 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) - 2 (FAN NO. 2 relay terminal) Always Below 1 Ω

CONDITION
1 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) or 2 (FAN NO. 2 relay terminal) - Body

ground
*2 FAN NO. 1 Relay Terminals
*3 FAN NO. 2 Relay Terminals
(c) Reinstall the FAN No. 1 and FAN No. 2 relays.
REPLACE ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK

NG
OK
15. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK)
(a) Disconnect the A35 ECM connector.
A35-11 (FAN1) - 1 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) Always Below 1 Ω

CONDITION
A35-11 (FAN1) or 1 (FAN NO. 1 relay terminal) or 2 (FAN NO. 2 relay 10 kΩ or

Always
terminal) - Body ground higher
10 kΩ or
A35-12 (FAN2) or 1 (FAN NO. 3 relay terminal) - Body ground Always
higher
(d) Reconnect the A35 ECM connector.

CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE ROOM RELAY
NG BLOCK)
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XW0075X
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT COOLING FAN OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES (Below 83 °C (181 °F))

(b) Check that the cooling fans stop.
If it does not, check the cooling fan relays and engine coolant temperature sensor, and check
whether there is a disconnection or an open circuit between them.
(c) Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
(d) Check that the cooling fans operate.
If it does not, check the fuses, cooling fan relays, ECM and cooling fans, and check for a short
circuit between the cooling fan relays and the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(e) Reconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
2. INSPECT COOLING FAN OPERATION AT HIGH TEMPERATURES (Above 96 °C (205 °F))

(a) Start the engine, and raise the engine coolant temperature to above 96 °C (205 °F).
HINT:
The engine coolant temperature is detected by the engine coolant temperature sensor on the water
outlet.
(b) Check that the cooling fans operate.
If it does not, replace the engine coolant temperature sensor.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000419I00DX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003E0003BX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

Cooling Fan System
Cooling fan motor
No. 2 cooling fan motor
Cooling fan does not operate FAN NO. 1 relay
FAN NO. 3 relay
Cooling fan circuit
ECM
Cooling fan circuit (for short circuit)
Cooling fan does not stop FAN NO. 1 relay
FAN NO. 3 relay
ECM
FAN NO. 2 relay
Cooling fan speed does not change Cooling fan circuit
ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003D8M00UX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING FAN SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V1Q0BLX
Title: FA20 COOLING: COOLING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
CAUTION:
Do not remove the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are still hot. Pressurized hot
engine coolant and steam may be released and cause serious burns.
NOTICE:
Before performing each inspection, turn the A/C switch off.
(a) Fill the radiator with coolant and attach a radiator cap
tester.
(b) Warm up the engine.
(c) Using a radiator cap tester, increase the pressure inside the radiator to 137 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm 2 , 20
psi), and check that the pressure does not drop.
If the pressure drops, check the hoses, radiator and water pump for leaks. If no external leaks are
found, check the heater core, cylinder block and cylinder head.
2. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
(a) Check that the engine coolant level is between the low
and full lines when the engine is cold.
If the engine coolant level is low, check for leaks and add
TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life
Coolant BLUE or similar high quality ethylene glycol based
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology to
the full line.
NOTICE:
Do not substitute plain water for engine coolant.
3. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT QUALITY

(a) Remove the radiator cap.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are still hot. Pressurized, hot
engine coolant and steam may be released and cause serious burns.
(b) Check if there are any excessive deposits of rust or scales around the radiator cap and radiator filler
hole. Also, the coolant should be free of oil.
If excessively dirty, clean the coolant passage and replace the coolant.
(c) Install the radiator cap.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BJV01LX
Title: FA20 COOLING: RADIATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MV1038X
Title: FA20 COOLING: RADIATOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. REMOVE RADIATOR PACKING (LOWER)

(a) Install the new radiator packing.
2. REMOVE NO. 2 RADIATOR PACKING

(a) Install the new No. 2 radiator packing.

(a) Install the new No. 1 radiator packing.
4. REMOVE RADIATOR PACKING (UPPER)
(a) Install the new radiator packing.
*1 Radiator Packing
HINT:
Cut the radiator packing at the same position in the removal.
5. INSTALL OUTLET RADIATOR HOSE

(a) Since the radiator hose must be attached in the correct position, apply match marks before
removing it.
(b) Install the outlet radiator hose to the radiator assembly and secure it with the clamp.
6. INSTALL NO. 1 RADIATOR HOSE

removing it.
(b) Install the No. 1 radiator hose to the water filler sub-assembly and secure it with the clamp.
7. INSTALL INLET RADIATOR HOSE

removing it.
(b) Install the inlet radiator hose to the radiator assembly and secure it with the clamp.
8. INSTALL RADIATOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 2 radiator support cushions to the radiator assembly.
(b) While lifting the outlet radiator hose, install the radiator assembly.
NOTICE:
Push a blanket or a cardboard against the cooler condenser assembly to protect it.
(c) Attach the claw and install the thermistor assembly.
(d) Install the radiator support RH with the 2 bolts.
(e) Install the radiator support LH with the 2 bolts.
10. INSTALL COOLER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the cooler condenser assembly to the radiator assembly with the 5 bolts.
11. INSTALL RADIATOR SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 6 bolts and radiator support sub-assembly.
12. INSTALL HOOD LOCK ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the water filler sub-assembly and water filler bracket with the 4 bolts.
(b) Connect the inlet radiator hose and No. 1 radiator hose to the radiator assembly with the 2 clamps.
(c) Connect the radiator cap hose to the water filler sub-assembly.
14. INSTALL RADIATOR COVER PLATE

(a) Install the radiator cover plate with the 6 clips.
15. INSTALL AIR CLEANER DUCT

(a) Install the air cleaner duct with the 2 bolts.

(a) Install the radiator reserve tank assembly with the 2 bolts.
17. CONNECT OUTLET RADIATOR HOSE
21. INSTALL FRONT BUMPER COVER
22. INSTALL AIR CLEANER CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the hose.
HINT:
When connecting the hose, align the protrusion of the air

cleaner case sub-assembly with the cutout of the hose, and
push in the hose until it contacts the stopper of the air cleaner
case sub-assembly.
*a match marks
*b Stopper
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XYW08QX
Title: FA20 COOLING: RADIATOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK RADIATOR CAP SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Measure the valve opening pressure.
(1) If there are water stains or foreign matter on rubber packings 1, 2 or 3, clean the part(s) with
water and finger scouring.
(2) Check that rubber packings 1, 2 or 3 are not deformed, cracked or swollen.
(3) Check that rubber packings 3 and 4 are not stuck together.
(4) Apply engine coolant to rubber packings 2 and 3 before using the radiator cap tester.
(5) When using the cap tester, tilt it 30° or more.
*1 Radiator Cap Tester
*2 Radiator cap sub-assembly
*a 30° or more
(6) Pump the cap tester several times, and check the maximum pressure*1.
Pumping speed:
1 pump per second
HINT:
*1: Even if the cap cannot maintain the maximum pressure, it is not a defect.
Judgment Criterion:
Standard valve
93 to 123 kPa (0.95 to 1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 14 to 18 psi)
(for brand-new cap)
Minimum standard valve
83 kPa (0.85 kgf/cm 2 , 12 psi)
(for used cap)
If the maximum pressure is less than the minimum standard valve, replace the radiator cap
sub-assembly.
Title: FA20 COOLING: RADIATOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR CLEANER CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the clamp, and disconnect the mass air flow
meter connector.
(b) Remove the 3 bolts.
(c) Loosen the hose clamp, and disconnect the hose.
(d) Remove the air cleaner case sub-assembly.
2. REMOVE FRONT BUMPER COVER
5. DISCONNECT OUTLET RADIATOR HOSE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and radiator reserve tank assembly.

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and air cleaner duct.
8. REMOVE RADIATOR COVER PLATE
(a) Remove the 6 clips and radiator cover plate.

(a) Disconnect the radiator cap hose.
(b) Detach the 2 water hose clamps.
(c) Disconnect the inlet radiator hose and No. 1 radiator hose.
HINT:
Since the radiator hose must be attached in the correct position, apply match marks before removing
it.
(d) Remove the 4 bolts and the water filler sub-assembly

with water filler bracket.
10. REMOVE HOOD LOCK ASSEMBLY
11. REMOVE RADIATOR SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and radiator support sub-assembly.
12. SEPARATE COOLER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

(b) Remove the bolt.
(c) Remove the bolt.
(d) Remove the bolt A.
(e) Remove the bolt B and separate the cooler condenser assembly from the radiator assembly.
14. REMOVE RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and radiator support RH.

(b) Remove the 2 bolts and radiator support LH.
(c) Detach the claw and disconnect the thermistor assembly.
(d) While lifting the outlet radiator hose, remove the radiator
assembly.
NOTICE:
Insert cardboard or a blanket between the radiator
assembly and the cooler condenser assembly to protect
the cooler condenser assembly.
*1 Cooler condenser assembly
*2 Cardboard or Blanket
*3 Radiator assembly
(e) Remove the 2 radiator support cushions.
15. REMOVE INLET RADIATOR HOSE
(a) Remove the clamp and the inlet radiator hose from the
water filler sub-assembly.
HINT:
Since the radiator hose must be attached in the correct

position, apply match marks before removing it.
16. REMOVE NO. 1 RADIATOR HOSE
(a) Remove the clamp and No. 1 radiator hose from the
radiator assembly.
*1 No. 1 radiator hose
HINT:

17. REMOVE OUTLET RADIATOR HOSE
(a) Remove the clamp and outlet radiator hose from the
radiator assembly.
*1 Outlet radiator hose
HINT:

18. REMOVE RADIATOR PACKING (UPPER)
(a) Remove the radiator packing.
*1 Radiator Packing

(a) Remove the No. 1 radiator packing.
*1 No. 1 Radiator Packing
(a) Remove the No. 2 radiator packing.
*1 No. 2 Radiator Packing
21. REMOVE RADIATOR PACKING (LOWER)
(a) Remove the radiator packing.
*1 Radiator Packing
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XX00ABX
Title: FA20 COOLING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. FAN NO. 1 RELAY

table below.

Battery voltage is not applied 10 kΩ or

3-5
between terminals 1 and 2 higher
Battery voltage is applied

3-5 Below 1 Ω
between terminals 1 and 2
If the result is not as specified, replace the relay.
2. FAN NO. 2 RELAY

table below.

Battery voltage is not applied

3-4 Below 1 Ω

3-5
Battery voltage is applied 10 kΩ or

3-4

3-5 Below 1 Ω
3. FAN NO. 3 RELAY

table below.


3-5

3-5 Below 1 Ω

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000RTE03TX
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Automatic Transmission): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000335X02CX
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Automatic Transmission): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT THERMOSTAT
(a) Immerse the thermostat in water and then gradually heat the water.
HINT:
Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like, so that the thermostat does not come into contact with
the bottom of the container.
(b) Check the valve opening temperature of the thermostat.

48 to 52°C (118 to 126°F)
HINT:
If the valve opening temperature is not as specified, replace

the thermostat.
(c) Check the valve lift.
*a Valve Lift
Valve lift:
6.0 mm (0.236 in.) or more at 63°C (145°F)
HINT:
If the valve lift is not as specified, replace the thermostat.
(d) Check that the valve is fully closed when the water inlet with thermostat is at low temperatures
(below 45°C (113°F)).
HINT:
If it is not fully closed, replace the thermostat.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000RTC04VX
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Automatic Transmission): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL THERMOSTAT
(a) Install a new gasket to the thermostat.
(b) Install the thermostat to the water inlet housing as shown in the illustration.
*1 Jiggle Valve
Upper Side
HINT:
The jiggle valve must be set within 10° on either side of the position shown in the illustration.
2. CONNECT WATER INLET HOUSING

(a) Install the water inlet housing with the 2 bolts.
3. CONNECT WATER HOSE

(a) Connect the water hose to the water inlet housing with the hose clamp.
4. ADD COOLANT
6. INSTALL INTAKE MANIFOLD

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000RTF04VX
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Automatic Transmission): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DRAIN COOLANT
2. REMOVE INTAKE MANIFOLD
3. DISCONNECT WATER HOSE
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the water hose
from the water inlet housing.
4. DISCONNECT WATER INLET HOUSING
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and water inlet housing.
5. REMOVE THERMOSTAT
(a) Remove the thermostat.
(b) Remove the gasket from the thermostat.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BK2017X
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Engine Coolant): COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000041GQ00BX
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Engine Coolant): INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Immerse the thermostat in water and then gradually heat

the water.
HINT:
Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like, so that the

thermostat does not come into contact with the bottom of the
container.
(b) Check the valve opening temperature of the thermostat.
Standard valve opening temperature:

86 to 90 °C (187 to 194 °F)
HINT:
If the valve opening temperature is not as specified, replace the thermostat.
(c) Check the valve opening temperature.
(d) Check the valve lift.
*a Valve lift
Valve lift:
8.0 mm (0.315 in.) or more at 95 °C (203 °F)
HINT:
If the valve lift value is not as specified, replace the

thermostat.
(e) When the temperature of the thermostat drops below 83 °C (181 °F), check that the valve is fully
closed.
HINT:
If the valve is not fully closed, replace the thermostat.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MWC028X
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Engine Coolant): INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Install a new thermostat gasket to the thermostat.
(b) Install the thermostat to the water outlet.
2. INSTALL WATER OUTLET

(a) Install the water outlet with the 2 bolts.
3. CONNECT OUTLET RADIATOR HOSE

removing it.
(b) Connect the outlet radiator hose to the water outlet with the hose clamp.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MWE028X
Title: FA20 COOLING: THERMOSTAT (for Engine Coolant): REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. SEPARATE OUTLET RADIATOR HOSE
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the outlet radiator
hose from the water outlet.
HINT:

4. REMOVE WATER OUTLET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and water outlet.
(b) Remove the thermostat gasket from the thermostat.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BJY017X
Title: FA20 COOLING: WATER PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MW802FX
Title: FA20 COOLING: WATER PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY

(a) Install a new water pump gasket and the engine water pump assembly with the 5 bolts.
2. INSTALL WATER PUMP PULLEY

(a) Temporarily install the water pump pulley with the 3 bolts.
(b) Using SST, hold the water pump pulley and tighten the 3 bolts.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
4. INSTALL FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000041DB00HX
Title: FA20 COOLING: WATER PUMP: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. REMOVE WATER PUMP PULLEY
2. INSPECT ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY

(a) Turn the pulley and check that the water pump bearing moves smoothly and quietly. If necessary,
replace the engine water pump assembly.
If necessary, replace the engine water pump assembly.
(b) Visually check the air hole and water hole for coolant
leaks.
*1 Air Hole
*2 Water Hole
If necessary, replace the engine water pump assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MWA02CX
Title: FA20 COOLING: WATER PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT
(a) Using SST, hold the water pump pulley.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and water pump pulley.
6. REMOVE ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 5 bolts, engine water pump assembly and

water pump gasket.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VQ204UX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004TQH00FX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
*1 Cruise Control Main Switch Assembly (ON-OFF button) - -

*a *b ON-OFF
(Cruise Control Main Switch Assembly)
*c +/RES *d -/SET
*e CANCEL - -
TESTER SWITCH CONDITION SPECIFIED

Cruise control Main switch Assembly (ON-OFF button)

1 MΩ or higher
released
Cruise control Main switch Assembly (ON-OFF button)

Below 2.5 Ω
pushed
1-3
+/RES switch ON 235 to 245 Ω
CANCEL switch ON 1509 to 1571 Ω

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VQ107IX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the cruise control main switch wire connector to the cruise control main switch assembly.
(b) Set the cruise control main switch assembly to the lower steering wheel cover.
(c) Engage the 2 claws and install the lower steering wheel cover.
(d) Install the 4 screws.
(e) Engage the clamp.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VQ307IX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 screws.
(b) Engage the 2 claws and remove the lower steering wheel cover and cruise control main switch
assembly.
(c) Disengage the clamp and disconnect the cruise control main switch wire connector.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000005AY5000X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: CANCEL CODE (2013 FR-S)
CANCEL CODE
1. DESCRIPTION
The ECM stores cancellation of cruise control due to driver operation and system abnormality as a
"CANCEL CODE". In troubleshooting, the "CANCEL CODE" can be used to specify the cause of the
malfunction.
HINT:
The "CANCEL CODE" for canceled cruise control resulting from a driver operation is also stored.
Therefore, fault troubleshooting needs to determine whether the "CANCEL CODE" is due to a driver
operation or a system abnormality.
Storage of a "CANCEL CODE" due to the driver canceling cruise control is normal, and not a system
abnormality.
The "CANCEL CODE" is cleared by turning off the ignition switch. So, does not turn the ignition
switch off until the "CANCEL CODE" has been checked.
2. READ CANCEL CODE

(d) Perform a cruise control road test, and recreate the driving conditions in which cruise control was
previously canceled.
(e) After cruise control is canceled, check the DATA LIST .
(f) Check the stored "CANCEL CODE".
*: "(MEMORY)" displays the storage history of the "CANCEL CODE", and is not deleted by turning
the ignition switch off. When clearing, perform to clear the DTC .
Cruise Cancel : Main Switch
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE TROUBLE AREA

DISPLAY
Operation of
cruise control
main switch
Cruise control
Cruise control was canceled through a cruise control main main switch
switch operation or cruise control main switch signal assembly
abnormality. / ON or OFF malfunction
Cruise
Cruise control
Cancel :
main switch
Main Switch
circuit
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a cruise control main switch operation.
2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "Cruise
Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Stop/Brake Switch
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE TROUBLE AREA
Brake pedal
operation
Stop light
Cruise control was canceled through a brake pedal switch
operation or stop light switch signal abnormality. / ON or assembly
OFF malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
Stop light
Stop/Brake
switch circuit
Switch
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a brake pedal operation.

2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "Stop
Light Switch Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Clutch Switch

DISPLAY
Clutch pedal
operation
Clutch switch
Cruise control was canceled through a clutch pedal operation assembly
or clutch switch signal abnormality. / ON or OFF malfunction
Clutch switch
Cruise Cancel :
circuit
Clutch Switch
malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a clutch pedal operation.

2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "Clutch
Switch Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch

DISPLAY
Shift lever
operation
Park/neutral
Cruise control was canceled through a shift lever position switch
operation or park/neutral start switch signal abnormality. assembly
/ ON or OFF malfunction
Cruise Cancel
Park/neutral
: Neutral
position switch
Switch
circuit malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a shift lever operation.

2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to
"Transmission Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Cancel Switch

DISPLAY
CANCEL switch
operation
Cruise control main
Cruise control was canceled through a CANCEL switch
switch assembly
operation or CANCEL switch signal abnormality. / ON or
malfunction
OFF
Cruise Cancel Cruise control main
: Cancel switch circuit
Switch malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a CANCEL switch operation.

2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "Cruise
Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : IG Switch

DISPLAY
Ignition switch
Cruise control was canceled through an ignition switch operation
operation or ECM power supply circuit abnormality. / ON or ECM power
OFF supply circuit
Cruise
malfunction
Cancel : IG
Switch
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been an ignition switch operation.

2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to "ECM
Power Source Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 1
Speed sensor malfunction

Skid control ECU (Brake
Cruise control was canceled through a vehicle
actuator assembly)
speed signal abnormality. / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel : malfunction
Vehicle Speed 1 ECM malfunction
Troubleshooting:
1. Check the VSC system DTC .
Cruise Cancel : Engine Revolution
One of the following conditions is met:

Shift lever
Cruise control was canceled through detection operation
of engine speed that is more than specified. Crankshaft
Cruise control was canceled through moving position sensor
the shift lever to 1st or R position. malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
ECM malfunction
Engine Revolution / ON or OFF
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a shift lever operation.

2. If it was stored resulting from other than a driver operation, refer to DTC
P0335, and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Out of Range

DISPLAY
Cruise control was canceled through vehicle

SET switch operation
speed dropping below minimum cruise
RESUME switch
control speed.
operation
Cruise control was canceled through setting
Speed sensor
the cruise control outside permitted vehicle
malfunction
speed.
Cruise Cancel Skid control ECU
Cruise control was canceled through a
: Out of (Brake actuator
RESUME operation with no recorded vehicle
Range assembly) malfunction
speed.
/ ON or OFF
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been a SET or RESUME operation.

2. Perform a cruise control road test with a vehicle speed at 40km/h or more.
3. If the "CANCEL CODE" is stored again, check the VSC system DTC .
Cruise Cancel : Accel Angle
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE TROUBLE

DISPLAY AREA
Accelerator
Cruise control was canceled through an accelerator pedal operation
pedal
resulting in more than 10 minutes of set vehicle speed. / ON or OFF
Cruise Cancel operation
: Accel Angle
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm whether there has been an accelerator pedal operation.
Cruise Cancel : Keeping Vehicle Speed
Parking brake not

released
Insufficient tire
Cruise control was canceled through an inability to
pressure
maintain vehicle speed. / ON or OFF
Road condition
Cruise Cancel :
(inclination, road
Keeping Vehicle
surface)
Speed
Troubleshooting:
1. Confirm the road conditions (inclination, road surface) when the

"CANCEL CODE" was stored.
2. Check the vehicle status (parking brake, tire pressure).
Cruise Cancel : VSC/TRC Operation
Cruise control was canceled through a VSC/TR(A)C VSC/TR(A)C

Cruise Cancel : VSC/TRC operation. / ON or OFF operation
Operation Troubleshooting:
-
Cruise Cancel : ABS/VSC Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through an ABS/VSC system ABS/VSC system

abnormality / ON or OFF malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
ABS/VSC Abnormal Troubleshooting:
Cruise Cancel : Meter Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through a combination meter Combination meter

assembly abnormality. / ON or OFF assembly malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
Meter Abnormal Troubleshooting:
1. Check the combination meter assembly .

Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through a stop light switch Stop light switch
assembly abnormality. / ON or OFF assembly malfunction
Cruise Cancel : Brake
Switch Abnormal Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to "Stop Light Switch Circuit", and perform a check .
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through a park/neutral Park/neutral position switch

position switch abnormality. / ON or OFF assembly malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
Neutral Switch Troubleshooting:
Abnormal 1. Refer to "Transmission Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
.
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2

Cruise control was canceled through a vehicle Skid control ECU (Brake
speed change abnormality. / ON or OFF actuator assembly)
Cruise Cancel :
malfunction
Vehicle Speed 2
Troubleshooting:
Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through an engine system Engine control system
abnormality. / ON or OFF malfunction
Cruise Cancel : Engine
Abnormal Troubleshooting:
1. Check the engine control system DTC .
Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to Cruise Control
Cruise control was canceled through a cruise control main Cruise control main
switch fixation (2 minutes or more continuous input). / switch assembly
Cruise Cancel :
ON or OFF malfunction
Switch Related to
Cruise Control Troubleshooting:
1. Refer to "Cruise Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check .

Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch Abnormal(Memory)*
"Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch Abnormal" is Stop light switch

detected. / ON or OFF assembly malfunction
Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch
Troubleshooting:
Abnormal(Memory)
1. Refer to "Stop Light Switch Circuit", and perform a check
.
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch Abnormal(Memory)*
"Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch Park/neutral position switch

Abnormal" is detected. / ON or OFF assembly malfunction
Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch
Troubleshooting:
Abnormal(Memory)
1. Refer to "Transmission Control Switch Circuit", and perform a
check .
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2(Memory)*

"Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2" is Skid control ECU (Brake
detected. / ON or OFF actuator assembly)
Cruise Cancel : Vehicle
malfunction
Speed 2(Memory)
Troubleshooting:
Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal(Memory)*
"Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal" is Engine control system

detected. / ON or OFF malfunction
Cruise Cancel : Engine
Abnormal(Memory) Troubleshooting:
1. Check the engine control system DTC .
Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to CCS(Memory)*
"Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to Cruise Cruise control main switch

Control" is detected. / ON or OFF assembly malfunction
Cruise Cancel : Switch
Troubleshooting:
Related to CCS(Memory)
1. Refer to "Cruise Control Switch Circuit", and perform a check
.
Cruise Cancel : ECT Abnormal
Cruise control was canceled through an automatic Automatic transmission

transmission system abnormality. / ON or OFF system malfunction
Cruise Cancel :
ECT Abnormal Troubleshooting:
1. Check the automatic transmission system DTC .

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000ZAN031X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Clutch Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Clutch Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
Clutch switch circuit inspection is necessary for M/T vehicles.
When the clutch pedal is released, the ECM receives positive (+) battery voltage through the ECU IG2
fuse. While depressing the clutch pedal, the clutch switch sends a signal to terminal CLSW of the ECM. The
ECM cancels cruise control drive when terminal CLSW receives the signal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Clutch switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.
1. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. Turn the Techstream on.
4. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / All Data / Clutch Switch .
Engine
CLUTCH PEDAL OPERATION CLUTCH SWITCH
Depressed ON
Released OFF
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ECM (TERMINAL VOLTAGE)
Standard voltage:
Clutch pedal depressed Below 1 V

A33-15 (CLSW) - Body ground
Clutch pedal released 11 to 14 V
Component with harness connected

*a
(ECM)
NG INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY

OK SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(a) Inspect the clutch switch assembly .
NG REPLACE CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - CLUTCH SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the clutch switch assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the ECM connector.
Standard resistance (Check for open):
A33-15 (CLSW) - A21-2 Always Below 1 Ω
Standard resistance (Check for short):
A33-15 (CLSW) or A21-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (ECM - CLUTCH SWITCH
NG ASSEMBLY)
OK INSPECT ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PLU0BDX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Control Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cruise Control Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The cruise control main switch is used to turn the cruise control system on and off, as well as operate 7
functions: SET, - (COAST), TAP-DOWN, RES (RESUME), + (ACCEL), TAP-UP and CANCEL. The SET, TAP-
DOWN and - (COAST) functions, and the RES (RESUME), TAP-UP and + (ACCEL) functions are operated
with the same switch. The cruise control main switch is an automatic return type switch which turns on
only while operating it in the direction of each arrow and turns off after releasing it. The internal contact
points of the cruise control main switch turn on with switch operation. Then the ECM reads the voltage
value that has been changed by the switch operation to control SET, - (COAST), RES (RESUME), +
(ACCEL), and CANCEL.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE ON TECHSTREAM
(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise

Control / Data List.
(e) Check the Data List to confirm proper functioning of the

cruise control main switch.
*a ON-OFF
*b -/SET
*c +/RES
*d CANCEL
Cruise Control
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE CONDITION NOTE
ON: cruise
control main
Cruise control switch (ON-OFF
Main SW main switch button) pushed
-
M-CPU signal (Main CPU) OFF: cruise
/ ON or OFF control main
switch (ON-OFF
button) released
ON: CANCEL
CANCEL switch
Cancel switch on
signal / ON or -
Switch OFF: CANCEL
OFF
switch off
ON: -/SET
-/SET switch
SET/COAST switch on
signal / ON or -
Switch OFF: -/SET
OFF
switch off
ON: +/RES
+/RES switch
RES/ACC switch on
signal / ON or -
Switch OFF: +/RES
OFF
switch off
OK:
When the cruise control main switch is operated, the
display changes as shown above.
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY

2. INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the cruise control main switch assembly .
REPLACE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
3. CHECK CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH WIRE
(a) Disconnect the cruise control main switch assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly

connector.

table below.
Standard Resistance (Check for open):

CONDITION
Cruise control main switch side connector

Below 1 Ω
terminal 3 (R) - z5-4
Cruise control main switch side connector

Below 1 Ω
terminal 1 (B) - z5-3

*a
(to Spiral Cable with Sensor Sub-assembly)

*b
(to Cruise Control Main Switch Assembly)
REPAIR OR REPLACE CRUISE CONTROL
NG MAIN SWITCH WIRE
OK
4. INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly .
REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR SUB-

5.
ASSEMBLY - ECM AND BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the ECM connector.
(b) Disconnect the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly connector.
A33-30 (CCS) - D51-11 (CCS) Always Below 1 Ω
A33-4 (EC) - D51-10 (ECC) Always Below 1 Ω
Standard Resistance (Check for short):
A33-30 (CCS) or D51-11 (CCS) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A33-4 (EC) or D51-10 (ECC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR
NG
SUB-ASSEMBLY - ECM)
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PLV0B2X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM turns on the cruise control indicator light by sending indicator output demand signals
to the combination meter assembly using CAN communication.
The cruise control indicator light illuminates in green when the cruise control system has been
turned on using the ON-OFF switch. If a malfunction is detected, the cruise control indicator
light changes to amber.
The cruise control indicator light circuit uses CAN communication. If the cruise control indicator
light is not functioning correctly, check for CAN communication DTCs before troubleshooting this
circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM
(d) Select the following menu items: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(e) Check the cruise control indicator light by performing the Active Test.
Combination Meter

DISPLAY NOTE
Indicat. Lamp Cruise control Cruise control indicator light (illuminated in

-
Cruise indicator light green) ON / OFF
Cruise control Cruise control indicator light (illuminated in

Cruise Warning -
indicator light amber) ON / OFF
OK:
The cruise control indicator light goes on or off.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003TL901UX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Cruise SET Indicator Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM turns on the SET indicator light by sending indicator output demand signals to the
combination meter assembly using CAN communication.
The cruise control SET indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is controlling
vehicle speed.
The cruise control indicator light circuit uses CAN communication. If the cruise control indicator
light is not functioning correctly, check for CAN communication DTCs before troubleshooting this
circuit.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit .
PROCEDURE
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(e) Check the cruise control SET indicator light by performing the Active Test.
Combination Meter

DISPLAY NOTE
Cruise control SET indicator Cruise control SET indicator light ON /

Indicat. SET -
light OFF
OK:
The cruise control SET indicator light goes on or goes off.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PM3071X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
HINT:
(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List.
(e) Read the Data List according to the display on the Techstream.
[Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List]

NOTE
Vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h (0

CCS Vehicle Spd Actual vehicle speed -
mph), Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Stored vehicle speed / Min.: 0

CCS Mem Vehicle
km/h (0 mph), Max.: 255 km/h Actual stored vehicle speed -
Spd
(158 mph)
Cruise Request Required engine torque / Min.: -

Actual required engine torque -
Torque 32768 Nm, Max.: 32767 Nm
Cruise control system active ON: Cruise control activated

Cruise Control -
condition / ON or OFF OFF: Cruise control deactivated
ON: Cruise control indicator light

Cruise control indicator light
CCS Indicator M- illuminated in green
illumination signal (Main CPU) / ON -
CPU OFF: Cruise control indicator
or OFF
light not on
ON: CANCEL switch on

Cancel Switch CANCEL switch signal / ON or OFF -
OFF: CANCEL switch off
ON: -/SET switch on

SET/COAST Switch -/SET switch signal / ON or OFF -
OFF: -/SET switch off
ON: +/RES switch on

RES/ACC Switch +/RES switch signal / ON or OFF -
OFF: +/RES switch off
Each time cruise control main

Cruise control system standby
CCS Ready M-CPU switch (ON-OFF button) is -
condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF
pushed, ON/OFF changes
ON: cruise control main switch

cruise control main switch signal (ON-OFF button) pushed
Main SW M-CPU -
(Main CPU) / ON or OFF OFF: cruise control main switch
(ON-OFF button) released
Stop light switch signal1 / ON or ON: Brake pedal depressed

Stop Light Switch 1 -
OFF OFF: Brake pedal released
Stop light switch signal2 / ON or ON: Brake pedal depressed

Stop Light Switch 2 -
OFF OFF: Brake pedal released
Refer to
ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by cruise control "CANCEL
OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
Main Switch main switch operation / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by brake pedal "CANCEL
Stop/Brake Switch operation / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
"CANCEL CODE" by clutch pedal ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL
operation (for Manual OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
Clutch Switch CODE"
Transmission) / ON or OFF detected
.
Refer to
"CANCEL CODE" by shift lever ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
operation (for Automatic OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
Neutral Switch CODE"
Transmission) / ON or OFF detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by CANCEL switch "CANCEL
Cancel Switch operation / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : IG "CANCEL CODE" by ignition switch "CANCEL
Switch operation / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by abnormal "CANCEL
Vehicle Speed 1 vehicle speed signal / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by raising engine "CANCEL
Engine Revolution speed / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
"CANCEL CODE" by setting the ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
Cruise Cancel : Out "CANCEL
cruise control outside permitted OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
of Range CODE"
vehicle speed / ON or OFF detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by accelerator "CANCEL
Accel Angle pedal operation / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
"CANCEL CODE" by inability to "CANCEL
Keeping Vehicle OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
maintain vehicle speed / ON or OFF CODE"
Speed detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by VSC/TR(A)C "CANCEL
VSC/TRC Operation operation / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by ABS/VSC "CANCEL
ABS/VSC Abnormal abnormality / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
"CANCEL CODE" by combination ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
meter assembly abnormality / ON OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
Meter Abnormal CODE"
or OFF detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by stop light ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
"CANCEL
Brake Switch switch assembly abnormality / ON OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
CODE"
Abnormal or OFF detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by park/neutral ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
"CANCEL
Neutral Switch position switch abnormality / ON or OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
CODE"
Abnormal OFF detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by abnormal "CANCEL
Vehicle Speed 2 vehicle speed change / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by engine control "CANCEL
Engine Abnormal system abnormality / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : "CANCEL CODE" by cruise control ON: "CANCEL CODE" detected
"CANCEL
Switch Related to main switch abnormality / ON or OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
CODE"
Cruise Control OFF detected
.
Refer to
"Cruise Cancel : Brake Switch "CANCEL
Brake Switch OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
Abnormal" is detected / ON or OFF CODE"
Abnormal(Memory) detected
.
Refer to
"Cruise Cancel : Neutral Switch "CANCEL
Neutral Switch OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
Abnormal" is detected / ON or OFF CODE"
.
Refer to
"Cruise Cancel : Vehicle Speed 2" "CANCEL
Vehicle Speed OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
is detected / ON or OFF CODE"
2(Memory) detected
.
Refer to
"Cruise Cancel : Engine Abnormal" "CANCEL
Engine OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
is detected / ON or OFF CODE"
.
Refer to
"Cruise Cancel : Switch Related to "CANCEL
Switch Related to OFF: "CANCEL CODE" not
CCS" is detected / ON or OFF CODE"
CCS(Memory) detected
.
Refer to
Cruise Cancel : ECT "CANCEL CODE" by automatic "CANCEL
Abnormal transmission system / ON or OFF CODE"
detected
.
Brake Cancel Stop light switch signal / ON or ON: Brake pedal depressed
-
Switch OFF OFF: Brake pedal released
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
Active Tests early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be
displayed while performing Active Tests.
(d) Select the following menu items: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(e) Perform "Active Test" according to the display on Techstream.
HINT:
The ignition switch must be turned on to proceed with the Active Test using the Techstream.
[Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test]

DISPLAY NOTE
Indicat. Lamp Cruise control indicator Cruise control indicator light (illuminated in
-
Cruise light green) ON / OFF
Cruise control SET

Indicat. SET Cruise control SET indicator light ON / OFF -
indicator light
Cruise control indicator Cruise control indicator light (illuminated in

Cruise Warning -
light amber) ON / OFF
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PM00ABX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the cruise control system of the vehicle. The data and DTCs relating to the cruise control
system can be read from the DLC3 of the vehicle. Use the Techstream to check and solve the problem.
HINT:
If a speed sensor, stop light switch or any other related part malfunctions, the ECM cancels cruise
control operation automatically.
2. CHECK INDICATOR
(b) Check that the cruise control indicator light illuminates in

green when the cruise control system is turned on using
the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF button), and that
the indicator light turns off when the cruise control
system is turned off using the cruise control main switch
(ON-OFF button). If the results are not as specified,
perform the Cruise Main Indicator Light Circuit inspection
procedure .
*1 Cruise Control Indicator Light (Green)
HINT:
While driving with the cruise control system controlling

vehicle speed, the ECM will automatically cancel cruise control
system control of vehicle speed when a malfunction occurs in
one of the following: speed sensors, stop light switch
assembly, or other related parts. When control of vehicle
speed by the cruise control system is automatically canceled,
the cruise control indicator changes to amber. At the same
time, a DTC is stored.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004VW9004X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
U0073 Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off
U0101 Lost Communication with TCM
U0122 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
U0155 Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control Module
U0402 Invalid Data Received from TCM
U0416 Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
U0423 Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PM107UX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. DTC CHECK
(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Trouble Codes.
(e) Check the details of the DTC(s) .
2. DTC CLEAR
(d) Select the following menu items: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Trouble Codes.
(e) Clear the DTCs.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PLO0BNX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the cruise control system.

NEXT
(a) Measure the battery voltage with the ignition switch off.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery before proceeding to the next step.
NEXT
3. CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)*
(a) Use the Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is not output A
CAN DTC is output B
B GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A
4. CHECK FOR DTC*
Refer to DTC Check / Clear .
(a) Check for DTCs and note any codes that are output.
(b) Clear the DTCs.
(c) Recheck for DTCs. Try to reproduce the DTCs by duplicating the conditions indicated by the
DTCs.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC does not reoccur A
DTC reoccurs B
B GO TO DTC CHART
5. ROAD TEST
(a) Perform the road test .
(b) Check that cruise control is not canceled by other than canceling operations by the driver.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Cruise control is cancelled A
Cruise control is not cancelled B
B GO TO STEP 8
6. CHECK "CANCEL CODE"*

HINT:
The driver's history of canceling cruise control is also stored.
(a) Check "CANCEL CODE" .

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
"CANCEL CODE" is not detected A
"CANCEL CODE" is detected B
ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE ACCORDING TO

B "CANCEL CODE"
Refer to Problem Symptoms Table .
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Fault is not listed in Problem Symptoms Table A
Fault is listed in Problem Symptoms Table B
ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE IN

B ACCORDANCE WITH PROBLEM SYMPTOMS
TABLE
8. OVERALL ANALYSIS AND TROUBLESHOOTING*
(a) Terminals of ECU
(b) Data List / Active Test

NEXT
9. ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000ZRD07IX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction (2013
FR-S)
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
Refer to P0500 .
Speed sensor
P0500 DTC P0500 is detected in SFI system. Skid control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0500 .
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P0500 is output B
B GO TO TROUBLESHOOTING FOR DTC P0500

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SSZ06FX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PLN08BX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. HANDLING PRECAUTION FOR CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Turn the cruise control system off using the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF button) when not
using the cruise control system.
(b) Be careful as the vehicle speed increases when driving downhill with the cruise control system
controlling vehicle speed.
(c) The + (ACCEL)/RES (RESUME) operation changes according to the cruise control system status.
When the cruise control system is controlling vehicle speed, the + (ACCEL) function operates. When
the cruise control system is not controlling vehicle speed, the RES (RESUME) function operates.
(d) While the cruise control system is controlling vehicle speed, if the cruise control indicator light
changes to amber, turn the cruise control system off using the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF
button) to reset the cruise control system. After the cruise control system is reset, if the cruise
control system does not turn on, or if the cruise control system stops functioning immediately after
being turned on, there may be a malfunction.
(e) Do not use the cruise control system where the road conditions are as follows:
Heavy traffic
Steep downhill roads
Roads with sharp turns
Icy or snowy roads
Slippery roads
(f) Do not use the cruise control system while towing.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PLS0BAX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Cruise Control System
SYMPTOM SUSPECTED SEE

AREA PAGE
Cruise
control main
switch
circuit
The cruise control system cannot be turned on using the cruise control main switch
(ON-OFF button). Cruise main
indicator
light circuit
ECM
Cruise
Vehicle speed cannot be set (the cruise control indicator light illuminates in green control main
when the cruise control system is turned on using the cruise control main switch switch
(ON-OFF button), but the cruise control indicator light goes out when the cruise circuit
control main switch is pushed to -/SET).
ECM
Stop light
switch
circuit
Vehicle
speed
sensor
circuit
Cruise
Vehicle speed cannot be set (the cruise control indicator light illuminates in green control main
when the cruise control system is turned on using the cruise control main switch switch
(ON-OFF button), and it remains illuminated when the cruise control main switch is circuit
pushed to -/SET).
Automatic
transmission
system*2
VSC system
Combination
meter
assembly
ECM
Stop light
switch
circuit
Automatic
transmission
system*2
Cruise
Vehicle speed control by the cruise control system is automatically canceled after it control main
has started. switch
circuit
VSC system
Combination
meter
assembly
ECM
Cruise
control main
switch
circuit
Pulling back on the cruise control main switch does not cancel vehicle speed control
by the cruise control system. (The cruise control indicator light remains illuminated VSC system
in green.) Combination
meter
assembly
ECM
Pulling back on the cruise control main switch does not cancel vehicle speed control
ECM
by the cruise control system. (The cruise control indicator light goes out.)
Vehicle speed control by the cruise control system is not canceled when vehicle VSC system
speed drops below the low speed limit. (The cruise control indicator light remains
illuminated in green.) ECM
Vehicle speed control by the cruise control system is not canceled when vehicle
ECM
speed drops below the low speed limit. (The cruise control indicator light goes out.)
Stop light
switch
circuit
Depressing the brake pedal does not cancel vehicle speed control by the cruise
Combination
control system. (The cruise control indicator light remains illuminated in green.)
meter
assembly
ECM
Depressing the brake pedal does not cancel vehicle speed control by the cruise
ECM
control system. (The cruise control indicator light goes out.)
Stop light
switch
circuit
Automatic
Moving the shift lever does not cancel vehicle speed control by the cruise control transmission
system. (The cruise control indicator light remains illuminated in green.) system*2
Combination
meter
assembly
ECM
Moving the shift lever does not cancel vehicle speed control by the cruise control
ECM
system. (The cruise control indicator light goes out.)
Automatic
transmission
system*2
Vehicle speed control by the cruise control system is not canceled when paddle shift
switch is operated. (The cruise control indicator light remains illuminated in Combination
green.)*1 meter
assembly
ECM
Vehicle speed control by the cruise control system is not canceled when paddle shift
ECM
switch is operated. (The cruise control indicator light goes out.)*1
Vehicle
speed
Hunting (Speed is not constant.) sensor
circuit
SFI system
Cruise SET
The cruise control SET indicator light does not illuminate. (Vehicle speed can be indicator
set) light circuit
ECM
*1: w/ Shift Paddle Switch
*2: for Automatic Transmission

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000ST009EX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: ROAD TEST (2013 FR-S)
ROAD TEST
(a) Inspect the SET function.
(1) Turn the cruise control system on using the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF button).
(2) Check that the cruise control indicator light illuminates in green on the combination meter
assembly.
(3) Drive at a speed between 40 km/h (25 mph) and 145 km/h (90 mph).
(4) Push the cruise control main switch to -/SET.
(5) Check that the cruise control SET indicator light

illuminates at this time.
*1 Cruise Control Indicator Light (Green)
*2 Cruise Control SET Indicator
(6) After releasing the switch, check that the vehicle maintains the set speed.
(b) Inspect the + (ACCEL) function.
(1) Turn the cruise control system on using the cruise

control main switch (ON-OFF button).
(2) Drive at a speed between 40 km/h (25 mph) and 145

km/h (90 mph).
(4) Check that vehicle speed increases while the cruise

control main switch is pushed to +/RES, and that the
vehicle maintains the newly set speed when the switch
is released.
(5) Push the cruise control main switch to +/RES and then
release it immediately. Check that vehicle speed
increases by approximately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) (tap-
up control).
(c) Inspect the - (COAST) function.


km/h (90 mph).
(4) Check that vehicle speed decreases while the cruise

control main switch is pushed to -/SET, and the vehicle
maintains the newly set speed when the switch is
released.
(5) Push the cruise control main switch to -/SET, and then
release it immediately. Check that vehicle speed
decreases by approximately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) (tap-
down control).
(d) Inspect the CANCEL function.


km/h (90 mph).
(4) When any of the following are performed, check that

cruise control system control of vehicle speed is
canceled and that the normal driving mode (no control
of vehicle speed by the cruise control system) resumes.
Depressing the brake pedal

Moving the shift lever to 1st or R position (for
Manual Transmission)
Moving the shift lever from D or M to any
other position (for Automatic Transmission)
Selecting the 3rd, 2nd or 1st range with the
shift lever in M (for Automatic Transmission)
Selecting the 3rd, 2nd or 1st range using the
shift paddle switch with the shift lever in M
(w/ shift paddle switch) (for Automatic
Transmission)
Pulling the cruise control main switch to
CANCEL
Turning the cruise control system off using
the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF
button)
(e) Inspect the RES (RESUME) function.


km/h (90 mph).
(4) Cancel cruise control system control of vehicle speed

by performing any of the above operations (other than
turning the cruise control system off using the cruise
control main switch (ON-OFF button)).
(5) After pushing the cruise control main switch to +/RES

at a speed of more than 40 km/h (25 mph), check that
the vehicle resumes the speed set prior to cancellation.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000057KI000X
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: Stop Light Switch Circuit (2013 FR-S)
Stop Light Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the brake pedal is released, terminal STP of the ECM receives positive (+) battery voltage through
the ECU IG2 fuse. While depressing the brake pedal, the stop light switch sends a signal to terminals STP
and ST1- of the ECM. The ECM cancels cruise control drive when terminal STP receives the signal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Stop light switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.

4. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Data List / Stop Light Switch 1 and Stop
Light Switch 2.
Cruise Control
BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION STOP LIGHT SWITCH 1 STOP LIGHT SWITCH 2
Depressed ON ON
Released OFF OFF

PROCEDURE
Standard voltage:
Brake pedal released 11 to 14 V

Brake pedal depressed Below 1 V

*a
(ECM)
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER

NG SOURCE OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH
ASSEMBLY)
OK

Standard voltage:
Brake pedal depressed 11 to 14 V

A33-3 (ST1-) - Body ground
Brake pedal released Below 1 V

*a
(ECM)

NG SOURCE OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH
ASSEMBLY)

CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH

3.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the stop light switch assembly connector.
Standard voltage:

A22-3 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Stop Light Switch Assembly)
NG INSPECT ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
A33-7 (STP) - A22-4 Always Below 1 Ω
A33-7 (STP) or A22-4 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the stop light switch assembly .

OK REPLACE ECM
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH

6.
ASSEMBLY)
Standard voltage:

*a
(to Stop Light Switch Assembly)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NOISE

NG FILTER - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
OK
7. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
A33-3 (ST1-) - A22-2 Always Below 1 Ω

A33-3 (ST1-) or A22-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STOP

NG LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY - NOISE FILTER)
OK
(a) Inspect the stop light switch assembly .
OK REPLACE ECM

9.
ASSEMBLY)
A22-1 or A13-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the noise filter .

OK CONNECTOR (NOISE FILTER - BATTERY)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY - NOISE

11.
FILTER)
A22-2 or A13-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the noise filter .

OK
13. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - NOISE FILTER)
A33-3 (ST1-) - A13-4 Always Below 1 Ω
A33-3 (ST1-) or A13-4 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PLZ0AFX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
This system is controlled by the ECM, and control is performed using the throttle with motor body
assembly. The ECM controls the following functions: ON-OFF, - (COAST)/SET, + (ACCEL)/RES (RESUME),
CANCEL, vehicle speed operation and shift down control.
The ECM compares the vehicle speed from the speed sensor with the stored vehicle speed set
using the cruise control main switch. The ECM instructs the throttle valve motor of the throttle
with motor body assembly to close the valve when the vehicle speed is greater than the stored
speed, and instructs it to open the valve when the vehicle speed is less than the stored speed.
The ECM receives signals such as ON-OFF, - (COAST)/SET, + (ACCEL)/RES (RESUME), and
CANCEL from the cruise control main switch and executes the command.
The ECM illuminates the combination meter assembly cruise control indicator light in green
when the cruise control system is turned on using the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF
button).
The ECM illuminates the combination meter assembly cruise control indicator light in amber
when a malfunction occurs during cruise control driving.
The ECM illuminates the combination meter assembly cruise control SET indicator light when
vehicle speed control begins after the cruise control main switch is pushed to -/SET while
driving.
*1 Cruise Control Indicator Light (Illuminated in Green or in Amber)
*2 Cruise Control SET Indicator
2. LIMIT CONTROL
(a) Low speed limit
The lowest possible set speed is approximately 40 km/h (25 mph). The cruise control system cannot
be set when the vehicle speed is below the low speed limit. Control of vehicle speed will be
automatically canceled but the stored vehicle speed will be retained when the vehicle speed drops
below the low speed limit while the cruise control is controlling vehicle speed.
(b) High speed limit
The highest possible set speed is approximately 145 km/h (90 mph). The cruise control system
cannot be set when the vehicle speed is over the high speed limit. Also, + (ACCEL)/RES (RESUME)
cannot be used to increase the speed beyond the high speed limit.
3. OPERATION OF CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control main switch is used to turn the cruise control system on and off, as well as operate 7
functions: SET, - (COAST), TAP-DOWN, RES (RESUME), + (ACCEL), TAP-UP, and CANCEL. The SET, TAP-
DOWN, and - (COAST) functions, and the RES (RESUME), TAP-UP, and + (ACCEL) functions are operated
with the same switch. The cruise control main switch is an automatic return type switch which turns on
only while operating it in the direction of each arrow, and turns off after it is released.
(a) SET CONTROL
The vehicle speed is stored and speed control begins when the cruise control main switch is pushed
to -/SET while driving with the cruise control system on (while the cruise control indicator light is
illuminated in green), and the vehicle speed is within the set speed range (between the low and
high speed limits).
(b) - (COAST) CONTROL
When the cruise control system is controlling vehicle speed and the cruise control main switch is
pushed to -/SET and held in that position, the cruise control system sends a "required engine
torque = 0 Nm" demand signal to the ECM. Following this, the vehicle speed is stored and
maintained when the cruise control main switch is released.
(c) TAP-DOWN CONTROL
tapped to the -/SET side (for approximately 0.6 seconds), the stored vehicle speed decreases by
approximately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) for each time the switch is tapped. When the cruise control main
switch is tapped to -/SET and the difference between the current and stored vehicle speed is more
than 5 km/h (approximately 3 mph), the current vehicle speed is stored and speed control is
performed.
(d) ACCELERATION CONTROL
pushed to +/RES and held in that position, the cruise control system sends a signal to the ECM to
operate the throttle valve motor of the throttle with motor body assembly to open the throttle
valve. Following this, the vehicle speed is stored and maintained when the cruise control main
switch is released.
(e) TAP-UP CONTROL
tapped to the +/RES side (for approximately 0.6 seconds), the stored vehicle speed increases by
approximately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) for each time the switch is tapped. When the cruise control main
switch is tapped to +/RES and the difference between the current and stored vehicle speed is more
than 5 km/h (approximately 3 mph), the stored vehicle speed will not be changed.
(f) RESUME CONTROL
If cruise control system control of vehicle speed was canceled due to any of the manual cancel
conditions (other than turning the cruise control system off using the ON-OFF switch), and if the
vehicle speed is between the low and high speed limits, the stored vehicle speed from the time of
cancelation will be resumed and maintained when the cruise control main switch is pushed to
+/RES.
(g) SHIFT DOWN CONTROL (for Automatic Transmission)
When the vehicle is cruising uphill, the transmission may shift down according to ECT control. After
the ECM judges that uphill cruising has ended based on the throttle valve angle, the transmission
will shift up. If the transmission shifts down during acceleration or resume control, it will shift up
after acceleration or resume control is completed.
(h) MANUAL CANCEL CONTROL

Performing any of the following cancels the cruise control system control of vehicle speed (the
stored vehicle speed in the ECM is maintained).
Depressing the brake pedal.

Moving the shift lever to 1st or R position. (for Manual Transmission)
Moving the shift lever from D or M to any other position. (for Automatic Transmission)
Selecting the 3rd, 2nd or 1st range with the shift lever in M. (for Automatic Transmission)
Selecting the 3rd, 2nd or 1st range using the shift paddle switch with the shift lever in M
(w/ shift paddle switch). (for Automatic Transmission)
Pulling the cruise control main switch to CANCEL
Turning the cruise control system off using the cruise control main switch (ON-OFF button)
(the stored vehicle speed in the ECM is not maintained)
4. AUTO CANCEL
The ECM cancels the cruise control under the specified conditions. The cause for cancellation can be
confirmed by referring to the "CANCEL CODE" .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PM209IX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Communication Table
SENDER RECEIVER SIGNAL LINE

TCM ECM Shift lever position and gear range signal CAN
Vehicle speed signal

ECM ABS, TR(A)C and/or VSC operation CAN
Actuator Assembly)
signal
Combination Meter
Assembly
(Cruise Control Cruise control indicator and cruise control SET
ECM CAN
Indicator Light) indicator operation signal
(Cruise Control SET
Indicator)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001W1U05TX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECM (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECM
1. CHECK ECM
TERMINAL NO. WIRING TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

Ignition switch ON, Brake pedal

Below 1 V
A33-3 (ST1-) - BR-B - depressed
Brake signal
A33-4 (EC) B-L Ignition switch ON, Brake pedal
11 to 14 V
released
Ignition switch ON, Brake pedal

11 to 14 V
A33-7 (STP) - A33- depressed
R - B-L Stop light signal
4 (EC) Ignition switch ON, Brake pedal
Below 1 V
released
Ignition switch ON, Clutch pedal

Below 1 V
A33-15 (CLSW)* - depressed
R-Y - B-L Clutch switch circuit
A33-4 (EC) Ignition switch ON, Clutch pedal
11 to 14 V
released
Cruise control main switch (ON-

1 MΩ or higher
OFF button) released
Cruise control main switch (ON-

Below 2.5 Ω
OFF button) pushed
A33-30 (CCS) - W-L - B- Cruise control main
A33-4 (EC) L switch circuit +/RES switch ON 235 to 245 Ω
1509 to 1571
CANCEL switch ON
Ω
*: for Manual Transmission

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002X2201MX
Title: CRUISE CONTROL: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM: U0073,U0101,U0122,U0155,U0402,U0416,U0423:

Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off (2013 FR-S)
DTC U0155 Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control Module
DTC U0402 Invalid Data Received from TCM
DESCRIPTION
The ECM communicates several signals with each sensor and ECU by CAN communication circuit.
There are any malfunctions in the communication circuit, one or more DTCs in the CAN communication
system are output.

CODE
Wire harness (CANL and

Bus off state for 0.436 seconds or more
U0073 CANH circuits)
(1 trip detection logic)
ECM

No communication between ECM and TCM for 0.5 seconds
CANH circuits)
U0101 or more
TCM
ECM

No communication between ECM and skid control ECU for CANH circuits)
U0122 0.5 seconds or more Skid control ECU (Brake
(1 trip detection logic) actuator assembly)
ECM

No communication between ECM and combination meter CANH circuits)
U0155 assembly for 0.5 seconds or more Combination meter
(1 trip detection logic) assembly
ECM

Invalid data received from TCM for 2 seconds or more CANH circuits)
U0402
(1 trip detection logic) TCM
ECM

Invalid data received from skid control ECU (brake actuator CANH circuits)
U0416 assembly) for 2 seconds or more Skid control ECU (Brake
ECM

Invalid data received from combination meter assembly for CANH circuits)
U0423 2 seconds or more Combination meter
ECM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Cruise Control / Trouble Codes.
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 or U0423 is output A
DTC U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 or U0423 and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
A GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0P009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0O00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
When applying vacuum, the needle may waver but, as long as the needle returns to its initial
position immediately, it is not a malfunction.
(a) Visually check the charcoal canister assembly for cracks or damage.
If cracks or damage is found, replace the charcoal canister assembly.
(b) Check the air flow.
(1) Using a vacuum pump, check the air flow according to

the procedures below.
*1 Port A
*2 Port B
*3 Port C
OK:
MEASUREMENT CONDITION SPECIFIED

CONDITION
Ports B and C closed, and vacuum applied to

No air leaks
port A (2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.590 in.Hg))
Port C closed, and vacuum applied to port A Air flows from

(2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.590 in.Hg)) port B
Port C closed and air blown into port A (5 kPa Air flows from
(0.1 kgf/cm 2 , 0.725 psi)) port B
Air blown into port A (5 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm 2 , Air flows from
0.725 psi)) ports B and C
If the result is not as specified, replace the charcoal

canister assembly.
2. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value in the table

below.
1-5 20°C (68°F) 25 to 30 Ω
1-5 60°C (140°F) 27 to 35 Ω

*a
(Canister Pump Module)
(b) Check the operation of the check valve.
(1) Install a clean hose to the purge valve.
(2) Check that air flows from port A to port B.
*1 Port A
*2 Port B
(3) Connect the positive (+) lead of the battery to

terminal 5 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1.
(4) Check that air does not flow from port A to port B.
*1 Port A
*2 Port B

*a


*a
(6) Check that the vacuum pump operates.
NOTICE:
Do not operate vacuum pump for 5 minutes or more.

*1 1.5 V
*2 4.8 to 5.2 V

*a
(8) Measure the voltage according to the value in the table below.
Standard Voltage:

7-8 25°C (77°F) 3.5 V

*1 1.5 V
*2 4.8 to 5.2 V

*a
(10) Connect the positive (+) lead of the battery to terminal 3 and the negative (-) lead to terminal
4. Check that the voltage drops slightly from 3.5 volts.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0N00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the canister base bracket to the charcoal canister assembly with 2 nuts.
(b) Install the charcoal canister assembly with canister base bracket with the 2 bolts and the nut.
Bolt - Torque: 7.5 N·m (77 kgf·cm, 66in·lbf)

Nut - Torque: 18 N·m (184 kgf·cm, 13ft·lbf)
(c) Connect the drain hose D as indicated by the arrows, in

the order shown in the illustration.
(d) Connect the drain hose C as shown in the illustration.
2. INSTALL CANISTER PUMP MODULE

(a) Install the drain hose E.
(b) Connect the drain hose A and the drain hose B.
(c) Engage the clamp.
(d) Install the nuts and bracket B.
(e) Install the 2 nuts and bracket A.
(f) Engage the clip.
(g) Install the check valve with 3 bolts.

(h) Connect the evaporation hose to the fuel pipe assembly.
(i) Engage the clip.
(j) Connect the drain hose A to the fuel filler pipe.
(k) Connect the drain hose B to the charcoal canister assembly.
3. INSTALL REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0Q00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: CANISTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE CANISTER PUMP MODULE
(a) Disconnect the drain hose B as indicated by the arrows,

in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Disconnect the drain hose A as indicated by the arrows,

(c) Disconnect the evaporation hose from the fuel filler pipe
assembly.
(d) Disengage the clip.
(e) Remove the 3 bolts and check valve.
(f) Disengage the clip.
(g) Disengage the clamp.
(h) Remove the nut and bracket B.
(i) Remove the 2 nuts and bracket A.
(j) Disconnect the drain hose A and drain hose B as indicated

by the arrows, in the order shown in the illustration.
*1 Drain hose A
*2 Drain hose B
(k) Disconnect the 2 quick connector as indicated by the
arrows, in the order shown in the illustration, and remove
the drain hose E.
4. REMOVE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the drain hose D as indicated by the arrows,

(b) Disconnect the drain hose C as indicated by the arrows,

(c) Remove the nut.

(d) Remove the 2 bolts and charcoal canister assembly along
with the canister base bracket B.
(e) Remove the 2 nuts and canister base bracket.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0J009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK PURGE VALVE
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose (on the
canister side) of the fuel pipe.
*1 Fuel pipe
*2 No.2 fuel vapor feed hose
(e) Enter the following menus: Engine / Active Test / Activate the VSV for Evap Control.
(f) When the purge valve is operated using the tester, check whether the port of the purge valve
applies suction to your finger.
OK:
Check valve: OFF Purge valve has no suction
Check valve: ON Purge valve has suction
If the result is not as specified, check the valve , wire harness and ECM.
(g) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose (on the canister side) of the purge valve.
2. INSPECT FUEL CUT-OFF RPM

(a) Start and warm up the engine.
(b) Use a sound scope to check for injector operation noise.
(c) Increase the engine speed to at least 3000 rpm.
(d) Check that when the accelerator pedal is released, the injector operation noise stops momentarily
and then resumes.
Standard:
Fuel cut off rpm 2500 rpm or more

Fuel injection restart rpm 1400 rpm
If the result is not as specified, check the injector , wire harness and ECM.
3. VISUALLY INSPECT HOSES, CONNECTIONS AND GASKETS EMISSION HOSE
(a) Check that there are no cracks, leaks or damage.
NOTICE:
Detachment or other problems with the engine oil
dipstick, filler cap, ventilation hose and other components
may cause the engine to run improperly.
Air suction caused by disconnections, looseness or cracks
in the parts of the air induction system between the
throttle with motor body assembly and cylinder head will
cause engine failure or engine malfunctions.
If the result is not as specified, replace parts as

necessary.
4. CHECK HOSES AND CONNECTORS

(a) Visually check for loose connections, sharp bends or damage.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0H009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0I009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
*1 ECM *2 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
*3 Heated Oxygen Sensor *4 Purge Valve
*a to Charcoal Canister Assembly - -

*1 Roll Over Valve *2 Cut-off Valve
*3 Fuel Tank Assembly *4 Fuel Tank Cap Assembly
*5 Purge Valve *6 ECM
*7 Canister Pump Module *8 Air Filter
*9 Vent Valve *10 Pump Motor
*11 Canister Pressure Sensor *12 Charcoal Canister Assembly
*a to Intake Manifold - -
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I3E009X
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: FUEL TANK CAP: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check if the cap and/or gasket are deformed or

damaged.
*1 Gasket
If necessary, replace the fuel tank cap assembly or

gasket.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I3I00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I3H00HX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install a clean hose to the PCV valve sub-assembly.
(b) Check the PCV valve sub-assembly operation.
(1) Blow air into the cylinder head side and check that air
passes through easily.
*1 Clean Hose
*a Air
CAUTION:
Do not suck air through the valve. Petroleum substances
inside the valve are hazardous to your health.
(2) Blow air into the intake manifold side and check that
air passes through with difficulty.
*1 Clean Hose
*a Air
If the result is not as specified, replace the PCV valve

sub-assembly.
(c) Remove the clean hose from the PCV valve sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I3G00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the PCV valve sub-

assembly.
Adhesive:
Three Bond 1141G or equivalent
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the PCV valve sub-assembly.

(c) Connect the ventilation hose.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I3J00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PCV VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the ventilation hose from the PCV valve sub-
assembly.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the PCV

valve sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0X00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0W00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PURGE VALVE
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value in the table

below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 21 to 27 Ω
(b) Check the operation of the purge valve.
(1) Install a clean hose to the purge valve.
(2) Check that air does not flow from port E to port F.
(3) Check that air flows from port E to port F.
*1 Port E
*2 Port F
*3 Clean Hose
Air
OK:
MEASUREMENT CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
Battery does not connect Air does not flow from port E to port F
Battery positive (+) → Terminal 1
Air flows from port E to port F
Battery negative (-) → Terminal 2
If the result is not as specified, replace the purge valve.
(4) Remove the clean hose from the purge valve.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0V00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PURGE VALVE

(a) Connect the joint wire harness to the purge valve.
(b) Connect the No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose and No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose, and install the purge valve
with the joint wire harness.
(c) Connect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
(d) Connect the purge valve connector.
(e) Install the nut and purge valve.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 ENGINE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003I0Y00CX
Title: FA20 EMISSION CONTROL: PURGE VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE NO. 1 ENGINE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE PURGE VALVE
(a) Remove the nut which holds the purge valve onto the
intake manifold.
(b) Disconnect the purge valve connector.
(c) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor

connector.
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
*1 air pressure sensor assembly connector
*2 No. 2 ventilation hose
(e) Disconnect the No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose and No. 2 fuel
vapor feed hose, and remove the purge valve with the
joint wire harness.
*1 No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose

*2 No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose
*3 Joint wire harness
*4 purge valve
(f) Remove the joint wire harness from the purge valve
assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002QU600LX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Avoid excessive force to the accelerator pedal assembly.
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
(a) Install the accelerator pedal assembly with the 2 nuts.
(b) Connect the accelerator pedal assembly connector.
2. INSTALL ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD COVER

(a) Engage the new clip, and install the accelerator pedal rod cover.
3. INSTALL ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD STOPPER

(a) Install the accelerator pedal rod stopper.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHM006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

(d) Enter the following menus: Data List / Accel Sensor Out No. 1 and Accel Sensor Out No. 2.
(e) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.
Standard Voltage:
ACCELERATOR PEDAL OPERATION ACCEL SENSOR OUT NO. 1 ACCEL SENSOR OUT NO. 2
Released 0.5 to 0.8 V 0.5 to 0.8 V
Depressed 2.4 to 3.5 V 2.4 to 3.5 V

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ACCELERATOR PEDAL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD STOPPER
(a) Remove the accelerator pedal rod stopper.
3. REMOVE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD COVER
(a) Disengage the clip, and remove the accelerator pedal rod
cover.
4. REMOVE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

(a) Disconnect the accelerator pedal assembly connector.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the accelerator pedal assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BOE00FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MUG00UX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) the table

below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 1.98 to 2.64 Ω

*a
(Air Fuel Ratio Sensor)
If the result is not as specified, replace the air fuel ratio

sensor.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MUF00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Using SST, install the air fuel ratio sensor onto the
exhaust manifold.
SST: 09224-00010
Without SST - Torque: 21 N·m (214 kgf·cm, 16ft·lbf)
With SST - Torque: 18 N·m (184 kgf·cm, 13ft·lbf)
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected to a
strong impact, replace it.
HINT:
This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to the

torque wrench.
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using SST
with a fulcrum length of 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using a
torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 180 mm (7.087
in.).
If using a torque wrench with a different length, or
connecting the torque wrench and SST at an angle, refer
to the alternate torque values .
(c) Connect the air fuel ratio sensor connector.
2. CONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MUI00YX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. DISCONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
2. REMOVE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the air fuel ratio sensor connector.
(c) Using SST, remove the air fuel ratio sensor from the
exhaust manifold.
SST: 09224-00010
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BO600QX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHH008X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE

table below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 6.85 to 7.65 Ω

*a
(Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve)
If the result is not as specified, replace the camshaft

timing oil control valve.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BO500PX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Exhaust Side of Bank 2)
(a) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(b) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
(c) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected to a strong impact, replace it.
Make sure that the O-ring is not damaged or does not jump out of position during installation.
(d) Connect the camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
2. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Intake Side of Bank 2)
valve.
NOTICE:
3. INSTALL AIR CLEANER CAP WITH AIR CLEANER HOSE
valve.
NOTICE:
valve.
NOTICE:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHI00AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE

(d) Turn the A/C switch on.
(e) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side).
(1) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank 1).
(2) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve assembly (for
intake side) using the Techstream.
OK:
0 deg (CA) Normal engine speed
36 deg (CA) Engine idles roughly or stalls
If the operation is not as specified, check the camshaft timing oil control valve, wire harness
and ECM.
(3) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank 2).
intake side) using the Techstream.
OK:
and ECM.
(f) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side).
(1) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear
(Bank 1).
exhaust side) using the Techstream.
OK:

and ECM.
(3) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear
(Bank 2).
exhaust side) using the Techstream.
OK:
and ECM.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BO700QX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT OIL CONTROL VALVE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Intake Side of Bank 1)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve

connector.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
(d) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
3. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (for Exhaust Side of Bank 1)

connector.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
4. REMOVE AIR CLEANER CAP WITH AIR CLEANER HOSE

connector.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
connector.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Q9U00HX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Q9T00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank 2)

(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the new O-ring of the VVT sensor.
(b) Install the VVT sensor with the bolt.
(c) Connect the VVT sensor connector.
3. INSTALL VVT SENSOR (for Intake Side of Bank 2)

(c) Connect the VVT sensor connector



Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Q9V00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Intake Side of Bank 1)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
3. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank 1)

6. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank 2)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Q9Y00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002QA000KX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

table below.
1-2 Always 1836 to 2244 Ω
Component without harness connected:

*a
(Crankshaft Position Sensor)
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the crankshaft

position sensor.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Q9X00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

(a) Install the crankshaft position sensor with the bolt.
(b) Connect the crankshaft position sensor connector.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002Q9Z00JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and crankshaft position sensor.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000047VL005X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000047NH009X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ECM BRACKET

(a) Engage the 2 claws, and install the new ECM bracket to the ECM.
NOTICE:
After attaching the ECM bracket to the ECM, do not remove the ECM bracket.
If the ECM bracket is attached to the ECM the wrong way around, replace ECM bracket with new
items.
2. INSTALL ECM
NOTICE:
When replacing the ECM, do not use ECM with different specifications.
(a) Install the ECM with the 2 nuts.
(b) Connect the 4 connectors to the ECM.
NOTICE:
Be sure to securely connect the connectors.
3. INSTALL CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY
5. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL RH
7. PERFORM INITIALIZATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000047NJ009X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ECM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
If the ECM or ECM bracket have replaced, use the new ECM and new ECM bracket.
2. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL RH
3. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVE ECM
(a) Disconnect the 4 connectors from the ECM.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the ECM.
NOTICE:
6. REMOVE ECM BRACKET
(a) Disengage the 2 claws, and remove ECM bracket.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003II1008X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MTM00NX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
*1 Resistance *2 Temperature
*3 Acceptable - -

*a - -
(Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor)
(a) Partially soak the sensor in the water and warm up the water.
Approximately. 20°C (68°F) 2.35 to 2.65 kΩ

1-2
Approximately. 80°C (176°F) 0.305 to 0.331 kΩ
NOTICE:
When checking the engine coolant temperature sensor in water, keep the terminals dry. After the
check, wipe the engine coolant temperature sensor dry.
If the result is not as specified, replace the engine coolant temperature sensor.
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Install a new gasket to the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install the engine coolant temperature sensor to the cylinder
head sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected a strong impact, replace it.
Use the torque value compensation formula to calculate the torque value for use when a torque
wrench is combined with a tool such as a ball joint lock nut wrench .
(c) Connect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
3. FILL ENGINE COOLANT
4. INSPECT COOLANT LEAK
5. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL (for High Pressure)

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor

connector.
(b) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the engine

coolant temperature sensor.
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MTM00PX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
*a Resistance *b Temperature

*c Acceptable *d
(Engine oil Temperature Sensor)
(a) Partially soak the sensor in the water and warm up the water.
Approximately 20°C (68°F) 2.25 to 2.65 kΩ

1-2
Approximately 80°C (176°F) 0.305 to 0.331 kΩ
NOTICE:
When checking the engine oil temperature sensor in water, keep the terminals dry. After the
check, wipe the engine oil temperature sensor dry.
If the result is not as specified, replace the engine oil temperature sensor.
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Install a new gasket to the engine oil temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil temperature sensor to the cylinder head
sub-assembly.
(c) Connect the engine oil temperature sensor connector.

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor connector.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the engine

oil temperature sensor.
*1 19 mm Deep Socket Wrench

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BOD00FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MUK00UX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) the

table below.
1-2 20°C (68 °F) 5.0 to 6.4 Ω

*a
(Heated Oxygen Sensor)
If the result is not as specified, replace the heated oxygen

sensor.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MUJ00VX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Using SST, install the heated oxygen sensor onto the
exhaust manifold assembly.
SST: 09224-00010
without SST - Torque: 21 N·m (214 kgf·cm, 16ft·lbf)
with SST - Torque: 18 N·m (184 kgf·cm, 13ft·lbf)
HINT:
This torque value is effective when SST is parallel to the

torque wrench.
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using SST
with a fulcrum length of 30 mm (1.18 in.).
The "with SST" torque value is effective when using a
torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 180 mm (7.087
in.).
If using a torque wrench with a different length, or
connecting the torque wrench and SST at an angle, refer
to the alternate torque values
(c) Connect the oxygen sensor connector.
3. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH

(a) Instal the 3 clips, and connect the engine under cover rear RH.
5. INSTALL FRONT TIRE

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MUM00VX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE FRONT TIRE RH
3. DISCONNECT REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
(a) Remove the 3 clips, and disconnect the rear engine under
cover RH.
4. REMOVE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector.
(c) Using SST, remove the oxygen sensor from the exhaust
manifold assembly.
SST: 09224-00010
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002QV300OX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000053AP003X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SPARK PLUG (for Bank 1)
(a) Using the spark plug wrench 14 mm, tilt extension bar 35
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and install the 2 spark
plugs onto the cylinder head sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected a strong
impact, replace it.
2. INSTALL IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)

(a) Install the 2 ignition coils onto the cylinder head cover sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
(b) Connect the 2 ignition coil connectors to the ignition coil.
3. INSTALL INJECTOR DRIVER
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and install the 2 spark
plugs onto the cylinder head sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
If a component has been dropped or subjected a strong
impact, replace it.

(a) Install the 2 ignition coils onto the cylinder head cover sub-assembly with the 2 bolts.
NOTICE:
(b) Connect the 2 ignition coil connectors to the ignition coil.
6. INSTALL INJECTOR COVER (for Bank 2)

(a) Install the injector cover with the 2 bolts.
(b) Engage the clamp, and install the fuel hoses.
7. REMOVE SST
(a) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(b) Remove the SST.
SST: 09250-53010
(c) Install the 2 nuts.
(d) Remove the rope that is tying the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly to the front suspension cross
member sub-assembly.
8. REMOVE ENGINE HANGER
10. CONNECT ENGINE WIRE

(a) Connect the engine wire with the wire harness clamp bracket mount bolt and 3 clamps.
(b) Connect the engine wire with the 4 clamps.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002QV400RX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. SET HOOD SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. DISCONNECT ENGINE WIRE
(a) Disengage the 4 clamps, and disconnect the engine wire.
(b) Disengage the 3 clamps and wire harness clamp bracket

mount bolt, and disconnect the engine wire.
8. INSTALL ENGINE HANGER
9. SET SST
(a) Tie the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly onto the front
suspension cross member sub-assembly using rope.
HINT:
This operation is necessary in order to prevent the front

exhaust pipe sub-assembly from falling off.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts.
(c) Install the engine hanger with the bolt.
(d) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(e) Install the SST to between the engine mount and front.
SST: 09250-53010
10. REMOVE INJECTOR COVER (for Bank 2)
(a) Disengage the clamp, and disconnect the fuel hoses.

(b) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover.
11. REMOVE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY (for Bank 2)
(a) Disconnect the 2 ignition coil connectors from the ignition

coil assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and remove the 2 ignition coils.
12. REMOVE SPARK PLUG (for Bank 2)
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and remove the 2 spark
plugs.
13. REMOVE INJECTOR DRIVER
(a) Disconnect the 2 ignition coil connectors from the ignition

coil assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and remove the 2 ignition coils.
mm and universal joint 54 mm, and remove the 2 spark
plugs.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IGF006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. PERFORM SPARK TEST
(a) Check for DTCs .
NOTICE:
If any DTC is present, perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure for that DTC.
(b) Remove the 4 ignition coils and 4 spark plugs .
(c) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(d) Remove the SST.
SST: 09250-53010
(e) Install the 2 nuts.
(f) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover (bank 1).

(g) Disconnect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(h) Install the injector cover (bank 1).
(i) Install the injector driver with the 3 bolts.
HINT:
Do not connect the upper side 2 connectors.
(j) Disconnect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(k) Connect the cable to the negative battery terminal.
(l) Install the air cleaner case sub-assembly with the hose.
(m) Install a spark plug to each ignition coil and connect the ignition coil connector.
(n) Ground the spark plug.
(o) Check that spark occurs while the engine is being cranked.
(p) Check whether sparks occur.
NOTICE:
Ground the spark plugs when checking them.
Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds.
Do not use an ignition coil and spark plug that has been dropped or subjected to a strong impact.
(q) If spark does not occur, perform the following procedure.
2. INSPECT IGNITION COIL AND SPARK PLUG

(a) Perform the spark test in accordance with the following procedure.
(1) Check that the wire harness side connector of the ignition coil assembly is securely connected.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG Connect securely
OK Go to next step
(2) Perform a spark test on each ignition coil assembly.
1. If there is a cylinder where sparks do not occur, replace its ignition coil with the
ignition coil of a cylinder where sparks occur normally.
2. Crank the engine and visually check that sparks occur at the cylinder with the
normally operating ignition coil.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK Replace ignition coil assembly
NG Go to next step
(3) Perform a spark test on each spark plug.
1. If there is a cylinder where sparks do not occur, replace its spark plug with the spark
plug of a cylinder where sparks occur normally.
2. Crank the engine and visually check that sparks occur at the cylinder with the
normally operating spark plug.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK Replace spark plug
NG Inspect the ignition system
(b) Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal.
(c) Remove the air cleaner case sub-assembly with hose.
(d) Remove the 3 bolts and the injector driver.
(e) Remove the 2 bolts and the injector cover (bank 1).
(f) Connect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(g) Install the 2 bolts and the injector cover.
(h) Install the 3 bolts and the injector driver.
(i) Connect the 4 connectors to the injector driver. Move the lock levers in the direction indicated by
the arrow to lock the 3 connectors.
*1 Lock Lever
Connector with Lock Lever

Connector without Lock Lever
(j) Connect the 2 fuel injector connectors.
(k) Install the injector cover (bank 1) with the 2 bolts.
(l) Remove the 2 nuts.
(m) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
(n) Install the SST.
SST: 09250-53010
(o) Install the ignition coil assembly and spark plug .
(p) Clear the DTCs .

(q) Check for DTCs .
HINT:
Reinstall the sensors, connectors, etc. and restore the previous vehicle conditions before rechecking for
DTCs.
3. INSPECT SPARK PLUG
NOTICE:
When replacing a spark plug, make sure to use the designated spark plug because an ion current
type misfire detection system is used for the spark plug.
Do not damage the platinum tip. If the spark plug has been dropped, make sure to replace it with a
designated new spark plug.
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
Do not attempt to adjust the electrode gap of a used spark plug.
Make sure to use SST to check gaps, preventing the platinum tip from being damaged.
If damaged, replace it with a designated new spark plug.
(a) Check the electrode using a megohmmeter:
*a Ground

the table below.
Standard Insulation Resistance:

CONDITION
Spark plug (terminal part) - 10 MΩ or

Always
Body ground higher
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, clean the spark plug with

a spark plug cleaner and measure the resistance again.
If a megohmmeter is not available, perform the following
simple inspection instead.
(b) Alternative inspection method:
(1) Quickly accelerate the engine to 4000 rpm 5 times.
(2) Remove the spark plug .
(3) Visually check the spark plug.
If the electrode is dry, the spark plug is functioning

properly. If the electrode is damp, proceed to the next
step.
HINT:
If a megohmmeter is not available, perform the following

simple inspection instead.
(4) Install the spark plug .
(c) Check the spark plug for any damage to its threads and insulator.
HINT:
If there is any damage, replace the spark plug.
Recommended Spark Plug:
MANUFACTURER PRODUCT
DENSO made ZXE27HBR8
(d) Reference:
(1) Using SST, check the spark plug electrode gap.
*a Spark Plug Electrode Gap
SST: 09240-00020
Maximum electrode gap for a used spark plug:
1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
If the gap exceeds the maximum, replace the spark plug.
NOTICE:
Never attempt to adjust the gap of a used plug.
Electrode gap for a new spark plug:

0.7 to 0.8 mm (0.0276 to 0.0315 in.)
(e) Clean the spark plugs.
If the electrode has traces of wet carbon, clean the electrode with a spark plug cleaner and then dry
it.
Standard air pressure:
588 kPa (6.0 kgf/cm 2 , 85 psi)

Standard duration:
20 seconds or less
HINT:
Only use a spark plug cleaner when the electrode is free of oil. If the electrode has traces of oil, use
gasoline to clean off the oil before using the spark plug cleaner.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BOZ00FX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IGE006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: IGNITION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BO400JX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MTF00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR
(a) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) the table

below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 532 to 588 kΩ

*a
(Knock Sensor)
If the result is not as specified, replace the knock sensor.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MTE00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL KNOCK SENSOR

(a) Install the 2 knock sensors onto the cylinder block with the 2 bolts as shown in the illustration.

*a Bank 1
*b Bank 2
Engine Front Side
(b) Connect the 2 knock sensors connectors.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MTH00WX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: KNOCK SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE KNOCK SENSOR
(a) Disconnect the 2 knock sensor connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 knock sensor.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHS006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: MASS AIR FLOW METER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MTL00MX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: MASS AIR FLOW METER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER
(a) Perform a visual check for any foreign matter on the

platinum hot wire (heater) of the mass air flow meter
*1 Platinum Hot Wire (Heater)
OK:
There is no foreign matter.
If the result is not as specified, replace the mass air flow

meter.
(b) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.

*a
(Mass Air Flow Meter)
-20°C (-4°F) 13.6 to 18.4 kΩ
1-2 20°C (68°F) 2.21 to 2.69 kΩ
60°C (140°F) 0.49 to 0.67 kΩ
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the mass air

flow meter.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHR006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: MASS AIR FLOW METER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL MASS AIR FLOW METER

(a) Install the mass air flow meter with the 2 screws.
(b) Connect the mass air flow meter.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHU006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: MASS AIR FLOW METER: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
NOTICE:
Perform the mass air flow meter inspection according to the procedures below.
Only replace the mass air flow meter when the mass air flow value in the Data List is not within the
normal operating range (with the engine stopped) or there is foreign matter on the mass air flow
meter platinum hot wire (heater).

(a) Read the value using the Techstream.
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection with the vehicle indoors and on a level surface.
Perform the inspection of the mass air flow meter while it is installed to the air cleaner case
(installed to the vehicle).
During the test, do not use the exhaust air duct to perform suction on the exhaust pipe.
(4) Enter the following menus: Data List / MAF.
(5) Wait for 30 seconds, and read the values on the Techstream.
Standard:
TESTER DISPLAY CONDITION STANDARD CONDITION
Engine not running

MAF 0.47 gm/sec or less
30 seconds after turning ignition switch to ON
If the result is not as specified, replace the mass air flow meter.
If the result is within the specified range, inspect the mass air flow meter .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IHT006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: MASS AIR FLOW METER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE MASS AIR FLOW METER
(a) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.
(b) Remove the 2 screws and the mass air flow meter.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000480H005X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT EFI MAIN 1 RELAY

table below.

Battery voltage not applied to 10 kΩ or

1 and 2 terminals higher
3-5
Battery voltage applied to 1
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals
If the result is not as specified, replace the EFI main 1

relay.

table below.


3-5
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals

relay.

table below.

3-5
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals

relay.
4. INSPECT IG2 RELAY

table below.


3-5
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals
If the result is not as specified, replace the IG2 relay.
5. INSPECT INJ RELAY

table below.


3-5
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals
If the result is not as specified, replace the INJ relay.
6. INSPECT ETCS RELAY

table below.

3-5
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals
If the result is not as specified, replace the ETCS relay.
7. INSPECT C/OPEN RELAY

table below.


3-5
Below 1 Ω
and 2 terminals
If the result is not as specified, replace the C/OPEN relay.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDM0MBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: BASIC INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
BASIC INSPECTION
When a malfunction is not confirmed by the DTC check, troubleshooting should be carried out for all
circuits considered to be possible causes of the problem. In many cases, by carrying out the basic engine
check shown in the following procedure, the location of the problem can be found quickly and efficiently.
Therefore, using this check is essential when engine troubleshooting.
1. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE
NOTICE:
Carry out this check with the engine stopped and the ignition switch off.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
11 V or higher OK
Below 11 V NG
NG CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY
OK
2. CHECK WHETHER ENGINE CRANKS
NG PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
OK
3. CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS
NG GO TO STEP 6
OK
4. CHECK AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly is not excessively
contaminated with dirt or oil.
REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT

NG SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
5. CHECK IDLING SPEED
(a) Check the engine idling speed .
TROUBLESHOOT IDLING SPEED AND

NG PROCEED TO NEXT STEP
OK
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
(a) Check the fuel pressure .
TROUBLESHOOT FUEL PRESSURE AND

NG PROCEED TO NEXT STEP
OK
7. CHECK FOR SPARK
(a) Perform a spark test .

TROUBLESHOOT SPARK AND PROCEED TO
NG NEXT STEP
OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

2/5/2014 TIS - Scion 2013 FR-S Repair Manual (RM20S0U)
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000004G8F0CEX

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Prod Date Range: [03/2012 - ]
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Brake Override System; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
Brake Override System
DESCRIPTION
When the vehicle is being driven with the accelerator pedal depressed, depressing the brake pedal
without releasing the accelerator pedal will activate the brake override system to restrict driving torque.
The conditions for activating the brake override system as well as the items that are controlled are
explained below.
Activation Conditions:
Vehicle is running at or above the specified speed.
The accelerator pedal is depressed, and then the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTICE:
The vehicle may not enter the brake override system control due to the relation of the accelerator
pedal angle and the vehicle's speed.
Items Controlled:
Driving torque is restricted.
HINT:
During brake override system control, the value for the accelerator pedal angle (which is used for
engine control) is forcibly reduced to a specified value. For this reason, the Data List value for
Accelerator Position will be replaced with a specified value regardless of the actual accelerator
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/resources/jsp/siviewer/index.jsp?dir=rm/RM20S0U&href=xhtml/RM000000PD80E1X.html&locale=en&model=FR-S&MY=20… 1/6
pedal angle (Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt %, Accel Sens. No. 2 Volt %)
Deactivation Conditions:
When the Stop Light Switch turns OFF or the actual accelerator pedal angle increases or
decreases beyond the specified range.
Inspection Method
Drive at 10 km/h (6.25 mph), depress the accelerator pedal by 1/2 to 3/4 and keep it in that position.
Under these conditions, if the brake pedal is depressed, then the brake override system has been
activated.
CAUTION:
When carrying out the inspection, use a place where you are able to carry it out safely and also
pay close attention to your surroundings.
Also, when driving make absolutely sure that all road traffic laws, such as speed limits, are observed.
HINT:
Under normal conditions, the Accelerator Position value changes in response to the Accel Sens. No.
1 Volt % value. For more information on the numerical values, refer to the Data List .
If the Data List values of Accelerator Position and Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % do not match, and the
value of Accelerator Position changes but the value of Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % is constant, this
confirms that brake override system has activated. (Data can be captured relatively easily by using
the snapshot function in the Data List. Confirm the data after performing the drive test.)
NOTICE:
The brake override system restricts driving torque if the brake pedal is depressed when driving
with the accelerator pedal depressed. If a customer reports experiencing loss of torque after the
accelerator and brake pedals have both been intentionally depressed, explain to the customer
that this is not a malfunction, and that the customer should avoid depressing both the accelerator
and brake pedals at the same time.
Example: While operating the accelerator pedal, the customer uses their left foot to operate the
brake pedal.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(c) Enter the following menus: System Select / Health Check.
(d) Check DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STOP LIGHT SWITCH AND and ST1)
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Stop Light Switch and ST1.
(d) Check the Data List indication when the brake pedal is depressed and released.
OK:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
Brake pedal released OFF

Stop Light Switch
Brake pedal depressed ON
Brake pedal released OFF

ST1
Brake pedal depressed ON
NG INSPECT STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
3. INSPECT BRAKE PEDAL
(a) Inspect and adjust the brake pedal (for Manual Transmission) .
(b) Inspect and adjust the brake pedal (for Automatic Transmission) .
HINT:
If the stop light switch turns ON too late, the start of brake override system control may be
delayed; if it turns ON too soon, brake override system control may begin too early, so conduct
inspection of the brake pedal and stop light switch assembly.
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (for Manual Transmission) B
NG (for Automatic Transmission) C
B REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE PEDAL
C REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE PEDAL
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR)
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % and Accel
Sens. No. 2 Volt %.
(d) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.

OK:
TECHSTREAM CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION

DISPLAY
Accel Sens. No. 1

Volt % Accelerator Pedal
Values smoothly change following accelerator
Released → Depressed →
Accel Sens. No. 2 pedal operation
Released
Volt %
HINT:
For numerical values of Accel Sens. No. 1 Volt % and Accel Sens. No. 2 Volt %, refer to the Data List
.
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR

NG
ASSEMBLY
OK
5. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VEHICLE SPEED)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Vehicle Speed.

Standard:

DISPLAY
Vehicle stopped, engine running 0 km/h (0 mph)

Vehicle Speed Vehicle running at constant speed between 16.1 No large fluctuations when driving
to 64.4 km/h (10 to 40 mph) at a constant speed
CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and traffic laws.
HINT:
Data can be captured relatively easily by using the snapshot function in the Data List. Confirm the
data after performing the drive test.
NG GO TO METER / GAUGE SYSTEM
OK
6. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FR, FL, RR, RL WHEEL SPEED)
(d) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Data List / FR Wheel Speed, FL Wheel
Speed, RR Wheel Speed and RL Wheel Speed.

Standard:

DISPLAY
FR Wheel
Speed Vehicle stopped, engine running 0 km/h (0 mph)
FL Wheel
Speed
RR Wheel
Vehicle running at constant speed between 16.1 No large fluctuations when driving
Speed
to 64.4 km/h (10 to 40 mph) at a constant speed
RL Wheel
Speed
CAUTION:
HINT:
Data can be captured relatively easily by using the snapshot function in the Data List. Confirm the
data after performing the drive test.
NG INSPECT FRONT OR REAR SPEED SENSOR
OK END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDQ0U4X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (2013 FR-S)
CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

HINT:
Inspect the vehicle ECM using check mode. Intermittent problems are easier to detect with the
Techstream when the ECM is in check mode. In check mode, the ECM uses 1 trip detection logic, which
is more sensitive to malfunctions than normal mode (default), which uses 2 trip detection logic.
1. Clear DTCs .
2. Switch the ECM from normal mode to check mode using the Techstream .
3. Perform a simulation test.
4. Check and wiggle the harness(es), connector(s) and terminal(s).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDL0OBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CHECK MODE PROCEDURE (2013 FR-S)
CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

HINT:
Compared to normal mode, check mode is more sensitive to malfunctions. Therefore, check mode can
detect malfunctions that cannot be detected in normal mode.
NOTICE:
All the stored DTCs and freeze frame data are cleared if: 1) the ECM is changed from normal
mode to check mode or vice versa; or 2) the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or off
while in check mode. Before changing modes, always check and note any DTCs and freeze frame
data.
1. CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

(a) Check and ensure the following conditions:
(1) Battery voltage is 11 V or higher.
(2) Throttle valve is fully closed.
(3) Shift lever is in P, N or neutral.
(4) A/C switch is off.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Check Mode.
(g) Switch the ECM from normal mode to check mode.
(h) Check that the MIL flashes as shown in the illustration.
(i) Start the engine.
(j) Check that the MIL turns off.
(k) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.
(l) Check DTCs and freeze frame data using the Techstream.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDR0C4X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: CHECKING MONITOR STATUS (2013 FR-S)
CHECKING MONITOR STATUS

The purpose of the monitor result (mode 06) is to allow access to the results of on-board diagnostic
monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. Examples are
catalysts and evaporative emissions (EVAP) systems.
The monitor result allows the OBD II scan tool to display the monitor status, test value, minimum test
limit and maximum test limit. These data are displayed after the vehicle has been driven to run the
monitor.
When the test value is not between the minimum and maximum test limits, the ECM (PCM) interprets this
as a malfunction. If the test value is on the borderline of the test limits, the component is likely to
malfunction in the near future.
Perform the following procedures to view the monitor status. Although these procedures refer to the
Lexus/Toyota Techstream, the monitor status can be checked using a generic OBD II scan tool. Refer to
your scan tool operator's manual for specific procedural information.
1. PERFORM MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN

(c) Clear DTCs .
(d) Operate the vehicle in accordance with the applicable drive pattern described in Readiness Monitor
Drive Pattern . Do not turn the ignition switch off.
NOTICE:
The test results will be lost if the ignition switch is turned off.
2. ACCESS MONITOR RESULT

(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Monitor / Current Monitor / Result.
(b) Confirm the monitor status for each component.
HINT:
The monitor status for each component is displayed in the Result column.
Pass: The component is functioning normally.

Fail: The component is malfunctioning.
(c) Display the test results and test values for a monitor by selecting the icon in the Details column for
that monitor.
3. CHECK COMPONENT STATUS

(a) Compare the test value with the minimum test limit (Min Limit) and maximum test limit (Max
Limit).
(b) If the test value is between the minimum and maximum test limits, the component is functioning
normally. If not, the component is malfunctioning. The test value is usually not near the test limits.
If the test value is on the borderline of the test limits, the component is likely to malfunction in the
near future.
HINT:
The monitor result might on rare occasions be Pass even if the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is
illuminated. This indicates the system malfunctioned on a previous driving cycle. This might be caused
by an intermittent problem.
4. MONITOR RESULT INFORMATION
When using a generic scan tool, multiply the test value by the scaling value.
Refer to "Monitor Result" in each DTC related to the monitor .
Advance / Retarded Intake Side (for Bank 1):
MONITOR ID TEST ID SCALING UNIT DESCRIPTION
$35 $8B Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Advance)
$35 $8C Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Retarded)
Advance / Retarded Intake Side (for Bank 2):
$36 $8B Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Advance)
$36 $8C Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Retarded)
Advance / Retarded Exhaust Side (for Bank 1):
$35 $8D Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Advance)
$35 $8E Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Retarded)
Advance / Retarded Exhaust Side (for Bank 2):
$36 $8D Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Advance)
$36 $8E Multiply by 0.5 °CA VVT slow response (Retarded)
A/F Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1:
$01 $84 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension A/F sensor minimum value
$01 $85 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension A/F sensor maximum value
$01 $86 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension A/F sensor response
$01 $8F Multiply by 0.004 No dimension A/F sensor fluctuation (Width)
$01 $90 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension A/F sensor fluctuation (Time)
$01 $91 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension Rich to lean delay level
$01 $92 Multiply by 0.001 Second Rich / lean time ratio
$01 $A3 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension Lean to rich delay level

$01 $A4 Multiply by 0.001 Second Lean / rich time ratio
$01 $AC Multiply by 0.001 Second Waiting time for rich side
$01 $AD Multiply by 0.001 Second Rich / lean time difference
$01 $AE Multiply by 0.001 Second Waiting time for lean side
$01 $AF Multiply by 0.001 Second Lean / rich time difference
HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2:
$02 $05 Multiply by 0.004 Second Rich to lean sensor threshold time (calculated)
$02 $06 Multiply by 0.004 Second Lean to rich sensor threshold time (calculated)
$02 $07 Multiply by 0.005 V Minimum sensor voltage for test cycle (calculation)
$02 $08 Multiply by 0.005 V Maximum sensor voltage for test cycle (calculation)
Catalyst:
$21 $89 Multiply by 0.004 No dimension Oxygen storage capacity of catalyst
EVAP Monitor (Cap Off):
$39 $93 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode B test result
EVAP Monitor (0.040"):
$3B $94 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode C test result
$3B $95 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode D test result
EVAP Monitor (0.020"):
$3C $96 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode D test result
$3C $97 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode E test result
$3C $C1 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode 4-1 test result
$3C $C3 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode 5 test result
$3C $C6 Multiply by 0.01 Second Mode 9 test result

$3C $CA Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Mode 16 test result
Purge Flow Monitor:
$3D $98 Multiply by 0.00025 kPa 0.04" mode Z test result
$3D $CB Multiply by 0.01 Second Test 1 result
$3D $CC Multiply by 0.00025 kPa Test 2 result
A/F Sensor Heater Bank 1 Sensor 1:
$41 $9B Multiply by 1 Time Oxygen sensor heater test result
Oxygen Sensor Heater Bank 1 Sensor 2:
$42 $A2 Multiply by 1 Ω A/F sensor heater impedance
Misfire:
MONITOR TEST SCALING UNIT DESCRIPTION

ID ID
Multiply
$A1 $0B Time Total EWMA misfire count of all cylinders in last ten driving cycles
by 1
When ignition switch ON, total misfire count of all cylinders

Multiply in last driving cycle is displayed.
$A1 $0C Time
by 1 While engine is running, total misfire count of all cylinders
in current driving cycle is displayed.
Multiply
$A2 $0B Time Total EWMA* misfire count of cylinder 1 in last ten driving cycles
by 1
When ignition switch ON, total misfire count of cylinder 1 in

Multiply last driving cycle is displayed.
$A2 $0C Time
by 1 While engine is running, total misfire count of cylinder 1 in
current driving cycle is displayed.
Multiply
by 1

$A3 $0C Time
Multiply
by 1

$A4 $0C Time
Multiply
by 1

$A5 $0C Time
HINT:
*: EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles (calculated)
Calculation: 0.1 x (current counts) + 0.9 x (previous average) Initial value for (previous average) = 0
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SXS076X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
In the table below, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not depend
solely on these reference values when deciding whether a part is faulty or not.
The actual values may differ from the values listed in the chart under "Results of real-vehicle check"
due to climate, weather conditions, etc.
HINT:
Normal Condition: If no conditions are specifically stated for "idling", the shift lever should be in P, N
or neutral, the A/C switch should be off and all accessory switches should be off.
(b) Turn the A/C switch off.
(d) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(f) Turn the Techstream on.
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List.
HINT:
To display the list box, press the pull down menu button next to Primary. Then select a
measurement group.
When you select a measurement group, the ECU data belonging to that group is displayed.
Measurement Group List / Description
All Data / All data

Primary / -
Engine Control / Engine control system related data
Gas General / -
Gas AF Control / Air fuel ratio control system related data
Gas AF O2 Sensor / Air fuel ratio sensor and heated oxygen sensor related data
Gas Throttle / Gasoline throttle system related data
Gas Intake Control / Intake control system related data
Gas Valve Control / Valve control system related data
Gas Misfire / "Misfire" related data
Gas Starting / "Difficult to start" related data
Gas Rough Idle / "Rough idle" related data
Gas Evaporative / Evaporative system related data
Gas CAT Converter / Catalyst converter related data
Check Mode / Check mode related data
Monitor Status / Monitor status related data
Ignition / Ignition system related data
Charging Control / Charging control system related data
Compression / Data used during "Check the Cylinder Compression" Active Test
AT / Continuously variable transaxle system related data
Vehicle Information / Vehicle information
(h) According to the display on the Techstream, read the Data List.
HINT:
The title used for each group of Data List items in this repair manual does not appear on the
Techstream. However, the name in parentheses after the title, which is a Measurement Group, does
appear on the Techstream. When the name shown in parentheses is selected on the Techstream, all
the Data List items listed for that group will be displayed.
"Result of real-vehicle check" is the assessment of one vehicle. Use it only for reference.
2. Various Vehicle Conditions 1 (All Data)

Vehicle Speed
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL STORED AS FREEZE FRAME

DISPLAY CONDITION DATA
Vehicle speed/
Actual vehicle
Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), Max.: 255 km/h Yes
speed
(158 mph)
Diagnostic Note:
This is the current vehicle speed

Vehicle The vehicle speed is detected using the wheel speed sensors.
Speed
Vehicle speed data is delayed when it is displayed. Therefore, even if the
vehicle speed listed in the freeze frame data is 0 km/h (0 mph), this does
not always mean that the malfunction occurred when the vehicle was
stopped.
To accurately confirm whether the vehicle was stopped or not, use "SPD
(SP2)" which is the transmission output speed.
Engine Speed
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE FRAME DATA

DISPLAY
Engine speed/ 650 to 800 rpm:

Yes
Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 16383 rpm Idling
Engine
Speed Diagnostic Note:
When the crankshaft position sensor is malfunctioning, "Engine Speed" is approximately 0
or varies greatly from the actual engine speed.
Calculate Load

DISPLAY
Load calculated by ECM/ 15 to 40%:

Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 100% Idling
Diagnostic Note:
Calculate This is the engine load calculated based on the estimated intake manifold pressure.
Load Calculate Load = Estimated intake manifold pressure / maximum intake manifold pressure
x 100 (%)
(For example, when the estimated intake manifold pressure is the same as atmospheric
pressure, Calculate Load is 100%.)
Vehicle Load

DISPLAY
Vehicle load/
- Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 25700%
Diagnostic Note:
This is the engine intake air charging efficiency.
Vehicle Load = Current intake airflow (g/rev.) / maximum intake airflow
Maximum intake airflow = Displacement (L) / 2 x 1.2 (g/rev.)
Vehicle Load
HINT:
Due to individual engine differences, intake air temperature, etc., the value may
exceed 100%.
Intake airflow (g/rev.) = Intake airflow (gm/sec) x 60 / Engine speed (rpm)

(Intake airflow (gm/sec) is MAF)
MAF
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
Airflow rate from Mass Air Flow

1.0 to 3.0 gm/sec: Idling
(MAF) meter/
8 to 13 gm/sec: 3000 rpm Yes
Min.: 0 gm/sec, Max.: 655.35
MAF (without load)
gm/sec
Diagnostic Note:
This is the intake air amount from the mass air flow meter.
Atmosphere Pressure
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS

DISPLAY FREEZE FRAME
DATA
Atmospheric pressure/
Min.: 0 kPa (0 mmHg), Equivalent to atmospheric pressure
Yes
Max.: 255 kPa (1912 (absolute pressure): Ignition switch ON
mmHg)
Atmosphere
Diagnostic Note:
Pressure
This value is calculated from the intake air amount.
Standard atmospheric pressure: 101 kPa (757 mmHg)
For every 100 m increase in altitude, pressure drops by 1 kPa. This varies by
weather.
MAP

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
80 to 110 kPa: Ignition

intake manifold pressure/
switch ON
Min.: 0 kPa (0 mmHg), Max.: 255 kPa Yes
20 to 48 kPa: Idling
MAP (1912 mmHg)
(A/C off)
Diagnostic Note:
Intake manifold pressure is calculated by manifold absolute pressure sensor.
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE

ITEM/RANGE FRAME DATA
Engine oil
temperature/ More than 85°C (185°F): After
Yes
Engine Oil Min.: -40°C, Max.: warming up
Temperature Sensor 215°C
Diagnostic Note:
Engine oil temperature is calculated by engine oil temperature sensor.
Coolant Temp
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE FRAME

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE DATA
Coolant temperature/
75 to 100°C (167 to 212°F): After
Min.: -40°C, Max.: Yes
warming up
215°C
Diagnostic Note:
This is the engine coolant temperature.
Coolant
HINT:
Temp
After warming up the engine, the engine coolant temperature is 75 to 100°C.
After a long soak, the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and
ambient air temperature are approximately equal.
If the value is -40°C (-40°F) or higher than 215°C (419°F), the sensor circuit may be
open or shorted.
Intake Air
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE FRAME DATA
Intake air
temperature/ Equivalent to temperature at location of mass air
Yes
Min.: -40°C, flow meter: Ignition switch ON
Max.: 215°C
Diagnostic Note:
This is the intake air temperature.
Intake Air
HINT:
If the value is -40°C (-40°F) or higher than 215°C (419°F), the sensor circuit is open
or shorted.
Ambient Temperature

Ambient
temperature/ Equivalent to ambient air temperature:
Yes
Min.: -40°C, Max.: Ignition switch ON
215°C
Ambient Diagnostic Note:

Temperature This is the ambient temperature.
HINT:
Engine Run Time

Engine run time/ Time after engine

Yes
Min.: 0 s, Max.: 65535 s start
Diagnostic Note:
Engine Run This is the time elapsed since the engine started.
Time
HINT:
The time is counted only while the engine is running.
Initial Engine Coolant Temp
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL STORED AS FREEZE FRAME

CONDITION DATA
Initial engine coolant

temperature/ - Yes
Initial Engine Coolant Min.: -40°C, Max.: 119.3°C
Temp
Diagnostic Note:
This is the coolant temperature stored when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Initial Intake Air Temp
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT NORMAL STORED AS FREEZE FRAME

ITEM/RANGE CONDITION DATA
Initial intake air

temperature/ - Yes
Initial Intake Air Min.: -40°C, Max.: 119.3°C
Temp
Diagnostic Note:
This is the intake air temperature stored when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Battery Voltage
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE FRAME DATA
Battery voltage/
11 to 14 V: Idling Yes
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 65.535 V
Battery Voltage
Diagnostic Note:
If 11 V or less, characteristics of some electrical components may change.
3. Throttle Control 1 (Gas Throttle)

Accelerator Position

Accelerator pedal position/ Actual accelerator pedal

No
Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9% position
Accelerator Diagnostic Note:
Position This is the accelerator pedal position defined using the learned fully released position
(sensor output) of accelerator pedal position sensor as 0% and the fully depressed position
as 100%.
Accel Sens. No.1 Volt %

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
10 to 20%: Accelerator pedal

Absolute Accelerator Pedal
released
Position (APP) No. 1/ Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
fully depressed
Accel Sens. Diagnostic Note:

No.1 Volt % The accelerator pedal position sensor No. 1 output is converted using 5 V = 100%.
HINT:
If there are no accelerator pedal position sensor DTCs stored, it is possible to conclude
that the accelerator pedal position sensor system is normal.
Accel Sens. No.2 Volt %


Absolute APP No. 2/
released
Min.: 0%, Max.: Yes
Accel Sens. No.2 50 to 70%: Accelerator pedal fully
100%
Volt % depressed
Diagnostic Note:
The accelerator pedal position sensor No. 2 output is converted using 5 V = 100%.
Accel Sensor Out No.1

APP sensor No. 1 0.5 to 0.8 V: Accelerator pedal

voltage/ released
No
Accel Sensor Out Min.: 0 V, Max.: 2.4 to 3.5 V: Accelerator pedal fully
No.1 4.980 V depressed
Diagnostic Note:
This is the raw voltage from the accelerator pedal position sensor No. 1.
Accel Sensor Out No.2

APP sensor No. 2 0.5 to 0.8 V: Accelerator pedal

voltage/ released
No
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 2.4 to 3.5 V: Accelerator pedal fully
Accel V depressed
Sensor Diagnostic Note:
Out No.2 This is the raw voltage from the accelerator pedal position sensor No. 2.
Accelerator pedal position sensor No. 2 is used to monitor accelerator pedal position sensor
No. 1. When there is a malfunction in sensor No. 1, the ECM uses sensor No. 2 to control the
engine.
Accelerator Idle Position
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL STORED AS

DISPLAY CONDITION FREEZE FRAME
DATA
Whether or not accelerator pedal position sensor

ON: Accelerator
detecting released accelerator pedal/ No
pedal released
Accelerator ON or OFF
Idle Position Diagnostic Note:
This is a parameter calculated by the ECM which indicates whether the accelerator pedal
is in the learned idle position.
Accel Fully Close Learn #1
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE

FRAME DATA
Accelerator fully released learned

2.5 to 6.5 deg: Ignition
value No. 1/ No
switch ON
Accel Fully Close Min.: 0 deg, Max.: 124.5 deg
Learn #1 Diagnostic Note:
This is the value of accelerator pedal position sensor No. 1 learned when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Accel Fully Close Learn #2

FRAME DATA
Accelerator fully released learned

2.5 to 6.5 deg: Ignition
value No. 2/ No
switch ON
Accel Fully Close Min.: 0 deg, Max.: 124.5 deg
Learn #2 Diagnostic Note:
This is the value of accelerator pedal position sensor No. 2 learned when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Throttle Sensor Volt %

10 to 22%: Throttle
Absolute throttle position
fully closed
sensor/ Yes
Throttle Sensor 80 to 90%: Throttle
Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
Volt % fully open
Diagnostic Note:
The throttle position sensor No. 1 output is converted using 5 V = 100%.
Throttl Sensor #2 Volt %

Throttle sensor 35 to 45%: Throttle

position #2/ fully closed
Yes
Throttl Sensor #2 Min.: 0%, Max.: 80 to 90%: Throttle
Volt % 100% fully open
Diagnostic Note:
The throttle position sensor No. 2 output is converted using 5 V = 100%.
ST1

ON: Brake pedal

Brake pedal signal/ depressed
No
ON or OFF OFF: Brake pedal
ST1 released
Diagnostic Note:
This is the stop light switch signal.
Throttle Idle Position

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
Whether or not throttle position sensor

ON: Accelerator pedal
detecting idle/ No
released
ON or OFF
Throttle Idle
Position Diagnostic Note:
This is a parameter calculated by the ECM.
The value is ON when the throttle is at the idle position and OFF when the throttle is
open.
Throttle Require Position

Required throttle
position/ 0.5 to 1.1 V: Idling at P, N or
No
Min.: 0 V, Max.: neutral (A/C off)
Throttle Require 4.980 V
Position
Diagnostic Note:
This is a value calculated by the ECM showing the voltage for the target throttle
valve position.
Throttle Sensor Position

3 to 5%: Throttle
Throttle sensor
fully closed
position/ Yes
65 to 75%: Throttle
Throttle Sensor Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
fully open
Position
Diagnostic Note:
This is the throttle valve opening amount used for engine control.
This value has no meaning when the ignition switch is ON and the engine is stopped.
Throttle Position No. 1

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
0.5 to 1.1 V:
Throttle fully closed
Throttle position sensor No. 1
3.2 to 4.8 V:
output voltage/ No
Throttle Throttle fully open
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 V
Position No. 1 0.6 to 1.4 V: Fail-
safe operating
Diagnostic Note:
This is the throttle position sensor No. 1 output voltage.
Throttle Position No. 2

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
1.5 to 2.2 V:
Throttle fully closed
Throttle position sensor No. 2
4.0 to 4.5 V:
output voltage/ No
Throttle Throttle fully open
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 V
Position No. 2 1.9 to 2.6 V: Fail-
safe operating
Diagnostic Note:
This is the throttle position sensor No. 2 output voltage.
Throttle Position Command

CONDITION DATA
Throttle position command

value/ - No
Throttle Position Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 V
Command
Diagnostic Note:
Throttle Position Command is the same value as Throttle Require Position.
Throttle Sens Open Pos #1
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE FRAME

DISPLAY DATA
Throttle position sensor No.

0.7 to 1.1 V: Ignition switch
1/ No
Throttle ON
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 V
Sens
Open Pos Diagnostic Note:
#1 This is the throttle position sensor No. 1 output voltage when there is no current supplied to
the electronic throttle actuator. The accelerator pedal is released but the throttle valve is kept
open by the throttle valve opener with the ignition switch ON.
Throttle Sens Open Pos #2

DISPLAY DATA
Throttle position sensor No.

0.7 to 1.1 V: Ignition switch
2/ No
Throttle ON
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 V
Sens
Open Pos Diagnostic Note:
#2 This is the throttle position sensor No. 2 output voltage when there is no current supplied to
the electronic throttle actuator. The accelerator pedal is released but the throttle valve is kept
open by the throttle valve opener with the ignition switch ON.
Throttle Motor Power Supply Relay
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT NORMAL STORED AS FREEZE

ITEM/RANGE CONDITION FRAME DATA
Throttle motor power

Throttle Motor Power ON: Ignition
supply relay/ Yes
Supply Relay switch ON
ON or OFF
Throttle Motor DUTY

Throttle actuator/ 2 to 5%: Idling at P, N or neutral

Yes
Throttle Motor Min.: 0%, Max.: 100% (A/C off)
DUTY Diagnostic Note:
This is the output duty ratio of the throttle actuator drive circuit.
Throttle Motor Duty (Open)

Throttle actuator duty

0 to 40%: Idling at P, N or
ratio (open)/ No
neutral (A/C off)
Throttle Motor Min.: 0%, Max.: 255%
Duty (Open) Diagnostic Note:
This is the duty ratio used to drive the throttle actuator and open the throttle valve.
It is an ECM command signal.
Throttle Motor Duty (Close)

DISPLAY DATA
Throttle actuator duty ratio

0 to 40%: Idling at P, N or neutral
(close)/ No
(A/C off)
Min.: 0%, Max.: 255%
Diagnostic Note:
This is the duty ratio used to drive the throttle actuator and close the throttle valve. It is an
Throttle ECM command signal.
Motor
Duty HINT:
(Close)
During idling, the throttle valve opening angle is usually controlled using a duty ratio drive
signal which closes the throttle valve. However, when carbon deposits build up, it may be
necessary to open the throttle valve more than the throttle valve opener does. In that case,
the opening angle is controlled using a "Throttle Motor Duty (Open)" signal which opens the
throttle valve.
Throttle Fully Close Learn

FRAME DATA
Throttle valve fully closed

0.35 to 0.85 V: Ignition
(learned value)/ No
switch ON
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 4.980 V
Throttle Fully Diagnostic Note:

Close Learn The ECM uses this learned value to determine the fully closed (and fully
open) position of the throttle valve.
Learning is performed immediately after the ignition switch is turned to
ON.
+BM Voltage

+BM voltage/ 11 to 14 V: Ignition switch

No
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 79.998 V ON
+BM Voltage
Diagnostic Note:
This is the power supply for the electronic throttle actuator.
Actuator Power Supply
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE FRAME

ITEM/RANGE DATA
Actuator power supply/ ON: Ignition switch

No
Actuator Power ON or OFF ON
Supply Diagnostic Note:
If +BM power is lost, this item changes to OFF.
Throttle Position

Throttle valve opening angle/

Min.: 0 deg, Max.: 499.99 - Yes
Throttle Position deg
Diagnostic Note:
This value has no meaning when the ignition switch is ON and the engine is stopped.
4. Idle Speed Control (Gas Rough Idle)

ISC Flow
TESTER MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL STORED AS FREEZE

DISPLAY CONDITION FRAME DATA
Flow rate calculated using information from

each sensor/ - Yes
Min.: 0 g/s, Max.: 299.99 g/s
Diagnostic Note:
This is the total ISC airflow amount (the amount of intake air necessary to maintain
ISC Flow idling).
HINT:
ISC Flow (total ISC airflow amount) = ISC Learning Value + ISC Feedback Value + each
compensation amount
ISC Position

Requested throttle opening amount calculated

using ISC control/ - Yes
ISC Min.: 0 deg, Max.: 499.99 deg
Position Diagnostic Note:
This is the throttle valve opening amount while the engine is idling (the throttle valve
opening amount necessary to maintain ISC air flow).
ISC Feedback Value

DISPLAY
ISC feedback amount/

- Yes
Min.: -150 g/s, Max.: 149.99 g/s
Diagnostic Note:
This is the feedback amount necessary to adjust the airflow amount to maintain the target
ISC idling speed.
Feedback
Value HINT:
When the idling speed differs from the target, the feedback amount is adjusted. If the
feedback amount becomes more than a certain value, this will be reflected in the ISC
learned airflow value.
ISC Learning Value

ISC learned airflow value/

Min.: -150 g/s, Max.: 149.99 - Yes
g/s
Diagnostic Note:
This is the learned value of the airflow amount necessary for engine idling.
ISC Learning
Value HINT:
If ISC Feedback Value becomes more than a certain value, this will be reflected in
ISC Learning Value.
ISC Flow (total ISC airflow amount) = ISC Learning Value + ISC Feedback Value +
each compensation amount
Electric Load Feedback Val
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL STORED AS FREEZE

CONDITION FRAME DATA
Compensation flow rate according to

electrical load/ - Yes
Electric Load Min.: -150 g/s, Max.: 149.99 g/s
Feedback Val
Diagnostic Note:
This is the ISC compensation amount determined according to the electrical load.
Air Conditioner FB Val

Compensation flow rate according to air

conditioner load/ - Yes
Air Conditioner Min.: -150 g/s, Max.: 149.99 g/s
FB Val
Diagnostic Note:
This is the ISC compensation amount determined according to the air conditioner load.
Deposit Loss Flow

DISPLAY
Flow loss due to deposits/

- Yes
Min.: -150 g/s, Max.: 149.99 g/s
Diagnostic Note:
This value indicates the amount of compensation for a decrease in flow passage
area due to the buildup of deposits on the throttle valve.
Check this value for reference when the engine stalls, is difficult to start, or idles
roughly.
Deposit
When the ISC learned value is initialized by disconnecting the battery negative
Loss
terminal or removing the EFI(+B) fuse , performing the following procedures in
Flow
order to quickly relearn the Deposit Loss Flow value. After the Deposit Loss Flow
has been relearned, gradual fine adjustments will continue automatically.
Start the engine cold and allow the engine to idle.

After the engine is warmed up (engine coolant temperature is above
80°C [176°F]), allow the engine to idle for an additional 5 minutes.
Turn the ignition switch off and wait for 30 seconds.
Start the engine again, and allow the engine to idle for 5 minutes.
5. Fuel System (Gas General)

Fuel Press

DISPLAY FREEZE
FRAME DATA
Fuel pressure/
3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 51.0 kgf/cm 2 ,
Min.: 0 kPa (0 kgf/cm 2 , 0 psi),
435 to 725 psi): Idling at P, N or neutral after Yes
Fuel Max.: 655350 kPa (6683 kgf/cm
warming up (A/C off)
Press 2 , 95050 psi)
Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates the fuel pressure on the high-pressure side.
Fuel Pump Duty
Fuel pump duty/

Fuel Pump Duty 20 to 70%: Idling Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
Fuel Level Sensor Impedance

Fuel Level Sensor

Fuel Level Sensor Impedance/ About 100 Ohm: Fuel receiver
No
Impedance Min.: 0 Ohm, Max.: gauge is F position
511.5 Ohm
Injector (Port)

DISPLAY DATA
Injection period of the No. 1 1000 to 2000 μs

cylinder/ Idling after warming Yes
Injector (Port) Min.: 0 μs, Max.: 65535 μs up
Diagnostic Note:
This is the injection period of the No. 1 cylinder (the command value from the ECM).
Injection Volum (Cylinder 1)

Injection volume
(cylinder 1)/ 0 to 0.15 ml: Idling after
Yes
Injection Volum Min.: 0 ml, Max.: warming up
(Cylinder 1) 2.047 ml
Diagnostic Note:
This is the fuel injection volume for 10 injections.
Fuel Pressure Target Value
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE FREEZE FRAME
DATA
Target fuel
3 to 5 MPa (31 to 51 kgf/cm 2 , 435 to
pressure/
725 psi): Idling after warming up
Min.: 0 MPa, Yes
Fuel Pressure Max.: 65.535 7 to 9 MPa (72 to 91 kgf/cm 2 , 1024
Target Value MPa to 8924 psi): 2500 rpm (without load)
Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates the target fuel pressure for the high-pressure fuel pump.
HP FP Discharge Rate

DATA
Fuel volume required by the

0.04 to 0.08 ml: Idling at P, N or
HP FP high pressure fuel pump/ Yes
neutral after warming up (A/C off)
Discharge Min.: 0 ml, Max.: 2.047 ml
Rate Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates the high-pressure fuel pump discharge amount.
Injection Way
Injection mode/
- Yes
Port / Direct / Either
Injection Way
Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates the injection mode.
Injection Switching Status

Prohibition of changing the D-4S
injection method/ - Yes
Injection Switching OK or NG
Status
Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates whether the Control the Injection Way Active Test is prohibited.
Injection Timing (D4)

DATA
Injection timing/
320 to 340 deg(CA): Idling at P, N or
Min.: -3277 deg(CA), Yes
Injection neutral after warming up (A/C off)
Max.: 3276.7 deg(CA)
Timing (D4)
Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates the injection timing of the main injector.
Injection Time (D4)

Injection time/
0 to 2000 μs: Idling at P, N or neutral after
Min.: 0 μs, Max.: Yes
Injection warming up (A/C off)
65535 μs
Time (D4)
Diagnostic Note:
This item indicates the last injection time of the injector for the number 1 cylinder.
6. EVAP System 1 (All Data)

Vacuum Pump

DISPLAY
Key-off EVAP system pump status/

- Yes
ON or OFF
Vacuum
Diagnostic Note:
Pump
This item changes to ON during the key-off EVAP monitor which is performed approximately
5 hours after the ignition switch is turned off .
7. EVAP System 2 (Gas Evaporative)

EVAP (Purge) VSV

DISPLAY
Purge valve control duty/

- Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 100%
Diagnostic Note:
This is the command signal from the ECM.

EVAP
(Purge) This is the purge valve control duty ratio. When EVAP (Purge) VSV is any value
VSV except 0%, EVAP purge* is being performed.
*: Gasoline vapor from the fuel tank is being introduced into the intake system
via the purge VSV.
When the engine is cold or immediately after the engine is started, EVAP (Purge)
VSV is 0%.
Evap Purge Flow
Purge flow/
- Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
Evap Purge Flow Diagnostic Note:
This is the percentage of total engine airflow contributed by EVAP purge operation.
(Evap Purge Flow = Purge flow / Engine airflow x 100 (%))
Purge Density Learn Value

DISPLAY
Purge density learned value/

- Yes
Min.: -200%, Max.: 199.993%
Diagnostic Note:
Purge Density Learn Value is the proportion of the decrease in injection volume (based on
the change in the air fuel ratio feedback compensation value) related to a 1% purge flow
rate.
When Purge Density Learn Value is a large negative value, the purge effect is large.
The purge density is determined from the change in the air fuel ratio feedback
Purge
compensation value when purge flow is introduced.
Density
Purge density learning is performed so that the feedback compensation value is 0 +/-2%.
Learn Value
HINT:
Usually, the value is approximately +/-1%.

1%: The concentration of HC in the purge gas is relatively low.
0%: The concentration of HC in the purge gas is approximately equal to the
stoichiometric air fuel ratio.
Large negative values indicate that the concentration of HC in the purge gas is
relatively high.
Vapor Pressure Pump

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
Vapor pressure/
Approximately 100 kPa (750
Min.: 0 kPa (0 mmHg), Max.: No
mmHg): Ignition switch ON
1441.77 kPa (10814.17 mmHg)
Diagnostic Note:
This is the EVAP system pressure monitored by the canister pressure sensor.
Vapor
HINT:
Pressure
Pump Except for when the monitor is running, this value should be approximately the same as
atmospheric pressure.
As Vapor Pressure Pump is almost the same as Atmosphere Pressure when the engine is
stopped, these items can be used to help determine if the canister pressure sensor
characteristics are abnormal, if there is noise, or if the sensor output is stuck at a
certain value.
EVAP System Vent Valve

CONDITION DATA
Key-off EVAP system vent valve

EVAP System Vent OFF: Vent
status/ Yes
Valve ON: Close
ON or OFF
EVAP Purge VSV

DISPLAY
VSV status for EVAP control/

- Yes
ON or OFF
EVAP Purge
VSV Diagnostic Note:
This parameter displays ON when EVAP (Purge) VSV is 30% or more, and displays OFF
when the VSV duty ratio is less than 30%.
Purge Cut VSV Duty

Purge valve duty/

- Yes
Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
Purge Cut VSV Results of real-vehicle check:
Duty
Idling (warm up the engine): 0.0%
Running without load (3000 rpm): 33.3%
8. Air Fuel Ratio Control 1 (All Data)

Target Air-Fuel Ratio

DISPLAY
Target air fuel ratio/

0.8 to 1.2: During idling Yes
Min.: 0, Max.: 1.99
Diagnostic Note:
Target This is the target air fuel ratio used by the ECM.
Air-Fuel
Ratio 1.0 is the stoichiometric air fuel ratio. Values that are more than 1 indicate the system
attempting to make the air fuel ratio leaner. Values that are less than 1 indicate the
system attempting to make the air fuel ratio richer.
Target Air-Fuel Ratio and AF Lambda B1S1 are related.
9. Air Fuel Ratio Control 2 (Gas AF O2 Sensor)

AF Lambda B1S1

Value less than 1 (0.000 to

Output air fuel ratio 0.999) = Rich
associated/ 1 = Stoichiometric air fuel ratio Yes
Min.: 0, Max.: 1.999 Value more than 1 (1.001 to
AF 1.999) = Lean
Lambda
B1S1 Diagnostic Note:
This is the actual air fuel ratio calculated based on the air fuel ratio sensor output.
Performing the "Control the Injection Volume" or "Control the Injection Volume for A/F
Sensor" function of the Active Test enables the technician to check the voltage output of the
sensor.
AFS Voltage B1S1

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
Air fuel ratio sensor output

About 2.2 V: Idling (warming up
voltage/ Yes
the engine)
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 7.999 V
Diagnostic Note:
AFS This is the voltage output of the air fuel ratio sensor (the voltage cannot be
Voltage measured at the terminals of the sensor). This value is calculated by the ECM based
B1S1 on the current output of the air fuel ratio sensor (refer to AFS Current B1S1 below
for the actual sensor output).
Performing the "Control the Injection Volume" or "Control the Injection Volume for
A/F Sensor" function of the Active Test enables the technician to check the voltage
output of the sensor.
AFS Current B1S1

DISPLAY
Air fuel ratio sensor output current

-0.5 to 0.5 mA:
/ Yes
Idling
Min.: -128 mA, Max.: 127.99 mA
AFS Diagnostic Note:

Current With a stoichiometric air fuel ratio (for example, during idling after the engine is
B1S1
warmed up), the air fuel ratio sensor current output is approximately -0.5 to 0.5
mA.
When the value is outside the range of 0.7 to 2.2 mA when the fuel-cut is being
performed, there is a malfunction in the air fuel ratio sensor or sensor circuit.
A/F Sensor Impedance B1S1


A/F Sensor impedance/ About 32 Ohm: Idling after
Yes
Impedance B1S1 Min.: 0 Ohm, Max.: warming up
6553.5 Ohm
A/F Heater Duty #1

CONDITION DATA
Air fuel ratio sensor heater duty

ratio/ 0 to 100% Yes
A/F Heater Duty Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
#1
Diagnostic Note:
When the value is any value except 0%, current is being supplied to the heater.
O2S B1S2


0 to 0.9 V: Vehicle driven at constant
output voltage / Yes
speed of 70 km/h (44mph)
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 1.275 V
Diagnostic Note:
This is the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor.
O2S Values close to 0 V indicate an air fuel ratio leaner than the stoichiometric ratio.
B1S2 Values close to 1 V indicate an air fuel ratio richer than the stoichiometric ratio.
During air fuel ratio feedback control, the value moves back and forth in the range of 0
to 1 V.
Performing the "Control the Injection Volume" or "Control the Injection Volume for A/F
Sensor" function of the Active Test enables the technician to check voltage output of the
sensor.
O2 Heater B1S2


O2 Heater B1S2 heater/ - Yes
Not Act or Active
O2 Sensor Heater Duty

CONDITION DATA
Oxygen sensor heater duty

ratio/ 0 to 100% Yes
O2 Sensor Heater Min.: 0%, Max.: 400%
Duty
Diagnostic Note:
When the vehicle is any valve except 0%, current is being supplied to the heater.
Short FT #1

DISPLAY
Short-term fuel trim /

-15 to +15% Yes
Min.: -100%, Max.: 99.2%
Short FT
#1 Diagnostic Note:
This item is the "short-term fuel injection volume compensation ratio" used to maintain the air
fuel ratio at the stoichiometric ratio using the air fuel ratio sensor for feedback.
Long FT #1

DISPLAY
Long-term fuel trim /

-15 to +15% Yes
Min.: -100%, Max.: 99.2%
Diagnostic Note:
The ECM will learn the Long FT values based on Short FT. The goal is to keep Short FT at 0%
to keep the A/F mixture at the stoichiometric ratio.
This value is used to determine whether the system related to air fuel ratio control is
malfunctioning.
The condition of the system is determined based on the sum of Short FT and Long FT
(excluding times when the system is in transition).
Long FT +15% or more: There may be a lean air fuel ratio.
#1 -15 to +15%: The air fuel ratio can be determined to be normal.
-15% or less: There may be a rich air fuel ratio.
The learned value is cleared when the battery cable is disconnected.
Air fuel ratio feedback leaning is divided up according to the engine operating range
(engine speed * load), and separate value are stored for each operating range.
"Long FT #1" indicates the learned value for the current operating range.
[A/F Learn Value Idle #1], [A/F Learn Value Low #1], [A/F Learn Value Mid1 #1],
[A/F Learn Value Mid2 #1] and [A/F Learn Value High #1] indicate the leaned
values for the different operating ranges. The learned value that is the same as
"Long FT #1" indicates the current engine operating range.
Fuel System Status #1

Fuel System Status Fuel system status/

- Yes
#1 ON or OFF
10. Ignition System (Ignition)

IGN Advance

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
Ignition timing advance for No.

IGN BTDC -5 to 10 deg.: Idling at
1 cylinder/ Yes
Advance N position
Min.: -64 deg., Max.: 63.5 deg.
Knock Feedback Value

Knocking feedback value/

Min.: -1024 deg(CA), Max.: 1023.9 - Yes
deg(CA)
Diagnostic Note:
This is the ignition timing retard compensation amount determined by the presence or
absence of knocking.
Ignition timing = Most retarded timing value*1 + Knock Correct Learn Value*2 + Knock
Feedback Value*3
Example: 21 deg(CA) = 10° + 14° - 3°
*1: The most retarded timing value is a constant determined by the engine speed and engine
load.
*2: The knock correction learned value is calculated as shown below in order to keep Knock
Feedback Value as close to -3 deg(CA) as possible.
When Knock Feedback Value is less than -4 deg(CA), Knock Correct Learn Value is slowly
Knock decreased.
Feedback When Knock Feedback Value is more than -2 deg(CA), Knock Correct Learn Value is slowly
Value increased.
*3: The base value is -3 deg(CA) and is adjusted based on the presence or absence of
knocking. When there is no knocking, the value is increased, and when knocking is present,
the value is decreased.
HINT:
If Knock Feedback Value does not change around the time when knocking occurs even
though knocking continues (for example, stays at -3 deg(CA)), it can be determined that
knocking is not being detected.
Possible Causes:
There is a problem with the knock sensor sensitivity.

The knock sensor is improperly installed.
There is a problem with a wire harness.
Knock Correct Learn Value

Knocking correction learned value/

Min.: -1024 deg(CA), Max.: 1023.9 - Yes
deg(CA)
Diagnostic Note:
Refer to "Knock Feedback Value".
When there is knocking or a lack of power, compare the following values to another vehicle of
the same model.
Engine speed
Calculate Load
Knock IGN Advance
Correct Knock Feedback Value
Learn Knock Correct Learn Value
Value
Knock Correct Learn Value is large: There is no knocking and the ignition timing is advanced.
Knock Correct Learn Value is small: Knocking is present and the ignition timing is being
retarded.
HINT:
When knocking continues even though Knock Correct Learn Value is less than that of the
vehicle being used for comparison (in other words, the ignition timing is being retarded but
the knocking is not stopping), there may be a buildup of deposits or other such problems
due to deterioration over time (oil entering the cylinders, poor quality fuel, etc.).
Idle Spark Advn Ctrl #1 to #4

Idle Individual cylinder timing advance compensation

Spark amount (No. 1 to No. 4)/ - Yes
Advn Min.: -16 deg(CA), Max.: 15.875 deg(CA)
Ctrl #1
Idle
Spark
Advn Diagnostic Note:
Ctrl #2 This is the ignition timing advance compensation amount used to stabilize idling
Idle (each cylinder has a separate value). When the speed for a certain cylinder drops,
Spark the system advances the timing for that particular cylinder in an attempt to restore
Advn the speed and stabilize idling.
Ctrl #3 It may be possible to use this item to help determine specific cylinders which are not
Idle operating normally.
Spark
Advn
Ctrl #4
11. VVT Control 1 (All Data)

VVT Aim Angle #1, #2
VVT hold duty learned value for bank 1

(bank 2)/ - Yes
VVT Aim Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
Angle Diagnostic Note:
#1, #2 This value represents the duty ratio necessary to operate the camshaft timing oil control valve
in order to block the camshaft timing oil control valve path and maintain the advanced state of
the VVT controller. This is only available during the Active Test.
VVT Change Angle #1, #2

VVT displacement angle for bank 1

(bank2)/ - Yes
Min.: -320 DegFR, Max.: 320 DegFR
VVT Change Diagnostic Note:
Angle #1, #2 This is the VVT displacement angle during forced operation.
This is only available during the Active Test.
By checking the VVT Change Angle during the Active Test, it is also possible to
determine whether or not the camshaft position sensor signal is being output.
VVT OCV Duty #1, #2

VVT camshaft timing oil control valve operation

duty for bank 1 (bank2)/ - Yes
VVT OCV Duty Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
#1, #2 Diagnostic Note:
This is the requested duty value for forced operation.
VVT Ex Hold Lrn Val #1, #2

VVT exhaust hold duty ratio learned value for

bank 1 (bank2)/ - Yes
VVT Ex Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
Hold Lrn
Val #1, Diagnostic Note:
#2 This value represents the duty ratio necessary to operate the camshaft timing oil control
valve in order to block the camshaft timing oil control valve path and maintain the advanced
state of the VVT controller. This is only available during the Active Test.
VVT Ex Chg Angle #1, #2

VVT exhaust displacement angle for

bank 1 (bank2)/ - Yes
VVT Ex Chg Angle Min.: 0 DegFR, Max.: 639.9 DegFR
#1, #2 Diagnostic Note:
This is the displacement angle during forced operation. This is only available during
the Active Test.
VVT Ex OCV Duty #1, #2

VVT exhaust camshaft timing oil control valve

duty for bank 1 (bank2)/ - No
VVT Ex OCV Min.: 0%, Max.: 399.9%
Duty #1, #2 Diagnostic Note:
This is the requested duty value for forced operation.
Target VVT Angle #1, #2

CONDITION DATA
Target VVT angle for bank 1

(bank2)/
- Yes
Target VVT Angle #1, Min.: -320 DegFR, Max.: 320
#2 DegFR
Diagnostic Note:
Target VVT Ex Angle #1, #2

Target VVT exhaust angle for bank

1 (bank2)/ - Yes
Target VVT Ex Angle Min.: 0 DegFR, Max.: 640 DegFR
#1, #2
Diagnostic Note:
VVT OCV Current #1, #2

DATA
VVT camshaft timing oil control valve

0.55 to 0.85 A: Idling
VVT OCV output current for bank 1 (bank2)/ Yes
after warming up
Current #1, Min.: 0 A, Max.: 1.99 A
#2 Diagnostic Note:
VVT Ex OCV Current #1, #2

DATA
VVT exhaust camshaft timing oil control

0.55 to 0.85 A: Idling
VVT Ex OCV valve output current for bank 1 (bank2)/ Yes
after warming up
Current #1, Min.: 0 A, Max.: 1.99 A
#2 Diagnostic Note:
12. VN Turbo (All Data)

VN Turbo Type
Turbo type/
Not No
Not/Commo/Vacuum/CAN
VN Turbo Type
Diagnostic Note:
This is the type of the turbo charger.
13. Catalyst (Gas CAT Converter)

Catalyst Temp B1S1

Catalyst temperature/
Min.: -40°C, Max.: - Yes
Catalyst Temp 6513.5°C
B1S1
Diagnostic Note:
This is the temperature of the front catalyst estimated by the ECM.

Starter Signal

ON: Starter operating

Starter signal/
Starter Signal OFF: Starter not Yes
ON or OFF
operating
Starter Control
ON: Starter operating

Starter signal/
Starter Control OFF: Starter not Yes
ON or OFF
operating
Starter Cut Relay
Starter cut relay/

Starter Cut Relay - Yes
ON or OFF
ACC Relay
ACC relay/
ACC Relay - Yes
ON or OFF
Neutral Position SW Signal

ITEM/RANGE DATA
Neutral Position SW PNP switch status/ ON: Shift lever in P, N or

Yes
Signal ON or OFF neutral
Clutch Switch

ON: Clutch pedal

Clutch switch status/ depressed
Clutch Switch Yes
ON or OFF OFF: Clutch pedal
released
Stop Light Switch

ON: Brake pedal

Stop Light Stop light switch status/ depressed
Yes
Switch ON or OFF OFF: Brake pedal
released
A/C Signal
A/C switch status/

A/C Signal ON: A/C on Yes
ON or OFF
A/C Pressure Normal SW

FRAME DATA
Air conditioning pressure

A/C Pressure ON: Air conditioning
sensor status/ Yes
Normal SW pressure sensor on
ON or OFF
Closed Throttle Position SW

ON: Throttle fully

Closed throttle position
Closed Throttle closed
switch/ Yes
Position SW OFF: Throttle
ON or OFF
open
Rear Defogger SW

Rear Defogger Rear defogger switch/ ON: Rear defogger switch

No
SW ON or OFF ON
Blower Fan SW

Blower fan switch/ ON: Blower fan switch

Blower Fan SW No
ON or OFF ON
Head Light Switch

Head Light Head light switch/ ON: light control switch tail
No
Switch ON or OFF on
Front Wiper Switch

ITEM/RANGE DATA
Front Wiper Front wiper switch/ ON: Front wiper switch

No
Switch ON or OFF ON
Ignition Status
Ignition switch/ ON: Ignition switch

Ignition Status Yes
ON or OFF ON
Fuel Cut Condition

ITEM/RANGE DATA
Fuel Cut Fuel cut condition/ ON: Fuel cut

Yes
Condition ON or OFF operating
15. Check Mode (Check Mode)

Check Mode
Check mode/
Check Mode ON: Check mode on No
ON or OFF
16. Test Result (Monitor Status)

Monitor Information 1
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC STORED AS FREEZE

CONDITION NOTE FRAME DATA
N position monitor/
NSW Test Result - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
Check mode result for heated

OXS1 Test Result oxygen sensor / - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
Check mode result for air fuel

A/F Test Results
ratio sensor/ - *1 No
#1
Compl or Incmpl
Check mode result for starter

Starter SW Test
switch/ - *1 No
Result
Compl or Incmpl
Comprehensive component
Complete Parts
monitor/ - *1 No
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
Fuel System Fuel system monitor/

- *1 No
Monitor Not Avl or Avail
Check mode result for misfire

Misfire Test
monitor/ - *1 No
Result
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT monitor/
EGR/VVT Monitor - *1 No
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT monitor/
EGR/VVT Monitor - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
O2S(A/FS) O2S (A/FS) heater monitor/

- *1 No
Heater Monitor Not Avl or Avail
O2S(A/FS) O2S (A/FS) heater monitor/

- *1 No
Heater Monitor Compl or Incmpl
O2S(A/FS) O2S (A/FS) monitor/

- *1 No
O2S(A/FS) O2S (A/FS) monitor/

- *1 No
Monitor Compl or Incmpl
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - *1 No
Not Avl or Avail
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
2nd air monitor/

2nd Air Monitor - *1 No
Not Avl or Avail
2nd air monitor/

2nd Air Monitor - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - *1 No
Not Avl or Avail
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
Heated Catalyst Heated catalyst monitor/

- *1 No
Heated Catalyst Heated catalyst monitor/

- *1 No
Monitor Compl or Incmpl
Catalyst monitor/
Catalyst Monitor - *1 No
Not Avl or Avail
Catalyst monitor/
Catalyst Monitor - *1 No
Compl or Incmpl
*1:
Avail: The monitor is available on the vehicle.
Not Avl: The monitor is not available on the vehicle.
Incmpl / Compl: The item changes from Incmpl to Compl if the monitor was completed at least once at
some time in the past. This item does not change when the ignition switch is turned off. However, the
item changes back to Incmpl when DTCs are cleared or the battery cable is disconnected.
Monitor result (mode 06): The last judgment result is output. This is not cleared when the ignition
switch is turned off, but is cleared when DTCs are cleared.
Monitor Information 2
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC STORED AS FREEZE

ITEM/RANGE CONDITION NOTE FRAME DATA
Comprehensive
Component
component monitor/ - *2 No
Monitor ENA
Unable or Enable
Comprehensive
Component
component monitor/ - *2 No
Monitor CMPL
Compl or Incmpl

- *2 No
Monitor ENA Unable or Enable

- *2 No
Monitor CMPL Compl or Incmpl
Misfire Monitor Misfire monitor/

- *2 No
ENA Unable or Enable
Misfire Monitor Misfire monitor/

- *2 No
CMPL Compl or Incmpl
EGR/VVT Monitor EGR monitor/

- *2 No
EGR/VVT Monitor EGR monitor/

- *2 No
O2S (A/FS) heater

Heater Monitor
monitor/ - *2 No
ENA
Unable or Enable
O2S (A/FS) heater

Heater Monitor
monitor/ - *2 No
CMPL
Compl or Incmpl
O2S(A/FS) Monitor O2S (A/FS) monitor/

- *2 No
O2S(A/FS) Monitor O2S (A/FS) monitor/

- *2 No
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor ENA - *2 No
Unable or Enable
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor CMPL - *2 No
Compl or Incmpl
2nd Air Monitor 2nd air monitor/

- *2 No
2nd Air Monitor 2nd air monitor/

- *2 No
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor ENA - *2 No
Unable or Enable
EVAP Monitor EVAP monitor/

- *2 No
Heated Cat Heated catalyst monitor/

- *2 No
Monitor ENA Unable or Enable
Heated Cat Heated catalyst monitor/

- *2 No
Monitor CMPL Compl or Incmpl
Catalyst Monitor Catalyst monitor/

- *2 No
Catalyst Monitor Catalyst monitor/

- *2 No
*2:
Enable: The monitor is available on the vehicle.
Unable: The monitor is not available on the vehicle.
Incmpl / Compl: The item changes from Incmpl to Compl if the monitor was completed during the
current trip. The item changes back to Incmpl when the ignition switch is turned off.
Monitor result (mode 06): The last judgment result is output. This is not cleared when the ignition
switch is turned off, but is cleared when DTCs are cleared. Therefore, only when DTCs are cleared at the
beginning of a trip do the system monitor (Monitor Information 2) and monitor result (mode 06) match.

TC Terminal
TC terminal status/
TC Terminal - No
ON or OFF
# Codes (Include History)

# Codes (Include Number of codes/

0 No
History) Min.: 0, Max.: 255
MIL
MIL status/
MIL - No
ON or OFF
MIL ON Run Distance

Distance driven with MIL

on/
- No
MIL ON Run Min.: 0 km, Max.: 65535
Distance km
Diagnostic Note:
This is the distance driven after a DTC is stored.
Running Time from MIL ON

Running time from MIL

Running Time from MIL ON/
- No
ON Min.: 0 min, Max.: 65535
min
Time after DTC Cleared

ITEM/RANGE DATA
Time after DTCs cleared/

Time after DTCs
Min.: 0 min, Max.: 65535 Yes
cleared
Time after DTC min
Cleared Diagnostic Note:
This is the time elapsed after DTCs were cleared. Time elapsed after the ignition
switch is turned off is not counted.
Distance from DTC Cleared

Distance driven after DTCs

cleared/ Distance driven after DTCs
Yes
Distance from DTC Min.: 0 km, Max.: 65535 cleared
Cleared km
Diagnostic Note:
This is the distance driven after DTCs were cleared.
Warmup Cycle Cleared DTC

Warmup cycles after DTCs

cleared/ - Yes
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
Warmup Diagnostic Note:
Cycle This is the number of warmup cycles after the DTCs were cleared.
Cleared DTC This is the number of times the engine was warmed up* after DTCs were cleared (or after
the vehicle left the factory).
*: An engine warmup is defined as the engine coolant temperature rising 20°C (104°F) or
more and reaching a temperature of 70°C (158°F) or higher after the engine is started.
Dist Batt Cable Disconnect

DISPLAY FRAME DATA
Distance driven after battery

Dist Batt Cable Total distance vehicle driven after
cable disconnected/ Yes
Disconnect battery cable disconnected
Min.: 0 km, Max.: 65535 km
IG OFF Elapsed Time

CONDITION DATA
Time after ignition switch

IG OFF Elapsed off/
- Yes
Time Min.: 0 min, Max.: 655350
min
OBD Requirements

ITEM/RANGE DATA
OBD OBD II (California

OBD requirement No
Requirements ARB)
Number of Emission DTC

Emissions-related DTCs - No
Number of Emission
DTC Diagnostic Note:
This is the number of emissions-related DTCs.
TC and TE1

TC and CG (TE1) terminals of

TC and TE1 DLC3/ - Yes
ON or OFF
18. Misfire (Gas Misfire)

Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count

CONDITION DATA
Cylinder #1 Misfire Misfire count of cylinders 1

Count to 4/ 0 to 16 Yes
Cylinder #2 Misfire Min.: 0, Max.: 255
Count Diagnostic Note:
Cylinder #3 Misfire This is the misfire count for each individual cylinder.
Count This counter is incremented by one for each misfire and is cleared every 200
Cylinder #4 Misfire revolutions.
Count Check this item to help determine the malfunctioning cylinder.

Engine Speed (Starter Off)

Engine speed when starter

off/
- Yes
Engine Speed (Starter Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 51199
Off) rpm
Diagnostic Note:
This is the engine speed immediately after starting the engine.
Starter Count

Number of times starter turned on after ignition

switch turned to ON/ - Yes
Starter Min.: 0, Max.: 255
Count
Diagnostic Note:
This is the number of times the starter turned on during the current trip.
Run Dist of Previous Trip

DISPLAY
Distance driven during previous trip/

- Yes
Min.: 0 km, Max.: 655.35 km
Diagnostic Note:
Before 5 seconds elapse after starting the engine, which is DTC P1604 (Startability
Malfunction) detection duration, this parameter indicates the distance driven during the
previous trip.
Run Dist
After 5 seconds elapse after starting the engine, this parameter indicates the distance driven
of
during the current trip calculated from the vehicle speed signal.
Previous
Trip HINT:
Run Dist of Previous Trip in freeze frame data which were present when the startability
malfunction occurred (DTC P1604 detected) indicates the distance driven during the
previous trip, but in all other cases, such as for the snapshot data of Data List (real-time
measurements), or for freeze frame data which were present when the DTCs other than
P1604 were detected, the value indicates the distance driven during the current trip.
Engine Starting Time

CONDITION DATA
Time elapsed before engine

starts/ - Yes
Min.: 0 ms, Max.: 655350 ms
Engine Starting Diagnostic Note:
Time This is the time elapsed after the starter turns on until the engine speed reaches
400 rpm.
This value is cleared 5 seconds after the engine is started and the value is displayed
as 0 ms.
Previous Trip Coolant Temp

Engine coolant temperature during

previous trip/ - Yes
Min.: -40°C, Max.: 215°C
Previous Trip Diagnostic Note:
Coolant Temp Before 120 seconds elapse after starting the engine, this parameter indicates the
engine coolant temperature at the end of the previous trip.
After 120 seconds elapse after starting the engine, this parameter indicates the engine
coolant temperature during the current trip.
Previous Trip Intake Temp

Intake air temperature during

Min.: -40°C, Max.: 215°C
Previous Trip Diagnostic Note:
Intake Temp Before 120 seconds elapse after starting the engine, this parameter indicates the
intake air temperature at the end of the previous trip.
After 120 seconds elapse after starting the engine, this parameter indicates the intake
air temperature during the current trip.
Engine Oil Temperature

Engine oil temperature (estimated

Engine Oil
temperature)/ - Yes
Temperature
Min.: -40°C, Max.: 215°C
Previous Trip Eng Oil Temp

Engine oil temperature during

Previous Trip Eng Oil
Temp
Min.: -40°C, Max.: 215°C
Ambient Temp for A/C

Ambient temperature for
Ambient Temp for
A/C/ - Yes
A/C
Min.: -40°C, Max.: 215°C
Previous Trip Ambient Temp

Ambient temperature during

Previous Trip Ambient
Temp
Min.: -40°C, Max.: 215°C
Engine Start Hesitation

CONDITION DATA
History of hesitation during engine

start/ - Yes
Engine Start ON or OFF
Hesitation Diagnostic Note:
This value changes to ON when the engine speed does not reach 500 rpm during
cranking.
Low Rev for Eng Start

History of low engine speed after

engine start/ - Yes
Low Rev for ON or OFF
Eng Start Diagnostic Note:
This flag changes to ON when the engine speed drops to 200 rpm or less within
approximately 2 seconds of starting the engine.
Fuel Cut Elps Time

CONDITION DATA
Time elapsed before engine

Fuel Cut Elps starts/
- Yes
Time Time elapsed after fuel cut/
Min.: 0 sec, Max.: 67107 sec
Engine Oil Temp for Eng Start

History of engine oil temperature

Engine Oil Temp for
during engine start/ - Yes
Eng Start
Min.: -40 deg, Max.: 215 deg
A/F Learn Value Idle #1

CONDITION DATA
Air fuel ratio learn value of idle

area/ -15 to +15% Yes
A/F Learn Value Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
Idle #1 Diagnostic Note:
Learning is performed when idling with the engine warmed up (engine coolant
temperature is 80°C [176°F] or higher).
A/F Learn Value Idle #1 (Dual)

CONDITION DATA
Air fuel ratio learn value of idle

A/F Learn Value Idle Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
#1 (Dual) Diagnostic Note:
Learning is performed when idling with the engine warmed up (engine coolant
temperature is 80°C [176°F] or higher).
A/F Learn Value Low #1

Air fuel ratio learn value of low load

A/F Learn Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
Value Diagnostic Note:
Low #1 Learning is performed when driving with the engine warmed up (engine coolant temperature
is 80°C [176°F] or higher) and operating in the low load range (when the range of engine
loads is divided into four parts).
A/F Learn Value Mid1 #1

Air fuel ratio learn value of middle1 load

A/F Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
Learn
Mid1 #1 Learning is performed when driving with the engine warmed up (engine coolant temperature
is 80°C [176°F] or higher) and operating in the mid-size load range closer to the low load
range (when the range of engine loads is divided into four parts).
A/F Learn Value High #1

Air fuel ratio learn value of high load

A/F Learn Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
High #1 Learning is performed when driving with the engine warmed up (engine coolant temperature
is 80°C [176°F] or higher) and operating in the high load range (when the range of engine
A/F Learn Value Low #1 (Dual)

Air fuel ratio learn value of low load

A/F Learn Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
Low #1 Learning is performed when driving with the engine warmed up (engine coolant temperature
is 80°C [176°F] or higher) and operating in the low load range (when the range of engine
A/F Learn Value Mid1 #1 (Dual)

Air fuel ratio learn value of middle1 load

A/F Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
Learn
Mid1 #1 Learning is performed when driving with the engine warmed up (engine coolant temperature
is 80°C [176°F] or higher) and operating in the mid-size load range closer to the low load
range (when the range of engine loads is divided into four parts).
A/F Learn Value High #1 (Dual)

Air fuel ratio learn value of high load

A/F Learn Min.: -50%, Max.: 49.6%
High #1 Learning is performed when driving with the engine warmed up (engine coolant temperature
is 80°C [176°F] or higher) and operating in the high load range (when the range of engine
A/C Magnetic Clutch Relay

A/C magnetic clutch

A/C Magnetic Clutch
relay/ ON: A/C on Yes
Relay
ON or OFF
Electrical Fan Motor

CONDITION DATA
Electric fan motors operation

Electrical Fan
status/ - Yes
Motor
ON or OFF
Electric Cooling Fan Relay #1

Electric cooling fan relay

Electric Cooling Fan ON: Cooling fan relay
No. 1/ Yes
Relay #1 No. 1 ON
ON or OFF
Electric Cooling Fan Relay #2

Electric cooling fan relay

Electric Cooling Fan ON: Cooling fan relay
No. 2/ Yes
Relay #2 No. 2 ON
ON or OFF
Brake Override System

ITEM/RANGE DATA
Brake override system

Brake Override ON: Brake override
operation/ Yes
System system ON
ON or OFF
Idle Fuel Cut
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION STORED AS FREEZE FRAME DATA

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE
Fuel cut at idle/ ON: Fuel cut

Yes
ON or OFF operating
Idle Fuel Cut Diagnostic Note:
Idle Fuel Cut = "ON" when the throttle valve is fully closed and the engine speed is
high.
FC TAU

Fuel cut TAU (fuel cut during very light

ON: Fuel cut
load)/ Yes
operating
ON or OFF
FC TAU
Diagnostic Note:
This is the fuel cut performed under a very light load to prevent the engine combustion
from becoming incomplete.
Immobiliser Fuel Cut

CONDITION DATA
Status of immobiliser fuel

Immobiliser Fuel
cut/ - Yes
Cut
ON or OFF
Immobiliser Fuel Cut History

CONDITION DATA
Status of the immobiliser fuel cut

history/ - Yes
History
ON or OFF
Fuel Dilution Estimate

Fuel dilution estimate/

Fuel Dilution
Min.: 0 ml, Max.: 1279.9 - No
Estimate
ml
20. Compression (Compression)

Engine Speed of Cyl #1 to #4

Engine Engine speed for cylinder No. 1 to No.

Speed 4/ - Yes
of Cyl Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 51199 rpm
#1
Engine
Speed Diagnostic Note:
of Cyl This is output only when Check the Cylinder Compression is performed using the Active Test.
#2 This is the engine speed for each cylinder measured during the engine cranking.
Engine When there is compression loss, the engine speed for that cylinder increases.
Speed
HINT:
of Cyl
#3 When multiple cylinders have compression loss, the engine speeds for multiple cylinders
Engine increase and it is not possible to determine which cylinders have compression loss. At this
Speed time, it is necessary to actually perform a compression measurement.
of Cyl
#4
Av Engine Speed of All Cyl

CONDITION DATA
Average engine speed for all

cylinders/ - No
Av Engine Speed of Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: 51199 rpm
All Cyl Diagnostic Note:
This is output only when Check the Cylinder Compression is performed using the
Active Test.
21. Automatic Transmission (All Data)
Refer to Automatic Transmission System .
Received MIL from ECT

Received MIL from MIL status/

- Yes
ECT ON or OFF
Shift Position Sig from ECT

Received Shift Position Signal

Shift Position Sig from ECT/ Same as actual gear
Yes
from ECT 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th ratio
or 8th
SPD (NT)

DATA
Lock-up ON (After warming up engine):

Input turbine speed Input turbine speed (NT) equal to engine
SPD (speed sensor NT)/ speed
Yes
(NT) Min.: 0 rpm, Max.: Lock-up OFF (Idling at P or N position):
12750 rpm Input turbine speed (NT) nearly equal to
engine speed
ECT Lock Up
ECT lock up status/

ECT Lock Up - Yes
ON or OFF
Shift SW Status (P Range)

CONDITION DATA
Park/neutral position switch ON: Shift lever in P

Shift SW Status (P
status/ OFF: Shift lever not Yes
Range)
ON or OFF in P
Shift SW Status (R Range)

CONDITION DATA
Park/neutral position switch ON: Shift lever in R

Shift SW Status (R
Range)
ON or OFF in R
Shift SW Status (N Range)

CONDITION DATA
Park/neutral position switch ON: Shift lever in N

Shift SW Status (N
Range)
ON or OFF in N
Sports Mode Selection SW

ON: Shift lever in M, "+" or

Sport mode select switch
Sports Mode "-"
status/ Yes
Selection SW OFF: Shift lever not in M,
ON or OFF
"+" or "-"
Shift SW Status (D Range)

CONDITION DATA
Park/neutral position switch ON: Shift lever in D

Shift SW Status (D
Range)
ON or OFF in D
Spark Timing Retard Request from ECT

Status of the spark timing retard

Spark Timing Retard
request from ECT/ - Yes
Request from ECT
ON or OFF
Fuel Cut Request from ECT

CONDITION DATA
Status of the fuel cut request

Fuel Cut Request from
from ECT/ - Yes
ECT
ON or OFF
Torque Down Prohibit Request to ECT

Status of the torque down prohibit

Torque Down Prohibit
request to ECT/ - Yes
Request to ECT
ON or OFF
Torque Down Request from VSC

Status of the torque down request

Torque Down Request
from VSC/ - Yes
from VSC
ON or OFF
Torque Up Request from VSC

Status of the torque up request

Torque Up Request
from VSC/ - Yes
from VSC
ON or OFF
Torque Down Prohibit Request to VSC

Status of the torque down prohibit

Torque Down Prohibit
request to VSC/ - Yes
Request to VSC
ON or OFF
Torque Up Prohibit Request to VSC

Status of the torque up prohibit

Torque Up Prohibit
request to VSC/ - Yes
Request to VSC
ON or OFF
22. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test.
(g) According to the display on the Techstream, perform the Active Test.
TESTER TEST PART CONTROL RANGE DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY
All injectors are tested at the

same time.
This test is possible when the
following conditions are met:
Engine speed is
3000 rpm or less.
Engine coolant
temperature is
80°C (80°F) or
more.
Injection volume can be

changed in fine gradations
Control the
Change injection Between -12.5% and within control range.
Injection
volume 24.8% Control the Injection Volume
Volume
enables the checking and
graphing of the air fuel ratio
sensor and the heated oxygen
sensor voltage outputs.
To conduct the test, enter the
following menus: Active Test /
Control the Injection Volume /
AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S
B1S2.
During the Active Test, air fuel
ratio feedback control and
feedback learning are
stopped.
All injectors are tested at the

same time.
This test is possible when the
Engine speed is
3000 rpm or less.
Engine coolant
temperature is
80°C (80°F) or
more.
Control the Control the Injection Volume

Injection Change injection for A/F Sensor enables the
-12%/0%/12%
Volume for volume checking and graphing of the
A/F Sensor air fuel ratio sensor and the
heated oxygen sensor voltage
outputs.
To conduct the test, enter the
following menus: Active Test /
Control the Injection Volume
for A/F Sensor / AFS Voltage
B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
During the Active Test, air fuel
ratio feedback control and
feedback learning are
stopped.
Activate the
Activate purge
VSV for Evap ON/OFF Engine is stopped.
VSV control
Control
Perform this test when the following

conditions are met:
Control the
A/C magnet clutch Ignition switch is ON.
A/C Magnet ON/OFF
control Engine is stopped.
Clutch
Shift lever is in P, N or
neutral.

conditions are met:
Control the
Activate fuel Ignition switch is ON.
Fuel Pump / ON/OFF
pump Engine is stopped.
Speed
neutral.

conditions are met:
Control the
Ignition switch is ON.
Fuel Pump Fuel pump control 25%/80%
Engine is stopped.
Duty
neutral.
ON: TC and TE1 are

connected.
OFF: TC and TE1 are
disconnected.
Turn on and off Perform this test when the
Connect the following conditions are met:
TC and TE1 ON/OFF
TC and TE1
connection Ignition switch is
ON.
Engine is stopped.
Shift lever is in P, N
or neutral.
Control the
Control electric Perform this test when the ignition
Electric ON/OFF
cooling fan switch is ON.
Cooling Fan

conditions are met:
Activate the
Activate ACC cut Ignition switch is ON.
ACC Cut ON/OFF
relay Engine is stopped.
Relay
neutral.
This test is possible when the following

conditions are met:
Control the Ignition switch is ON.

ETCS Engine is stopped.
Throttle actuator Close/Open
Open/Close Accelerator pedal is fully
Slow Speed depressed.
neutral.
Control the
ETCS
Throttle actuator Close/Open Same as above.
Open/Close
Fast Speed
Control the
Control injection Between -16 deg(CA) and Test possible during vehicle stopping
Injection
timing #1 15.87 deg(CA) and engine idling.
Timing #1
Control the
Injection
Timing #2
Control the
Injection
Timing #3
Control the
Injection
Timing #4
Control the
Control the target
Target Fuel -12.5 to 24.8% Perform the test at below 3000 rpm.
fuel pressure
Pressure

conditions are met:
Control the Control the
Voltage of voltage of 12.8 to 14.3 V Engine is idling.
Alternator alternator Shift lever is in P, N or
neutral.

conditions are met:
Engine speed is 3000 rpm or

Perform 3 pattern
Control the less
in order to
Injection Either/Port/Direct Engine coolant temperature is
operate fuel
Way 80°C (176°F ) or more.
injection
neutral.
Perform the port mode within 3 minutes.

conditions are met:

Perform 3 pattern
less
D-4S (A/F in order to Either/Port/Direct
Engine coolant temperature is
Control) operate air fuel -12.5 to 24.8%
80°C (176°F ) or more.
ratio control
neutral.

conditions are met:

Either/Port/Direct
Perform 3 pattern less
D-4S (Fuel Selected cylinder
in order to Engine coolant temperature is
Cut) (cylinder #1 to
operate fuel cut 80°C (176°F ) or more.
#4)
neutral.

conditions are met:

Perform 3 pattern
D-4S less
in order to Either/Port/Direct
(Injection Engine coolant temperature is
operate injection -12.5 to 24.8%
Volume) 80°C (176°F ) or more.
volume
neutral.

conditions are met
Control the Selected cylinder Vehicle is stopped.

Select (cylinder #1 to #1/#2/#3/#4 Engine is idling.
Cylinder Fuel #4) injector fuel ON/OFF Shift lever is in P, N or
Cut cut neutral.
Speed sensor is normal.
*1

conditions are met
Vehicle is stopped.
Control the
All cylinder fuel Engine is idling.
All Cylinders ON/OFF
cut Shift lever is in P, N or
Fuel Cut
neutral.
Speed sensor is normal.
*1

conditions are met
Vehicle is stopped.
Engine is idling.
Check the Check the cylinder Shift lever is in P, N or
Cylinder compression ON/OFF neutral.
Compression pressure Speed sensor is normal.
*1
Fuel injection and ignition stop in all
cylinders.
*2

conditions are met:
Activate the
Activate starter Ignition switch is ON.
Starter Cut ON/OFF
cut relay Engine is stopped.
Relay
neutral.
Control the
Control the target Test possible during vehicle stopping
Target 500 to 2000 rpm
engine speed and engine idling.
Engine Speed
Engine stalls or idles roughly

when the VVT actuator is
operated.
Perform this test when the
Control the Control VVT (for Engine is idling.

VVT Linear intake side of -27 to 36 deg (CA) Shift lever is in P, N
(Bank 1) bank 1) or neutral.
DTCs related to the VVT
system may be stored due to
Active Test operation, but this
does not indicate a
malfunction.

operated.
Control the Control VVT (for Engine is idling.

VVT Linear intake side of -27 to 36 deg (CA) Shift lever is in P, N
(Bank 2) bank 2) or neutral.

does not indicate a
malfunction.

operated.
Control the
Control VVT (for Engine is idling.
VVT Exhaust
exhaust side of 0 to 51 deg (CA) Shift lever is in P, N
Linear (Bank
bank 1) or neutral.
1)
does not indicate a
malfunction.

operated.
Control the
Control VVT (for Engine is idling.
VVT Exhaust
exhaust side of 0 to 51 deg (CA) Shift lever is in P, N
Linear (Bank
bank 2) or neutral.
2)
does not indicate a
malfunction.
NOTICE:
*1:
If the display of the Data List item Catalyst OT MF F/C item is Not Avl, perform this Active Test with
the vehicle stopped and the engine idling.
If the display of the Data List item Catalyst OT MF F/C item is Avail, perform this Active Test as
described below.
a. Stop the engine, turn the ignition switch to ON.

b. Enter the Control the Select Cylinder Fuel Cut.
c. Select the cylinder for fuel cut (cylinder #1 to #4) and turn the Active Test ON (press
the RIGHT or LEFT button).
d. Start the engine.
HINT:
*2: When cranking the engine, each cylinder measures the engine speed. In this Active Test, the fuel
and ignition of all cylinders is cut. The engine must then be cranked for approximately 10 seconds. At
this time, the speed of each cylinder is measured. If the speed of one cylinder is more than the other
cylinders, it can be determined that the compression pressure of that cylinder is lower than the other
cylinders.
1. Warm up the engine.

2. Turn the ignition switch off.
6. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Check the Cylinder
Compression.
HINT:
To display the entire Data List, press the pull down menu button next to Primary. Then
select Compression.
7. Push the snapshot button to turn the snapshot function on.
HINT:
Using the snapshot function, data can be recorded during the Active Test.
8. While the engine is not running, press the RIGHT or LEFT button to change Check the
Cylinder Compression to ON.
HINT:
After performing the above procedure, Check the Cylinder Compression will start. Fuel
injection for all cylinders is prohibited and each cylinder engine speed measurement
enters standby mode.
9. Crank the engine for about 10 seconds.
HINT:
Continue to crank the engine until the values change from the default value (51199
rpm).
10. Monitor the engine speed (Engine Speed of Cyl #1 to #4) displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
At first, the Techstream displays extremely high cylinder engine speed values. After
approximately 10 seconds of engine cranking, each cylinder engine speed measurement
will change to the actual engine speed.
NOTICE:
Do not crank the engine continuously for 20 seconds or more.
If it is necessary to crank the engine again after Check the Cylinder Compression
has been changed to ON and the engine has been cranked once, press Exit to
return to the Active Test menu screen. Then change Check the Cylinder
Compression to ON and crank the engine.
Use a fully-charged battery.
23. SYSTEM CHECK
HINT:
Performing a System Check enables the system, which consists of multiple actuators, to be operated
without removing any parts. In addition, it can show whether or not any DTCs are stored, and can
detect potential malfunctions in the system. The System Check can be performed with the Techstream.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility.
(e) Perform the System Check by referring to the table below.
TESTER TEST PART CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY RANGE
Evaporative If no pending DTCs are output after

System Perform 5 steps in order to 35°C performing this test, the system is
Check operate EVAP key-off monitor (95°F) or functioning normally.
(Automatic automatically less Refer to EVAP Inspection Procedure
Mode) .
Evaporative
Used to detect malfunctioning
System Perform 5 steps in order to 35°C
parts.
Check operate EVAP key-off monitor (95°F) or
Refer to EVAP Inspection Procedure
(Manual manually less
.
Mode)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDC0GNX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DEFINITION OF TERMS (2013 FR-S)
DEFINITION OF TERMS
TERM DEFINITION
Description of what ECM monitors and how it detects malfunctions (monitoring

Monitor Description
purpose and details).
Group of diagnostic trouble codes that are output by ECM based on same
Related DTCs
malfunction detection logic.
Preconditions that allow ECM to detect malfunctions.

Typical Enabling
With all preconditions satisfied, ECM stores DTC when monitored value(s) exceeds
Condition
malfunction threshold(s).
Order of monitor priority, applied if multiple sensors and components are involved
Sequence of in single malfunction detection process.
Operation Each sensor and component is monitored in turn, when previous detection
operation is completed.
Required
Sensors and components used by ECM to detect each malfunction.
Sensor/Components
Number of times ECM checks for each malfunction during each driving cycle.
"Once per driving cycle" means ECM only performs checks for that malfunction
Frequency of
once during single driving cycle.
Operation
"Continuous" means ECM performs checks for that malfunction whenever enabling
conditions are met.
Minimum time for which ECM must detect continuous deviation in monitored
Duration value(s) in order to store DTC. Timing begins when Typical Enabling Conditions are
met.
Malfunction
Value beyond which ECM determines malfunctions exist and stores DTCs.
Thresholds
Timing of MIL illumination after malfunction is detected.

"Immediate" means ECM illuminates MIL as soon as malfunction is detected.
MIL Operation
"2 driving cycles" means ECM illuminates MIL if same malfunction is detected
second time during next sequential driving cycle.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDJ0VLX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. DESCRIPTION
When troubleshooting OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics) vehicles, the Techstream (complying with SAE
J1987) must be connected to the DLC3 (Data Link Connector 3) of the vehicle. Various data in the
vehicle's ECM (Engine Control Module) can be then read.
OBD II regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer illuminates the MIL (Malfunction
Indicator Lamp) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in:
a. The emission control system and components.

b. The powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions).
c. The computer itself.
In addition, the applicable DTCs prescribed by SAE J2012 are stored in the ECM memory. If the
malfunction does not recur in 3 consecutive trips, the MIL turns off automatically but the DTCs
remain stored in the ECM memory.
To check the DTCs, connect the Techstream to the DLC3. The Techstream displays output DTCs,
freeze frame data, and a variety of engine data. The DTCs and freeze frame data can be cleared
with the Techstream. In order to enhance OBD function on vehicles and develop the Off-Board
diagnosis system, Controller Area Network (CAN) communication is used in this system. CAN is a
network which uses a pair of data transmission lines spanning multiple computers and sensors. It
allows for high speed communications between the systems and simplification of the wire harness
connections.
2. NORMAL MODE AND CHECK MODE
The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. In normal mode, 2 trip
detection logic is used to ensure accurate detection of malfunctions. Check mode is also available as an
option for technicians. In check mode, 1 trip detection logic is used for duplicating malfunction symptoms
and increasing the system's ability to detect malfunctions, including intermittent problems (Techstream
only).
3. 2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st
trip). If the same malfunction is detected during the next subsequent drive cycle, the MIL is
illuminated (2nd trip).

vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel
ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data stored at the time of a malfunction.
6. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery.
7. MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

(a) The MIL is illuminated when the ignition switch is first turned to ON (the engine is not running).
(b) The MIL turns off when the engine is started. If the MIL remains illuminated, the diagnosis system
has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
HINT:
If the MIL is not illuminated when the ignition switch is first turned to ON, check the MIL circuit
.
8. ALL READINESS
HINT:
With "All Readiness", you can check whether or not the DTC judgment has been completed by using
the Techstream.
You should check "All Readiness" after simulating malfunction symptoms or for validation after
finishing repairs.
(d) Clear DTCs .
(e) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(g) Perform the DTC judgment driving pattern to run the DTC judgment.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(i) Input the DTCs to be confirmed.
(j) Check the DTC judgment result.
TECHSTREAM DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY
DTC judgment completed

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal
DTC judgment not completed

INCOMPLETE
Perform the driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling conditions
Unable to perform DTC judgment

N/A Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached ECU
memory limit
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDF0FSX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Factors such as instrument type may cause readings to differ slightly from stated values. If any DTCs
are output during a check mode DTC check, check the circuit for the DTCs listed in the table below. For
details of each DTC, refer to the "See page" below.
*: The MIL flashes when a catalyst damaging misfire is detected.
DTC DETECTION ITEM MIL MEMORY SEE

CODE PAGE
DTC
P000A Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P000B Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P000C Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2 Comes on
stored
DTC
P000D Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2 Comes on
stored
DTC
P0010 Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System DTC

P0011 Comes on
Performance (Bank 1) stored
DTC
P0013 Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System DTC

P0014 Comes on
Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 DTC

P0016 Comes on
Sensor A) stored

P0017 Comes on
Sensor B) stored

P0018 Comes on
Sensor A) stored

P0019 Comes on
Sensor B) stored
DTC
P0020 Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 2) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System DTC

P0021 Comes on
DTC
P0023 Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 2) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System DTC
P0024 Comes on
DTC
P0030 A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Comes on
stored
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor DTC
P0031 Comes on
1) stored
Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 DTC

P0032 Comes on
Sensor 1) stored
DTC
P0037 Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0038 Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0068 MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation Comes on
stored
DTC
P0087 Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0088 Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High Comes on
stored
DTC
P0101 Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem Comes on
stored
DTC
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit Low DTC

P0107 Comes on
Input stored
Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit High DTC

P0108 Comes on
Input stored
DTC
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High Comes on
stored
DTC
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range / Performance DTC

P0116 Comes on
Problem stored
DTC
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0122 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0123 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control Comes on
stored
Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat DTC

P0128 Comes on
Regulating Temperature) stored
DTC
P0131 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0132 Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank1 Sensor1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P0134 Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0137 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0138 Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P013A Oxygen Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 2 Comes on
stored
DTC
P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0140 Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0141 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P014C A/F Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P014D A/F Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P015A A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P015B A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1 Comes on
stored
DTC
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0191 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range / Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P0192 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0193 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (Range/Performance) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High Comes on
stored
DTC
P0201 Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
P0222 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0223 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit Comes on
stored
Comes DTC
P0300 Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
on/Blinks* stored
Comes DTC
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
on/Blinks* stored
Comes DTC
on/Blinks* stored
Comes DTC
on/Blinks* stored
Comes DTC
on/Blinks* stored
DTC
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0332 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low Input (Bank 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0333 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit High Input (Bank 2) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor Range / Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance DTC
P0341 Comes on
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) stored
DTC
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (Bank 2) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance DTC

P0346 Comes on
(Bank 2) stored
DTC
P0351 Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P0352 Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P0353 Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P0354 Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance DTC

P0366 Comes on
(Bank 1) stored
DTC
P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 2) Comes on
stored
Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance DTC

P0391 Comes on
(Bank 2) stored
DTC
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0441 Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge Flow Comes on
stored
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Range / DTC

P0451 Comes on
Performance stored
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch DTC

P0452 Comes on
Low Input stored
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch DTC

P0453 Comes on
High Input stored
Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Gross DTC

P0455 Comes on
Leak) stored
Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very DTC

P0456 Comes on
Small Leak) stored
DTC
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High Comes on
stored
DTC
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit High Comes on
stored
DTC
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" Comes on
stored
DTC
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than Expected Comes on
stored
DTC
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher than Expected Comes on
stored
DTC
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P0560 System Voltage Comes on
stored
DTC
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error Comes on
stored
DTC
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error Comes on
stored
DTC
P0606 ECM / PCM Processor Comes on
stored
DTC
P060A Internal Control Module Monitoring Processor Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P060B Internal Control Module A/D Processing Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P0616 Starter Relay Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0617 Starter Relay Circuit High Comes on
stored
DTC
P062D No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P062F Internal Control Module EEPROM Error Comes on
stored
DTC
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request) Comes on
stored
DTC
P0851 Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P0852 Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit High Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

P1109 Throttle Deposit Malfunction
come on stored
DTC
P1160 Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

P1170 Port Injector Fuel Performance
come on stored
Does not DTC
P117B Direct Injector Fuel Performance
come on stored
DTC
P1235 High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit Comes on
stored
DTC
P1261 DI Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
stored
DTC
P1449 Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck ON Comes on
stored
DTC
P1451 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Range/Performance Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

P1603 Engine Stall History
come on stored
Does not DTC

P1604 Startability Malfunction
come on stored
DTC
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low Comes on
stored
DTC
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High Comes on
stored
Does not DTC

P2109 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor "A" Minimum Stop Performance
come on stored
DTC
P2119 Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Range / Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
P2122 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P2123 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P2127 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "E" Circuit Low Input Comes on
stored
DTC
P2128 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "E" Circuit High Input Comes on
stored
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" / "B" Voltage DTC

P2135 Comes on
Correlation stored
Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" / "E" Voltage DTC
P2138 Comes on
Correlation stored
DTC
P2195 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P2196 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Comes on
stored
DTC
P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance Comes on
stored
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Control DTC

P2401 Comes on
Circuit Low stored
DTC
P2402 Evaporative Emission Leak Detection Pump Stuck ON Comes on
stored
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Sense DTC

P2404 Comes on
Circuit Range / Performance stored
Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit DTC

P2419 Comes on
Low stored
DTC
P2420 Evaporative Emission Pressure Switching Valve Stuck OFF Comes on
stored
DTC
P2610 ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance Comes on
stored
DTC
U0073 Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off Comes on
stored
DTC
U0101 Lost Communication with TCM Comes on
stored
DTC
U0122 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamics Control Module Comes on
stored
DTC
U0140 Lost Communication with Body Control Module Comes on
stored
Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) DTC

U0155 Comes on
Control Module stored
DTC
U0402 Invalid Data Received from TCM Comes on
stored
DTC
U0416 Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamics Control Module Comes on
stored
Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control DTC

U0423 Comes on
Module stored
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

NOTICE:
When the diagnosis system is changed from normal mode to check mode or vice versa, all DTCs
and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode are cleared. Before changing modes, always
check and make a note of DTCs and freeze frame data.
HINT:
DTCs which are stored in the ECM can be displayed on the Techstream. The Techstream can display
the current, pending and permanent DTCs.
If a malfunction is detected during the current driving cycle, current and permanent DTCs are
stored.
Some DTCs are not stored if the ECM does not detect the same malfunction again during a second
consecutive driving cycle. However, such malfunctions, detected on only one occasion, are stored as
pending DTCs.
Current and pending DTCs can be cleared by using the Techstream or by disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal. However, permanent DTCs cannot be cleared using either of
these two methods.
After clearing current DTCs using the Techstream (or by disconnecting the cable from the negative
battery terminal), permanent DTCs can be cleared when the system is determined to be normal for
the relevant DTCs and then the universal trip is performed. The driving pattern to obtain a normal
judgment is described under the "Confirmation Driving Pattern" for the respective DTC.
2 Trip Detection Examples
Store
Malfunction detected
condition
System determined to be normal

Pending
or
DTC Clear
condition
or
Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery terminal
Store
condition
No malfunctions in 40 driving cycles

Current
or
DTC Clear
condition
or
Store
condition
Ignition switch turned to ON after normal judgment obtained in 3 consecutive

driving cycles
or
Permanent After DTCs cleared using Techstream or cable disconnected from negative (-)
DTC Clear battery terminal, normal judgment obtained and universal trip performed (not for
condition misfire and fuel system DTCs)
or
After DTCs cleared using Techstream or cable disconnected from negative (-)
battery terminal, malfunction not detected when universal trip driving performed
(misfire and fuel system DTCs)
ON Malfunction detected (2nd trip)
Ignition switch turned to ON after normal judgment obtained in 3 consecutive

driving cycles
MIL or
OFF
or
HINT:
Obtaining a normal judgment and performing a universal trip driving pattern can be done in the
same driving cycle or in different driving cycles.
It is unnecessary to obtain a normal judgment if the DTCs are misfire or fuel system DTCs.
1. CHECK DTC
(e) Check DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.
(f) Check the details of the DTCs .
2. CLEAR DTC (Pending and Current DTC)

(e) Clear DTCs.
3. CLEAR DTC (Pending and Current DTC without using Techstream)

(a) Perform either of the following operations:
NOTICE:
After turning ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable
from the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with work .
(1) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal for more than 1 minute.
(2) Remove the EFI (+B) fuse from the engine room relay block assembly located inside the engine
compartment for more than 1 minute.
4. CLEAR PERMANENT DTC
HINT:
Even if the following procedure is not performed, permanent DTCs are cleared by obtaining a normal
judgment during 3 consecutive driving cycles.
(e) Check if permanent DTCs are stored.
HINT:
If permanent DTCs are not output, it is not necessary to continue this procedure.
(f) Clear DTCs.
(g) Perform the respective confirmation driving patterns in order to obtain a normal judgment for the
output DTCs.
HINT:
Confirmation driving patterns do not need to be performed for misfire and fuel system DTCs.
For the confirmation driving pattern, refer to the procedures for the relevant DTC .
(h) Perform the universal trip.
HINT:
The driving pattern to obtain a normal judgment and the universal trip driving can be performed
consecutively in the same driving cycle.

2. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes or more.
CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and
traffic laws.
HINT:
It is possible to complete the drive pattern even if the vehicle decelerates to less than
40 km/h (25 mph) during the driving cycle provided that the vehicle is driven at 40
km/h (25 mph) or more for a total of 5 minutes.
3. Allow 10 minutes or more to elapse from the time the engine is started.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(j) Check that the permanent DTCs have been cleared.
HINT:
The permanent DTCs are cleared when the universal trip is completed.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000001F7102QX

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Prod Date Range: [03/2012 - 05/2013]
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: ECM Power Source Circuit; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
05/2013]
ECM Power Source Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the IGSW signal is input into the ECM. This turns the internal
transistor ON, causing the current to flow to the EFI MAIN1 relay coil, which closes the relay, supplying
power to the ECM +B and +B2 terminals.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT ECM (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
A34-6 (+B) - A36-4 Ignition switch

12 to 14 V
(E01) ON
A33-1 (+B2) - A36-4 Ignition switch

12 to 14 V
(E01) ON

*a
(ECM)
NG GO TO STEP 4
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - BODY GROUND)
A36-4 (E01) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
3. INSPECT ECM (IGSW TERMINAL VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
A33-27 (IGSW) - A36-4 Ignition switch

10 to 13 V
(E01) ON

*a
(ECM)
NG GO TO STEP 8
OK REPLACE ECM
4. INSPECT ECM (SSHUT TERMINAL VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:
TESTER CONNECTION SWITCH SPECIFIED

CONDITION CONDITION
A35-13 (SSHUT) - A36-4 Ignition switch

approximately 0 V
(E01) ON

*a
(ECM)

NG CONNECTOR
OK
5. INSPECT RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
(a) Inspect the EFI MAIN1 relay .
NG REPLACE RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
OK
6. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EFI MAIN1 RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 1 - A35-13 (SSHUT) Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - A34-6 (+B) Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - A33-1 (+B2) Always Below 1 Ω


CONDITION
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 1 or A35-13 (SSHUT) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3, A34-6 (+B) or A33-1 (+B2) - Body

ground

NG CONNECTOR
OK
7. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 2 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 5 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
*1 Engine Room Relay Block Assembly
*2 EFI MAIN1 Relay Terminal

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
8. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2 RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
IG2 relay terminal 3 - A33-27 (IGSW) Always Below 1 Ω
IG2 relay terminal 1 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
IG2 relay terminal 3 or A33-27 (IGSW) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
9. INSPECT RELAY (IG2)
(a) Inspect the IG2 relay .
REPLACE RELAY (IG2)

NG
OK
10. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (IG2 RELAY)
(a) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room relay block
assembly.
IG2 relay terminal 5 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
*2 IG2 Relay Terminal

NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IG2 RELAY - IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

11.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Remove the IG2 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
(b) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly connector.
IG2 relay terminal 2 - D55-6 (IG2) Always Below 1 Ω
IG2 relay terminal 2 or D55-6 (IG2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
12. INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the ignition or starter switch assembly .
REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

NG
ASSEMBLY

OK CONNECTOR
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM0000011IO036X

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: EVAP System; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
EVAP System
RELATED DTCS
DTC MONITORING ITEM SEE
NO. PAGE
P0441 Purge flow
Difference between canister pressure sensor (built into canister pump module) output value and
P0451
manifold absolute pressure sensor output value
P0452 Canister pressure sensor (built into canister pump module) voltage low
P0453 Canister pressure sensor (built into canister pump module) voltage high
P0455 EVAP gross leak
P0456 EVAP small leak
P0458 Purge valve voltage low
P0459 Purge valve voltage high
P1449 Air filter clogged (built into canister pump module)
P1451 Pipe clogged
Reference orifice high-flow (built into canister pump module)

P2404
Reference orifice low-flow (built into canister pump module)
P2401 Leak detection pump stuck OFF (built into canister pump module)
P2402 Leak detection pump stuck ON (built into canister pump module)
P2419 Vent valve stuck closed (built into canister pump module)
P2420 Vent valve stuck open (vent) (built into canister pump module)
P2610 Soak timer (built into ECM)
If any EVAP system DTCs are stored, the malfunctioning area can be determined using the table below.
NOTICE:
If the reference pressure difference between the first and second checks is more than the specification, all the
DTCs relating to the reference pressure (P0455, P0456, P1451, P2404) will all be stored.
DESCRIPTION
*1 Purge Valve *2 EVAP Hose (to Intake Manifold)
*3 EVAP Hose (from Charcoal Canister Assembly) *4 Fuel Tank
Canister Pump Module

- Canister Pressure Sensor
*5 - Leak Detection Pump *6 Fuel Tank Cap Assembly
- Vent Valve
- Canister filter
*7 Air Inlet Port *8 Charcoal Canister Assembly
*9 Purge Line - -
*a Location of EVAP (Evaporative Emission) System - -
HINT:
The canister pressure sensor, the canister filter, the leak detection pump and the vent valve are built into the
canister pump module.
*1 Intake Manifold *2 Throttle Valve
*3 Purge Valve *4 Cut-off Valve
*5 Fuel Tank *6 Fuel Tank Cap Assembly
*7 Fuel Tank Vent Valve *8 Charcoal Canister Assembly (Charcoal Filter)
*9 Canister Filter *10 Canister Pump Module
*11 ECM *12 Soak Timer
*13 Air Cleaner - -
*a EVAP System Circuit - -
NOTICE:
In the EVAP system of this vehicle, turning ON the vent valve does not seal off the EVAP system. To check for
leaks in the EVAP system, disconnect the air inlet drain hose and apply pressure from atmospheric side of the
charcoal canister assembly.
While the engine is running, if a predetermined condition (closed-loop, etc.) is met, the purge valve is opened by the
ECM and fuel vapors stored in the charcoal canister assembly are purged to the intake manifold. The ECM changes
the duty cycle ratio of the purge valve to control purge flow volume.
The purge flow volume is also determined by the intake manifold pressure. Atmospheric pressure is allowed into the
charcoal canister assembly through the vent valve to ensure that the purge flow is maintained when negative
pressure (vacuum) is applied to the charcoal canister assembly.
The following two monitors run to confirm appropriate EVAP system operation.
1. Purge flow monitor
The purge flow monitor consists of the 2 monitors. The 1st monitor is conducted every time and the 2nd monitor is
activated if necessary.
The 1st monitor
While the engine is running and the purge valve (Vacuum Switching Valve) is on (open), the ECM
monitors the purge flow by measuring the EVAP pressure change. If the variation in the pressure is
less than threshold, the ECM begins the 2nd monitor.
The 2nd monitor
The vent valve is turned ON (closed) and the EVAP pressure is then measured. If the variation in the
pressure is less than threshold, the ECM interprets this as the purge valve being stuck closed, and
illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0441 (2 trip detection logic).
Atmospheric pressure check:

In order to ensure reliable malfunction detection, the variation between the atmospheric pressures,
before and after of the purge flow monitor, is measured by the ECM.
*1 ECM *2 Soak Timer
*3 Purge Valve (on) *4 Fuel Tank Cap Assembly
*5 Fuel Tank *6 Canister Filter
*7 Leak Detection Pump (off) *8 Canister Pressure Sensor
*9 Charcoal Canister Assembly *10 Vent Valve (off)
*11 Canister Pump Module *12 Reference Orifice (0.02 inch)
*a EVAP Purge Flow *b to Intake Manifold
COMPONENT OPERATION
Charcoal
Canister Contains activated charcoal to absorb EVAP (Evaporative Emissions) generated in fuel tank.
Assembly
Located in fuel tank. Valve closes by its own weight when vehicle overturns to prevent fuel from
Cut-off valve
spilling out.
Purge valve Opens or closes line between charcoal canister assembly and intake manifold. ECM uses purge valve
(Vacuum to control EVAP purge flow. In order to discharge EVAP absorbed by charcoal canister assembly to
Switching intake manifold, ECM opens purge valve. EVAP discharge volume to intake manifold controlled by
Valve) purge valve duty cycle (current-carrying time). (Open: on, Close: off)
Fuel tank Located in the fuel tank. Passes evaporative emissions occurring during fueling to the charcoal
vent valve canister assembly. Additionally, this mechanism also detects when the fuel tank is full.
Built into ECM. To ensure accurate EVAP monitor, measures 5 hours (+/-15 min) after ignition switch
Soak timer is turned off. This allows fuel to cool down, stabilizing EVAP pressure. When approximately 5 hours
elapsed, ECM activates (refer to fig. 3).
Canister
pump Consists of (a) to (d) below. Canister pump module cannot be disassembled.
module
Vents and closes EVAP system. When ECM turns valve on, EVAP system is closed. When ECM turns
(a) Vent valve off, EVAP system is vented. Negative pressure (vacuum) is created in EVAP system to check for
valve EVAP leaks by closing purge valve, turning on vent valve (closing it) and operating leak detection
valve EVAP leaks by closing purge valve, turning on vent valve (closing it) and operating leak detection
pump (refer to fig. 1).
(b) Canister
Indicates pressure as voltages. ECM supplies regulated 5 V to pressure sensor, and uses feedback
pressure
from sensor to monitor EVAP system pressure (refer to fig. 2).
sensor
(c) Leak
detection Creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system for leak check.
pump
(d) Has opening with 0.02 inch diameter. Vacuum is produced through orifice by closing purge valve,
Reference turning off vent valve and operating leak detection pump, to monitor reference pressure. Reference
orifice pressure indicates a small leak of EVAP.
*1 Canister *2 Reference Orifice (0.02 Inch)
*3 Canister Pressure Sensor - -

*a Canister Pump Module (fig. 1) *b Airflow
*c Condition: Purge Flow *d Condition: Leak Check
*e Vent Valve: off (vent) *f to Canister Filter (Atmosphere)
*g Leak Detection Pump: off *h Vent Valve: on (closed)
*i Leak Detection Pump: on - -
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0451 .
NOTICE:
Inspect the fuses for circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection procedure.
The Techstream is required to conduct the following diagnostic troubleshooting procedure.
HINT:
Using the Techstream monitor results enables the EVAP (Evaporative Emission) system to be confirmed.
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as
freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine
if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio was lean or
rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM DTC
(a) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for 10 seconds.
(c) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for 10 seconds.
(d) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(e) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(g) Confirm DTCs and freeze frame data.
If any EVAP system DTCs are stored, the malfunctioning area can be determined using the table below.
NOTICE:
If the reference pressure difference between the first and second checks is more than the specification, all the
DTCs relating to the reference pressure (P0455, P0456, P1451, P2404) will all be stored.
NEXT
2. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTOMATIC MODE)
NOTICE:
The Evaporative System Check (Automatic Mode) consists of 5 steps performed automatically by the
Techstream. It takes a maximum of approximately 24 minutes.
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full because the cut-off
valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
Do not run the engine during this operation.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35°C (95°F) or more, a large amount of vapor forms and any check
results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel temperature below
35°C (95°F) and the coolant temperature below 45°C (113°F).
(d) Clear the DTCs .
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Automatic Mode.
(f) After the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the following menus:
Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
NEXT
3. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (MANUAL MODE)
https://techinfo.toyota.com/t3Portal/resources/jsp/siviewer/index.jsp?dir=rm/RM20S0U&href=xhtml/RM000000PD80E1X.html&locale=en&model=FR-S&MY=… 10/28
NOTICE:
In the Evaporative System Check (Manual Mode), the series of 5 Evaporative System Check steps are
performed manually using the Techstream.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Manual Mode.
NEXT
NEXT
4. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 1/5)
(a) Check the EVAP pressure in step 1/5.

Result
DTC RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

* TO
- Virtually no variation in EVAP pressure Not yet determined A
EVAP pressure is less than -0.224 kPa(gauge) [2 Leak detection pump stuck
P2404 B
mmHg(gauge)] OFF
*: These DTCs are already present in the ECM when the vehicle arrives and are confirmed in the "Confirm DTC"
procedure above.
B GO TO STEP 9

(a) Check the EVAP pressure in steps 2/5.

Result
DTC* RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

TO
- Virtually no variation in EVAP pressure Not yet determined A
Vent valve stuck

close
EVAP pressure fluctuates by more than +/- 0.3 kPa (gauge) [2 Reference orifice
P2404 B
mmHg (gauge)] high-flow
Reference orifice
low-flow
procedure above.
HINT:
The first reference pressure is the value determined in step 2/5.
B GO TO STEP 12
A

Result
DTC* RESULT SUSPECTED PROCEED

TROUBLE AREA TO
EVAP pressure increases by 0.2 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg (gauge)] or more

- Not yet determined A
within 12 seconds.
EVAP pressure increases by less than 0.2 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg

Vent valve stuck
P2404 (gauge)] within 12 seconds. B
open
Virtually no variation in EVAP pressure
procedure above.
B GO TO STEP 14

Result

TROUBLE AREA TO
EVAP pressure is more than -5 kPa (gauge) [-38 mmHg (gauge)] within 900 Not yet
- A
seconds determined
EVAP pressure is reference pressure -0.9 kPa [- 7 mmHg] less then -5 kPa
P1451 Pipe clogged B
(gauge) [-38 mmHg (gauge)] within 27 seconds
procedure above.
B GO TO STEP 18
(b) Compare the EVAP pressure in step 4/5 and the reference pressure (step 5/5).
Result

TROUBLE AREA TO
Not yet
EVAP pressure increases by 0.3 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg (gauge)] or less determined
- A
within 40 seconds. (no leakage from
EVAP system)
EVAP pressure increases by more than 0.3 kPa (gauge) [2 mmHg (gauge)]
P2404 EVAP gross leak B
within 40 seconds of proceeding from step 4/5 to 5/5
EVAP pressure from step 4/5 higher than [reference pressure (step 4/5) x
P0455 EVAP gross leak B
0.377]
P0456 EVAP pressure from step 4/5 higher than reference pressure (step D) EVAP small leak B
procedure above.
A GO TO STEP 27
B GO TO STEP 20
9. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ACTIVATE THE VACUUM PUMP)
(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Activate the Vacuum Pump.

*a
(to Canister Pump Module)
Result
TESTER CONDITION TEST RESULT SUSPECTED PROCEED

CONNECTION TROUBLE AREA TO
Approximately Power source wire

0 V when OFF harness of leak A
and ON detection pump
Wire
harness
Leak or
detection connector
10 to 13 V
pump on between
G8-4 - Body when OFF B
and off leak
ground and ON
(Active Test detection
ON and pump
OFF) and ECM
ECM
10 to 13 V
when OFF Leak detection
C
Approximately pump
0 V when ON
B GO TO STEP 11
C GO TO STEP 28
10. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE FOR LEAK DETECTION PUMP)
(b) Disconnect the canister pump module connector.
Result
TESTER CONDITION TEST SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

CONNECTION RESULT TO
11 to 14
Canister pump module A
G8-3 - Body Ignition V
ground switch ON Wire harness or connector between canister pump
Below 1 V B
module and battery
A GO TO STEP 28
B GO TO STEP 25
11. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - ECM)
(c) Disconnect the ECM connector.
A35-8 (MPMP) - G8-4 Always Below 1 Ω
A35-8 (MPMP) or G8-4 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
Result
RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED TO
OK ECM A
NG Wire harness or connector between ECM and canister pump module B
A GO TO STEP 30
B GO TO STEP 25
12. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (VENT VALVE OPERATION)


*a
(c) Apply the battery voltage to terminals G8-5 and G8-1 of the canister pump module.
(d) Touch the canister pump module to confirm the vent valve operation.
Result
CONDITION TESTER SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

RESULT TO
Wire harness or connector between vent valve

and ECM
Leak detection pump performance deteriorates
Operating A
Apply battery voltage to Leak detection pump circuit malfunctioning (large
terminals G8-5 and G8-1 resistance exists in the circuit)
ECM
Not
Vent valve B
operating
B GO TO STEP 28
A35-1 (VPMP) - G8-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A35-1 (VPMP) or G8-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
Result
RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED TO
OK ECM A
NG Wire harness or connector between ECM and canister pump module B
A GO TO STEP 30
B GO TO STEP 25
14. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE FOR VENT VALVE)

*a
Result
TESTER SWITCH SPECIFIED SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

CONNECTION CONDITION CONDITION TO
Wire harness or connector between vent

valve and ECM
Vent valve
G8-5 - Body Ignition 11 to 14 V A
Charcoal canister assembly (charcoal filter
ground switch ON inside canister) clogged
ECM
Below 1 V Power source wire harness of vent valve B
B GO TO STEP 25
A
A
15. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (VENT VALVE OPERATION)


*a
(c) Apply the battery voltage to terminals G8-5 and G8-1 of the pump module.
(d) Touch the canister pump module to confirm the vent valve operation.
Result
CONDITION TESTER SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

RESULT TO
Wire harness or connector between vent valve

and ECM
Leak detection pump performance deteriorates
Operating A
Apply battery voltage to Leak detection pump circuit malfunctioning (large
terminals G8-5 and G8-1 resistance exists in the circuit)
ECM
Not
Vent valve B
operating
B GO TO STEP 28
Result
TESTER CONDITION TEST SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

CONNECTION RESULT TO
Charcoal canister assembly (charcoal filter inside

Below 1 Ω canister) clogged A
A35-1 (VPMP) - ECM
Always
G8-1
10 kΩ or Wire harness or connector between ECM and charcoal
B
higher canister assembly pump module
B GO TO STEP 25
17. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (CHARCOAL FILTER INSIDE CANISTER)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the charcoal canister assembly .

OK:
No blockages in the charcoal canister assembly.
OK GO TO STEP 30
NG GO TO STEP 24
18. INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY - CANISTER PUMP MODULE)
(a) Check for blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and canister pump
module.
OK:
No blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and canister pump module.
NG GO TO STEP 26
OK
19. INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY - FUEL TANK)
(a) Check for blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and fuel tank.
(a) Check for blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and fuel tank.
OK:
No blockages in the EVAP purge line between the charcoal canister assembly and fuel tank.
OK GO TO STEP 24
NG GO TO STEP 26
20. CHECK FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the fuel tank cap assembly is correctly installed and confirm that the fuel tank cap assembly
meets OEM specifications.
(b) Tighten the fuel tank cap assembly firmly (only one click sound could be heard).
Result
TEST RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

TO
fuel tank cap assembly correctly

- A
installed
fuel tank cap assembly improperly installed

Defective fuel tank cap assembly
fuel tank cap assembly loose B
fuel tank cap assembly does not meet OEM
specifications
Defective fuel tank cap assembly - B
No fuel tank cap assembly - C
B GO TO STEP 22
C GO TO STEP 23
21. LOCATE EVAP LEAK PART
(a) Check for leakage from EVAP system (hose, disconnection, cracks, etc.).
(b) Repair or replace the leak point.
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
22. CORRECTLY REINSTALL OR REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY

22. CORRECTLY REINSTALL OR REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
HINT:
When reinstalling the fuel tank cap assembly, tighten it firmly (only one click sound could be head).
When replacing the fuel tank cap assembly, use a fuel tank cap assembly that meets OEM specifications, and
install it firmly.
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
23. REPLACE FUEL TANK CAP ASSEMBLY
HINT:
When installing the fuel tank cap assembly, tighten it firmly (only one click sound could be head).
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
24. REPLACE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the charcoal canister assembly .
NOTICE:
When replacing the charcoal canister assembly, check the canister pump module interior and related pipes for
water, fuel and other liquids. If liquids are present, check for disconnections and/or cracks in the following: 1)
the pipe from the air inlet port to the canister pump module; 2) the canister filter; and 3) the fuel tank vent
hose.
Check for filter blockage in the canister filter. If the canister filter has blockages, replace the canister pump
module.
*1 Fuel Tank Vent Hose *2 Air Inlet Port
*3 Drain Hose *4 Fuel Tank
*5 Charcoal Canister Assembly - -
Inspection Area
*a - -
(check for disconnection and/or cracks)
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
25. REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
26. REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE (PURGE VALVE - CANISTER)
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
27. REPAIR OR REPLACE PARTS AND COMPONENTS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS
(a) Repair the malfunctioning areas indicated by the DTCs that had been confirmed when the vehicle was
brought in.
NEXT GO TO STEP 29
28. REPLACE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the canister pump module .
NOTICE:
When replacing the charcoal canister assembly, check the canister pump module interior and related pipes for
water, fuel and other liquids. If liquids are present, check for disconnections and/or cracks in the following: 1)
the pipe from the air inlet port to the canister pump module; 2) the canister filter; and 3) the fuel tank vent
hose.
Check for filter blockage in the canister filter. If the canister filter has blockages, replace the canister filter.
*1 Fuel Tank Vent Hose *2 Air Inlet Port
*3 Vent Hose *4 Fuel Tank
*5 Charcoal Canister Assembly - -
Inspection Area
*a - -
(check for disconnection and/or cracks)
NEXT
NOTICE:
Do not run the engine in this step.
(f) After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
EVAP system DTCs are output A
No DTCs output
B
(No pending DTCs output)
B END
30. REPLACE ECM
(a) Replace the ECM .
NEXT
NOTICE:
(f) After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
HINT:
If no pending DTCs are found, the repair has been successfully completed.
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDO0IEX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
If any of the following DTCs are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode to allow the vehicle to be driven
temporarily or stops fuel injection.
DTC FAIL-SAFE OPERATION FAIL-SAFE DEACTIVATION

CODE CONDITION
P000A
P000C
P0010
P0011
P0016 After recovery in normal
P0018 Fix intake VVT control at intermediate position status, turn the ignition
P0020 switch to ON again
P0021
P0341
P0345
P0346
P000B
P000D
P0013
P0014
P0017
After recovery in normal
P0019
Fix exhaust VVT control at maximum retard angle status, turn the ignition
P0023
switch to ON again
P0024
P0365
P0366
P0390
P0391
P0031
P0032
P0037
P0131
P0132
P0134
P0137
Stop air fuel ratio feedback control status, turn the ignition
P0138
switch to ON again
P013A
P013B
P013E
P013F
P0140
P0141
P0087
P0088
Stop fuel pump assembly drive (high pressure side) After recovery in normal
P0191
Fix fuel pressure at 0.4 MPa (4.07 kgf/cm 2 , 57.9 psi). status, turn the ignition
P0192
Cut fuel at 1500 rpm or more switch to ON again
P0193
P1235
P0101
Make the engine load the manifold absolute pressure converted
P0102 Return to normal status
estimated value
P0103
P0068
Make the manifold absolute pressure value the mass air flow meter
P0107 Return to normal status
converted estimated value
P0108
P0111
P0112 Fix inlet air temperature at 20°C (68°F) Return to normal status
P0113
P0116
P0117 Fix coolant temperature at 70°C ( 158°F)
Return to normal status
P0118 Stop intake and exhaust VVT
P0125
P0172 Stop purge control Return to normal status
P0196
P0197 Fix engine oil temperature at 70°C (158°F) Return to normal status
P0198
P062D
Cut fuel at 1500 rpm or more
P1262 status, turn the ignition
Cut fuel to abnormal cylinders
P1263 switch to ON again
P1264
P0201
P0202
Cut fuel to abnormal cylinders status, turn the ignition
P0203
switch to ON again
P0204
P062F
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P0604
P0605
Stop electronic throttle control, and fix the throttle valve opening
P060A status, turn the ignition
angle (5 degrees)
P060B switch to ON again
P1160
P2101
P2102
P2103
P2109
P2119
P2135
P0327
P0328
Maximum retard angle Return to normal status
P0332
P0333
P0451 Stop leak detection pump control Return to normal status
P0500 Fix ECU recognized vehicle speed at 10 km/h (6.2 mph) Return to normal status
P0851
Turn off the gear position display within the combination meter Return to normal status
P0852
P1451
Fix atmospheric pressure at 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg) Return to normal status
P2404
Accelerator pedal sensor assembly has 2 sensor circuits: Main and

P2122
Sub If either circuit malfunctions, substitute the normal accelerator After recovery in normal
P2123
position sensor until the prescribed angle. status, turn the ignition
P2127
If both circuits malfunction, fix accelerator position at prescribed switch to ON again
P2128
angle (12%).
Fix accelerator pedal angle After recovery in normal

P2138 Stop electronic throttle control, and fix the throttle valve status, turn the ignition
opening angle switch to ON again
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDS0SJX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
FREEZE FRAME DATA

1. DESCRIPTION
vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel
ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system information, calculated load,
engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction
is detected.
HINT:
If it is impossible to duplicate the problem even though a DTC is output, check the freeze frame
data.
The ECM records engine conditions in the form of freeze frame data every 0.5 seconds. Using the
Techstream, 5 separate sets of freeze frame data can be checked.
3 data sets from before the DTC was stored

1 data set from when the DTC was stored
1 data set from after the DTC was stored
These data sets can be used to simulate the condition of the vehicle from around the time of the
occurrence of the malfunction. The data may assist in identifying the cause of the malfunction, and in
judging whether it was temporary or not.
2. LIST OF FREEZE FRAME DATA
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" .

Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000000ZRM0EXX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Fuel Injector Circuit; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
Fuel Injector Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The fuel injectors (for port injection) are attached to the intake manifold, and inject fuel into the intake
manifold based on the ECM signals.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly connectors.
Standard Voltage:
C8-1 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Fuel Injector Assembly)
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
NG GO TO STEP 4
OK
2. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (INJECTION AND VOLUME)
(a) Check the fuel injector injection and volume .
NG REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly connector.
C8-2 - A36-12 (#10) Always Below 1 Ω
C30-2 - A36-22 (#20) Always Below 1 Ω
C9-2 - A36-32 (#30) Always Below 1 Ω
C31-2 - A36-13 (#40) Always Below 1 Ω
C1-2 or A36-12 (#10) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly connector.
(b) Remove the EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
C8-1 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω
C8-1 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000001F70022X

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Fuel Pump Control Circuit; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
Fuel Pump Control Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The fuel pump circuit (low pressure side) is comprised of the ECM, fuel pump assembly (low pressure
side), and fuel pump control ECU assembly (which operates the fuel pump [low pressure side]). The ECM
judges the speed of the fuel pump assembly (low pressure side) based on the engine output. This speed
is converted into a loading signal, which is sent to the fuel pump control ECU assembly. The fuel pump
control ECU assembly adjusts the fuel pump operating speed (low pressure side), based on the signal
sent from the ECM.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP/SPEED)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump/Speed.
(e) Check whether the fuel pump operating sound occurs when performing the Active Test on the
Techstream.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Fuel pump operating sound does not occur A
Fuel pump operating sound occurs B
B GO TO STEP 8
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active

Test /Control the Fuel Pump Duty.
(e) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:
3 (FP+) - 4 (FP-) FPC Duty: 25% 3.2 to 4.05 V
3 (FP+) - 4 (FP-) FPC Duty: 80% 8.8 to 12.5 V

*a
(Fuel Pump Assembly)
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active

Test / Control the Fuel Pump/Speed.
(g) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:

ON
3 (FP+) - 4 (FP-) (FPC Duty: 9.0 to 14.0 V
25%)
HINT:
Be sure to measure the voltage with all the connectors
connected.
Before performing this inspection, check that the battery
voltage is between 11 and 14 V (not depleted).
NG GO TO STEP 6
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU assembly connector.
A35-19 (FPC) - G12-2 (FPC) Always Below 1 Ω

A35-19 (FPC) or G12-2 (FPC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
4. REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the fuel pump assembly .
NEXT
5. CHECK CONFIRM WHETHER MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY REPAIRED
(a) Check the fuel pump operation .

OK:
Malfunction has been repaired successfully.
NG REPLACE ECM
OK END
6. REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the fuel pump control ECU assembly .
NEXT

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM
OK END
8. INSPECT FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
G12-1 (+B) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
Front view of wire harness connector:

*a
(to Fuel Pump Control ECU Assembly)
NG GO TO STEP 14
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU
9.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
G7-4 (FP-) - G12-5 (FP-) Always Below 1 Ω
G7-3 (FP+) - G12-6 (FP+) Always Below 1 Ω
G7-4 (FP-) or G12-5 (FP-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
G7-3 (FP+) or G12-6 (FP+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
10. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect fuel pump assembly .
NG REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
OK
11. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY - ECM)
G12-4 (E)- Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
12. REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the fuel pump control ECU assembly .
NEXT

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM
OK END
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN RELAY - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU
14.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Remove the C/OPEN relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 - G12-1 (+B) Always Below 1 Ω
C/OPEN relay terminal 1 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 or G12-1 (+B) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
15. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (C/OPEN RELAY)
(a) Remove the C/OPEN relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 5 - Body

IG ON 11 to 14 V
ground
*2 C/OPEN Relay Terminal
NG GO TO ECU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
16. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN RELAY - ECM - IG2 RELAY)
(b) Remove the C/OPEN relay and IG2 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
C/OPEN relay terminal 2 - A33-27 (IGSW) Always Below 1 Ω
C/OPEN relay terminal 2 - IG2 relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω

CONDITION
C/OPEN relay terminal 2, A33-27 (IGSW) or IG2 relay terminal 3 -

Body ground

NG
CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PD90TLX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
NEXT
NEXT
3. CONNECT TECHSTREAM TO DLC3*
HINT:
If the display indicates a communication fault in the Techstream, inspect the DLC3.
When any CAN communication system DTCs are output, perform troubleshooting on the CAN
communication system first.
NEXT
(a) Check for DTCs and freeze frame data .
HINT:
Record or print DTCs and freeze frame data if necessary.

NEXT
5. CLEAR DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
(a) Clear DTCs and freeze frame data .
NEXT
6. CONDUCT VISUAL INSPECTION
NEXT
7. SELECT CHECK MODE DIAGNOSIS*
(a) Switch the ECM from normal mode to check mode.
HINT:
Refer to Check Mode Procedure .
NEXT
8. CONFIRM PROBLEM SYMPTOMS
(a) Confirm problem symptoms.
HINT:
If the engine does not start, first perform the "Check DTC" procedure and "Conduct Basic Inspection"
procedure below.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Malfunction does not occur A
Malfunction occurs B
B GO TO STEP 10
9. SIMULATE SYMPTOMS
HINT:
Refer to Symptom Simulation .
NEXT
10. CHECK DTC*
(a) Check for DTCs.
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Trouble code output A
No trouble code output B
B GO TO STEP 12
11. REFER TO DTC CHART
(a) Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart .
NEXT
12. CONDUCT BASIC INSPECTION
(a) Conduct basic inspection .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Malfunctioning parts not confirmed A
Malfunctioning parts confirmed B
B GO TO STEP 17
13. REFER TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
(a) Refer to Problem Symptoms Table .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Malfunctioning circuit confirmed A
B GO TO STEP 17
14. CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
(a) Check the ECM power source circuit.
HINT:
Refer to ECM Power Source Circuit .

NEXT
15. CONDUCT CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Malfunction not confirmed A
Malfunction confirmed B
B GO TO STEP 18
(a) Check for intermittent problems.
HINT:
Refer to Check for Intermittent Problems .
NEXT
17. CONDUCT PARTS INSPECTION
NEXT
18. IDENTIFY PROBLEM
NEXT
19. ADJUST AND/OR REPAIR
NEXT
20. CONDUCT CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT END
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000000WZ10ULX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: MIL Circuit; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
MIL Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) is used to indicate vehicle malfunctions detected by the ECM. When
the ignition switch is turned to ON, power is supplied to the MIL circuit, which illuminates the MIL.
The MIL operation can be checked visually: When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the MIL should be
illuminated and should turn off after engine is started. If the MIL remains illuminated or is not illuminated,
conduct the following troubleshooting procedure using the Techstream.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK THAT MIL IS ILLUMINATED
(a) Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the table below.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL remains ON A
MIL does not illuminate B
MIL illuminates for several seconds, but turns off after engine is started C
B GO TO STEP 3
C CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
2. CHECK WHETHER MIL TURNS OFF
(e) Check if any DTCs have been detected. Note down any DTCs.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC detected A
Any DTCs detected B
HINT:
Check for detected DTCs output from other ECUs which relate to the MIL.
B REPAIR CIRCUITS INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTCS
A GO TO METER / GAUGE SYSTEM
3. CHECK THAT ENGINE STARTS

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Engine starts A
Engine does not start* B
HINT:
*: The Techstream cannot communicate with the ECM.
B GO TO VC OUTPUT CIRCUIT
A REPLACE COMBINATION METER
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDU0OMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P000A,P000C,P0011,P0021: Camshaft Position "A" - Timing
Slow Response Bank 1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC P000A Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1
DTC P000C Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance

DTC P0011
(Bank 1)
Camshaft Position "A" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance

DTC P0021
(Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
The Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system adjusts the intake valve timing to improve driveability. The
engine oil pressure turns the VVT controller to adjust the valve timing.
The camshaft timing oil control valve is a solenoid valve and switches the engine oil line. The valve moves
when the ECM applies 12 V to the solenoid. The ECM changes the energizing time to the solenoid (duty-
cycle) in accordance with the camshaft position, crankshaft position, throttle position, etc.
NO.
Integrated deviations in target intake valve timing and actual

Valve timing
intake valve timing per specified time exceed thresholds for 15
P000A Camshaft timing oil
seconds (bank 1).
control valve (for
intake side of bank
1)
Oil control valve
filter
Deviation in target intake valve timing and actual intake valve Camshaft timing
P0011 timing exceeds thresholds (bank 1). gear assembly (for
(2 trip detection logic) intake side of bank
1)
ECM
Integrated deviations in target intake valve timing and actual

Valve timing
intake valve timing per specified time exceed thresholds for 15
P000C Camshaft timing oil
seconds (bank 2).
control valve (for
intake side of bank
2)
Oil control valve
filter
Deviation in target intake valve timing and actual intake valve Camshaft timing
P0021 timing exceeds thresholds (bank 2). gear assembly (for
(2 trip detection logic) intake side of bank
2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM optimizes the intake valve timing using the Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system to control
the intake camshaft. The VVT system includes the ECM, the camshaft timing oil control valve and
the VVT controller (camshaft timing gear assembly). The ECM sends a target duty-cycle control
signal to the camshaft timing oil control valve. This control signal regulates the oil pressure supplied
to the VVT controller. The VVT controller can advance or retard the intake camshaft.
If the difference between the target and actual intake valve timings is large, and changes in the
actual intake valve timing are small, the ECM interprets this as the VVT controller stuck malfunction
and stores a DTC.
These DTCs indicate that the VVT controller cannot operate properly due to camshaft timing oil
control valve malfunctions or the presence of foreign objects in the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P000A: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 1)
P000C: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 2)
Related DTCs
P0011: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 1)
P0021: VVT intake method with mid-position start functional check
(Bank 2)
Required Sensors/Components Camshaft timing oil control valve

(Main) Camshaft timing gear assembly

VVT sensor
(Related)
15 seconds: P000A, P000C

Duration 7 seconds: P0011, P0021 (Target error)
1 second: P0011, P0021 (Mid lock position)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles

All
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - intake with variable
not stored valve timing (VVT))

Engine speed 500 rpm or higher
Engine oil temperature 0°C (32°F) or higher
P000A, P000C
VVT feedback control Active
Change of VVT target angle during 64 msec Less than 3.84°CA
VVT target position 0°CA or more
P0011, P0021 (Target error)
P0011, P0021 (Mid lock position)
VVT command Mid lock position
Elapsed time after engine start 0.5 seconds or more

P000A, P000C
Sigma (VVT target position - VVT actual position) More than 4000°CA or less than -4000°CA
P0011, P0021 (Target error)
VVT target position - VVT actual position More than 7°CA or less than -7°CA
P0011, P0021 (Mid lock position)
MONITOR RESULT
Refer to detailed information in Checking Monitor Status .
CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC operation) .
4. Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature reaches 75°C (167°F) or
higher.
7. Perform the following the confirmation driving pattern.
CAUTION:
When performing the confirmation driving pattern, obey all speed limits and traffic
laws.
a. Idle the engine for 10 seconds or more [A].

b. Accelerate the vehicle to 97 km/h (60 mph) or more within 20 seconds [B].
c. Drive the vehicle at 97 km/h (60 mph) or more for 20 seconds or more [C].
d. Release the accelerator pedal to Decelerate until the vehicle speed decreases to less
than 64 km/h (40 mph) [D].
HINT:
Release the accelerator pedal fully to perform the fuel-cut.
e. Drive the vehicle at 60 km/h (40 mph) or less for 20 seconds or more [E].
f. Accelerate the vehicle to 97 km/h (60 mph) or more within 10 seconds [F].
g. Release the accelerator pedal and stop the vehicle [G].
8. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.

9. Read pending DTCs.
HINT:
If a pending DTC is output, the system is malfunctioning.

If a pending DTC is not output, perform the following procedure.
10. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
11. Input the DTC: P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021.
12. Check the DTC judgment result.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE Perform driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling
conditions

N/A Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has
reached ECU memory limit
HINT:
If the judgment result shows NORMAL, the system is normal.

If the judgment result shows ABNORMAL, the system has a malfunction.
13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no DTC is output, perform a universal trip and
check for permanent DTCs .
HINT:
If a permanent DTC is output, the system is malfunctioning.

If no permanent DTC is output, the system is normal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P000A or P0011 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT
system (bank 1).
If DTC P000C or P0021 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system
(bank 2).
Bank 1 refers to the bank that includes the No. 1 cylinder*.
*: The No. 1 cylinder is the cylinder which is farthest from transmission.

Bank 2 refers to the bank that does not include the No. 1 cylinder.
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition
information as freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame
data can help determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or
not, if the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P000A, P000C, P0011
1.
OR P0021)

(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 is output A
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (OPERATE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL

2.
CONTROL VALVE)
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank
1), Control the VVT Linear (Bank 2).
(f) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake
camshaft) using the Techstream.
OK:
TECHSTREAM OPERATION SPECIFIED CONDITION
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [VVT OCV Duty #1, VVT OCV Duty #2 and VVT Change Angle #1, VVT
Change Angle #2] .
CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE
NG TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
OK
3. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 OR P0021)
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(g) Turn the Techstream on.
(h) Start the engine and warm it up.
(i) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(j) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(k) Read pending DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 is output B
HINT:
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught in
some parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to normal after a
short time. These foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.

B TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
4. CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
(a) Check the valve timing .
NG ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK
5. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft) .
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

NG VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
OK
6. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing gear assembly .
HINT:
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are
caught in some parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to
normal after a short time. These foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR

NG ASSEMBLY (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
OK
7. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 OR P0021)

Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 is output B
HINT:
DTC P000A, P000C, P0011 or P0021 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught in
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XH80G0X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P000B,P000D,P0014,P0024: Camshaft Position "B" - Timing
Slow Response Bank 1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC P000B Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 1
DTC P000D Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Slow Response Bank 2
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance

DTC P0014
(Bank 1)
Camshaft Position "B" - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance

DTC P0024
(Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
The Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system adjusts the exhaust valve timing to improve driveability. The
engine oil pressure turns the VVT controller to adjust the valve timing.
The camshaft timing oil control valve is a solenoid valve and switches the engine oil line. The valve moves
when the ECM applies 12 V to the solenoid. The ECM changes the energizing time to the solenoid (duty-
cycle) in accordance with the camshaft position, crankshaft position, throttle position, etc.
NO.
Integrated deviations in target exhaust valve timing and actual

Valve timing
exhaust valve timing per specified time exceed threshold for 25
P000B Camshaft timing oil
seconds (bank 1).
control valve (for
exhaust side of bank
1)
Camshaft oil control
valve filter (bank 1)
Deviation in target exhaust valve timing and actual exhaust Camshaft timing
P0014 valve timing exceeds threshold for 8 seconds (bank 1). gear assembly (for
(2 trip detection logic) exhaust side of bank
1)
ECM
Integrated deviations in target exhaust valve timing and actual

Valve timing
exhaust valve timing per specified time exceed threshold for 25
P000D Camshaft timing oil
seconds (bank 2).
control valve (for
exhaust side of bank
2)
Camshaft oil control
valve filter (bank 2)
Deviation in target exhaust valve timing and actual exhaust Camshaft timing
P0024 valve timing exceeds threshold for 8 seconds (bank 2). gear assembly (for
(2 trip detection logic) exhaust side of bank
2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM optimizes the exhaust valve timing using the Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system to control the
exhaust camshaft. The VVT system includes the ECM, the camshaft timing oil control valve and the VVT
controller (camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly). The ECM sends a target duty-cycle control signal to
the camshaft timing oil control valve. This control signal regulates the oil pressure supplied to the VVT
controller. The VVT controller can advance or retard the exhaust camshaft.
If the difference between the target and actual exhaust valve timing is large, and changes in the actual
exhaust valve timing are small, the ECM interprets this as a VVT controller stuck malfunction and stores a
DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P000B: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
1)
P000D: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
2)
Related DTCs
P0014: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
1)
P0024: VVT exhaust method without mid-position start (Bank
2)
Camshaft timing oil control valve

Required Sensors/Components (Main)
Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly

VVT sensor
(Related)
25 seconds: P000B, P000D

Duration
8 seconds: P0014, P0024

All
Monitor runs whenever following P0365, P0390 (Camshaft position sensor - exhaust with variable
DTCs not stored valve timing (VVT))
Engine oil temperature 0°C (32°F) or higher

P000B, P000D
Change of VVT target angle during 64 msec Less than 3.84°CA
VVT target position 0°CA or more

P000B, P000D
Sigma (VVT target position - VVT actual position) More than 4000°CA or less than -4000°CA
P0014, P0024
MONITOR RESULT

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

HINT:

11. Input the DTC: P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P000B or P0014 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT
system (bank 1).
If DTC P000D or P0024 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT
system (bank 2).
DTC P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught in some parts
of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to normal after a short time.
Those foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
PROCEDURE
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P000B, P000D, P0014
1.
OR P0024)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 is output A
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART

2.
CONTROL VALVE)
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust
Linear (Bank 1), Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank 2).
(f) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
camshaft) using the Techstream.
OK:
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [VVT Ex OCV Duty #1, VVT Ex OCV Duty #2 and VVT Ex Chg Angle
#1, VVT Ex Chg Angle #2] .

NG TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
OK
3. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 OR P0024)
Pattern.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 is output A
DTC is not output B
HINT:
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught in
4. CHECK VALVE TIMING (CHECK FOR LOOSE TIMING CHAIN AND JUMPED TEETH)
OK
5. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft) .

NG VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
6. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY

(a) Inspect the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly .
HINT:
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are
caught in some parts of the system. The DTC will remain stored even if the system returns to
normal after a short time. These foreign objects may then be captured by the oil filter.
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
7. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 OR P0024)
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 is output B
HINT:
DTC P000B, P000D, P0014 or P0024 may be stored when foreign objects in the engine oil are caught in
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDW0MSX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0010,P0020: Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank
1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0010 Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 1)
DTC P0020 Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to P000A .

NO.
Open or short in camshaft timing

Oil control valve current is less than 0.306 A for oil control valve circuit (for intake
intake camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more side of bank 1)
P0010
(bank 1). Camshaft timing oil control valve
(1 trip detection logic) (for intake side of bank 1)
ECM

Oil control valve current is less than 0.306 A for oil control valve circuit (for intake
intake camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more side of bank 2)
P0020
(1 trip detection logic) (for intake side of bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC is designed to detect open or short in the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft)
circuit. If the camshaft timing oil control valve's duty-cycle is excessively high or low while the engine is
running, the ECM will illuminate the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0010: Oil control valve for intake-VVT circuit continuity (Bank
1)
Related DTCs
P0020: Oil control valve for intake-VVT circuit continuity (Bank
2)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) camshaft timing oil control valve
-
(Related)

Duration 2 second
MIL Operation Immediate

Camshaft timing oil control valve control duty 99.61% or more

Camshaft timing oil control valve control actual current Less than 0.306 A

higher.
7. With the vehicle stationary, depress the accelerator pedal and maintain an engine speed of
between 2500 and 3000 rpm for 40 seconds or more [A].
8. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [B].
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

12. Input the DTC: P0010 or P0020.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0010 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT system (bank
1).
If DTC P0020 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system (bank 2).
PROCEDURE
1. READ DTC OUTPUT

(d) Clear the DTC after recording the freeze frame data and DTC.
(e) Turn the ignition switch off.
(f) Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(h) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0010 or P0020 is output A
DTC is not output B
2. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft) .

NG VALVE (FOR INTAKE CAMSHAFT)
OK
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL

3.
CONTROL VALVE)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for

intake camshaft connector).
Standard Voltage:
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve)
NG INSPECT RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE -

4.
ECM)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft connector).
A36-17 (OC1) - C7-2 Always Below 1 Ω

A36-17 (OC1) or C7-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
(a) Inspect EFI MAIN1 relay .
REPLACE RELAY (EFI MAIN1)

NG
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

6.
VALVE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C7-1 Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C7-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XH70FAX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0013,P0023: Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit /
Open (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0013 Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 1)
DTC P0023 Camshaft Position "B" Actuator Circuit / Open (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
Refer to P000B .

NO.

Oil control valve current is less than 0.306 A for oil control valve circuit (for
exhaust camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more exhaust side of bank 1)
P0013
(1 trip detection logic) (for exhaust side of bank 1)
ECM

Oil control valve current is less than 0.306 A for oil control valve circuit (for
exhaust camshaft circuit for 2 seconds or more exhaust side of bank 2)
P0023
(1 trip detection logic) (for exhaust side of bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC is designed to detect open or short in the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
camshaft) circuit. If the camshaft timing oil control valve's duty-cycle is excessively high or low while the
engine is running, the ECM will illuminate the MIL and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0013: Oil control valve for exhaust-VVT circuit continuity (Bank
1)
Related DTCs
P0023: Oil control valve for exhaust-VVT circuit continuity (Bank
2)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Exhaust camshaft timing oil control valve
-
(Related)

Duration 2 seconds

Camshaft timing oil control valve control duty 99.61% or more

Camshaft timing oil control valve control actual current Less than 0.306 A

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0013 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT system (bank
1).
If DTC P0023 is displayed, check the exhaust camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system (bank
2).

PROCEDURE
1. READ DTC OUTPUT

(d) Clear the DTC after recording the freeze frame data and DTC.
(f) Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
(h) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
2. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft) .

NG VALVE (FOR EXHAUST CAMSHAFT)
OK
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL

3.
CONTROL VALVE)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for
exhaust camshaft connector).
Standard Voltage:
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve)
OK

4.
ECM)
(a) Disconnect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft) connector.
A36-7 (OE1) - C5-2 Always Below 1 Ω

A36-7 (OE1) or C5-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM

NG
OK

6.
EFI MAIN1 RELAY)

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WC20GWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P014C,P014D,P015A,P015B: A/F Sensor Slow Response -
Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC P014C A/F Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
DTC P014D A/F Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
DTC P015A A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 1
DTC P015B A/F Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich Bank 1 Sensor 1
DESCRIPTION

NO.
The "Rich to Lean response rate deterioration level*" value is

P014C standard or less for 70 seconds.
The "Lean to Rich response rate deterioration level*" value is Air fuel ratio
P014D standard or more for 70 seconds. sensor
(2 trip detection logic) Air fuel ratio
sensor heater
The "Rich to Lean delay level*" value is standard or more. ECM
P015A
The "Lean to Rich delay level*" value is standard or more.

P015B
*: Calculated by ECM based on the air fuel ratio sensor output.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
P014C, P014D (Asymmetric slow response)
The ECM monitors the time that the air fuel ratio sensor output waveform is at its maximum and minimum
as time(m) and Time(n) respectively.
If the difference between the average time(m) and the average time(n) is the specified value or more,
and the air fuel ratio sensor output waveform time of decreasing lambda is less than the air fuel ratio
sensor output cumulative time, then P014C is stored, and if this is more, P014D is stored.
P014C, P014D (Symmetric slow response)
The ECM monitors the amount of change from the air fuel ratio sensor for each specified period, and when
the total variation exceeds a specified value, P014C or P014D is stored.
P015A, P015B (Asymmetric delayed start)
The ECM monitors the time that the air fuel ratio sensor output waveform is at its maximum and minimum
as time(m) and time(n) respectively.
If the difference between the average time(m) and the average time(n) is the specified value or more,
and time(m) is the specified value or more, then P015A is stored, and if time(n) is the specified value or
more, then P015B is stored.
P015A, P015B (Symmetric delayed start)
If the average value for the Lambda maximum value and minimum value is the specified value or more,
then P015A and P015B are stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P014C: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric slow response
Rich to Lean)
P014D: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric slow response
Lean to Rich)
P014C and P014D: Primary oxygen sensor response (Symmetric slow
response)
Related DTCs
P015A: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric delayed start
Rich to Lean)
P015B: Primary oxygen sensor response (Asymmetric delayed start
Lean to Rich)
P015A and P015B: Primary oxygen sensor response (Symmetric
delayed start)
(Main)
Required Sensors/Components Speed sensor

(Related) Crankshaft position sensor
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
70 seconds: P014C, P014D

Duration 30 seconds: P015A, P015B (Asymmetric delayed start)
90 seconds: P015A, P015B (Symmetric delayed start)

All
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored None
Battery voltage 10.9 V or higher
Fuel system Closed loop
Impedance of air fuel ratio sensor 0 to 65 Ω
Elapsed time after engine start 40 seconds or more
Engine coolant temperature 0°C or higher
Intake air mass per second 10 g/sec or more
Elapsed time for fuel cut not active 3 seconds or more
Engine Not idling
Learning value of EVAP density during purge Less than 0.2
Total time of canister purge 20 seconds or more
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine revolution Less than 0.02 g/rev

P014C (Asymmetric slow response)
Sum of DL (time of decreasing lambda) / Sum of total time Less than 0.39
Average of time(m) (local minimum) - Average of time(n) (local maximum) 0.08 seconds or more
P014D (Asymmetric slow response)

Sum of DL (time of decreasing lambda) / Sum of total time 0.63 or more
Average of time(n) (local maximum) - Average of time(m) (local minimum) 0.1 seconds or more
P014C, P014D (Symmetric slow response)
Sum of lambda ({(lambda(n) - lambda(n-1)} - Less than 7 (varies with accumulated value of
{(lambda(n-1) - lambda(n-2)}) lambda variation)
P015A (Asymmetric delayed start)
Average of time(m) (local minimum) 0.35 seconds or more
Average of time(m) (local minimum) - Average of time(n) (local maximum) 0.25 seconds or more
P015B (Asymmetric delayed start)
Average of time(n) (local minimum) 0.35 seconds or more
Average of time(n) (local maximum) - Average of time(m) (local minimum) 0.25 seconds or more
Average of (maximum lambda - minimum lambda) 0.08 or more
MONITOR RESULT
Refer to Checking Monitor Status .

higher.
HINT:
Check the engine coolant temperature is 20°C (68°F) or less at engine started.
CAUTION:
laws.
a. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 20 minutes or more [A].
b. Stop the vehicle.
c. Idle the engine for 1 minute or more [B].

HINT:

11. Input the DTC: P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run lean.

Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.
Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.
data can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the
engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data
recorded at the time of a malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P014C, P014D, P015A
1.
OR P015B)
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B is output A
DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
A
2. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
(a) Inspect the air fuel ratio sensor .
NG REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR - ECM)

CONNECTOR (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR -
NG ECM)
OK
4. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Check that the proper air fuel ratio sensor is installed to the vehicle.
SECURELY REINSTALL AIR FUEL RATIO

NG SENSOR
OK
5. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
(a) Drive the vehicle according to the Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
6. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P014C, P014D, P015A OR P015B)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B is output A
DTC is not output B
7. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Replace the air fuel ratio sensor .
NEXT
(a) Drive the vehicle according to the Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P014C, P014D, P014E, P014F,
9.
P015A, P015B, P015C OR P015D)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P014C, P014D, P015A or P015B is output B
CHECK ENGINE TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF

B EXTREMELY RICH OR LEAN ACTUAL AIR FUEL
RATIO
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDV0M3X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0016-P0019: Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position
Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor A) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor A)
DTC P0017 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 1 Sensor B)
DTC P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 2 Sensor A)
DTC P0019 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank 2 Sensor B)
DESCRIPTION
In the VVT (Variable Valve Timing) system, the appropriate intake and exhaust valve open and close
timing is controlled by the ECM. The ECM performs intake and exhaust valve control by performing the
following: 1) controlling the camshaft and camshaft timing oil control valve, and operating the camshaft
timing gear: and 2) changing the relative positions of the camshaft and crankshaft.

NO.
Valve timing
Camshaft timing oil control
One of the following conditions is met (2 trip detection
valve (for intake side of
logic):
bank 1)
Slip intake valve timing for 1 second (bank Oil control valve filter (bank
P0016
1). 1)
Intake camshaft position has slipped from the Camshaft timing gear
central lock position for 1 second (bank 1). assembly (for intake side of
bank 1)
ECM
Valve timing
logic):
valve (for exhaust of bank 1)
Slip exhaust valve timing for 5 seconds (bank Oil control valve filter (bank
P0017 1). 1)
Exhaust camshaft position has slipped from Camshaft timing gear
the central lock position for 5 seconds (bank assembly (for exhaust side
1). of bank 1)
ECM
Valve timing
valve (for intake side of
logic):
bank 2)
Slip intake valve timing for 1 second (bank Oil control valve filter (bank
P0018
2). 2)
Intake camshaft position has slipped from the Camshaft timing gear
central lock position for 1 second (bank 2). assembly (for intake side of
bank 2)
ECM
Valve timing
One of the following conditions is met (2 trip detection Camshaft timing oil control
logic): valve (for exhaust side of
bank 2)
Slip exhaust valve timing for 5 seconds (bank
Oil control valve filter (bank
P0019 2).
2)
Exhaust camshaft position has slipped from
Camshaft timing gear
the central lock position for 5 seconds (bank
assembly (for exhaust side
2).
of bank 2)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
To monitor the correlation of the intake camshaft position and crankshaft position, the ECM checks the
VVT learned value while the engine is idling. The VVT learned value is calibrated based on the camshaft
position and crankshaft position. The intake valve timing is set to the most retarded angle while the
engine is idling. If the VVT learned value is out of the specified range in consecutive driving cycles, the
ECM illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0016 (bank 1) or P0018 (bank 2).
To monitor the correlation of the exhaust camshaft position and crankshaft position, the ECM checks the
VVT learned value while the engine is idling. The VVT learned value is calibrated based on the camshaft
position and crankshaft position. The exhaust valve timing is set to the most advanced angle while the
engine is idling. If the VVT learned value is out of the specified range in consecutive driving cycles, the
ECM illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0017 (bank 1) or P0019 (bank 2).
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0016: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (intake) functional check
(Bank 1)
P0017: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (exhaust) functional
check (Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0018: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (intake) functional check
(Bank 2)
P0019: Crankshaft / Camshaft correlation (exhaust) functional
check (Bank 2)
Required Sensors/Components Camshaft timing gear assembly

(Main) Camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly
Required Sensors/Components VVT sensor

1 second: P0016, P0018

Duration
5 second: P0017, P0019

All
Engine coolant temperature 50°C (122°F) or higher
VVT feedback control Not active
VVT target position Less than 0.01°CA
Learning experienced flag Set
Duration of no power steering switch change 3 seconds or more
Duration of no neutral switch change 3 seconds or more
P0016, P0018
Engine speed 1400 to 3000 rpm
P0017, P0019

P0016, P0018 (One tooth misalignment)
Actual angle of camshaft - Learning value of the base position 10°CA or more
P0016, P0018 (Two teeth misalignment)
Actual angle of camshaft Less than 28°CA or more than 87°CA
P0017, P0019 (One tooth misalignment)
Actual angle of camshaft - Learning value of the base position 10°CA or more
P0017, P0019 (Two teeth misalignment)
Actual angle of camshaft Less than 58°CA or more than 117°CA

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

12. Input the DTC: P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P0010 for the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake camshaft) circuit .
Refer to DTC P0013 for the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust camshaft) circuit .
HINT:
If DTC P0016 or P0017 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the right bank VVT
system (bank 1).
If DTC P0018 or P0019 is displayed, check the intake camshaft circuit for the left bank VVT system
(bank 2).

PROCEDURE
CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0016, P0017, P0018
1.
OR P0019)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 is output A
DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART

2.
CONTROL VALVE)
HINT:
If the VVT system can be operated through the Active Test, it can be assumed that the VVT system is
operating normally.
(c) Turn the A/C on.
(e) Warm up the engine.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank
1) or Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank 1) / VVT Change Angle #1, VVT Ex Chg Angle #1,
VVT Change Angle #2, VVT Ex Chg Angle #2.
(g) Perform the Active Test. Check that the displacement angle varies.
OK:
Displacement angle varies.
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL

NG VALVE (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT)
OK
3. CHECK VALVE TIMING

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC

B P0016, P0017, P0018 OR P0019)
A ADJUST VALVE TIMING
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST

4.
CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake or exhaust camshaft) .

NG VALVE (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT)
OK
5. INSPECT OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER AND OIL PIPE
(a) Check that the oil control valve filter and oil pipe are not clogged.
OK:
The oil control valve filter and oil pipe are not clogged.
CLEAN OR REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE

NG FILTER AND OIL PIPE
OK
INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY (FOR INTAKE OR EXHAUST

6.
CAMSHAFT)
(a) Inspect the camshaft timing gear assembly (for intake camshaft or exhaust camshaft) .

NG ASSEMBLY (INTAKE OR EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT)
OK
7. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 OR P0019)
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P0016, P0017, P0018 or P0019 is output B

B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WC10PBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0030-P0032: A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1
Sensor 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0030 A/F Sensor Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P0031 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P0032 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
When any of these DTCs is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. The ECM turns off the air fuel
ratio sensor heater in fail-safe mode. Fail-safe mode continues until the ignition switch is turned off.
Although the DTC titles say oxygen sensor, these DTCs relate to the air fuel ratio sensor.
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor mounted in front of the three-way catalytic converter and located
near the engine assembly.
The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust the current through the heater.
The air fuel ratio sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the +B side of the circuit.

NO.
Air fuel ratio sensor impedance is greater than 65 Ω for

P0030 10 seconds or more.
Open or short in air fuel ratio
Air fuel ratio sensor heater voltage is less than 1.2 V for
sensor circuit
P0031 1 second or more.
ECM
Air fuel ratio sensor heater voltage is 1.2 V or more for
P0032 2 seconds or more.
HINT:

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses information from the air fuel ratio sensor to regulate the air fuel ratio and keep it close to
the stoichiometric level. This maximizes the ability of the three-way catalytic converter to purify the
exhaust gases.
The air fuel ratio sensor detects oxygen levels in the exhaust gas and transmits the information to the
ECM. The inner surface of the sensor element is exposed to the outside air. The outer surface of the sensor
element is exposed to the exhaust gas. The sensor element is made of platinum-coated zirconia and
includes an integrated heating element.
The zirconia element generates a small voltage when there is a large difference in the oxygen
concentrations between the exhaust gas and outside air. The platinum coating amplifies this voltage
generation.
The air fuel ratio sensor is more efficient when heated. When the exhaust gas temperature is low, the
sensor cannot generate useful voltage signals without supplementary heating. The ECM regulates the
supplementary heating using a duty-cycle approach to adjust the average current in the sensor heater
element. If the heater current is outside the normal range, the signal transmitted by the air fuel ratio
sensor becomes inaccurate. As a result, the ECM is unable to regulate the air fuel ratio properly.
When the current in the air fuel ratio sensor heater is outside the normal operating range, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor heater and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0030: Primary oxygen sensor - Heater functional check
Related DTCs P0031: Primary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity
P0032: Primary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Air fuel ratio sensor heater
Required Sensors/Components (Related) -
10 seconds: P0030
Duration 1 second: P0031
2 seconds: P0032
2 driving cycles: P0030

MIL Operation
Immediate: P0031, P0032

P0030
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle position sensor)

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0604, P0605 (ROM in ECM)
P1160 (Throttle return spring)
P2101, P2102 (Throttle actuator control motor)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs
P2109 (Throttle position sensor minimum stop)
not stored
P2119 (Throttle actuator control)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APPS) circuit)
P2135 (Throttle position sensor (TPS) correlation)
P2138 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS) correlation)

Heater energize continuously Active
Elapsed time after fuel cut. 20 seconds or more
P0031
Air fuel ratio sensor heater control duty Less than 87.5%
P0032
Air fuel ratio sensor heater control duty 12.5% or more

P0030
Impedance of air fuel ratio sensor 65 Ω or higher
P0031
Air fuel ratio sensor heater ON voltage Less than 1.2 V
P0032
Air fuel ratio sensor heater ON voltage 1.2 V or higher

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

12. Input the DTC: P0030, P0031 or P0032.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [A/F Heater Duty #1] .

Change the fuel injection volume using the Control the Injection Volume function provided in the
Active Test and monitor the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage . If the sensor output voltage
does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
malfunctioning.
PROCEDURE
OK
2. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)
Standard Voltage:
C14-2 (+B) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Air Fuel Ratio Sensor)
OK

A34-5 (HA1A) - C14-1(HA1A) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-5 (HA1A) or C14-1 (HA1A) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (P0030, P0031 OR P0032)
(h) Start the engine.
(i) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(j) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(k) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P0030, P0031or P0032 is output B
B REPLACE ECM
(a) Check the EFI MAIN2 relay .

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR - EFI MAIN2
6.
RELAY)
EFI MAIN2 relay terminal 3 - C14-2 (+B) Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN2 relay terminal 3 or C14-2 (+B) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PFA0P5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0037,P0038,P0141: Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit
Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0037 Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P0038 Oxygen Sensor Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P0141 Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DESCRIPTION

NO.
Heated oxygen sensor heater voltage is less than battery

P0037 voltage X 0.3 V for 10 seconds or more.
Open or short in heated
Heated oxygen sensor heater voltage is battery voltage X oxygen sensor heater
P0038 0.2 V or more for 10 seconds or more. circuit
(2 trip detection logic) Heated oxygen sensor
ECM
Heated oxygen sensor heater voltage is less than battery
P0141 voltage X 0.88 V for 10 seconds or more.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The sensing portion of the heated oxygen sensor has a zirconia element which is used to detect the
oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas. If the zirconia element is at the appropriate temperature, and
the difference between the oxygen concentrations surrounding the inside and outside surfaces of the
sensor is large, the zirconia element generates voltage signals. In order to increase the oxygen
concentration detecting capacity of the zirconia element, the ECM supplements the heat from the exhaust
with heat from a heating element inside the sensor.
The ECM monitors the current applied to the heated oxygen sensor heater to check the heater for
malfunctions.
If the heater current is outside the normal range, the signal transmitted by the heated oxygen sensor
becomes inaccurate. When the current in the heated oxygen sensor heater is outside the normal operating
range, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor heater and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0037: Secondary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity
Related DTCs P0038: Secondary oxygen sensor - Heater circuit continuity
P0141: Secondary oxygen sensor - Heater functional check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Heated oxygen sensor heater
10 seconds (8 msec. X 1250 count): P0037

Duration 2.56 seconds (8 msec. X 320 count): P0038
10 seconds (4 msec X 1250 count): P0141

P0037
Elapsed time after engine start 1 second or more
Heated oxygen sensor heater control duty Less than 75%
P0038
Heated oxygen sensor heater control duty 20% or more
P0141
Engine coolant temperature 60°C (140 °F) or higher
Impedance of air fuel ratio sensor Less than 65 Ω
Heated oxygen sensor heater control duty Less than 70%
Air fuel ratio sensor heater control duty Less than 75%

P0037
Output voltage Battery voltage X 0.2 or more
P0038
Output voltage Battery voltage X 0.3 or more
P0141
Judgement voltage Less than Battery voltage X 0.88
MONITOR RESULT

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:

Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [O2 Heater B1S2 and O2 Heater Curr Val B1S2] .
When the values for the Data List item O2 Heater Curr Val B1S2 is not 0 A, the heater is on.
Change the fuel injection volume using the Control the Injection Volume function provided in the
Active Test and monitor the heated oxygen sensor output voltage . If the sensor output
voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
malfunctioning.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
(a) Inspect the heated oxygen sensor .
NG REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
OK
2. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor connector.
Standard Voltage:

*a
(to Heated Oxygen Sensor)
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR - ECM)
A36-6 (HT1B) - C13-1 (HT1B) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-6 (HT1B) or C13-1 (HT1B)- Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0037 OR P0038)
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P0037, P0038 or P0141 is output B
B REPLACE ECM
(a) Check the EFI MAIN2 relay .

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR - EFI MAIN2

6.
RELAY)

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BFY08MX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P050A,P050B: Cold Start Idle Air Control System
Performance (2013 FR-S)
DTC P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance
DTC P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance
DESCRIPTION
Cold start emission reduction strategy (CSERS) is employed to shorten the time to catalyst light-off from
cold start. CSERS consists of retarded ignition timing and increased engine idle speed for a calibrated
period of time. This monitor detects malfunctions of the estimated exhaust gas temperature, ECM
commanded ignition timing and engine idle speed not reaching the target values.

NO.
The engine speed does not achieve the target engine speed for 7
Throttle with
P050A seconds with engine cooled down.
motor body
assembly
Mass air flow
meter
PCV system
Air cleaner
The ignition timing is not retarded for 7 seconds, despite rapid filter element
P050B warming control of the catalyst (to retard the ignition timing). Intake system
(2 trip detection logic) VVT system
Wire harness
or connector
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
P050A: Cold start emission reduction strategy functional check
Related DTCs
P050B: Cold start emission reduction strategy functional check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Throttle with motor body assembly
Mass air flow meter

Required Sensors/Components (Related) Vacuum sensor assembly
14 seconds: P050A (Case 1)

Duration 7 seconds: P050A (Case 2)
10 seconds: P050B

All
Atmospheric pressure 75.06 kPa(abs) [563 mmHg(abs)] or higher
Vehicle speed Less than 2 km/h (1.2 mph)
Throttle position Less than 0.296%
Elapsed time after gear position change N ←→ D 3 seconds or more
P050A (Case 1)
Idle speed control Active
Commanded ignition timing with CSERS Less than 3°CA
P050A (Case 2)
Engine coolant temperature Less than 80°C (176°F)
Integrated amount of intake Less than 800 g (varies with engine coolant temperature at engine
air start)
P050B
Less than 800 g (varies with engine coolant temperature at engine

Integrated amount of intake air
start)
Commanded ignition timing with

Less than 3°CA
CSERS

P050A (Case 1)
Estimated exhaust gas temperature*

Less than 298°C
*: (Manifold absolute pressure X Coefficient 1) + {(Actual engine speed - Target
(568.4°F)
engine speed) X Coefficient 2}
P050A (Case 2)
Actual engine speed - Target engine speed Less than -300 rpm
P050B
Final commanded ignition timing - Commanded ignition timing with CSERS More than 7°CA

6. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp, Intake Air.
7. Check that "Coolant Temp - Intake Air" is less than 5°C (9°F).
HINT:
If the conditions are not met, then turn the ignition switch off, and wait until the conditions
are met.
higher.
HINT:

12. Input the DTC: P050A or P50B.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
information as freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data
can help determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the
air fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P050A OR P050B)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P050A or P050B is output A
DTC P050A or P050B and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P050A or P050B are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
A
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL TRIM)
HINT:
Calculate the total fuel trim values to check the characteristic deviation of the mass air flow meter.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
(e) Read the values displayed on the Techstream at engine idle.
(f) Add together the Short FT #1 and Long FT #1 values to obtain the total fuel trim.
Standard:
Total of Short FT #1 and Long FT #1 values is between -20% and 20%.
NG CHECK PCV SYSTEM
OK
3. INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (THROTTLE VALVE)
(a) Check that there are no deposits around the throttle valve and throttle valve condition.
OK:
No deposits around the throttle valve and throttle valve moves smoothly.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B

B P050A OR P050B)
4. REPLACE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY

(a) Replace the throttle with motor body assembly .
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS

NEXT (DTC P050A OR P050B)
5. CHECK PCV SYSTEM
(a) Check the PCV hose connections .

OK:
PCV valve and hose are connected correctly and are not damaged.
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
OK
6. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
(a) Check the intake system for vacuum leaks .

OK:
No leaks from the intake system.
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE INTAKE SYSTEM
OK
7. CHECK AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that the air cleaner filter element is not excessively contaminated with dirt or
oil.
OK:
The air cleaner filter element is not excessively contaminated with dirt or oil.
REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT

NG SUB-ASSEMBLY
OK
8.
CONTROL VALVE)
(a) Operate the VVT system through the Active test, and check if the VVT system is operating
normally.
(1) Perform the Active Test, referring to DTC P000A inspection procedure (VVT system for
intake camshaft) .
(2) Perform the Active Test, referring to DTC P000B inspection procedure (VVT system for
exhaust camshaft) .
NG CHECK AND REPAIR VVT SYSTEM
OK
9. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MAF)

OK P050A OR P050B)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS

NG AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR
CONNECTION)
10. REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
(a) Repair or replace the PCV valve or hose.

11. REPAIR OR REPLACE INTAKE SYSTEM
(a) Repair or replace the intake system.

12. REPLACE AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly .

13. CHECK AND REPAIR VVT SYSTEM
(a) Check and repair the VVT system.
HINT:
Refer to DTC P000A Inspection Procedure (VVT system for intake camshaft) .
Refer to DTC P000B Inspection Procedure (VVT system for exhaust camshaft) .
NEXT
14. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P050A OR P050B)
NOTICE:
In this operation, the engine must be cold (approximately the same as the engine coolant
temperature recorded in the freeze frame data).
(f) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(h) Input the DTC: P050A or P050B.
(i) Check the DTC judgment result.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NORMAL (DTC is not output) A
ABNORMAL (DTC P050A or P050B is output) B

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR
B FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR

15.
CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harnesses
between the mass air flow meter and ECM .
HINT:
Repair any problems.
NEXT
16. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P050A OR P050B)
NOTICE:
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P050A or P050B is output) A
NORMAL (DTC is not output) B
END
B
17. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER - ECM)

NG CONNECTOR
OK
18. REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
(a) Replace the mass air flow meter .
HINT:
If the results of the inspections performed in step 9 indicated no problem, proceed to the next step
without replacing the mass air flow meter.
NEXT
19. CONFIRM WHETHER MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY REPAIRED
NOTICE:
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P050A or P050B is output) B
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XH6022X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P062D,P1261-P1264: No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit
DTC P062D No. 1 Fuel Injector Driver Circuit Performance
DTC P1261 DI Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1)
DESCRIPTION
The D-4S system has two fuel injection methods. One is the in-cylinder direct injection method that
directly injects pressurized fuel into the combustion chamber. The other is the intake port injection
method. The ECM determines which fuel injection method to use in accordance with the engine conditions.
For the in-cylinder direction injection method, the injector driver (EDU) in the engine room operates the
fuel injectors (for direction injection) at high speeds. The EDU receives fuel injection request signals from
the ECM and converts the signals to high voltage / high current injector operation signals to operate the
fuel injectors (for direction injection).
The fuel injection sequence occurs in numerical order from No. 1 to No. 4.
The ECM monitors the EDU at all times. If drivers or fuel injectors are malfunctioning, the EDU sends fuel
injector operation condition signals (fail signals IJF1 to IJF2) to the ECM. When the ECM receives the
signals, the ECM stops the fuel injection control of the appropriate cylinders, cuts voltage to the
appropriate injector relay, and illuminates the MIL.

NO.
Open or short in
When injection is finished in all cylinders, the diagnostic signal
injector driver (EDU)
from the EDU does not change (open or short in the injector or
P062D circuit
EDU circuit).
Injector driver (EDU)
ECM
Open or short in fuel

injector (for direct
injection) circuit (No.
When the injection of No. 1 cylinder is finished, the diagnostic 1 cylinder)
signal from injector driver (EDU) does not change (open or Injector driver (EDU)
P1261
short in No. 1 cylinder injector circuit ). Fuel injector
(1 trip detection logic) assembly (for direct
injection) (No. 1
cylinder)
ECM

P1262
injection) (No. 2
cylinder)
ECM

P1263
injection) (No. 3
cylinder)
ECM

P1264
injection) (No. 4
cylinder)
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
P062D: Fuel injector driver circuit functional check
P1261: Direct fuel injector functional check (Cylinder 1)
Related DTCs P1262: Direct fuel injector functional check (Cylinder 2)
Required Sensors/Components Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)

(Main) Injector driver (EDU)
-
(Related)
0.225 seconds or more (varies with engine speed): P062D

Duration 20 counts [0.33 seconds or more (varies with engine speed)]: P1261,
P1262, P1263, P1264

Monitor runs whenever following DTCs are not present None
Engine speed Less than 7450 rpm
Injection time 0.7 msec or more

P062D
Falling edge for all injectors Not detected
P1261, P1262, P1263, P1264
Falling edge of injector output signal from injector driver (EDU) Not detected

3. Record the Freeze Frame Data.
4. Clear the DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure) .
7. Based on engine speed, engine load and other freeze frame data stored in the ECM, reproduce
the conditions present when the DTC was stored.
9. Read the DTC.
HINT:
If a DTC is output, the system is malfunctioning.

If a DTC is not output, perform the following procedure.
11. Input the DTC: P062D, P1261, P1262, P1263 or P1264.
DISPLAY
NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE
Perform driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling conditions

reached ECU's memory limit
HINT:
If the judgment result shown ABNORMAL, the system has a malfunction.

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P1261 is output, check the No. 1 fuel injector (for direct injection) (No. 1 cylinder) circuit.
If the current from the INJ relay is cut because DTC P062D is stored, DTC P1235 will be stored even
if the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is normal.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
P1261, P1262, P1263 and/or P1264 are output A
DTC P062D is output B
CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (ECM -

B INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
(a) Disconnect the injector driver (EDU) connectors.
C3-2 (IJ1-) - C3-5 (IJ1+) 20°C (68°F) 1.74 to 2.04 Ω
C4-1 (IJ2-) - C4-4 (IJ2+) 20°C (68°F) 1.74 to 2.04 Ω
C3-1 (IJ3-) - C3-4 (IJ3+) 20°C (68°F) 1.74 to 2.04 Ω
C4-3 (IJ4-) - C4-6 (IJ4+) 20°C (68°F) 1.74 to 2.04 Ω
HINT:
The standard values shown are fuel injector assembly resistance values.
C3-2 (IJ1-) or C3-5 (IJ1+) - Body ground 20°C (68°F) 1 MΩ or higher
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR

NG DIRECT INJECTION)
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
(a) Disconnect the ECM connectors.
(b) Disconnect the injector driver (EDU) connector.
A36-14 (#1) - C1-3 (IJT1) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-14 (#1) or C1-3 (IJT1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
5. CHECK ECM (ECM OUTPUT VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the injector driver (EDU) connector.
(b) Inspect the ECM using an oscilloscope.
(1) While cranking the engine, check waveform the

terminals of the ECM connector.
Standard:
Signal waveform appears as shown in the illustration.
A36-14 (#1) or A36-23 (#4) - Body

ECM Terminal ground
Name A36-25 (#2) or A36-24 (#3) - Body
ground
Tester Range 2 V/DIV., 4 ms./DIV.
Condition Cranking

*a
(ECM)
NG REPLACE ECM
OK REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)

6. CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (ECM - INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
A34-11 (IJF1) - C1-6 (IJF1) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-31 (IJF2) - C1-5 (IJF2) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-11 (IJF1) or C1-6 (IJF1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-31 (IJF2) or C1-5 (IJF2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
7. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (ECM OUTPUT VOLTAGE)
(1) While start the engine, check waveform the

Standard:
A34-11 (IJF1) - Body ground

ECM Terminal Name
A34-31 (IJF2) - Body ground
Condition Idling

*a
(ECM)
NG REPLACE ECM
8. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
(a) Inspect the resistance of the fuel injector (for direct injection) .
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR

NG DIRECT INJECTION)

OK CONNECTOR
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000U5B0MLX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0068: MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation (2013 FR-
S)
DTC P0068 MAP / MAF - Throttle Position Correlation
DESCRIPTION

NO.
One of the following conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):

Open or short in
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is less than manifold absolute
1.25 V for 5 seconds or more when throttle position is pressure sensor
P0068 16° or more with driving. circuit
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is more than Manifold absolute
3.3 V for 10 seconds or more when throttle position is pressure sensor
5.13° or less with driving. ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The manifold absolute pressure sensor is affixed to the intake manifold.
If the manifold absolute pressure is low in spite of driving conditions that would suggest this would be
high, or if this is high in spite of driving conditions that would suggest this would be low, then this DTC is
detected.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0068: Manifold absolute pressure sensor rationality check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
Required Sensors/Components (Related) Crankshaft position sensor
5 seconds: Low side monitor

Duration
10 seconds: High side monitor

All
P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor)

P0111, P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor)
P0117, P0118 (Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor)
not stored
(APPS) circuit)
Low Side Monitor
Intake air 0.36 g/rev or more
Throttle position 8% or more
High Side Monitor
Intake air Less than 0.35 g/rev

Low Side Monitor
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold absolute Less than 1.25 V [21.66 kPa (162
pressure] mmHg)]
High Side Monitor
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold absolute More than 3.3 V [21.66 kPa (162
pressure] mmHg)]

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

HINT:

11. Input the DTC: P0068.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0107 .
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0068)

(e) Read DTCs.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0068 is output A
DTC P0068 and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART

OK:
REPAIR OR REPLACE INTAKE SYSTEM

NG
OK
3. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTIONS

OK:
No leaks from intake system.
REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE

NG
OK
4. REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

(a) Replace the manifold absolute pressure sensor .
NEXT
Pattern.
(j) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(k) Input the DTC: P0068.
(l) Check the DTC judgment.

Result:
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

memory limit
END
NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PG603AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0087: Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0087 Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too Low
DESCRIPTION
The high-pressure fuel system consists of the spill control valve, pump plunger and fuel pressure sensor.
The spill control valve opens and closes the low-pressure fuel line (from the fuel tank), the pump plunger
(operated by the camshaft) pressurizes fuel and the fuel pressure sensor located on the fuel delivery pipe
monitors fuel pressure.
The fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is installed to the cylinder head cover (bank 2) and is driven
by the cam located at the intake camshaft.
The plunger moves up and down by the camshaft rotations, and produces a vacuum to suck fuel and
pressurizes the fuel. This fuel flows into the fuel delivery pipe. The ECM opens and closes the spill control
valve to regulate the fuel pressure to the target fuel pressure. In order to obtain and maintain the target
pressure, the ECM monitors the fuel pressure using the fuel pressure sensor and performs the feedback
control.
HINT:
The spill control valve, pump plunger are built into the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure).
DTC DTC DETECTION TROUBLE AREA

NO. CONDITION
Leak of fuel
Fuel pipe (Fuel tank - Fuel pump assembly (for high
pressure) [bank 1 or bank 2])
Fuel pipe (Fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) - Fuel
Fuel pressure is lower than
injector assembly [for direct injection])
P0087 the target value.
Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)
Fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
Injector driver (EDU)
Fuel pump assembly
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the fuel pressure decreases even after the ECM commands the high-pressure fuel pump to close the
spill control valve, a DTC is output.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0087: High pressure fuel system monitor functional check
Related DTCs
(Pressure too low)
Required sensors/Components
(Main)
-
(Related)
Duration 10 seconds

Monitor runs whenever following DTC not stored None
Elapsed time after engine start 10 seconds
Elapsed time after fuel cut 2 seconds or more
Target fuel pressure change during 64 msec Less than 2.4 MPa (24.4 kgf/cm 2 , 348 psi)
Direct injection ratio 0% or more

Actual fuel pressure - Target fuel pressure Less than -3.5 MPa (-35.7 kgf/cm 2 , -508 psi)

9. Read the DTC.
HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was
warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at the
time of a malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FUEL LEAK (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Check around and beneath the car for fuel leaks, fumes, etc.
OK:
No fuel leaks present.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL LEAK POINT

NG
OK

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(d) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0087 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
3. CHECK IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
(a) Has the vehicle run out of fuel in the past?
DTC CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

NO
YES
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL PRESS)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(e) Read Fuel Press when racing the engine.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Fuel Press value varies. A
Fuel Press value does not increase. B
Fuel Press value does not vary. C
B CHECK FUEL LEAK (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)
C REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP /

5.
SPEED)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump /
Speed.
(e) When performing the Active Test, check for an operating sound from the fuel pump.
NG CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION
OK
6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Check the fuel pressure (low pressure side) .
NG REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
OK
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(d) Check changes in the fuel pressure when the engine is stopped.
HINT:
Turn the ignition switch to ON immediately after turning the ignition switch off.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
The fuel pressure drops immediately after turning the ignition switch off. A
The fuel pressure is nearly maintained, or with moderate variations. B
B REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
8. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Inspect the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) .

REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH
NG PRESSURE)
OK
9. REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
(a) Replace the fuel injector driver (EDU) .
NEXT
(g) Start the engine and warm it up.
(h) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(j) Read the DTC.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END
B
A
11. REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Replace the fuel pump assembly (high pressure side) .
HINT:
If the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) has been replaced in step 8, then proceed to step 13
without replacing the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure).
NEXT
Pattern.
(j) Read the DTC.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END
B
A
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(d) Check changes in the fuel pressure when the engine is stopped.
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
The fuel pressure drops immediately after turning the ignition off. A
The fuel pressure is nearly maintained, or with moderate variations. B

B DIRECT INJECTION)
A REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PG7039X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0088: Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0088 Fuel Rail / System Pressure - Too High
DESCRIPTION

NO.
Fuel pressure is higher than the target value for 10 Fuel pump assembly (for high
P0088 seconds or more. pressure)
(1 trip detection logic) ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the fuel pressure does not decrease even after the ECM commands the high-pressure fuel pump to open
the spill control valve, a DTC is output.
If there is minimal difference between the fuel pressure before and after the fuel relief valve operates, a
DTC is output.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0088: High pressure fuel system monitor functional check
Related DTCs
(Pressure too high)
(Main)
-
(Related)
Duration 10 seconds

Elapsed time after fuel cut 2 seconds or more
Target fuel pressure change during 64 msec Less than 2.4 MPa (24.4 kgf/cm 2 , 348 psi)
Direct injection ratio 0% or more

Actual fuel pressure - Target fuel pressure More than 6 MPa (61.2 kgf/cm 2 , 871 psi)

9. Read the DTC.
HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:

HINT:
HINT:
can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle was moving or stationary, whether the engine was
warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as other data recorded at the
time of a malfunction.
PROCEDURE
(d) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART
(b) Start the engine and turn the Techstream on.
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Target Fuel
Pressure / Fuel Press.
(d) Check that the fuel pressure fluctuates when the target fuel pressure changes.
HINT:
The Active Test operation lowers the target fuel pressure by 12.5% or increase the target fuel
pressure by 24.8%.
OK:
Fuel pressure fluctuates.
NG REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
OK
3. REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Replace the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) .
NEXT
4. CHECK IF DTC OUTPUT RECURS (SEE IF DTC P0088 IS OUTPUT AGAIN)
(b) Turn the Techstream on.
(c) Clear the DTCs .
(d) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END
B
A REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PF40ACX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0101: Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0101 Mass Air Flow Circuit Range / Performance Problem
DESCRIPTION

NO.
One of the following conditions is met (2 trip detection logic): Mass air
flow meter
Mass air flow meter voltage is less than 1.13 V for 5 seconds or
Intake
P0101 more when throttle position is 16° or more with driving.
system
Mass air flow meter voltage is more than 1.88 V for 10 seconds
PCV hose
or more when throttle position is 5.13° or less with driving.
connections
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The mass air flow meter is a sensor that measures the amount of air flowing through the throttle valve.
The ECM uses this information to determine the fuel injection time and to provide an appropriate air fuel
ratio. Inside the mass air flow meter, there is a heated platinum wire which is exposed to the flow of
intake air. By applying a specific electrical current to the wire, the ECM heats it to a specific temperature.
The flow of incoming air cools both the wire and an internal thermistor, affecting their resistance. To
maintain a constant current value, the ECM varies the voltage applied to the mass air flow meter. The
voltage level is proportional to the airflow through the sensor, and the ECM uses it to calculate the intake
air volume.
The ECM monitors the average engine load value ratio to check the mass air flow meter for malfunctions.
The average engine load value ratio is obtained by comparing the average engine load calculated from the
MAF meter output to the average engine load estimated from the driving conditions, such as the engine
speed and the throttle opening angle. If the average engine load value ratio is below the threshold value,
the ECM determines that the intake air volume is low, and if the average engine load value ratio is above
the threshold value, the ECM determines that the intake air volume is high.
If this is detected in 2 consecutive driving cycles, the MIL is illuminated and the DTC is stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0101: Mass air flow meter rationality check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Mass air flow meter

VVT sensor
Required Sensors/Components (Related)
Throttle position sensor
5 seconds: Low side monitor

Duration
10 seconds: High side monitor

All
P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor)

P0102, P0103 (Mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor)
P0335, P0336 (Crankshaft position sensor)
P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - Intake with variable
valve timing (VVT))
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs P0506, P0507 (Idle speed control (ISC))
not stored P0604, P0605 (ROM in ECM)
(APPS) circuit)
Low Side Monitor
Throttle position 8% or more
Intake manifold pressure 53.32 kPa [400 mmHg] or higher
High Side Monitor
Intake manifold pressure Less than 53.32 kPa [400 mmHg]

Low Side Monitor
Mass air flow meter voltage [Mass air flow] Less than 1.13 V [1.87 g/sec]
High Side Monitor
Mass air flow meter voltage (fuel system in rich) [Mass air flow] More than 1.88 V [10.6 g/sec]

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE

(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART

OK:

NG
OK

OK:

NG
OK
NEXT
Pattern.
(k) Input the DTC: P0101.

Result
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal
INCOMPLETE

memory limit
END
NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000U5B0MNX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0102,P0103: Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
DTC P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The mass air flow meter is a sensor that measures the amount of air flowing through the throttle valve.
The ECM uses this information to determine the fuel injection time and to provide the appropriate air fuel
ratio.
Inside the mass air flow meter, there is a heated platinum wire which is exposed to the flow of intake air.
By applying a specific electrical current to the wire, the ECM heats it to a given temperature. The flow of
incoming air cools both the wire and an internal thermistor, affecting their resistance. To maintain a
constant current value, the ECM varies the voltage applied to the wire and internal thermistor. The voltage
level is proportional to the airflow through the sensor, and the ECM uses it to calculate the intake air
volume.
The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and the temperature sensor create a bridge circuit,
and the power transistor is controlled so that the potentials of A and B remain equal to maintain the
predetermined temperature.
HINT:
When any of these DTCs is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ignition
timing is calculated by the ECM, according to the engine speed and throttle valve position. Fail-safe
mode continues until a pass condition is detected.

NO.
Mass air flow meter voltage is 0.127 V or less for 0.5
P0102 seconds or more. Open or short in mass air flow
(1 trip detection logic) meter circuit
Mass air flow meter voltage is 4.723 V or more for 0.5 Mass air flow meter
P0103 seconds or more. ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the air-flow rate using the Techstream. Enter the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF.
MASS AIR FLOW RATE (GM/SEC) MALFUNCTION
Open in mass air flow meter power source circuit

Approximately 0.0
Open or short in VG circuit
160.0 or more Open in E2G circuit
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there is a defect in the mass air flow meter or an open or short circuit, the voltage level deviates from
the normal operating range. The ECM interprets this deviation as a malfunction in the mass air flow meter
circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0102: Mass air flow meter circuit continuity (Low voltage)
Related DTCs
P0103: Mass air flow meter circuit continuity (High voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Mass air flow meter
Duration 0.5 seconds


P0102
Mass air flow meter voltage [Mass air flow] Less than 0.127 V [0.0 g/sec]
P0103
Mass air flow meter voltage [Mass air flow] More than 4.723 V [248.1 g/sec]
COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

Mass air flow meter voltage [Mass air flow] 0.127 to 4.651 V [0.01 to 235.37 g/sec]

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. READ DTC OUTPUT
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SENSOR

B GROUND)
2. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF MASS AIR FLOW METER)

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION CONDITION
C16-3 (+B) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a
(to Mass Air Flow Meter)
NG CHECK RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
OK

C33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG) Always Below 1 Ω
C33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G) Always Below 1 Ω
C33-22 (VG) or C16-5 (VG) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
C33-29 (E2G) or C16-4 (E2G) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the mass air flow meter, referring to the On-vehicle Inspection for Mass Air Flow
Meter .
(b) Inspect the mass air flow meter, referring to the Inspection for Mass Air Flow Meter .
(c) Inspect the function of the mass air flow meter.
(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF.
(6) Check that the MAF value changes when the engine is raced.
OK:
The reading changes.
NG REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER

OK REPLACE ECM
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SENSOR GROUND)
C16-4 (E2G)- Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG AIR FLOW METER - ECM)
OK REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
A33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G) Always Below 1 Ω
A33-29 (E2G) or C16-4 (E2G) - Body-ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
7. CHECK RELAY (EFI MAIN1)


NG
OK
8. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000U5B0MMX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0107,P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric
Pressure Circuit Low Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input
DTC P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure / Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
Manifold absolute pressure sensor uses a built-in sensor to detect the intake manifold pressure as a
voltage. Additionally, because this measures the absolute pressure as the pressure within the intake
manifold without detecting the atmospheric pressure as a standard value, this enables measurements
without being influenced by changes in atmospheric pressure from altitude or other causes.

NO.
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is 0.61 V

P0107 or less for 0.5 seconds or more. Open or short in manifold
(1 trip detection logic) absolute pressure sensor circuit
Manifold absolute pressure
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage is 3.906 V sensor
P0108 or more for 0.5 seconds or more. ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the manifold absolute pressure using the Techstream. Enter
the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAP.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (KPA [MMHG]) MALFUNCTION
Approximately 0 [0] Short in MAP circuit
Short in VC circuit
141 [1058] or more Open in PIM circuit
Open in E1 circuit
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM calculates the manifold absolute pressure based upon the manifold absolute pressure sensor
output voltage. If the manifold absolute pressure output voltage is outside the normal range, there may be
an abnormality with the manifold absolute pressure, or an open or short in the circuit. In these cases, the
ECM will light the check engine warning light, and store the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0107: Manifold absolute pressure sensor range check (Low
voltage)
Related DTCs
P0108: Manifold absolute pressure sensor range check (High
voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
-
(Related)
Duration 2 seconds


P0107
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold absolute Less than 0.61 V [0.35 kPa (3
pressure] mmHg)]
P0108
Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold absolute More than 3.906 V [110.22 kPa (827
pressure] mmHg)]

Manifold absolute pressure sensor voltage [Manifold 0.647 to 3.897 V [1.56 to 109.9 kPa (12 to
absolute pressure] 824 mmHg)]

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MAP)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAP.

Standard:
Nearly equal to atmosphere pressure
Reference Value
CONDITION MAP
Ignition switch ON 80 to 110 kPa
HINT:
Standard atmospheric pressure is 101 kPa (758 mmHg). For every 100 m (328 ft) increase in altitude,
pressure drops by 1 kPa. This varies by weather.

NG SOURCE OF MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE SENSOR)
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE

2.
PRESSURE SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor

connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION CONDITION
C18-3 (VC) - C18-1 Ignition switch

4.5 to 5.5 V
(E2) ON
C18-2 (PIM) - C18-1 Ignition switch

4.0 to 5.0 V
(E2) ON

*a
(to Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor)

NG (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR -
ECM)
OK
NEXT

Pattern.
(j) Read the DTC.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END
B
A REPLACE ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR -

5.
ECM)
(a) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
A36-19 (VC) - C18-3 (VC) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-20 (PIM) - C18-2 (PIM) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-29 (E1) - C18-1(E2) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-19 (VC) or C18-3 (VC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-20 (PIM) or C18-2 (PIM) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C18-1 (E2) or Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001WPH06PX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0111: Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Gradient Too High
DESCRIPTION
The intake air temperature sensor, mounted on the mass air flow meter, monitors the intake air
temperature. The intake air temperature sensor has a built-in thermistor with a resistance that
varies according to the temperature of the intake air. When the intake air temperature is low, the
resistance of the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. These
variations in resistance are transmitted to the ECM as voltage changes.
The intake air temperature sensor is powered by a 5 V supply from the THA terminal of the ECM,
via resistor R.
Resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value
of the intake air temperature sensor changes, according to changes in the intake air temperature,
the voltage at terminal THA also varies. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection
volume when the engine is cold to improve driveability.

NO. AREA
The difference between maximum and minimum values for inlet air temperature
Mass air
P0111 sensor voltage is less than 0.02 V for 1 second or more.
flow meter
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs OBD II monitoring based on the values from the intake air temperature sensor. If there
is no change of the sensor value within the normal range, the ECM will not be able to perform OBD II
monitoring or will misdiagnose that there is a malfunction in the sensor. The ECM detects when the intake
air temperature sensor value is stuck by performing monitoring after the ignition switch is turned off or the
engine is started (short soak or long soak).
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0111: Intake air temperature sensor rationality check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Intake air temperature sensor
Duration Immediately

P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor)
sensor)
P0500 (Vehicle speed sensor (VSS))
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs P1160 (Throttle return spring)
not stored P2101, P2102 (Throttle actuator control motor)
(APPS) circuit)
Integrated amount of intake air 6500 g or more
Either of the following condition is met: A or B
A. All of the following conditions are

(a), (b) and (c)
met:
(a) Time period 10 seconds
(b) Vehicle speed 4 km/h (2.5 mph) or higher
(c) Intake air mass per second 10 g/sec or more
B. All of the following conditions are

(a) and (b)
met:
(a) Time period 10 seconds
(b) Vehicle speed Less than 40 km/h (24.9 mph)

Intake air temperature sensor maximum voltage - Intake air temperature sensor Less than 0.02
minimum voltage V

6. Check that engine coolant temperature is 30°C (86°F) or less.
7. Start the engine.
CAUTION:
laws.

b. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 8 minutes or more [B].
c. Stop the vehicle and idle the engine for 30 seconds or more [C].
d. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 30 seconds or more [D].
e. Stop the vehicle and idle the engine for 30 seconds or more [E].
f. Drive the vehicle at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more for 30 seconds or more [F].
g. Stop the vehicle and idle the engine for 30 seconds or more [G].

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal
conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0112 .
HINT:
PROCEDURE
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0111 and other DTCs are output A

HINT:
B REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
A GO TO DTC CHART
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PF30NNX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0112,P0113: Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0112 Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input
DTC P0113 Intake Air Temperature Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The intake air temperature sensor, mounted on the mass air flow meter, monitors the intake air
temperature. The intake air temperature sensor has a built-in thermistor with a resistance that
varies according to the temperature of the intake air. When the intake air temperature is low, the
resistance of the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. These
variations in resistance are transmitted to the ECM as voltage changes.
The intake air temperature sensor is powered by a 5 V supply from the THA terminal of the ECM,
via resistor.
Resistor and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value
of the intake air temperature sensor changes, according to changes in the intake air temperature,
the voltage at terminal THA also varies. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection
volume when the engine is cold to improve driveability.
HINT:
When DTC P0112 or P0113 is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the
intake air temperature is estimated to be 20°C (68°F) by the ECM. Fail-safe mode continues until
a pass condition is detected.

NO.
Intake air temperature sensor voltage is less than

P0112 0.4 V for 0.5 seconds or more. Open or short in intake air
(1 trip detection logic) temperature sensor circuit
Intake air temperature sensor
Intake air temperature sensor voltage is 4.707 V (built into mass air flow meter)
P0113 or more for 0.5 seconds or more. ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the intake air temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
-40°C (-40°F) Open circuit
215°C (419°F) Short circuit

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the intake air temperature. When
the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the intake air temperature sensor circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0112: Intake air temperature sensor range check (Low
voltage)
Related DTCs
P0113: Intake air temperature sensor range check (High
voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Intake air temperature sensor
-
(Related)


P0112
Intake air temperature sensor voltage [Intake air Less than 0.4 V [Higher than 132.8°C
temperature] (271°F)]
P0113
Intake air temperature sensor voltage [Intake air More than 4.91 V [Below -46.9°C (-
temperature] 52.4°F)]

Intake air temperature sensor voltage [Intake air 0.435 to 4.698 V [-44.6 to 128.53°C (-48.3 to

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.

OK:
Same as actual intake air temperature.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
-40°C (-40°F) A
215°C (419°F) B
Same as actual intake air temperature C
HINT:
If there is an open circuit, the Techstream indicates -40°C (-40°F).

If there is a short circuit, the Techstream indicates 215°C (419°F).
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR

B SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS)

(b) Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the mass air flow meter connector on the wire harness side.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
(g) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.

Standard value:
215°C (419°F)
*1 Mass Air Flow Meter
*2 ECM

*a
(to Mass Air Flow Meter)


A33-12 (THA) - C16-1 (THA) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-29 (E1) - C16-2 (E2) Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
(f) Read the value displayed on the Techstream.

Standard value:
-40°C (-40°F)
*1 Mass Air Flow Meter
*2 ECM


A33-12 (THA) or C16-1(THA) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C16-2 (E2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PFB0PSX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0116: Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range /
Performance Problem (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range / Performance Problem
DESCRIPTION

NO.
Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature has not dropped completely 6
Engine coolant
P0116 hours after ignition switch turned off.
temperature
sensor
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the engine coolant temperature sensor value does not change after the warmed up engine is stopped
and then the next cold engine start is performed, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred. If this
is detected in 2 consecutive driving cycles, the MIL is illuminated and the DTC is stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0116: Engine coolant temperature sensor stuck rationality
Related DTCs
check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Engine coolant temperature sensor
(Related)

P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor)
not stored
P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
Soak time 6 hours or more
Elapsed time after electric circuit turned

Less than 60 seconds
on (ignition switch ON)
Engine coolant temperature at the end 70.2°C (158.2°F) or higher (varies with estimated ambient
of the previous driving cycle temperature at previous ignition switch off)

Engine coolant temperature - Intake air temperature 15°C (59°F) or higher

3. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
higher.
8. Turn the ignition switch off and leave the vehicle for 6 hours or more.
HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:
HINT:

HINT:
If any of DTCs P0117, P0118 or P0125 are output simultaneously with DTC P0116, the engine
coolant temperature sensor may have an open or a short circuit. Troubleshoot those DTCs first.
When the DTC is output, check the engine coolant temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp. If the Coolant Temp value is lower
than the actual engine coolant temperature, the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit may be
malfunctioning. In this case, check the wire harnesses and connectors (and those connections)
between the ECM and the engine coolant temperature sensor first.
PROCEDURE
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
If any DTCs and other than P0116 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
A
(a) Inspect the thermostat (thermostat opening temperature) .
NG REPLACE THERMOSTAT
REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

OK SENSOR
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PF50PIX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0117,P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low
Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low Input
DTC P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
A thermistor, whose resistance value varies according to the engine coolant temperature, is built into the
engine coolant temperature sensor. The structure of the sensor and its connection to the ECM are the
same as those of the intake air temperature sensor.
HINT:
When any of DTCs P0117 and P0118 is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode,
the engine coolant temperature is estimated to be 70°C (158°F) by the ECM. Fail-safe mode continues
until a pass condition is detected.

NO.
Short in engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage is less than temperature sensor circuit
P0117 0.47 V for 0.5 seconds or more. Engine coolant temperature
(1 trip detection logic) sensor
ECM
Open in engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage is more than temperature sensor circuit
P0118 4.698 V for 0.5 seconds or more. Engine coolant temperature
ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the engine coolant temperature using the Techstream. Enter
the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.
-40°C (-40°F) Open circuit
215°C (419°F) Short circuit
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to monitor the engine coolant temperature. The engine
coolant temperature sensor has a thermistor with a resistance that varies according to the temperature of
the engine coolant. When the coolant temperature is low, the resistance in the thermistor increases. When
the temperature is high, the resistance drops. These variations in resistance are reflected in the output
voltage from the sensor. The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the engine
coolant temperature. When the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM
interprets this as a fault in the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0117: Engine coolant temperature sensor range check (Low
voltage)
Related DTCs
P0118: Engine coolant temperature sensor range check (High
voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Engine coolant temperature sensor
-
(Related)


P0117
Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage [Engine coolant Less than 0.47 V [Higher than 122.8°C
temperature] (253°F)]
P0118
Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage [Engine coolant More than 4.698 V [Below -46.2°C (-

Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage [Engine 0.479 to 4.688 V [-43.85 to 121.85°C (-46.9
coolant temperature] to 251.3°F)]

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0117 is stored, check that the engine does not overheat (the DTC P0117 may be stored
due to engine overheating).
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.

Standard value:
Between 75 and 100°C (167 and 212°F) with warm engine.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
-40°C (-40°F) A
215°C (419°F) B
Between 75 and 100°C (167 and 212°F) C
HINT:

If there is a short circuit, the Techstream indicates higher than 215°C (419°F).
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR

B SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS)

connector.
(b) Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor connector on the wire
harness side.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.

Standard value:
Higher than 215°C (419°F)
*1 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
*2 ECM

*a
(to Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE

NG COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ECM)

OK SENSOR
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR -

3.
ECM)
(a) Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
A36-30 (THW) - C35-2 (THW) Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)

connector.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp.

Standard value:
-40°C (-40°F)
*1 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
*2 ECM
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE

NG COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ECM)

OK SENSOR
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR -
5.
ECM)
A36-30 (THW) or C35-2 (THW) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 C Doc ID: RM000004GKG01MX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P119E,P119F,P219A; Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance for
Port Injection; 2013 MY FR-S [05/2013 - ]
DTC P119E Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance for Port Injection
DTC P119F Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance for Direct Injection
DTC P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
DESCRIPTION

NO.
Crankshaft position sensor signal fluctuates in port injection

P119E Fuel injector assembly
air fuel ratio feedback control.
(for port injection)
Crankshaft position sensor signal fluctuates in direct Fuel injector assembly
P119F
injection air fuel ratio feedback control. (for direct injection)
Intake system
Gas leaks from exhaust
logic):
system
Air fuel ratio sensor signal fluctuates in air fuel Ignition system
P219A
ratio feedback control. Compression pressure
Crankshaft position sensor signal fluctuates in air Air fuel ratio sensor
fuel ratio feedback control. ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Fuel System Air Fuel Ratio Cylinder Imbalance Monitor
The ECM uses the air fuel ratio sensor and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the difference in air fuel
ratios between the cylinders caused by differences in injection volumes between the cylinders, leakage
in the intake or exhaust system, etc.
When the air fuel ratios of the cylinders are lean or rich with respect to each other, the ECM determines
that a problem is present and stores a DTC.
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitoring Method

When the system detects a difference in air fuel ratios between the cylinders due to fluctuation in the air
fuel ratio sensor output over 1 engine cycle (2 crankshaft revolutions), the system determines that there
is a problem.
Crankshaft Position Sensor Monitoring Method

The system monitors the engine speed variation and when the variation becomes large, the system
determines that there is a difference in air fuel ratios between the cylinders, which it determines to be a
problem.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P119E: Fuel system air fuel ratio cylinder imbalance functional check
(for port fuel injection)
Related DTCs P119F: Fuel system air fuel ratio cylinder imbalance functional check
(for direct injection)
P219A: Fuel system air fuel ratio cylinder imbalance functional check
Required Sensors/Components Air fuel ratio sensor

(Main) Crankshaft position sensor
Mass air flow meter

(Related)
Speed sensor
200 revolutions: Air fuel ratio sensor monitoring method

Duration
400 revolutions: Crankshaft position sensor monitoring method

All
Monitor runs whenever the following DTCs are not stored None
P119E, P119F and P219A (Crankshaft Position Sensor Monitoring Method)
Accelerator pedal position 0%
Estimated time after engine start 30 seconds or more
Engine coolant temperature Higher than 60°C (140°F)
Fuel system status (Air fuel ratio sensor) Closed loop
P219A (Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitoring Method)
Estimated time after engine start 30 seconds or more
Engine coolant temperature Higher than 60°C (140°F)
Fuel system status (Air fuel ratio sensor) Closed loop
Intake air mass per revolution 0.55 to 0.8 g/rev (varies with engine speed)
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine revolution Less than 0.005 g/rev

P119E and P219A (Crankshaft Position Sensor Monitoring Method)
Higher than 30.7 rpm (for Automatic Transmission)

The average of the crankshaft speed (varies with engine speed)
fluctuation at port fuel injection Higher than 18.3 rpm (for Manual Transmission)
(varies with engine speed)
P119F and P219A (Crankshaft Position Sensor Monitoring Method)
Higher than 25.5 rpm (for Automatic Transmission)

The average of the crankshaft speed fluctuation (varies with engine speed)
at direct fuel injection Higher than 16.5 rpm (for Manual Transmission)
(varies with engine speed)
P219A (Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitoring Method)
Either following condition is met A or B
A. The average of the positive gradient of air More than 0.001125 (varies with engine speed and
fuel ratio sensor output intake air mass per revolution)
B. The average of the negative gradient of air Less than 0.000975 (varies with engine speed and
fuel ratio sensor output intake air mass per revolution)

6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature reaches 75°C (167°F)
or higher.
HINT:
CAUTION:

HINT:
11. Input the DTC: P119E, P119F or P219A.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to P0030 .
Refer to P0335 .
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records the engine condition
when malfunctions are detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if
the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio was
lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
*: The No. 1 cylinder is the cylinder which is farthest from the transmission.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P219A)
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P119E, P119F or P219A is output A
DTC P119E, P119F, P219A and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P219A are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FREEZE FRAME DATA)
(c) Using the Techstream, confirm the vehicle conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which
were present when the DTC was stored .
Freeze Frame Data Items for DTC P119E, P119F and P219A
Vehicle Speed
Engine Speed
Calculate Load
Accelerator Idle Position
Short FT #1
Long FT #1
Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count
HINT:
When the sum of Short FT and Long FT is positive, the engine is running lean, and when the sum is
negative, the engine is running rich.
DTC stored during It is possible to conclude that the problem was detected due to a "lean
idling imbalance" (detected using crankshaft speed variation).
DTC stored while It is possible to conclude that the problem was detected due to a "rich
vehicle being driven imbalance" (detected using the air fuel ratio sensor).
NEXT
3. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME)
(d) Warm up the engine.
HINT:
The A/C switch and all accessory switches should be off and the shift lever should be in P, N or
neutral position.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume /
Cylinder #1 to #4 Misfire Count.
HINT:
When the "Control the Injection Volume" Active Test is selected (injection volume is 0%), if a
misfire count increases, proceed to step 6 (Check Intake System).
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume operation with the engine idling.
(g) Check the misfire counts ("Cylinder #1 Misfire Count" to "Cylinder #4 Misfire Count") while
decreasing the injection volume in 5% increments.
NOTICE:
Do not decrease the injection volume by higher than 20%.
The cylinder whose misfire count has not increased can be assumed to be running rich. Therefore,
perform inspections while focusing on that cylinder.
NEXT
4. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
(a) Check for exhaust gas leaks.

OK:
No gas leaks.
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST SYSTEM
OK

OK:
No leaks in the intake system.
OK
(a) Inspect the spark plug of the cylinder causing the imbalance .
NG REPLACE SPARK PLUG
OK
7. CHECK FOR SPARK (SPARK TEST)
HINT:
If the result of the spark test is normal, proceed to the next step.
NEXT
8. CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE
(a) Measure the cylinder compression pressure of the misfiring cylinder .
CHECK ENGINE TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF LOW

NG COMPRESSION
OK
9. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection)

connector.
Standard Voltage:

*a
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
NG GO TO FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT
OK
10. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Check the harness and connector of fuel injector assembly (for port injection) .
(b) Check the harness and connector of fuel injector assembly (for direct injection) .

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
11. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY OF CYLINDER CAUSING IMBALANCE
(a) Check the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) [whether fuel volume is high or low, and
whether injection pattern is poor] .
(b) Check the fuel injector assembly (for direct injection) [whether fuel volume is high or low, and
whether injection pattern is poor] .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
Fuel injector assembly (for port injection) is NG. B
Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection) is NG. C
REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT

B INJECTION)

C DIRECT INJECTION)
12. CHECK FOR CAUSE OF FAILURE
(a) If the cause of the problem has not been found even after performing the troubleshooting
procedure, perform the inspection below.
(b) Check the intake valve for deposits.
HINT:
As the DTC may have been stored due to deposits on the intake valve, remove the cylinder head
and check the intake valve.
NEXT
Pattern.
(j) Check for DTCs.

P219A is not output.
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PF60PBX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0122,P0123,P0222,P0223,P2135: Throttle Position Sensor
Circuit Low Input (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0122 Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Low Input
DTC P0123 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" Circuit High Input
DTC P0222 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit Low Input
DTC P0223 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "B" Circuit High Input
DTC P2135 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "A" / "B" Voltage Correlation
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
These DTCs relate to the throttle position sensor.
The throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle with motor body assembly, and detects the opening
angle of the throttle valve. This sensor is a non-contact type sensor. It uses Hall-effect elements in order
to yield accurate signals even in extreme driving conditions, such as at high speeds as well as very low
speeds.
The throttle position sensor has 2 sensor circuits, each of which transmits a signal, VTA1 and VTA2. VTA1
is used to detect the throttle valve angle and VTA2 is used to detect malfunctions in VTA2. The sensor
signal voltages vary between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the throttle valve opening angle, and are
transmitted to the VTA1 and VTA2 terminals of the ECM.
As the valve closes, the sensor output voltage decreases and as the valve opens, the sensor output
voltage increases. The ECM calculates the throttle valve opening angle according to these signals and
controls the throttle actuator in response to driver inputs. These signals are also used in calculations such
as air fuel ratio correction, power increase correction and fuel-cut control.
NO.
Throttle position sensor (built into

The voltage of VTA1 is 0.273 V or less for 0.024 throttle with motor body assembly)
P0122 seconds or more. Short in VTA1 circuit
(1 trip detection logic) Open in VC circuit
ECM

throttle with motor body assembly)
The voltage of VTA1 is more than 4.736 V for
Open in VTA1 circuit
P0123 0.024 seconds or more.
Open in E1 circuit
Short between VC and VTA1 circuits
ECM

The voltage of VTA2 is 1.153 V or less for 0.024 throttle with motor body assembly)
P0222 seconds or more. Short in VTA2 circuit
(1 trip detection logic) Open in VC circuit
ECM

throttle with motor body assembly)
The voltage of VTA2 is 4.772 V or more for 0.024
Open in VTA2 circuit
P0223 seconds or more.
Open in E1 circuit
Short between VC and VTA2 circuits
ECM
Short between VTA1 and VTA2

Deviation in voltages of VTA1 and VTA2 exceed circuits
P2135 thresholds for 0.212 seconds or more. Throttle position sensor (built into
(1 trip detection logic) throttle with motor body assembly)
ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs are output, check the throttle valve opening angle using the Techstream.
Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1 and Throttle
Position No. 2.
Throttle Position No. 1 is the VTA1 signal, and Throttle Position No. 2 is the VTA2 signal.
Reference (Normal Condition):
TECHSTREAM ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY ACCELERATOR PEDAL FULLY

DISPLAY RELEASED DEPRESSED
Throttle Position No.

0.5 to 1.1 V 3.2 to 4.8 V
1
Throttle Position No.

1.5 to 2.2 V 4.0 to 4.5 V
2
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses the throttle position sensor to monitor the throttle valve opening angle. There are several
checks that the ECM performs to confirm the proper operation of the throttle position sensor.
A specific voltage difference is expected between the sensor terminals, VTA1 and VTA2, for
each throttle valve opening angle. If the difference between VTA1 and VTA2 is incorrect, the
ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor circuit, and stores a DTC.
VTA1 and VTA2 each have a specific voltage range. If VTA1 or VTA2 is outside the normal
operating range, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor circuit, and stores a
DTC.
VTA1 and VTA2 should never be close to the same voltage level. If VTA1 is within 0.02 V of
VTA2, the ECM determines that there is a short circuit in the sensor circuit, and stores a DTC.
If the malfunction is not repaired successfully, a DTC is stored 10 seconds after the engine is next started.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0122: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (Low Voltage)
(Sensor 1)
P0123: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (High Voltage)
(Sensor 1)
Related DTCs P0222: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (Low Voltage)
(Sensor 2)
P0223: Throttle position sensor circuit continuity (High Voltage)
(Sensor 2)
P2135: Throttle position sensor rationality check
(Main)
-
(Related)
0.024 seconds: P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223

Duration
0.212 seconds: P2135

Battery voltage 6 V or more

P0122
VTA1 voltage (Throttle position) Less than 0.273 V (5.46%)
P0123
VTA1 voltage (Throttle position) More than 4.736 V (94.73%)
P0222
VTA2 voltage (Throttle position) Less than 1.153 V (3.82%)
P0223
VTA2 voltage (Throttle position) More than 4.772 V (94.30%)
P2135
VTA2 - VTA1 Less than 3.79% (varies with VTA1)

VTA1 voltage (Throttle position) 0.382 to 4.504 V (7.64 to 90.09%)
VTA2 voltage (Throttle position) 1.262 to 4.696 V (6.54 to 92.41%)

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

12. Input the DTC: P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 or P2135.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

FAIL-SAFE
When any of these DTCs or other DTCs relating to Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) malfunctions
are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ECM cuts the current to the throttle
actuator, and the throttle valve is returned to a specified throttle angle by the return spring. The ECM then
adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing, in
accordance with the accelerator pedal angle, to allow the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed. If the
accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and gently, the vehicle can be driven slowly.
Fail-safe mode continues until a pass condition is detected, and the ignition switch is then turned off.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1 and
Throttle Position No. 2.
(e) Read the values displayed on the Techstream.

Result
WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL WHEN ACCELERATOR PEDAL TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

RELEASED DEPRESSED TO
THROTTLE THROTTLE THROTTLE THROTTLE

POSITION NO. 1 POSITION NO. 2 POSITION NO. 1 POSITION NO. 2
(VTA1) (VTA2) (VTA1) (VTA2)
0 to 0.2 V 0 to 1.75 V 0 to 0.2 V 0 to 1.75 V VC circuit open
4.5 to 5.0 V 4.5 to 5.0 V 4.5 to 5.0 V 4.5 to 5.0 V E2 circuit open
0 to 0.2 V, 1.9 V to 2.6 V 0 to 0.2 V, 1.9 V to 2.6 V VTA1 circuit open or A
or 4.5 to 5.0 V (Fail-safe) or 4.5 to 5.0 V (Fail-safe) ground short
0.6 V to 1.4 V 0 to 1.75V, 0.6 V to 1.4 V 0 to 1.75 V, VTA2 circuit open or

(Fail-safe) or 4.8 to 5.0 V (Fail-safe) or 4.8 to 5.0 V ground short
3.2 to 4.8 V 4.0 to 4.5 V Throttle position

0.5 to 1.1 V 1.5 to 2.2 V B
(Not fail-safe) (Not fail-safe) sensor circuit normal

B (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS)
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the throttle with motor body assembly connector.
A36-18 (VTA1) - C15-6 (VTA1) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-28 (VTA2) - C15-4 (VTA2) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-19(VC) or C15-5 (VC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-18 (VTA1) or C15-6 (VTA1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C15-4 (VTA2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. INSPECT ECM (VC VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the throttle with motor body assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
C15-5 (VC) - C15-3 (E2) Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V

*a
(to Throttle with Motor Body Assembly)
NG REPLACE ECM
OK
NEXT
5. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS)

(e) Start the engine.
Pattern.
(h) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 and/or P2135 are output A
DTC is not output B
END
B
A REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T9P0BWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0125: Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop
Fuel Control (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control
DESCRIPTION

NO.
Cooling
system
Despite estimated engine coolant temperature is 20°C (68 °F) or more,
Engine
engine coolant temperature sensor value is less than 20°C (68 °F) for
P0125 coolant
300 seconds or more.
temperature
sensor
Thermostat
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The diagnostic system monitors for a functional check of the engine coolant temperature sensor. If the
engine coolant temperature does not reach the temperature to enable the closed loop air/fuel ratio control
within a predetermined time after engine start, the diagnostic system determines a malfunction of engine
coolant temperature sensor and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0125: Engine coolant temperature sensor range check

Required Sensors/Components (Main) Thermostat
Cooling system
-
(Related)
120 seconds: Closed loop temperature -10°C (14°F)

Duration 300 seconds: Closed loop temperature -10 to 20 °C (14 to
68°F)

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
Monitor runs whenever following
DTCs are not present
(APPS) circuit)
[Diagnostic value(n-1) + 64 + 7.9 (varies with vehicle speed and

Diagnostic value(n)
lowest engine coolant temperature)] or more


higher.
HINT:

CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If any of DTCs P0116, P0117 or P0118 are set simultaneously with DTC P0125, the engine coolant
temperature sensor may have an open or a short circuit. Troubleshoot those DTCs first.
PROCEDURE
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART
(a) Inspect the thermostat .
OK
3. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
(a) Check for defects in the cooling system that might cause the system to be too cold, such as
abnormal radiator fan operation or any modifications.
REPAIR OR REPLACE COOLING SYSTEM

NG

OK SENSOR
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000TB3096X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0128: Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below
Thermostat Regulating Temperature) (2013 FR-S)
Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulating

DTC P0128
Temperature)
DESCRIPTION
At the same time as using the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine coolant
temperature, the ECM estimates the engine coolant temperature. If the difference between the estimated
and actual engine coolant temperatures exceeds a predetermined value, then the DTC is stored, notifying
of a malfunction in the functioning of the thermostat.

NO.
Thermostat
Abnormal (open) thermostat functioning Cooling system
P0128 detected. Engine coolant temperature
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM estimates the engine coolant temperature based on the starting temperature, engine loads, and
engine speeds. The ECM then compares the estimated temperature with the actual engine coolant
temperature. If the difference between the estimated engine coolant temperature and the actual engine
coolant temperature exceeds the specified value, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the
thermostat or the engine cooling system and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0128: Thermostat functional check
Thermostat

Required Sensors/Components (Related)
Speed sensor
Duration Immediately

All
P0101, P0102, P0103 (Mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
sensor)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0335, P0336 (Crankshaft position sensor)
P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - Intake with variable
valve timing (VVT))
not stored
(APPS) circuit)
Ambient temperature -7°C (19.4°F) or higher
Vehicle speed 30 km/h (18.6 mph) or higher
Case 1
Modeled engine coolant temperature 60°C (140°F) or higher
Case 2
Modeled engine coolant 70.2°C (158.4°F) or higher (varies with ambient temperature at
temperature engine start)
Case 3
Modeled engine coolant 47.1°C (116.8°F) or higher (varies with ambient temperature at
temperature engine start)

Case 1
Actual engine coolant temperature Less than 60°C (140°F)
Sigma (Modeled engine coolant temperature - 1731.6°C (3148.9°F) or higher (varies with engine
Actual engine coolant temperature) coolant temperature at engine start)
Case 2
Less than 77.8°C (172°F) (varies with ambient

Actual engine coolant temperature
temperature at engine start)
Case 3
Modeled engine coolant temperature - Actual

11.1 °C (52°F) or higher
engine coolant temperature

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
When the DTC is output, check the engine coolant temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Coolant Temp. If the Coolant Temp value is lower
than the actual engine coolant temperature, the engine coolant temperature sensor circuit may be
malfunctioning. In this case, check the wire harnesses and connectors (and those connections)
between the ECM and the engine coolant temperature sensor first.
PROCEDURE

(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
(a) Check for defects in the cooling system that might cause the system to be too cold, such as
abnormal cooling fan operation or any modifications.
REPAIR OR REPLACE COOLING SYSTEM

NG
OK
(a) Inspect the thermostat (thermostat opening temperature) .
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000028K60CZX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0131,P0132,P0134: Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0131 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P0132 Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank1 Sensor1
DTC P0134 Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor mounted in front of the three-way catalytic converter and
located near the engine assembly.

NO.
One of the following conditions is met for 1 second or more (1 trip

detection logic):
The voltage of A1A+ is less than 0.4 V.

P0131 The voltage of A1A- is less than 0.4 V.
The difference between voltage of A1A+ and voltage of A1A-
Open or short
is less than 0.1 V and the voltage of A1A- is more than 3.8
in air fuel
V and less than 4.7 V.
ratio sensor
circuit
One of the following conditions is met for 1 second or more (1 trip
Air fuel ratio
detection logic):
sensor
P0132
The voltage of A1A+ is more than 4.7 V. ECM
The voltage of A1A- is more than 4.7 V.
Air fuel ratio sensor impedance is 450 Ω or more for 5 seconds or

P0134 more.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are output when there is an open or short in the air fuel ratio sensor circuit, or if the air fuel
ratio sensor output drops. To detect these problems, the voltage of the air fuel ratio sensor is monitored
when turning the ignition switch to ON, and the admittance (admittance is an electrical term that indicates
the ease of flow of current) is checked while driving. If the voltage of the air fuel ratio sensor is between
0.6 V and 4.5 V, it is considered normal. If the voltage is out of the specified range, or the admittance is
less than the standard value, the ECM determines that there is a malfunction in the air fuel ratio sensor. If
the same malfunction is detected in next driving cycle, the MIL is illuminated and a DTC is stored.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0131: Primary oxygen sensor - ECM input voltage circuit
continuity
Related DTCs P0132: Primary oxygen sensor - ECM input voltage circuit
continuity
P0134: Primary oxygen sensor - Output voltage circuit continuity
(Main)
-
(Sub)
1 second: P0131, P0132

Duration
5 seconds: P0134

All
P0131, P0132
P0134
Accumulated variation of front lambda sensor heater control duty per 70% or higher for 36 seconds or
0.128 sec. more

P0131
Either of following conditions is met: A, B, C or D
A. A1A+ terminal voltage Less than 0.4 V
B. A1A- terminal voltage Less than 0.4 V
C. Difference of A1A+ terminal voltage and A1A- terminal

Less than 0.1 V
voltage
Less than 4.7 V and higher than 3.8

D. A1A- terminal voltage
V
P0132
Either of following conditions is met: A or B
A. A1A+ terminal voltage 4.7 V or higher
B. A1A- terminal voltage 4.7 V or higher
P0134
Impedance of air fuel ratio sensor 450 Ω or higher

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:
HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:

Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [AFS Voltage B1S1] .
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
A34-19 (A1A+) - C14-3 (A1A+) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-18 (A1A-) - C14-4 (A1A-) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-5 (HA1A) - C14-1 (HA1A) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-19 (A1A+) or C14-3 (A1A+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-18 (A1A-) or C14-4 (A1A-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
NEXT
3. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0131, P0132 OR P0134)
(h) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(j) Input the DTC: P0131, P0132 or P0134.
(k) Check the DTC judgment.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P0131, P0132 or P0134 is output) B
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WBY0GEX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0137,P0138,P013A,P013B,P013E,P013F,P0140: Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0137 Oxygen Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P0138 Oxygen Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P013A Oxygen Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean Bank 1 Sensor 2
DTC P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DTC P0140 Oxygen Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
DESCRIPTION
In order to obtain a high purification rate of the carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbon (HC) and nitrogen oxide (NOx) components in
the exhaust gas, a TWC (Three-Way Catalytic Converter) is used. For the most efficient use of the TWC, the air fuel ratio must be
precisely controlled so that it is always close to the stoichiometric air fuel level. For the purpose of helping the ECM to deliver
accurate air fuel ratio control, a Heated Oxygen (HO2) sensor is used.
The HO2 sensor is located behind the TWC, and detects the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas. Since the sensor is integrated
with the heater that heats the sensing portion, it is possible to detect the oxygen concentration even when the intake air volume is
low (the exhaust gas temperature is low).
When the air fuel ratio becomes lean, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas is rich. The HO2 sensor informs the ECM that the
post-TWC air fuel ratio is lean (low voltage, i.e. less than 0.45 V).
Conversely, when the air fuel ratio is richer than the stoichiometric air fuel level, the oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas
becomes lean. The HO2 sensor informs the ECM that the post-TWC air fuel ratio is rich (high voltage, i.e. more than 0.45 V). The
HO2 sensor has the property of changing its output voltage drastically when the air fuel ratio is close to the stoichiometric level.
The ECM uses the supplementary information from the HO2 sensor to determine whether the air fuel ratio after the TWC is rich or
lean, and adjusts the fuel injection time accordingly. Thus, if the HO2 sensor is working improperly due to internal malfunctions, the
ECM is unable to compensate for deviations in the primary air fuel ratio control.
NO.
Heated Oxygen (HO2) sensor voltage is less than 0.03 V.

P0137
Heated Oxygen (HO2) sensor voltage is 1.2 V or more for 2.5 seconds or more.
P0138
The response rate for heated oxygen sensor voltage to change from 0.5 V (rich) to 0.2 V
P013A (lean) is slow for 2 seconds or more.
Heated oxygen
The response rate for heated oxygen sensor voltage to change from 300 mV (lean) to 500 sensor circuit
P013B mV (rich) is slow for 4 seconds or more. Heated oxygen
Gas leak from
Heated oxygen sensor voltage is slow in dropping to 0.5 V or less for 4 seconds or more.
P013E exhaust system
Heated oxygen sensor voltage is slow in increasing to 0.3V or more for 120 seconds.
P013F
One of the following conditions is met for 180 seconds or more (2 trip detection logic):
P0140 The minimum voltage of heated oxygen sensor does not drop below 0.15 V.
The maximum voltage of heated oxygen sensor does not exceed 0.55 V.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1. Abnormal Voltage Output of Heated Oxygen (HO2) Sensor (DTC P013B, P013F or P0140)
If the sensor is not functioning properly, the voltage output variation is small. For example, when the HO2 sensor voltage does not
decrease to less than 0.15 V and does not increase to more than 0.55 V, the ECM determines that the sensor voltage output is
abnormal and stores DTC P013B, P013F or P0140.
2. Open in Heated Oxygen (HO2) Sensor Circuit (DTC P0137)
During active air fuel ratio control, the ECM calculates the Oxygen Storage Capacity (OSC)* of the Three-Way Catalytic Converter
(TWC) by forcibly regulating the air fuel ratio to become rich or lean.
If the HO2 sensor has an open or short, or the voltage output of the sensor noticeably decreases, the OSC indicates an
extraordinarily high value. Even if the ECM attempts to continue regulating the air fuel ratio to become rich or lean, the HO2 sensor
output does not change.
While performing active air fuel ratio control, when the target air fuel ratio is rich and the HO2 sensor voltage output is 0.03 V or
less (lean), the ECM interprets this as an abnormally low sensor output voltage and stores DTC P0137.
HINT:
*: The TWC has the capability to store oxygen. The OSC and the emission purification capacity of the TWC are mutually related.
The ECM determines whether the catalyst has deteriorated, based on the calculated OSC value .
3. Extremely High Output Voltage of Heated Oxygen (HO2) Sensor (DTC P0138)
The ECM continuously monitors the HO2 sensor output voltage while the engine is running.
DTC P0138 is stored if the HO2 sensor voltage output is more than 1.2 V.
4. Abnormal Voltage Output of Heated Oxygen (HO2) Sensor During Fuel-cut (DTC P013A or P013E)
The sensor output voltage drops to below 0.2 V (extremely lean status) immediately when the vehicle decelerates and fuel cut is
operating. If the voltage does not drop to below 0.5 V for 4 seconds or more, or voltage does not drop from 0.5 V to 0.2 V, the
ECM determines that the sensor response has deteriorated, illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0137: Secondary oxygen sensor - A lack of circuit continuity output range check
P0138: Secondary oxygen sensor - A lack of circuit continuity output range check
P013A: Secondary oxygen sensor - Response rate functional check
Related DTCs P013B: Secondary oxygen sensor - Response rate functional check
P013E: Secondary oxygen sensor - Response rate functional check
P013F: Secondary oxygen sensor - Response rate functional check
P0140: Secondary oxygen sensor - Output voltage rationality check
(Main)

Mass air flow meter
(Related)
Once per driving cycle: Active air fuel ratio control detection, heated oxygen sensor abnormal
Frequency of Operation voltage during fuel cut.
Continuous: Other
20 seconds: P0137 (Case 1)

40 seconds: P0137 (Case 2 and 3)
2.5 seconds: P0138
Duration 2 seconds: P013A
4 seconds: P013B, P013E
120 seconds: P013F
180 seconds: P0140

P0137 (Case 1)
Short term fuel trim 0.7 to 1.35
Intake air mass per second 10 g/sec
P0137 (Case 2)
Continuous time of secondary oxygen sensor heating 30 seconds or more
Fuel shut-off Not experienced
P0137 (Case 3)
Continuous time of secondary oxygen sensor heating 30 seconds or more
Fuel shut-off Experienced
P0138
P013A

Integrated time of heated oxygen sensor heater operation 180 seconds or more
Engine speed when deceleration fuel cut starts 1000 rpm or higher
Heated oxygen sensor output voltage when fuel cut starts 0.55 V or more
Elapsed time for fuel cut 5 seconds or more
Engine coolant temperature when fuel cut starts 60°C (140°F) or higher
Estimated temperature of heated oxygen sensor element when fuel cut 500°C (932°F) or higher
P013B
Fuel cut Not active
P013E
Engine speed when deceleration fuel cut starts 1000 rpm or higher
Heated oxygen sensor output voltage when fuel cut starts 0.55 V or more
Air fuel ratio enrichment compensation Not active
P013F
Engine speed when deceleration fuel cut finish 500 rpm or higher
Heated oxygen sensor output voltage when fuel cut finish Less than 0.15 V
Fuel cut Not active
P0140
P0030 (Air fuel ratio sensor - heater)

P0037, P0038 (Heated oxygen sensor - heater)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS)
circuit)
P2195, P2196 (Air fuel ratio sensor - output voltage)
Target commanded output voltage of heated oxygen

0.6 V or more
sensor
Intake air mass per second 10 g/sec or higher
Fuel system status Closed loop
All of the following conditions are experienced. A, B and C
A. Time of fuel cut in deceleration 5 seconds or more
B. Engine speed 1000 rpm or higher
C. Short term fuel trim 0.7 to 1.35

P0137
Minimum output voltage caused by a lack of circuit continuity Less than 0.03 V
P0138
Maximum output voltage caused by a lack of circuit continuity 1.2 V or more
P013A
Response time from rich (0.5 V) to lean (0.2 V) if output voltage decrease from 0.55 V to 0.15 V 0.491 seconds or more
P013B
Response time from lean (0.3 V) to rich (0.5 V) if output voltage increase from 0.25 V to 0.55 V 4 seconds or more
P013E
Response time from fuel cut start to heated oxygen sensor output reaching 0.5 V 4 seconds or more
P013F
Response time from fuel cut start to heated oxygen sensor output reaching 0.3 V 120 seconds or more (32 msec. X 3750 count)
P0140
Either of the following condition is met: A or B
A. Maximum output voltage Less than 0.55 V
B. Minimum output voltage 0.15 V or more
MONITOR RESULT

6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature reaches 75°C (167°F) or higher.
CAUTION:

d. Release the accelerator pedal to Decelerate until the vehicle speed decreases to less than 64 km/h (40 mph)
[D].
HINT:

HINT:

11. Input the DTC: P0137, P0138 P13A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

N/A Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached ECU memory
limit
HINT:

13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no DTC is output, perform a universal trip and check for permanent DTCs
.
HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Malfunctioning areas can be identified by performing the Control the Injection Volume function provided in the Active Test. The
Control the Injection Volume function can help to determine whether the air fuel ratio sensor, heated oxygen sensor and other
potential trouble areas are malfunctioning.
The following instructions describe how to conduct the Control the Injection Volume operation using the Techstream.

4. Warm up the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
5. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume.
6. Perform the Active Test operation with the engine idling (press the RIGHT or LEFT button to change the fuel injection
volume).
7. Monitor the output voltages of the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on
the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12.5% to +12.5%. The injection volume can be changed in fine
gradations.
Each sensor reacts in accordance with increases and decreases in the fuel injection volume.
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY (SENSOR) INJECTION VOLUME STATUS VOLTAGE
AFS Voltage B1S1 +12.5% Rich Below 2.0 V

(Air fuel ratio) -12.5% Lean Higher than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2 +12.5% Rich Higher than 0.55 V

(Heated oxygen) -12.5% Lean Below 0.4 V
NOTICE:
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has a maximum output
delay of approximately 20 seconds.
CASE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE MAIN SUSPECTED
TROUBLE AREA
1 -
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
Air fuel
ratio
2 sensor
heater
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
circuit
Heated
oxygen
sensor
Heated
oxygen
3 sensor
heater
Heated
oxygen
sensor
circuit
Fuel
injector
assembly
Fuel
pressure
Gas leak
from
4
exhaust
system
(air fuel
ratio
extremely
rich or
lean)
Following the Control the Injection Volume procedure enables technicians to check and graph the voltage outputs of both
the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors.
To display the graph, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume / AFS
Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2; and then press the graph button on the Data List view.
NOTICE:
Inspect the fuses for circuits related to this system before performing the following inspection procedure.
HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information as freeze frame
data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was moving or
stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the
malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1. READ OUTPUT DTC (DTC P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F AND P0140)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140 is output A
P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0136, P0137, P0138 or P0139 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume.
(f) Change the fuel injection volume using the Techstream, and monitoring the voltage output of heated oxygen sensors
displayed on the Techstream.
(g) Read the heated oxygen (HO2) sensor output voltage while idling.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of - 12.5% and +12.5%.
The heated oxygen sensor is displayed as O2S B1S2, on the Techstream.
The heated oxygen sensor has a maximum output delay of approximately 20 seconds.
If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test, the sensor may be
malfunctioning.
Standard:
The heated oxygen (HO2) sensor output voltage alternates between more than 0.55 V and less than 0.4 V.
NG CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
OK
(f) Change the fuel injection volume using the Techstream and monitor the voltage output of the air fuel ratio and
heated oxygen sensors displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% and +12%. The injection volume can be changed in fine
gradations within the range.
The air fuel ratio sensor is displayed as AFS Voltage B1S1, and the heated oxygen sensor is displayed as O2S B1S2, on the
Techstream.
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has a maximum output delay of
approximately 20 seconds.
malfunctioning.
Result
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY (SENSOR) VOLTAGE VARIATION PROCEED TO
Alternates between more and less than 2.2 V OK
AFS Voltage B1S1 (A/F) Remains at more than 2.2 V NG
Remains at less than 2.2 V NG
HINT:
A normal heated oxygen sensor voltage (O2S B1S2) reacts in accordance with increases and decreases in fuel injection volumes.
When the air fuel ratio sensor voltage remains at either less or more than 2.2 V despite the heated oxygen sensor indicating a
normal reaction, the air fuel ratio sensor is malfunctioning.
CHECK ENGINE TO DETERMINE CAUSE OF EXTREMELY RICH OR

OK LEAN ACTUAL AIR FUEL RATIO (FUEL INJECTOR, FUEL SYSTEM,
INTAKE SYSTEM, ETC.)
(a) Inspect for exhaust gas leaks from the exhaust manifold sub-assembly and exhaust pipes.
OK:
No gas leakage.
REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST GAS LEAK POINT

NG
OK
5. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
(a) Inspect the heated oxygen sensor .
OK
6. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR - ECM)
A36-6 (HT1B) - C13-1 (HT1B) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-21 (OX1B) - C13-3 (OX1B) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-6 (HT1B) or C13-1 (HT1B) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-21 (OX1B) or C13-3 (OX1B) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

NG
OK
7. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Replace the heated oxygen sensor .
NEXT
8. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F OR P0140)
(i) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
(k) Input the DTC: P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140.
(l) Check the DTC judgment result.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140 is output) B
B REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
END
A
9. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Replace the heated oxygen sensor .
NEXT
10. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F OR P0140)

(k) Input the DTC: P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140.
(l) Check the DTC judgment result.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F or P0140 is output) B
B REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WC30M6X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0171,P0172,P1170,P117B: System Too Lean (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
DTC P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
DTC P1170 Port Injector Fuel Performance
DTC P117B Direct Injector Fuel Performance
DESCRIPTION
The fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The fuel trim consists of both the short-
term and the long-term fuel trim.
The short-term fuel trim is fuel compensation that is used to constantly maintain the air fuel ratio at stoichiometric levels. The
signal from the air fuel ratio sensor indicates whether the air fuel ratio is rich or lean compared to the stoichiometric ratio. This
triggers a reduction in the fuel injection volume if the air fuel ratio is rich and an increase in the fuel injection volume if it is lean.
Factors such as individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in operating environment cause short-term fuel trim to
vary from the ideal theoretical value. The long-term fuel trim controls overall fuel compensation. The long-term fuel trim
compensates for long term deviations of the fuel trim from the ideal theoretical value. These long term deviations result from the
corrections made by the short-term fuel trim.
If both the short-term fuel and long-term fuel trim are lean or rich beyond predetermined values, it is interpreted as a malfunction,
the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.

NO.
Intake system
Fuel injector assembly
Mass air flow meter
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, fuel trim considerably in error Fuel pressure
P0171 to lean side. Gas leaks from exhaust
(2 trip detection logic) system
Open or short in air fuel
ratio sensor circuit
PCV valve and hose
PCV hose connections
ECM
Wire harness or
connector
Mass air flow meter

Engine coolant
temperature sensor
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, fuel trim considerably in error Ignition system
P0172 to rich side. Fuel pressure
(2 trip detection logic) Gas leaks from exhaust
system
Open or short in air fuel
ratio sensor circuit
ECM
Wire harness or
connector

Although a DTC is stored for a rich or lean condition, the amount of fuel trim during
P1170 direct injection is normal for 9 seconds.
Fuel pressure
ECM

Although a DTC is stored for a rich or lean condition, the amount of fuel trim during
P117B port injection is normal for 9 seconds.
Fuel pressure
ECM
HINT:
When DTC P0171 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the lean side. When DTC P0172 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the
rich side.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is lean and DTC P0171 may be set. The MIL is then illuminated.
When DTC P1170 or P117B is output , it may not be possible to precisely determine whether the port injection or the direct
injection is malfunctioning, depending on the conditions. In this case, perform an Active Test (control the injection way) to
determine which injection system is malfunctioning.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Under closed loop fuel control, fuel injection volumes that deviate from those estimated by the ECM cause changes in the long-term
fuel trim compensation value. The long-term fuel trim is adjusted when there are persistent deviations in the short-term fuel trim
values. Deviations from the ECM's estimated fuel injection volumes also affect the average fuel trim learning value, which is a
combination of the average short-term fuel trim (fuel feedback compensation value) and the average long-term fuel trim (learning
value of the air fuel ratio). If the average fuel trim learning value exceeds the malfunction threshold, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the fuel system and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0171: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (System too lean)
P0172: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (System too rich)
Related DTCs
P1170: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (Direct injection fail)
P117B: Fuel system main feedback control functional check (Port injection fail)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Fuel system

Required Sensors/Components (Related) Mass air flow meter
9 seconds X 3 times: P0171 and P0172

Duration
9 seconds: P1170 and P117B
2 driving cycles: P0171 and P0172

MIL Operation
Immediately: P1170 and P117B

All

P0102, P0103 (Mass air flow (MAF) sensor)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
P0458, P0459 (Solenoid valve for purge control)
P0461, P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS) circuit)
P2195, P2196 (Air fuel ratio sensor - output voltage)
P0171
Intake air mass per revolution More than 0.12 g/rev (varies with engine speed)
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine rev. 0.02 g/rev or less
Oil attenuation Not determined
P0172
Intake air mass per revolution More than 0.12 g/rev (varies with engine speed)
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine rev. 0.02 g/rev or less
Oil attenuation Not determined
Integrated time of canister purge after engine start 20 seconds or more
P1170
Enable condition to detect malfunction in P0171 or P0172 Satisfied
P0171 or P0172 malfunction Detected
Direct injection ratio 100%
P117B
Enable condition to detect malfunction in P0171 or P0172 Satisfied
P0171 or P0172 malfunction Detected
Port injection ratio 100%

P0171
Diagnostic value [Air fuel ratio sensor short term fuel trim + air fuel ratio sensor long term 30% or higher (varies with intake
fuel trim + (measured lambda - target lambda)] air mass per second)
P0172
Diagnostic value [Air fuel ratio sensor short term fuel trim + air fuel ratio sensor long term Less than -30% (varies with intake
fuel trim + (measured lambda - target lambda)] air mass per second)
P1170, P117B
Diagnostic value [Air fuel ratio sensor short term fuel trim + air fuel ratio sensor long term fuel trim + Less than 15% or higher
(measured lambda - target lambda)] than -15%

HINT:
CAUTION:

HINT:

11. Input the DTC: P0171, P0172, P1170 or P117B.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

limit
HINT:

.
HINT:

HINT:
Malfunctioning areas can be identified by performing the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function provided in the
Active Test. The Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function can help to determine whether the air fuel ratio sensor,
heated oxygen sensor and other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning.
The following instructions describe how to conduct the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation using the
Techstream.

5. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / Gas AF Control /
AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
volume).
the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12.5% to +12.5%.


NOTICE:
CASE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (SENSOR 1) OUTPUT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (SENSOR 2) OUTPUT MAIN SUSPECTED
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE TROUBLE AREA
1 -
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
Air fuel
ratio
2 sensor
heater
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
circuit
Heated
oxygen
sensor
Heated
oxygen
3 sensor
heater
Heated
oxygen
sensor
circuit
Fuel
injector
assembly
Fuel
pressure
Gas leak
from
4
exhaust
system
(Air fuel
ratio
extremely
rich or
lean)
Following the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor procedure enables technicians to check and graph the voltage
outputs of both the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors.
To display the graph, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F
Sensor / Gas AF Control / AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2; and then press the graph button on the Data List view.
HINT:

data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle
was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as
other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run lean.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0171, P0172, P1170 AND/OR P117B)
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
P0171, P0172, P1170 or P117B A
P0171, P0172, P1170 and/or P117B and other DTCs B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0171, P0172, P1170 or P117B are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME FOR A/F SENSOR)
(c) Turn Techstream on.
(d) Warm up the engine and run the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / AFS
Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation with the engine in an idling.
(g) Monitor the output voltages of the A/F and HO2 sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on the
Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12.5% to 12.5%.
malfunctioning.
AFS Voltage B1S1 12.5% Rich Less than 2.0 V

(A/F) -12.5% Lean More than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2 12.5% Rich More than 0.55 V

(HO2) -12.5% Lean Less than 0.4 V
Result:
STATUS STATUS A/F CONDITION AND SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED TO

AFS VOLTAGE B1S1 O2S B1S2 A/F SENSOR CONDITION
Lean/Rich Lean/Rich Normal - A
Ventilation valve and hose

Ventilation hose connections
Injector for port injection
Gas leakage from exhaust system
Lean Lean Actual air-fuel ratio lean A
Air induction system
Fuel pressure
Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

Ignition system
Rich Rich Actual air-fuel ratio rich Fuel pressure A
Mass air flow (MAF) meter
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Lean Lean/Rich A/F sensor malfunction Air fuel ratio sensor B
Rich Lean/Rich A/F sensor malfunction Air fuel ratio sensor B
Lean: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage (AFS Voltage) is
consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage (O2S) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the AFS Voltage is consistently below 2.0 V, and the O2S
is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor
alternates correctly.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2] .
B INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(a) Check freeze frame data, and understand the status of vehicles when abnormalities occur.
HINT:
The 5 separate sets of freeze frame data can be used to check the engine status before and after storing of the DTC.
Use freeze frame data to check if the engine was idling or running.
FREEZE FRAME DATA
Engine Speed Fuel System Status #1 O2S B1S2
Calculate Load Short FT #1 Evap Purge Flow
Vehicle Speed Long FT #1 Shift Position Sig from ECT
MAF AFS Voltage B1S1 Coolant Temp
NEXT
4. CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION
HINT:
When checking trouble during abnormal status, use the following procedure.
(a) Remove the EFI (+B) fuse, wait 60 seconds or more, and connect the fuse.
HINT:
Clear the ECM feedback learning value.

After clearing the DTC, initial diagnosis of the electronically controlled throttle is performed. Accordingly, engine start after
clearing DTC takes place 10 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch ON.
(d) Turn Techstream on.
(f) Increase or decrease injection quantities by 1 step.
HINT:
This operation stops feedback compensation and feedback learning, enabling checking of trouble.
(g) Start the engine.
(h) Refer to the running state freeze frame data, reproduce the conditions in which the abnormality occurred, and check
the trouble.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Trouble can be confirmed. A
Trouble cannot be confirmed. B
B READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SHORT FT #1 AND LONG FT #1)

(a) Specify the location of the trouble from the following, then conduct inspections and replacements.
NOTICE:
If only the check light is lit, and it is not possible to specify the location of the trouble, then go to step 3.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

AREA
Rough
idling
Deviation in
Mass air Pausing at
characteristic of the Refer to . -
flow meter start-up
mass air flow meter
MIL lights
up only.
Very long
unattended idle
time
Long running
distance
Refer to for port
Long-term usage of
Fuel injector assembly injection.
MIL lights up only. regular gasoline
blockage Refer to for direct
injection. From the vehicle usage
conditions above, there may
be a blockage in the fuel
injector assembly.
During driving, the MIL lights
up often.
Fuel injector
assembly Problem with oil-
(for port tightness results in
injection or a rich side
direct abnormality
injection) If a high
Engine concentration of HC
stalls when within the intake
the vehicle Refer to for port manifold after the
Problem with oil-
stops injection. engine stopped,
tightness in fuel
(restart is Refer to for direct this results in a rich
injector assembly
possible). injection. side abnormality.
MIL lights From scorching on
up only. the spark plug,
there may be a fuel
system
abnormality.
DTC P0088 may
have been stored.
Fuel pump
assembly
malfunction
Low
Refer to for fuel
pressure
pump control circuit (low
Engine stall side fuel
Fuel pump pressure side).
Poor pressure -
assembly Refer to for fuel
acceleration abnormality
pressure (low pressure
Low
side).
pressure
side fuel
system
blockage
Air sucked in from the

Check intake manifold gasket
intake manifold -
inspection.
gasket.
Rough Damage to
Start the engine, and in idle condition If air is being drawn into the
Intake idling intake
block off individual hoses connected hose, the fuel compensation
system MIL lights system
to the intake manifold, and check quantity (total of feedback
up only. hoses
that the fuel compensation quantity compensated value and
Continuous
(total of feedback compensated value feedback learning value) is
the purge
and feedback learning value) large, and this drops with a
VSV stuck
decreases. racing condition.
on
Air fuel Air fuel ratio sensor Air fuel ratio sensor system
Rough idling Refer to .
ratio sensor malfunction DTC may be stored.
(b) After the trouble area is repaired, Check that the trouble symptom is resolved.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Trouble symptom resolved A
Trouble symptom not resolved B
B READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SHORT FT #1 AND LONG FT #1)
6. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
7. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SHORT FT #1 AND LONG FT #1)
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short #1, Long FT #1.
(f) Read the value Short #1 and Long FT #1.

Result:

Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 Vehicle condition when the malfunction occurs (Idling or driving) -20% to +20%
HINT:
If the trouble occurs during high speed driving, it is possible to take measurements at medium or low speeds by matching the
intake air volume to that at the time of the trouble by shifting down.
NG READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SHORT FT #1 AND LONG FT #1)
OK
(a) Check the diagnostic table and freeze frame data again, and if there is no abnormality, finish operations.
HINT:
In the event of running out of gas, the fuel compensation quantity will increase by +35% or more, and if this continues for 2
trips, this is a lean abnormality, and P0171 may be stored.
Repeated short trips (a short time between the ignition switch ON and turning it off or short distance driving) result in
gasoline vaporizing at subsequent engine warm-up, and P0172 as a result of increased blow-by gas may be stored.
END
NEXT
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Port.
(e) Read the value Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.

Standard:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 Idling -20% to +20%
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(g) Read the value Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.

Standard:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 Idling -20% to +20%
Result:
CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY PROCEED TO
PORT DIRECT
OK OK A
OK NG B
NG OK C
NG NG D
B READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL PRESS)
C INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
D CHECK EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Check the diagnostic table and freeze frame data again, and if there is no abnormality, finish operations.
HINT:
In the event of running out of gas, the fuel compensation quantity will increase by +35% or more, and if this continues for 2
trips, this is a lean abnormality, and P0171 may be stored.
Repeated short trips (a short time between turning the ignition switch ON and turning it off or short distance driving) result in
gasoline vaporizing at subsequent engine warm-up, and P0172 as a result of increased blow-by gas may be stored.
END
NEXT
11. CHECK EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
(a) Check emission control system .
REPAIR OR REPLACE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

NG
OK

OK:
No leaks in intake system.

NG
OK
(a) Inspect the engine coolant temperature sensor .
NG REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF.
(f) Read MAF with the engine speed at 3000 rpm.

Standard:
MAF Engine speed at 3000 rpm 8 to 13 g/s
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER

NG CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
OK
15. CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM
(a) Check the ignition system .
REPAIR OR REPLACE IGNITION SYSTEM

NG
OK

OK:
No gas leaks.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B

B
CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST SYSTEM

A
OK

NG
OK

NEXT
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1, Long FT #1.

Standard:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 Idling or racing -20% to +20%
HINT:
NG CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
END
OK

B
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)

A
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.

Standard:
Fuel Press Idling 3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi)
HINT:
The A/C switch and all accessory switches should be off, and the shift lever should be in the N, P or neutral position, and the
engine should be fully warmed up.
If the result is other than the standard value, there may be a fuel system (high pressure side) abnormality.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)

NG
OK
23. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(e) Read the value Fuel Press Target Value, Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY CONDITION PROCEED TO
FUEL PRESSURE TARGET VALUE SHORT FT #1 + LONG FT #1
3 to 5 MPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi) - A
5 MPa (50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 725 psi) or more +20% or more B
5 MPa (50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 725 psi) or more -20% or less Idling C
3 MPa (30.6 kgf/cm 2 , 436 psi) or less +20% or more C
3 MPa (30.6 kgf/cm 2 , 436 psi) or less -20% or less D
HINT:
B READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (FUEL PRESS)
C REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
D REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
24. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY)
(e) Read the value Fuel Press Target Value, Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY CONDITION PROCEED TO
FUEL PRESSURE TARGET VALUE SHORT FT #1 + LONG FT #1
3 to 5 MPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi) -25% or less

A
3 to 5 MPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi) +30% or more Idling
5 MPa (50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 725 psi) or more -25% to 25% B
HINT:
A REPLACE ECM

Standard:
Fuel Press Engine running → Ignition switch OFF → Ignition switch ON Fuel Press value decrease moderately.
HINT:
After approximately 10 minutes, fuel pressure reaches 0 kPa.
Depending on the vehicle condition, after turning the ignition switch to ON, fuel pressure may rise moderately.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Fuel pressure rises or drops moderately. A
Fuel pressure drops immediately after turning the ignition switch off. B
B REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
A REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
26. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) .
NG REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
OK REPLACE ECM
27. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harness between the mass air flow
meter and ECM .
HINT:
NEXT
28. CLEAR DTC

NEXT
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1, Long FT #1

Standard:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 Vehicle condition when the malfunction occurs (Idling or driving) -20% to +20%
NG CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER - ECM)
END
OK
A33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG) Always Below 1 Ω
A33-22 (VG) or C16-5 (VG) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A33-29 (E2G) or C16-4 (E2G) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
OK
HINT:
If the result of the inspection performed in step 8 indicated no problem, proceed to the next step without replacing the mass
air flow meter.
NEXT
32. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Short FT #1, Long FT #1.

Standard:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 Idling or racing -20% to +20%
HINT:
NG REPLACE ECM
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XH502XX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0191-P0193: Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range /
DTC P0191 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range / Performance
DTC P0192 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input
DTC P0193 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The fuel pressure sensor is installed on the delivery pipe. The sensor changes fuel pressure to an electrical
signal and sends the signal to the ECM. Then the ECM controls the pump discharge using this feedback to
maintain the fuel's target pressure. If the sensor output stops, the ECM will stop the high pressure side
fuel pump and supply fuel using the low pressure side fuel pump.

NO.
One of the following conditions is met (2 trip detection logic): Open or short
in fuel
Fuel pressure is 1.9 MPa or more 5 hours after ignition
pressure
switch turned off.
P0191 sensor circuit
Fuel pressure is 1.84 MPa or less for 10 seconds or more
Fuel pressure
with engine running when 5 hours or more elapsed after
sensor
ignition switch turned off.
ECM
Short in fuel
pressure
Fuel pressure sensor voltage is too low for 2.5 seconds or more. sensor circuit
P0192
(1 trip detection logic) Fuel pressure
sensor
ECM
Open in fuel
pressure
Fuel pressure sensor voltage is too high for 2.5 seconds or more. sensor circuit
P0193
(1 trip detection logic) Fuel pressure
sensor
ECM
HINT:
After confirming DTC P0192 or P0193, use the Techstream to confirm the fuel pressure in the delivery
pipe by entering the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
FUEL PRESSURE (KPA) MALFUNCTION
Approximately 0 PR, E1 circuit short
Approximately 26000 PR, VC circuit short
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs are set if the fuel pressure sensor output voltage is out of the standard range. The DTCs
stand for an open or short malfunction of the sensor circuit.
If these DTCs are set, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and limits the engine power. Fail-safe mode
continues until the ignition switch is turned off.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0191: Fuel pressure sensor rationality check
Related DTCs P0192: Fuel pressure sensor output range check (Low voltage)
P0193: Fuel pressure sensor output range check (High voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Fuel Pressure Sensor
-
(Related)
Once per driving cycle: P0191

Frequency of Operation
Continuous: P0192, P0193
0.1 seconds: P0191 (Stuck high monitor)

Duration 10 seconds: P0191 (Stuck low monitor)
2.5 seconds: P0192, P0193

MIL Operation
Immediately: P0192, P0193

All
P0191 (Stuck High Monitor)
Elapsed time after ignition switch ON 0.1 seconds or more
High pressure fuel pump Off
P0191 (Stuck Low Monitor)

Target fuel pressure 4 MPa (40.8 kgf/cm 2 , 581 psi) or higher
Vehicle speed 30 km/h (18.6 mph) or more
Direct injection Active
High pressure fuel pump Off

P0191 (Stuck High Monitor)
Fuel pressure sensor value Higher than 1.9 MPa (19.4 kgf/cm 2 , 276 psi)
P0191 (Stuck Low Monitor)
Fuel pressure sensor value Less than 1.84 MPa (18.7 kgf/cm 2 , 267 psi)
P0192
Fuel rail pressure sensor voltage [Fuel pressure] Less than 0.208 V [0 MPa (0 kgf/cm 2 , 0 psi)]
P0193
Fuel rail pressure sensor voltage [Fuel More than 4.78 V [26.75 MPa (273 kgf/cm 2 , 3880
pressure] psi)]

Fuel rail pressure sensor voltage [Fuel 0.306 to 4.639 V [0.00 to 25.87 MPa (0 to 263.8 kgf/cm 2 , 0
pressure] to 3752 psi)]

P0191
higher.
between 2500 and 3000 rpm for 40 seconds or more.
8. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (18.75 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [A].
CAUTION:
laws.
9. Turn the ignition switch off and leave vehicle for 5 hours or more [B].
higher.
13. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (18.75 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [C].
CAUTION:
laws.
HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

P0192, P0193

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
PROCEDURE
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(e) Read the values.

Result:
FUEL PRESSURE (KPA) PROCEED TO
26000 or more
A
Approximately 0
3000 to 5000* B
HINT:
*: The value must change when the engine is moving or stationary.
2. INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector.
Standard Voltage:
C10-1 (VC) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V

*a
(to Fuel Pressure Sensor)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM -

NG FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
OK
3. INSPECT ECM (PR VOLTAGE)

(a) Start the engine.
Standard Voltage:
A34-9 (PR) - A36-29 (E1) Idling with warm engine 1.0 to 1.7 V

*a
(ECM)
HINT:
The fuel pressure in the delivery pipe is 3 to 5 MPa.

NG FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
OK REPLACE ECM
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the ECM connectors.
(b) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector.
A34-9 (PR) - C10-3 (PR) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-9 (PR) or C10-3 (PR) - body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-29 (E1) or C10-2 (E2) - body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE
NG SENSOR)
OK REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
A36-19 (VC) or C10-1 (VC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PRESSURE
NG SENSOR)
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PFB0PRX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0196-P0198: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
(Range/Performance) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (Range/Performance)
DTC P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low
DTC P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High
DESCRIPTION
The resistance of the thermistor within the oil temperature sensor changes in accordance with variations in
the oil temperature. The method for connecting the oil temperature sensor and the ECM is the same as for
the intake air temperature sensor.
HINT:
If any DTC is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During operation of fail-safe mode, the ECM sets
the engine oil temperature determined value at 70°C (158°F). Operation of fail-safe mode continues
until the ECM restores normal operation.

NO.
Despite estimated engine oil temperature is higher than 45°C (113°F),

P0196 engine oil temperature sensor value is lower than 45°C (113°F).
Engine oil
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage is less than 0.203 V for 0.5
temperature
sensor
ECM
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage is more than 4.698 V for 0.5
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
P0196
When a cold engine start is performed and then the engine is warmed up, if the Engine oil temperature
sensor value is less than specified value, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred. If this is
detected in 2 consecutive driving cycles, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the engine oil
temperature sensor and stores a DTC.
P0197, P0198
The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the engine oil temperature. When
the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the engine oil temperature sensor circuit and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0196: Engine oil temperature sensor functional check
P0197: Engine oil temperature sensor functional check (Low
Related DTCs voltage)
P0198: Engine oil temperature sensor functional check (High
voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Engine oil temperature sensor
-
(Related)

250 to 550 seconds: P0196

Duration
0.5 seconds: P0197, P0198
Immediately: P0196
MIL Operation
2 driving cycles: P0197, P0198

P0196
P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature

(IAT) sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor)
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle
position sensor)
P0197, P0198 (Engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor)
P2101, P2102 (Throttle actuator control
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored
motor)
P2109 (Throttle position sensor minimum
stop)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128
(Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APPS) circuit)
P2135 (Throttle position sensor (TPS)
correlation)
P2138 (Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APPS) correlation)

Diagnostic value (n) [Diagnostic value (n-1) + 64 + 3.0 1732125 - (39285 X Lowest engine oil
(varies with lowest engine oil temperature and vehicle speed)] coolant after engine start)
P0197, P0198

P0196
Actual engine oil temperature Less than 45°C (113°F)
P0197
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage [Engine oil temperature] Less than 0.203 V [165.54°C (330°F)]
P0198
Engine oil temperature sensor voltage [Engine oil temperature] More than 4.698 V [-46.24°C (-51.2°F)]

Engine oil temperature sensor voltage [Engine oil 0.210 to 4.688 V [163.70 to -43.85 °C (326.7 to
temperature] -46.9°F)]

6. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine oil temperature reaches 75°C (167°F) or
higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
When the DTC is output, check the engine oil temperature using the Techstream. Enter the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature. If the Engine Oil
Temperature value is lower than the actual engine oil temperature, the engine oil temperature
sensor circuit may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the wire harnesses and connectors (and
those connections) between the ECM and the engine oil temperature sensor first.
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
-40°C (-40°F) A
215°C (419°F) B
Between 75 and 100°C (167 and 212°F) C
HINT:

If there is a short circuit, the Techstream indicates higher than 215°C (419°F).
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE

B OIL TEMPERATURE)
C CHECK INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

(a) Disconnect the Engine oil temperature sensor
connector.
(b) Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the Engine oil temperature sensor connector on the wire
harness side.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature.

Standard value:
215°C (419°F)
*1 Engine oil temperature sensor
*2 ECM

*a
(to Engine oil temperature sensor)

NG ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
REPLACE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE

OK SENSOR
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
A36-20 (OT) - C21-2 (OT) Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
(a) Disconnect the Engine oil temperature sensor

connector.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Oil Temperature.

Standard Value:
-40°C (-40°F)
*1 Engine oil temperature sensor
*2 ECM

NG ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
REPLACE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE

OK SENSOR
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
A36-20 (OT) or C21-2 (OT) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001O9K02AX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0201-P0204: Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1) (2013
FR-S)
DTC P0201 Injector Circuit / Open - (Cylinder 1)
DESCRIPTION
The D-4S system has two injection systems. One is the in-cylinder direct injection system that directly
injects pressurized fuel into the combustion chamber. The other is the intake port injection system. The
ECM determines the percentage of in-cylinder direct injection to the intake port injection systems in
accordance with the engine speed and load.

NO.

injector (for port
injection) circuit
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND (No. 1 cylinder)
short / +B short or overheating) from the fuel injector IC INJ fuse
P0201
continuously 10 times or more (No. 1 cylinder). Fuel injector
(1 trip detection logic) assembly (for port
injection) (No. 1
cylinder)
ECM

injector (for port
injection) circuit
P0202
injection) (No. 2
cylinder)
ECM
injector (for port
injection) circuit
P0203
injection) (No. 3
cylinder)
ECM

injector (for port
injection) circuit
P0204
injection) (No. 4
cylinder)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the injection control of the port injector. If a malfunction is detected in the port injector
circuit, the ECM cancels the injection control for the corresponding cylinder and turns on the MIL.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0201: Fuel injector circuit continuity (Cylinder 1)
Related DTCs
Required sensors/Components (Main) Fuel injector assembly (for port injection) (cylinder 1 to 4)
Required sensors/Components (Sub) None

Injection time 0.001 seconds or more

Fuel cut Not active

Signal of malfunction from fuel injector IC On

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0201 is output, check the No. 1 fuel injector assembly (for port injection) (No. 1 cylinder)
circuit.
circuit.
circuit.
circuit.
PROCEDURE

(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
P0201, P0202, P0203 and P0204 are output A
P0201, P0202, P0203 or P0204 is output B
P0201, P0202, P0203 or P0204 and other DTCs are output C
B INSPECT RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
C GO TO DTC CHART
2. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port

injection) connector.
Standard Voltage:


*a
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT
3.
INJECTION))
(b) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) connector.
A36-12 (#10) - C8-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-22 (#20) - C30-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-32 (#30) - C9-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-13 (#40) - C31-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-12 (#10) or C8-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) .

NG PORT INJECTION)
OK REPLACE ECM

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EFI MAIN1 RELAY - FUEL INJECTOR

6.
ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the fuel injector assembly (for port injection) connector.


NG CONNECTOR
OK GO TO ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T8X0C9X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0230: Fuel Pump Primary Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When a malfunction in the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) is detected, DTC P0230 is stored.
The fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) consists of the ECM, fuel pump assembly and fuel pump
control ECU (which operates the fuel pump assembly). Based on the engine output, the ECM determines
the fuel pump speed. The speed is then converted to a duty signal and sent to the fuel pump control ECU.
Based on the signal sent from the ECM, the fuel pump control ECU adjusts the fuel pump assembly
operation speed among 3 settings. The fuel pump control ECU also has a self-diagnosis function. Based on
the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) condition, the fuel pump control ECU outputs a diagnostic
signal to the ECM, and the ECM determines if there is a malfunction in the fuel pump control circuit (low
pressure side).

NO.
Open or short in fuel pump control circuit

(low pressure side)
Open or short in fuel pump circuit for 2.5
C/OPEN relay
Fuel pump assembly
Fuel pump control ECU
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
To monitor the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side), the ECM checks the fuel pump control signal
(FPC) and diagnostic signal (DI). The FPC voltage varies between approximately 0 V and approximately 12
V (duty signal). Based on the condition of the fuel pump control ECU malfunction, the DI voltage varies
between approximately 0 V and approximately 12 V. The ECM then compares the variation of the FPC
voltage and DI voltage, and determines if the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) is
malfunctioning. When the ECM determines that the fuel pump control circuit (low pressure side) is
malfunctioning, a DTC is stored immediately.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0230: Fuel pump control circuit continuity
Required sensors/Components (Main) Fuel pump control ECU
Required sensors/Components (Related) -


Fuel level 15% or more
After engine starting 180 seconds or more
Fuel pump control On

Fuel control ECU output diagnostic signal Low

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to Fuel Pump Control Circuit .
This troubleshooting procedure is based on the premise that the engine is started. If the engine is not
started, proceed to Problem Symptoms Table .
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (+B OF FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU)
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU connector.
Standard Voltage:
G12-1 (+B) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Fuel Pump Control ECU)
NG INSPECT RELAY (C/OPEN)
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU - BODY GROUND)
G12-4 (E) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU)
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU connector.
A35-10 (DI) - G12-3 (DI) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-10 (DI) or G12-3 (DI) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the fuel pump assembly .
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL

NG PUMP CONTROL ECU - FUEL PUMP
ASSEMBLY)
OK
5. REPLACE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU
(a) Replace the fuel pump control ECU .
NEXT
6. CONFIRM WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS
(d) Crank the engine for 15 seconds.
(e) Idle the engine for 1 minute.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / DTC.
(g) Read the DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC output A
DTC P0230 output B
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU - FUEL PUMP
7.
ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump assembly connectors.
G12-5 (FP-) - G7-4 (FP-) Always Below 1 Ω
G12-6 (FP+) - G7-3 (FP+) Always Below 1 Ω
G12-5 (FP-) or G7-4 (FP-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
G12-6 (FP+) or G7-3 (FP+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
8. INSPECT RELAY (C/OPEN)
(a) Inspect the C/OPEN relay .
REPLACE RELAY (C/OPEN)

NG
OK
9. INSPECT RELAY (C/OPEN RELAY OPERATION)
(a) Check the relay operation sound when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Result:
ITEM CONDITION STANDARD
C/OPEN RELAY Ignition switch OFF → Ignition switch ON Operation sound is heard.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
10. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (C/OPEN RELAY - FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU)
(a) Remove the C/OPEN relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU connector.
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 - G12-1 Always Below 1 Ω
C/OPEN relay terminal 1 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
C/OPEN relay terminal 3 or G12-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XH30QQX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0300-P0304: Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0300 Random / Multiple Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
DESCRIPTION
When the engine misfires, high concentrations of hydrocarbons (HC) enter the exhaust gas. Extremely
high hydrocarbon concentration levels can cause an increase in exhaust emission levels. Extremely high
concentrations of hydrocarbons can also cause increases in the three-way catalytic converter temperature,
which may cause damage to the three-way catalytic converter. To prevent this increase in emissions and
to limit the possibility of thermal damage, the ECM monitors the misfire count. When the temperature of
the three-way catalytic converter reaches the point of thermal degradation, the ECM blinks the MIL. To
monitor misfires, the ECM uses both the VVT sensor and the crankshaft position sensor. The VVT sensor is
used to identify any misfiring cylinders and the crankshaft position sensor is used to measure variations in
the crankshaft rotation speed. Misfires are counted when the crankshaft rotation speed variations exceed
predetermined thresholds. If the misfire count exceeds the threshold levels, and could cause emission
control system performance deterioration, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC.
NO.
Simultaneous misfiring of several cylinders occurs and one of the

following conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):
A misfire occurs that may damage the three-way

P0300
catalytic converter (MIL blinks).
Open or short in
An emission deterioration misfire occurs (MIL
engine wire
illuminates).
harness
Connector
Misfiring of the No. 1 cylinder occurs and one of the following
connection
conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):
Vacuum hose
A misfire occurs that may damage the three-way connections
P0301
catalytic converter (MIL blinks). Ignition system
An emission deterioration misfire occurs (MIL Fuel injector
illuminates). assembly (for port
injection)
Misfiring of the No. 2 cylinder occurs and one of the following Fuel injector
conditions is met (2 trip detection logic): assembly (for
direct injection)
P0302 Fuel pressure (low
pressure side)
Fuel pressure (high
illuminates).
pressure side)
Mass air flow meter
Misfiring of the No. 3 cylinder occurs and one of the following
Engine coolant
conditions is met (2 trip detection logic):
temperature sensor
A misfire occurs that may damage the three-way Compression
P0303
catalytic converter (MIL blinks). pressure
An emission deterioration misfire occurs (MIL Valve timing
illuminates). PCV valve and hose
PCV hose
Misfiring of the No. 4 cylinder occurs and one of the following connections
conditions is met (2 trip detection logic): Intake system
ECM
P0304
illuminates).
When DTCs for misfiring cylinders are randomly stored, but DTC P0300 is not stored, it indicates that
misfires have been detected in different cylinders at different times. DTC P0300 is only stored when
several misfiring cylinders are detected at the same time.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC when either one of the following conditions, which could
cause emission deterioration, is detected (2 trip detection logic).
Within the first 1000 crankshaft revolutions after the engine starts, an excessive number of
misfires (approximately 20 to 50 misfires per 1000 crankshaft revolutions) occurs once.
An excessive number of misfires (approximately 20 to 50 misfires per 1000 crankshaft
revolutions) occurs a total of 4 times.
The ECM flashes the MIL and stores a DTC when either one of the following conditions, which could cause
damage to the three-way catalytic converter, is detected (2 trip detection logic).
At a high engine speed, a sufficient amount of misfires to damage the catalyst occurring within
200 crankshaft revolutions is detected once.
At a normal engine speed, a sufficient amount of misfires to damage the catalyst occurring
within 200 crankshaft revolutions is detected 3 times.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0300: Multiple cylinder misfire
P0301: Cylinder 1 misfire (crankshaft speed fluctuation)
Related DTCs P0302: Cylinder 2 misfire (crankshaft speed fluctuation)

VVT sensor

Required Sensors/Components (Related) Intake air temperature sensor
Mass air flow meter
1000 crankshaft revolutions (Emissions-related misfire)

Duration
200 crankshaft revolutions (Catalyst-damaging misfire)
2 driving cycles: Emission-related misfire

MIL Operation
MIL flashes immediately: Catalyst-damaging misfire

P0011, P0021 (VVT intake method (A) with mid-
position start)
P0030, P0031, P0032 (Air fuel ratio sensor - heater)
P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure
(MAP) sensor)
P0111, P0112, P0113 (Intake air temperature (IAT)
sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor)
P0131, P0132 (Air fuel ratio sensor - ECM input
voltage)
P0134, P2195, P2196 (Air fuel ratio sensor - output
voltage)
P0171, P0172 (Fuel system main feedback control)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not P0335, P0336 (Crankshaft position sensor)
stored P0340, P0345 (Camshaft position sensor - intake with
VVT)
P0365, P0390 (Camshaft position sensor - exhaust with
VVT)
P0458, P0459 (Solenoid valve for purge control)
P0851, P0852 (Neutral position switch)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal
position sensor (APPS) circuit)
P2138 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS)
correlation)
Change of manifold absolute pressure (MAP)

Less than 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg)
during 1/2 engine rev.
Throttle position change during 16 ms Less than 16.8%
Fuel cut Not active
VSC or A/T torque control Not active
EVAP system monitoring Not active
Battery voltage 8 V or higher
21.7 kPa (163 mmHg) or more (A/T) (varies with

engine speed)
MAP
20.9 kPa (157 mmHg) or more (M/T) (varies with
engine speed)

Monitor Period of Emission-related Misfire
Misfire percentage in 1000 rev. 1.9% or more
Monitor Period of Catalyst-damaging Misfire (MIL Blinks)
Misfire percentage in 200 rev. 5% or more (varies with engine speed)
MONITOR RESULT

4. Record the DTC(s) and freeze frame data.
5. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the Clear DTC procedure) .
6. Using the Techstream, switch the ECM from normal mode to check mode .
7. Read the misfire counts of each cylinder, Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire
Count, with the engine idling. If any misfire count is displayed, skip the following confirmation
driving pattern.
8. Drive the vehicle so that the vehicle conditions displayed in Engine Speed and Calculate Load of
the Data List are the same as the freeze frame data. Perform this step several times.
HINT:
In order to store misfire DTCs, it is necessary to operate the vehicle for the period of time
shown in the table below, confirm the Misfire RPM and Misfire Load in the Data List.
ENGINE SPEED DURATION
Idling 8.0 minutes or more
1000 4.5 minutes or more
9. Check whether misfires have occurred by checking DTCs and freeze frame data.
HINT:
Do not turn the ignition switch off until the output DTC(s) and freeze frame data have been
recorded. When the ECM returns to normal mode (default), the stored DTC(s), freeze frame
data and other data are cleared.
10. Record the DTC(s), freeze frame data and misfire counts.
12. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the Clear DTC procedure) .
HINT:
If any DTCs other than misfire DTCs are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
If the misfire does not recur when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, reproduce the conditions
stored in the ECM as freeze frame data.
If the misfire still cannot be reproduced even though the conditions stored in the ECM as freeze
frame data have been reproduced, one of the following factors is considered to be a possible cause
of the problem:
a. There was insufficient fuel in the tank.

b. Improper fuel was used.
c. The spark plugs have been contaminated.
d. The problem requires further diagnosis.
After finishing repairs, check the misfire counts of the cylinders (Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to
Cylinder #4 Misfire Count).
Be sure to confirm that no misfiring cylinder DTCs are stored again by conducting the confirmation
driving pattern after finishing repairs.
When one of Short FT #1 or Long FT #1 in the freeze frame data is outside the range of +/-15%,
the air fuel ratio may be rich (-15% or less) or lean (+15% or more).
When Coolant Temp in the freeze frame data is below 75°C (167°F), the misfires have occurred
only while warming up the engine.
An extremely imbalanced drive wheel which causes body vibration may cause misfire DTCs to be
stored.
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO MISFIRE DTCS)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304 are output A
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and/or P0304 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 and P0304 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs
first.
B GO TO DTC CHART

OK:
PCV valve and hose are correctly connected and are not damaged.

NG
OK
3. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PORT INJECTION)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way /
Port.
(e) Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.
(f) Read the Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count or DTCs displayed on the
Techstream.
Result
MISFIRE COUNT PROCEED TO
Most misfires occur in only 1 or 2 cylinders A
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire counts A
There are no misfire counts B
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER

B MISFIRE COUNT)
A
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (DIRECT INJECTION)
Direct.
Techstream.
Result
MISFIRE COUNT PROCEED

TO
PORT DIRECT
Most misfires occur in only 1 or 2 cylinders Most misfires occur in only 1 or 2 cylinders A
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire 3 cylinders or more have equal misfire
B
counts counts
Most misfires occur in only 1 or 2 cylinders There are no misfire counts C
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire

There are no misfire counts D
counts
B CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

C PORT INJECTION)
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE

D SIDE)
(a) Inspect the spark plug of the misfiring cylinder .

OK
HINT:
NEXT

NG LOW COMPRESSION
OK REPLACE ECM

OK:

NG
OK
9. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (COOLANT TEMP)

(e) Read the Coolant Temp twice, when the engine is both cold and warmed up.
Standard:
With cold engine
Same as ambient air temperature.
With warm engine
Between 75 and 100°C (167 and 212°F)

NG SENSOR
OK
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF, Coolant Temp and Engine
Speed.
(f) Allow the engine to idle until Coolant Temp reaches 75°C (167°F) or higher.
(g) Read MAF with the engine speed at 3000 rpm.

Standard:
Between 13.0 gm/sec and 14.0 gm/sec (shift lever: N, A/C: Off).

CONNECTION)
OK

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL A
NORMAL B
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR

B FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
A ADJUST VALVE TIMING
NG INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY

OK PORT INJECTION)
OK GO TO FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT
14. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER MISFIRE COUNT)
Direct.
Techstream.
Result
PORT DIRECT
There are no misfire counts There are misfire counts A
There are no misfire counts There are no misfire counts B
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER

B MISFIRE COUNT)

A DIRECT INJECTION)
15. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (CYLINDER MISFIRE COUNT)
(b) Start the engine and turn the Techstream on.
(c) Clear DTCs ( ).
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Misfire RPM, Misfire Load,
Cylinder #1 to #4 Misfire Count and Injection Way.
(e) Monitor all of the misfire count values or DTCs and Injection Way displayed on the
Techstream.
Result
MISFIRE COUNTS INJECTION WAY PROCEED TO
There are no misfire counts - A
Most misfires occur in only 1 or 2 cylinders Either B
3 cylinders or more have equal misfire counts Either C
There are misfire counts Direct D
B INSPECT SPARK PLUG
C CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

D DIRECT INJECTION)

(a) Inspect the spark plug of the misfiring cylinder .
OK
HINT:
NEXT

NG LOW COMPRESSION
OK REPLACE ECM

OK:

NG
OK
Standard:
With cold engine
With warm engine

NG SENSOR
OK
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF, Coolant Temp and Engine
Speed.

Standard:

CONNECTION)
OK
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR

23.
CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harnesses
between the mass air flow meter and ECM .
HINT:
NEXT
24. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS
(i) Warm up the engine.
(j) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(k) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(l) Input the DTC: P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304.
(m) Check the DTC judgment result.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL
A
(P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304 output)
NORMAL
B
(No DTC output)
END
B
A33-12 (THA) - C16-1 (THA) Always Below 1 Ω
A33-12 (THA) or C16-1 (THA) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
HINT:
If the results of the inspections performed in steps 15 and 20 indicated no problem, proceed to the
next step without replacing the mass air flow meter.
NEXT
Pattern.
(l) Input the DTC: P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NORMAL
A
(No DTC output)
ABNORMAL
B
(P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303 or P0304 output)
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SVT0NQX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0327,P0328,P0332,P0333: Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low
Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
DTC P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Input (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
DTC P0332 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low Input (Bank 2)
DTC P0333 Knock Sensor 2 Circuit High Input (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
A flat-type knock sensor (non-resonant type) has a structure that can detect vibrations between
approximately 5 kHz and 15 kHz.
Knock sensor is fitted onto the engine block to detect engine knocking.
The knock sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed.
The voltage is generated when the engine block vibrates due to knocking. Any occurrence of engine
knocking can be suppressed by delaying the ignition timing.

NO.
Knock sensor voltage is less than 0.154 V for 1 second

P0327 or more (bank 1). Open or short in knock sensor
(1 trip detection logic) circuit (bank 1)
Knock sensor voltage is more than 4.838 V for 1 Knock sensor (bank 1)
P0328 second or more (bank 1). ECM
Knock sensor voltage is less than 0.154 V for 1 second

P0332 or more (bank 2). Open or short in knock sensor
(1 trip detection logic) circuit (bank 2)
Knock sensor voltage is more than 4.838 V for 1 Knock sensor (bank 2)
P0333 second or more (bank 2). ECM
HINT:
When DTC P0327, P0328, P332 or P0333 is stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe
mode, the ignition timing is delayed to its maximum retardation. Fail-safe mode continues until the
ignition switch is turned off.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the output voltage transmitted by the knock sensor remains low or high for more than 1 second, the
ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the sensor circuit and the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0327: Knock sensor range check (Low voltage) (Bank 1)
P0328: Knock sensor range check (High voltage) (Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0332: Knock sensor range check (Low voltage) (Bank 2)
P0333: Knock sensor range check (High voltage) (Bank 2)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Knock sensor
Duration 1 second


P0327, P0332
Knock sensor voltage Less than 0.154 V
P0328, P0333
Knock sensor voltage More than 4.838 V

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0327 or P0332 is displayed, check the knock sensor circuit for the right bank (bank 1).
If DTC P0328 or P0333 is displayed, check the knock sensor circuit for the left bank (bank 2).
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (+B OF KNOCK SENSOR)

(a) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
Standard Voltage:
C36-1 - C36-2 Ignition switch ON 2.4 to 2.6 V
C34-1 - C34-2 Ignition switch ON 2.4 to 2.6 V

*a
(to Knock Sensor)
*b Bank 1
*c Bank 2

NG KNOCK SENSOR)
OK
2. INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR
(a) Inspect the knock sensor .
NG REPLACE KNOCK SENSOR
OK

Pattern.
(l) Input the DTC: P0327, P0328, P0332, or P0333.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NORMAL
A
(No DTC output)
ABNORMAL
B
(P0327, P0328, P0332, or P0333 output)
B REPLACE ECM
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - KNOCK SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
A34-28 (KNK1) - C36-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A34-17 (KNK2) - C34-2 Always Below 1 Ω

A36-29 (E1) - C36-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-29 (E1) - C34-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A34-28 (KNK1) or C36-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-17 (KNK2) or C34-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C36-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-29 (E1) or C34-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
Pattern.
(l) Input the DTC: P0327, P0328, P0332 or P0333.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NORMAL
A
(No DTC output)
ABNORMAL
B
(P0327, P0328, P0332, or P0333 output)
B REPLACE ECM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000TCW0R7X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0335,P0336: Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (2013
FR-S)
DTC P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit
DTC P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor Range / Performance
DESCRIPTION
The crankshaft position sensor system consists of a No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate and
Magnetoresistive Element (MRE) type sensor. The crankshaft angle sensor plate is installed on the
crankshaft. The crankshaft position sensor generates 30 signals per crankshaft revolution. The ECM uses
the camshaft position signal to distinguish between the cylinders, and uses the crankshaft position signal
to detect the crankshaft position and engine speed.

NO.
Open or short in crankshaft

position sensor circuit
No crankshaft position sensor signal is sent to the ECM
P0335 while cranking for 3 seconds or more.
Crankshaft angle sensor plate
(crankshaft sub-assembly)
ECM

Crankshaft position sensor signal is not 30 counts per 1
Crankshaft angle sensor plate
P0336 revolution of crankshaft.
(crankshaft sub-assembly)
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there is no signal from the crankshaft position sensor despite the crankshaft revolving, the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor and the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0335: Crankshaft position sensor circuit continuity
Related DTCs
P0336: Crankshaft position sensor rationality check
Required sensors/Components (Main) Crankshaft position sensor
Required sensors/Components (Related) VVT sensor
3 seconds: P0335
Duration
10 revolutions: P0336
Immediately: P335
MIL operation

P0335
Starter switch On
P0336

P0335 (Crankshaft position sensor)
not present
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position
sensor (APPS) circuit)

P0335
Crankshaft position sensor signal No signal
P0336
Crankshaft position sensor signal during 1 revolution Not 30

HINT:
If the engine could not be started, crank engine for 10 seconds.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, check for problems by referring
to the engine mechanical section.
The engine speed can be checked by using the Techstream. To perform the check, follow the
procedures below:
a. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.

b. Start the engine.
c. Turn the Techstream on.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
The engine speed may be indicated as zero despite the engine running normally. This is
caused by a lack of NE signals from the crankshaft position sensor. Alternatively, the engine
speed may be indicated as lower than the actual engine speed if the crankshaft position
sensor output voltage is insufficient.
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE SPEED)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(e) Start the engine.
(f) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while the engine is running.
OK:
Correct values are displayed.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
HINT:
To check the engine speed change, display the graph on the Techstream.
If the engine does not start, check the engine speed while cranking.
If the engine speed indicated on the Techstream remains zero (0), there may be an open or short in
the Crankshaft Position sensor circuit.
2. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Inspect the crankshaft position sensor .
NG REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
(b) Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor connector.
C34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+) Always Below 1 Ω

C34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-) Always Below 1 Ω
C34-16 (NE+) or C33-1 (NE+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
C34-27 (NE-) or C33-2 (NE-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR)
(a) Check the crankshaft position sensor installation.

OK:
Sensor is installed correctly.
NG SECURELY REINSTALL SENSOR
OK
5. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT (TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.
OK:
Sensor plate does not have any cracks or deformation.
REPLACE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION

NG SENSOR PLATE
OK
6. REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(a) Replace the crankshaft position sensor .
NEXT
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the tester on.
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC is output A
P0335 or P0336 is output B
HINT:
If the engine does not start, replace the ECM.
B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WBZ0JFX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0340,P0341,P0345,P0346: Camshaft Position Sensor
Circuit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction
Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 1 or

DTC P0341
Single Sensor)
DTC P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit (Bank 2)
DTC P0346 Camshaft Position Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
The intake camshaft VVT sensors consist of a magnet and MRE (Magnetic Resistive Element).
The VVT camshaft drive gear has a sensor plate with 3 teeth on its outer circumference. When the gear
rotates, changes occur in the air gaps between the sensor plate and MRE, which affects the magnetic field.
As a result, the resistance of the MRE material fluctuates. The VVT sensor converts the gear rotation data
to pulse signals, uses the pulse signals to determine the camshaft angle, and sends it to the ECM.
The crank angle sensor generates 30 signals for each engine rotation. Based on combination of the VVT
sensor signals and crankshaft position sensor signals, the ECM detects the crankshaft angle. Then the ECM
uses this data to control fuel injection time and injection timing. Also, based on the crankshaft position
sensor signal, the ECM detects the engine speed.

NO.

Open or short in VVT
logic):
sensor circuit (for intake
No VVT sensor for intake side signal input side of bank 1)
P0340 during crankshaft 1.5 rotations (bank 1). VVT sensor (for intake side
No VVT sensor for intake side signal is sent to of bank 1)
the ECM while cranking for 3 seconds or more Camshaft timing gear
(bank 1). assembly (bank 1)
Jumped tooth of timing
VVT sensor for intake side signal is not 3 during chain for intake camshaft
P0341 crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 1). (bank 1)

Open or short in VVT
logic):
sensor circuit (for intake
No VVT sensor for intake side signal input side of bank 2)
P0345 during crankshaft 1.5 rotations (bank 2). VVT sensor (for intake side
No VVT sensor for intake side signal is sent to of bank 2)
the ECM while cranking for 3 seconds or more Camshaft timing gear
(bank 2). assembly (bank 2)
Jumped tooth of timing
VVT sensor for intake side signal is not 3 during chain for intake camshaft
P0346 crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 2). (bank 2)
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If no signal is transmitted by the VVT sensor despite the engine running, or the rotations of the camshaft
and the crankshaft are not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0340: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT circuit continuity
(Bank 1)
P0341: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT rationality check
(Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0345: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT circuit continuity
(Bank 2)
P0346: Camshaft position sensor - Intake with VVT rationality check
(Bank 2)
VVT sensor (Bank 1 and 2)
(Main)
(Sub)
Once per driving cycle: P340, P0345 (First monitor)

Frequency of Operation Continuous: P340, P0345 (Second monitor)
3 seconds: P340, P0345 (First monitor)

Duration 7 revolutions: P340, P0345 (Second monitor)
2 revolutions: P341, P0346

All
P0340, P0345 (First monitor)
Starter On

P0341, P0346

P0340, P0345 (First monitor)
Intake VVT sensor signal No signal
P0340, P0345 (Second monitor)
Intake VVT sensor signal during 1.5 revolutions No signal
P0341, P0346
Intake VVT sensor signal during 2 revolutions Not 3

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0340 or P0341 is displayed, check the VVT sensor for intake side circuit for the right bank
(bank 1).
If DTC P0345 or P0346 is displayed, check the VVT sensor for intake side circuit for the left bank
(bank 2).

If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, troubleshoot the engine
mechanical system.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE (SENSOR POWER SOURCE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION CONDITION
C12-1 (VV1-) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON
C26-1 (VV2-) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to VVT Sensor for Intake Side)
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE - ECM)
(b) Disconnect the VVT sensor connector.
A34-26 (VV1+) - C12-2 (VV1+) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-34 (VCV) - C12-3 (VC) Always Below 1 Ω

A34-26 (VV1+) or C12-2 (VV1+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-34 (VCV) or C12-3 (VC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE
NG SIDE - ECM)
OK
3. CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE)
(a) Check the VVT sensor installation.

OK:
SECURELY REINSTALL VVT SENSOR FOR

NG INTAKE SIDE
OK
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY (TEETH OF PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the sensor plate.

OK:
Sensor plate teeth do not have any cracks or deformation.
NG ASSEMBLY
OK
OK
6. REPLACE VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE
(a) Replace the VVT sensor .
NEXT
CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0340, P0341, P0345 AND/OR
7.
P0346)
(f) Start the engine.
(g) Turn the Techstream on
Pattern.

(j) Read the DTCs.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
HINT:
B REPLACE ECM
END
A

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE SIDE - EFI MAIN1
9.
RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor for intake side connector.
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C12-1 (VV1-) Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C26-1 (VV2-) Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C12-1 (VV1-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C26-1 (VV2-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR INTAKE
NG SIDE - ECM)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XH40PUX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0351-P0354: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0351 Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DTC P0352 Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DTC P0353 Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DTC P0354 Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
DESCRIPTION
A Direct Ignition System (DIS) is used on this vehicle.
The DIS is a 1-cylinder ignition system in which each cylinder is ignited by one ignition coil and one spark
plug is connected to the end of each secondary wiring. A powerful voltage, generated in the secondary
wiring, is applied directly to each spark plug. The spark current of the spark plugs passes from the ground
electrodes to the center electrode.
The ECM determines the ignition timing and transmits the ignition (IGT) signals to each cylinder. Using the
IGT signal, the ECM turns the power transistor inside the igniter on and off. The power transistor, in turn,
switches on and off the current to the primary coil. When the current to the primary coil is cut off, a
powerful voltage is generated in the secondary coil. This voltage is applied to the spark plugs, causing
them to spark inside the cylinders.
NO.
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND short /

+B short or overheating) from the ignition coil driver IC for No. 1
P0351
ignition coil assembly continuously 10 times or more.
Ignition system
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND short / Open or short in
+B short or overheating) from the ignition coil driver IC for No. 2 IGT circuit (1 to
P0352
ignition coil assembly continuously 10 times or more. 4) between
(1 trip detection logic) ignition coil and
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND short / ECM
+B short or overheating) from the ignition coil driver IC for No. 3 Ignition coil (No.
P0353 1 to No. 4
(1 trip detection logic) cylinder)
ECM
Received diagnostic information (open circuit detected / GND short /
+B short or overheating) from the ignition coil driver IC for No. 4
P0354
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the ECM receives the malfunction signal from the ignition coil driver IC, it interprets this as a fault in the
igniter and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0351: Ignition Coil "A" Primary / Secondary Circuit
P0352: Ignition Coil "B" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Related DTCs
P0353: Ignition Coil "C" Primary / Secondary Circuit
P0354: Ignition Coil "D" Primary / Secondary Circuit
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Igniter
Duration 2.5 seconds (256 msec. X 10 counts)

Ignition dwell time 0.002 seconds or more
Ignition cut Not active

Signal of malfunction from ignition coil driver IC On

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
These DTCs indicate malfunctions relating to the primary circuit.

If DTC P0351 is output, check the No. 1 ignition coil (No. 1 cylinder) circuit.
PROCEDURE

(f) Shuffle the arrangement of the ignition coils (among No. 1 to No. 4 cylinders).
NOTICE:
Do not change the location of the connectors.
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(i) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Same DTC output A
Different ignition coil DTC output B
B REPLACE IGNITION COIL
2. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF IGNITION COIL)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil connectors.
Standard Voltage:

*a
(to Ignition Coil)
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil connectors.
C38-2 (GND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL - ECM)
(b) Disconnect the ignition coil connectors.
A36-21 (IGT1) - C38-3 (IGT1) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-21 (IGT1) or C38-3 (IGT1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-8 (IGT4) or- C27-3 (IGT4) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YTB0FIX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0365,P0366,P0390,P0391: Camshaft Position Sensor "B"
Circuit (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 1)
DTC P0366 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 1)
DTC P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 2)
DTC P0391 Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance (Bank 2)
DESCRIPTION
The exhaust camshaft VVT sensors consist of a magnet and MRE (Magnetic Resistive Element).
The exhaust camshaft has a sensor plate with 2 teeth on its outer circumference.
When the exhaust camshaft rotates, changes occur in the air gaps between the 2 teeth and MRE, which
affects the magnet. As a result, the resistance of the MRE material fluctuates. The VVT sensor converts
the exhaust camshaft rotation data to pulse signals, uses the pulse signals to determine the camshaft
angle, and sends it to the ECM.
The crank angle sensor generates 30 signals for each engine rotation. Based on combination of the VVT
signals and NE signal, the ECM detects the crankshaft angle. Then the ECM uses this data to control fuel
injection time and injection timing. Also, based on the NE signal, the ECM detects the engine speed.

NO.
No VVT sensor for exhaust side signal input during

Open or short in VVT sensor
P0365 crankshaft 7.5 rotations (bank 1).
circuit (for exhaust side of bank
1)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side of
2 VVT sensor for exhaust side signals are not output bank 1)
P0366 during crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 1). Exhaust camshaft (bank 1)
(1 trip detection logic) Jumped tooth of timing chain
ECM
No VVT sensor for exhaust side signal input during

Open or short in VVT sensor
P0390 crankshaft 7.5 rotations (bank 2).
circuit (for exhaust side of bank
2)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side of
2 VVT sensor for exhaust side signals are not output bank 2)
P0391 during crankshaft 2 rotations (bank 2). Exhaust camshaft (bank 2)
(1 trip detection logic) Jumped tooth of timing chain
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If no signal is transmitted by the VVT sensor despite the engine running, or the rotations of the camshaft
and the crankshaft are not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor and the
ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0365: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 1)
P0366: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance
(Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P0390: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit (Bank 2)
P0391: Camshaft Position Sensor "B" Circuit Range / Performance
(Bank 2)
VVT sensor for exhaust side (bank 1 and 2)
(Main)
(Related)
7.5 revolutions: P0365, P0390

Duration
2 revolutions: P0366, P0391


P0365, P0390
Exhaust VVT sensor signal No signal
P0366, P0391
Exhaust VVT sensor signal during 2 revolutions Not 2

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal
ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If DTC P0365 or P0366 is displayed, check the VVT sensor circuit for the right bank (bank 1).
If DTC P0390 or P0391 is displayed, check the VVT sensor circuit for the left bank (bank 2).

If no problem is found by this diagnostic troubleshooting procedure, troubleshoot the engine
mechanical system.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE (SENSOR POWER SOURCE)

(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor for exhaust side connector.
Standard Voltage:
C6-1 (EV1-) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to VVT Sensor for Exhaust Side)
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE - ECM)
(b) Disconnect the VVT sensor connector.
A34-14 (EV1+) - C6-2 (EV1+) Always Below 1 Ω

A34-14 (EV1+) or C6-2 (EV1+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST
NG SIDE - ECM)
OK
3. CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE)
(a) Check the VVT sensor installation.

OK:
SECURELY REINSTALL VVT SENSOR FOR

NG EXHAUST SIDE
OK
4. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSEMBLY (TEETH OF PLATE)
(a) Check the teeth of the sensor plate.

OK:
Sensor plate teeth do not have any cracks or deformation.

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
OK
6. REPLACE VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE
(a) Replace the VVT sensor for exhaust side .
NEXT
7. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P0365, P0366, P0390 OR P0391)
(f) Start the engine.
Pattern.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(j) Read the DTC.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
HINT:
B REPLACE ECM
END
A

NG
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST SIDE - EFI
9.
MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the VVT sensor for exhaust side connector.
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C6-1 (EV1-) Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - C25-1 (EV2-) Always Below 1 Ω

EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C6-1 (EV1-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or C25-1 (EV2-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR FOR EXHAUST
NG SIDE - ECM)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000220S035X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank
1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses sensors mounted in front of and behind the Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) to
monitor its efficiency.
The first sensor, the air fuel ratio sensor, sends pre-catalyst information to the ECM. The second sensor,
the heated oxygen sensor, sends post-catalyst information to the ECM.
In order to detect any deterioration in the three-way catalytic converter, the ECM calculates the oxygen
storage capacity of the three-way catalytic converter. This calculation is based on the voltage output of
the heated oxygen sensor while performing active air fuel ratio control.
The ECM uses the oxygen storage capacity value to determine the state of the three-way catalytic
converter. If any deterioration has occurred, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
This system determines the deterioration of the entire catalyst system (including the front and rear
catalysts), by using the oxygen storage capacity value of the front catalyst, that is more sensitive than the
rear catalyst, as the representative value. Therefore, be sure to replace the front and rear catalysts
together when catalyst replacement is necessary.

NO.

Diagnostic value is more than the Air fuel ratio sensor
standard value under active air-fuel Heated oxygen sensor
P0420
ratio control. Front exhaust manifold assembly (TWC: Front
(2 trip detection logic) catalyst) and front exhaust pipe assembly
(TWC: Rear catalyst)
CATALYST LOCATION
*1 TWC: Front Catalyst *2 TWC: Rear Catalyst
*3 Exhaust Manifold *4 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor
*5 Heated Oxygen Sensor *6 Front Exhaust Pipe Sub-Assembly
*7 Front Exhaust Pipe Assembly *8 Center Exhaust Pipe Assembly
*9 Tail Exhaust pipe Assembly - -
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses diagnostic values to determine deterioration of the catalyst. If the diagnostic value exceeds
a specified value, the catalyst is considered deteriorated, and the DTC is stored.
The diagnostic values are based upon the catalyst monitor value (CM) calculated by changes in the air fuel
ratio sensor lambda and changes in the heated oxygen sensor output voltage, and in the response rate
calculated from the heated oxygen sensor response time.
*: Diagnostic Value = CM X (1 + Response rate)
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0420: Catalyst monitor with sufficient sensor performance for other
Related DTCs
monitors functional check
Required Sensors/Components Air fuel ratio sensor

(Main) Heated oxygen sensor

Mass air flow meter
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
(Related)
Duration 30 to 55 seconds

P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor)
sensor)
sensor)
P0131, P0132 (Air fuel ratio sensor - ECM input voltage)
voltage)
P0137, P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor - a lack of circuit
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs are not
continuity)
present
P0140 (Heated oxygen sensor - output voltage)
P2096, P2097 (Post catalyst fuel trim system)
correlation)
Intake air mass per second 5 g/sec or more, and less than 30 g/sec
Estimated exhaust gas temperature in a

440°C (824°F) or more
catalyst
Elapsed time
(difference between actual and target lambda 1 second
< 0.15)
Vehicle speed 70 km (43.4 mph) or higher
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 engine

Less than 0.02 g/rev
rev.
Heated oxygen sensor output change, lean to

Experienced
rich after fuel cut
Evaporative system monitor Not active
Integrated time of canister purge after engine

35 seconds or more
start
Estimated temperature of secondary oxygen

500°C or higher
sensor element
4800 g or more (varies with estimated ambient

Integrated amount of intake air per second
temperature)
Atmospheric pressure 75.06 kPa [563 mmHg] or more

Diagnostic value* 10 or more
*: Refer to Monitor Description
MONITOR RESULT

higher.
HINT:
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

CONDITIONING FOR SENSOR TESTING
1. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3 [A].

2. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched off, until the engine coolant
temperature stabilizes [B].
3. Run the engine at an engine speed of between 2500 rpm and 3000 rpm for at least 3 minutes
[C].
4. While running the engine at 3000 rpm and 2000 rpm for 2 seconds, check the waveforms of
the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors using the Techstream [D].
HINT:
If either of the voltage outputs of either the air fuel ratio or heated oxygen sensor does not
fluctuate, or either of the sensors makes a noise, the sensor may be malfunctioning.
If the voltage outputs of both the sensors remain lean or rich, the air fuel ratio may be extremely
lean or rich. In such cases, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control
the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor.
If the three-way catalytic converter has deteriorated, the heated oxygen sensor (located behind the
three-way catalytic converter) voltage output fluctuates up and down frequently, even under
normal driving conditions (active air fuel ratio control is not performed).
HINT:
If a malfunction cannot be found when troubleshooting DTC P0420, a lean or rich abnormality may
be the cause. Perform troubleshooting by following the inspection procedure for P0171 (System Too
Lean) and P0172 (System Too Rich).

PROCEDURE
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (Control the Injection Volume)
(b) Start the engine and warm it up.
(d) Run the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume
(f) Perform the Active Test operation with the engine idling (press the RIGHT or LEFT button to
change the fuel injection volume).
(g) Monitor the voltage outputs of the air fuel ratio sensor and heated oxygen sensor (AFS
Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of - 12.5% to +12.5%.
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has a
maximum output delay of approximately 20 seconds.
If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active Test,
the sensor may be malfunctioning.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY INJECTION VOLUME STATUS VOLTAGE

(SENSOR)


Result:
STATUS STATUS A/F CONDITION AND MISFIRE MAIN SUSPECTED TROUBLE PROCEED
AFS O2S A/F AND AREAS TO
VOLTAGE B1S2 HO2 SENSOR
B1S1 CONDITIONS
Three-Way Catalytic
Converter (TWC)
Gas leakage from
exhaust system

Lean Lean/Rich - Air fuel ratio sensor
malfunction
B
Rich Lean/Rich - Air fuel ratio sensor
malfunction

Lean/Rich Lean - Gas leakage from
malfunction
exhaust system
C
Lean/Rich Rich - Gas leakage from
malfunction
exhaust system
Extremely rich or lean

Actual air-fuel ratio May actual air-fuel ratio
Lean Lean
lean occur Gas leakage from
exhaust system
D
Extremely rich or lean
Actual air-fuel ratio actual air-fuel ratio
Rich Rich -
lean Gas leakage from
exhaust system
Lean: During Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage (AFS
Voltage B1S1) is consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage (O2S
B1S2) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor, the AFS Voltage B1S1 is consistently below 2.0
V, and the O2S B1S2 is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor of the Active Test, the output voltage of
the air fuel ratio sensor and heated oxygen sensor alternate correctly.
C CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
D CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK

A

OK:
No gas leaks.
REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST GAS LEAK

NG POINT
OK
4. REPLACE EXHAUST MANIFOLD (TWC: FRONT CATALYST)
(a) Replace the exhaust manifold (TWC: front catalyst) .
REPLACE FRONT EXHAUST PIPE

NEXT ASSEMBLY (TWC: REAR CATALYST)

OK:
No gas leaks.

NG POINT
OK REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

OK:
No gas leaks.
NG POINT
CHECK CAUSE OF EXTREMELY RICH OR

OK LEARN ACTUAL AIR FUEL RATIO
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SWF0AFX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0441: Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge
Flow (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0441 Evaporative Emission Control System Incorrect Purge Flow
DTC SUMMARY
DTC MONITORING MALFUNCTION DETECTION TROUBLE AREA DETECTION DETECTION
NO. ITEM CONDITION TIMING LOGIC
While engine running, following

conditions successively met:
The pressure
difference between
non-purge and purge
Purge valve
is less than 0.075 kPa
Purge line
(gauge) [1 mmHg
Connector/wire
(gauge)]. While
harness (Purge
P0441 Purge flow Regardless of forced engine 2 trip
valve - ECM)
vent valve on (close) running
ECM
and purge being
Leak from
carried out, the
EVAP system
pressure difference
between non-purge
and purge is less than
0.075 kPa (gauge) [1
mmHg (gauge)].
DESCRIPTION
The description can be found in EVAP (Evaporative Emission) System .
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The purge flow monitor runs while the engine is running. The purge flow monitor consists of 2 monitors. The
1st monitor is conducted every time and the 2nd monitor is activated if necessary.
The 1st monitor
While the engine is running and the purge valve is on (open), the ECM monitors the purge
flow by measuring the EVAP pressure change. If the variation in the pressure is more than
threshold, the ECM begins the 2nd monitor.
The 2nd monitor
The vent valve is turned on (closed) and the EVAP pressure is then measured. If the variation
in the pressure is more than threshold, the ECM interprets this as the purge valve being stuck
closed, and illuminates the MIL and stores DTC P0441 (2 trip detection logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTC P0441: Incorrect purge flow in ELCM functional check
Purge valve
Canister pump module
26 seconds: 1st stage

Duration
21 seconds: 2nd stage

All
1st Stage
2nd Stage
Vehicle speed 30 km/h (18.6 mph) or higher
Lambda 0.76 to 1.25
Ambient temperature -25.0°C (-13°F) or higher
Short-term fuel trim 0.9 or higher

1st Stage
Pressure without purge - Pressure with purge Less than 0.075 kPa(gauge) [1 mmHg(gauge)]
2nd Stage
Pressure without purge - Pressure with purge Less than 0.666 kPa(gauge) [5 mmHg(gauge)]
MONITOR RESULT

3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure) .
6. Start the engine and wait 15 minutes or more.
HINT:

9. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All readiness.

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE You should perform driving pattern after confirming DTC enabling
conditions

N/A Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached
ECU memory limit
HINT:

If the judgment result shows INCOMPLETE or N/A, perform the following procedure.
NOTICE:
The Evaporative System Check (Automatic Mode) consists of 5 steps performed automatically
by the Techstream. It takes a maximum of approximately 24 minutes.
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full
because the cut-off valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35°C (95°F) or higher, a large amount of vapor forms
and any check results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System Check,
keep the fuel temperature below 35°C (95°F).
15. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Automatic
Mode.
16. After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for All Readiness by entering the following
menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

N/A Number of DTCs which do not fulfill DTC preconditions has reached
ECU memory limit
HINT:

19. If the judgment result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no pending DTC is output, perform a universal
trip and check for permanent DTCs .
HINT:

PROCEDURE
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (ACTIVATE THE VSV FOR EVAP
1.
CONTROL)
(a) Connect a Techstream to the DLC3.

(b) Disconnect the vacuum hose (canister side) from the
purge valve.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active

Test / Activate the VSV for EVAP Control.
(f) When the purge valve is operated using the Techstream,

check whether the port of the purge valve applies suction to
your finger.
OK:
TESTER OPERATION TESTER OPERATION
VSV ON Purge valve port applies suction to finger
VSV OFF Purge valve port applies no suction to finger
*a Purge valve ON
*b Purge valve OFF
NG REPLACE PURGE VALVE
OK
2. INSPECT EVAP LEAK PART
(a) Check for leakage from EVAP system (hose, disconnection, cracks, etc.).
OK:
No leakages in the EVAP purge line
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE
OK
3. REPLACE PURGE VALVE
(a) Replace the purge valve .

PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTOMATIC
NEXT MODE)
4. REPAIR OR REPLACE EVAP PURGE LINE
NEXT
NOTICE:
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full because the
cut-off valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35°C (95°F) or more, a large amount of vapor forms and any
check results become inaccurate. When performing an Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel
temperature below 35°C (95°F).
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Automatic
Mode.
(f) After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for pending DTCs by entering the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
EVAP system DTCs are output A
No DTCs output
B
(No pending DTCs output)
END
B
A
6. REPLACE ECM
NEXT
NOTICE:
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full because the
cut-off valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check / Automatic
Mode.
HINT:
END
NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000012MC083X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0451-P0453: Evaporative Emission Control System
Pressure Sensor Range / Performance (2013 FR-S)
Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Range /

DTC P0451
Performance
DTC P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch Low Input
DTC P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor / Switch High Input
DTC SUMMARY
DTC MONITORING MALFUNCTION TROUBLE AREA DETECTION TIMING DETECTION
NO. ITEM DETECTION LOGIC
CONDITION
Difference
The difference
between
between the
canister
canister pressure EVAP
pressure
sensor output monitoring
sensor output
value and the Canister pump (ignition
P0451 value and 2 trip
manifold absolute module switch off)
manifold
pressure sensor Connector/wire Engine
absolute
output value with harness running
pressure
the ignition switch (Canister
sensor output
ON is large. pump module
value
- ECM)
EVAP system
Ignition
hose (pipe
Canister EVAP pressure switch ON
from air inlet
pressure sensor less than EVAP
P0452 port to 1 trip
sensor low 0.973 V for 1 monitoring
canister pump
input second. (ignition
module,
switch off)
canister filter,
fuel tank vent
hose) Ignition
Canister EVAP pressure ECM switch ON
pressure sensor more than EVAP
P0453 1 trip
sensor high 4.095 V for 1 monitoring
input second. (ignition
switch off)
HINT:
The canister pressure sensor is built into the canister pump module.
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1. DTC P0451: Difference between canister pressure sensor output value and manifold absolute
pressure sensor output value
If the difference between the atmospheric pressure calculated using the canister pressure
sensor and that calculated using the MAP sensor exceeds the specified value, then the
ECM determines there is a canister pressure sensor abnormality. The ECM then
illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2 trip detection logic).
2. DTC P0452: Canister pressure sensor voltage low
If the canister pressure sensor voltage output (pressure) is below 0.973 V: 51.71
kPa(abs) [388 mmHg(abs)], the ECM interprets this as an open or short circuit in the
canister pressure sensor or its circuit, and stops the EVAP system monitor. The ECM then
3. DTC P0453: Canister pressure sensor voltage high
If the canister pressure sensor voltage output (pressure) is 4.095 V: 108.99 kPa(abs)
[818 mmHg(abs)] or more, the ECM interprets this as an open or short circuit in the
canister pressure sensor or its circuit, and stops the EVAP system monitor. The ECM then
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0451: ELCM pressure sensor rationality
Related DTC P0452: ELCM pressure sensor range check (Low voltage)
P0453: ELCM pressure sensor range check (High voltage)
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Canister pump module


Duration
1 second: P0452, P0453

MIL Operation
Immediately: P0452, P0453

All
P0451
Ignition switch On
Elapsed time after ignition switch ON 0.5 to 60 seconds
Soak time 60 seconds or more
ELCM vacuum pump Not active
ELCM switching valve Off (Open)
Purge control Not active
P0452, P0453
Either of the following conditions is met: A or B
A. Ignition switch On
B. Activated by soak timer Satisfied

P0451
ELCM pressure at ignition switch ON - MAP at ignition switch ON Higher than 4.7329 KPa (36 mmHg)
P0452
ELCM pressure sensor output voltage [ELCM pressure] Less than 0.973 V [51.71 KPa (388 mmHg)]
P0453
ELCM pressure sensor output voltage [ELCM pressure] More than 4.095 V [108.99 KPa (818 mmHg)]

ELCM pressure sensor output voltage [ELCM 1.016 to 4.087 V [52.49 to 108.85 KPa (394 to 817
pressure] mmHg)]
MONITOR RESULT

NOTICE:
Do not perform the Evaporative System Check when the fuel tank is more than 90% full because
the cut-off valve may be closed, making the fuel tank leak check unavailable.
When the temperature of the fuel is 35°C (95°F) or higher, a large amount of vapor forms and any
check results become inaccurate. When performing the Evaporative System Check, keep the fuel

3. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Intake Air.
4. Check that the intake air temperature is between 4.4 and 35°C (40 and 95°F).
8. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check /
Automatic Mode.
9. After the Evaporative System Check is completed, check for All Readiness by entering the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All readiness.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

12. If the judgment result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no pending DTC is output, perform a
universal trip and check for permanent DTCs .
HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
When a vehicle is brought into the workshop, leave it as it is. Do not change the vehicle condition.
For example, do not tighten the fuel cap.
Do not disassemble the canister pump module.
The Techstream is required to conduct the following diagnostic troubleshooting procedure.
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM DTC AND EVAP PRESSURE
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON (do not start the engine).
(e) Read DTCs.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Vapor Pressure Pump.
(g) Read the EVAP (Evaporative Emission) pressure displayed on the Techstream.
Result
DISPLAY (DTC TEST RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

OUTPUT) TO
Canister pressure sensor

P0451 - C
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
Wire harness/connector (ECM -

Below 75 kPa(abs) [563 Canister pressure sensor)
P0452 A
mmHg(abs)] Canister pressure sensor
Short in ECM circuit

Higher than 110 kPa(abs) Canister pressure sensor)
P0453 B
[825 mmHg(abs)] Canister pressure sensor
Open in ECM circuit
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER

B PUMP MODULE - ECM)
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM

C (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)

Result
TESTER CONDITION SPECIFIED SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

CONNECTION CONDITION TO

Canister pressure sensor)
Below 10 Ω A
Short in canister pressure sensor
A35-20 (PPMP) - circuit
Always
Body ground
10 kΩ or
Canister pressure sensor) B
higher
Short in ECM circuit
READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM

B (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)
(a) Disconnect the canister pump module connector.
Result
TESTER CONDITION SPECIFIED SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

CONNECTION CONDITION TO
10 kΩ or
Short in canister pressure sensor circuit A
A35-20 (PPMP) - higher
Always
Body ground Short in wire harness/connector (ECM -
Below 10 Ω B
Canister pressure sensor)

A CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - ECM)
B REPLACE ECM
G8-8 - Body ground Always 100 Ω or less
Standard Voltage:
G8-6 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
G8-7 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
Result
TEST RESULT SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED

TO
Voltage and resistance within standard

Open in canister pressure sensor circuit A
ranges
Voltage and/or resistance outside Open in wire harness/connector (ECM - Canister

B
standard ranges pressure sensor)

*a
B REPLACE ECM
A
5. REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE

NEXT (AFTER REPAIR)
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE -

6.
ECM)

NEXT (AFTER REPAIR)
7. REPLACE ECM

NEXT (AFTER REPAIR)
8. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Atmosphere Pressure.
(e) Compares Atmosphere Pressure displayed with the Techstream to the actual atmosphere
pressure.
Result
RESULT PROCEED
TO
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is less than 27 kPa (abs) [203 mmHg
A
(abs)].
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is 27 kPa (abs) [203 mmHg (abs)] or
B
more.
B REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE
9. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MAP)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAP.
(e) Compares the MAP displayed with the Techstream to the actual atmosphere pressure.
Result
RESULT PROCEED
TO
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is less than 27 kPa (abs) [203 mmHg
A
(abs)].
Difference with the actual atmosphere pressure is 27 kPa (abs) [203 mmHg (abs)] or
B
more.
REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

B SENSOR
A CHECK INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

NEXT (AFTER REPAIR)

NEXT (AFTER REPAIR)
12. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (AFTER REPAIR)
(h) Perform the Evaporative System Check using the Techstream, referring to the Confirmation
Driving Pattern.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
(j) Input the DTC: P0451, P0452 or P0453.
(k) Check the DTC judgment result.

Result
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

memory limit
END
NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SWH09OX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0455,P0456,P1451,P2404: Evaporative Emission Control
System Leak Detected (Gross Leak) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0455 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Gross Leak)
DTC P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak)
DTC P1451 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Range/Performance
Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Sense Circuit Range /

DTC P2404
Performance
DTC SUMMARY
Leak detection pump creates

Fuel cap
negative pressure (vacuum) in
(loose)
EVAP system and EVAP system
Leakage
pressure is measured. Reference
from While
EVAP gross pressure is measured at start and
P0455 EVAP ignition 2 trip
leak end of leak check.
line switch off
If stabilized pressure is higher than
(canister
[second reference pressure x
- fuel
0.377], ECM determines that EVAP
tank)
system has a large leak.
Leakage
from
EVAP
line
(purge
Leak detection pump creates valve -
negative pressure (vacuum) in canister)
EVAP system and EVAP system Leakage
pressure is measured. Reference from While
EVAP small pressure measured at start and canister
P0456 ignition 2 trip
leak end of leak check. pump switch on
If stabilized pressure is higher than module
second reference pressure, ECM Leakage
determines that EVAP system has from fuel
a small leak. tank
Leakage
from
canister
Blockage
in EVAP
line
(canister
- fuel
tank)
Blockage
in EVAP While
A blockage in the EVAP system
P1451 EVAP clogged line ignition 2 trip
pipe is detected.
(purge switch on
valve -
canister)
Blockage
in
canister
pump
module
Leak detection pump ending

pressure is more than the
threshold.
The difference between the leak Leak While
EVAP
P2404 detection pump highest pressure detection ignition 2 trip
malfunction
and lowest pressure is the pump switch on
threshold value or more.
The vent valve abnormality is
detected.
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
5 hours*1 after the ignition switch is turned off, the leak detection pump creates negative pressure
(vacuum) in the EVAP (Evaporative Emission) system. The ECM monitors for leaks and actuator
malfunctions based on the EVAP pressure.
HINT:
*: If the enable conditions are not satisfied 5 hours after the ignition switch is turned off, the monitor
check starts 2 hours later. If the enable conditions are still not satisfied 7 hours after the ignition
switch is turned off, the monitor check starts 2.5 hours later.
SEQUENCE OPERATION DURATION
A Leak detection pump monitor 300 seconds
B First reference pressure measurement 40 seconds
C Vent valve monitor 12 seconds
D Pipe clogging monitor 900 seconds

E Second reference pressure measurement 40 seconds
*: If only a small amount of fuel is in the fuel tank, it takes longer for the EVAP pressure to stabilize.
*1 Purge valve: OFF (closed) *2 Purge valve: ON (open)
*3 Vent Valve: OFF (vent) *4 Vent Valve: ON (closed)
*5 Leak Detection Pump: OFF *6 Leak Detection Pump: ON
*7 Reference Orifice (0.02 inch) *8 Canister Pressure Sensor
*9 Canister *10 Fuel Tank
*11 Canister Pump Module *12 Canister Filter
Operation A: Operation B, E:
*a *b
Atmospheric Pressure Measurement Reference Pressure Measurement
Operation C: Operation D:
*c *d
EVAP System Pressure Measurement Purge valve Monitor
*e Atmospheric Pressure *f Negative Pressure
(a) P0455: EVAP (Evaporative Emission) gross leak
In operation C, the leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP
system and the EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized system pressure is
higher than [second reference pressure x 0.377] (near atmospheric pressure), the ECM
determines that the EVAP system has a large leak, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2
trip detection logic).
(b) P0456: EVAP very small leak
In operation C, the leak detection pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP
system and the EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized system pressure is
higher than second reference pressure, the ECM determines that the EVAP system has a
small leak, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2 trip detection logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0455: Evaporative system functional check (0.040 inch leak)
P0456: Evaporative system functional check (0.020 inch leak)
Related DTC P1451: Evaporative system functional check (Pipe clogging)
P2404: Evaporative system functional check (ELCM
performance)
Purge valve
-
(Related)
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle: P0455, P0456, P1451 and P2404
Duration 23 minutes

All
P0455, P0456, P1451, P2404
Soak time 5, 7 or 9.5 hours
Engine coolant temperature 4.4 to 45°C (39.9 to 113°F)
Intake air temperature 4.4°C (39.9°F) or higher
75.06 to 110 kPa(abs) [563 to 825

Atmospheric pressure
mmHg(abs)]
EVAP density learning during previous driving cycle Completed
Learning value of EVAP density during purge in previous

Less than 0.2
driving cycle
Integrated value of purge airflow during previous driving 3000 or higher (varies with engine coolant
cycle temperature)
EVAP leak check diagnostic Not completed

P0455
Tank pressure Higher than [reference pressure x 0.377 - (-45.5)]
P0456
Tank pressure Less than (reference pressure x 0.377 - (-45.5))
P1451
Time it takes to become [reference pressure for functional check - 0.941 kPa or 4.9726 Less than 27
kPa [7 mmHg or 37 mmHg]] seconds
P2404
Either of following conditions met A, B, C or D
A: Operation A ending pressure -0.224 kPa [-2 mmHg] or higher
B. Maximum pressure - minimum

0.314 kPa [2 mmHg] or higher
pressure at operation B and E
Less than -3.9717 kPa [-30 mmHg] or higher than -0.9419

C. Ending pressure at operation B and E
kPa [-7 mmHg] (varies with atmospheric pressure)
D. Operation C ending pressure -

Less than 0.224 kPa [2 mmHg]
reference pressure for functional check
MONITOR RESULT
NOTICE:

3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure).
Automatic Mode.
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

PROCEDURE
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0455, P0456, P1451 or P2404 is output A
DTC P0455, P0456, P1451 or P2404 and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
A GO TO EVAP SYSTEM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VSO0FWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0458,P0459: Evaporative Emission System Purge Control
Valve Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low
DTC P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
To reduce hydrocarbon emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through a charcoal canister
to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders.
The ECM changes the duty signals to the purge valve (Vacuum Switching Valve for Purge Control) so that
the intake amount of hydrocarbon emissions is appropriate for the driving conditions (engine load, engine
speed, vehicle speed, etc.) after the engine is warmed up.

NO.
The voltage of purge valve circuit is low for 2.5 seconds

P0458 or more. Open or short in purge valve
(2 trip detection logic) circuit
The voltage of purge valve circuit is high for 2.5 purge valve
P0459 seconds or more. ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the output terminal voltage when the vacuum switching valve assembly is actuated. By
turning the FET in the ECM on and off, the purge valve assembly is subject to duty control. If the ECM
control value (drive signal) and the output terminal voltage duty cycle continue to not match, then the
ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the vacuum switching valve circuit, illuminates the MIL, and stores
the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0458: Solenoid valve for purge control functional check
Related DTCs
P0459: Solenoid valve for purge control functional check
Required sensors/Components (Main) Purge valve
Required sensors/Components (Related) -

All
P0458
After engine starting 1 second or more
Purge valve control duty ratio Less than 75%
P0459
After engine starting 1 second or more
Purge valve control duty ratio More than 25%

P0458
Drain voltage of FET for purge valve Less than battery voltage X 0.38
P0459
Current of FET for purge valve More than 3.5 A

higher.
HINT:
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records the engine condition when
malfunctions are detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle
was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich,
and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1.
CONTROL)
(a) Connect a Techstream to the DLC3.

(b) Disconnect the vacuum hose (canister side) from the purge valve.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Activate the VSV for EVAP
Control.
(f) When the purge valve is operated using the Techstream, check whether the port of the purge
valve applies suction to your finger.
OK:
VSV ON Purge valve port applies suction to finger
VSV OFF Purge valve port applies no suction to finger
*a Purge valve ON
*b Purge valve OFF
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE

B VALVE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Inspect the purge valve .
OK
3. INSPECT PURGE VALVE (POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the purge valve connector.
Standard Voltage:
d1-1 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Purge valve)
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE VALVE - ECM)
A36-11 (PRG) - d1-2 Always Below 1 Ω

A36-11 (PRG) or d1-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC is output A
HINT:
B REPLACE ECM


NG
OK
7. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE VALVE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
d1-1 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω
d1-1 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PF60PCX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0461-P0463: Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range /
DTC P0461 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Range / Performance
DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit Low
DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor "A" Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The signal output from the sender gauge assembly installed in the fuel tank is converted to a CAN
communication signal using the combination meter assembly, and this signal is input into the ECM as a
remaining fuel signal.

NO.
Compared with the estimated fuel consumption, the actual variation

Fuel sender
P0461 in the fuel sender gauge assembly signal is small.
gauge
assembly
Fuel sender gauge assembly voltage is less than 0.35 V for 2.5 Fuel sender
P0462 seconds or more. gauge
(2 trip detection logic) assembly No. 2
Combination
Fuel sender gauge assembly voltage is higher than 7.183 V for 1 meter
P0463 second or more. assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM uses the fuel sender gauge to monitor the amount of furl. There are several checks that the ECM
performs to confirm the proper operation of the fuel sender gauge.
P0461
If the fuel sender gauge variation is lower than the estimated fuel consumption calculated from the
fuel injection quantity and the engine speed, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the fuel
sender gauge, and stores the DTC.
P0462, P0463
If an open or short in the fuel sender gauge signal line is detected, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the fuel sender gauge, and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0461: Fuel level sensor rationality check
Related DTCs P0462: Fuel level sensor range check (Low voltage)
P0463: Fuel level sensor range check (High voltage)
Fuel sender gauge assembly

Fuel sender gauge assembly No. 2
Required Sensors/Components (Related) Combination meter assembly
Immediately: P0461
Duration 2.5 seconds: P0462
1 second: P0463

P0461

sensor)
P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs P1160 (Throttle return spring)
not stored P2101, P2102 (Throttle actuator control motor)
(APPS) circuit)
U0073, U0155, U0423 (CAN system)
Fuel cut Not active
Integrated amount of intake air mass 165375 g or more
P0462, P0463
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored U0073, U0155, U0423 (CAN system)

P0461
Maximum fuel level - Minimum fuel level Less than 5.2%
P0462
Fuel sender gauge voltage (Resistance) Less than 0.35 V (10.5 Ω)
P0463
Fuel sender gauge voltage (Resistance) More than 7.183 V (432 Ω)

Fuel sender gauge voltage (Resistance) 0.398 to 7.051 V (12 to 416 Ω)

P0461
higher.
7. Drive the vehicle and consume more than 30 liters (31.7 US qts) of the fuel.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

P0462, P0463

higher .
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0461, P0462 or P0463 is output A
DTC P0461, P0462 or P0463 and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
A GO TO FUEL GAUGE MALFUNCTION

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000012ME0EVX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A"
DESCRIPTION
Vehicles, which are equipped with ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), detect the vehicle speed using the skid
control ECU (brake actuator assembly) and wheel speed sensor. The wheel speed sensor monitors the
wheel rotation speed and sends a signal to the skid control ECU. The skid control ECU converts the wheel
speed signal into a 4-pulse signal and transmits it to the ECM. The ECM determines the vehicle speed
based on the frequency of the pulse signal.

NO.
Open or short in wheel

The vehicle speed signal from the driving wheels is 300 km/h speed signal circuit
P0500 or more for 2.5 seconds or more. Skid control ECU (Brake
Speed sensor
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If the driving wheel speed signal input from the skid control ECU indicates speed of 300 km/h (186.42
mph) or more, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction in the speed signal circuit. The ECM then
illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0500: Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) range check
Speed sensor
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Combination meter
Skid control ECU

Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present U0073, U0122, U0416 (CAN system)


Vehicle speed More than 300 km/h (186.42 mph)

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (VEHICLE SPEED)
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Vehicle Speed.
(d) Drive the vehicle.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Values displayed on Techstream and speedometer display not equal A
Values displayed on Techstream and speedometer display equal B
A
2. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM)
(d) Enter the following menus: Chassis / ABS/VSC/TRAC / Trouble Codes.
(e) Read DTCs .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC is output A
No DTCs are output B
B GO TO VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM
Pattern.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
B REPLACE ECM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T8M0MVX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0506,P0507: Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than
Expected (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower than Expected
DTC P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher than Expected
DESCRIPTION
The idling speed is controlled by the ETCS (Electronic Throttle Control System). The ETCS is comprised of:
1) the one valve type throttle body; 2) the throttle actuator, which operates the throttle valve; 3) the
throttle position sensor, which detects the opening angle of the throttle valve; 4) the accelerator pedal
position sensor, which detects the accelerator pedal position; and 5) the ECM, which controls the ETCS.
Based on the target idling speed, the ECM controls the throttle actuator to provide the proper throttle
valve opening angle.

NO.
The engine speed is not close to the target engine speed for 30 seconds
Electronic
P0506 or more (Actual engine speed - target engine speed) < -100 rpm).
throttle
control
system
Intake
The engine speed is not close to the target engine speed for 30 seconds system
P0507 or more (Actual engine speed - target engine speed) >= 200 rpm). PCV hose
(2 trip detection logic) connections
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the idling speed and idling air flow volume to conduct Idle Speed Control (ISC). The
ECM determines that the ISC system is malfunctioning if the difference between the target engine idling
speed and actual engine idling speed exceeds the threshold for 30 seconds or more.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0506: Idle speed control (ISC) functional check
Related DTCs
P0507: Idle speed control (ISC) functional check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Electronic throttle control system

Required Sensors/Components (Related) Engine coolant temperature sensor
Speed sensor

Duration 30 seconds

P0068, P0107, P0108 (Manifold absolute pressure
(MAP) sensor)
P0117, P0118, P0125 (Engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor)
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223 (Throttle position
sensor)
P0131, P0132 (Air fuel ratio sensor - ECM input
voltage)
voltage)
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored P0461, P0462, P0463 (Fuel level sensor (FL))
P0851, P0852 (Neutral position switch)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal
position sensor (APPS) circuit)
correlation)
Atmospheric pressure 75.06 kPa [563 mmHg] or more
Closed control in ISC Active
Lambda 0.81 to 1.1
Elapsed time after A/C switch OFF ←→ ON 5.1 seconds or more
Elapsed time after changing intake manifold

5.1 seconds or more
pressure =< 4 kPa (30 mmHg)
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 mph)
Elapsed time after neutral switch OFF ←→ ON 5.1 seconds or more

P0506
Actual engine speed - Target engine speed Less than -100 rpm
P0507
Actual engine speed - Target engine speed More than 200 rpm

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.
a. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [A].
c. Idle the engine for 10 minutes or more [B].

HINT:

DISPLAY
NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

HINT:
The following conditions may also cause DTC DTC P0506 or P0507 to be stored:
a. The floor carpet overlapping slightly onto the accelerator pedal, causing the accelerator
pedal to be slightly depressed and therefore the throttle valve position to be slightly
open.
b. The accelerator pedal being not fully released.
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [Engine Speed, ISC Feedback Value and ISC Learning Value]
.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0506 AND P0507)

(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P0506 or P0507 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P0506 or P0507 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART

OK:

NG
OK

OK:
No leaks from the intake system.

NG
OK
(a) Check the throttle with motor body assembly condition .

OK:
Throttle valve is not contaminated with foreign objects and moves smoothly.
REPLACE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
5. CONFIRM WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS
(d) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC is output B
END
B

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T8P0ZQX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0560: System Voltage (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0560 System Voltage
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The battery supplies electricity to the ECM even when the ignition switch is off. This power allows the ECM
to store data such as DTC history, freeze frame data and fuel trim values. If the battery voltage falls
below a minimum level, the memory is cleared and the ECM determines that there is a malfunction in the
power supply circuit. When the engine is next started, the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.

NO.
Open in back up
power source
Back up power source terminal voltage is 3.5 V or less with the
circuit
P0560 engine running for 2.5 seconds or more.
Battery
Battery terminals
ECM
HINT:
If DTC P0560 is stored, the ECM does not store other DTCs or the data stored in the ECM is partly
cleared.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0560: Back-up power supply for memory of ECM functional
Related DTCs
check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) ECM
-
(Related)


Voltage of back-up power Less than 3.5 V

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
After turning ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable from
the negative (-) battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from
the negative (-) battery terminal notices before proceeding with work .
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - BATTERY)
NOTICE:
(a) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal .
(b) Disconnect the cable from the positive (+) battery terminal.
A33-2 (BATT) - Battery positive (+) terminal Always Below 1 Ω
A33-2 (BATT) or Battery positive (+) terminal - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
2. INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
(a) Inspect the charging system .
REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING

NG PARTS
OK
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in the Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(i) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
B REPLACE ECM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000W950HAX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0604-P0606,P060A,P060B,P062F: Internal Control Module
Random Access Memory (RAM) Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error
DTC P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error
DTC P0606 ECM / PCM Processor
DTC P060A Internal Control Module Monitoring Processor Performance
DTC P060B Internal Control Module A/D Processing Performance
DTC P062F Internal Control Module EEPROM Error
DESCRIPTION
P0604
The ECM continuously monitors its internal memory status. This self-check ensures that the ECM
functioning properly. It is diagnosed by internal "mirroring" of the main CPU and sub CPU to detect the
Random Access Memory (RAM) errors. If outputs from these CPUs are different and deviate from the
standard, the ECM stores the DTC.
P0605
The ECM continuously monitors its internal memory status. This self-check ensures that the ECM
functioning properly. It is diagnosed by internal "mirroring" of the main CPU and sub CPU to detect the
Read Only Memory (ROM) errors. If outputs from these CPUs are different and deviate from the standard,
the ECM stores the DTC.
P0606
The ECM continuously monitors its main and sub CPUs. This self-check ensures that the ECM is functioning
properly. If outputs from the CPUs are different and deviate from the standard, the ECM stores the DTC.
P060A
The main CPU and sub CPU of the ECM perform data communication between each other. The main CPU
monitors the communications and WDC pulses from the sub CPU. If the malfunction is detected, the ECM
stores the DTC.
P060B
If a communication error occurs in the ECM, the ECM stores the DTC.
P062F
The ECM monitors its internal operation. If the ECM detects an internal malfunction, the ECM stores the
DTC.
DTC DTC SETTING CONDITION TROUBLE AREA
ECM internal error (RAM)

P0604 ECM
ECM internal error (ROM)

P0605 ECM
ECM internal error (Processor)

P0606 ECM
ECM internal error (Monitoring processor)

P060A ECM
ECM internal error (A/D processor)

P060B ECM
ECM internal error (EEPROM)

P062F ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0604: RAM in ECM functional check
P0605: ROM in ECM functional check
P0606: Control module processor functional check
Related DTCs P060A: Internal control module monitoring processor performance
functional check
P060B: Internal control A/D processing performance functional check
P062F: Internal control EEPROM error functional check
ECM
(Main)
-
(Related)
Continuous: P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B

Once per driving cycle: P062F
0.512 seconds: P0604, P0605

2 times: P0606 (Instruction check) (Case 1)
0.512 seconds: P0606 (Instruction check) (Case 2)
0.504 seconds: P0606 (Software flow check)
0.048 seconds: P0606 (Output driver communication check)
Duration 0.048 seconds: P0606 (CAN register check)
0.024 seconds: P060A (Disable function observation IC)
0.016 seconds: P060A (Malfunction of observation IC calculation)
0.2 seconds: P060A (Observation IC resister monitoring)
0.2 seconds: P060B
2 driving cycles: P062F

All
P0604, P0605
P0606 (Instruction Check) (Case 1)
ETCS relay On
P0606 (Software Monitor Check)
ETCS relay On
P060A (Disable Function Observation IC)
Main throttle sensor circuit continuity No failure
Sub throttle sensor circuit continuity No failure
Throttle sensor rationality check No failure
Microcomputer disable Off
Observation IC disable On
P060A (Malfunction of Observation IC Calculation)
Microcomputer disable On
P060A (Observation IC Resister Monitoring)

P060B

P0604
Setting value can be written in all RAM area, and the values can be read correctly Fail to read correctly
P0605
Comparing Check sum data on ROM with Calculated sum data Not equal
Instruction error Detect
Calculated data through CPU and FPU (Floating point number Processing Unit) are compared Not
with expectation equal
P0606 (Software Flow Check)
Software flow error Detect
P0606 (Output Driver Communication Check)
Driver IC communication Malfunction
Port voltage of driver IC check Low
P0606 (CAN Resister Check)
Comparison of data written to CAN register with data read from the CAN register Not equal
P060A (Disable Function Observation IC)
Throttle angle - Memory throttle angle when monitoring More than 1.6%
P060A (Malfunction of Observation IC Calculation)
TAC disable request from observation IC Not detected
P060A (Observation IC Resister Monitoring)
Comparison of data written to observation IC register with data read from the observation IC Not
register equal
P060B
A. A/D voltages for monitoring - 0 at target A/D voltages 0 V More than 0.01953 V
B. 5 - A/D voltages for monitoring at target A/D voltages 5 V More than 4.97925 V
P062F (Observation IC Resister Monitoring)
Fail writing to EEPROM Yes

4. Turn the Techstream off.
5. Turn the ignition switch off.
6. Disconnect the Techstream.
7. Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and wait for 1 minute.
8. Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
11. Wait 16 seconds or more.
13. Read the pending DTCs.
HINT:

15. Input the DTC: P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B or P062F.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:
HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. The ECM records vehicle and driving condition information
as freeze frame data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help
determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air fuel ratio
was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
PROCEDURE
1. READ DTC OUTPUT (DTC P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B AND/OR P062F)
(f) Turn the Techstream off.
(g) Disconnect the Techstream.
(h) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and wait for 1 minute.
(i) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(j) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.
(k) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(l) Turn the Techstream on.
(m) Wait for 16 seconds or more.
(n) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(o) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC DTC P0604, P0605, P0606, P060A, P060B or P062F is output B

B REPLACE ECM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000TA0123X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0616,P0617: Starter Relay Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0616 Starter Relay Circuit Low
DTC P0617 Starter Relay Circuit High
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
While the engine is being cranked, battery voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. If the ECM
detects the starter control (STA) signal after the engine is started, it determines that there is a
malfunction in the STA circuit. The ECM then illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
Starter system
No starter signal is input when engine started.
P0616 ST relay circuit
ECM
Starter system
Starter signal remains input after engine started.
P0617 ST relay circuit
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0616: Starter switch circuit without push start system functional
check
Related DTCs
P0617: Starter switch circuit without push start system functional
check
ST relay
Park/neutral position switch assembly
(Main)
Ignition or starter switch assembly
Required Sensors/Components Speed sensor

Immediately: P0616
Duration
60 seconds: P0617

P0616
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored P0500 (Vehicle speed sensor (VSS))
Engine condition Stop to Run
Vehicle speed Less than 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
P0617
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored P0500 (Vehicle speed sensor (VSS))
Engine condition Run

P0616
Starter signal 1 Off
P0617
Starter signal 1 On

6. Idle the engine for 1 second or more.
HINT:


DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal
conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to Starter Signal Circuit .
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
The following troubleshooting flowchart is based on the premise that the engine can be cranked
normally.
If the engine does not crank, proceed to Problem Symptoms Table .

PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STARTER SIGNAL, STARTER SWITCH)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Starter Signal and Starter
Switch.
(e) Read the value displayed on the Techstream when the ignition switch is turned to ON and
cranking.
OK:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY CONDITION NORMAL CONDITION
Ignition switch ON OFF

Starter Signal
Cranking ON
Ignition switch ON OFF

Starter Switch
Cranking ON
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
B CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS
2. INSPECT RELAY (ST)
(a) Inspect the ST relay .
REPLACE RELAY (ST)

NG
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ST RELAY - ECM)
(a) Remove the ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.

ST relay terminal 3 - A33-17 (STSW2) Always Below 1 Ω
ST relay terminal 1 - A35-26 (STA) Always Below 1 Ω
ST relay terminal 3 or A33-17 (STSW2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
ST relay terminal 1 or A35-26 (STA) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK CHECK STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No DTC is output A
HINT:
B REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002KQO09CX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0700: Transmission Control System (MIL Request) (2013
FR-S)
DTC P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request)
DESCRIPTION
The ECM and TCM communicate with each other via the CAN communication line. If the TCM detects an
automatic transmission malfunction, the ECM receives this signal.

NO.
Automatic transmission system malfunction received from Automatic transmission

P0700 the TCM system
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0700: Transmission control system (MIL request) functional
Related DTCs
check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) ECM
-
(Related)

Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not stored U0073, U0101, U0402 (CAN system)

MIL request flag from TCM Set
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
HINT:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
B GO TO AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
2. READ OUTPUT DTC
(d) Clear the DTC .
(i) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
B REPLACE ECM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XCT0QKX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P0851,P0852: Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P0851 Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low
DTC P0852 Park / Neutral Switch Input Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
NO.
Manual
Transmission
Open or short in
neutral position
switch signal
Manual Transmission circuit
Neutral position
No non-neutral position detected in shift change running state switch
(judged based on changes in the relationship between vehicle ECM
speed and engine speed) (2 trip detection logic)
P0851
Automatic
Automatic Transmission Transmission
The CAN data received from the TCM is "P or N" position signal Open or short in
while the park/neutral position switch assembly is not in P or N park/neutral
position. (2 trip detection logic) position switch
signal circuit
Park/neutral
position switch
assembly
ECM
TCM
Manual
Transmission
Open or short in
neutral position
switch signal
Manual Transmission circuit
Neutral position
No neutral position detected in shift change running state switch
(judged based on changes in the relationship between vehicle ECM
speed and engine speed) (2 trip detection logic)
P0852 Automatic
Automatic Transmission Transmission
The CAN data received from the TCM is other than "P or N" Open or short in
position signal while the park/neutral position switch assembly park / neutral
is in P or N position. (2 trip detection logic) position switch
signal circuit
Park/neutral
position switch
assembly
ECM
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Manual Transmission
The ECM detects the shift change status from the neutral position switch signal, and detects the
current selected gear from the engine speed and vehicle speed. If the neutral position switch signal
and the shift change status cannot be coordinated, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction,
illuminates the MIL, and stores the DTC.
If the ECM cannot coordinate the N, P or neutral information from the park/neutral position switch
signal with the shift information sent from the TCM through CAN communication, then the ECM
interprets this as a malfunction, illuminates the MIL, and stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P0851: Neutral position switch circuit continuity (Low voltage)
Related DTCs
P0852: Neutral position switch circuit continuity (High voltage)
Park/neutral position switch assembly

Neutral position switch
3 counts: Manual transmission

Duration
6.4 seconds: Automatic transmission

Manual Transmission
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present P0500 (Vehicle speed sensor (VSS))
ST relay Off
Starter Off
Driving condition change from the following condition A to B: -
A. All of the following conditions are met: (a) and (b)
(a) Vehicle speed Less than 0 km/h (0 mph)
(b) Engine speed 550 to 880 rpm
B. All of the following conditions are met: (a) and (b)
(a) Vehicle speed 64 km/h (39.8 mph) or more
(b) Engine speed 1600 to 2600 rpm
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present U0073, U0101, U0402 (CAN system)
ST relay Off
Starter Off
Range switch on automatic transmission (TCM) ON

P0851 (Manual Transmission)
Switch signal for manual transmission Less than battery voltage X 0.19
P0852 (Manual Transmission)
Switch signal for manual transmission More than battery voltage X 0.6
P0851 (Automatic Transmission)
Park/neutral position switch signal Less than battery voltage X 0.19
Park/neutral position from TCM On
P0852 (Automatic Transmission)
Park/neutral position switch signal More than battery voltage X 0.6
Park/neutral position from TCM Off

higher.
7. Change gear position 3 times or more during Accelerating vehicle to 64 km/h (40 mph) [A].
(for Manual Transmission)
CAUTION:
laws.
8. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more [B]. (for Automatic
Transmission)
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
Stop light switch assembly conditions can be checked using the Techstream.
a. Connect the Techstream to the DLC3.

b. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
c. Turn the Techstream on.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Stop Light Switch and ST1.
e. Check the Data List indication when the brake pedal is depressed and released.
BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION STOP LIGHT SWITCH ST1
Depressed ON ON
Released OFF OFF
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK VEHICLE TYPE
(a) Confirm the transmission.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Manual Transmission A
Automatic Transmission B
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER

B SOURCE OF PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
2. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH)
(a) Disconnect the neutral position switch connector.
Standard Voltage:
A54-1 - A54-2 Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V


*a
(to Neutral Position Switch)

NG (NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH - ECM)
OK
3. INSPECT NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
(a) Inspect the neutral position switch .
NG REPLACE NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH - ECM)
(b) Disconnect the neutral position switch connector.
A33-16 (NSW) - A54-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A33-4 (EC) - A54-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A33-16 (NSW) or A54-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A33-4 (EC) or A54-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION

5.
SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
L2-4 - L2-5 Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Park/Neutral Position Switch Assembly)

NG (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
ASSEMBLY - ECM - BODY GROUND)
OK
(a) Inspect the park/neutral position switch assembly .
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION

NG SWITCH ASSEMBLY

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
7.
ASSEMBLY - ECM - BODY GROUND)
(b) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch assembly connector.
A33-16 (NSW) - L2-4 Always Below 1 Ω
L2-5 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
A33-16 (NSW) or L2-4 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000043HM01EX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1109,P2109: Throttle Deposit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1109 Throttle Deposit Malfunction
DTC P2109 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor "A" Minimum Stop Performance
DESCRIPTION
The idling speed is controlled by the Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS). The ETCS is comprised of
a throttle actuator, which operates the throttle valve, and a throttle position sensor, which detects the
opening amount of the throttle valve. The ECM controls the throttle actuator to adjust the throttle valve
opening amount so that the idling speed is maintained at the target idling speed.

NO.
ISC learning value is 95% or more of the maximum learning ISC learning Throttle with
P1109 value, and 50% or more deposit is accumulated for 10 seconds continuously. motor body
The throttle position sensor opening angle when learning the fully-
Throttle with
closed position is less than 9.975°or more than 20.025°.
P2109 motor body
When the throttle actuator current is off, the difference between
assembly
the actual throttle position and the fully-closed position is less than
1.162°.
HINT:
The ISC learned value is the calculated intake air amount corresponding to the throttle opening
amount necessary to maintain the idling speed.
This malfunction is only detected once per trip. After it has been detected once, the system will not
monitor for the malfunction for the rest of the trip.
The system uses the throttle with motor body assembly and mass air flow meter assembly to detect
this malfunction.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
If there are deposits in the throttle valve, a decrease in the ISC flow rate may cause engine stall or
unstable idling. Therefore, the necessary ISC flow rate for idling is maintained using the ISC learned value
and feedback. The ECM stores this DTC if the ISC learned value approaches its limit.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P2109: Throttle position sensor minimum stop rationality check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Throttle position sensor

-
(Related)
0.008 seconds: Case 1

Duration
0.08 seconds: Case 2


Case 1
Throttle minimum stop position Less than -4.02% (0.399 V) or more than 4.02% (0.801 V)
Case 2
Throttle position at ignition switch OFF to ON - Throttle minimum stop Less than 0.71% (0.035
position V)

higher.
7. Depress the accelerator pedal fully and release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

NOTICE:
Never clean the throttle with motor body assembly.
HINT:
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a
malfunction occurs. This information can be useful when troubleshooting.
Since a pending DTC is not stored for this DTC, it takes time to confirm whether the malfunction
has been successfully repaired by checking for this DTC. When confirming whether the malfunction
has been successfully repaired, compare "ISC Learning Value" recorded in the freeze frame data
with "ISC Learning Value" in the Data List after repairs have been made to save time.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO P2109)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART

A ASSEMBLY
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PFX0SWX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1160,P2119: Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC P1160 Throttle Valve Return Spring Malfunction
DTC P2119 Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Range / Performance
DESCRIPTION
The electronic throttle control system is composed of the throttle actuator, throttle position sensor,
accelerator pedal position sensor, and ECM. The ECM operates the throttle actuator to regulate the throttle
valve in response to driver inputs. The throttle position sensor detects the opening angle of the throttle
valve, and provides the ECM with feedback so that the throttle valve can be appropriately controlled by
the ECM.

NO.
After setting throttle valve opening angle at 40% in throttle actuator

control, the change in opening angle is less than 2°after throttle actuator Throttle with motor
P1160
has been off. body assembly
Electronic
throttle
control
The throttle valve opening angle continues to vary greatly from the target system
P2119 opening angle. Wire
(1 trip detection logic) harness
or
connector
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
P1160
When the ECM cuts the power supply to the throttle actuator, the throttle valve returns to the fully-closed
position by the spring. If the throttle valve does not return with ETCS relay off, the ECM judges throttle
valve is stuck and then the ECM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
P2119
The ECM determines the actual opening angle of the throttle valve from the throttle position sensor signal.
The actual opening angle is compared to the target opening angle commanded by the ECM. If the
difference between these two values is outside the standard range, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the electronic throttle control system. The ECM then illuminates the MIL and stores the
DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P1160: Throttle return spring functional check
Related DTCs
P2119: Throttle actuator control functional check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Throttle actuator (throttle with motor body assembly)
-
(Related)
Immediately: P1160
5 seconds: P2119 (Case 1 and Case 5)
2 seconds: P2119 (Case 2)
Duration
More than 248 msec (varies with throttle position): P2119 (Case
3)
1 second: P2119 (Case 4)

All
P1160
Ignition switch Off
Time after ignition switch off 3.392 seconds
Throttle position sensor 1 circuit DTC Not detected
Throttle position sensor 2 circuit DTC Not detected
Throttle position sensor rationality DTC Not detected
P2119 (Case 1)
ETCS relay On
P2119 (Case 2)
ETCS relay On

P2119 (Case 3)
ETCS relay On
Throttle position sensor 1 value More than target throttle position
P2119 (Case 4)
ETCS relay On
Throttle position sensor 1 value Less than target throttle position
P2119 (Case 5):
ETCS relay On

P1160
Throttle position sensor 1 at diagnosis start - throttle position sensor 1 Less than 1.6%
P2119 (Case 1 and Case 2)
Throttle motor control duty More than 95%
P2119 (Case 3, Case 4 and Case 5)
Target throttle position - throttle position sensor More than 3.72% (varies with target throttle
1 position)

higher.
8. Drive the vehicle at 10 km/h (6.25 mph) or more for 1 minute or more.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

FAIL-SAFE
When this DTC or other DTCs relating to Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) malfunctions are
stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ECM cuts the current to the throttle
actuator, and the throttle valve is returned to a fully closed throttle angle by the return spring. The ECM
then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing,
in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle, to allow the vehicle to continue running at a
minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and gently, the vehicle can be driven slowly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
Never clean the throttle with motor body assembly.
procedure.
HINT:
Refer to "Data List / Active Test" [Throttle Position Commanded, Throttle Position No. 1, Throttle
Motor Current, Throttle Motor Duty (Open) and Throttle Motor Duty (Close)] .
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P1160 OR P2119)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P1160 and/or P2119 is output A
DTC P1160 and/or P2119 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P1160 and/or P2119 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (THROTTLE POSITION)

(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1 and
Throttle Position Command.
(h) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while fully depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal quickly.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Throttle Position No. 1 does not change A
Throttle Position No. 1 changes even a little B
HINT:
When a DTC is output, the system changes to fail-safe mode. Therefore, only use the data up until the
time the DTC is stored for confirmation.
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY

B ASSEMBLY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE
VALVE)
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (RESISTANCE OF THROTTLE

3.
ACTUATOR)
(a) Inspect the throttle with motor body assembly .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE
4.
VALVE)
(a) Check for contamination between the throttle valve and housing. If necessary, clean the
throttle with motor body assembly. Also, check that the throttle valve moves smoothly.
OK:
Throttle valve is not contaminated with foreign objects and moves smoothly.

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
5. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (THROTTLE POSITION)
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Throttle Position No. 1, Throttle
Position No. 2 and Throttle Position Command.
(h) Read the values displayed on the Techstream while wiggling the ECM wire harness.
(j) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Value in Data List changes when wire harness is wiggled, or DTC is output A
Other than above B
B CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS
A
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (ECM - THROTTLE WITH MOTOR
6.
BODY ASSEMBLY)
(a) As the DTC was stored due to a change in the contact resistance of the connector, repair or
replace the wire harness or connector.
END
NEXT
NEXT
Pattern.
(j) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P1160 and/or P2119 is output B

B REPLACE ECM
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XCU02ZX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1235: High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1235 High Pressure Fuel Pump Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is attached to the insulator, which is attached to the cylinder
head cover. The pump activates according to the position of the cam on the intake side camshaft (bank
2).
The fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) increases the pressure of the fuel supplied from the fuel
pump in the fuel tank to the specified fuel pressure according to the operating condition, and it feeds the
fuel to the fuel delivery pipe.

NO.
Open or
short in fuel
pump (for
When fuel pump for high pressure is operating, the diagnostic signal high
from injector driver (EDU) does not change (open or short in the fuel pressure)
P1235
pump (for high pressure) circuit). Fuel pump
(for high
pressure)
ECM
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P1235: High pressure fuel pump functional check
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Fuel pump assembly (for high pressure)
Required Sensors/Components (Related) Injector driver (EDU)
Duration 20 counts [More than 0.1 seconds (varies with engine speed)]

Monitor runs whenever these DTCs are not
None
present

Starter Off
Active crank angle of high pressure fuel More than 7°CA (varies with engine speed) and less than
pump 148°CA

High pressure fuel pump output signal No falling edge detected

9. Read the DTC.
HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:

HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
If the current from the INJ relay is cut because DTC P062D is stored, DTC P1235 will be stored even
if the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) is normal.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)
(a) Inspect the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) .
REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH

NG PRESSURE)
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU) - FUEL PUMP
2.
ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump assembly (for high pressure) connector.
C2-3 (FP-) - C29-2 Always Below 1 Ω
C2-4 (FP+) - C29-1 Always Below 1 Ω
C2-3 (FP-) or C29-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
C2-4 (FP+) or C29-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU))
A34-32 (FPD) - C1-8 (FPD) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-13 (FPF) - C1-7 (FPF) Always Below 1 Ω

A34-32 (FPD) or C1-8 (FPD) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-13 (FPF) or C1-7 (FPF) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. INSPECT ECM (FPD VOLTAGE)
(1) While idling the engine, check the waveform the

ECM Terminal Name A34-32 (FPD) - Body ground
Condition Idling

*a
(ECM)
*b FPD Terminal Waveform Normal Waveform
Standard:
HINT:
The FPD terminal waveform is output only right after the

engine starts. If this DTC is stored when the engine is started
from ignition switch off, the system enters fail-safe mode and
the waveform is not output.
NG INSPECT ECM (FPD VOLTAGE)
OK
5. INSPECT ECM (FPF VOLTAGE)
(1) While idling the engine, check the waveform the terminals of the ECM connector.
CH1: A34-32 (FPD) - Body ground

ECM Terminal Name
CH2: A34-13 (FPF) - Body ground
Condition Idling

*a
(ECM)
*b FPD Terminal and FPF Terminal Waveform Normal Waveform
*c FPF Terminal Waveform NG Waveform 1
*d FPF Terminal Waveform NG Waveform 2
HINT:
*: If the FPF terminal waveform is similar to the FPF terminal waveform NG waveform 1, stop the
engine and disconnect injector driver (EDU) connector. Then, while cranking the engine, check to see if
there is a difference between the FPF terminal waveform and the previous one.
Result:
FPD FPF TERMINAL WAVEFORM PROCEED

TERMINAL TO
WAVEFORM
OK OK A
Does not change from NG waveform 1 (FPF terminal waveform

remains at GND even after disconnecting the injector driver (EDU) A
NG connector and cranking the engine)
OK waveform
1* Changes to NG waveform 2 (FPF terminal waveform rises from GND
after disconnecting the injector driver (EDU) connector and cranking B
the engine)
OK NG waveform 2 B
B REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
A REPLACE ECM
6. INSPECT ECM (FPD VOLTAGE)
(c) Inspect the ECM using an oscilloscope.
(1) While cranking the engine, check the waveform the

ECM Terminal Name A34-32 (FPD) - Body ground
Condition Cranking

*a
(ECM)
*b FPD Terminal Waveform Normal Waveform
Standard:
NG REPLACE ECM

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1449: Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch
Stuck ON (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1449 Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck ON
DTC SUMMARY
DTC MONITORING MALFUNCTION TROUBLE AREA DETECTION DETECTION
NO. ITEM DETECTION CONDITION TIMING LOGIC
Clogged on EVAP
line (drain tube)
Clogged on EVAP
The canister pressure line (canister pump While
Canister filter
P1449 sensor output value has module - drain ignition 2 trip
clogged
rapidly changed. separator) switch off
Clogged on canister
pump module
(drain separator)
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors for canister filter in the canister pump module. The pressure is checked every 5 seconds
and if the pressure difference becomes more than threshold, stops the EVAP system monitor. The ECM
then illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC (2 trip detection logic).
MONITOR STRATEGY
P1449: Evaporative Emission System Lid Open Switch Stuck
Related DTC
ON
Purge valve
-
(Related)
Duration 6 seconds

Elapsed time after engine 20 seconds or more
ELCM vacuum pump Not active
ELCM switching valve Off (Open)
All of the following condition are met A and B
A. Pressure difference in 0.064 seconds Less than 0.66661 kPa [5 mmHg]
B. Period to satisfy above condition 18.12 seconds or more

Pressure difference in 5 seconds 1.21 kPa [9 mmHg] or more
MONITOR RESULT

NOTICE:

3. Clear DTCs (even if no DTCs are stored, perform the clear DTC procedure).
Automatic Mode.
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All Readiness.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal
conditions

HINT:

HINT:

PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT EVAP HOSE (DRAIN TUBE)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the drain tube.

OK:
OK: No blockages in the drain tube.
NG REPLACE EVAP HOSE (DRAIN TUBE)
OK
2. INSPECT EVAP HOSE (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - DRAIN SEPARATOR)
(a) Check for filter blockage in the EVAP purge line between the canister pump module and drain
separator.
OK:
No blockages in the EVAP purge line between the canister pump module and drain separator.
REPLACE EVAP HOSE (CANISTER PUMP

NG MODULE - DRAIN SEPARATOR)
OK
3. INSPECT DRAIN SEPARATOR
(a) Check for filter blockage in the drain separator.

OK:
No blockages in the drain separator.
NG REPLACE DRAIN SEPARATOR
OK
NEXT PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM
5. REPLACE EVAP HOSE (DRAIN TUBE)
6. REPLACE EVAP HOSE (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - DRAIN SEPARATOR)
7. REPLACE DRAIN SEPARATOR
(a) Replace the drain separator.
NEXT
8. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM
NOTICE:
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / Evaporative System Check /
Automatic Mode.
HINT:
END
NEXT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000021140ENX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1603: Engine Stall History (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1603 Engine Stall History
DESCRIPTION
After starting the engine, this DTC is stored when the engine stops without the ignition switch being
operated.
Using the Techstream, the conditions present when the DTC was stored can be confirmed by referring to
the freeze frame data. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a malfunction occurs. This
information can be useful when troubleshooting.
It is necessary to check if the vehicle has run out of fuel before performing troubleshooting, as this DTC is
also stored when the engine stalls due to running out of fuel.

NO.
Air leak in intake

system
Purge valve
Brake booster
Mass air flow meter
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Thermostat
Power supply circuit
(purge valve, air fuel
ratio sensor, fuel
injector assembly,
ignition coil assembly)
Fuel pump assembly)
Fuel pump control
circuit (low pressure
side)
After monitoring for startability problems (P1604) finishes and
Fuel line
starting the engine, with the engine running, the engine stops
PCV valve and hose
P1603 (the engine speed drops to 300 rpm or less) without the
Camshaft timing oil
ignition switch being operated.
control valve
Knock sensor
Ignition system
Air conditioning
system
Power steering system
Electrical load signal
system
Charging system
Automatic
transmission system
Park/neutral position
switch assembly
ECM
Wire harness or
connector
Engine immobiliser
system
HINT:
In contrast to normal malfunction diagnosis for components, circuits and systems, DTCs P1603 is
used to determine the malfunctioning area from the problem symptoms and freeze frame data
when the user mentions problems such as engine stall.
As these DTCs can be stored as a result of certain user actions, even if these DTCs are
output, if the customer makes no mention of problems, clear these DTCs without performing
any troubleshooting and return the vehicle to the customer.
If any other DTCs are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
Use any information from the customer problem analysis about the condition of the vehicle at the
time when the problem occurred (how the engine stopped, conditions when the engine was
restarted, etc.) as a reference.
SYMPTOM SUSPECTED AREA
Engine vibration occurs and engine stops Air-fuel ratio abnormal
Ignition system, injection stoppage, high load from

Engine stops with no engine vibration
external parts
Engine can be started with accelerator pedal

Insufficient air volume
depressed
Rough idling after engine started Air-fuel ratio abnormal, abnormal combustion
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a
malfunction occurs. This information can be useful when troubleshooting.
When confirming the freeze frame data, be sure to check all 5 sets of freeze frame data .
When confirming freeze frame data, if there are multiple items related to the cause of the
malfunction, perform troubleshooting for all related items.
Try to operate the vehicle under the conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which were
present when the malfunction occurred. Confirm the data at this time and the data when the engine
is idling (engine warmed up, no load, and shift lever in D, N or neutral) and compare these data
with the freeze frame data.
Inspections take into account the fact that the malfunction may not have reoccurred and place
emphasis on checking the vehicle conditions present at the time when the malfunction occurred.
When performing inspections, jiggle the relevant wire harnesses and connectors in an attempt to
reproduce malfunctions that do not always occur.
Inspection flow:
Using freeze frame data, narrow down the parts to be inspected according to the vehicle conditions
at the time when the malfunction occurred.
1:
If the engine stalled when the intake air volume was low (during idling or deceleration), there
may be a decrease in torque due to an incorrect air-fuel ratio, etc.
If the engine stalled when the intake air volume was high (during driving or acceleration), there
may be a major malfunction such as continuous misfire due to ignition stoppage, fuel injection
stoppage, etc. and the torque drops to zero.
2:
If the engine speed decreased slowly, there may have been a decrease in torque due to an air-
fuel ratio that was incorrect (by approximately 20 to 30%), etc.
If the engine speed decreased rapidly, there may have been a malfunction such as when the
engine misfires almost continuously due to ignition stoppage, fuel injection stoppage, etc., or
when the external load increases due to an external part malfunctioning.
3:
If the air-fuel ratio is abnormal, there may have been an intake air leak, sensor malfunction, or
fuel supply problem.
If the vehicle was normal, the air volume may have been insufficient or the ignition timing may
have been incorrect.
P1603 inspection flow: Narrow down the parts to be inspected according to the vehicle conditions at the
time when the malfunction occurred (freeze frame data).
VEHICLE ENGINE SUSPECTED AREA PRIMARY PARTS TO INSPECT PROCEDURE

STATE SPEED
Power supply
circuit
Ignition system Igniter
Ignition coil 10, 38, 52
abnormal abnormal
assemblies
Spark plug
Intake system
connections
Air suction 5 to 9
Purge valve system
Brake booster
Sensor
malfunction
(value from Mass air flow meter 11 to 23
sensor too Engine coolant
lean) temperature
Air-fuel ratio sensor
abnormal Sensor Air fuel ratio sensor
malfunction system
(value from Thermostat 39 to 51
sensor too
Slowly rich)
decreases
and engine Fuel pump control
stalls circuit
Fuel supply
Purge valve system 24 to 37
problem
Fuel line
ECM
Intake system
connections
Idling or Problem with Mass air flow meter
53 to 55
decelerating air passage Brake booster
Intake air volume PCV valve and hose
insufficient Purge valve system
Excessive Camshaft timing oil
56 to 59
valve overlap control valve
Knock sensor
Does not Engine coolant
Ignition timing
operate as temperature 60 to 64
incorrect
expected sensor
Mass air flow meter
Power supply
Ignition and
Power circuit (fuel injector
injection stops
temporarily assembly (for port 65, 66
(electrical system
cut injection), ignition
malfunction)
coil assembly)
Air conditioning
Rapidly system
decreases Electrical load
and engine signal system
stalls* Power steering
External part Increase in system
67 to 69
malfunctioning load Automatic
transmission
system
Park/neutral
position switch
assembly
Crankshaft
Power
position sensor or
temporarily Check DTCs 1
VVT sensor
cut
malfunction
Mass air flow Foreign matter

Mass air flow meter 70 to 73
meter adhesion
Power supply
Accelerating - Ignition and
Power circuit (fuel injector
injection stops
temporarily assembly (for port 74, 75
(electrical system
cut injection), ignition
malfunction)
coil assembly)
Fuel pump control

Fuel supply
Fuel leak, clog circuit 76 to 80
problem
Fuel line
*: If the engine stalls immediately after the injection method is switched from port injection to direct
injection, the injector driver (EDU) may be malfunctioning.
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT
(c) Read the DTCs .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Only DTC P1603 is output A
DTCs other than P1603 are output B
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART
OK:
Immobiliser Fuel Cut is OFF.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
B READ FREEZE FRAME DATA

A
3. CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
(c) Idle the engine
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Immobiliser Communication and
Immobiliser Fuel Cut.
(e) Check the Data List indication.

Result
DATA LIST ITEM RESULT
Immobiliser Communication ON
Immobiliser Fuel Cut OFF
NG CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
OK
4. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED

TO
CLOSED ENGINE TOTAL OF SHORT
THROTTLE SPEED FT AND LONG FT
POSITION
SW
Air suction
Sensor
All 5 sets of malfunction
freeze frame data (value from
A
are +15% or sensor too
more*2 lean)
Fuel supply
problem
When idling or
decelerating, engine Decreases At least 1 of the 5
speed slowly decreases slowly*1 sets of freeze Sensor malfunction
and engine stalls (value from sensor B
frame data is -
too rich)
15% or less*3
All 5 sets of
freeze frame Intake air
data are ON volume
All 5 sets of
freeze frame data insufficient
C
are from -15% to Ignition
+15% timing
incorrect
Injection
stoppage,
When idling or ignition
decelerating, engine Decreases stoppage
- D
speed rapidly decreases rapidly*1
and engine stalls Load from
external
parts
Sensor
malfunction
Injection
When accelerating or
At least one stoppage,
driving at constant - - E
is OFF ignition
speed, engine stalls
stoppage
Fuel supply
problem
HINT:
*1: A rapid decrease in engine speed may be caused by an electrical fault in the shared wiring of all
or a number of cylinders, an increase in load from external parts, etc. The engine speed is
considered to have decreased rapidly if either of the following conditions applies.
Otherwise, the engine speed is considered to have decreased slowly.
a. In the freeze frame data, the decrease in engine speed from #3 to #5 is 400 rpm or
more.
b. In the freeze frame data, the engine speed at #5 is 120 rpm or less.
If the vehicle speed is 30 km/h or less and the difference between Engine Speed and SPD (NT) is
100 rpm or less, inspect the automatic transmission. (Depending on the rate of vehicle deceleration,
the engine speed may have decreased due to the A/T lock-up release being late.)
*2: When a DTC is stored, feedback compensation increases because the air-fuel ratio is
determined to be lean.
*3: When a DTC is stored, feedback compensation decreases because the air-fuel ratio is
determined to be rich.
B CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM
C CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (FUEL INJECTOR

D POWER SOURCE)
E CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA
(a) Check for air leakage in the intake system [vacuum hose disconnection, cracks, damaged
gaskets, etc.] .
HINT:
If the accelerator pedal is released after racing the engine, the inspection is easier to perform
because the vacuum inside the intake pipes increases and the air suction noise becomes louder.
If Short FT and Long FT are largely different from the normal values when idling (the intake air
volume is small) and almost the same as the normal values when racing the engine (the intake air
volume is high), air leakage may be present.
OK:
There is no air leakage.

NG
OK
(a) Disconnect the purge hose (on the canister side) of the
purge valve.
(c) Idle the engine.
(d) Disconnect the connector of the purge valve.
(e) Check if air flows through the purge valve.

OK:
Air does not flow.
(f) Connect the connector of the purge valve.
(g) Connect the purge hose of the purge valve.
HINT:
When this inspection is performed, the MIL may illuminate. After finishing the inspection, check and
clear DTCs .
OK
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED

ITEM TO
At least 1 of the 5 sets of freeze frame Air suction from brake

A
Stop Light Switch data is ON booster
All 5 sets of freeze frame data are OFF - B
B CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM
8. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (SHORT FT)

(c) Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature stabilizes.
HINT:
The A/C switch and all accessory switches should be off.
(d) Idle the engine.
(e) Using the Techstream, read the value of Short FT #1 in the Data List while depressing the
brake pedal.
Standard:
Short FT #1 changes by +10% or less.
HINT:
When air leakage from the brake booster is present, the feedback compensation increases because the
air-fuel ratio becomes lean.
NG INSPECT BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY
OK
9. PERFORM DRIVE TEST
(b) Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature stabilizes.
HINT:
(d) Using the Techstream, read the value of Short FT #1 in the Data List.
Standard:
DATA LIST CONDITION SPECIFIED

CONDITION
Short FT #1 + Long The conditions of the vehicle are matched to those present
-15 to +15%
FT #1 when the problem occurs
NG INSPECT BRAKE BOOSTER ASSEMBLY
OK
(a) Perform ignition system On-vehicle Inspection .

NG PARTS, COMPONENT AND AREA
OK
Result

ITEM TO
Below 90% of the current value of the

Calculate Load Mass air flow meter A
vehicle*1
Air fuel ratio

sensor
AFS Voltage B1S1 2.2 V or higher*2 B
Wire harness or
connector
HINT:
*1: If the mass air flow meter is malfunctioning and incorrectly measures the pressure to be less
than the actual intake manifold pressure, the freeze frame data will show a low engine load value.
*2: If the air fuel ratio sensor is malfunctioning and constantly outputs a value indicating the air-
fuel ratio is lean, the actual air-fuel ratio will become rich and the engine may stall.
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM

B (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME FOR A/F
SENSOR)
A
12. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW METER
(a) Remove the mass air flow meter.
(b) Check for foreign matter in the airflow passage of the mass airflow meter.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Visible foreign matter is not present A
Visible foreign matter is present B
13. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - MASS AIR FLOW METER)
(a) Disconnect the ECM.
(b) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do
not always occur.
Make sure there is not an excessive amount of force applied to the wire harness.
NG CONNECTOR
OK
HINT:
(d) Using the Techstream, read the value of Calculate Load in the Data List.
Standard:
DATA LIST SPECIFIED CONDITION
Calculate Load 90 to 110% of the current value of the vehicle
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
A REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME

15.
FOR A/F SENSOR)
(c) Start the engine, turn off all accessory switches and warm up the engine until the engine
coolant temperature stabilizes.
for A/F Sensor.
(f) Read the output voltage from the air fuel ratio sensor when increasing and decreasing the
fuel injection volume.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY SPECIFIED CONDITION
Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor

Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is below 2.0 V
(+12.5%)
Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor (- Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is higher than
12.5%) 2.4 V
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
HINT:
A
16. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR POWER SOURCE)
(b) Turn ignition switch to ON.
Standard Voltage:

*a
HINT:
not always occur.
REPAIR AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR POWER

NG SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
(a) Disconnect the ECM.
(b) Disconnect the air fuel ratio sensor connector.
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM RESULT PROCEED

TO
Difference in temperature between each

A
Initial Engine Coolant Temp, Ambient Temp for item is less than 10°C*1
A/C, Initial Intake Air Temp Difference in temperature between each
B
item is 10°C or more*2
HINT:
*1: A long time had elapsed after stopping the engine.
*2: A long time had not elapsed after stopping the engine.
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED

TO
Engine coolant
Range
temperature sensor A
A
Thermostat
Initial Engine Coolant Temp, Coolant Temp,
Engine Run Time Range
Engine coolant temperature sensor B
B
Range
- C
C
HINT:
This step is not directly related to engine stall.

INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
B SENSOR
C READ FREEZE FRAME DATA
HINT:
For the thermostat inspection, refer to the following procedures .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B

B SENSOR
A REPLACE THERMOSTAT
Result

ITEM TO
Engine coolant
Coolant Temp 120°C or higher
temperature sensor
A
Coolant Temp, Ambient Engine coolant temperature is lower than Engine coolant
Temp for A/C outside temperature by 15°C or more temperature sensor
Both freeze frame data

Values are other than above - B
items listed above

NG SENSOR
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

23.
SENSOR)
(b) Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA RESULT SUSPECTED PROCEED

ITEM AREA TO
At least 1 of the 5 sets of freeze frame data is

Purge valve A
EVAP (Purge) VSV not 0%
All 5 sets of freeze frame data are 0% - B
HINT:
If the purge valve is stuck closed, air-fuel ratio compensation by the purge valve is incorrectly
adjusted, and then the air-fuel ratio becomes lean and the engine may stall.

B (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP DUTY)
25.
CONTROL)
purge valve.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Activate the VSV for Evap
Control.
(f) Operate the purge valve and check the airflow.

OK:
ACTIVATE THE VSV FOR EVAP CONTROL SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON Air flows
OFF Air does not flow
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
*a Purge valve ON (Air flows)
*b Purge valve OFF (Air does not flow)
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do not
always occur.

B (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP DUTY)
A
(a) Inspect the purge valve .
OK
27. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (PURGE VALVE POWER SOURCE)
Standard Voltage:
d1-1 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Purge Valve)
HINT:
not always occur.
REPAIR PURGE VALVE POWER SOURCE

NG CIRCUIT
OK
28. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE VALVE - ECM)
A36-11 (PRG) - d1-2 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-11 (PRG) or d1-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
29. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
30. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (EVAP (Purge) VSV)
HINT:
(c) Idle the engine for 15 minutes or more.
(d) Using the Techstream, read the value of EVAP (Purge) VSV in the Data List.
Standard:
EVAP (Purge) VSV Value other than 0% is displayed
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
purge valve.

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Activate the VSV for Evap
Control.
(f) Operate the purge valve and check the airflow.

OK:
ACTIVATE THE VSV FOR EVAP CONTROL SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON Air flows
OFF Air does not flow
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
*a VSV ON (Air flows)
*b VSV OFF (Air does not flow)
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do not
always occur.
32. CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (ECM)
(a) Check the ECM connector connection condition.
HINT:
not always occur.
RECONNECT CONNECTOR CORRECTLY

NG
OK REPLACE ECM
33. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP DUTY)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump Duty.
Standard:
CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP DUTY SPECIFIED CONDITION
25 or 80% Operating sound heard
OFF Operating sound not heard
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
HINT:
not always occur.
While performing the Active Test, make sure that there is no fuel leakage from the pipes, no signs
that fuel has leaked, and no fuel smell.
If the fuel pump operating noise is abnormal, proceed to step 34.
B CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
CHECK FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (LOW

OK PRESSURE SIDE)
35. CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
(a) Check the fuel system.
Check the fuel pump operation.

Check the fuel leaks.
Check the fuel pressure (low pressure side).
Check the fuel pressure (high pressure side).
Perform the Active Test [D-4S (Fuel Cut)].
HINT:
For the fuel system On-vehicle Inspection, refer to the following procedures .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
(a) Check for foreign matter such as iron particles around the fuel pump assembly (fuel pump,
fuel pump filter and inside the fuel tank), and for signs that the fuel pump was stuck.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
There is foreign matter or signs that fuel pump was stuck A
There is no foreign matter and no signs that fuel pump was stuck B
HINT:
If there is foreign matter such as iron particles on the fuel pump, fuel filter or fuel tank, remove the
foreign matter.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM

B
A

Check the fuel pressure (low pressure side).
Check the fuel pressure (high pressure side).
HINT:

END
OK

OK
Result

TO
110% or more of the current value

Calculate Load Mass air flow meter A
of the vehicle*1
Air fuel ratio

sensor
AFS Voltage B1S1 Below 2.4 V*2 B
Harness and
connector
Both freeze frame data items

Values are other than above - C
listed above
HINT:
*1: If the mass air flow meter is malfunctioning and incorrectly measures the intake air volume to
be higher than the actual volume of air flowing through the intake manifold, the freeze frame data
will show a high engine load value.
*2: As the air fuel ratio sensor output is low before the sensor warms up, the value at that time
cannot be used for diagnosis. If the air fuel ratio sensor is malfunctioning and constantly outputs a
value indicating the air-fuel ratio is rich, the actual air-fuel ratio will become lean and the engine
may stall.

B (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME FOR A/F
SENSOR)
C READ FREEZE FRAME DATA
(a) Remove the mass airflow meter.
(b) Check for foreign matter in the airflow passage of the mass air flow meter.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO

A
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
HINT:

Standard:
OK
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME

43.
FOR A/F SENSOR)
(c) Start the engine, turn off all accessory switches and warm up the engine until the engine
coolant temperature stabilizes.
for A/F Sensor.
(f) Read the output voltage from the air fuel ratio sensor when increasing and decreasing the
fuel injection volume.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM DISPLAY SPECIFIED CONDITION
Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor

Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is below 2.0 V
(+12.5%)
Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor (- Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is higher than
12.5%) 2.4 V
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
HINT:
44. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR POWER SOURCE)
Standard Voltage:

*a
HINT:
not always occur.
REPAIR AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR POWER

NG SOURCE CIRCUIT
OK
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM RESULT PROCEED

TO
Difference in temperature between each

A
Initial Engine Coolant Temp, Ambient Temp for item is less than 10°C*1
A/C, Initial Intake Air Temp Difference in temperature between each
B
item is 10°C or more*2
HINT:

Result

TO
Engine coolant
Range
temperature sensor A
A
Thermostat
Initial Engine Coolant Temp, Coolant Temp,
Engine Run Time Range
Engine coolant temperature B
B
Range
- C
C
HINT:

B SENSOR
C CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
HINT:
For the thermostat inspection, refer to the following procedures .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
HINT:

B SENSOR
A REPLACE THERMOSTAT
Result

ITEM TO
Engine coolant
Coolant Temp 120°C or higher
temperature sensor
A
Coolant Temp, Ambient Engine coolant temperature is lower than Engine coolant
Temp for A/C outside temperature by 15°C or more temperature sensor
Both freeze frame data

items listed above
B CLEAR DTC
HINT:
For the engine coolant temperature sensor inspection, refer to the following procedures .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Normal A
Abnormal B

B SENSOR

51.
SENSOR)
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR


OK
Result

TO
Below 80% of the current value

A
Total of ISC Learning Value and ISC of the vehicle Intake air volume
Feedback Value 80% or more of the current value insufficient
B
of the vehicle

B (CONTROL THE VVT LINEAR)
(a) Check for air leakage in the intake system [vacuum hose disconnection, cracks, damaged
gaskets, etc.] .
HINT:
If the accelerator pedal is released after racing the engine, the inspection is easier to perform
because the vacuum inside the intake pipes increases and the air suction noise becomes louder.
If Short FT and Long FT are largely different from the normal values when idling (the intake air
volume is small) and almost the same as the normal values when racing the engine (the intake air
volume is high), air leakage may be present.
OK:

NG
OK
(a) Check the intake system.
Inspect the brake booster assembly .

Inspect the mass air flow meter .
Check the PCV hose .
Inspect the PCV valve .
Inspect the purge valve .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B

A PARTS, COMPONENT AND AREA
56. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE VVT LINEAR)
(c) Warm up the engine.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear
(Bank1) or Control the VVT Linear (Bank2).
HINT:
When performing the Active Test, make sure the A/C is on and the shift lever is in P, N or neutral.
(e) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve using the
Techstream.
OK:
HINT:
not always occur.
When the results of the inspection using the Active Test are normal but the valve operating noise is
abnormal, check the valve for any signs of problems.
If the camshaft timing oil control valve is stuck on, the valve overlap increases and combustion
worsens due to the internal EGR which may cause rough idle or cause the engine to stall.

NG VALVE
OK

57.
ECM)

connector.
Standard Voltage:
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve for Intake Side)
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE VVT EXHAUST

58.
LINEAR)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust
Linear (Bank1) or Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank2).
HINT:
When performing the Active Test, make sure the A/C is on and the shift lever is in P, N or neutral
position.
(e) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve using the
Techstream.
OK:
HINT:
not always occur.
When the results of the inspection using the Active Test are normal but the valve operating noise is
abnormal, check the valve for any signs of problems.
If the camshaft timing oil control valve is stuck on, the valve overlap increases and combustion
worsens due to the internal EGR which may cause rough idle or cause the engine to stall.

NG VALVE
OK

59.
ECM)

connector.
Standard Voltage:

*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve for Exhaust Side)
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED
TO
IGN ADVANCE KNOCK CORRECT
LEARN VALUE
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Differs from the current value of the Less than 3° A
Mass air flow meter
vehicle by 10° or more Knock sensor
3° or more -
Differs from the current value of the B

- -
vehicle by less than 10°
HINT:
For the engine coolant temperature sensor inspection, refer to the following procedures .

NG SENSOR
OK

62.
SENSOR)

HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
63. INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
(a) Inspect the mass air flow meter .
HINT:
If the intake air temperature sent to the ECM is higher than the standard due to the mass air flow
meter (intake air temperature sensor) malfunctioning, the ignition timing may become delayed.
OK
HINT:

(d) Using the Techstream, read the value of IGN Advance and Knock Correct Learn Value in the
Data List.
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM PROCEED

TO
IGN ADVANCE KNOCK CORRECT LEARN
VALUE
Differs from the current value of the vehicle by 10° or Less than 3° A
more 3° or more
Differs from the current value of the vehicle by less than B

-
10°
HINT:
If the results of the checks performed in steps 56 to 64 were all normal and the sum of ISC Feedback
Value and ISC Learning Value in the Data List is 120% of the normal value or more, check for carbon
deposits in the throttle with motor body assembly. If there are carbon deposits, clean them off to
finish the troubleshooting procedure.
END
B
A CHECK KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
65. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (FUEL INJECTOR POWER SOURCE)
Standard Voltage:
CYLINDER TESTER CONNECTION SWITCH CONDITION SPECIFIED CONDITION
No. 1 C8-1 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V


*a
(to Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port Injection))
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
not always occur.
A rapid decrease in engine speed may have been caused by a malfunction in all or multiple
cylinders. (There may be an electrical malfunction in the wiring shared by all the cylinders.)
REPAIR FUEL INJECTOR POWER SOURCE

NG CIRCUIT
OK

OK
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM SUSPECTED PROCEED

AREA TO
A/C SIGNAL AIR CONDITIONER FB VAL
A/C Signal display does not

-
change from OFF Except for A/C
A
Value displayed for Air Conditioner FB Val system
A/C Signal display changes from does not increase

OFF to ON*1 Value displayed for Air Conditioner FB Val
A/C system B
increases
HINT:
*1: Check not only the on/off state of the air conditioner but also the change in air conditioner load.
The normal value for the ISC learned value is engine displacement (liters) x 0.9.
Even if the results are normal, the power steering system and/or A/C system may have been
malfunctioning. If there are no problems with other parts, inspect the power steering system and/or
A/C system.
B CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Result

AREA TO
ELECTRIC LOAD FEEDBACK VAL DIFFERENCE VEHICLE
BETWEEN ENGINE SPEED
SPEED AND SPD
(NT)
Value
Electrical
displayed for
- - load signal C
Electric Load
circuit
Val changes
Electrical Load Signal display Less Automatic

At least 1 of the 5 than 30 transmission B
changes from OFF to ON*3, or
Value sets of freeze km/h system
value displayed for Electric Load
displayed for frame data is less
Feedback Val increases*1 30 km/h
Electric Load than 100 rpm - A
or more
Val does not
change All 5 sets of freeze
frame data are - - A
100 rpm or more
Less Automatic
At least 1 of the 5 than 30 transmission B
sets of freeze km/h system
Electrical Load Signal display frame data is less
does not change from OFF, or than 100 rpm 30 km/h
- - A
value displayed for Electric Load or more
Feedback Val does not increase
All 5 sets of freeze
frame data are - - A
100 rpm or more
HINT:
*1: If the Electrical Load Signal display changes from OFF to ON, or the "Electric Load Feedback
Val" increases, it probably is a malfunction due to a change in electrical load. Check the generator
and the continuity and connections between the generator and ECM.
The normal value for the ISC learned value is engine displacement (liters) x 0.9.
Even if the results are normal, the electrical load signal system and/or Automatic transmission
system may have been malfunctioning. If there are no problems with other parts, inspect the
electrical load system and/or Automatic transmission system.
B CHECK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
C CHECK GENERATOR CIRCUIT
Result

TO
SHIFT SW STATUS (P RANGE) NEUTRAL POSITION
SHIFT SW STATUS (N RANGE) SW SIGNAL
Park/neutral position switch
In D or R, NSW is ON A
P and N position are both OFF in at assembly
least one data set Automatic transmission
In D or R, NSW is OFF B
system
All 5 sets of freeze frame data are ON - - C
HINT:
Even if the results are normal, the park/neutral position switch assembly and/or Automatic
transmission system may have been malfunctioning. If there are no problems with other parts, inspect
the park/neutral position switch assembly and/or Automatic transmission system.
B CHECK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

A ASSEMBLY
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM RESULT SUSPECTED PROCEED

AREA TO
Calculate Load decreases while Throttle Sensor Mass air flow

A
Throttle Sensor Position, Position increases meter
Calculate Load Calculate Load does not decrease while Throttle
- B
Sensor Position increases
CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (FUEL INJECTOR

B POWER SOURCE)

(a) Remove the mass air flow meter.
(b) Check for foreign matter in the airflow passage of the mass airflow meter.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
not always occur.

NG CONNECTOR
OK
HINT:
Standard:
OK
Standard Voltage:


*a
(to Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port Injection))
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
not always occur.
A rapid decrease in engine speed may have been caused by a malfunction in all or multiple
cylinders. (There may be an electrical malfunction in the wiring shared by all the cylinders.)
REPAIR FUEL INJECTOR POWER SOURCE

NG CIRCUIT
OK

OK
76. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP DUTY)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump Duty.
Standard:
CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP DUTY SPECIFIED CONDITION
25 or 80% Operating sound heard
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
HINT:
not always occur.
While performing the Active Test, make sure that there is no fuel leakage from the pipes, no signs
that fuel has leaked, and no fuel smell.
If the fuel pump operating noise is abnormal, proceed to step 77.
B CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
CHECK FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (LOW

OK PRESSURE SIDE)

Check the fuel pressure.
Check the fuel pressure (for high pressure).
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
(a) Check for foreign matter such as iron particles around the fuel pump assembly (fuel pump,
fuel pump filter and inside the fuel tank), and for signs that the fuel pump was stuck.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
If there is foreign matter such as iron particles on the fuel pump, fuel filter or fuel tank, remove the
foreign matter.

B


Check the fuel pressure.
Check the fuel pressure (for high pressure).
HINT:

END
OK
81. CLEAR DTC
END
NEXT
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P1604: Startability Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1604 Startability Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
This DTC is stored when the engine does not start even though the starter signal is input or when the engine takes a
long time to start, and when the engine speed is low or the engine stalls just after the engine starts.
Using the Techstream, the conditions present when the DTC was stored can be confirmed by referring to the freeze
frame data. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a malfunction occurs. This information can be useful
when troubleshooting.
It is necessary to check if the vehicle ran out of fuel before performing troubleshooting, as this DTC is also stored when
there is engine starting trouble due to running out of fuel.

NO.
Engine
immobiliser
system
Engine assembly
(excess friction,
compression
loss)
Starter assembly
Crankshaft
position sensor
VVT sensor
Engine coolant
temperature
sensor
Fuel pump
assembly
Fuel pump
control circuit
(low pressure
side)
Fuel pipes
Fuel injector
assembly (for
port injection)
The engine speed is less than 500 rpm with the starter signal on for a Throttle with
certain amount of time (Depending on the engine coolant temperature motor body
P1604
and atmospheric pressure). assembly
After the engine starts (engine speed is 500 rpm or more), the engine Pressure
speed drops to 300 rpm or less immediately. regulator
Battery
Flywheel (for
Manual
Transmission)
Drive plate (for
Automatic
Transmission)
Spark plug
Ignition coil
circuit
Intake system
Camshaft timing
oil control valve
Mass air flow
meter
Air fuel ratio
sensor
Valve timing
Fuel
Purge valve
Intake valve
Exhaust valve
ECM
HINT:
In contrast to normal malfunction diagnosis for components, circuits and systems, DTC P1604 is used to
determine the malfunctioning area from the problem symptoms and freeze frame data when the user mentions
problems such as starting difficulty.
As these DTCs can be stored as a result of certain user actions, even if these DTCs are output, if the
customer makes no mention of problems, clear these DTCs without performing any troubleshooting and
return the vehicle to the customer.
If any other DTCs are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
When the Data List item "Immobiliser Fuel Cut" is ON, the engine cannot be started.
Read freeze frame data using the Techstream. Freeze frame data records engine conditions when a malfunction
occurs. This information can be useful when troubleshooting.
When confirming the freeze frame data, be sure to check all 5 sets of freeze frame data .
When confirming freeze frame data, if there are multiple items related to the cause of the malfunction, perform
troubleshooting for all related items.
Try to start the vehicle under the conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which were present when the
malfunction occurred. Confirm the data at this time and compare it with the freeze frame data.
If the malfunction does not reoccur, carefully check the vehicle conditions from when the malfunction occurred
using freeze frame data.
When performing inspections, jiggle the relevant wire harnesses and connectors in an attempt to reproduce
malfunctions that do not always occur.
If the same inspection or replacement procedure appears 2 times when performing an inspection procedure, it is
not necessary to repeat the procedure the second time.
1. Malfunction Recurrence and Inspection Areas

(a) Freeze frame data exists, but the malfunction (starting difficulty) has not reoccurred and the malfunction
conditions are unknown.
(1) The engine speed recorded in the freeze frame data is 0 rpm (the engine does not crank).
HINT:
One of the following problems may be present: battery depletion, excess engine friction, a starter malfunction or a
crankshaft position sensor malfunction.
If the battery voltage is less than 9 V during cranking, there is a high probability that engine friction
is abnormal.
If the battery voltage drops to 5 V or less when starting the engine, the battery may be
malfunctioning.
If the battery voltage fluctuates while cranking the engine, it can be concluded that cranking is
being performed. When the engine speed is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor and/or ECM may
be malfunctioning.
(2) All engine speeds recorded in the freeze frame data are between 100 and 250 rpm (the engine cranks but
there is no combustion).
HINT:
If the engine speed is between 100 and 250 rpm (no initial combustion), there may be a wiring problem or a
complete failure of an ignition or fuel system part.
Due to an engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction, the fuel injection volume is extremely
high or low and the engine may not be able to be started.
(3) The engine speed recorded in the freeze frame data is 250 rpm or higher (the initial combustion and starter
turnoff timing is too late).
HINT:
If the engine speed is 250 rpm or higher (combustion occurs but the initial combustion and starter turnoff timing is
too late), the fuel injection volume is often incorrect (too low or too high) and determining the cause of the
malfunction is often difficult.
Due to an engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction, the fuel injection volume is extremely
high or low and engine starting trouble may occur.
If Long FT is incorrect, there may be a fuel supply problem due to the injectors or fuel pump being
clogged, etc.
If the engine cranking speed is too high, compression loss may have occurred due to carbon
interfering with the valve operation.
(b) When the malfunction (starting difficulty) can be reproduced, or malfunction conditions are known, perform the
following inspections ("Problem Symptoms" and "Systems to Inspect").
(1) Problem Symptoms
1. The engine does not crank.
HINT:
The starter is normal if a noise that indicates the starter pinion gear is extending is heard. The
battery may be fully depleted or there may be excess engine friction.
2. The engine cranking speed is abnormal.
HINT:
If the engine cranking speed is too high (for example, 300 rpm or higher with no combustion),
compression loss may have occurred because carbon interfered with valve operation, etc.
3. There is no initial combustion.
HINT:
If there is no initial combustion, there is probably a wiring problem or an ignition or fuel system
part malfunction.
4. The engine stalls after starter turnoff.
HINT:
If the engine stalls after starter turnoff, the air-fuel ratio may be incorrect or the VVT may have
a problem returning.
5. The initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late.

HINT:
If the initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late, the fuel injection volume is probably
incorrect (too low or too high).
HINT:
Causes of fuel system malfunctions according to conditions present at the time of the
malfunction.
When 2 to 3 minutes have elapsed after stopping the engine: Fuel pressure loss due to the
pressure regulator failing to maintain the fuel pressure.
When 15 to 120 minutes have elapsed after stopping the engine: Problem with injector fuel
seal.
When a long time has elapsed after stopping the engine: Pressure regulator is stuck open.
(2) Systems to Inspect

1. Intake system
2. Ignition system
3. Fuel system
2. INSPECTION FLOW
(a) Freeze frame data exists, but the malfunction (starting difficulty) has not reoccurred and the malfunction
conditions are unknown.
FREEZE FRAME RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEDURE

DATA ITEM
Battery fully depleted

Engine assembly
(excess friction)
Starter assembly
0 rpm (no engine cranking at all) Engine immobiliser 4 to 9
system
Crankshaft position
sensor
ECM
Fuel pump control

circuit (Low pressure
Engine Speed
side)
100 to 250 rpm (engine cranks but no initial
Ignition system 10 to 14
combustion*1)
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Fuel injection system
Engine assembly
(compression loss)
250 rpm or higher (combustion occurs but initial Fuel injection system
15 to 23
combustion and starter turnoff*2 occur late) Fuel pump control
side)
HINT:
*1: First combustion after cranking begins.

*2: Condition when engine speed increases and starter can be turned off.
(b) When the malfunction (starting difficulty) can be reproduced, or when malfunction conditions are known.
(1) Problem Symptoms
PROBLEM SYMPTOM SUSPECTED AREA SUSPECTED COMPONENT PROCEDURE
Battery malfunction Battery fully depleted
Starter assembly (includes pinion

Starting system gear wear or tooth damage)
Starting system
The engine does not crank 26 to 31
Engine immobiliser system Engine immobiliser system
Engine assembly (excess friction)

Engine assembly
Drive plate wear or tooth damage
Battery malfunction Battery fully depleted
Cranking speed too low Starting system Starter assembly
32 to 34
Engine assembly Engine assembly (excess friction)
Engine assembly (compression

Cranking speed too high Engine assembly
loss)
Cannot maintain pressure due to

pressure regulator malfunction
Fuel injector leak
Fuel supply problem Fuel leak from fuel line
Fuel pump control circuit (Low
There is no initial combustion pressure side) 35 to 49
Fuel pump assembly
Spark plug
Ignition system malfunction Crankshaft position sensor
Ignition coil assembly
Air suction Intake system connections
Throttle with motor body

Deposits in throttle body
Engine stalls after starter assembly
50 to 56
turnoff
VVT valve does not return
Camshaft timing oil control valve
properly
Mass air flow meter

Mass air flow meter
malfunction
Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature

sensor malfunction sensor
Mass air flow meter

Mass air flow meter
malfunction
Abnormal A/F learned value Air fuel ratio sensor

The initial combustion and Deviation from fuel Fuel injector assembly (for port 57 to 71
starter turnoff occur late injection characteristics injection)
Wet-fouled or dry-fouled
Spark plug
spark plug
Pressure regulator
Fuel pump assembly
Lack of fuel pressure
Fuel pump control circuit (low
pressure side)
(2) Systems to Inspect
TROUBLESHOOTING SUSPECTED AREA SUSPECTED COMPONENT PROCEDURE

BY SYSTEM
Fuel injector assembly (for port

Abnormal A/F learned value
injection)
Rough idling Crankshaft position sensor

Fuel system 87 to 94
troubleshooting A 95 to 102
Fuel
Fuel leak from fuel line
Abnormal fuel pressure
Fuel pump assembly
Pressure regulator
Purge valve system

Fuel system Abnormal concentration of HC in Fuel injector assembly (for port
103 to 105
troubleshooting B surge tank injection)
Intake valve

injection)
Fuel system
Injection signal system malfunction Crankshaft position sensor 73 to 76
troubleshooting C
VVT sensor
ECM
Engine assembly (compression

loss)
Intake system Difference between ISC target value Valve timing 84 to 86
troubleshooting and opening angle when idling Engine coolant temperature 106 to 108
sensor
ECM

system (including sensor
Ignition system Camshaft and/or crankshaft position installation) 77 to 83
troubleshooting sensor signal malfunction VVT sensor system (including 109 to 115
sensor installation)
ECM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT AND RECORD FREEZE FRAME DATA
(d) Read the DTCs and record the freeze frame data.
HINT:
This freeze frame data shows the actual engine conditions when engine
starting trouble occurred.
When confirming the freeze frame data, be sure to check all 5 data
sets of freeze frame data.
The fourth set of freeze frame data is the data recorded when the DTC
is stored.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Only DTC P1604 is output A
DTCs other than P1604 are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Immobiliser Fuel Cut.

OK:
Immobiliser Fuel Cut is OFF.
HINT:
After reconnecting the battery cable, if the engine is started immediately (without waiting 1.8 seconds after turning
the ignition switch to ON), the engine will stop (due to the key verification process). The engine can be started
after that.
REPAIR ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM

NG
OK
3. CHECK MALFUNCTION CONDITION
(a) Confirm the problem symptoms.

Result
RESULT PROCEED
TO
Freeze frame data exists, but the starting difficulty cannot be reproduced and it is unknown what kind of
A
starting difficulty occurred
The problem symptoms can be reproduced, or the malfunction conditions are known B
B CONFIRM PROBLEM SYMPTOM
(c) Using the Techstream, confirm the vehicle conditions recorded in the freeze frame data which were
present when the DTC was stored .
Result

TO
ENGINE SPEED BATTERY VOLTAGE
Minimum voltage
Battery fully depleted A
is below 5 V
Starter malfunction
All 5 sets of freeze frame data are 0 rpm (no engine Crankshaft position
cranking at all) sensor system
Minimum voltage
Excess engine friction B
is 5 V or higher
Engine immobiliser
system
ECM
Fuel pump control

side)
Ignition system
60 to 250 rpm (engine cranks but no initial
- Engine coolant C
combustion)
temperature sensor
Engine immobiliser
system
Engine assembly
250 rpm or higher (combustion occurs but initial
- Fuel pump control D
combustion and starter turnoff occur late)
side)
HINT:
When DTC P1604 is stored, either "Engine Start Hesitation"*1 or "Low Rev for Eng Start"*2 in the freeze frame
data will be ON. If "Low Rev for Eng Start" is ON, proceed to E.
*1: This value turns ON when the engine speed does not reach a certain value for a certain period of time when
starting the engine.
*2: This value turns ON when the engine stalls immediately after starting the engine. If "Low Rev for Eng Start" is
ON, as there is a possibility that the low engine speed or engine stall was caused by the user, confirm the following
freeze frame data items.

Engine Speed (Starter Off)
Shift SW Status (R, D Range)
B CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA
C CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA
D CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA
CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY

A
Result
FREEZE FRAME RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED

DATA ITEM TO
Crankshaft position
Minimum voltage is 9 V or higher and voltage
sensor system A
fluctuates*2, *3
ECM
Battery Voltage Minimum voltage is 9 V or higher and voltage

Starter system B
does not fluctuate*1
Excess engine friction
Minimum voltage is 5 to 9 V*4 C
HINT:
*1: The 5 sets of freeze frame data show approximately the same battery voltage.
*2: The 5 sets of freeze frame data show different battery voltages.
*3: If the voltage fluctuates, it can be determined that cranking is being performed. When the engine speed is 0
rpm, the crankshaft position sensor system and/or the ECM may be malfunctioning.
*4: There may be excess engine friction. Make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly when turning it by
hand. Excess engine friction may have occurred temporarily. Remove the cylinder head cover and oil pan, and
check for foreign matter such as iron fragments. If there is a malfunction or signs of a malfunction present,
perform a detailed inspection by disassembling all the parts.
B CHECK STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
CHECK AND REPAIR ENGINE OR BATTERY

C
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (SENSOR INSTALLATION)
(a) Check the tightening and installation condition of the crankshaft position sensor bolt.
(b) Check the connection of the crankshaft position sensor connector.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Normal A
Abnormal B
B SECURELY REINSTALL SENSOR
A
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(b) Check for oil on the connector terminals.

OK:
No oil on the terminals.
OK
A34-16 (NE+) - C33-1 (NE+) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-27 (NE-) - C33-2 (NE-) Always Below 1 Ω
A34-16 (NE+) or C33-1 (NE+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A34-27 (NE-) or C33-2 (NE-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do not always
occur.

NG
OK
(b) Check the engine start operation.

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM
END (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR IS DEFECTIVE)

OK
Result

AREA TO
COOLANT TEMP, AMBIENT TEMP COOLANT TEMP, AMBIENT FUEL PUMP DUTY
FOR A/C, INTAKE AIR TEMP FOR A/C
Coolant Temp is 125°C or Engine coolant

higher, or below Ambient Temp - temperature A
for A/C by 15°C or more sensor
Difference between Coolant Temp, No sets of freeze

- B
Ambient Temp for A/C and Intake frame data are 0%
Air is 10°C or more*1
Other than above Fuel pump
At least 1 of the 5
control circuit
sets of freeze C
(low pressure
frame data is 0%
side)
Fuel pump
At least 1 of the 5
control circuit
Difference between Coolant Temp, sets of freeze C
(low pressure
Ambient Temp for A/C and Intake - frame data is 0%
side)
Air is less than 10°C*2
No sets of freeze
- B
frame data are 0%
HINT:
PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL

B THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED)
CHECK FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (LOW PRESSURE

C
SIDE)
A REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
11. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED)
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump / Speed.
(d) When performing the Active Test, check for an operating sound from the fuel pump.
OK:
CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON Operating sound heard
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do not always occur.
REPAIR FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT (LOW PRESSURE

NG SIDE)
OK
Standard Voltage:


*a
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
REPAIR FUEL INJECTOR POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

NG
OK
(d) When performing the Active Test, check for fuel leakage from the fuel pipes.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Fuel leakage or signs of fuel leakage are present A
No fuel leakage or signs of fuel leakage B
HINT:
occur.
When performing the Active Test, if there is no operating noise from the fuel pump, the fuel pump system may
be malfunctioning.
Check if the vehicle ran out of fuel, as engine starting trouble due to running out of fuel is also detected.
B CHECK FUEL SYSTEM
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL LINE

A
(a) Check for foreign matter such as iron particles around the fuel pump assembly (fuel pump, fuel pump
filter, and inside the fuel tank), and for signs that the fuel pump was stuck.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
B PERFORM SIMULATION TEST

A
Result

TO
COOLANT TEMP, AMBIENT COOLANT TEMP, AMBIENT LONG FT ENGINE
TEMP FOR A/C, INTAKE AIR TEMP FOR A/C SPEED
Coolant Temp is 125°C or

higher, or below Ambient Engine coolant
- - A
Temp for A/C by 15°C or temperature sensor
more
Fuel
pump
control
circuit
-15% or (low
less, or pressure
- B
+15% or side)
Difference between Coolant more Fuel
Temp, Ambient Temp for A/C injector
and Intake Air is 10°C or assembly
more (for port
Other than above injection)
Minimum
speed is 300
Engine assembly C
rpm or
more*1
-15 to
+15% Fuel
Minimum
system
speed is less
Intake D
than 300
air
rpm
system
Fuel
pump
control
circuit
-15% or (low
less, or pressure
- B
+15% or side)
more Fuel
injector
assembly
Difference between Coolant
(for port
Temp, Ambient Temp for A/C
- injection)
and Intake Air is less than
10°C
Minimum
speed is 300
Engine assembly C
rpm or
more*1
-15 to
+15% Fuel
Minimum
system
speed is less
Intake D
than 300
air
rpm
system
HINT:
*1: Compression loss may have occurred in the engine assembly.
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT

B INJECTION)
CHECK AND REPAIR ENGINE

C
D CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA
A REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Check that no carbon is stuck to the fuel injector assembly (for port injection).
OK:
No carbon present.

NG
INJECTION)
OK
(a) Check for foreign matter such as iron particles around the fuel pump assembly (fuel pump, fuel pump
filter, and inside the fuel tank), and for signs that the fuel pump was stuck.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO

A
Result
FREEZE FRAME DATA ITEM RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED TO
Engine coolant temperature is 40°C or less*1 Pressure regulator A
Coolant Temp Engine coolant temperature is 40 to 90°C*2 Fuel injector B
Engine coolant temperature is 90°C or higher*3 Pressure regulator A
HINT:
*1: If the engine coolant temperature is 40°C or less (after stopping the engine and the vehicle has not been
driven for a long period of time), the pressure regulator may be stuck open. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check
the ability of the system to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*2: If the engine coolant temperature is 40 to 90°C (15 to 120 minutes have passed after stopping the engine),
there may be fuel leaking from a fuel injector.
*3: If the engine coolant temperature is 90°C or more (2 to 5 minutes have passed after stopping the engine),
there may be a problem with the pressure regulator failing to maintain the fuel pressure. Attach a fuel pressure
gauge and check the ability of the pressure regulator to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
B CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)

A
HINT:
For the fuel pressure inspection, refer to the following procedures .
(a) Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
Standard:
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher (5 minutes after stopping the engine)
HINT:
If the engine cannot be started, read the values after cranking the engine.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
A REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
20. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
(a) Clean the inside of the surge tank with compressed air.
(b) After stopping the engine, measure the HC concentration inside the surge tank for 15 minutes.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more A
Less than 4000 ppm B
HINT:
If the concentration is 4000 ppm or more, a fuel injector assembly may have a sealing problem.
B CHECK THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
A
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assemblies (for port injection) .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal B
B CHECK THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY

A INJECTION)
22. CHECK THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Check if carbon is in the airflow passage.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Carbon in passage A
No carbon present B
B CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
A REPLACE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY

OK:

NG
OK
24. PERFORM SIMULATION TEST
(a) Check if the engine can be started.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Engine can be started A
Engine cannot be started B
B CONFIRM PROBLEM SYMPTOM
END
A
25. CONFIRM PROBLEM SYMPTOM
(a) Confirm the problem symptoms.
HINT:
The problem symptoms below can be determined by reading the freeze frame data.
Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED

TO

Starter assembly (includes
pinion gear wear or tooth
damage)
Starter system
Engine assembly (excess
The engine does not crank A
friction)
Flywheel wear or tooth damage
(for Manual Transmission)
Drive plate wear or tooth
damage (for Automatic
Transmission)

Starter assembly
Abnormal cranking speed B
Engine assembly (excess
friction, compression loss)
Pressure regulator fuel

pressure maintenance
Fuel injector leak
Fuel leak from fuel line
There is no initial combustion (combustion does not occur even
pressure side) C
once)*1
Fuel pump assembly
Spark plug
system
Ignition coil system
Intake system connections

Throttle with motor body
The engine stalls after starter turnoff (engine stalls immediately assembly
D
after the first time the engine speed increases)*2 Camshaft timing oil control
valve
Mass air flow meter system
Engine coolant temperature

sensor
Mass air flow meter
The initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late*3 E
injection)
Spark plug
Pressure regulator
Fuel pump assembly
pressure side)
HINT:
If there is hesitation (cranking speed is slow and combustion occurs before passing TDC) during the initial
cranking period, the battery charge may be insufficient or the starter may be malfunctioning.
*1: If there is no initial combustion, a wire harness may be malfunctioning, or the ignition or fuel system may be
malfunctioning.
*2: If the engine stalls after starter turnoff, the air-fuel ratio may be incorrect or the camshaft timing oil control
valve may have a problem returning.
*3: If the initial combustion and starter turnoff occur late, the fuel injection volume may be incorrect (too low or
too high).
C CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
D INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER
E INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) When cranking the engine, check for a noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending, and
check that the starter pinion gear is not spinning freely.
Result

TO
Battery
A noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending is heard and
Excess engine friction A
the starter pinion gear is not spinning freely*1
Starter assembly
Fly wheel (for Manual

Transmission)
A noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending is heard but Drive plate (for
B
the starter pinion gear is spinning freely Automatic
Transmission)
Starter assembly
Battery
A noise indicating that the starter pinion gear is extending is not heard Starter assembly C
Starter system
HINT:
*1: The battery may be fully depleted or there may be excess engine friction.
B CHECK STARTER ASSEMBLY
C INSPECT BATTERY
27. INSPECT BATTERY
(a) Check the electrolyte quantity.

OK:
Electrolyte quantity is within the specified range.
(b) Inspect the specific gravity.
(1) Inspect the specific gravity of each cell.

Standard specific gravity:
1.25 to 1.29 (electrolyte is at 20°C (68°F))
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, recharge or replace the battery.

It is not necessary to inspect a maintenance-free battery.
(c) Inspect the battery voltage.
(1) Turn the ignition switch off and turn on the headlights for 20 to 30 seconds. This will remove the
surface charge from the battery.
(2) Measure the battery voltage.

Standard voltage:
12.5 to 12.9 V (electrolyte is at 20°C (68°F))
HINT:
(3) Measure the battery voltage when cranking the engine.

Standard:
Approximately 6 V or higher (0°C (32°F) or higher)
HINT:
When the battery is depleted, the horn becomes quieter.

NG
OK
28. CHECK ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly when rotating it by hand.
OK:
Crankshaft rotates smoothly.
HINT:
Excess engine friction may have occurred temporarily. Remove the cylinder head cover and oil pan, and check for
foreign matter such as iron fragments. If there is a malfunction or signs of a malfunction present, perform a
detailed inspection by disassembling all the parts.
REPAIR OR REPLACE ENGINE ASSEMBLY

NG
OK INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
29. CHECK STARTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the starter assembly .

(b) Check for starter pinion gear wear and damage.
OK:
There is no wear or damage.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Abnormal A
Normal (for Manual Transmission) B
Normal (for Automatic Transmission) C
B REPLACE FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
C REPLACE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY
A REPLACE STARTER ASSEMBLY
30. INSPECT BATTERY

OK:

HINT:

Standard voltage:
HINT:

Standard:
HINT:

NG
OK
31. INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the starter assembly .
NG REPLACE STARTER ASSEMBLY
OK CHECK STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(a) Check the cranking speed.

Result
PROBLEM SYMPTOM SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED TO
Battery
Cranking speed is slow (100 rpm or less) Starter assembly A
Excess engine friction
Cranking speed is fast (300 rpm or more)*1 Engine compression loss B
HINT:
*1: If the cranking speed is fast, there may be compression loss.
CHECK AND REPAIR ENGINE ASSEMBLY

B
A
33. INSPECT BATTERY

OK:

HINT:


Standard voltage:
HINT:

Standard:
HINT:

NG
OK
34. CHECK ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly when rotating it by hand.
OK:
Crankshaft rotates smoothly.
HINT:
Excess engine friction may have occurred temporarily. Remove the cylinder head cover and oil pan, and check for
foreign matter such as iron fragments. If there is a malfunction or signs of a malfunction present, perform a
detailed inspection by disassembling all the parts.

NG
OK INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a sound scope or screwdriver, check for fuel injector operating noise while cranking the engine.
OK:
Fuel injector operating noise is heard.
NG READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ENGINE SPEED)
OK
(a) Inspect the fuel pressure .

NG
THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED)
OK
37. CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK
(a) Check for sparks .
NG CHECK SPARK PLUG
OK
38. CONFIRM VEHICLE CONDITION
(a) Confirm the conditions present when the malfunction occurred based on the customer problem analysis.
Result

TO
When the engine is stopped and a long time has passed, engine
Pressure regulator is stuck open A
starting trouble occurs*1
When the engine is stopped and approximately 15 to 120 minutes have

Fuel injector leak B
passed, engine starting trouble occurs*2
When the engine is stopped and approximately 2 to 3 minutes have Failure to maintain fuel pressure
A
passed, engine starting trouble occurs*3 by pressure regulator
Condition other than above, or there is an inconsistency in the

- C*4
conditions present when engine starting trouble occurs
HINT:
*1: The pressure regulator may be stuck open. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the ability of the system to
maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*2: Fuel may be leaking from a fuel injector assembly.
*3: The pressure regulator may not be able to maintain the fuel pressure. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check
the ability of the pressure regulator to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*4: From step 72, perform fuel system troubleshooting C (steps 73 to 76).
B CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
C CHECK MALFUNCTION CONDITION
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Below 147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) (5 minutes after stopping the engine) A
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher (5 minutes after stopping the engine) B*1
HINT:
If the engine cannot be started, check the fuel pressure after cranking the engine.
B CHECK MALFUNCTION CONDITION
(a) After stopping the engine, measure the HC concentration inside the surge tank for 15 minutes.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more A
Less than 4000 ppm B*1
HINT:

A INJECTION)
41. CHECK SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plugs .
HINT:
Even if the spark plug of only one cylinder is malfunctioning, replace the spark plugs of all cylinders.
OK
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(e) While running the engine, read the value of Engine Speed.
OK:
A value that matches the actual engine speed is constantly output.
HINT:
Check the engine speed using a line graph.

If the engine cannot be started, check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
If the engine speed is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor may have an open or short circuit.
NG CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
OK
43. CHECK TERMINAL VOLTAGE (IGNITION COIL POWER SOURCE)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil assembly connectors.
Standard Voltage:
*a
(to Ignition Coil Assembly)
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

NG
OK
44. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY - ECM)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil assembly connector.
A36-21 (IGT1) - C38-3 Always Below 1 Ω
A36-21 (IGT1) or C38-3 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
45. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the ignition coil assembly connector.
C38-2 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness is normal, after replacing the ignition coil assembly, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble occurs again, proceed to step 72 and perform troubleshooting for the ignition
system (steps 78 to 83).

NG
OK REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
(d) When performing the Active Test, check for an operating sound from the fuel pump.
OK:
CONTROL THE FUEL PUMP / SPEED SPECIFIED CONDITION
ON Operating sound heard
HINT:
Jiggle the wire harness and connector to increase the likelihood of detecting malfunctions that do not always occur.

NG
SIDE)
OK
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
If there are no fuel leaks, after inspecting the fuel pump control circuit, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble occurs again, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting C
(steps 73 to 77).

B SIDE)

A
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Engine Speed.
(e) While running the engine, read the value of Engine Speed.
OK:
A value that matches the actual engine speed is constantly output.
HINT:
Check the engine speed using a line graph.

If the engine cannot be started, check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
If the engine speed is 0 rpm, the crankshaft position sensor may have an open or short circuit.
OK
Standard Voltage:

*a
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.
NG
OK
NG INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK
(a) Check for air leakage in the intake system [vacuum hose disconnection, cracks, damaged gaskets, etc.]
.
HINT:
If the accelerator pedal is released after racing the engine, the inspection is easier to perform because the
vacuum inside the intake manifold increases and the air suction noise becomes louder.
If Short FT and Long FT are largely different from the normal values (differ by more than 15%) when idling
(intake air volume is small) and almost the same as the normal values when racing the engine (for example,
when maintaining a speed of 3000 rpm) (intake air volume is high), air leakage may be present.
OK:

NG
OK
HINT:
When the connector is disconnected, the vehicle enters fail-safe mode.
(b) Crank the engine and check that it starts.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Engine starts A
Engine does not start B
(c) Connect the throttle with motor body assembly connector.
HINT:
When this inspection is performed, the MIL may illuminate. After finishing the inspection, check and clear DTCs
.

B THE VVT LINEAR)
(a) Check if carbon is in the airflow passage.

OK:
No carbon present.
NG REPLACE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
OK
54. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE VVT LINEAR)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Linear (Bank1) or Control
the VVT Linear (Bank2).
HINT:
When performing the Active Test, make sure the A/C is on and the shift lever is in P, N or neutral position.
(e) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve using the Techstream.
OK:

HINT:
occur.
When the results of the inspection using the Active Test are normal but the valve operating noise is abnormal,
check the valve for any signs of problems.
If the camshaft timing oil control valve is stuck on, the valve overlap increases and combustion worsens due to
the internal EGR which may cause the engine to stall.
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR

NG
INTAKE SIDE)
OK
55. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE VVT EXHAUST LINEAR)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank1) or
Control the VVT Exhaust Linear (Bank2).
HINT:
When performing the Active Test, make sure the A/C is on and the shift lever is in P, N or neutral position.
(e) Check the engine speed while operating the camshaft timing oil control valve using the Techstream.
OK*1:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
HINT:
*1: From step 72, perform intake system troubleshooting (steps 84 to 86). If engine starting trouble still occurs,
perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 87 to 94).
occur.
When the results of the inspection using the Active Test are normal but the valve operating noise is abnormal,
check the valve for any signs of problems.
If the camshaft timing oil control valve is stuck on, the valve overlap increases and combustion worsens due to
the internal EGR which may cause the engine to stall.
REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE (FOR

A EXHAUST SIDE)
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness is normal, after replacing the mass air flow meter, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble occurs again, proceed to step 72 and perform intake system troubleshooting
(steps 84 to 86). If engine starting trouble still occurs, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 87 to 94).

NG
HINT:
If the engine coolant temperature sensor is malfunctioning, after replacing it, check if engine starting trouble
occurs again. If engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to
step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to
105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 114), in
that order.
REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NG
OK
58. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - ECM)
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness or connector is malfunctioning, after replacing or repairing it, check if engine starting trouble
step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103
to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to
115), in that order.

NG
OK
HINT:
If the mass air flow meter is malfunctioning, after replacing it, check if engine starting trouble occurs again. If
engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and
perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake
system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.
OK
HINT:
occur.
If the wire harness or connector is malfunctioning, after replacing or repairing it, check if engine starting trouble
step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103
to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to

NG
OK

(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Atmospheric Pressure and Long FT.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED

TO
+25% or more or less than -

Long FT Air fuel ratio sensor
25%
Mass air flow meter
A
80 kPa or less (when elevation Fuel injector assembly (for port
Atmosphere Pressure injection)
is 0 m)
ECM
Both Data List items listed

above
B CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Remove the EFI MAIN and ETCS fuses from the engine room relay block assembly.
(b) After 60 seconds or more elapse, install the EFI MAIN and ETCS fuses.
(c) Check if the engine can be started.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Engine can be started A
Engine cannot be started B
B CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)

(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Fuel
System Status #1.
(e) Confirm that Fuel System Status #1 is CL.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / AF

Lambda B1S1.
(g) Confirm that AF Lambda B1S1 is both within the range of 0.95 to
1.05 when idling.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test /

Control the Injection Volume for A/F sensor.
(i) Read the output voltage from the air fuel ratio sensor when
increasing and decreasing the fuel injection volume.
Standard:
TECHSTREAM INJECTION SPECIFIED CONDITION

DISPLAY VOLUME
Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is

+12.5%
AFS Voltage below 2.0 V
B1S1 Air fuel ratio sensor output voltage is
-12.5%
higher than 2.4 V
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Normal A
Abnormal B
HINT:
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the
heated oxygen sensor has a maximum output delay of approximately
20 seconds.
If the air fuel ratio sensor is malfunctioning, after replacing it, check if
engine starting trouble occurs again. If engine starting trouble occurs,
replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step
72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel
system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system
troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system
troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.

(a) Check if the idling speed is stable after starting the engine.
OK:
Speed is stable.
HINT:
After replacing the fuel injector assembly or mass air flow meter, check if engine starting trouble occurs again. If
engine starting trouble occurs, replace the ECM. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and
perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake
system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.

NG
INJECTION)
(a) Inspect the fuel pressure .

NG
OK
66. CHECK SPARK PLUG
(a) Inspect the spark plugs .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
All cylinders are normal A
One cylinder is abnormal*1 B
All cylinders are abnormal*2, *3 C
HINT:
*1: If one cylinder is abnormal, replace the spark plug of that cylinder and inspect the ignition and fuel system
for that cylinder. After performing repairs, check if engine starting trouble occurs again. If engine starting trouble
still occurs, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system
troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system
troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.
*2: If all cylinders are abnormal, replace the spark plugs of all cylinders and check if engine starting trouble
occurs again. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting
A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106
to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 115), in that order.
*3: Engine starting trouble may occur if the vehicle is driven extremely short distances repeatedly.
B REPLACE SPARK PLUG (ABNORMAL CYLINDER)
C REPLACE SPARK PLUG (ALL)
67. CONFIRM VEHICLE CONDITION
(a) Confirm the conditions present when the malfunction occurred based on the customer problem analysis.
Result

TO
When the engine is stopped and a long time has passed, engine
Pressure regulator is stuck open A
starting trouble occurs*1
When the engine is stopped and approximately 15 to 120 minutes have

Fuel injector leak B
passed, engine starting trouble occurs*2
When the engine is stopped and approximately 2 to 3 minutes have Failure to maintain fuel pressure
A
passed, engine starting trouble occurs*3 by pressure regulator
Condition other than above, or there is an inconsistency in the

- C*4
conditions present when engine starting trouble occurs
HINT:
*1: The pressure regulator may be stuck open. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the ability of the system to
maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*2: Fuel may be leaking from a fuel injector assembly.
*3: The pressure regulator may not be able to maintain the fuel pressure. Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check
the ability of the pressure regulator to maintain fuel pressure after stopping the engine.
*4: From step 72, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps
103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to
B CHECK PURGE VALVE
C CHECK MALFUNCTION CONDITION
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Below 147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) (5 minutes after stopping the engine) A
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher (5 minutes after stopping the engine) B*1
HINT:
If the engine cannot be started, check the fuel pressure after cranking the engine.
*1: From step 72, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B
(steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting
(steps 109 to 114), in that order.
(a) Disconnect the purge hose (on the canister side) of the purge
valve.

OK:
Air does not flow.
(g) Connect the purge hose of the purge valve.
HINT:
.

OK
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more A
Less than 4000 ppm B*1
HINT:
*1: From step 72, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B
(steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting

A INJECTION)
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
If there are no fuel leaks, after inspecting the fuel pump control circuit, check if engine starting trouble occurs
again. If engine starting trouble still occurs, proceed to step 72 and perform fuel system troubleshooting A
(steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps 103 to 105), intake system troubleshooting (steps 106
to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting (steps 109 to 114), in that order.
B
SIDE)

A
72. CHECK MALFUNCTION CONDITION
(a) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspections in steps 38, 39, 40 and 47, perform fuel
system troubleshooting C (steps 73 to 76).
Result
PERFORMED STEP TROUBLESHOOTING BY SYSTEM PROCEDURE PROCEED TO
Steps 38, 39, 40 and 47 Fuel system troubleshooting C 73 to 76 A
(b) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspection in step 45, perform ignition system
troubleshooting (steps 77 to 83).
Result
Step 45 Ignition system troubleshooting 77 to 83 B
(c) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspections in steps 55, 56 and 57, perform intake
air system troubleshooting (steps 84 to 86). If engine starting trouble still occurs, perform fuel system
troubleshooting A (steps 87 to 94).
Result
Intake air system troubleshooting 84 to 86

Step 55, 56, 57 C
Fuel system troubleshooting A 87 to 94
(d) If the malfunction could not be identified during the inspections in steps 58, 59, 60, 63, 64, 66, 67, 68,
70 and 71, perform fuel system troubleshooting A (steps 95 to 102), fuel system troubleshooting B (steps
103 to 105), intake air system troubleshooting (steps 106 to 108), and ignition system troubleshooting
Result
Fuel system troubleshooting A 95 to 102
Fuel system troubleshooting B 103 to 105

Steps 57, 58, 59, 60, 63, 64, 66, 67, 68, 70 and 71 D
Intake air system troubleshooting 106 to 108
Ignition system troubleshooting 109 to 115
B CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
C READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ISC LEARNING VALUE)
D CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)

A
(a) Inspect the fuel injector assemblies (for port injection) .

NG INJECTION)
OK
Standard Voltage:

*a
*b No. 1 cylinder
*c No. 2 cylinder
*d No. 3 cylinder
*e No. 4 cylinder
HINT:
occur.

NG
OK

OK:
NG CHECK VVT SENSOR

OK
76. CHECK VVT SENSOR

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM
END (VVT SENSOR IS DEFECTIVE)

OK

OK:

OK
(a) Check the tightening and installation condition of the VVT sensor bolt.
(b) Check the connection of the VVT sensor connector.

OK:
OK
HINT:
occur.

NG
OK
80. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (INTAKE SIDE) - ECM)
Standard Voltage:
C12-1 (VV1-) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to VVT Sensor (Intake Side))
HINT:
occur.

NG
OK
81. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (EXHAUST SIDE) - ECM)
Standard Voltage:
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to VVT Sensor (Exhaust Side))

HINT:
occur.

NG
OK

OK:
NG CHECK VVT SENSOR

OK

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM

OK
84. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ISC LEARNING VALUE)

(c) Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature stabilizes with the A/C switch and
all the accessory switches off.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / ISC Learning Value.
Result
DATA LIST ITEM RESULT SUSPECTED AREA PROCEED TO
Valve timing
(engine displacement (liters) x 0.9) or more A
ISC Learning Value Compression
Less than (engine displacement (liters) x 0.9) - B
B INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Inspect the compression .

NG
OK ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK
HINT:
(a) Attach a fuel pressure gauge and check the fuel pressure when cranking the engine and after stopping
the engine.
Result
VEHICLE STATE SPECIFIED CONDITION
Cranking engine 304 to 343 kPa (3.1 to 3.5 kgf/cm 2 )
5 minutes after stopping engine 147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher

NG
OK
88. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (LONG FT)
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Long FT.
Result

-15 to +15% A
Long FT Fuel
+15% or more, or less than -15% Fuel injector assembly B

B
INJECTION)
(a) Check if the idling speed is stable after starting the engine and if an unstable idling speed has ever
occurred in the past.
Result
Current unstable idling speed or history of unstable idling speed Crankshaft position sensor system A
All current and past idling speeds are stable Fuel B
HINT:
Through the customer problem analysis, confirm the fuel being used and the location at which the fuel was added
to check if the malfunction is caused by the fuel in the vehicle.
REPLACE FUEL
B

OK:
OK
HINT:
occur.

NG
OK

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM

OK
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
be malfunctioning.
B INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY

A

HINT:
Make sure there is no foreign matter such as iron particles on the fuel pump assembly and no signs that the fuel
pump was stuck.
Make sure the internal connector is securely connected.
Make sure the fuel pump filter is not clogged.
OK REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) or higher (5 minutes after stopping the engine) A
Below 147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 ) (5 minutes after stopping the engine) B

B
96. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (LONG FT)
(c) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Long FT.
Result

-15 to +15% A
Long FT Fuel
+15% or more, or less than -15% Fuel injector assembly B

B
INJECTION)
(a) Check if the idling speed is stable after starting the engine and if an unstable idling speed has ever
occurred in the past.
Result
Current unstable idling speed or history of unstable idling speed Crankshaft position sensor system A
All current and past idling speeds are stable Fuel B
HINT:
Through the customer problem analysis, confirm the fuel being used and the location at which the fuel was added
to check if the malfunction is caused by the fuel in the vehicle.
REPLACE FUEL
B

OK:
OK

HINT:
occur.

NG
OK

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM

OK
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
occur.
be malfunctioning.
B INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY

A
HINT:
Make sure there is no foreign matter such as iron particles on the fuel pump assembly and no signs that the fuel
pump was stuck.
Make sure the internal connector is securely connected.
Make sure the fuel pump filter is not clogged.
OK
(a) Disconnect the vacuum hose (on the canister side) of the purge
valve.


OK:
Air does not flow
(g) Connect the vacuum hose of the purge valve.
HINT:
.
NG INSPECT PURGE VALVE
OK
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
4000 ppm or more A
Less than 4000 ppm B
HINT:
B CHECK INTAKE VALVE

A
INJECTION)
105. CHECK INTAKE VALVE
(a) Check if carbon is on the intake valves.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Carbon present A
No carbon present B
B READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ISC LEARNING VALUE)
CLEAN INTAKE VALVE

A
106. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ISC LEARNING VALUE)
(c) Start the engine, turn off all accessory switches and warm up the engine until the engine coolant
temperature stabilizes.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / ISC Learning Value.
Result
Valve timing
(engine displacement (liters) x 0.9) or more A
ISC Learning Value Compression
Less than (engine displacement (liters) x 0.9) - B
B INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Inspect the compression .

NG
OK ADJUST VALVE TIMING
OK

OK:
OK
(a) Check the tightening and installation condition of the VVT sensor bolt.
(b) Check the connection of the VVT sensor connector.

OK:
OK

HINT:
occur.

NG
OK
112. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (INTAKE SIDE) - ECM)
Standard Voltage:
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to VVT Sensor (Intake Side))

HINT:
occur.

NG
OK
113. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VVT SENSOR (EXHAUST SIDE) - ECM)
Standard Voltage:
*A Bank 1
*B Bank 2

*a
(to VVT Sensor (Exhaust Side))

HINT:
occur.

NG
OK

OK:
NG CHECK VVT SENSOR

OK

OK:
NG REPLACE ECM

OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WC30M5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2096,P2097: Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1) (2013 FR-S)
DTC P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
DTC P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
DESCRIPTION
The sub fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The sub fuel trim consists of both
the short-term and the long-term fuel trim between the front catalyst and rear catalyst.
The short-term fuel trim is fuel compensation that is used to constantly maintain the air fuel ratio at stoichiometric levels. The
signal from the air fuel ratio sensor indicates whether the air fuel ratio is rich or lean compared to the stoichiometric ratio. This
triggers a reduction in the fuel injection volume if the air fuel ratio is rich and an increase in the fuel injection volume if it is lean.
Factors such as individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in operating environment cause short-term fuel trim to
vary from the ideal theoretical value. The long-term fuel trim controls overall fuel compensation. The long-term fuel trim
compensates for long term deviations of the fuel trim from the ideal theoretical value. These long term deviations result from the
corrections made by the short-term fuel trim.
If both the short-term fuel and long-term fuel trim are lean or rich beyond predetermined values, it is interpreted as a malfunction,
the ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC.

NO.
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, sub fuel trim considerably
Intake system
P2096 in error to lean side
injection)
Fuel injector assembly (for
direct injection)
Mass air flow meter
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
Fuel pressure
With warm engine and stable air fuel ratio feedback, sub fuel trim considerably Gas leaks from exhaust system
P2097 in error to rich side Open or short in air fuel ratio
(2 trip detection logic) sensor circuit
PCV valve and hose
PCV hose connections
ECM
HINT:
When DTC P2096 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the lean side. When DTC P2097 is set, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the
rich side.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is lean and DTC P2096 may be set. The MIL is then illuminated.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Under closed loop fuel control, fuel injection volumes that deviate from those estimated by the ECM cause changes in the long-term
fuel trim compensation value. The long-term fuel trim is adjusted when there are persistent deviations in the short-term fuel trim
values. Deviations from the ECM's estimated fuel injection volumes also affect the average fuel trim learning value, which is a
combination of the average short-term fuel trim (fuel feedback compensation value) and the average long-term fuel trim (learning
value of the air fuel ratio). If the average fuel trim learning value exceeds the malfunction threshold, the ECM interprets this as a
malfunction in the fuel system and sets a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2096: Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
Related DTCs
P2097: Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
Fuel system

Required Sensors/Components (Related) Mass air flow meter
Duration 1 second (1 time)

P0137, P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor - a lack of circuit continuity)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not present P1160 (Throttle return spring)
P2102 (Throttle actuator control motor)
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position sensor (APPS) circuit)
Post catalyst long term fuel trim system control Active

P2096
Post catalyst long term fuel trim value Less than -0.037
P2097
Post catalyst long term fuel trim value 0.028 or higher

HINT:
CAUTION:

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

limit
HINT:

.
HINT:

WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
Malfunctioning areas can be identified by performing the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function provided in the
Active Test. The Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor function can help to determine whether the air fuel ratio sensor,
heated oxygen sensor and other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning.
The following instructions describe how to conduct the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation using the
Techstream.

5. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / Gas AF Control /
AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
volume).
the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12.5% to +12.5%.


NOTICE:
CASE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (SENSOR 1) OUTPUT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (SENSOR 2) OUTPUT MAIN SUSPECTED
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE TROUBLE AREA
1 -
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
Air fuel
ratio
2 sensor
heater
Air fuel
ratio
sensor
circuit
Heated
oxygen
sensor
Heated
oxygen
3 sensor
heater
Heated
oxygen
sensor
circuit
Fuel
injector
assembly
Fuel
pressure
Gas leak
from
4
exhaust
system
(Air fuel
ratio
extremely
rich or
lean)
Following the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor procedure enables technicians to check and graph the voltage
outputs of both the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors.
To display the graph, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F
Sensor / Gas AF Control / AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2; and then press the graph button on the Data List view.
HINT:

data the moment a DTC is stored. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can be helpful in determining whether the vehicle
was moving or stationary, whether the engine was warmed up or not, whether the air fuel ratio was lean or rich, as well as
other data recorded at the time of a malfunction.
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the
engine to run lean.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P2096 AND/OR P2097)
(e) Read the DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
P2096 or P2097 A
P2096 and/or P2097 and other DTCs B
HINT:
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. PERFORM SYSTEM CHECK (CONTROL THE INJECTION WAY)
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Port.
(f) Read the value Short #1 and Long FT #1.

OK:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 = Between -19% and +19%
(g) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(h) Read the value Short FT #1 and Long FT #1.

OK:
Short FT #1 + Long FT #1 = Between -19% and +19%
Result:
ITEM PROCEED TO
PORT DIRECT
OK OK A
OK NG B
NG OK C
NG NG D
B CHECK FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
C CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
D CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTIONS
3. CHECK IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST

NO CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
DTC CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

YES

OK:

NG
OK

OK:

NG
OK
6. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (CONTROL THE INJECTION VOLUME FOR A/F SENSOR)
(c) Turn Techstream on.
(d) Warm up the engine and run the engine at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor / AFS
Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2.
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor operation with the engine in an idling.
(g) Monitor the output voltages of the A/F and HO2 sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1 and O2S B1S2) displayed on the
Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12.5% to 12.5%.
malfunctioning.
AFS Voltage B1S1 12.5% Rich Less than 2.0 V

(A/F) -12.5% Lean More than 2.4 V
O2S B1S2 12.5% Rich More than 0.55 V

(HO2) -12.5% Lean Less than 0.4 V
Result:
STATUS STATUS A/F CONDITION AND SUSPECTED TROUBLE AREA PROCEED TO

AFS VOLTAGE B1S1 O2S B1S2 A/F SENSOR CONDITION
Ventilation valve and hose

Ventilation hose connections
Injector for port injection
Lean Lean Actual air-fuel ratio lean A
Air induction system
Fuel pressure
Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

Ignition system
Rich Rich Actual air-fuel ratio rich Fuel pressure A
Mass air flow meter
ECT sensor
Lean Lean/Rich A/F sensor malfunction Air fuel ratio sensor B
Rich Lean/Rich A/F sensor malfunction Air fuel ratio sensor B
Lean: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage (AFS Voltage) is
consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage (O2S) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the AFS Voltage is consistently below 2.0 V, and the O2S
is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume for A/F Sensor Active Test, the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor
alternates correctly.
HINT:
B INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)

Standard:
With cold engine
With warm engine
OK
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / MAF, Coolant Temp and Engine Speed.

Standard:

NG
OK

OK:
No gas leaks.
OK PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST SYSTEM

NG

OK

NG
OK
NEXT
(d) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
(f) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT
14. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P2096 AND/OR P2097)
(a) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes.
(b) Read the pending DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
P2096 and/or P2097 A
DTC is not output B
END
B

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B

B CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
16. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
OK
17. CHECK FUEL LEAK (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Check for fuel leaks (low pressure side).

OK:
No leaks.
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE SIDE)

NG
CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL PUMP, PRESSURE REGULATOR, FUEL

OK LINE AND FILTER
18. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
(f) While revving the engine, check that the fuel pressure fluctuates.
Standard:
Idling
3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 50.9 kgf/cm 2 , 436 to 725 psi).
HINT:
NG CHECK MISFIRE COUNT
OK
HINT:
(e) Read the value Short FT #1, Long FT #1 and Fuel Pump Duty.
Result:
ITEM PROCEED TO
FUEL PUMP DUTY SHORT FT #1 + LONG FT #1
10% to 40% - A
40% or more -20% or less B
10% or less +20% or more B
40% or more +20% or more C
10% or less -20% or less D
B REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
C INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
D REPLACE ECM
HINT:
(e) Read the value Short FT #1, Long FT #1 and Fuel Pump Duty.
Result:
ITEM PROCEED TO
FUEL PUMP DUTY SHORT FT #1 + LONG FT #1
10% to 40% -25% or less A
10% to 40% -25% to +25% B
10% to 40% +25% or more A
A REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
21. CHECK MISFIRE COUNT

(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active test / Control the Injection Way / Direct.
(f) Allow the engine to idle.
(g) Monitor all of the misfire count values that are displayed on the Techstream: Powertrain / Engine / Data List /
Cylinder #1 Misfire Count to Cylinder #4 Misfire Count.
If no misfire counts occur for any of the cylinders, perform the following procedure:
(1) Move the shift lever to D.
(2) Monitor all of the misfire rate values that are displayed on the Techstream.
Result:
No misfire counts, or misfire counts occur randomly in all cylinders A
Misfire counts occur in particular cylinder B
B REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
22. INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU)
(a) Replace the injector driver (EDU) with known good ones from another vehicle.
NOTICE:
Do not disconnect and reconnect the connectors with the ignition switch to ON, as the injector driver (EDU) may be
damaged.
(e) Clear the DTCs .
(f) Turn the ignition switch off and wait for at least 30 seconds.
(g) Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the Techstream on.
(k) Read the pending DTCs.

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END (INJECTOR DRIVER (EDU) IS DEFECTIVE)

B
A REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY (FOR HIGH PRESSURE)

(a) Check the injection volume (whether fuel volume is high or low, and whether injection pattern is poor).
NG REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR PORT INJECTION)
OK REPLACE ECM
24. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MASS AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR CONNECTION)
(a) Check the connection and terminal contact pressure of connectors and wire harness between the mass air flow
meter and ECM .
HINT:
NEXT
(f) Start the engine and warm it up.
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END
B
A
C33-22 (VG) - C16-5 (VG) Always Below 1 Ω
C33-29 (E2G) - C16-4 (E2G) Always Below 1 Ω
C33-22 (VG) or C16-5 (VG) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
OK
HINT:
If the result of the inspection performed in step 8 indicated no problem, proceed to the next step without replacing the mass
air flow meter.
NEXT
(f) Start the engine and warm it up.
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving Pattern.
NEXT

Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
END
B
A REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PFU0P5X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2101-P2103: Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit
Range/Performance (2013 FR-S)
DTC P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance
DTC P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low
DTC P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The throttle actuator is operated by the ECM and opens and closes the throttle valve using gears.
The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor, which is mounted on
the throttle with motor body assembly. The throttle position sensor provides feedback to the ECM. This
feedback allows the ECM to appropriately control the throttle actuator and monitor the throttle opening
angle as the ECM responds to driver inputs.
HINT:
This Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) does not use a throttle cable.

NO.

Throttle with motor
Throttle actuator current is 8 A or more.
P2101 body assembly
Internal temperature of throttle actuator driving
ECM
circuit is 175°C (347°F) or higher.
Open in throttle
actuator circuit
ECM is turning ETCS relay on but throttle actuator power supply
Throttle with motor
P2102 voltage is 5 V or less.
body assembly
ETCS relay
ECM
Short in throttle
actuator circuit
ECM is turning ETCS relay off but throttle actuator power supply
Throttle with motor
P2103 voltage is 5 V or more.
body assembly
ETCS relay
ECM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM monitors the electrical current through the electronic actuator, and detects malfunctions and
open circuits in the throttle actuator based on this value. If the current is outside the standard range, the
ECM determines that there is a malfunction in the throttle actuator. In addition, if the throttle valve does
not function properly (for example, stuck on), the ECM determines that there is a malfunction. The ECM
then illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2101: Throttle actuator control motor circuit continuity
Related DTCs P2102: Throttle actuator control motor circuit continuity
P2103: Throttle actuator control motor circuit continuity
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Throttle actuator (throttle with motor body assembly)

0.6 seconds: P2103

All
P2101
ETCS relay On
CPU communication No failure
Previous diagnosis result No failure
P2102
ETCS relay On
P2103
ETCS relay Off

P2101
Malfunction flag from throttle actuator operation IC Set
P2102
Throttle actuator supply voltage Less than 5 V
P2103
Throttle actuator supply voltage More than 5 V

higher.
CAUTION:
laws.

HINT:

DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

conditions

HINT:

HINT:

FAIL-SAFE
When either of these DTCs or other DTCs relating to ETCS (Electronic Throttle Control System)
malfunctions are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. During fail-safe mode, the ECM cuts the current
to the throttle actuator, and the throttle valve is returned to a fully closed throttle angle by the return
spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and
ignition timing, in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle, to allow the vehicle to continue
running at a minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and gently, the vehicle can be
driven slowly.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
The throttle actuator current (Throttle Motor Current) and the throttle actuator duty ratio (Throttle
Motor Duty (Open) / Throttle Motor Duty (Close)) can be read using the Techstream. However, the
ECM shuts off the throttle actuator current when the electronic throttle control system malfunctions.
PROCEDURE
INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (POWER SOURCE OF THROTTLE WITH MOTOR

1.
BODY ASSEMBLY)
(a) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
C35-7 (+BM) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a
(ECM)
NG INSPECT RELAY (ETCS)
OK
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (RESISTANCE OF THROTTLE

2.
ACTUATOR)
(a) Inspect the throttle with motor body assembly .

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY -

3.
ECM)

A36-2 (M+) - C15-2 (M+) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-1 (M-) - C15-1 (M-) Always Below 1 Ω
A36-2 (M+) or C15-2 (M+) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A36-1 (M-) or C15-1 (M-) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE

4.
VALVE)
(a) Check for foreign objects between the throttle valve and the housing.
OK:
No foreign objects between the throttle valve and housing.
REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT

NG
OK
(a) Check if the throttle valve opens and closes smoothly.

OK:
Throttle valve opens and closes smoothly.

NG ASSEMBLY
OK REPLACE ECM
6. INSPECT RELAY (ETCS)
(a) Inspect the ETCS relay .
REPLACE RELAY (ETCS)

NG
OK
7. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ETCS RELAY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY - BATTERY)
(a) Remove the ETCS relay from the engine room relay
block assembly.
Standard Voltage:
5 (ETCS relay holder) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
2 (ETCS relay holder) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Normal A
ETCS relay terminal 5 is abnormal. B

ETCS relay terminal 2 is abnormal. C
*1 Engine room relay block assembly
*2 ETCS relay terminal

B CONNECTOR
C INSPECT RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
8. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ETCS RELAY)
(a) Remove the ETCS relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
A35-17 (MCR) - ETCS relay terminal 1 Always Below 1 Ω
A35-7 (+BM) - ETCS relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω
A35-17 (MCR) or ETCS relay terminal 1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-7 (+BM) or ETCS relay terminal 3 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK

NG
OK
10. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ETCS RELAY - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(a) Remove the ETCS relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - ETCS relay terminal 2 Always Below 1 Ω
EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 or ETCS relay terminal 2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR

Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 C Doc ID: RM000000PFZ0PHX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2122,P2123,P2127,P2128,P2138; Throttle / Pedal Position
Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit Low Input; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
DTC P2122 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit Low Input
DTC P2123 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" Circuit High Input
DTC P2127 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "E" Circuit Low Input
DTC P2128 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "E" Circuit High Input
DTC P2138 Throttle / Pedal Position Sensor / Switch "D" / "E" Voltage Correlation
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
These DTCs relate to the accelerator pedal sensor assembly.
This electronic throttle control system does not use a throttle cable.
The accelerator pedal sensor assembly is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and has 2 sensor
circuits: VPA (main) and VPA2 (sub). This sensor is a non-contact type. It uses Hall-effect elements in
order to yield accurate signals, even in extreme conditions. The voltage, which is applied to terminals VPA
and VPA2 of the ECM, varies between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the operating angle of the accelerator
pedal (throttle valve).
The ECM monitors the actual accelerator pedal operating angle (throttle valve opening angle) through
the signals from VPA and VPA2, and controls the throttle actuator according to these signals.
HINT:
The accelerator pedal position output voltages of VPA and VPA2 are almost the same.
*a Accelerator pedal fully released *b Accelerator pedal fully depressed
- - - -

NO.
VPA voltage is less than 0.303 V.

P2122
VPA voltage is 4.737 V or more.

P2123
Open or short in accelerator
VPA2 voltage is less than 0.303 V. pedal sensor circuit
P2127
(1 trip detection logic) Accelerator pedal sensor
assembly
VPA2 voltage is 4.737 V or more.
P2128 ECM
Difference in the signals from VPA and VPA2

P2138 exceeds the threshold.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket. The accelerator pedal
position sensor has 2 sensor elements and 2 signal outputs: VPA and VPA2. VPA is used to detect the
actual accelerator pedal angle (used for engine control) and VPA2 is used to detect malfunctions in VPA.
When the difference between the output voltages of VPA and VPA2 deviates from the standard, the ECM
determines that the accelerator pedal position sensor is malfunctioning. The ECM turns on the MIL and
stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2122: Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit continuity (Low
voltage) (Sensor 1)
P2123: Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit continuity (High
voltage) (Sensor 1)
P2127: Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit continuity (Low
Related DTCs
voltage) (Sensor 2)
P2128: Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit continuity (High
voltage) (Sensor 2)
P2138: Accelerator pedal position sensor correlation rationality
check
Accelerator pedal sensor assembly
(Main)
-
(Related)
0.1 seconds: P2122, P2127, P2128


P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128
P2138
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 (Accelerator pedal position
not stored sensor (APPS) circuit)

P2122
VPA voltage (Accelerator pedal position) Less than 0.303 V (1.6%)
P2123
VPA voltage (Accelerator pedal position) 4.737 V (25.02%) or more
P2127
VPA2 voltage (Accelerator pedal position) Less than 0.303 V (1.6%)
P2128
VPA2 voltage (Accelerator pedal position) 4.737 V (25.02%) or more
P2138
VPA - VPA2 4.44% (varies with VPA2) or more

VPA voltage (Accelerator pedal position) 0.394 to 4.729 V (2.08 to 24.97%)
VPA2 voltage (Accelerator pedal position) 0.394 to 4.729 V (2.08 to 24.97%)

or higher.
CAUTION:

HINT:
12. Input the DTC: P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:
HINT:
FAIL-SAFE
The accelerator pedal position sensor has 2 (main and sub) sensor circuits. If a malfunction occurs in
either of the sensor circuits, the ECM detects the abnormal signal voltage difference between the 2
sensor circuits and switches to fail-safe mode. In fail-safe mode, the functioning circuit is used to
calculate the accelerator pedal opening angle to allow the vehicle to continue driving. If both circuits
malfunction, the ECM regards the opening angle of the accelerator pedal as being fully closed. In this
case, the throttle valve remains closed as if the engine is idling.
If a pass condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned off, the fail-safe operation stops and
the system returns to normal.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HINT:
This DTC relates to the accelerator pedal position sensor.
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR)
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data

List / Accel Sensor Out No. 1 and Accel Sensor Out No. 2.
(e) Read the values displayed on the Techstream.

*a Depressed
*b Released
Standard Voltage:
ACCELERATOR ACCEL ACCEL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PEDAL SENSOR SENSOR ACCEL SENSOR OUT NO. 1
OPERATION OUT OUT AND ACCEL SENSOR OUT
NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 2
0.5 to 0.5 to
Released
0.8 V 0.8 V
Less than 10%
2.4 to 2.4 to
Depressed
3.5 V 3.5 V
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR)
(b) Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor connector.
A35-23 (VPA) - A23-6 (VPA1) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-29 (EPA) - A23-5 (GND) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-21 (VCPA) - A23-4 (VC1) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-31 (VPA2) - A23-3 (VPA2) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-30 (EPA2) - A23-2 (GND2) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-22 (VCP2) - A23-1 (VC2) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-23 (VPA) or A23-6 (VPA1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-29 (EPA) or A23-5 (GND) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-21 (VCPA) or A23-4 (VC1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-31 (VPA2) or A23-3 (VPA2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-30 (EPA2) or A23-2 (GND2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-22 (VCP2) or A23-1 (VC2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. INSPECT ECM (VC VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor connector.
Standard Voltage:
A23-4 (VC1) - A23-5 (GND) Ignition Switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
A23-1 (VC2) - A23-2 (GND2) Ignition Switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V

*a
(to Accelerator Pedal Sensor)
NG REPLACE ECM
OK
4. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the accelerator pedal sensor assembly .
NEXT
5. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (DTC P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 OR P2138)
(g) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(i) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, and/or P2138 is output B
B REPLACE ECM
A END
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 C Doc ID: RM000000WC40OFX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2195,P2196; Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank
1 Sensor 1); 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
DTC P2195 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DTC P2196 Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Signal Stuck Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
DESCRIPTION
HINT:
Sensor 1 refers to the sensor mounted in front of the three-way catalytic converter and located
near the engine assembly.
The air fuel ratio sensor generates a voltage* that corresponds to the actual air fuel ratio. This sensor
voltage is used to provide the ECM with feedback so that it can control the air fuel ratio. The ECM
determines the deviation from the stoichiometric air fuel ratio level, and regulates the fuel injection time.
If the air fuel ratio sensor malfunctions, the ECM is unable to control the air fuel ratio accurately.
The air fuel ratio sensor is the planar type and is integrated with the heater, which heats the solid
electrolyte (zirconia element). This heater is controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low
(the exhaust gas temperature is low), a current flows into the heater to heat the sensor, in order to
facilitate accurate oxygen concentration detection. In addition, the sensor and heater portions are the
narrow type. The heat generated by the heater is conducted to the solid electrolyte through the alumina,
and therefore the sensor activation is accelerated.
In order to obtain a high purification rate of the carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbon (HC) and nitrogen
oxide (NOx) components in the exhaust gas, a three-way catalytic converter is used. For the most
efficient use of the three-way catalytic converter, the air fuel ratio must be precisely controlled so that it
is always close to the stoichiometric level.
*: Value changes inside the ECM. Since the air fuel ratio sensor is a current output element, the current
is converted into a voltage inside the ECM. Any measurements taken at the air fuel ratio sensor or ECM
connectors will show a constant voltage.

NO.
Open or short in air fuel ratio

Lambda is less than 0.85 for 10 seconds in air fuel
sensor circuit
P2195 ratio feed back control
(2 trip detection logic) Intake system
Fuel pressure
Fuel injector assembly (for
Lambda is more than 1.15 for 10 seconds in air fuel port injection)
P2196 ratio feed back control Fuel injector assembly (for
direct injection)
ECM
HINT:
When any of these DTCs is stored, check the air fuel ratio sensor voltage output by entering the
following menus on the Techstream: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / AFS Voltage B1S1.
Short-term fuel trim values can also be read using the Techstream.
The ECM regulates the voltages at the A1A+ and A1A- terminals of the ECM to a constant level.
Therefore, the air fuel ratio sensor voltage output cannot be confirmed without using the
Techstream.
If an air fuel ratio sensor malfunction is detected, the ECM stores a DTC.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
ECM calculates lambda based on air fuel ratio sensor output voltage. If lambda is out of the thresholds
for 10 seconds or more, ECM judges the air fuel ratio sensor is stuck and stores a DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2195: Primary oxygen sensor - Output voltage out of range
Related DTCs P2196: Primary oxygen sensor - Output voltage out of range
Required Sensors/Components (Main) Air fuel ratio sensor
Required Sensors/Components (Related) Heated oxygen sensor
Duration 10 seconds

sensor)
sensor)
P0137, P0138 (Heated oxygen sensor - a lack of circuit
continuity)
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs not P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 (Misfire)
stored P0458, P0459 (Solenoid valve for purge control)
P0604 (RAM in ECM)
P0605 (ROM in ECM)
correlation)
Atmospheric pressure Higher than 75.06 kPa(abs) [563 mmHg(abs)]
Change of intake air mass during 1/2 Less than 0.02 g/rev
engine
Impedance of primary oxygen sensor 0 to 65 Ω
Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12.4 mph) or more
Intake air mass per second 6 g/sec or more
Integrated time of canister purge after

19.9 seconds or more
engine start
Learning value of EVAP density during

Less than 0.2
purge
Target lambda load correction coefficient -0.05 to 0.05
Either of following condition is met A, B or C
A. Heated oxygen sensor output voltage

Less than 0.1 V and Higher than -0.2 V
feedback target
B. Heated oxygen sensor feedback adjust On minimum limit
C. Heated oxygen sensor feedback adjust On maximum limit

P2195
Output lambda 0.85 or less
P2196
Output lambda 1.15 or more


or higher.
HINT:
CAUTION:

HINT:
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
A low air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a rich air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run rich.
A high air fuel ratio sensor voltage could be caused by a lean air fuel mixture. Check for conditions
that would cause the engine to run lean.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO P2195 OR P2196)
(e) Read DTCs.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
HINT:
If any DTCs relating to the air fuel ratio sensor (DTCs for the air fuel ratio sensor heater or air fuel
ratio sensor admittance) are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
NO GO TO STEP 4
YES
Pattern.
(k) Input the DTC: P2195 or P2196.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P2195 or P2196 is output) A
B DTC CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (TEST VALUE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)
(e) Drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving pattern described in Confirmation Driving
Pattern.
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Monitor Status / O2S(A/FS) Monitor CMPL.
(g) Check that the status of O2S(A/FS) Monitor CMPL is Complete.
If the status is still Incomplete, drive the vehicle according to the driving pattern again.
(h) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / AFS Current B1S1.
(i) Check the test value of the air fuel ratio sensor output current during fuel-cut.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Within normal range (0.7 mA or higher, and lower than 2.2 mA) A
Outside normal range (lower than 0.7 mA, or 2.2 mA or higher) B
B GO TO STEP 16
5. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR)
(d) Warm up the air fuel ratio sensor at an engine speed of 2500 rpm for 90 seconds.
(f) Perform the Control the Injection Volume operation with the engine idling.
(g) Monitor the output voltages of the air fuel ratio and heated oxygen sensors (AFS Voltage B1S1
and O2S B1S2) displayed on the Techstream.
HINT:
Change the fuel injection volume within the range of -12% to +12%. The injection volume can be
changed in fine gradations.
The air fuel ratio sensor has an output delay of a few seconds and the heated oxygen sensor has
a maximum output delay of approximately 20 seconds.
If the sensor output voltage does not change (almost no reaction) while performing the Active
Test, the sensor may be malfunctioning.
AFS Voltage B1S1

+12% Rich Below 2.0 V
(Air fuel ratio)
AFS Voltage B1S1

-12% Lean Higher than 2.4 V
(Air fuel ratio)
O2S B1S2
+12% Rich Higher than 0.55 V
(Heated oxygen)
O2S B1S2
-12% Lean Below 0.4 V
(Heated oxygen)
Result
STATUS OF AFS STATUS OF O2S AIR FUEL RATIO CONDITION AND AIR FUEL RATIO PROCEED
VOLTAGE B1S1 B1S2 SENSOR CONDITION TO
Lean Lean Actual air fuel ratio lean A
Rich Rich Actual air fuel ratio rich A
Lean Lean/Rich Air fuel ratio sensor malfunction B
Rich Lean/Rich Air fuel ratio sensor malfunction B
Lean/Rich Lean/Rich Normal B
Lean: During the Control the Injection Volume Active Test, the air fuel ratio sensor output voltage
(AFS Voltage) is consistently higher than 2.4 V, and the heated oxygen sensor output voltage
(O2S) is consistently below 0.4 V.
Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume Active Test, the AFS Voltage is consistently below 2.0
V, and the O2S is consistently higher than 0.55 V.
Lean/Rich: During the Control the Injection Volume Active Test, the output voltage of the heated
oxygen sensor alternates correctly.
HINT:
B GO TO STEP 16

OK:
No leaks in the intake system.
OK

OK:
No gas leaks.
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST SYSTEM
OK
NG GO TO STEP 18
OK
(a) Check the fuel injector assembly (whether fuel volume is high or low, and whether injection
pattern is poor) .

NG PORT INJECTION)
OK
10. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)
(a) Check the fuel pressure (high pressure side) .
REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM (HIGH

NG
PRESSURE SIDE)
OK
11. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY (FOR DIRECT INJECTION)
(a) Check the fuel injector assembly (for direct injection) .

NG
DIRECT INJECTION)
OK
NEXT
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P2195 or P2196 is output) A
B END
14. REPLACE ECM
NEXT
Pattern.

Result
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

memory limit
NEXT END
NEXT
Pattern.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
ABNORMAL (DTC P2195 or P2196 is output) B
B REPLACE ECM
A END
18. CHECK FUEL LINE
(a) Check the fuel lines for leaks or blockage.
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL LINE
OK REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 C Doc ID: RM000002BHB05SX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2401,P2402,P2419,P2420; Evaporative Emission System
Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit Low; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
DTC P2401 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit Low
DTC P2402 Evaporative Emission Leak Detection Pump Stuck ON
DTC P2419 Evaporative Emission System Switching Valve Control Circuit Low
DTC P2420 Evaporative Emission Pressure Switching Valve Stuck OFF
DTC SUMMARY
P2401, P2402, P2419 and

Leak
P2420 stored when one of
detection
P2401 following conditions met
pump stuck
during EVAP monitor:
OFF
Leak detection
Canister pump
pump OFF
Leak module
malfunction
detection Connector/wire
P2402 Leak detection While EVAP
pump stuck harness 1 trip
pump ON monitor
ON (Canister pump
malfunction
module - ECM)
Vent valve ON
ECM
Vent valve (closed)
P2419
circuit low malfunction
Vent valve OFF
Vent valve (opened)
P2420
circuit high malfunction
DESCRIPTION
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
While the ECM monitors the EVAP system, it also monitors the status of the leak detection pump and the
vent valve within the canister pump module. If the ECM detects an abnormality in the leak detection
pump or vent valve operational statuses, the ECM stores the DTC, and illuminates the MIL.
MONITOR STRATEGY
P2401: Evaporative emission system leak detection pump circuit
continuity
P2402: Evaporative emission system leak detection pump circuit
continuity
Related DTC
P2419: Evaporative emission system switching valve circuit
continuity
P2420: Evaporative emission system switching valve circuit
continuity
(Main)
-
(Related)

A. Ignition switch On
B. Activated by soak timer Satisfied

P2401
Drain voltage of FET for leak detection pump Battery voltage X 0.38 V or less
Command signal from ECM Off
P2402
Current of FET for leak detection pump 3.5 A or more
Command signal from ECM On
P2419
Drain voltage of FET for vent valve Battery voltage X 0.38 V or less
Command signal from ECM Off
P2402
Current of FET for vent valve 3.5 A or more
Command signal from ECM On

NOTICE:
The Evaporative System Check (Automatic Mode) consists of 5 steps performed automatically by
the Techstream. It takes a maximum of approximately 24 minutes.
temperature below 35°C (95°F) and the coolant temperature below 45°C (113°F).

Automatic Mode.
7. After the "Evaporative System Check" is completed, check for All Readiness by entering the
following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / All readiness.
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
Do not disassemble the canister pump module.
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE (POWER SOURCE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:

G8-3 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
G8-5 - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
NG GO TO STEP 4
OK
A35-8 (MPMP) - G8-4 Always Below 1 Ω
A35-1 (VPMP) - G8-1 Always Below 1 Ω
A35-8 (MPMP) or G8-4 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-1 (VPMP) or G8-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
3. INSPECT CANISTER PUMP MODULE
(a) Inspect the canister pump module .
NG REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE
NG REPLACE RELAY (EFI MAIN1)
OK
5. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CANISTER PUMP MODULE - EFI MAIN1 RELAY)
(b) Remove EFI MAIN1 relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
G8-3 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω
G8-5 - EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω
G8-3 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
G8-5 or EFI MAIN1 relay terminal 3 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 C Doc ID: RM000000T6X0B4X

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: P2610; ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance;
2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
DTC P2610 ECM / PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance
DTC SUMMARY
NO. AREA

Timer diagnosis
[(Engine ECU counter - soak timer IC counter) / Engine ECU counter] is

0.24 or more.
Full count diagnosis
P2610 Soak timer IC counter is not 1023. ECM
Timer diagnosis
The setting time written to the soak timer IC is different to the value
read. Full count diagnosis during wake-up.
When the engine ECU counter is 1.636 seconds or less, the soak timer IC
counter is 1023.
DESCRIPTION
The soak timer operates after the ignition switch is turned off. When a certain amount of time has
elapsed after turning the ignition switch off, the soak timer activates the ECM to perform malfunction
checks which can only be performed after the engine is stopped. The soak timer is built into the ECM.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
1. While the engine is running, the ECM monitors the synchronization of the soak timer and the
CPU clock. If these two are not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction,
illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
2. If the soak timer activates the ECM even though only a short amount of time has elapsed
since the ignition switch was turned off, or if the soak timer does not activate the ECM even
though a considerable amount of time has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned off,
the ECM determines that the soak timer is malfunctioning, illuminates the MIL and stores a
DTC the next time the ignition switch is turned ON.
MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs
P2610: ECM engine off timer performance (soak timer IC)
Required
ECM
Sensors/Components
Required
-
Sensors/Components
0.128 seconds: Timer Diagnosis, Full Count Diagnosis and Timer Diagnosis
Duration (Case 1)
Immediately: Timer Diagnosis (Case 2) and Wake-up Diagnosis

All
Timer Diagnosis
Ignition switch Off
Elapsed time after engine start 10 minutes to 17.05 hours
Full Count Diagnosis
Ignition switch Off
ECM timer 4 seconds or more
Timer Diagnosis (Case 1)
Ignition switch Off
Ignition switch Off
Wake-up Diagnosis
Ignition switch On
Soak time 1 hour or more

Timer Diagnosis
[(ECM counter) - (Soak timer IC counter)] / ECM counter More than 0.24
Full Count Diagnosis
Soak timer IC counter Not 1023 counts
Value commanded by ECM = Value received by soak timer IC Yes
A. Soak timer IC counter when ECM timer is less than 1.636 seconds 1023 counts
B. Soak timer IC counter when ECM timer is more than 2.456 seconds Not 1023 counts
Wake-up Diagnosis
Number of record wake-up counts is less than Number of record wake-up commands Yes

7. Idle the engine for 10 minutes or more.
HINT:
DISPLAY

NORMAL
System normal

ABNORMAL
System abnormal

INCOMPLETE

HINT:
13. If the test result is INCOMPLETE or N/A and no pending DTC is output, perform a universal trip
and check for permanent DTCs .
HINT:
HINT:
DTC P2610 is stored if an internal ECM problem is detected. Diagnostic procedures are not
required. ECM replacement is required.
PROCEDURE
1. REPLACE ECM
NEXT
2. CHECK WHETHER DTC OUTPUT RECURS (IN ADDITION TO DTC P2610)
(h) Start the engine and wait for 10 minutes or more.
(i) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Trouble Codes / Pending.
(j) If no pending DTC is output, the repair has been successfully completed.
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004G5U006X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PD80E1X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. INITIALIZATION
NOTICE:
If the ECM is replaced, register the ECU communication ID for Immobiliser System .
Perform Registration (VIN registration) when replacing the ECM .
2. WHEN USING TECHSTREAM
CAUTION:
Observe the following items for safety reasons:
Before using the Techstream, read the instruction manual.

Prevent the Techstream cable from being caught on the pedals, shift lever or steering wheel
when driving with the Techstream connected to the vehicle.
When driving the vehicle for testing purposes using the Techstream, 2 persons are required.
One is for driving the vehicle, and the other operates the Techstream.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PD80E1X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. INITIALIZATION
NOTICE:
If the ECM is replaced, register the ECU communication ID for Immobiliser System .
Perform Registration (VIN registration) when replacing the ECM .
2. WHEN USING TECHSTREAM
CAUTION:
Observe the following items for safety reasons:
Before using the Techstream, read the instruction manual.

Prevent the Techstream cable from being caught on the pedals, shift lever or steering wheel
when driving with the Techstream connected to the vehicle.
When driving the vehicle for testing purposes using the Techstream, 2 persons are required.
One is for driving the vehicle, and the other operates the Techstream.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDG0O4X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
SFI System

PAGE
Battery
Starter
Engine does not crank (Does not start) Park/neutral position switch assembly*1
Clutch start switch assembly*2
Starter signal circuit
ECM power source circuit
Ignition system
Fuel pump control circuit
Fuel pump
Fuel injector circuit
No initial combustion (Does not start) Valve timing
VC output circuit (ECM 5 V output)
VVT sensor (for intake side)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side)
Engine immobiliser system
ECM
Fuel injector assembly (for port injection)

Engine cranks normally but difficult to start Starter signal circuit
Intake system
Ignition system
Spark plug
Compression
Fuel line
Ignition circuit
Ignition system
Incomplete intermittent combustion occurs Fuel injector assembly (for direct injection)
(Does not start) ECM power source circuit
VVT sensor (for intake side)
VVT sensor (for exhaust side)
Engine immobiliser system
Valve timing
Intake system
A/C signal circuit

High engine idle speed
PCV valve and hose
A/C signal circuit

Low engine idle speed (Poor idling)
Fuel pump
Intake system
PCV valve and hose

Compression
Ignition system
Spark plug

Rough idling
Fuel line
Intake system
Purge valve
PCV valve and hose
Mass air flow meter
Knock sensor
Intake system
Hunting (Poor idling) PCV valve and hose
Mass air flow meter
Fuel line
Spark plug
Ignition system

Hesitation/poor acceleration
Knock sensor
Mass air flow meter

Intake system
Valve timing
Compression
Brake override system
Spark plug
Ignition system
Surging (Poor driveability) Fuel injector assembly (for port injection)
Mass air flow meter
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system
Compression
Spark plug
Ignition system

Engine stalls soon after starting
Mass air flow meter
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system
Intake system
PCV valve and hose
Compression
A/C signal circuit

Engine stalls only during A/C operation
ECM
Fuel system (canister, refueling valve, roll over

Unable/difficult to refuel -
valve, fuel tank, etc.)

*2: for Manual Transmission
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000SXQ07MX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN (2013 FR-S)
READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN

1. PURPOSE OF READINESS TESTS
The On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) system is designed to monitor the performance of emission
related components, and indicate any detected abnormalities using DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble
Codes). Since various components need to be monitored during different driving conditions, the
OBD II system is designed to run separate monitoring programs called Readiness Monitors.
To view the status, enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Monitor / Current Monitor /
Current.
When the status of a Readiness Monitor reads Complete, the necessary conditions have been
met for running the performance tests for that Readiness Monitor.
A generic OBD II scan tool can also be used to view the Readiness Monitor status.
HINT:
Many state Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs require the status of vehicle Readiness Monitor
to show Complete before beginning emission tests.
The Readiness Monitor is reset to Incomplete if:
The ECM has lost battery power or blown a fuse.

DTCs have been cleared.
The conditions for running the Readiness Monitor have not been met.
If the Readiness Monitor status shows Incomplete, follow the appropriate Readiness Monitor Drive
Pattern to change the status to Complete.
CAUTION:
Strictly observe posted speed limits, traffic laws, and road conditions when performing these
drive patterns.
NOTICE:
These drive patterns represent the fastest method of satisfying all conditions necessary to
achieve complete status for each specific Readiness Monitor.
In the event of a drive pattern being interrupted (possibly due to factors such as traffic
conditions), the drive pattern can be resumed. In most cases, the Readiness Monitor will still
achieve complete status upon completion of the drive pattern.
To ensure completion of the Readiness Monitors, avoid sudden changes in vehicle load and speed
(driving up and down hills and/or sudden acceleration).
2. VVT SYSTEM MONITOR
(a) Refer to Confirmation Driving Pattern [P0011] .
(b) Refer to Confirmation Driving Pattern [P0014] .
3. CATALYST MONITOR (ACTIVE AIR FUEL RATIO CONTROL TYPE)
4. EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR (KEY OFF TYPE)
(a) Refer to Confirmation Driving Pattern [EVAP System] .
5. AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) AND HEATED OXYGEN (HO2) SENSOR MONITORS (ACTIVE AIR
FUEL RATIO CONTROL TYPE)
6. AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) AND HEATED OXYGEN (HO2) SENSOR HEATER MONITORS
(FRONT A/F AND REAR HO2 SENSOR TYPE)

Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.4 M From: 201203
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDT0ACX
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: REGISTRATION (2013 FR-S)
REGISTRATION
NOTICE:
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) must be input into a replacement ECM.
HINT:
The VIN is a 17-digit alphanumeric vehicle identification number. The Techstream is required to
register the VIN.
1. DESCRIPTION (Using the Techstream)
HINT:
This registration section consists of 2 parts: Read VIN and Write VIN.
(a) Read VIN: This process allows the VIN stored in the ECM to be read in order to confirm that the 2
VINs, provided with the vehicle and stored in the vehicle ECM, are the same.
(b) Write VIN: This process allows the VIN to be input into the ECM. If the ECM is replaced, or the ECM
VIN and vehicle VIN do not match, the VIN can be registered, or overwritten in the ECM by
following this procedure.
2. READ VIN
(a) Confirm the vehicle VIN.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / VIN / VIN Read.
3. WRITE VIN
(a) Confirm the vehicle VIN.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Utility / VIN / VIN Write.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000002XN20D5X

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: Starter Signal Circuit; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
Starter Signal Circuit
DESCRIPTION
While the engine is being cranked, the current from the ST relay flows to the ECM STSW2 terminal. The
starter start signal flowing to the STSW2 terminal is mainly used to increase the fuel injection quantity
while the engine is starting.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK WHETHER ENGINE CAN BE CRANKED
(a) Check if the engine can be cranked.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Engine cannot be cranked A
Engine can be cranked B
B GO TO STEP 16
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (STARTER SIGNAL)
(a) Connect the Techstream to DLC3.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Starter Signal.
(e) Check the value displayed on the Techstream when the ignition switch is turned to the ON and
START positions.
OK
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION STARTER SIGNAL
ON Close (OFF)
START Open (ON)
NG GO TO STEP 4
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ST RELAY - STARTER ASSEMBLY)
(b) Disconnect the starter assembly connector.
(c) Remove the ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
B1-1 - A33-17 (STSW2) Always Below 1 Ω
B1-1 - ST relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω
A33-17 (STSW2), ST relay terminal 3 or B1-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
(a) Inspect the ignition or starter switch assembly .
REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY - ST

5.
RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly connector.
(b) Remove the ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
D55-8 (ST2) - ST relay terminal 5 Always Below 1 Ω
D55-8 (ST2) or ST relay terminal 5 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
6. INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (+B OF IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the ignition or starter switch assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
D55-2 (AM1) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
D55-7 (AM2) - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
*a Front view of wire harness connector

(to Ignition or Starter Switch Assembly)
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK (for automatic transmission models) B
OK (for manual transmission models) C
B GO TO STEP 7
C GO TO STEP 12
A REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR
(a) Inspect the park/neutral position switch assembly .
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

NG
ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY -

8.
INHIBITOR RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch assembly connector.
(b) Remove the INHIBITOR relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
L2-4 - INHIBITOR relay terminal 1 Always Below 1 Ω
L2-5 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
L2-4 or INHIBITOR relay terminal 1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY -

9.
INHIBITOR RELAY)
(b) Remove the INHIBITOR relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
D55-1 (ST1) - INHIBITOR relay terminal 5 Always Below 1 Ω
D55-1 (ST1) - INHIBITOR relay terminal 2 Always Below 1 Ω

CONDITION
D55-1 (ST1), INHIBITOR relay terminal 2 or INHIBITOR relay terminal 5 -

Body ground

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
10. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (INHIBITOR RELAY - ST RELAY)

(a) Remove the INHIBITOR relay and ST relay from the engine room relay block assembly.
INHIBITOR relay terminal 3 - ST relay terminal 2 Always Below 1 Ω
INHIBITOR relay terminal 3 or ST relay terminal 2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK
11. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - ST RELAY)
A35-26 (STA) - ST relay terminal 1 Always Below 1 Ω
A33-17 (STSW2) - ST relay terminal 3 Always Below 1 Ω

CONDITION
A35-26 (STA), A33-17 (STSW2), ST relay terminal 1 or ST relay terminal

3 - Body ground
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR
CONNECTOR
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN

OK IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
12. INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the clutch start switch assembly .
NG REPLACE CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY -

13.
CLUTCH START SWITCH)
(b) Disconnect the clutch start switch assembly connector.
D55-1 (ST1) - A20-1 Always Below 1 Ω
D55-1 (ST1) or A20-1 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
14. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSEMBLY - ST RELAY)
(a) Disconnect the clutch start switch assembly connector.
A20-2 - ST relay terminal 2 Always Below 1 Ω
A20-2 or ST relay terminal 2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK

CONDITION

3 - Body ground

NG CONNECTOR
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN

OK
IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
16. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (ST SIGNAL)
(a) Connect the Techstream to DLC3.
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Starter Signal.
(e) Check the value displayed on the Techstream when the ignition switch is turned to the ON and
START positions.
OK
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION STARTER SIGNAL
ON Close (OFF)
START Open (ON)
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN IN

B

CONDITION

3 - Body ground

NG
CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDB0D3X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDH0K9X
Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECM (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECM
HINT:
The standard voltage between each pair of the ECM terminals is shown in the table below. The
appropriate conditions for checking each pair of the terminals are also indicated. The result of checks
should be compared with the standard voltage for that pair of the terminals, and displayed in the
"Specified Condition" column. The illustration above can be used as a reference to identify the ECM
terminal locations.
TERMINAL WIRING TERMINAL DESCRIPTION CONDITION SPECIFIED

NO. (SYMBOL) COLOR CONDITION
A33-1 (+B2) -
V - B-L Power source of ECM Ignition switch ON 12 to 14 V
A36-4 (E01)
Battery(for measuring battery

A33-2 (BATT)
W - B-L voltage and for ECM Always 10 to 13 V
- A36-4 (E01)
memory)
A33-3 (ST1-) BR-B - Brake pedal depressed 11 to 14 V

Stop light switch
- A36-4 (E01) B-L Brake pedal released 0 to 1 V
A33-7 (STP) - Brake pedal depressed 0 to 1 V

A36-4 R - B-L Stop light switch
(E01)*1 Brake pedal released 11 to 14 V
A33-8 (ACP) - Air conditioning pressure Ignition switch ON with A/C on 0 to 1 V

G - B-L
A36-4 (E01) sensor Idling with A/C off 12 to 14 V

A33-12 (THA) BR-G -
(built into mass air flow Ignition switch ON 0.3 to 4.6 V
- A36-29 (E1) Y-B
meter)
A33-14 Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V

(STSW2) - BR - B-
Starter signal
A36-4 L Cranking 6 to 13 V
(E01)*3
A33-15 Ignition switch ON with clutch

0 to 1 V
(CLSW) - R-Y - pedal depressed
Clutch switch
A36-4 B-L Ignition switch ON with clutch
(E01)*2 10 to 13 V
pedal released
Ignition switch ON, shift lever in

P or N*1
0 to 1 V
W-R - Ignition switch ON, shift lever in
A33-16 Neutral*2
B-L*1
(NSW) - A36- Neutral switch signal
G-B - Ignition switch ON, shift lever
4 (E01)
B-L*2 not in P or N*1
10 to 13 V
Ignition switch ON, shift lever
not in Neutral*2
A33-17 Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V

BR - B-
(STSW2) - Starter signal
L Cranking 6 to 13 V
A36-4 (E01)
Pulse
A33-18
B-P - generation
(CANL) - A36- CAN communication line Ignition switch ON
B-L (See
4 (E01)
waveform 1)
Pulse
A33-19
generation
(CANH) - O - B-L CAN communication line Ignition switch ON
(See
A36-4 (E01)
waveform 2)
Ignition switch ON with blower

0 to 1 V
A33-20 (HB) - G-Y - fan switch on
BLOWER relay
A36-4 (E01) B-L Ignition switch ON with blower
10 to 13 V
fan switch off
A33-22 (VG) -
Y - B-G Mass air flow meter Idling with warm engine 0.9 to 4.5 V
A33-29 (E2G)
A33-27
GR - B-
(IGSW) - IG2 relay Ignition switch ON 10 to 13 V
L
A36-4 (E01)
Pulse
A34-5 (HA1A) generation
V - B-L Air fuel ratio sensor heater Idling with cold engine
- A36-4 (E01) (See
waveform 3)
A34-6 (+B) -
V - B-L Power source of ECM Ignition switch ON 12 to 14 V
A36-4 (E01)
A34-9 (PR) - V-B -

Fuel pressure sensor Idling with warm engine 1.0 to 1.7 V
A36-29 (E1) Y-B
Pulse
A34-11 (IJF1) R-Y - Injector for direct injection generation
Idling
- A36-4 (E01) B-L confirmation signal (See
waveform 4)
Pulse
A34-13 (FPF) R-B - High pressure side fuel pump generation
Idling
- A36-4 (E01) B-L (Spill valve) (See
waveform 5)
Pulse
A34-14 Variable valve timing (VVT)
Y-BR - generation
(EV1+) - A36- sensor (Exhaust side (bank Idling with warm engine
B-L (See
4 (E01) 1))
waveform 6)
Pulse
A34-
Y-V - Variable valve timing (VVT) generation
15(VV2+) - Idling with warm engine
B-L sensor (Intake side (bank 2)) (See
A36-4 (E01)
waveform 7)
Pulse
A34-16 (NE+) generation
- A34-27 (NE- B-W Crank position sensor Idling with warm engine (See
) waveform 6
or 7)
A34-17
Approximately
(KNK2) - A36- G - Y-B Knock sensor Ignition switch ON
2.5 V
29 (E1)
A34-18 (A1A-
) - A36-4 O - B-L Air fuel ratio sensor Ignition switch ON 2.4 to 2.7 V
(E01)
A34-19
(A1A+) - A36- W - B-L Air fuel ratio sensor Ignition switch ON 2.8 to 3.2 V
4 (E01)
A34-20 (PIM) BR-B - Manifold absolute pressure

Idling with warm engine 1.1 to 2.0 V
- A36-29 (E1) Y-B sensor
A34-21
L-W -
(OX1B) - A36- Heated oxygen sensor Idling with warm engine 0 to 0.9 V
B-L
4 (E01)
Pulse
A34-25 Variable valve timing (VVT)
BR-Y - generation
(EV2+) - A36- sensor (Exhaust side (bank Idling with warm engine
B-L (See
4 (E01) 2))
waveform 6)
Pulse
A34-26
Y-P - B- Variable valve timing (VVT) generation
(VV1+) - A36- Idling with warm engine
L sensor (Intake side (bank 1)) (See
4 (E01)
waveform 7)
A34-28
Approximately
(KNK1) - A36- G - Y-B Knock sensor Ignition switch ON
2.5 V
29 (E1)
Pulse
A34-31 (IJF2) R-G - Injector for direct injection generation
Idling
- A36-4 (E01) B-L confirmation signal (See
waveform 4)
Pulse
A34-32 (FPD) R-W - High pressure side fuel pump generation
Idling
- A36-4 (E01) B-L (Spill valve) (See
waveform 5)
A34-34 (VCV) G-B - Power source of camshaft

Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
- A36-4 (E01) B-L timing oil control valve (OCV)
A35-1 (VPMP) D-L - Vent valve (built into canister

Ignition switch ON 10 to 13 V
- A36-4 (E01) B-L pump module)
A35-5 (IREL) D-W - Idling 10 to 13 V

INJ relay
- A36-4 (E01) B-L Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V
A35-7 (+BM) R-L - B-

ETCS relay Ignition switch ON 10 to 13 V
- A36-4 (E01) L
A35-8 (MPMP) O-L - Leak detection pump (built Ignition switch ON 10 to 13 V

- A36-4 (E01) B-L into canister pump module)) Leak detection pump ON 0 to 1 V
Fuel pump control (for fuel

A35-10 (DI) - W-B -
pump control malfunctioning Ignition switch ON 10 to 12 V
A36-4 (E01) B-L
detection)
Ignition switch ON
10 to 13 V
A35-11 Cooling fan not operated
R-W -
(FAN1) - A36- FAN NO. 3 relay Idling with A/C on or High
B-L
4 (E01) engine coolant temperature 0 to 0.5 V
Cooling fan operated
A35-12
B-R - Idling with A/C on or High
(FAN2) - A36- FAN NO. 2 relay
B-L engine coolant temperature 0 to 0.5 V
4 (E01)
Cooling fan operated
A35-13
LG - B-
(SSHUT) - EFI MAIN1 relay Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V
L
A36-4 (E01)
Pulse
A35-15
GR-R - Engine speed maintained at generation
(TACH) - A36- Engine speed
B-L 1500 rpm (See
4 (E01)*3
waveform 8)
A35-17 (MCR) L-R - B-

ETCS relay Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V
- A36-4 (E01) L
Pulse
A35-19(FPC) - SB - B- generation
Fuel pump control Ignition switch ON
A36-4 (E01) L (See
waveform 9)
A35-20 Canister pressure sensor

O-B -
(PPMP) - A36- (built into canister pump Ignition switch ON 1.5 to 4.0 V
B-L
4 (E01) module)
A35-21
L-Y - B- Power source of accelerator
(VCPA) - A36- Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
L pedal position sensor
4 (E01)
A35-22
G-B - Power source of accelerator
(VCP2) - A36- Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
B-L pedal position sensor
4 (E01)
Ignition switch ON, Accelerator Approximately

A35-23(VPA) pedal fully released 0.7 V
Accelerator pedal position
- A35-29 W-L
sensor (for engine control) Ignition switch ON, Accelerator Approximately
(EPA)
pedal fully depressed 3.1 V
A35-26 (STA) B-W - Ignition switch ON 10 to 13 V

ST relay
- A36-4 (E01) B-L Cranking 0 to 1 V

A35-31 Accelerator pedal position pedal fully released 0.7 V
(VPA2) - A35- O - Y-B sensor (for sensor
30 (EPA2) malfunctioning detection) Ignition switch ON, Accelerator Approximately
A35-35 (AC) - L-O - Idling with A/C on 0 to 0.5 V

HEATER relay
A36-4 (E01) B-L Idling with A/C off 12 to 14 V
Pulse
A36-1 (M-) - SB - B- generation
Throttle actuator Idling with warm engine
A36-4 (E01) L (See
waveform 10)
Pulse
A36-2 (M+) - G-Y - generation
Throttle actuator Idling with warm engine
A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 10)
Camshaft timing oil control Pulse
A36-5 (OE2) - BR-L -
valve (OCV) (Exhaust side generation
A36-4 (E01) B-L Idling with warm engine
(bank 2)) (See
waveform 11)
A36-6 (HT1B) R-B - Pulse

Heated oxygen sensor heater generation
- A36-4 (E01) B-L Idling with cold engine
(See
waveform 12)
Camshaft timing oil control Pulse
A36-7 (OE1) - R-W -
valve (OCV) (Exhaust side generation
A36-4 (E01) B-L Idling with warm engine
(bank 1)) (See
waveform 11)
Pulse
A36-8 (IGT4) W-L - generation
Ignition coil (ignition signal) Idling with warm engine
- A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 13)
Pulse
A36-10
Y-R - generation
(IGT2) - A36- Ignition coil (ignition signal) Idling with warm engine
B-L (See
4 (E01)
waveform 13)
One of the following conditions
is met:
Pulse
A36-11 (PRG) R-G - Ignition switch ON generation
Purge valve
- A36-4 (E01) B-L Idling with warm (See
engine, under purge waveform 14)
control
Pulse
A36-12 (#10) generation
P - B-L Injector for port injection Idling with warm engine
- A36-4 (E01) (See
waveform 15)
Pulse
A36-13 (#40) P-G - generation
Injector for port injection Idling with warm engine
- A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 15)
Pulse
A36-14 (#1) - generation
W - B-L Injector for direct injection Idling with warm engine
A36-4 (E01) (See
waveform 4)
A36-16 (OC2) GR - B- Variable valve timing (VVT) Pulse

- A36-4 (E01) L sensor (Intake side (bank 2)) generation
Idling with warm engine
(See
waveform 11)
A36-17 (OC1) G-W - Variable valve timing (VVT) Pulse

- A36-4 (E01) B-L sensor (Intake side (bank 1)) generation
Idling with warm engine
(See
waveform 11)

A36-18 pedal fully released 0.6 V
LG - Y- Throttle position sensor (for
(VTA1) - A36-
B engine control) Ignition switch ON, Accelerator Approximately
29 (E1)
A36-19 (VC) - Power source for sensor

R - Y-B Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
A36-29 (E1) (specific voltage)
A36-20 (OT) - BR - Y-
Oil temperature sensor Idling 0.5 to 1.4 V
A36-29 (E1) B
Pulse
A36-21
W-R - generation
B-L (See
4 (E01)
waveform 13)
Pulse
A36-22 (#20) P-L - B- generation
- A36-4 (E01) L (See
waveform 15)
Pulse
A36-23 (#4) - LG-R - generation
Injector for direct injection Idling with warm engine
A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 4)
Pulse
A36-24 (#3) - LG-W - generation
A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 4)
Pulse
A36-25 (#2) - LG-B - generation
A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 4)

A36-28 pedal fully released 1.5 V
R-Y - Y- Throttle position sensor (for
(VTA2) - A36-
B sensor malfunction detection) Ignition switch ON, Accelerator Approximately
29 (E1)
A36-30 Idling, Engine coolant

BR-W - Engine coolant temperature
(THW) - A36- temperature 60 to 120°C (176 0.8 to 1.8 V
Y-B sensor
29 (E1) to 248°F)
Pulse
A36-31
W-G - generation
B-L (See
4 (E01)
waveform 13)
Pulse
A36-32 (#30) P-B - generation
- A36-4 (E01) B-L (See
waveform 15)
B-L -
A33-4 (EC) -
Body ground
ground
A33-28
(SLE2) - Body - Shield Always Below 1 Ω
ground
B-R -
A34-1 (E03) -
Body ground
ground
B-W -
A34-2 (E04) -
Body ground
ground
B-W -
A34-3 (E05) -
Body ground
ground
A34-29
(EKNK) - - Shield Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground
A34-30
ground
A34-35
ground
A35-29 (EPA)
L - B-L Ground Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V
- A36-4 (E01)
A35-30
Y-B -
(EPA2) - A36- Ground Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V
B-L
4 (E01)
B-Y -
A36-3 (E02) -
Body ground
ground
B-L -
A36-4 (E01) -
Body ground
ground
Y-B -
A36-29 (E1) -
Body Ground Ignition switch ON 0 to 1 V
Body ground
ground

*2: for Manual Transmission
1. WAVEFORM 1
CAN Communication Signal
ECM Terminal Name Between CANL and E01
Tester Range 1 V/DIV., 10 μs./DIV.
Condition Ignition switch ON
HINT:
The waveform varies depending on the CAN communication

signal.
2. WAVEFORM 2
CAN Communication Signal
ECM Terminal Name Between CANH and E01
HINT:
The waveform varies depending on the CAN communication

signal.
3. WAVEFORM 3
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Heater
ECM Terminal Name Between HA1A and E01
Condition Idling with cold engine
4. WAVEFORM 4
Injector for Direct Injection No. 1 (to No. 4) Injection
Signal
CH1: Between #1 (to #4) and E01

ECM Terminal Name
CH2: Between IJF1or IJF2 and E01
Condition Idling with warm engine
HINT:
The wavelength becomes shorter as the engine speed

increases.
5. WAVEFORM 5
Fuel Pump for High Pressure (Spill Valve)
CH1: Between FPD and E01

ECM Terminal Name
CH2: Between FPF and E01
6. WAVEFORM 6
Crankshaft Position Sensor and VVT Sensor for Exhaust
Camshaft
CH1: Between NE+ and NE-

ECM Terminal Name CH2: Between EV1+ and E01
CH3: Between EV2+ and E01
HINT:

increases.
7. WAVEFORM 7
Crankshaft Position Sensor and VVT Sensor for Intake
Camshaft
CH1: Between NE+ and NE-

ECM Terminal Name CH2: Between VV1+ and E01
CH3: Between VV2+ and E01
HINT:

increases.
8. WAVEFORM 8
Engine Speed Signal
ECM Terminal Name Between TACH and E01
Condition Engine speed maintained at 1500 rpm
HINT:
The wavelength becomes shorter as the vehicle speed

increases.
9. WAVEFORM 9
Fuel Pump Control
ECM Terminal Name Between FPC and E01
10. WAVEFORM 10
Throttle Actuator
CH1: Between M+ and E01

ECM Terminal Name
CH1: Between M- and E01
CH1: 5 V/DIV., 500 μs./DIV.

Tester Range
CH2: 200 mV/DIV., 500 μs./DIV.
11. WAVEFORM 11
Camshaft Timing Oil Control Valve (OCV)
ECM Terminal Name Between OC1, OC2, OE1 or OE2 and E01
12. WAVEFORM 12
Heated Oxygen Sensor
ECM Terminal Name Between HT1B and E01
Condition Idling with cold engine
13. WAVEFORM 13
Ignition Coil (Ignition Signal)
ECM Terminal Name Between IGT (1 to 4) and E01
14. WAVEFORM 14
Purge Valve
ECM Terminal
Between PRG and E01
Name
Tester Range 10 V/DIV., 2 s./DIV.

Ignition switch ON
Condition
Idling with warm engine, under
purge control
15. WAVEFORM 15
Injector for Port Injection No. 1 (to No. 4) Injection
Signal
ECM Terminal Name Between # (10 to 40) and E01
HINT:

increases.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 C Doc ID: RM0000020H3028X

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: U0073,U0101,U0122,U0140,U0155,U0402,U0416,U0423;

Control Module Communication Bus "A" Off; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - 05/2013]
DTC U0140 Lost Communication with Body Control Module
DTC U0155 Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control Module
DTC U0402 Invalid Data Received from TCM
DESCRIPTION
Refer to CAN communication system for system description .
DTC DTC DETECTION CONDITIONS TROUBLE AREAS

NO.

Bus off state for 0.436 seconds or more
U0073 CANH circuits)
ECM

No communication between ECM and TCM for 0.5 seconds CANH circuits)
U0101 or more ECM
(1 trip detection logic) TCM

No communication between ECM and skid control ECU for CANH circuits)
U0122 0.5 seconds or more ECM
(1 trip detection logic) Skid control ECU (Brake
actuator assembly)

No communication between ECM and combination meter CANH circuits)
U0155 assembly for 0.5 seconds or more ECM
(1 trip detection logic) Combination meter
assembly

Invalid data received from TCM for 2 seconds or more CANH circuits)
U0402
TCM

Invalid data received from skid control ECU for 2 seconds CANH circuits)
U0416 or more ECM
(1 trip detection logic) Skid control ECU (Brake
actuator assembly)

Invalid data received from combination meter assembly for CANH circuits)
U0423 2 seconds or more ECM
(1 trip detection logic) Combination meter
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ECM, TCM, skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) and combination meter assembly
communicate with each other via the CAN communication line. If there is a problem in this communication,
the ECM stores the DTC.
MONITOR STRATEGY
U0073: Control Module Communication Bus Off
U0122: Lost Communication with Vehicle Stability Control Module
U0155: Lost Communication with Instrument Panel Cluster Control
Related DTCs Module (Combination Meter)
U0402: Invalid Data Received from TCM
U0416: Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Stability Control Module
U0423: Invalid Data Received from Instrument Panel Cluster Control

Module
Required
ECM
Sensors/Components (Main)
Required TCM
Sensors/Components Skid control ECU (Brake actuator assembly)
(Related) Combination meter assembly
0.436 seconds: U0073

Duration 0.5 seconds: U0101, U0122 and U0155
2 seconds: U0402, U0416 and U0423

All
Starter switch Off
Engine Running
U0073
Monitor runs whenever following DTCs are U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416, U0423 (CAN
not present system (ECM))
U0101
U0122
U0155
U0402
U0416
U0423

U0073
State of Control module communication bus "A" OFF On
U0101
State of lost communication with TCM On
U0122
State of lost communication with skid control ECU On
U0155
State of lost communication with combination meter assembly On
U0402
Communication counter between ECM and TCM Not count up
U0416
Communication counter between ECM and skid control ECU Not count up
U0423
Communication counter between ECM and combination meter assembly Not count up
Go to CAN communication system for troubleshooting .
HINT:
When DTCs indicating a CAN communication system malfunction are output, repair the CAN
communication system before repairing each corresponding sensor.
not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
If the CAN communication malfunctions, there is no data output from the ECM. In this case, some
of the freeze frame data are not correct and not identical with the ECM data, but the ECM data are
correct.
PROCEDURE
(e) Read the DTCs.
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 or U0423 is output A
DTC U0073, U0101, U0122, U0155, U0402, U0416 or U0423 and other DTCs are output B
B GO TO DTC CHART
A GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 J Doc ID: RM000001D6V0LTX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: SFI SYSTEM: VC Output Circuit; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
VC Output Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The ECM constantly generates 5 V power from the battery voltages supplied to the +B terminal and +B2
terminal to operate the microprocessor. The ECM also provides this power to the sensors through the VC
output circuit.
When the VC circuit is short-circuited, the microprocessor in the ECM and sensors that are supplied with
power through the VC circuit are deactivated because the power is not supplied from the VC circuit.
Under this condition, the system does not start up and the MIL does not illuminate even if the system
malfunctions.
HINT:
Under normal conditions, the MIL is illuminated when the ignition switch is turned to ON. The MIL
goes off when the engine is started.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK MIL CONDITION
(a) Check that the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) lights up when turning the ignition switch to
ON.
OK:
MIL lights up.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
NG A
OK B
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN IN

B
2. CHECK CONNECTION BETWEEN TECHSTREAM AND ECM
(d) Check for communication between the Techstream and ECM.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Communication is not possible A
Communication is possible B
B GO TO MIL CIRCUIT
3. CHECK MIL (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)
(c) Check the MIL.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL does not illuminate A
MIL illuminates B

B
ASSEMBLY
4. CHECK MIL (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR)
(a) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
(c) Check the MIL.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates B
REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE

B
SENSOR
5. CHECK MIL (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR)
(c) Check the MIL.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates B
B REPLACE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
6. CHECK MIL (ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor assembly connector.
(c) Check the MIL.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates B
REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR

B ASSEMBLY
7. CHECK MIL (BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the battery current sensor assembly connector.
(c) Check the MIL.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates B
B REPLACE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
8. CHECK MIL (CANISTER PUMP MODULE)
(c) Check the MIL.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
MIL illuminates B
B REPLACE CANISTER PUMP MODULE
9. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (EACH SENSOR - ECM)
(b) Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
(c) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector.

(d) Disconnect the accelerator pedal sensor assembly connector.
(e) Disconnect the battery current sensor assembly connector.
(f) Disconnect the canister pump module connector.
(g) Disconnect the ECM connectors.
(h) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
A36-19 (VC) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-22 (VCP2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-21 (VCPA) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG
CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000001BQK00HX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000MTB00SX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY

table below.

*a
(Throttle with Motor Body Assembly)
1-2 20°C (68°F) 0.3 to 10 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the throttle with

motor body assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000MTA00VX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a new gasket to the intake manifold.
(b) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses to the throttle with motor body assembly with the 2 clamps.
(c) Install the throttle with motor body assembly to the intake manifold with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
8.0 N·m {82 kgf·cm, 71in·lbf}
(d) Connect the throttle with motor body assembly connector.
NOTICE:
Perform the following procedure after replacing the ECM, throttle with motor body assembly or any
throttle with motor body assembly components.
(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON without operating the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
If the accelerator pedal is operated, perform the above steps again.
(b) Connect the Techstream to the DLC3 and clear the DTCs .
(c) Start the engine and check that the MIL is not illuminated. After the engine is warmed up, check
that the idle speed is within the specified range when the A/C is switched off.
Standard:
CONDITION ENGINE IDLE SPEED
A/C switched off 650 to 800 rpm
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform this step with all accessories off.
Make sure that the shift lever is in neutral (for manual transmission).
Make sure that the shift lever is in N or P (for automatic transmission).
(d) Enter the following menus: Data List / Throttle Sensor Volt%. Fully depress the accelerator pedal
and check that the value is 80 to 90%.
(e) Perform a road test and confirm that there are no abnormalities.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000MTD00TX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: THROTTLE BODY: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the throttle with motor body assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the 2 water by-pass hoses from the throttle

with motor body assembly.
(c) Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle with motor body
assembly from the intake manifold.
(d) Remove the gasket from the intake manifold.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000001BO600RX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000001BO500QX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the manifold absolute pressure
sensor.
(b) Install the manifold absolute pressure sensor with the bolt.
Torque:
NOTICE:
(c) Connect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000003IHI00BX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
1. INSPECT MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(b) Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
(c) Inspect the manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(1) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Atmosphere Pressure.
(2) Check the atmoshere pressure.
OK:
Almost the same as ambient pressure
HINT:
The standard atmospheric pressure is 101 kPa (1.03 kgf/cm2, 14.6 psi).
The atmospheric pressure decreases by 1 kPa (0.01 kgf/cm2, 0.1 psi) as the altitude increases by
100 m.
The atmospheric pressure varies depending on the weather.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000001BO700RX

Title: FA20 ENGINE CONTROL: VACUUM SENSOR: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the manifold absolute pressure

sensor.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM0000056U8008X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000056U700AX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CAMSHAFT LH (for Bank 2)
(a) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(b) Set the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH

to the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
2. INSTALL CAMSHAFT CAP (for Bank 2)

(a) Apply the seal packing to the contact surface of the front camshaft cap LH, intake rear camshaft
cap LH and exhaust rear camshaft cap LH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
Three Bond 1217G, 1217H or equivalent
*1 Intake Rear Camshaft Cap LH *2 Exhaust Rear Camshaft Cap LH
*3 Front Camshaft Cap LH - -
*a Within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) *b φ3.0 to 4.0 mm (0.1181 to 0.1575 in.)
*c φ2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.0984 to 0.1378 in.) *d φ2.5 to 4.0 mm (0.0984 to 0.1575 in.)
*e φ1.5 to 2.5 mm (0.0591 to 0.0984 in.) *f Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessively seal packing as it may cause excess seal packing to flow toward the cam
journal, resulting in engine seizure.
Do not apply seal packing to the intake center camshaft cap LH and exhaust center camshaft cap
LH.
Install the camshaft caps within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(b) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft caps, and place them on the camshaft housing
sub-assembly LH.
(c) Tighten the 13 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

to install the front camshaft cap LH, intake center
camshaft cap LH, intake rear camshaft cap LH, exhaust
center camshaft cap LH and exhaust rear camshaft cap
LH.
Torque:
18 N·m {184 kgf·cm, 13ft·lbf}
3. INSTALL CAMSHAFT RH (for Bank 1)

(a) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(b) Set the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH

to the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.

(a) Apply the seal packing to the contact surface of the front camshaft cap RH, intake rear camshaft
cap RH and exhaust rear camshaft cap RH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*1 Front Camshaft Cap RH *2 Intake Rear Camshaft Cap RH
*3 Exhaust Rear Camshaft Cap RH - -
a φ2.5 to 4.0 mm (0.0984 to 0.1575 in.) b Within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
c φ3.0 to 4.0 mm (0.1181 to 0.1575 in.) d φ1.5 to 2.5 mm (0.0591 to 0.0984 in.)
e Chamfer edge - -
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessively seal packing as it may cause excess seal packing to flow toward the cam
journal, resulting in engine seizure.
Do not apply seal packing to the intake center camshaft cap RH and exhaust center camshaft cap
RH.
Install the camshaft caps within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(b) Apply engine oil to the journals of the camshaft caps, and place them on the camshaft housing
sub-assembly RH.

to install the front camshaft cap RH, intake center
camshaft cap RH, intake rear camshaft cap RH, exhaust
center camshaft cap RH and exhaust rear camshaft cap
RH.
Torque:
5. INSTALL CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
6. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
7. INSTALL CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
8. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
9. INSTALL INJECTOR DRIVER BRACKET
14. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH and exhaust camshaft LH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH

while aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing
exhaust gear assembly LH with the knock pin of the
exhaust camshaft LH.
*1 Knock Hole
*2 Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly LH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket "TORX"
wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
Torque:
15. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly LH and intake camshaft LH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH

while aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing intake
gear assembly LH with the knock pin of the intake
camshaft LH.
*1 Knock Hole
*2 Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket "TORX" wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
Torque:
16. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH and exhaust camshaft RH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH while

aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing exhaust
gear assembly RH with the knock pin of the exhaust
camshaft RH.
*1 Knock Hole
*2 Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly RH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket
"TORX" wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
Torque:
17. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
NOTICE:
Before installation, check that there is no foreign matter on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH and intake camshaft RH.
(a) Install the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH while

aligning the knock hole of the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH with the knock pin of the intake camshaft RH.
*1 Knock Hole
*2 Knock Pin
(b) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
RH, and tighten the 3 bolts with a socket "TORX" wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
Torque:
18. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET
19. INSTALL CHAIN SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 2)
21. INSTALL TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
23. INSTALL TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER OIL SEAL
24. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
25. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual Transmission)
26. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic Transmission)
27. INSTALL REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)
28. INSTALL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
29. INSTALL PUMP DRIVE CASE ASSEMBLY
30. INSTALL VALVE LIFTER
31. INSTALL FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
32. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
34. CONNECT VENTILATION HOSE
35. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
38. INSTALL V-RIBBED BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY
39. INSTALL NO. 2 IDLER PULLEY SUB-ASSEMBLY
40. INSTALL OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK GUIDE
41. INSTALL GENERATOR ASSEMBLY
43. INSTALL BELT GENERATOR COVER
44. INSTALL GENERATOR COVER
46. REMOVE ENGINE STAND
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000056U900CX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CAMSHAFT: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
1. INSTALL ENGINE STAND
3. REMOVE GENERATOR COVER
4. REMOVE BELT GENERATOR COVER
6. REMOVE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY
7. REMOVE OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK GUIDE
8. REMOVE NO. 2 IDLER PULLEY SUB-ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE V-RIBBED BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY
12. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
13. SEPARATE VENTILATION HOSE
15. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
16. REMOVE FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
17. REMOVE VALVE LIFTER
18. REMOVE PUMP DRIVE CASE ASSEMBLY
19. REMOVE VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
20. REMOVE REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)
21. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic Transmission)
22. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual Transmission)
23. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
24. REMOVE TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER OIL SEAL
26. REMOVE TIMING CHAIN OR BELT COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
27. REMOVE CHAIN SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)
29. ROTATE CRANKSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT
(a) Turn the crankshaft approximately 200° clockwise, and

align the alignment mark as shown in the illustration.
*a Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
Do not turn the crankshaft counterclockwise except for a
slight adjustment to correctly align the alignment mark. If
not, the valves may come into contact with the piston.
(b) Using SST, turn the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH approximately 180°clockwise, and align the alignment
mark on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH to
the position (zero-lift position) shown in the illustration.
*a Alignment Mark
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
NOTICE:
After this work, when the intake valve and exhaust valve
lift at the same time, the valve heads contact each other,
causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not
turn the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH
more than the zero-lift range (the range where the
camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
(c) Remove the pulley bolt.
30. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET
31. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
RH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH.
32. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly RH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket
wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly RH.
33. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket wrench
E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH.
34. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Using SST, hold the camshaft timing exhaust gear

assembly LH and remove the 3 bolts with a "TORX" socket
wrench E16.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH.
39. REMOVE INJECTOR DRIVER BRACKET
40. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
41. REMOVE CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
42. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
43. REMOVE CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
44. REMOVE CAMSHAFT CAP (for Bank 1)
(a) In several steps, uniformly loosen the 12 bolts in the

order shown in the illustration, and remove the front
camshaft cap RH, intake center camshaft cap RH, intake
rear camshaft cap RH, exhaust center camshaft cap RH,
and exhaust rear camshaft cap RH.
HINT:
Arrange the removed parts in the correct order.
45. REMOVE CAMSHAFT RH (for Bank 1)
(a) Remove the intake camshaft RH and exhaust camshaft RH

from the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
46. REMOVE CAMSHAFT CAP (for Bank 2)
(a) In several steps, uniformly loosen the 13 bolts in the

order shown in the illustration, and remove the front
camshaft cap LH, intake center camshaft cap LH, intake
rear camshaft cap LH, exhaust center camshaft cap LH
and exhaust rear camshaft cap LH.
HINT:
47. REMOVE CAMSHAFT LH (for Bank 2)
(a) Remove the intake camshaft LH and exhaust camshaft LH

from the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000T4V07IX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000T4X087X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: DISASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY WITH CONNECTING ROD
(a) Mark each connecting rod cap and piston with a cylinder number.
(b) Turn the crankshaft so that the connecting rod cap can be removed.
(c) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, remove the 2

connecting rod cap bolts and connecting rod cap.
(d) Turn the crankshaft and separate the crank pin from the
connecting rod.
*1 Crank pin
*2 Connecting rod
HINT:
Turn the crankshaft clockwise when removing the No. 1 or
No. 3 piston with connecting rod, and turn it
counterclockwise when removing the No. 2 or No. 4 piston
with connecting rod.
(e) Push the connecting rod in the direction of the arrow, and
remove the piston with connecting rod from the cylinder

block.
2. REMOVE CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)
NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder block during servicing.
(a) Operate the engine stand so that the bank 1 side faces upward.
(c) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts in the

order as shown in the illustration.
(d) Remove the 10 bolts and cylinder block (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
Lift the cylinder block (for bank 1) slightly, and confirm that the crankshaft is remaining on the
cylinder block (for bank 2). If the cylinder block (for bank 1) is lifted carelessly when separating, the
crankshaft possibly having stuck to cylinder block (for bank 1) may fall off.
3. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT
(a) Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block (for bank
2).
4. REMOVE REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL

(a) Remove the rear engine oil seal.
5. REMOVE O-RING
(a) Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block (for bank 2).
6. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT BEARING
(a) Remove the crankshaft bearings from the cylinder block

(for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
*1 No. 1 and No. 3 Crankshaft Bearing
*2 No. 2 and No. 4 Crankshaft Bearing
*3 No. 5 Crankshaft Bearing
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
HINT:
Push the bearing at the opposite end to locking lip to
remove the bearing.
7. REMOVE OIL SEPARATOR COVER
(a) Remove the 7 bolts and oil separator cover from the
cylinder block (for bank 1).
8. REMOVE CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 2)

(a) Remove the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 2) from the engine stand.
9. REMOVE CYLINDER BLOCK PLATE
(a) Remove the 5 bolts and cylinder block plate from the
10. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT SENSOR HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and crankshaft sensor holder

assembly from the cylinder block (for bank 2).
11. REMOVE NO. 1 CYLINDER BLOCK TIGHT PLUG
(a) Remove the 3 No. 1 cylinder block tight plugs from the
cylinder block (for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
12. REMOVE CONNECTING ROD BEARING

(a) Remove the connecting rod bearings.
HINT:
13. REMOVE PISTON RING SET
HINT:
(a) Using a piston ring expander, remove the No. 1

compression ring and No. 2 compression ring in order.
(b) Remove the upper oil ring side rail, lower oil ring side rail and oil ring expander in order by hand.
14. REMOVE PISTON WITH PIN SUB-ASSEMBLY

tape, remove the piston pin hole snap ring on one end
from the piston.
*1 Protective Tape
HINT:
Be careful not to damage the piston and piston pin by
wrapping the tip of the screwdriver with protective tape.
(b) Remove the piston pin from the piston.
(c) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the piston pin hole snap ring
on other end from the piston.
HINT:
Be careful not to damage the piston and piston pin by wrapping the tip of the screwdriver with
protective tape.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000XCV08HX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that there are no cracks, scratches or other damage.
(b) Using a dye penetrant, check the important sections for fissures.
(c) Check that there are no signs of gas leak or water leak on gasket attachment surfaces.
(d) Check the oil passages for clogging.
2. INSPECT CYLINDER BLOCK FOR WARPAGE

(a) Using a precision straightedge and a feeler gauge, measure the surfaces that contact the cylinder head for
warpage.
*a for Bank 1 *b for Bank 2
Maximum warpage:
0.025 mm (0.00098 in.)
If the warpage is greater than the maximum, correct the surface by grinding it or replace the cylinder block.
HINT:
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).
Allowable minimum cylinder block height:

204.9 mm (8.067 in.)
Standard cylinder block height:
205.0 mm (8.071 in.)
3. INSPECT CYLINDER BORE

(a) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the cylinder bore diameter at positions shown in the illustration and check
for taper and out-of-round.
*a Piston pin direction *b Thrust direction
Standard
Cylinder bore size A 86.005 to 86.015 mm (3.38602 to 3.38641 in.)
Cylinder bore size B 85.995 to 86.005 mm (3.38562 to 3.38602 in.)
Maximum
Taper 0.030 mm (0.00118 in.)
Location
H1 10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
H2 45.0 mm (1.772 in.)
H3 80.0 mm (3.150 in.)
H4 115.0 mm (4.528 in.)
If the result is not as specified, perform boring and honing, or replace the cylinder block and piston as a
set.
set.
HINT:
Measure the inside diameter of each cylinder bore in both the thrust and piston pin directions at the height
The cylinder bore size is stamped on the upper face of the cylinder block.
*a Main journal size mark
*b Cylinder block (for bank 1 / for bank 2) combination mark
*c No. 1 cylinder bore size mark
*d No. 2cylinder bore size mark
*e No. 3 cylinder bore size mark
*f No. 4 cylinder bore size mark
4. INSPECT PISTON DIAMETER
(a) Using a micrometer, measure the piston diameter at right angles

to the piston pin hole, and at a point 39.4 mm (1.551 in.) from the
top of the piston head.
Standard
85.985 to 85.995 mm (3.38523 to

A grade
3.38562 in.)
85.975 to 85.985 mm (3.38484 to

B grade
3.38523 in.)
0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) over 86.225 to 86.245 mm (3.39468 to

size 3.39547 in.)
0.50 mm (0.0197 in.) over 86.475 to 86.495 mm (3.40452 to

size 3.40531 in.)
If the result is not as specified, replace the piston.
HINT:
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20°C
(68°F).
Measure the outer diameter of each piston in thrust direction at
the height shown in the illustration.
Standard sized pistons are classified into 2 grades, "A" and "B".
These grades should be used as guide lines in selecting a
These grades should be used as guide lines in selecting a
standard piston diameter.
If the piston is replaced, check the piston oil clearance, and select
a suitable sized piston diameter.
5. INSPECT PISTON OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Subtract the piston diameter measurement from the cylinder bore diameter measurement.
Standard oil clearance:

0.010 to 0.030 mm (0.00039 to 0.00118 in.)
HINT:
Oil clearance = maximum cylinder bore diameter - piston diameter
If the result is not as specified, perform boring and honing, or replace the cylinder block and piston as a
set.
6. REPAIR CYLINDER LINER

(a) If any of the inside diameter, taper, out-of-round or piston oil clearance is out of standard, or if there is any
damage on the cylinder liner, rebore it to replace with an oversized piston.
Allowable maximum cylinder liner diameter:
86.505 mm (3.40570 in.)
If the inside diameter of cylinder liner is more than the maximum after boring and honing, replace the
cylinder block and piston as a set.
HINT:
When any of the cylinder liner needs to be rebored, all other cylinder bores must be rebored at the same
time, and replaced with oversized pistons.
Immediately after reboring, the inside diameter of the cylinder liner may differ from its actual diameter due
to high temperature. Thus, when measuring the inside diameter of the cylinder liner, wait until it has cooled
to the normal temperature of 20°C (68°F).
7. INSPECT PISTON WITH PIN

(a) Check the piston and piston pin for wear or cracks.
(b) Check the piston pin hole snap ring for distortion or wear.
(c) Check the piston ring groove for damage.
(d) Check the piston pin hole snap ring groove for burr.
*1 Piston Pin Hole Snap Ring Groove
If any burr is found, remove the burr from the groove.
(e) Check if the piston pin can be pushed into the piston pin hole with your thumb.
HINT:
8. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD SMALL END BUSH

(a) Check the bushing at connecting rod small end bush for damage.
9. INSPECT PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE
(a) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the piston
pin hole.
HINT:
(68°F).
Measure the inside diameter of the piston pin hole at the 4
locations shown in the illustration, and take the maximum value.
Record the measured value.
(b) Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of the piston pin.
*a 10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
HINT:
(68°F).
Measure the outer diameter of the piston pin at the 4 locations
shown in the illustration, and take the minimum value.
(c) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of bushing at
connecting rod small end.
HINT:
(68°F).
Measure the inside diameter of the bushing at the 4 locations
(d) Calculate the clearance between the piston pin hole and piston pin.

0.004 to 0.008 mm (0.00016 to 0.00031 in.)
If the clearance between the piston pin and piston pin hole is more than the maximum, replace the piston
and piston pin as a set.
HINT:
Oil clearance = piston pin hole inside diameter - piston pin outer diameter
(e) Calculate the clearance between piston pin and bushing at connecting rod small end.

0.006 to 0.026 mm (0.00024 to 0.00102 in.)
If the clearance between the piston pin and bushing at connecting rod small end is more than the
maximum, replace the connecting rod and piston pin as a set.
HINT:
Oil clearance = connecting rod small end inside diameter - piston pin outer diameter
10. INSPECT PISTON RING

(a) Make sure that the piston ring is not broken or damaged.
If the piston ring is broken or damaged, replace it with a new one.
HINT:
Use a piston ring of the same size as the piston to be used.
11. INSPECT PISTON RING END GAP
(a) Using a piston, push the piston ring into the cylinder.
HINT:
Push the piston ring into the cylinder until the entire piston is
inserted into the cylinder.
*1 Piston ring
(b) Using a feeler gauge, measure the end gap.
Maximum end gap
No. 1 0.20 to 0.25 mm (0.00787 to 0.00984 in.)
No. 2 0.60 to 0.70 mm (0.02362 to 0.02756 in.)
Oil ring 0.10 to 0.35 mm (0.00394 to 0.01378 in.)
If the end gap is more than the maximum, replace the piston ring
with a new one.
HINT:
(68°F).
Use a piston ring of the same size as the piston to be used.
12. INSPECT RING GROOVE CLEARANCE
(a) Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the piston
ring and the wall of the ring groove.
Maximum clearance
No. 1 0.030 to 0.080 mm (0.00118 to 0.00315 in.)
No. 2 0.030 to 0.070 mm (0.00118 to 0.00276 in.)
If the clearance is more than the maximum, replace the piston ring
with a new one.
HINT:
(68°F).
Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston ring groove and
piston ring.
Use a same sized piston ring with the piston when replacing it.
13. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check that the large or small end thrust surface is not damaged.
(b) Check the connecting rod assembly bearing for scar, peeling, seizure, melting or wear, etc.
(c) Using a rod aligner and feeler gauge, check the connecting rod
sub-assembly for bend.
Maximum bend:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100 mm (3.937 in.) in length
If the bend is more than the maximum, replace the connecting rod
sub-assembly with a new one.
HINT:
(68°F).
(d) Using a rod aligner and feeler gauge, check the connecting rod
sub-assembly for twist.
Maximum twist:
0.10 mm (0.0039 in.) per 100 mm (3.937 in.) in length
If the twist is more than the maximum, replace the connecting rod
sub-assembly with a new one.
HINT:
(68°F).
14. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD THRUST CLEARANCE

(a) Clean the connecting rod bearings and crank pins, and apply engine oil to the crank pins. <*1>
(b) Align the claw and attach the connecting rod bearing to the
connecting rod.
*a Claw
(c) Check the matching symbols and set the connecting rod,
connecting rod cap and connecting rod cap bolts.
*1 Matching Symbol
HINT:
HINT:
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they are assembled correctly by checking their
matching symbol.
(e) Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod cap bolts.
(f) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, tighten the 2 connecting rod
cup bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
Torque:
NOTICE:
Securely hold the crankshaft during the operation.
Be sure not to damage the crankshaft when securing it.
(g) Retighten the 2 connecting rod cup bolts in the same order as above. <*2>
Torque:
NOTICE:

(h) In the same procedures from <*1> to <*2>, install the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 piston with connecting rods.
(i) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14 and an angle gauge, tighten
the connecting rod cup bolts for the No. 1 to No. 4 piston with
connecting rods by additional 92.5°.
NOTICE:
(j) Using a feeler gauge, measure the thrust clearance for each
connecting rod.
Standard thrust clearance:

0.070 to 0.330 mm (0.00276 to 0.01299 in.)
If the clearance is not within the standard, replace the connecting

rod.
HINT:
HINT:
Measure the thrust clearance for each connecting rod at several
points, and replace the connecting rod if there is uneven wear.
15. INSPECT CONNECTING ROD OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Clean the connecting rod bearings and crank pins, and apply engine oil to the crank pins. <*1>
(b) Attach the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and connecting rod cap.
(c) Lay a strip of Plastigage across the crank pin, and set the
connecting rod and the connecting rod cap with the 2 connecting
rod cap bolts after checking the matching symbols.
*1 Matching Symbol
HINT:
(68°F).
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they
are assembled correctly by checking their matching symbol.
(d) Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod cap bolts.
(e) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, tighten the 2 connecting rod
cup bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
Torque:
NOTICE:
Do not turn the crankshaft.
(f) Retighten the 2 connecting rod cup bolts in the same order as above. <*2>
Torque:
NOTICE:
Do not turn the crankshaft.
(g) In the same procedures from <*1> to <*2>, install the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 piston with connecting rods.
(h) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14 and an angle gauge, tighten
the connecting rod cup bolts for the No. 1 to No. 4 piston with
connecting rods by additional 92.5°.
(i) Remove the connecting rod cup and measure the Plastigage at its
widest point.

0.025 to 0.055 mm (0.00098 to 0.00217 in.)
NOTICE:
Completely remove the Plastigage after the inspection.
If the oil clearance is more than the maximum, replace the

bearings.
HINT:
Measure the outer diameter of the crank pin using a micrometer,
and select a suitable size connecting rod bearing when replacing
the connecting rod bearing.
Standard
BEARING BEARING SIZE OUTER DIAMETER OF

(THICKNESS AT CENTER) CRANK PIN
1.492 to 1.508 mm 49.976 to 50.000 mm

Standard
(0.05874 to 0.05937 in.) (1.96756 to 1.96850 in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 1.511 to 1.515 mm 49.946 to 49.970 mm

in.) Undersize (0.05949 to 0.05965 in.) (1.96637 to 1.96732 in.)
0.05 mm (0.0020 1.521 to 1.525 mm 49.926 to 49.950 mm

0.25 mm (0.0098 1.621 to 1.625 mm 49.726 to 49.750 mm

16. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT

(a) Using a dye penetrant, check the important sections for fissures.
(b) Using a dial indicator, measure the circle runout at the center
(b) Using a dial indicator, measure the circle runout at the center
journal.
Maximum circle runout:

0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
If the circle runout is more than the maximum, grind to correct or

replace the crankshaft.
HINT:
(68°F).
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the No. 1 and No. 5
crankshaft bearings on the cylinder block, position the crankshaft
on the cylinder block. Then, measure the crankshaft runout using a
dial indicator.
(c) Using a micrometer, check the outer diameter of the crankshaft

journal and crank pin for taper and out-of-round.
Maximum (Pin)
Taper 0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Maximum (Journal)
Taper 0.006 mm (0.00024 in.)
Allowable minimum diameter
Pin 47.726 mm (1.87897 in.)
Journal 67.735 mm (2.66673 in.)
If taper or out-of-round is more than the maximum, replace the

connecting rod bearing or crankshaft bearing, and grind to correct
or replace the crankshaft as required.
HINT:
(68°F).
Select a suitable size connecting rod bearing or crankshaft bearing
when replacing the connecting rod bearing or crankshaft bearing.
When grinding to correct the crank journal or crank pin, finish them
to the suitable dimensions as shown in the table below according
to the undersize bearing to be used.
Standard
BEARING CONNECTING CRANK CRANKSHAFT CRANKSHAFT

ROD PIN BEARING JOURNAL
BEARING OUTER THICKNESS (AT DIAMETER
THICKNESS DIAMETER CENTER)
(AT CENTER)
NO. 1 TO NO. 5
NO. 1 TO NO. 5
NO. 4
49.976 to 2.495 to 2.493 to

50.000 2.513 2.511
1.492 to 67.985 to
mm mm mm
1.508 mm 68.009 mm
Standard (1.96756 (0.09823 (0.09815
(0.05874 to (2.67657 to
to to to
0.05937 in.) 2.67751 in.)
1.96850 0.09894 0.09886
in.) in.) in.)
49.946 to 2.519 to 2.517 to

49.970 2.522 2.520
0.03 mm 1.511 to 67.955 to
mm mm mm
(0.0012 1.515 mm 67.979 mm
(1.96637 (0.09917 (0.09909
in.) (0.05949 to (2.67539 to
to to to
Undersize 0.05965 in.) 2.67633 in.)
1.96734 0.09929 0.09921
in.) in.) in.)
49.926 to 2.529 to 2.527 to

0.05 mm 1.521 to 49.950 2.532 2.530 67.935 to
(0.0020 1.525 mm mm mm mm 67.959 mm
(1.96559 (0.09957 (0.09949
in.) (0.05988 to to to to (2.67460 to
Undersize 0.06004 in.) 1.96653 0.09968 0.09961 2.67555 in.)
in.) in.) in.)
49.726 to 2.629 to 2.627 to

49.750 2.632 2.630
0.25 mm 1.621 to 67.735 to
mm mm mm
(0.0098 1.625 mm 67.759 mm
(1.95771 (0.10350 (0.10342
in.) (0.06382 to (2.66673 to
to to to
Undersize 0.06398 in.) 2.66767 in.)
1.95866 0.10362 0.10354
in.) in.) in.)
17. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT BEARING

(a) Inspect the crankshaft bearing for scar, peeling, seizure, melting or wear, etc.
18. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT THRUST CLEARANCE
(a) Using a feeler gauge, check the thrust clearance of the crankshaft
at No. 5 crankshaft bearing.
Standard clearance:
0.130 to 0.308 mm (0.00512 to 0.01213 in.)
If the thrust clearance is not within the standard, replace the No. 5
crankshaft bearing.
19. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT OIL CLEARANCE

(a) Remove the seal packing left on the cylinder block.
(b) Clean the crankshaft bearings and crankshaft journals.
(c) Attach the crankshaft bearings to the cylinder block.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the matching surface of the cylinder
block.
The shapes of the No. 1 and No. 3 bearings are different from
those of the No. 2 and No. 4 bearings. Be sure to attach them
correctly.
*1 No. 1 and No. 3 crankshaft bearings (with grooves)
*2 No. 2 and No. 4 crankshaft bearings (without grooves)
*3 No. 5 crankshaft bearings
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
(d) Place the crankshaft on the cylinder block.
(e) Lay a strip of Plastigage across each camshaft journal.
(f) Place the cylinder block (for bank 1) on the cylinder block (for bank 2).
(g) Apply engine oil to the washers and cylinder block bolt threads.
NOTICE:
To prevent engine oil from entering into the water jacket, do not apply a large amount.
(h) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the order

Torque:
NOTICE:
When tightening the bolts, hold the cylinder block (for bank 2)
while not holding the cylinder block (for bank 1) to ensure the joint
accuracy of the cylinder blocks.
(i) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts by 180 ° in the

order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
When loosening the bolts, hold the cylinder block (for bank 2)
(j) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the order

Torque:
NOTICE:
(k) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 4 bolts by 180 ° in the

NOTICE:
When loosening the bolts, hold the cylinder block (for bank 2)
(l) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 4 bolts in the order

Torque:
NOTICE:
(m) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten the 4

bolts by additional 60° in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
(n) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 6 bolts by 180 ° in the

NOTICE:
When loosening the bolts, hold the cylinder block (for bank 2) while
not holding the cylinder block (for bank 1) to ensure the joint
(o) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 6 bolts in the order

Torque:
NOTICE:
(p) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten the 6

bolts by additional 60° in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
(q) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts in the order

(r) Remove the 10 bolts and cylinder block (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
Lift the cylinder block (for bank 1) slightly, and confirm that the crankshaft remains on the cylinder block (for
bank 2). If the cylinder block (for bank 1) is lifted carelessly when separating, the crankshaft may fall off as
it may have stuck to the cylinder block (for bank 1).
(s) Measure the Plastigage at its widest point.
Standard clearance:
0.013 to 0.031 mm (0.00051 to 0.00122 in.)
If the clearance is not within the standard, replace the crankshaft

bearing, and grind to correct or replace the crankshaft as required.
NOTICE:
Completely remove the Plastigage after the inspection.
HINT:
Select the suitable size connecting rod bearing or crankshaft
bearing when replacing the connecting rod bearing or crankshaft
bearing.
When grinding to correct the crank journal or crank pin, finish them
to the suitable dimensions as shown in the table below according
to the undersize bearing to be used.
Standard
BEARING CONNECTING CRANK CRANKSHAFT CRANKSHAFT

ROD PIN BEARING JOURNAL
BEARING OUTER THICKNESS (AT DIAMETER
THICKNESS DIAMETER CENTER)
(AT CENTER)
NO. 1 TO NO. 5
NO. 4
49.976 to 2.495 to 2.493 to

50.000 2.513 2.511
1.492 to 67.985 to
mm mm mm
1.508 mm 68.009 mm
Standard (1.96756 (0.09823 (0.09815
(0.05874 to (2.67657 to
to to to
0.05937 in.) 2.67751 in.)
1.96850 0.09894 0.09886
in.) in.) in.)
49.946 to 2.519 to 2.517 to

49.970 2.522 2.520
0.03 mm 1.511 to 67.955 to
mm mm mm
(0.0012 1.515 mm 67.979 mm
(1.96637 (0.09917 (0.09909
in.) (0.05949 to (2.67539 to
to to to
Undersize 0.05965 in.) 2.67633 in.)
1.96734 0.09929 0.09921
in.) in.) in.)
49.926 to 2.529 to 2.527 to

49.950 2.532 2.530
0.05 mm 1.521 to 67.935 to
mm mm mm
(0.0020 1.525 mm 67.959 mm
(1.96559 (0.09957 (0.09949
in.) (0.05988 to (2.67460 to
in.) (0.05988 to (2.67460 to
to to to
Undersize 0.06004 in.) 2.67555 in.)
1.96653 0.09968 0.09961
in.) in.) in.)
49.726 to 2.629 to 2.627 to

49.750 2.632 2.630
0.25 mm 1.621 to mm mm mm 67.735 to
(0.0098 1.625 mm (1.95771 (0.10350 (0.10342 67.759 mm
in.) (0.06382 to (2.66673 to
Undersize 0.06398 in.) to to to 2.66767 in.)
1.95866 0.10362 0.10354
in.) in.) in.)
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BEX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER BLOCK: REASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 1 CYLINDER BLOCK TIGHT PLUG
NOTICE:
Place wooden blocks wrapped in a cloth under the
cylinder block and stabilize the cylinder block during
servicing.
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the
cylinder block during servicing.
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
(a) Apply seal packing to the threaded portion of the No. 1

cylinder block tight plugs and install them to the cylinder
block (for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
Seal packing:
Three Bond 1105 or equivalent
Torque:
NOTICE:
Before applying seal packing, degrease the No. 1 cylinder
block tight plugs and thread holes of the cylinder block
(for bank 1) and cylinder block (for bank 2).
2. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT SENSOR HOLDER ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the crankshaft sensor holder assembly to the
cylinder block (for bank 2) with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
3. INSTALL CYLINDER BLOCK PLATE

(a) Install the cylinder block plate to the cylinder block (for
bank 2) with the 5 bolts.
Torque:
4. INSTALL OIL SEPARATOR COVER
(a) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the

illustration.
Seal packing:
*a φ3.0 to 5.0 mm (0.118 to 0.197 in.)
NOTICE:
Install the oil separator cover within 5 minutes of applying
seal packing.
(b) Tight the 7 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to

install the oil separator cover to the cylinder block (for
bank 1).
Torque:
5. INSTALL O-RING
(a) Attach a new O-ring to the cylinder block (for bank 2).
6. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT BEARING

(a) Apply engine oil to the crankshaft bearing, and install

them to the cylinder block (for bank 1) and cylinder block
(for bank 2).
*1 No. 1 and No. 3 Bearings (with groove)
*2 No. 2 and No. 4 Bearings (without groove)
*3 No. 5 Bearing
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the
cylinder block during servicing.
The shapes of the No. 1 and No. 3 bearings are different
from those of the No. 2 and No. 4 bearings. Be sure to
install them in the right locations.
7. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT
(a) Apply engine oil to the crankshaft journals and place the
crankshaft on the cylinder block (for bank 2).
8. INSTALL CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Bank 1)

(a) Apply seal packing to the mating surface of the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 1) as shown
in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*a φ3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.) *b φ0.5to 1.5 mm (0.0197 to 0.0591 in.)
*c Range of A-A *d Within 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
*e φ2.7 to 3.7 mm (0.106 to 0.146 in.) *f φ3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.)
*g 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) *h Chamfer edge
*i 36.0 mm (1.417 in.) *j 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not let the seal packing overflow to the oil passage or crankshaft bearing because engine
seizure may result.
Install the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 1) within 5 minutes of applying seal packing.
(b) Place the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 1) to the cylinder block sub-assembly (for bank 2).
(c) Apply engine oil to the washers and cylinder block bolt threads.
NOTICE:
To prevent engine oil from entering into the water jacket, do not apply a large amount.
(d) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the

Torque:
NOTICE:
When tightening the bolts, hold the cylinder block sub-
assembly (for bank 2) while not holding the cylinder block
sub-assembly (for bank 1) to ensure the joint accuracy of
the cylinder blocks.
(e) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 10 bolts by 180
° in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
When loosening the bolts, hold the cylinder block sub-
(f) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 10 bolts in the

Torque:
NOTICE:
(g) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 4 bolts by 180

° in the order shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
(h) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 4 bolts in the

Torque:
NOTICE:
(i) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten

the 4 bolts by additional 60° in the order shown in the
illustration.
NOTICE:
(j) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, loosen the 6 bolts by 180 °

NOTICE:
(k) Using a 12 mm socket wrench, tighten the 6 bolts in the

Torque:
NOTICE:
(l) Using a 12 mm socket wrench and an angle gauge, tighten

the 6 bolts by additional 60° in the order shown in the
illustration.
NOTICE:
(m) Tighten the 5 bolts.
Torque:
HINT:
After tightening, if the seal packing is squeezed out in the
seal surface area of the chain cover and oil pan sub-
assembly, completely remove it. Seal packing on the
chamfer area, however, should not be removed.
(n) Check that the crankshaft turns smoothly.
9. INSTALL REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL

(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new rear engine oil seal inner periphery and outer periphery.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the rear engine oil seal
uniformly to the position shown in the illustration.
SST: 09223-15030
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07150
Oil seal tap-in depth:
0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.039 in.) from the cylinder block surface
NOTICE:
Do not tap in the rear engine oil seal at an angle.
Remove the engine oil from the crankshaft.
Do not tap in the rear engine oil seal more than
necessary.
10. INSTALL CYLINDER BLOCK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Mount the cylinder block sub-assembly onto an engine stand.
11. INSTALL PISTON WITH PIN SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, install the piston pin hole snap ring on
one end of the piston.
*1 Protective Tape
HINT:
Make sure that the piston pin hole snap ring is firmly attached into the piston pin hole snap ring
groove.
After installing the piston pin hole snap ring, rotate the piston pin hole snap ring so that its end
part and the cutout portion of the piston pin hole snap ring groove do not match.
*1 Piston Pin Hole Snap Ring
*a Correct
*b Incorrect
(b) Make sure the directions of the piston front mark and
connecting rod, and then set the piston to the connecting
rod.
*1 Front Mark
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
(c) Apply engine oil to the piston pin and install it to the piston.
(d) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, install the piston pin hole snap ring to
the piston.
*1 Protective Tape
HINT:
Make sure the piston pin hole snap ring is firmly attached into the piston pin hole snap ring
groove.
After installing the piston pin hole snap ring, rotate the piston pin hole snap ring so that its end
part and the cutout portion of the piston pin hole snap ring groove do not match.
*1 Piston Pin Hole Snap Ring
*a Correct
*b Incorrect
12. INSTALL PISTON RING SET

(a) Install the oil ring expander, lower oil ring side rail and upper oil ring side rail in order by hand.
HINT:
The oil ring consists of the 2 oil ring side rails and oil ring expander.
(b) Set the oil ring expander ends at the location B in the illustration.
(c) Hook the stoppers at the both ends of the lower oil ring side rail into the oil return hole at the
coating cutout portion A and the oil ring expander as shown in the illustration.
*1 Lower Oil Ring Side Rail
*2 Oil Ring Expander
*3 Oil Return Hole
*4 Coating Cutout
*a 0 to 20°
Coating part
(d) Align the rail ends of the upper oil ring side rail within the range C and hook the stopper into the
oil ring expander.
(e) Using a piston ring expander, install the No. 2 compression ring and No. 1 compression ring in
order.
(f) Set the No. 1 compression ring ends at the location A or B

in the illustration.
HINT:
The No. 1 compression ring ends can be set either at A or
B.
(g) Set the No. 2 compression ring ends at the location A or B, that is 180° opposite of those of the
No. 1 compression ring.
(h) Check that the piston rings and oil rings are correctly set.
13. INSTALL PISTON SUB-ASSEMBLY WITH CONNECTING ROD

(a) Operate the engine stand so that the oil pan side faces upward.
(b) Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod

and connecting rod cap. <*1>
*a Claw
(c) Check that the piston rings and oil rings are correctly set.
(d) Apply engine oil to the piston and inside the cylinder bore.
(e) Turn the crankshaft so that the crank pin is positioned at

TDC.
*1 Crank Pin
(f) Squeeze the piston rings with a piston ring compressor,

face the piston front mark toward the engine front side,
and insert the piston with connecting rod into the cylinder
block by lightly tapping on the piston top with a hammer
handle, etc.
NOTICE:
When inserting the piston with connecting rod, be careful
not to scratch the cylinder bore or crank pin by connecting
the rod edge.
Be careful not to apply too much impact when inserting to
prevent the connecting rod bearing from falling off.
(g) Apply engine oil to the seating face of the connecting rod cap and threads of the connecting rod
cap bolts.
(h) While pushing the piston top, turn the crankshaft to position the crankshaft pin and connecting
rod large end as shown in the illustration, and then attach the connecting rod cup with 2 new
connecting rod cap bolts.
*1 Connecting Rod
*2 Crankshaft Pin
HINT:
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they are assembled correctly by
checking their matching symbols.

Use new connecting rod cap bolts.
Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise when installing the No. 1 or No. 3 piston with connecting rod,
and turn the crankshaft clockwise when installing the No. 2 or No. 4 piston with connecting rod.
*1 Matching Symbol
(i) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14, tighten the 2

connecting rod cup bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
Torque:
*a No. 1 and No. 4
*b No. 2 and No. 3
(j) Retighten the 2 connecting rod cup bolts in the same order as above. <*2>
Torque:
(k) In the same procedures from <*1> to <*2>, install the No. 2, No. 3 and No. 4 piston with
connecting rods.
(l) Using a "TORX" socket wrench E14 and an angle gauge,

tighten the connecting rod cup bolts for the No. 1 to No. 4
piston with connecting rods by additional 92.5°.
*a No. 1 and No. 4
*b No. 2 and No. 3
(m) Check that the crankshaft can be turned smoothly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM00000591R000X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000056U7008X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
(b) Clean the bolt holes in the cylinder block (bank 2).
NOTICE:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts, clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing with
compressed air to eliminate engine coolant, etc.
(c) Apply the seal packing to both sides of the No. 2 cylinder head gasket as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*a 0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.039in.) *b φ2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
*c Edge of the gasket - -
NOTICE:
Install the cylinder head sub-assembly LH within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(d) Place the No. 2 cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block (bank 2).
2. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Clean the threads of the cylinder head bolts and apply sufficient engine oil to the washers and
threads of the bolts.
(b) Mount the cylinder head sub-assembly LH on the cylinder block (bank 2).
(c) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in

the illustration.
Torque:
(d) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order above.
Torque:
100 N·m {1020 kgf·cm, 74ft·lbf}
NOTICE:
If the bolt makes a stick-slip sound during tightening, repeat the procedure from the cylinder head
gasket installation after cleaning and completely drying the bolt holes and contact surfaces.
HINT:
In that case, the No. 2 cylinder head gasket can be reused.
(e) Loosen the 6 cylinder head bolts by 360 ° in the order

(f) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
Torque:
(g) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order above.
Torque:
(h) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts

another 100 ° in the order shown in the illustration.
HINT:
Temporarily install the appropriate bolt for angle gauge if
necessary.
*1 Temporary Bolt
(i) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 2 cylinder head bolts

(j) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 4 cylinder head bolts

4. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(b) Clean the bolt holes in the cylinder block (bank 1).
NOTICE:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts, clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing with
compressed air to eliminate engine coolant, etc.
(c) Apply the seal packing to both sides of the cylinder head gasket as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*a 0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.039in.) *b φ2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
*c Edge of the gasket - -
NOTICE:
Install the cylinder head sub-assembly RH within 5 minutes of applying the seal packing.
(d) Place the cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block (bank 1).
5. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH

(a) Clean the threads of the cylinder head bolts and apply sufficient engine oil to the washers and
threads of the bolts.
(b) Mount the cylinder head sub-assembly RH on the cylinder block (bank 1).
(c) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in

the illustration.
Torque:
(d) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order as above.
Torque:
100 N·m {1020 kgf·cm, 74ft·lbf}
NOTICE:
If the bolt makes a stick-slip sound during tightening, repeat the procedure from the cylinder head
gasket installation after cleaning and completely drying the bolt holes and contact surfaces.
HINT:
In that case, the cylinder head gasket can be reused.
(e) Loosen the 6 cylinder head bolts by 360 ° in the order

(f) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts in the order shown in the
illustration.
Torque:
(g) Tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts further in the same order above.
Torque:
(h) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 6 cylinder head bolts

HINT:
Temporarily install the appropriate bolt for angle gauge if
necessary.
*1 Temporary Bolt
(i) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 2 cylinder head bolts

(j) Using an angle gauge, tighten the 4 cylinder head bolts

Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000056U900AX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD GASKET: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Loosen the 6 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Lightly tap the cylinder head sub-assembly RH to separate it from the cylinder block (bank 1).
(c) Remove the cylinder head sub-assembly RH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of the cylinder head and cylinder block.
3. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(a) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
5. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Loosen the 6 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(b) Lightly tap the cylinder head sub-assembly LH to separate it from the cylinder block (bank 2).
(c) Remove the cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of the cylinder head and cylinder block.
6. REMOVE NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(a) Remove the No. 2 cylinder head gasket.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000T4V07HX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000T4X086X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: DISASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE CHAIN COVER MOUNT BOLT

(a) Remove the chain cover mount bolt.
2. REMOVE STUD BOLT
HINT:
If any of the stud bolts is deformed or the threads are
damaged, replace it.
(a) Remove the 6 stud bolts from the cylinder heads.
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
3. REMOVE INTAKE VALVE
NOTICE:
Place a cloth, etc. to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder head during servicing.
HINT:
Mark each part to prevent confusion.
(a) Using SST, compress the spring and remove the valve
spring retainer locks.
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(b) Remove the valve, valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat.
4. REMOVE EXHAUST VALVE
CAUTION:
The exhaust valve is encapsulated with metallic sodium. The metallic sodium is a strong alkaline
and prone to cause a serious chemical reaction. Therefore, extra caution is required when handling
or disposing the exhaust valve.
Never disassemble the exhaust valve. The metallic sodium may cause blindness if it gets into your
eyes, or cause burn injuries or chemical reactions resulting in fire if it comes into contact with your
skin or any heat source.
If the exhaust valve is damaged, after removing the valve, carry out processing of "Preparation for
disposal" and "Disposal".
Make sure to wear safety glasses and protective gloves when removing a damaged exhaust valve.
Do not intentionally damage the exhaust valve to remove the metallic sodium.
NOTICE:
When it is determined that disposal procedure is dissolving, this may be performed.
HINT:
The exhaust valve is encapsulated with metallic sodium. This is safe as long as it does not come
into contact with air.
The exhaust valve in which metallic sodium is encapsulated can be identified with the embossed
mark.
*a Embossed mark (E2H is for FA20 Engine)
(a) Using SST, compress the spring and remove the valve
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(b) Remove the valve, valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat.
5. REMOVE VALVE STEM OIL SEAL
(a) Remove the 8 valve stem oil seals.
NOTICE:
Place a cloth, etc. to avoid scratching the mating surface
of the cylinder head during servicing.
Be careful not to damage the valve guide bushes and
cylinder head.
6. DISPOSE OF EXHAUST VALVE
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
HINT:
The metallic sodium within the exhaust valve can be identified using the embossed mark.
(a) Preparation for disposal
CAUTION:
Ensure a fire extinguisher is at hand.
Wear safety glasses.
Wear protective gloves.
(b) Disposal
(1) Wear protective gloves and then remove the damaged valve from the cylinder head.
(2) Place a large container (bucket or other container) in a well-ventilated area and fill it with
water (at least 10 liters).
(3) Place the damaged exhaust valve inside the container

in an upright position using large pliers or similar tool
to submerge it under water.
CAUTION:
Ensure the damaged exhaust valve is fully submerged in

water.
Keep any fire sparks or fire sources away from this
container because hydrogen gas will be emitted from the
chemical reaction.
Because of serious chemical reaction, step back at least 2
to 3 m from the container.
(4) After the chemical reaction has completed (approximately 4 to 5 hours), using large pliers or
similar tool, carefully remove the valve from the container, and then dispose of it according to
the same procedures that are provided for other parts.
CAUTION:
After the chemical reaction, be careful not to let used liquid (sodium hydrate) contact your skin.
Should it contact your skin, immediately rinse it with plenty of water.
After the chemical reaction, dispose of used liquid (sodium hydrate) according to all applicable
government and local regulations.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000XCV08GX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Visually check that there are no cracks, scratches or other damage.
(b) Using a dye penetrant, check the important sections for fissures.
(c) Check that there are no signs of gas leak or water leak on gasket attachment surfaces.
(d) Using a precision straightedge and a feeler gauge, measure the surfaces that contact the cylinder
block for warpage.
Maximum warpage:
0.035 mm (0.00138 in.)
Allowable minimum cylinder head height:
98.4 mm (3.874 in.)

Standard cylinder head height:
98.5 mm (3.878 in.)
If the warpage is more than the maximum, correct the surface by grinding it or replace the cylinder
head sub-assembly.
HINT:
If the cylinder head sub-assembly bolt tightening torques and tightening angles are uneven,
cylinder head sub-assembly warpage may occur. During installation, make sure that tightening
torques and tightening angles are correctly obtained.
If the cylinder head sub-assembly is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive
compound.
2. INSPECT INTAKE VALVE

(a) Check the valve flange and valve stem for damage, wear or deformation.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the overall length of the

valve.
Standard overall length:

103.3 mm (4.067 in.)
*a Overall Length
(c) Using a vernier caliper, measure the valve head margin

thickness.
Standard margin thickness:
0.8 to 1.2 mm (0.0315 to 0.0472 in.)
*a Margin thickness
If the margin thickness is not as specified, replace the

valve.
HINT:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake valve
and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
If the valve is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat
with an abrasive compound.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the diameter of the valve

stem.
Standard valve stem diameter:

5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.2148 to 0.2154 in.)
If the valve stem diameter is not as specified, replace the

valve.
HINT:
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of
20°C (68°F).
Measure the valve stem diameter at the 6 locations as
3. INSPECT EXHAUST VALVE

(a) Check the valve flange and valve stem for damage, wear or deformation.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the overall length of the

valve.
Standard overall length:

95.1 mm (3.744 in.)
*a Overall Length
(c) Using a vernier caliper, measure the valve head margin

thickness.
Standard margin thickness:

1.0 to 1.4 mm (0.039 to 0.055 in.)
*a Margin thickness
If the margin thickness is not as specified, replace the

valve.
HINT:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake valve
and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the diameter of the valve

stem.
Standard valve stem diameter:

5.445 to 5.460 mm (0.21437 to 0.21496 in.)
If the valve stem diameter is not as specified, replace the

valve.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
Measure the valve stem diameter at the 6 locations as
4. INSPECT VALVE GUIDE BUSH OIL CLEARANCE

valve guide bush.
Standard valve guide bush inside diameter:

5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to 0.21701 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the valve

guide bush.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
Measure the inside diameter of the valve guide bush at
the 6 locations as shown in the illustration, and take the
maximum value.
(b) Calculate the clearance between the valve guide bush and valve stem.
Standard Oil Clearance:
Intake 0.030 to 0.057 mm (0.00118 to 0.00224 in.)
Exhaust 0.040 to 0.067 mm (0.00157 to 0.00264 in.)
If the clearance between valve guide bush and valve stem is more the standard, replace the valve
guide bush or valve, whichever shows the greater amount of wear or damage.
HINT:
Subtract the valve stem diameter measurement from the inside diameter measurement of the
valve guide bush.
If the valve is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
5. INSPECT VALVE ADJUSTING SHIM CLEARANCE

(a) Visually check the valve adjusting shim for damage.
(b) Using a micrometer, measure the valve stem end

diameter.
Standard valve stem end diameter:
Intake 5.455 to 5.470 mm (0.21476 to 0.21535 in.)
If the valve stem end diameter is not as specified, replace

the valve.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
Measure the valve stem end diameter at the 2 locations
as shown in the illustration, and take the minimum value.
(c) Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the

valve adjusting shim.
Standard valve adjusting shim inside diameter:
5.500 to 5.560 mm (0.21654 to 0.21890 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the valve

adjusting shim.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
Measure the inside diameter of the valve adjusting shim
at the 2 locations as shown in the illustration, and take
the maximum value.
If the valve adjusting shim needs to be replaced, check
the valve clearance and select a suitable one.
(d) Calculate the clearance between the valve adjusting shim and valve stem end.
Standard Oil Clearance:

0.030 to 0.115 mm (0.00118 to 0.00453 in.)
If the clearance between valve adjusting shim and valve stem end exceeds the standard, replace
the valve adjusting shim or valve, whichever shows the greater amount of wear or damage.
HINT:
Subtract the valve stem end diameter measurement from the inside diameter measurement of the
valve adjusting shim.
If the valve is replaced, hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
If the valve adjusting shim needs to be replaced, check the valve clearance and select a suitable
one.
6. INSPECT INTAKE VALVE SEATS
(a) Visually check the valve seat for damage or deformation.
(b) Clean the valve and valve seat.
(c) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve face.
*a Valve stem
*b Valve face
(d) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
seat, and then pull it out.
(e) Using a vernier caliper, measure the width of the contact face shown in the illustration.
Standard width (A):

0.8 to 1.6 mm (0.032 to 0.063 in.)
If the width is not as specified, repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Measure the width of the Prussian blue adhering to the valve seat.
If the Prussian blue is not continually adhered on the valve seat, hand-lap the valve and valve
seat with an abrasive compound.
If the Prussian blue is still not continually adhered on the valve seat after lapping, repair the valve
seat with a cutter.
(f) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
(g) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve seat
face.
*a Valve stem
*b Contact face
(h) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
(i) Check the location of the contact face shown in the

illustration.
Standard contact face location:
Middle of the valve face at all circumference
*a Contact face location
If the seat contact is not in the middle of the valve face,

repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Check the location of the Prussian blue adhering to the
valve face.
(j) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
7. INSPECT EXHAUST VALVE SEATS

(a) Visually check the valve seat for damage or deformation.
(b) Clean the valve and valve seat.
(c) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve face.
*a Valve stem
*b Valve face
(d) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
(e) Using a vernier caliper, measure the width of the contact face shown in the illustration.
Standard width (A):

1.1 to 1.7 mm (0.043 to 0.067 in.)
If the width is not as specified, repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Measure the width of the Prussian blue adhering to the valve seat.
If the Prussian blue is not continually adhered on the valve seat, hand-lap the valve and valve
seat with an abrasive compound.
If the Prussian blue is still not continually adhered on the valve seat after lapping, repair the valve
seat with a cutter.
(f) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
(g) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
light coat of Prussian blue uniformly to the valve seat
face.
*a Valve stem
*b Contact face
(h) Insert the valve, and without rotating the valve, lightly press the valve face against the valve
(i) Check the location of the contact face shown in the

illustration.
Standard contact face location:

Middle of the valve face at all circumference
*a Contact face location
If the seat contact is not in the middle of the valve face,

repair the valve seat with a cutter.
HINT:
Check the location of the Prussian blue adhering to the
valve face.
(j) Completely remove the Prussian blue from the valve and valve seat.
8. INSPECT VALVE SPRING

(a) Visually check the valve spring for damage or deformation.
(b) Using a vernier caliper, measure the free length of the

valve spring.
41.06 mm (1.617 in.)
If the free length is not as specified, replace the spring.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
(c) Using a steel square, measure the deviation of the valve

spring.
Maximum deviation:
Less than 1.8 mm (0.0710 in.)
Maximum angle:
2.5°
*a Deviation
If the result is not as specified, replace the valve spring.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
To measure deviation of the valve spring, stand the valve
spring on a level surface and measure its deviation at the
top of the valve spring using a steel square.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BDX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL INTAKE VALVE STEM OIL SEAL
(a) Apply engine oil to new valve stem oil seals.

*a for Intake
*b for Exhaust
*c Gray
*d Light green
NOTICE:
Pay close attention to the colors when installing the oil
seals.
Installing the intake oil seal into the exhaust side or
installing the exhaust oil seal to the intake side may
cause installation problems later.
(b) Using SST, push in the oil seals by hand.

SST: 09201-41020
*a Correct
*b Incorrect
NOTICE:
Place a cloth, etc. to avoid scratching the mating surface
of the cylinder head during servicing.
Do not tap SST with a plastic hummer to install the oil
seals as it may damage the oil seals. Push in the oil seals
by hand with SST.
Do not install the oil seals at an angle.
2. INSTALL EXHAUST VALVE STEM OIL SEAL

(a) Using SST, push in the oil seals by hand.
SST: 09201-41020
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the intake oil seals.
3. INSTALL INTAKE VALVE
NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder head during servicing.
(a) Set the valve spring seat, valve spring and retainer onto the cylinder head.
HINT:
Install the valve spring to the cylinder head with the narrow pitch end facing the valve spring seat.
(b) Apply engine oil to the valve stem and insert the valve into the valve guide bush.
NOTICE:
When inserting the valve into the valve guide bush, use special care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(c) Apply engine oil to the valve spring retainer locks.
(d) Using SST, compress the valve spring and install the valve
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(e) Using a plastic hammer, lightly tap the valve stem tip to
ensure a proper fit.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to tap the retainer.
4. INSTALL EXHAUST VALVE
NOTICE:
Place a cloth to avoid scratching the mating surface of the cylinder head during servicing.
(a) Set the valve spring seat, valve spring and retainer onto the cylinder head.
HINT:
Install the valve spring to the cylinder head with the narrow pitch end facing the valve spring seat.
(b) Apply engine oil to the valve stem and insert the valve into the valve guide bush.
NOTICE:
When inserting the valve into the valve guide bush, use special care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(c) Apply engine oil to the valve spring retainer locks.
(d) Using SST, compress the valve spring and install the valve
SST: 09202-70020
09202-00010
09202-01010
09202-01020
(e) Using a plastic hammer, lightly tap the valve stem tip to
ensure a proper fit.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to tap the retainer.
5. INSTALL STUD BOLT
(a) Install the 6 stud bolts to the cylinder heads.
Torque:
*a for Bank 1
*b for Bank 2
6. INSTALL CHAIN COVER MOUNT BOLT

(a) Install the chain cover mount bolt to the cylinder head
sub-assembly LH.
Torque:
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000035AU028X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REPAIR; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REPAIR
1. REPAIR INTAKE VALVE SEATS
NOTICE:
Repair the seat while checking the seating position.
Releasing the seat cutter pressure gradually helps to make the intake valve seat faces smoother.
(a) Using a 45° cutter, resurface the valve seat so that the
valve seat width is more than the specification.
(b) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
(c) Check the valve seating position.
HINT:
This procedure is necessary to select a cutter to be used in the following steps.
(d) Using 30° or 75° cutters, correct the valve seat so that the contact condition between the valve
and valve seat is within the standard.
NOTICE:
HINT:
Select an appropriate cutter by referring to the following chart.
CONTACT CUTTER TO BE SELECTED

POSITION
A in the If the valve face position is high, use a 30° valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface
illustration so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
B in the If the valve face position is low, use a 75° valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface so
illustration that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
If the valve face position is centered, use a 30°and 75° valve seat cutter in order to grind
C in the
the surface so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a
illustration
standard value.
(e) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
2. REPAIR EXHAUST VALVE SEATS
NOTICE:
(a) Using a 45° cutter, resurface the valve seat so that the
valve seat width is more than the specification.
(b) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
(c) Check the valve seating position.
HINT:
This procedure is necessary to select a cutter to be used in the following steps.
(d) Using 30° or 60° cutters, correct the valve seat so that the contact condition between the valve
and valve seat is within the standard.
NOTICE:
HINT:
Select an appropriate cutter by referring to the following chart.
CONTACT CUTTER TO BE SELECTED

POSITION
A in the If the valve face position is high, use a 30° valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface
illustration so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
B in the If the valve face position is low, use a 60° valve seat cutter in order to grind the surface so
illustration that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a standard value.
If the valve face position is centered, use a 30°and 60° valve seat cutter in order to grind
C in the
the surface so that the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat is at a
illustration
standard value.
(e) Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
3. REPAIR VALVE
(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to the valve stem, and a
small amount of an abrasive compound uniformly to the
valve face.
*a Valve stem
*b Valve face
HINT:
Do not apply the abrasive compound more than
necessary.
Do not apply the abrasive compound to the valve stem as
the valve stem may be affected.
(b) Slowly insert the valve stem into the valve guide bush and lap the valve and valve seat.
HINT:
Lift the valve and strike the valve on the valve seat 2 times, and slightly rotate the valve. Repeat
this set.
The contact surface between the valve and the valve seat may become larger than the standard
value, therefore, ensure that the valve is not continuously lapped by rotating while seated in the
valve seat.
While lapping, ensure that the valve is not removed from the valve guide bush by lifting too much.
(c) After lapping, completely remove the abrasive compound.
NOTICE:
Be sure to completely remove the abrasive compound as the remained compound could cause
engine troubles.
(d) Check the valve seating position and width.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BCX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: CYLINDER HEAD: REPLACEMENT; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REPLACEMENT
1. REPLACE NO. 2 INTAKE VALVE GUIDE BUSH
(a) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap out the No. 2 intake valve
guide bush.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
cylinder head and stabilize the cylinder head during
servicing.
Use special care not to damage the cylinder head.
(c) Before installing the No. 2 intake valve guide bush, make sure that neither scratches nor damages
exist on the inner surface of cylinder head valve guide bush holes.
(d) Draw a reference line 7.6 mm (0.299 in.) below from the
top face on a new No. 2 intake valve guide bush using a
marker.
*a Reference line
HINT:
Reference line is used as a guide when tapping-in the No.
2 intake valve guide bush.
(e) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing downward.
(f) Apply enough engine oil to the No. 2 intake valve guide bush, and set it on the cylinder head.
(g) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the No. 2 intake valve
guide bush to the reference line.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
servicing.
(h) While measuring the No. 2 intake valve guide bush

protrusion amount using a vernier caliper, tap in the No. 2
intake valve guide bush so that its height is within the
standard.
Standard protrusion height:

11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466 in.)
NOTICE:
servicing.
HINT:
Use multiple small repetitions of tap-in and measurement
in order not to excessively tap in the No. 2 intake valve
guide bush.
*a Protrusion height
(i) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
NOTICE:
Place wooden blocks wrapped in a cloth under the cylinder head and stabilize the cylinder head
during servicing.
(j) Using a reamer, ream the No. 2 intake valve guide bush to
obtain the standard clearance between the No. 2 intake
valve guide bush and valve stem.

5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to 0.21701 in.) at 20°C
(68°F)
NOTICE:
While gradually widening the reamer diameter, ream the
No. 2 intake valve guide bush uniformly so that the oil
clearance is within the standard.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the reamer when reaming.
If the inner surface of No. 2 intake valve guide bush is
damaged, slightly grind the edge of the reamer with 400-
grit sandpaper.
If the inner surface of No. 2 intake valve guide bush
becomes lustrous and the reamer does not chip, use a
new reamer or correct the reamer.
(k) After reaming, remove chips and clean the No. 2 intake valve guide bush.
(l) Measure the inside diameter of the No. 2 intake valve guide bush and confirm the oil clearance.
(m) Check the contact condition between the valve and valve seat.
2. REPLACE NO. 2 EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE BUSH

(a) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap out the No. 2 exhaust valve
guide bush.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
servicing.
(c) Before installing the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush, make sure that neither scratches nor
damages exist on the inner surface of cylinder head valve guide bush holes.
(d) Draw a reference line 7.6 mm (0.299 in.) below from the
top face on a new No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush using a
marker.
*a Reference line
HINT:
Reference line is used as a guide when tapping-in the No.
2 exhaust valve guide bush.
(e) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing downward.
(f) Apply enough engine oil to the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush, and set it on the cylinder head.
(g) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the No. 2 exhaust valve
guide bush to the reference line.
SST: 09201-10000
09201-01050
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
NOTICE:
servicing.
(h) While measuring the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush

protrusion amount using a vernier caliper, tap in the No. 2
exhaust valve guide bush so that its height is within the
standard.
Standard protrusion height:
11.4 to 11.8 mm (0.449 to 0.466 in.)
NOTICE:
servicing.
HINT:
Use multiple small repetitions of tap-in and measurement
in order not to excessively tap in the No. 2 exhaust valve
guide bush.
*a Protrusion height
(i) Place the cylinder block on wooden blocks with the combustion chamber side facing upward.
NOTICE:
Place wooden blocks wrapped in a cloth under the cylinder head and stabilize the cylinder head
during servicing.
(j) Using a reamer, ream the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush
to obtain the standard clearance between the No. 2
exhaust valve guide bush and valve stem.
5.500 to 5.512 mm (0.21654 to 0.21701 in.) at 20°C
(68°F)
NOTICE:
While gradually widening the reamer diameter, ream the
No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush uniformly so that the oil
clearance is within the standard.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the reamer when reaming.
If the inner surface of No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush is
damaged, slightly grind the edge of the reamer with 400-
grit sandpaper.
If the inner surface of No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush
becomes lustrous and the reamer does not chip, use a
new reamer or correct the reamer.
(k) After reaming, remove chips and clean the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush.
(l) Measure the inside diameter of the No. 2 exhaust valve guide bush and confirm the oil clearance.
(m) Check the contact condition between the valve and valve seat.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000T3R03YX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000TXU067X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION

(a) Set the fan and generator V belt onto every part.
*1 Idler
*2 Generator
*3 Tensioner
*4 Water Pump
*5 Crankshaft
*6 A/C Compressor
(b) While turning the belt tensioner clockwise, remove the 3

mm (0.118 in.) hexagon wrench.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the fan and generator V belt is properly
installed to each pulley.
(c) Check that the fan and generator V belt fits properly in
the ribbed grooves.
HINT:
Make sure to check by hand that the fan and generator V
belt have not slipped out of the grooves on the bottom of
the pulley.

(a) Install the belt generator cover with the 2 blots.
Torque:
(b) Engage the 2 wire harness clamps and install the wire harness to the belt generator cover.

(a) Install the generator cover with the 2 blots.
Torque:
(a) Install the air cleaner cap with air cleaner hose with the 3 blots.
Torque:
(b) Install the air cleaner cap with air cleaner hose with the 2 hose clamps.
Torque:
(c) Connect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
(d) Connect the mass air flow meter connector.
(e) Engage the wire harness clamp and install the wire harness to the air cleaner cap.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM0000041LH006X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
1. INSPECT FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT
(a) Check the belt for wear, cracks or other signs of damage.
*a INCORRECT
If any of the following defects is found, replace the fan

and generator V belt.
The belt is cracked.

The belt is worn out to the extent that the cords
are exposed.
The belt has chunks missing from the ribs.
(b) Check that the belt fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
*a CORRECT
*b INCORRECT
HINT:
Check with your hand to confirm that the belt has not
slipped out of the grooves on the bottom of the pulley. If
it has slipped out, replace the fan and generator V belt.
Install the new fan and generator V belt.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000TXV06BX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: DRIVE BELT: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the No. 2

ventilation hose.
(b) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.
(c) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness from the air cleaner cap.
(d) Loosen the 2 hose clamps.
(e) Remove the 3 bolts and the air cleaner cap with air
cleaner hose.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and generator cover.

(a) Disengage the 2 clamps and separate the wire harness
from the belt generator cover.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and belt generator cover.

(a) While turning the belt tensioner clockwise, align the holes
and insert a 3 mm (0.118 in.) hexagon wrench into the
holes to hold the belt tensioner.
*1 Hexagon Wrench
HINT:
The pulley bolt for the belt tensioner has a left-hand
thread.
(b) Remove the fan and generator V belt from the belt
tensioner.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000003IC9006X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000N8101BX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET
(a) Install the 2 front engine mounting brackets with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
2. REMOVE ENGINE STAND

(a) Attach an engine sling device and hang the engine with a chain block.
NOTICE:
With the exception of installing the engine assembly to an engine stand or removing the engine
assembly from an engine stand, do not perform any work on the engine while it is suspended, as
doing so is dangerous.
(b) Remove the engine stand from the engine.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE
4. INSTALL FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
5. INSTALL CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
6. INSTALL CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
7. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
8. INSTALL ENGINE ASSEMBLY

(a) Confirm that 2 knock pins are on the transmission contact
surface of the engine block before transmission
installation.
(b) Keeping the engine assembly and the transmission

assembly in a horizontal position, align the knock pins
with each hole on the transmission assembly and install
the bolt.
Torque:
10. CONNECT FUEL HOSE

(a) Connect the fuel tube and No. 2 fuel tube to the fuel pipe .
(b) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose to the fuel pipe.
11. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE SETTING HEXAGON BOLT (for Automatic Transmission)
12. INSTALL FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER
13. INSTALL FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the front suspension crossmember sub-assembly with the 2 nuts.
Torque:
14. INSTALL MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Install the 3 bolts and 2nuts.
Torque:
15. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Install the 3 bolts and 2nuts.
Torque:
16. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER BAR (for Automatic Transmission)
17. INSTALL EARTH CABLE

(a) Install the 2 grounded cables with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
18. CONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE

(a) Install the clamp and connect the radiator outlet hose.
19. CONNECT NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Connect the No. 3 transmission oil cooler hose.
21. CONNECT NO. 1 COOLER REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE HOSE
22. INSTALL SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the attached vinyl tape from the hose.
(b) Apply sufficient compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the compressor assembly
with pulley.
Compressor oil:
ND-OIL 8 or equivalent
(c) Install the O-ring onto the suction hose sub-assembly.
(d) Install the suction hose sub-assembly onto the compressor assembly with pulley with the bolt.
Torque:
(e) Remove the vinyl tape from the pipe.
(f) Sufficiently apply compressor oil to a new O-ring and the fitting surface of the suction pipe sub-
assembly.
Compressor oil:
ND-OIL 8 or equivalent
(g) Connect the O-ring to the suction pipe sub-assembly.
(h) Connect the suction pipe sub-assembly.
(i) Rotate the hook connector in the direction indicated by the arrow in the illustration.
(j) Insert the pipe joint into the cooler expansion valve
securely and tighten the bolt.
Torque:
(k) Install the suction pipe sub-assembly with the nut.
Torque:
23. INSTALL NO. 1 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Connect the No. 1 transmission oil cooler hose.
24. CONNECT HEATER WATER HOSE

(a) Install the 2 hose clamps and connect 2 heater water hoses.
26. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose with the bolt.
Torque:
(b) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose.
27. CONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the vacuum tube connector hose.

(a) Connect the generator connector and connect the clamp.
(b) Connect the generator wire with the nut.
Torque:
(c) Install the terminal cap.
(d) Connect the 5 wire harness clamps.

(e) Install the 2 wire harness clamp brackets with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(f) Connect the 2 wire harness clamps to the 2 wire harness clamp brackets.
(g) Connect the wire harness clamp to the No. 2 engine hanger.
(h) Connect the connector (B).
(i) Connect the wire harness connector (A) and securely lock the connector.
(j) Install the wire harness clamp bracket to the No. 2 engine hanger with the bolt.
Torque:
(k) for Automatic Transmission:
(1) Slide the connector in the direction shown in the

diagram, and connect the wire harness.
(2) Connect the 2 wire harness clamps.
(3) Connect the wire harness connector (A) and securely lock the connector.
(4) Connect the connector (B).

(a) Install the 2 clamps and connect the water filler sub-assembly.
(b) Install the water filler sub-assembly with 2 bolts.
Torque:

(a) Install the stay with bolt to the body.
Torque:
(b) Install the air cleaner assembly with hose with the 3 bolts.
Torque:
(c) Install the hose clamp.

Torque:
(d) Connect the clamp and wire harness to the air cleaner cap.
(e) Connect the mass air flow meter connector.
(f) Connect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
(g) Install the 2 bolts and the chamber duct with chamber.
Torque:
(h) Connect the hose.
36. ADD ENGINE OIL

39. CHARGE WITH REFRIGERANT
40. CHECK FOR ENGINE COOLANT LEAK
41. CHECK FOR ENGINE OIL LEAK
42. CHECK FOR FUEL LEAK
44. INSPECT FOR REFRIGERANT LEAK
46. INSPECT IGNITION TIMING
47. INSPECT ENGINE IDLE SPEED
48. INSPECT CO/HC
49. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
50. INSPECT ENGINE OIL LEVEL

(a) Change the front hood stay position from B to A, and store the front hood stay.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000N82013X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
(a) Change the front hood stay position from A to B, and support the hood sub-assembly at position
B.
2. RECOVER REFRIGERANT FROM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
3. DISCHARGE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE
(a) Disconnect the hose.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the chamber.
(c) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the No. 2

ventilation hose.
(d) Disconnect the mass air flow meter connector.
(e) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness from the air cleaner cap.
(f) Loosen the hose clamp.
(g) Remove the 3 bolts and air cleaner cap with air cleaner
hose.
(h) Remove the bolt and stay from the body.
8. DRAIN ENGINE OIL

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the water filler sub-
assembly.
(b) Remove the 2 clamps and water filler sub-assembly.
HINT:
Fix the disconnected harness components with tape to keep them out of the way.
(a) Remove the bolt and wire harness clamp bracket from the
No. 2 engine hanger.
(b) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the connector.
(c) Disconnect the connector (B).
(d) Disconnect the connector.
(e) Disconnect the wire harness clamp and wire harness from
the No. 2 engine hanger.
(f) Disconnect the 3 wire harness clamps.
(g) for Automatic Transmission:
(1) Release the lock of connector (A) and disconnect the

connector.
(2) Disconnect the connector (B).
(3) Slide the connector in the direction shown in the

illustration, and disconnect the wire harness.
(4) Disconnect the 3 wire harness clamps.
(5) Remove the bolt and wire harness clamp bracket.
(h) Disconnect the terminal cap.
(i) Remove the nut and disconnect the wire harness from terminal B.
(j) Disconnect the generator connector and disengage the clamp.
15. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the vacuum tube
connector hose.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the vacuum tube

connector hose.
(c) Loosen the hose clamp and remove the vacuum tube connector hose.
16. DISCONNECT VACUUM TUBE CONNECTOR HOSE (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the vacuum tube
connector hose from the intake manifold.
(b) Remove the bolt and disconnect the vacuum tube connector hose.
18. FIX FRONT EXHAUST PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Tie the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly to the front cross
member sub-assembly with rope.
19. DISCONNECT HEATER WATER HOSE
(a) Loosen the 2 hose clamps and disconnect the 2 heater

water hoses.
20. DISCONNECT NO. 1 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Loosen the clip and disconnect the No. 1 transmission oil
cooler hose.
21. REMOVE SUCTION HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the suction hose sub-
assembly from the compressor assembly with pulley.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the discharge hose sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Seal the openings of the disconnected parts using vinyl tape to prevent entry of moisture and
foreign matter.
(c) Remove the bolt and slide the hook connector.
(d) Remove the nut and suction pipe sub-assembly.
(e) Remove the O-ring from the suction pipe sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Seal the openings of the disconnected parts using vinyl tape to prevent entry of moisture and
foreign matter.
22. DISCONNECT NO. 1 COOLER REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE HOSE
24. DISCONNECT NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Loosen the clip and disconnect the No. 3 transmission oil
cooler hose.
25. DISCONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE
(a) Loosen the clip and disconnect the radiator outlet hose.
26. DISCONNECT GROUNDED CABLE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the 2 grounded

cables.
27. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER BAR (for Automatic Transmission)
28. FIX FRONT EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Tie the front exhaust pipe assembly to the front cross
member sub-assembly with rope.
29. SEPARATE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
In order to prevent dropping, do not remove bolt B.
30. REMOVE MANUAL TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
Bolt
Nut
NOTICE:
In order to prevent dropping, do not remove bolt B.
31. SEPARATE FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 nuts from the front cross member sub-
assembly.
32. REMOVE FLYWHEEL HOUSING UNDER COVER
33. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE SETTING HEXAGON BOLT (for Automatic Transmission)
34. SEPARATE FUEL HOSE
(a) Using SST, disconnect the fuel tube and No. 2 fuel tube
from the fuel pipe .
SST: SU003-03936
(b) Remove the clamp and disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor
feed hose from the fuel pipe.
(a) Install the engine hanger with the bolt, as shown in the
illustration.
*1 No. 1 Engine Hanger
*2 No. 2 Engine Hanger
Torque:
No. 1 Engine Hanger 12281-38030
Bolt 90119-14120
(b) Use an engine sling device and a mini crane to hold the engine.
36. SUPPORT TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
(a) Support the transmission assembly clutch housing with a

jack.
NOTICE:
Support the transmission assembly until the installation of
the engine assembly is completed.
37. REMOVE ENGINE ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt from the transmission assembly.
*A for Automatic Transmission
*B for Manual Transmission
(b) Hoist the engine assembly up with an engine sling device and a mini crane.
38. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
39. REMOVE CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
40. REMOVE CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
41. REMOVE FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
42. REMOVE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE
43. INSTALL ENGINE STAND

(a) Set the engine on an engine stand.
NOTICE:
With the exception of installing the engine assembly to an engine stand or removing the engine
assembly from an engine stand, do not perform any work on the engine while it is suspended, as
doing so is dangerous.
44. REMOVE FRONT ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and 2 front engine mounting

brackets.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000T4V07GX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000021ZT04OX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: DISASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE OIL FILLER CAP ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the oil filler cap assembly.
2. REMOVE OIL FILTER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, remove the oil filter sub-assembly.
SST: 09228-22020
3. REMOVE OIL FILTER UNION
(a) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, remove the oil filter

union.
4. REMOVE E.F.I. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, remove the E.F.I.

engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. REMOVE KNOCK CONTROL SENSOR
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and 2 knock control sensors.
6. REMOVE CRANK POSITION SENSOR
(a) Remove the bolt and crank position sensor.
7. REMOVE VVT SENSOR
(a) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for intake side of bank
1).
(b) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
(c) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank
1).
(d) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
(e) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for intake side of bank
2).
(f) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
(g) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank
2).
(h) Remove the O-ring from the VVT sensor.
8. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for intake side of bank 1).
(b) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control
valve.
(c) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for exhaust side of bank 1).
(e) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(f) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(g) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for intake side of bank 2).
(h) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(i) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(j) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control valve
(for exhaust side of bank 2).
(k) Remove the O-ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
(l) Remove the back-up ring from the camshaft timing oil control valve.
9. REMOVE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the

temperature sensor.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth or the like to prevent engine oil from
splashing.
10. REMOVE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, remove the engine

oil pressure switch assembly.
NOTICE:
Use a cloth or the like to prevent engine oil from
splashing.
*1 24 mm deep socket wrench
11. REMOVE PCV HOSE CONNECTOR
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and PCV hose connector.
(b) Loosen the 2 clips and remove the No. 2 water by-pass hose from the PCV hose connector.
12. REMOVE VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
13. REMOVE REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the 3 bolts and rear cylinder head plate.
14. REMOVE WATER INLET PIPE
(a) Disconnect the No. 3 water by-pass hose.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts and water inlet pipe.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings from the cylinder block.
15. REMOVE PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, remove the PCV

valve sub-assembly.
(a) Remove the bolt, No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly and idler
pulley cover.
(a) Remove the bolt, No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly and idler
pulley cover.
(a) Using SST, hold the water pump pulley.

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and water pump pulley.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to let SST slip during the work.
19. REMOVE ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 5 bolts, engine water pump assembly and

gasket.
20. REMOVE WATER OUTLET
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and water outlet.

(b) Remove the gasket from the thermostat.
NOTICE:
(a) Install SST to the crankshaft pulley.

SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
HINT:
Position the projections on SST in the direction as shown
in the illustration to prevent SST from separating from the
crankshaft pulley.
*1 Claw
(b) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and loosen the
crankshaft pulley set bolt.
SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
*a Hold
*b Turn
(c) Remove the crankshaft pulley.
(d) Remove the O-ring and crankshaft pulley spacer.

tape, pry out the timing chain or belt cover oil seal.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
After the removal, check the crankshaft for damage. If it is
damaged, smooth the surface with 400-grit sandpaper.
HINT:

(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the timing chain or belt cover
sub-assembly by prying between the timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly and cylinder head or
cylinder block.
*1 Protective Tape - -
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of the cylinder head, cylinder block or chain cover.
(c) Remove the 4 O-rings.

(a) Temporarily install the crank pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
crankshaft timing gear or sprocket, camshaft timing intake
gear assembly RH and camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
HINT:
The crankshaft key faces downward at this time.
*1 Alignment Mark
*2 Key
(c) Push down the chain tensioner slipper and retain the
plunger by inserting a 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter
hexagonal wrench into the No. 1 chain tensioner
assembly through the stopper plate.
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(e) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(f) Using a 5 mm hexagonal wrench, remove the bolt and No.

1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub- assembly (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
With the chain sub- assembly (for bank 1) removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend.
To avoid this, do not turn the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH more than zero-lift
range (The range where camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
HINT:
(a) Turn the crankshaft and position each alignment mark on

the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket, camshaft timing
intake gear assembly LH and camshaft timing exhaust
gear assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
*1 Key
*2 Alignment Mark
(b) Push the chain tensioner slipper and retain the plunger
by inserting an approximately 1 mm (0.039 in.) diameter
wire into the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly through the
stopper plate .
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(d) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(e) Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block.
(f) Using a 5 mm socket hexagon wrench, remove the bolt

and No. 1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub-assembly (for bank 2).
NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly (for bank 2) removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the exhaust
camshaft LH more than zero-lift rang (The range where the camshaft can be turned lightly by
hand).
At this time, No. 1 and No. 4 pistons are located near TDC. If the intake camshaft is turned, the
valves may come into contact with the piston, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do
not turn the intake camshaft LH.
HINT:
27. ROTATE CRANK SHAFT AND CAMSHAFT
28. REMOVE CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET
(a) Remove the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
HINT:
Make sure the front-back direction and make a mark for
installation if necessary.
29. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
30. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
31. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH

32. REMOVE CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
33. REMOVE SPARK PLUG

(a) Using a 14 mm spark plug wrench, remove the 4 spark plugs.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and injector driver bracket.

(c) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the cylinder head cover sub-
assembly RH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH, cam caps and cylinder head cover sub-
assembly RH.
(d) Remove the cylinder head cover gasket.
(e) Remove the 2 spark plug tube gaskets.
NOTICE:
When removing the seal packing left on the camshaft
housing sub-assembly RH using a scraper, use special
care not to damage the camshafts.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the intake and exhaust camshafts first as it may cause a deformation of the
cylinder head sub-assembly.
(a) Loosen the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and remove them.
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the camshaft housing sub-
assembly RH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the cylinder head sub-assembly RH and camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings and 8 No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-
assemblies from the cylinder head sub-assembly.
HINT:
(d) Remove the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8 roller rocker

arm pivots from the cylinder head sub-assembly.
HINT:
37. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
38. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

(c) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the cylinder head cover sub-
assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH, cam caps and cylinder head cover sub-
assembly LH.
(d) Remove the cylinder head cover gasket.
(e) Remove the 2 spark plug tube gaskets.
NOTICE:
When removing the seal packing left on the camshaft
housing sub-assembly LH using a scraper, use special
care not to damage the camshafts.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the intake and exhaust camshafts first as it may cause a deformation of the
camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(a) Loosen the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and remove them.
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the camshaft housing sub-
assembly LH.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the cylinder head sub-assembly LH and camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(c) Remove the 2 O-rings and 8 No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-
assemblies from the cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
HINT:
(d) Remove the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8 roller rocker

arm pivots from the cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
HINT:
41. REMOVE CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
42. REMOVE NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
43. REMOVE NO. 2 ENGINE HANGER

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 2 engine hanger from the
44. REMOVE NO. 2 OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the drain plug and gasket.
(c) Using an oil pan seal cutter, remove the No. 2 oil pan sub-
assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the contact surface and flange part of the
No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 seal rings from the No. 2 oil pan sub-
assembly.
45. REMOVE OIL STRAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and oil strainer sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring.
46. REMOVE OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped in protective tape, remove the oil pan sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the cylinder block and oil pan sub-assembly.
(c) Remove the 3 O-rings from the cylinder block.
(d) Remove the 4 bolts and baffle plate from the oil pan sub-
assembly.
(e) Remove the 2 stud bolts from the oil pan sub-assembly.
47. REMOVE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP (for Bank 1)
48. REMOVE CAMSHAFT (for Bank 1)
49. REMOVE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 1)
(a) Remove the 2 oil control valve filters from the camshaft
housing sub-assembly RH.
50. REMOVE OIL SPACER RH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and oil spacer RH.
51. REMOVE CAMSHAFT OIL FEED PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the 2 union bolts, the bolt, camshaft oil feed pipe
sub-assembly and 2 gaskets from the camshaft housing
sub-assembly RH.
52. REMOVE HOLE PLUG (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the hole plug and gasket from the camshaft
53. REMOVE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP (for Bank 2)
54. REMOVE CAMSHAFT (for Bank 2)
55. REMOVE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 2)
(a) Remove the 2 oil control valve filters from the camshaft
housing sub-assembly LH.
56. REMOVE OIL SPACER LH

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and oil spacer LH.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000XCV08FX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 1 VALVE ROCKER ARM SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the roller moves smoothly by rotating it by

hand.
Replace the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly if the

roller does not rotate smoothly.
2. INSPECT CHAIN SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the chain sub-assembly for deformation, cracks or other damages.
If the chain sub-assembly has any defects, replace it.
3. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR

(a) Check the camshaft timing gear teeth for abnormal wear and scratches.
If the camshaft timing gear has any defects, replace it.
4. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET

(a) Check the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket teeth for abnormal wear and scratches.
If necessary, replace it.
(b) Check that there is no play between the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket and the key.
If necessary, replace the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket or the key.
5. INSPECT CHAIN TENSIONER SLIPPER

(a) Check the chain tensioner slipper for deformation, cracks or other damages.
6. INSPECT NO. 1 CHAIN VIBRATION DAMPER

(a) Check the No. 1 chain vibration damper for deformation, cracks or other damages.
7. INSPECT CHAIN TENSIONER ASSEMBLY

(a) Check the chain tensioner assembly for deformation, cracks or other damages.
(b) Check that the plunger moves smoothly when it is

unlocked.
If the plunger does not move smoothly, replace the chain

tensioner assembly.
(c) Check that the plunger does not move when it is locked.
8. INSPECT CAMSHAFT HOUSING SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Visually check the oil control valve filters, and if clogging is found, replace them with new ones.
(b) Check the camshaft housing sub-assembly journals for damage and wear. Replace the camshaft
housing sub-assembly if necessary.
9. INSPECT CAMSHAFT
(a) Check the camshaft journals for damage and wear.
Replace the camshaft if necessary.
(b) Check the cam face condition.
Replace the camshaft if uneven wear is found.
HINT:
Remove the minor faults by smoothing the surface with 400-grit sandpaper.
(c) Inspect for runout.

(1) Place the camshaft on V-blocks.
(2) Using a dial indicator, measure the circle runout at the

center journal.
Maximum circle runout:

0.020 mm (0.00079 in.)
If the circle runout is more than the maximum, replace

the camshaft.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
(d) Inspect for cam height.
(1) Using a micrometer, measure the cam lobe height.

Standard height (Intake):
POSITION STANDARD
A 40.82 to 40.92 mm (1.6083 to 1.6110 in.)
B 34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)
Standard height (Exhaust):
POSITION STANDARD
A 40.72 to 40.82 mm (1.6031 to 1.6071 in.)
B 34.0 mm (1.3386 in.)
Standard height (For fuel pump):
POSITION STANDARD
C 40.55 to 40.65
*a For Valve
*b For Fuel Pump
If the result is not as specified, replace the camshaft.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
(e) Inspect for camshaft journals.
(1) Using a micrometer, measure the journal diameter.

Standard journal diameter:
25.946 to 25.963 mm (1.02149 to 1.02216 in.)
If the result is not as specified, check the oil clearance.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
10. INSPECT CAMSHAFT OIL CLEARANCE
(a) Using a dial indicator, measure the thrust clearance while

moving the camshaft back and forth.
Standard thrust clearance:

0.0068 to 0.1160 mm (0.00027 to 0.00457 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified or if uneven wear is

found, replace each camshaft cap and camshaft housing
as a set. If necessary replace the camshaft.
HINT:
20°C (68°F).
Set the dial indicator at the end surface of the camshaft.
11. INSPECT CAMSHAFT OIL CLEARANCE
HINT:
(a) Remove the seal packing from camshaft housing and front camshaft cap, intake rear camshaft cap
and exhaust rear camshaft cap.
(b) Clean each camshaft cap and camshaft housing journal.

(c) Set the camshafts on the camshaft housing.
(d) Place a plastigauge across the camshaft journals and set the camshaft caps.
(e) Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the front camshaft cap, intake
center camshaft cap, intake rear camshaft cap, exhaust center camshaft cap and exhaust rear
camshaft cap.
Torque:
(f) Using several steps, uniformly loosen the bolts in the order shown in the illustration, and remove
the front camshaft cap, intake center camshaft cap, intake rear camshaft cap, exhaust center
camshaft cap and exhaust rear camshaft cap.
(g) Measure the widest point of the plastigauge on each

journal.

0.037 to 0.072 mm (0.00146 to 0.00283 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified, replace each camshaft

cap and camshaft housing as a set. If necessary, replace
the camshaft.
(h) Completely remove the plastigauge.

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 4 ignition coils with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
2. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Install the No. 1 water by-pass pipe with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the water by-pass hose with the hose clamp.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Install the No. 1 water by-pass pipe with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses with the 2 hose clamps.
4. CONNECT NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Connect the No. 3 transmission oil cooler hose with the hose clamp.
5. INSTALL NO. 2 WATER BY-PASS HOSE
(a) Connect the No. 2 water by-pass hose with the clamp.
6. CONNECT NO. 2 VENTILATION HOSE

(a) Connect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
7. INSTALL ENGINE WIRE

(a) Connect the ground wire with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect each connector and each clamp to fix the engine wire as shown in the illustration, and
check that the engine wire is correctly installed.
*1 Ground Wire - -
*a Upper side *b Front side
*c Right side *d Left side
11. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR O-RING
12. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
13. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH
14. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH
15. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE

(a) Install 2 new gaskets to the intake manifold.
(b) Install the intake manifold with the 6 bolts.
Torque:
(c) Engage the 2 clamps and connect the 4 connectors.
(d) Connect the fuel pump connector.
(e) Connect the No. 1 vacuum switching valve assembly connector.
(f) Connect the vacuum sensor connector.
(g) Connect the 2 water by-pass hoses to the throttle body assembly.
(h) Connect the throttle body assembly connector.
19. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel pump assembly with a new gasket and the
union bolt.
Torque:
(b) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose.
(c) Install the bolt and connect the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
Torque:

(a) Install the injector cover to the intake manifold with the 2 bolts.
Torque:

Torque:
22. INSTALL COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH

(a) Install the generator assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000T4Y0BBX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: REASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL OIL SPACER LH
(a) Install the oil spacer LH with the 2 bolts.

Torque:
2. INSTALL OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 2)
(a) Install 2 new oil control valve filters to the camshaft

housing sub-assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.0197 in.) from the face of the camshaft

*a
housing sub-assembly LH
3. INSTALL CAMSHAFT (for Bank 2)
5. INSTALL HOLE PLUG (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Install a new gasket and the hole plug to the camshaft
Torque:
6. INSTALL CAMSHAFT OIL FEED PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Temporarily install 2 new gaskets and the camshaft oil feed pipe sub-assembly with the bolt and 2
union bolts.
(b) Tighten the 2 union bolts to the specified torque.
Torque:
(c) Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.

Torque:
7. INSTALL OIL SPACER RH
(a) Install the oil spacer RH with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
8. INSTALL OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER (for Bank 1)
(a) Install 2 new oil control valve filters to the camshaft

housing sub-assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.0197 in.) from the face of the camshaft

*a
housing sub-assembly RH
9. INSTALL CAMSHAFT (for Bank 1)
11. INSTALL OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the 2 stud bolts to the oil pan sub-assembly.
Torque:
Standard height (A):
70.0 mm (2.756 in.)
(b) Install the baffle plate to the oil pan sub-assembly with
the 4 bolts.
Torque:
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the

illustration.
Seal packing:
*a Seal Packing
*b φ4.0 to 6.0 mm (0.158 to 0.236 in.)
*c 1.5 mm (0.059 in.)
*d Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Install the oil pan sub-assembly within 5 minutes of
Apply seal packing 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.) away from the
outer side of the chamfer edge. However, it is allowed to
apply the seal packing on the chamfer around the bolt
hole.
(d) Install 3 new O-rings to the cylinder block.
(e) Tighten the 13 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the oil pan sub-assembly to the
cylinder block.
Bolt A
Bolt B
Length of bolt A:
25.0 mm (0.984 in.)
Length of bolt B:
75.0 mm (2.953 in.)
HINT:
After tightening the bolts, if the seal packing is squeezed out onto the seal surface of the chain
cover, completely remove it.
12. INSTALL OIL STRAINER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install a new O-ring.
(b) Install the oil strainer sub-assembly to the oil pan sub-
assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
13. INSTALL NO. 2 OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install 2 new oil pan seal rings to the No. 2 oil pan sub-
assembly.
(b) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the

illustration.
Seal packing:
NOTICE:
Install the No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly within 5 minutes of
*a Seal Packing
*b 9.5 mm (0.374 in.)
*c φ4.0 to 6.0 mm (0.158 to 0.236 in.)

to install the No. 2 oil pan sub-assembly.
Torque:
(d) Install a new gasket and the drain plug.

Torque:
14. INSTALL NO. 2 ENGINE HANGER
(a) Install the No. 2 engine hanger to the cylinder block (for
bank 1) with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
15. INSTALL NO. 2 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
16. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Apply engine oil to the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8

roller rocker arm pivots, and then install them to the
cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
(b) Apply engine oil to 2 new O-rings and the 8 No. 1 valve
rocker arm sub-assemblies, and then install them to the
cylinder head sub-assembly LH.
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the illustration.

Seal packing:
*a Chamfer edge *b Range of B-B
*c within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) *d φ2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.098 to 0.138 in.)
*e -0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.) *f 18.0 mm (0.709 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive seal packing.
Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH within 5 minutes of applying seal packing.
(d) Tighten the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the camshaft housing sub-
assembly LH.
Torque:
HINT:
Set the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH to the zero-lift position.
(e) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180° in the order shown in the

illustration.
(f) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

Torque:
(g) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180° in the order shown in the

illustration.
(h) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

Torque:
(i) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180° in the order shown in the

illustration.
(j) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.

Torque:
HINT:
After tightening the bolts, if the seal packing is squeezed
out onto the seal surface of the chain cover, completely
remove it.
18. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 2)
NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly (for bank 2) removed, valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the intake
camshaft LH and exhaust camshaft LH more than the zero-lift rang (The range where the
(a) Using a feeler gauge, check the valve clearance between the cam base circle and the roller surface
of the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly.
Standard valve clearance (cold):

0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.) for intake
0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to 0.0106 in.) for exhaust
HINT:
Set the intake camshaft LH and the exhaust camshaft LH to the zero-lift position.
If the clearance is not as specified, take notes of the value in order to adjust the valve clearance
later on.
19. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 2)

(a) Remove the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.
(b) Remove the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies.

(c) Remove the valve adjusting shims.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the valve

adjusting shims.
(e) Calculate the thickness of the valve adjusting shim so that the valve clearance comes within the
specified values.
Intake side:
A = B + (C - 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) x 1.54
Exhaust side:
A = B + (C - 0.24 mm (0.0094 in.) x 1.69
A:
Required valve adjusting shim thickness
B:
Removed valve adjusting shim thickness
C:
Measured valve clearance
(f) Apply engine oil to the inner face of the valve adjusting shims and install them to the valves.
NOTICE:
Check if the shims can be rotated smoothly on the valves.
(g) Install the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies.
(h) Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly LH.

(i) Check that the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies are correctly installed.
(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to 2 new spark plug tube
gaskets and install them to the spark plug tubes as
*a Spark plug tube edge
(b) Install a new cylinder head cover gasket to the cylinder head cover sub-assembly LH.
(c) Apply seal packing to the mating surface of cylinder head

cover sub-assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
AREA APPLICATION LENGTH
A 10.0 mm (0.394 in.) or more
B 18.8 mm (0.740 in.) or more
C 63.0 mm (2.480 in.) or more
*a Arch starting point
*b φ2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
(d) Tighten the 8 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and install the cylinder head cover sub-assembly LH.
Torque:
21. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
22. INSTALL CYLINDER HEAD SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
(a) Apply engine oil to the 8 valve adjusting shims and 8

roller rocker arm pivots, and then install them to the
(b) Apply engine oil to 2 new O-rings and the 8 No. 1 valve
rocker arm sub-assemblies, and then install them to the
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*a Range of B-B *b 0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.0394 in.)
*c φ2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.098 to 0.138 in.) *d -0.5 to 0.5 mm (-0.0197 to 0.0197 in.)
*e Chamfer edge *f 18.0 mm (0.709 in.)
NOTICE:
Do not apply excessive seal packing.
Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH within 5 minutes of applying seal packing.
(d) Tighten the 9 bolts in the order shown in the illustration to install the camshaft housing sub-
assembly RH.
Torque:
HINT:
Set the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH to the zero-lift position.
(e) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180° in the order shown in the

illustration.
Torque:
(g) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180° in the order shown in the

illustration.
(h) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
Torque:
(i) Loosen the 3 bolts by 180° in the order shown in the

illustration.
(j) Tighten the 3 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
Torque:
HINT:
After tightening the bolts, if the seal packing is squeezed
out onto the seal surface of the chain cover, completely
remove it.
24. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 1)
NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly (for bank 1) removed, valve heads may contact each other if the
camshafts are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the intake
camshaft RH and exhaust camshaft RH more than the zero-lift rang (The range where the
(a) Using a feeler gauge, check the valve clearance between the cam base circle and the roller surface
of the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly.
Standard valve clearance (cold):

0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.) for intake
0.21 to 0.27 mm (0.0083 to 0.0106 in.) for exhaust
HINT:
Set the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH to the zero-lift position.
If the clearance is not as specified, take notes of the value in order to adjust the valve clearance
later on.
25. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (for Bank 1)

(a) Remove the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the valve

adjusting shims.
specified values.
Intake side:
A = B + (C - 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.) x 1.54
Exhaust side:
A = B + (C - 0.24 mm (0.0094 in.) x 1.69
A:
B:
C:
(f) Apply engine oil to the inner face of the valve adjusting shims and install them to the valves.
NOTICE:
Check if the shims can be rotated smoothly on the valves.
(h) Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly RH.
(i) Check that the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assemblies are correctly installed.
(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to 2 new spark plug tube
gaskets and install them to the spark plug tubes as
*a Spark plug tube edge
(b) Install a new cylinder head cover gasket to the cylinder head cover sub-assembly RH.
(c) Apply seal packing to the mating surface of cylinder head

cover sub-assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
AREA APPLICATION LENGTH
A 10.0 mm (0.394 in.) or more
B 68.0 mm (2.677 in.) or more
C 70.7 mm (2.784 in.) or more
*a Arch starting point
*b φ2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
(d) Tighten the 8 bolts in the order shown in the illustration

and install the cylinder head cover sub-assembly RH.
Torque:
(a) Install the injector driver bracket with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
28. INSTALL SPARK PLUG

(a) Using a 14 mm spark plug wrench, install the 4 spark plugs.
Torque:
29. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
30. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY LH
31. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING EXHAUST GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
32. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING INTAKE GEAR ASSEMBLY RH
33. INSTALL CRANKSHAFT TIMING GEAR OR SPROCKET
(a) Install the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
HINT:
The crankshaft timing gear or sprocket should be installed
as it was before.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere or to enter into the component parts during installation.
HINT:
Apply engine oil to all component parts of the chain sub-assembly.
(a) Temporarily install the crank pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
illustration to press in the plunger.
*1 Link Plate
*2 Plunger
(c) Insert an approximately 1 mm (0.0394 in.) diameter wire

or the like into the chain tensioner assembly through the
stopper pin hole, and hold the plunger.
*1 First notch of the plunger rack
*2 Stopper Tooth
HINT:
If the stopper pin hole on the link plate and the stopper
pin hole on the chain tensioner assembly are not aligned,
check that the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged
with the stopper tooth. If not engaged, retract the
plunger a little so that the first notch of the plunger rack is
engaged with the stopper tooth.
(d) Check that the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket is

located at the position shown in the illustration. If not,
turn the crankshaft to align the crankshaft timing gear or
sprocket alignment mark as shown in the illustration.
*a Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
Make sure to perform this operation to prevent the valves
and pistons from contacting each other.
(e) Using SST, turn the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH and align the alignment mark as shown in the
illustration.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
*a Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
Do not turn the exhaust camshaft LH. If the exhaust
camshaft LH is turned, valve heads may come into contact
with each other, causing the valve stems to bend.
(f) Remove the crank pulley bolt from the crankshaft.
(g) Temporarily install the crankshaft pulley spacer and crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft with the
crank pulley bolt.
HINT:
Put a mark on the crankshaft pulley to mark the position of the crankshaft timing gear key.
(h) Using SST, turn the crankshaft counterclockwise by 200°

and align the crankshaft key as shown in the illustration.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
*1 Key
NOTICE:
Never turn the crankshaft clockwise because the valves
may come into contact with the piston. Turning the
crankshaft clockwise is only allowed when adjusting the
key position precisely.
(i) Remove the crank pulley bolt, crankshaft pulley and crankshaft pulley spacer.
(j) Align the alignment mark on the camshaft timing exhaust

*a Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
To avoid damaging the valves, do not turn the camshaft
timing exhaust gear assembly LH more than the zero-lift
range (The range where camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH can be turned lightly by hand).
(k) Align the chain mark plate (blue) with the alignment mark
on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a Alignment mark
*b Timing mark
*c Mark plate (Blue)
*d Mark plate (Pink)
(l) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
LH.
(m) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH.
(n) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
Torque:
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the bolt before install it.
(o) Install a new O-ring to the cylinder block (for bank 2).
(p) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(q) Install the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(r) Check that the chain is correctly installed.
*a Alignment mark
*b Timing mark
(1) Chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the alignment

mark on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
(2) Chain mark plate (pink) is aligned with the timing mark
on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly LH.
on the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly LH.
(s) Pull out the wire or the like from the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(t) Temporarily install the crank pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(u) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
Be sure to perform this confirmation.
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere or to enter into the component parts during installation.
HINT:
(a) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
*1 Link Plate
*2 Plunger
(b) Insert a 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) diameter hexagon wrench into

the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly through the stopper
pin hole, and hold the plunger.
*2 Stopper Tooth
HINT:
pin hole on the chain tensioner assembly are not aligned,
check that the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged
with the stopper tooth. If not engaged, retract the
plunger a little so that the first notch of the plunger rack is
engaged with the stopper tooth.
(c) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
gear assembly LH and camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH as shown in the illustration.
*a Alignment Mark
HINT:
When the marks are aligned as shown in the illustration,
crankshaft key faces directly underneath.
(d) Align the alignment marks of the camshaft timing intake

assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
*a Alignment Mark
NOTICE:
timing intake gear assembly RH and camshaft timing
exhaust gear assembly RH more than the zero-lift range
(The range where the camshafts can be turned lightly by
hand).
(e) Align the chain mark plate (blue) with the alignment mark
on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a Alignment mark
*b Timing mark
(f) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly
RH.
(g) Align the chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
(h) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
Torque:
HINT:
Apply engine oil to the bolt before install it.
(i) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(j) Install the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(k) Check that the chain is correctly installed.

*a Alignment mark
*b Timing mark
(1) Chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the alignment

mark on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
on the camshaft timing intake gear assembly RH.
on the camshaft timing exhaust gear assembly RH.
(l) Pull out the hexagon wrench from the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(m) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
(n) Remove the crank pulley bolt.

(a) Apply a light layer of engine oil to 4 new O-rings and attach them to the engine.
(b) Clean and degrease the contact surface.
(c) If there are gaps at positions shown in the illustration, fill up with seal packing.
Seal packing:
(d) Apply seal packing in a continuous line as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
*a Area A *b Boss (5 locations)
*c Area B *d Other than ranges A and B
*e φ3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.) *f 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
*g φ12 mm (0.472 in.) *h 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
*i 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.) - -
NOTICE:
Install the chain cover within 5 minutes and tighten the bolts within 15 minutes of applying seal
packing.
Do not add engine oil within 30 minutes of installation.
Do not start the engine within 30 minutes of installation.
(e) Temporarily install the timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly with the 32 bolts.
(f) Securely tighten the 32 bolts in the order as shown in the illustration.
Bolt A Bolt B
Bolt C Bolt D
Torque:
Bolt A and B -
Bolt C and D -

Bolt Length:
ITEM LENGTH ITEM LENGTH
Bolt A 20 mm (0.787 in.) Bolt B 50 mm (1.969 in.)
Bolt C 25 mm (0.984 in.) Bolt D 60 mm (2.362 in.)
37. INSTALL TIMING CHAIN COVER OIL SEAL
(a) Apply engine oil to a new oil seal lip.
NOTICE:
Keep the lip free from foreign matter.
Do not apply engine oil to the dust seal section.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the new oil seal until its surface is flush with the timing chain or
belt cover sub-assembly edge.
SST: 09223-22010
NOTICE:
Do not deform the oil seal.
HINT:
Alternatively, the tapping depth of the timing chain cover oil seal can be 0 to -1.0 mm (0 to -0.0394
in.) from the timing chain cover end surface.

(a) Install the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(b) Install a new O-ring to the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(c) Install the crankshaft pulley while aligning the knock hole
of the pulley with the knock pin on the crankshaft pulley
spacer.
*1 Knock Hole
*2 Knock Pin
(d) Apply engine oil to threads and seat sections of the crankshaft pulley set bolt.
(e) Install SST to the crankshaft pulley.

SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
HINT:
crankshaft pulley.
*1 Claw
(f) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and tighten the
SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
Torque:
*a Hold
*b Turn
(g) Using a marker, draw the reference line (A) on the

crankshaft pulley set bolt and also the reference line (B)
on the crank pulley according to the line engraved around
the crankshaft pulley set bolt head as shown in the
illustration.
*a Reference Line A
*b Reference Line B
HINT:
There are carved lines on the crankshaft pulley set bolt
head every 90°.
(h) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the
crankshaft pulley set bolt by 90° until the reference lines
A and B are aligned.
SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
*a Hold
*b Turn
*c Reference Line A
*d Reference Line B

(a) Attach a new gasket to the thermostat.
40. INSTALL WATER OUTLET
(a) Install the thermostat and water outlet with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
41. INSTALL ENGINE WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
(a) Install a new gasket and the water pump assembly with
the 5 bolts.
Torque:

(a) Temporarily install the water pump pulley with the 3 bolts.
(b) Using SST, hold the water pump pulley.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-00700
(c) Securely tighten the 3 bolts.
NOTICE:
Torque:
(a) Install the idler pulley cover and No. 1 idler pulley sub-
Torque:
(a) Install the idler pulley cover and No. 1 idler pulley sub-
Torque:
45. INSTALL PCV VALVE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the PCV valve sub-

assembly.
Adhesive:
Three Bond 1141G or equivalent

*1 Adhesive 1141G
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the PCV valve

sub-assembly.
Torque:
46. INSTALL WATER INLET PIPE
(a) Attach 2 new O-rings to the cylinder block.
(b) Install the water inlet pipe with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
(c) Connect the No. 3 water by-pass hose with the clamp.
47. INSTALL REAR CYLINDER HEAD PLATE (for Manual Transmission)

illustration.
Seal packing:

*a φ2,0 to 4.0 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
*b Within 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
*c Chamfer edge
NOTICE:
Install the rear cylinder head plate within 5 minutes of
(b) Install the rear cylinder head plate with the 3 bolts.
Torque:
48. INSTALL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
49. INSTALL PCV HOSE CONNECTOR
(a) Connect the No. 2 water by-pass hose to the PCV hose
connector and water inlet pipe with the clips.
(b) Install the PCV hose connector with the 3 bolts.
Torque:
50. INSTALL ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Clean and degrease the threads of the engine oil pressure switch assembly.
(b) Apply adhesive 1324 to the threads of the engine oil

pressure switch assembly.
Adhesive:
equivalent
*1 Adhesive 1324
NOTICE:
Keep the oil hole free from adhesive.
(c) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil

Torque:
NOTICE:
Do not start the engine for at least 1 hour after
installation.
51. INSTALL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(a) Attach a new gasket to the temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the

temperature sensor.
Torque:
52. INSTALL CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE
(a) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control
valve (for exhaust side of bank 2).
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up ring
(b) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side of bank 2).
(c) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(d) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
side of bank 2) with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(e) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 2).
(f) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 2).
(g) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(h) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake
Torque:
(i) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side of bank 1).
(j) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust side of bank 1).
(k) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(l) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for exhaust
Torque:
(m) Install the back-up ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 1).
(n) Install a new O-ring to the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake side of bank 1).
(o) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(p) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve (for intake
Torque:
53. INSTALL VVT SENSOR

(a) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 2).
(b) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(c) Install the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 2) with
the bolt.
Torque:
(d) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 2).
(e) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(f) Install the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 2) with the
bolt.
Torque:
(g) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 1).
(h) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(i) Install the VVT sensor (for exhaust side of bank 1) with
the bolt.
Torque:
(j) Install a new O-ring to the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 1).
(k) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(l) Install the VVT sensor (for intake side of bank 1) with the
bolt.
Torque:
54. INSTALL CRANK POSITION SENSOR
(a) Install the crank position sensor with the bolt.
Torque:
55. INSTALL KNOCK CONTROL SENSOR

(a) Install the 2 knock control sensors onto the cylinder block with the 2 bolts as shown in the
illustration.
Torque:
Engine front
56. INSTALL E.F.I. WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Using a 19 mm union nut wrench, install a new gasket

and the E.F.I. water temperature sensor.
Torque:
NOTICE:
situations where a union nut wrench is combined with a
torque wrench .
57. INSTALL OIL FILTER UNION
(a) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the oil filter

union.
Torque:
58. INSTALL OIL FILTER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Apply engine oil to the installation surface of the oil filter sub-assembly.
(b) Using SST, install the oil filter sub-assembly.
SST: 09228-22020
Torque:
59. INSTALL OIL FILLER CAP ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the oil filler cap assembly.

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE UNIT: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
HINT:
The exhaust valve in which metallic sodium is encapsulated can be identified with the embossed
mark.
For removal of the exhaust valve, .
For disposal of the exhaust valve, .
1. REMOVE ENGINE HANGERS

(a) Remove the bolt and engine hanger.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and generator assembly.
9. REMOVE COMPRESSOR WITH MAGNET CLUTCH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover.
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover.
12. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
(b) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose.
(c) Remove the union bolt and gasket, and disconnect the
fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
13. SEPARATE VENTILATION HOSE
(a) Disconnect the throttle body assembly connector.
(b) Disconnect the 2 water by-pass hoses from the throttle

body assembly.
(c) Disconnect the vacuum sensor connector.
(d) Disconnect the No. 1 vacuum switching valve assembly

connector.
(e) Disengage the 2 clamps and disconnect the 4 connectors.
*a for Bank 2
*b for Bank 1
(f) Disconnect the wire harness.
(g) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
(h) Remove the 6 bolts, intake manifold and 2 gaskets.
*a for Bank 2
*b for Bank 1
16. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
17. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH
18. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH
19. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
20. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR O-RING
24. REMOVE ENGINE WIRE

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and separate the ground wire harness.
(b) Disconnect each connector and clamp, and remove the engine wire.
25. REMOVE NO. 2 VENTILATION HOSE
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 ventilation hose.
26. REMOVE NO. 2 WATER BY-PASS HOSE
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 water by-pass hose.
27. REMOVE NO. 3 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER HOSE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Disconnect the No. 3 transmission oil cooler hose.
28. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Manual

Transmission)
(a) Loosen the hose clip and disconnect the water by-pass
hose.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the No. 1 water by-pass pipe.
29. REMOVE NO. 1 WATER BY-PASS PIPE (for Automatic

Transmission)
(a) Loosen the 2 hose clips and disconnect the 2 water by-
pass hoses.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 1 water by-pass pipe.
30. REMOVE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and 4 ignition coil assemblies.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000U3S02RX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: ENGINE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
1. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT
2. INSPECT ENGINE OIL
3. INSPECT BATTERY
4. INSPECT AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
6. INSPECT V-RIBBED BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the fan and generator V belt .

(b) Check that nothing gets caught in the tensioner by turning it clockwise and counterclockwise.
If a any malfunction exists, replace the tensioner.
(c) Install the fan and generator V belt .
7. INSPECT IGNITION TIMING

(a) Warm up and stop the engine.

(2) Start the engine and idle it.

(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ECT / Data List / IGN Advance.
Standard ignition timing:

-5 to 10° BTDC at idle
NOTICE:
Switch off all the accessories and the A/C before connecting the Techstream.
When checking the idle speed, the transmission should be in neutral.
HINT:
Refer to the Techstream operator's manual for further details.
(5) Check that the ignition timing advances immediately when the engine speed is increased.
(c) When not using the Techstream:
(1) Connect the tester probe of a timing light to the wire

of the ignition connector for the No. 1 cylinder.
HINT:
Use a timing light that detects the primary current.
(2) Using the timing light, check the ignition timing.
Standard ignition timing:

-5 to 10° BTDC at idle
NOTICE:
When checking the ignition timing, the transmission
should be in neutral.
(3) Check that the ignition timing advances immediately when the engine speed is increased.
(4) Disconnect the timing light from the engine.
8. INSPECT ENGINE IDLE SPEED

(a) Warm up and stop the engine.

NOTICE:
Switch off all the accessories and the A/C before connecting the Techstream.
(2) Race the engine at 2500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ECT / Data List / Engine Speed.
Standard Idle Speed:
TRANSMISSION IDLING SPEED
for Automatic Transmission 600 to 800 rpm
for Manual Transmission 550 to 750 rpm
NOTICE:
When checking the idle speed, the transmission should be in neutral.
HINT:
If the idle speed is not as specified, check the air intake system.
(5) Disconnect the Techstream from the DLC3.
9. INSPECT COMPRESSION
(b) Remove the relay block cover.
(c) Remove the F/PMP fuse.
(d) Warm up and stop the engine.
(e) Remove the 4 spark plugs .
(f) Insert a compression gauge into the spark plug hole.
(g) Inspect the cylinder compression pressure.

(1) While cranking the engine, measure the compression pressure.
HINT:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain an engine speed of 250 rpm or more.
NOTICE:
The measurement must be performed as quickly as possible.
Standard compression pressure:

1750 kPa (17.8 kgf/cm 2 , 254 psi) or higher
Minimum pressure:
1150 kPa (11.7 kgf/cm 2 , 167 psi)

Difference between each cylinder:

200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2 , 29 psi) or less
HINT:
If the cylinder compression is low, pour a small amount of engine oil into the cylinder through the
spark plug hole and inspect the compression again. Then perform the 2 steps above for the
cylinders with low compression.
If adding oil increases the compression, the piston rings and/or cylinder bore may be
worn or damaged.
If the pressure stays low, a valve may be stuck or seated improperly, or there may be
leakage from the gasket.
(h) Install the 4 spark plugs .
(i) Reinstall the F/PMP fuse.

(j) Install the relay block cover.
(k) Clear the DTC .
10. INSPECT CO/HC
HINT:
This check is for determining whether or not the idle CO/HC complies with regulations.

(b) Maintain the engine speed at 2500 rpm for approximately 180 seconds.
(c) Insert a CO/HC meter testing probe at least 40 cm (1.31 ft) into the tailpipe during idling.
(d) Immediately check the CO/HC concentration at idle and/or 2500 rpm.
HINT:
When performing the 2 mode (2500 rpm and idle) test, follow the measurement order prescribed
by the applicable local regulations.
If the CO/HC concentration does not comply with regulations, troubleshoot in the order given
below.
(1) Check the A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor operation.
(2) Refer to the table below for the possible cause, and then inspect and correct the applicable
causes if necessary.
CO HC SYMPTOM CAUSES
1. Faulty ignition:
Incorrect timing
Plugs are contaminated or shorted, or plug
Normal High Rough idle gaps are incorrect
2. Incorrect valve clearance

3. Leaky intake and exhaust valves
4. Leaky cylinders
1. Vacuum leaks:
Rough idle Ventilation hoses

Low High (Fluctuating HC Intake manifold

reading) Throttle body
2. Lean mixture causing misfire
1. Restricted air filter

2. Plugged PCV valve
3. Faulty EFI system:
Rough idle Faulty pressure regulator
High High (Black smoke from Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
exhaust) Faulty mass air flow meter
Faulty ECM
Faulty injectors
Faulty throttle position sensor
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000002S5D01AX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S
[03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000041LD007X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S
[03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply engine oil to the lip of a new timing chain or belt cover oil seal.
NOTICE:
Do not apply engine oil to the dust seal section.
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the timing chain or belt
cover oil seal until its surface is flush with the timing chain
cover edge.
SST: 09223-22010
NOTICE:
HINT:
Alternatively, the tapping depth of the timing chain or belt
cover oil seal can be 0 to -1.0 mm (0 to -0.039 in.) from
the timing chain cover end surface.

(a) Install the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(b) Install a new O-ring to the crankshaft pulley spacer.
(c) Install the crankshaft pulley while aligning the knock hole
of the pulley with the knock pin on the crankshaft pulley
spacer.
*1 Knock Hole
*2 Knock Pin
(d) Install SST to the crankshaft pulley.

SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
HINT:
crankshaft pulley.
*1 Claw
(e) Apply engine oil to the crankshaft pulley set bolt.
(f) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and tighten the
SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
Torque:
*a Hold
*b Turn
(g) Using a marker, draw the reference line (A) on the

crankshaft pulley set bolt and also the reference line (B)
on the crank pulley according to the line engraved around
the crankshaft pulley set bolt head as shown in the
illustration.
*a Reference Line A
*b Reference Line B
HINT:
There are carved lines on the crankshaft pulley set bolt
head every 90°.
(h) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the
crankshaft pulley set bolt by 90° until the reference lines
A and B are aligned.
SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
*a Hold
*b Turn
*c Reference Line A
*d Reference Line B
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000041LE007X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: FRONT CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
REMOVAL
(a) Install SST to the crankshaft pulley.

SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
HINT:
crankshaft pulley.
*1 Claw
(b) Using SST, hold the crankshaft pulley and loosen the
SST: 09213-80010
90179-10016
09213-08010
09213-08110
*a Hold
*b Turn
(c) Remove the crankshaft pulley.
(d) Remove the O-ring and crankshaft pulley spacer.

tape, pry out the timing chain or belt cover oil seal.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
After the removal, check the crankshaft for damage. If it is
damaged, smooth the surface with 400-grit sandpaper.
HINT:
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000004I0M003X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012
- ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000041LF007X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012
- ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL
(a) Apply engine oil to the lip of a new rear engine oil seal.
NOTICE:
(b) Using SST and a hammer, tap in the oil seal until its
surface is flush with the rear oil seal retainer edge.
SST: 09223-15030
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07150
Oil seal tap in depth:
0 to 1.0 mm (0 to 0.0394 in.)
NOTICE:
Wipe any extra grease off of the crankshaft.
Do not tap on the oil seal at an angle.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE

(a) Clean the 8 bolts and 8 bolt holes.
(b) Install the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.

*1 Pin Hole
*2 Pin
HINT:
Align the pin of the front drive spacer with the pin hole of
the crankshaft.
3. INSTALL FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Install the flywheel sub-assembly onto the crankshaft.
(c) In several steps, uniformly install and tighten the 8 bolts

in the sequence shown in the illustration.
Torque:
4. INSTALL CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
5. INSTALL CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
6. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Install the drive plate and ring gear sub-assembly and rear drive plate spacer onto the crankshaft.
(c) In several steps, uniformly install and tighten the 8 bolts

in the sequence shown in the illustration.
Torque:
8. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
9. INSPECT FOR OIL LEAK
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000041LG007X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: REAR CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
3. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE AND RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Remove the 8 bolts, drive plate and ring gear sub-
assembly and rear drive plate spacer.
4. REMOVE CLUTCH COVER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
5. REMOVE CLUTCH DISC ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
6. REMOVE FLYWHEEL SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Using SST, hold the crankshaft.
SST: 09960-10010
09962-01000
09963-01000
(b) Remove the 8 bolts and flywheel sub-assembly.
7. REMOVE NO. 1 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE

(a) Remove the No. 1 crankshaft position sensor plate.
8. REMOVE REAR ENGINE OIL SEAL
(a) Using a knife, cut through the oil seal lip.
*1 Protective Tape
*a Cut position
(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip taped, pry out the rear engine oil seal.
NOTICE:
After removal, check the crankshaft for damage. If it is damaged, smooth the surface with 400-grit
sandpaper.
HINT:
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM00000591S000X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000056U7009X

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere onto or to enter into the component parts during
installation.
HINT:
(a) Temporarily install the pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
*1 Link Plate
*2 Plunger
(c) Insert an approximately 1 mm (0.039 in.) wire or the like

into the chain tensioner through the stopper pin hole, and
hold the plunger.
HINT:
pin hole on the chain tensioner are not aligned, check that
the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged with the
stopper tooth. If not engaged, retract the plunger a little
so that the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged with
the stopper tooth.
*2 Stopper Tooth
(d) Align the alignment mark on the camshaft timing intake

assembly LH with the position shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
timing intake gear assemblies more than the zero-lift
range (the range where camshaft timing intake gear
assembles can be turned lightly by hand).
*a Alignment Mark
(e) Align the timing chain mark plate (blue) with the
alignment mark of the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a Alignment Mark
*b Timing Mark
(f) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly LH.
(g) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH.
(h) Apply engine oil to the bolt.
(i) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
Torque:
(j) Install a new O-ring to the cylinder block (bank 2).
(k) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(l) Install the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(m) Check that the chain is correctly installed.

*a Alignment Mark
*b Timing Mark
(1) Timing chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the

alignment mark on the crankshaft timing gear or
sprocket.
(2) Timing chain mark plate (pink) is aligned with the

timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly LH.

timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly LH.
(n) Pull out the wire or the like from the No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(o) Temporarily install the pulley bolt to the crankshaft.

(p) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere onto or to enter into the component parts during
installation.
HINT:
(a) Move the link plate in the direction of the arrow in the
*1 Link Plate
*2 Plunger
(b) Insert a 2.5 mm (0.098 in.) hexagon wrench into the No.
1 chain tensioner assembly through the stopper pin hole,
and hold the plunger.
*2 Stopper Tooth
HINT:
pin hole on the chain tensioner are not aligned, check that
the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged with the
stopper tooth. If not engaged, retract the plunger a little
so that the first notch of the plunger rack is engaged with
the stopper tooth.
(c) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
assembly LH shown in the illustration.
*a Alignment Mark
HINT:
When the marks are aligned with the positions in the
illustration, crankshaft key faces directly underneath.
(d) Align the alignment marks of the camshaft timing intake

assembly RH as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
timing intake gear assembly RH and camshaft more than
the zero-lift range (the range where the camshaft timing
intake gear assembles can be turned lightly by hand).
*a Alignment Mark
(e) Align the timing chain mark plate (blue) with the
alignment mark on the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket.
*a Alignment Mark
*b Timing Mark
(f) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH.
(g) Align the timing chain mark plate (pink) with the timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
(h) Apply engine oil to the bolt.
(i) Using a 5 mm hexagon socket wrench, install the No. 1 chain vibration damper with the bolt.
Torque:
(j) Install the chain tensioner slipper.
(k) Install the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(l) Check that the chain is correctly installed.
*a Alignment Mark
*b Timing Mark
(1) Timing chain mark plate (blue) is aligned with the

alignment mark on the crankshaft timing gear or
sprocket.

timing mark on the camshaft timing intake gear
assembly RH.
timing mark on the camshaft timing exhaust gear
assembly RH.
(m) Pull out the hexagon wrench from the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(n) Turn the crankshaft clockwise, and make sure that there are no abnormal conditions.
NOTICE:
(o) Remove the pulley bolt.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM0000056U900BX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: TIMING CHAIN: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL

(a) Temporarily install the pulley bolt to the crankshaft.
(b) Turn the crankshaft and align the alignment marks of the
assembly RH.
*1 Alignment Mark
*2 Key
HINT:
The crankshaft key faces downward at this time.
(c) Push down the chain tensioner slipper and insert a 2.5
mm (0.098 in.) hexagonal wrench through the stopper
plate into the No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 1 chain tensioner assembly.
(e) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(f) Using a 5 mm hexagonal wrench, remove the bolt and No.

1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the camshafts
are turned, causing the valve stems to bend.
To avoid this, do not turn the intake camshaft RH and the exhaust camshaft RH more than the
zero-lift range (the range where camshafts can be turned lightly by hand).
HINT:
(a) Turn the crankshaft and position each alignment mark on

the crankshaft timing gear or sprocket, camshaft timing
intake gear assembly LH and camshaft timing exhaust
*1 Key
*2 Alignment Mark
(b) Push the chain tensioner slipper and retain the plunger
by inserting an approximately 1 mm (0.039 in.) wire
through the stopper plate into the No. 2 chain tensioner
assembly.
(c) Remove the 2 bolts and No. 2 chain tensioner assembly.
(d) Remove the chain tensioner slipper.
(e) Remove the O-ring from the cylinder block (bank 2).
(f) Using a 5 mm socket hexagon wrench, remove the bolt

and No. 1 chain vibration damper.
(g) Remove the chain sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
With the chain sub-assembly removed, the valve heads may contact each other if the camshafts
are turned, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do not turn the exhaust camshaft LH
more than the zero-lift range (the range where the camshaft can be turned lightly by hand).
At this time, the No. 1 and No. 4 pistons are located near TDC. If the intake camshaft is turned, the
valves may come into contact with the piston, causing the valve stems to bend. To avoid this, do
not turn the intake camshaft LH.
HINT:
(h) Remove the pulley bolt.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 N Doc ID: RM000000RRR00NX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: VALVE CLEARANCE: ADJUSTMENT; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
ADJUSTMENT
1. REMOVE IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
6. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE
NOTICE:
Inspect the valve clearance when the engine is cold.
(a) Set the No. 1 cylinder to the TDC/compression.

(1) Turn the crankshaft clockwise to align the timing mark on the crankshaft pulley with the
indicator of the timing chain cover.
*1 Intake Camshaft *2 Exhaust Camshaft
*3 No. 1 Valve Rocker Arm Sub-assembly - -
*a Timing Mark - -
(b) At this time, check that the intake camshaft and exhaust camshaft do not depress the No. 1
cylinder intake side No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (intake valve) and exhaust side No. 1
valve rocker arm sub-assembly (exhaust valve).
HINT:
If the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (valve) is depressed, turn the crank pulley by 360° in
order to make the No. 1 cylinder piston at TDC/compression.
(c) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a Intake Side *b Exhaust Side
(d) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly using a feeler gauge.
Standard Valve Clearance (Cold):

Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
(e) Turn the crank pulley by 360°.
(f) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a Intake Side - -
(g) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
(h) Turn the crank pulley clockwise, set the No. 2 cylinder at TDC/compression, and then align the
timing mark (notch) with 0° position of the timing chain cover.
*1 Intake Camshaft *2 Exhaust Camshaft
*3 No. 1 Valve Rocker Arm Sub-assembly - -
*a Timing Mark - -
(i) At this time, check that the intake camshaft and exhaust camshaft do not depress the No. 2
cylinder intake side No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (intake valve) and exhaust side No. 1
valve rocker arm sub-assembly (exhaust valve).
HINT:
If the No. 1 valve rocker arm sub-assembly (valve) is depressed, turn the crank pulley by 360° in
order to make the No. 2 cylinder piston at TDC/compression.
(j) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a Intake Side *b Exhaust Side
(k) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.
Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
(l) Turn the crank pulley by 360°.
(m) Inspect the valve clearance indicated in the illustration.
*a Intake Side - -
(n) Measure the clearance between the surface of the cam base circle and the roller surface of the No.

Intake 0.10 to 0.16 mm (0.0039 to 0.0063 in.)
7. ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE

(a) Remove the camshaft housing sub-assembly.
(d) Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the

removed valve adjusting shims.
specified values.
Intake Side:
A = B + [C - 0.13 mm (0.0051 in.)] x 1.54
Exhaust Side:
A = B + [C - 0.24 mm (0.0094 in.)] x 1.69
A:
B:
C:
(f) Apply engine oil to the inner face of the valve adjusting shim, and install it to the valve.
NOTICE:
Check whether valve adjusting shim can be rotated smoothly on the valve.
(h) Install the camshaft housing sub-assembly.
12. INSTALL IGNITION COIL ASSEMBLY
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM00000409400QX

Title: FA20 ENGINE MECHANICAL: VALVE CLEARANCE: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S
[03/2012 - ]
1. INSPECT VALVE CLEARANCE
(a) Check for noise and vibration

(1) Check for valve noise or a rough idle.
(2) Judge whether the valve clearance needs to be

adjusted.
HINT:
If the valve noise is too loud or the idle is rough, inspect
the valve clearance .
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000PE206UX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000WQQ07RX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
This inspection aims is to inspect the fuel injectors for opens or shorts, because the fuel injectors
of this vehicle are of a high-pressure type and cannot be inspected for fuel injection volume.

table below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 1.9 Ω

*a
(Fuel Injector Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel injector

assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000Q4608BX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR SEAL
(a) Apply engine conditioner to the injector area shown in the

illustration. Using a piece of cloth, remove the carbon
deposits from the injector and its grooves.
*a Clean Area
NOTICE:
Do not clean the tip of the injector.
Do not use a wire brush to clean the injector.
If an injector is dropped or the tips of the injectors are
struck, replace it with a new one.
(b) Apply engine oil to the injector contact surface of SST

(guide). Then attach SST (guide) to the injector with the
tapered inner portion facing the tip of the injector, as
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03020
*1 SST (Guide)
*a Tapered Inner Portion
(c) Install a new injector seal to SST (holder).

SST: 09260-39020
09261-03010
*1 SST (holder)
*2 Injector Seal
*a CORRECT
*b INCORRECT
NOTICE:
Be careful not to install the injector seal to SST (holder) at
an angle. Doing so will stretch the seal and correcting this
problem is very complicated.
(d) Install SST (holder with injector seal) to the tip of the
injector. Slide the seal downward into the injector groove
(injector connector side) with your fingers, as shown in
the illustration.
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03010
09261-03020
*1 SST (Guide)
*2 SST (Holder)
HINT:
Check that the seal covers the circumference of the
injector groove as shown in the illustration.
(e) Using SST (holder), gently press downward on the

injector seal (injector connector side). Then slowly slide
SST (guide) toward the injector tip to settle the seal into
the injector groove.
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03010
09261-03020
*1 SST (Guide)
*2 SST (Holder)
*3 Injector Seal
*a Gently Press
*b Slowly Slide
*c CORRECT
*d INCORRECT
NOTICE:
Be careful that the seal is not pinched between SST
(guide) and the injector groove. Replace the seal if it
becomes damaged.
HINT:
When using SST (guide) to settle the seal into the groove,
SST (guide) only needs to be slid upward to the position
labeled A in the illustration.
After using SST (guide) to settle the seal into the groove,
return SST (guide) to its position labeled B in the
illustration.
(f) Slowly slide SST (guide) toward the tip of the injector.
When the injector contact surface of SST (guide) aligns
with the seal (injector connector side) as shown in the
illustration, hold the position for 5 seconds or more to fully
align the seal into the injector groove.
SST: 09260-39020
09261-03020
*1 SST (Guide)
*2 Injector Seal
NOTICE:
Be careful that the seal is not pinched between SST
(guide) and the injector groove. Replace the seal if it
becomes damaged.
HINT:
Set SST (guide) so that its bottom surface and seal are
flush.
If there is difficulty in sliding SST upward, slowly wiggle it
from side to side while sliding it up the injector little by
little.
(g) After installing the seals, check that they are not
scratched, deformed or protruding from the injector
groove.
*a CORRECT
*b INCORRECT
*c Normal
*d Protruding
*e Deformed
NOTICE:
If a seal is scratched, deformed or protruding from the
groove, replace it with a new one.
NOTICE:
If the tip of the fuel injector assembly is struck or the fuel injector assembly is dropped, replace the
fuel injector assembly with a new one.
(a) Install new fuel injector backup rings (No. 1 and No. 2)
and a new fuel injector seal to the fuel injector assembly
*1 No. 1 Fuel Injector Backup Ring
*2 Injector Seal
*a Alignment Opening
*b INCORRECT
*c CORRECT
*d Overlapped
*e Normal
*f Stretched
*g Grooved Section
NOTICE:
Check that there is no foreign matter or damaged areas in
the injector seal groove.
Check that the No. 1 fuel injector backup ring is installed
in the correct direction.
Install the No. 2 fuel injector backup ring so that the
grooved section faces the fuel delivery pipe.
Make sure that the backup rings and injector seal are
Check that the alignment openings of the backup rings
are not overlapped or stretched as shown in the
illustration.
After installing the injector seal, check that it is not
contaminated with foreign matter and is not damaged.
(b) Install a new fuel injector insulator to the fuel injector.
*1 Fuel Injector Insulator
NOTICE:
Install a new fuel injector insulator to the fuel injector as shown in the illustration.
(c) Install the No. 1 injector holder.
(d) Apply new engine oil to the surface of the injector insertion hole in the fuel delivery pipe.
*a Protruding section
*b Baffle hole
No gap
NOTICE:
Check that there are no foreign objects or scratches in the inner face of the fuel injector assembly
insertion hole in the fuel delivery pipe.
Ensure that gasoline does not adhere to the fuel injector seal or to inside the attachment hole.
Insert the fuel injector assembly in a straight line into the fuel delivery pipe without tilting it.
Ensure that there is no gap between the No. 1 injector holder and the fuel injector pipe on the
high-pressure side.
If using a new fuel injector assembly, use one with the same numbers.
*1 Number
*2 Quick Response Code
NOTICE:
Make sure that there is no gap between the delivery pipe and the No. 1 injector holder.
Check that there is no foreign matter or damage to the injector insertion hole of the delivery pipe.
Insert the injector straight into the delivery pipe without tilting it.
(e) Install the No. 1 injector holder while aligning the protrusion on the No. 1 injector holder with the
baffle hole on the fuel delivery pipe.
3. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe LH with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.
4. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe RH with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.

(a) Temporarily install the new fuel delivery pipe with the 2 union nuts and 3 bolts.
(b) Tighten the 3 bolts.
Torque:
(c) Using a union nut wrench, tighten the 2 union nuts.
Torque:

(a) Temporarily install the new No. 2 fuel pipe with the 2 union nuts.
(b) Using a union nut wrench, tighten the 2 union nuts.
Torque:
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000Q4808IX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Direct Injection): REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
(a) Using a union nut wrench, loosen the 2 union nuts and
remove the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
When removing the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe, pull it out in a
straight line to avoid damaging seal surface of the fuel
delivery pipe LH.
(b) Using a union nut wrench, loosen the 2 union nuts and remove the fuel delivery pipe.
4. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE LH
(a) Disconnect the 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe LH.
5. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE RH
(a) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel

injector assembly connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe RH.

(a) Remove the 4 fuel injector assemblies from the fuel delivery pipe.
*a for Bank 2
*b for Bank 1
NOTICE:
If the tip of the fuel injector assembly is struck or the fuel injector assembly is dropped, replace the
fuel injector assembly with a new one.
Pull and remove the fuel injector assembly in a straight line to avoid damaging the seal surface of
the fuel delivery pipe.
For re-installation, attach a tag or label to each fuel injector assembly.
NOTICE:
Pull and remove the injector in a straight line to avoid damaging to the seal surface of the delivery
pipe O-rings.
For reinstallation, attach a tag or label to the injector shaft.
(b) Remove the No. 1 injector holders from the fuel injectors.
(c) Using a screwdriver, remove the fuel injector insulator.
*1 Fuel Injector Insulator
(d) Using a needle nose plier, remove the No. 2 fuel injector
backup ring.
*2 Fuel Injector Seal
(e) Remove the fuel injector seal and No. 1 fuel injector backup ring.
7. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR O-RING
(a) Using the tips of a pair of needle nose pliers, pinch and
pull one of the fuel injector O-ring at several points to
stretch it. Repeat this for the other fuel injector O-ring.
NOTICE:
Excessively pinching the fuel injector O-ring may damage
the groove of the injector.
If an injector is dropped or the tip of the injector is struck,
replace it with a new one.
(b) Remove the injector seal from the injector.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000PE206TX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000WQQ07QX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY

table below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 12 Ω

*a
(Fuel Injector Assembly)
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the fuel

injector assembly.
(b) Inspect the injection volume.
CAUTION:
This test involves high-pressure fuel and electricity. Take all precautions regarding safe handling of
both the fuel and the electricity. Perform this test in a safe area, and avoid any sparks or flames.
Do not smoke.
(c) Disconnect the fuel tube.
(d) Connect SST (hose) to the fuel pipe (vehicle side) with
SST (hose band).
SST: 09268-31014
09268-41700
95336-08070
SST
*1
(Hose)
SST
*2
(Hose Band)
*3 Fuel Pipe (Vehicle Side)
(e) Install the O-ring to the fuel injector assembly.
(f) Install SST and vinyl tube to the fuel injector assembly.
SST: 09268-31014
09268-41141
09268-41410
09268-41700
95336-08070
SST
*1
(Hose)
SST
*2
(Hose Band)
SST
*3
(Adapter)
*4 O-ring
SST
*5
(Clamp)
*6 Vinyl Tube
(g) Tie SST (clamp and adapter) together with SST (tie band)
SST: 09268-31014
09268-41141
09268-41410
09268-41800
SST
*1
(Tie Band)
SST
*2
(Adapter)
SST
*3
(Clamp)
(h) Put the injector into a graduated cylinder.
SST: 09842-30090
*1 SST (Wire)
*a Connect
CAUTION:
Install a strong rubber tube onto the injector to prevent
gasoline from splashing.
(i) Operate the fuel pump (turn the ignition switch to ON).
(j) Connect SST (wire) to the injector and the battery for 15 seconds, and measure the injection
volume with the graduated cylinder. Test each injector 2 or 3 times.
Standard injection volume:

84 to 103 cc (5.1 to 6.3 cu.in.) per 15 seconds
Difference between each injector:
19 cc (1.2 cu.in.) or less
NOTICE:
Make sure that SST (EFI inspection wire I) is securely connected.
Always turn on and off the voltage on the battery side, not on the fuel pump side.
If the injection volume is not as specified, replace the fuel injector assembly.
(k) Check for leakage.
(1) In the condition above, disconnect the tester probes

of SST (wire) from the battery and check for fuel
leakage from the fuel injector assembly.
Standard fuel drop:

1 drop or less in 22 minutes
If there is excessive leakage, replace the fuel injector

assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000Q4608AX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply gasoline to a new fuel injector O-ring and a new fuel injector grommet, and then install them
to the injector.
NOTICE:
Check that there is no damage or foreign material in the groove of the injector when installing the
fuel injector O-ring and fuel injector grommet.
(b) Install the 4 fuel injector assemblies to the fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
Check that there are no foreign objects or scratches in the insertion opening of the fuel delivery
pipe.
Take sufficient care not to twist the O-ring.
If the injector does not rotate smoothly after installing it to the fuel delivery pipe, remove the
injector and reinstall it with a new O-ring.
2. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR SEAL (for Bank 1)

(a) Install 2 new fuel injector seals.
3. INSTALL FUEL DELIVERY PIPE (for Bank 1)

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1) (with injector) to the intake manifold with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Engage the clamp to connect the wire harness.
(c) Connect the 2 fuel injector assembly connectors.
HINT:
Connect the connector, aligning it with the baffles on the fuel injector assembly on the fuel delivery
pipe (for bank 1).
(d) Connect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1) .
4. INSTALL FUEL INJECTOR SEAL (for Bank 2)

(a) Install 2 new fuel injector seals.

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2) (with injector) to the intake manifold with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the 2 injector connectors and clamp.
HINT:
Connect the connector, aligning it with the baffles on the fuel injector assembly on the fuel delivery
pipe (for bank 2).
(c) Connect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2) .

Torque:
(b) Install the wire harness clamp bracket to the injector cover with the bolt.
Torque:
7. CONNECT NO. 2 FUEL HOSE

(a) Connect the No. 2 fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly with the clamp.

(a) Align the matchmarks on the the fuel delivery pipe and No. 3 fuel hose.
(b) Connect the No. 3 fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly .

(a) Align the matchmarks on fuel delivery pipe and the No. 1 fuel hose.
(b) Connect the No. 1 fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe .

Torque:
(b) Engage the 4 clamps to install the wire harness to the injector cover.
12. INSTALL CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
14. INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000Q4808HX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL INJECTOR (for Port Injection): REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 4 clamps and separate the wire harness

from the injector cover (for bank 1).
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover (for bank 1).
6. DISCONNECT NO. 1 FUEL HOSE
(a) Place matchmarks on the fuel delivery pipe and the No. 1
fuel hose.
*a Matchmark
(b) Using SST, disconnect the No. 1 fuel hose from the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly .
SST: SU003-03936
(a) Place matchmarks on the fuel delivery pipe and the No. 3
fuel hose from the fuel pipe.
*a Matchmark
(b) Using SST, disconnect the No. 3 fuel hose from the fuel pipe .
SST: SU003-03936
(a) Remove the clamp and disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor
feed hose from the fuel pipe.
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the wire harness clamp
bracket from the injector cover (for bank 2).
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and injector cover (for bank 2).
10. REMOVE FUEL DELIVERY PIPE (for Bank 2)
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness.
(c) Disconnect the fuel pump assembly connector.
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly from

the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2) .
(e) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2).
NOTICE:
When removing the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2), hold
the pipe by both ends and pull it straight upward.
11. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR SEAL (for Bank 2)
(a) Remove the 2 fuel injector seals.
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the wire harness.
(c) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly from the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1) .
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1).
NOTICE:
When removing the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 1), hold
the pipe by both ends and pull it straight upward.
13. REMOVE FUEL INJECTOR SEAL (for Bank 1)
(a) Remove the 2 fuel injector seals.

(a) Remove the 4 fuel injector assemblies from the fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
For reinstallation, attach a tag or label to the injector shaft.
(b) Remove the fuel injector O-ring and fuel injector grommet
from the fuel injector assembly.
*1 Fuel Injector O-ring
*2 Fuel Injector Grommet
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000VIL02HX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000WU302HX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR

(a) Check the fuel pressure sensor output voltage.
(1) Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the

table below.
Standard Voltage:

1 (GND) - 2 Apply 5 V between terminals 3 Approximately

(VOUT) (VCC) and 1 (GND) 0.5 V

*a
(Fuel Pressure Sensor)
NOTICE:
Be careful when connecting the leads, as the fuel
pressure sensor may be damaged if the leads are
connected to the wrong terminals.
Do not apply a voltage of 6 V or more to the terminals 3
(VCC) and 1 (GND).
HINT:
If a stable power supply is not available, use 4 1.2 V
nickel-metal hydride batteries, etc.
If the resistance is not as specified, replace the fuel

pressure sensor.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIK030X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Be sure to use a new fuel delivery pipe and new fuel pressure sensor.

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe (for Bank 1) with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
3. INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR

(a) Temporarily install the new fuel pressure sensor by hand as much as possible to the fuel delivery
pipe (for Bank 1).
(b) Tighten the fuel pressure sensor.
Torque:
NOTICE:
Ensure that no oil adheres to the threads of the fuel pressure sensor and No. 1 fuel delivery pipe
sub-assembly RH.
Do not allow any foreign matter to adhere when installing the fuel pressure sensor.
Once the fuel pressure sensor is tightened to the specified torque, do not retighten or recheck it.
(c) Connect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel injector connectors.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIM02ZX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
(a) Disconnect the fuel pressure sensor connector and 2 fuel

injector connectors.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel delivery pipe (for Bank
1).
4. REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Remove the fuel pressure sensor from the fuel delivery
pipe (for Bank 1).
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000VIR02GX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM0000053LC004X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION

table below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 0.45 to 0.55 Ω

*a
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel pump

assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIQ02TX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION

illustration.
Seal packing:
Standard seal diameter:
Within 1 mm (0.039 in.)
NOTICE:
Install within 5 minutes of applying seal packing, and
tighten the bolts within 15 minutes.
Do not pour in engine oil for at least 2 hours after
installation.
Do not start the engine for at least 2 hours after
installation.
Do not allow seal packing to enter the engine oil passage.
*A A-A cross-section
*1 Seal Packing
Seal Application Position : Within 1 mm (0.039 in.) from

*a
Edge
*b Seal Diameter : 2 to 4 mm (0.079 to 0.158 in.)
(b) Using a 6 mm hexagon wrench, install the pump drive case assembly with the 3 bolts.
Torque:

(a) Turn the crankshaft until the flat of the cam is facing the cylinder head cover's fuel pump
attachment hole.
HINT:
When installing the fuel pump by following the procedure described above, it is easier to install the
fuel pump and the No. 2 fuel pipe later if the crankshaft pointed side is not used to push up the
pump activation surface.
(b) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pump activation cam and pump lifter part.
(c) Apply new engine oil to the inside of the pump drive case
assembly and the underside of the valve lifter, and install
the valve lifter to the pump drive case assembly.
*1 Valve Lifter
*2 Pump Drive Case Assembly
*3 Location for applying new engine oil
HINT:
When applying oil to the underside of the valve lifter, drop
a few drops of oil on the camshaft and the roller rocker
arm from the valve lifter hole.

(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to a new O-ring and install it to the fuel pump assembly.
(b) Using a "TORX" Plus Socket Wrench, install the fuel pump assembly with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
4. CONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the fuel pump assembly with a new gasket and the
union bolt.
Torque:
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000VIT02IX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 -
]
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION
(a) Check fuel pressure.
(4) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test / Control the Target Fuel Pressure.
(5) Check that the fuel pressure fluctuates when the target fuel pressure changes.
HINT:
The target fuel pressure operation lowers the target fuel pressure by -12.5% or increases the
target fuel pressure by 24.8%.
Standard:
Fuel pressure fluctuates in accordance with the Techstream operation.
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel pump or fuel pressure sensor.
(b) Check operating sound.
(1) Remove the injector cover (for bank 2).
(3) Using a sound scope, check the operating sound of

the pump.
If no sound can be heard, check the fuel pump, wire

harness and ECM.
(4) Stop the engine.
(5) Reinstall the injector cover (for bank 2).
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIS02SX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP (for High Pressure): REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
3. DISCONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the union bolt and gasket, and disconnect the
fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
(a) Using a "TORX" Plus Socket Wrench, remove the 2 bolts

and fuel pump assembly.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the fuel pump assembly.
(a) Remove the valve lifter from the pump drive case
assembly.
(a) Using a 6 mm hexagon wrench, remove the 3 bolts and

pump drive case assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000VIW02HX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIU044X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Attach the fuel pump control ECU assembly bracket to the body attachment hole, and pass the
stud bolt through the hole in the body.
(b) Install the fuel pump control ECU assembly with the nut.
Torque:
NOTICE:
Do not reuse the fuel pump control ECU assembly if it has been subjected to shocks.
(c) Connect the fuel pump control ECU assembly connector.
2. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER RH
3. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
4. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY RH
5. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH
6. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIX041X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP ECU: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
2. SEPARATE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH
4. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY RH
5. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
6. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER RH
7. REMOVE FUEL PUMP CONTROL ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump control ECU assembly

connector.
(b) Remove the nut.
(c) Push in the fuel pump control ECU assembly stud bolt.
*1 Stud Bolt
*2 Bracket
(d) Move the fuel pump control ECU assembly towards the rear of the vehicle, disengage the bracket,
and remove the fuel pump control ECU assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not reuse the fuel pump control ECU assembly if it has been subjected to shocks.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000QDV05XX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000QDW07JX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: DISASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
DISASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not disconnect the hose indicated in the illustration.
When replacing the fuel filter assembly, replace it together with the fuel suction plate sub-
assembly.
1. REMOVE FUEL SENDER GAGE ASSEMBLY
2. REMOVE NO. 1 FUEL SUB-TANK
(a) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
(b) Hold the fuel suction plate sub-assembly in the direction

of the arrow as shown in the illustration.
(c) Using needle nose plier, remove the E-ring.

(d) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the

claw and separate the jet pump nozzle.
*1 Protective Tape
(e) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the 3

claws and separate the No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the No. 1 fuel sub-tank or the fuel filter.
(f) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the

claw and separate the jet pump.
(g) Remove the O-ring from the No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
(a) Using 2 screwdrivers with the tip taped, disengage the 2

claws.
(b) Using a screwdriver with the tip taped, disengage the 3

claws and remove the fuel pump.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the fuel pump or the fuel filter.
(c) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fuel pump wire
harness.
(d) Remove the O-ring and fuel pump spacer from the fuel pump assembly.
*1 fuel pump wire harness
*2 O-Ring
*3 Fuel Pump Spacer
4. REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the fuel pressure regulator assembly from the

fuel filter.
(b) Remove the 2 O-ring and backup ring from the fuel
pressure regulator assembly.
*1 O-Ring
*2 Backup Ring
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000W1H055X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
(a) Inspect the resistance of the fuel pump assembly.

the table below.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 0.2 to 3.0 Ω

*a
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuel pump

assembly.
(b) Inspect the operation of the fuel pump assembly.

(1) Connect a battery's negative (-) lead to terminal 3 of
the connector, and a positive (+) lead to terminal 4.
Check that the fuel pump operates.

*a
(Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and Gauge)
NOTICE:
These tests must be performed within 10 seconds to
prevent the coil from burning out.
Keep the fuel pump as far away from the battery as
possible.
Always turn on and off the voltage on the battery side,
and not on the fuel pump side.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000QDU07TX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
(a) Set the new gasket to the fuel suction tube assembly
with pump and gauge.
*1 Gasket
(b) Connect the fuel tank vent hose sub-assembly .
NOTICE:
When connecting the fuel tube connector, do not forcibly pull the fuel return vent tube sub-
assembly.
Be careful not to bend the arm of the fuel sender gauge assembly.
(c) Insert the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge inside the fuel tank assembly, and
then attach the new gasket which has already been mounted on the fuel suction tube assembly
with pump and gauge to the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Gaps or misplaced attachment of the gasket may cause fuel to leak, so make sure that there are
no gaps or misalignments anywhere around the gasket when attaching it to the fuel tank
assembly.
(d) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a gasket.
*1 Gasket
*a Application area
NOTICE:
Apply gasoline in the area indicated in the illustration.
Ensure that gasoline does not adhere to the threads of
the fuel tank assembly.
Check that there is no fuel or foreign matter in the seal
section.
(e) Set the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge
within the fuel tank assembly installation position marks.
*a Installation position marks
(f) Attach a new sheet ring and fuel pump gauge retainer, and temporarily tighten the fuel pump
gauge retainer.
(g) Temporarily install SST (plate and 4 claws) to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
Do not apply a claw of SST at the marked part.
*a Marked Part
HINT:
Be sure to use SST (claws) as shown in the illustration.
Engage SST (claws) securely with the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs to secure SST.
(h) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, tighten the 4 bolts.
HINT:
Install SST while pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer (towards the center of
SST).
(i) Using SST, tighten the fuel pump gauge retainer.
Torque:
NOTICE:
Do not use any tools other than those specified in this
operation. Damage to the fuel pump gauge retainer or
fuel tank may result.
Do not press down on SST excessively as this may make
the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to rotate, and may
damage components.
Make sure to rotate SST horizontally. If SST is rotated at
an angle, SST may come off.
Do not spin SST too fast or use an impact wrench as this
may result in damage to components.
If SST comes off of the fuel pump gauge retainer, loosen
SST (bolts) and reinstall SST.
Check that the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and
gauge position marks are within the fuel tank assembly
installation position marks, as shown in the illustration.
After tightening to the specified torque, check that it has
been tightened to the correct torque.
HINT:
Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from separating
from the fuel pump gauge retainer. While pressing SST,
rotate the handle slowly to tighten the fuel pump gauge
retainer.
The tips of SST (claws) can be fitted onto the ribs of the
fuel pump gauge retainer.
*a Position mark
*b Installation position marks
(j) Connect the fuel tank main tube .
4. INSTALL NO. 2 REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER

(a) Connect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge connector.
(b) Install the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover with new butyl tape.
5. INSTALL SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY LH
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000QDU07UX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: REASSEMBLY; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Apply a light coat of gasoline to new 2 O-rings, and install

the 2 O-rings and backup ring to the fuel pressure
regulator assembly.
*1 O-Ring
*2 Backup Ring
(b) Install the fuel pressure regulator assembly to the fuel

filter.
(a) Install the new O-ring and fuel pump spacer to the fuel
pump assembly.
*1 Fuel Pump Wire harness
*2 O-Ring
*3 Fuel Pump Spacer
(b) Connect the new fuel pump wire harness to the fuel pump assembly.
(c) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a seal, and install it to the

fuel pump assembly.
(d) Attach the 5 claws of the fuel filter to install the fuel pump assembly.
NOTICE:
When installing the seal, make sure that it does not become pinched or cut.
3. INSTALL NO. 1 FUEL SUB-TANK

(a) Set the fuel suction plate sub-assembly to the No. 1 fuel sub-tank using the spring.
(b) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a new O-ring and install

the O-ring to the jet pump.
*1 Jet Pump
(c) Install the jet pump to the No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
NOTICE:
When installing the O-ring, make sure that it does not become pinched or cut.
Securely attach the claws.
(d) Attach the 3 claws to install the fuel filter assembly to the
No. 1 fuel sub-tank.
(e) Attach the claw to install the jet pump nozzle to the No. 1
fuel sub-tank.
(f) Install a new E-ring.
(g) Connect the fuel pump connector.
4. INSTALL FUEL SENDER GAGE ASSEMBLY
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000QDW07IX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL PUMP: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
2. DRAIN FUEL
(a) If the fuel gauge reads 2/3 or more, carry out the following procedure to drain fuel.
CAUTION:
After running, the engine will be very hot, so take care to avoid burns.
NOTICE:
Be sure not to scatter any fuel.
In some cases, there may be fuel in the fuel filler pipe section. Use a gasoline-capable pump or a
gasoline-capable hose with a diameter of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) or less, to drain fuel from the fuel
filler pipe section.
(1) Remove the center exhaust pipe assembly.
(2) Remove the tail exhaust pipe assembly.
(3) Loosen the hose clamp bolt and disconnect the fuel
tank to filler pipe hose.
NOTICE:
(4) Place a metal container below the vehicle, and use a gasoline-capable hose with a diameter of
10 mm or less to drain fuel from the opening of fuel tank assembly to filler pipe hose.
NOTICE:
Static electricity could possibly ignite gasoline, so be sure to use earthed metal containers.
(5) Connect the fuel tank to filler pipe hose to the fuel tank filler pipe sub-assembly with the clamp.
Torque:
4. REMOVE SEPARATE TYPE REAR SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY LH
5. REMOVE NO. 2 REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
(a) Remove the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover.
(b) Disconnect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and
gauge connector.
6. REMOVE FUEL SUCTION TUBE ASSEMBLY WITH PUMP AND GAUGE
(a) Disconnect the fuel tank main tube .
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the fuel tank main
tube from the fuel tank assembly.
(c) Remove the fuel pump gauge retainer.
(1) Temporarily install SST to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01010
09808-01020
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
*a Marked Part
HINT:
(2) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, tighten the 4
bolts.
(3) Install SST (handle).
(4) Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from

separating from the fuel pump gauge retainer. While
pressing SST, rotate the handle slowly to loosen the
NOTICE:
the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to rotate and may
damage components.
Make sure to rotate SST (handle) horizontally. If SST
(handle) is rotated at an angle, SST may come off.
(5) Disconnect the fuel tank vent hose sub-assembly

.
(6) Remove the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge from the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not pull the fuel return vent tube sub-assembly forcibly when disconnecting the fuel return vent
tube sub-assembly.
Do not rotate the fuel suction tube assembly inside the fuel tank assembly, as doing so may bend
the fuel sender gauge arm section.
Be sure not to spill the fuel remaining in the fuel suction tube assembly on the exterior of the fuel
tank assembly or interior of the vehicle.
(7) Remove the gasket from the fuel tank assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000001OU801OX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM0000014W605MX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Take special care of fire.
(a) Inspect to see if there is any damage to the fuel sender gauge assembly.
(b) Measure the dimensions between the fuel tank seat face
and the float center with the float position at F (upper
end) and at E (lower end).
Dimensions
Float position F (upper end) to fuel 121 to 129 mm (4.764 to

tank seat face 5.079 in.)
Float position E (lower end) to fuel 14.7 to 22.7 mm (0.579

tank seat face to 0.894 in.)
*1 Float position F (upper end)
*2 Float position E (lower end)
*3 Fuel tank seat face
(c) Check that the float moves smoothly between F (upper) and E (lower).
(d) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.

Float position is F
6.5 to 8.5 Ω
(upper end)
1-2
Float position is E
168 to 172 Ω
(lower end)
*a Component without harness connected

(Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly)
*b F (upper end)
*c E (lower end)
If the value is not as specified, replace the fuel sender

gauge assembly.
2. INSPECT NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Take special care of fire.
(a) Inspect to see if there is any damage to the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
(b) Measure the dimensions between the fuel tank seat face
and the float center with the float position at F (upper
end) and at E (lower end).
Dimensions
Float position F (upper end) to 150.3 to 158.3 mm (5.917

fuel tank seat face to 6.232 in.)
Float position E (lower end) to 0.7 to 8.7 mm (0.028 to

fuel tank seat face 0.343 in.)
*1 Float position F (upper end)
*2 Float position E (lower end)
*3 Fuel tank seat face
(c) Check that the float moves smoothly between F (upper) and E (lower).
(d) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the

table below.

Float position is F
5.5 to 9.5 Ω
(upper end)
1-2
Float position is E
236 to 244 Ω
(lower end)

*a
(No. 2 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly)
*b F (upper end)
*c E (lower end)
If the value is not as specified, replace the fuel sender

gauge assembly.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000001OU701VX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(a) Slide the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly downwards and attach the claw labeled A to install
the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
Slide
(b) Connect the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly connector.

(c) Engage the 4 clamps.
2. INSTALL FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE

(a) Install a new gasket to the fuel tank assembly.
(b) Apply a light coat of gasoline to a gasket.

*1 Gasket
*a Application area
NOTICE:
Apply gasoline in the area indicated in the illustration.
Ensure that gasoline does not adhere to the threads of
Check that there is no fuel or foreign matter in the seal
section.
(c) Engage the clamp to install the tube and set the fuel tank return tube into the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to bend the arm of the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
(d) Set the fuel tank return tube within the fuel tank
assembly installation position marks.
*a Installation position marks
(e) Attach a new sheet ring and fuel pump gauge retainer, and temporarily tighten the fuel pump
gauge retainer.
(f) Temporarily install SST (plate and 4 claws) to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
*a Marked Part
HINT:
(g) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, tighten the 4 bolts.
HINT:
Install SST while pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer (towards the center of
SST).
(h) Using SST, tighten the fuel pump gauge retainer.
Torque:
NOTICE:
the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to rotate, and may
damage components.
Make sure to rotate SST horizontally. If SST is rotated at
an angle, SST may come off.
Check that the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly within
the fuel tank assembly position marks are within the fuel
tank assembly installation position marks, as shown in the
illustration.
After tightening to the specified torque, check that it has
been tightened to the correct torque.
HINT:
Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from separating
from the fuel pump gauge retainer. While pressing SST,
rotate the handle slowly to tighten the fuel pump gauge
retainer.
The tips of SST (claws) can be fitted onto the ribs of the
*a Position mark
*b Installation position marks
3. INSTALL FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY

(a) Slide the fuel sender gauge assembly downwards and attach the claw labeled A to install the fuel
sender gauge assembly.
Slide
(b) Connect the fuel pump harness to the 2 clamps.
(c) Connect the fuel sender gauge assembly connector.
8. INSTALL REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER

(a) Connect the fuel tank return tube connector.
(b) Install the rear floor service hole cover with new butyl tape.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000001OU901TX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
7. REMOVE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump harness from the 4 clamps.
(c) Push the claw labeled A of the fuel sender gauge assembly, and then pull up the fuel sender
gauge assembly to remove it.
NOTICE:
Push
Pull up
8. REMOVE REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
(a) Remove the rear floor service hole cover.
(b) Disconnect the fuel tank return tube connector.
9. REMOVE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE
(a) Temporarily install SST to the fuel pump gauge retainer.
SST: 09808-14030
09808-01010
09808-01020
09808-01030
09808-01050
SST: 09808-01071
NOTICE:
*a Marked Part
HINT:
(b) While securely pressing SST (claws) against the fuel pump gauge retainer ribs, tighten the 4 bolts.
(c) Install SST (handle).

(d) Lightly press down on SST to prevent it from separating from the fuel pump gauge retainer.
While pressing SST, rotate the handle slowly to loosen the fuel pump gauge retainer.
NOTICE:
Do not use any tools other than those specified in this operation.
Damage to the fuel pump gauge retainer or fuel tank may result.
Do not press down on SST excessively as this may make the fuel pump gauge retainer hard to
rotate and may damage components.
Make sure to rotate SST (handle) horizontally. If SST (handle) is rotated at an angle, SST may
come off.
Do not spin SST too fast or use an impact wrench as this may result in damage to components.
If SST comes off of the fuel pump gauge retainer, loosen SST (bolts) and reinstall SST.
(e) Remove the fuel pump gauge retainer.
(f) Disengage the clamp and separate the fuel tank vent
hose sub-assembly from the fuel tank return tube.
(g) Remove the fuel tank return tube from the fuel tank assembly.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to bend the arm of the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly.
(h) Remove the gasket from the fuel tank assembly.
10. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly

connector.
(b) Disconnect the fuel pump harness from the clamp.

(c) Push the claw labeled A of the No. 2 fuel sender gauge assembly, and then pull up the No. 2 fuel
sender gauge assembly to remove it.
Push
Pull up
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000000Q3M04GX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION AND INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
NOTICE:
Do not start the engine.
(3) Enter the following menus: Power train / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump Speed.
(b) Check the fuel pump operation.
(1) Check for pressure in the fuel inlet tube from the fuel line. Check that sound of fuel flowing in
the fuel tank can be heard.
If no sound can be heard, check the EFI MAIN 1 relay, fuel pump, ECM and wiring connector.
(c) Inspect for fuel leaks.
(1) Check that there are no fuel leaks anywhere on the system after performing maintenance.
If there is a fuel leak, repair or replace parts as necessary.
2. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

(a) Check that the battery positive voltage is above 12 V.
(b) Discharge the fuel system pressure .
(c) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly when
the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door is closed the door in order to
prevent the door molding from being damaged. When the battery negative (-) terminal needs to
(d) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel tube. (Direct injection side)
(1) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the No. 2 fuel
tube.
(e) Disconnect the fuel tube. (Port injection side)

(1) Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the fuel tube.
(f) Install SST (pressure gauge) as shown in the illustration.

SST: 09268-31014
09268-41700
SST: 09268-45100
09268-41250
09268-41260
09268-41270
95336-08070
96135-51300
SST
*1
(Pressure Gauge)
SST
*2
(Straight joint)
SST
*3
(Hose)
SST
*4
(T-joint)
SST
*5
(Hose Band)
SST
*6
(Clip)
(g) Wipe off any gasoline.
(h) Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(i) Operate the fuel pump.
NOTICE:
Do not start the engine.
(4) Enter the following menus: Power train / Engine / Active Test / Control the Fuel Pump Speed.
(j) Measure the fuel pressure.
Standard fuel pressure:

350 to 500 kPa (4 to 5 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to 73 psi)
If the fuel pressure is higher than the specification, replace the fuel pump (built-in fuel tank).
If the pressure is lower than the specification, check the fuel hoses, connections, and fuel pump
(built-in fuel tank).
(k) Start the engine.
(l) Measure the fuel pressure when idle.

350 to 500 kPa (4 to 5 kgf/cm 2 , 51 to 73 psi)
If the pressure is not as specified, check the fuel pump and injectors.
(m) Stop the engine.
(n) Check that the fuel pressure remains as specified for 5 minutes after the engine has stopped.

147 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm 2 , 21 psi) or more
If the pressure is not as specified, check the fuel pump or injectors.
(o) After checking the fuel pressure, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and
carefully remove SST and the fuel tube connector to prevent fuel from spilling.
(p) Reconnect the No. 2 fuel tube with the clamp. (Direct injection side)
(q) Reconnect the fuel tube with the clamp. (Port injection side)
(r) Inspect for fuel leaks (Step 1).
3. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (for High Pressure)

(b) Start and warm up the engine.
(c) Run the engine at idle.
(d) Enter the following menus: Power train / Engine / Data List / Fuel Press.
(e) Check the high pressure side fuel pressure.

3000 to 5000 kPa (30.6 to 51.0 kgf/cm 2 , 435 to 725 psi)
If the pressure is not as specified, check the fuel pump, high pressure side fuel pump, fuel
pressure sensor and wirings.
(f) Stop the engine.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 R Doc ID: RM000000VHO03YX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 L Doc ID: RM000000Q3K042X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: PRECAUTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
Before working on the fuel system, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
Do not smoke or be near an open flame when working on the fuel system.
Keep gasoline away from rubber or leather parts.
Do not allow fuel to spray when removing the pipe between the high pressure side fuel pump and
the fuel injector. The fuel in the pipe is highly pressurized.
1. PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
After turning the ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable
from the battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from the
battery terminal notice before proceeding with work .
CAUTION:
Make sure the engine coolant temperature is 60°C (140°F) or less when performing this
procedure.
Do not disconnect any part of the fuel system until you have discharged the fuel system pressure.
Even after discharging the fuel pressure, place a piece of cloth or equivalent over fittings as you
separate them to reduce the risk of fuel spray on yourself or in the engine compartment.
(a) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
(b) Remove rear seat cushion assembly LH.
(c) Remove the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover.
(d) Disconnect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and
gauge connector.
(e) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(f) Start the engine. After the engine has stopped on its own, turn the ignition switch off.
HINT:
Some DTCs may be stored. Clear the DTCs before proceeding to the next step.
(g) Crank the engine again, then check that the engine does not start.
(h) Loosen the fuel tank cap, then discharge the pressure in the fuel tank completely.
(i) Connect the fuel suction tube assembly with pump and gauge connector.
(j) Install the No. 2 rear floor service hole cover.
(k) Install rear seat cushion assembly LH.
3. FUEL SYSTEM
(a) When disconnecting a fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out. Perform the
following procedure:
(1) Discharge fuel system pressure.
(2) Put a container under the connection.
(3) Disconnect the fuel pump tube.
(4) Drain the fuel remaining inside the fuel pump tube into the container.
(5) Cover the disconnected pipe and connector with a plastic bag to prevent damage and
contamination.
(b) Observe these precautions when connecting the fuel tube connector (for metallic type).
(1) Attach SST to the fuel pipe.
SST: SU003-03936
(2) Insert SST in the fuel tube connector side, and remove the fuel tube from the fuel pipe.
*1 Retainer
*2 O-Ring
*3 Housing
*4 Fuel Pipe
Insert
(3) Cover the disconnected fuel pipe and fuel tube connector with plastic bags to prevent damage
and contamination.
(c) Observe these precautions when connecting the fuel tube connector (for metallic type).
(1) Check for damage or foreign matter on the connected part of the fuel pipe.
(2) Align the fuel tube connector axis with the fuel pipe axis, and push the fuel tube connector in
until the retainer makes a clicking sound.
Push
(3) After connecting the fuel tube connector, pull the fuel tube connector and pipe, and then push
them to check that they are connected firmly.
NOTICE:
Be sure to always finish checking the fuel pipe connections by pushing.
Pull
Push
(4) Inspect for fuel leaks .
(d) Observe these precautions when disconnecting the fuel tube connector (for quick type A).
(1) Check that there is no damage or foreign matter on the part of the pipe that contacts the
connector.
(2) Detach the 2 claws of the connector retainer. Push down on the connector and disconnect it
from the pipe.
*1 Retainer
Push
Down
Pull
HINT:
If the connector and pipe are stuck, pinch the fuel pipe by hand and push and pull the connector to
disconnect it.
Pull
Push
NOTICE:
Check for any dirt and foreign matter contamination in the pipe and around the connector. Clean if
necessary. Foreign matter may damage the O-ring or cause leaks in the seal between the pipe
and connector.
Do not use any tools to separate the pipe and connector.
Do not allow any scratches or foreign matter on the parts when disconnecting them, as the fuel
tube joint contains the O-rings that seal the plug.
Check for any dirt and foreign matter on the pipe seal surface. Clean if necessary.
Do not forcibly bend, twist or turn the nylon tube.
Protect the disconnected part by covering it with a plastic bag and tape after disconnecting the
main tube.
If the pipe and connector are stuck together, pinch the tube between your fingers and turn it
carefully to free it. Then disconnect the main tube.
*1 Pipe
*2 Retainer
*3 Nylon Tube
*4 Connector
*5 O-Ring
(3) Check for foreign matter on the seal surface of the disconnected pipe. Clean it if necessary.
(4) To protect the disconnected pipe and connector from damage and foreign matter, cover them
with a plastic bag.
(e) Observe these precautions when connecting the fuel tube connector (for quick type A).
(1) Check for foreign matter on the pipe and around the connector before connecting it. Clean it if
necessary.
(2) Align the axis of the connector with the axis of the pipe. Push the pipe into the connector, and
then push up on the retainer.
*1 Retainer
Up
Push
NOTICE:
Before connecting the tube connectors to the pipes, check if there is any damage or foreign matter
in the connectors.
After connecting the pipe and the connector, check that the pipe and connector are securely
connected by trying to pull them apart.
Pull
(f) Perform the following procedure when disconnecting a fuel tube connector (Quick Type B).
*1 Fuel Tube Connector
*2 Fuel Pipe
*3 Retainer
Pinch
Pull Out
(1) Check that there is no dirt or other foreign matter around the fuel tube connector before
disconnecting it. Clean the joint if necessary.
(2) Pinch the retainer as illustrated, then pull out the fuel tube connector from the fuel pipe.
NOTICE:
Be sure to disconnect the fuel tube connector by hand.
(3) If the fuel tube connector and fuel pipe are stuck,
pinch the fuel pipe, and then push and pull the fuel
tube connector to release and disconnect the fuel
tube connector.
(4) Check if there is any dirt or other foreign matter on the seal surface of the disconnected fuel
pipe and clean it away as necessary.
(5) Cover the disconnected fuel pipe and fuel tube connector with plastic bags to prevent damage
and contamination.
(g) Perform the following procedure when connecting a fuel tube connector (Quick Type B).
(1) Check for damage or foreign matter on the connected part of the fuel pipe.
(2) Align the fuel tube connector with the fuel pipe, and then push in the fuel tube connector until
the retainer makes a "click" sound.
HINT:
If the fuel pipe is difficult to push into the fuel tube connector, apply a light coat of engine oil to the
tip of the fuel pipe and reinsert it.
(3) After finishing the connection, check that the fuel pipe
and the fuel tube connector are securely connected by
pulling on them.

(a) Check that there are no fuel leaks anywhere on the fuel system after performing maintenance
.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 U Doc ID: RM000000PDZ03ZX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. FUEL FLOW DIAGRAM
*A Direct Injection Side - -
*1 Throttle with Motor Body Assembly *2 Fuel Injector Assembly (for Direct Injection)
*3 Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper *4 Cylinder
*5 Fuel Pressure Sensor *6 Solenoid Spill Valve
*7 *8 Camshaft
Fuel Pump Assembly (for High Pressure)
*9 Fuel Tank Assembly *10 Jet Pump
Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and

*11 Fuel Pressure Regulator *12
Gauge
*13 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly *14 Fuel Pump Assembly
*15 Fuel Filter *16 Fuel Tank Return Tube
*17 No. 2 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly - -
to Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port

*a *b High Pressure Fuel Line
Injection)
*c Low Pressure Fuel Line - -
*A Port Injection Side - -
*1 Throttle with Motor Body Assembly *2 Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port Injection)
*3 Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper *4 Fuel Delivery Pipe
*5 Fuel Tank Assembly *6 Jet Pump
*7 Fuel Tank Return Tube *8 No. 2 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly
Fuel Suction Tube Assembly with Pump and

*9 *10 Fuel Pressure Regulator
Gauge
*11 Fuel Sender Gauge Assembly *12 Fuel Pump Assembly
*13 Fuel Filter - -
*a to Fuel Injector Assembly (for Direct Injection) *b Low Pressure Fuel Line
2. ELECTRICAL CONTROL DIAGRAM
*1 Throttle with Motor Body Assembly *2 Fuel Pressure Sensor
*3 Fuel Pump Assembly (for High Pressure) *4 Solenoid Spill Valve
*5 ECM *6 Injector Driver
*7 Fuel Pump Control ECU Assembly *8 Fuel Tank Assembly
*9 Fuel Pump Assembly *10 Battery
*11 Camshaft *12 Fuel Injector Assembly (for Direct Injection)
*13 Fuel Injector Assembly (for Port Injection) - -
3. HIGH PRESSURE SIDE FUEL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
4. LOW PRESSURE SIDE FUEL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000QDY03WX

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000QDX057X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NO. 1 FUEL TANK CUSHION
(a) Install 10 new No. 1 fuel tank cushions to the fuel tank assembly.
2. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL TANK MAIN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the fuel filter to the No. 2 fuel tank main tube sub-assembly.
(b) Install the No. 2 fuel tank main tube sub-assembly to the fuel tank assembly.
3. INSTALL FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE

(a) Install the fuel tank to filler pipe hose to the fuel tank assembly with the clamp.
(b) Tighten the hose clamp bolt.
Torque:
4. INSTALL FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the fuel tank cover.
HINT:
The fuel tank cover is used as a base when attaching the
fuel tank assembly, so inspect for any deformation,
cracking, or other damage. If any faults are found, replace
with a new one.
(b) Hold the fuel tank assembly with an engine lifter.
(c) Temporarily install the fuel tank assembly to the body with the 2 No. 1 fuel tank bands and 4 bolts.
(d) Adjust the position of the fuel tank assembly to achieve

the required separation between the front edge of the
fuel tank cover and the holes used for fixing the parking
brake cable bracket in place.
Standard:
42 to 44 mm (1.6535 to 1.7323 in.)
(e) Adjust the position of the fuel tank assembly to achieve

the required difference in clearance between the left and
right sides of the fuel tank assembly and the body.
Standard:
Below 2 mm (0.0787 in.)

Torque:
5. INSTALL CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Connect the quick connector as indicated by the arrows in

the order shown in the illustration.
6. CONNECT FUEL TANK VENT HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Engage the clamp to install the tube.
(b) Connect the fuel tank vent hose sub-assembly with the clamp.
7. CONNECT FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE

(a) Connect the fuel tank to filler pipe hose to the fuel tank filler pipe sub-assembly with the clamp.
(b) Tighten the hose clamp bolt.
Torque:

(a) Install the No. 3 fuel tank protector with a new nut and 2 clips.
Torque:
12. INSTALL FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE
14. ADD FUEL
18. INSTALL REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000QDZ052X

Title: FA20 FUEL: FUEL TANK: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
6. REMOVE REAR FLOOR SERVICE HOLE COVER
8. REMOVE FUEL TANK RETURN TUBE
9. DRAIN FUEL
(a) Remove the nut, 2 clips and No. 3 fuel tank protector.
14. DISCONNECT FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE
(a) Loosen the hose clamp bolt and disconnect the fuel tank
to filler pipe hose.
15. DISCONNECT FUEL TANK VENT HOSE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the clamp and disconnect the fuel tank vent hose
sub-assembly.
(b) Disengage the clamp and separate the tube.
16. SEPARATE CHARCOAL CANISTER ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the quick connector as indicated by the arrows

17. REMOVE FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
(a) Place an engine lifter under the fuel tank assembly.
(b) Remove the 4 bolts, 2 No. 1 fuel tank bands and fuel tank assembly.
18. REMOVE FUEL TANK TO FILLER PIPE HOSE
(a) Loosen the hose clamp bolt and remove the fuel tank to
filler pipe hose from the fuel tank.
19. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL TANK MAIN TUBE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the No. 2 fuel tank main tube sub-assembly from
(b) Remove the fuel filter from the No. 2 fuel tank main tube
sub-assembly.
20. REMOVE NO. 1 FUEL TANK CUSHION
(a) Remove the 10 No. 1 fuel tank cushions shown in the

illustration.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000000VIO02JX

Title: FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIN02UX

Title: FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Be careful not to drop or strike the injector driver.
The injector driver is grounded at the bolt and the nut. To ensure that it is grounded, clean all oil
and foreign matter from the installation areas of the injector driver and engine before installing the
injector driver.
(a) Install the injector driver with the 3 bolts.
Torque:
(b) Connect the 4 connectors to the injector driver. Move the lock levers in the direction indicated by
the arrow to lock the 3 connectors.
*1 Lock Lever
Lock with Connector
Normal Connector
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000000VIP02SX

Title: FA20 FUEL: INJECTOR DRIVER: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL

(a) Move the lock levers in the direction indicated by the arrow to release the 3 connector locks.
Disconnect the 4 connectors from the injector driver.
*1 Lock Lever
*a Release
Lock with Connector
Normal Connector
(b) Remove the 3 bolts and injector driver.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to drop or strike the injector driver.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 K Doc ID: RM000003VQK009X

Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: COMPONENTS; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 G Doc ID: RM000001QE000JX

Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSPECTION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT CHAMBER ASSEMBLY

(a) Check operation of the chamber assembly.
(1) Blow air into exhaust side. Check that air does not
come out of intake side.
*a Exhaust Side
*b Intake Side
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000001QDX00RX

Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: INSTALLATION; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the air cleaner duct to the chamber assembly with a hose clamp.
Torque:
2. INSTALL AIR CLEANER DUCT

(a) Install the 2 bolts and the air cleaner duct with the chamber.
Torque:
(b) Install the air cleaner duct with a hose clamp.
Torque:
3. INSTALL HOSE
(a) Engage the 2 clamps and install the hose.
(b) Insert the hose in until its flange contacts that of the grommet.
*1 Grommet
*a Flange
NOTICE:
Do not convolute the grommet when insert the hose to the grommet.
Check the grommet from the vehicle interior side to verify that it is properly installed onto the
body.
(c) Connect the hose.
Last Modified: 4-14-2014 6.6 A Doc ID: RM000001QDZ00SX

Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: CHAMBER: REMOVAL; 2013 MY FR-S [03/2012 - ]
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE HOSE
(a) Disconnect the hose.
(c) Remove the grommet and the hose.
(a) Loosen the hose clamp.
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the air cleaner duct with the
chamber assembly.
3. REMOVE CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
(a) Loosen the hose clamp and remove the chamber

assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000497C007X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000497B007X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Install 2 new gaskets.
(b) Install the exhaust manifold with the 6 new nuts.
NOTICE:
(c) Install new gasket to the exhaust manifold.
(d) Install 2 new nuts and the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly.
4. INSTALL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
5. INSTALL AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR

Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST MANIFOLD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
2. REMOVE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and disconnect the front exhaust pipe
sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the gasket.
(c) Remove the 6 nuts and the exhaust manifold.
(d) Remove the 2 gaskets.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000QD104LX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000QD005KX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT EXHAUST PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Rope up the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly to the front suspension crossmember.
HINT:
This operation is necessary in order to prevent the front exhaust pipe sub-assembly from falling off.
(b) Remove the SST.
SST: 09250-53010
2. INSTALL TAIL PIPE BAFFLE

(a) Press in the tail pipe baffle until the tail exhaust pipe assembly plate contact shown in the
illustration.
*1 Tail Exhaust Pipe Assembly
*2 Tail Pipe Baffle
*2 Plate
Contact area
(b) Install the 2 bolts and the 2 tail pipe baffles.
3. INSTALL TAIL EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 4 cushion rubbers and the tail exhaust pipe assembly.

(a) Install the center exhaust pipe assembly with the cushion rubber.
(b) Install the 2 new gaskets and the center exhaust pipe assembly with the 2 new nuts and the 2
bolts.
NOTICE:

(a) Temporarily install the front exhaust pipe assembly to the bracket with the bolt.
(b) Install the new gaskets and the front exhaust pipe assembly to the center exhaust pipe assembly
with the 2 nuts.
NOTICE:
(c) Install the new gaskets and the front exhaust pipe assembly to the front exhaust pipe sub-
assembly with the 2 new nuts.
NOTICE:
(d) Fully tighten the bolt.

(a) If gas is leaking, tighten the areas necessary to stop the leak. Replace the damaged parts as
necessary.

(a) Install the 7 bolts and the No. 2 engine under cover.

(a) Install the No. 1 engine under cover with the 12 bolts and engage the 7 clips.
Bolt A
Bolt B
Bolt A - Torque: 30 N·m (306 kgf·cm, 22ft·lbf)

Bolt B - Torque: 7.5 N·m (77 kgf·cm, 66in·lbf)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000QD205FX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: EXHAUST PIPE: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Disengage the 7 clips and remove the 12 bolts and No. 1
engine under cover.
(a) Remove the 7 bolts and the No. 2 engine under cover.
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and disconnect the exhaust joint

pipe.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the 2 bolts.
(c) Remove the 2 compression springs and disconnect the center exhaust pipe assembly.
(d) Remove the bolt and the front exhaust pipe assembly.
(e) Remove the 2 gaskets.
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and 2 bolts, and disconnect the tail
exhaust pipe assembly.
(b) Remove the cushion rubber and the center exhaust pipe
assembly.
(c) Remove the gasket.
5. REMOVE TAIL EXHAUST PIPE ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 cushion rubbers and the tail exhaust pipe
assembly.
6. REMOVE TAIL PIPE BAFFLE

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and the 2 tail pipe baffles.
7. REMOVE FRONT EXHAUST PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Set the SST.
SST: 09250-53010
(b) Remove the rope that is tying the joint pipe to the front suspension cross member sub-assembly.
(c) Remove the exhaust joint pipe.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000Q0T024X
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MU900WX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
(a) Remove the bolt and manifold absolute pressure sensor

from the intake manifold.
(b) Remove the O-ring from the manifold absolute pressure

sensor.
2. REMOVE PURGE VALVE
(a) Disconnect the No. 1 fuel vapor feed hose from the intake
manifold.
(b) Remove the nut and purge valve.
3. REMOVE CAP (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the cap from the intake manifold.

(a) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly from the fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
If the connector and pipe are stuck, pinch the fuel delivery pipe by hand and push and pull the
connector to disconnect it
Do not allow any scratches or foreign matter on the parts when disconnecting them, as the No. 2
fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly joint contains the O-rings that seal the plug.
Do not use any tools to separate the pipe and connector.
Do not forcibly bend, twist or turn the nylon tube.
If the pipe and connector are stuck together, pinch the tube between your fingers and turn it
carefully to free it. Then, disconnect the main tube.
Protect the disconnected part by covering it with a plastic bag and tape after disconnecting the
main tube.
Check that the top hat cannot be pulled out.
*1 Retainer *2 No. 2 Fuel Delivery Pipe Sub-assembly Connector
*3 Nylon Tube *4 O-ring
*5 fuel delivery pipe *6 Top Hat
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel delivery pipe from the
intake manifold.
HINT:
Use the same procedure described for the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2).
6. REMOVE NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disengage the 3 clamps and remove the No. 2 fuel

delivery pipe sub-assembly from the intake manifold.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VFL02UX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Install the 2 new gaskets to the intake manifold.
(b) Install the intake manifold with the 6 bolts.
(c) Engage the 2 clamps.
(d) Engage the 4 connectors and connect the wire harness.
(e) Connect the fuel pump connector.
(f) Engage the clamp and connect the engine wire harness.
(g) Engage the 5 clamps and connect the battery cable.
(h) Connect the purge valve connector.
(i) Connect the manifold absolute pressure sensor connector.

(a) Connect the ventilation hose.
3. CONNECT NO. 2 VACUUM HOSE (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Engage the 3 claws and install the No. 1 engine cover sub-assembly.
5. CONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Connect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose.
(b) Install the bolt and connect the fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly.
10. CONNECT THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY

(a) Install a new gasket to the intake manifold.
(b) Install the 4 bolts and throttle with motor body assembly to intake manifold.

13. INSPECT FUEL PUMP OPERATION AND INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000MU600XX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL NO. 2 FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the No. 2 fuel delivery pipe sub-assembly to the

intake manifold with the 3 clamps.

(a) Apply a gasoline to the contact surfaces of the new O-ring on each fuel injector assembly.
(b) Install a new O-ring to each fuel injector assembly.
(c) Install the fuel injector assembly to the intake manifold with fuel delivery pipe.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the fuel injector assembly or the O-ring.
Do not twist the O-ring.
(d) Install the fuel delivery pipe with the 2 bolts.
(e) Check that the fuel injectors rotate smoothly.
NOTICE:
If the fuel injectors do not rotate smoothly, the probable cause is incorrect installation of the O-
rings. Replace the O-rings.
(f) Position the fuel injector connector outward.
HINT:
Use the same procedure described for the fuel delivery pipe (for bank 2).
4. INSTALL CAP (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Install the clamp and cap to the intake manifold.
5. INSTALL PURGE VALVE
(a) Connect the No.1 fuel vapor feed hose to the intake
manifold.
(b) Install the nut and purge valve to the intake manifold.
6. INSTALL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

(a) Apply engine oil to the contact surfaces of the new O-ring on manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(b) Install a new O-ring to the manifold absolute pressure

sensor.
(c) Install the manifold absolute pressure sensor to the
intake manifold with the bolt.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000Q0U02UX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE MANIFOLD: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION AND INSPECT FOR FUEL LEAK
4. REMOVE THROTTLE WITH MOTOR BODY ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and the throttle with motor body
assembly.
(b) Remove the gasket.
9. DISCONNECT FUEL DELIVERY PIPE SUB-

ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the bolt and disconnect the fuel delivery pipe
sub-assembly.
(b) Disconnect the No. 2 fuel vapor feed hose and move the
fuel delivery pipe toward the front of the vehicle.

(a) Disengage the 3 craws and remove the No. 1 engine
cover sub-assembly.
HINT:
Disengage the 3 craws in the order shown in the illustration.
11. DISCONNECT NO. 2 VACUUM HOSE (for Manual Transmission)
12. DISCONNECT VENTILATION HOSE
(a) Disconnect the ventilation hose.

connector.
(c) Disengage the 5 clamps and disconnect the battery cable.
(d) Disengage the clamp and disconnect the engine wire

harness.
(e) Disengage the 2 clamps and disconnect the 4 connectors.
*a Bank 2 Side
*b Bank 1 Side
(f) Disconnect the fuel pump connector.
(g) Remove the 6 bolts, intake manifold and 2 gaskets.
*a Bank 2 Side
*b Bank 1 Side
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000Q2601JX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT INTAKE SYSTEM

(a) Check that there is no air suction at the points shown in the illustration.
*A for Manual Transmission *B for Automatic Transmission
NOTICE:
Disengagement, cracks or damage in the intake component may cause an idling defect.
2. INSPECT AIR CLEANER FILTER ELEMENT SUB-ASSEMBY
(a) Disengage the 2 clips.

(b) Lift the rear air cleaner case, and disengage the 2 claws.
(c) Lift the rear air cleaner case as shown in the illustration,
and remove the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly.
(d) Check that the air cleaner element is moderately clean.
Standard air cleaner element condition:

Not too dirty.
NOTICE:
If the element is too dirty, replace the air cleaner filter element.
(e) Use compressed air if the air cleaner filter element needs to be cleaned.
(f) Lift the rear air cleaner case, and install the air cleaner filter element sub-assembly.
(g) Engage the 2 claws.

(h) Engage the 2 clips.
NOTICE:
Securely engage the lower side claws of the air cleaner
case.
Check if the right and left locating lugs of the air cleaner
case do not get into the opposite air cleaner case.
*1 Locating Lugs
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000VDM01FX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PE701HX
Title: FA20 INTAKE / EXHAUST: INTAKE SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. INTAKE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM VALVE DIAGRAM
*1 ECM *2 Mass Air Flow Meter
*3 Throttle with Motor Body Assembly *4 Air Cleaner
*5 Crankshaft Position Sensor - -

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T5102GX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: LUBRICATION SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK ENGINE OIL QUALITY

(a) Check the oil for deterioration, water contamination, discoloring or thinning.
If the quality is visibly poor, replace the oil and oil filter element.
2. CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

(a) Warm up and stop the engine, and then wait for 5 minutes. The oil level should be between the
dipstick's low level and full level marks.
If low, check for leakage and add oil up to the full level mark.
NOTICE:
Do not add engine oil above the full level mark.
HINT:
Engine oil is always being consumed when driving the vehicle.
Generally, engine oil consumed at a rate of 1 liter every 3000 km, or 1 US qts. every 2000 miles.
In the following situations, oil consumption may increase and it may be necessary to add oil between
maintenances.
The engine is new.

The oil quality is poor or the viscosity is inappropriate.
The engine speed or load is high, the vehicle is towing something or the vehicle is being accelerated
and decelerated frequently.
The engine is idled for a very long time or the vehicle is frequently driven in traffic.
3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE
(a) Remove the oil pressure switch assembly .
(b) Install the oil pressure gauge with adapter.
(c) Install the air cleaner assembly .
(e) Check the oil pressure under the following conditions.
Specification Oil Pressure:

ITEM ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE OIL PRESSURE
Idle 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7.3 psi) or more

80°C (176°F)
6000 rpm 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm 2 , 73 psi) or more
(f) Remove the air cleaner assembly .
(g) Remove the oil pressure gauge with adapter.
(h) Install the oil pressure switch assembly .
(i) Inspect for engine oil leaks.

Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T4Z02CX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL AND OIL FILTER: REPLACEMENT (2013 FR-S)
REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
Prolonged and repeated contact with engine oil will result in removal of natural oils from the skin,
leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
Precautions should be taken when replacing engine oil to minimize the risk of your skin making
contact with used engine oil. Protective clothing and gloves that cannot be penetrated by oil should
be worn. The skin should be washed with soap and water, or use waterless hand cleaner, to remove
any used engine oil thoroughly. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
In order to preserve the environment, used oil and used oil filters must be disposed of at designated
disposal sites.
1. DRAIN ENGINE OIL

(a) Remove the oil filler cap.
(b) Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the oil into a container.
(c) Clean and install the oil pan drain plug with a new oil pan drain plug gasket.

(a) Remove any foreign matter and clean the installation
surface of the engine.
(b) Using SST, remove the oil filter sub-assembly.
SST: 09228-22020
(a) Remove the oil filter union.

(a) Install the oil filter union.

(a) Remove any foreign matter and clean the inside and installation surface of the engine.
(b) Apply a light layer of engine oil to the seal rubber of a new oil filter sub-assembly.
(c) Tighten the oil filter sub-assembly by hand.
NOTICE:
Do not damage the seal rubber of the oil filter sub-assembly.
(d) Using SST, tighten the oil filter sub-assembly.
SST: 09228-22020
6. ADD ENGINE OIL

(a) Add new engine oil and install the oil filler cap.
Standard Oil Grade:
OIL GRADE OIL VISCOSITY

(SAE)
0W-
API grade SL "energy-conserving", SM "energy-conserving", SN "resource- 20
conserving" or ILSAC multigrade engine oil 5W-
30
5W-
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
20
Standard Capacity:
ITEM CAPACITY
Drain and refill with oil filter change 5.4 liters (5.7 US qts, 4.8 Imp. qts)
Drain and refill without oil filter change 5.2 liters (5.5 US qts, 4.6 Imp. qts)
Dry fill 6.3 liters (6.7 US qts, 5.5 Imp. qts)
7. INSPECT FOR ENGINE OIL LEAK

(a) Start the engine. Make sure that there are no oil leaks from the connection point of the oil filter
sub-assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000364101CX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the engine oil

*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(b) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil pressure switch assembly.
NOTICE:
Do not start the engine for at least 1 hour after installation.
(c) Connect the engine oil pressure switch connector.
4. INSPECT FOR OIL LEAK

(b) Check for engine oil leaks from the engine oil pressure switch assembly.

Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PRESSURE SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL

(a) Disconnect the engine oil pressure switch connector.
(b) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, remove the engine


Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000591J000X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY

4. REMOVE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

oil temperature sensor.

(a) Remove the bolt and VVT sensor.

6. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank
1)

8. REMOVE VVT SENSOR (for Exhaust Side of Bank

2)
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and camshaft timing oil control

valve.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring

valve.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring

valve.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring

valve.
valve.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T5302TX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the 4 O-rings.
(b) Remove any old packing material remaining on the sealing surfaces before applying seal packing.
(c) Apply seal packing in a continuous line to the engine unit as shown in the illustration.
Seal packing:
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing Black, Three Bond 1217G or equivalent
(d) Apply seal packing in a line to the timing chain cover as shown in the following illustration.
*a Range A *b Boss (5 locations)
*c Range B *d Other than ranges A and B
*e φ3.5 to 4.5 mm (0.138 to 0.177 in.) *f 2 mm (0.079 in.)
*g φ12 mm (0.472 in.) *h 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
*i 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) - -
Seal packing:
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1217G or equivalent
NOTICE:
If the contact surfaces are wet, wipe them with an oil-free cloth before applying seal packing.
Install the chain cover within 3 minutes and tighten the bolts within 10 minutes after applying seal
packing.
Do not add engine oil for at least 2 hours after installing.
Do not start the engine for at least 2 hours after installing.
(e) Temporarily tighten the timing chain cover with the 32 bolts.
(f) Fully tighten the 32 bolts shown in the illustration.

Bolt A Bolt B
Bolt C Bolt D
for bolt A and B - Torque: 10 N·m (102 kgf·cm, 7ft·lbf)

for bolt C and D - Torque: 25 N·m (255 kgf·cm, 18ft·lbf)
Bolt Length:
ITEM LENGTH ITEM LENGTH
Bolt A 20 mm (0.787 in.) Bolt B 25 mm (0.984 in.)
Bolt C 60 mm (2.362 in.) Bolt D 50 mm (1.969 in.)
(a) Install the washer plate to the No. 1 idler pulley sub-
*a Protrusion
(b) Install the washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly with the bolt.
(c) Install the washer plate to the No. 1 idler pulley sub-
*a Protrusion
(d) Install the washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley sub-assembly with the bolt.

(a) Temporarily install the V-ribbed belt tensioner with the 5
bolts.
(b) Tighten the 4 bolts in the order shown in the illustration.
(a) Install the washer plate to the No. 2 idler pulley sub-
*a Protrusion
(b) Install the washer plate and No. 2 idler pulley sub-assembly with the bolt.

(a) Install a new O-ring to the oil level dipstick guide.
(b) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the O-ring.
(c) Install the oil level dipstick guide with the bolt.
(d) Install the oil level dipstick sub-assembly.

(a) Connect the camshaft position sensor connector and camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(c) Connect the engine oil pressure switch connector and engine oil temperature sensor connector.
(d) Connect the camshaft position sensor connector and camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(e) Connect the 2 camshaft position sensor connectors and camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(f) Connect the camshaft position sensor connector.
(g) Install the wire harness bracket with the bolt.
(h) Engage the wire harness clamp.
(i) Install the 2 wire harness brackets with the 2 bolts.
11. CONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE
18. ADD ENGINE OIL
19. INSPECT FOR ENGINE OIL LEAK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000591K000X
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
valve.
(c) Install the camshaft timing oil control valve with the 2
bolts.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the O-ring is not damaged or does not
jump out of position during installation.
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
valve.
bolts.
NOTICE:
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
valve.
bolts.
NOTICE:
*1 O-ring
*2 Back-up Ring
valve.
bolts.
NOTICE:





9. INSTALL ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(a) Install a new gasket to the engine oil temperature sensor.
(b) Using a 19 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil

temperature sensor to the cylinder head sub-assembly.
(a) Apply adhesive to 2 or 3 threads of the engine oil

*1 Adhesive
Adhesive:
equivalent
(b) Using a 24 mm deep socket wrench, install the engine oil

NOTICE:
Do not start the engine for at least 1 hour after
installation.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000T5702RX
Title: FA20 LUBRICATION: OIL PUMP: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
8. DISCONNECT RADIATOR OUTLET HOSE
9. DRAIN ENGINE OIL

(a) Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the 2 wire harness clamp brackets from the engine assembly.
(b) Remove the bolts and disconnect the wire harness clamp
bracket from the engine assembly.
(c) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector.

(d) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector and 2
camshaft timing oil control valve connectors.
(e) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector and

camshaft timing oil control valve connector.
(f) Disconnect the engine oil pressure switch connector and engine oil temperature connector.
(g) Disengage the clamp.
(h) Disconnect the camshaft position sensor connector and

camshaft timing oil control valve connector.

(a) Remove the oil level dipstick sub-assembly.
(b) Remove the bolt and oil level dipstick guide.
(c) Remove the O-ring from the oil level dipstick guide.

(a) Remove the bolt, washer plate and No. 2 idler pulley sub-
assembly.
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and V-ribbed belt tensioner

assembly.
(a) Remove the bolt, washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley sub-
assembly.
(b) Remove the bolt, washer plate and No. 1 idler pulley sub-
assembly.

(b) Using a screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective tape, remove the timing chain or belt cover
sub-assembly by prying between the timing chain or belt cover sub-assembly and cylinder head or
cylinder block.
*1 Protective Tape - -
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the contact surfaces of the cylinder head, cylinder block or chain cover.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003VP800LX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003VP700NX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION

table below.

CONDITION CONDITION
All combinations of all

LOCK 10 kΩ or higher
terminals
2 (AM2) - 3 (ACC) ACC Below 1 Ω
2 (AM2) - 3 (ACC) - 4
(IG1) ON Below 1 Ω
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM1)
1 (ST1) - 2 (AM2) - 4
(IG1)
START Below 1 Ω
6 (IG2) - 7 (AM1) - 8
(ST2)

*a
(Ignition or starter Switch Assembly)
If the result is not as specified, replace the ignition or

starter switch assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003VP600UX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the 2 screws, and install the ignition or starter switch.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003VP900UX
Title: FA20 STARTING: IGNITION SWITCH: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
8. REMOVE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the 2 screws, and remove the ignition switch.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002U5203MX
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: Key Cannot be Removed or Inserted (2013 FR-S)
Key Cannot be Removed or Inserted
DESCRIPTION
When an ACC signal and a P signal is input, the control unit relay assembly outputs a signal to the key
inter lock solenoid.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to System Diagram .
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ACC VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the D42 control unit relay assembly

connector.
Standard Voltage:
D42-6 (ACC) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a
(to control unit relay assembly)
NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY -

2.
BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D42 control unit relay assembly connector.
D42-1 (E) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. INSPECT P SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER HOUSING)
(a) Inspect the P switch (floor shift shift lever housing) .
REPLACE P SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT

NG LEVER HOUSING)
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY - P

4.
SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER HOUSING)

(b) Disconnect the D28 P switch (floor shift shift lever housing) connector.
D42-4 (P) - D28-1 (P) Always Below 1 Ω
D42-4 (P) or D28-1 (P) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (P SWITCH (FLOOR SHIFT SHIFT LEVER
5.
HOUSING) - BODY GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D28 P switch (floor shift shift lever housing) connector.
D28-3 (E) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
6. CHECK KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID

(a) Disconnect the D60 key inter lock solenoid connector.
1-2 20°C (68°F) 13.05 to 15.95 Ω

*a
(Key Inter Lock Solenoid)
NG REPLACE KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY -

7.
KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID)
(b) Disconnect the D60 key inter lock solenoid connector.
D42-5 (KLS+) - D60-2 Always Below 1 Ω
D42-5 (KLS+) or D60-2 - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (KEY INTER LOCK SOLENOID - BODY
8.
GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D60 key inter lock solenoid connector.

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000057TO000X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK KEY INTER LOCK OPERATION

(b) Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to any position other than P.
(c) Check that the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK.
(d) Move the shift lever to P, turn the ignition key to LOCK and check that the ignition key can be
removed. If the operation cannot be done as specified, inspect the key inter lock circuit.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000BNP00OX
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003N4Y00WX
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

Key Inter Lock System
Key cannot be removed or inserted Key inter lock circuit

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003N95014X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY INTER LOCK SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000048MW007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000048QE007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the control unit relay with the bolt.
2. INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000048QF007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: KEY LOCK UNIT: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
3. REMOVE GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR ASSEMBLY
4. REMOVE CONTROL UNIT RELAY ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the control unit relay assembly connector.
(b) Remove the bolt and control unit relay assembly unit.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FFP03HX
Title: FA20 STARTING: RELAY: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT ST RELAY

table below.

Battery voltage not applied to

terminals 1 and 2 93.8 to 136.4
1-2
Measurement temperature : 20 kΩ
°C

3-5
terminals 1 and 2 higher
Battery voltage applied to

3-5 Below 1 Ω
terminals 1 and 2
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter relay.
2. REMOVE INHIBITOR RELAY

table below.

Battery voltage not applied to

terminals 1 and 2 93.8 to 136.4
1-2
Measurement temperature : 20 kΩ
°C

3-5
terminals 1 and 2 higher
Battery voltage applied to

3-5 Below 1 Ω
terminals 1 and 2
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter relay.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001UBV007X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000EGY01TX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the lead wire from
terminal C.
(b) Remove the 2 screws and the magnet starter switch

assembly from the starter drive housing assembly.
2. REMOVE MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the lead wire from
terminal C.
(b) Remove the 2 nuts and the magnet starter switch
assembly from the starter drive housing assembly.
3. REMOVE STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Using a "TORX" socket wrench T25, remove the 2

through bolts.
(b) Remove the starter yoke assembly and starter cover from
the starter drive housing assembly.
4. REMOVE STARTER COVER (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the 2 through bolts and 2 screws, and remove

the starter cover.
5. REMOVE STARTER COVER (for Automatic Transmission)

(b) Remove the starter cover from the starter yoke

assembly.
*1 Starter Yoke Assembly
*2 Starter Cover
NOTICE:
Hold the lead wire and remove the starter cover.
(c) Remove the dust starter protect from the starter yoke assembly.
6. REMOVE STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the starter brush holder assembly.
HINT:
Hold the brush with your fingers so that the brush spring does
not come flying out.
7. REMOVE STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Using a screwdriver, disengage the spring from the

bush.
(b) Disconnect the 4 brush from the starter brush holder assembly.
(c) Remove the starter brush holder assembly.
8. REMOVE STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the starter yoke assembly and starter armature

assembly together from the starter drive housing
assembly.
9. REMOVE STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Pull out the starter armature assembly from the starter
yoke assembly.
10. REMOVE STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Pull out the starter armature assembly from the starter
yoke assembly.
*2 Starter Armature Assembly
11. REMOVE STARTER ARMATURE PLATE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the starter armature plate from the starter yoke
assembly and starter drive housing assembly.
*1 Starter Drive Housing Assembly

*3 Starter Armature Plate
12. REMOVE STARTER HOUSING RUBBER (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the starter housing rubber, seal rubber and plate
from the starter drive housing assembly.
*1 Starter Housing Rubber
*2 Plate
*3 Seal Rubber
13. REMOVE RUBBER SEAL (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the rubber seal from the starter drive housing
assembly.
*1 Rubber Seal
14. REMOVE STARTER PLANETARY GEAR
(a) Remove the 3 starter planetary gears from the starter

clutch sub-assembly.
15. REMOVE STARTER CLUTCH SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Remove the starter clutch sub-assembly together with

the drive lever set pin from the starter drive housing
assembly.
(b) Using a 14 mm deep socket wrench, remove the stopper

from snap ring.
*2 Stopper
*3 Snap Ring
(c) Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring and stopper.
(d) Pull out the over running clutch from the shaft.
(e) Remove the internal gear assembly from the shaft.
*1 Internal Gear Assembly
*2 Shaft
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000162401EX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT STARTER ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
As a large electric current passes through the cable during this inspection, a thick cable must be
used. If not, the cable may become hot and cause injury.
NOTICE:
The following tests must each be performed within 3 to 5 seconds to prevent the coil from
burning out.
(a) Mount the starter in a vise between aluminum plates.
(b) Perform a pull-in test.
(1) Remove the nut, and then disconnect the lead wire from terminal C.
(2) Connect the battery to the starter as shown in the

illustration. Check that the clutch pinion gear extends.
*1 Body
*2 Terminal 50
*3 Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear does not move, inspect the

magnet starter switch assembly. If the magnet starter
switch assembly is not as specified, replace it.
(c) Perform a holding test.
(1) Disconnect the negative (-) terminal lead from

terminal C while the conditions specified in the pull-in
test above are maintained. Check that the pinion gear
remains out.
*1 Body
*2 Terminal 50
*3 Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear returns inward, inspect the

magnet starter switch assembly. If the magnet starter
switch assembly is not as specified, replace it.
(d) Inspect the clutch pinion gear return.
(1) Disconnect the negative (-) terminal lead from the

starter body. Check that the clutch pinion gear returns
inward.
*1 Body
*2 Terminal 50
*3 Terminal C
If the clutch pinion gear does not return inward,

inspect the magnet starter switch assembly. If the
magnet starter switch assembly is not as specified,
replace it.
(e) Perform an operation test without load.
(1) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.
(2) Connect the battery and an ammeter to the starter as

*1 Terminal 50
*2 Terminal 30
*3 Ammeter
(3) Check that the starter rotates smoothly and steadily while the clutch pinion gear is extended.
Then measure the current.
Standard Current:
Battery positive terminal - Terminal 30 - Terminal 50 11.5 V Below 90 A
If the result is not as specified, inspect the starter assembly.
HINT:
Inspect the starter armature assembly, starter commutator end frame assembly and magnet starter
switch assembly. If there is a malfunction, replace the part and perform again this test.
2. INSPECT STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Check the commutator for signs of seizure or stepped wear caused by roughness of the surface. If
there is light wear, use sandpaper to repair.
(b) Check for runout on the commutator. If excessive,
replace the armature.
Standard runout:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Maximum runout:
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
*1 Dial Gauge
*2 V-block
(c) Check the depth of the segment mold. If it is not within

the standard, replace the armature.
Standard depth:
0.50 mm (0.020 in.)
*1 Mold
*2 Segment
*3 Depth of Mold
(d) Place the armature on the growler tester to check for

short circuits. While slowly turning the armature, support
the steel sheet for the armature core. If the circuit of the
armature is shorted, the steel sheet will vibrate, causing it
to move towards the core. When the steel sheet has
moved or vibrated, replace the armature.
*1 Steel Sheet
*2 Growler Tester
(e) Touch the probe of one side to the commutator segment,

and the other probe to the shaft. If there is continuity,
3. INSPECT STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Check the commutator for dirt and/or burns on the surface.
If the surface is dirty or burnt, correct it with sandpaper (No. 400) or a lathe. If necessary, replace
the starter armature assembly.
(b) Inspect the commutator for an open circuit.

the table below.
*1 Segment
Segment - Segment Always Below 1 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter

armature assembly.
(c) Inspect the commutator for short circuits.

the table below.
*1 Segment
*2 Coil Core
Segment - Coil core Always 10 kΩ or higher

armature assembly.
(d) Check the commutator for signs of seizure or stepped wear caused by roughness of the surface. If
there is light wear, use sandpaper to repair.
(e) Check for runout on the commutator. If excessive,

Standard runout:
0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
Maximum runout:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
*1 Dial Gauge
*2 V-block

armature assembly.
(f) Using vernier caliper, measure the commutator diameter.
*a Diameter
Standard diameter:
29 mm (1.1417 in.)
Minimum diameter:
28 mm (1.1024 in.)
If the diameter is less than the minimum, replace the

starter armature assembly.
(g) Using vernier caliper, measure the under cut depth of the
segment. If it is not within the standard, replace the
starter armature assembly.
Standard depth:
0.7 mm (0.0276 in.)
Minimum depth:
0.2 mm (0.0079 in.)
4. INSPECT STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Make sure that the pole is set at the predetermined position.
5. INSPECT STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Visually check the brush. If there is any abnormal wear or cracks, replace the brush.
(b) Measure the length of the brush. If it exceeds the service

limits, replace the brush.
Standard length:
12.3 mm (0.484 in.)
Minimum length:
7.0 mm (0.276 in.)
*1 Service Limit Line
*2 Brush
(c) Check that the brush moves smoothly in the brush holder.
(d) Measure the brush spring force with a spring scale. Replace the brush holder if below the service
limit.
Standard brush spring force:

15.9 to 19.5 N (1.6 to 2.0 kgf, 3.6 to 4.4 lbf)
Minimum brush spring force:
2.5 N (0.3 kgf, 0.6 lbf)
6. INSPECT STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the brush length.
*a Length
Standard length:
14.4 mm (0.5669 in.)
Minimum length:
9.0 mm (0.3543 in.)
If the length is less than the minimum, replace the starter

brush holder assembly.

table below.
A-B
A-C
B-D
C-D
A-D
Always Below 1 Ω
B-C
If the result is not as specified, replace the starter brush

holder assembly.
7. INSPECT STARTER CLUTCH SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Check the gear teeth on the planetary gear, internal gear and starter clutch for wear or damage.
If any of the gears is damaged, replace the starter center bearing clutch sub-assembly.
(b) Check the starter clutch pinion gear.
(1) Hold the starter clutch, rotate the pinion gear

clockwise and check that it turns freely. Try to rotate
the pinion gear counterclockwise and check that it
locks.
*a Free
*b Lock
If necessary, replace the starter clutch sub-assembly.
8. INSPECT MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Check that there is continuity between terminals 50 and

C, and between terminal 50 and ground. Also, check to be
sure there is no continuity between terminal C and 30.

CONDITION
Terminal C - Terminal 50 Always Below 1 Ω
Terminal 50 - Switch
Always Below 1 Ω
body
Terminal C - Terminal 30 Always 1 MΩ or higher
*1 Terminal 50
*2 Terminal C
*3 Terminal 30
(b) Using a lead wire, connect the switch assembly terminal 50 to the positive terminal of the battery,
and the starter body to the ground terminal of the battery. The pinion should be forced to be
pushed out on the shaft.
HINT:
With the pinion forced to be pushed out on the shaft, the starter motor can sometimes rotate because
the current flows, through pull-in coil, to motor. This is not a problem.
(c) Disconnect the connector from terminal C. Then, using a

lead wire, connect the positive terminal of the battery and
terminal C, and ground terminal to starter body. In this
test set up, the pinion should return to its original position
even when it is pulled out with a screwdriver.
*1 Terminal 50
*2 Terminal C
9. INSPECT MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Check the plunger.
(1) Push in the plunger and check that it returns quickly

to it is original position.
If necessary, replace the magnet starter switch

assembly.
(b) Inspect the pull-in coil.

the table below.
Terminal C - Terminal 50 Always Below 1 Ω
*1 Terminal C
*2 Terminal 50
If the result is not as specified, replace the magnet

(c) Inspect the holding coil.

the table below.

CONDITION
Terminal 50 - Switch
Always Below 2 Ω
body
*1 Terminal 50
*2 Switch Body
If the result is not as specified, replace the magnet

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V3F029X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
(a) Temporarily install the upper side bolts.
(b) Install the lower side bolt.
(c) Install the upper side bolt and starter assembly.
SST: 09249-37010
HINT:
Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 260 mm

(10.2 in.). When using a torque wrench with a fulcrum
length that is not 260 mm (10.24 in.), calculate the
torque specification for the torque wrench and SST based
on the "without SST" torque specification .
Make sure SST and the wrench are connected in a straight
line.
(d) Engage the wire clamp.
(e) Connect the starter connector.
(f) Connect the starter wire with the nut.


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000EH001TX
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL STARTER CLUTCH SUB-ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the shaft as shown in the illustration.
High-temperature Grease
(b) Install the internal gear to the shaft.
(c) Apply high-temperature grease to the shaft as shown in the illustration.

(d) Install the over running clutch to the shaft.
(e) Install the stopper to the shaft.
Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring.
(f) Using a press, press the snap ring into the stopper.
*1 Snap Ring
*2 Stopper
(g) Install the starter clutch sub-assembly together with the
drive lever set pin to the starter drive housing assembly.
2. INSTALL STARTER PLANETARY GEAR (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the planetary gears and pins of the planetary shaft.
(b) Install the 3 starter planetary gears.
3. INSTALL STARTER PLANETARY GEAR (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the planetary gears and pins of the planetary shaft.
(b) Install the 3 starter planetary gears.
4. INSTALL STARTER HOUSING RUBBER (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Install the starter housing rubber, seal rubber and plate
to the starter drive housing assembly.
*1 Starter Housing Rubber
*2 Plate
*3 Seal Rubber
5. INSTALL RUBBER SEAL (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Install the rubber seal to the starter drive housing

assembly.
*1 Rubber Seal
6. INSTALL STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Install the starter armature assembly to the starter yoke

assembly.
*2 Starter Armature Assembly
7. INSTALL STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Install the 4 brushes and 4 brush springs.

(b) Install the starter brush holder assembly to the starter
armature assembly. Push the 4 brushs.
(c) Insert the grommet between the positive (+) motor read
wire and the negative (-) brush holder plate.
*1 Grommet
*2 Negative (-) Brush Holder Plate
*3 Positive (+) Motor Read Wire
8. INSTALL STARTER COVER (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Install the dust starter protector to the starter yoke assembly.
(b) Align the starter brush holder assembly read wire rubber
with the groove of the starter cover.
(c) Install the starter cover to the starter brush holder

assembly with 2 screws.
- Torque: 1.5 N·m (15 kgf·cm, 13in·lbf)

9. INSTALL STARTER ARMATURE PLATE (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Align the claw of the starter yoke assembly with the groove the starter armature plate.
(b) Install the starter armature plate to the starter yoke assembly.
*1 Claw *2 Groove
10. INSTALL STARTER ARMATURE ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Install the starter armature assembly to the starter yoke

assembly.
11. INSTALL STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Align the claw of the starter yoke assembly with the
groove inside the starter drive housing assembly.
*1 Claw
*2 Groove
(b) Install the starter yoke assembly together with the

starter armature assembly to the starter drive housing
assembly.
12. INSTALL STARTER YOKE ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Align the claw of the starter yoke assembly with the
groove inside the starter drive housing assembly.
Install the starter yoke assembly together with the starter

armature assembly to the starter drive housing assembly.
*1 Claw
*2 Groove
(b) Using a "TORX" socket wrench T25, install the 2 through

bolts.
13. INSTALL STARTER BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)

(a) Install a 24 mm socket to the starter brush holder
assembly.
(b) Install the starter brush holder assembly to the starter armature assembly.
14. INSTALL STARTER COVER (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Install the starter cover with 2 screws and 2 bolts.
Bolt - Torque: 6.0 N·m (61 kgf·cm, 53in·lbf)

Screw - Torque: 1.4 N·m (14 kgf·cm, 12in·lbf)
15. INSTALL MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Manual Transmission)
(a) Install the magnet starter switch assembly with the 2

screws.
(b) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.
16. INSTALL MAGNET STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Apply high-temperature grease to the plunger and hook as shown in the illustration.
High-temperature grease
(b) Hook the plunger and hook of the magnet starter switch
assembly to the lever of the starter drive housing
assembly.
*1 Plunger and Hook
*2 Lever
(c) Install the magnet starter switch assembly with the 2

screws.
(d) Connect the lead wire to terminal C with the nut.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000V3I029X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Remove the nut and disconnect the starter wire.
(b) Disconnect the starter connector.
(c) Disengage the wire clamp.
(d) Remove the upper side bolt.

(e) Remove the lower side bolt, battery cable stay and
starter assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000048MU006X
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
Title: FA20 STARTING: STARTING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDN0LXX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
In the table below, the values listed under Normal Condition are reference values. Do not
(f) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List.
(g) Check the values by referring to the table below.
ECM

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE
When the battery voltage is

below 11 V, other systems may
be affected.
Reference figures:
Battery voltage:
Battery IG ON: 12.5 V
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 11 to 14 V: Idling
Voltage When cranking:
65.535 V
9.834 V
When idling (after
warming up): 13.359
V
Changes in response to the When a malfunction occurs,

Battery current:
Battery amount of electricity generated there may be a problem with
Min.: -125 A, Max.:
Current by the alternator: while running the IB voltage system or the
125 A
after warming up. sensor power source.
Battery temperature: When a malfunction occurs,

Changes in response to the
Battery Min.: -40°C (-40°F), there may be a problem with
actual temperature: while
Temperature Max.: 6513.5°C the THB voltage system or the
running after warming up.
(11756.3°F) sensor power source.
Displays the voltage

required when the When a malfunction occurs,
Alt Vol - Non battery fluid temperature and
regulator is not being there may be problems with
Active Test running state (12.4 to 14.6 V):
forcefully driven: charging control systems.
after starting the engine.
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 80 V
Displays the voltage

generated when
Displays the voltage performing the active
Specified voltage required when
required when the test.
Alt Vol - performing the "generation
regulator is being When a malfunction
Active Test required voltage" active test:
forcefully driven: occurs, there may be
after starting the engine.
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 80 V problems with the
charging control
systems.
Displays the charging Changes in response to the

When a malfunction occurs,
Alternator control signal: amount of electricity generated
there may be problems with the
Duty Min.: 0%, Max.: 255 by the alternator: while charging
charging control systems.
% control.
Displays the
Request alternator generation When a malfunction occurs,
amount of electricity generated
Voltage to control mode: there may be problems with the
by the alternator: while charging
Alternator Min.: 0%, Max.: 255 charging control systems.
control.
%
# Codes
Number of DTCs:
(Include 0 -
Min.: 0, Max.: 255
History)
2. ACTIVE TEST
HINT:
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Active Test.
(e) Perform the Active Test by referring to the table below.
ECM
TESTER DISPLAY TEST PART CONTROL RANGE DIAGNOSTIC

NOTE
Control the Voltage of Fluctuations in the required alternator Between 12.8 and While engine
Alternator generated voltage. 14.3 V running.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDJ0VJX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
2. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, replace or recharge the battery.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003MXP02KX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-
S)

P0516 Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit Low
P0517 Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit High
P1530 Short in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
P1531 Open in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
P1532 Battery Current Sensor Circuit

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XKX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / DTC.
(e) Check the DTC(s), and then write them down.
(f) Check the details of the DTC(s) .
2. CLEAR DTC
(e) Clear the DTCs.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003MXV01SX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
If any of the following DTCs are stored, the ECM enters fail-safe mode to allow the vehicle to be driven
temporarily.
DTC NO. COMPONENT FAIL-SAFE OPERATION FAIL-SAFE DEACTIVATION

CONDITION
P0516, P0517, P1530, P1531 and Generator command is

Generator Pass condition detected
P1532 fixed.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PD90TJX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
NEXT
HINT:
In troubleshooting, confirm that the problem symptoms have been accurately identified.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may also
help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points in the problem analysis:
Under what conditions? Running conditions, driving conditions, weather conditions
NEXT
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
4. INSPECT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Use the Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally
.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
CAN DTCs are not output A
CAN DTCs are output B
B GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM .
5. CHECK FOR DTC*
HINT:
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
No code A
Trouble code B
B GO TO DTC CHART
6. REFER TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

HINT:
Refer to Problem Symptoms Table .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
B GO TO STEP 10
HINT:
Refer to Data List / Active Test .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
B GO TO STEP 10
8. CHECK ECU CIRCUIT
HINT:
Refer to Terminals of ECU .
NG GO TO STEP 10
OK
HINT:
Refer to Symptom Simulation .
NEXT
10. CONDUCT PARTS INSPECTION
NEXT
11. IDENTIFY PROBLEM
NEXT
12. ADJUST AND/OR REPAIR
NEXT
13. CONDUCT CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001AR909JX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK BATTERY CONDITION
NOTICE:
If the battery is weak or if the engine is difficult to start, perform the following procedures.
(a) Check the battery for damage and deformation. If severe damage, deformation or leakage is found,
replace the battery.
(b) Check the volume of electrolyte quantity in each cell.
If the electrolyte volume is below the lower line,

add distilled water to each cell. Then, recharge
the battery and check the electrolyte specific
gravity.
1.25 to 1.29 at 20°C (68°F)
If the electrolyte volume is above the lower

line, check the battery voltage when
cranking the engine. If the battery voltage
is less than 9.6 V, recharge or replace the
battery.
HINT:
Before checking the battery voltage, turn off all

the electrical systems (headlights, blower
motor, rear defogger, etc.).
2. INSPECT BATTERY TERMINAL AND FUSE

(a) Check that the battery terminals are not loose or corroded.
If the terminal is corroded, clean the terminal.
(b) Measure the resistance of the H-fuses and fuses.
Below 1 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the fuse.
3. INSPECT FAN AND GENERATOR V BELT
4. INSPECT GENERATOR WIRING

(a) Visually check the generator wiring.
(1) Check that the wiring is in good condition.
5. CHECK FOR ABNORMAL NOISES

(a) Listen for abnormal noises from the generator.
(1) Check that no abnormal noises are heard from the generator while the engine is running.
6. INSPECT CHARGE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT

(a) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Check that the charge warning light comes on.
(b) Start the engine and check that the light goes off.
If the light does not operate as specified, troubleshoot the charge warning light circuit.
7. INSPECT CHARGING CIRCUIT WITHOUT LOAD
(a) Connect a voltmeter and ammeter to the charging circuit

as follows.
(1) Disconnect the wire from terminal B of the generator,

and then connect it to the negative (-) lead of an
ammeter.
*1 Battery
*2 Terminal B
*3 Generator Assembly
(2) Connect the positive (+) lead of the ammeter to

terminal B of the generator.
(3) Connect the positive (+) lead of a voltmeter to

terminal B of the generator.
(4) Ground the negative (-) lead of the voltmeter.
(b) Check the charging circuit.
(1) Maintain the engine speed at 2000 rpm and check the reading on the ammeter and voltmeter.
Standard current:
10 A or less
Standard voltage:
11.3 to 15.6 V
If the result is not as specified, replace the generator assembly.
HINT:
If the battery is not fully charged, the ammeter reading will sometimes be higher than the standard
current.
8. INSPECT CHARGING CIRCUIT WITH LOAD

(a) With the engine running at 2000 rpm, turn the high beam headlights on and turn the heater blower
switch to the HI position.
(b) Check the reading on the ammeter.
Standard current:
30 A or higher
If the ammeter reading is below the standard current, repair the generator.
HINT:
If the battery is fully charged, the indication will sometimes be below the standard current. If this is
the case, add more electrical load (operate the wipers, rear window defogger, etc.) and check the
reading on the ammeter again.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010BK0E1X
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: P0516,P0517: Battery Temperature Sensor
Circuit Low (2013 FR-S)
DTC P0516 Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit Low
DTC P0517 Battery Temperature Sensor Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The battery temperature sensor installed on the battery current sensor assembly detects the battery
temperature.
A thermistor is integrated into the battery temperature sensor, and the resistance in the battery
temperature sensor changes according to the battery temperature.
The resistance of the thermistor in the battery temperature sensor decreases as the battery temperature
increases. The resistance increases as the temperature decreases.
The battery temperature sensor is connected to the ECM. The ECM supplies 5 V from the THB terminal to
the battery temperature sensor through resistor R.
The battery temperature sensor and resistor R are connected in series. This results in fluctuations in the
voltage supplied from the THB terminal when the resistance changes according to the battery
temperature.
The ECM determines the battery temperature according to fluctuations in voltage. When the battery
temperature is high, the ECM determines to reduce the amount of current supplied from the generator in
order to protect the battery.

NO.
Battery current
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage is sensor assembly
10.9 V or more, and 1 second or more have elapsed (battery temperature
after starting. sensor)
P0516
Battery temperature sensor output is less than 0.104 Short to GND in
V, and duration of the malfunction is 0.5 seconds or battery temperature
more (1-trip detection logic). sensor circuit
ECM
Battery current
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage is sensor assembly
10.9 V or more, and 1 second or more have elapsed (battery temperature
after starting. sensor)
P0517
Battery temperature sensor output is more than Open in battery
4.867 V, and duration of the malfunction is 0.5 temperature sensor
seconds or more (1-trip detection logic). circuit
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
(b) Disconnect the A11 battery current sensor assembly
connector.
2 (THB) - 3 (GND) 20 to 30°C (68 to 86°F) 1.5 to 2.6 kΩ

*a
(Battery Current Sensor Assembly)
(d) Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
REPLACE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY -

2.
ECM)
(a) Disconnect the A33 and A35 ECM connectors.
A33-24 (THB) - A11-2 (THB) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-30 (EPA2) - A11-3 (GND) Always Below 1 Ω
A33-24 (THB) or A11-2 (THB) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

A35-30 (EPA2) or A11-3 (GND) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010BL058X
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: P1530-P1532: Short in Battery Current Sensor
Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC P1530 Short in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
DTC P1531 Open in Battery Current Sensor Circuit
DTC P1532 Battery Current Sensor Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The battery current sensor assembly installed on the negative (-) battery terminal detects the amount of
current supplied from the generator.
The battery current sensor assembly changes current to voltage (at the negative (-) battery terminal) and
sends it to the ECM. The ECM controls the voltage of the generator based on the signals from the battery
current sensor assembly.

NO.
Battery
current
sensor
assembly
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage is 10.9 V or Open or
more, and 1 second or more have elapsed after starting. short to
P1530
Battery current sensor output is less than 0.347 V, and duration GND in
of the malfunction is 0.5 seconds or more (1-trip detection logic). battery
current
sensor
circuit
ECM
Battery
current
sensor
assembly
Engine speed is 500 r/min or more, battery voltage is 10.9 V or Short to
more, and 1 second or more have elapsed after starting. +B or VC
P1531
Battery current sensor output is more than 4.653 V, and duration in
of the malfunction is 0.5 seconds or more (1-trip detection logic). battery
current
sensor
circuit
ECM
Ignition switch ON
Current sensor fixing diagnosis: The difference between the
maximum and minimum current value when changing charging
states is less than 0.07 V, and the charging state changes 10
times or more in succession when malfunctioning (1-trip Battery
detection logic). current
Charging side properties diagnosis: After the alternator target sensor
DUTY has changed from 60% or more to less than 40%, with the assembly
alternator target DUTY is less than 40%, the battery voltage is Short in
P1532
less than 13.2 V and the battery current sensor voltage is 2.6 V battery
or more and less than 5 V, and the duration of the malfunction is current
30 seconds or more (1-trip detection logic). sensor
Discharge side properties diagnosis: After the alternator target circuit
DUTY has changed from less than 40% to 60% or more, with the ECM
alternator target DUTY at 60% or more, the battery voltage is
more than 13.7 V and the battery current sensor voltage is 0 V
or more and less than 2.4 V and the duration of malfunction is 30
seconds or more (1-trip detection logic).
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ANY OTHER DTCS OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO P1530, P1531, P1532)

(e) Read the DTC.

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC P1530, P1531 and P1532 are output A
DTC P1530, P1531, P1532 and other DTCs are output B
HINT:
If any DTCs other than P1530, P1531 and P1532 are output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (BATTERY CURRENT)
(a) Turn all of the electrical systems (headlights, blower motor, rear defogger, etc.) off.
(e) Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List / Battery Current.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Battery current is fixed at 0 A, or fluctuates by +/- 1 A or less between -100 and 100 A A
Battery current fluctuates between -20 and 0 A B
B USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK

(a) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery
terminal.
(b) Disconnect the A11 battery current sensor assembly connector.
1 (VIN) - 3 (GND) Always 3 to 10 kΩ
1 (VIN) - 4 (IB) Always Below 0.5 kΩ
3 (GND) - 4 (IB) Always 3 to 10 kΩ

*a
(d) Reconnect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
REPLACE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

NG ASSEMBLY
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY -

4.
ECM)
A33-11 (IB) - A11-4 (IB) Always Below 1 Ω
A35-22 (VCP2) - A11-1 (VIN) Always Below 1 Ω

A35-30 (EPA2) - A11-3 (GND) Always Below 1 Ω
A33-11 (IB) or A11-4 (IB) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-22 (VCP2) or A11-1 (VIN) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A35-30 (EPA2) or A11-3 (GND) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003SCX00LX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001GNI01AX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. PRECAUTION
(a) Check that the battery cables are connected to the correct terminals.
(b) Disconnect the battery cables when the battery is given a quick charge.
(c) Do not perform tests with a high voltage insulation resistance tester.
(d) Never disconnect the battery cables while the engine is running.
(e) Check that the charging cable nuts are tightened on terminal B of the generator and on the engine
room relay block.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003MXQ01AX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Charging System
Battery
Charging warning light comes on Generator assembly
Charging system
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001HWM00YX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000220604OX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: CHARGING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK ECM
(a) Measure the resistance, voltage and waveform according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING TERMINAL DESCRIPTION CONDITION SPECIFIED

(SYMBOL) COLOR CONDITION
A33-2 (BATT) -
W - B-R Battery power Always 11 to 14 V
A34-1 (E03)
A33-11 (IB) -
R-B - Y-B Battery current sensor Ignition switch ON 0.5 to 4.5 V
A35-30 (EPA2)
A33-24 (THB) - R-W - Y- Battery temperature Ignition switch ON 20 to

1.1 to 2.4 V
A35-30 (EPA2) B sensor 50°C (68 to 122°F)
B-R -
A34-1 (E03) -
Body Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground
ground
A35-18 (ALT) - Pulse generation

V - B-R Generator Idling with warm engine
A34-1 (E03) (See waveform 1)
A35-22 (VCP2) - Power source of battery

G-B - Y-B Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
A35-30 (EPA2) current sensor assembly
If the result is not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.
(b) WAVEFORM 1
Generator
TESTER TOOL VEHICLE SPECIFIED

CONNECTION SETTING CONDITION CONDITION
Idling with
A35-18 (ALT) 2 V/DIV., 2 Correct waveform as
warm
- A34-1 (E03) msec./DIV. shown in illustration
engine
HINT:
The oscilloscope waveform shown in the illustration is an

example for reference only. Noise, chattering, etc. are not
shown.
A constant value is not output, as the duty ratio varies
depending on the electrical load and battery condition.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017VI01GX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017VK02QX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE GENERATOR REAR END COVER
(a) Remove the 4 through bolts.
(b) Using the heat gun, heat the generator rear end cover.
Heating Temperature:
ITEM TEMPERATURE
Generator Rear End Cover 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F)
*1 Heat gun
(c) Insert the 2 screw drivers, remove the generator rear end
cover as shown in the illustration.
2. REMOVE GENERATOR PULLEY
(a) Mount the generator in a vise between aluminum plates.
*1 Aluminium plate
(b) Remove the nut and generator pulley.
3. REMOVE GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the generator drive end frame assembly from

the generator rotor assembly.
4. REMOVE GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME BEARING
(a) Mount the generator drive end frame assembly in a vise

(b) Remove the 4 bolts and bearing retainer.
*1 Aluminium plate
(c) Using SST and a hammer, tap out the bearing.
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00250
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
5. REMOVE GENERATOR ROTOR BEARING
(a) Set the SST to the generator rotor assembly between

wooden blocks.
SST: 09387-00041
*1 Wooden block
(b) Hold the SST nut, and turn the SST bolt to remove the
generator rotor bearing.
*1 SST Nut
*2 SST Bolt
*a Hold
*b Turn
6. REMOVE GENERATOR COIL ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 6 bolts and generator coil assembly.
7. REMOVE GENERATOR BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 4 bolts and generator brush holder

assembly.
8. REMOVE BRUSH
(a) Remove the cover A from the brush holder assembly.

(b) Remove the cover B from the brush holder assembly.
(c) Using a soldering iron, separate the 2 brushes from the

brush holder assembly.
*1 Soldering iron
9. REMOVE GENERATOR HOLDER WITH RECTIFIER
(a) Remove the terminal cover.
(b) Remove the nut and the terminal.

(c) Remove the 3 bolts and the generator holder with
rectifier.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017VH02NX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT BRUSH
(a) Using a vernier caliper, measure the brush length.
Standard length:
22.5 mm (0.885 in)
Minimum length:
5.0 mm (0.196 in)
*a Minimum length
*b Standard length
*c Mark of minimum length
Brush
If the brush length is less than the minimum, replace the brush.
2. INSPECT GENERATOR COIL ASSEMBLY

the table below.
1-2
1-3
2-3
Always Below 1 Ω
4-5
4-6
5-6
*a Lead wire
If the result is not as specified, replace the generator

coil assembly.
(b) Check the resistance.

the table below.
Stator core - Lead wire Always 10 kΩ or higher
*1 Stator core
*a Lead wire

coil assembly.
3. INSPECT GENERATOR ROTOR ASSEMBLY
(a) Check the generator rotor assembly for an open circuit.

the table below.
Slip ring - Slip ring 20°C (68°F) 2.0 to 2.4 Ω
*1 Slip Ring

rotor assembly.
(b) Check if the generator rotor assembly is grounded.

the table below.
Slip ring - Rotor core Always 10 kΩ or higher
*1 Slip Ring
*2 Rotor Core

rotor assembly.
(c) Check the slip ring diameter.
(1) Using a vernier caliper, measure the diameter of each

slip ring.
Standard diameter:
22.7 mm (0.893 in.)
Minimum diameter:
22.1 mm (0.870 in.)
If the diameter is less than the minimum, replace the

generator rotor assembly.
*a Diameter of Slip Ring
4. INSPECT GENERATOR HOLDER WITH RECTIFIER

the table below.

P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6

(Tester positive) Below 1 Ω
P1, P2, P3, P4, B (Tester negative)
P5, P6 - B P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
(Tester negative) 10 kΩ or higher
B (Tester positive)
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
(Tester positive) 10 kΩ or higher
P1, P2, P3, P4, E (Tester negative)
P5, P6 - E P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6
(Tester negative) Below 1 Ω
E (Tester positive)

holder with rectifier.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017VG01NX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Install the generator with the 2 bolts.
(b) Connect the generator connector.
(c) Connect the generator wire with the nut.
(d) Install the terminal cap.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017VL02TX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL GENERATOR HOLDER WITH RECTIFIER
(a) Install the generator holder with rectifier with the 3 bolts.
(b) Install the terminal with the nut.
(c) Install the terminal cover.
2. INSTALL BRUSH
(a) Using a soldering iron, install the 2 brushes to the brush
holder assembly.
*1 Soldering iron
*2 Solder
(b) Install the cover B to the brush holder assembly.
(c) Install the cover A to the brush holder assembly.
3. INSTALL GENERATOR BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the generator brush holder assembly with the 4

bolts.
Bolt A - Torque: 2.0 N·m (20 kgf·cm, 18in·lbf)

Bolt B - Torque: 3.9 N·m (40 kgf·cm, 35in·lbf)
(b) While pushing the 2 brushes into the generator rear end
cover, insert a 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) pin into the generator
rear end cover.
NOTICE:
Remove the pin after reassembling the generator.
*1 Pin 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.)
4. INSTALL GENERATOR COIL ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the generator coil assembly with the 6 bolts.
5. INSTALL GENERATOR ROTOR BEARING
(a) Using SST and a press, press in a new generator rotor

bearing.
SST: 09632-36010
SST: 09820-36010
6. INSTALL GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME BEARING
(a) Using SST and a press, press in a new generator drive

end frame bearing.
SST: 09950-60010
09951-00520
SST: 09950-70010
09951-07100
(b) Install the bearing retainer with the 4 screws.
7. INSTALL GENERATOR DRIVE END FRAME ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the generator drive end frame assembly to the

generator rotor assembly.
8. INSTALL GENERATOR PULLEY
(a) Mount the generator in a vise between aluminum plates.
*1 Aluminium plate
(b) Install the generator pulley with the nut.
9. INSTALL GENERATOR REAR END COVER
(a) using the heat gun, heat the generator rear end cover.
Heating Temperature:
ITEM TEMPERATURE
Generator Rear End Cover 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F)
*1 Heat gun
(b) Install the generator rear end cover.
(c) Pull out the pin of the generator rear end cover.
(d) Install the 4 through bolts.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000017VJ01HX
Title: FA20 BATTERY / CHARGING: GENERATOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism in which the door glass moves down slightly
when the door is opened, and in which the glass moves up when the door closed in order to
prevent the door molding from being damaged. When the negative (-) battery terminal needs to
(a) Remove the terminal cap.
*1 terminal cap
(b) Remove the nut and disconnect the generator wire.
(c) Disconnect the generator connector.
(d) Remove the 2 bolts and generator assembly.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000109K06OX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013
FR-S)
Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION SYMPTOM TROUBLE AREA
ITEM
Bus Buffer ECU Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with U) that are PSP (option
Communication output correspond to "Bus Buffer ECU Communication Stop Mode" connector) branch
Stop Mode in "DTC Combination Table" line or connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
Before measuring the resistance of the CAN bus, turn the ignition switch off and leave the vehicle
for 1 minute or more without operating the key, switches or opening or closing the doors. After
that, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and leave the vehicle for 1 minute
or more before measuring the resistance.
Because the order of diagnosis is important to allow correct diagnosis, make sure to begin
troubleshooting using How to Proceed with Troubleshooting when CAN communication system
related DTCs are output .
After performing repairs, perform the DTC check procedure and confirm that the DTCs are not
output again.
DTC check procedure: Turn the ignition switch to ON and wait at least 10 seconds.
After the repair, perform CAN Bus Check and check that all the ECUs and sensors connected to the
CAN communication system are displayed .
HINT:
Operating the ignition switch, any other switches or a door triggers related ECU and sensor
communication on the CAN. This communication will cause the resistance value to change.
Even after DTCs are cleared, if a DTC is stored again after driving the vehicle for a while, the
malfunction may be occurring due to vibration of the vehicle. In such a case, wiggling the ECUs or
wire harness while performing the inspection below may help determine the cause of the
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (PSP (OPTION CONNECTOR) BRANCH LINE)

terminal.

CONDITION
D29-4 (CANH) - D29-5 Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal
*a
(to PSP (Option Connector))
REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN BRANCH LINE OR

NG CONNECTOR (PSP (OPTION CONNECTOR))
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001WG905CX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Center Airbag Sensor Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Center Airbag Sensor Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Air bag
ECU
assembly
branch
line or
connector
Either condition is met: Power
source
"Airbag" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus Check"
Center Airbag circuit of
screen of the Techstream
Sensor air bag
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with U)
Communication ECU
that are output correspond to "Center Airbag Sensor
Stop Mode assembly
Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC Combination
Air bag
Table"
ECU
assembly
ground
circuit
Air bag
ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY BRANCH LINE)
(b) Disconnect the D27 air bag ECU assembly connector.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to Air Bag ECU Assembly)

NG CONNECTOR (AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY)
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)

table below.

D27-25 (GND) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω
Body ground negative (-) battery terminal
D27-26 (GND) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω

*a
(b) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
Standard Voltage:
D27-21 (IG) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a

OK REPLACE AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FAD05LX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Line for Short to +B (2013 FR-S)
Check CAN Bus Line for Short to +B
DESCRIPTION
There may be a short circuit between one of the CAN bus lines and +B when no resistance exists between
terminals 6 (CANH) and 16 (BAT) or 14 (CANL) and 16 (BAT) of the DLC3.
SYMPTOM TROUBLE AREA
Short to +B in CAN main

bus line
Short to +B in CAN branch
line
Main body ECU (network
gateway ECU)
Combination meter
assembly
ECM
TCM*
No resistance exists between terminals 6 (CANH) and 16 (BAT)
Skid control ECU (brake
or 14 (CANL) and 16 (BAT) of DLC3.
actuator assembly)
Steering angle sensor (spiral
cable sub-assembly)
Power steering ECU
assembly
Air bag ECU assembly
CAN No. 1 junction
connector
CAN No. 2 junction
connector
*: for Automatic Transmission System
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
DTC check procedure: Turn the ignition switch to ON, wait at least 60 seconds,
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43

CAN No. 2 junction connector.
TESTER CONDITION SPECIFIED CONNECTED TO

D43-1 - D10-
16 (BAT) Cable disconnected from negative (-
6 kΩ or higher CAN No. 1 junction connector
D43-12 - D10- ) battery terminal
16 (BAT)
D43-2 - D10-
6 kΩ or higher Combination meter assembly
16 (BAT)
D43-3 - D10-
16 (BAT) Cable disconnected from negative (- Main body ECU (network
6 kΩ or higher
D43-14 - D10- ) battery terminal gateway ECU)
16 (BAT)
D43-5 - D10-
6 kΩ or higher DLC3
16 (BAT)
D43-6 - D10-
16 (BAT) Cable disconnected from negative (- Steering angle sensor (spiral
6 kΩ or higher
D43-17 - D10- ) battery terminal cable sub-assembly)
16 (BAT)
D43-7 - D10-
6 kΩ or higher PSP (option connector)
16 (BAT)
D43-8 - D10-
6 kΩ or higher Air bag ECU assembly
16 (BAT)
D43-9 - D10-
6 kΩ or higher ECM
16 (BAT)
*1 DLC3

*a
(to CAN No. 2 Junction Connector)
*b to CAN No. 1 Junction Connector
*c to Combination Meter Assembly
*d to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)
*e to DLC3
*f to Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
*g to PSP (Option Connector)
*h to Air Bag ECU Assembly
*i to ECM
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (CAN No. 1 junction connector main line) B
NG (ECM main line) C
NG (ECU or sensor branch line) D
NG (DLC3 branch line or PSP (option connector) branch line) E
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE

B (CAN NO. 1 J/C)
REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN MAIN BUS LINE OR

C CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 2 J/C - ECM)
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CONNECTED

D COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN BRANCH LINE

CONNECTED TO DLC3 OR PSP (OPTION
E CONNECTOR)
REPLACE CAN NO. 2 JUNCTION CONNECTOR

A
2. CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 1 J/C)
(a) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A17


A17-5 - D10-16
(BAT) Cable disconnected from negative (-)
6 kΩ or higher TCM
A17-16 - D10- battery terminal
16 (BAT)
A17-6 - D10-16
(BAT) Cable disconnected from negative (-) Skid control ECU (brake
6 kΩ or higher
A17-17 - D10- battery terminal actuator assembly)
16 (BAT)
A17-7 - D10-16
6 kΩ or higher CAN No. 2 junction connector
16 (BAT)
A17-8 - D10-16
6 kΩ or higher Power steering ECU assembly
16 (BAT)
*1 DLC3

*a
*b to TCM
*c to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)
*d to CAN No. 2 Junction Connector
*e to Power Steering ECU Assembly
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) main line) C

B CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 2 J/C - CAN NO. 1 J/C)
CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 1 J/C - SKID CONTROL
C ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY))
CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CONNECTED


A
3. CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN CONNECTED COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
(a) Reconnect all the wire harness connectors (the A17 CAN No. 1 junction connector and D43
CAN No. 2 junction connector).
(b) Disconnect the ECU or sensor connected to the CAN bus line that is shorted to +B.
HINT:
If the ECU or sensor has multiple connectors, disconnect the connector that includes the CAN bus
lines. To determine the ECU or sensor that is connected to the shorted bus line, refer to the terminals
of ECU tables .

table below.

D10-6 (CANH) -
D10-16 (BAT) Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
D10-14 (CANL) - negative (-) battery terminal higher
D10-16 (BAT)
*1 DLC3
HINT:
If the resistance changes to 6 kΩ or higher when the connector is disconnected from the ECU (or
sensor), there may be a short in the ECU (or sensor).
REPAIR OR REPLACE REPAIR OR REPLACE

CORRESPONDING ECU/SENSOR WIRE OR
NG CONNECTOR
REPLACE CORRESPONDING ECU OR SENSOR
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FAD05PX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Line for Short to GND (2013 FR-
S)
Check CAN Bus Line for Short to GND
DESCRIPTION
There may be a short circuit between one of the CAN bus lines and GND when there is no resistance
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 4 (CG) or 14 (CANL) and 4 (CG) of the DLC3.
Short to ground in CAN main

bus line
Short to ground in CAN
branch line
gateway ECU)
Combination meter assembly
ECM
No resistance exists between terminals 6 (CANH) and 4 (CG) or
TCM*
14 (CANL) and 4 (CG) of DLC3.
Skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly)
Steering angle sensor (spiral
cable sub-assembly)
Power steering ECU assembly
CAN No. 1 junction connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43


D43-1 - D10-
4 (CG) Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or
D43-12 - ) battery terminal higher
D10-4 (CG)
D43-2 - D10-
D10-4 (CG)
D43-3 - D10-
4 (CG) Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or Main body ECU (network gateway
D43-14 - ) battery terminal higher ECU)
D10-4 (CG)
D43-5 - D10-
DLC3
D10-4 (CG)
D43-6 - D10-
4 (CG) Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or Steering angle sensor (spiral
D43-17 - ) battery terminal higher cable sub-assembly)
D10-4 (CG)
D43-7 - D10-
PSP (option connector)
D10-4 (CG)
D43-8 - D10-
D10-4 (CG)
D43-9 - D10-
ECM
D10-4 (CG)
*1 DLC3

*a
*e to DLC3
*i to ECM
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE

B (CAN NO. 1 J/C)

CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CONNECTED


E CONNECTOR)

A
2. CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE (CAN NO. 1 J/C)


A17-5 - D10-4
(CG) Cable disconnected from negative (-)
200 Ω or higher TCM
4 (CG)
A17-6 - D10-4
(CG) Cable disconnected from negative (-) Skid control ECU (brake
200 Ω or higher
A17-17 - D10- battery terminal actuator assembly)
4 (CG)
A17-7 - D10-4
200 Ω or higher CAN No. 2 junction connector
4 (CG)
A17-8 - D10-4
200 Ω or higher Power steering ECU assembly
4 (CG)
*1 DLC3

*a
*b to TCM
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A

CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CONNECTED


A
3. CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN CONNECTED COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
(b) Disconnect the ECU or sensor connected to the CAN bus line that is shorted to ground.
HINT:
If the ECU or sensor has multiple connectors, disconnect the connector that includes the CAN bus
lines. To determine the ECU or sensor that is connected to the shorted bus line, refer to the terminals
of ECU tables .

table below.

D10-6 (CANH) -
D10-4 (CG) Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
D10-14 (CANL) negative (-) battery terminal higher
- D10-4 (CG)
*1 DLC3
HINT:
If the resistance changes to 200 Ω or higher when the connector is disconnected from the ECU (or
sensor), there may be a short in the ECU (or sensor).
REPAIR OR REPLACE REPAIR OR REPLACE

CORRESPONDING ECU/SENSOR WIRE OR
NG CONNECTOR
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001FAD05IX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Check CAN Bus Lines for Short Circuit (2013 FR-
S)
Check CAN Bus Lines for Short Circuit
DESCRIPTION
There may be a short circuit between the V bus main lines and/or CAN branch lines when the resistance
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of the DLC3 is below 57 Ω.
Short in CAN main bus line

Short in CAN branch line
Main body ECU (network gateway
ECU)
ECM
TCM*
Resistance between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of
Skid control ECU (brake actuator
DLC3 is below 57 Ω.
assembly)
Steering angle sensor (spiral cable
sub-assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (ECM)
(b) Disconnect the A33 ECM connector.

CONDITION
A33-19 (CANH) - A33-18 Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery

114 to 126 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to ECM)
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID

NG CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY))
OK REPLACE ECM
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
2.
ASSEMBLY))
(a) Reconnect the A33 ECM connector.
(b) Disconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator


CONDITION

114 to 126 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN

NG NO. 2 J/C)
REPLACE SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE

OK ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
3. CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Reconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(b) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43


D43-1 - D43- Cable disconnected from negative (-

114 to 126 Ω CAN No. 1 junction connector
12 ) battery terminal
D43-2 - D43- Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or

13 ) battery terminal higher
D43-3 - D43- Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or Main body ECU (network gateway
14 ) battery terminal higher ECU)

1 MΩ or higher DLC3
D43-6 - D43- Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or Steering angle sensor (spiral
17 ) battery terminal higher cable sub-assembly)

1 MΩ or higher PSP (option connector)
D43-8 - D43- Cable disconnected from negative (- 200 Ω or

19 ) battery terminal higher

114 to 126 Ω ECM

*a
*e to DLC3

*i to ECM
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN

B NO. 1 J/C)

CHECK FOR SHORT IN CONNECTED


E CONNECTOR)

A
4. CHECK FOR SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 1 J/C)


A17-5 - A17- Cable disconnected from negative (-)

200 Ω or higher TCM
16 battery terminal
A17-6 - A17- Cable disconnected from negative (-) Skid control ECU (brake
114 to 126 Ω
17 battery terminal actuator assembly)

1 MΩ or higher CAN No. 2 junction connector
18 battery terminal

200 Ω or higher Power steering ECU assembly
19 battery terminal

*a
*b to TCM
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A


CHECK FOR SHORT IN CONNECTED


A
5. CHECK FOR SHORT IN CONNECTED COMPONENT (ECU, SENSOR)
(b) Disconnect the connector that includes terminals CANH and CANL from the ECU (or sensor)
to which the short circuited branch line is connected .

table below.

D10-6 (CANH) - Cable disconnected from

57 to 63 Ω
D10-14 (CANL) negative (-) battery terminal
*1 DLC3
HINT:
If the resistance becomes normal (between 57 and 63 Ω) when the connector is disconnected from
the ECU (or sensor), there may be a short in the ECU (or sensor).
If the resistance does not become normal (between 57 and 63 Ω) when the connector is
disconnected from the ECU (or sensor), repair or replace the short circuited branch line or
connector.
REPAIR OR REPLACE CORRESPONDING ECU

NG OR SENSOR BUS LINE OR CONNECTOR
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001F1S06SX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop
Mode (2013 FR-S)
Combination Meter ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Combination
meter
assembly
branch line
or
connector
Either condition is met: Power
source
"Combination Meter" is not displayed on the "CAN
Combination circuit of
Bus Check" screen of the Techstream
Meter ECU combination
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with
Communication meter
U) that are output correspond to "Combination
Stop Mode assembly
Meter ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Combination
Combination Table"
meter
assembly
ground
circuit
Combination
meter
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY BRANCH
1.
LINE)
(b) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly

connector.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to Combination Meter Assembly)

CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER
NG ASSEMBLY)
OK

table below.

D7-20 (ES1) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω
D7-40 (ES2) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω

*a
Standard Voltage:
D7-1 (B) - Body ground Ignition switch off 11 to 14 V
D7-2 (IG+) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V

*a

OK REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004UCE002X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. ECUS OR SENSORS WHICH COMMUNICATE THROUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(a) V Bus
(1) Main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
(2) Combination meter assembly

(3) ECM
(4) TCM*
(5) Skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
(6) Steering angle sensor (spiral cable sub-assembly)

(7) Power steering ECU assembly
(8) Air bag ECU assembly
(9) PSP (option connector)
2. CHECK FOR INSTALLED SYSTEMS (ECUS AND SENSORS) THAT ADOPT CAN COMMUNICATION
(a) The systems (ECUs and sensors) that adopt CAN communication vary depending on the vehicle and optional
equipment. Check which systems (ECUs and sensors) are installed on the vehicle.
HINT:
The names of ECUs and sensors shown on the Techstream display may differ from those shown in the DTC Table by
ECU section that follows.
ECU/SENSOR NAME TECHSTREAM DISPLAY APPLICABILITY
Main body ECU (network gateway ECU) Main Body Installed on all vehicles
Combination meter assembly Combination Meter Installed on all vehicles
ECM ECM (Engine) Installed on all vehicles
for Automatic Transmission

TCM TCM
System
Skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) Skid Control (ABS/VSC/TRAC) Installed on all vehicles
Steering angle sensor (spiral cable sub- Spiral cable (Steering Angle
Installed on all vehicles
assembly) Sensor)
Power steering ECU assembly Power Steering (EPS) Installed on all vehicles
Air bag ECU assembly Airbag Installed on all vehicles
PSP (option connector) - Installed on all vehicles
3. CAN BUS CHECK
HINT:
The ECUs and sensors that are properly connected to the CAN communication system can be displayed using the
Techstream.
(a) Using the Techstream, select "CAN Bus Check" from "System Select".
NOTICE:
It may be possible to select buses that do not have ECUs or sensors from the bus selection pull-down menu.
This is not a malfunction. (This occurs when optional devices are not on a sub bus that is monitored by a
gateway function equipped ECU.)
In the bus selection pull down menu, all buses applicable to the model are displayed (e.g. LIN communication
buses are also displayed). Therefore, refer to the wiring diagrams to check the names of the sub buses for CAN
communication .
HINT:
Different connection statuses are indicated by the background color of the ECUs and sensors that are displayed.
Explanation of CAN Bus Check (Communication Bus Check) screen
BUS TYPE BACKGROUND CONNECTION STATUS

COLOR
Communication has been normal since the start of the CAN bus
White
check.
Communication stop occurred at least once since the start of

Yellow the CAN bus check, but communication is currently occurring
(unstable communication).
V Bus
Communication was established at least once since the start of
Red the CAN bus check, but communication is currently not
occurring (unstable communication).
Communication stop has continued since the start of the CAN

Not displayed
bus check.*1
White
check.

Sub bus Yellow the CAN bus check, but communication is currently occurring
(gateway function equipped ECU (unstable communication).
that does not have history of Communication was established at least once since the start of
connected ECUs)*2 Red the CAN bus check, but communication is currently not
occurring (unstable communication).
Communication stop has continued since the start of the CAN

Not displayed
bus check.*1
White
check.

Yellow the CAN bus check, but communication is currently occurring
(unstable communication).
Currently not communicating (either of the following):
Communication stop has continued since the start of

Sub bus the CAN bus check
Red
(gateway function equipped ECU Communication was established at least once since
that has history of connected the start of the CAN bus check, but communication is
ECUs)*3 currently not occurring
Either of the following:
If a gateway function equipped ECU cannot

communicate, the sub bus and ECUs connected to
Not displayed the sub bus will not be displayed.
If no ECUs are connected to the sub bus, ''There is no
system found on the Communication Bus'' will be
displayed.
HINT:
Gateway function equipped ECUs relay signals between the ECUs connected to the different buses.
*1: ECUs that are present in the vehicle but are not displayed on the CAN Bus Check.
*2: Gateway function equipped ECU that does not memorize the sub bus ECUs that are connected to it.
*3: Gateway function equipped ECU that memorizes the sub bus ECUs that are connected to it.
If none of the connected ECUs are displayed, or there is no response from the vehicle to the Techstream, check
the DLC3 branch and the V bus main bus lines for a malfunction.
(b) Observe the connection response screen for approximately 2 minutes to check for a change in connection status
of the connected ECUs and sensors.
HINT:
If an open occurs in one of the lines of a CAN branch (except DLC3), output from the other branch line (the line
that is not open) will be unstable and it may interfere the response (display) of other ECUs and sensors.
If the connection status changes during the inspection, repair the open in the branch line of the ECU or sensor
that does not respond (is not detected) and then perform the CAN bus check again.
4. HOW TO INTERPRET CAN BUS CHECK (COMMUNICATION BUS CHECK) SCREEN

(a) When a communication stop is currently occurring, the probable malfunctioning part can be determined from
the CAN bus check and by using the following methods.
NOTICE:
The following CAN bus wiring diagram is provided only as an example. This wiring diagram is different from
the actual wiring diagram for this vehicle.
HINT:
When a communication stop is currently occurring, it is easier to determine the probable malfunctioning part
from the CAN bus check rather than from communication DTCs.
Wait for approximately 2 minutes after turning the Ignition switch ON (or simulate the driving conditions that
enable the malfunction to be reproduced) and select the CAN bus check. Then observe the communication status
of each ECU on the screen.
(b) If a communication error of only 1 ECU or sensor is indicated on the CAN Bus Check screen, a communication
stop of the ECU or sensor is suspected.
Example: Open in both CAN branch lines of ECU B on the V bus

*a V Bus *b Sub bus
*c Terminating Resistor *d Location of malfunction
*e Not displayed or background color changes to red or yellow *f CAN Bus Check screen
HINT:
When there are communication stops, ECUs are present in the vehicle even though they are not displayed on the
CAN Bus Check screen.
(c) If communication errors for multiple ECUs or sensors are indicated on

the CAN Bus Check screen, then a communication stop of the ECU or
sensor that shows a more serious communication stop (an ECU or a
sensor which is not displayed) is suspected.
Example: Open in a CAN branch line for ECU D on the V bus
*a Background color periodically changes to yellow or red
*b Not displayed or background color is yellow or red
*c Not displayed
Explanation of CAN Bus Check (Communication Bus Check) screen
BUS TYPE BACKGROUND CONNECTION STATUS

COLOR
Communication has been normal

White since the start of the CAN bus
check.
Communication stop occurred at

least once since the start of the
Yellow CAN bus check, but communication
is currently occurring (unstable
communication).
V Bus
Communication was established at
Red CAN bus check, but communication
is currently not occurring (unstable
communication).
Communication stop has continued

Not displayed since the start of the CAN bus
check.*1

check.

Sub bus is currently occurring (unstable
(gateway function communication).
equipped ECU that
does not have history Communication was established at
of connected ECUs)*2 least once since the start of the
Red CAN bus check, but communication
is currently not occurring (unstable
communication).
Communication stop has continued

Not displayed since the start of the CAN bus
check.*1

check.

is currently occurring (unstable
communication).
Currently not communicating

(either of the following):
Communication stop has

continued since the start
of the CAN bus check
Red Communication was
Sub bus established at least once
(gateway function since the start of the
equipped ECU that has CAN bus check, but
history of connected communication is
ECUs)*3 currently not occurring
Either of the following:
If a gateway function
equipped ECU cannot
communicate, the sub
bus and ECUs connected
to the sub bus will not
Not displayed be displayed.
If no ECUs are
connected to the sub
bus, ''There is no system
found on the
Communication Bus'' will
be displayed.
HINT:
Gateway function equipped ECUs relay signals between the ECUs

connected to the different buses.
*1: ECUs that are present in the vehicle but are not displayed on the
CAN Bus Check screen.
*2: Gateway function equipped ECU that does not memorize the sub
bus ECUs that are connected to it.
*3: Gateway function equipped ECU that memorizes the sub bus ECUs
that are connected to it.
The example of the CAN Bus Check screen in the illustration shows the
result of electrical noise on the CAN bus which is caused by an open in
a CAN branch line of ECU D (output from the other branch line is
unstable) and the communication of ECU C is also unstable. In
addition, in this example, ECU C is equipped with a gateway function.
Therefore, communication is also unstable between the sub bus ECUs
of ECU C and the V bus.
The example in the illustration shows that ECU D is not displayed on
the CAN Bus Check screen. This indicates a more significant
communication stop. In this case, a communication stop of ECU D is
suspected.
(d) If a communication error is indicated on both the V bus and sub bus
on the CAN Bus Check screen, suspect any communication stop
displayed for the V bus first.
Example: Open in both CAN branch lines of ECU C on the V bus
*a Not displayed or background color changes to red
HINT:
In the CAN bus check, it is possible to confirm the communication

status of ECUs connected to the V bus after connecting the
Techstream to the DLC3. As for the sub buses, it is possible to confirm
which sub bus connected ECUs can communicate with a gateway
function equipped ECU on the V bus.
If a gateway function equipped ECU has a communication error, ECUs
connected to the gateway function equipped ECU are also affected,
and communication stops will be indicated.
The CAN Bus Check screen in the illustration shows that ECU C has a
gateway function and a communication stop in ECU C is suspected.
(e) If the CAN Bus Check screen indicates a communication stop only in
the sub bus, a communication stop in the sub bus is suspected.
Example: Open in both CAN branch lines of ECU G on the sub bus
*a Background color changes to red
HINT:
A communication error in a sub bus does not affect the V bus or other
buses.
When a gateway function equipped ECU has memorized the ECUs that
are connected to the sub bus, if any of the ECUs connected to the
gateway function equipped ECU has a communication error, the
background color changes to yellow or red. (The displayed name will
not disappear.)
(f) If both of the V bus main bus lines are open, ECUs or sensors that are located farther away from the DLC3 than
the open part will be displayed as a communication stop on the CAN Bus Check screen.
(In this case, ECU A and B are not displayed or their background color changes to red.)
*a V Bus *b Sub Bus
*e Not displayed or background color is red *f CAN Bus Check screen
HINT:
If a communication error occurs in an ECU, it is not displayed on the CAN Bus Check screen even though the ECU is
present.
(g) If both of the sub bus main bus lines are open, the ECUs that are located farther away from the gateway
function equipped ECU than the open part will be displayed as a communication stop on the CAN Bus Check
screen.
(In this case, ECU I and J are not displayed or their background color changes to red.)
*a V Bus *b Sub Bus
*e Not displayed or background color is red *f CAN Bus Check screen
*g Gateway function equipped ECU - -
(h) When any of the following malfunctions occurs, CAN communication

cannot be established and almost all ECUs and sensors on the bus
show a communication error on the CAN Bus Check screen.
*a When any of the following malfunctions occurs on the V bus
*b When any of the following malfunctions occurs on a sub bus
*c Not displayed
Details of Malfunction
Short between CAN lines (CANH and CANL)
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and +B
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and ground
Open in a CAN main bus line
HINT:
When a malfunction occurs on the V bus, almost all ECUs and sensors
on the V bus and sub bus indicate a communication error (almost all
ECUs are not displayed). As communication with the gateway function
equipped ECU that is connected to the V bus stops, communication
from the ECUs connected to the sub bus that is monitored by the
gateway function equipped ECU also stops (these ECUs are not
displayed).
When a malfunction occurs in a sub bus, almost all ECUs connected to
the sub bus indicate a communication error.
A communication error in a sub bus does not affect the V bus or other
buses.
The malfunctioning part can be determined by checking for a short
circuit between CAN bus lines or between a CAN bus line and ground
or +B short using an electrical tester.
5. HOW TO INTERPRET COMMUNICATION DTCS (DTCS THAT START WITH U)

(a) If a CAN communication error cannot be reproduced, determine the suspected malfunctioning part using the
DTCs stored in ECUs that are connected to the CAN buses by following the procedure below.
HINT:
Communication DTCs (DTCs that start with U) indicate a communication error between the ECU that stores the DTC
and the ECU that is indicated by the DTC.
(1) If multiple ECUs store a communication DTC for a particular ECU, a communication stop of the ECU is
suspected.
*a Items to be checked - -
NOTICE:
This DTC table is from another model, and is only used here to show an example of DTCs that are output when
there is an open in a CAN branch line for the main body ECU. This table does not show DTCs applicable to this
vehicle.
Even though a DTC title may indicate a communication error with a specific ECU, the ECU name used in the DTC
name on the Techstream may differ depending on the ECU that stores the DTC. (Regarding output DTCs, refer to
step 6 and the DTC chart for each ECU.)
HINT:
As multiple ECUs indicate a communication stop with the main body ECU, the possibility of a communication stop of
the main body ECU is high.
(2) If almost all of the communication DTCs of an ECU are stored, a communication stop of the ECU is
suspected.
*a Items to be checked - -
NOTICE:
This DTC table is from another model, and is only used here to show an example of DTCs that are output
when there is an open in a CAN branch line for the main body ECU. This table does not show DTCs applicable
to this vehicle.
HINT:
If almost all of the DTCs of the main body ECU are stored, the possibility of a communication stop of the main
body ECU is high.
(3) When a CAN communication error occurs, many DTCs are output. DTCs other than communication error
DTCs (such as DTCs that start with C or B) and communication DTCs for the ABS system are important
DTCs, however it may be easier to determine the malfunctioning part by examining the overall situation
without considering these DTCs.
(b) To help determine the part of the sub bus that has a communication error, prioritize the communication stop
DTCs stored in the gateway function equipped ECU.
*a Items to be checked *b ECM
*c Gateway function equipped ECU *d Location of malfunction
*e V Bus *f Sub Bus
NOTICE:
This DTC table is from another model, and is only used here to show the ECUs connected to both a V bus and
a sub bus. It shows DTCs output when there is an open in the main bus lines for the ECM on the sub bus.
This table does not show DTCs applicable to this vehicle.
HINT:
As gateway function equipped ECUs (sub bus monitor ECU) monitor signals from all ECUs that are connected to
sub buses, gateway function equipped ECUs can detect ECUs with a communication stop more accurately.
When there is a communication stop for the gateway function equipped ECU (gateway), communication with
ECUs connected to other buses such as the V bus stops. Therefore, communication DTCs for ECUs connected to
other buses are also stored.
(c) When any of the following malfunctions occurs, many DTCs are likely to be output from many ECUs. Because of
this, it may be difficult to determine the probable malfunctioning part.
Short between CAN lines (CANH and CANL)

Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and ground
Short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and +B
Open in a CAN branch line (CANH or CANL) of an ECU or sensor
Open in a CAN main bus line (CANH or CANL) between 2 ECUs that have a terminating resistor
6. DTC TABLE BY ECU
HINT:
In the CAN communication system, the CAN communication DTCs of each ECU can be displayed using the
Techstream.
If CAN communication system DTCs are output, trouble cannot be determined only by the DTCs. Perform
troubleshooting according to How to Proceed with Troubleshooting .
If system function temporarily returns to normal, DTCs may not be output again even though the following DTC
check procedures are used.
(a) Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU) / Techstream Display "Main Body"
DTC DETECTION DTC DETECTION DTC DETECTION PRE- DTC CHECK WARNING DTC
ITEM CONDITION CONDITION PROCEDURE INDICATION STORAGE
IN METER METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
Main body ECU (network second DTC is
ignition
Control Module gateway computer) elapses. stored until
switch to ON
U0073 Communication communications stopped The power - it is cleared
and wait for
Bus "A" Off because of an error with source using the
at least 15
high-speed CAN. voltage of Techstream.
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
second DTC is
Lost The main body ECU ignition
elapses. stored until
Communication (network gateway ECU) switch to ON
U0100 The power - it is cleared
With ECM/PCM does not receive data and wait for
source using the
"A" from the ECM. at least 15
voltage of Techstream.
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
second DTC is
The main body ECU ignition
Lost elapses. stored until
(network gateway ECU) switch to ON
U0101 Communication The power - it is cleared
does not receive data and wait for
with TCM source using the
from the TCM. at least 15
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
The main body ECU Turn the
Lost second DTC is
(network gateway ECU) ignition
Communication elapses. stored until
does not receive data switch to ON
U0122 with Vehicle The power - it is cleared
from the skid control ECU and wait for
Dynamics source using the
(brake actuator at least 15
Control Module voltage of Techstream.
assembly). seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost Turn the
The main body ECU second DTC is
Communication ignition
(network gateway ECU) elapses. stored until
with Instrument switch to ON
U0155 does not receive data The power - it is cleared
Panel Cluster and wait for
from the combination source using the
(IPC) Control at least 15
meter assembly. voltage of Techstream.
Module seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
ignition
Invalid Data (network gateway elapses. stored until
switch to ON
U0401 Received From computer) detects The power - it is cleared
and wait for
ECM/PCM "A" abnormal data from the source using the
at least 15
ECM. voltage of Techstream.
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are
met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
ignition
Invalid Data (network gateway elapses. stored until
switch to ON
U0402 Received From computer) detects The power - it is cleared
and wait for
TCM abnormal data from the source using the
at least 15
TCM. voltage of Techstream.
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Invalid Data second DTC is
(network gateway ignition
Received From elapses. stored until
computer) detects switch to ON
U0416 Vehicle The power - it is cleared
abnormal data from the and wait for
Dynamics source using the
skid control ECU (brake at least 15
actuator assembly). seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Invalid Data second DTC is
(network gateway ignition
Received From elapses. stored until
computer) detects switch to ON
U0423 Instrument The power - it is cleared
abnormal data from the and wait for
Panel Cluster source using the
combination meter at least 15
assembly. seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Turn the
second DTC is
ignition
Unstable communications elapses. stored until
CAN Fail/Error switch to ON
U1201 because of an error with The power - it is cleared
Counter Circuit and wait for
high-speed CAN. source using the
at least 15
seconds.
the main
body ECU
(network
gateway
ECU) is 10
V or more.
HINT:
This ECU uses the CAN communication system for DTC communication.
(b) Combination Meter Assembly / Techstream Display "Combination Meter"
IN METER METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
The combination meter second Turn the DTC is
Control Module assembly elapses. ignition switch stored until
U0073 Communication communications stopped The power to ON and wait - it is cleared
Bus "A" Off because of an error with source for at least 10 using the
high-speed CAN. voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second Turn the DTC is
Lost The combination meter
elapses. ignition switch stored until
Communication assembly does not
U0100 The power to ON and wait - it is cleared
with ECM/PCM receive data from the
source for at least 10 using the
"A" ECM.
voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost The combination meter second Turn the DTC is
Communication assembly does not elapses. ignition switch stored until
U0122 with Vehicle receive data from the The power to ON and wait - it is cleared
Dynamics skid control ECU (brake source for at least 10 using the
Control Module actuator assembly). voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost The combination meter second Turn the DTC is
U0131 with Power receive data from the The power to ON and wait - it is cleared
Steering power steering ECU source for at least 10 using the
Control Module assembly. voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
The combination meter second Turn the DTC is
Lost
assembly does not elapses. ignition switch stored until
Communication
U0140 receive data from the The power to ON and wait - it is cleared
with Body
main body ECU (network source for at least 10 using the
Control Module
gateway ECU). voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost The combination meter
Communication assembly does not
U0151 The power to ON and wait - it is cleared
with Restraints receive data from the air
Control Module bag ECU assembly.
the
combination
meter
assembly is
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(c) ECM / Techstream Display "Engine"
DTC DETECTION ITEM DTC DETECTION DTC DETECTION DTC CHECK WARNING DTC
CONDITION PRE-CONDITION PROCEDURE INDICATION STORAGE
IN METER METHOD
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
The ECM to ON DTC is
Turn the ignition
Control Module communications and 1 MIL warning stored until
switch to ON and
U0073 Communication stopped because of an second light it is cleared
wait for at least
Bus "A" Off error with high-speed elapses. illuminates. using the
10 seconds.
CAN. The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON DTC is
Turn the ignition
Lost The ECM does not and 1 MIL warning stored until
switch to ON and
U0101 Communication receive data from the second light it is cleared
wait for at least
with TCM TCM. elapses. illuminates. using the
10 seconds.
The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Lost The ECM does not to ON DTC is
Turn the ignition
Communication receive data from the and 1 MIL warning stored until
switch to ON and
U0122 with Vehicle skid control ECU second light it is cleared
wait for at least
Dynamics Control (brake actuator elapses. illuminates. using the
10 seconds.
Module assembly). The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Lost to ON DTC is
The ECM does not Turn the ignition
Communication and 1 MIL warning stored until
receive data from the switch to ON and
U0155 With Instrument second light it is cleared
combination meter wait for at least
Panel Cluster (IPC) elapses. illuminates. using the
assembly. 10 seconds.
Control Module The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON DTC is
Turn the ignition
The ECM detects and 1 MIL warning stored until
Invalid Data switch to ON and
U0402 abnormal data from second light it is cleared
Received from TCM wait for at least
the TCM. elapses. illuminates. using the
10 seconds.
The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
The ECM detects to ON DTC is
Invalid Data Turn the ignition
abnormal data from and 1 MIL warning stored until
Received from switch to ON and
U0416 the skid control ECU second light it is cleared
Vehicle Dynamics wait for at least
(brake actuator elapses. illuminates. using the
Control Module 10 seconds.
assembly). The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Invalid Data to ON DTC is
The ECM detects Turn the ignition
Received from and 1 MIL warning stored until
abnormal data from switch to ON and
U0423 Instrument Panel second light it is cleared
the combination meter wait for at least
Cluster Control elapses. illuminates. using the
assembly. 10 seconds.
Module The Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
ECM is
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(d) TCM / Techstream Display "ECT"
DTC DETECTION ITEM DTC DETECTION DTC DETECTION DTC CHECK WARNING DTC
CONDITION PRE-CONDITION PROCEDURE INDICATION STORAGE
IN METER METHOD
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
The TCM to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
Control Module communications and 1 switch to ON stored until
U0073 Communication stopped because of an second and wait for at - it is cleared
Bus "A" Off error with high-speed elapses. least 10 using the
CAN. The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
Lost The TCM does not and 1 switch to ON stored until
U0100 Communication receive data from the second and wait for at - it is cleared
with ECM/PCM "A" ECM. elapses. least 10 using the
The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Lost to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
The TCM does not
Communication and 1 switch to ON stored until
receive data from the
U0122 with Vehicle second and wait for at - it is cleared
skid control ECU (brake
Dynamics Control elapses. least 10 using the
actuator assembly).
Module The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
The TCM does not to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
Lost
receive data from the and 1 switch to ON stored until
Communication
U0140 main body ECU second and wait for at - it is cleared
with Body Control
(network gateway elapses. least 10 using the
Module
ECU). The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Lost to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
The TCM does not
Communication and 1 switch to ON stored until
receive data from the
U0155 With Instrument second and wait for at - it is cleared
combination meter
Panel Cluster (IPC) elapses. least 10 using the
assembly.
Control Module The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
Invalid Data The TCM detects and 1 switch to ON stored until
U0401 Received from abnormal data from second and wait for at - it is cleared
ECM/PCM "A" the ECM. elapses. least 10 using the
The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
The TCM detects to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
Invalid Data
abnormal data from and 1 switch to ON stored until
Received from
U0416 the skid control ECU second and wait for at - it is cleared
Vehicle Dynamics
(brake actuator elapses. least 10 using the
Control Module
assembly). The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
The TCM detects to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
Invalid Data
abnormal data from and 1 switch to ON stored until
Received from
U0422 the main body ECU second and wait for at - it is cleared
Body Control
(network gateway elapses. least 10 using the
Module
computer). The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions
are met:
The
ignition
switch
is
turned
Invalid Data to ON Turn the ignition DTC is
The TCM detects
Received from and 1 switch to ON stored until
abnormal data from
U0423 Instrument Panel second and wait for at - it is cleared
the combination meter
Cluster Control elapses. least 10 using the
assembly.
Module The seconds. Techstream.
power
source
voltage
of the
TCM is
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(e) Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly) / Techstream Display "ABS/VSC/TRAC"
IN METER METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second Turn the
The skid control ECU DTC is
elapses. ignition ABS
Control Module (brake actuator assembly) stored until
The power switch to ON warning
U0073 Communication communications stopped it is cleared
source and wait for light
Bus OFF because of an error with using the
voltage of at least 60 illuminates.
high-speed CAN. Techstream.
the skid seconds.
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly) is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second Turn the
DTC is
Lost The skid control ECU elapses. ignition ABS
stored until
Communication (brake actuator assembly) The power switch to ON warning
U0100 it is cleared
With ECM/PCM does not receive data source and wait for light
using the
"A" from the ECM. voltage of at least 10 illuminates.
Techstream.
the skid seconds.
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly) is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
second Turn the
DTC is
The skid control ECU elapses. ignition ABS
Lost stored until
(brake actuator assembly) The power switch to ON warning
U0101 Communication it is cleared
does not receive data source and wait for light
with TCM using the
from the TCM. voltage of at least 10 illuminates.
Techstream.
the skid seconds.
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly) is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
The skid control ECU second Turn the
Lost DTC is
(brake actuator assembly) elapses. ignition ABS
Communication stored until
does not receive data The power switch to ON warning
U0126 With Steering it is cleared
from the steering angle source and wait for light
Angle Sensor using the
sensor (spiral cable sub- voltage of at least 60 illuminates.
Module Techstream.
assembly). the skid seconds.
control ECU
(brake
actuator
assembly) is
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(f) Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly) / Techstream Display "-"
HINT:
The steering angle sensor is connected to the CAN communication system, but CAN communication DTCs are not
output.
(g) Power Steering ECU Assembly / Techstream Display "EMPS"

IN METER METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost The power steering ECU EPS
Communication assembly does not warning
U0100 The power to ON and wait it is cleared
with ECM/PCM receive data from the light
"A" ECM. illuminates.
the power
steering
ECU
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Lost The power steering ECU second Turn the DTC is
EPS
warning
U0122 with Vehicle receive data from the The power to ON and wait it is cleared
light
Dynamics skid control ECU (brake source for at least 10 using the
illuminates.
Control Module actuator assembly). voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the power
steering
ECU
assembly is
10 V or
more.
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Invalid Data The power steering ECU second Turn the DTC is
EPS
Received from assembly does not send elapses. ignition switch stored until
warning
U0416 Vehicle data to the skid control The power to ON and wait it is cleared
light
Dynamics ECU (brake actuator source for at least 10 using the
illuminates.
Control Module assembly). voltage of seconds. Techstream.
the power
steering
ECU
assembly is
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(h) Air Bag ECU Assembly / Techstream Display "SRS Airbag"
IN METER METHOD
Both conditions are

met:
The ignition
switch is
turned to
ON and 1
Air bag ECU assembly Turn the ignition DTC is
second
Control Module communications switch to ON stored until
elapses.
U0073 Communication stopped because of an and wait for at - it is cleared
The power
Bus "A" Off error with high-speed least 60 using the
source
CAN. seconds. Techstream.
voltage of
the air bag
ECU
assembly is
10 V or
more.
HINT:
(i) PSP (Option Connector) / Techstream Display "-"
HINT:
The PSP (option connector) is connected to the CAN communication system, but CAN communication DTCs are not
output.
7. DTC COMBINATION TABLE (OPEN IN CAN BRANCH OF V BUS, PAST COMMUNICATION ERROR)
(a) Regarding the past communication error of ECUs and sensors connected to the V bus (in this case, normal was
displayed when performing the CAN bus check, but communication DTCs are output), the probable CAN branch
that had a malfunction can be determined based on the following DTC combination table.
HINT:
Based on the table below and DTCs output from ECUs connected via CAN communication, the probable part for
which communication stop occurred can be determined.
Regarding an open in a CAN branch and a communication stop that is currently occurring, the malfunctioning
part can be confirmed easily by performing the CAN bus check using the Techstream because the ECU or sensor
connected to the CAN branch does not respond (the ECU or sensor name will not be displayed on the screen).
If an open in a CAN main bus line, a short between the CAN bus lines (CANH and CANL) or a +B or ground short
in the CAN bus occurs, DTCs of almost all ECUs (or sensors) on the CAN bus may be output, or a message
indicating a communication error may be displayed on the Techstream screen. In this case, check the resistance
of the CAN bus (steps 7 to 9) first.
If an open occurs in just one of the lines of a CAN branch, DTCs which are not related to malfunctioning parts
may be output (DTCs may be displayed randomly), or a message indicating a communication error may be
displayed.
DTC TROUBLE MODE
OUTPUT OUTPUT SKID CONTROL POWER STEERING ANGLE ECM TRANSMISSION

ECU DTC ECU STEERING ECU SENSOR COMMUNICATION CONTROL ECU
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION STOP MODE COMMUNICATION
STOP MODE STOP MODE STOP MODE STOP MODE
U0073 ○*1 X X X X
Skid Control
ECU (Brake U0100 ○*1 X X ○ X
Actuator U0101 ○*1 X X X ○
Assembly)
U0126 ○*1 X ○ X X
Power U0100 X ○*1 X ○ X

Steering
U0122 ○ ○*1 X X X
ECU
Assembly U0416 X X*1 X X X
U0073 X X X ○*1 X
U0101 X X X ○*1 ○
U0122 ○ X X ○*1 X
ECM U0155 X X X ○*1 X
U0402 X X X ○*1 ○
U0416 ○ X X ○*1 X
U0423 X X X X*1 X
U0073 X X X X ○*1
U0100 X X X ○ ○*1
U0122 ○ X X X ○*1
U0140 X X X X ○*1
TCM
U0155 X X X X ○*1
U0416 X X X X X*1
U0422 X X X X X*1
U0423 X X X X X*1
U0073 X X X X X
U0100 X X X ○ X
U0101 X X X X ○
Main Body U0122 ○ X X X X

ECU
U0155 X X X X X
(Network
Gateway U0401 X X X X*2 X
ECU) U0402 X X X X X*2
U0416 X*2 X X X X
U0423 X X X X X
U1201 X X X X X
U0073 X X X X X
U0100 X X X ○ X
Combination U0122 ○ X X X X
Meter
Assembly U0131 X X X X X
U0140 X X X X X
U0151 X X X X X
Air Bag ECU

U0073 X X X X X
Assembly
DTC TROUBLE MODE
OUTPUT ECU OUTPUT MAIN BODY ECU COMBINATION METER CENTER AIRBAG BUS BUFFER ECU
DTC COMMUNICATION ECU COMMUNICATION SENSOR COMMUNICATION
STOP MODE STOP MODE COMMUNICATION STOP MODE
STOP MODE
U0073 X X X X
Skid Control
ECU (Brake U0100 X X X X
Actuator U0101 X X X X
Assembly)
U0126 X X X X
U0100 X X X X
Power Steering
U0122 X X X X
ECU Assembly
U0416 X X X X
U0073 X X X X
U0101 X X X X
U0122 X X X X
ECM U0155 X ○ X X
U0402 X X X X
U0416 X X X X
U0423 X X X X
U0073 X X X X
U0100 X X X X
U0122 X X X X
U0140 ○ X X X
TCM U0155 X ○ X X
U0401 X X X X
U0416 X X X X
U0422 X X X X
U0423 X X X X
U0073 ○*1 X X X
U0100 ○*1 X X X
U0101 ○*1 X X X
U0122 ○*1 X X X
Main Body ECU
U0155 ○*1 ○ X X
(Network
Gateway ECU) U0401 X*1 X X X
U0402 X*1 X X X
U0416 X*1 X X X
U0423 X*1 X*2 X X
U1201 ○*1 X X X
U0073 X ○*1 X X
U0100 X ○*1 X X
Combination U0122 X ○*1 X X

Meter Assembly U0131 X ○*1 X X
U0140 ○ ○*1 X X
U0151 X ○*1 ○ X
Air Bag ECU

U0073 X X ○*1 X
Assembly
HINT:
○: Set
X: Not set or may be set according to the malfunctioning part when one line of a CAN branch is open.
-: DTC is not output.
*:1 DTC is not output during communication error, but will be output as a history DTC (past DTC) when
communication returns to normal.
*:2 DTC may not be stored depending on conditions.
8. CAN BUS WAVEFORMS

HINT:
This waveform is measured between terminals CANH and GND, and terminals CANL and GND of the DLC3. (Use
this as a reference for diagnosis of CAN communication lines.)
When malfunctions in multiple ECUs are suspected based on CAN Bus Check and DTCs checked using the
Techstream, check the resistance of the CAN bus using an ohmmeter first . If no problems are found,
check the following waveforms.
If a waveform is not similar to one of the following 3 patterns (Group 1), then an open in a CAN main bus line,
an open in a CAN branch line, or a short between a CAN line (CANH or CANL) and ground is suspected (Group
2).
Wiggle the connector and wire harness to check if the waveform changes.
(a) CAN bus waveforms (Group 1)
(1) Normal waveform

(2) Open in both of the lines (CANH and CANL) of a CAN branch
HINT:
Waveforms (waveforms shown using dotted lines) are not present

from an ECU or sensor connected to a CAN branch with an open circuit
in both lines. (Waveforms from other ECUs or sensors are normal.)
Because this waveform is similar to a normal waveform, instead of
using the waveform, the malfunctioning part can be narrowed down by
performing a CAN bus check.
(3) Short between the CAN bus lines (CANH and CANL)
HINT:
Waveforms disappear.
If the malfunction is in an ECU, disconnecting the ECU will change the
waveform. If the waveform does not change, a malfunction in the wire
harness is suspected.
(b) CAN bus waveforms (reference) (Group 2)
NOTICE:
The following CAN bus waveforms can be used only as reference. The actual measured waveform may differ
significantly depending on the location of the open or short circuit.
(1) Open in a CAN branch line (CANH)
HINT:
An abnormal waveform is output from an ECU with an open in one of

its CAN branch lines. Because this abnormal output interferes with the
signals from other ECUs, the output of other ECUs will also appear
abnormal.
Narrow down the malfunctioning part by checking DTCs or performing
a CAN bus check, or by checking waveform changes when ECUs or
sensors are disconnected. The waveform will change to one for an
open in both sides of a CAN branch when the ECU or sensor with an
open CAN branch line is disconnected.
(2) Open in a CAN branch line (CANL)
HINT:
An abnormal waveform is output from an ECU with an open in one of

its CAN branch lines. Because this abnormal output interferes with the
signals from other ECUs, the output of other ECUs will also appear
abnormal.
Narrow down the malfunctioning part by checking DTCs or performing
a CAN bus check, or by checking waveform changes when ECUs or
sensors are disconnected. The waveform will change to one for an
open in both sides of a CAN branch when the ECU or sensor with an
open CAN branch line is disconnected.
(3) Open in a CAN main bus line (CANH)
HINT:
Waveforms of ECUs or sensors that are nearer to the DLC3 than the
open part are almost normal.
Waveforms of ECUs or sensors that are on the opposite side of the
DLC3 from the open part are abnormal.
An open in a CAN main bus line can be confirmed by measuring the
resistance between the CANH and CANL terminals of any CAN branch.
(4) Short between a CAN bus line (CANH) and ground
HINT:
Narrow down the shorted part by checking for waveform changes

when disconnecting connectors from the CAN junction connector or
when disconnecting ECUs or sensors.
A short to ground in the CANH line can be confirmed by measuring the
resistance between CANH and ground using an ohmmeter.
(5) Short between a CAN bus line (CANL) and ground
HINT:
Narrow down the shorted part by checking for waveform changes

when disconnecting connectors from the CAN junction connector or
when disconnecting ECUs or sensors.
A short to ground in the CANL line can be confirmed by measuring the
resistance between CANL and ground using an ohmmeter.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WIP0B6X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: ECM Communication Stop Mode (2013 FR-S)
ECM Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Power
source
Either condition is met: circuit of
ECM
"ECM (Engine)" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus Check"
ECM ECM main
Communication line or
Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start with U)
Stop Mode connector
that are output correspond to "ECM Communication
ECM
Stop Mode" in "DTC Combination Table"
ground
circuit
ECM
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (ECM MAIN LINE)
(b) Disconnect the A33 ECM connector.

CONDITION

114 to 126 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to ECM)
REPAIR OR REPLACE CAN MAIN BUS LINE

NG OR CONNECTOR (ECM MAIN LINE)
OK
2. CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
(a) Check the ECM power source circuit .

OK REPLACE ECM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WI60A6X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

(2013 FR-S)

1. PRECAUTIONS WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTICE:
related DTCs are output.
If the CAN communication system is malfunctioning, check the contact pressure of the terminals in
connectors, as insufficient terminal contact pressure may be the cause .
Refer to Diagnosis System for the DTCs for the CAN communication system.
Refer to troubleshooting of each system if DTCs regarding the CAN communication system are not
output.
(a) CAN communication DTCs are output for CAN main bus and CAN branch malfunctions as well as for
internal malfunctions or power source malfunctions of ECUs or sensors for systems using CAN
communication. Therefore, when DTCs for internal malfunctions or power source malfunctions of
corresponding systems are output at the same time as CAN communication DTCs, troubleshoot
according to the internal malfunction and power source malfunction DTCs.
(b) The DLC3 branch and V bus main bus circuits can be checked for malfunctions by inspecting at the
DLC3 terminals using an electrical tester.
NOTICE:
When inspecting at the DLC3 connector, do not connect the tester directly to the terminals. Instead,
connect using service wires.
Inspections for an open in an ECU or sensor branch, or inspections for buses other than the V bus
cannot be performed from the DLC3.
(c) An open in a branch for ECUs or sensors that are connected to the CAN main bus can be checked
by performing a CAN bus check using the Techstream. (This inspection is possible when the DLC3
branch and V bus main bus lines are normal.)
(d) If the V bus had a communication error, the probable ECU or sensor for which communication
stopped can be determined using the combination of communication DTCs (DTCs that start with U)
that are output.
(e) When an open circuit is detected, before disconnecting the related connectors for inspection, push
in on the connector body to check that the connector is not loose or disconnected.
(f) When a connector is disconnected, check that the terminals and the connector body are not
cracked, deformed or corroded.
HINT:
If the ignition switch can be turned to ON when the vehicle is brought in for repair, check for DTCs
and check the illumination condition of the indicators in the combination meter assembly and the
basic operation of the vehicle (such as steering operation) promptly.
Do not turn the ignition switch off until the inspection of the vehicle is finished, as some fail-safe
functions are canceled when the ignition switch is turned off.
If the ignition switch cannot be turned to ON when the vehicle is brought in, measure the voltage of
the battery. If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before performing
troubleshooting.
NEXT
HINT:
Ask the customer if the vehicle is/was equipped with additional devices such as a theft deterrent
device or monitor. (If equipped, explain the customer that the additional devices will be removed
before performing troubleshooting as the malfunction cannot be checked properly.)
(a) It is useful to confirm the symptoms and the conditions in which the vehicle was operating
at the time when a malfunction occurred. This helps to narrow down the malfunctioning part.
HINT:
What was affected (system, part or meter warning indicators)

What happened (details of the malfunction)
When (occurrence date and time, frequency and if it recurs or not)
Under what kind of situation did the problem occur (driving and operating condition at the
occurrence and weather)
Road type or condition (city, suburb, paved road, unpaved road, highway, etc.)
Return conditions (what made the vehicle return to normal. Example: ignition switch was turned off)
Points to be Confirmed
Electric power steering

- Normal
- A little heavier than usual
Symptom - There was no assist
Multi-information display
- Whether each display has stopped updating
Others
Illumination of warning lights and the order in which they illuminated
- Slip indicator light
- ABS warning light
- Check Engine warning light
- Brake warning light
- SRS warning light
Meter warning lights
- Others
Meter display
- Shift indicator
- Speedometer
- Tachometer (if it is fixed at 0 rpm)
- Engine coolant temperature gauge (if it is fixed at COLD)
NEXT
3. CHECK TECHSTREAM OPERATION
HINT:
Read the Techstream operators manual before use .
(d) Check that the Techstream and ECUs can communicate with the ignition switch ON.
HINT:
If communication is impossible, the Techstream screen will indicate an error.

If communication between the Techstream and ECUs is impossible, either the Techstream or vehicle
has a malfunction.
When communication between the Techstream and the vehicle is impossible, but communication is
possible when the Techstream is connected to another vehicle, the vehicle has the malfunction.
Inspect the CANH and CANL branch lines of the DLC3 and the ECU power source circuits (in this
case perform steps 7 to 9 first). In addition, check that the BAT terminal of the DLC3 receives
battery voltage (11 V or more).
If communication between the Techstream and ECUs is still impossible even when the Techstream is
connected to another vehicle, the Techstream has a malfunction. Perform the self tests described in
the Techstream operators manual. (The Techstream may be malfunctioning or its battery may be
discharged.)
RESULT PROCEED
TO
OK (Communication between the Techstream and the vehicle is possible.) A
OK (Communication between the Techstream and the vehicle is impossible but communication
B
is possible when connected to another vehicle.)
NG (Communication is not possible between the Techstream and the vehicle, nor between the
C
Techstream and another vehicle.)
B Go to step 7
C Refer to Techstream operator's manual
4. CHECK DTC
(a) Using the Techstream, perform Health Check to read current and history DTCs and record
them.
NOTICE:
CAN communication DTCs are output when there is an open or short in any of the communication
lines. Any problems with the power source of a corresponding ECU or sensor, or problems in the
ECU, the sensor itself also cause these DTCs to be output.
If a CAN communication line connector is disconnected with the ignition switch ON, the ECUs of the
corresponding system and related systems store a DTC.
HINT:
If an open in a CAN main bus line, a short between the CAN bus lines (CANH and CANL) or a +B or
ground short in a CAN bus occurs, DTCs of almost all ECUs and sensors on the CAN bus may be
output (or a message indicating a communication error may be displayed on the Techstream
screen). In this case, check the resistance of the CAN bus (steps 7 to 9) first.
If an open occurs in just one of the lines of a CAN branch, DTCs which are not related to
malfunctioning parts may be output (DTCs may be displayed randomly), or a message indicating a
communication error may be displayed on the Techstream.
(b) Read the freeze frame data using the Techstream and record it.
NEXT
CHECK COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION CHECK (CONNECTION STATUS CHECK

5.
USING TECHSTREAM)
(a) Select "CAN Bus Check" from the screen on the Techstream.
(b) Record all the DTCs stored for ECUs and sensors.
NEXT
6. CHECK CAN BUS CHECK (CONNECTION STATUS CHECK USING TECHSTREAM)
(a) Based on the vehicle equipment and specifications, confirm the systems that use CAN
communication .
(b) Select "CAN Bus Check" from the screen on the Techstream.
(c) Observe the screen for approximately 2 minutes to check the ECUs and sensors displayed on
the screen.
NEXT
7. CHECK DLC3 BRANCH LINE AND V BUS MAIN LINE (CANH - CANL)
NOTICE:
Before measuring the resistance of the CAN bus, turn the ignition switch off and leave the
vehicle for 1 minute or more without operating the key, switches or opening or closing the
doors. After that, disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal and leave the
vehicle for 1 minute or more before measuring the resistance.
HINT:
Operating the ignition switch, any other switches or a door triggers the related ECU and sensor

terminal.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal
*1 DLC3
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
NG (64 Ω or higher) B
NG (Below 57 Ω) C
B GO TO OPEN IN CAN MAIN BUS LINE
C GO TO SHORT IN CAN BUS LINES
8. CHECK FOR SHORT TO GND IN V BUS (CANH, CANL - CG)

table below.

D10-6 (CANH) - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or

D10-4 (CG) negative (-) battery terminal higher
D10-14 (CANL) Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or

- D10-4 (CG) negative (-) battery terminal higher
*1 DLC3
NG GO TO SHORT TO GND IN CAN BUS LINE
OK
9. CHECK FOR SHORT TO +B IN V BUS (CANH, CANL - BAT)

table below.

D10-6 (CANH) - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

D10-16 (BAT) negative (-) battery terminal higher
D10-14 (CANL) - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

D10-16 (BAT negative (-) battery terminal higher
*1 DLC3
NG GO TO SHORT TO +B IN CAN BUS LINE
OK
CHECK RESULT OF CAN BUS CHECK (CONNECTION STATUS CHECK USING

10.
TECHSTREAM)
(a) Inspect or repair the probable malfunctioning part based on the check result of step 6 (the
step in which CAN Bus Check was performed).
Result of CAN Bus Check (Connection Status Check Using Techstream):
RESULT PROCEED
TO
All ECUs and sensors connected to the CAN communication system are displayed on the
screen. A
(CAN bus circuit is currently normal.)
One of the ECUs and sensors connected to the V Bus is not displayed on the screen.
B
(Open in ECU or sensor branch lines, or communication interrupted.)
In addition to the ECUs and sensors which are connected to the CAN communication system
but are not displayed on the screen, there are ECUs or sensors for which the detection status
C
changes (changes between detected and not detected) during the inspection.
(Open in one side of ECU or sensor branch lines.)
NOTICE:
Non-installed ECUs or sensors will not be displayed. Do not mistake them for being in
communication stop mode.
It may be possible to select buses that do not have ECUs or sensors from the bus selection pull-
down menu on the Techstream. This is not a malfunction.
HINT:
Regarding CAN Bus Check, refer to How to Interpret CAN Bus Diagnosis (CAN Bus Check) Screen
.
If the detection status of ECUs changes during the inspection, one of the branch lines of a
connected ECU or sensor may be open. (Signals from the ECU or sensor that has an open in one of
its branch lines create electrical noise, affecting response to the Techstream and the ECUs and
whether or not sensors displayed.)
B GO TO COMMUNICATION STOP MODE TABLE
GO TO OPEN IN ONE SIDE OF CAN BRANCH

C LINE
CHECK RESULT OF COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION CHECK (SELECT THE

11.
MALFUNCTIONING BUS)
(a) Inspect or repair the probable malfunctioning part based on the check result of step 5 (the
step in which checking for communication malfunction DTCs was performed).
HINT:
When checking for communication DTCs, refer to How to Interpret Communication DTCs (DTCs that
start with U) .
If communication DTCs are stored, and all ECUs and sensors connected to the CAN communication
system are displayed on the Communication Bus Check (CAN bus check) screen of the Techstream,
a past malfunction that is currently not occurring is suspected.
When a CAN branch of the V bus is malfunctioning, because the ECUs and sensors related to it
detect the malfunction, the problem area can be determined using the combination of DTCs that are
output.
NEXT
12. DTC COMBINATION TABLE
(a) Confirm the problem according to the combination of output DTCs regarding the CAN
communication system .
RESULT PROCEED TO
Combination of DTCs is not in DTC Combination Table A
Combination of DTCs is in DTC Combination Table B
HINT:
CAN communication system history DTCs may indicate the problem if CAN communication system DTCs
are output and all ECUs and sensors connected to the CAN communication system are displayed on
"CAN Bus Check" of the Techstream.
B GO TO COMMUNICATION STOP MODE TABLE
13. IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM (PAST MALFUNCTION IN MAIN BUS OF V BUS)
(a) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(b) Clear the DTCs using the Techstream.
(c) Perform the tests in Symptom Simulation to check the wire harnesses and connectors
including those for V bus main bus lines .
(d) Based on the results of the check, inspect the parts that output DTCs to determine the
malfunctioning part.
HINT:
If DTCs are output, do not turn the ignition switch off.
NEXT
14. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
NEXT
15. CONFIRMATION TEST*

NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001F1V05UX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Main Body ECU Communication Stop Mode (2013
FR-S)
Main Body ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
branch line or
Either condition is met: connector
Power source
"Main Body" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus circuit of main
Main Body ECU Check" screen of the Techstream body ECU
Communication Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start (network
Stop Mode with U) that are output correspond to "Main Body gateway ECU)
ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC Main body ECU
Combination Table" (network
gateway ECU)
ground circuit
Main body ECU
(network
gateway ECU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY
1.
ECU) BRANCH LINE)
(b) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway

ECU) connector.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))

CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
NG GATEWAY ECU))
OK
2. CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) .
(b) Remove the instrument panel junction block assembly .

*a - -
3E-1 - MB-8 (IG) Battery voltage is applied to terminals 3A-15 and 3A-12 Below 1 Ω
MB-1 (BECU) - 3A-27 Always Below 1 Ω
MB-11 (GND) - 3B-18 Always Below 1 Ω
MB-32 (+B) - 3C-19 Always Below 1 Ω

NG BLOCK ASSEMBLY
OK

(a) Install the instrument panel junction block assembly.
Component without harness connected Front view of wire harness connector

*a *b
(Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly) (to Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly)

CONDITION
Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery

D6-1 (GND) - Body ground Below 1 Ω
terminal
MB-11 (GND) - Body Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery

Below 1 Ω
ground terminal
(c) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.

*a - -
Standard Voltage:
MB-1 (BECU) - Body ground Ignition switch off 11 to 14 V
MB-8 (IG) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 11 to 14 V
MB-32 (+B) - Body ground Ignition switch off 11 to 14 V


OK GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001V9P06AX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in CAN Main Bus Line (2013 FR-S)
Open in CAN Main Bus Line
DESCRIPTION
There may be an open circuit one of the V bus main lines and/or a DLC3 branch line when the resistance
between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of the DLC3 is 64 Ω or higher.
DLC3 branch line or connector

CAN main bus line or
connector
Resistance between terminals 6 (CANH) and 14 (CANL) of ECM
DLC3 is 64 Ω or higher. Skid control ECU (brake
actuator assembly)
This malfunction is not related to the lines of a CAN main bus branch or to ECUs or sensor connected a
CAN main bus branch.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (DLC3 BRANCH LINE)

table below.

D10-6 (CANH) - Cable disconnected from 114 to 126

D10-14 (CANL) negative (-) battery terminal Ω
*1 DLC3
NOTICE:
When the measured value is 127 Ω or higher and a CAN
communication system DTC is output, there may be a
fault besides disconnection of the DLC3 branch line. For
that reason, troubleshooting should be performed again
from How to Proceed with Troubleshooting after
repairing the trouble area .

NG CONNECTED TO DLC3
OK
2. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (ECM)
(a) Disconnect the A33 ECM connector.

CONDITION

114 to 126 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to ECM)
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID

ASSEMBLY))
OK REPLACE ECM
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
3.
ASSEMBLY))
(a) Reconnect the A33 ECM connector.


CONDITION

114 to 126 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN

NG NO. 2 J/C)

4. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2 J/C)
(a) Reconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) connector.
(b) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the D43


Cable disconnected from negative (-) CAN No. 1 junction

D43-1 - D43-12 114 to 126 Ω
battery terminal connector
Cable disconnected from negative (-)

D43-9 - D43-20 114 to 126 Ω ECM
battery terminal

*a
*c to ECM
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
OK A
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO.

B 2 J/C - CAN NO. 1 J/C)


A
5. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 2 J/C - CAN NO. 1 J/C)
(a) Reconnect the wire harness connector to the D43 CAN No. 2 junction connector.
(b) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A17
A17-7 - A17-18 Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery terminal 114 to 126 Ω

*a

OR CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 1 J/C - CAN NO. 2
NG J/C)
OK
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (CAN NO. 1 J/C - SKID CONTROL ECU
6.
(BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY))

table below.

A17-6 - A17- Cable disconnected from
114 to 126 Ω
17 negative (-) battery terminal

*a
*b to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)

OR CONNECTOR (CAN NO. 1 J/C - SKID
ASSEMBLY))

OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001ZUR06GX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line (2013 FR-S)
Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line
DESCRIPTION
If an ECU or sensor is not displayed on the CAN Bus Check screen of the Techstream and some ECUs and
sensors repeatedly appear and disappear from the screen when the CAN main bus lines are normal (there
is no open, short, short to +B or short to GND in the main bus lines), there may be an open circuit in
either of one pair of CAN branch lines.
HINT:
If some ECUs and sensors repeatedly appear and disappear from the CAN Bus Check screen,
communication between the normal ECUs (sensors) and the Techstream may be affected by the
incomplete signals that are output from the ECU that has an open circuit in either of its CAN branch
lines. In this case, the CAN branch lines for the ECUs and sensors that repeatedly appear and disappear
from the screen are normal and the ECU that is not displayed on the screen may be the main cause of
the problem (this ECU may have an open circuit in either of its CAN branch lines).
One side of CAN branch line is open, or

output signals are incomplete.
Short in CAN main bus line

Short in CAN branch line
Main body ECU (network gateway
ECU)
2 or more ECUs and/or sensors do not appear on the
ECM
Techstream "CAN Bus Check" screen.
TCM*
Skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly)
Steering angle sensor (spiral cable
sub-assembly)
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction may be occurring due to vibration of the vehicle. In such a case, wiggling the ECUs or wire
harness while performing the inspection below may help determine the cause of the malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR OPEN IN ONE SIDE OF V BUS BRANCH LINE
(a) Based on the vehicle equipment and specifications, confirm the systems that use CAN
communication .
(b) Using the Techstream, select and perform the CAN bus check .
(c) Observe the screen for approximately 2 minutes to check the ECUs and sensors that are not
displayed on the screen and also those that repeatedly appear and disappear from the screen.
(d) Check the applicable communication stop mode for the ECU or sensor that is not displayed
on the screen.
GO TO CORRESPONDING
NEXT COMMUNICATION STOP MODE
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000044OW00BX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001RT004DX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Power Steering ECU Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Power Steering ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Power
steering
ECU
assembly
branch line
or
connector
Power
Either condition is met: source
circuit of
"Power Steering (EPS)" is not displayed on the "CAN
Power Steering power
Bus Check" screen of the Techstream
ECU steering
Communication ECU
U) that are output correspond to "Power Steering
Stop Mode assembly
ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
Power
Combination Table"
steering
ECU
assembly
ground
circuit
Power
steering
ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY BRANCH
1.
LINE)
(b) Disconnect the A14 and A15 power steering ECU

assembly connectors.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to Power Steering ECU Assembly)

CONNECTOR (POWER STEERING ECU
NG ASSEMBLY)
OK

table below.

A14-2 (PGND) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω

*a

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
A14-1 (PIG) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground off
A15-6 (IG) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a

OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WI50CRX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
(a) Because the order of diagnosis is important to allow a correct diagnosis, make sure to begin
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING SYSTEM HANDLING

(a) Be careful when replacing parts. Incorrect replacement could affect the performance of the steering
system and result in hazardous driving.
3. PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM HANDLING

(a) This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) which includes parts such as
airbags for the driver and the front passenger. Failure to carry out service operations in the correct
sequence could cause unexpected SRS deployment during servicing and may cause a serious
accident. Before servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be
sure to read Precaution for SRS .
4. BUS LINE REPAIR
(a) After repairing a bus line with solder, wrap the repaired
part with electrical tape.
NOTICE:
The CANL bus line and CANH bus line must be installed
together at all times.
When installing, make sure that these lines are twisted,
because CAN bus lines are likely to be influenced by
electrical noise if the bus lines are not twisted.
Leave approximately 80 mm (3.150 in.) loose in the
twisted wires around the connector.
When repairing the CAN bus lines, do not change the
length of the lines. (Make sure that the length of the
CANH bus line and CANL bus line are the same.)
(b) Do not use bypass wiring between connectors.
*a Bypass Wire
NOTICE:
The ability of the twisted bus lines to resist interference
will be lost if bypass wiring is used.
Do not use a twisted pair of wires for bypass wiring.
5. CONNECTOR HANDLING
(a) When checking resistance with a tester, insert the tester

probes from the backside (harness side) of the connector.
*a Tester Probe
(b) Use service wires to check the connector if it is

impossible to check continuity from the rear of the
connector.
*a Service Wire
6. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTING OR REPLACING CAN JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) If the CAN junction connector is removed from the vehicle for inspection or replacement, make sure
to install the CAN junction connector and all wire harnesses to their original locations with tape and
the clamps.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WI80AVX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Because the order of diagnosis is important to allow a correct diagnosis, make sure to begin
Result List of How to Proceed with Troubleshooting

PAGE
Open in CAN Main Bus Line

The result of "How to Proceed with Troubleshooting" is
(Includes DLC3 branch lines and
"Open in CAN Main Bus Line".
terminating resistors)

Short in CAN Bus Lines
"Short in CAN Bus Lines".

Short to +B in CAN Bus Line
"Short to +B in CAN Bus Line".

Short to GND in CAN Bus Line
"Short to GND in CAN Bus Line".
The result of "How to Proceed with Troubleshooting" is Open in One Side of CAN Branch
"Open in One Side of CAN Branch Line". Line
HINT:
Refer to How to Proceed with Troubleshooting for the V Bus Check procedure.
Communication Stop Mode Table

The suspected communication stop area can be determined based on the ECU or sensor that was not
displayed in CAN Bus Check and by referring to the table below.

PAGE
"Skid Control (ABS/VSC/TRAC)" is not displayed on the Skid Control ECU Communication Stop
Techstream. Mode
"Power Steering (EPS)" is not displayed on the Power Steering ECU Communication
Techstream. Stop Mode
"Spiral cable (Steering Angle Sensor)" is not displayed Steering Angle Sensor Communication
on the Techstream. Stop Mode
"ECM (Engine)" is not displayed on the Techstream. ECM Communication Stop Mode
Transmission Control ECU

"TCM" is not displayed on the Techstream.
Communication Stop Mode
Main Body ECU Communication Stop

"Main Body" is not displayed on the Techstream.
Mode
"Combination Meter" is not displayed on the Combination Meter ECU Communication

Techstream. Stop Mode
Center Airbag Sensor Communication

"Airbag" is not displayed on the Techstream.
Stop Mode
DTC Combination Table

PAGE
Although CAN communication (V The probable part for which communication is interrupted
bus) is currently normal, ECUs can be determined using DTC Combination Table and
connected to the V bus store CAN comparing the DTCs output from ECUs connected to the
communication DTCs. CAN communication system
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001V2C056X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Skid Control ECU Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Skid Control ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Skid control
ECU (brake
actuator
assembly) main
line or
Power source
"Skid Control (ABS/VSC/TRAC)" is not displayed circuit of skid
Skid Control on the "CAN Bus Check" screen of the Techstream control ECU
ECU (brake actuator
Communication Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start assembly)
Stop Mode with U) that are output correspond to "Skid Skid control
Control ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC ECU (brake
Combination Table" actuator
assembly)
ground circuit
Skid control
ECU (brake
actuator
assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
DTC check procedure: Turn the ignition switch to ON, wait at least 60 seconds,.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR
1.
ASSEMBLY) MAIN LINE)


CONDITION

114 to 126 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a

OR CONNECTOR (SKID CONTROL ECU
NG (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY) MAIN LINE)
OK
2. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)

table below.

A5-13 (GND2) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω
A5-38 (GND1) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω

*a

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
A5-1 (+BM) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground off
A5-25 (+BS) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground off
A5-28 (IG1) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WIH07PX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Steering Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode
(2013 FR-S)
Steering Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
Steering angle
sensor (spiral
cable sub-
assembly)
branch line or
connector
Either condition is met: Power source
circuit of
"Spiral cable (Steering Angle Sensor)" is not
steering angle
Steering Angle displayed on the "CAN Bus Check" screen of the
sensor (spiral
Sensor Techstream
cable sub-
Communication Communication system DTCs (DTCs that start
assembly)
Stop Mode with U) that are output correspond to "Steering
Steering angle
Angle Sensor Communication Stop Mode" in
sensor (spiral
"DTC Combination Table"
cable sub-
assembly)
ground circuit
Steering angle
sensor (spiral
cable sub-
assembly)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SPIRAL CABLE
1.
SUB-ASSEMBLY) BRANCH WIRE)
(b) Disconnect the D56 steering angle sensor (spiral cable

sub-assembly) connector.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly))

CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE WITH SENSOR
NG SUB-ASSEMBLY)
OK

table below.

D56-1 (ESS) - Cable disconnected from

Below 1 Ω

*a

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
D56-4 (IG1) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a

REPLACE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SPIRAL

OK CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000YDW0B4X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. BRIEF DESCRIPTION
(a) The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial data communication system for real time application.
It is a vehicle multiplex communication system which has a high communication speed and the
ability to detect malfunctions.
(b) Using the CANH and CANL bus lines as a pair, CAN communication is performed using a voltage
differential. (A base voltage is applied to the pair of lines and a voltage differential is created when
communicating.)
(c) Many ECUs or sensors installed on the vehicle operate by sharing information and communicating
with each other.
(d) The CAN has two resistors of 120 Ω which are necessary to enable communication.
(e) Control system CAN is composed of 1 bus.
2. DEFINITION OF TERMS
(a) Main bus
(1) The main bus is a wire harness between the two terminating resistors on the bus. This is the
main bus in the CAN communication system.
(b) Branch
(1) The branch is a wire harness which diverges from the main bus to an ECU or sensor.
(c) Terminating resistors

(1) Two resistors of 120 Ω are installed in parallel across the ends of the CAN main bus lines. They
are called terminating resistors. These resistors allow the changes of the voltage differential
between the CAN bus lines to be accurately judged. To allow proper function of CAN
communication, it is necessary to have both terminating resistors installed. Since the two
resistors are installed in parallel, this results in a measurement of approximately 60 Ω.
3. ECUS OR SENSORS WHICH COMMUNICATE THROUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

(a) V Bus
(1) Main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
(2) Combination meter assembly
(3) ECM
(4) TCM*
(5) Skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly)
(6) Steering angle sensor (spiral cable sub-assembly)
(7) Power steering ECU assembly
(8) Air bag ECU assembly
* : for Automatic Transmission System
4. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
(a) The V bus has termination circuits with two resistors of 120 Ω.
5. TROUBLESHOOTING REMARKS
(a) DTCs for the CAN communication system can be checked using the Techstream. The DLC3 is
connected to the CAN communication system, but no DTCs exist regarding problems in the DLC3 or
the DLC3 branch lines. If there is any trouble in the DLC3 or the DLC3 branch lines, ECUs on the
CAN cannot output DTCs to the Techstream.
(b) Troubles in the CAN V bus (communication lines) can be checked by measuring the resistance
between the terminals of the DLC3. However, an open circuit in a branch line other than the DLC3
branch lines cannot be checked from the DLC3 (except branch line of the DLC3).
NOTICE:
Do not insert the tester probes directly into the DLC3. Be sure to use service wires.
6. DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES FOR CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
HINT:
See Diagnosis System .
7. HOW TO DISTINGUISH CONNECTOR OF CAN JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) In the CAN communication system, the shape of the connectors connected to the CAN junction
connector which has an earth terminal is the same. The connectors connected to the CAN junction
connector can be distinguished by the colors of the bus lines and the connecting side of the junction
connector.
HINT:
See Terminals of ECU for bus line color or the shape of connecting surface .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002DX504TX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. OVERALL CAN BUS DIAGRAM
(a) Control system CAN is composed of 1 bus.
*1 V Bus *2 V Bus Terminating Resistor
ECM Combination Meter Assembly

*3 *4
(for V Bus) (for V Bus)
Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU) DLC3

*5 *6
Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-

PSP (Option Connector)
*7 assembly) *8
(for V Bus)
(for V Bus)
Air Bag ECU Assembly TCM

*9 *10
Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator

Power Steering ECU Assembly
*11 *12 Assembly)
(for V Bus)
(for V Bus)
2. V BUS
HINT:
The CAN communication system connects to other networks via ECUs that function as a gateway
.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XVK0AOX
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
NOTICE:
Turn the ignition switch off before measuring the resistances between CAN main bus lines and
between CAN branch lines.
Turn the ignition switch off before inspecting CAN bus lines for a ground short.
Before measuring the resistance, leave the vehicle as is for at least 1 minute and do not operate the
ignition switch, any other switches or the doors. If any doors need to be opened in order to check
connectors, open the doors and leave them open.
This section describes the standard values for all CAN related components.
HINT:
Operating the ignition switch, any other switches or a door triggers the related ECU and sensor
malfunction.
1. CAN NO. 1 JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) Check the CAN No. 1 junction connector.
HINT:
The following tables contain information about the items and buses connected via junction connectors.
The junction connector may be used for multiple separate buses. In this case, the name of the bus will
be shown below the name of the item that terminals are connected to. The bus name will be shown in
brackets (example: (for V bus)).
(1) Connection diagram

Front view of wire harness connector to TCM

*a *b
(to CAN No. 1 Junction Connector) (for V bus)*
to Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly) to CAN No. 2 Junction Connector
*c *d
(for V bus) (for V bus)
to Power Steering ECU Assembly

*e - -
(for V bus)
(2) Check the connection diagram of the components which are connected to the CAN No. 1
junction connector.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING COLOR CONNECTED TO
A17-5 B-W TCM

A17-16 L (for V bus)*
A17-6 BR Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly)

A17-17 B-R (for V bus)
A17-7 W-B CAN No. 2 Junction Connector

A17-18 R-Y (for V bus)
A17-8 B Power Steering ECU Assembly

A17-19 W (for V bus)
2. CAN NO. 2 JUNCTION CONNECTOR

(a) Check the CAN No. 2 junction connector.
(1) Connection diagram

Front view of wire harness connector to CAN No. 1 Junction Connector

*a *b
(to CAN No. 2 Junction Connector) (for V bus)
to Combination Meter Assembly to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)

*c *d
to DLC3 to Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)

*e *f
to PSP (Option Connector) to Air Bag ECU Assembly

*g *h
to ECM
*i - -
(for V bus)
(2) Check the connection diagram of the components which are connected to the CAN No. 2
junction connector.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING COLOR CONNECTED TO
D43-1 W-B CAN No. 1 Junction Connector

D43-12 R-Y (for V bus)
D43-2 BR Combination Meter Assembly

D43-13 BR-W (for V bus)
D43-3 P Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)

D43-14 LG (for V bus)
D43-5 B-Y DLC3

D43-16 LG (for V bus)
D43-6 G-W Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)

D43-17 G (for V bus)
D43-7 P PSP (Option Connector)

D43-18 L (for V bus)
D43-8 P-L Air Bag ECU Assembly

D43-19 R-W (for V bus)
D43-9 O ECM
D43-20 B-P (for V bus)
3. DLC3

table below.
*a DLC3
TERMINAL WIRING TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION CONDITION
(SYMBOL)
Cable
D10-6 HIGH-level disconnected
(CANH) - B-Y - CAN bus line from
57 to 63 Ω
D10-14 LG - LOW-level negative (-)
(CANL) CAN bus line battery
terminal
Cable
D10-6 disconnected
HIGH-level
(CANH) - B-Y - from 200 Ω or
CAN bus line
D10-4 B-Y negative (-) higher
- Ground
(CG) battery
terminal
Cable
D10-14 disconnected
LOW-level
(CANL) - LG - B- from 200 Ω or
CAN bus line
D10-4 Y negative (-) higher
- Ground
(CG) battery
terminal
Cable
(CANH) - B-Y - CAN bus line from 6 kΩ or
D10-16 W-B - Battery negative (-) higher
(BAT) positive (+) battery
terminal
Cable
D10-14 LOW-level disconnected
(CANL) - LG - W- CAN bus line from 6 kΩ or
D10-16 B - Battery negative (-) higher
terminal
4. ECM

*a - -
(ECM)

*a
(to ECM)

A33-19 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 114 to 126
O - B-P
A33-18 (CANL) LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal Ω
A33-19 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
O - B-L
A36-4 (E01) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
A33-18 (CANL) - B-P - B- LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
A36-4 (E01) L Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
A33-19 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
O-W
A33-2 (BATT) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
A33-18 (CANL) - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

B-P - W
A33-2 (BATT) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
5. TCM (for Automatic Transmission System)

*a - -
(TCM)

*a
(to TCM)

A18-29 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from

B-W - L 57 to 63 Ω
A18-28 (CANL) LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
A18-29 (CANH) - B-W - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
A18-3 (E02) B-Y Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
A18-28 (CANL) - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
L - B-Y
A18-3 (E02) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
A18-29 (CANH) - B-W - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
A18-26 (BM) Y-R Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
L - Y-R
A18-26 (BM) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
6. POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

*a - -
(Power Steering ECU Assembly)
(a) Disconnect the A14 and A15 power steering ECU


*a

A15-1 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from

B-W 57 to 63 Ω
A15-7 (CANL) LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
B-B
A14-2 (PGND) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
W-B
A14-2 (PGND) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher

B-W
A14-1 (PIG) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher

W-W
A14-1 (PIG) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
7. COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY

*a - -
(Combination Meter Assembly)
(a) Disconnect the D7 combination meter assembly

connector.

*a

D7-6 (CANH) - BR - BR- HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from
57 to 63 Ω
D7-7 (CANL) W LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
D7-6 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
BR - B-Y
D7-20 (ES1) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
D7-7 (CANL) - BR-W - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
D7-20 (ES1) B-Y Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
D7-6 (CANH) - BR - R- HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

D7-1 (B W Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
D7-7 (CANL) - BR-W - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
D7-1 (B R-W Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
8. INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY AND MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK
GATEWAY ECU)
Component without harness connected Component without harness connected

*a *b
(Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly) (Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway
ECU) connector.
*1 DLC3

*a
(to Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))

D5-14 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from

P - LG 57 to 63 Ω
D5-13 (CANL) LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
D5-14 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
P - B-Y
D10-4 (CG) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
D5-13 (CANL) - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
LG - B-Y
D5-14 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

P - W-B
D10-16 (BAT) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
D5-13 (CANL) - LG - W- LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

D10-16 (BAT) B Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
9. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY)

*a - -
(Steering Angle Sensor (Spiral Cable Sub-assembly))
(a) Disconnect the D56 steering angle sensor (spiral cable

sub-assembly) connector.
*1 DLC3

*a

D56-3 (CANH) - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from

G-W - G 57 to 63 Ω
D56-2 (CANL) LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
D56-3 (CANH) - G-W - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
D10-4 (CG) B-Y Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
D56-2 (CANL) - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
G - B-Y
D56-3 (CANH) - G-W - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
D10-16 (BAT) W-B Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
D56-2 (CANL) - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

G - W-B
D10-16 (BAT) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
10. PSP (OPTION CONNECTOR)

*1 DLC3

*a
(to PSP (Option Connector))

table below.
TERMINAL WIRING TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION CONDITION
(SYMBOL)
Cable
(CANH) - CAN bus line from
P-L 57 to 63 Ω
D29-5 - LOW-level negative (-)
(CANL) CAN bus line battery
terminal
Cable
D29-4 disconnected
HIGH-level
(CANH) - from 200 Ω or
P - B-Y CAN bus line
D10-4 negative (-) higher
- Ground
(CG) battery
terminal
Cable
D29-5 disconnected
LOW-level
(CANL) - from 200 Ω or
L - B-Y CAN bus line
D10-4 negative (-) higher
- Ground
(CG) battery
terminal
Cable
(CANH) - CAN bus line from 6 kΩ or
P - W-B
D10-16 - Battery negative (-) higher
terminal
Cable
D29-5 LOW-level disconnected
(CANL) - CAN bus line from 6 kΩ or
L - W-B
D10-16 - Battery negative (-) higher
terminal
11. AIR BAG ECU ASSEMBLY


*a - -
(Air Bag ECU Assembly)
(a) Disconnect the D27 air bag ECU assembly connector.
*1 DLC3

*a

D27-13 (CANH) - P-L - R- HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from
57 to 63 Ω
D27-22 (CANL) W LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
D27-13 (CANH) - P-L - B- HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
D10-4 (CG) Y Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
D27-22 (CANL) - R-W - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 200 Ω or
D10-4 (CG) B-Y Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
D27-13 (CANH) - P-L - HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
D27-22 (CANL) - R-W - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or
12. SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)

*a - -
(Skid Control ECU (Brake Actuator Assembly))
(a) Disconnect the A5 skid control ECU (brake actuator


*a

A5-26 (CANH) - BR - B- HIGH-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from

114 to 126 Ω
A5-14 (CANL) R LOW-level CAN bus line negative (-) battery terminal
BR - B
A5-13 (GND2) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher
B-R - B
A5-13 (GND2) Ground negative (-) battery terminal higher

BR - W
A5-1 (+BM) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
A5-14 (CAN_L) - LOW-level CAN bus line - Cable disconnected from 6 kΩ or

B-R - W
A5-1 (+BM) Battery positive (+) negative (-) battery terminal higher
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WIP0B7X
Title: NETWORKING: CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: Transmission Control ECU Communication Stop
Mode (2013 FR-S)
Transmission Control ECU Communication Stop Mode
DESCRIPTION
DETECTION ITEM SYMPTOM TROUBLE AREA
TCM branch
line or
Power source
"TCM" is not displayed on the "CAN Bus Check"
Transmission circuit of
Control ECU TCM
Communication Transmission
U) that are output correspond to "Transmission
Stop Mode control ECU
Control ECU Communication Stop Mode" in "DTC
assembly
Combination Table"
ground
circuit
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
output again.
HINT:
malfunction.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR OPEN IN CAN BUS LINES (TCM BRANCH LINE)
(b) Disconnect the A18 TCM connector.

CONDITION

57 to 63 Ω
(CANL) terminal

*a
(to TCM)

NG CONNECTOR (TCM)
OK


CONDITION
Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery

A18-3 (E02) - Body ground Below 1 Ω
terminal
A18-33 (E01) - Body Cable disconnected from negative (-) battery

Below 1 Ω
ground terminal

*a
(to TCM)
Standard Voltage:
A18-26 (BM) - Body ground Ignition switch off 11 to 14 V

*a
(to TCM)
OK REPLACE TCM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002S8B02AX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: B2321,B2325: Lost Communication with Driver
Door Power Window ECU (2013 FR-S)
DTC B2321 Lost Communication with Driver Door Power Window ECU
DTC B2325 LIN Communication Bus Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
B2321 is stored when the communication between the power window regulator master switch assembly
and the main body ECU (network gateway computer) stops for 10 seconds or more.
The main body ECU (network gateway computer) monitors communication between all the ECUs
connected to the door LIN bus. When the main body ECU (network gateway computer) detects errors in
communication with all the ECUs connected to the door LIN bus at 2.6-second intervals and 3 times in a
row, DTC B2325 will be stored.

NO.
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
Lost communication between the multiplex network master switch Main body ECU
B2321
assembly and the main body ECU (network gateway computer). (network
gateway ECU)
Harness or
connector
Power window
regulator master
switch assembly
The main body ECU (network gateway computer) detects errors in
Main body ECU
B2325 door LIN bus communication lines at 2.6-second intervals and 3
(network
times in a row.
gateway ECU)
Harness or
connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
When using the Techstream with the ignition switch off to troubleshoot:
Connect the Techstream to the vehicle and turn a courtesy light switch on and off at 1.5
second intervals until communication between the Techstream and vehicle begins.
procedure.
HINT:
When communication between the power window regulator master switch assembly and the main body
ECU (network gateway ECU) stops, DTC B2325 is also stored.
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC B2321 or B2325 is output A
DTC B2321 or B235 is not output B

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU)
3.
- POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
(a) Disconnect the D5 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the E8 power window regulator master switch assembly connector.
D5-4 (LIN) - E8-11 (LIN) Always Below 1 Ω
D5-4 (LIN) or E8-11 (LIN) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK

table below.

CONDITION
E8-5 (GND) - Body

Always Below 1 Ω
ground
table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
E8-12 (+B) - Body

Always 11 to 14 V
ground

*a
(to Power Window Regulator Master Switch Assembly)

OK
5. REPLACE POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Temporarily replace the power window regulator master switch assembly with a new or
normally functioning one .
NEXT
6. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
7. CHECK FOR DTC

OK:
DTC B2321 or B2325 is not output.

NG GATEWAY ECU)
END (POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER

OK SWITCH ASSEMBLY WAS DEFECTIVE)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003YZK012X
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART (2013 FR-S)

B2321 Lost Communication with Driver Door Power Window ECU
B2325 LIN Communication Bus Malfunction

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002S8D02IX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / (desired system) / DTC.
(e) Read the DTCs.
2. CLEAR DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / (desired system) / DTC.
(e) Clear the DTCs.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XHI066X
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot the LIN communication system.
NEXT
Preconceptions should be discarded in order to make an accurate judgment. To clearly
understand what the problem symptoms are, it is extremely important to ask the customer
about the problem and the conditions at the time when the malfunction occurred.
Gather as much information as possible for reference. Past problems that seem unrelated may
also help in some cases.
The following 5 items are important points in problem analysis:
Under what conditions? Driving conditions, weather conditions
NEXT
(a) Measure the battery voltage with the ignition switch off.
Standard Voltage:
11 to 14 V
NEXT
4. CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Using the Techstream, inspect the LIN communication function to ensure there are no
malfunctions in the communication system .
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
B GO TO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(a) Terminals of ECU .
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XHK044X
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XHH05AX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
NOTICE:
from the battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from the
battery terminal notice before proceeding with work .
1. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING TECHSTREAM

(a) When using the Techstream to troubleshoot with the ignition switch off:
Connect the Techstream to the DLC3, and turn the courtesy light switch on and off at 1.5-second
intervals until communication between the Techstream and vehicle begins.
(b) After all DTCs are cleared, check if the trouble occurs again 6 seconds after the ignition switch to
ON.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XHQ04KX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The LIN communication system is used for the communication between the components in the tables
below. If the communication cannot be performed through the LIN communication because of an open in
the communication lines or other reasons, the master control ECU of the relevant system will store a DTC.
Refer to the table below about the communication bus lines and connected components.
HINT:
Each component has a fail-safe function which activates to maintain the minimum performance of
the system and protect the system.
In the following table, "○" indicates that the function applies, and "-" indicates that it does not.
Door Bus Lines
COMPONENT MASTER LIN COMMUNICATION DTC OUTPUT

CONTROL FUNCTION
Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU) ○ ○
Power Window Regulator Master Switch

- -
Assembly
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XHT04LX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. DOOR BUS LINES
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XHL04RX
Title: NETWORKING: LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY AND MAIN BODY ECU
(NETWORK GATEWAY ECU)
(a) Remove the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) from the instrument panel junction block
assembly .
(b) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING COLOR TERMINAL SWITCH SPECIFIED

(SYMBOL) DESCRIPTION CONDITION CONDITION
MB-1 (BECU) - Body None - Body Battery power

Always 11 to 14 V
ground ground supply
MB-8 (IG) - Body None - Body Battery power Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ground supply ON
MB-11 (GND) - Body None - Body

Ground Always Below 1 Ω
ground ground
MB-32 (+B) - Body None - Body Battery power

Always 11 to 14 V
ground ground supply
If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction in the wire harness.
(c) Install the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) onto the instrument panel junction block
assembly.
(d) Measure the pulses according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING TERMINAL SWITCH SPECIFIED

(SYMBOL) COLOR DESCRIPTION CONDITION CONDITION
D5-4 (LIN) - D6-1 LIN Communication

LG - B Ignition switch ON Pulse generation
(GND) line
If the result is not as specified, the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) or instrument panel
junction block assembly may have a malfunction.
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR MASTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the E8 power window regulator master switch assembly connector.
(b) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING COLOR TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

E8-5 (GND) - Body

B - Body ground Ground Always Below 1 Ω
ground
E8-12 (+B) - Body SB - Body

Battery power supply Always 11 to 14 V
ground ground
If the result is not as specified, there may be a malfunction in the wire harness.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002MQ300VX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1010: BIU System Error (2013
FR-S)
DTC B1010 BIU System Error
DESCRIPTION
B1010 is stored when there is an internal malfunction in the Main body ECU (network gateway
ECU).

NO.
Main body ECU (network gateway ECU) internal Main body ECU (network gateway
B1010
error ECU)
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC B1010 is output A
DTC is not output B

A GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002MQ300WX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1011: Battery Power Supply
Control Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC B1011 Battery Power Supply Control Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1011 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the BMPX circuit.
HINT:
In some cases, none of the functions of the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) may function when
B1012 is stored together with B1011.

NO.

gateway ECU)
When BMPX voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more
B1011 Instrument panel junction
(BMPX circuit malfunction)
block assembly
Harness or connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B

3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BMPX VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3C instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage :
3C-19 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V

*a
(to Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly)

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECU GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D6 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
Standard Resistance :
D6-1 (GND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
A73-4 (GND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

3B-18 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
assembly.

*a - -
3C-19 - MB-32 (BMPX) Always Below 1 Ω
3B-18 - MB-11 (GND) Always Below 1 Ω

NG BLOCK ASSEMBLY

OK GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002MQ300XX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1012: Battery Power Supply Back
Up Circuit (2013 FR-S)
DTC B1012 Battery Power Supply Back Up Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1012 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the BECU circuit.
HINT:
In some cases, none of the functions of the main body ECU (network gateway ECU) may
function when B1011 is stored together with B1012.

NO.

gateway ECU)
When BECU voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more
(BECU circuit malfunction)
block assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B

3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BECU VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3A instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:
3A-27 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V

*a

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECU GROUND)

NG CONNECTOR
OK
assembly.

*a - -
3A-27 - MB-1 (BECU) Always Below 1 Ω
3B-18 - MB-11 (GND) Always Below 1 Ω

NG BLOCK ASSEMBLY

OK GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002MQ300YX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1013: IG Power Supply Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC B1013 IG Power Supply Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1013 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the IG circuit.

NO.

gateway ECU)
When IG voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more (IG
circuit malfunction)
block assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:

3A-15 - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON
3E-1 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
*a

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (GROUND)
(a) Disconnect the D6 and A73 main body ECU (network gateway ECU) connector.
(b) Disconnect the 3A and 3B instrument panel junction block assembly connector.
D6-1 (GND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
A73-4 (GND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
3A-12 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
3A-13 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
3B-18 - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

NG CONNECTOR
OK
assembly.

*a - -

No battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-15 and

3E-1 - MB-8 (IG) 10 kΩ or higher
3A-12
Battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-15 and 3A-

3E-1 - MB-8 (IG) Below 1 Ω
12
3B-18 - MB-11
Always Below 1 Ω
(GND)

NG BLOCK ASSEMBLY

OK GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002MQ300ZX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: B1014: ACC Power Supply Circuit
(2013 FR-S)
DTC B1014 ACC Power Supply Circuit
DESCRIPTION
B1014 is stored when a malfunction is detected in the ACC circuit.

NO.

gateway ECU)
When ACC voltage is 8.3 V or less, or 16.7 V or more
(ACC circuit malfunction)
block assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is not output B
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VOLTAGE)
(a) Disconnect the 3A and 3E instrument panel junction block assembly connector.

table below.
Standard Voltage:

3A-20 - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ACC
3E-1 - Body ground Always 11 to 14 V
*a

NG CONNECTOR
OK
4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (GROUND)

NG CONNECTOR
OK
assembly.

*a - -

No battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-20 and

3E-1 - MB-9 (ACC) 10 kΩ or higher
3A-12
Battery voltage is applied across terminals 3A-20 and 3A-

3E-1 - MB-9 (ACC) Below 1 Ω
12
3B-18 - MB-11
Always Below 1 Ω
(GND)

NG BLOCK ASSEMBLY

OK GATEWAY ECU)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003QMR00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003TOD00CX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000CCZ0BNX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013
FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Data List.
(e) Read the Data List according to the display on the Techstream.
Main Body (Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU))
TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT ITEM/RANGE NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC

CONDITION NOTE
Battery power supply

Battery Power Supply Control
control voltage/ 11 to 14 V -
Voltage
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
Battery power supply back

Battery Power Supply Back Up
up voltage/ 11 to 14 V -
Voltage
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
IG power supply voltage/

IG Power Supply Voltage 11 to 14 V -
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
ACC voltage/
ACC Voltage 11 to 14 V -
Min.: 0 V, Max.: 21.4 V
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003MXP02LX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
CHART (2013 FR-S)

B1010 BIU System Error
B1011 Battery Power Supply Control Circuit
B1012 Battery Power Supply Back Up Circuit
B1013 IG Power Supply Circuit
B1014 ACC Power Supply Circuit

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PDK0XLX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(e) Check for DTCs.
2. CLEAR DTC
(d) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(e) Clear the DTCs.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000PKJ0E8X
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
NEXT
Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding.
NEXT
3. CHECK COMMUNICATION FUNCTION OF CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*
(a) Use the Techstream to check if the CAN communication system is functioning normally
.
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
CAN DTC is not output A
CAN DTC is output B
B Go to CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A
4. CHECK FOR DTC*
(c) Recheck for DTCs .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC output does not reoccur A
DTC output reoccurs B
B Go to step 6
(a) Terminals of ECU .
(b) Data List / Active Test .
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003QRB00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
(a) Check the resistance of the battery current sensor assembly.
(1) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
1 (VIN) - 3 (GND) Always 3 to 10 kΩ
1 (VIN) - 4 (IB) Always Below 0.5 kΩ
3 (GND) - 4 (IB) Always 3 to 10 kΩ
If the result is not as specified, replace the battery current sensor assembly.

*a
(b) Check the resistance of the battery current sensor

assembly.

the table below.

2 (THB) - 3 20°C (68°F) to 30°C

1.5 to 2.6 kΩ
(GND) (86°F)
If the result is not as specified, replace the battery

current sensor assembly.

*a
*b [kΩ]
*c [°C (°F)]
HINT:
The "Condition" indicates the temperature in the vicinity of the

sensor, not of the actual sensor itself.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003QMQ00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the battery current sensor assembly.
(b) Tighten the nut.
(c) Connect the engine wire with the nut.
(d) Connect the connector.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003TOC00EX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL NETWORK GATEWAY ECU
NOTICE:
Prevent foreign matter from being mixed into the engagement, connector or terminal.
Do not touch the network gateway ECU connector terminals.
(a) Make the network gateway ECU guide to contact the

housing side wall.
HINT:
The angle between the junction block and the network

gateway ECU guide should be 20° or more.
*a Housing Side Wall
*b Guide
*c 20° or more
(b) While aligning the guide with the housing side wall, slide
the network gateway ECU toward the fuse area of the
instrument panel junction block assembly and engage the
2 guides.
*a Hosing Side Wall
*b Fuse Area
(c) Slide the network gateway ECU until it contacts the A

surface.
(d) Rotate the network gateway ECU while holding it against the instrument panel junction block
assembly surface (axis of rotation).
NOTICE:
Slide the network gateway ECU gently.
Do not apply strong impact to the side of the network gateway ECU.
*a A surface
(e) Rotate the network gateway ECU until it engages with the lock to install it.
NOTICE:
When pressing the network gateway ECU, press the push area as shown in the illustration.
A lock sound will be heard when the network gateway ECU is engaged.
Do not hit or weight the network gateway ECU when it engages with the instrument panel junction
block assembly.
HINT:
If a lock sound is not heard, visually check the lock engagement. Check that the height of the network
gateway ECU and instrument panel junction block assembly match.
*1 Network Gateway ECU
*2 Instrument Panel Junction Block Assembly
Push Area
(a) Connect the connector as shown in the illustration.

(b) Slide the lever as indicated by the arrow shown in the
illustration.
*1 Lever
(c) Connect the connector indicated as shown in the

illustration.
(d) Install the instrument panel junction block assembly with the bolt and the nut.
(e) Connect 6 connectors to the instrument panel junction block assembly.
(f) Connect the 3 connectors to the power steering ECU

assembly.
(g) Connect the connector to the power steering ECU assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, return the lock lever to its original position to connect the connector
and securely push in the lock of the lock lever.
(h) Engage the clamp.
*a Return the lock lever
*b Push the lock

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003HIV00QX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003QMS00BX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
HINT:
After turning the ignition switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable from
the battery terminal. Therefore, make sure to read the disconnecting the cable from the battery
terminal notice before proceeding with work .
2. REMOVE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ASSEMBLY
(b) Remove the nut and disconnect the engine wire.
NOTICE:
Since this operation may damage the molding, make
sure to fully open the driver and passenger side door
windows.
*1 Engine Wire
(c) Loosen the nut and remove the battery current sensor
assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003TOE00EX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: MAIN BODY ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(b) Disconnect the connector from the power steering ECU assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, pull out the lock of the lock lever and turn the lock lever to
disconnect the connector.
*a Pull out the lock
*b Turn the lock lever
(c) Disconnect the 3 connectors from the power steering ECU.
(d) Disconnect the 6 front side connectors from the

instrument panel junction block assembly indicated as
(e) Remove the bolt, nut and the instrument panel junction
block assembly.
(f) Disconnect the connector indicated as shown in the

illustration.
(g) Disengage the claw and slide the lever to the upward.
*1 Lever
(h) Disconnect the connector indicated as shown in the

illustration.
(i) Remove the instrument panel junction block assembly.
4. REMOVE NETWORK GATEWAY ECU
(a) Press the claw of the instrument panel junction block assembly side as shown in the illustration to
release the lock.
(b) With the instrument panel junction block assembly side, insert the screwdriver with its tip wrapped
in protective tape between the network gateway ECU and the instrument panel junction block
assembly.
NOTICE:
Use a blade screwdriver with a diameter of 5.0 to 6.3 mm (0.197 to 0.248 in.),and with a length
of 90mm (3.543 in.) or more.
*1 Protective Tape
(c) Using the screwdriver with its tip wrapped with protective
tape, carefully raise the network gateway ECU until the
connector becomes disengaged.
*1 Protective Tape
NOTICE:
Do not twist the screwdriver to raise the network gateway
ECU.
If any terminals of the connectors, locking parts or cases
are deformed or damaged, replace the instrument panel
junction block assembly or the network gateway ECU.
(d) Raise the network gateway ECU as shown by arrow 1,
and then pull it out as shown by arrow 2 in the
illustration.
NOTICE:
Do not touch the network gateway ECU connector
terminals.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003HIX016X
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001H7X00KX
Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION: ELECTRIC POWER CONTROL SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL JUNCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY AND MAIN BODY ECU
(NETWORK GATEWAY ECU)
(a) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
HINT:
With the connectors connected, inspect from the rear side of the connectors.
TERMINAL NO. WIRING COLOR TERMINAL CONDITION SPECIFIED

W - Body Ignition switch

3A-15 - Body ground IG power supply 11 to 14V
ground ON
SB - Body Ignition switch

3A-20 - Body ground ACC power supply 11 to 14V
ground ON
G-R - Body
3A-27 - Body ground Battery power supply Always 11 to 14V
ground
L-R - Body
3C-19 - Body ground Battery power supply Always 11 to 14V
ground
B-R - Body
3E-1 - Body ground Battery power supply Always 11 to 14V
ground
3A-12 - Body ground B - Body ground Ground Always Below 1 Ω
3A-13 - Body ground B - Body ground Ground Always Below 1 Ω
B-Y - Body
3B-18 - Body ground Ground Always Below 1 Ω
ground
D6-1 (GND) - Body

B - Body ground Ground Always Below 1 Ω
ground
A73-4 (GND) - Body B-Y - Body

ground ground
assembly.
(c) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

MB-1 (BECU) - Body None - Body Battery power supply back

Always 11 to 14V
ground ground up voltage
MB-8 (IG) - Body None - Body Ignition switch

IG power supply 11 to 14V
ground ground ON
MB-9 (ACC) - Body None - Body Ignition switch

ACC power supply 11 to 14V
ground ground ACC
MB-32 (BMPX) - Body None - Body Battery power supply control

Always 11 to 14V
ground ground voltage
MB-11 (GND) - Body None - Body

ground ground
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XN502YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XN404SX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
Be sure to read Precaution thoroughly before servicing .
2. INSTALL POWER STEERING ECU BRACKET

(a) Install the power steering ECU bracket with 4 screws.
3. INSTALL POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the power steering ECU assembly with the 2 bolts.
(c) Connect the 3 connectors to the power steering ECU assembly.
(d) Connect the connector to the power steering ECU

assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, return the lock lever to its

original position to connect the connector and securely
push in the lock of the lock lever.
*b Push the lock
(e) Engage the clamp.
5. INITIALIZE ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR AND CALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR ZERO

POINT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002XN604SX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING ECU: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
3. REMOVE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
(b) Disconnect the connector from the power steering ECU assembly.
(1) As shown in the illustration, pull out the lock of the lock lever and turn the lock lever to
disconnect the connector.
(c) Disconnect the 3 connectors from the power steering ECU assembly.
(d) Disengage the clamp.
(e) Remove the 2 bolts and power steering ECU assembly.
4. REMOVE POWER STEERING ECU BRACKET
(a) Remove the 4 screws and power steering ECU bracket.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277F040X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1511-C1514,C1517: Torque Sensor
Circuit Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1511 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC C1514 Torque Sensor Power Supply Abnormal
DTC C1517 Torque Hold Abnormal
DESCRIPTION
The torque sensor converts the rotation torque input to the steering wheel into an electrical signal and
sends it to the power steering ECU assembly. Based on this signal, the ECU detects steering effort.

CODE
C1511 A torque sensor (TRQ1) signal error or stop
C1512 A torque sensor (TRQ2) signal error or stop

Steering column
The deviation between torque sensor TRQ1 and TRQ2 assembly (torque
C1513
exceeds a specified value. sensor)
Power steering ECU
C1514 A torque sensor power supply voltage error
assembly
Temporary control due to a malfunction related to the
C1517
torque sensor continues for long time.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
If the power steering ECU assembly or steering column assembly is replaced, perform rotation
angle sensor initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration .
PROCEDURE
CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (TORQUE SENSOR - POWER

1.
STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check the connection condition of the z2 torque sensor

connector.
OK:
Torque sensor connector is securely connected to the
power steering ECU assembly.

*a
CONNECT CONNECTOR SECURELY

NG
OK
2. CHECK POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY (TRQV VOLTAGE)

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION CONDITION
z2-9 (TRQV) - z2-11 Ignition switch

4.5 to 5.5 V
(TRQG) ON
HINT:
When the value is within the specified range, record the value.

*a
NG REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
OK
3. CHECK POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY (TRQ1, TRQ2 VOLTAGE)

Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
Engine running, steering wheel not turned (without load) 2.3 to 2.7 V
Engine running, steering wheel turned to right with

z2-8 (TRQ1) - z2-11 2.3 to 3.8 V
vehicle stopped
(TRQG)
Engine running, steering wheel turned to left with
1.2 to 2.7 V
vehicle stopped
Engine running, steering wheel not turned (without load) 2.3 to 2.7 V
Engine running, steering wheel turned to right with

z2-10 (TRQ2) - z2-11 1.2 to 2.7 V
vehicle stopped
(TRQG)
Engine running, steering wheel turned to left with
2.3 to 3.8 V
vehicle stopped
(c) Calculate the difference between the value recorded when measuring the voltage at terminal
TRQV in the previous step, and the sum of the output of torque sensor 1 and torque sensor 2.
OK:
0.3 V or less (Absolute value)

*a
NG REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277G03MX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1515,C1525: Torque Sensor Zero Point
Adjustment Undone (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1515 Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Undone
DTC C1525 Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Undone
DESCRIPTION
These DTCs do not indicate a malfunction. The power steering ECU assembly stores these DTCs when it
determines that the rotation angle sensor value initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration have
not been performed.

CODE
Torque sensor zero point

There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again after
C1515 calibration has not been
performing torque sensor zero point calibration.
performed.
Rotation angle sensor value

There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again after
C1525 initialization has not been
performing rotation angle sensor value initialization.
performed.
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
INITIALIZE ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR AND CALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR ZERO

1.
POINT
(a) Initialize the rotation angle sensor and calibrate the torque sensor zero point .
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

NOTICE:
If DTC C1515 or C1525 is output even though the rotation angle sensor value initialization and
torque sensor zero point calibration have been performed, check the procedure again, and
perform calibration and initialization 3 times.
Result
CONDITION PROCEED
TO
DTC C1515 or C1525 is still output after performing rotation angle sensor initialization and
A
torque sensor zero point calibration 3 times.
DTC C1515 or C1525 is not output. B
END
B
3. REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the power steering ECU assembly .
NEXT

4.
POINT
NEXT
5. CHECK FOR DTC
NOTICE:
Result
CONDITION PROCEED
TO
A
END
B
A REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000027BY03IX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1516,C1526: Torque Sensor Zero Point
Adjustment Incomplete (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1516 Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Incomplete
DTC C1526 Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Incomplete
DESCRIPTION
These DTCs do not indicate a malfunction. The power steering ECU assembly stores these DTCs when it
determines that the rotation angle sensor value initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration are
incomplete.

CODE
Torque sensor zero point calibration is There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again
C1516 incomplete due to the steering wheel after clearing the DTC and torque sensor calibration
being touched during calibration. value, and performing zero point calibration.
Rotation angle sensor value There is no malfunction if this DTC is not output again
initialization is incomplete due to the after clearing the DTC and torque sensor calibration
C1526
steering wheel being touched during value, and performing rotation angle sensor value
calibration. initialization.
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CLEAR DTC
(a) Clear the DTC(s) .
NEXT

2.
POINT
NEXT
3. CHECK FOR DTC
NOTICE:
perform the calibration and initialization 3 times.
Result
CONDITION PROCEED
TO
A
END
B
4. REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
(a) Replace the power steering ECU assembly .
NEXT
5. CLEAR DTC
NEXT
6.
POINT
NEXT
7. CHECK FOR DTC
NOTICE:
Result
CONDITION PROCEED
TO
A
END
B
A REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000027BZ03OX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1521,C1531-C1534,C1554: Motor Circuit
Malfunction (2013 FR-S)
DTC C1521 Motor Circuit Malfunction
DTC C1531 ECU Malfunction
DTC C1554 Power Supply Relay Failure
DESCRIPTION
If the power steering ECU assembly stores these DTCs, it will shut off the power supply relay circuit (built
into the power steering ECU assembly) and stop power assist. However, power assist continues if DTC
C1533 or C1534 is stored.

CODE
C1521 Motor overcurrent
C1531 An ECU internal malfunction (CPU malfunction)
C1532 An ECU internal malfunction (peripheral circuit malfunction)

Power steering ECU
An ECU internal malfunction (substrate temperature sensor assembly
C1533
malfunction)
C1534 An ECU internal malfunction (EEPROM error)
C1554 A power supply relay circuit malfunction
NOTICE:
If the power steering ECU assembly is replaced with a new one, perform rotation angle sensor
initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration .
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FOR DTC
(b) Check for DTCs .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
B REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY
A USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277N03JX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1522-C1555: Motor Circuit Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC C1555 Motor Relay Welding Failure
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly supplies the current to the power steering motor through the motor
circuit.

CODE
C1522 A motor current sensor malfunction
C1523 An excessively large current deviation Steering column

assembly
A short or open in the motor circuit or abnormal voltage or Power steering ECU
C1524
current in the motor circuit assembly
C1555 A motor relay malfunction
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (POWER STEERING MOTOR -

1.
POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check the connection condition of the z1 power

steering motor connector.
OK:
Power steering motor connector is securely connected and
locked to the power steering ECU assembly.

*a

NG
OK
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MOTOR VOLTAGE)
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Data List.
(f) Select the items "Motor Terminal Volt(U)", "Motor Terminal Volt(V)" and "Motor Terminal
Volt(W)" in the Data List and read the value displayed on the Techstream.
EMPS

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE
Motor terminal
Motor Terminal voltage (U phase)/ Value changes The engine is running and the steering
Volt(U) Min.: 0.000 V between 4 and 35 V wheel is being turned.
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
Motor Terminal voltage (V phase)/ Value changes The engine is running and the steering
Volt(V) Min.: 0.000 V between 4 and 35 V wheel is being turned.
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
Motor Terminal voltage (W phase)/ Value changes The engine is running and the steering
Volt(W) Min.: 0.000 V between 4 and 35 V wheel is being turned.
Max.: 98.000 V
Result
RESULT PROCEED
TO
During steering operation, value changes between 4 and 35 V. A
During steering operation, voltage is not generated or voltage outside specified range is
B
generated.
B REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
A REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1528: Motor Rotation Angle Sensor
DTC C1528 Motor Rotation Angle Sensor Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The rotation angle sensor detects the motor rotation angle and sends this information to the power
steering ECU assembly.

CODE
Rotation angle sensor (built into steering column

A rotation angle sensor
C1528 assembly)
malfunction
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
CHECK CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION (ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR -

1.
POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check the connection condition of the z2 rotation angle

sensor connector.
OK:
Rotation angle sensor connector is securely connected to
the power steering ECU assembly.

*a

NG
OK
2. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (MOTOR ROTATION ANGLE)

EMPS

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE
Motor rotation
Motor angle/
Motor rotation angle value The engine is running and the steering
Rotation Min.: 0.000 deg
changes from 0 to 360° wheel is being turned.
Angle Max.: 360.000
deg
OK:
During steering operation, motor rotation angle value changes from 0 to 360°.
NG CHECK STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
3. CHECK STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the z2 rotation angle sensor connector from

the power steering ECU assembly.
z2-14 (RZSN) - z2-7 (RZG) At 23°C (73°F) 75.2 to 112.8 Ω
z2-5 (RZV) - z2-7 (RZG) At 23°C (73°F) 27.6 to 41.4 Ω
z2-13 (RZCS) - z2-7 (RZG) At 23°C (73°F) 73.6 to 110.4 Ω

*a
(to Rotation Angle Sensor)
NG REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000027C005LX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1541: Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction
(2013 FR-S)
DTC C1541 Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly receives vehicle speed signals from the skid control ECU via CAN
communication. The power steering ECU assembly provides appropriate assisting force in accordance with
the vehicle speed, based on the signals.
If the power steering ECU assembly stores this DTC, it adjusts the amount of power assist to the amount
provided for a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and continues the system control.
DTC CODE DTC DETECTION CONDITION TROUBLE AREA

Skid control ECU
C1541 The vehicle speed signals malfunction
CAN communication system
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM)
(a) Check if DTC U0416 is output .

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC U0416 is not output. A
DTC U0416 is output. B
HINT:
DTC U0416 indicates a skid control ECU communication malfunction in the power steering system.

B TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING)
A
2. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM)
(a) Using the Techstream, check for DTCs and confirm that there are no problems in the brake
control system .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
GO TO VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM

B (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
A REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277I03TX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1551: IG Power Supply Voltage
DTC C1551 IG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly determines whether the ignition switch status is ON or off through the
IG power supply circuit.

CODE
ECU IG1 fuse

An IG power supply circuit malfunction inside the IG power supply circuit
C1551
ECU Power steering ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (IG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS
ECU power source voltage/

IG Power Supply Min.: 0.0000 V 9 to 16 V The ignition switch is ON.
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:
The normal condition value is displayed the Techstream.

NG STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY - BATTERY/BODY
GROUND)
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER STEERING ECU ASSEMBLY -

2.
BATTERY/BODY GROUND)

Standard Voltage:
A15-6 (IG) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 9 to 16 V
A14-2 (PGND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

*a

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277J03TX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1552: PIG Power Supply Voltage
DTC C1552 PIG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction
DESCRIPTION
When a problem occurs in the power steering system, the power supply relay circuit is shut off to stop the
power assist.

CODE
EPS fuse
A PIG power supply circuit malfunction inside the PIG power supply circuit
C1552
ECU Power steering ECU
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PIG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS

DISPLAY CONDITION
Power source voltage to

PIG Power active motor/ The engine is running and power steering
9 to 16 V
Supply Min.: 0.0000 V is operating.
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:

GROUND)

2.
(a) Disconnect the A14 power steering ECU assembly

connector .
Standard Voltage:
A14-1 (PIG) - Body ground Always 9 to 16 V

*a

NG CONNECTOR

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277L090X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1581: Assist Map Number Un-Writing
(2013 FR-S)
DTC C1581 Assist Map Number Un-Writing
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly stores this DTC when it determines that the assist map is not written in
the ECU.
HINT:
The assist map is data written in the power steering ECU assembly to control the degree of power
assist. The assist map is selected based on the vehicle's specified communication data.

CODE
assist map not written

CAN communication
The assist map is not written in the power steering ECU system
C1581
assembly. ECM
Power steering ECU
assembly
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE

1.
POINT
HINT:
The assist map is automatically written during the rotation angle sensor initialization and torque
sensor zero point calibration.
NEXT
2. CHECK FOR DTC

OK:
DTC C1581 is not output.
HINT:
DTC C1581 is cleared after the assist map is written.
CHECK FOR DTC (CAN COMMUNICATION

NG SYSTEM)
END
OK
3. CHECK FOR DTC (CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM)
(a) Using the Techstream, check for DTCs and confirm that there are no problems in the CAN
OK:
DTC is not output.

NG TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING)
OK
4. CHECK ECM
(a) Check if an ECM that complies with the vehicle specifications is installed.
NG REPLACE ECM

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003TY800IX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: C1582: Assist Map Number Mismatch
(2013 FR-S)
DTC C1582 Assist Map Number Mismatch
DESCRIPTION
If an incorrect power steering ECU assembly or ECM or skid control ECU is installed, DTC C1582 is stored
as the vehicle specification and data do not match.
HINT:
The assist map is data written in the power steering ECU assembly to control the degree of assistance.
The assist map is selected based on the vehicle's specified communication data.

CODE
CAN communication
system
ECM (wrong assembly)
Data that does not match the vehicle specification is Skid control ECU (wrong
C1582
received through CAN communication. assembly)
Power steering ECU
assembly (wrong
assembly)
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
(a) Using the Techstream, check for DTCs and confirm that there are no problems in the CAN
OK:
DTC is not output.

OK
2. CHECK ECM
(a) Check if an ECM that complies with the vehicle specifications is installed.
NG REPLACE ECM
OK
3. CHECK SKID CONTROL ECU (BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
(a) Check if a skid control ECU (brake actuator assembly) that complies with the vehicle
specifications is installed.

NG ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000275304ZX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: CALIBRATION (2013 FR-S)
CALIBRATION
1. ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION AND TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT
CALIBRATION
NOTICE:
Initialize the rotation angle sensor and calibrate the torque sensor zero point if any of the
following conditions occur:
The power steering ECU is replaced.

The steering column assembly is replaced.
Steering effort differs between turning left and right.
HINT:
When rotation angle sensor initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration are performed, the
assist map writing, the rotation angle sensor value initialization and the torque sensor zero point
calibration are performed at the same time.
(a) Inspection before calibration
(5) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Data List.
(6) Check the values by referring to the table below.
EMPS

IG Power Supply Min.: 0 V 9 to 16 V The ignition switch is ON.
Max.: 20.1531 V
Standard voltage:
10 V or more
NOTICE:
If the IG power supply voltage is 9 V or less, calibration cannot be performed. In this case,
charge or replace the battery, and then perform calibration.
(b) Rotation angle sensor initialization and torque sensor zero point calibration
NOTICE:
If DTC C1516 (Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Incomplete) is stored, the torque sensor zero
point cannot be calibrated. Clear the DTC before starting calibration.
If DTC C1526 (Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Incomplete) is stored, the rotation angle sensor
cannot be initialized. Clear the DTC before starting initialization.

(5) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Utility / Torque Sensor Adjustment.
(6) According to the display on the Techstream, perform calibration.
NOTICE:
Set the steering wheel to the center point and align the front tires straight ahead.
Do not turn the steering wheel sharply.
Do not touch the steering wheel during the rotation angle sensor initialization and torque sensor
zero point calibration (for 3 seconds).
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000275203PX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST (2013 FR-S)

1. DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
(f) According to the display on the Techstream, read the Data List.
EMPS
TESTER MEASUREMENT NORMAL DIAGNOSTIC NOTE

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE CONDITION
Vehicle speed from skid 0 km/h (0 mph) The vehicle is stopped.

Meter control ECU/
Vehicle Min.: 0.0 km/h (0.0 mph) No significant
Velocity The vehicle is driven at a constant speed.
Max.: 300.0 km/h (186.4 fluctuation
mph)
Engine speed/
Engine No significant
Min.: 0 rpm The engine is running at a constant speed.
Revolution fluctuation
Max.: 12800 rpm
Amount of current to
Value changes in
Motor Actual motor/ The engine is running and the steering
proportion to
Current Min.: -327.68 A wheel is being turned.
steering effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Demanded amount of
Command Value changes in
current to motor/ The engine is running and the steering
Value proportion to
Min.: -327.68 A wheel is being turned.
Current steering effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Steering Steering angle speed/ Value changes in

The engine is running and the steering
Angle Min.: -32768 deg/s proportion to
wheel is being turned.
Velocity Max.: 32767 deg/s steering effort
ECU substrate
Thermistor temperature/
- The ignition switch is ON.
Temperature Min.: -50.0°C (-58.0°F)
Max.: 150.0°C (302.0°F)

9 to 16 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
ECU power source

IG Power voltage/
9 to 16 V The ignition switch is ON.
Supply Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
Steering Steering wheel torque/ Value changes in

Wheel Min.: -7.00 Nm proportion to
Torque Max.: 7.00 Nm steering effort
Motor rotation
Motor Motor rotation angle/
angle value The engine is running and the steering
Rotation Min.: 0.000 deg
changes from 0 to wheel is being turned.
Angle Max.: 360.000 deg
360°
Demanded amount of
Command Value changes in
current to motor/ The engine is running and the steering
Val Current proportion to
Min.: -327.68 A wheel is being turned.
2 steering effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Approximately 27 The engine is running and the steering

Coil rear pressurization V wheel is not being turned.
PIG2 voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0.000 V Value changes
between 16 and
Max.: 98.000 V wheel is being turned.
35 V
Approximately 27 The engine is running and the steering

Motor power supply V wheel is not being turned.
Motor voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0.000 V Value changes
between 4 and 35
Max.: 98.000 V wheel is being turned.
V
Motor terminal voltage (U

Motor Value changes
phase)/ The engine is running and the steering
Terminal between 4 and 35
Min.: 0.000 V wheel is being turned.
Volt(U) V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal voltage (V

Motor Value changes
phase)/ The engine is running and the steering
Volt(V) V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal voltage

Motor Value changes
(W phase)/ The engine is running and the steering
Volt(W) V
Max.: 98.000 V

2.3 to 2.7 V
wheel is not turned (without load).
Torque sensor 1 output The engine is running and the steering

Torque
voltage/ 2.3 to 3.8 V wheel is turned to the right when the
Sensor 1
Min.: 0.0000 V vehicle is stopped.
Output
Max.: 5.0000 V
1.2 to 2.7 V wheel is turned to the left when the vehicle
is stopped.

2.3 to 2.7 V
Torque sensor 2 output The engine is running and the steering

Torque
voltage/ 1.2 to 2.7 V wheel is turned to the right when the
Sensor 2
Min.: 0.0000 V vehicle is stopped.
Output
Max.: 5.0000 V
is stopped.
Torque sensor 1 zero

Values differ
TRQ1 Zero point voltage/ The engine is running and the steering
depending on
Point Value Min.: 0.0000 V wheel is not being turned.
vehicle
Max.: 5.0000 V
Torque sensor 2 zero

Values differ
TRQ2 Zero point voltage/ The engine is running and the steering
depending on
Point Value Min.: 0.0000 V wheel is not being turned.
vehicle
Max.: 5.0000 V
Number of times ignition

switch turned to ON/off This value indicates the number of times
IG ON/OFF
after fail detection/ - the ignition switch is turned to ON and off
Times
Min.: 0 times after the latest DTC detection.
Max.: 65535 times
Continuous overheat
Motor
prevention control
Overheat Unrec -
record/
Record
Unrec or Rec
Motor Lo PIG power supply voltage

Power drop record/ Unrec -
Record Unrec or Rec
Record of engine speed

Eng Rev
interruption/ Unrec -
Inter Record
Unrec or Rec
Spd Sig Record of vehicle speed

Invalid signal invalid/ Unrec -
Record Unrec or Rec
Battery voltage reduction

Battery
history/
Voltage Lo 0 to 65535 -
Min.: 0 times, Max.:
Record
65535 times
Number of stored DTCs

when freeze frame data
The Number
stored/ 0 to 255 -
of DTCs
Min.: 0
Max.: 255
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274Z04YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013 FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. CHECK DLC3
2. FUNCTION OF EPS WARNING LIGHT
(a) When a malfunction is detected in the power steering

system, the EPS warning light in the combination meter
comes on to inform the driver of the malfunction.
HINT:
When power assist is stopped or reduced, the EPS warning

light comes on.
Power assist is stopped:
When a malfunction occurs in the power steering system

(including lost CAN communication, etc.)
When the engine stalls (not a malfunction)
During the period after the ignition switch is turned to ON
until the engine is started (not a malfunction)
Power assist is reduced:
When a malfunction occurs in the power steering system

(including lost CAN communication, etc.)
When the battery voltage decreases (not a malfunction)
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274U04GX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
If a trouble code is output during the DTC check, inspect the trouble areas listed for that code. For
details of the code, refer to the "See page" below.
Power Steering System
DTC DETECTION ITEM RETURN-TO-NORMAL EPS WARNING SEE

CODE CONDITION LIGHT PAGE
C1511 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction Ignition switch ON again *1
C1514 Torque Sensor Power Supply Abnormal Ignition switch ON again *1
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Zero Point calibration

C1515 *1
Undone completes
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment

C1516 Clear DTC *1
Incomplete
C1517 Torque Hold Abnormal Ignition switch ON again *1
C1521 Motor Circuit Malfunction Ignition switch ON again *1
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Rotation Angle Sensor

C1525 *1
Undone calibration completes
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization

C1526 Clear DTC *1
Incomplete
C1528 Motor Rotation Angle Sensor Malfunction Ignition switch ON again *1
C1531 ECU Malfunction Ignition switch ON again *1
C1533 ECU Malfunction After normal confirmation *2
C1541 Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction After normal confirmation *1
C1551 IG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction After normal confirmation *1
C1552 PIG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction After normal confirmation *1

C1554 Power Supply Relay Failure Ignition switch ON again *1
C1555 Motor Relay Welding Failure Ignition switch ON again *1
C1581 Assist Map Number Un-Writing Assist Map write *1
C1582 Assist Map Number Mismatch After normal confirmation *2
U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A" After normal confirmation *1
Lost Communication with Vehicle

U0122 After normal confirmation *1
Dynamics Control Module
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle

U0416 Ignition switch ON again *1
*1: Warning light comes on

*2: Warning light turns off
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274U04GX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
(2013 FR-S)

HINT:
If a trouble code is output during the DTC check, inspect the trouble areas listed for that code. For
details of the code, refer to the "See page" below.
DTC DETECTION ITEM RETURN-TO-NORMAL EPS WARNING SEE

CODE CONDITION LIGHT PAGE
C1514 Torque Sensor Power Supply Abnormal Ignition switch ON again *1
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment Zero Point calibration

C1515 *1
Undone completes
Torque Sensor Zero Point Adjustment

C1516 Clear DTC *1
Incomplete
C1517 Torque Hold Abnormal Ignition switch ON again *1
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization Rotation Angle Sensor

C1525 *1
Undone calibration completes
Rotation Angle Sensor Initialization

C1526 Clear DTC *1
Incomplete
C1528 Motor Rotation Angle Sensor Malfunction Ignition switch ON again *1
C1533 ECU Malfunction After normal confirmation *2
C1541 Vehicle Speed Signal Malfunction After normal confirmation *1
C1551 IG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction After normal confirmation *1
C1552 PIG Power Supply Voltage Malfunction After normal confirmation *1

C1554 Power Supply Relay Failure Ignition switch ON again *1
C1555 Motor Relay Welding Failure Ignition switch ON again *1
C1581 Assist Map Number Un-Writing Assist Map write *1
C1582 Assist Map Number Mismatch After normal confirmation *2
U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A" After normal confirmation *1
Lost Communication with Vehicle

U0122 After normal confirmation *1
Invalid Data Received from Vehicle

U0416 Ignition switch ON again *1
*1: Warning light comes on

*2: Warning light turns off
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013 FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / EMPS / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs following the display on the Techstream.
(g) Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart for DTC information .
2. CLEAR DTC
(f) Clear the DTCs by following the display on the Techstream.
(g) Turn the ignition switch off.
(h) Disconnect the Techstream from the DLC3.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277E04GX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: EPS Warning Light Circuit (2013 FR-S)
EPS Warning Light Circuit
DESCRIPTION
If the power steering ECU assembly detects a malfunction, the EPS warning light comes on. At this time,
the power steering ECU assembly stores a DTC in its memory.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
procedure.
HINT:
When the power supply voltage to the power steering ECU assembly (terminals IG and PIG) drops,
required steering effort increases and the EPS warning light turns on.
PROCEDURE
(b) Check the indication condition of the EPS warning light by wiggling the power steering ECU
assembly connector and wire harness up and down, and right and left.
OK:
EPS warning light indication condition does not change.

NG CONNECTOR
OK

OK:
DTC is not output.

OK
3. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (IG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS

IG Power Supply Min.: 0.0000 V 9 to 16 V The ignition switch is ON.
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:

GROUND)
OK
4. READ VALUE USING TECHSTREAM (PIG POWER SUPPLY)

EMPS

DISPLAY CONDITION

9 to 16 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
OK:

GROUND)
OK
5. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING TECHSTREAM (METER / GAUGE SYSTEM)

(a) Perform the Active Test of the combination meter using the Techstream .
Combination Meter
Indicat. EPS EPS warning light OFF/ON Vehicle is stopped and engine is idling
(b) Check that the EPS warning light operates in accordance with the Active Test.
HINT:
Reconnect the connectors and restore the vehicle to its previous condition before checking the
combination meter.

6.

Standard Voltage:
A15-6 (IG) - Body ground Ignition switch ON 9 to 16 V

*a

NG CONNECTOR

7.
(a) Disconnect the A14 power steering ECU assembly

connector .
Standard Voltage:
A14-1 (PIG) - Body ground Always 9 to 16 V

*a

NG CONNECTOR

Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FAIL-SAFE CHART (2013 FR-S)
FAIL-SAFE CHART
If a problem occurs in the power steering system, the EPS warning light comes on in the combination
meter and the power steering assist is stopped, locked at a particular point, or decreased simultaneously
to protect the system.
DTC DETECTION CONDITION FAIL-SAFE OPERATION

CODE
C1511
C1512
C1513
C1514 Torque sensor malfunction
C1515
C1516
C1517
C1521
Power assist stops.
C1522
Motor circuit malfunction
C1523
C1524
C1525
Motor rotation angle sensor
C1526
malfunction
C1528
C1531
C1532
ECU malfunction
C1533
Assist force is restricted.
C1534
The amount of power assist is locked at the 100 km/h (62

C1541 Skid control malfunction
mph) level of power assist.
C1551 IG power supply voltage error
C1552 PIG power supply voltage error

Power assist stops.
C1554 Power supply relay malfunction
C1555 Motor relay malfunction
Assist map not written in power

C1581 Control is performed using the default settings.
steering ECU
Assist map mismatch in power

C1582 Control is performed using the current assist map.
steering ECU
Power assist continues as normal*1.

U0100 ECM communication error
Power assist stops*2.
U0122 Skid control ECU communication The amount of power assist is locked at the 100 km/h (62
U0416 error mph) level of power assist.
HINT:
*1: When the DTC is stored while the engine is running.

*2: When the DTC is stored before the engine is started.
The amount of power assist may be decreased to prevent the motor and ECUs from overheating if
the steering wheel is continuously turned when the vehicle is either stopped or driven at a low
speed, or if the steering wheel is kept at either full lock position for a long time. In such cases, the
amount of power assist returns to normal if the steering wheel is not turned for approximately 10
minutes with the engine idling.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged or the voltage decreases temporarily, the amount of power
assist is reduced and the EPS warning light comes on. In such cases, the amount of power assist
returns normal when the battery voltage recovers.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000275504RX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: FREEZE FRAME DATA (2013 FR-S)
FREEZE FRAME DATA

(f) According to the display on the Techstream, select the freeze frame data.
EMPS

DISPLAY ITEM/RANGE
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 mph) The vehicle is stopped.

from skid control
Meter ECU/
Vehicle Min.: 0.0 km/h
Velocity (0.0 mph) No significant fluctuation The vehicle is driven at a constant speed.
Max.: 300.0 km/h

(186.4 mph)
Engine speed/
Engine
Min.: 0 rpm No significant fluctuation The engine is running at a constant speed.
Revolution
Max.: 12800 rpm
Amount of
Value changes in
Motor Actual current to motor/ The engine is running and the steering
proportion to steering
Current Min.: -327.68 A wheel is being turned.
effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Demanded
Command amount of current Value changes in
Value to motor/ proportion to steering
Current Min.: -327.68 A effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Steering angle
speed/
Steering Value changes in
Min.: -32768 The engine is running and the steering
Angle proportion to steering
deg/s wheel is being turned.
Velocity effort
Max.: 32767
deg/s
ECU substrate
temperature/
Thermistor Min.: -50.0°C (-
- The ignition switch is ON.
Temperature 58.0°F)
Max.: 150.0°C
(302.0°F)
Power source
voltage to active
PIG Power The engine is running and power steering is
motor/ 9 to 16 V
Supply operating.
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
ECU power source

IG Power voltage/
9 to 16 V The ignition switch is ON.
Supply Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 20.1531 V
Steering wheel
Steering Value changes in
torque/ The engine is running and the steering
Wheel proportion to steering
Min.: -7.00 Nm wheel is being turned.
Torque effort
Max.: 7.00 Nm
Motor rotation
Motor angle/ Motor rotation angle
Rotation Min.: 0.000 deg value changes from 0 to
Angle Max.: 360.000 360 deg
deg
Demanded
Command amount of current Value changes in
Val Current to motor/ proportion to steering
2 Min.: -327.68 A effort
Max.: 327.67 A
Coil rear The engine is running and the steering

Approximately 27 V
pressurization wheel is not being turned.
PIG2
voltage/
Voltage Value changes between The engine is running and the steering
Min.: 0.000 V
16 and 35 V wheel is being turned.
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor power The engine is running and the steering

Approximately 27 V
Motor supply voltage/ wheel is not being turned.
Voltage Min.: 0.000 V Value changes between The engine is running and the steering
Max.: 98.000 V 4 and 35 V wheel is being turned.
Motor terminal
Motor voltage (U
Value changes between The engine is running and the steering
Terminal phase)/
Volt(U) Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
Motor voltage (V
Terminal phase)/
Volt(V) Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
Motor terminal
Motor voltage (W
Terminal phase)/
Volt(W) Min.: 0.000 V
Max.: 98.000 V
2.3 to 2.7 V
Torque sensor 1 The engine is running and the steering

Torque
output voltage/ 2.3 to 3.8 V wheel is turned to the right when the vehicle
Sensor 1
Min.: 0.0000 V is stopped.
Output
Max.: 5.0000 V
is stopped.

2.3 to 2.7 V
Torque sensor 2 The engine is running and the steering

Torque
output voltage/ 1.2 to 2.7 V wheel is turned to the right when the vehicle
Sensor 2
Min.: 0.0000 V is stopped.
Output
Max.: 5.0000 V
is stopped.
Torque sensor 1
zero point
TRQ1 Zero Values differ depending The engine is running and the steering
voltage/
Point Value on vehicle wheel is not being turned.
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
Torque sensor 2
zero point
TRQ2 Zero Values differ depending The engine is running and the steering
voltage/
Point Value on vehicle wheel is not being turned.
Min.: 0.0000 V
Max.: 5.0000 V
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274T05UX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH

HINT:
NEXT
(a) Confirm problem symptoms .
NEXT
3. INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE*
(a) Measure the voltage of the battery.

Standard voltage:
11 to 14 V
(b) Using the Techstream, inspect battery voltage reduction history "Battery Voltage Lo Record"
in the Data List .
NEXT
(a) Check and record DTCs and freeze frame data.

NEXT
5. CLEAR DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*
(a) Clear the DTCs and freeze frame data.
NEXT
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
Symptom does not occur. A
Symptom occurs. B
B Go to step 8
(a) Perform symptom simulation .
NEXT
8. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM*

Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
CAN communication system DTC is not output. A
CAN communication system DTC is output. B
HINT:
If any CAN communication system DTCs are output, perform troubleshooting for the CAN
communication system first.
If communication to the power steering ECU cannot be established through the Techstream, inspect
terminals CANH and CANL of the DLC3 and power steering ECU, and the IG circuit of the power
steering ECU.
PROCEED TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

B (HOW TO PROCEED WITH
TROUBLESHOOTING)
9. CHECK FOR DTC*
HINT:
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart when any DTCs are output .
Result
RESULT PROCEED TO
DTC is output. B
B Go to step 11
(a) Refer to Problem Symptoms Table .
NEXT
11. CIRCUIT INSPECTION
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT END
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WF605FX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. CHECK STEERING EFFORT (TORQUE)
NOTICE:
Some of these service operations may affect the SRS airbags. Read the precautionary notices
concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing.
(a) Stop the vehicle on a level, paved surface and align the wheels straight ahead.
(b) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
Wait at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal to
disable the SRS system.
(c) Remove the steering pad .
(d) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
(e) Using a torque wrench, check that the steering wheel set nut is properly tightened.
(f) Turn the ignition switch to ON so that the power steering is ready to operate.
(g) Turn the steering wheel 90 degrees to the right and check the steering effort (torque) while
continuing to turn it further in the same direction.
Standard steering effort (Reference):

6.0 N*m (61 kgf*cm, 53 in.*lbf) or less
(h) Align the front wheels facing straight ahead.
(i) Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
(j) Install the steering pad .
(k) Connect the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274V02QX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PARTS LOCATION (2013 FR-S)
PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274S03XX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
(a) The vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Failure to carry out service
operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to unexpectedly deploy during servicing.
This may cause a serious accident.
Before servicing (including inspection, replacement, removal and installation of parts), be sure to
read the precautionary notices for Supplemental Restraint System .
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRONIC

MOTOR POWER STEERING COMPONENTS
(a) Be sure to align the front wheels straight ahead when removing and installing the power steering
link assembly.
(b) If disconnecting the steering intermediate shaft and pinion shaft of the power steering link
assembly, be sure to place matchmarks before starting the operation.
(c) If replacing the power steering ECU assembly, always replace it with a new one (if the power
steering ECU assembly is not replaced with a new one, DTCs may be stored).
NOTICE:
Do not use the power steering ECU assembly from another vehicle (display model, etc.).
(d) After replacing the steering column assembly or power steering ECU assembly, write the assist
map, initialize the rotation angle sensor and calibrate the torque sensor zero point .
3. HANDLING PRECAUTION
(a) When handling electronic parts:
Avoid any impact to electronic parts such as ECUs and relays. Replace electronic parts
with new ones if dropped or subjected to a severe blow.
Do not expose any electronic parts to high temperatures or humidity.
Do not touch the connector terminals in order to prevent deformation or malfunctions due
to static electricity.
(b) When handling the steering column assembly:
Avoid any impact to the steering column assembly, especially to the motor and torque
sensor. Replace them with new ones if dropped or subjected to a severe blow.
Do not pull the wire harness when moving the steering column assembly.
(c) When disconnecting the connectors related to the power steering system, turn the ignition switch to
ON, center the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal, and then disconnect the connectors.
4. PRECAUTIONS FOR CAN COMMUNICATION

(a) Perform troubleshooting for the communication line problems when DTCs of the CAN
communication system are output. Be sure to start troubleshooting the power steering system after
confirming that the CAN communication system is normal.
(b) Since the CAN communication line has a specific length and route, it cannot be repaired temporarily
with a bypass wire, etc.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000020NO01EX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:

PAGE
Front tires (Improperly

inflated, unevenly worn)
Front wheel alignment

(Incorrect)
Front suspension (Lower ball

joint)
Rack and pinion power steering

gear assembly
Steering column assembly
Torque sensor (Built into

-
Steering is heavy. steering column assembly)
Power steering motor (Built

-
into steering column assembly)
Speed sensor
Skid control ECU
Battery and power source

system
Power steering ECU power

supply voltage and relay
Calibration of rotation angle

sensor output and torque
sensor
Front tires (Improperly

inflated, unevenly worn)

(Incorrect)

joint)
Steering effort differs between right and left or is uneven.
gear assembly

-
steering column assembly)

-

joint)
Speed sensor
Skid control ECU

While driving, steering effort does not change in accordance with -
vehicle speed or the steering wheel does not return properly.
-

gear assembly

joint)
A knocking (or cranking) sound occurs when turning the steering
Steering intermediate shaft -
wheel while power steering operating.
gear assembly

-

Noise occurs when turning the steering wheel during low speed gear assembly
driving.
Steering sensor -

High-pitched sounds (squeaking) occur when turning the gear assembly
steering wheel slowly with the vehicle stopped. Power steering motor (Built
-

gear assembly
The steering wheel vibrates and noise occurs when turning the
steering wheel from lock to lock. -

EPS warning light remains on. EPS warning light circuit
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274Y02YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. DESCRIPTION
The power steering system generates torque through the operation of the motor and reduction
gear installed on the column shaft in order to assist steering effort.
The power steering ECU determines directions and the amount of assisting power in accordance
with vehicle speed signals and signals from the torque sensor built into the steering column
assembly. As a result, the power steering ECU adjusts the steering effort so that it is lighter
during low speed driving and heavier during high speed driving.
When there is a power supply voltage drop that may result in an increase in required steering
effort, the power steering system has a function that warns the driver by illuminating the EPS
warning light.
(a) Power steering ECU:
The power steering ECU calculates assisting power based on steering torque signals from the torque
sensor and vehicle speed signals from the skid control ECU.
(b) Torque sensor:
The torque sensor detects the steering effort generated when the steering wheel is turned and
converts it to an electrical signal.
(c) Power steering motor:
The power steering motor is activated by the current from the power steering ECU and generates
torque to assist the steering effort.
(d) Motor rotation angle sensor:
The motor rotation angle sensor consists of the resolver sensor, which excels in reliability and
durability. The rotation angle sensor detects the rotation angle of the motor and outputs it to the
power steering ECU. As a result, it ensures efficient EPS control.
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: SYSTEM DIAGRAM (2013 FR-S)
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000274W02YX
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: TERMINALS OF ECU (2013 FR-S)
TERMINALS OF ECU
1. CHECK POWER STEERING ECU

*a - -
HINT:
As connector z1 uses a lock lever, each terminal cannot be checked while the connector is still
connected to the power steering ECU.
TERMINAL NO. (SYMBOL) TERMINAL DESCRIPTION
z1-1 (V) V phase motor output
z1-2 (U) U phase motor output
z1-3 (W) W phase motor output
(a) Measure the voltage and resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

A14-1 (PIG) -
W-B Motor power supply Always 9 to 16 V
A14-2 (PGND)
B-
A14-2 (PGND) -
Body Power ground Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground
ground
A15-1 (CANH) -
B-W CAN communication line Ignition switch off 57 to 63 Ω
A15-7 (CANL)
A15-6 (IG) -
G-W - B IG power supply Ignition switch ON 9 to 16 V
A14-2 (PGND)
z2-5 (RZV) - Rotation angle sensor Engine running, steering wheel 0.68 to 4.42
R-B
A14-2 (PGND) excitation output signal being turned V
z2-7 (RZG) - Rotation angle sensor

B-B Always Below 1 Ω
A14-2 (PGND) excitation circuit ground
z2-13 (RZCS) - Rotation angle sensor Engine running, steering wheel 0.68 to 4.42
L-B
A14-2 (PGND) COS aspect input signal being turned V
z2-14 (RZSN) - Rotation angle sensor Engine running, steering wheel 0.68 to 4.42
Y-B
A14-2 (PGND) SIN aspect input signal being turned V
Engine running, steering wheel not

2.3 to 2.7 V
turned (without load)
z2-8 (TRQ1) - Engine running, steering wheel

W-B Torque sensor signal 1 2.3 to 3.8 V
z2-11 (TRQG) turned to right with vehicle stopped
Engine running, steering wheel

1.2 to 2.7 V
turned to left with vehicle stopped
z2-9 (TRQV) - Torque sensor power

R-B Ignition switch ON 4.5 to 5.5 V
z2-11 (TRQG) supply
Engine running, steering wheel not

2.3 to 2.7 V
turned (without load)
z2-10 (TRQ2) - Engine running, steering wheel

Y-B Torque sensor signal 2 1.2 to 2.7 V
z2-11 (TRQG) turned to right with vehicle stopped
Engine running, steering wheel

2.3 to 3.8 V
turned to left with vehicle stopped
B-
z2-11 (TRQG) -
Body Torque sensor ground Always Below 1 Ω
Body ground
ground
If the result is not as specified, the ECU may have a malfunction.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM00000277M064X
Title: POWER ASSIST SYSTEMS: POWER STEERING SYSTEM: U0100,U0122,U0416: Lost Communication
with ECM / PCM "A" (2013 FR-S)
DESCRIPTION
The power steering ECU assembly receives signals from the ECM and skid control ECU (brake actuator
assembly) via the CAN communication system.

CODE
CAN communication system

U0100 Lost communication with the ECM/PCM "A"
ECM
Lost communication with the brake system

U0122 CAN communication system
control module
Skid control ECU (Brake actuator
The brake system control module signal assembly)
U0416
malfunction
PROCEDURE
(b) Check for DTCs .

OK:
DTC is not output.

OK USE SIMULATION METHOD TO CHECK

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002TEU01VX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WAE05WX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
When using a vise, do not overtighten it.
Do not drop the steering column assembly, strike it with tools or subject it to impacts.
If the steering column assembly is subjected to an impact, replace it with a new one.
Do not pull the wire harness of the steering column assembly.
Do not allow any moisture to come into contact with the steering column assembly.
Do not loosen any bolts not mentioned in the procedure.
1. REMOVE STEERING COLUMN UPPER WITH SWITCH BRACKET ASSEMBLY

(a) Using a center punch, mark the center of the 2 tapered-head bolts.
(b) Using a 3 to 4 mm (0.118 to 0.157 in.) diameter drill bit, drill a hole in each tapered-head bolt.
(c) Using a screw extractor, remove each tapered-head bolt,

and then remove the steering column upper with switch
bracket assembly from the steering column assembly.
2. REMOVE TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
(a) Slide the transponder key amplifier, disengage the 2

claws and then remove the transponder key amplifier as
3. REMOVE UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Insert the key.
(b) Disengage the 2 claws and slide the unlock warning switch assembly to remove it as shown in the
illustration.
4. REMOVE KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (for Automatic Transmission)
(a) Remove the 2 screws and the key interlock solenoid from
the steering column upper bracket assembly.
(b) Disengage the clamp.
5. REMOVE IGNITION SWITCH LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Turn the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly to the ACC
position.
*a LOCK
*b ACC
(b) Insert a screwdriver into the hole of the steering column upper bracket assembly as shown in the
illustration. Pull the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly until its claw contacts the stopper of the
steering column upper bracket assembly.
*1 Claw
*2 Stopper
Push
Pull
NOTICE:
Make sure to pull the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly until its claw contacts the stopper of
the steering column upper bracket assembly. Failure to do so will affect later work operations.
(c) Insert a screwdriver into the hole of the steering column upper bracket assembly. Tilt the
screwdriver as shown in the illustration to disengage the claw of the ignition switch lock cylinder
assembly, and pull out the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly from the steering column upper
bracket assembly.
*1 Claw
*2 Stopper
*a Claw disengaged
*b Driver Insertion Hole
Tilt
Pull out
6. REMOVE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 screws and the ignition or starter switch

assembly from the steering column upper bracket
assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001NM101CX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
NOTICE:
1. INSPECT PRELOAD
(a) Secure the steering column assembly in a vice using

aluminum plates and wooden block as shown in the
illustration.
*1 Wooden Block
NOTICE:
Do not overtighten the vice, as the steering column
assembly may become deformed.
Support the steering column assembly with a wooden
block or similar item to ensure that it does not fall.
(b) Install the 2 service nuts to the steering main shaft.
*1 Service Nut
Recommended service nut:

Thread diameter
12.0 mm (0.472 in.)
Thread pitch
1.25 mm (0.0492 in.)
(c) Tighten the 2 service nuts each other to lock them.
NOTICE:
Do not apply excess torque to the service nuts by using a tool such as an impact wrench.
HINT:
These nuts are installed to turn the steering main shaft. They should be removed after inspecting the
steering main shaft rotating torque.
(d) Using a torque wrench, turn the main shaft and measure
the preload.
Preload:
1.6 to 2.1 N*m (16.3 to 21.4 kgf*cm, 14.2 to 18.6
in.*lbf)
If the preload is not as specified, replace the steering

column assembly with a new one.
2. INSPECT STEERING LOCK OPERATION
(a) Check that the steering lock mechanism is activated

when the key is removed.
(b) Check that the steering lock mechanism is deactivated

when the key is inserted and turned to the ACC position.
*a LOCK
*b ACC
HINT:
If there is any abnormality, replace the ignition switch lock

cylinder assembly or steering column upper bracket assembly.
3. INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Check that the 2 capsules are securely installed to the

steering column assembly as shown in the illustration.
OK:
5.0 mm (0.1969 in.) or more
*1 Capsule
If the capsules are not positioned as specified, replace the

steering column assembly with a new one.
(b) Check the 2 capsules for deformation and damage.

If either of the capsules is deformed, loose, missing or damaged, replace the steering column
assembly with a new one.
4. INSPECT STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(a) Check for play
(1) Check that there is no play at the universal joint.
OK:
No play
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the steering

intermediate shaft assembly with a new one.
(b) Turning toque
(1) Hold the steering intermediate shaft assembly in a

vise with the yoke on the rack and pinion power
steering gear assembly side facing upward.
(2) Using a push and pull gauge, measure the turning torque in the both directions.
Torque:
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the steering intermediate shaft assembly with a new one.
(3) Hold the steering intermediate shaft assembly in a vise with the yoke on the steering column
assembly side facing upward.
(4) Using a push and pull gauge, measure the turning torque in the both directions.
Torque:
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, replace the steering intermediate shaft assembly with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WAB094X
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
2. INSTALL STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the steering column assembly with the 2 nuts and new bolt.
NOTICE:
When installing the steering column assembly, be careful that the wire harness does not
interfere with or is not pinched between other parts.
(c) Connect the 2 connectors to the power steering ECU.
(1) As shown in the illustration, return the lock lever to its original position to connect the connector
and securely push in the lock of the lock lever.
(d) Connect the each connector and engage the wire harness clamps to the steering column assembly.
*b Push in the lock
3. INSTALL STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

(a) Pass the steering intermediate shaft assembly through the hole in the body from the inside of the
cabin.
(b) Connect the steering intermediate shaft assembly to the
rack and pinion power steering gear assembly.
*1 Matchmark
NOTICE:
assembly and the rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
(c) Install the new bolt.
(d) Install the steering intermediate shaft assembly to the

steering column assembly.
*1 Matchmark
NOTICE:
(e) Install the new bolt.
(f) Engage the 4 claws and install the dust seal.
4. INSTALL TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and turn the ignition switch to ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and turn the
ignition switch to ON.
Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned straight when inspecting the steering sensor.
(a) With the clamp loosened, install the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-assembly to
the steering column assembly.
(b) Engage the claw on the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-assembly to the steering
column assembly and tighten the clamp.
(c) Connect the each connector to the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-assembly.

(a) Engage the 2 claws to install the upper steering column cover.

(a) Engage the 6 claws to install the lower steering column cover.
(b) Install the 2 screws.

10. TURN FRONT WHEELS TO FACE STRAIGHT AHEAD
12. INSPECT STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT
14. INSTALL LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY
16. INSTALL INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL
(a) Engage the 4 clips and claw to install the instrument side
panel.

20. PERFORM MEMORIZATION
HINT:
Perform VSC sensor neutral memorization .
21. INITIALIZE ROTATION ANGLE SENSOR AND CALIBRATE TORQUE SENSOR ZERO
POINT
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WAF05WX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
NOTICE:
Do not drop the steering column assembly, strike it with tools or subject it to impacts.
If the steering column assembly is subjected to an impact, replace it with a new one.
Do not pull the wire harness of the steering column assembly.
Do not allow any moisture to come into contact with the steering column sub-assembly.
Do not loosen any bolts not mentioned in the procedure.
1. INSTALL IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Install the ignition or starter switch assembly with the 2

screws to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
2. INSTALL IGNITION SWITCH LOCK CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
(a) Make sure that the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly
is in the ACC position.
*a LOCK
*b ACC
(b) Install the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
(c) Make sure that the ignition switch lock cylinder assembly is securely installed.
3. INSTALL KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (for Automatic Transmission)

(a) Engage the clamp.
(b) Install the 2 screws and the key interlock solenoid to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
4. INSTALL UN-LOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
(a) Slide the unlock warning switch assembly and engage the
2 claws to install the unlock warning switch assembly to
the steering column upper bracket assembly as shown in
the illustration.
5. INSTALL TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER
(a) Align the transponder key amplifier with the steering

column upper bracket assembly. Tilt the transponder key
amplifier slightly and slide it into position.
(b) Push the transponder key amplifier, and engage the 2 claws to install the transponder key amplifier
to the steering column upper bracket assembly.
6. INSPECT STEERING LOCK OPERATION
7. INSTALL STEERING COLUMN UPPER WITH SWITCH BRACKET ASSEMBLY

(a) Secure the steering column assembly in a vise.
(b) Temporarily install the steering column upper with switch
bracket assembly to the steering column assembly with
new tapered-head bolt.
(c) Tighten the tapered-head bolt until the bolt head break off.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WAD090X
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Some of these service operations affect the SRS airbag system. Read the precautionary notices
concerning the SRS airbag system before servicing the steering column.
1. PRECAUTION
2. TURN FRONT WHEELS TO FACE STRAIGHT AHEAD
6. REMOVE INSTRUMENT SIDE PANEL
(a) Using a moulding remover, disengage the claw and 4

clips and remove the instrument side panel.
*1 Moulding Remover
8. REMOVE LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL REINFORCEMENT SUB-ASSEMBLY

(b) Disengage the 6 claws and remove the lower steering column cover.
(a) Disengage the 2 claws to remove the upper steering

column cover.
14. REMOVE TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ASSEMBLY WITH SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the each connector from the turn signal switch assembly with spiral cable sub-
assembly.
(b) Using pliers, loosen the clamp.
(c) With the clamp loosened, use a screwdriver to disengage

the claw, and remove the turn signal switch assembly
with spiral cable sub-assembly from the steering column
assembly.
*1 Clamp
*2 Claw
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected
and turn the ignition switch to ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable with the battery connected
and turn the ignition switch to ON.
Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned
straight when inspecting the steering sensor.
15. REMOVE STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

*1 Matchmark
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the steering column
assembly.
(c) Put matchmarks on the steering intermediate shaft

assembly and the rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
*1 Matchmark
(d) Remove the bolt and separate the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the rack and pinion
power steering gear assembly.
(e) Disengage the 4 claws from the exterior of the vehicle

cabin, and remove the steering intermediate shaft
assembly.
16. REMOVE STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY
(a) Disconnect the 2 connectors from the power steering

ECU.
(1) As shown illustration, pull out the lock of the lock lever
and turn the lock lever to disconnect the connector.
(b) Disengage the clamp.
(c) Disconnect the each connector and disengage the wire harness clamps from the steering column
assembly.
(d) Remove the bolt and 2 nuts to remove the steering

column assembly.
HINT:
When pulling the bolts out, lifting the motor section of the
steering column assembly and tilting the steering column
assembly will make it easier to remove the bolts.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001R4405BX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
1. STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

(a) Inspect steering wheel off center.
(1) Turn the steering wheel to the center position.
(2) Apply masking tape to the top center of the steering

wheel and upper steering column cover.
*1 Steering Wheel
*2 Upper Steering Column Cover
*a Masking Tape
(3) Drive the vehicle in a straight line for 100 m (328 ft.) at a constant speed of 56 km/h (35 mph),
while holding the steering wheel to maintain the course.
(4) Draw a line on the masking tape as shown in the

illustration.
*2 Steering Wheel
*a Marked Line
(5) Turn the steering wheel to the center position.
HINT:
Look at the upper surface of the steering wheel, steering spoke and SRS airbag line to find the center
position.
(6) Draw a new line on the masking tape on the steering

wheel as shown in the illustration.
*2 Steering Wheel
*a Marked Line
(7) Measure the distance between the 2 lines on the masking tape on the steering wheel.
(8) Convert the measured distance to steering angle.
HINT:
Measured distance 1 mm (0.0394 in.) = Steering angle of approximately 1 degree.

Make a note of the steering angle.
(b) Adjust the steering angle.
(1) Put matchmarks on both sides of the tie rod assembly

and steering rack end sub-assembly respectively.
*1 Matchmark
(2) Using a paper gauge, measure the distance from the RH and LH tie rod ends to the rack end
screws.
HINT:
Measure both RH and LH sides.

Make a note of the measured values.
(3) Remove the steering rack boot clips from both sides of
the rack boots.
(4) Loosen the RH and LH lock nuts.
(5) Turn the RH and LH rack ends by the same amount (but in different directions) according to the
steering angle.
HINT:
One 360 degree turn of rack end (1.5 mm (0.0591 in.) horizontal movement) equals to 12 degrees of
steering angle.
(6) Tighten the RH and LH lock nuts to the specified torque.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the difference in length between the RH and LH tie rod ends and rack end screws
is within 1.5 mm (0.0591 in.).
(7) Install the RH and LH boot clips.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WB705QX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
1. INSPECT STEERING WHEEL FREE PLAY

(a) Stop the vehicle and position the front wheels straight ahead.
(b) Gently turn the steering wheel right and left, and check steering wheel free play.
Maximum free play:

30 mm (1.18 in.)
HINT:
If the free play exceeds the maximum, check the steering system .
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WB506OX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PRECAUTION (2013 FR-S)
PRECAUTION
1. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING SYSTEM
(a) Care must be taken when replacing parts. Incorrect replacement may affect the performance of the
steering system and result in a driving hazard.
2. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM

(a) This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Failure to carry out service
operations in the correct sequence could cause the SRS to unexpectedly deploy during servicing.
This may cause a serious accident. Before servicing (including inspection, replacement, removal,
and installation of parts), be sure to read the precautionary notices for Supplemental Restraint
System .
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING COLUMN (When handling the steering

column assembly)
(a) Avoid any impact to the steering column assembly, especially to the torque sensor. Replace the
steering column assembly with a new one if it is dropped or subjected to any severe impacts.
(b) Do not pull the wire harness when moving the steering column assembly.
(c) When the steering column assembly has been replaced, perform the rotation angle sensor
(d) When the steering column assembly has been replaced, perform the VSC sensor neutral
memorization .
(e) Do not release the tilt lever when the steering column assembly is not installed on the vehicle.
4. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STEERING COLUMN (When disconnecting or

reconnecting the connectors)
(a) Before disconnecting the connectors related to the power steering system, turn the ignition switch
to ON, center the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch off, and then disconnect the connectors.
(b) Before reconnecting the connectors related to the power steering system, ensure that the ignition
switch is off. Then center the steering wheel and turn the ignition switch to ON.
NOTICE:
Do not turn the ignition switch to ON when the steering wheel is not centered.
(c) If the above operations are not carried out properly, the steering center point (zero point) will
deviate, which may lead to a difference in steering effort between turning right and left. If there is a
difference in steering effort between turning right and left, perform the rotation angle sensor
5. HANDLING PRECAUTION FOR SPIRAL CABLE

(a) Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and turn the ignition switch to ON.
(b) Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and turn the
ignition switch to ON.
(c) Ensure that the steering wheel is installed and aligned straight when inspecting the steering sensor.
(d) Be sure that the spiral cable with sensor sub-assembly is in the center position during installation
and when removing and installing the steering wheel .
CAUTION:
If the steering wheel is turned without the spiral cable installed in the neutral position, the cable
may break.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WB606VX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Steering System

PAGE
Front tires (Improperly inflated,

unevenly worn)

(Incorrect)
Steering system joints (Worn) -
Steering column

-

-
Heavy steering
Speed sensor

-
system

source voltage and relay

gear assembly
Power steering ECU

-
actuator assembly)

unevenly worn)

(Incorrect)
Poor return

gear assembly
Power steering ECU

joint)
Intermediate shaft, universal

Excessive free play -
joint, sliding yoke (Worn)
Front axle hub (Hub bearing)

gear assembly

joint)
A knocking (or clunking) sound occurs when turning the steering
wheel back and forth while power steering is operating. Steering intermediate shaft -
Power steering ECU

Friction occurs when turning the steering wheel during low-
speed driving. Power steering motor (Built
-

A high-pitched sound (squeaking) occurs when turning the
-

Steering wheel vibrates and noise occurs when turning the
steering wheel with the vehicle stopped. Power steering motor (Built
-
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WB606VX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Steering System

PAGE

unevenly worn)

(Incorrect)
Steering column

-

-
Heavy steering
Speed sensor

-
system

source voltage and relay

gear assembly
Power steering ECU

-
actuator assembly)

unevenly worn)

(Incorrect)
Poor return

gear assembly
Power steering ECU

joint)
Intermediate shaft, universal

Excessive free play -
joint, sliding yoke (Worn)
Front axle hub (Hub bearing)

gear assembly

joint)
A knocking (or clunking) sound occurs when turning the steering
wheel back and forth while power steering is operating. Steering intermediate shaft -
Power steering ECU

Friction occurs when turning the steering wheel during low-
speed driving. Power steering motor (Built
-

A high-pitched sound (squeaking) occurs when turning the
-

Steering wheel vibrates and noise occurs when turning the
steering wheel with the vehicle stopped. Power steering motor (Built
-
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000033RS06RX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000033RR08CX
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and the ignition switch ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and the ignition
switch ON.
1. INSTALL NO. 1 STEERING WHEEL ORNAMENT

(a) Engage the 2 claws and guide to install the No. 1 steering wheel ornament.
2. INSTALL LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/ Cruise Control System)
3. INSTALL LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/o Cruise Control System)
(a) Engage the 2 claws and install the lower steering wheel boss cover.
(b) Install the 2 screws.
4. INSTALL STEERING SHAKE DAMPER

(a) Install the steering shake damper with 2 screws to steering wheel assembly.
5. INSTALL SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY) (for

(a) Install the steering wheel assembly aligning the

matchmarks on the steering wheel assembly and steering
main shaft.
*1 Matchmark
(b) Install the steering wheel assembly set nut.

(c) Connect the connectors to the spiral cable sub-assembly and steering wheel assembly.
9. CHECK STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT
10. INSTALL HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
11. INSPECT HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
12. PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK
13. INSPECT SRS WARNING LIGHT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000033RT088X
Title: STEERING COLUMN: STEERING WHEEL: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Do not replace the spiral cable with the battery connected and the ignition switch ON.
Do not rotate the spiral cable without the steering wheel with the battery connected and the ignition
switch ON.
1. PRECAUTION
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
The power window system utilizes a mechanism that the door glass moves down slightly when
the door is opened, and that the glass moves up when closing the door in order to prevent the
door molding from being damaged. When the battery negative (-) terminal needs to be
disconnected for servicing, fully open the driver and passenger door glasses in advance.
4. REMOVE HORN BUTTON ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the steering wheel assembly set nut.
*1 Matchmark
(b) Put matchmarks on the steering wheel assembly and steering main shaft.
(c) Disconnect the connectors from the spiral cable sub-assembly and steering wheel assembly.
(d) Using SST, remove the steering wheel assembly.
*a Turn
*b Hold
SST: 09950-50013
09951-05010
09952-05010
09953-05020
09954-05031
NOTICE:
Apply a small amount of grease to the threads and tip of
SST (09953-05020) before use.
6. REMOVE SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH (TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY) (for

7. REMOVE STEERING SHAKE DAMPER
(a) Remove the 2 screws and steering shake damper from

steering wheel assembly.
8. REMOVE LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/ Cruise Control System)
9. REMOVE LOWER STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER (w/o Cruise Control System)

(b) Disengage the 2 claws and remove the lower steering wheel boss cover.
10. REMOVE CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSEMBLY (w/ Cruise Control System)
11. REMOVE NO. 1 STEERING WHEEL ORNAMENT
(a) Disengage the 2 claws and guide to remove the No. 1

steering wheel ornament.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002TET014X
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000045EQ00OX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
1. SECURE RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, secure the rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly in a vise.
SST: 09612-00012
*1 Protective Tape
HINT:
Tape SST before use.
2. REMOVE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Put matchmarks on the tie rod end sub-assembly LH and

the steering rack end sub-assembly.
*1 Matchmark
(b) Remove the tie rod end sub-assembly LH and lock nut.
3. REMOVE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
Use the same procedure as for the LH side.
4. REMOVE STEERING RACK BOOT CLIP
HINT:
Use the same procedure for both the LH side and RH side.
(a) Using pliers, remove the steering rack boot clip.
5. REMOVE NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
(a) Using a screwdriver, remove the No. 1 steering rack boot

clamp.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the No. 1 steering rack boot.
6. REMOVE NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT
NOTICE:
If the No. 1 steering rack boot is fissured, damaged or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
HINT:
7. REMOVE STEERING RACK END SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using SST, remove the steering rack end sub-assembly.
SST: 09922-10010
*c Turn *d Hold
NOTICE:
Turn SST in the direction as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
8. REMOVE STEERING RACK GUIDE

(a) Using SST, remove the lock nut.
SST: 09922-10010
NOTICE:
(b) Using SST, remove the steering rack guide spring cap.
SST: 09631-10021
(c) Remove the steering rack guide and the steering rack guide spring.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001S2N02GX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Secure the tie rod assembly in a vise.
NOTICE:
(b) Turn the ball joint back and forth.
OK:
There is no unusual resistance or play while turning.
HINT:
If the result is not as specified, remove the tie rod end sub-assembly with a new one.
If the dust seal is fissured, damaged or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
NOTICE:
Inspect the total preload in a no-load condition by removing the tie rod assembly RH and LH, and
steering rack boots.
(a) Install SST to the pinion shaft and turn it left and right 5
times or more.
SST: 09616-00011
(b) Set a torque wrench to SST and turn the pinion shaft continuously at a rate of 4 to 6 seconds per
turn to inspect the total preload of the steering gear assembly.
Standard Preload:
0.9 to 1.6 N*m (9.2 to 16.3 kgf*cm, 8.0 to 14.2 in.*lbf)
NOTICE:
Inspect the total preload around the steering rack center position.
HINT:
If the total preload is not within the specified range, adjust the total preload.
3. ADJUST TOTAL PRELOAD

(a) Temporarily install the rack ends sub-assembly RH and LH.
(b) Install the steering rack guide and steering rack guide spring to the steering rack housing.
(c) Apply the three bond to the screw part of steering rack guide spring cap and steering rack housing.
(d) Temporally install the steering rack guide spring cap.
(e) Using SST, tighten the steering rack guide spring cap so
that the rotational torque of the pinion shaft reaches the
standard value.
SST: 09631-10021
SST: 09616-00011
Torque: Preload (turning):
0.9 to 1.6 N*m (9.2 to 16.3 kgf*cm, 8.0 to 14.2 in.*lbf)
(f) Apply the three bond to the screw part of lock nut.
(g) Using SST, hold the steering rack guide spring cap and
tighten the lock nut.
SST: 09631-10021
SST: 09922-10010
NOTICE:
situations where SST is combined with a torque wrench
.
(h) Set a torque wrench to SST and turn the pinion shaft continuously at a rate of 4 to 6 seconds per
turn to inspect the total preload of the steering gear assembly.
SST: 09616-00011
Standard Preload:
0.9 to 1.6 N*m (9.2 to 16.3 kgf*cm, 8.0to 14.2 in.*lbf)
NOTICE:
Inspect the total preload around the steering rack center position.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001S2M03AX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY

(a) Install the rack and pinion power steering gear assembly with the 2 bolts.
HINT:
Confirm that the rack is positioned in neutral.
2. CONNECT STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(a) Align the matchmarks and install the steering

intermediate shaft to the rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly.
*1 Matchmark
(b) Install the new bolt.
3. CONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Connect the tie rod end sub-assembly LH to the steering knuckle with the nut.
(b) Install a new cotter pin.
NOTICE:
Further tighten the nut up to 60° if the holes for the cotter pin are not aligned.
4. CONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Install the front stabilizer bar together with the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly LH and
RH to the front suspension cross member with the new 8 bolts.
6. CONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Connect the front stabilizer link assembly LH to the front
stabilizer bar with the nut.
If the ball joint turns together with the nut, use a

hexagon wrench to hold the stud bolt.
7. CONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
10. INSTALL FRONT WHEELS

13. PERFORM MEMORIZATION
HINT:
Perform VSC sensor neutral memorization .

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000045ER00OX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL STEERING RACK GUIDE

(a) Apply grease to the steering rack guide spring and the contact surface of the rack guide.
(b) Install the rack guide and the steering rack guide spring.
(c) Apply three bond to 2 or 3 threads of the steering rack guide spring cap.
(d) Temporarily install the steering rack guide spring cap.
2. ADJUST TOTAL PRELOAD
3. INSTALL STEERING RACK END SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Using SST, install the steering rack end sub-assembly.
SST: 09922-10010
*c Turn *d Hold
HINT:
Using SST, hold the steering rack and install the steering rack end sub-assembly.
NOTICE:
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where SST is combined with a
torque wrench .
Fix the steering rack firmly in place.
4. INSTALL NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT
HINT:
(a) Wipe the old grease off of the No. 1 steering rack boot and rack end mating groove.
(b) Apply silicone grease to the inside of the small opening of

a new No. 1 steering rack boot.
(c) Install the No. 1 steering rack boot to the groove on the rack housing.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage or twist the boot.
Make sure that the boot is free of rust and foreign matter.
5. INSTALL NO. 1 STEERING RACK BOOT CLAMP
HINT:
(a) Install the new No. 1 steering rack boot clamp to the No.
1 steering rack boot in such a way that the staked part of
the clamp is positioned with in the range, as shown in the
illustration.
*a 150°
(b) Using SST, tighten a new No. 1 steering rack boot clamp
SST: 09521-24010
Clearance:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.) or less
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage the No. 1 steering rack boot.
If the No. 1 steering rack boot is fissured, damaged or
deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
6. INSTALL STEERING RACK BOOT CLIP
HINT:
(a) Using pliers, install the steering rack boot clip.
7. INSPECT RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, rotate the pinion shaft to see if both the left
and the right steering rack boots expand and contract
smoothly.
SST: 09616-00011
NOTICE:
Set the pinion shaft at the neutral position after the
inspection.
HINT:
If the operation cannot be done as specified, use a new

steering rack boot clamp and reinstall the steering rack boots.
8. INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Temporarily tighten the lock nut and tie rod end sub-
assembly LH to the steering rack end sub-assembly until
the matchmarks are aligned.
*1 Matchmark
HINT:
After adjusting the front wheel alignment, securely tighten the

lock nut.
Temporarily tighten - Torque: 5.0 N·m (51 kgf·cm,

44in·lbf)
Securely tighten - Torque: 85 N·m (869 kgf·cm,
63ft·lbf)
9. INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
Use the procedure as for the LH side.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001S2P03AX
Title: STEERING GEAR / LINKAGE: STEERING GEAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
NOTICE:
Be sure to align the front wheels straight ahead when removing and installing the steering gear
assembly.
When disconnecting the steering intermediate shaft assembly and the pinion shaft of the steering
gear assembly, be sure to place matchmarks before servicing.
1. PLACE FRONT WHEELS FACING STRAIGHT AHEAD
2. REMOVE FRONT WHEELS
3. SECURE STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
(a) Secure the steering wheel assembly with the seat belt in
order to prevent rotation.
HINT:
This operation is useful to prevent damage to the spiral cable.
6. DISCONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the nut and front stabilizer link assembly LH

from the front stabilizer bar.

7. DISCONNECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
(a) Remove the 8 bolts, and remove the front stabilizer bar
together with the rear body mounting cushion sub-
assembly LH and RH from the front suspension cross
member.
9. SEPARATE STEERING INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

assembly and rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
*1 Matchmark
(c) Disconnect the steering intermediate shaft assembly from the rack and pinion power steering gear
assembly.
10. DISCONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
(b) Install SST to the tie rod end sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02060
NOTICE:
Make sure that the lower ends of the tie rod end sub-
assembly LH and SST are aligned.
(c) Secure SST using a string.
NOTICE:
Be sure to tighten the string firmly to secure SST to the steering knuckle to prevent SST from
falling off.
(d) Using SST, separate the tie rod end sub-assembly LH from the steering knuckle.
*1 Center Nut - -
*a String *b Grease Application Area
Place the wrench here. - -
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02010
CAUTION:
Apply grease to the bolt threads and the tip of SST.
NOTICE:
Install SST with the center nut so that A and B shown in the illustration are parallel. Otherwise, the
dust cover may be damaged.
Be sure to place the wrench on the part indicated in the illustration.

Do not damage the ball joint dust cover.
11. DISCONNECT TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
12. REMOVE RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rack and pinion power steering
gear assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001BCN021X
Title: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTICE:
If the wheel alignment has been adjusted, and if suspension or underbody components have
been removed/installed or replaced, be sure to perform the following initialization procedure in
order for the system to function normally:
Perform zero point calibration of the yaw rate and acceleration sensor and test mode inspection
.
1. INSPECT TIRES
2. MEASURE VEHICLE HEIGHT
(a) Bounce the vehicle up and down at the corners to

stabilize the suspension before inspecting the vehicle
height.
Vehicle Height (Unloaded Vehicle)
TIRE SIZE FRONT B - A REAR C FRONT D REAR E
146 mm 225 mm 375 mm 372 mm

215/45 R17
(5.75 in.) (8.86 in.) (14.76 in.) (14.65 in.)
146 mm 225 mm 375 mm 372 mm

P215/45 R17
(5.75 in.) (8.86 in.) (14.76 in.) (14.65 in.)
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection while the vehicle is empty (with a
spare tire, jack and tools on board, but with the fuel tank
filled with fuel).
The standard value shown here is a value that is used for
adjusting the wheel alignment and does not indicate the
height of an actual vehicle.
Measuring points:
A
Ground clearance of front lower suspension arm set front
bolt center
B
Ground clearance of front wheel center
C
Ground clearance of lower control arm set bolt center
D
Front wheel arch height of front wheel center
E
Rear wheel arch height of rear wheel center
3. INSPECT CAMBER, CASTER AND STEERING AXIS
INCLINATION
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection while the vehicle is empty
(without a spare tire, jack or tools on board, but with
the fuel tank filled with fuel).
(a) Put the front wheel on the center of the alignment tester.
*1 Alignment tester
*2 Camber-Caster-Steering Axis Inclination Gauge
(b) Remove the wheel cap.
(c) Set the camber-caster-steering axis inclination gauge at

the center of the axle hub or drive shaft.
(d) Inspect the camber, caster and steering axis inclination.
Standard Dimension (Unloaded Vehicle):
CAMBER CASTER STEERING AXIS INCLINATION

(REFERENCE) (REFERENCE)
0 +/- 45' 5°54' 15°31'

(0 +/- 0.75°) (5.90°) (15.52°)
NOTICE:
Perform the inspection while the vehicle is empty (with a
spare tire, jack and tools on board, but with the fuel tank
filled with fuel).
The tolerance for the difference between the left and right
wheels is 45' (0.75°) or less for both the camber.
(e) Remove the camber-caster-steering axis inclination

gauge and attachment.
(f) Install the wheel cap.

If the caster and steering axis inclination are not within
the specified values after the camber has been correctly
adjusted, recheck the suspension parts for damage and
wear.
4. ADJUST CAMBER
NOTICE:
Inspect toe-in after the camber has been adjusted.
(a) Remove the front wheel.
(b) Loosen the lower mounting bolt and nut of the front
shock absorber assembly and steering knuckle.
(c) Replace the upper mounting bolt of the front shock

absorber assembly and steering knuckle with a service
bolt. (Part No.: SU003-02818)
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the rear side of the vehicle.
(d) Pivot the lower mounting bolt to move the front shock
absorber assembly and steering knuckle, and use the play
between the bolt and bolt holds of the steering knuckle
and front shock absorber assembly to adjust the camber.
NOTICE:
Left-right tolerance for camber is to be 0°45' (0.75°) or
less.
HINT:
The range that can be adjusted by replacing bolts is 0°+/- 45'

(0°+/- 0.75°).
(e) Tighten the 2 bolts and 2 new nuts.
(f) Install the front wheel.
(g) Lower the vehicle and bounce it up and down several times to stabilize the front suspension.
(h) Check the camber.

(i) Check the toe-in.
5. INSPECT TOE-IN
(a) Bounce the vehicle up and down at the corners to stabilize the suspension.
(b) Release the parking brake and move the shift lever to the neutral position (for manual
transmission).
(c) Release the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (for Automatic transmission).
(d) Push the vehicle straight ahead approximately 5 m (16.4 ft.). (Step A)
(e) Put tread center marks on the rearmost points of the front wheels and measure the distance
between the marks (dimension B).
*a Tread Center Mark
*b Dimension B
Front of the Vehicle
(f) Slowly push the vehicle straight ahead to cause the front wheels to rotate 180°. Use the front tire
valve as a reference point.
HINT:
Do not allow the wheels to rotate more than 180°. If the wheels rotate more than 180°, perform the
procedure from Step A again.
(g) Measure the distance between the tread center marks on the front side of the wheels (dimension
A).
*a Dimension A
Standard Dimension (Unloaded Vehicle):
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 0°00' +/- 0°11' (0.00° +/- 0.19°)
B - A: 0 +/- 3.0 mm (0 +/- 0.1181 in.)
HINT:
Measure "B - A" only when "C + D" cannot be measured.
If the toe-in is not within the specified value, adjust it at the rack ends.
6. ADJUST TOE-IN
(a) Measure the thread lengths of the right and left rack
ends.
Standard:
Difference in thread length of 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.) or less
(b) Remove the rack boot set clips.
(c) Loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.
(d) Adjust the rack ends if the difference in thread length

between the right and left rack ends is not within the
specified range.
(1) If the toe-in measurement is greater than the
specified range (too much toe-out), extend the
shorter rack end so that the length difference is within
the specified range.
(2) If the toe-in measurement is less than the specified

range (too much toe-in), shorten the longer rack end
so that the length difference is within the specified
range.
(3) Measure the toe-in.
(e) Turn the right and left rack ends by an equal amount to
adjust the toe-in.
(f) Make sure that the thread lengths of the right and left
rack ends are the same.
(g) Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts.
(h) Place the steering rack boots on the seats and install the
steering rack boot clips.
HINT:
Make sure that the steering rack boots are not twisted.
7. INSPECT WHEEL ANGLE
(a) Put tread center marks on the rearmost points of a turning radius gauge.
*a Inside
*b Outside
(b) Turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right and measure the turning angle.
HINT:
Inspect while the vehicle is unloaded.
Wheel Turning Angle (Unloaded Vehicle):
INSIDE WHEEL OUTSIDE WHEEL

(REFERENCE) (REFERENCE)
36°54' 31°12'
(43.90°) (31.20°)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000WXS028X
Title: ALIGNMENT / HANDLING DIAGNOSIS: REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT: ADJUSTMENT (2013 FR-S)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTICE:
If the wheel alignment has been adjusted, and if suspension or underbody components have
been removed/installed or replaced, be sure to perform the following initialization procedure in
order for the system to function normally:
Perform zero point calibration of the yaw rate and acceleration sensor and test mode inspection
.
1. INSPECT TIRES
2. MEASURE VEHICLE HEIGHT
3. INSPECT TOE-IN
NOTICE:
Inspect while the vehicle is unloaded.
(a) Bounce the vehicle up and down at the corners to stabilize the suspension.
(b) Release the parking brake and move the shift lever to N.
(c) Push the vehicle straight ahead approximately 5 m (16.4 ft.). (Step B)
(d) Put tread center marks on the rearmost points of the rear wheels and measure the distance
between the marks (dimension B).
*a Tread Center Mark
*b Dimension B
(e) Slowly push the vehicle straight ahead to cause the rear wheels to rotate 180°. Use the rear tire
valve as a reference point.
HINT:
Do not allow the wheels to rotate more than 180°. If the wheels rotate more than 180°, perform the
procedure from Step B again.
(f) Measure the distance between the tread center marks on the front of the rear wheels (dimension
A).
*a Dimension A
Toe-in (Unloaded Vehicle):
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 0°10' +/- 0°15' (0.16° +/- 0.24°)
B - A: 2.0 +/- 3.0 mm(0.0787 +/- 0.1181 in.)
HINT:
Measure "B - A" only when "C + D" cannot be measured.
If the toe-in is not within the specified range, adjust it at the toe control link sub-assembly.
4. ADJUST TOE-IN
(a) Loosen the toe adjust cam nut.
(b) Turn the adjust cams by an equal amount to adjust the toe-in.
Toe-in (Unloaded Vehicle):
SPECIFIED CONDITION
C + D: 0°10' +/- 0°15' (0.16° +/- 0.24°)

B - A: 2.0 +/- 3.0 mm(0.0787 +/- 0.1181 in.)
HINT:
Try to adjust the toe-in to the center value.

The toe-in will change by approximately 1.3 mm (0.051 in.) for each gradation of the cam.
(c) Tighten the toe adjust cam nut.
5. INSPECT CAMBER
(a) Remove the center wheel ornament.
(b) Install a camber-caster-kingpin gauge at the center of the

axle hub or drive shaft.
*1 Camber-caster-kingpin Gauge
(c) Inspect the camber.
Camber (Unloaded Vehicle):
CAMBER INCLINATION RIGHT-LEFT DIFFERENCE
-1°12' +/- 45'

45' (0.75°) or less
(-1.20° +/- 0.75°)
If the measured value is not within the specified range, inspect the suspension parts for damage
and wear. Replace parts as necessary because camber cannot be properly adjusted with any
damaged or worn parts.
(d) Remove the camber-caster-kingpin gauge.
(e) Install the center wheel ornament.
6. INSPECT REAR SUSPENSION
(a) Inspect the rear suspension member.
(1) Measure the distance between the centers of the 2

installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH and RH
Standard distance:
442.8 to 448.8 mm (17.43 to 17.67 in.)
If the distance is not within the specified range,

replace the rear suspension member.
(b) Inspect the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly.
(1) Measure the distance between the centers of the 2

installation bolts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly.
Standard distance:
447.9 to 451.9 mm (17.63 to 17.79 in.)
If the distance is not within the specified range,

replace the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly.
(c) Inspect and adjust the toe-in and camber.
(1) Inspect the toe-in and camber.
Inspect the toe-in and camber. If the values are not within the specified ranges, adjust the
installation bolt holding the rear suspension member to the vehicle body, or the bolt holding the
upper control arm and rear suspension arm so that the values fall within the specified ranges.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004EOJ00OX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PR000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

Use the same procedure for the RH side and LH side.
1. REMOVE FRONT LOWER NO. 1 ARM BUSH LH
(a) Using SST and a press, front lower No. 1 arm bush LH.
SST: 09716-18020
SST: 09716-18030
2. REMOVE FRONT LOWER NO. 2 ARM BUSH LH
(a) Using SST, front lower No. 2 arm bush LH.
SST: 09710-18040
09711-01010
09711-01020
09711-01030
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058V1000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Inspect the state of rotation of the ball joint.
(1) With the brake pedal depressed, attempt to move the top and bottom of the front tire in the
axial direction, and confirm that there is no play.
(2) If there is any play, replace the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
(3) With the brake pedal released, attempt to move the top and bottom of the front tire in the axial
direction, and confirm that there is no play.
(4) If there is any play, replace the front axle hub.
(5) Install the nut to the front lower suspension arm assembly LH stud.
(6) Turn the stud back and forth.
Standard:
There is no unusual resistance or play.
(7) If there is any unusual resistance or play, replace the front lower suspension arm assembly LH
with a new one.
(b) Inspect the dust cover.
(1) Check that the dust cover is not cracked and that there is no grease on it.
(2) If the dust cover is cracked or there is grease on it, replace the front lower suspension arm
assembly LH with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004EGK01DX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM BOLT

(a) Using SST, install the new front lower suspension arm bolt.
SST: 09726-18010
2. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Temporarily tighten the front lower suspension arm assembly LH with the bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the front of the vehicle.
3. INSTALL STEERING KNUCKLE LH

(a) Install the front lower arm suspension arm assembly LH with the nut to the steering knuckle LH.
(b) Install new clip.
4. INSTALL TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
5. INSTALL LOWER ARM SUPPORT PLATE

(a) Install the lower arm support plate with the new bolt and new nut.

8. FULLY TIGHTEN FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Fully tighten the nut on the rear of front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
9. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH

(a) Install the rear engine under cover LH with the 3 clips.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PS000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL FRONT LOWER NO. 1 ARM BUSH LH

(a) Using SST, install the front lower No. 1 arm bushing LH to the front lower suspension arm assembly
LH so that the fitting dimensions come within the specifications shown in the illustration.
SST: 09716-18020
SST: 09716-18030
*1 Front Lower Suspension Arm Assembly LH *2 Front Lower No. 2 Arm Bush LH
*a 44 to 50° *b 25.0 to 26.0 mm (0.984 to 1.023 in.)
*c 26.5 to 27.5 mm (1.043 to 1.083 in.) - -
2. INSTALL FRONT LOWER NO. 2 ARM BUSH LH
(a) Using SST, install the front lower No. 2 arm bush LH to
the front lower suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18040
09711-01010
09711-01020
09711-01030
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000004EGK01EX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH
(a) Remove the 3 clips and rear engine under cover LH.
3. REMOVE LOWER ARM SUPPORT PLATE
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and lower arm support plate.
4. SEPARATE TIE ROD END SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
5. SEPARATE STEERING KNUCKLE LH
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and front lower suspension arm
assembly LH from the front cross member sub-assembly.
7. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM BOLT
(a) Using SST, remove the front lower suspension arm bolt.
SST: 09726-18010
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DE02HX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PO000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE FRONT SUPPORT TO FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH
(a) Secure the SST in a vise.

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Attach the arm of SST to the diameter of the front coil
spring LH.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the front coil spring LH is installed so that

the distance between the upper and lower hooks of SST is
at the maximum.
Make sure that the claws on the hooks are securely
engaged.
(c) Using SST, compress the front coil spring LH.
CAUTION:
If the front coil spring LH bends during the compression, immediately stop the compression and
reinstall SST.
Do not compress the spring until the front coil spring LH contact each other.
Do not use an impact wrench.
(d) Using a long socket hexagon wrench 6mm, fix the shock absorber rod.
(e) Confirm that the front coil spring LH becomes free and
remove the lock nut.
SST: 09729-97202
CAUTION:
Do not remove the lock nut when the front coil spring
LH is not free.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage or deform the threaded section.
Fully insert a long socket hexagon wrench 6mm.
2. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the front suspension support sub-assembly LH.
3. REMOVE FRONT SPRING SEAT

(a) Remove the front spring seat.
4. REMOVE FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Remove the front spring bumper.
5. REMOVE FRONT COIL SPRING INSULATOR UPPER LH

(a) Remove the front coil spring upper insulator LH.
6. REMOVE FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Remove the front spring bumper LH.
7. REMOVE FRONT COIL SPRING LH

(a) Release the SST and remove the front coil spring LH.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DB02IX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Affix the front shock absorber assembly LH perpendicularly.
(b) Push the piston rod down approximately 70 mm (2.756 in.) by hand.
(c) Using a metal saw or the like, slowly cut a hole in the location shown in the illustration and let the
gas out.
Area to cut a hole
NOTICE:
Wear protective glasses.
Since the discharging gas may cause chips to scatter, cover the metal saw with a piece of cloth
when making the hole.
HINT:
The gas is colorless, odorless and non-poisonous.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DD02JX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Compress and extend the shock absorber rod 4 or more

times.
Standard:
There is no abnormal resistance or sound and operation
resistance is normal.
If there is any abnormality, replace the front shock

absorber assembly with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DC03FX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING

(a) Install the front shock absorber with coil spring (upper side) with the 3 new nuts.
(b) Install the front shock absorber with coil spring (lower side) to the steering knuckle and insert the
2 bolts and 2 new nuts.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the rear of the vehicle.
NOTICE:
While keeping the bolts from rotating, tighten the nuts.
2. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the front stabilizer link assembly to the front shock absorber assembly with a new nut.
(b) Using a socket hexagon wrench 6 mm, fix the stud bolt and install the front stabilizer link assembly
LH with a new nut.
3. INSTALL FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE

(a) Install the front flexible hose to the front shock absorber assembly with the bolt.
4. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT DUST COVER LH

(a) Install the front suspension support dust cover LH to the front shock absorber with coil spring.

(a) Install the front speed sensor LH to the front shock absorber assembly with the 2 clamps.
NOTICE:
Do not twist the front speed sensor when installing it.

(a) Lower the vehicle and bounce it up and down several times to stabilize the front suspension.


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PP000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Install the front spring bumper LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
2. INSTALL FRONT COIL SPRING INSULATOR UPPER LH

(a) Install the front coil spring insulator upper LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
3. INSTALL FRONT COIL SPRING LH

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Install SST to the front coil spring LH with the hooks
spread as far apart as possible from each other.
(c) Attach the arm of SST to the diameter of the coil spring.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the front coil spring LH is installed so that

the distance between the upper and lower hooks of SST is
at the maximum.
Make sure that the claws on the hooks are securely
engaged.
(d) Using SST, compress the front coil spring LH.
CAUTION:
If the front coil spring LH bends during the compression, immediately stop the compression and
reinstall SST.
Do not compress the spring until the coil springs contact each other.
(e) Install the front coil spring LH so that the lower end of
the spring and lower side spring seat stopper are aligned.
*1 Front Coil Spring LH
*a 0 to 10 mm (0 to 0.397 in.)
*b Spring seat stopper
4. INSTALL FRONT SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Install the front spring bumper LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
5. INSTALL FRONT SPRING SEAT

(a) Install the front spring seat to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
6. INSTALL FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the front suspension support sub-assembly LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
7. INSTALL FRONT SUPPORT TO FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH

(a) Long socket hexagon wrench 6, fix the shock absorber rod.
(b) Using SST, install a new front support to front shock
absorber nut LH to the front shock absorber assembly LH.
SST: 09729-97202
*a Fulcrum Length
*b 40 mm (1.575 in.)

NOTICE:
Use a torque wrench wiht a fulcrum length of 300 mm
(11.81 in.)
Be careful not to damage or deform the threaded section.
Securely set the long socket hexagon wrench 6.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DF02NX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. SEPARATE FRONT SPEED SENSOR LH
(a) Remove the 2 clamps and separate the front speed

sensor LH from the front shock absorber with coil spring.
3. SEPARATE FRONT FLEXIBLE HOSE
(a) Remove the bolt and separate the front flexible hose from
the front shock absorber with coil spring.
4. SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the nut and separate the front stabilizer link
assembly LH from the front shock absorber with coil
spring.

5. REMOVE FRONT SUSPENSION SUPPORT DUST COVER LH
HINT:
If it is necessary to disassemble the front shock absorber with coil spring, remove the front suspension
support dust cover LH.
(a) Remove the front suspension support dust cover LH.
6. REMOVE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING
(a) Support the front axle using a jack and wooden block.
*1 Wooden Block
(b) Remove the 2 bolts and 2 nuts, and separate the front
shock absorber with coil spring (lower side) from the
steering knuckle.
(c) Remove the 3 nuts from the front upper coil spring
insulator LH.
(d) Remove the front shock absorber with coil spring.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011I6031X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DO051X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY
(a) Inspect the ball joint.
(1) Secure the front stabilizer link assembly in a vise

using aluminum plates.
(2) Install the nut to the front stabilizer link assembly

stud.
Standard:
(4) If there is any unusual resistance or play, replace the

front stabilizer link assembly with a new one.
(2) If the dust cover is cracked or there is grease on it, replace the front stabilizer link assembly
with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DN03YX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)
(a) Install the front No. 1 stabilizer bar bushing so that it is

positioned closer to the outside of the vehicle than the
front stabilizer bar stopper ring.
NOTICE:
Install the front No. 1 stabilizer bar bushing so that the
arrow mark is facing towards the front of the vehicle.
*a Front of the Vehicle
*b Outside of the Vehicle
*c Stopper Ring
*d Arrow
*1 Front No. 1 Stabilizer Bar Bushing
2. INSTALL FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)
HINT:
Perform the same procedure as the LH side.
3. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET LH
(a) Install the front No. 2 stabilizer bracket LH to the rear

body mounting cushion sub-assembly with the bolt and
nut.
Bolt - Torque: 75 N·m (765 kgf·cm, 55ft·lbf)

Nut - Torque: 25 N·m (255 kgf·cm, 18ft·lbf)
4. INSTALL FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET RH
HINT:
5. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly LH and front stabilizer bar with the 4 new
bolts.
6. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Using a hexagon wrench 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and install the front stabilizer link assembly LH to
the front stabilizer bar with a new nut.
(b) Using a hexagon wrench 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and install the front stabilizer link assembly LH to
the front shock absorber with coil spring with a new nut.
8. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
9. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH
10. INSTALL REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
HINT:


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000011DP03YX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
4. REMOVE REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER LH
5. REMOVE REAR ENGINE UNDER COVER RH
HINT:
6. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Using a socket hexagon 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and
remove the nut.
(b) Remove the front stabilizer link assembly LH from the front shock absorber with coil spring.
(c) Using a socket hexagon 6 mm, fix the stud bolt, and
remove the nut.
(d) Remove the front stabilizer link assembly LH from the front stabilizer bar.
7. REMOVE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
8. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the 4 bolts, and remove the front stabilizer bar and the body mounting cushion sub-
assembly LH together.
Bolt
Vehicle for front side
9. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
10. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET LH
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and front No. 2 stabilizer bracket LH
from the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly.
11. REMOVE FRONT NO. 2 STABILIZER BRACKET RH
HINT:

(a) Remove the front stabilizer bar from the rear body mounting cushion sub-assembly.
13. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the front No. 1 stabilizer bar bushing from the front stabilizer bar.
14. REMOVE FRONT NO. 1 STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PU000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PT000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION

(a) Install the front suspension upper to cowl brace sub-assembly with the new bolt and 3 new nuts.
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH side as for the LH side.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058PV000X
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT STRUT BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
(a) Remove the bolt, 3 nuts and the front suspension upper
to cowl brace sub-assembly LH
*a Bolt
*b Nut
HINT:
Use the same procedure for the RH side as for the LH side.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000035CJ01DX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000034GK01OX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Tighten 4 new bolts in the order shown in the illustration, and temporarily install the front cross
Front of vehicle
Bolt
(b) Tighten the 4 bolts.
2. ADJUST SHIFT LEVER POSITION (for Automatic Transmission)
NOTICE:
If the front cross member sub-assembly mounting bolts are loosened even if only slightly, check
adjustment with the shift lever .
3. INSTALL RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
4. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
5. INSTALL REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

7. INSTALL FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
8. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
9. INSTALL FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
10. INSTALL ENGINE ASSEMBLY

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000034GL01OX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE ENGINE ASSEMBLY
3. REMOVE FRONT LOWER SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
4. SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY LH
5. SEPARATE FRONT STABILIZER LINK ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
6. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
7. REMOVE REAR BODY MOUNTING CUSHION SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
8. REMOVE RACK AND PINION POWER STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
9. REMOVE FRONT CROSS MEMBER SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Remove the 4 bolts and front cross member sub-assembly.
Vehicle of front side
Bolt
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003CRU02CX
Title: FRONT SUSPENSION: FRONT SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Front Suspension System
Tire (worn or improperly inflated)
Front wheel alignment (incorrect)
Rear wheel alignment (incorrect)

Vehicle pulls to one side while driving
Front hub bearing (worn)
Front shock absorber (worn)
Rear shock absorber (worn)
Vehicle (overloaded) -
Bottoming Front shock absorber (worn)
Sways/pitches Front shock absorber (worn)
Wheel (out of balance)

Wheel shimmy
Front lower suspension arm (worn)
Front shock absorber (worn)
Front hub bearing (worn)

Abnormal tire wear

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFT00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XF000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST, remove the rear No. 1 suspension arm bushing from the rear No. 1 suspension arm
assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18030
Pressing direction
2. REMOVE REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST, remove the rear No. 2 suspension arm bushing from the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18020
Pressing direction
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFS00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly to the rear suspension member with
the bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the front side of the vehicle.
(b) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly to the axle carrier with the bolt and
new nut.
NOTICE:
2. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING

(a) Temporarily install the rear shock absorber with coil spring to the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH with the bolt and new nut.
HINT:
The bolt may be inserted from either direction.
3. INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH to the axle carrier with the new bolt
and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from inside the vehicle.
(b) Temporarily install the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member with
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from outside the vehicle.

(a) Fully tighten the 2 bolt and 2 nut of the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH.

8. INSTALL NO. 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET
(a) Install the No. 1 parking brake cable support bracket with the bolt.


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XG000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST and a press, install a new rear No. 2 suspension arm bushing to the rear No. 2
suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18020
Pressing direction
2. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM BUSHING

(a) Using SST and a press, install a new rear No. 1 suspension arm bushing to the rear No. 1
suspension arm assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18030
Pressing direction
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFU00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR LOWER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

2. REMOVE NO. 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET
(a) Remove the bolt and No.1 parking brake cable support
bracket.
3. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 2 bolts, 2 nuts and the rear No. 1 suspension
arm assembly LH.
4. SEPARATE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
5. SEPARATE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear shock
absorber with coil spring from the rear No. 2 suspension
arm assembly.
(a) Remove the nut and bolt on the axle carrier side, and
then separate the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH.
(b) Remove the bolt and nut on the rear suspension member
side, and then remove the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IG500DX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XC000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE REAR SUPPORT TO REAR SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH

SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Set the arm hooks of SST on the middle line on the
spring outer circumference.
CAUTION:
Install SST to the rear coil spring LH so that the distance

between the upper and lower hooks is as wide as possible
within the installation area.
Check that the claws of the hooks are attached securely.
(c) Using SST, compress the rear coil spring LH.
CAUTION:
During the work, if the rear coil spring LH is arched, immediately stop the work and reset SST.
Do not compress the spring until each coil contacts each other.
(d) After the rear coil spring LH becomes free of load, install
SST to the rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH.
And then, using a long socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the
piston rod of the rear shock absorber assembly and
remove the rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH.
SST: 09729-18010
CAUTION:
When the rear coil spring LH is still applied with load,
do not remove the rear support to rear shock absorber
nut LH.
NOTICE:
Be careful not to damage or deform the threads.
Securely set the long socket hexagon 5 mm.
2. REMOVE REAR SUSPENSION SUPPORT ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the rear suspension support assembly LH from rear shock absorber assembly LH.
3. REMOVE REAR UPPER SPRING SEAT LH

(a) Remove the rear upper spring seat LH from the rear suspension support assembly LH.
4. REMOVE REAR COIL SPRING LH

(a) Remove the rear coil spring from the rear shock absorber assembly LH. Release the SST and
remove the rear coil spring.
CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench. It will damage.
5. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SHOCK ABSORBER DUST COVER LH

(a) Remove the rear No. 1 shock absorber dust cover LH form the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
6. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Remove the rear No. 1 spring bumper LH from the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Hold the rear shock absorber assembly LH perpendicularly.
(b) Push down the piston rod about 60 mm (2.362 in.) by hand.
(c) Using a metal saw or the like, slowly cut a hole in the location shown in the illustration and let the
gas out.
Area to cut a hole
NOTICE:
Wear protective glasses.
Since the discharging gas may cause chips to scatter, cover the metal saw with a piece of cloth
when making the hole.
HINT:
The gas is colorless, odorless and harmless.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XB000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Check of the rear shock absorber assembly LH
(1) Compress and extend the shock absorber rod and

check the conditions.
Standard:
Compress and extend the shock absorber rod at a
constant speed, and check that the operating load is even
at all strokes and that there is no abnormal resistance or
abnormal sound during the operation.
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING

(a) Mount the rear shock absorber with coil spring on the vehicle.
(b) Install rear shock absorber with coil spring with the 2 new nuts.

(a) Replace the mounting nuts of the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH and rear suspension
member sub-assembly with new nut and then temporarily tighten them.
(b) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear axle carrier sub-
assembly LH with the bolt and new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the front of the vehicle.
(c) Temporarily install the rear shock absorber with coil spring with the bolt and new nut.
HINT:
3. TEMPORARILY INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Temporarily install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH with the bolt and new nut.
(a) Jack up the axle carrier, with a wooden block placed

between the jack and axle carrier, to apply load to the
suspension so that the rear drive shaft assembly becomes
level.
*a Wooden Block

(a) Fully tighten the nut on the rear axle carrier sub-assembly LH side.
(b) Fully tighten the nut holding the rear shock absorber.
(c) Fully tighten the nut on the rear suspension member sub-assembly side.
6. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Fully tighten the nut rear stabilizer link sub-assembly side.

8. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER LH
9. INSTALL REAR FLOOR FINISH PLATE
10. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XD000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SPRING BUMPER LH

(a) Install the rear No. 1 spring bumper LH to the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
2. INSTALL REAR NO. 1 SHOCK ABSORBER DUST COVER LH

(a) Install the rear No. 1 shock absorber dust cover LH to the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
3. INSTALL REAR COIL SPRING LH
SST: 09727-30021
09727-00010
09727-00021
09727-00031
(b) Set the arm hooks of SST on the middle line on the
spring outer circumference.
CAUTION:
Install SST to the rear coil spring LH so that the distance

between the upper and lower hooks is as wide as possible
within the installation area.
Check that the claws of the hooks are attached securely.
(c) Using SST, compress the rear coil spring LH.
CAUTION:
During the work, if the rear coil spring LH is arched, immediately stop the work and reset SST.
Do not compress the spring until each coil contacts each other.
(d) Install the rear coil spring LH with the lower end of the
coil spring and the stopper of the spring seat fit.
HINT:
Fit the lower end of the rear coil spring LH into the gap of the
absorber lower seat.
*1 Rear Coil Spring LH
*a 0 to 10 mm (0 to 0.394 in.)
*b Stopper of spring seat
4. INSTALL REAR UPPER SPRING SEAT LH

(a) Install the rear upper spring seat LH to the rear coil spring LH.
5. INSTALL REAR SUSPENSION SUPPORT ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the rear suspension support assembly LH to the rear shock absorber assembly LH.
6. INSTALL REAR SUPPORT TO REAR SHOCK ABSORBER NUT LH

(a) Temporarily tighten a new rear support to rear shock absorber nut LH to the rear shock absorber
assembly LH.
*a for LH side
*b for RH side
*c 75 to 85°
*d Lower End
Outside of the Vehicle
(b) Adjust the rear suspension support assembly LH to the installation position of the shock absorber
so that the studs are positioned as shown in the illustration.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the left coil spring end faces toward the front of the vehicle and the right spring
end faces toward the rear.
(c) Release SST and remove it from the rear coil spring LH.
CAUTION:
Do not use an impact wrench
NOTICE:
Remove SST after confirming the position of the suspension support assembly.
(d) Install SST to the rear support to rear shock absorber nut
LH. And then, using a long socket hexagon 5 mm, hold
the piston rod of the rear shock absorber assembly LH,
and tighten the rear support to rear shock absorber nut
LH using a union nut wrench 14 mm.
*1 Union nut wrench 14 mm
*a Fulcrum length
*b 25 mm (0.984 in.)
SST: 09729-18010
NOTICE:
Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 300 mm
(11.81 in.)
Be careful not to damage or deform the threads.
Securely set the long socket hexagon 5 mm.
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

1. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR MAT
2. REMOVE REAR FLOOR FINISH PLATE
3. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER INNER LH
5. SEPARATE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear stabilizer link
sub-assembly from the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
(a) Loosen the nut on the rear suspension member side.
NOTICE:
Do not remove the nut.
(b) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear shock
absorber with coil spring from the rear No. 2 suspension
arm assembly LH.
(c) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the rear axle carrier
sub-assembly LH from the rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH.
7. REMOVE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING
(a) Remove the 2 nuts and rear shock absorber with coil
spring.
NOTICE:
Hold the rear shock absorber with coil spring to prevent
it from falling accidentally.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFZ00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XJ000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY

(a) Inspect the state of rotation of the ball joint.
(1) Temporarily install the attaching nut to the stud of the rear stabilizer link assembly.
Standard:
(3) If there is unusual resistance or play, replace the rear stabilizer link assembly with a new one.
(2) If the dust cover is fissured or grease is leaked, replace the rear stabilizer link assembly with a
new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFY00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)
(a) Install the rear stabilizer bar bushing to the outside of the
stopper ring on the rear stabilizer bar as shown in the
illustration.
*1 Rear Stabilizer Bar Bushing
*a Stopper Ring
2. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)
HINT:

(a) Install the rear stabilizer bar to the rear suspension member.
4. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for LH Side)
(a) Install the rear stabilizer bracket with the 2 bolts.
*a Crow
NOTICE:
Install the rear stabilizer bracket with its claw facing
upper.
5. INSTALL REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for RH Side)
HINT:
6. INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear stabilizer bar
(b) Using a socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the stud bolt and tighten the nut.
(c) Temporarily install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH with the bolt and a new nut.
7. INSTALL STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
8. INSTALL REAR WHEELS

10. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)

(a) Install the rear stabilizer link sub-assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH with the
bolt and nut.
11. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IG000FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR STABILIZER BAR: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR WHEELS
2. REMOVE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and separate the stabilizer link sub-
assembly from the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly
LH.
(b) Using a socket hexagon 5 mm, hold the stud bolt and
remove the nut and stabilizer link sub-assembly from the
rear stabilizer bar.
HINT:
Using a socket hexagon wrench 5 mm to hold the stud.
3. REMOVE STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
4. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for LH Side)
(a) Remove the 2 bolts and rear stabilizer bracket.

5. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BRACKET (for RH Side)
HINT:

(a) Remove the 2 rear stabilizer bushings and the rear stabilizer bar.
7. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for LH Side)

(a) Remove the rear stabilizer bar bushing from the rear stabilizer bar.
8. REMOVE REAR STABILIZER BAR BUSHING (for RH Side)
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFQ00DX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFP00JX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
3. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
4. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Support the rear suspension member sub-assembly with an engine lifter using 4 attachments or
equivalent tools.
NOTICE:
Make sure to secure the rear suspension member sub-assembly to prevent it from dropping.
Use the attachments to keep the rear suspension member sub-assembly level.
(b) Raise the rear suspension member sub-assembly until there is no clearance between the rear
suspension member sub-assembly and the vehicle body.
NOTICE:
When raising the rear suspension member sub-assembly, be careful not to damage the vehicle
body or other components installed on the vehicle.
(c) While supporting the rear suspension member sub-assembly with a high transmission jack, using
the 4 bolts B and 4 new bolts A, install the suspension member sub-assembly, front support rear
LH, front support rear RH, rear support upper and rear support lower all together.
NOTICE:
After temporarily tightening the bolts A in the order shown in the illustration, tighten them
securely.
*a Bolt A (New bolt) *b Bolt B
Torque: 145 N·m (1479 kgf·cm, 107ft·lbf)(Bolt A)

Torque: 70 N·m (714 kgf·cm, 52ft·lbf)(Bolt B)
6. TEMPORARILY INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the toe control link sub-assembly LH and insert the toe adjust cam from the front of the
vehicle. Then, install the No. 2 toe adjust plate and temporarily install a new nut.
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the rear suspension member and rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust
plate.
7. TEMPORARILY INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member with
the bolt and a new nut.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from inside the vehicle.
9. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

10. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING LH
(a) Temporarily install the rear shock absorber assembly to the rear No. 2 suspension arm with the bolt
and a new nut.
HINT:
11. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING RH
HINT:

(a) Temporarily install the rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member with
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from outside the vehicle.
HINT:
15. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
16. TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:
17. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for LH Side)

(a) Install the parking brake cable support bracket with the bolt.
18. INSTALL PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for RH Side)
HINT:

(a) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the axle carrier with the clamp.
(b) Install the No. 3 parking brake cable assembly to the rear suspension member lower stopper LH
with the bolt.

HINT:
22. INSTALL REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
23. INSTALL REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
24. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY LH
25. INSTALL REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
28. INSTALL EXHAUST TAIL PIPE ASSEMBLY
31. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
32. FULLY TIGHTEN TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
33. FULLY TIGHTEN TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Fully tighten the nut holding the rear shock absorber.
(b) Fully tighten the nut on the rear suspension member sub-assembly side.

HINT:
36. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for LH Side)
37. FULLY TIGHTEN STABILIZER LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY (for RH Side)
HINT:

(a) Fully tighten the bolt on the rear suspension member side of the rear No. 1 suspension arm
assembly LH.
39. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
40. INSTALL REAR WHEELS

43. CHECK FOR SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFR00JX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
1. REMOVE REAR WHEELS
3. REMOVE EXHAUST TAIL PIPE ASSEMBLY
6. REMOVE REAR DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
7. REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
8. REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
(a) Remove the clamp and separate the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly.
(b) Remove the bolt and separate the No. 3 parking brake
cable assembly from rear suspension member lower
stopper LH.
HINT:
12. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for LH Side)
13. REMOVE PARKING BRAKE CABLE SUPPORT BRACKET (for RH Side)
HINT:
(a) Remove the bolt, nut and rear No. 1 suspension arm
assembly LH.
16. REMOVE REAR NO. 1 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
17. SEPARATE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING LH
18. SEPARATE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER WITH COIL SPRING RH
HINT:

(a) Remove the bolt, nut and rear No. 2 suspension arm
assembly LH from the rear suspension member sub-
assembly.
20. SEPARATE REAR NO. 2 SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
21. REMOVE TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Put matchmarks on the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and rear suspension member.
*a Matchmark - -
(b) Remove the nut, rear suspension toe adjust cam, rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and toe
control link sub-assembly LH.
22. REMOVE TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Support the rear suspension member sub-assembly with an engine lifter using 4 attachments or
equivalent tools as shown in the illustration.
Attachment Placement Location
NOTICE:
Make sure to secure the rear suspension member sub-assembly to prevent it from dropping.
Use the attachments to keep the rear suspension member sub-assembly level.
(b) Remove the 8 bolts, 2 rear lower suspension member stoppers, 2 differential support member
stoppers and 2 rear suspension member lower stoppers from the rear suspension member.
(c) Slowly lower the rear suspension member sub-assembly.

NOTICE:
When lowering the rear suspension member sub-assembly, be careful not to damage the vehicle
body or other components installed on the vehicle.
24. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
25. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR SUSPENSION SYSTEM: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
Rear Suspension System

Vehicle tilts
Rear hub bearing (worn)
Rear shock absorber with coil spring (worn)
Vehicle (overloaded) -
Bottoming
Wheel shimmy Rear stabilizer bar (worn)
Toe control link sub-assembly (worn)
Abnormal tire wear Rear No. 1 suspension arm assembly (worn)
Rear No. 2 suspension arm assembly (worn)
Rear upper control arm assembly (worn)
Rear hub bearing (worn)
Vehicle sways Wheel (out of balance)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFN00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XE000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Inspect the ball joint of upper control arm assembly.
Standard:
(2) If there is any unusual resistance or play, replace the upper control arm assembly LH with a new
one.
(b) Inspect the dust cover of upper control arm assembly.
(2) If the dust cover is fissured or grease is leaked, replace the upper control arm assembly LH with
a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFM00DX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Temporarily install the rear upper control arm assembly LH to the rear suspension member sub-
assembly with the 2 bolts and 2 new nuts.
NOTICE:
Insert the bolt from the rear side of the vehicle for the front side of the installation position.
Insert the bolt from the front side of the vehicle for the rear side of the installation position.
(b) Temporarily install the rear upper control arm assembly LH to the axle carrier with the new bolt and
a new nut.
NOTICE:
2. TEMPORARILY INSTALL REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

(a) Fully tighten the nut on the axle carrier side of the upper control arm assembly LH.
(b) Fully tighten the 2 nuts on the suspension member side of the upper control arm assembly LH.
6. FULLY TIGHTEN REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFO00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: REAR UPPER ARM: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
2. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY LH
(a) Remove the 3 bolts, 3 nuts, and then remove the rear
upper control arm assembly LH from the rear suspension
3. REMOVE REAR UPPER CONTROL ARM ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
Perform the same procedure as for the LH side.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFW00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE LATERAL CONTROL ROD BUSHING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, lateral control rod bushing sub-assembly from

the toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18010
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: DISASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
DISASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. REMOVE LATERAL CONTROL ROD BUSHING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, lateral control rod bushing sub-assembly from

the toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18010
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058YI000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Inspect the ball joint.
(1) Temporarily install the attaching nut to the stud of the

toe control link sub-assembly LH.
Standard:
(3) If there is unusual resistance or play, replace the toe control link sub-assembly LH with a new
one.
(2) If the dust cover is fissured or grease is leaked, replace the toe control link sub-assembly LH
with a new one.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFV00FX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:

1. TEMPORARILY INSTALL TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Install the toe control link sub-assembly LH and insert the toe adjust cam from the front of the
vehicle. Then, install the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and temporarily install the new nut.
NOTICE:
Align the matchmarks on the rear suspension member and the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust
plate.
(b) Install the rear suspension toe control link sub-assembly LH to the rear axle carrier side with a nut.
(c) Install the new snap pin.
4. FULLY TIGHTEN TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Fully tighten the nut on the rear suspension member side.
NOTICE:
Check that the matchmarks on the rear suspension member and the rear No. 2 suspension toe
adjust plate are aligned.


Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000058XI000X
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: REASSEMBLY (2013 FR-S)
REASSEMBLY
HINT:

1. INSTALL LATERAL CONTROL ROD BUSHING SUB-ASSEMBLY
(a) Using SST, install a new lateral control rod bushing sub-
assembly to the toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09710-18010
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003IFX00EX
Title: REAR SUSPENSION: TOE CONTROL LINK: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:

3. REMOVE TOE CONTROL LINK SUB-ASSEMBLY LH

(a) Remove the snap pin.
(b) Remove the nut on the rear axle carrier side.
(c) Install SST (2 pieces of spacer B) to the threaded section of the t toe control link sub-assembly LH.
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02060
09961-02010
(d) Using SST (ball join puller), separate the toe control link sub-assembly LH from the rear axle
carrier LH.
*1 Nut *2 Body
*3 Claw *4 SST (Spacer B)
*a 1 mm (0.039 in.) *b Place wrench here
Molybdenum grease Turning direction
SST: 09960-20010
09961-02060
09961-02010
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
As the dust cover may be damaged, adjust SST with the center nut so that the body and claw are
parallel.
Do not damage the dust cover on the toe control link sub-assembly.
Do not damage the toe control link sub-assembly.
(e) Put matchmarks on the rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and the rear suspension member.
*a Matchmark - -
(f) Remove the nut, toe adjust cam, rear No. 2 suspension toe adjust plate and the toe control link
sub-assembly.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003P8Q040X
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING (2013
FR-S)

1. DIAGNOSIS OF TIRE VIBRATION
1. TIGHTEN WHEEL NUTS
NEXT
2. INSPECT TIRES
NG Go to step 3
OK Go to step 4
3. REPAIR OR REPLACE TIRE(S)
NEXT
4. INSPECT AND/OR ADJUST WHEEL BALANCE
NEXT
5. INSPECT FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NG Go to step 6
OK Go to step 7
6. REPAIR FRONT AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NEXT
7. INSPECT REAR AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NG Go to step 8
OK Go to step 9
8. REPAIR REAR AXLE HUB BEARING LOOSENESS AND AXLE HUB RUNOUT
NEXT
9. PERFORM ROAD TEST
NEXT
10. RETURN VEHICLE TO CUSTOMER
2. DIAGNOSIS OF IRREGULAR TIRE WEAR
1. INSPECT TIRES
NEXT
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE TIRE(S)

NEXT
3. INSPECT AND/OR ADJUST FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NEXT
4. INSPECT AND/OR ADJUST REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NEXT
5. PERFORM ROAD TEST
NEXT
6. RETURN VEHICLE TO CUSTOMER

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000015KU04JX
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE AND WHEEL SYSTEM: INSPECTION (2013 FR-S)
INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TIRES
(a) Check the tires for wear and proper inflation pressure.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure:
TIRE SIZE FRONT REAR
KPA (KGF/CM 2 , PSI) KPA (KGF/CM 2 , PSI)
215/45R17 87W 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)
P215/45R17 87V 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)
T135/80D 16 101M 420 (4.2, 60) 420 (4.2, 60)
(b) Using a dial indicator, check the runout of the wheel.
Maximum wheel runout
Steel wheel 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.) (Vertical and lateral)
Aluminum wheel 1.0 mm (0.0394 in.) (Vertical and lateral)
2. ROTATE TIRES
(a) Rotate the tires as shown in the illustration.

3. INSPECT WHEEL BALANCE
(a) Check and perform off-car balancing.
(b) If required, perform on-car balancing.
Imbalance after adjustment:

10.0 g (0.0220 lb) or less

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000021ML018X
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE REPAIR SEAL: DISPOSAL (2013 FR-S)
DISPOSAL
1. DISPOSE OF TIRE REPAIR SEAL
HINT:
Confirm the expiration date on the side of the repair seal bottle.
(a) Dispose of the retrieved seal by consigning disposal to a waste the disposal firm.
NOTICE:
The valve and valve core cannot be reused.
Do not reuse items such as cloths that were used to wipe off seal or gloves soiled with the seal.
Dispose of such items as burnable waste.
(b) Dispose of the bottle used for retrieving the seal as plastic waste.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000021MM018X
Title: TIRE / WHEEL: TIRE REPAIR SEAL: RECOVERY (2013 FR-S)
RECOVERY
1. RECOVERY OF TIRE REPAIR SEAL
NOTICE:
Try not to spill the tire repair seal in the tire during servicing.
Wipe off any spilt seal with a cloth or the equivalent.
(a) Using a tire changer, remove the tire from the wheel by following the same procedures as for a
regular tire change.
NOTICE:
Do not raise the tire rapidly as the seal may spill out.
(b) Retrieve the tire repair seal from the removed tire.
HINT:
Using a cloth or the equivalent, wipe off any seal spilt on the tire, the wheel, the tire changer and the
floor.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003ZWC008X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: COMPONENTS (2013 FR-S)
COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002PLM029X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: INSTALLATION (2013 FR-S)
INSTALLATION
HINT:
The tire pressure warning receiver is integrated in the door control receiver.
1. INSTALL DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
NOTICE:
Do not drop the door control receiver or apply impact on it.
When replacing or inspecting the door control receiver, do not change the wiring route or the length
of the harness around the receiver.
(a) Engage the guide and install the door control receiver.
(b) Install the bolt.
(c) Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY
3. INSTALL REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH LH
4. INSTALL REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH RH
HINT:
5. INSTALL QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
6. INSTALL QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:
7. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER LH
8. INSTALL LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER RH
HINT:
9. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER COVER LH
10. CONNECT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM INNER COVER RH
HINT:

11. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH
12. INSTALL FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH
HINT:
13. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH
14. INSTALL FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
HINT:
HINT:

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002PLO022X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RECEIVER: REMOVAL (2013 FR-S)
REMOVAL
HINT:
The tire pressure warning receiver is integrated in the door control receiver.
HINT:
3. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP LH
4. REMOVE FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM WEATHERSTRIP RH
HINT:
5. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE LH
6. REMOVE FRONT DOOR SCUFF PLATE RH
HINT:
7. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER LH
8. SEPARATE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INNER TRIM COVER RH
HINT:
9. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER LH
10. REMOVE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TRIM COVER RH
HINT:
11. REMOVE QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY LH
12. REMOVE QUARTER TRIM LID SUB-ASSEMBLY RH
HINT:

13. REMOVE REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH LH
14. REMOVE REAR WINDOW SIDE GARNISH RH
HINT:
15. REMOVE PACKAGE TRAY TRIM PANEL ASSEMBLY
16. REMOVE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
(c) Disengage the guide and remove the door control receiver.
NOTICE:
Do not drop the door control receiver or apply impact on it.
When replacing or inspecting the door control receiver, do not change the wiring route or the length
of the harness around the receiver.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000001NN303HX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: B1247: Tire Pressure Monitor
Receiver Communication Stop (2013 FR-S)
DTC B1247 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver Communication Stop
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) and door control receiver are connected using 2 direct lines
that they use to communicate with each other.

NO.
Door control
receiver
Wire
harness or
In diagnostic mode, an applicable RDA signal cannot be received within
connector
B1247 10 seconds after a PRG signal is sent from the main body ECU (network
Main body
gateway ECU).
ECU
(network
gateway
ECU)
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
When replacing the door control receiver, read the IDs stored in the old ECU using the Techstream
and write them down before removal.
It is necessary to perform registration of the transmitter IDs into the tire pressure warning
ECU after the ECU has been replaced.
When replacing the door control receiver on vehicles, be sure to perform Registration of Recognition
Code to register the transmitter IDs after ECU replacement .
HINT:
procedure.
PROCEDURE
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU)
1.
- DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)
(a) Disconnect the H28 door control receiver connector and the D6 main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) connector.

H28-4 (RDA) - D6-7 Always Below 1 Ω
H28-5 (PRG) - D6-6 Always Below 1 Ω
D6-7 (RDA) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
D6-6 (PRG) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE OF DOOR CONTROL

2.
RECEIVER)
H28-12 (GND) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω

table below.
Standard Voltage:

CONDITION
H28-1 (IG) - Body Ignition switch

11 to 14 V
ground ON

*a
(to Door Control Receiver)

NG CONNECTOR
OK
3. REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
(a) Replace the door control receiver .
NEXT
4. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (B1247)
(d) Check for DTCs .

OK:
DTC B1247 is not output.

NG GATEWAY ECU)
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002DZD073X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2111-C2114: Transmitter
ID1 Operation Stop (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2111 Transmitter ID1 Operation Stop
DESCRIPTION
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters that are installed in the tire and wheel assemblies
measure the tire pressures. The measured values are transmitted to the door control receiver in the
vehicle as radio waves. The ECU compares the measured air pressure values with the air pressure
threshold. When the measured air pressure value is less than this threshold, the warning light in the
combination meter assembly illuminates. The door control receiver stores a DTC when the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter stops transmitting signals. The signals can be forcibly transmitted by
releasing the tire pressure rapidly. The stored DTC is cleared when signal transmission resumes.

NO.
C2111
Tire pressure warning valve
C2112 Tire pressure warning valve and transmitters stop
and transmitter
C2113 transmitting signals
Door control receiver
C2114
HINT:
It is necessary to perform the following procedure to identify the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter that is malfunctioning because it cannot be identified by the output DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. PERFORM FORCED TRANSMISSION OF TRANSMITTER ID OF ALL WHEELS
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified value .

(f) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Data List.

Tire Pressure Monitor

DISPLAY CONDITION
ID1 tire inflation pressure/

min.: Absolute pressure / 50 kPa
(0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi), Relative
If 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi) is displayed
ID1 Tire pressure / -50 kPa (-0.5 kgf/cm Actual tire
for absolute pressure or -50 kPa (-0.5 kgf/cm
Inflation 2 , -7 psi) inflation
2
Pressure max.: Absolute pressure / 480 pressure , -7 psi) is displayed for relative pressure,
data has not been received.*
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
Relative pressure / 380 kPa (3.9
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
ID2 tire inflation pressure /

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
*: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed. If the values are not displayed after a few
minutes, perform troubleshooting according to the inspection procedure for DTCs C2121 to C2124
.
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm 2 , 5.8 psi)
within 30 seconds.
(1) Check that each tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream has changed.
OK:
Each tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream will change to the value of the tire pressure.
NOTICE:
It may take a few minutes to display the updated tire pressure data.
When the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data has not changed, reset the tire pressure to the
appropriate specified value and rotate the tire 90 to 270 degrees. Then rapidly release the tire
pressure and recheck the data.
(2) After confirming that all of the tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream has
changed, set the tire pressure to the appropriate specified values.
HINT:
If the tire pressure data displayed on the Techstream has not changed after rechecking, inspect for
another problem .
GO TO TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER

NG INSPECTION PROCEDURE
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000ZUQ089X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2121-C2124,C2181-C2184:

No Signal from Transmitter ID1 (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2121 No Signal from Transmitter ID1
DTC C2181 Transmitter ID1 not Received (Test Mode DTC)
DESCRIPTION
combination meter assembly illuminates.
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitters constantly send radio waves to the door control receiver.
Under the conditions below, the door control receiver is unable to receive the signals from the tire
pressure warning valve and transmitters, and a DTC is stored.
Facilities or devices that use similar radio frequencies are located in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Devices using similar radio frequencies are used in the vehicle.
The ID of a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is mistyped during registration.
A tire, wheel and/or transmitter from a different vehicle is installed.
HINT:
When no transmitter ID is received from a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter for a total of 20
minutes while the vehicle speed is more than 37 km/h (23 mph), or no transmitter ID is received from
all the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters for a total of 20 minutes, these DTCs are set.
DTCs from C2121 to C2124 can only be cleared by using the Techstream. DTCs from C2181 to C2184
can be cleared when the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter sends a forced transmission signal
or test mode ends. DTCs from C2181 to C2184 are output only in test mode.

NO.
Following condition (a) or (b) is met:

(a) When all conditions below are met:
Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not in

stop mode.
Any transmitter ID is not received from tire pressure
Tire pressure
C2121 warning valve and transmitters.
warning valve and
C2122 For 20 minutes or more, vehicle speed is more than 37
transmitter
C2123 km/h (23 mph) or no vehicle speed signal is received.
Door control
C2124
(b) When both conditions below are met: receiver
Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not in

stop mode.
No transmitter ID is received from tire pressure
warning valve and transmitters for 20 minutes or more.
Tire pressure
C2181
warning valve and
C2182
Test mode procedure is performed. transmitter
C2183
Door control
C2184
receiver
NOTICE:
When DTCs C2121 to C2124 are set, DTC C2179 may be set simultaneously. In such cases,
troubleshoot DTCs C2121 to C2124 first, then troubleshoot DTC C2179.
HINT:
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FREQUENCY RECEIVING CONDITION
(a) Check that the vehicle is not located in an area such as described below:
(1) Facilities or devices that use similar radio frequencies are located in the vicinity of the
vehicle.
HINT:
If the vehicle is located in an area such as the one described above, the tire pressure warning light
may come on only in a particular area.
(2) Devices using similar radio frequencies are used in the vehicle.
OK:
Facilities, or devices that use similar radio frequencies are not located in the vicinity of the vehicle.
HINT:
Radio transmissions may be interrupted due to the surroundings or devices installed by the user.
CHECK IF ANY DEVICE IS INSTALLED BY

NG USER
OK
2. IDENTIFY TRANSMITTER CORRESPONDING TO DTC
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified values .


DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
*: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed.
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kg/cm 2 , 5.8 psi) within
30 seconds.
(i) Check the Data List.
NOTICE:
Record the transmitter ID of which "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data corresponds to each tire.
(j) After confirming that the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data for one tire (ID1 to ID4) has
changed, repeat this procedure one by one. Identify the transmitter that corresponds to the
DTC.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
One or more of transmitters abnormal A
All normal B
END
B
3. CHECK TRANSMITTER ID
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Data List.
(f) Check the values by referring to the table below.

TESTER DISPLAY MEASUREMENT NORMAL CONDITION DIAGNOSTIC

ITEM/RANGE NOTE
Registered ID1 code/

Registered ID1 ID No. registered for transmitter ID1
min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*
HINT:
*: Displayed only when the ID No. is not registered.
(g) Check the ID number on the identified transmitter by removing it from the tire and wheel.
*1 Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter *2 Transmitter ID (7-digit number)
(h) Confirm that the ID number on the transmitter and recorded transmitter ID match.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Match A
Do not match B
B REGISTRATION OF TRANSMITTER ID
4. REPLACE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING VALVE AND TRANSMITTER
(a) Replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter .
NEXT
5. REGISTRATION OF TRANSMITTER ID
(a) Perform registration .
NEXT
6. CONFIRM TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE (DATA LIST)


DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
(0.5 kgf/cm , 7 psi), Relative
2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:

When no "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data has changed, reset the tire pressure to the appropriate
specified value and rotate the tire 90 to 270 degrees. Then rapidly release the tire pressure and
recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Tire pressure values are not displayed. A
All tire pressure readings are equal to specified values. B
END
B
A REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER

Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2126: Transmitter ID not
Received in Main Mode (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2126 Transmitter ID not Received in Main Mode
DESCRIPTION
After all IDs are registered, DTC C2126 is set in the door control receiver and the tire pressure warning
light blinks for 1 minute and then illuminates.
When the door control receiver successfully receives radio waves from all the transmitters whose IDs are
stored in the ECU, DTC C2126 is cleared and the tire pressure warning light goes off.

NO.
ID registration
failure
Tire pressure
After ID registration is completed, ECU does not receive radio
C2126 warning valve and
waves from transmitters whose IDs are stored in ECU.
transmitter
Door control
receiver
HINT:
The purpose of this DTC is to help prevent delivering a vehicle that has incorrectly registered IDs. After
all IDs are registered, DTC C2126 is detected and the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute
and then illuminates. If the tire pressure warning light does not turn off after a little while, IDs may be
incorrectly registered.
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. IDENTIFY TRANSMITTER NOT RECEIVED
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified values .


DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm 2 , 5.8 psi)
within 30 seconds.
NOTICE:
Record the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data transmitter ID that corresponds to each tire.
(j) After confirming that the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data for one tire (ID1 to ID4) has
changed, repeat this procedure one by one. Identify the transmitter not received.
Result:
CONDITION PROCEED TO
One or more of transmitters abnormal A
All normal B
END
B
2. CHECK TRANSMITTER ID



ITEM/DISPLAY NOTE

min.: 0 -
Code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
Code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
Code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
Code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*
HINT:
(g) Check the ID number on the identified transmitter by removing it from the tire and wheel.
*1 Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter *2 Transmitter ID (7-digit number)
(h) Confirm that the ID number on the transmitter and recorded transmitter ID match.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
Match A
Do not match B
B REGISTRATION OF TRANSMITTER ID
(a) Replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter .
NEXT
(a) Perform registration .
NEXT
(b) Connect Techstream to the DLC3.


DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:

recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

END
B

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XN408JX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2141-C2144: Transmitter
ID1 Error (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2141 Transmitter ID1 Error
DESCRIPTION
combination meter assembly illuminates.
When the internal circuit of a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is malfunctioning, one of these
DTCs is output.

NO.
If an "ERROR" signal is received 3 times consecutively, the tire pressure Tire

warning valve and transmitter will be judged as defective and a DTC will pressure
C2141 be output. warning
C2142 This will happen in situations where the inflation pressure is outside the valve and
C2143 range -50 to 380 kPa (-0.5 to 3.9 kgf/cm 2 , -7 to 55 psi), the transmitter
C2144 temperature inside the tire is outside the specified range -40 to 120°C (- Door
40 to 248°F), or an error occurs in the tire pressure warning valve and control
transmitter or the surrounding area. receiver
HINT:
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. IDENTIFY TRANSMITTER CORRESPONDING TO DTC
(a) Set the tire pressure to the specified value .
(g) Display the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data for each wheel using the Techstream.
(h) Rapidly reduce the tire pressure for each wheel at least 40 kPa (0.4 kg/cm 2 , 5.8 psi) within
30 seconds. If "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" displayed on the Techstream (ID1 to ID4) does not
change, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter corresponding to the unchanged "ID
Tire Inflation Pressure" data was the cause of the output DTC.
HINT:
Identify the malfunctioning tire pressure warning valve and transmitter by repeatedly decreasing
the tire pressure for each tire.
Record which "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) corresponds to each tire.

DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:
*: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed. If the values are not displayed after a few
minutes, perform troubleshooting according to the inspection procedure for DTCs C2121 to C2124
.

Result:
RESULT DETECTION CONDITION
One of "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) changed. Normal
"ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data did not change. Transmitter corresponding to DTC
NOTICE:
Record the transmitter IDs and positions of transmitters that are normal.
(j) When the "ID Tire inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) has changed, repeat this procedure to
identify the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter that corresponds to the DTC.
(k) When all of the "ID Tire Inflation Pressure" data (ID1 to ID4) has changed, identify the
malfunctioning tire pressure warning valve and transmitter using the recorded ID numbers and
output DTCs.
NEXT
(a) Replace the identified tire pressure warning valve and transmitter with a new one .
HINT:
Before installing a new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, read and write down its
transmitter ID.
The IDs for the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters which are not replaced should be
checked using the Techstream and recorded.
NEXT
(a) Register the transmitter ID for all wheels .
NEXT


DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:

recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO

END
B

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000002DZY05VX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2171: Transmitter ID not
Registered (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2171 Transmitter ID not Registered
DESCRIPTION
The IDs of each tire pressure warning valve and transmitter are registered to the door control receiver.
When the ECU detects that a transmitter ID code is not registered in the ECU, a DTC is stored.

NO.
Transmitter ID code is not registered. (When an ID code is unregistered for 3 Door control
C2171
minutes or more) receiver
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CONFIRM REGISTRATION CONDITION (REGISTERED ID CODES)


ITEM/RANGE NOTE

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*

min.: 0 -
code displayed
max.: FFFFFFF*
HINT:
OK:
The registered transmitter ID codes are displayed on the Techstream.
PERFORM REGISTRATION (TRANSMITTER

NG ID)
OK REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
2. PERFORM REGISTRATION (TRANSMITTER ID)
(a) Register the transmitter IDs for all the wheels .
NEXT


DISPLAY CONDITION
2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:

recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
All tire pressure readings are equal to specified values. A
Tire pressure values are not displayed. B
B REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000026PN07UX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2176: Receiver Error (2013
FR-S)
DTC C2176 Receiver Error
DESCRIPTION
The signals are transmitted to the door control receiver in the vehicle as radio waves.
C2176 Malfunction in the door control receiver internal circuit Door control receiver
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (C2176)
(c) Turn the ignition switch to ON and check for DTCs .

OK:
NG REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000Z8107LX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2177: Initialization not
Completed (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2177 Initialization not Completed
DESCRIPTION
Initialization is necessary if one of the following occurs:
The door control receiver is replaced.

A tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is replaced.
Tires with a different tire standard pressure are installed.
The tires are rotated.
A new vehicle is delivered.

NO.
All conditions below are met:
During initialization Tire pressure warning

Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not in valve and transmitter
C2177 stop mode Wire harness or
Signal is not received from tire pressure warning connector
valve and transmitter for 20 minutes or more Door control receiver
Vehicle speed is more than 37 km/h (23 mph) for a
total of 20 minutes
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK FREQUENCY RECEIVING CONDITION
(a) Check that the vehicle is not located in an area such as described below:
(1) Facilities or devices that use similar radio frequencies are located in the vicinity of the
vehicle.
HINT:
If the vehicle is located in an area such as the one described above, the tire pressure warning light
may come on after blinking 1 minute only in a particular area due to interfering radio frequencies.
(2) Devices using similar radio frequencies are used in the vehicle.
OK:
Facilities, or devices that use similar radio frequencies are not located in the vicinity of the vehicle.
HINT:
Radio transmissions may be interrupted due to the surroundings, or devices installed by the user.
CHECK IF ANY DEVICE IS INSTALLED BY

NG USER
OK


DISPLAY CONDITION

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

2
kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi),
kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)
HINT:

recheck the data.
Result:
RESULT PROCEED TO
All tire pressure readings are equal to specified values. A
Tire pressure values are not displayed. B

B GO TO DTC C2121 TO C2124
END
A
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000003B9X02AX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: C2179: Tire Pressure Monitor
ECU Communication Stop (2013 FR-S)
DTC C2179 Tire Pressure Monitor ECU Communication Stop
DESCRIPTION
The main body ECU (network gateway ECU) sends signals to the door control receiver via a direct line.

NO.
Main body ECU

(network
gateway ECU)
Communication between the main body ECU (network gateway ECU)
C2179 Wire harness
and door control receiver is interrupted for 10 seconds or more.
or connector
Door control
receiver
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTICE:
PROCEDURE
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER - MAIN BODY ECU
1.
(NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
(a) Disconnect the H28 door control receiver connector and the D6 main body ECU (network
gateway ECU) connector.
H28-5 (PRG) - D6-6 (PRG) Always Below 1 Ω
H28-5 (PRG) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

NG CONNECTOR
OK
2. REPLACE DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER
(a) Replace the door control receiver .
NEXT
3. CHECK DTC OUTPUT
(d) Check for DTCs .

OK:

NG
GATEWAY ECU)
END
OK
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XMY07AX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST
(2013 FR-S)

1. READ DATA LIST
HINT:
NOTICE:
(f) According to the display on the Techstream, read the Data List.

DISPLAY CONDITION
NORMAL:
Tire pressure warning system Normal
Mode Status mode/ mode -
NORMAL or TEST TEST: Test
mode
Number of main tire ID to be

4 to 5
Main Tire registered/ -
displayed
4 or 5
ON: Switch
Tire pressure warning reset
Initialization on
switch/ -
Switch*3 OFF: Switch
ON, OFF
off
Vehicle speed reading/ Actual

Vehicle Speed indicated on the combination meter
min.: 0 km/h (0 mph), max.: vehicle
Speed assembly
255 km/h (158 mph) speed
ID No.
registered
Registered Registered ID1 code/ for
-
ID1 Code min.: 0, max.: FFFFFFF*1 transmitter
ID1
displayed
ID No.
registered
-
ID2
displayed
ID No.
registered
-
ID3
displayed
ID No.
registered
-
ID4
displayed
ID No.
registered
-
ID5 Code*3 min.: 0, max.: FFFFFFF*1 transmitter
ID5
displayed
ID1 ID1 temperature in tire/

Actual tire If -40°C (-40°F) is displayed, data has not
Temperature min.: -40°C (-40°F), max.:
temperature been received.
in Tire 120°C (248°F)

in Tire 120°C (248°F)

in Tire 120°C (248°F)

in Tire 120°C (248°F)

in Tire*3 120°C (248°F)
ID1 Battery ID1 battery voltage/OVER or

OVER -
Voltage LESS

OVER -
Voltage LESS

OVER -
Voltage LESS

OVER -
Voltage LESS
OVER -
Voltage*3 LESS
Initialization Tire pressure warning reset

Switch switch setting information/ WITHOUT -
Info*3 WITH or WITHOUT

min.: Absolute pressure / 50
kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi),
Relative pressure / -50 kPa (- Actual tire If 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi) is displayed
ID1 Tire
for absolute pressure or -50 kPa (-0.5
Inflation 0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi) inflation
Pressure max.: Absolute pressure / pressure kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi) is displayed for relative
pressure, data has not been received.*2
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70
psi), Relative pressure / 380
kPa (3.9 kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi)

ID2 Tire
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID3 Tire
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID4 Tire
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

ID5 Tire
Pressure*3 max.: Absolute pressure / pressure kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi) is displayed for relative
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70
ID1 initial threshold of low-

pressure/
ID1 Initial kPa (0.5 kgf/cm 2 , 7 psi), Tire

Threshold of Relative pressure / -50 kPa (- pressure
-
Low- 0.5 kgf/cm 2 , -7 psi) after
pressure max.: Absolute pressure / initialization
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70


pressure/

-
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70


pressure/

-
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70


pressure/

-
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70


pressure/

-
pressure*3 max.: Absolute pressure / initialization
480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70

Number of
Number of DTCs Min.: 0,
Trouble -
recorded/min.: 0, max.: 255 Max.: -
Code
HINT:
*1: Displayed only when the ID No. is not registered.
*2: It may take a few minutes until the values are displayed. If the values are not displayed after a
few minutes, perform troubleshooting according to the inspection procedure for DTCs C2121 to C2124
.
*3: This item is displayed on the Techstream, however, it is not used for this vehicle.
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST
Using the Techstream to perform Active Tests allows the relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be
operated without removing any parts. This non-intrusive functional inspection can be very useful because
intermittent operation may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed. Performing Active Tests early
in trouble shooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be displayed while
performing Active Tests.
(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Combination Meter / Active Test.
(f) Check the operation by referring to the table below.
Combination Meter
Indicat. Tire Pressure Tire pressure Tire pressure warning Confirm that the vehicle is
Warning System warning light light OFF or ON stopped, engine idling
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XMW081X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (2013
FR-S)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. CHECK WARNING LIGHT
NOTICE:
When there is a problem with the tire pressure warning system, the tire pressure warning light
blinks at 0.5 second intervals, and illuminates after 1 minute.
When the malfunction has been corrected, the tire pressure warning light does not illuminate.
When the tire pressure warning light illuminates, immediately check the tire pressures of the tire
and adjust it to the specified value(s).
After the ignition switch is turned to ON, the tire pressure warning light illuminates for 3 seconds
and then goes off. If the warning light does not illuminate for 3 seconds, proceed to the
troubleshooting for the tire pressure warning light circuit .
(b) Check that the tire pressure warning light illuminates for
3 seconds.
*1 Tire Pressure Warning Light
2. WHAT TO CONSIDER WHEN TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES

(a) When the tire pressure warning light does not go off, or when it illuminates during driving, check
the tire pressure. If the tire pressure warning light illuminates within several hours after adjusting
the tire pressure, the tire may have a slow air leak.
(b) The system is disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal, the system
will work properly).
(1) When all of the tires and wheels that have the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters
registered with the door control receiver have not been installed.
(2) When all of the transmitter ID codes are not registered with the door control receiver.
(3) When the tire pressure is abnormally high (absolute pressure: 480 kPa (4.9 kgf/cm 2 , 70 psi)
or more; relative pressure: 380 kPa (3.9 kgf/cm 2 , 55 psi) or more).
(4) When the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter battery is depleted.
(c) The system may become disabled in the following conditions (when the condition becomes normal,
the system will work properly).
(1) When electric devices or facilities using similar radio frequencies are nearby.
(2) When a wireless device or other equipment operating at a similar frequency is in use in the
vehicle.
(3) When a window tint that affects radio wave signals is installed.
(4) When there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or wheel
housing.
(5) When non-genuine wheels are used.
(6) When tire chains are used.
(7) When aftermarket tire repair sealant is used.
CAUTION:
After use of tire repair sealant, replacement of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is
required to ensure normal system operation. (Normal system operation cannot be ensured by
only repairing or replacing the tire.)
3. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHART
HINT:
The table below indicates the state of the tire pressure warning light after the ignition switch is turned
to ON.
IMMEDIATELY AFTER TURNING THE ALWAYS

IGNITION SWITCH TO ON
WARNING LIGHT OUTPUT PATTERN
ILLUMINATES FOR 3 SEC. GOES ILLUMINATES BLINKS*1 BLINKS*2

OFF
Normal ○ ○ - - -
Low tire pressure ○ - ○ - -
System failure ○ - - ○ -
Test mode (signal

○ - - - ○
check mode)
ECU connector
- - - ○ -
poorly connected
*1: Illuminates and goes off repeatedly at 0.5 second intervals, and illuminates after 1 minute.
*a ON
*b OFF
*c 0.5 sec.
*d 1 minute
*2: Illuminates and goes off repeatedly at 0.125 second intervals.
*a ON
*b OFF
*c 0.125 sec.
4. Normal mode DTCs

(a) DTCs are stored in the door control receiver and output by the blinking of tire pressure warning
light or by using the Techstream .
5. Test mode (signal check mode) DTCs

(a) By switching from normal mode into test mode (input signal check), you can inspect the door
control receiver, each tire pressure warning valve and transmitter .
6. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
(a) When a system malfunction occurs in the tire pressure warning system, the tire pressure warning
light illuminates after blinking for 1 minute to inform the driver of the system failure.
(b) The result of this diagnosis code is stored in the door control receiver.
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XMR06UX
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
CHART (2013 FR-S)

HINT:
If a trouble code is displayed during the DTC check, inspect the circuit listed for that code. For details
of each code, refer to the relevant page listed under respective "DTC Code" in the DTC chart.
Door Control Receiver
C2111 Transmitter ID1 Operation Stop
C2121 No Signal from Transmitter ID1
C2126 Transmitter ID not Received in Main Mode
C2141 Transmitter ID1 Error
C2171 Transmitter ID not Registered
C2176 Receiver Error
C2177 Initialization not Completed
C2179 Tire Pressure Monitor ECU Communication Stop
C2181 Transmitter ID1 not Received (Test Mode DTC)
Main Body ECU (Network Gateway ECU)

B1247 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver Communication Stop
Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000XMX081X
Title: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING: TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM: DTC CHECK / CLEAR (2013
FR-S)
DTC CHECK / CLEAR

1. CHECK DTC (for DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs.
2. CHECK DTC (for MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body / Trouble Codes.
(f) Read the DTCs.
3. CLEAR DTC (for DOOR CONTROL RECEIVER)
HINT:
After repairing the malfunctions, clear the DTCs.
(e) Enter the following menus: Chassis / Tire Pressure Monitor / Trouble Codes.
(f) Clear DTCs following the prompts on the Techstream screen.
HINT:
4. CLEAR DTC (for MAIN BODY ECU (NETWORK GATEWAY ECU))
HINT:
After repairing the malfunctions, clear the DTCs.

(e) Enter the following menus: Body Electrical / Main Body

2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Scion FR-S Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Last Modified: 3-27-2012 6.

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010EX1UGX

Title: FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: CAUTION (2013 FR-S)

This contents must be read thoroughly. It is especially important to have a good

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM0000010EW2RZX

Title: FOREWORD / CAUTION / SECTION: FOREWORD: FOREWORD (2013 FR-S)

Applicable models ZN6 series

MANUAL NAME PUB. NO.

2013 SCION FR-S Electrical Wiring Diagram EM20S0U

2013 SCION FR-S New Car Features NM20S0U

Repair Manual Quality Report

Att.) Service Manager, Your Distributor

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UYV0BHX

(2) Removing/Installing, Replacing, Disassembling/Reassembling, Checking and Adjusting

(3) Final Inspection

(1) Use a jack or lift to perform operations.

(2) Clean all removed parts.

The following illustration is an example.

Illustration What to do and where to do it

Task heading What work will be performed

How to perform the task

(f) Procedures are presented in a step-by-step format.

CAUTION Possibility of injury to you or other people.

NOTICE Possibility of damage to components being repaired.

HINT Provides additional information to help you perform repairs.

7. INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS

Torque: 30 N·m (310 kgf·cm, 22ft·lbf)

Model Year: 2013 Model: FR-S Doc ID: RM000000UZB09AX

Title: INTRODUCTION: TERMS: ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL (2013 FR-S)

ABBREVIATIONS USED IN MANUAL

ABS Anti-Lock Brake System

A/C Air Conditioner

ACIS Acoustic Control Induction System

ACM Active Control Engine Mount

ACSD Automatic Cold Start Device

A.D.D Automatic Disconnecting Differential

ADM P.T. Astra Daihatsu Motor

A/F Air-Fuel Ratio

AFS Adaptive Front-Lighting System

AHC Active Height Control Suspension

AID Air Injection Control Driver

ALR Automatic Locking Retractor

ASG Automated Sequential Gearbox

ASL Automatic Sound Levelizer

ASSB Assembly Services Sdn. Bhd.

A/T, ATM Automatic Transmission (Transaxle)

A-TRAC, A-TRC Active Traction Control

ATDC After Top Dead Center

ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid

AVS Adaptive Variable Suspension

AWD All Wheel Drive

B+, +B Battery Voltage

BACS Boost Altitude Compensation System

BDC Bottom Dead Center

B/S Bore-Stroke Ratio

BTDC Before Top Dead Center

BVSV Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve

CAN Controller Area Network

CCM Carbon Ceramic Material

CCo Catalytic Converter for Oxidation